JP7244012B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pinball game machine (generally called a "pachinko machine") and a reel-type game machine (generally called a "pachislot machine").

In recent years, there has been known a game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a pending image (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-239729 A

In such a game machine, there is room for improvement in the display control that is executed when displaying the pending image on the display means .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing suitable display control for displaying a pending image .

The game machine according to [means 1] is
Lottery means for performing a lottery for granting profits;
By arranging various effect images on multiple layers with different display priorities, the display priority is differentiated, and the effect image placed on the layer with the higher display priority is replaced with the effect image placed on the layer with the lower display priority. a display means for displaying in front of the
A symbol variation means for performing a symbol variation display based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means;
a special effect means capable of changing a pending display indicating the number of executions of symbol variation display by the symbol variation means from a normal display mode to an expectation level mode suggesting an expectation level regarding the awarding of the profit;
with
The pending display includes a corresponding display displayed corresponding to the symbol variation display being executed, and a suspension corresponding display displayed corresponding to the number of symbol variation displays whose execution is suspended,
The special production means is
The mode of the pending display is changed to the expectation level mode while maintaining the layer when the pending display is displayed in the normal display mode without changing the layer when the pending display is displayed in the normal display mode. special performances and
A second special effect of changing the mode of the pending display from the layer when the pending display is displayed in the normal display mode to a different layer, and then changing it to the expectation level mode,
The layer on which the pending display is displayed can be changed in accordance with the start of execution of the symbol variation display,
Execution probability of the first special effect for changing the pending display to the expectation degree mode while maintaining the layer when the pending display is displayed in the normal display mode, and when the pending display is displayed in the normal display mode. The execution probability of the second special effect that changes the pending display to the degree of expectation mode after changing from the layer to a different layer is different, and the pending display is either the corresponding display or the pending display. is displayed as the corresponding display, the ratio of the display in the expectation mode is high when the corresponding display is displayed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing suitable display control for displaying a pending image .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled an outer frame and was seen from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded. be. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an outer upper hinge member; Fig. 10 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the body-side upper hinge member is attached to the; It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the locking member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19; FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19; FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit in a door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends; FIG. 34(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a). FIG. 34B is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit, which is exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which an operation button is pressed in the sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37; (a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a portion of the operation button is cut away to show the portion that is to be hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a portion of an operation button to be hidden by a first button decorative portion, a button frame, or the like in a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. is a perspective view. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 47(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL. (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. is a perspective view. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 51(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit. is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 56; It is a front view of a game board. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63, viewed from behind; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the part of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63 as seen from the front together with the front structural member, the substrate holder, and the main control unit; FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind; It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 69; FIG. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input to and output from a game ball lending device connection terminal plate that relays electrical connections between a payout control board that constitutes the main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 69; FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU; FIG. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal and a sound control part. It is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 75; It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an inter-board communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board; FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram continued from FIG. 81; It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit; FIG. 4 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on an external terminal plate; 4 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device; FIG. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board; FIG. 90 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board in FIG. 89 to the peripheral control boards; FIG. It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of connection failure determination processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of connection recovery processing; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC for the upper tray liquid crystal; FIG. 10 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in a game machine; It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the game machine of embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the operating states of the magnetic sensor and each transistor in tabular form; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a circuit configuration in which a plurality of sensor signal input units connected to each of a plurality of magnetic detection sensors are connected in parallel to base terminals of transistors in the detection circuit unit; (A) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input section in the conventional example, and (B) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input section in the embodiment. (A) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input section in the conventional example, and (B) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input section in the embodiment. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit of another embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in which a voltage output section, a voltage raising section, and a detection circuit section are arranged on the same substrate; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in which a voltage booster and a detection circuit are arranged on the same substrate, and a voltage output section is arranged on another substrate (sensor substrate); FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in which a voltage output section and a voltage raising section are arranged on the same substrate, and a detection circuit section is arranged on another substrate (for example, a main control substrate); The figure which shows the circuit structure which connected several sensors in parallel with the voltage output part. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing how the first control unit MCG is integrated only with components (discrete components) having high security performance against fraud. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a partial region of a base board of a main control board according to a modification; It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the acquisition principle of the operation information in the opening window vicinity. FIG. 120 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 119; FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the special operation receiving portion when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front and various effect members disposed at positions overlapping the special operation receiving portion when viewed from the front; be. (a) is a figure explaining the 1st operation control mode with respect to a display part, (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd operation control mode with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control mode with respect to a movable body. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control mode with respect to a movable body. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a control example of physical object detection information analysis processing executed in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing; FIG. (a) is a time chart showing the control when production acceptance occurs at a plurality of operation parts, and (b) shows the production behavior when production reception occurs at each of the plurality of operation parts. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing; It is a figure which shows the example 1 of production|presentation using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of production|presentation using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of production|presentation using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of production|presentation using a special operation receiving part. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special design and special electric accessary goods control processing (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage process (step S5234). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S5238). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a big hit determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing symbol determination tables. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop design setting process (step S5281). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal design and normal electric accessary goods control processing (step S116). FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the procedure of gate passage processing (step S5402). FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about normal design normal processing (step S5403). It is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) referred to in the effect symbol variation start process when the game is in the normal game state. It is a flow chart showing an example of the processing procedure for a lottery (announcement lottery performed in the performance symbol variation start process) related to the foretell performance that appears within the performance pattern execution period (symbol fluctuation time). It is a diagram showing an example of a timer advance notice determination table T2 that is referred to when the change (holding to be consumed) is not targeted for the timer prefetch effect in the normal game state (second timer advance notice lottery). (a) is a diagram showing an example of a first mission effect determination table T3a (first mission effect lottery) to be referred to when the notice-side timer effect is performed in the normal game state, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the normal game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a second mission effect determination table T3b (second mission effect lottery) that is referred to when the advance notice-side timer effect is not performed in the state. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a notice-side timer type determination table T4 referred to in the notice-side timer type lottery (step S5505). Reach type and processing status ( FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a comparison of the upper limit number of appearances of timer target candidate effects determined according to the first to fourth processing conditions, as well as a fifth processing condition and a sixth processing condition (to be described later). If the mode is single timer (YES in step S5506) and the first processing state is determined (YES in step S5507) to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear), step S5508 3 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5a referred to in the processing of . If it is in the second processing state in which it is in the mode of single timer (YES in step S5506) and it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507), step S5523 FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5b referred to in the processing of . If it is in the third processing state in which the double timer mode is set (NO in step S5506) and the execution of the mission rendering (make the conversation notice appear) is determined (YES in step S5532), step S5533 FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5c referred to in the processing of . If it is in the fourth processing state in which the double timer mode is set (NO in step S5506) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5532), step S5543 FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5d referred to in the processing of . In the first processing situation in which the single timer mode is used (YES in step S5506) and the execution of the mission rendering (make the conversation announcement appear) has been determined (YES in step S5507), the processing of step S5508 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6a-1 that is referred to when it is decided to set the number of advance notices to 1 as a result of executing (step S5509). In the second processing situation in which the single timer mode is used (YES in step S5506) and it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507), the processing of step S5523 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6b-1 that is referred to when it is decided to set the number of advance notices to 1 as a result of executing (step S5524). In the fourth processing situation in which the double timer mode is used (NO in step S5506) and it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5532), the processing of step S5543 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6d-2 that is referred to when it is decided to set the number of advance notices to 2 as a result of executing (step S5544). Corresponds to character reach in the second processing situation in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S5506) and a decision (NO in step S5507) to the effect that the mission effect (appear the conversation notice) is not executed. 10 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the count display lottery (step 510) that is performed when the variable number to be played is selected; In the second processing situation in which it is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and a decision (NO in step S5507) to the effect that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed, corresponds to SP reach 10 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the count display lottery (step 510) that is performed when the variable number to be played is selected; FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a table T7a referred to in the first non-timer advance notice lottery (step S5512); FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a table T7b referred to in the second timer-untargeted advance notice lottery (step S5525); In the fifth processing situation in which it has been determined (YES in step S5552) not to execute the advance notice-side timer effect (NO in step S5503) and to execute the mission effect (make the conversation advance notice appear). FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5e referenced in the process of step S5553; FIG. In the case of the sixth processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the notice-side timer effect (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5552). FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5f referenced in the process of step S5563; FIG. In the fifth processing situation in which it has been determined (YES in step S5552) that the advance notice-side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation advance notice appear) is executed (YES in step S5553). 19 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6e-1 that is referred to when it is decided to set the number of notices to 1 as a result of executing the process of 1 (step S5554). FIG. In the fifth processing situation in which it has been determined (YES in step S5552) that the advance notice-side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation advance notice appear) is executed (YES in step S5553). FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6e-2 that is referred to when it is decided to set the number of advance notices to 2 as a result of executing the process of 1 (step S5554). In the sixth processing situation where it is determined not to execute the advance notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (appear the conversation advance notice) (NO in step S5552), step S5563. 19 is a diagram showing an example of table T6f-1 that is referred to when it is decided to set the number of advance notices to 1 as a result of executing the process of 1 (step S5564). FIG. In the sixth processing situation where it is determined not to execute the advance notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (appear the conversation advance notice) (NO in step S5552), step S5563. 19 is a diagram showing an example of table T6f-2 that is referred to when it is decided to set the number of advance notices to 2 (step S5564) as a result of executing the process of . (a) stores pending information (first special symbol) in which variable display is being executed and three pending information (both first special symbols) in which variable display is not executed. It is a diagram showing an example of the table T7a referred to in the first special figure prefetching process when a new winning prize (first special symbol) occurs in the state. In addition, in (b), the pending information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is being executed and the two pending information (both first special symbols) in which the variable display is not executed are stored. It is a diagram showing an example of the table T7b to be referred to in the first special figure prefetching process when a new winning prize (first special symbol) occurs in the state of being. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing examples of tables T8a-1 and T8a-2 that are referred to when determining the mode of execution of the timer prefetch effect in a situation where the prefetch variable number is four. . (a) and (b) are diagrams showing examples of tables T8b-1 and T8b-2 that are referred to when determining the mode of execution of the timer prefetch effect in a situation where the prefetch variable number is 3. . Usually referred to when there is no one that causes a big hit pattern to appear among the hold information in which the variable display is being executed and the hold information in which the variable display is not executed (for example, hold 1 to hold 3) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an hour hold change table T9a; A special reference that is referred to when there is one that causes a jackpot pattern to appear among the pending information in which the variable display is being executed and the pending information in which the variable display is not being executed (for example, Hold 1 to Hold 3) FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an hour hold change table T9b; It is a figure which shows an example of the processing procedure about the process performed in order to implement|achieve a change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of timer production|presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer production|presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer production|presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer production|presentation concretely. (a) is a single-timer mode (YES in step S5506), and in a second processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507); FIG. 11 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of the timer target exclusion effect to be performed; FIG. (b) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and in a second processing situation in which it has been determined (NO in step S5507) not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear). FIG. 11 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of the timer target exclusion effect to be performed; FIG. Timer target first-out performed in the second processing situation in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S506) and a decision (NO in step S507) to the effect that the mission rendering (make the conversation announcement appear) is not executed (NO in step S507) It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example about the content of the determination processing about whether the timer object first-out production|presentation should be generated, and furthermore at which timing the timer object first-out production|presentation should be produced. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of determination processing regarding which type of effect mode to be generated at that timing when a timer-target first-out effect is performed at any one of timings Ta1 to Ta3. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the content of determination processing regarding which type of effect mode to be generated at these timings when a timer-target first-out effect is performed at any two timings of timings Ta1 to Ta3. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of determination processing regarding which type of effect mode to be generated at these timings when the timer-targeted first-out effect is performed at all timings Ta1 to Ta3. In the second processing situation in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S506) and a decision (NO in step S507) to the effect that the mission effect (appear the conversation notice) is not executed (NO in step S507), the number of notices is 2 is determined (step S523), and it is decided to perform the "conversation notice" at the earlier timing and perform the "character A action 1" at the later timing. 4 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of . (a) is a single-timer mode (YES in step S506), and in a second processing situation in which it has been determined (NO in step S507) that the mission effect (make the conversation announcement appear) is not executed; FIG. 5 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of the timer-targeted suppression control that is performed; FIG. (b) is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to in timer-targeted suppression control when the rate at which a suppression period occurs is varied depending on the type of effect mode that appears as a timer-targeted effect. (a) is a single-timer mode (YES in step S506), and in a second processing situation in which it has been determined (NO in step S507) that the mission effect (make the conversation announcement appear) is not executed; FIG. 10 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of a timer effect that targets a new timer to be performed; FIG. (b) is a single-timer mode (YES in step S506), and in a second processing situation in which it has been determined (NO in step S507) that the mission effect (appear the conversation notice) is not executed; FIG. 10 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of a timer effect that targets a new timer to be performed; FIG. The timer mode effect performed in the second processing situation in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S506) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S507). 4 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of . (a) to (c) are single-timer mode (YES in step S506), and the second mode in which it is determined (NO in step S507) that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed. 4 is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the count output stop control performed in the processing state of . 7 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure when implementing count output stop control; It is a figure for demonstrating the concrete content of timer plus production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the concrete content of timer stagnation production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the concrete content of the progress production|presentation which leads to a timer object production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of the operation performance within a timer. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining specific contents of the timer concealment effect; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of timer production|presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer production|presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer production|presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer production|presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer production|presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer production|presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer production|presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer production|presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer production|presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer production|presentation concretely. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of sound control by a fixed channel method as a comparison target for this embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control using a fixed channel method; It shows the relationship between the game state, the playback sound, and the playback channel. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production|presentation time chart. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of sound control by an automatic channel method as the embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method; It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state, a reproduction sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production|presentation time chart. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of automatic channel control work information stored in an AUTO group channel control work area provided in a peripheral control RAM; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of empty channel search processing when performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel method; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of empty channel search processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of empty channel search processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of empty channel search processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of empty channel search processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of empty channel search processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of empty channel search processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of empty channel search processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of empty channel search processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of empty channel search processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of empty channel search processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern of sound control according to each channel method or a combination thereof; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in sound source control in the present embodiment; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of empty channel search processing when executing control for outputting sound according to the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of conditions for selecting a channel for switching sound output (stopping sound reproduction) when a channel is not available at the time of outputting a new sound in this embodiment. 4 is a timing chart showing a production example for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the timing at which sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows the channels to which each sound effect is output. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the order of priority of sound effects in the production example of the present embodiment; 4 is a timing chart showing an example of changes in volume of sound effects in the first half of the present embodiment, where (A) shows output timing of sound effects, and (B) shows changes in volume of sound effects. It is a figure which shows the screen structural example of the production|presentation in the modification of this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in sound source control in a modification of the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of volume changes of sound effects in the latter half of variation of the modification of the present embodiment, where (A) shows output timing of sound effects, and (B) shows volume changes of each sound effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a channel group volume control table indicating the priority order of volume control for each group according to the present embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of group volume control processing for performing sound control corresponding to a group to which an output sound belongs according to the embodiment; It is a timing chart for demonstrating the procedure which controls the volume in this embodiment along a time series, (A) shows the execution timing of production|presentation, (B) shows the volume of each production|presentation. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a sound effect volume control table showing volume control for each total sound reproduction time (output time) according to the present embodiment; 3 is the first half of a flowchart showing the procedure of volume control processing for performing sound control based on parameters set for each sound effect according to the embodiment; 3 is the second half of the flowchart showing the procedure of volume control processing for performing sound control based on parameters set for each sound effect according to the embodiment; It is a timing chart for demonstrating the procedure which controls the volume in this embodiment along a time series, (A) shows the execution timing of production|presentation, (B) shows the volume of each production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. FIG. 245 is a diagram showing, for each type of notification sound illustrated in FIG. 244, notification contents, notification mode, notification time, and conditions for termination of notification (cancellation conditions). (a) is an example of processing when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced and the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied. is a diagram. (b) is an example of processing when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied. It is a figure which shows. (c) is an example of processing when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied. It is a figure which shows. (a) is a diagram showing an example of processing when output conditions (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group are satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced; is. (b) is a diagram showing an example of processing when output conditions (state detection) for the notification sound belonging to the third notification group are satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced; is. (c) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced; is. (d) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced; is. 4 is a time chart showing one example of a mode of notifying the state of the gaming machine; 4 is a time chart showing one example of a mode of notifying the state of the gaming machine; 4 is a time chart showing one example of a mode of notifying the state of the gaming machine; 4 is a time chart showing one example of a mode of notifying the state of the gaming machine; 4 is a time chart showing one example of a mode of notifying the state of the gaming machine; 4 is a time chart showing one example of a mode of notifying the state of the gaming machine; It is a figure explaining separately the information state of the said pachinko machine 1 about the content of the notification process under production|presentation progress. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. 4 is a time chart showing an example of channel reservation processing; 4 is a time chart showing an example of channel reservation processing; 4 is a time chart showing an example of channel reservation processing; 4 is a time chart showing an example of channel reservation processing; 4 is a time chart showing an example of channel reservation processing; 6 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for processing for setting a channel restriction level; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of restriction contents determined separately for each channel restriction level; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of restriction contents determined for each channel restriction level; FIG. 10 is a time chart showing an example of channel allocation status when channel special release processing is performed; FIG. FIG. 11 is a time chart showing an example of channel allocation when suppressed operation sound output processing is performed; FIG. FIG. 11 is a time chart showing an example of channel allocation status when processing related to channel allocation cancellation operation is performed; FIG. Here is an example of the assignment status of each channel and the status of the movable decoration when a movable decoration abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decoration according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the judgment of the big hit. It is a time chart showing. When a movable body abnormality is detected in a process other than the process of operating the movable decoration according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the judgment of the big hit, the allocation status of each channel and the movable It is a time chart which shows those examples about the situation of the decoration body side. 10 is a time chart showing an example of assignment status of each channel and status of movable decorations when movable body abnormalities occur simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorations at a specific timing during a period in which pattern variation is performed; . A time chart showing an example of the assignment status of each channel and the status of the movable decorations when movable body abnormalities occur in the plurality of movable decorations at two different timings during the pattern variation period. be. 4 is a time chart showing an example of control contents for realizing an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous tapping function); 5 is a time chart showing an example of display contents when operations are performed a plurality of times; 4 is a time chart showing an example of control contents for realizing an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous tapping function); It is a time chart which shows the example of the production|presentation using an automatic multiple operation function (automatic continuous-hit function). It is a time chart which shows the example of the production|presentation using an automatic multiple operation function (automatic continuous-hit function). It is a front view of a game machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a right side view of the game machine provided with the sword effect operation unit. It is a diagram showing an example of a selection table of the production pattern in the production mode in which the sword drawing production can be executed, (A) showing an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of the sword drawing preparation transition production according to the type of variation pattern, (B) ) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to draw the sword. FIG. 4 is a state transition diagram for explaining the sword drawing operation of the sword decoration when the aura member is provided on the sword portion (blade portion) itself, (A) sword drawn state, (B) first sword drawn state, (C) second. Indicates the sword drawn state. FIG. 4 is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member; FIG. 4 is a state transition diagram for explaining the sword drawing operation of the sword decoration when the aura member is provided on the sheath, showing (A) the sword drawn state, (B) the first sword drawn state, and (C) the second sword drawn state. FIG. 4 is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member; It is an effect transition diagram of the sword drawing effect. It is an effect transition diagram of the sword drawing effect. It is an effect transition diagram of the sword drawing effect. It is an effect transition diagram of the sword drawing effect. It is an effect transition diagram of the sword drawing effect. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration and the operation effective period of the operating means. FIG. 11 is an example of an effect transition diagram of a sword draw effect of Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is an example of an effect transition diagram of a sword draw effect of Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is an example of an effect transition diagram of a sword draw effect of Modification 1. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration and the operation timing of the operation means of Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is an example of an effect transition diagram of a sword draw effect of Modification 2. FIG. FIG. 11 is an example of an effect transition diagram of a sword draw effect of Modification 2. FIG. FIG. 11 is an example of an effect transition diagram of a sword draw effect of Modification 2. FIG. FIG. 11 is an example of an effect transition diagram of a sword draw effect of Modification 2. FIG. FIG. 11 is an example of an effect transition diagram of a sword draw effect of Modification 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production|presentation display apparatus in the princess ready-to-win production, and the operation|movement transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production|presentation display apparatus in the princess ready-to-win production, and the operation|movement transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production|presentation display apparatus in the princess ready-to-win production, and the operation|movement transition of the sword decoration. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of the operation buttons, and movement transitions of the sword ornament in the ready-to-win effect including the operation effects of the operation buttons used in many ways. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of the operation buttons, and movement transitions of the sword ornament in the ready-to-win effect including the operation effects of the operation buttons used in many ways. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of the operation buttons, and movement transitions of the sword ornament in the ready-to-win effect including the operation effects of the operation buttons used in many ways. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of operation buttons, and movement transitions of sword ornaments in the ready-to-win effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of operation buttons, and movement transitions of sword ornaments in the ready-to-win effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of operation buttons, and movement transitions of sword ornaments in the ready-to-win effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of operation buttons, and movement transitions of sword ornaments in the ready-to-win effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of operation buttons, and movement transitions of sword ornaments in the ready-to-win effect. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword ornament used for pseudo-continuous effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition of a pseudo-continuous effect common to all effect patterns. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of transition of effects as to whether or not an opportunity to operate a sword ornament is granted while pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is being performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of transition of effects as to whether or not an opportunity to operate a sword ornament is granted while pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is being performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of transition of effects as to whether or not an opportunity to operate a sword ornament is granted while pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is being performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a transition example of a post-operation effect of the sword decorative body (drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain)) during the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) common to all the effect patterns. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition that is characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition that is characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition that is a feature of the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of production|presentation pattern which can be selected based on a variation pattern. FIG. 10 is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decoration body and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory) in the pseudo continuous effect, showing a sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern). FIG. 10 is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory) in the pseudo continuous effect, showing a sword LV2 weak effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern). FIG. 10 is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decoration body and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory) in the pseudo continuous effect, showing a sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern). 4 is a timing chart for executing actions of the sword decoration body and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory) in the pseudo-continuous effect, showing a pseudo-sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo-sword LV1 strong effect pattern). FIG. 10 is a timing chart for execution of sword ornaments and specific decorative members SDY (blind blinds) in a simulated continuous effect, showing a simulated resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern; FIG. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword ornament is operational during the ready-to-win effect by lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variable effect (ready-to-win effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. 10 is a diagram showing a transition example of a ready-to-win effect in which a pre-operation suggestive effect of the first suggestive pattern is executed. FIG. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword ornament is operational during the ready-to-win effect by lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variable effect (ready-to-win effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. 10 is a diagram showing a transition example of a ready-to-win effect in which a pre-operation suggestive effect of the first suggestive pattern is executed. FIG. As with the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is to be operated during the ready-to-win effect, the pre-operation suggestive effect of the second suggestive pattern is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition. Although the second suggestion pattern is performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the sword decoration does not become operationally valid, and the operation button becomes operationally valid once, and then the sword decoration becomes operationally valid. It is a figure which shows about the suggestion production|presentation before operation of a pattern. It is a figure which shows the 1st production|presentation aspect regarding specific operation-related production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 1st production|presentation aspect regarding specific operation-related production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production|presentation aspect regarding specific operation-related production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production|presentation aspect regarding specific operation-related production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production|presentation aspect regarding specific operation-related production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production|presentation aspect regarding specific operation-related production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 3rd production|presentation aspect regarding specific operation-related production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 3rd production|presentation aspect regarding specific operation-related production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 3rd production|presentation aspect regarding specific operation-related production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 3rd production|presentation aspect regarding specific operation-related production|presentation. It is a figure which shows another example of specific operation-related production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when a “specific operation-related effect” is set as the effect target of the timer effect; 4 is a time chart for explaining an example of performance contents for each type of performance when a plurality of types (forecast performances A, B1, B2, and C) are prepared as portent performances. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect content when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed and the effect content when a predictive effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of the contents of an effect when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a button image BTG is displayed in a mode (specific effect mode) with a princess character added; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a player makes an operation error between a first operation mode and a second operation mode in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a player makes an operation error between a first operation mode and a second operation mode in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode; It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation when a 1st omen production|presentation is performed. It is a time chart which shows the example of a production|presentation when a 1st omen production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production|presentation which an expectation level is shown by an automatic production|presentation function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production|presentation which an expectation level is shown by an automatic production|presentation function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production|presentation which an expectation level is shown by an automatic production|presentation function. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining operation unification control in an automatic button presentation state; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining operation unification control in an automatic button presentation state; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining operation unification control in an automatic button presentation state; It is a diagram for explaining the stable side automatic effect processing when in the automatic button effect state. It is a diagram for explaining the stable side automatic effect processing when in the automatic button effect state. It is a diagram for explaining the stable side automatic effect processing when in the automatic button effect state. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining effect acceptance processing according to a display type when in an automatic button effect state; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining effect acceptance processing according to a display type when in an automatic button effect state; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining effect acceptance processing according to a display type when in an automatic button effect state; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining effect acceptance processing according to a display type when in an automatic button effect state; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining effect acceptance processing according to a display type when in an automatic button effect state; (a) is a time chart showing an example of an effect when the button is not controlled to the automatic button effect state and the button is operated multiple times in a single-shot operation mode; 10 is a time chart showing an example of an effect when the button is operated in a long-pressing mode when the button is not pressed. (a) is a time chart showing an example of an effect when the automatic effect function functions in the automatic button effect state; 10 is a time chart showing an example of an effect when an operation is started in a mode; When the automatic button production state is controlled and the number of reservations is in the production situation of 3, pattern variation is started with ``a first production pattern in which a specific production acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation can be set can be set'', It is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation. When it is controlled to the automatic button production state and the number of reservations is in the production situation of 3, it is a pattern with 'a second production pattern (loss variation) in which a specific production acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears and cannot be set'. A time chart showing an example of processing when a variation is started and an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation. be. When the automatic button performance state is not controlled, the pattern variation is started in a ``third performance pattern in which a specific performance reception period (specific valid period) can be set in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears'', and the execution period of the pattern variation. 10 is a time chart showing an example of processing when an operation for setting an automatic button effect state is performed within. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the effect progresses in the third effect pattern; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of a prohibition period related to “specific processing related to effects such as effect settings”; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of a prohibition period related to “specific processing related to effects such as effect settings”; It is a time chart which shows an example about the production|presentation process regarding a special production|presentation acceptance period. 4 is a time chart showing the details of processing when moving a movable decoration when a specific condition is satisfied; FIG. 375 is a time chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 374; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing the details of processing when a timing tm1 at which a new pattern variation is started in a situation where a specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing processing details when timing tm11 at which a special effect pattern is started in a situation where a specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state; FIG. It is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword ornament 5001 is returned to its original position. 4 is a time chart showing operation states of operation buttons during a series of operation confirmation periods; (A) is a time chart showing operation button abnormality determination timings outside the arbitrary action confirmation period, and (B) is a time chart showing operation button abnormality determination timings during the arbitrary action confirmation period. (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the sword decoration during the operation reception period, and (B) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the sword decoration and the abnormality detection outside the operation reception period. , and (C) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the sword decoration and the abnormality detection during the operation accepting period. (A) is a time chart showing the timing of abnormality determination of operation buttons, and (B) is a time chart showing the timing of abnormality determination of movable decorations provided on the game board. (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the normal state when the button is projected, and (B) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the button projection time effect when an abnormality occurs. . (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the normal button effect when normal, and (B) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the normal button effect when an abnormality occurs. . (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the operation button and the notification mode when an error occurs during the operation reception period; 4 is a time chart showing the relationship between operating states and notification modes; It is a time chart showing the flow of presentation when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body. (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button during the operation reception period, and (B) shows the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs during the operation reception period. It is a time chart. (A) is a time chart showing the operating state of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in a non-time saving state, and (B) is an operation button cover and operation button when an abnormality occurs in a time saving state 4 is a time chart showing operating states; It is a functional block diagram explaining a structure and an outline of a function for performing production control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the module structure in the peripheral control part of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the basic concept of production|presentation control in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure until it acquires the data required for production|presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal drawing effect|action of a step-up notice of this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the flow of scheduler data during execution according to the embodiment; FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing functions of the sound module of the embodiment; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing functions of the lamp module of the embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the sequence control in the production|presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the lamp|ramp in the production control of the gaming machine of this embodiment, and a sound. It is a figure which shows an example of functions, such as a sound and a motor, in production|presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler definition of this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a role product controlled using scheduler data according to the present embodiment; It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the notice production performed in a series of variable display until it stops from the start of variation of a special symbol in this embodiment, and shows an example of the scheduler and scheduler data which are used. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the contents of scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” that controls lighting and blinking of lamps in advance notice of step-up according to the present embodiment; FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating the contents of scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” for controlling lamps in advance of button cut-in according to the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the overall flow of the star role announcement and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" that controls the left star role in the present embodiment; It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" which controls the right star role in the star role announcement of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" which controls the middle star role item in the star role announcement of this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the contents of scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” for motor control in the logo accessory drop notice of the present embodiment; It is a drawing explaining the scheduler data executed when the power of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is turned on. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in the peripheral control board of the gaming machine of the present embodiment and the relationship between these configurations. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a process of executing scheduler data when power is turned on according to the embodiment; It is a diagram showing an example of an advance notice effect in a series of variable display from the start to stop of the variation of the special symbol in this embodiment, (A) is performed from the start to the end of the variation and the effect is executed. (B) is a diagram for explaining the position of the machete in the falling notice of the machete. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the contents of scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" for performing motor control in the first half of the button machete role drop notice, which is the first half of the machete role drop notice of the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" that performs motor control in the hatchet accessory fall notice, which is the latter half of the hatchet accessory fall notice of the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the second half of the hatchet accessory fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” that controls the motor in the hatchet accessory fall notice, which is the latter half of the hatchet accessory fall notice of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table classified by variation pattern (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) which stores the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal design block data combination number table classified by variation pattern (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) which stores the combination of the liquid crystal design block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a sub effect block data combination number table by variation pattern (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) storing combinations of sub effect block data corresponding to variation pattern commands in the present embodiment; It is a figure explaining the outline|summary of production|presentation control of the fluctuation|variation (usually fluctuation|variation 12 second) of the first half of the fluctuation pattern "10H03H" in this embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of sub effect block data control start processing according to the present embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of sub effect block data control activation processing according to the present embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of sub effect block data control update processing according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the procedure for executing the notice effect in the variable display corresponding to the change pattern "10H03H" of the present embodiment, (A) is the timing of executing the notice effect and the execution time of the notice effect, (B) is It shows the scheduler data driven by each scheduler to execute the advance notice effect. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the liquid crystal effect block data classified by variation pattern of this embodiment, and the liquid crystal design block data classified by variation pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an image of creating a data file for drawing a step-up advance notice for liquid crystal display in the step-up effect unit (step-up effect 1 to step-up effect 4) by the image composition/motion creation graphic tool of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of step-up notice effect block data according to the present embodiment, where (A) shows the configuration of step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, and (B) shows the configuration of step-up notice sub-effect block data. show. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentations of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of the production|presentation switch in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the production|presentation SW group of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation SW starting command table of this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a step-up notice in the present embodiment, (A) showing stages in which the step-up notice effect is executed, and (B) showing an example of a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device at each stage. . It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using production|presentation SW in this embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in the present embodiment, (A) is the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for executing the step-up notice 1, (B) is the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect 10 shows a drawing image using scheduler data. It is a figure explaining the master data defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each drawing section in this embodiment, and the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data replaced with the said master data. It is a figure explaining the control procedure by the production|presentation switch of this embodiment, and especially shows the evaluation procedure which sets production|presentation SW to ON. It is a figure explaining an example of the function defined in the production|presentation SW command analysis module of this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the details of the configuration of the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, (A) is an example of program code defining the effect SW information table, (B) is bit assignment of effect SW control information, and (C). is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW group It is a figure which shows an example of the program code which defines the production|presentation SW number corresponding to the production|presentation SW in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data code which defines the production|presentation SW flag and production|presentation SW information table of this embodiment, (A) shows a production|presentation SW flag, (B) shows a production|presentation SW information table. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining effect SW replacement table information and effect SW replacement table included in the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, where (A) is effect SW replacement table information and (B) is effect SW. Shows a replacement table. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining a layer information table of the present embodiment, where (A) is a list storing addresses for storing each layer information table, and (B) is the contents of the layer information table (for background); indicates FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment, (A) shows the contents of the layer information table (preliminary first half 1), and (B) shows the contents of the layer information table (preliminary first half 2). show. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining a liquid crystal layer table and a liquid crystal effect common block in this embodiment, (A) showing a liquid crystal layer table for a step-up notice effect, and (B) showing a configuration of a liquid crystal effect common block. . It is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the liquid crystal effect block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1-4) of each step of the step-up notice of the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an outline of button mini-character effects according to the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining a liquid crystal layer table corresponding to button mini character effects in the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining individual common blocks for button mini character effects in the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining liquid crystal effect block data for executing a button mini character effect in the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of drawing divisions that can be determined within a callback function when a callback is executed by the effect SW of the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of drawing results of individual layers and drawing results of all layers when the advance notice effect is executed according to the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a common block that spans a plurality of periods according to the present embodiment, where (A) shows the execution timing of symbol display and notice effect, and (B) shows the structure of a liquid crystal notice effect block made up of common blocks. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a conventional configuration for writing an image in a frame buffer by writing an image written in each layer; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for converting an image file stored in an off-screen buffer and then writing it to a frame buffer according to the embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a procedure for temporarily storing a display list command group in a peripheral control RAM and then transferring it to a VDP with built-in tone generator according to the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a procedure for transferring a display list command group to a tone generator built-in VDP without storing it in a peripheral control RAM in this embodiment; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration having a plurality of display areas for variably displaying identification patterns in the present embodiment, (A) is a configuration example having a display area A and a display area B for identification patterns on one display screen, ( B) is a configuration example in which, in the case of having two display screens, a display area A and a display area B of an identification pattern are provided on each display screen. It is a diagram for explaining the highlighting mode of the display area for executing the variable display of the identification pattern in the present embodiment, (A) is a normal mode in which the display area A and the display area B are displayed in a standard mode (prescribed size). , (B) is an enhancement mode A in which the display area A is displayed in an enhancement mode, and (C) is an enhancement mode B in which the display area B is displayed in an enhancement mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of screen transition in a configuration in which variable display of the identification pattern of the present embodiment is performed in the display area A and the display area B, respectively. Then, an example in which the identification pattern stops changing in the display area B is shown. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of screen transition in a configuration in which the variable display of the identification pattern of the present embodiment is performed in the display area A and the display area B, respectively. An example of displaying all the stop symbols is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the production|presentation block of the timer production|presentation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the timer production|presentation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the production|presentation block of the background production|presentation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the background production|presentation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the mini character production|presentation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example which an identification pattern changes and displays in each of several display areas of this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which identification patterns are independently variably displayed in a plurality of display areas according to the present embodiment, and variably displayed in the same manner at a predetermined timing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which identification patterns are variably displayed in a plurality of display areas of the present embodiment and stopped at different patterns; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the game board of the game machine in this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the shape of the character accessory in this embodiment. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a perspective view which shows the shape of the snowman accessory in this embodiment, (A) is the figure seen from the front, (B) is the figure seen from the back. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a character accessory of this embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which looked at the cover member of the character accessory of this embodiment from the back side. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character accessory board|substrate of the character accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory board|substrate in the cover member of the character accessory of this embodiment, and shows the back side of a character accessory board|substrate. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship of a light-emitting body, the transmissive part of a cover member, and a non-transmissive part in the character role object of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the light guide member which diffuses the light from the light-emitting body in the character role object of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character accessory board|substrate of the character accessory of the modification 1 of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory board|substrate in the cover member of the character accessory of the modification 1 of this embodiment, and shows the back side of a character accessory board|substrate. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship of the light-emitting body, the transmissive part of a cover member, and a non-transmissive part in the character role object of the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character accessory board|substrate of the character accessory board|substrate of the modification 2 of this embodiment of this embodiment, and has shown the state which the character accessory board|substrate and the light guide member have overlapped. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory board|substrate in the cover member of the character accessory of the modification 2 of this embodiment, and shows the back side of a character accessory board|substrate. It is a figure which shows the state which attached the character accessory of the modification 2 of this embodiment to the game board. It is a figure which shows sectional drawing of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side cover member of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the back side cover member of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the snowman board|substrate of the snowman accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the back side of the snowman board|substrate of the snowman accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is the figure which looked at the cross section of the horizontal direction of the snowman accessory of this embodiment from the top. It is the figure which looked at the cross section of the horizontal direction of the snowman accessory in the modification of this embodiment from the top. It is the figure which showed the whole game board of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the front view, perspective view, and exploded perspective view of the rabbit role of this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a front view and a rear view of the face substrate of the rabbit character according to the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the face covering portion of the rabbit character of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the rabbit accessory of the present embodiment is in a standby position; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the rabbit character of the present embodiment; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the rabbit character of the present embodiment; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the rabbit character of the present embodiment; It is the figure which showed the whole game board in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the stump accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the stump accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the stump box part of this embodiment, its exploded view, the front view of a rear-wall cover, and the front view of a rear-wall board|substrate. It is the figure which showed the stump box part in the modification of this embodiment, its exploded view, the front view of a rear-wall cover, and the front view of a rear-wall board|substrate. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the front view, the perspective view, and the exploded perspective view of the rabbit character in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the mountain role of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the back grass accessory of this embodiment. In the stump box portion shown in FIGS. 498(A) and 499(A) of this embodiment, the box upper wall portion, the box right wall portion, the box lower wall portion, and the box left wall portion are moved from the standby position to the moving position. It is the figure which showed the state to which it was made to move. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which no stump plate portion is provided in front of the stump box portion of the present embodiment, and a fixed grass plate portion is provided instead of the first grass movable portion and the second grass movable portion; be. FIG. 517 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 517 of this embodiment. FIG. 518 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 518 of the present embodiment; FIG. 518 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 518 of the present embodiment; FIG. 518 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 518 of the present embodiment; (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of the configuration of the box rear wall portion of FIG. 520 of this embodiment, and (C) and (D) of the box rear wall portion of FIG. It is a figure showing an example of composition. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a time chart showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing changes over time in the display mode of the game board side effect display device, the moving state of the frame movable body, and the light emitting effect state in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing changes over time in the display mode of the game board side effect display device, the moving state of the frame movable body, and the light emitting effect state in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure showing a pachinko machine of a modification in the present embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. be. It is a figure showing a pachinko machine of a modification in the present embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. be. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a figure showing a pachinko machine of a modification in the present embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. be. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a figure showing a pachinko machine of a modification in the present embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. be. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are top views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are top views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are top views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are right side views. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the second embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a game panel in the second embodiment; It is an enlarged right front perspective view of the game panel in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of an area covering member in the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a plan view of the arrangement of obstructing nails in the right game area in the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of an area covering member in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the obstructing nail in the right playing area in the second embodiment, where (a) is a cross-sectional view of a portion where one obstructing nail is accommodated in the penetrating portion, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing two obstructing nails. A cross-sectional view of the location where the penetration portion is accommodated is shown, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the location where the three obstacle nails are accommodated in the penetration portion. It is a front view which shows an example of a nail sheet. Fig. 2 is a front view showing an example of usage of the nail sheet; FIG. 10A is a front view showing an example of an installation method of the area covering member in the third embodiment, and FIG. 11B is a front view showing an example of the installation state of the area covering member. FIG. 4C shows a cross-sectional view when the area covering member is attached to the existing member, and FIG. 4D shows a cross-sectional view when the area covering member is integrated with the existing member. Installation examples of multiple types of area covering members according to the third embodiment, in which (a) is an installation mode of the area covering member in which the right through portion is shifted inward, and (b) is an installation mode in which the left through portion is shifted inward. (c) is an installation mode of the area covering member with both penetrating portions shifted inward, and (d) is an installation mode of the area covering member with the right penetrating portion shifted outward. However, (e) shows an installation mode of the area covering member in which the left through-hole is shifted outward, and (f) shows an installation mode of the area-covering member in which both through-holes are shifted outward. ing. Another embodiment of the area covering member according to the third embodiment, in which (a) is a front view showing an example of an installation method of the area covering member, and (b) is a front view showing an example of an installation state of the area covering member. However, (c) is an installation mode in which the area covering member is rotated 180 degrees and both penetrating parts are shifted inward, and (d) is an installation mode in which the area covering member is rotated 90 degrees to the right and both penetrating parts are inward. A front view shows a staggered installation mode, and (e) shows an installation mode in which the area covering member is rotated 90 degrees to the left and both through-holes are shifted inward. Another embodiment of the area covering member according to the third embodiment, in which (a) is a front view showing an example of an installation method of the area covering member, and (b) is a front view showing an example of an installation state of the area covering member. However, (c) shows a front view of an installation mode in which the area covering member is moved downward and the penetrating portions on both sides are shifted downward. 3(a) to 3(d) show another embodiment of the area covering member according to the third embodiment, showing various applicable shapes of the penetrating portion, respectively, in front views. Another embodiment of the area covering member in the third embodiment, (a) is an installation mode of the area covering member that accommodates two obstacle nails in the penetration part on both sides, and (b) is an installation mode of two obstacle nails in the penetration part. (c) is a front view showing an example of a case where the area cover member is installed on the game panel from the front side, (d) and (e) are cross-sectional views showing an example of the case where the area cover member is installed on the game panel from the front side. Another embodiment of the area covering member in the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing an example of fixing the area covering member from behind the game panel, and (b) is a front view showing an example of fixing the area covering member to the game panel. A cross-sectional view showing an example of fixing from the rear of the is shown. Another embodiment of the area covering member in the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing a part of the left game area before installing the area covering member, and (b) is a left side after installing the area covering member. A front view showing a portion of the playing area is shown, respectively. Another embodiment of the area covering member according to the third embodiment, in which (a) is a front view showing an installation mode of the area covering member molded with the penetrating portion shifted downward, and (b) is a front view showing an installation state of the area covering member formed with the penetrating portion shifted upward. Front views showing the manner in which the staggered area covering members are installed are shown, respectively. An example of an installation mode of the decorative seal on the area covering member, (a) is a front view showing the area covering member before installation of the decorative seal, and (b) is an embodiment in which the decorative seal is attached to the entire perimeter of the through portion. , and (c) is a front view showing a mode in which a decorative seal is affixed to a part of the periphery of the penetrating portion. 1A to 1C show an example of accommodation of an obstructing nail in a penetration portion formed in an area covering member, and FIGS. The manner in which the obstructing nail is accommodated is shown in cross-sectional views. (a) to (g) show an example of accommodation of an obstructing nail in a penetration portion formed in an area covering member, and (a) to (g) show an obstructing nail in a penetration portion in which a convex portion is formed in the central portion of the cross section of the area covering member. The accommodation mode is shown in cross-section, respectively. (a) to (d) show an example of accommodation of an obstacle nail in a penetration portion formed in a region covering member, and (a) to (d) show an obstacle nail in a penetration portion in which a convex portion is formed on the game panel side of the region covering member. The accommodation mode is shown in cross-section, respectively. FIGS. 1A to 1D show an example of accommodation of an obstructing nail in a penetrating portion formed in an area covering member, and FIGS. Aspects are each shown in cross-section. FIGS. 1A to 1E are cross-sectional views showing an example of how an obstacle nail is accommodated in a penetration portion formed in an area covering member, and FIGS. are indicated respectively. 1A to 1C are cross-sectional views showing an example of a housing manner of an obstructive nail in a penetration portion formed in an area covering member, and FIGS. each indicated in the figure. Fig. 10A shows an example of a manner in which an obstructing nail is accommodated in a penetration portion formed in a region covering member, and Fig. 3(a) shows a visually recognizable manner before a fraudulent act, and Fig. 4(b) is a front view showing a visually recognizable manner after the fraudulent act. It is shown. A front view of another embodiment of the area covering member of the third embodiment is shown. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. (A) and (B) are front views showing a modified pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. (C) is a front view of the root vegetable frame movable body of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 4 is a table showing display effect patterns of the game board side effect display device and image data to be arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 4 is a table showing display effect patterns of the game board side effect display device and image data to be arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 4 is a table showing the priority of layers used for display effects of the game board side effect display device and image data arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 4 is a table showing the priority of layers used for display effects of the game board side effect display device and image data arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 4 is a table showing the priority of layers used for display effects of the game board side effect display device and image data arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 4 is a table showing the priority of layers used for display effects of the game board side effect display device and image data arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 4 is a table showing the priority of layers used for display effects of the game board side effect display device and image data arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 4 is a table showing combinations of image data and image data arranged in display effects of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 4 is a table showing the priority of the display effect pattern of the game board side effect display device, the layer to be used, and the image data to be arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 4 is a table showing the priority of layers used for display effects of the game board side effect display device and image data arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit by.

The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in FIGS. 20 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 .

The outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 . The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a vertically extending rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100.例文帳に追加A handle unit 300 which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to hit a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface below the plate unit 320 and a plate unit 320 attached to the center of the plate unit 320. According to the game state that changes when a game ball is hit into the game area 5a, the player can A performance operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory performance, and a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320. , a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530, and a door frame right side unit 550. and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100 .

The body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a frame-shaped body frame base 600 which can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame base 600. It is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a right side surface of the main body frame base 600, which is attached to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and a locking unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse side mounted on the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in the front view to pay out game balls to the player side. An L-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 600. and a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the top of the dispensing unit base 801 and extending to the left and right to open upward. A box-shaped ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 are detachably attached to the lower side of the payout unit base 801 and paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. and a payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 to guide the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward and to release the game balls according to the state of storage of the game balls on the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. An upper full ball path unit 850 that discharges from either a normal discharge port 850d or a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801 and discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 A normal guiding path 861 that guides game balls forward and guides them from the front end to the through-ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and guides forward game balls released from the full tank release port 850e to guide the game balls forward and guides the game balls forward from the front end to the full ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. and a lower full ball path unit 860 having a full guideway 862 leading to the tank ball receptacle 274 .

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a lower part for bass sound which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in front view. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921 , a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and accommodates the power supply board inside, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 . An interface control board box 940 housing an interface control board inside, and a payout control board 951 mounted across the power board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 to control the payout of game balls are housed therein. A payout control board box 950 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and shoots game balls from the ball launching device 680 into the upper portion of the game area 5a. A front structural member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guide to the front, and a flat plate-like game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. there is

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a player rotates the handle 302 while game balls are stored in the upper tray 321, the ball launcher 680 shoots the game ball with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 . Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are accepted by the winning openings, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 by the paying-out device 830 according to the accepted winning openings. Since the payout of the game balls can enhance the interest of the player, the game balls in the upper tray 321 can be hit into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. 13 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 14 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 16(a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame, omitting the left frame member, as viewed from below, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded. It is a diagram. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are separated vertically and extend left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 are connected to each other. and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 . Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the laterally outwardly facing side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are flush with each other. It is

In addition, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in a front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

In addition, the outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the rear side of the panel member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively; a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position to the left from the center of the left and right; A flat plate-shaped right sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 . The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40. As shown in FIG.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. In addition, the outer frame 2 includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and engage an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 which will be described later. , is equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
An upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 has engaging cutouts 11 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. Upper lateral fixing portions 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are mounted in the engaging notch portion 11 . In addition, the upper frame member 10 has mounting steps 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end in front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12 .

[2-2. Lower frame member]
A lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that its lateral length and vertical thickness are the same as those of the upper frame member 10, and its front and rear width is equal to that of the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the front and back width of the . The lower frame member 20 has engagement cutouts 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. In the engaging notch portion 21, a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of a left lower connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is attached.

In addition, the lower frame member 20 has front end notches 22 recessed rearward from the front surfaces of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20 , the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10 . When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2 , the portion between the left and right front end cutouts 22 is inserted into the panel member 50 .

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed by extrusions of metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetrical shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position rearward of the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the lateral outer side surfaces. It has concave portions 31 and 41, and protruding portions 32 and 42 which protrude from the side surfaces opposite to the concave portions 31 and 41 and have hollow interiors. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42 . Further, lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 are inserted and attached into the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively.

In addition, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on their surfaces. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility such as a game hall or is transported by the plurality of grooves, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker's finger, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extension portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape with a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically in a size that allows a game ball to pass through on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension part 51, A vertical wall portion 54 extending upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 51, and a front surface bulging forward from near the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54. and a return portion 55 that inclines toward the rear as it goes toward.

The curtain plate member 50 is mounted on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 on the front side and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 . A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position that coincides with a later-described discharge hole 74 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2 . Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in the assembled state with the outer frame 2 . The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 .

Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. The curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the top surface, and a right mounting portion 56 for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the top surface. a portion 57; The bottom surface of the body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82 .

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown, the panel member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper fixing portion 61 extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. , a bearing groove 63 extending from the right end of the forward extending portion 62 to the center of the front extending portion 62 toward the front and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61 in plan view. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lateral fixing portion extending downward from the left end of the forward extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 opens around the front end thereof. A flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16(b), etc.).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). there is Further, the forward extending portion 62 extends forward beyond the front end of the upper frame member 10 . Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above and fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to move the main body frame 4. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 consists of a band plate-shaped lock body 66a extending forward and backward with a predetermined width on both sides and an operation portion projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable bar-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d and. This lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 62 of the outer-frame-side upper hinge member 60 with a mounting screw 67 .

The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is attached to a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the forward extending portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. The hanging portion 65 of 60 extends forward so as to come into contact with the portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame upper hinge member 60. As shown in FIG. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 near the front end is in contact with the drooping portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space capable of accommodating a body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620, which will be described later, is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. By operating the operation portion 66b to rotate the lock body 66a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the main frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or removed from the bearing groove 63 .

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 includes a flat plate-like horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally and a left side of the horizontal portion 71 which rises upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. A raised plate-shaped rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 are penetrated vertically so that only one game ball can pass through. and a sized discharge hole 74 . The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer-frame-side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 . The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the center portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 in an inverted U shape. This discharge hole 74 is formed to have approximately the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 .

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the panel member 50 and the rear extension portion 51 . is fixed to the panel reinforcement member 80 by a screw (not shown) passing through the upper surface of the panel member 50 . When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 . In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 . Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 . More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 move between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74 . At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. A game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is discharged from the discharge hole 74 so that it can be easily prevented from rolling backward from the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 70.例文帳に追加

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connection member 85D, which connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40. As shown in FIG.

The connection member 85 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper lateral fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the horizontal fixing portion. A flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion of 86 from which the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends is provided. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 87. extending downwards. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10 . The upper lateral fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engaging notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10 . Further, the front lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw that is inserted into the projecting portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and further protrudes further than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward beyond the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the left lower connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. As shown in FIG. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20 . Also, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notch portions 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the lateral end surfaces of the lower frame member 20, respectively. be.

[2-9. Lock Mechanism of Upper Hinge Member on Outer Frame Side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the locking mechanism of the lock member 66 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. will be described with reference to FIG. 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an outer upper side view. FIG. 4 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which a body-side upper hinge member is attached to a hinge member; 18A and 18B are explanatory diagrams showing the action of the locking member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is adapted to block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V-shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

The support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a is mounted. is close to the right drooping portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right drooping portion 65, and they are in contact with each other). ), the centers of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock body 66a are diagonally shifted and opposed to each other. state.

In this normal axially supported state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 that supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end face of lock body 66a. In other words, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. As shown in FIG. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 can be smoothly rotated when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. there is Also, in the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is applied with an acting force F in a direction to pull out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape, and comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end face of the lock body 66a, the acting force is applied. F is the component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the main body frame hinge pin 622 and the arc-shaped front end face, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 and the bearing groove 63. and the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). , the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 does not rotate in the direction away from the right drooping portion 65, and the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is positioned between the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surfaces is maintained.

For this reason, even in a normal axially supported state or a state in which the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always subjected to a load, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and prevent the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 from falling out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the rightward direction by applying an excessive force, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts the drooping portion 65 and cannot move further. Since it does not rotate, the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the front extending portion 62 .

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the front end of the lock member 66 may be positioned toward the outside of the front extending portion 62 so that no rotational moment is generated by the action of the force component F1. By locating the center of rotation of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a only abuts the hanging portion 65 , so the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62 .

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert hinge pin 622 . When the main body frame hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main body frame hinge pin 622 contacts the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is pushed against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67 so as to move leftward. As a result, the lock body 66a closing the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, so that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is released by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to its normal state. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space on the front side of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63 , and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can rotate in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 . state is held (locked).

When removing the body frame upper hinge pin 622 from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock body 66a moves leftward, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63 .

[2-10. Crime Prevention Mechanism and Ball Engagement Prevention Mechanism at the Location of the Lower Hinge Member on the Outer Frame Side]
Ball biting prevention for preventing a game ball from being caught between a crime prevention mechanism at a portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be explained.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the front view left end portion of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. As shown in FIG. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer-frame-side lower hinge member 70 is attached in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the panel member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 . The curtain plate member 50 has a standing wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, Since the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, further insertion of the unauthorized tool to the rear side can be prevented. , tampering through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side can be prevented.

In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with a return portion 55 extending forward, when an unauthorized tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 is bent upward, the return portion 55 bends the tip of the unauthorized tool. can be further folded forward, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and fraudulent actions can be performed through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side. can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When dropped onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not ejected backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. There is a risk of being caught between On the other hand, in this embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 are provided with a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass. , and the right ejection hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be ejected downward from the ejection hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be ejected downward. It is possible to reduce the pinching of the game ball between.

Therefore, if a game ball is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 may be damaged, or the main body frame 4 may not be closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the body frame 4 and fraudulent acts using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. FIG. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-section cut along line CC in FIG. It is a diagram. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 has a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100. a handle unit 300 attached to the door frame base unit 100, a plate unit 320 attached to the front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100, a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. A door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 550 and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 .

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear directions, and has a vertically extending rectangular (quadrangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, although the details will be described later. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and the body frame 4, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 are locked. a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball shooting device 680; and a ball shooting device 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. and a foul cover unit 270 for receiving a game ball which is shot by and does not reach the game area 5a and discharges it to the lower tray 322. - 特許庁

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 rotates the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, which will be described later in detail. The ball can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong force.

The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described later in detail, is attached to a portion below the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. A production operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 includes an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be hit into the game area 5a, and an upper plate 321 arranged below the upper plate 321 for receiving game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower tray 322 that can be stored, an upper tray ball extraction button 327 for extracting game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and within the range of the balance of cash and prepaid cards thrown into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to the player, a return button 329 for returning the cash or prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and the cash put into the ball lending machine. , a ball rental/return display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 that can be operated by the player when presenting an effect, A lower tray ball ejection button 333 for discharging game balls downward from the tray unit 320 is provided.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is possible. Although details will be described later, the effect operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display the effect image. and a display device 460 .

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320 and to the left of the through hole 111 in the through hole 111 ( It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decoration lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, which will be described later in detail, is attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and the through hole 111 ( It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided at the front end. A right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is mounted above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. Although details will be described later, the door frame top unit 570 includes a pair of upper speakers 573 separated left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center of the front surface, and left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 with light emission.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31-33. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable (hinge rotatable) so that the left side in front view closes the front surface of the body frame 4 . The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower corner of the front surface, a plate unit 320 to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. A door frame right side unit 550 and a door frame top unit 570 are attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111 and the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a vertically extending rectangular shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-like reinforcing unit 130 attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, projecting forward from the door frame base 110 and projecting from the main body frame 4. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the door frame base 110 and the front surface of the through hole 111. A door frame left side decorative substrate 160 mounted on the left side of the view and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 190 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 are detachably mounted. and a glass unit mounting member 170 for.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 at the lower right corner in front view, and is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a cylindrical handle mounting member 180 for mounting the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 for closing the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 for covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening/closing cylinder unit attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210 , a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 , and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 .

Further, although illustration is omitted, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , the upper speaker 573 , etc., and a door body relay board for relaying connection with the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the body frame 4 .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 110 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 110 penetrates in the front-rear direction, and has a through-hole 111 formed in a generally rectangular shape extending vertically in the inner peripheral shape when viewed from the front. The through-hole 111 has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner circumference thereof, and is close to the outer circumference of the door frame base 110 , and a lower side forming the inner circumference extends vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 110 . It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole with the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 has a handle mounting seat surface 112 which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112 and a through hole 111. A cylinder mounting portion 113 to which a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted is recessed from the rear surface toward the front near the right end in front view between the and the cylinder mounting portion 113, and the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 penetrates in the front and rear at the cylinder mounting portion 113. The cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 are penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the front view. and a ball feed opening 115 for facing the ball.

In addition, the door frame base 110 penetrates in the front and rear direction at a position on the left side of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, so that the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. A passage opening 116 for a lower tray and a through-ball passage 273 of a foul cover unit 270 are penetrated in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through-opening 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 in front view. A plate passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the through opening 111 and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and both upper left and right sides of the door frame base 110. A speaker insertion opening 119 penetrates in the front and rear direction at the corner and through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. reinforcement unit]
The reinforcement unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (the door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending to the left and right and attached along the upper edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 , and a middle reinforcing sheet metal extending to the left and right attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 . A sheet metal 132, a vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the front view left side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a vertically extending right reinforcement sheet attached along the front view right side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A metal plate 134 and a lock engaging portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing metal plate 134 and engages the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 .

In the reinforcement unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 which will be described later. Therefore, the reinforcement unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by an upper reinforcement sheet metal 131, a middle reinforcement sheet metal 132, a left reinforcement sheet metal 133, a right reinforcement sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the lock engaging portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch 132a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the upper tray passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110 .

Although not shown in detail, the reinforcement unit 130 includes an upper reinforcement sheet metal 131, a middle reinforcement sheet metal 132, a left reinforcement sheet metal 133, and a right reinforcement sheet metal 134, each of which has a portion bent in the front-rear direction. This part not only increases the strength and rigidity, but also prevents unauthorized tools such as piano wires and flathead screwdrivers from entering from the outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 includes a door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 that is attached to the door-frame base 110 and has a pair of projecting pieces 141a that are separated vertically, and a pair of projections of the door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 that passes through the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a on the door frame upper hinge pin 142. A disc-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame, which is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a of the pair of projecting pieces 141a. and a lock spring 144 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece connecting the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. It is shaped like a letter. The door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece that connects a pair of protruding pieces 141a and is attached to the rear surface of the door-frame base 110 with screws.

The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) that protrudes upward from the upper projecting piece 141a. Further, although illustration is omitted, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion that protrudes downward from the lower projecting piece 141a and is bent in the horizontal direction. This bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the projecting piece 141a on the lower side, thereby restricting upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. As shown in FIG.

The flange member 143 is an E-ring and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer circumference of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 . The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and has its upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and its lower end in contact with the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the flange member 143 and the projecting piece 141a on the lower side, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

In the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140, the door-frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by a lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door-frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

When an operator holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144, the door frame upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620 or removed downward. can be done. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in the front view is moved. , can be hinge-rotatably supported with respect to the body frame 4 .

Further, in the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door-frame-side upper hinge pin 142 supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door-frame-side hinge shaft bracket 141 is attached to the door frame of the door-frame-side lower hinge member 150, which will be described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152 . As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 and the door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 .

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 includes a door-frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that is attached to the door-frame base 110 and has a flat plate-like extension piece 151a that extends forward, and A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 151a.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a horizontally extending flat plate-like extension piece 151a. is formed in a substantially L shape. The lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The lower door frame hinge pin 152 has a truncated cone shape that narrows downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 to be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 .

The door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 . can support

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 in front view. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height below the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 in the front view to the height near the center of the through opening 111 in the vertical direction. A frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and a door frame left side lower decoration extending vertically from the height of the position below the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper tray passage opening 117 a substrate 162;

A door-frame left-side upper decorative board 161 and a door-frame left-side lower decorative board 162 of the door-frame left-side decorative board 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of emitting light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is positioned behind a door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, with the door frame 3 assembled, and has a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decoration lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is used to detachably mount the glass unit 190 . The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base portion 171 mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a protrusion 172 that

The glass unit mounting members 170 are rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 .

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, so that the projecting portion 172 is outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In this position, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 or removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118 .

With the glass unit 190 inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 , the glass unit mounting member 170 rotates so that the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171 . The rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 is brought into contact with the rear side of the glass unit 190 to restrict the upper portion of the glass unit 190 from moving rearward.

The center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is positioned within the projecting portion 172 because the protruding portion 172 protrudes from the disk-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110 . . Therefore, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is freely rotatable, the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171 and is stable. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the projecting portion 172 is in the rotational position where the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is restricted by the projecting portion 172. Even if the member 170 is subjected to vibration or the like, the whole does not rotate so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, and the rearward movement restriction of the glass unit 190 is not naturally released. do not have.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, and the projecting portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110 .

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 . 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and a rear end of the tube portion 181 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181. An extended annular flange portion 182 and a plurality of ( In this example, three) ridges 183 and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 are provided. .

The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws while the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 .

The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300 . One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side inside the tubular portion 181 and the remaining two are provided on the lower side inside the tubular portion 181 . These three ridges 183 are formed in the handle base 301 at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c. Therefore, in the handle mounting member 180, the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

Since the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 so that the cylindrical portion The axis 181 is tilted so as to extend forward right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a similarly tilted state.

[3-1h. glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118 , and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 191 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. and two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191 . The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 191a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. A mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can abut against a projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 . The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

This glass unit 190 is obtained by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the reinforcing sheet metal 132 in the reinforcing unit 130 from above. , the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame base 110 .

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 190 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 110 .

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 200 includes a flat plate-shaped body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 201, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the body portion 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 .

The body portion 201 of the crime prevention cover 200 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 201 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed along substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201 . Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the body portion 201 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 201 . A rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball shot by the ball shooting device 680) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is within the game area 5a. It does not interfere with hitting the game ball into.

A pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 . Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110 .

When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is The removed rear projecting piece 202 is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. In addition, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security concave portion 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the crime prevention concave portion 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open/close cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 located between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4.

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending back and forth, and a locking unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 to rotate a key inserted into the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 that transmits rotation to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting plate 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can be rotated by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of .

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is arranged at opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end to the front. It has a pair of cutouts 212a that are cut out in the same direction. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the body frame 4 can be inserted from behind, and projections of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 are inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the lock unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape that protrudes forward when viewed from above. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of flat plate-like side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. and a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape from the respective rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b in directions away from each other. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. Of the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side in front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side in front view is attached to the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 . As a result, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 .

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100 , the front end of the cylinder lock 211 projecting forward from the front plate portion 213 a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 extends from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the cylinder insertion hole. 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110. A front plate portion 213a and a pair of side plate portions 213b of a cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is open rearward. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. FIG. 34(a) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Also, FIG. 35(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a), and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). FIG. 39(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the dish unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. is.

The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape, and the central side except for the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player and the production operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decoration board unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light emission, and a frame. A base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having an operation button 410 and a decoration board unit 420 attached to the front side, and a base unit 430 attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410 and effecting A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image is provided.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. The operation button 410 has a circular outer shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface (a shape of a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward. It has an annular button frame 412 attached thereto, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 . The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are made of a member that does not easily transmit light.

The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed to have a smooth curved surface without unevenness on the front side. The button lens 411 extends for a predetermined length toward the center (inner side) in a recessed state with a W-shaped cross section from the rear surface of the button frame 412 and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. A first button decorative portion 411a extends on an axis toward the center in a recessed state with an arcuate cross section from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side of the first button decorative portion 411a, and is arranged in a circumferential direction within a predetermined angular range. and a plurality (six) of second button decoration portions 411b provided.

As shown in the drawing, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends toward the center from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 when assembled to the operation button 410. It extends longer toward the center than

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three each on the left and right sides. These second button decorative portions 411b are formed to face from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward such that the front side thereof is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect of refracting light due to unevennesses having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side cannot be seen clearly.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and has a plurality (six) of frame openings 412a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the circumferential direction in an arc shape with a predetermined length. The six frame openings 412 a are provided three each on the left and right sides, corresponding to the six second button decorations 411 b of the button lens 411 . This button frame 412 has a plated layer with metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body portion 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, and an annular flange portion 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a. A plurality of (four) guide boss portions 413c projecting rearward along the outer periphery of the main body portion 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and from the rear side of the flange portion 413b along the outer periphery of the main body portion 413a. A plurality (three) of detection pieces 413d protruding rearward in a band-like shape and arranged in the circumferential direction, and a detection piece 413d extending forward and backward through the flange portion 413b outside the main body portion 413a and along the outer circumference for a predetermined length. A plurality (six) of base openings 413e are formed in the circumferential direction, and a base opening 413e extends forward from the front end of the main body 413a. and an inner extending portion 413f that narrows toward (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively arranged at portions corresponding to the four upper, lower, left, and right corners with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. 413 d of three detection pieces are arrange|positioned at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two may be distribute|arranged to the upper side and one to the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main-body part 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

The six base openings 413e are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decorative portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. As shown in FIG. At the base opening 413e of the button base 413, part of the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f are recessed inward from the outer circumference. The inner diameter of the inwardly tapering front end of the inner extending portion 413 f substantially matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412 .

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface), and is formed transparently. can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and an operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. is urged forward by The front side of the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 abuts against the frame unit 415 due to the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430 . By pressing against the , it moves rearward until the rear end abuts the front surface of the base unit 430 . When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 . Detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440 means that the operation button 410 has been operated.

In addition, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 .

Further, the operation button 410 has a button lens 411 and a button frame 412 that close the front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 . A transparent portion that allows the rear to be visually recognized is formed so as to narrow from the outer periphery to the inner side with respect to the outer diameter of 410 . The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 .

In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400 , the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413 a ) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decoration board unit 420 and extends from the front surface of the decoration board unit 420 . It will protrude backwards. As a result, the lights emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 are emitted from the button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button top interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button bottom interior of the base unit 430 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413 . Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420, the operation button left inner decoration board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LEDs mounted on the lower interior decoration board 436 from illuminating the parts other than the part to be luminous decoration, and the luminous decoration can be performed with good appearance.

[3-4b. frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button 410 from the front side, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 and having a circular central opening 416a, and frame main bodies 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side to the frame, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. there is

The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a which is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A plurality (six) of outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and arranged in rows in the circumferential direction, and a notch 416c having a predetermined width in the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , is equipped with The central opening 416 a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 . As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening portion 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided three each on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by frame side lenses 417 from the rear side. The cutout portion 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

The frame main body 416 also includes a substantially tubular inner tubular portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening portion 416a and the outer peripheral opening portion 416b, and has a cutout portion corresponding to the cutout portion 416c. In the state where the production operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylindrical portion 416d is arranged so that the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 are respectively arranged. and partitions between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Further, the frame body 416 has a pair of mounting portions 416e that extend outward from the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, respectively, and are mounted to the effect operation unit mounting portions 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. As shown in FIG. The frame main body 416 (effect operation unit 400) is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at the left and right portions of the pair of attachment portions 416e and cutout portion 416c.

The frame main body 416 has a metal cover on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) across the central opening 416a. A glossy plated layer is formed.

The frame side lenses 417 close outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 three each, from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface without unevenness on the front side, and a plurality of unevenness along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). Light is refracted by these multiple unevennesses, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front surface. In addition, the frame top lens 418 has a plurality of concave and convex portions extending in a zigzag pattern on the rear surface side along the periphery of the central opening 416a and arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen because light is refracted by these unevennesses.

In the frame unit 415, in a state in which the production operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are connected to the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420, respectively. , and the frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted thereon can be decorated with light. .

[3-4c. Decoration board unit]
The decoration board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit, viewed from the front. The decoration board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400 .

The decoration board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left external decoration board 422 and an operation button right external decoration board 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the board base 421, respectively. , and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 .

The substrate base 421 has an inner circumference that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and an outer diameter that is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415 .

The operation button left external decoration board 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421 . The operation button left external decoration board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner periphery of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. and a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right external decoration board 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421 . The operation button right outer decoration board 423 has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of first LEDs 423a on the inner periphery of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. and a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. Both front and rear surfaces of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decoration board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400 , the rear end side of the cylindrical main body part 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421 . Further, in the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b, 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. As shown in FIG. In addition, in the state assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the frame The inner tubular portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 illuminates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 with light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated with light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b.

Further, the decoration board unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire presentation operation unit 400. FIG.

[3-4f. Effects of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37. FIG. FIG. 45(a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away to be hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site|part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the production|presentation operation unit. FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the effect operation unit 400. The player can be entertained by participating in the performance presented to the player by operating the button 410.例文帳に追加

The performance operation unit 400 is formed to have a total height substantially equal to the height of the portion below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 . Further, the performance operation unit 400 is formed to have a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. - 特許庁The effect operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction under the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

The production operation unit 400 has the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 . When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper portion of the plate unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. installed as. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined so that it moves upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is placed above the plate unit 320 (the effect operation unit 400). Since it is positioned in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes through the vicinity of the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). Therefore, the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 inside the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in good condition.

The effect operation unit 400 has four guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410 slidably inserted into four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and is biased forward by an operation button spring 438. As shown in FIG. In a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the operation button spring 438 pushes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 toward the frame unit 415 . It abuts on the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 (center axis line CL side). there is In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface), a portion protruding forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37, etc.).

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is set to about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) faces the frame unit with respect to the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 , the operation button 410 moves backward along the center axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 . When the rear end of the operation button 410 contacts the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the performance operation button provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. likely to be To be more specific, the operation buttons for presentation in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that their central axes extend substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the presentation operation unit 400 of the present embodiment are attached. is installed with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as indicated by the white arrow in FIG. A portion of the operation button 410 away from the center axis CL is pressed.

By the way, since the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed on a flat surface to be pressed by the player, if the operation buttons are enlarged while the portions to be pressed are flat surfaces, When a part of the operation button deviated from the center is pressed, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot retreat straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation becomes impossible.

On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface) that bulges forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can be done. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without being tilted. You can fully enjoy the performance to operate.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front surface of the board base 421 of the decoration board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is plated so that the effect operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since it is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the attachment part. , the entire effect operation unit 400 can be greatly (strongly) vibrated, and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the effect operation unit 400. - 特許庁In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly below the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44) that is relatively easy for the player to press, the player pressing the operation button 410 It is possible to transmit strong vibrations to the player, and surprise the player and enjoy the performance.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326 form the lower surface. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or struck, the frame is not held until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like bend downward, thereby absorbing the impact. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is regulated, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 are attached to the effect operation unit. It is possible to avoid applying an excessive force to the portion 326a and the like, and to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 and the like. Therefore, when the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is pressed and an effect is presented to the player, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit is not pressed. Since the 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the decline in the interest of the player, and reduce the increase in the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. can be suppressed.

As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, so that the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity of the button lens 411 are higher than those of the case, and even if the button lens 411 is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, making it difficult to break.

46, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button inner decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The decoration by unevenness such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button interior decoration portion 432f, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the back side is the front side (player side). ). In addition, since the plate thickness changes in the parts where these uneven decorations are formed, the light is refracted in a complicated way, so it is difficult to see the rear side through the parts where the uneven decorations are formed. .

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center, the first button decoration portion 411a is decorated with unevenness. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion inside the button lens 411 . Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rear in the direction of the center axis CL), there are the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the inner decorative member 432 of the operation button. 432a, and the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap is positioned from the front side (player side) to close the gap on the outer circumference of the operation button inner decorative member 432. can be made invisible. As a result, even if the operating button interior decoration member 432 whose position is fixed is provided inside the operating button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the operating button 410 from deteriorating in appearance. It is possible to prevent the player from having an unpleasant feeling, and it is possible to arrange the operation button internal decoration member 432 inside the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410.例文帳に追加

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is configured such that the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 are arranged so that the outer circumference of the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is adjusted. The unit base 431, the decoration board unit 420, and the like on the rear side (back side) of the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411.例文帳に追加Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross-hatched portion surrounded by the one-dot chain line is hidden from the player's side. In this way, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outer side and the inner side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are difficult to see and hidden. It is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, in turn, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. A second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 arranged inside and behind the operation button 410 extends in a modified octagonal shape around the center axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the concave-convex line of the first button decoration portion 411a and the concave-convex line of the second button inner decoration portion 432g intersect with each other. The decoration can be shown to the player.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends). With the second button inner decoration part 432g, a deep and three-dimensional geometric pattern can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second inner button decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concave-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, the player can see the decoration with movement, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the effect operation unit 400 provides a moving and three-dimensional decoration to the player by using the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the player's interest and have a high appeal.

In addition, in the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), behind the operation button inner decorative member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button An upper interior decoration board 435 and an operation button lower interior decoration board 436 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces thereof emit light, thereby causing the operation button interior decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 to emit light. can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433 , the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434 , the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435 , and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 . As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 are as follows. As viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is arranged inside the cylindrical main body portion 413a, so that the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body portion 413a. , only the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is arranged behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 positioned near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 in the decoration substrate unit 420 is positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are arranged, and by lighting these first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light emission. can be done. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are formed by the cylindrical body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. 415 and the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is arranged behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board A second LED 423b of 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light emission by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with good light. .

In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a frame top lens decoration substrate 437 in the base unit 430 arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of lenses mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437. , the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission. A plate-shaped light shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward from the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 to which the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached to near the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. Light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the side of the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably illuminated.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. Fig. 47 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame left-side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame left-side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is a sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). The door frame left side unit 530 is arranged above the tray unit 320 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160). It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100 . The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the left side of the through hole 111 in the front view of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 532 attached to the front surface, and a translucent property arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown), and a left unit top that is attached to the upper front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, protrudes forward in a cylindrical frame shape, and extends vertically. a decoration base 534, a left unit lower decoration base 535 attached to the front lower portion of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decoration lens member and protruding forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decoration base 534; A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front sides of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit. and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536 .

A left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating in the front and rear directions. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include circular holes and vertically extending rectangular holes. The left unit base 531 has LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162). It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. The openings 531a of the left unit base 531 are formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned substantially in the vertical center when the door frame 3 is assembled. The left unit base 531 is made of an opaque member.

In addition, the left unit base 531 has a left reflecting standing wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) erected toward the front from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111. As shown in FIG. ing. In the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538, the inner surface which has a flat planar shape and is provided so as to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light. This reflective surface can be provided not only by forming the inner surface itself of the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 from a reflective material such as metal or resin, but also by attaching a reflective seal to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a portion (left portion) of the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 described above.

The left unit diffuser lens member 532 is made of a transparent member and is vertically divided into an upper diffuser lens member 532A and a lower diffuser lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a that is circular in front view and corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a rectangular lens portion that is square in front view and corresponds to the square opening 531a. and a lens portion 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and square lens portion 532b. formed.

A circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. With this circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged in the rear can be emitted forward in the form of dots. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with light emission by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , an input lens portion 532e that bulges rearward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and an input lens portion 532e on the rear surface that is entirely outside of the input lens portion 532e and that extends forward as it goes away from the input lens portion 532e. and a forward reflecting portion 532f that is slanted for movement.

The front diffuser lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffuser lens portion 532d has grooves recessed rearward in an arc shape in a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and a mountain portion between the grooves extends forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. In addition, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portions and the peak portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line that divides it in the circumferential direction.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 532e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portions are formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a triangular cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, with peaks between grooves sharpening rearward, and is formed in a serrated shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the grooves and peaks move forward as the distance from the center increases. In addition, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that groove portions and mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line dividing the portion in the circumferential direction. The radially extending line that divides in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffuser lens portion 532d.

When this rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately behind the input lens portion 532e.

Light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input into the square lens portion 532b from the input lens portion 532e. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges rearward into a curved surface (convex lens shape), it refracts the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a so that it travels forward in parallel. Almost all of the light can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is directed perpendicularly to the longitudinally extending axis (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. direction), and travels outward along the front surface of the square lens portion 532b from the center side. Also, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection portion 532c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected outward from the central side in the rectangular lens portion 532b substantially parallel to the front surface of the left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame reaches the saw-shaped forward reflecting portion 532f, it is reflected forward by the surface of the forward reflecting portion 532f. reflect to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so as to move forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center. (see Figure 50). As a result, light that is reflected outward over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction by the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially forwardly reflected by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes outward from the center side. can be reflected.

The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f passes through the front diffusion lens portion 532d and is emitted forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions. light can be emitted substantially uniformly forward (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) from the front surface of the .

In the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, the square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then forming a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing lines as boundaries. are shifted in the radial direction, and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted forward from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b has a concentric striped pattern of light and shade. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the light forward with more uniform light and shade. As a result, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 . The left unit decorative lens member includes a circular decorative portion formed in a portion positioned in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and a portion positioned in front of the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. and a multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and which extends short in the front-rear direction. The polyhedral decorative part has a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts arranged in a vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in a vertical direction on both sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is shaped like this. The circular decorative portion and the multifaceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multifaceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 of the door frame right side unit 550, respectively.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536 . In addition, the left unit decorative lens member is configured such that the circular decorative portion is projected forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532, and the multifaceted decorative portion is projected forward from the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. By the light irradiated to each of them, they are decorated with light emission.

The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is formed in the shape of a rectangular tube extending back and forth. The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a portion forming a lower surface on the outer periphery thereof, which is inclined so as to protrude downward from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates in the front-rear direction. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is made of an opaque member.

The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U shape that opens upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined from the approximate center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of an opaque member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530 . The left unit decorative cover 536 has a vertically intermediate portion that is bent rearward. A V-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535 connects the lower end of the upper V-shaped part and the upper end of the lower V-shaped part. It is composed of a linear part and a.

The left unit decorative cover 536 is attached at both upper and lower ends to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is made of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 537 extend short in the vertical direction and are attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is made of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. Fig. 51(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). FIG. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320 .

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the right side of the through hole 111 in the front view of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. and a door frame right side decorative board 552 attached to the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552, which is mounted on the front side of the right unit base 551 on the left side of the front view center and extends in the vertical direction and the front and back direction. A transparent plate-like right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decoration member. and a transparent plate-like right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554 .

In addition, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 in front view, and on the front side of the right unit base 551 on the right side of the center in front view and the right unit left diffusion lens. A transparent plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side surface of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. and a right unit right cover 558 in the form of a transparent plate attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. there is

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and is open on the front and right sides. A box-shaped opaque right unit left light shielding member 559 and an opaque right light shielding member 559 attached to the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and a right unit right light shielding member 560 having a flat plate shape.

The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and has a translucent right diffuser having a polyhedral decoration on the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the unit decorative lens member 561 , the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 , the front end sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating in the front and rear direction, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover. and a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563 . Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting with the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The right unit base 551 is made of an opaque member.

In addition, the right unit base 551 has a right reflecting vertical wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected toward the front from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111. ing. In the right reflecting vertical wall portion 568, the inner surface which has a flat planar shape and is provided so as to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light. As with the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, the inner surface of the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 itself is made of a reflective material such as metal or resin. It is also possible to provide such as by attaching a seal for use. As will be described later, the right reflecting vertical wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a portion (right portion) of the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 described above.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 includes a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a left LED 552b mounted on the center of the front surface in the left-right direction. and a plurality of medium LEDs 552c. The left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for lighting up the right unit left decoration member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Also, the right LED 552b is for lighting up and decorating the right unit right decoration member 557 via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The middle LED 552c is for decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed white on both front and rear surfaces. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is connected to the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view in a short flat shape, A plurality of notch portions 553c are cut out in a rectangular shape leftward from the right end of the rear wall portion 553b when viewed from the front, and a plurality of notch portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. 554, input lens portions 553e protruding rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and provided in a plurality in the vertical direction, and on the right side of the main body portion 553a when viewed from the front. A plurality of side reflection portions 553f are arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is positioned at the center in the vertical direction.

The body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a vertically extending quadrangular shape in side view. It is formed in a shape that is slanted to move to the Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a is aligned with the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the right in front view as it goes forward from the rear end side. Slightly slanted. The front end of the body portion 553 a projects forward to a greater extent than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3 .

The right end of the rear wall portion 553 b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 contacts the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of cutouts 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 . When the door-frame right-side unit 550 is assembled, the inner LEDs 552c of the door-frame right-side decorative substrate 552 face forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light by the plurality of inner LEDs 552c. can be decorated.

The housing recess 553 d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer circumference substantially matches the outer shape of the left decorative member 554 of the right unit. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is vertically divided into 6 equal parts, it is formed at substantially the center in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending square protrudes rearward, and a concave portion forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. It has a part and a. These input lens portions 553e are positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in the assembled state of the door frame right side unit 550 respectively. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side farther from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape, when cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens portion 553e, formed in a sharp triangular shape in which the peaks between the grooves face toward the center. , the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflecting portions 553f are formed so that groove portions and ridge portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with radial lines separating the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

In this right unit left diffusion lens member 553, the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is directed into the body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted by the curved surface so that the light from the left LED 552a spreads. will be radially diffused toward the front from the center.

The body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door-frame right-side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the right in front view as the whole goes forward. Light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration board 552 and incident on the main body 553a through the input lens 553e hits the flat left surface of the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the body portion 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the body portion 553a, and is reflected toward the side reflecting portion 553f on the inner surface of the left surface. becomes.

The light incident forward into the body portion 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits the sawtooth side reflecting portion 553f, is reflected leftward in front view, and travels outward from the left surface of the body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 passes through the main body portion 553a and is irradiated to the left side. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main portion 553a and the light emitted rightward from the side reflecting portion 553f are emitted from the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 to the left. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the body portion 553a is irradiated to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the body portion 553a can be decorated with good brightness. can.

In the side reflection portion 553f, a plurality of concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of lines extending radially, and the plurality of concentric circular grooves are shifted in the radial direction with respect to the dividing lines to form concentric circular grooves. are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, the light emitted outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body 553a is prevented from becoming light with concentric striped pattern shading. This makes it possible to irradiate leftward light with more uniform intensity. As a result, the right unit left decorative member 554 housed in the housing recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

Since the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is made of a transparent material, it is formed on the opposite side from the left side of the main body 553a in front view (the side where the housing recess 553d is formed). A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines in the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. portion can be decorated with the side reflecting portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and decorations such as the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the concept of the performance presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is designed to have The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 .

The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall projecting short to the left in front view from the rear side of the main body portion 556a. 556b, a plurality of notch portions 556c that are cut out in a rectangular shape from the left end of the rear wall portion 556b to the right when viewed from the front and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; A front view of a housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, a plurality of input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a and are provided in the vertical direction, and the main body portion 556a. A plurality of side reflection portions 556f are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is centered in the vertical direction on the left side.

The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 has a vertically extending rectangular front end with an upper corner notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and a lower side extending upward toward the front. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to the right direction, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a is aligned with the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move leftward in the front view as it goes forward from the rear end side. Slightly slanted. The front end of the main body portion 556 a projects forward farther than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3 .

The left end of the rear wall portion 556b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled with the door frame right side unit 550 . The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 abuts against the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of the cutouts 556c correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. As shown in FIG. The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a square opening penetrating back and forth between the notch portion 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the notch portion 556c of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The housing recess 556 d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer circumference substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. Thereby, the right decorative member 557 of the right unit can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, when the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is vertically divided into six equal parts, it is formed at the approximate center in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending square protrudes rearward, and a recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. It has a part and a. These input lens portions 556e are positioned in front of the right LEDs 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in the assembled state of the door frame right side unit 550 respectively. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves circumferentially divided by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side farther from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape, when cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens portion 556e, formed in a sharp triangular shape in which the peaks between the grooves face toward the center. , the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflecting portions 556f are formed so that the groove portions and the ridge portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with respect to the radial line that divides the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

In this right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is directed into the body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted by the curved surface so that the light from the right LED 552b spreads. will be radially diffused toward the front from the center.

The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the main body portion 556a moves leftward in a front view as the whole goes forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration board 552 and incident on the main body 556a through the input lens 556e strikes the flat right surface of the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the body portion 556a due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the body portion 556a, and is reflected toward the side reflecting portion 556f on the inner surface of the right surface. becomes.

The light incident forward into the body portion 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the sawtooth side reflecting portion 556f, is reflected rightward in front view, and travels outward from the right surface of the body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 passes through the main body portion 556a and is irradiated to the right side. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected rightward by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main portion 556a and the light emitted leftward from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560. Since the light reflected to the right direction and passed through the body portion 556a is irradiated to the right side, the right decorative member 557 of the right unit attached to the right side of the body portion 556a can be decorated with good brightness. can.

In the side reflection portion 556f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing lines as boundaries to form the concentric arc grooves. are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, the light irradiated outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a is prevented from becoming light with concentric striped pattern shading. It is possible to irradiate rightward light with more uniform density. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 accommodated in the accommodation recess 556d on the right surface of the main body portion 556a can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, it is formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body portion 556a in front view (the side on which the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines in the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. portion can be decorated with the side reflecting portion 556f.

The right decorative member 557 of the right unit is formed in a thin sheet shape, and decorations such as the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is designed to have The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555 . Further, the decoration applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 when viewed from the side. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape that is open on the front and right sides. The right unit left light shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view in a short flat shape, and a rear wall portion 559b. A plurality of notch portions 559c are cut leftward from the right end of the wall portion 559b in a front view and have a plurality of cutout portions 559c formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. A plurality of flat reinforcement portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a are provided.

The main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a vertically extending rectangular shape in which the upper corners on the front end side are notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side extends upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the body portions 553 a and 556 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 .

The left end of the rear wall portion 559b extends to the right from the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 contacts the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of the cutouts 559c correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 . The plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, respectively. Therefore, when the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c emit light from the right unit decorative lens member 561. can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets spaced apart by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, one pair of reinforcing portions 559d having a height substantially equal to the left and right widths and spaced apart in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind a decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563 . The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are enhanced by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

The right light shielding member 560 of the right unit has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner on the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559 a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 . The right unit right light shielding member 560 closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 .

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 as shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to be close to the body portions 553 a and 556 a of the left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the horizontal direction, forming a space extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the horizontal direction. . Through the space formed between the body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light emitted forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is emitted from the right unit decoration. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of an opaque member, and the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 illuminate forward, respectively. The light emitted is prevented from interfering with each other. Only the middle LED 552c can be used for luminous decoration.

Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is vertically divided into four by the three sets of reinforcing parts 559d. It is possible to prevent light from interfering between the spaces by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, which is located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561. , can be decorated independently. In other words, the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550 can be vertically divided into a plurality of (four) areas, and each area can be illuminated independently.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and formed with a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and which extends short in the front-rear direction. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of rows of quadrangular pyramid-shaped parts arranged vertically on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of rows of polyhedrons made up of a plurality of triangles on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed into a shape as shown.

More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and multifaceted decorative portions 561b divided into four spaces by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d of the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three regions located in the front, the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction is provided with one multifaceted decorative portion 561b on each of the upper and lower sides. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged in the rear.

The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front and upper ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561 . The front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . This right unit decorative base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so as to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562 . The right unit cover 563 is made of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 564 extend short in the vertical direction and are attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is made of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 vertically divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four.

When the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame left side unit 530 protrudes forward in a large plate shape, and slightly forward than the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. there is The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both projecting left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. can be decorated with luminescence.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It is possible to exhibit a function and effect like a partition between. As a result, the players playing the pachinko machine 1 can be given the illusion that they are playing in a private room, and the players can play in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around them. can be done.

In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, in a game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the door frame right side unit 550 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the island facility can be installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall where many pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are decorated with light, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not positioned near the front of the pachinko machine 1, the book can be seen from a distance. The existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the players.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides By making the member 561 or the like luminous and decorated in a peculiar manner, the staff of the game hall can immediately be notified of the occurrence of the trouble and be made to recognize it, and can quickly deal with the trouble. Therefore, the interruption of the game by the player can be resolved early, and the player's frustration and loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. Figure 56 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame top unit from the back. It is a perspective view. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is mounted above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the left and right sides of the center base 571 that is mounted in the center in the horizontal direction above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 . A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and extending to the left and right, with the center in the left and right direction protruding forward. A pair of openings 574a passing through the pair of upper speakers 573 in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box-like shape with an open rear, and a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three on each side) extending vertically and penetrating them in the front-rear direction. A unit main body 271, and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Here, although illustration is omitted, the pair of side bases 572 (the left side base 572a and the right side base 572b) each have an internal space that is open only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the internal space of the opening window, the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 (left outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34a, right outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b) provided so as to emit light from outside the outer periphery into the opening window, and from inside the outer periphery of the opening window outer peripheral light detectors 35 (left outer peripheral outer light detector 35a, right outer outer light detector 35b) for detecting the light outside the outer periphery.

That is, as will be described later, according to such a structure, the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 and the outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35 are arranged outside the outer periphery of the opening window. Almost the entire area of the window can be made to function as a portion (operation receiving portion) for receiving operations by the player. In addition, the outer peripheral external light detection section 35 is not arranged in an exposed state, but is arranged in the internal space 3435 (see FIG. 119) of the side base 572 that is opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. As a result, when light is detected by the outer peripheral external light detection unit 35, it is possible to preferably eliminate effect light that may cause disturbance.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the top inner decorative member 576 having translucency, and to the rear side of the top inner decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative substrate 577 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a plurality of slits 574b attached to the front surface of the unit body 271, respectively, and left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. A plurality of transparent plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and a top inner decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 attached to the left and right sides and respectively covering the front surfaces of a plurality (three) of light guide members 578, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decoration. A top center left decorative member 581, which is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of each lens member 580 and extends from both left and right sides of the top center decorative member 576 to near the center side end of the opening 574a, and A top middle right decorative member 582 is provided.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inner side of the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 271, respectively, and LEDs are mounted on portions facing the left and right outer ends of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578, respectively. A door frame top left decorative board 583 and a door frame top right decorative board 584 pass through, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on both left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271. A pair of substrate bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and a door attached to the front surfaces of the pair of substrate bases 585 and having a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted behind the slit 574b of the unit main body 271. It is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the front side of the frame top center left decoration board 586 and the door frame top center right decoration board 587, and the door frame top center left decoration board 586 and the door frame top center right decoration board 587, respectively. A pair of light blocking members 588 are provided.

In addition, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 within the unit main body 271, and a central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. An attached relay board cover 590, an upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and a unit cover 591 so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. and a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271 .

A central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. The center base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward, and has a plurality of unevenness on the front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. When the pair of upper speakers 573 are assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the respective front surfaces are obliquely attached so that the side near the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone speakers capable of outputting sound over a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the lower portions near the left and right ends of a square extending in the left and right direction bulge downward when viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that a square extending in the left and right direction is notched with a trapezoid narrowing upward from the lower end side when viewed from the front. The unit main body 271 has a rectangular shape extending to the left and right in a plan view, and a portion of about 1/2 of the total width (length in the horizontal direction) centered on the center in the horizontal direction on the front edge side of the rectangle. A trapezoid protruding forward and a quadrangle protruding short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are combined to form a shape. Therefore, the unit main body 271 is arranged such that both sides of the portion protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface are aligned with the lines connecting the left-right end portions of the unit main body 271 and the left-right direction end portions of the front ends of the portions protruding forward. It is located posteriorly (recessed).

The unit main body 271 has openings 574a penetrating in the front-rear direction at portions extending from the right and left ends of the front surface to positions outside the portions projecting forward. In addition, the unit body 271 has a plurality of slits that extend left and right at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and that penetrate in the front-rear direction at a portion that protrudes forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface and that extends obliquely. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend laterally from the vicinity of the front end of the front surface of the unit main body 271, which extends obliquely forward, to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Also, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction so as to be separated vertically by three.

The unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c formed by notching forward from the rear end toward the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d formed by notching from the rear end toward the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , is equipped with An upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by an upper cover 591. As shown in FIG. Also, the lower opening 574 d is closed by a lower cover 592 .

The unit main body 271 also has a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. This unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a shape when viewed from the front that is a modified pentagon bent so that the center of the lower side of the substantially square in the horizontal direction is positioned downward, and extends laterally outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed in a shape as if it were a combination of a substantially right-angled triangle connecting the tip of the edge and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined such that the modified pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is arranged behind the top middle decorative member 576 in a state in which the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to follow the front surface of the modified pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576 . side mounted. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top interior decoration substrate 577, and the interior top decoration member 576 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LEDs to emit light.

The light guide member 578 is made of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the left and right outer sides of the front end of the front surface of the unit main body 271 protruding forward. The side near the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 is defined as the end side, and the side near the center is defined as the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape with a large radius so as to move forward from the central end side of the straight portion 578a toward the central side. The straight portion 578a of the light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b has a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction. The straight portion 578a of the light guide member 578 has a constant vertical height, and the circular arc portion 578b has a vertical height that decreases toward the center. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 271 from the front. there is

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and formed of sawtooth unevenness, a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b and formed of a plurality of irregularities, It has

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both left and right outer ends of the light guide member 578 face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative board 586 or the door frame top center right decorative board 587. FIG. When the light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. As the light advances toward the center, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and the portion in front of the straight portion 578a of them is decorated with light emission.

Light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top center right decorative substrate 587 enters the light guide member 578 from a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be decorated with light.

In this way, the light guide member 578 is connected to the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 , or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 . By guiding the light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front can be decorated with good (uniform) light.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271 . The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. A decorative lens portion 579 a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578 and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578 . On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, concavities and convexities of truncated square pyramids protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right sides.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574 e of the unit body 271 . That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 . The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated by the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578 .

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271 . The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. A decorative lens portion 580 a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578 and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578 . On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, concavities and convexities of truncated square pyramids projecting forward are arranged in rows on the left and right sides.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574 f of the unit body 271 . That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 . The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated by LEDs 584 a and 587 a of a door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and a door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578 .

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top center left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in the state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579 . The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top center right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in the state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580 . The top center right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

The door frame top left decorative board 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted directed rightward. The door frame top left decorative board 583 has an LED 583a mounted at a position facing the left end surface of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can be made to emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 271 is illuminated by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted directed leftward. On the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surfaces of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can be made to emit light independently. By means of the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit main body 271 is illuminated via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

The pair of board bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion in the unit main body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrical with each other. The substrate base 585 has side walls that are substantially square in side view and have sides that extend vertically and forward and backward, a rear wall that is square in front view and extends outward in the left and right direction at right angles from the rear sides of the side walls, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. The line connecting the upper sides of the side walls to the middle is the oblique side, and the upper side of a substantially right-angled triangle connects the upper sides of the side wall and the back wall. and a right-angled triangular lower wall, and is formed in a triangular prism-like box shape with an open space between upper and lower oblique sides. The board base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit main body 271 . A door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or a door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 is attached to the substrate base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top center left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the left rear side of the left-right center of the unit main body 271 . be done. The door frame top center left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It becomes inclined. As a result, when the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b are formed on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. becomes a state approximately parallel to .

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top center left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271 . As a result, when the door frame top center left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570 , a plurality of LEDs 586 a face forward from the three slits 574 b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 . The door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to light-embellish a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 near the top center decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is mounted on the board base 585 mounted on the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the right side of the left-right center so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front. be done. The door frame top center right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It becomes inclined. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b are formed on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. becomes a state approximately parallel to .

A plurality of LEDs 587 a are mounted on the door frame top center right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit body 271 . As a result, when the door frame top center right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, a plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to light-embellish a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

A pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at positions between the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 587 and the unit main body 271 . The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with each other by an opaque member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower portions of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top center right decorative substrate 587 which are arranged in rows corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. partitioning. With this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward only by the LEDs 586a and 587a positioned immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 579 can be guided forward. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily light-emitting and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571 . The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. It relays the connection between the frame top center right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door main body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550 . The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590 .

The door frame top unit 570 is provided with a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the front surfaces of both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curved backward. Therefore, the player can be given the illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest in the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted.

In addition, the door frame top unit 570 attaches the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center to the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 . It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed on both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. As shown in FIG. As a result, the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated with the door frame top unit 570 .

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each in the vicinity of both left and right ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. The speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three vertically spaced decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be listened to by the player in good condition, and the player can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

Further, the door-frame top unit 570 has a top left decorative lens member 579 and a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top right decorative lens member 580, so that the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 583 are arranged. Light from substrate 584, door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be directed to top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, and top left decorative lens member. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well decorated with light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can light-embellish the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 including the front side of the left and right upper speakers 573 .

[3-8. Effects of door frame]
Effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a through-hole 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, which is made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than the conventional pachinko machine. , the vertical height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 is reduced. is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , corresponds to a game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 has an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 protruding forward below the through hole 111. , and the front surface of the lower half (the portion below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (the front surface of the front lower decorative portion 326c) is hollowed backward (dish unit 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the production operation unit 400, the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 are positioned rearward. ing. As a result, the performance operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction appears to protrude forward greatly, so that the performance operation unit 400 is made conspicuous and emphasized to the player. , and the effect operation unit 400 can be strongly focused.

The door frame 3 tilts the performance operation unit 400 arranged in front of the plate unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large semispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Therefore, when the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation buttons 410 face the player's head (face), and the player lowers his/her line of sight and presses the effect operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen almost in the front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be strongly recognized, and the expectation for the performance using the operation button 410 can be heightened. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good condition, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 which is large in diameter and protrudes forward in a round shape and has a diameter substantially equal to the total height of the plate unit 320, the operation button 410 can be operated by moving the hand over a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is mounted in a tilted state, it can be pressed from above like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine. It can be operated satisfactorily even from the front or from the front, and the operation button 410 with good operability can make the performance using the operation button 410 more enjoyable.

Further, the door frame 3 is attached with the effect operation unit 400 in a state of being suspended by the plate unit 320, and is provided with a vibration motor 424 for generating vibrations in the lower part of the effect operation unit 400. When vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 according to the state, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the player is startled by pressing the operation button. The production using 410 can be made even more enjoyable.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (effect operation unit 400) extending over the entire height of the plate unit 320 at the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less conspicuous, it is possible to make it easier for players who are familiar with the conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and appeal strongly attracting the interest of the players. The pachinko machine 1 with high power can be obtained.

In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that opens on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the capacity of the lower tray 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower tray opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be sufficiently secured. In addition, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his or her left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his or her finger on the lower plate opening 326d, Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower tray 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of incongruity, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game and increasing the size of the lower tray opening 326d. The fact that the lower plate 322 has a larger volume than that can also be made tactilely recognizable.

Further, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are discharged to the lower tray 322, and a lower outlet for discharging game balls from the lower tray 322 to a dollar box or the like below the tray unit 320. The countersunk ball extraction hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outside of the lower dish opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in front view. That is, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the appearance of the tray unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be improved. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the lower tray 322 of the door frame 3, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is arranged in front of (directly in front of) the lower tray ball supply port 323c. As a result, the game ball discharged from the upper tray 321 or the like to the lower tray 322 is immediately discharged from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a to the dollar box or the like below as soon as it enters the lower tray 322. At this time, since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper tray 321 and the like to the dollar box through the lower tray 322 also increases. can't see This allows the player to have the illusion that the game balls on the upper tray 321 or the game balls or the like paid out from the payout device 830 with the upper tray 321 being full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and to make the player concentrate on the game (striking operation of the game ball, effect images, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. can.

In the lower tray 322, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a at a position closer to the front left of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, and the lower tray 322 is erected on the right side of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall part is obliquely curved to face the direction of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 is directly discharged. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or it can be reflected by the wall on the right side and indirectly guided to the ball hole 322a. As a result, while the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is located in the area on the left side of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a in the lower tray 322. (Lower tray first area A1), since it can be ejected downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball circulating in the lower tray 322 is not visible to the player. Game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate opening 326d of a plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 faces forward, between the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a (the performance operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower tray opening 326d or puts his hand into the lower tray 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be favorably output forward, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player puts his or her hand into the lower tray 322 or approaches it, the player can feel the vibration caused by the deep bass sound from the lower speaker 921 forwardly output from the lower speaker port 326e. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a plate-shaped right side unit 550 projecting greatly forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. It is possible to give the illusion that the player is there, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around.

Further, the door frame 3 can be decorated with light on the front end and the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward. In the pachinko machine 1, even if it is not positioned in front of the pachinko machine 1, the existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from a lateral direction along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the players. machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 above the through hole 111, and the front surfaces of both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are The top middle decorative member of the door frame top unit 570 is more concave than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of 576 are positioned rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decorative member 576 can be made conspicuous and emphasized to the player, and the top can be seen to be emphasized. Strong attention can be drawn to the middle decorative member 576 .

By the way, the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine is equipped with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other to the left and right, and the two upper speakers stand out. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 has a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends. A speaker 573 is provided, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of a central top middle decorative member 576 through the front of a speaker cover 575 to both left and right ends are provided. The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light. As a result, the upper part of the front face of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 are not conspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing to the player by allowing the player to recognize at a glance that it is there, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound. can.

In this way, the door frame 3 of this embodiment has the effect operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 below and above the through hole 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward at the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to present to the player a decoration with a sense of unity in the top and bottom in which the imaginary line passing through the center in the left-right direction is conspicuous, and at the same time, the decoration gives a sophisticated feeling. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

In addition, since the door frame 3 has the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the production operation unit 400 arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction protrude forward, the top middle decorative member 576 When the effect operation unit 400 is decorated with light, the player can see a light emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged at the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400 or the like.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 is the game board of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which game balls are struck by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. As shown in FIG. The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front structural member 1000 that is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to cover the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, and the game is played by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side performance display device 1600. - 特許庁

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept the game ball hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by this, and the first special lottery that is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A big prize winning opening 2005 is provided in which game balls can be accepted either according to the result of the lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005. A start port unit 2100 and a start port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It has an upper part 2300 and a frame-like center accessory 2500 having a gate part 2003 and a second starting port 2004 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the back wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600 is provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back top left movable effect unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side in the front view, and the back box. A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in the back box 3010, and a back upper center attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. A movable effect unit 3400 and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front constituent member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65 and the like. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in a front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 and the impact part 1006 with which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes the outer side of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 near the lower ends thereof extending substantially vertically, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1008 projects backward from the security cover 200 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security concave portion 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the crime prevention concave portion 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also has a plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002 . By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 , the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 .

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearwardly from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (the game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. FIG.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1011 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1011 is aligned with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, these notches 1011 and 1127 are passed through the lower full ball path. Front end openings of a normal guideway 861 and a full tank guideway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIGS. 64 and 65, and the like. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and having the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface thereof.

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if obstacle nails are planted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

In addition, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 which are circular holes arranged near the outer circumference and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1114 arranged near the outer circumference at the lower left portion and penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in the vertical direction. , is equipped with These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5 a and are used for positioning with the panel holder 1120 . Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engaging stepped portions 1115 recessed on the front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engaging stepped portions 1115 are cut out to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a like the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114, It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120 .

In addition, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116, the inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and has a holding stepped portion 1121 recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and a front-to-rear direction inside the holding stepped portion 1121 having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a. and a through hole 1122 penetrating through.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 , and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the same as the panel holder 1120 . Almost flush with the front surface. Further, the holding stepped portion 1121 is formed in such a size that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 on the front inner peripheral surface thereof. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding stepped portion 1121, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1121. It extends and has a plurality of projecting pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 . By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 that engage with the engaging stepped portion 1115 at positions corresponding to the engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 . More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is arranged above the holding stepped portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1121. It protrudes toward and elastically engages with the engaging stepped portion 1115 . The engaging claw 1124 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120 .

The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding stepped portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 . The engaging piece 1125 is arranged along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 on the upper side ( center side) by a predetermined amount. By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging claws 1124 and the engaging pieces 1125 , the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has an out port 1126 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the rear lower side of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126. - 特許庁

Further, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1127 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This cutout portion 1127 is aligned with the cutout portion 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, these cutout portions 1011 and 1127 are penetrated to form the lower full ball path unit 860. Front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 face forward.

The panel holder 1120 also has a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front structural member 1000 . By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front structural member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front structural member 1000, and the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the front structural member 1000. 1120 (gaming panel 1100) can be positioned.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127 . The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129 .

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 , the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 . As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guide section 1003 and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 .

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the game panel 1100 described above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63, seen from the front together with the front structural member, substrate holder, and main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is made of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

The game panel 1150 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer shape of the front component 1000 . The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guide portion 1003 of the front structural member 1000 in the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the game panel 1150, the rear lower side of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.例文帳に追加

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the cutout portion 1011 of the front structural member 1000 and a cutout portion 1152 which penetrates in the front-view left side of the lower end in the front-rear direction and which is open downward, and which is located above the cutout portion 1152 in the vertical direction. and a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of inner rails penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the positioning projections 1009 can be fitted in positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component member 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front structural member 1000 . By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel 1150 can be attached to the front component 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating back and forth for mounting the front unit 2000 in the same manner as the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 described above. ing.

The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 , and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front structural member 1000 . As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guide section 1003, and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is slanted downward toward the center in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below when assembled on the game board 5 . As a result, all of the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 can be received. It is possible to discharge downward from the discharging portion 1201 that is positioned.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents, payout of game balls, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be traced. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

Each of the various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 is provided as a transparent member so that visual confirmation from the outside is possible. there is That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in particular, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 have surfaces inferior in fraud prevention performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to fraud countermeasures, which will be described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the play area 5a, as shown. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing game balls through the gate section 2003. Ordinary pattern display 1402 consisting of, normal holding indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate part 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002 A first special design indicator 1403 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the first special lottery result, and a first special reservation consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls to the first start port 2002 A number indicator 1404, a second special symbol indicator 1405 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second start port 2004, and a second start port 2004 A second special reservation number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc., the big winning opening 2005 A round indicator 1407 consisting of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern is mainly provided.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although illustration is omitted, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part for controlling effect images. .

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center thereof. This game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . This game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves which are open on the left inner circumferential surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. The two left fixing pieces 1601 are inserted into 3010c from the oblique rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. front unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. FIG. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving a game ball hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are located within the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and a game ball A second starting port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the part 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a big prize winning port 2005 that enables acceptance of game balls according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

A plurality of general winning holes 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged substantially directly below the impact portion 1006 on the upper right side in the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate portion 2003 to the right in front view. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126 .

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005. A start port unit 2100 and a start port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It comprises an upper part 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has a gate part 2003 and a second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

The starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly above the out port 1126 in the vicinity of the lower end portion of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starter opening unit 2100, the first starter opening 2002 opens upward to a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time, and the big winning opening 2005 receives a plurality of game balls at once ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) extend to the left and right with an acceptable size, and are formed so as to be openable and closable according to the game state.

The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 capable of receiving game balls at all times.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front in the game area 5a, at the upper left side of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view, slightly below the center in the vertical direction. When the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball that has flowed down along the inner rail 1002 is directed to the right (game area 5a). center in the left-right direction).

The center accessory 2500 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front. installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and the effect units provided in the back unit 3000 are visually recognized from the front. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 .

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, except for the lower side, so that a game ball hit into the game area 5a is projected inside the frame. It is impenetrable.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 which is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side in the front view so that game balls in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball which has entered the warp entrance 2520 can be released into a frame. It has a warp exit 2522 that is open and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball discharged from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharges it into the game area 5a. A starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. FIG. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 on the game panel 1100 . Also, behind the back unit 3000, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached.

The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front. The rear wall has a square opening 3010a. A box-shaped performance drive board box 3042 is provided so as to be rotatable about an axis extending left and right along the axis and housing the performance drive board.

The back unit 3000 includes a back left center decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back top left movable effect unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side in the front view, and the back box. A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in the back box 3010, and a back upper center attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. A movable effect unit 3400 and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front, and has a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall and a plate frame-like shape protruding rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a at intervals. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. , and a notch portion 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back case 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view.

The opening 3010 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 . Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting each movable effect unit and the like at appropriate positions.

The back unit 3000 uses a back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, a back top left movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back top middle movable effect unit 3400, and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500, etc. , luminous effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[6. Game content]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are released by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , the ball passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more the handle is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. , the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and game balls are placed on the obstacle nails. By coming into contact with the game ball, the speed at which the game ball flows down is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. When the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 , it is supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 .

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves left and right, and is released forward. When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, it is received by the first start hole 2002 with a high probability because it is positioned directly above the first start hole 2002. - 特許庁When the game ball is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. - 特許庁A game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the open big winning opening 2005, or the like.

By the way, if the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it will be moved to the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the starting port 2002 or the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

On the other hand, when the game ball hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right hitting), On the downstream side, it flows through a region provided with a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 .

Then, when the right-handed game ball passes through the gate part 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the normal lottery is "normal hit", the second start port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time ( For example, between 0.3 to 10 seconds), it will be in an open state, and the reception of game balls to the second start port 2004 is possible. Then, when the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. be.

In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by passing game balls through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the indication of the result of the normal lottery (for example, 0.5 hours). 01-60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 before the normal lottery result is indicated after the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the result of the ordinary lottery ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of pending lottery results is set to four, and even if the game balls pass through the gate section 2003, the game balls exceeding the upper limit are discarded without being held. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 sets an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot", " A lottery for the special lottery result that generates a medium hit, a small win, a variable probability win, a reduced time win, etc. is performed. Then, the special lottery result of the lottery is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by receiving the game ball in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", " 15R big hit”, “probability change (probability change) hit”, “time saving (time reduction) hit”, “probability change time saving hit”, “probability change time saving hit”, etc.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state , After the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state in which it is possible to receive game balls in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When game balls are received in the big winning opening 2005 when the big winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls are sent from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. is dispensed to the upper tray 321 . Therefore, when the big winning hole 2005 can receive the game balls, by making the big winning hole 2005 accept the game balls, a lot of game balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

If the special lottery result is a "small win", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a predetermined short period of time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) to accept a game ball. Repeat the opening and closing pattern multiple times (eg, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the large winning opening 2005 is in an open state capable of accepting game balls, or the opening to the big winning opening 2005 When any of the conditions of acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, a predetermined opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball unacceptable in a closed state is set. Repeat a number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big win game, change the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn ("variable hit"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. There is a "hit" to do ("time saving hit").

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery to the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the special lottery result drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and the second Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball is accepted in the second start port 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. be. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to flash for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the game board side effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and a special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the game board side effect display device 1600 is variably displayed by changing each symbol row in a state in which three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are arranged in the horizontal direction. The pattern rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three stopped and displayed pattern rows are combined corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous game state (for example, a small winning game, a big winning game, etc.) occurs according to the drawn special lottery result.

It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED flashing time (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates). A longer time is set for the function display unit 1400 than the time until the finalized image is displayed.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 on the door frame 3 is displayed according to the special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations of center accessory 2500, various decorations of back unit 3000, back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect By appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc., it is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc., and the game can be played by various effects. It is possible to keep the player's interest in the game from declining.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in this embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main frame 4 in this embodiment is the main unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment is the present invention. , the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment and the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

In addition, the decorative member inside the operation button of the base unit in this embodiment, the main screen 471 and sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are the second decorations of the present invention, The second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral edge decoration member 478 each correspond to the second decoration portion of the present invention. .

Further, each LED and sub-screen decoration substrate mounted on the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 in this embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is the luminous body of the present invention, the door frame side effect display device 460 of the present embodiment is the back side decoration means of the present invention, the frame unit 415 of the present embodiment, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and The unit bases 451 of the second base unit 450 each correspond to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 bulging forward in the door frame 3 is performed. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A) 472a, sub-screen decorative member 476, peripheral decorative member 478, etc.), decoration in which the first button decoration part 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, etc. Since it is possible to show the player the decoration full of decorativeness with a sense of perspective, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be made expensive.

In addition, the operation button internal decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the movement direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it. As a result, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.) approach or separate, A change in the distance between the first button decoration portion 411a and the second inner button decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.) changes the distance between the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g. It is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that overlaps the button inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) and the first button decorative portion 411a. The decoration (intersection mode) by the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player himself, and the player can It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, which is the side opposite to the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the first decorative body Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the player, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button of the operation button inner decorative member 432 The distance to the inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) is greatly different, and the button lens 411 is operated to move it. When the position of the player's eyes moves even when the screen is not on, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second inner button decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) are displayed. Since the intersecting state (overlapping condition) with the decoration changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Furthermore, since the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, the central side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration portion 411a is not provided The operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 on the back side can be visually recognized well through the first button decoration portion 411a. The player's line of sight can be directed to the center of the button lens 411 by the decoration of , and through the center of the transparent button lens 411, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) or the door frame It is possible to draw the player's attention to the side effect display device 460 strongly.

In addition, since the operation button inner decorative member 432 is provided with the second button inner decorative portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centering on the center, the button lens 411 can be seen from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a and the decoration of the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 intersect with each other, so that the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g The pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appeal to the players by making the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g conspicuous. can.

In addition, since the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centering on the center, the second button inner decoration portion 432g By the decoration, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 visible in the center of the operation button inner decorative member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. can.

Furthermore, each LED mounted on the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 (or the sub-screen decoration substrate 477) When the LED 477a) emits light, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) can be decorated with light emission, and the button lens 411 can also be decorated with light emission. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can also be entertained by light emission decoration. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) are operated by the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decoration substrate 436 can be diffused, in the second button interior decoration portion 432g, the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, and the operation button top Direct light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the interior decoration substrate 435 and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 emits light for decoration. Indirect light diffused by the portion 432g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) is used for luminous decoration, while the second button inner decorative portion 432g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is strongly luminous-decorated. Since the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly illuminated, the LEDs of the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 are illuminated. (or the LED 477a) is illuminated, and the perspective is emphasized when the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) are viewed from the outside. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing by showing the decoration to the player and strongly attracting the interest of the player.

In addition, since the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door There is no need to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move to a portion outside the outer circumference of the frame-side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame The side second effect display device 460A) can be spread outward to be made as large as possible, and the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged. 460A) can be highlighted. In addition, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, by arranging the frame unit 415 outside the button lens 411, the whole pachinko machine 1 can be The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly decorative and highly appealing to strongly attract the interest of players by improving its appearance.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, the button lens 411 has a flat shape when the player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface. Compared to the case, the applied impact force is more likely to disperse over the entire button lens 411, so the button lens 411 can be made less likely to break (be less likely to be damaged). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the breakage of the button lens 411 during the game, which interrupts the game and makes some players feel frustrated and lose interest. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the front through the through hole 111 in the door frame 3. The unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 protruding forward on the side has an outer diameter of 10 cm. Operation buttons 410 that are movable (advance and retreat) by being operated by the player with a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ~30 cm, and decoration inside the operation buttons that can be seen from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation buttons 410 Since the member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged in the frame are attached, the conventional Since the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) having as large an operation button 410 as possible can be seen at a position where the storage tray for the game balls is conspicuous in the pachinko machine, the player can see the performance operation unit 400 at a glance. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 is highly appealing. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and a translucent second button decoration is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. 411b, and attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b. First LEDs 422a and 423a for decorating the second button decoration part 411b with light emission and second LEDs 422b and 423b for decorating the frame side lens 417 with light emission are provided, and the frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided. An inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 partitioning the decoration portion 411b, and a main body portion 413a and an inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 partitioning the second button decoration portion 411b and the central side of the button lens 411. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411, and the second LED 422b , 423b can be prevented from illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently decorated with light emission. can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly decorated with light emission, and a good-looking light emission effect can be performed. In addition, by appropriately combining lights off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc., for the frame side lenses 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b that are adjacent to each other, various patterns of light emission effects can be performed. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored, entertains the player, and suppresses the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the first LEDs 422a and 423a that decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b that decorate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are combined into one operation button left outer decoration. Since the board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are provided and the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration part Compared to the case where 411b (operation button 410) is provided with a substrate, the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept away from the second button decoration portion 411b as much as possible, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently emitted. It is possible to irradiate the second button decoration portion 411b in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly decorated with light emission, the appearance of the light emission decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. At the same time, the player can be entertained, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (the second base unit 450), the operation button left external decoration board 422 is moved as the operation button 410 advances and retreats. Also, the wiring connected to the operation button right external decorative board 423 is not bent or stretched, and disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (the second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring will not be disconnected. The player can be entertained with the luminous decoration without any problem, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, since the second button decorative portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the transparent button lens 411 can be passed through the rear operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460. When looking at (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edge of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is the second button decoration portion 411b. is decorated, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. By appropriately lighting the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen behind. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417, which decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411, can be decorated with light emission in various patterns. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the light emission effect, the operation of the operation button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted. It is possible to entertain the effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decorative portion 411b on the outer edge can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 can be operated by the player during execution of the player participation type production. By allowing the operation, the player can enjoy the operation of the operation button 410 (player-participation type performance), and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Then, when executing the player-participation type production, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated with light emission, thereby attracting the interest of the player to the operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type production.

Furthermore, since only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with the opaque main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f that can be decorated with light emission by the first LEDs 422a, 423a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 can be The portion closer to the center than the button decoration portion 411b is not decorated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is brightened so that it is positioned backward. It is possible to prevent the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be decorated with light emission in a good state, and the transparent button lens 411 can pass through the transparent button lens 411 to the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460). The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be sufficiently entertained with decorations, light-emitting effects, and the like, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, since the inner cylindrical portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 having the frame side lenses 417, the frame side lenses 417 and the second button decoration of the operation button 410 are arranged on the rear side of the frame unit 415. The portion 411b can be completely partitioned by the inner cylindrical portion 416d. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the inner tubular portion 416d near the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423, light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is positioned closer to the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external Even if a gap is formed between the decoration substrate 423 and the front surface, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b illuminates the second button decoration portion 411b. never do. Therefore, it is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 that reliably blocks the light by the inner cylindrical portion 416d and reliably exhibits the above-described effects.

In addition, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (the button lens 411), the rear side of the operation button 410 has the second button decorative portion 411b. and the central side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f. On the other hand, the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423 are located near the end (rear end) of the main body 413 a near the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423 . , the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body portion 413a, and light from entering the central side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 is completely blocked. can be done. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be illuminated in a favorable state by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the transparent button lens 411 can be used to illuminate the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 ( The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be sufficiently entertained with the decoration and the light emission effect, thereby suppressing the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is placed in front of the outer portion of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is positioned, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (the door frame side second The second button decorative portion 411b can make the outside members and the rear side (back side) of the effect display device 460A) difficult to see, thereby preventing deterioration of the appearance of the operation buttons 410.例文帳に追加Also, at this time, if the second button decoration portion 411b is decorated with light emission by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b is changed by the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect Since the outer side and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, the members on the outer side and the rear side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made difficult to see. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation button inner decorative member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the player can A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b The side lens 417 has an arcuate shape. Therefore, by appropriately emitting light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, it is possible to create a light emission effect such that the light circulates around the outer edge of the operation button 410, or light emission such that the light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player an effect, a light-emitting effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., the player can be kept from getting bored with various light-emitting effects, and the player can enjoy it. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper tray 321 used for the game by hitting the game balls stored in the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a is formed. At the same time, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and lower side of the upper plate 321 to create a mounting space of a predetermined size behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed, the portion corresponding to the lower plate first region A1 of the lower plate main body 325 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed from that portion. Since the part corresponding to the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 is extended inside to attach the lower plate 322 capable of storing game balls, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front. As a result, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be relatively conspicuous. Therefore, when the present pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be seen at the position where the upper tray and the lower tray are vertically aligned in the conventional pachinko machine. A highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of making a player recognize that it is different from a conventional pachinko machine at a glance and strongly attracting the interest of the player. can.

In addition, in the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate body 325 of the lower plate 322, it extends upward from the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, and extends to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since lower tray covers 340, 340A for regulating movement of the game balls are provided, the game balls in the lower tray 322 are prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A). , the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 contact or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not come into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the game ball does not damage the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the breakage of the performance operation unit 400 (the second performance operation unit 400A), thereby preventing the player from losing interest, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Also, lower plate covers 340, 340A for restricting movement of game balls to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j are provided in the portion of the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322. , it is possible to prevent game balls from entering (spilling out) from the lower tray main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable due to the game ball entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 is covered by the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 bounces within the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the portion of the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray main body 325 is covered by the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the player can easily move the lower tray main body 325 toward the lower tray first area A1 (lower tray opening). 326d) into the lower tray second area A2, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A can prevent the fingertips from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. etc. can be prevented from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), etc., and the player can play in a safe state. can be done.

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), impact and pressure due to the contact of the game ball against the lower plate covers 340, 340A Even if is acted, it is not transmitted from the lower tray covers 340, 340A to the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is surely damaged. can be prevented.

Further, in the portion of the lower tray second region A2 in the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322, since the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is provided in front of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game balls discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can enter the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a as it is and be discharged downward (dollar box), and the game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball will not reach the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent damage to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), reduce the interruption of the game, and reduce the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is tilted. By climbing the bottom, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball contacting the lower tray covers 340, 340A can be slowed down, the lower tray covers 340, 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. In addition, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball hits the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the main body vertical wall portion 325b, thereby suppressing damage to them.

Further, since at least the lower tray covers 340, 340A are formed as separate members, when the lower tray covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired only by replacing the lower tray covers 340, 340A. 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center of the front surface in the left-right direction bulges most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game such as receiving game balls into the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. After the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 is provided, the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forwardly bulging portion thereof, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. and a lower plate 322, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) is provided with the outer side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. It has a lower tray first area A1 and a lower tray second area A2 positioned in the rear space of the mounting space 326j behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be conspicuous, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) can be made small and inconspicuous. can. Therefore, since the conspicuous production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in the part where the upper tray and the lower tray were visible in the conventional pachinko machine, the game machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine for the player. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing and capable of strongly attracting the player's interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is Although it is smaller, the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second region A2 located in the space behind the installation space 326j behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Since the extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, game balls can be stored in a range (lower plate second area A2) of the lower plate 322 that cannot be seen from the front. can. Therefore, since a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured contrary to the appearance from the front, the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加This allows the player to enjoy the game and suppress the loss of interest.

Further, the lower tray main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower tray first area A1, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A having the lower tray second area A2, the first extension section 325B and the second extension section Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the portion 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, the second extension portion 325C, and the like having different sizes are prepared in advance. By attaching the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C of sizes corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the plate unit cover 326, etc. The volume of dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the space behind the mounting space 326j. Since the size of this rear space depends on the rearward projection amount of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), various production operation units 400 (second production operation unit 400A) with different rearward projection amounts can be used. The lower plate 322 can be adapted to the production operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

In addition, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a downwardly recessed container shape, and the game ball can be reliably stored. In addition, since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A have the cover vertical wall section 340a that rises from the upper end of the main body vertical wall section 325b of the lower tray main body 325, various shapes of the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are prepared in advance. By combining (attaching) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having shapes corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space behind the mounting space 326j, etc., various forms can be accommodated. It is possible to achieve the same effects as those described above.

In the lower tray 322 composed of the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325. Therefore, since the part of the lower tray 322 on which the game balls are placed becomes the lower tray main body 325, the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340, 340A are placed on the part where the load of the game balls is increased due to the storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower tray main body 325, even if many game balls are stored, the lower tray cover 340, 340A will not be pulled away from the lower tray main body 325. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower tray covers 340 and 340A from coming off the lower tray main body 325.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls is provided below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game is performed such that the game balls are accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. 321 and a lower plate 322, and a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322 by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including the and is made invisible from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made neat and attractive, and the player is interested. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, capable of strongly attracting . In addition, since the game ball heading from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a is made difficult to see by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the player can play the game inside the lower dish 322. It is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by making it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the ball, and to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the bottom plate of the lower plate 322 to guide the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a Since the part between the ball extraction hole 322a and the game ball guided by the guide means such as the ball guide part 322c and the buffer part 322d is made difficult to see, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is kept open, , the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c are guided by the guiding means and are smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. It is possible to create the illusion that the game balls are discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to make the player less likely to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and to make the player concentrate on the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a difficult to see from the front. In addition, the lower tray ball supply port 323c, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, and the like are positioned behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). That is, since half or more of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front is different from the actual size of the lower plate. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 compared to its appearance.

Also, in the state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game ball released into the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is transferred to the lower tray ball supply port 323c on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322 Since the guide means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d, which are located between the ball hole 322a, the ball can be smoothly guided to the lower plate ball hole 322a and discharged to the bottom of the lower plate 322 (dollar box). , the game ball can be prevented from circulating in the lower tray 322, and the game ball circulating in the lower tray 322 can be reliably made invisible from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower tray 322, thereby preventing the player from being distracted and suppressing the loss of interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is kept open, the game ball supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is immediately released by the ball guiding portion 322c or the like without making the player aware of it. Since the ball can be ejected downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the player is given the illusion that the game ball is ejected below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加can be done. As a result, it is possible to make the player less likely to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and to make the player concentrate on the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is made invisible from the front, so the lower plate visible from the front Since the actual lower tray 322 is larger than the visible size of the lower tray 322, a sufficient amount of game balls can be reserved as with the lower tray of the conventional pachinko machine.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 protruding forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game such as receiving game balls into the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. Effect operation unit attachment for attaching a large effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having the same height as the total height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. In addition to having a portion 326a, the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is recessed so as to be scooped out rearward from the center in the vertical direction. Because of the shape, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a can be seen to protrude greatly forward, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect The operation unit 400A) can be conspicuous. Therefore, the large production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in an emphasized state at the position where the upper tray and the lower tray were arranged vertically in the conventional pachinko machine. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing by making the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine just by looking at it. The lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part is wrapped around the back of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently secured. The player does not have to worry about the lower plate 322 being filled with game balls while playing, and the player can concentrate on the game, enjoy the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his or her hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertip is It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. As a result, it is possible for the player to perceive that a sufficient amount of game balls is secured even by touch, and in a state in which the game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, Since it is possible to recognize that many game balls are stored in the space, the player can be given a sense of satisfaction, enjoy the game, and suppress a decline in interest. In addition, since the fingertips of the hand placed in the lower tray 322 are less likely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322, the lower tray cover 340, etc., the player feels the same as the lower tray in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incompatibility given to a player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine, and to reassure the player and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear), even if the front side is small, a sufficient storage amount of game balls can be secured. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made small, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) where the lower plate 322 is open. , and the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) can be relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be attracted. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the lower plate cover 340 covers the sides and upper part of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around the production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A), the player cannot move inside the lower plate 322. When a player puts his or her hand in, it is possible to prevent the fingertip or the like from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and get injured. The game can be played in a safe state. Also, the lower tray cover 340 can prevent game balls from entering (spilling out) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326 .

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be operated from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous and highly appealing, capable of strongly attracting the interest of the players, and the decoration by the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. By doing so, it is possible to keep the player entertained with decorations and effects of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest of the player.

In addition, since the lower tray 322 is provided with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321 and a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates vertically so as to be openable and closable, the conventional pachinko machine can be used. Since it has the same function as the lower tray 322, when a player accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine plays a game with this pachinko machine 1, the function of the lower tray 322 will not be confused and the same as the conventional one. The game can be played with a feeling of relaxation, and the player can concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. In addition, since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a are arranged. A pachinko machine with a high appealing power, in which a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is not visible from the player side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made neat and attractive, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a of the door frame 3, the plate unit 320 protruding forward is A base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 is provided with a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting effects to the player. The operation button interior decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) that decorates the outside is attached, and the outer diameter of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470) is adjusted so as to surround the outer periphery. An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 bulging in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450 ) is attached at the center thereof, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 is provided with a button lens 410 . A cylindrical button base 413 that includes a first button decorative portion 411a, a second button decorative portion 411b, and a button frame 412 and protrudes from the button lens 411 side toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. Therefore, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second It is possible to reduce visibility of the outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the screen unit 470) of the effect display device 460A, and the appearance of the operation buttons 410 can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decorative member 432 provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc., and improve the appearance of the player. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 allow the button lens 411 and the button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) to pass through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). Since it is possible to make the outer edge and inner side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) difficult to see, by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be 470) is relatively large, it can be satisfactorily hidden by the first button decoration part 411a and the like, so that while preventing deterioration in appearance, a large operation button with an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be used. 410 (button lens 411) can be implemented without problems. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous and the player's interest is strongly enhanced. The pachinko machine 1 can be made attractive and highly appealing.

Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) projecting in a cylindrical shape from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield the objects outside the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) so that they cannot be seen. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

In addition, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (semispherical shape) that bulges in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the portion near the outer periphery of the button lens 411 The surface is a plane formed by the front end side opening of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are aligned, that is, the advancing/retreating direction of the operation button 410). ), the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge are combined to form the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). ), the outer edge of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470), the back side, and the like can be made difficult to see through the gap between them, so that the above-described effects can be achieved reliably.

In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 increases. The side effect display device 460 (the second door frame side effect display device 460A) can be made larger or made easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device can entertain the player through the operation button 410.例文帳に追加460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the players more can be embodied.

Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is provided with design (decorativeness). can be made to face, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played.

In the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is made opaque. It is possible to reliably hide the inner side of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), etc. from being seen through the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

In addition, the button frame 412 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 covering the entire circumference with a predetermined width from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411 to the inside, and cooperates with the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b to allow the player to Since the gap between the body portion 413a of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the body portion 413a and the operation button interior decoration member 432 ( The gap between the screen unit 470 and the screen unit 470) can be increased, and the space for moving the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be easily secured. can be moved well.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the operation button 410 can be moved smoothly and easily because there is no directivity in the outer periphery compared to the polygonal shape. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is made large, it can be pressed without any problem, and the player can surely enjoy the player-participation type performance using the operation button 410, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the operation button 410 is made larger, when the player-participation-type production is executed in which the player operates the operation button 410, the operation button 410 can be easily operated without confirming the position of the operation button 410. Since the operation button 410 can be easily touched and pressed, the player can easily participate in the player-participation type performance using the operation button 410, which amuses the player and reduces interest. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest is manipulated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) In addition to being able to entertain the performance, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410 by means of a performance image or a light-emitting performance by the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A). , the decline in interest can be suppressed by making the player actively participate in the player-participation-type production and entertaining the player. In addition, by executing the performance within the operation button 410, it is possible to make some players think that something good will happen, thereby heightening the expectation for the game and suppressing the decrease in interest. can be done.

In addition, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 (the portion inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation buttons 410 of the pachinko machine 1 are clearly different from the operation buttons of the conventional pachinko machine, and the appeal to the players is high. It can be used as a pachinko machine 1, and at the same time, heightens the player's expectation for the performance using the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) in the operation button 410.例文帳に追加It is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

In the above-described embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decorative portion 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the button lens 411 without the first button decorative portion 411a may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation button 410 has the opaque button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 . A decorative portion may be formed around the entire periphery of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412 to hide the rear side.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the second Although the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) projecting cylindrically toward the second base unit 450) side is shown, it is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second effect on the door frame side are shown. At least one may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to partially surround the entire outer periphery of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape that follows the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape that does not follow the outer circumference of the button lens 411 . The button base 413 may have decorations (planar decorations such as pasting stickers or printing, or three-dimensional decorations such as reliefs) on the inner wall side. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be translucent or opaque. Also, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. Also, when the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable that at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side is subjected to light diffusion processing such as embossing, slits, prisms, and the like.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is shown. but not limited to, recessed backward from both left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a lower plate that is connected to each other behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) 322 may be used, and only the portion on the right outside of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is recessed rearward, and a part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) wraps around to the rear. You can let it be.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the shape of the portion (front lower decorative portion 326c) of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved rearward. Although an example of a recessed shape has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front surface may be recessed in the shape of a polygonal prism or a polyhedron.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. , ``equipped with a rotating body having a decoration on its surface,'' ``equipped with a decoration with a decoration and a movable device for moving the decoration,'' and ``a game Equipped with decorations that three-dimensionally mimic characters, items, logos, and scenes (diorama), etc., in line with the concept of the game machine", "Characters, items, logos, and predetermined patterns in line with the concept of the game machine" You may attach members, such as a unit or a panel provided with decorations, such as , by a seal, printing, etc., etc. Moreover, the member attached to the attachment space 326j (the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a) does not need to be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

In the above-described embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is provided with the frontwardly opening effect operation unit attachment portion 326a for attaching the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). However, the plate unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) that does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the plate unit cover. It should be noted that the front surface of such a plate unit cover should preferably be decorated with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. in line with the concept of the game machine by means of stickers, printing, attachment of decorative members, or the like. .

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is covered by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as a cover. Although an example is shown in which it is difficult to see from the front, the present invention is not limited to this. The entire plate 322 may be made invisible from the front.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are arranged in an arc shape partially in the circumferential direction. , and the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be formed in an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432 in the effect operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown. The second inner button decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including ovals) centering on the center.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decorative member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect are arranged on the rear side. Although the rear member such as the display device 460A is shown to be visible at all times, it is not limited to this. may be provided with a variable light transmitting means that allows the rear side to be visually recognized by satisfying the above. Here, as the variable light transmitting means, there are two types of means, such as a magic mirror, which makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side, and a liquid crystal film, which becomes transparent when the power is turned on and off. or become opaque so that the rear side can be visually recognized”, and the like. In addition, the front member and the rear member may be relatively movable, or relatively non-movable.

At least one of the front member and the rear member has a variable light transmission means, so that only the front member or both the front member and the rear member are visible in a normal state, The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. In a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged behind the rear member) that cannot be seen in a normal state can be seen. A member and a back member, or a front member, a back member and a member behind the back member can show overlapping decorations. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player using the front member and the rear member, making it difficult for the player to get tired of the game and entertaining the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

More specifically, for example, when the front member has a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the front member is decorated by darkening the rear side of the front member. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting part such as an LED, the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member are satisfied, and the rear member passes through the front member. The member can be visually recognized, and the player can see the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member are superimposed.

Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state. A player can be shown the surface and decoration of the Then, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light from the light emitting part such as the LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmission means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the member, the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character) can be seen by the player.

Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member have variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be seen by the player, When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by light emitted from a light-emitting portion such as an LED, the sufficient condition of the variable light transmission means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The decoration by the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light emitted from the LED or the like (or the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light emitted from the LED or the like). ), and the satisfaction conditions of the respective variable light transmission means in the front member and the rear member are satisfied, respectively, and the member behind the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character) through the front member and the rear member can be shown to the player. Accordingly, by appropriately selecting the portion to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and the player can enjoy various decorations.

In the above specific example, since the variable light transmission means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror when the rear side is darkened. A glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmission means is explained as something like a magic mirror. In addition, if a liquid crystal film or the like is used as the variable light transmission means, it can transmit light even in an opaque state (it has translucency). If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or decorated with light) by the light of the light emitting part such as an LED, it is possible to show the player a variety of effects such as light emitting effects and decorative effects. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. FIG. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69; FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around a VDP with built-in sound source in a liquid crystal display control section.

The pachinko machine 1 has, as its control configuration, as shown in FIG. , and a second control unit SCG for performing effects related to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards. , a payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931 are explained in this order. 2 The control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310, which controls the progress of the game, controls power-on processing executed when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that stores various control programs such as a main control program that controls game operations, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., and various A main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. , and a blackout monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors signs of blackout or momentary blackout of a predetermined voltage.

The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual (a unique code that exists only in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a includes a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in A hard random number circuit 1310an” is built in. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value to 32767 as the maximum value is preset), A predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured so that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value to a clock signal ( Based on a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator (to be described later), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When finished, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are respectively input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit 1310b, information based on detection signals from various detection switches input to various input terminals thereof is not reset by a main control system reset, which will be described later, so that various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND). A main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset terminal provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a main control output circuit without a reset function 1310cb having no reset terminal and not having a reset function. and consists of The main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by resetting the main control system, which will be described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs a signal based on it from its various output terminals.

As shown in FIG. 60, a first starting hole sensor 4002 that detects a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002, a second starting hole sensor 4004 that detects a game ball entering the second starting hole 2004, and general A detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 that detects a game ball that has entered the winning hole 2001 and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are sent to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. is entered in 60, a gate sensor 4003 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a count sensor 4005 for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from a magnetism detection sensor 4024 attached to detect fraudulent activity using a magnet is supplied to a panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5, and a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches. 1310ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starter solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or outputs a drive signal to the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the first special symbol display device 1403 via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the panel relay board 4161, and the function display unit 1400 , Second special symbol indicator 1405, first special reservation number indicator 1404, second special reservation number indicator 1406, normal symbol indicator 1402, state indicator 1401, and round indicator 1407 or output a drive signal do.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. By outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the board 951 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, the main control with the reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In this embodiment, non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first starting sensor 4002, the second starting sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005. For the general winning hole sensors 4020, 4020, contact type ON/OFF mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 4002, the second starting hole sensor 4004, and the Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also occurs frequently. For this reason, long-life proximity switches are used for the first starter sensor 4002, the second starter sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. FIG. Also, when a big winning game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and game balls enter frequently, so that the count sensor 4005 frequently detects the game balls. For this reason, the count sensor 4005 also uses a long-life proximity switch. On the other hand, in general winning openings 2001 and 2201 into which game balls do not enter frequently, detection by general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general prize winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 use mechanical switches that have a shorter life than the proximity switches.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs to the main control board 1310 a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, thereby inputting the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it sends a signal (main pay ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. It outputs to the circuit 1310ca, and outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function. , various commands are transmitted as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around a main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control serial I/O ports, etc., are connected to the bus 1310ah. (See FIG. 79). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, etc. (Fig. 79). The main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea to start transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits multiple commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting multiple commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. ) and BC0 (see FIG. 75). This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from power on. Is output from the payout control board 951, through the main control input circuit 1310b, is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU1310a, and is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU1310a (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
Out of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc. includes, as shown in FIG. and an error LED indicator 860b for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, controls the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on the detection signal output by being operated. .) outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the memory.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls the payout of game media that is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on. A payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor containing various control programs including a payout control program that controls operations, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., and detection from various detection switches related to payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting drive signals to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. 952 d and a CR unit input/output circuit 952 e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 . The payout control MPU 952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). It also has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program serially converts various information (game information) on the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout to the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. to receive serial data. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the game ball payout operation, and operates the operation switch 954 as an error cancellation unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the first error cancellation command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence commands and error cancellation navigation commands are sent as serial data to the payer. As a signal, serial data is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, this payout control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main processing is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is executed and payout control is started, the payout When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

In addition, this payout control program outputs a door frame open command (first door open command) when a detection signal (door frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame open switch 618. , when a detection signal (body frame open detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame open switch 619, a body frame open command (first body frame open command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When the body frame open switch 619 receives a detection signal (body frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation, it outputs a body frame closing command (first body frame closing command).

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and various signals are input to its various input terminals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like. A payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb having no reset terminal and having no reset function. and consists of The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on it from its various output terminals.

A ball run-out detection sensor 827 for detecting the running out of game balls in the supply passage of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting game balls released from payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. A detection signal from a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is inputted to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through a payout control input circuit 952b. It should be noted that the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will simply be referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification for the sake of the explanation below.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch 618 for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch 619 for detecting opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are applied to the payout control input circuit 952b. input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

Further, a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in a serial data format at the input terminal of the serial input port, or receives an operation signal (detection command) of the operation switch 954. signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a payout control signal with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. Various commands are transmitted from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310 as serial data.
When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951 to that effect. This signal (primary payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control input circuit 952b.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, or outputs the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED indicator By outputting the drive signal for displaying on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is outputted from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b.

The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board with the payout control board 951), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it informs that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the dispensing device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is "ball caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotator and the game ball engage near the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult to rotate the payout rotator. ), and when the number "3" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "payout detection sensor error" is occurring), and when the number "5" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit). is displayed, and when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored). game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (electrical connection at any point from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6 is disconnected), and when the number "9" is displayed, it is "in stock (with prize ball stock (not paid out))" (specifically, game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached the predetermined number of balls).

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually put out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. , the number of game balls actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

In addition, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) regarding the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). ), the number of game balls and various information (game information, contents of errors related to the payout operation of game balls, or the fact that there was an error) are communicated to the hall computer installed in the hall computer.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are in a state of being electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers. It is designed to prevent the computer from malfunctioning or breaking down, and the main control board 1310 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls payout etc. It is designed not to malfunction or break down due to application of abnormal voltage. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending button 328 and a prepaid card return requesting signal from the return button 329 are first sent to the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and then the game ball lending device connection terminal plate. 869 to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input/output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending/returning display unit 330. This signal is output to the lending device connection terminal plate 869 , the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the frequency display plate 365 , and this signal is input to the ball lending/returning display section 330 . In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section 330 receives the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

In addition, the power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 has a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. there is Due to this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is transmitted through the payout control input circuit 952b to the payout control MPU 952a. It is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 952a judges it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb.

[7-2-2. Exchanging various signals with the connection terminal board for rental equipment such as game balls]
Here, exchange of various signals between the payout control section 952 and the CR unit 6 and exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, but also connects the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365. (To be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. , the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 and the degree display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the board between the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 951, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 is electrically connected to the substrate, and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness). AC 24 V, which will be described later, is supplied from the power supply board 931 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 . The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V by a built-in voltage generating circuit (not shown), and generates the voltage together with the ground LG. , to the payout control board 951 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 , and to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . .

A ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, is mounted on the part surface of the frequency display plate 365 at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch is mounted at a position corresponding to the returning button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. A return button 329 is mounted, and a ball rental/return display section 330 as a segment display is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining rental display section 363 of the rental ball unit 360 .

The ball lending button 328 and return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via a ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 . When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (turned ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device. Input is made to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869 .

The ball lending/returning display unit 330 is composed of three segment displays arranged in a row, and the segment displays of the three digits are sequentially driven one by one by a so-called dynamic lighting method. The lighting of the digit segment indicators is controlled. With such lighting control, the ball lending/returning display section 330 displays the balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error in the CR unit 6 . The ball rental/return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a single-digit segment display out of three-digit segment displays, and the designated single-digit segment display. segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by lighting the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal When input through the plate 880, the 1-digit segment displays are sequentially illuminated according to the input digit signals DG0-DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A-SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment displays are displayed. The content of the luminescence of the vessel can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display portion 363 .

A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the degree display plate 365 adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section 330 . A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365 d via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880 . A predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lendable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via a CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 with a built-in voltage creation circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are valid and the ball lending state is possible controls the logic of the ball lendable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending/returning display unit 330 through current limiting resistors mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 .

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is sent from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rental balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which is equivalent to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, outputs EXS, which is a signal for notifying the start or end of one payout operation, to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. to output to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board for connecting the game ball lending device PRDY, which is a signal to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is possible or not possible. 869 to the CR unit 6. For example, if the hall clerk or the like has set the CR unit 6 in advance so that game balls worth 200 yen are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. is performed twice in a row, and when 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen will be paid out, and a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, when the return button 329 is pressed, the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount after subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328 .

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power board 931 includes a power switch 934 that can electrically connect or disconnect 24 volts AC (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and a power control unit 935 that generates various power sources. , and a shooting control section 953 that performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 682 of the ball shooting device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power supply controller]
The power control unit 935 operates a power switch 934 to operate a synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies 24 volts AC (24V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various direct currents for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. and a power generation circuit 935d for generating power.

[7-3-2. Launch control section]
A firing control section 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The shooting control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the intensity (shooting intensity) at which the game ball is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the launch (shooting) of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. , and are inputted via the handle relay terminal board 315 . In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 953a, a CR connection signal is input via the payout control board 951 to notify that effect. .

The shooting control circuit 953a adjusts the driving current for launching (shooting) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and controls the output to the shooting solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 through the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, Control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball sending member to the batted ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control section SCG performs performance control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 with respect to the first control section MCG. 19, a performance display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, a peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data), a game board side performance display device 1600 and a door. While performing drawing control of the frame side effect display device 460, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 performing sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, calendar information specifying the date and time A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information specifying seconds, and the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are controlled by rotating the knob. and a volume adjustment volume 1510a that is adjusted by operation.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control, controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b for storing various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and control performance operations, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, Various information that continues across the peripheral control unit steady-state processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and light emission modes such as various LEDs and information for managing the schedule data that defines the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and various information that continues over the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state and special A peripheral control SRAM 1511d for storing information for managing effect flags, etc.) and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally ".) and are provided.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can retain the stored contents only for a period of time when power is immediately restored after an instantaneous power failure occurs. ), the peripheral control SRAM 1511d loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"). As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. By providing an SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. It loses its contents as it can no longer be held.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decoration board of the game board 5 is controlled based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the motor drive board serial Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, and for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 Data is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Peripheral control output of door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board in 3 from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 .

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Also, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the effect operation unit 400 and a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, and the serialized performance operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the serial I/O port for detecting the performance operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 . Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, this serialized movable object detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit through the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"). It is diagnosed whether or not

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a comprises a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I/O controllers. /O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads/writes various data from/to the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah. Various data are read from and written to the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h. Various data are read and written via an internal bus 1511ah, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and an external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d. /O port 1511ag and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. to DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a peripheral control various serial I/O port 1511ae built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af. , peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, to transfer data independently. In addition, while reading and writing the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and It reads and writes from/to an input/output device such as a peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and a peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Between input/output devices such as O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, In order to transfer data independently, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h. Serial I/O port 1511ae, WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices are connected via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. read and write.

A peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls an internal bus 1511ah, a peripheral bus 1511ai, and an external bus 1511h to control a central processing unit of a peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control RAM 1511c. Storage devices such as SRAM 1511d, input/output devices such as peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converters 1511ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae are serial I/O port for lamp drive board, serial I/O port for motor drive board, serial I/O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED , a serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for obtaining the performance operation unit information.

A peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. It has become. In other words, if the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer expires) to the WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, it will be reset. will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as the game board side motor drive latch signal and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. and outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and serves as a decision notice lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big win game state has been decided. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag are directly connected electrically, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag can be shortened. Therefore, noise countermeasures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. The lighting control of the LED is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, and the other LEDs except for this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume control volume 1510a, and its resistance value is varied by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted to a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. FIG. In this manner, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying pachinko machine 1 clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts on the pachinko machine 1, and contents related to game effects are announced. (For example, to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and from mute to maximum volume. can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above.
As a result, for example, even if the hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. that flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound becomes smaller, when the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or when the player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be emitted. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 can be made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, or the game state can shift to an advantageous game state for the player. You can also notify them of high prices.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects, etc., and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The schedule data for screen generation is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is defined. It is The schedule data for generating the light emission mode is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the VDP built-in sound source 1512a. and a track number for indicating in which track among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source the sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Some of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed. Some are read and executed. Various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are also read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and are stored in various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. In some cases, what is copied in is read out.

In addition, in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, a program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is stored. A brightness correction program is included. This luminance correction program corrects the decrease in luminance due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is used based on the correction information. to correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range of 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set. Therefore, when six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the luminance When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of 80% obtained by adding 5% which is the acquired correction information to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, and the effect display device on the game board side is displayed. When lighting the backlight of 1600, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is obtained by adding 10%, which is the acquired correction information, to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A managed work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup managed work area 1511ca, and a backup area stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing copies of various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and copies of various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. various control data copy areas 1511ce for dedicated storage; backup unmanaged work areas 1511cf for dedicated storage of various types of information updated by execution of various control programs that are not backed up; is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), a value of 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf to clear it to zero. For the work area 1511ca to be managed, the first backup area 1511cb, and the second backup area 1511cc, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect. and to indicate the game state (for example, to indicate the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on). Sometimes cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is performance information (1fr ) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs, is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) which is exclusively stored as an object. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511cb to a backup second area 1511 cc, which will be described later, are of the same storage area as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. "(1fr)" is, as will be described later, when the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a A V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to indicate that it is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" are respectively appended (effect information (1fr) and effect Backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning). As will be described later, "(1 ms)" means that the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. and "Bank4" (effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms), which will be described later, are also used in the same sense).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is set, and in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED, lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs, etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 are stored. This is a storage area in which door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting signals is set. In the received command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area where various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set. is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to commands received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set

Bank 0 (1 ms) includes frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, presentation operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. Door-side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, which is a storage area to be set, a drive signal for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is stored. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. This is a storage area in which various types of information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies are set. Rotation (direction of rotation) of the dial operation unit 401 and operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, dial created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400) Rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set, and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak has an effect display drive board 4450 on its periphery. Drawing data is received from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the control board 1510, and if the received drawing data is determined to be abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 output based on the LOCKN signal described later to notify that fact. This is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained by acquiring the frequency of troubles and the state of occurrence of troubles between connections with the effect display drive board 4450 are set.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in Bank 0 (1 fr), the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf in Bank 0 (1 ms). and the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa when the peripheral controller steady-state processing described later is executed. , when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady-state Each time the process is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady process, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame-decoration driving amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. be. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in this peripheral control unit steady process, When the previous peripheral controller steady-state processing was executed, the process proceeds based on the door-side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame-decoration driving amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It's becoming

In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later is executed, the door When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is stored in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing was executed. Based on this, the process proceeds.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing was executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It's like

Next, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc dedicated to storing copies of performance information, which are various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. Effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Effect information (1 ms), which is copied to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the normally used storage area. , as effect backup information (1 ms), is sent to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Copied quickly. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cb, Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) are set as one pair, and a total of two pairs are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, It is copied to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr) match. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) match.

In the backup second area 1511cc, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the first backup area 1511cb has Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing pages, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of 2 pairs, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as performance backup information (1fr) by the peripheral control unit every 1 frame. Each time a routine process is executed, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, and the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the normally used storage area. is backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed as effect backup information (1ms). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac executes high-speed copying by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in common. In other words, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and the performance information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (common program execution).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs; A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. It should be noted that the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state command from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89) when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure). indicates the start of the RAM clearing effect and the game state (for example, when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, it instructs the start of the effect. ), it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the first backup area 1511cb, and the second backup area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is designed to be By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state) etc.), on the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The backup management target work area 1511da includes performance information (SRAM), which is various information that continues over the course of the day (for example, information for managing the history of the occurrence of a big hit game state and for managing a special performance flag). information, etc.) to be backed up. Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly explained. As described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a first backup area 1511db to a second backup area 1511dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. "(SRAM)" is for backing up various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. , and “Bank 4” (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM), which will be described later, are also used with the same meaning).

Next, a backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc dedicated to storing a copy of performance information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc are managed as one page, with two banks forming one pair. Effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Then, it is copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the first backup area 1511db, a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

In the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are paired, and this pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first backup area 1511db is an area for managing a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page. 1511dc is an area for managing a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. As described above, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as "internal sound source"), and the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are drawn. Sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a for control, various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 In addition, various kinds of music, sound effects, etc. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, an audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is sent to the effect display drive board 4450 which is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the plate unit 320. A differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, into a positive signal and a negative signal. Then, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is a forced switching circuit 1512f that is connected so as to transmit the signal, and is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input; It has The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores sprite data used for displaying screens and images, which will be described later, such as ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and for displaying an operation menu background image, which will be described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display object image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale to be described later, volume adjustment icon to be described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, body frame back image data used for displaying the body frame back image that allows the position of each part on the back of the body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the player, display of the service mode screen Service mode screen image data used for , break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the rest timer setting screen, and during rest screen image data used for displaying the during rest screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestive display object image data used to display the suggestive display object for prompting the user to operate the depressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400. FIG.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to commands from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, when a V blank signal (to be described later) is input, the first screen data is extracted according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The following screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. In this manner, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the screen data is output one by one from the first screen data to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator.

Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a copies the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted and set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting various control data from the control data copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator, when the V blank signal is input, the leading data is extracted according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and receives the V blank signal. Each time, the sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one from the top sound command data.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in tone generator, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source controls the game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. The side character data and the top dish side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated. A VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM") for The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and outputs the drawing data for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is sent from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, while the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame periphery. A terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display stored in the plate unit 320 by being arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450 . As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short due to being attached to the game board 5 respectively, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 can The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because the control board 1510 outputs to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 . On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of wiring required for the path of CH1 is much longer than that of the channel CH1, it is extremely susceptible to noise. For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than channel CH1, THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication system called "Registered Trademark", it is a mechanism that is less susceptible to noise.

Channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), whereas channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is serialized by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 4610d and stored in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 . The serialized various signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460 .

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Based on this input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data for one screen to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460. frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side is output. Image data for the performance display device 460 is sent from the channel CH2 to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means that the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is stored in the built-in VRAM. It is the data for generating above.

In addition, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, it outputs a V blank signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to notify that it is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a executes peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to the input of this V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V-blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . Also, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a are mounted.

Note that the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" is to hold drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). , drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 .

In addition, when the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source displays the music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. subvolume values to be included. Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 and shifting to a later-described setting mode.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, it is amplified up to the master volume value which is the sound volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, serializes the amplified effect sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value, so that it flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effect, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used and the sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used By synthesizing the set volume adjustment volume 1510a with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob, the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the volume actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. is amplified to the master volume value, and this amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. Synthesizing the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, The volume of this synthesized notification sound is amplified to a master volume value that is the volume actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. .

Here, when the performance sound is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of playing the notification sound to notify the pachinko hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or of an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 is simple. First, forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated to mute, the sound data of the track in which this sound effect is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, and the notification The sound data of the track in which the sound is embedded and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the informational sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the informational sound are actually It amplifies to the master volume value which becomes the sound volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, serializes the amplified effect sound and notification sound, and outputs them as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, the sounds that actually flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are only the notification sounds with the maximum volume. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound progresses according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In this embodiment, the notification sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 90 seconds). The volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data for the production is set again as the sub-volume value by the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a (at this time, the dial of the effect operation unit 400 When the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is operated to shift to the setting mode and adjust, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 flowing.

In this way, when the performance sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound is played to notify the pachinko hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the effect sound is muted and the informational sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the muted effect sound progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation, so that the predetermined period of time has elapsed. When the sound stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start playing again from the point at which the information sound started to flow, but continues according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed since the information sound started to flow. It starts to flow again from where it progressed.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores, as shown in FIG. are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, effect sound, notification sound, notification sound, etc. are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
The audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with the built-in sound source, and converts the right audio data into positive and negative signals as differential serial data to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and frame peripheral relay. It is transmitted to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is output to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. , the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 , and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 . As a result, music, sound effects, and the like are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in accordance with various presentations.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as differential serial data between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame-decorating drive amplifier board 194. For example, the positive signal of the left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are combined by the frame-decorating drive amplifier board 194 into one left-side audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Channel CH2 uses a parallel interface as described above. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , the green video signal, and the blue video signal each consist of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a.

Three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d transmits three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronizing signal, and a vertical synchronizing signal. and a clock signal, and serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. with only a differential 1-pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 , the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 , and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 .

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for (the first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is transferred from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and then the door. Since it is output (sent) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (the first 2 path) is much longer than the wiring length required for the first path, it is very susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported to be freely opened and closed with respect to the body frame 4 shown in FIG. For example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 provided in the door frame 3, on the main body frame 4 side It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closing side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 can guide the game balls. A full-tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding paid-out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the tank becomes full is arranged.
Further, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. In this way, various wirings for electrically connecting various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are routed near the dispensing device 830, the full-tank branch unit 770, the power supply substrate 931, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by the driving of the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by the electrostatic discharge caused by the game ball and the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The environment is subject to noise, etc.

For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than channel CH1, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is provided by Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. By adopting a differential system communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the system is less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as a wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the transmitter and the receiver. is a twisted pair cable, not just parallel wires. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case in which parallel lines are used as a differential one-pair cable for electrically connecting a transmitter and a receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source that the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is much longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, THine Electronics Even with a mechanism that is less susceptible to noise by adopting differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Co., Ltd., only with such a hardware configuration, electrostatic discharge of game balls When the serial data on the parallel lines are affected by noise, noise intruding into the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the performance display is stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 in the affected state. , the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as being different from normal and disturbed data, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it appears like a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem that an image is displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what the image is at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is used for the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator, which has a much longer wire length for sending the drawing data than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. In the performance transmitter IC 1512d, THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential method communication is adopted to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration Therefore, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that enters the wiring is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data is affected by the twisted pair cable due to noise caused by electrostatic discharge of game balls, noise intruding into the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC 0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, the image generated by the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image such as a sandstorm that makes it impossible to recognize what kind of image it is. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play due to the influence of the noise.

In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which will be described later, are provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. , that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally constructed, but are separately assembled and attached to the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, maintenance of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be reduced by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and various wirings are removed. However, if the defect occurring in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3' is attached to the body frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 is replaced. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the side of the body frame 4 to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the side of the body frame 4, various boards provided on the side of the body frame 4 and various wirings provided on the side of the door frame 3' can be connected. and the substrate can be electrically connected.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 adopts differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to such a hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that enters the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) was employed as the differential one-pair cable to electrically connect between the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the substrates between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the effect display drive The substrates 4450 and 4450 are electrically connected to each other by twisted pair cables, while power supply wiring and wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the differential serial data transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, The power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the above-described video transmission wiring patterns are formed apart from the power supply wiring patterns and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined distance. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal boards such as the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, video transmission terminals formed on these multiple relay terminal boards are provided. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal that transmits serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, and the output level of the signal is lowered. occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, between the substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the substrates between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the substrates of the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The terminal plate 882 and the production display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, while the power supply wiring and other wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. However, one wire of the twisted pair cable is red and the other wire is gray, and of the harness, the wire that supplies power is red and the other multiple wires are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is designed to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 that is housed. LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is supplied to the forced switching circuit 1512f in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e and input. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into differential serial signals (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or for the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state for a customer to perform a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During this period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which is provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and will be described later. , that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is transmitted as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 . The forced switching circuit 1512f, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, connects the circuits so as to transmit these two signals. When the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is configured so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It is As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e When the two differential signals of the plus signal and the minus signal are not input, the door frame side effect transmitter is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the start screen on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and performs a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510).

When a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 serializes various and a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

Door frame side presentation receiver IC SDIC0 receives the drawing data from VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, and if it judges that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it transmits a LOCKN signal (to be described later) to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 to convey that fact. , and output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 . This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 . Peripheral control MPU 1511a controls VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to generate an image for notifying that a predetermined condition is established based on the input LOCKN signal, and outputs the image to game board side effect display device 1600. is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to notify.

Further, when the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, it outputs a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 . As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input. While it can be determined that there is no problem with the performance display drive board 4450 housed in 320, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 has a problem, and a notification image (for example, "There is a problem with the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk.") is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and a notification sound (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device ) is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and the notification sound is played from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification can be made by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 . At this time, all the various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a incorporates a RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") that holds calendar information and time information. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without receiving any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and time information by power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. Based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be unfolded. As such effects, for example, on December 25th, a screen of a Christmas tree or reindeer will be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, a New Year's countdown will be displayed. The screen to be executed is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the like. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range of 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and brightness adjustment information for the currently set game. The brightness of the LEDs that are the backlights of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are included.

In addition to the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date and hour, minute, and second first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs ON/OFF control of the backlight or ON only when the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are of the cold cathode tube type. It is designed to

Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set on the production line of the game machine manufacturer. In order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600 on the production line, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

In this way, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information and input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. , the information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot game state with a low probability or a high probability) can be stored.

In addition, depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the backlight luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the date of manufacture. , sometimes too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation part 401 or the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration by the game board side production display device 1600 is being performed in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be set as desired. brightness can be adjusted. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LEDs stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described luminance correction program, so that if the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight, the game board side effect This corrects the decrease in luminance that accompanies aging of the display device 1600 . Peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, and uses calendar information and time to specify the year, month, and day. Acquire time information specifying minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, and adjust the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. Luminance setting information including luminance adjustment information for playing and the currently set luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, based on the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on and the current date and time, if six months have already passed since the time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, Acquire the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is lit, this 75% Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted so that the brightness is 80%, which is the correction information acquired by adding 5%. and lights up, and if 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the acquired correction information of 10% is added to this 75% to obtain 85%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on so as to achieve the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. and the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume control volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc., which are output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the sound volume control volume 1510a is adapted to vary the resistance value by rotating the knob portion thereof, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into values in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. FIG.

In this manner, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, and a game effect (For example, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is made more powerful, or the possibility of shifting to an advantageous game state for the player is announced. etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the sound is muted. to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control section 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above. As a result, for example, even if the hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. that flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound becomes smaller, when the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or when the player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be emitted. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 and the By operating the push operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to a setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation part 401 or the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration by the game board side production display device 1600 is being performed in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the presentation operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased. there is This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music and sound effects is incorporated, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and notification sound described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 or pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is used. and adjusting the volume of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of . Since the volume control volume 1510 a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 , the body frame 4 must always be left open from the outer frame 2 . Then, the person who can rotate the knob of the volume control volume 1510a is the store clerk in the hall. However, with the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, the player may find the music and sound effects to be too soft and difficult to hear, and the player may feel loud and the music and sound effects loud. Therefore, within a predetermined period of time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed in a customer waiting state. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the effect is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the presentation operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. The dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a non-playing state for a predetermined period of time and the customer waits for customers, the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , the volume adjusted by the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is set to the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. As a result, when a player who has played a game while sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the adjusted sound volume is too small to hear the music and sound effects, the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. A player who plays a game can operate the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and the player sat in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and played a game. If the player who has been playing the game feels that the adjusted volume is loud and the music and sound effects are loud, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game can turn the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

[8. power supply system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal plates are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power board 931, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

The power board 931 includes a power control section 935 and a firing control section 953, as shown in FIG. The power control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from the 24 volts AC (24V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. A section 953 is a circuit for driving and controlling the shooting solenoid 682 of the ball shooting device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 931, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor improvement circuit 935b. The power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to generate DC +37V (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied +37V ripple, smoothes the +37V, and supplies it to the firing control circuit 953a and the power generating circuit 935d of the firing control section 953, respectively.

Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built into the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (withdrawal control built-in RAM).

A shooting control circuit 953a of the shooting control unit 953 uses the +37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power source, and shoots the game ball at a launch strength (launch strength) that matches the rotational position of the handle 302. While adjusting the drive current for hitting (shooting) toward the ball and controlling the output to the shooting solenoid 682, the ball of the ball feeding unit 250 is output by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 A feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and performs control for feeding the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the shot ball launching device 650 side.

The power source generation circuit 935d converts the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c to +5V DC (+5V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), +12V DC (+12V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") is generated and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, respectively. A power system to which +5V is applied and supplied is a +5V power line, a power system to which +12V is applied and supplied is a +12V power line, and a power system to which +24V is applied and supplied is a +24V power line.

The +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. +5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM through the diode PD0. ing. +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. This +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from +12V from the payout control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control filter circuit 1310h and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM through the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951, and the payout The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951 is also electrically connected. In other words, the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, which is forward due to the diode PD0, and the capacitor BC1. The positive terminal is designed to allow current to flow toward it. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is connected to +5V by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is returned to the payout control board 951 and then again from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a because it is blocked by the diode PD0, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. , and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 on the main control board 1310 . In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g causes current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. A current flows in the direction of Thus, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5V and charged by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g can create +5V. When it is exhausted, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the current is blocked by MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the memory contents are retained. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline about the voltage supplied to each control board etc. is demonstrated, Then, the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board are demonstrated.

The three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. Two voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 . The three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power source creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, They are supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 respectively.

The three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are applied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 4180a, respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decoration boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for the board 5 .

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a +3.3V generating circuit 1510b that generates DC 3.3V (DC+3.3V, hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") from +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG. In addition, +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power source 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG.

On the other hand, the three voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76(b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 has a +9V generating circuit 194a that generates DC +9V (DC+9V, hereinafter referred to as "+9V") from +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. +9V generated by the +9V generating circuit 194a and +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 3 and the like.

In addition, +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper tray side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x generates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3 V generated by the upper tray liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. and the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage generated by the upper tray side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450 y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460 .

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. This payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952, for example. +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 is a circuit for outputting a signal that conveys the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc., to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). is. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by ascertaining the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. from signals output from the external communication circuit 784a. In addition, +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used at all in the payout control board 951 .

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, etc., in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the +5V power line is a power supply system to which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied. In this embodiment, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Therefore, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the +5V power supply of the main control board 1310 The +5V power supply line created by the creating circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310, either.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V produced by the +5V production circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to the main control MPU 1310a, for example. +12V from the payout control board 951, for example, is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b and the like, +24V from the payout control board 951, for example, is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these +12V and +24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 1310a. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a through the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. Also, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310 . 76(b), the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, they are input to the decoration substrates of the door frames and the like via the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 .

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltage applied to each of the +12V power line and the +24V power line by monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line. Signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure can be detected more accurately than when monitoring the voltage applied to the power supply.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a diagram. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, followed by the power supply created by the main control board 1310, the main control system reset, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, the power failure monitoring circuit, the main control MPU Various input/output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and the interface circuit for communication between the peripheral control boards 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main control MPU 1310a shown in FIGS. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, peripheral circuits include a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (24 megahertz (MHz )).

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 has its 1st terminal applied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, its 2nd terminal connected to the ground (GND), and noise components removed from its 3rd terminal. +5V is output. The +5V applied to the No. 1 terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is grounded (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. are smoothed.

The +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is supplied with the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. It is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after generation.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC3, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded (GND).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is connected to the ground (GND). is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 through the diode MD0. is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. When the circuit 1310g cannot generate +5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by the diode MD0, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and includes a delay circuit. The delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC5, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacity of this capacitor MC5. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time when +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25 V).

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca with is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC7 grounded to the ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Also, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, this smoothed +5 V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically unconnected to the outside. state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b receives detection from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to the signal, it is a circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the power on. It is operated to clear the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, and an error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the RAM clear function has passed, that is, after the predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). and a function to perform Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 951 has, when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on, the main control It is judged as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and processing for clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed.

The main control board 1310 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 951 when the operation switch 954 is not operated. becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be given later).

The transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on is, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 through the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR0 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is transmitted. The line is pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistor MR2. The main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW and is input, while the operation switch 954 is operated. When it is on, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI and is input.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954. FIG.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning off the transistor MTR0 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. When the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning on the transistor MTR0 and switching the switch. The circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. I judge.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input through the payout control board 951 . That is, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the control reference voltage is higher than +5V A voltage of +12V is used to improve signal reliability. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor like the operation signal from the operation switch 954 .

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and +12 V and +24 V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, and when a power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, a power failure warning signal is sent as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 1310a and a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU 952 a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510 . Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of +24 V power failure or momentary power failure, +12 V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring, and the output of a power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly comprises a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. +5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in this embodiment) that serves as a comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded (GND).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B) , +12V are used to compare the monitor voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the sixth terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21, one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is connected to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. +24V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +24V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitor voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied, is a resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the other end of the capacitor MC23 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V applied to the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +24V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC23. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are such that when +24V is interrupted or instantaneously interrupted, the voltage starts to drop from +24V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V). The monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when the voltage is applied.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC24, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. +12V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +12V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitor voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 78, the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitor voltage V2 is applied, is a resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and the other end of the capacitor MC25 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +12V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are such that, when +12V power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from +12V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 10.47V). The monitor voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when the reference voltage Vref is applied.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A. A preset D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor MC24 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter as described above.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal that has been pulled down to the side and has a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power failure warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and stores this stored value. (logic) is output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal whose logic is LOW at the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, it releases the latched state and resets the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal). (a logic signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a logic HI signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state by inputting a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the logic of the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is LOW. is input, the state of outputting a signal with logic HI from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is maintained (at this time, the signal output from 1Q with the logic inverted is negative logic maintains the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a D input terminal 1D terminal and a clock input terminal 1CK terminal that are both grounded (GND). The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is stored and is not output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors momentary power failure, is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC22, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the voltage is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal. This power failure clear signal is designed to be stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed after starting to be output in the main control side power-on processing (to be described later) performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with the logic being LOW. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to set a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state with the logic LOW at the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs to the payout control board 951 as a payout power outage warning signal, and outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

The main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the amplifier MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR20. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes LOW in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 951 as the payout power outage warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the wiring is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). In addition, when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 in the payout control board 951 In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage is a switching circuit of the preceding stage, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34 and the transistor MTR22 of the succeeding stage is a switching circuit of the latter stage, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 .

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor in the previous stage is pulled down. MTR21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR21. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 951 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21. The input turns ON the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 through the wiring (harness). A payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951 .

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as the peripheral power failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b and connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 through the resistor MR35. is electrically connected to The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control section 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. , one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR23. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side to turn on the transistor MTR23. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. is input to the peripheral control board 1510 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness). 1510.

In this way, a main control input circuit 1310b that transmits a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a blackout warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs a signal output from a peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal and a main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function each have one transistor. While the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is issued to the payout control board 951. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs a power failure warning signal has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage. The logic is the inversion of the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is connected via wiring (harness) to the payout control board. In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are located between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board, whereas the power failure warning signal logic (ON / OFF signal) using +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, A power failure warning is performed by the power failure warning signal logic (ON/OFF signal) using +12V, which is a voltage higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, use the serial data to be transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data transmission signal. A main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the circuit 1310cb without reset function from the main control output circuit 1310cb to the payout control board 951, and the serial data to be transmitted from the TXB terminal to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310 cb without reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310 cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. respectively entered or equal.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, a main payment ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function for the starting solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. and output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the starting port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. For the device, a drive signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various displays, and various information (game information) related to the game is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, and various information (game information) related to the game is output to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, an interface circuit for communication between main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress this, +12V, which is higher than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is used for transmission, thereby increasing its reliability.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly comprises a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. It is On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes, as a communication interface circuit, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). It is composed mainly of

+12 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 through the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, for example, due to a power failure or momentary power failure, when the power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 +12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 .

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, the capacitance is 470 μF) shown in FIG. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41aea by the unit 1310aec and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main peripheral serial data.

The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, +12V, which is higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is used for transmission, thereby increasing its reliability.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, +12 V is charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 so that it is applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it. When it is transmitted from the shift register 1310aea as main cycle serial data, it is possible to transmit a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI by +12V from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a is 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data of up to 10 packets are stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Also, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 on the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). A resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

A TXB terminal for outputting a main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51 and also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND).

A circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND). As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main-peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and also turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON.

+5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6), which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (4th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal (5th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5V side by AR11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler AIC10, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is transmitted as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. is input to the input terminal of

As a result, as described above, when the +5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or momentary power failure, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as +5V. When a power outage or momentary power failure occurs, +5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a. The transmission of the data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main-circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed. The peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the data without missing or missing data.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50 to turn on the transistor MTR50, thereby turning on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. . Thus, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of

Thus, in this embodiment, a +5V power line to which +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is applied, and a +12V power line to which +12V, which is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50, is applied. , measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power supply line, the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h which is the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, it is possible to maintain the state in which the control reference voltage is applied. +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied as a voltage for communication to the anode terminal of diode MD50 and the cathode terminal of diode MD50. and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage is applied from the +12V power supply line through the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained by applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply. there is As a result, the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from being interrupted, and the command can be prevented from being omitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the command from being missed immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during an instantaneous power failure.

In addition, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all used as main peripheral serial data, and are composed of the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb are reset so that all of them function as interface circuits as main peripheral serial data. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the non-functioning main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt or drop multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. can be received without fail.

[10. Circuit of Payout Control Board]
Next, the circuit etc. of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. FIG. FIG. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the payout control unit, etc., FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing the payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram continuing from FIG. 81, and FIG. 83 is a payout motor drive. FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input/output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Dispensing Control Filter Circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a is mainly composed of a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The 1st terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND). The +5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to the ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is further smoothed by removing ripples. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc., which will be described later. . It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is supplied with the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. It is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded (GND).

Moreover, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end is grounded (GND) and the capacitor PC4 which is grounded. is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and through the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, when the +5V generated by the power source generation circuit 935d of the power source substrate 931 shown in FIG. Since it is supplied to the payout control board 951 as, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The memory contents are held by applying the VBB voltage. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of Payout Control Unit]
The payout control unit 952 includes a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, and peripheral circuits as shown in FIG. It mainly consists of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment). Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, payout control input circuit, payout motor drive circuit, CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Dispensing control system reset]
+5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and incorporates a delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the capacitance of this capacitor PC5 sets the delay time of the delay circuit. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time when +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open-collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of PC6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output with reset function. While input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function The attached payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. One end of the power terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor PC7, and the +5 V input to the power terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Also, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing Control Crystal Oscillator]
+5V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0. The payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5V to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives payout power failure notice signals from the door frame open switch 618, the body frame open switch 619, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. circuit, handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input will be explained, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input, the circuit to which the output power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, A circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. In addition, the full tank detection sensor 279 and various detection switches such as the ball out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit where the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame open switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 3 is closed by the body frame 4, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR20 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. , and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR21, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

Further, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR22 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR20 and a capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed with the body frame 4, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit composed of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit composed of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit composed of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. It is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from 618 .

When the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. be. Further, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . Further, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310 .

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is off, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20. , the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is raised to +5V, thereby turning the transistor PTR21 ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. FIG. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is raised to +5V, thereby turning the transistor PTR22 ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned ON, so that the door frame open signal whose logic is HI is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door open information output signal which is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. , the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

[10-2-3(b). Circuit where the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The No. 2 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is grounded (GND), while the No. 1 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR23 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

The first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22, and the wiring (harness) shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 . When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR24, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR28 and a capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame open switch 619 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts forming the body frame open switch 619 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit made up of resistors PR29, PR30 and transistor PTR23 and a circuit made up of resistors PR31, PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from body frame open switch 619. FIG.

When the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR23 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer edge frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . In addition, when the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310 .

On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer edge frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated. It is input to the external terminal board 784 . When the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated by the main control board. 1310.

In this way, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is turned ON to input the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI to the external terminal plate 784. A main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is turned off to turn off the logic. is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

In this embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 69, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 receives the main frame door opening signal. Although it cannot be determined whether the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 based on the door frame 3 and / or It is possible for the player to determine that the body frame 4 is open, which does not occur during a normal game, and that an outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since the outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, the hall computer outputs the door frame door open information output signal based on the outer end frame door open information output signal. 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are opened. It can be determined that a state that does not occur during a normal game has occurred.

In this embodiment, as described above, the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are normally closed switches. Even if the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, and the main body frame open switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. By adopting normally closed switches for the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 in this manner, it is possible to output the main frame door open signal to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a short circuit, and A frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

If the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (normally open (NO)) switches (door frame open switch 618' and body frame open switch 619'), , the door frame open switch 618' is turned ON (conducting) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and turned OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4. . The body frame open switch 619 ′ is turned on (conducting) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2 and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 . Then, even if the door frame open switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 3 will be in a state of being released from the body frame 4. Even if the frame opening switch 619' is broken and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. FIG. In this way, even if normally open switches are employed for the door frame open switch 618' and the body frame open switch 619', the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of disconnection. An outer end frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

[10-2-3(c). Circuit to which output power failure warning signal from power failure monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line for transmitting a power outage warning signal from a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 has one end electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR40 electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor PR40. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR40 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR40 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as the payout power failure warning signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR41, PR42, and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an output power failure warning signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310. FIG.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of the two voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 931, and when the power failure or momentary power failure signs are detected, the reset function is disabled. A payout power outage notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power outage notice through the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages of +12V and +24V for signs of power failure or momentary power failure, and as described above, the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions of the large condition are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf When the condition is established, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the above-mentioned pull-up resistor PR40 through the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes HI. is input to the payout control board 951 .

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V. Occasionally, since a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby turning off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5V side by resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power outage notice signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12V and/or +24V. When there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, so that the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 to turn on the transistor PTR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

Thus, when there is a sign of power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltage of +12V and / or +24V, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and/or +24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e The logic of the payout power outage notice signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. is entered in The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 is circuit-configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control board 951. is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full-tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50 is connected to the full tank detection sensor 3 via a resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed in the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. Capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR47 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR41 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a full tank signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR45, PR46, and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. FIG.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not filled with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 via the In the payout control board 951, a signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951, while the storage space is filled with the stored game balls. , the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. is input to the payout control board 951 .

When the accommodation space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 to the payout control board 951. A signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and having a logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning on the transistor PTR41 and also turning on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 via the payout control board. At 951, the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning off the transistor PTR41 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit composed of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50. Although it was a circuit configuration, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball out detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. It has a circuit configuration in which it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through. Since the full-tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, compared with the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , the path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long, and is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with stored game balls. Based on the detection signal from 279, when it is determined that the accommodation space is full of stored game balls, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotator. It is designed to control. In other words, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a detects that the game balls in which the accommodation space is stored are not full, but the payout motor 834 In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotating body, and the payout motor 834 is driven even though the accommodation space is full of game balls stored. When the game balls are filled up to the upstream side of the winning ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotor to continue the payout of the game balls, the payout rotor itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 is abnormally loaded, the payout motor 834 is overloaded and abnormally heats up and breaks down. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first filtered by the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC 50 to remove the noise component so that such a problem does not occur. adopted.

[10-2-3(e). Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The first and second output terminals of the operation switch 954 are grounded (GND), and the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the ground (GND) at one end and the other end of the capacitor PC41. ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via a resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the preceding stage and the subsequent stage, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage changes, and the signal is the RWMCLR signal input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. is entered in

The third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5 V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 through a resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR44 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR48 and a capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact forming the operation switch 954 repeats ON/OFF for a short time. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the operation switch 954 caused by .

A circuit composed of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit in the previous stage, a circuit composed of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit in the latter stage, and resistors PR55, PR56 and transistor PTR44. is a switch circuit, which is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954 .

As described above, the operation switch 954 is set to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, and to cancel an error after the power is turned on (after a period of time during which the RAM is cleared, that is, after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). It has a function and The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. ), it becomes an error cancellation signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR48. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn on the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on. When the voltage applied is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the error is not instructed, and error cancellation is performed when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on). It is judged that it is not instructive.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is generated by the transistor PTR44. , the transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. is entered. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a judges that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the preceding transistor. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn off the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off. When the voltage applied is pulled up to +5V by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. After the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, the error is cleared. It is judged to be an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 to turn off the transistor PTR44, thereby turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, it is an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d is mainly composed of a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12V and +5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is designed to be The power supply output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD60, and is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. , and +12 V or +5 V is applied as a motor drive voltage to the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 through the Zener diode PZD 60 based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supplied to the terminal and the tenth terminal, respectively, and also supplied to the payout motor 834 .

The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, 6th terminal and 7th terminal, are grounded (GND) respectively, and the base terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 is grounded. A payout motor drive signal is input to certain 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals via resistors PR60 to PR63. The 2nd, 4th, 9th and 11th terminals that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are connected to the 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. Correspondingly, when the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, the excitation signal A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834, respectively. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the drive ICPIC60 via the resistors PR60 to PR63. Outputs are made to base terminals 1, 5, 8 and 12, respectively. These drive pulses are generated by switching exciting currents flowing through the phases (/B phase, B phase, A phase, and /A phase) of the payout motor 834 to rotate the payout motor 834 . When the driving pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) is interrupted by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 will be damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the front stage of the 3rd and 10th terminals, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. A circuit configuration that

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting/outputting various signals to/from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. The payout control board 951 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 as described above. , are supplied, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and ground LG generated from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Through the terminal plate 869, an EXS signal to inform that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal to inform that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible. and output As shown in FIG. 84, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals and the like is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (which incorporate an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. A cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 . A resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR75 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. 80 through ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting it). is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR70 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is not only electrically connected to the resistor PR72, but also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR71 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71, and the signal is input to the power substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR71, PR74, and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. be.

A circuit composed of resistors PR72, PR76 and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply substrate 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply substrate 931. be.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 931 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 931. be done.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. A resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as the BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6. FIG.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. A resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a as a BRQ signal.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same logic as the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6. FIG.

An EXS signal that tells that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC73 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the CR unit 6 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by a pull-up resistor PR83. , is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. The ON/OFF of the photocoupler PIC73 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73, and the signal is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW becomes the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting EXS is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

A PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out rental balls from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is sent via a resistor PR84 to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74. is entered in The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC74 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a The photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF when the logic of the PRDY signal that is output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. , is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. The ON/OFF of the photocoupler PIC74 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74, and the signal is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting PRDY is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . Thus, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals input/output from input/output terminals of various input/output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b as a main payment serial data reception signal. be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 is sent as the payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. A payout serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb.

Each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a receives the above-described RWMCLR signal, payout power outage notice signal, door open signal, full tank signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection signal 1, etc.), etc. are input, for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310, which notifies completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal described above, is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. Also, detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are inputted via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and the EXS signal and the PRDY signal are output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the voltage switching signal is sent from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Alternatively, the payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs a payer ACK signal to inform that the main payment serial data reception signal has been normally received, and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs the payout control output circuit 952ca to the payer. Output the ACK signal to the main control board 1310, or output the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. For example, output to the error LED indicator 860b.

[10-3. Various input/output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 1310 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the payout control board 951 controls the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. is output to the main control board 1310 . These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310. FIG.

On the other hand, the payout control board 951 provides, in addition to the above-described main payment serial data reception signal, main payment ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), a main prize number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal, And 2 rounds jackpot information output signal such as jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting entrance winning information output signal etc. A game information signal, a payout blackout warning signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310 . These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the above-described outer end frame door open information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. Jackpot information including a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round big win information output signal and a 2 round big win information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Game information signals such as an output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a start winning prize information output signal are output to the external terminal plate 784. do. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 . In other words, two signals are output to the external terminal plate 784, the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and the prize ball number information output signal, and the main prize ball number from the main control board 1310 side is output. Information output signal, 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2nd round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and starting entrance winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951 .

A signal output from the external terminal plate 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the games played by the players. When the 15-round big-hit information output signal or the 2-round big-hit information output signal is output to the hall computer as one big-hit information output signal, the hall computer outputs the number of big hits with two rounds (2-round big-hit ) and the number of big wins with 15 rounds (the number of occurrences of 15-round big wins) is the sum of the number of big wins of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2-round big wins and the number of occurrences of 15-land big wins from the total number of big wins. , it is not possible to grasp whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. A data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players refer to the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter to select whether or not to play the game. Some do.

However, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased toward the number of occurrences of the two-round big win, so even when the player starts playing, only the two-round big wins occur. Sometimes the 15 round jackpot doesn't happen easily. In this way, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may unnecessarily stir up the gambling spirit of the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by separately outputting the 15 round big win information output signal and the 2 round big win information output signal as the big win information output signal to the hall computer, the hall computer can output the number of occurrences of the 2 round big win, The number of 15-round big hits and the number of occurrences can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big wins actually occurring in the pachinko machine 1 is the 2-round big win or the 15-round big win, and the data counter stores 15 rounds. Since the number of occurrences of the big win and the number of occurrences of the 2-round big win can be separately displayed or only the number of occurrences of the 15-round big win can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the big win game state, it is possible to stimulate the gambling spirit of the player more than necessary. do not have.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round big win information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round big win to the end of the 2-round big win, and the 15-round big win information output signal is also in the state where the 15-round big win occurs. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from generation to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round big win occurs, the 2-round big win information output signal is output for a predetermined period. The 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information are output to the hall computer, and when the 15-round big win occurs, the 15-round big win information output signal is outputted to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer only for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of Output Terminals on External Terminal Board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 for outputting various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with an external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal plate.

As described above, the external terminal plate 784 outputs the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round big win information output signal, and the 2 round big win information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving information output signal, and the start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, It outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 .

Briefly describing these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal is not generated during a normal game when the player says that the door frame 3 and/or the body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open. This is a signal that conveys that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is generated each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. The main prize number information output signal is the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001 and 2201, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal to inform that each time the number of game balls scheduled to be put out as prize balls based on the entered game balls reaches 10 balls, and the 15-round big win information output signal is a 15-round big win. The 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2-round jackpot is occurring, and the information output signal during probability fluctuation is a signal that a probability fluctuation occurs. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the special symbol display information output signal is the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal that informs that the variable display is finished (stopped). It is a signal that tells that it is in a stopped state, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal that tells that a time saving state is occurring, and the start winning prize information output signal is the first start shown in FIG. Each time a game ball enters the opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, it is a signal to notify that effect.

As shown in FIG. 86, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are horizontally arranged in a line on the external terminal plate 784 . The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the number of prize balls information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 to generate 10 prize balls each time the number of prize balls information output signal is input to the hall computer. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been put out as prize balls, and to grasp the total number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of the put out game balls.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer end frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door open information output signal indicates that the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or the body frame 4 are opened. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer controls the door frame 3 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is being input. / Or it can grasp that the main body frame 4 is opened.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal terminates (stops) the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the end (stop) of the special symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3 It is designed to be output for 0.128 seconds at times. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of special symbols has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and count the number of times to display the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of times the special symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 can be grasped.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a start winning prize information output signal. As described above, the starting hole winning information output signal is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 shown in FIG. , Every time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting hole winning information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the starting hole winning information output signal is inputted. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the starting hole 2004, count the number of times the starting hole winning prize information output signal is input, and send to the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls entered.

The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. The 15-round jackpot information output signal is, as described above, a signal that indicates that a 15-round jackpot is occurring. It is designed to be output. When the 15-round big win information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer keeps the pachinko machine 1 generating 15-round big wins while the 15-round big win information output signal is being input. The state can be grasped, and the total number of occurrences of the 15-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the 15-round big win information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 2-round big win information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2-round big win is occurring. It is designed to be output. When the 2-round big win information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is inputted to the hall computer, the hall computer keeps the 2-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round big win information output signal is being inputted. The state can be grasped, and the total number of occurrences of the 2-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the 2-round big win information output signal is inputted.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. The normal symbol display information output signal is, as described above, a signal that informs that the variable display of normal symbols has ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, it is designed to be output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds at the end (stop) of the normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. FIG. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. In 1402, it is possible to grasp that the variable display of normal symbols has ended (stopped), count the number of times, and display the total number of variable displays of normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The number of times can be grasped.

The output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time saving information output signal. As described above, the information output signal during time saving is a signal that conveys that the time saving state has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving information output signal is input. In addition, it is possible to grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state by counting the number of times that the information output signal during time saving is input.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the information output signal during probability fluctuation, and the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the probability fluctuation is occurring. In addition, it is possible to grasp the total number of occurrences of probability fluctuations in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the probability fluctuation information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is input to various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the played game balls reaches 10, and is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds in this embodiment. It has become so. When the main prize number information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the pachinko machine 1 outputs 10 prize balls each time the main prize number information output signal is input to the hall computer. It is possible to grasp that the game balls are scheduled to be put out as prize balls, and to grasp the total number of game balls to be put out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of the game balls to be put out. can do. It should be noted that game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls that have entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds, It is designed to be output with an interval of 0.128 seconds as if it were one continuous signal.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, while the output terminals PT3 to PT10 output the main control board. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged to be output via (pass through) the payout control board 951 . The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are colored, respectively. By electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, respectively, it is possible to mistakenly connect other wirings. can be prevented from being connected to each other. Various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed, and various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal plate 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output from the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are arranged on the external terminal plate 784. By arranging them in a row from the center left side to the right side, in this respect also, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side It is possible to prevent erroneous electrical connection with the wiring for transmitting the signal to the hall computer.

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main winning ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively sent from the external terminal board 784 to the hall. configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. When the number of game balls is running low, if the pachinko machine 1 happens to hit a 15-round jackpot, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient, so the game balls are paid out. (For example, if ball clogging or ball entanglement occurs in the payout device 830, game balls cannot be paid out unless this is resolved). Then, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches ten. Since it is a signal that conveys that every time, when game balls cannot be paid out, the payout control board 951 outputs a winning ball number information output signal and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784. become unable. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls a hall clerk or the like. A hall clerk or the like checks, for example, a hose-shaped replenishment nozzle or the like for supplying game balls from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 to identify the position of the clogged ball (or, for example, to Then, by specifying the position of the clogged ball or the position of the jammed ball and resolving it, the game ball will be returned to the state of being paid out.

However, since the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress even when the hall clerk or the like is proceeding with the work, the game balls are paid out by the work of the hall clerk or the like after the jackpot of 15 rounds is completed. When the state is restored, the payout control board 951 will pay out the game balls that have not been paid out one after another, and the payout control board 951 is in a period when the 15 round big win is completed and the 15 round big win is not occurring. Every time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10, it outputs a prize number information output signal to notify that effect and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784. It will happen. As a result, an extremely large number of game balls are put out even though the 15-round jackpot has not yet occurred. , a problem arises in that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between .

Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is drive-controlled by the payout control board 951 and the prize balls are actually paid out, that is, the number of prize balls information output signal output by the payout control board 951 is different. As a signal of the main control board 1310, the game ball that entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, a main prize number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal plate 784 are output. A system was adopted in which the information is transmitted to the hall computer via the system. As a result, even if the above-described troubles (ball clogging in the replenishment nozzle, etc., ball clogging in the payout device 830, ball jamming, etc.) occur, the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout in this game state The relationship between the number of game balls to be put out and the relationship can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in the game state.

[12. Circuit of effect display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and housed in the plate unit 320. A liquid crystal module circuit 450V for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 is mainly composed of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) by a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. are sent as a plus signal and a minus signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the positive signal and the negative signal are input by the common mode choke coil SDL0. Noise can be separated from negative signals. The noise-separated plus signal and minus signal are input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator) and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, thereby preventing disturbance of the serial signal.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, and It restores to three synchronizing signals, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal (that is, restores to a parallel signal before being serialized). Although the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source are each 8 bits, as described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are , the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. Two signals obtained by differentiating certain LOCKN signal output request data into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also inputted. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits two signals that are differentially differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured so that the circuit is connected so as to As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the two differential signals of the positive signal and the negative signal are not input to the motion circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the transmitter IC 1512d for frame side effect is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. is transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V.

The forced switching circuit 1512f outputs the signal output from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door-frame From the transmitter IC 1512d for side effects, the serial signal (serial data) by THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential method is used as a positive signal and a negative signal, and from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and through the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, it is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentially converted into a plus signal and a minus signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. Door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 judges that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals that are differentially differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in differential circuit 1512e are input, A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 . This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 .

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is used to produce the startup screen on the game board side when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. During the period during which the display is displayed on the display device 1600, or during the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is being performed, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 is operated. This is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, THine Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 judges that the signal is not output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and an abnormal event occurs. Assuming that it is data, a LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, by utilizing the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 to output the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from that of the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 By outputting it, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each supplied with +3.3 V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND application form, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminals of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal that serves as the ground for this digital circuit, and the +3.3 V power supply is supplied to the VDD terminal. It removes high frequency noise from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal that serves as the ground for this TTL output. It removes high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal that serves as the ground for this LVDS input, and the capacitor SDC2 is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. It removes high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal that serves as the ground for this PLL circuit, and the power is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

When +3.3 V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, indicating normal operation. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via a resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of a varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltages on the +3.3V electrical line supplied through resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. (logic transitions from LOW to HI) or falling edge (logic transitions from HI to LOW). As shown, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal. By the way, if the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3V, a rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal instructs whether or not to permit output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals, D0 to D17 terminals, and CLKOUT terminal) to be described later. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal, the output is always enabled. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, it will be in a state where it cannot be output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both of them. Operation modes include a normal mode and a handshake mode. In normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal are generated based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. and three synchronous signals (3-bit synchronous signals) of a horizontal synchronous signal, a vertical synchronous signal, and a clock signal. be. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is connected. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is automatically switched.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, For some reason, the parallel signal restored by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is abnormal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistor SDR2, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and controls the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510 . The peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d in order to inform the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the establishment of a predetermined condition based on the input LOCKN signal. to output When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side presentation drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Send to receiver IC SDIC0. When such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is received by the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. In addition, the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door A direct electrical connection may be made via the relay terminal plate 882 .

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal for outputting a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistance SDR2, which is the damping resistor of the performance display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510 .

The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronizing signals, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. terminal. In this embodiment, since the restored three synchronization signals, ie, the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal, are not used, the SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal outputs a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal that indicates whether the data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid. A DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR3, which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit incorporated in the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4, which is a damping resistor.

The D0 to D17 terminals receive three video signals (18 This is a data output terminal for outputting a 1-bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA1. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

The peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to the same ground. It's becoming

[Mounting mode of each electronic component possessed by the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG]
By the way, it is generally known that surface-mounting electronic components is advantageous in that it is possible to suitably reduce the size of hardware circuits through integration. However, among electronic components, integrated circuit components (components in which multiple types of single-function elements (resistive elements, diode elements, capacitor elements, etc.) are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package) A relatively large amount of space is created on the back side of the package because the package is naturally larger than a discrete component (a component in which a single single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package). Such a space on the back side of the package becomes a location that is difficult to visually confirm in a surface-mounted state (a location where electronic components (unauthorized components) are likely to be mounted illegally). For this reason, in the field of gaming machines, for many years, electronic components have been inserted into a base board (so-called base board) instead of being surface-mounted.

That is, an electronic component that is inserted and mounted tends to create a relatively large gap between the package and the base plate. Therefore, by inserting and mounting electronic components, it is possible to maintain the space on the back side of the package as a place where it is easy to visually confirm even in the mounted state, thereby preventing unauthorized components from being mounted. It is preferably suppressed.

However, in recent years, in the field of amusement machines, the space used for presentations has become even larger. It is becoming necessary to plan.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, of the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. In view of the fact that the SCG is not directly related to the benefits that the player obtains and is unlikely to be the object of fraudulence, first, the second control unit SCG is surface-mounted.

That is, as described above, the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment is configured including the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. Then, the second control unit SCG uses various integrated circuit components and various discrete components mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510 to perform progress processing of effects according to the results of the game progress processing. is considered feasible.

Various integrated circuit components mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510 include, for example, a peripheral control MPU 1511a and a peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. Various discrete components mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510 include, for example, resistors AR10 and AR11, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10, and the like shown in FIG.

In this regard, in the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment, lead portions of various electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate (here, the base plate of the peripheral control board 1510). Only the surface mounting area that is mounted in form is formed. That is, in this case, the various electronic components of the peripheral control board 1510 are also surface mount type components (SMD). However, since these electronic parts are not directly related to the benefits that players get and are unlikely to be the target of fraud, the security performance against unauthorized installation of electronic parts cannot be The hardware circuit mounted on the pachinko machine 1 can be miniaturized.

On the other hand, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment comprises the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931, as shown in FIG. The first control unit MCG uses various integrated circuit components and various discrete components mounted on the base substrates of these substrates 1310, 951, and 931 to supply the power supply for control (for example, +5 V). A game-related process including a generation process and payout of prize balls can be executed. However, since such processing on the side of the first control unit MCG is directly linked to awarding of benefits to the player, the first control unit MCG is easily targeted for fraud. Therefore, although miniaturization of the hardware circuit is required, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic parts will be significantly lowered, and the game will be interesting. The reality is that a decline in

However, on the other hand, even such a first control unit MCG is mounted on its base board (the base board of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, the base board of the power supply board 931) Among various electronic components, discrete components have smaller packages than integrated circuit components, and even if an electronic component is illegally mounted on the back side of the discrete component, it can be easily confirmed visually. It can be said that the component has a relatively high performance in terms of security performance against unauthorized mounting of the electronic component.

That is, the inventor believes that the electronic components mounted on the first control unit MCG include components with high security performance against fraud (discrete components) and components with low security performance against fraud (integrated circuit components). If further integration as a hardware circuit is attempted using only components (discrete components) with high security performance against fraud, even on the first control unit MCG side, which is likely to be targeted for fraud, We have found that it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

FIG. 117 is a diagram schematically showing how the first control unit MCG is integrated only with components (discrete components) having high security performance against fraud. Hereinafter, referring to FIG. 117, even on the side of the first control unit MCG, which is likely to be the target of fraudulence, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against fraudulent mounting of electronic components. I will explain that it is.

As shown in FIG. 117, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes a base plate BB and various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB. . Note that FIG. 117 is only a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of the characteristic technique according to the present application. 951 base board and power supply board 931 base board. An example of applying the characteristic technique according to the present application to such an embodiment will be described later. First, for convenience of explanation, the explanation will be made assuming an example in which they are configured by one base substrate.

Here, on the base plate BB,
An insertion mounting region TH where lead portions provided on electronic components are mounted by being inserted into the base plate BB, and is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud prevention performance;
A surface mounting area SM in which the leads provided on the electronic component are mounted on the surface of the base plate BB, and the integration performance is excellent due to multi-layered wiring patterns, but the fraud suppression performance is inferior. are provided in a separate manner.

According to such a configuration, while electronic components that are unlikely to be targeted for fraud can be mounted in the surface mounting area SM, electronic components that should be pursued to prevent fraud rather than integration are mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. Since it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit, it is possible to preferably maintain the performance of suppressing mounting of illegal components.

That is, as described above, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as the various electronic components D,
An integrated circuit component D1 in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package, and has low security performance against unauthorized mounting;
・Since the single-function element is enclosed in a relatively small package, it is equipped with a discrete component D2 with high security performance against unauthorized mounting.

In this respect, as a first characteristic technique according to the present application, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment places the integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance in the insertion mounting area TH and the surface area TH. Among the mounting areas SM, only the insertion mounting area TH, which has superior tampering prevention performance, is mounted, and only the discrete components with high security performance are mounted in the surface mounting area SM, which has inferior tampering prevention performance. As a result, even on the side of the first control unit MCG, which is likely to be a target of fraudulence, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against fraudulent mounting of electronic components.

In the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, the discrete component D2 with high security performance is a surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted in the surface mount area SM. , and an insertion mounting type discrete component D2b mounted in the insertion mounting area TH.

That is, as described above, with regard to electronic components, in general, integration can be achieved by using the surface mounting type rather than the insertion mounting type. However, if both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are separately provided as the base plate BB, the position where the integrated circuit component D1 to be electrically connected, for example, is provided in terms of circuit design. Also, considering the space in which wiring patterns are provided, it is better to place the electronic components in the insertion mounting area TH instead of the surface mounting area SM. can also occur.

In this regard, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, instead of using all the discrete components D2 as the surface-mount type discrete components D2a, they are designed to be the most suitable mode for integration. An insertion mounting type discrete component D2b is intentionally used in part. As a result, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be made more compact while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 117, the insertion mounting area TH, which is excellent in fraud prevention performance, is not formed on one side (back side) of the board, but is formed on the other side (front side) of the board, and is a discrete component. and integrated circuit components are respectively mounted. On the other hand, the surface mount area SM, which is inferior in fraud prevention performance, is not formed on one side (back side) of the substrate, but is formed on the other side (front side) of the substrate, and is formed between the integrated circuit component and the discrete component. It is desirable that the integrated circuit components are not mounted and only the discrete components are mounted. That is, in this case, first, the mounting of electronic components for mounting on the back side, which is likely to become a blind spot when checking whether an illegal component is mounted, is eliminated. On top of this, both integrated circuit components that are likely to be targeted for fraud and discrete components that are less likely to be targeted for fraud are mounted in the insertion mounting region TH, which has excellent fraud prevention performance. Since only discrete parts that are difficult to be targeted for fraud are mounted in the inferior surface mounting area SM, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of fraudulent parts. become.

Furthermore, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, even if the discrete component D2 has a high security performance, the capacitor element having a large capacitance value (backup For power supplies, etc.), considering that the shape is relatively larger than other elements (resistive elements, diode elements, capacitor elements with small capacitance values (for filter circuits, etc.), etc.), the surface mounting area is It is not used as the surface mounting type discrete component D2a mounted on the SM, but is prepared only as the insertion mounting type discrete component D2b-C mounted in the insertion mounting region TH. This makes it possible to more preferably maintain security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components when miniaturizing hardware circuits.

However, although the capacitor element with a large capacitance value is larger than the other elements (discrete parts), compared to the integrated circuit part D1, there is not a large gap between the package and the base plate. . Therefore, the capacitor element may be used as a surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted in the surface mount area SM. Even in this case, security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components can be maintained. is possible.

Moreover, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment incorporates a characteristic second technique based on a different viewpoint from the characteristic first technique according to the present application described above. ing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 117, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, one hardware circuit for the purpose of exhibiting a specific electrical function (for example, backup power supply function) as a discrete circuit (hardware circuit using no integrated circuit component D1) DHC electrically configured by the discrete component D2. However, this discrete circuit DHC is provided with an electrical structure composed of a plurality of discrete components D2 each mounted in a manner divided into an insertion mounting area TH and a surface mounting area SM.

That is, in this case, although the discrete circuit DHC is intended to perform a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function), it is not mounted on the insertion mounting area TH on the base plate BB. An electronic component D2b having a shape that enables mounting and an electronic component D2a having a shape that enables mounting on the surface mounting area SM coexist. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrically close role to perform a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It will be possible to make it difficult to remember that there is such a circuit. Further, by mounting a part of the electronic component on the surface mounting area SM, it can be expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suppressing fraudulent use of electronic components.

However, as described above, the example shown in FIG. 117 is for explaining the principles of the two characteristic techniques according to the present application. explain.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the base board BB of the first control unit MCG includes the base board of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, and the base board of the power supply board 931. and three base substrates. Both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided in such a manner as to be separated from each other on these base substrates.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, only the insertion mounting area TH is formed on the base board of the power supply board 931 of the three base boards, and the base board of the main control board 1310 is formed. The substrate and the base substrate of the payout control substrate 951 are provided in such a manner that both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are separated from each other.

Among the various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB of the first controller MCG, the diode MD0 (FIG. 75 ) is mounted on the surface mounting area SM of the base board of the main control board 1310 as a surface mounting type discrete component D2a. Similarly, the diode PD0 (see FIG. 75) of the "backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the payout control built-in RAM" is surface-mounted on the base board of the payout control board 951. A surface mount type discrete component D2a is mounted in the area SM.

According to such a configuration, of the integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance and the discrete component D2 with high security performance, only the discrete component D2 (diode MD0, diode PD0) is the surface mount type discrete component D2a. They are mounted in the surface mounting area SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951). As a result, even on the side of the first control unit MCG, which is likely to be the target of fraudulence, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against fraudulent mounting of electronic components ( A characteristic first technology according to the present application).

Moreover, in the example applied to this embodiment, the surface mount area SM formed on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG includes a specific type of discrete component (here, the diode MD0 and the diode PD0 are both Schottky diode element) will be mounted in plurality. That is, in this case, all the electronic components mounted on the surface mount area SM having inferior fraud prevention performance have the same shape, so it is expected that the labor required for fraud confirmation can be saved.

Further, in the above configuration, the discrete components (the electronic components responsible for part of the power supply function) that should originally be included in the power supply board 931 are intentionally mounted on a board (main control board 1310) different from the power supply board 931. I have to. That is, even if the power supply board 931 does not have enough space to form the surface mounting area SM, it is possible to form the surface mounting area SM on another board and mount the surface mounting type discrete component D2 there. is possible, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the circuit of the first control unit MCG as a whole.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) having a plurality of discrete components D2 (capacitor element and Schottky diode element here) for the purpose of exhibiting a backup power supply function. is provided, the plurality of discrete components D2 constituting the discrete circuit DHC are separately mounted in an insertion mounting area TH (capacitor element) and a surface mounting area SM (Schottky diode element). I'm doing it.

According to such a configuration, although the discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) is intended to exhibit a backup power supply function, on the base plate BB, the insertion mounting area TH (power supply board 931) and an electronic component D2a having a shape that enables mounting on the surface mounting area SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951). become. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrically close role to perform a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It will be possible to make it difficult to remember that the circuit is there, and by increasing the difficulty of understanding such circuits, fraud can be expected to be suppressed (the second characteristic technology according to the present application).

Moreover, in the example applied to this embodiment, a plurality of discrete components D2 of one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) intended to exhibit a backup power supply function are placed in the insertion mounting area TH (capacitor element). and surface mounting area SM (Schottky diode element), and these discrete components D2 can be mounted on two different boards (main control board 1310, supply control board 951 (Schottky diode element), power supply board In this case, the electronic components D2a and D2b, which are mixed for surface mounting and insertion mounting, are mounted on different base substrates. Therefore, the difficulty of understanding the circuit will be increased more and more, and it will be possible to further suppress fraud.

Further, in the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the mounting surface of the surface mounting area SM on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the same as the insertion mounting area TH on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. It is provided so as to have an area smaller than the mounting surface. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a third party to notice that the surface mount area SM having inferior anti-fraud performance is provided, and anti-fraud can be expected to be suppressed.

Further, in the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the number of types of electronic components mounted on the surface mounting area SM on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is The number of types of electronic components to be mounted in the insertion mounting area TH in the BB is smaller than that of the electronic components. Therefore, the number of types of electronic components to be visually checked to see if any illegal activity has been performed on the electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area SM, which is relatively inferior in security performance, is relatively reduced. This makes it possible to facilitate visual checks.

Further, in the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the total number of electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area SM on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is It is provided so as to be smaller than the total number of electronic components to be mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. Therefore, by relatively reducing the total number of electronic components that are subject to visual checks to see if there is any fraudulent activity on the electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area with relatively inferior security performance. , it is possible to reduce the load on visual checks.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface mounting areas SM are provided on the base substrate of the main control substrate 1310 and the base substrate of the payout control substrate 951, respectively. may be formed.

In addition, the surface mounting area SM is formed only on a specific base board, and the surface mounting type discrete components D2 which should be originally mounted on other base boards are collectively arranged on the specific base board. good too. According to such a configuration, when confirming whether or not unauthorized mounting is performed, only the surface mounting area SM formed on the specific base substrate needs to be confirmed intensively. It is expected that the required time and effort will be saved.

However, in view of the fact that the integrated circuit component D1 is mounted on any of the three base substrates, at least the insertion mounting region TH must be formed on any of the three base substrates in order to appropriately suppress fraud. must.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the base board BB of the first control unit MCG is the base board of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, and the base board of the power supply board 931. Although it is configured by three base substrates, as schematically shown in FIG. 117, they may be collectively configured on one base substrate.

In addition, the "base board BB of the first control unit MCG" according to the present application is essentially a board in which the surface mounting area SM and the insertion mounting area TH are separated, which are provided by a plurality of base substrates. , or may be provided by one base substrate.

For example, the main control board 1310 includes a first base board on which only the insertion mounting area TH is formed, and a second base board on which only the surface mounting area SM is formed. By inserting and mounting the substrate into the insertion mounting region TH of the first base substrate, the electronic components inserted and mounted in the first base substrate are maintained while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components. It is conceivable to adopt a structure in which the components and the electronic components surface-mounted on the second base substrate are electrically connected to each other. "Board BB" is a concept that includes at least both a first base substrate on which only the insertion mounting area TH is formed and a second base substrate on which only the surface mounting area SM is formed. That is, this mode is also one of the modes that "the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is provided with both the insertion mounting region TH and the surface mounting region SM in a manner that they are separated from each other.” It is included as an aspect.

Note that when the first base substrate on which only the insertion mounting region TH is formed and the second base substrate on which only the surface mounting region SM is formed, the insertion mounting region TH and the surface mounting region SM It is desirable to dispose the first base substrate and the second base substrate so that they are oriented in different directions (preferably orthogonal directions).

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the components (surface-mounted components) mounted in the surface-mounted area SM inferior in fraud suppression performance are electronic components enclosed in a relatively small package. By using only discrete components, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while eliminating the space for mounting illegal components (reducing the space on the back side).

However, even with such a discrete component (surface mount component) with excellent security performance, there is a small space on the back side of the component, but it is difficult to visually confirm it when mounted in the surface mount area SM. still left. Therefore, the pachinko hall side, which operates and manages the pachinko machine 1, understands that ``there is no space left behind the discrete parts (surface-mounted parts) for the illegal parts to be mounted.'' However, it is impossible to completely get rid of the anxiety that "a very small illegal part may be produced and installed illegally", and in a situation where it is difficult to confirm visually There is a concern that the operation and management of the pachinko machine 1 will become complicated, such as being forced to confirm.

Therefore, it is more desirable to provide each base board of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 in the following mode instead of the above-described mode.

[Modified example of each base board of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951]
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a partial region of the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to the modification. A modification of the base board MB of the main control board 1310 will be described below with reference to FIG. Although description of a modification of the base board of the payout control board 951 is omitted, it can be modified in the same manner as the base board MB of the main control board 1310 described below.

As shown in FIG. 118, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification includes at least an insertion mounting board THB that is inferior in integration performance but superior in fraud prevention performance.

Also in the insertion mounting board THB according to this modified example, a plurality of types of electronic components (insertion mounting components) are mounted in an inserted manner in the same manner as in the insertion mounting board TH of the above-described embodiment. Similarly, these electronic components (insertion mounting components) include both the integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance and the discrete component D2b with high security performance.

However, as is clear from FIG. 118, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modified example, the insertion mounting board THB and the insertion mounting lead parts are inserted into the insertion mounting board THB. It remains that the electronic components mounted in the form of being mounted are provided respectively. That is, although the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification has a surface mount area and surface mount components mounted in the area, at first glance it is difficult to see which of them A special mounting structure that does not appear to be provided is adopted.

More specifically, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification includes not only the integrated circuit component D1 and the discrete component D2b as the insertion mounting components, but also the special mounting component D3 (in the figure, the special mounting component D3a and special mounted parts D3b). Although this special mounting component D3 incorporates an electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted in a surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud prevention performance, it is concealed from the insertion mounting board THB. It is inserted and mounted via a special insertion mounting lead portion TL, which will be described later.

According to such a special mounting component D3, although a surface mounting region to be described later and an electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted in the surface mounting region are respectively provided inside the special mounting component D3, fraud prevention is performed. Since it has an external shape that looks like an insertion mounting component mounted on the insertion mounting board THB with excellent performance, it is expected that it will be excluded from the target component for illegal purposes by malicious persons. be able to be In addition, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modified example, the part into which such a special mounting component D3 is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting board THB is a surface mounting board on which surface mounting components are mounted. It will function as an area.

Moreover, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modified example, such special mounting components D3 are not arranged together (adjacently) in one place, but are arranged in a plurality of places on the base board MB. At least one of the special mounting components D3 (special mounting component D3a in the figure) is arranged so as to be surrounded by a relatively large area (insertion mounting area) where the insertion mounting components D1 and D2b are insertion mounted. We are planning to set up

In other words, in this case, surface mount areas with inferior anti-tamper performance and electronic components (surface mount components) mounted in the surface mount areas are subdivided into small pieces to make them inconspicuous. The surface mounting area is present when a malicious person sees the base board MB of the main control board 1310, because it can be successfully slipped into the insertion mounting area provided as a relatively large area. As a result, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while the performance of suppressing the mounting of illegal components is more preferably maintained.

As will be described later, a diode MD0 (see FIG. 75) as the surface-mounted discrete component D2a shown in FIG. 117 is sealed inside the special mounting component D3a according to this modified example. As described above, such a diode MD0 is used in a discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) intended to provide a backup power supply function. Nevertheless, even in this modified example, for a plurality of discrete components constituting one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit), the insertion mounting area (capacitor element (capacitor BC0)) and the surface mounting area (Schottky diode element (Diode MD0)) and mounted separately. Moreover, for the capacitor element (capacitor BC0) inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area, a position (such as the power supply board 931) not adjacent to the special mounting component D3a containing the Schottky diode element (diode MD0) in the insertion mounting area. It is designed to be implemented in

In this way, the difficulty of understanding the circuit is increased by making it difficult to remember that the electronic component built into the special mounting component D3a exhibits a specific electrical function (backup power supply function). As a result, even if it is noticed that there is a surface-mounted area with inferior anti-fraud performance, anti-fraud can be expected.

Next, an example of the structure of the special mounting component D3a according to this modified example will be described. In FIG. 118, for convenience of explanation, the portion where the special mounting component D3a is mounted is enlarged, and the outer package OP of the special mounting component D3a is partially omitted to expose its internal structure. Figures (indicated by dotted lines) are included.

As also shown in the explanatory diagram, the special mounting component D3a according to this modified example includes a special surface mounting board SMB as a surface mounting board on which a surface mounting type electronic component (surface mounting component) is mounted; A surface mounting type discrete component D2a mounted on a special surface mounting board SMB, and a special insertion mounting lead part as an insertion mounting lead part inserted into a through hole (specific insertion hole) of the insertion mounting board THB. It has a TL and an outer package OP that molds these parts with molding resin.

Here, the special surface mounting board SMB electrically connects the surface mounting lead portions SL provided in the electronic components (surface mounting type discrete components D2a) mounted on the board and the special insertion mounting lead portions TL. The wiring pattern HP is formed so as to be directly connected, and the mounting surface of the wiring pattern HP is provided so as to be substantially perpendicular to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting board THB.

The surface area of the mounting surface of the special surface mount board SMB is only large enough to mount the surface mount type discrete component D2a. It is designed to have a mounting surface with a smaller area than the assumed area. That is, in the insertion mounting board THB, even when all the electronic parts necessary for operating the pachinko machine 1 are mounted, there is still a spare space for mounting other electronic parts. In order to reduce the size of the surface mount board SMB, when the electronic component to be mounted (surface mount type discrete component D2a) is mounted, there is no extra space for mounting other electronic components. not left.

With such a configuration, it is difficult to tamper with the special surface mount board SMB. come to be expected.

The surface mount type discrete component D2a itself has a package structure (inner package) molded with molding resin. Inside, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) included in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) is electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL by a bonding wire. That is, the surface-mounting type discrete component D2a is provided with the surface-mounting lead portions SL formed so as to be pulled out to the outside of the inner package (mold resin). Other electronic components mounted on the insertion mounting board THB are electrically connected to the special insertion mounting lead portions TL via the wiring patterns HP formed on the special surface mounting board SMB. The Schottky diode element (diode MD0) is electrically connected to perform processing in cooperation with each other.

Furthermore, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided in a flat external shape (package shape), and is soldered to the special surface mount board SMB in such a manner that its flat surface faces the special surface mount board SMB. It is surface mounted. However, as described above, the mounting surface of the special surface mounting board SMB on which the surface mounting type discrete component D2a is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting board THB. Therefore, the surface mounting type discrete component D2a provided in the special mounting component D3 faces the insertion mounting board THB not by its flat surface but by its thin surface (thin surface). It will be implemented so that it becomes a form.

In such a configuration, the thin surface having a relatively small area, rather than the flat surface having a relatively large area, faces the insertion mounting board THB. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 118, only a small area (equivalent to two through holes) is left on the insertion mounting board THB so that one discrete component (insertion mounting type) can be mounted. Even in a situation where the mounting component D3 is not mounted, the special mounting component D3 can be arranged in the small area (for two through holes).

It should be noted that the size of the surface-mounted discrete component D2a itself (length in the horizontal direction in the drawing) according to this modification is the same as when the special-mounted component D3a is mounted on the insertion mounting board THB. It is smaller than the pitch between the through-holes into which the lead parts TL for special insertion mounting are inserted (the spacing between specific insertion holes).

One end of the special insertion mounting lead portion TL has a bifurcated structure in which the special surface mounting board SMB is sandwiched from both sides thereof, and the wiring pattern HP is formed on the special surface mounting board SMB. It is fixed to the special surface-mounting board SMB by soldering at the location where it is mounted, and is electrically connected to the surface-mounting lead portion SL via the wiring pattern HP. . On the other hand, the other end side is fixed to the insertion mounting board THB by being inserted into the through hole of the insertion mounting board THB and soldered to the insertion mounting board THB side. are electrically connected to various electronic components via the wiring patterns.

In addition, although the outer package OP has a package structure (inner package) in which the surface-mounted discrete component D2a itself is molded with a mold resin, a mold resin other than the mold resin is used. Accordingly, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is further molded (double molded) together with the special surface mount board SMB to be mounted.

With such a configuration, it is extremely difficult to tamper with a surface mount board that is inferior in tampering prevention performance.

In particular, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modified example, the appearance shape produced by the outer package OP of the double mold is different from the appearance shape of the specific type of surface mounting component itself surface-mounted inside. . That is, in this case, since the discrete component D2a itself can be mounted in a state where the external shape thereof is concealed, it is possible to prevent the specific type of surface mounted component contained in the special mounted component D3a from being mounted. The circuit becomes more difficult to understand, for example, it looks like a

Moreover, of the special insertion mounting lead portions TL and the surface mounting lead portions SL provided inside the outer package OP, only the special insertion mounting lead portions TL are formed by the outer package OP (mold resin). The surface-mounted discrete component D2a is integrally molded with the special surface-mounted board SMB so that the surface-mounted discrete component D2a is pulled out to the outside of the surface-mounted component D3a. It is mounted on the insertion mounting board THB as one electronic component having lead portions TL).

According to such a configuration, although a surface-mounted board inferior in fraud prevention performance and an electronic component mounted on the board (surface-mounted component) are provided inside, the special mounted component D3a is Since it can function as if it were an insertion mount component mounted in an insertion mount area with excellent fraud prevention performance, it is expected that it will be excluded from fraudulent purposes by malicious persons. be able to be Also, in terms of physical distribution and mounting, it can be handled in the same manner as an insertion-mounting type discrete component, so it can be said that it is also superior in terms of ease of handling.

Furthermore, the outer package OP is mounted on the surface-mount type discrete component D2a having a width smaller than the pitch between the through-holes using a molding resin different from the molding resin of the discrete component D2a itself. By integrally molding with the target special surface mount board SMB, it has an external shape as an electronic component having a size that does not fit within the pitch between the through holes.

That is, as shown in FIG. 117, when the surface mount type discrete component is left as it is in an external shape smaller than the pitch between the through holes in the insertion mounting area (the interval between the insertion holes), the main control board A third party is likely to notice that a surface mounting area having inferior anti-tampering performance is provided in the base board MB of 1310, which may encourage fraud.

In this regard, in the above configuration, the surface mount type discrete component D2a, which has a width smaller than the pitch between the through holes, is an electronic component having a size that does not fit within the pitch between the through holes. It is designed to be mounted after giving it an external shape. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 118, on the base board MB of the main control board 1310, there is no electronic component having an external shape whose lateral width is smaller than the pitch between the through-holes. Since it is possible to make it appear as if only electronic components (insertion mounting components) of the type are mounted, it is possible to improve the performance of suppressing mounting of illegal components.

Furthermore, the external shape produced by such an outer package OP is different from the external shape of electronic components that are surface-mounted inside. It has a unique external shape that is different from any of the electronic components (excluding the mounting component D3). That is, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modified example, the excessive security performance of protecting the mere discrete component D2a, which can only have a limited function compared to an arithmetic processing unit, with double molding resin is provided. In addition to this, a unique and relatively large external shape is given as an external shape that dares to attract the attention of malicious persons.

According to such a configuration, the excessive security performance provided on the base board MB of the main control board 1310 can be shown to a third party, so that the motivation to commit fraud is reduced. can be expected.

Furthermore, the outer package OP is given an identification number indicating the type of the electronic component as the special mounting component D3a. It is made different from the content (SD) of the identification number attached to the surface mount type discrete component D2a) mounted on the special surface mount board SMB.

According to such a configuration, since the content (SD) of the identification number attached to the specific type of surface-mounted component does not appear, the external shape produced by the outer package OP and the surface-mounted component inside are Combined with the fact that the appearance shape of the specific type of surface mount component is different from that of the surface mount component (combined with the structure of the double mold), it becomes possible to make it appear that the specific type of surface mount component is not mounted. In addition, it becomes possible to make it look as if only insertion mounting type electronic components (insertion mounting components) are mounted, and it is possible to improve the performance of suppressing mounting of illegal components.

Further, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modified example, the length in the thickness direction of the special surface mounting board SMB is made smaller than the length in the thickness direction of the surface mounting type discrete component D2a. On top of this, a mounting surface on which electronic components and wiring patterns are provided is formed only on one side of the flat surface of the special surface mounting board SMB, and a molding resin is directly attached to the back side thereof. It has become.

That is, by adopting such a configuration, not only a unique and asymmetric external shape is formed, but also the length in the thickness direction of the special mounting part D3a is an insertion mounting type mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. is smaller than the length in the thickness direction of the discrete component D2b. As a result, together with the above-described structure in which the mounting surfaces are perpendicular to each other, there is no need to secure a special mounting space when mounting the special mounting component D3a on the insertion mounting board THB. The special mounting component D3a can be mixed into the mounting of the insertion mounting component.

As described above, the special mounting component D3a according to this modified example looks like one insertion-mounting type discrete component from the outside, but actually, the special surface-mounting board SMB and the surface-mounting type discrete component D2a and D2a are included therein. That is, in the special mounting component D3a, the special insertion mounting lead portion TL is internally fixed to the special surface mounting board SMB and electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL through the wiring pattern HP. On the other hand, the insertion mounting component has a structure in which the insertion mounting lead portion is electrically connected to a specific electronic component by a bonding wire inside.

Further, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modified example, as shown in FIG. In addition to the special mounting component D3a that is surface-mounted, a special mounting component D3b that internally surface-mounts a capacitor element with a small capacitance value is provided.

That is, the special mounting component D3b according to this modified example has a filter for a specific data line between it and the discrete component D2b provided as a resistance element among the insertion mounting type discrete components D2b mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. It forms a circuit. Recall that even with such a filter circuit configuration, the electronic components included in one discrete circuit have an electrically close role in order to exhibit a specific electrical function (filter function). By increasing the difficulty of understanding such circuits, fraud can be expected to be suppressed.

As for the special mounting component D3b, both the resistor element and the capacitor element forming the filter circuit may be internally surface-mounted on the special surface-mounting board SMB. However, in this case, the electronic components are arranged side by side in a row. For example, it is desirable to keep the external shape lower than the capacitor element (not shown in the drawing) in order to reduce the size of the base board MB of the main control board 1310 .

Further, the special mounting component D3 may contain a plurality of types of electronic components as described above, or may contain a plurality of electronic components of one type. In any case, when a plurality of electronic components are embedded, the plurality of electronic components are surface-mounted side by side in a row on one special surface mount board SMB, and the electronic components are It is desirable to package the parts and the special surface mount board SMB together by molding with molding resin.

However, if a plurality of electronic components are built into the special mounting component D3, the external shape of the component naturally becomes large. There is a concern that it will no longer be possible to expect a dazzling effect using preconceptions such as "It must be an insertion mounting type discrete component." Therefore, in order to suitably obtain the dazzling effect using such a prejudice, it is necessary to make a single surface-mount type discrete component different in external shape and thin by the above-mentioned double mold structure. It is desirable to mount them so that their faces face the insertion mounting board TH.

In addition, the above-described double-molded outer package OP may be formed of a non-transparent material such as a mold resin, and an identification number different from the identification number attached to one surface-mount type discrete component itself may be assigned to the outer package. It is also important to make it more difficult to understand the circuit by adding it to the OP.

It should be noted that the special mounting component D3 according to this modification has a structure in which "one surface mounting type discrete component" smaller than "one insertion mounting type discrete component" is included. When double-molded, the size is about the same as that of a single insertion-mounting type discrete component, and it can be expected that the above-mentioned excellent effects will be achieved. . Therefore, in a configuration in which "one insertion-mounting type discrete component" is provided inside and is double-molded, the size becomes larger than "one insertion-mounting type discrete component". Therefore, it cannot be expected that the above-described excellent effects will be achieved.

The techniques described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 will be summarized below. It should be noted that each content described below can be adopted by any of the technology described with reference to FIG. 117 and another example thereof, or the technology described with reference to FIG. 118 and another example thereof, unless otherwise specified. It is a configuration that is assumed to be, and it is a function and effect that can be achieved.

As described above, the techniques described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 are:
・It has a board on which multiple mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using these electronic components, in addition to the generation processing of the control power supply (for example, +5V, etc.), the progress processing of the game including the payout of prize balls and a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using these electronic components, an effect related to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG is performed. Second control unit SCG
It is intended to solve the problem of ``miniaturizing hardware circuits while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting'' in gaming machines equipped with .

More specifically, in the technique described with reference to FIGS. The above-mentioned second control unit SCG, which is only performed, is not directly related to the benefits that the player obtains, and is unlikely to be the target of fraud. One of the technical features of is that it is configured only by surface mounting. That is, in this case, surface mount type components (SMD) are used as the above-described various mounting electronic components of the peripheral control board 1510, but these mounting electronic components are provided by the player. A hardware circuit installed in the pachinko machine 1 without degrading security performance against unauthorized mounting of mounting electronic components because it is not directly related to the privilege and is unlikely to be illegally targeted. miniaturization can be achieved.

On the other hand, the processing on the side of the first control unit MCG is directly linked to awarding of benefits to the player, so the first control unit MCG is likely to be a target of fraud. Therefore, although miniaturization of the hardware circuit is required, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting will be remarkably lowered. The reality is that the decline in interest in gaming is inevitable.

Therefore, in the technique described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, on the substrate of the first control unit MCG,
An insertion mounting region where lead portions provided on mounting electronic components are mounted by being inserted into the base plate BB, and is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud prevention performance;
・A surface mounting area where the leads provided on the electronic component for mounting are placed on the surface of the base plate BB, and the wiring pattern is multi-layered, resulting in excellent integration performance but inferior fraud prevention performance. First of all, it is decided to establish both. On top of this, the technical feature is to select and mount the following two types of mounting electronic components with different properties in the insertion mounting region or the surface mounting region having the above properties in a manner that can solve the above problems. is one of

・Multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package, so integrated circuit components with low security performance against unauthorized mounting ・Single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package Discrete components with high security performance against unauthorized mounting

More specifically, in the first control unit MCG, the integrated circuit component with low security performance is mounted only in the insertion mounting region, which is superior in fraud prevention performance, out of the insertion mounting region TH and the surface mounting region. At the same time, only the discrete components with high security performance are mounted in the surface mounting area where the anti-fraud performance is inferior. As a result, even on the side of the first control unit MCG, which is likely to be the target of fraudulence, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against fraudulent mounting of mounting electronic components.

However, even if the security performance is maintained against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting in this way, the board of the first control unit MCG is likely to be the object of unauthorized use. No change. Therefore, the substrates of the first control unit MCG are basically covered with transparent cover members (various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.) as shown in FIGS. ), the mounting surface (flat surface) is directed toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. That is, in this case, not only is it possible to make it difficult to cheat on the mounting surface (flat surface) by the transparent cover member, but the first control unit MCG can be operated simply by performing an operation to open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . Since it is possible to monitor (visually) whether illegal parts are mounted on the board (first board) on which integrated circuit parts that are likely to be illegal are mounted, illegal parts Therefore, it is possible to suitably secure the suppressing performance and the ease of monitoring for the mounting of the

In order to obtain such effects, as shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, electronic components for mounting are mounted on one surface (rear surface) of the substrate of the first control unit MCG. First, the electronic component for mounting is mounted only on the other side (front side), and in a state covered with the transparent cover member (various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.), Needless to say, it should be arranged so that the other side (front side) faces the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

In addition, considering that the main control board 1310 is a part of the first control unit MCG that performs processing that is directly linked to the granting of benefits to the player, the first control unit MCG has the above-described configurations. It can be said that it is desirable to apply each of the substrates, particularly to the substrates of the main control substrate 1310 .

Furthermore, in order to more preferably maintain the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting, first, as a board possessed by the main control board 1310, an insertion mounting area excellent in unauthorized suppression performance is formed and integrated circuit components are installed. At least a first substrate on which both the discrete component and the discrete component are inserted and mounted, and a second substrate on which the discrete component is surface-mounted and the integrated circuit component is not mounted on which a surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed are prepared. to Among these substrates, the first substrate is covered with the transparent cover member (various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.), and the one side surface (on which electronic components are not mounted) is placed. back side) and the other side (the front side on which electronic components are mounted) are arranged so that the other side faces the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the second board , the one side surface (the back side surface on which electronic components are not mounted) and the other side surface (the front side surface on which electronic components are mounted) do not face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 and are perpendicular to it. It is desirable to arrange so as to face the direction of In other words, in this case, the presence of the surface mounting area (second substrate), which is inferior in fraud prevention performance, can be made difficult to be visually recognized from the rear side, so that the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting is more suitable. will be expected to remain at

However, even with such a configuration, if a malicious person insists on ``whether a surface mounting area with inferior anti-tampering performance is formed somewhere,'' There is a concern that the second substrate on which the mounting area is formed may be noticed. In this case, even though only the discrete components with high security performance among the integrated circuit components and the discrete components are mounted on the surface mounting area of the second substrate, fraudulent acts that the hall side has not yet thought of. (For example, the development of microscopic fraudulent chips) could lead to losses.

Therefore, regarding the other side surface (front side) of the first substrate where both the integrated circuit component and the discrete component are inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area with excellent tampering prevention performance, not only the insertion mounting area but also the tampering prevention A surface mounting area with inferior performance should be intentionally formed on the same surface (front surface). Then, the other side surface (front side surface) of the first substrate is mounted on the pachinko machine while the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is exposed without mounting any electronic component for mounting on the surface mounting area. It is desirable to arrange it in such a manner that it faces the rear side of 1. That is, in this case, the surface mounting area of the other side surface (front side surface) of the first substrate arranged to face the rear side is used when a malicious person attempts to commit fraud from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a high level of fraud prevention performance. As a result, it is possible to discourage a malicious person from trying to find the second board on which the surface mount area having inferior anti-fraud performance is formed. It is desirable that the surface mounting area formed on the first substrate be provided at a position (such as an end portion of the first substrate) where the presence of the surface mounting area can be easily noticed when looking at the first substrate.

Also, regarding the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area formed on the first substrate, does it have an independent shape that is not electrically connected to the insertion mounting area formed on the same surface as the surface mounting area? Although it is electrically connected to the insertion mounting area, even if an illegal part is mounted on the surface mounting area, the insertion mounting area is not affected (the game progresses). It is important to form on output signals that do not need to be used above). On the other hand, in the second substrate according to this illustrative example, unlike the first substrate, only the surface mounting region, which is inferior in fraud prevention performance, is formed between the insertion mounting region and the surface mounting region. Mounting electronic components (here, discrete components) are surface-mounted on the surface-mounting area.

Even if each of the above-described configurations is adopted, there is a possibility that a malicious person will find out "the second substrate on which discrete components are surface-mounted in the surface-mounted area with inferior anti-fraud performance". Gender cannot be completely ruled out. Therefore, among the surface mounting areas of the main control board 1310, the surface mounting area which is formed only on the other side of the first board and in which no mounting electronic components are mounted is used as the surface mounting area. Regarding the "surface mounting area formed only on the other side of the second substrate" In the second substrate, only the discrete components, which are difficult to be tampered with, out of the discrete components and the integrated circuit components are surface-mounted, and the second substrate is molded with a molding member (non-permeable member), and the one side surface ( The back side on which no electronic parts are mounted) and the other side (front side) are arranged so as not to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 but to face the direction perpendicular to it. is desirable. That is, in this case, it is possible to conceal the fact that the surface mounting area is formed on the second substrate and the type of the discrete component surface-mounted on the surface mounting area. In addition, the molding material makes it difficult to cheat on the mounting surface. Therefore, it is possible to remove the mounting from the target that requires monitoring), so it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting. It is expected that problems such as

However, more preferably, as for mounting components (discrete components in this case) surface-mounted in the surface-mounting region, as shown in FIG. 118, a molding member ( It should be inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting region TH of the first substrate while being molded with a non-transparent member). According to such a configuration, the first board arranged to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 (a surface mounting area that gives an impression that "surface mounting parts are not mounted in the pachinko machine 1" and electronic parts (substrate formed with an insertion mounting area on which a second substrate is mounted), the insertion mounting area includes "discrete components", "integrated circuit components", and "a second substrate together with a mold member (non-transparent member) The surface mounting areas molded by the " are mounted by insertion, and the electronic components are electrically connected to each other. That is, in this case, when the first substrate is viewed from the rear side, there is a surface mounting area (second 2 substrates) are made invisible by the molded material, making it possible to make them appear as insertion mounting components and allow them to function electrically. It is expected that the problem of "miniaturization of the hardware circuit" will be solved more favorably.

In addition, the second substrate on which the surface-mounted components are mounted is inserted and mounted into the first substrate so that the thin surface of the substrate faces the rear side (both substrate surfaces are orthogonal to the first substrate). Therefore, it becomes possible to mount the second substrate in the molded state without creating a large dead angle with the first substrate.

Here, even if each of the above configurations is adopted, "the second substrate itself in a state of being molded by a mold member (non-permeable member) is attached to the mold member (non-permeable member) together with the unauthorized parts. ), the hall side is required to periodically check whether there is any fraudulent act such as replacing it with another board that is in a molded state. In this regard, if the above-described mold structure is simply adopted, when the above-described fraudulent act of replacing the mold member with another board having the same configuration such as color and material is performed, the fraudulent act is committed. It becomes difficult to see that it is in a broken state, and the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting may conversely deteriorate.

Therefore, in the surface mounting area of the second substrate to be molded, only a specific type of discrete component (electronic component for mounting) among various discrete components mounted on the substrate of the main control board 1310 is mounted. It is desirable that they are surface-mounted, and other types are not surface-mounted on the second substrate and are mounted only on a different substrate. According to such a configuration, only discrete components having a specific shape are surface-mounted and molded in the surface-mounting area of the second substrate. The degree of swelling of the mold member (see, for example, FIG. 118, etc.) at the mounting position of the discrete component is unified. In other words, when a different board on which unauthorized components are mounted in addition to a specific type of discrete component is molded with a molding member, the degree of swelling of the molded member at the mounting position of the unauthorized component will be different from the mounting position of the specific type of discrete component. Since the bulging condition of the mold member will be different from the bulging condition of the mold member in the above, the difference in shape (the bulging condition is not uniform) in the mold member facilitates the monitoring of the above-mentioned fraudulent acts, and prevents unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting. It is expected that the security performance will be favorably maintained.

In this case, in the substrate included in at least the main control substrate 1310 of the first control unit MCG, the discrete components of the specific type are collectively mounted only in the surface mounting area of the second substrate. It can be said that it is more desirable to avoid mounting on a substrate different from the two substrates in terms of miniaturization (integration) of the hardware circuit.

However, since the "specific type of discrete component" is required to be an electronic component for mounting that has the same shape in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effects, for example, the "specific type of discrete component" If the "Schottky barrier diode" is surface-mounted on the second substrate, the "PN diode" is a "discrete component different from the specific type", and is not mounted on the second substrate and is a different substrate. is required to be implemented in Strictly speaking, when surface-mounting a "Schottky barrier diode" as a "specific type of discrete component" to the second board, the same product "Schottky barrier diode" must be mounted on the second board. It is desirable that the "Schottky barrier diode" of a different product is not mounted on the second substrate but is mounted on a different substrate.

However, in the board included in the main control board 1310, it is required to mount many types of discrete components in addition to the specific type of discrete components. Therefore, in order to achieve more suitable miniaturization (integration) of hardware circuits, the only difference is the type of discrete components to be surface-mounted, and the other structures (no insertion mounting area or , being mounted only on one side, a mold structure, etc.) is prepared, and only one type of discrete component different from the specific type is surface-mounted. Further, it is desirable that the third substrate is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area of the first substrate so as to be electrically connected to other mounted electronic components. According to such a configuration, the substrates (the second substrate and the third substrate) having the mold structure described above for each type of discrete component are different electronic components (in the example of FIG. 118, the special mounting component D3a, the special (equivalent to the mounting component D3b), and the shape to be monitored for each board having a mold structure (the degree of swelling in the mold member) is unified to monitor the above-mentioned fraudulent activity (e.g. confirmation of whether or not a type of electronic component that should not be mounted is mounted), it is possible to maintain the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting, It becomes possible to suitably solve problems such as "miniaturization of circuits". In addition to the second board and the third board, boards on which only discrete components of a different type from those mounted on these boards are surface-mounted may be similarly prepared.

If only one discrete component is surface-mounted on the second and third substrates as shown in FIG. In combination, it is possible to more preferably solve the problem of "miniaturizing hardware circuits while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting".

Further, when a plurality of substrates molded in this way (here, the second substrate and the third substrate (corresponding to the special mounting component D3a and the special mounting component D3b in the example of FIG. 118)) are provided, these substrates Preferably, each surface mounting surface (the surface on the other side described above) is arranged so as to face a specific direction. According to such a configuration, since it is possible to collectively check the degree of swelling of the molding member of each substrate from the same direction, it is possible to monitor the above-mentioned fraudulent activity (e.g. confirmation of whether or not an electronic component is mounted) can be facilitated.

Furthermore, each member (mold member) that molds the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component side identification mark corresponding to the type of the discrete component surface-mounted on each of the substrates. In addition, it is desirable that the surfaces on which the component side identification marks are attached face the same direction. That is, in this case, it is possible to make one-to-one correspondence between the "type of component side identification mark" attached to each of the second substrate and the third substrate and the "shape to appear on the mold member". , it becomes possible to facilitate fraud monitoring as to whether replacement of parts has occurred. In this case, it is preferable that the component side identification mark is attached to the mold surface opposite to the side where the surface mounting area is formed (the surface on which the mold member does not bulge). It is desirable to eliminate the distortion as the identification mark so as not to cause an erroneous confirmation.

Further, according to the above configuration, for the second substrate and the third substrate in which the surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed, one electronic component molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate is formed. They are provided as components and are inserted and mounted in an insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate so that their substrate surfaces are perpendicular to each other. That is, in this case, the second board and the third board on which the discrete components originally provided as surface-mounted components are mounted are treated as if they were insertion-mounted components without creating a large space between them and the first board. Therefore, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the performance of suppressing mounting of illegal components.

However, in order to preferably maintain the performance of suppressing the mounting of illegal components, the appearance of "an electronic component inserted and mounted on the first board as if it were an insertion mounted component" should be changed to the second board or the second board. It is required that they are held by the third substrate so as not to be seen on the substrate on which the surface mounting area is formed. Therefore, the second and third substrates should be designed so that multiple types of discrete components are not surface-mounted, integrated circuit components are not surface-mounted, and furthermore, as shown in FIG. To make only one discrete component surface-mounted is to suppress the size of the board and convert it into one insertion-mounting component (a structure in which an electric element is connected to an insertion-mounting lead portion by a bonding wire). It can be said that it is extremely important in making it look as if it is a general electronic component (discrete component) that has been used. That is, the surface mounting area formed on the second substrate and the third substrate includes at least an insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate and an empty state where nothing is mounted on the first substrate. It is required that the area be made smaller than the surface mounting area provided.

Furthermore, after making the second substrate and the third substrate compact in this way, the first substrate has the second substrate and the third substrate each having one electron. Insertion mount components (discrete components) that are mounted at a lower mounting height than those electronic components that are inserted and mounted as components (discrete components (general electronic components that have a structure in which electrical elements are connected to lead parts for insertion mounting by bonding wires) components)), and insertion mounting components that are mounted at a higher mounting height than these electronic components (discrete components (general electronic components with a structure in which electrical elements are connected to insertion mounting leads by bonding wires)) and are preferably arranged respectively. According to such a configuration, the second substrate and the third substrate in which the surface mounting region having inferior fraud prevention performance is formed are inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate and having excellent fraud prevention performance. It becomes possible to make it look more suitable as if it were a single electronic component. In this sense, the second substrate and the third substrate may be provided as electronic components (mold components) smaller than any of the integrated circuit components inserted and mounted on the first substrate, or may be inserted into the first substrate. It can also be said that it is important to provide an electronic component (mold component) that is smaller than the largest discrete component to be mounted.

In addition to the substrate (first substrate) on which the insertion mounting area according to this embodiment is formed, in general, substrates on which electronic components are mounted also have substrates corresponding to the types of the electronic components to be mounted. In many cases, a side identification indication is attached, and for example, an electrical symbol corresponding to the Schottky barrier diode is attached near the location where the Schottky barrier diode is mounted. However, with respect to the second board and the third board according to the present embodiment, it is possible to conceal which type of electronic component it functions as, thereby increasing the difficulty of understanding the circuit. It can be said that this is desirable in terms of suitably maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of illegal components.

Therefore, in the insertion mounting surface of the first substrate, in the vicinity of each position where the second substrate and the third substrate are inserted and mounted as one electronic component, different substrate side identification marks are attached respectively. However, any of these board-side identification marks, including the board-side identification marks attached corresponding to mounting electronic components of the same type, is any board-side identification mark within the insertion mounting area of the first control unit MCG. It is desirable to use a unique mode different from the display (for example, a special display mode such as "?" or "*"). That is, in this case, even if the board side identification mark (mounting surface of the first board) attached near the position where the second board and the third board are respectively inserted and mounted is confirmed, the mode is the same type of mounting electronic device. Since it is a unique aspect that is different from the board-side identification marking attached corresponding to the component, which type is mounted as the discrete component surface-mounted on the second board or the third board, respectively. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize

However, in the case of adopting a structure that increases the difficulty of circuit understanding by concealing which type of electronic component the second board and the third board function as in this way, the type There is concern that a person with malicious intent may try to check the internal elements by scraping the mold member.

Therefore, with respect to the second substrate and the third substrate, first, the surface mounting surface (surface mounting surface in a molded state) formed on these substrates should not be provided with any substrate side identification indication. However, even if a person with malicious intent scrapes the mold member and tries to check the inside of it, it is difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component. is desirable.

Furthermore, with respect to each discrete component surface-mounted in the surface-mounting area formed on the second substrate and the third substrate, most of the discrete components inserted-mounted in the insertion-mounting area formed on the first substrate is configured by molding with a first mold member of a different color, and then both the second substrate and the third substrate to be mounted are molded with a second mold member of the same or similar color as the specific color Further, it is desirable that the molded electronic component is inserted and mounted in an insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate. According to such a configuration, the second substrate and the third substrate having the surface mounting region inferior in fraud prevention performance are molded in the same manner as other insertion mounting components and mounted on the first substrate. Even in the case of insertion mounting, the manager on the hall side can easily find out where the second board and the third board are. It becomes possible to facilitate confirmation of whether or not there is.

In this case, even a malicious person will be helped to grasp information about which surface mounting area (second substrate or third substrate) having inferior anti-fraud performance is provided. could become In this regard, in the above configuration, the type of the discrete component as the electronic component is concealed by molding the discrete component surface-mounted on the surface-mounting area with the second molding member together with the second substrate or the third substrate. In addition, the second mold member is provided in the same or similar color as the specific color assigned to the first mold member of the surface-mounted discrete component. ing. That is, in this case, in order to ascertain the type of the discrete component surface-mounted in the surface-mounting area, a person with malicious intent scrapes the second mold member and attempts to confirm the inside thereof. Even so, it is difficult to determine whether the second mold member molded together with the second substrate or the third substrate is being scraped, or whether the first mold member inside the second mold member is being scraped. As a result, it is expected that the type of the electronic component will be concealed and the difficulty of understanding the circuit will be favorably maintained.

Further, as described above, in this illustrative example, of the insertion mounting surface of the first substrate, in the vicinity of each position where the second substrate and the third substrate are inserted and mounted as one electronic component, on the same mounting surface A board-side identification display having a unique mode (for example, a special display mode such as "?" or "*") different from any board-side identification display is attached. However, if only the board-side identification display with such a unique aspect is attached, it is impossible for the hall side to grasp which type of electronic component it functions as. There is concern that it may adversely affect management. Therefore, in the vicinity of each position where the second board and the third board are inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the insertion mounting surface of the first board, a board having a unique aspect is placed at a relatively easily visible position. In addition to attaching a side identification mark, electronic components for mounting of the same type (or different It is desirable to secretly attach a board-side identification mark having the same form as the board-side identification mark attached corresponding to the same type of mounted electronic component on the board.

Further, as described above, in this illustrative example, the surface mounting area of the second board includes a specific type (for example, a Schottky barrier diode) of various discrete components mounted on the board of the main control board 1310. only discrete components (electronic components for mounting) are surface-mounted. In addition, in the surface mounting area of the third board, among various discrete components mounted on the board of the main control board 1310, one type different from the specific type (for example, having a relatively small specific capacity). Only discrete components (electronic components for mounting) of capacitors) are surface mounted. According to these configurations, it is obvious that the second substrate and the third substrate alone cannot function as a discrete circuit having a specific function (for example, a backup circuit or a filter circuit). That is, electronic components for mounting to be surface-mounted in a surface-mounting area formed on a molded substrate (second substrate or third substrate) and a substrate (here) different from the substrate (second substrate or third substrate) Then, by configuring a specific discrete circuit with mounting electronic components surface-mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate), the difficulty of understanding the circuit is increased, and the molded substrate (Second board or third board) It is difficult to replace this itself (because the structure in the mold is concealed, and it is necessary to create a mold part that does not have a specific circuit function) and is illegal. It is expected that countermeasures will be provided.

As described above, in summarizing the techniques described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, configurations having several technical features have been described in the order in which synergistic effects can be expected. Each configuration is merely described as the best embodiment, and it is not always necessary to use all of the configurations when implementing, and the configurations can be appropriately combined regardless of the order in which they are described. It is possible to implement

Next, technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiment and modifications will be described below.

[Technical concept 1-1]
A specific control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted and capable of executing control power source generation processing and game progress processing by using the electronic components,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
an insertion mounting region in which the lead provided on the electronic component is mounted by being inserted into the base plate;
a surface mounting area in which leads provided on the electronic component are mounted on the surface of the base plate;
At least one of the surface-mounted components among the plurality of electronic components mounted in the surface-mounting region is molded with a mold resin, even though the surface-mounted component itself is molded with the mold resin. is also molded with another molding resin together with the surface mounting area to be mounted thereon.

[Technical concept 1-2]
a first control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted and capable of executing control power source generation processing and game progression processing by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, a performance progress process can be executed according to the result of the game progress process;
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing,
The base plate of the second control unit has an insertion mounting region in which lead portions provided on the electronic component are mounted by being inserted into the base plate, and an insertion mounting region in which the lead portions provided on the electronic component are mounted on the base plate. Only the surface mounting area is provided among the surface mounting areas mounted on the surface of the
both the insertion mounting area and the surface mounting area are provided on the base plate of the first control unit,
Among the plurality of electronic components, a first-side surface-mounted component mounted on the surface-mounted area provided on the base plate of the first control section and the surface-mounted area provided on the base plate of the second control section. In spite of the fact that the mounted second-side surface-mounted components are themselves molded with a mold resin, the first-side surface-mounted components and the second-side surface-mounted components A gaming machine, wherein the surface mounting area of the first side surface mounting component is further molded with a mold resin different from the molding resin of the first side surface mounting component itself.

In such technical concepts 1-1 and 1-2, the surface-mounted parts mounted in the surface-mounted area inferior in fraud prevention performance are themselves molded with molding resin. Since it is integrally molded with the surface mounting area to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin, it is possible to perform some kind of tampering on the surface mounting area that is inferior in tampering prevention performance. becomes extremely difficult.

[Technical concept 2]
A specific control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted and capable of executing control power source generation processing and game progress processing by using the electronic components,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
an insertion mounting board on which the insertion mounting lead portions provided on the insertion mounting component of the electronic component are mounted so as to be inserted;
a surface-mounting board on which surface-mounting leads provided on the surface-mounting component of the electronic component are mounted so as to be placed on the surface;
The surface mounting board includes:
at least a special surface mounting board having a lead portion for special insertion mounting formed so as to extend outward from the surface mounting board and be insertable into the insertion mounting board,
On the special surface mounting board,
a wiring portion formed to electrically connect the lead portion for surface mounting of the surface-mounted component to be mounted on the special surface-mounting board and the lead portion for special insertion mounting;
The surface mount components mounted on the special surface mount board are
Only the lead portion for special insertion mounting out of the lead portion for surface mounting and the lead portion for special insertion mounting is integrally molded together with the special surface mounting plate so that only the lead portion for special insertion mounting is pulled out to the outside of the molding resin, A game machine characterized by being mounted on the insertion mounting board as one electronic component having a lead portion for special insertion mounting.

In technical idea 2, a surface mount component mounted in a surface mount area with inferior fraud prevention performance functions as if it were an insertion mount component mounted in an insertion mount region with excellent fraud prevention performance. can be expected to be excluded from malicious purposes.

[Technical concept 3]
A specific control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted and capable of executing control power source generation processing and game progress processing by using the electronic components,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
an insertion mounting board on which the insertion mounting lead portions provided on the insertion mounting component of the electronic component are mounted so as to be inserted;
a surface-mounting board on which surface-mounting leads provided on the surface-mounting component of the electronic component are mounted so as to be placed on the surface;
The surface mount component includes:
at least a discrete surface mount component in which a single function element is molded with a mold resin,
The discrete surface mount component comprises:
The discrete surface-mounted component is integrally molded together with the surface-mounted board on which it is to be mounted using a mold resin different from the mold resin of the discrete surface-mounted component itself, and thus has a relatively large external shape and a base of the specific control unit. A game machine characterized by having an external shape different from any of all electronic components mounted on a board.

In this technical idea 3, after giving excessive security performance such as protection with double mold resin to mere discrete surface mounted parts that can only have limited functions compared to arithmetic processing units etc. , a unique and relatively large external shape is provided as an external shape that dares to attract the attention of malicious persons. That is, in this case, it is possible to show the third party the excessive security performance provided in the specific control unit, so that it can be expected that the willingness to commit fraud will decrease.

[Technical concept 4]
A specific control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted and capable of executing control power source generation processing and game progress processing by using the electronic components,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
an insertion mounting region in which the lead provided on the electronic component is mounted by being inserted into the base plate;
a surface mounting area in which leads provided on the electronic component are mounted on the surface of the base plate;
In the base plate of the specific control unit, the surface mounting areas are provided dispersedly in a plurality of locations so that each area is a relatively small area, while the insertion mounting areas are dispersedly provided. A gaming machine provided as a relatively large area surrounding at least one of the provided surface mounting areas.

In such a technical idea 4, the surface mounting area with inferior anti-tampering performance is not gathered in one place, but is dispersed to make it less conspicuous. They are arranged in such a way that they are slipped into the insertion mounting area provided as an area. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a malicious person to notice the presence of the surface mounting area when looking at the base plate of the specific control unit. It is expected that hardware circuits will be miniaturized.

[Technical concept 5]
A specific control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed and capable of executing control power supply generation processing and game progress processing by using the electronic circuits,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The plurality of electronic circuits include:
A backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is cut off is included as a discrete circuit having at least a capacitor and a diode, both of which are single-function electronic components. ,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
an insertion mounting region in which the lead provided on the electronic component is mounted by being inserted into the base plate;
a surface mounting area in which leads provided on the electronic component are mounted on the surface of the base plate;
The insertion mounting area is
provided as a relatively large area surrounding the surface mounting area so that electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area are adjacent to some of the electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area;
The backup power supply circuit
Although the discrete circuit is provided as a discrete circuit having a backup power supply function that supplies backup power to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is cut off, the capacitor and the diode included in the discrete circuit One of the electronic components is mounted on the surface mounting area surrounded by the insertion mounting area, and the other electronic component is mounted on the surface mounting area in the insertion mounting area. A game machine characterized by being mounted at a position not adjacent to a part.

In this technical idea 5, although it is a discrete circuit intended to exhibit a specific electrical function (backup power supply function), it can be mounted in the insertion mounting area on the base plate. There will be a mixture of electronic components with a shape that allows smoothness and electronic components with a shape that allows mounting on the surface mounting area. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate of the specific control unit, remember that they have a close electrical role in order to perform a specific electrical function (backup power supply function). By increasing the difficulty of circuit understanding, fraud can be expected to be suppressed.

Moreover, the surface mounting area, which has inferior anti-tampering performance, is arranged in such a way that it can be blended into the insertion mounting area, which is provided as a relatively large area with excellent anti-tampering performance. The capacitors and diodes included in one discrete circuit for the purpose of exhibiting the power supply function) are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud prevention performance, and even if the existence is noticed, the electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area cooperate with other electronic components. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to remember what kind of electrical function the circuit is implemented for. can be expected.

[Technical concept 6]
A specific control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted and capable of executing control power source generation processing and game progress processing by using the electronic components,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
an insertion mounting board mounted in such a manner that lead portions for insertion mounting provided on the electronic component are inserted;
a surface mounting board on which surface mounting leads provided on the electronic component are mounted so as to be placed on the surface;
The surface mounting board includes:
at least a special surface mounting board having a lead portion for special insertion mounting formed so as to extend outward from the surface mounting board and be insertable into the insertion mounting board,
The special surface mounting board is
a wiring portion formed to electrically connect the lead portion for surface mounting of an electronic component to be mounted on the special surface mounting board and the lead portion for special insertion mounting; The special insertion mounting lead portions are inserted into the insertion mounting board so that the mounting surfaces are substantially orthogonal to each other.

A gaming machine characterized by:

In general, components mounted on a surface mounting board often have a flat shape. In this regard, in the technical idea 6, the special surface mounting board is arranged so that the mounting surfaces of the insertion mounting board are substantially perpendicular to each other. That is, in this case, a thin surface having a relatively small area, rather than a flat surface having a relatively large area, faces the insertion mounting board. The special surface mounting board can be arranged even in a situation where only a small area (surface area) is left.

[Technical concept 7]
A specific control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted and capable of executing control power source generation processing and game progress processing by using the electronic components,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
an insertion mounting board on which the insertion mounting lead provided on the electronic component is mounted so as to be inserted;
a surface mounting board on which surface mounting leads provided on the electronic component are mounted so as to be placed on the surface of the base board,
Among the plurality of electronic components, the surface-mounted components mounted on the surface-mounted board include specific surface-mounted components having a size that fits within installation intervals of specific insertion holes provided on the insertion mounting board. and
The specific surface mount component is
Although the size is within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole, the specific surface mount component is integrated with the surface mount board to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific surface mount component itself. A game machine characterized by having an external shape as an electronic component having a size that does not fit within the installation interval of the specific insertion holes by being molded.

In other words, if the specific surface-mounted component is left with an external shape that is smaller than the installation interval of the insertion holes in the insertion-mounting board, a surface-mounted area with inferior tampering prevention performance is provided in the specific control unit. It becomes easy for a third party to notice it, and it may encourage fraudulent acts.

In this regard, in the technical idea 7, the specific surface-mounted component is integrally molded with the surface-mounted board to be mounted with a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific surface-mounted component itself. Since the appearance shape of an electronic component with a size that does not fit within the installation interval of a specific insertion hole appears, a surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud prevention performance is provided in the specific control unit. It becomes possible to make it difficult for a third party to notice that.

[Technical concept 8]
a first control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a game progress process by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using these electronic components, a production progress process according to the result of the game progress process can be executed,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in relatively large packages,
The base plate of the first control unit,
an insertion mounting region in which the lead portions provided on the electronic component for mounting are mounted by being inserted into the base plate;
a surface mounting area in which lead portions provided on the electronic component for mounting are mounted on the surface of the base plate;
the base plate of the first control unit includes at least a first substrate and a second substrate as substrates on which the surface mounting area is formed;
The first substrate is
Neither the discrete component nor the integrated circuit component is mounted on the surface mounting area, and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is exposed, and faces the rear side of the gaming machine. It is arranged in
The second substrate is
Of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component, the integrated circuit component is not mounted on the surface mounting area, but only the discrete component is mounted, and is oriented in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine. A game machine characterized by being arranged.

In this technical idea 8, a first substrate is intentionally prepared in which a surface mounting area is formed in which no electronic component for mounting is mounted and which is in a vacant state. The pattern wiring is arranged so as to face the rear side of the game machine while the pattern wiring is exposed. In other words, in this case, when a malicious person attempts to commit fraud from behind the game machine, "No electronic components for mounting are mounted on the surface mounting area, which is inferior in fraud prevention performance, and it is highly fraudulent as a game machine." It has come to play a role as a billboard that appeals that it is equipped with suppression performance, and it is expected that this will suppress the installation of illegal parts.

On the other hand, on the second substrate, the integrated circuit is arranged in a direction different from the rear side of the game machine so that its existence is hardly noticed, and the integrated circuit is mounted on the surface mounting area. Among components and discrete components, integrated circuit components that are likely to be targets of fraud are not mounted, and only discrete components that are unlikely to be targets of fraud are mounted. That is, in this case, coupled with the existence of the first substrate, it is possible to make it difficult for the existence of the second substrate itself to be noticed, and even if the existence is noticed, the fraud prevention performance is inferior. Since only discrete components that are unlikely to be targeted for fraud are mounted in the surface mounting area, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of illegal components. Become.

[Technical concept 9]
a first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a game progress process by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using the electronic components, a performance progress process according to the result of the game progress process can be executed,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in relatively large packages,
The substrate of the first control unit is
A first substrate formed with an insertion mounting area in which the lead provided on the electronic component for mounting is mounted by being inserted into the substrate, and the lead provided on the electronic component for mounting is provided on the surface of the substrate. a second substrate formed with a surface mounting area to be mounted on top and a special insertion mounting lead portion extending outward and capable of being inserted into the insertion mounting area of the first substrate; and
The first substrate has
An insertion mounting region into which the insertion mounting lead provided on the insertion mounting component can be mounted, and a surface mounting region on which the surface mounting lead provided on the surface mounting component is placed. Although both the surface mounting area that can be mounted is formed, no mounting electronic component is mounted on the surface mounting area formed on the first substrate, and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is not mounted. It is said to remain exposed,
The second substrate has
Only the surface mounting area is formed out of the insertion mounting area and the surface mounting area, and only the discrete component out of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is mounted together with the second substrate. By inserting the special insertion mounting lead part into the insertion mounting area of the first substrate as one electronic component molded in the above, various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate A gaming machine characterized by being electrically connected between them.

In this technical idea 9, as a surface mounting area inferior in fraud prevention performance, a surface mounting area ( a first substrate), and a surface mounting region (second substrate) in which only discrete components, which are difficult to be targeted for unauthorized use, among discrete components and integrated circuit components are surface-mounted and molded together with the substrate. It has That is, in this case, when a malicious person attempts to commit fraud from the rear side of the game machine, the surface mounting area where the mounting electronic parts are mounted is made invisible, and any mounting area is hidden. Since only the surface mounting area where no electronic components are mounted is visible, the surface mounting area is considered to be "a surface mounting area with inferior anti-tampering performance where no mounting electronic components are mounted. , as a game machine, it has a high anti-fraud performance.

Moreover, in addition to the surface mounting area, the first substrate formed with the surface mounting area that plays the role of the advertising tower is also formed with an insertion mounting area that is excellent in fraud prevention performance. Then, the surface mounting area (second substrate) molded together with the substrate is inserted and mounted. That is, in this case, among the board (first board) giving the impression that "no surface-mounted components are mounted", the insertion mounting region with excellent fraud prevention performance is replaced with the surface mount region (first substrate) with inferior fraud prevention performance. 2 substrates) are incorporated into the mold in such a way that it is difficult to see, so it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of illegal parts. Become.

[Technical concept 10]
a first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a game progress process by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using the electronic components, a performance progress process according to the result of the game progress process can be executed,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in relatively large packages,
The substrate of the first control unit is
A first substrate formed with an insertion mounting area in which the lead provided on the electronic component for mounting is mounted by being inserted into the substrate, and the lead provided on the electronic component for mounting is provided on the surface of the substrate. a second substrate having a surface mounting area mounted thereon,
In the first substrate,
Electronic components for mounting are not mounted on one surface, and both the discrete components and the integrated circuit components are mounted on the other surface, and the other surface is the rear of the gaming machine. While it is arranged in a form facing the side,
In the second substrate,
Electronic components for mounting are not mounted on one surface, and only the discrete components are mounted on the other surface without the integrated circuit components among the integrated circuit components and the discrete components. is mounted on the first substrate in such a manner that both the one side surface and the other side surface are oriented in a direction different from the rear side of the game machine in a state molded by Amusement machine.

In this technical idea 10, the first substrate on which the insertion mounting area with excellent fraud prevention performance is formed does not mount electronic components for mounting on one side surface, and discrete components and integrated components are integrated on the other side surface. In the state where both the circuit parts and the circuit parts are respectively mounted, the other surface is arranged so as to face the rear side of the game machine. As a substrate (first substrate) to be used as the first substrate, it is possible to suitably secure the performance of suppressing mounting of illegal components and the ease of monitoring.

In addition, regarding the second substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior in fraud prevention performance is formed, electronic components for mounting are not mounted on one surface, and integrated circuit components that are likely to be subject to fraud are mounted on the other surface. Since only discrete parts that are difficult to be illegally targeted are mounted, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of illegal parts. Become.

Moreover, in the second substrate, the surface mounting area on which the discrete components are mounted is molded together with the substrate by the molding member, and both the surface on the one side and the surface on the other side are mounted on the gaming machine. It is arranged so as to face in a different direction from the rear side of the. In other words, in this case, the surface mounting area, which is inferior in fraud prevention performance, is made to function as a special area where it is practically impossible to mount unauthorized parts, and the target (gaming machine) that requires monitoring for mounting unauthorized parts confirmation target from the rear side).

In addition, regarding the surface mounting area (second substrate) excluded from the monitoring target for mounting of illegal components, the thin portion of the substrate faces the rear side (both the one side surface and the other side surface are subject to the monitoring). facing a direction different from the rear side of the game machine), the molded state can be maintained without creating a large space between the first substrate and the first substrate. It becomes possible to mount a second substrate.

[Technical concept 11]
a first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a game progress process by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using the electronic components, a performance progress process according to the result of the game progress process can be executed,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in relatively large packages,
The substrate of the first control unit is
a first substrate having an insertion mounting area in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted;
a second substrate formed with a surface mounting area where the integrated circuit component out of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted, and a specific type of electronic component for mounting out of the discrete component is surface-mounted; and A third substrate on which a surface mounting area is formed in which the integrated circuit component is not mounted among the discrete components and the integrated circuit component, and an electronic component for mounting of a type different from the specific type among the discrete components is surface-mounted. and
The second substrate and the third substrate are
Provided as separate electronic components molded together with discrete components surface-mounted on the substrates, and mounted by insertion into insertion mounting regions formed on the first substrate electrically connectable to various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate,
Each member for molding the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component side identification mark according to the type of the discrete component surface-mounted on each of the substrates. A gaming machine characterized by being arranged so that all faces with identification marks face in a specific direction.

In Technical Concept 11, both integrated circuit components that are likely to be targeted for fraud and discrete components that are less likely to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the first substrate in which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud prevention performance is formed. Then, on the second and third substrates formed with the surface mounting areas inferior in fraud prevention performance, only the discrete components that are difficult to be targeted for fraud are mounted in different types on each substrate.

Therefore, electronic components for mounting mounted on the insertion mounting area side, which has excellent tampering prevention performance, can be mounted on the surface mounting area side, which has inferior tampering prevention performance. Regarding electronic components for mounting, it is checked whether electronic components for mounting with shapes of types corresponding to each of the second and third boards are mounted (Electronic components of types that should not be mounted on the corresponding board) is not implemented), it is expected that even if fraud is done, it will be possible to detect it easily, and the hardware circuit will be miniaturized. become.

Moreover, the second and third substrates, on which the surface-mounted regions having inferior anti-fraud performance are formed, are provided as separate electronic components molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on these substrates. and are inserted and mounted in respective insertion mounting regions formed on the first substrate, so that they can be electrically connected to various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate. there is That is, in this case, a discrete component of a specific type originally provided as a surface mount component and a discrete component of a different type from the specific type are inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if they were insertion mounted components. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the performance of suppressing mounting of illegal components.

Further, each member for molding the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component-side identification mark according to the type of the discrete component surface-mounted on each of the substrates. They are arranged so that the surfaces with the side identification markings all face a specific direction. That is, in this case, the "type of component side identification mark" attached to the second board and the third board inserted and mounted on the first board and the "shape to appear on the mold member" are one-to-one. Since it becomes possible to correspond, it becomes possible to facilitate fraud monitoring as to whether replacement of parts has occurred.

[Technical concept 12]
a first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a game progress process by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using the electronic components, a performance progress process according to the result of the game progress process can be executed,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in relatively large packages,
The board of the first control unit,
a first substrate formed with insertion mounting regions into which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted; a second substrate having a surface mounting area on which discrete components are surface mounted;
The second substrate is
Discrete components to be surface-mounted on the substrate are provided as one electronic component molded together, and insertion mounting is performed in such a manner that the substrate surfaces are perpendicular to the insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate. are electrically connected to various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate,
The first substrate has
When the second substrate is inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the substrate, an insertion mounting component mounted at a lower mounting height than the electronic component, and an insertion mounting component mounted at a higher mounting height than the electronic component. A gaming machine characterized in that insertion mounting components are arranged respectively.

In Technical Concept 12, both integrated circuit components that are likely to be targeted for fraud and discrete components that are less likely to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the first substrate in which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud prevention performance is formed. Since only discrete components that are unlikely to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the second substrate in which a surface mounting area having inferior anti-fraud performance is formed, hardware It is expected that the miniaturization of circuits will be achieved.

Moreover, the second substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior in fraud prevention performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. They are inserted and mounted in such a manner that their substrate surfaces are orthogonal to each other in the inserted mounting area. That is, in this case, the second substrate on which the discrete components that are originally provided as surface-mounted components are mounted can be mounted on the first substrate as if it were insertion-mounted components without creating a large space between the first board and the first board. Therefore, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of illegal parts.

Furthermore, an insertion mounting component mounted on the first substrate at a lower mounting height than the electronic component when the second substrate is inserted and mounted on the substrate as one electronic component, and the electronic component Since the insertion mounting components mounted at a higher mounting height than the second substrate formed with the surface mounting area having inferior fraud prevention performance are arranged, the second substrate formed with the surface mounting area having the inferior fraud prevention performance is placed on the first substrate. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the device is mounted in an insertion mounting region with excellent suppression performance.

[Technical concept 13]
a first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a game progress process by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using the electronic components, a performance progress process according to the result of the game progress process can be executed,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in relatively large packages,
The substrate of the first control unit is
a first substrate formed with insertion mounting regions into which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted; a second substrate having a surface mounting area on which discrete components are surface mounted;
The discrete component surface-mounted on the second substrate is molded with a first molding member having a specific color different from most of the discrete components inserted and mounted on the first substrate. and
The second substrate is
Discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate are provided as one electronic component molded with a second molding member having the same or similar color as the specific color, and an insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate. A game machine characterized by being electrically connectable to various insertion-mounted components mounted on the first substrate by being inserted-mounted to the first substrate.

In this technical concept 13, both integrated circuit components that are likely to be targeted for fraud and discrete components that are difficult to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the first substrate in which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud prevention performance is formed. Since only discrete components that are unlikely to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the second substrate in which a surface mounting area having inferior anti-fraud performance is formed, hardware It is expected that the miniaturization of circuits will be achieved.

Moreover, the second substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior in fraud prevention performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. It is designed to be inserted and mounted for the inserted insertion mounting area. That is, in this case, the second substrate on which the discrete components that are originally provided as surface-mounted components are mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if they were insertion-mounted components. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the performance of suppressing mounting of illegal parts.

Further, for discrete components to be surface-mounted in the surface-mounting area formed on the second substrate, the first molding member has a color different from most of the discrete components to be inserted-mounted in the insertion-mounting area formed on the first substrate. After that, it is configured as one electronic component that is further molded with a second mold member that is the same as or similar to the specific color together with the second substrate to be mounted. I have to.

Therefore, even if the second board on which the surface mounting area inferior in fraud prevention performance is formed is molded in the same form as other insertion mounting components and is inserted and mounted on the first board, the hole The administrator on the side can easily find out where the second board is, and can easily confirm whether or not the second board has been tampered with. However, in this case, even a malicious person may be helped to grasp information about where the surface mounting area (second substrate) inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided.

In this regard, in the above configuration, the discrete components surface-mounted on the surface-mounting area are molded together with the second substrate by the second molding member, thereby concealing the type of the electronic component and making it difficult to understand the circuit. The second mold member is provided with the same or similar color as the specific color assigned to the first mold member of the surface-mounted discrete component. That is, in this case, in order to ascertain the type of the discrete component surface-mounted in the surface-mounting area, a person with malicious intent scrapes the second mold member and attempts to confirm the inside thereof. Even so, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the second mold member molded together with the second substrate is being scraped or the first mold member inside it is being scraped. As a result, it is expected that the type of the electronic component will be concealed and the difficulty of understanding the circuit will be favorably maintained.

[Technical concept 14]
a first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a game progress process by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using the electronic components, a performance progress process according to the result of the game progress process can be executed,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in relatively large packages,
The substrate of the first control unit is
a first substrate formed with insertion mounting regions into which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted; a second substrate having a surface mounting area on which discrete components are surface mounted;
The second substrate is
The first substrate is provided as one electronic component molded together with discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and is inserted and mounted in an insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate. It is possible to electrically connect with various insertion mounting parts mounted on the
The mounting surface of the second substrate is not provided with any substrate-side identification markings corresponding to the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and the mounting surface of the first substrate is provided with the one electronic component. A specific board-side identification mark is attached corresponding to the position where the second board is inserted and mounted, and the specific board-side identification mark is attached corresponding to the same type of electronic component for mounting. A game machine characterized by having a unique aspect that is different from any of the board-side identification marks attached within the insertion mounting area of the game machine, including the board-side identification marks.

In this technical concept 14, both integrated circuit components that are likely to be targeted for fraud and discrete components that are difficult to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the first substrate in which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud prevention performance is formed. Since only discrete components that are unlikely to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the second substrate in which a surface mounting area having inferior anti-fraud performance is formed, hardware It is expected that the miniaturization of circuits will be achieved.

Moreover, the second substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior in fraud prevention performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. It is designed to be inserted and mounted for the inserted insertion mounting area. That is, in this case, the second substrate on which the discrete components that are originally provided as surface-mounted components are mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if they were insertion-mounted components. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the performance of suppressing mounting of illegal components.

Furthermore, the mounting surface (surface mounting surface) of the second substrate is not provided with any substrate-side identification markings corresponding to the discrete components to be surface-mounted on the substrate, and the mounting surface of the first substrate is is attached with a specific board-side identification mark corresponding to the position where the second board as the one electronic component is inserted and mounted, and the specific board-side identification mark is an electronic component for mounting of the same type. Including the board-side identification mark attached corresponding to the , it is a unique aspect different from any of the board-side identification marks attached in the first control section and the second control section. That is, in this case, even if the specific board-side identification mark attached to the mounting surface of the first board is confirmed, the aspect thereof is different from the board-side identification mark attached corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component. Since it is a unique aspect, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component surface-mounted on the second substrate. In addition, even if a person with malicious intent scrapes the mold member and attempts to check the inside of the mold member in order to grasp the type of the discrete component that is surface-mounted in the surface-mounting area, It is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component.

[Technical concept 15]
a first control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed and capable of executing control power source generation processing and game progression processing by using the electronic circuits;
a second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and by using the electronic circuits, a production progress process according to the result of the game progress process can be executed,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The plurality of electronic circuits provided in the first control unit include:
Consists of electronic components for mounting single-function elements, and includes a specific discrete circuit intended to perform a specific electrical function,
the base plate of the first control unit has an insertion mounting area and a surface mounting area formed on different substrates;
On the specific substrate on which the surface mounting area is formed in the base plate, only a specific type of mounting electronic component among the plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit is surface-mounted. and mounted on a substrate different from the specific substrate by being inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on the substrate different from the specific substrate. is electrically connectable between the insertion mounting parts of
Electronic components for mounting other than the specific type among the plurality of types of electronic components for mounting constituting the specific discrete circuit are inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate. A game machine characterized by being

According to Technical Concept 15, only discrete components (mounting electronic components that make up a specific discrete circuit) that are difficult to be targeted for fraud are mounted on a specific substrate formed with a surface mounting region that is inferior in fraud prevention performance. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the performance of suppressing mounting of illegal components.

Moreover, in a specific substrate in which a surface mounting area inferior in fraud prevention performance is formed, only a specific type of mounting electronic component among a plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting a specific discrete circuit is surface-mounted. and mounted on a substrate different from the specific substrate by being inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on the substrate different from the specific substrate. It is designed to be electrically connectable with the insertion mount component of the.

That is, in this case, the specific substrate on which the surface-mounted component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if it were an insertion-mounted component. It is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the In addition, since only a specific type of mounting electronic component among the mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit is surface-mounted on the above-mentioned specific board, it is necessary to check whether the surface mounting area has been tampered with. can be made easier. In addition, since the specific board is molded together with the specific type of mounting electronic components, it is inserted and mounted on another board on which other mounting electronic components are inserted and mounted. To increase the difficulty of understanding a specific discrete circuit formed over a surface mounting area formed in a substrate and an insertion mounting area formed in a substrate different from the specific substrate, and serve as an anti-fraud measure. is expected.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described, followed by various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be explained.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When the signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 which are storage trays (a device that pays out game balls as rental balls) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88(a), the main control board Command 10H to command 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951. Command 10H designates one prize ball, and command 11H. , 2 prize balls are specified, . . . , 15 prize balls are specified by command 1EH. The payout control board 951 controls to drive the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322, which are storage trays, as rental balls) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. Commands 20H to 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be sent to , command 20H designates one prize ball, command 21H designates two prize balls, and command 2EH designates a prize ball. 15 spheres are specified. The payout control board 951 controls to drive the payout motor 834 and pay out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88(c), and the command 30H designates a self-check. If an ACK signal output from the receiving side as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input. Check connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6 .

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. and a mode showing variations of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

Various commands, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, are related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power on, normal figure synchronization effect related, normal electric role effect related, notification display, status classified into display and others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 synchronization effect relation is based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. Consists of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and state designation at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned a status of "A*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 1 specification command specifies loss, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. , Toku-zu 1 synchronization production end command is intended to indicate the end of Toku-zu 1 synchronization production, the state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates the probability and time saving state. In addition, in the probability and time saving state, a low probability time saving state indicating that it is a low probability state and a time saving state, a high probability state indicating that it is a time saving state, a low probability It consists of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (as a normal game state, A low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of hitting the jackpot is set higher than the low probability state (normal game state), and the time saving state is, for example, normal by the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. By shortening the time during which patterns are variably displayed as compared with a non-time-saving state (normal game state) and stop-displaying in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result, the ordinary lottery result by the ordinary lottery to be described later in a predetermined time is obtained. The number of times of stop display is increased compared to the non-time saving state, and the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is increased compared to the non-time saving state (normal game state). By increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of the game ball to the second start port 2004 shown, it is possible to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity without reducing the number of balls (in other words, compared to the non-time saving state By increasing the number of determinations as to whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces, and by lengthening the period of the opening and closing operation of the pair of movable pieces when the pair of movable pieces are to be opened and closed, the second starting port 2004 It is a state of increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of game balls to.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization production start, Special figure 1 synchronization The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (at the time of special symbol 1 determination), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the special symbol win-loss information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[13-2-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronization Production Related]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second start opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. It consists of a command named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end regarding the second special symbol display device 1405 of. These various commands are assigned a status of "B*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 2 specification command specifies loss, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization production is intended to instruct the end of the special figure 2 synchronization production.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 89, the section related to big win includes big win opening, big win 1 open Nth time display, big win 1 closed display, big win 1 count display, big win ending, big win pattern display, small win opening. , small-hit open display, small-hit count display, and small-hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of jackpot opening. During or start of opening of the N-th round of the large winning opening 2005), the large winning opening 1 closed display command is the start of the closing of the large winning opening 1 between rounds (large opening of the starting opening unit 2100). The command for displaying the number of game balls from 0 to 10 (count 0 to 10) indicates that the winning opening 2005 is being closed or has started closing between rounds (shown in FIG. 69). The number of game balls that entered the big winning opening 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted, the big winning ending command instructs the start of the big winning ending, and the big winning design display command It instructs the display of pattern information.

In addition, the small hit opening command instructs the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is the start of the small hit opening (during the opening of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting unit 2100 at the time of the small hit or opening start), and the small hit count display command is a small hit middle and big winning opening winning effect (when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 during a small hit is detected by the count sensor , and the small-hit ending command instructs the start of the small-hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, and the big win opening 1 Nth display command is when the big win 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (of the starter unit 2100 When the large winning opening 2005 is opened for the Nth round), the large winning opening 1 closed display command is transmitted when the large winning opening 1 is closed (start closing the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100), The large winning opening 1 count display command is used when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starter unit 2100 and when the game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending starts, and the jackpot pattern display command is sent when the big win opening is opened (when the big win opening 2005 of the starter unit 2100 is opened) ).

In addition, the small winning opening command is transmitted at the start of the small winning opening, and the small winning opening display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small winning (at the time of opening the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 at the time of the small winning), The small hit count display command is transmitted when the small hit middle and large winning opening is won (when the game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small winning), and the small winning ending command is , Sent at the start of the small winning ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the category of power-on consists of a command named "power-on state" and "return destination of main control at power-on". These various commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. When the power is turned on (including when the power is restored when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure in addition to when the power is turned on), the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. Information to instruct when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure). .) In the above-mentioned, low probability short working hours state, high probability short working hours state, low probability non-short working hours state, and high probability non short working hours state Information that indicates whether to return in which state (probability and short working hours state) , and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine is, for example, what kind of game specification (for example, probability variation occurs In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in the state where the number of times the special symbol is changed is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (so-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of a pachinko machine consists of a series code for specifying which type of machine type is the max type, middle type, or sweet digital type, and a series code for specifying the copyright of the work. and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the game specification that the state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs, in addition to the probability change in a state where the number of special symbol fluctuations is limited and a game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) that causes

The main control return destination command at power-on instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

As for the transmission timing of the power-on state command and the main control recovery target command at power-on, when the main control board power is turned on ) is sent to Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, the main control side power on time processing described later is executed and the peripheral control board command of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Related to Futsuzu Synchronization Production]
The general pattern synchronization production relation is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. Consists of commands with the names of normal pattern synchronization effect start, normal pattern designation, normal pattern synchronization effect end, and change state designation regarding the device 1402. These various commands are assigned a status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal pattern synchronization production start command instructs the start of the general pattern synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern specification command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronous production end command indicates the end of the normal figure synchronous production, and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates the probability and the time saving state. In the probability and time saving state, as described above, a low probability time saving state indicating that it is a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability state indicating that it is a time saving state High probability time saving state It consists of a state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (usually As a game state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general pattern synchronization production start command is sent at the start of normal pattern 1 fluctuation, the general pattern designation command is sent immediately after the general pattern synchronization production start, and the general pattern synchronization production end command is , It is transmitted when the normal pattern fluctuation time elapses (normal pattern confirmation), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the normal pattern win-lose information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
8, which are opened and closed by driving the starting solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. It consists of commands named hit opening, general electric open display, and general drawing ending. These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general pattern per opening command is to instruct the general pattern per opening to start, and the general pattern open display command is the start of general pattern open state, or when expanding), and the ending command per normal pattern instructs the start of ending per normal pattern.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the general pattern opening command is sent at the start of the general pattern opening, and the general pattern open display command is sent when the general pattern is opened (a pair of movable pieces are left and right by driving the start solenoid 2107 When spreading in the direction), the ending command per normal pattern is sent at the start of the ending per normal pattern. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the classification of the notification display consists of commands named Winning Abnormal Display, Connection Abnormal Display, Disconnection/Short Circuit Abnormal Display, Magnetic Detection Switch Abnormal Display, Door Open, and Door Close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is issued when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 when the winning opening is entered except during the big winning (when the condition device is in operation). is detected by the count sensor 4005). It instructs the start of connection abnormality notification when there is a connection abnormality. 4005 or the like, it instructs the start of disconnection/short-circuit abnormality display. It instructs the start of the magnetism detection switch abnormality notification when a

Further, the door open command is based on the detection signal (open signal) from the door frame open switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the open state, the door frame closing command instructs the door open notification, and the door frame closing command causes the door frame 3 to close with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 . When it is in the state of being opened, the end of the door open notification is instructed. On the other hand, the body frame open command is based on the detection signal (open signal) from the body frame open switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the body frame is in the open state, the body frame closing command instructs the body frame open notification. It instructs the end of the notification of the opening of the body frame when the door is in the closed state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a large winning opening other than during the jackpot (during operation of the condition device), and the connection abnormality display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 It is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 at the time of command transmission to, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is the first start sensor 4002, the second start sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door open command is transmitted when door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in a state of being opened with respect to the body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619), and the main body is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display is divided into commands named Frame status 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command), Error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the error cancellation command) and Frame status 2 command. there is These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed descriptions thereof will be given later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. Along with setting the status, the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, the additional information "7*H" is added to these received commands. is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is transmitted when power is restored, when the frame state changes, and during error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted when power is restored. , and when the frame state changes. Note that these formatted frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-9. test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related section consists of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various tests of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration board shown in FIG. 72). This is for inspecting various substrates such as the driving amplifier substrate 194).

As for the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at times other than the RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on and the RAM clear. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. A test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-10. others]
As shown in FIG. 90, the other divisions include start-up winning, variable reduction operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and It consists of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start opening winning command instructs the start of starting opening winning effect, and starts the effect when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002. , the start of the effect when the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 4004, respectively. The high-probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command. , special symbol 1 reserved 0 to 4 (the game ball enters the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. The number of balls that have not been held (number of reservations)), and the special symbol 2 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbols 2 reservations (the game ball enters the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8) The second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (number of reservations) that has not yet been used for the variable display of special symbols, and the normal symbol storage command is normal symbol 1 reservation 0 to 4 It conveys the number of balls (the number of balls (retained number) that have passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and have not yet been used for normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400). There is, and the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command is read ahead and the special symbol 1 is reserved before the special symbol 1 is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 1403 of the function display unit 1400 Based on the first special symbol display device 1403, it is intended to instruct the start of the pre-reading effect to notify the notice of the display result, and the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command is the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Before being used for the variable display of special symbols in the device 1405, it prefetches and instructs the start of the look-ahead performance to announce the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display device 1405 based on the special symbol 2 reservation.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting entrance winning command is issued at the time of starting entrance winning (when the game ball enters the first starting entrance 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting entrance sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second When the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting hole sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The command to specify the end of the fluctuation reduction operation is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is fixed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the stop period has passed), and the high-probability end designation command is , In the case of "high probability N times", it is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the high probability number of times has been digested (after the stop period has passed), and the special symbol 1 storage command is the special symbol 1 operation pending ball number change When the game ball enters the first start port 2002 and the first special symbol display device 1403 of the function display unit 1400 has a reserved number that is not yet used for variable display of special symbols, further the first start When the game ball enters the mouth 2002 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases by using the first special symbol display device 1403 for variable display of special symbols from the number of reservations). , The special symbol 2 storage command is used when the number of special symbol 2 operation pending balls changes (a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 changes the special symbol. In a state where there is a reserved number that is not yet used, when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the second special pattern display 1405 changes the special pattern. used for display and the number of reservations has decreased), and the normal design memory command is transmitted when the number of normal design 1 operation reservation balls changes (the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the normal design of the function display unit 1400 In a state where there is a reserved number that has not yet been used for variable display of normal symbols on the display device 1402, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the normal symbol display device 1402 is displayed. ), and the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls has decreased by using it for variable display of normal symbols, and when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls increases (the game ball is in the first start port 2002 When the number of reserved balls has increased by entering a ball), the special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls in special pattern 2 operation increases (a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases increased). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is issued when the starting opening wins (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second starting opening When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004), it is transmitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly to notify that effect by voice. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start-up winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is designed to be used not only to notify by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also to monitor the presence or absence of fraud. On the other hand, in some other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start-up winning command, and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 do not give voice notification.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 91, various commands from the payout control board 951 are divided into commands named frame state 1, error cancellation navigation, and frame state 2. Frame state 1, error cancellation navigation, and The order of priority is set in the order of frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command (equivalent to the error occurrence command) is prepared for ball out, full tank, stock of 50 or more, connection error and CR unconnected, and bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit.) is set to 1, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1 when the tank is full, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1 when 50 or more stocks are in stock, and connection failure A value of 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value of 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 1 command have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

The error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the error cancellation command) is prepared for ball catching, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. An error sets bit 3 (B3) to the value 1, and a retry error sets the value 1 to bit 4 (B4). Here, the "payout detection sensor error" indicates whether or not the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 is malfunctioning. A "retry error" indicates that an inconsistent game ball was repeatedly put out by a retry operation. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value of 0 in B0, a value of 0 in B1, a value of 0 in B5, a value of 1 in B6, A value of 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared as "draw ball", and bit 0 (B0) is set to "1" during ball draw. Bits 1 (B1) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 2 command have a value of 0 in B1, a value of 0 in B2, a value of 0 in B3, a value of 0 in B4, a value of 1 in B5, a value of 1 in B6, and A value of 0 is set in B7.

As transmission timings for these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at power restoration, frame state change, and error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation. is sent when power is restored and when frame status changes. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart showing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for judging a big hit for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and a reach (reach loss) when not generating a big hit game state. Reach determination random number for use in determination, shown in FIG. 69, the variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 A random number for a display pattern, a random number for a jackpot pattern to be used for determining a jackpot pattern derived and displayed by a first special pattern display device 1403 and a second special pattern display device 1405 when a jackpot game state is generated, and the jackpot pattern. A random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 when generating the small winning game state. A small-hit symbol random number for use in determining a small-hit symbol and a small-hit symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the small-hit symbol random number are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, the random numbers for normal symbol hit determination used to determine whether or not to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. A random number for determining the initial value for determination of a normal symbol hit, and a random number for normal symbol variation display pattern for use in determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402 shown in FIG. prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the big hit judging random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control internal hardware random number circuit 1310an incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first receives a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a with a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. (a clock signal output from the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for normal pattern hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number. .

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. The game information stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as a numerical value, and the checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total is stored in the main control side power failure processing (power failure). When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for determining per normal symbol is the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. extracts the ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on this extracted ID code, performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol per determination. It is a mechanism that executes and sets this derived fixed value. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for determining a normal winning pattern is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value to be set to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol is derived using the ID code, and the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a The first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if the ID code is stored in the external device, and the initial value derivation process is executed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on .

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the taken out ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains the game board 5 by some means, disassembles it, and uses the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number obtained illegally and the normal symbol hit determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5'. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5', that is, in the other pachinko machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. A game state in which a game ball can be received into the starting port 2004 cannot be generated.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a is circuit-configured such that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

92 and 93, the main control program described above performs main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. FIG. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM (game storage section).

Following step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the WDT control register), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts clocking, and the watchdog timer clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a ( hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the WDT 1310af with built-in main control is activated and time measurement is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and clocking is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clocking. It is possible to monitor whether or not

Following step S12, the main control program performs power failure clear processing (step S14). In this power clearing process, first, output of a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitor circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78 is started. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. A comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares +24V with a reference voltage or +12V with a reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. The result of this comparison is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, with logic HI when no power failure or momentary power failure has occurred. Its logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power clearing process, first, by starting to output a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is started. This power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, with the logic being LOW from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It is possible to invert and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and to monitor the signal from the 1Q terminal.

Subsequently, in the power clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs (phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input as a power failure forecast from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). It is Determination of whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure warning signal.

If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilized, the main control program outputs the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is sent from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the logic HI, and passes through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC. is entered in As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latch state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the PR terminal, which is its preset terminal, is LOW in logic, it outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal, which is its output terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute RAM clear processing for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time after the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to the main control MPU 1310a. This is done depending on whether or not the Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it is not intended to instruct the RAM clear, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is being operated by judging that the RAM clear is instructed.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The above-described RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc., stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased, and set to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. do). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure warning signal. When it is determined in step S24 that there is an input of the power failure warning signal, the main control program returns to the determination of step S24 and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared to restart the clocking. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, performs the main control side power-on processing again. A detailed description of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When it is determined in step S24 that there is no power failure warning signal input, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased, and is set to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S28, the main control program compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and retains game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , will be described later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main-control-side power-off process is normally terminated, the main control program sets the work area of the main-control built-in RAM as when power is restored ( step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. "Restoration of power" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and fraudulent means (e.g. A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, the checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as a result of the subsequent various processes being performed. If FLG is not set to 1, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S26, that is, when game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30 , or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power failure processing is not normally completed, the main control program writes all of the main control built-in RAM. Clear the area (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program writes the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as the initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a executes processing when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs RAM clearing and the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. When not completed normally, the unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and based on this taken out ID code, the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for normal design per determination. Perform an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from, and this fixed value is set to the normal symbol per determination initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the normal per symbol determination random number described above. do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input/output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 951, serial input/output ports for the peripheral control board 1510 (reception channel and transmission channel ), the transmission serial port prescaler is set for the communication speed and the presence or absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set for initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

Following step S44, the main control program initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various test information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the game machine testing facility.

Following step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a for updating the jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state by hardware In addition to setting the hardware random number setting register to latch and acquire the random number, the hard random number setting register is set to activate the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, a high-speed predetermined clock signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a (a clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Other values within the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and when all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. A random number (random value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is obtained from a hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number as a big hit determination random number.

Following step S48, the main control program sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored), FIG. A power-on state command and a main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, even if the game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored. be. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are transmitted in main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). By this setting, the main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Subsequent to step S52, the main control program issues an error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main control side main processing is started. Execution of game control side RAM clear processing triggered by receipt will be regulated (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing based on the concept of time-sharing to use the detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954 as an error cancellation navigation command for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. Triggered by the input, RAM clear processing is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, even if the error cancellation navigation command is input, the execution of RAM clear processing is regulated ( Game control side normal operation control means), handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification accompanying the error that occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel an error that occurred in the payout operation, is replaced as a game memory unit for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. Main control built-in RAM (and payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) function as an operation unit for executing RAM clear processing for starting initialization, or after the predetermined time has elapsed, the game It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred regarding the ball dispensing operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no power failure warning signal input in step S54, the main control program performs non-hit-lose random number update processing (step S56). In this non-hit-lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big win symbol initial value determination random number, small winning symbol initial value determination random number, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-hit-lose random number update process, software updates the random numbers that are not related to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination). Incidentally, the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number, normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number, normal symbol variation display pattern random number, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, and the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM and protecting the game information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program is shown in FIG. , 2nd special reservation number display 1406, normal design display 1402, normal design memory display 1188, state display 1401, round display 1407 etc. stop the drive signal which is output (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). By setting the RAM access prohibition, access to the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) becomes impossible, so that updating of the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) can be prevented.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by a fraudulent act.

Here, it will be described that the determination of the presence/absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby processing in step S22, and the subsequent processing proceeds. I will explain the problems in

The VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, charges the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The charge is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the power from the pachinko island facility will be restored by applying +5V charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2. The main control-side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power has been cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when a main control-side main process or a main-control-side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the pachinko island facility is interrupted. When the power is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed without fail.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, during the wait time standby process of step S22 when power is restored, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set) until the system that controls drawing of the device 460 starts to count, and immediately before reaching the waiting time. If an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the charge charged in hardware such as the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42 , and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed, and even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side It may not be possible to complete the main control side power-off processing in the power-on processing. Therefore, when the power is restored again, the main control side power-on processing is started without storing the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on processing is started, and the wait time standby processing of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk or the like, and even if the hall clerk or the like does not express the intention of clearing the RAM, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared). ).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared to restart the clocking. is disabled, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step When it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, so that the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and held immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure from being initialized.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, step S22 When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing the game, the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is supplied with power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing of steps S58 to S68 and the processing at the time of power failure on the main control side, which is composed of an infinite loop. When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64). Since the determination is made, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and held immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by restoring the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control built-in WDT 1310af causes the main control MPU 1310a to forcibly reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S24, the power failure warning signal has not been input. As a result, the main control side power failure processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period for momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure while the main control side power-on processing is being performed at the time of power restoration, the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. In step 24 immediately after, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. When the power failure warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, step S24 is performed. By repeating the determination, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and restarted. When the timer cannot be started, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by such software, steps after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then step S52 It is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) from being updated by preventing the progress to the control flow of setting interrupt permission and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing described later). adopted the mechanism. In this way, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the part provided by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM will not be changed at all, and the power supply on the main control side The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are covered by hardware so that the interruption process is surely completed and the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all. game information) can be reliably prevented from being changed.

Next, a description will be given of the fact that a command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, it is determined that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). In order to convey this, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. As described above, the main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. there is Here, first, when the main control return destination command at power-on does not include the information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 and the information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. , that is, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on as the main control return destination command at power-on is not performed in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big win game state screen (for example, the big win game effect screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to open the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred, the attacker Driving of the solenoid 2108 is started, and the state in which the big prize opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member 2107 is shifted to the state in which it is opened.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state and can be returned. It is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot game state. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the game ball that entered the big winning hole 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107 when, for example, the four rounds (fourth round) of the jackpot game state are finished. Peripheral control from the main control board 1310 of the large winning opening 1 closed display command instructing the transition from the open state to the closed state (that is, start closing between rounds of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100) When the information is sent to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member 2107. A 5th big winning gate opening display command for instructing the transition from the state to the open state (that is, the opening of the 5th round of the big winning gate 2005) is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and time saving state described above, and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. becomes.

In addition, for example, a screen that informs the player that the game state is such that the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and that the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, a screen that indicates that the movable piece is expanded When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen to be communicated to the player in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting solenoid 2107 to display the pair shown in FIG. When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs when the movable piece of the is expanded in the left and right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 stores the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, by restoring to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the starting port solenoid 2107 is started to drive and paired. The movable piece moves from a state in which it rises substantially vertically to a state in which it spreads in the left-right direction.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. , and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 as the game state, and the game state is generated in an advantageous game state for the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and returned, it becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and becomes a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen for telling the presence of the player in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised at the momentary power failure or power failure, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second start port 2004 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is possible to forget that the game state is enabled, and in such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 as the game state at the time of power restoration. In spite of this, when the power is restored, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game should be played.

Thus, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the power-on state command and a command to return to main control at power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the state command at power-on and the command to return to main control at power-on classified into power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives from the main control board 1310 based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, for example, in the above-described example, in the 4 rounds of the jackpot game state, When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large prize winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state by the opening and closing member 2107. Since it is possible to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 that the transition to the state of ) cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, but in the jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning port 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107. (For example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, ``This is a big win. A display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be displayed to instruct a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine to enter a game ball into the big winning hole 2005 after the power is restored, and For example, in the above-described example, in the state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then it is restored. When the power is turned on, a screen notifying that the starting port solenoid 2107 has started to be driven and the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction as the return destination of the main control board 1310 (for example, "Movable pieces The peripheral control board 1510 displays the display area of the game board side production display device 1600 (a screen that conveys the message to the player). can be displayed to instruct a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004 after power is restored. As a result, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 can give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the state command at power-on and the main control return destination command at power-on, can be stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is stored in As for these commands, in the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, and then the main control return destination command at power-on is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on status command is shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown is operated to perform RAM clearing, information to instruct that effect, and when power is turned on (in addition to turning on the power, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is Including when power is restored.) Return in any state (probability and time saving state) from the above-mentioned low probability short working time state, high probability short working time state, low probability non-short working time state, and high probability non short working time state and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is not included in the power-on state command will be described.

As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine is used for the copyright of any work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, It is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) in which a probability change occurs in a state where the game is played 30 times or 70 times).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works coexist.
Then, the worker of the production line is the owner of the copyright of which work out of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It becomes unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is required to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also an assumption and misunderstanding that it flows to the production line. For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the production line may It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is copyrighted, and even if the same work is copyrighted, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) type), and what kind of game specification (game specification or ST machine that when a probability change occurs, that state is continued until the next big win game state occurs). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works coexists, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is produced. The main control board 1310 is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches to the game board 5 the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 turns on the power (including when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, in addition to when the power is turned on), the model code of the pachinko machine In order to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying which type it is, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited; Based on this, by visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to. The model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (if the probability change occurs, the state will continue until the next big win game state occurs) It is also possible to discriminate whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line The operator can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, so that the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work can be sorted into the following. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from being lowered by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5 . Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5 .

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 .

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose storage elements (general-purpose registers) of the main control MPU 1310a have two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the above-described main control side power-on process, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second switch the register bank to the other register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, the processing of saving each register to the stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors control process described later, the normal In addition to the time when the normal symbol indicator 1402 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and normal electric auditors control process, various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are sent to the payout control board 951. Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the payer ACK signal is input to inform that the receiver has been received normally. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. Then, when the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program detects, for example, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, and a game ball that has entered the first start opening 2002 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and a detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 4004 shown in FIG. , a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. The detection signal and the payout control board 951 indicating that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are read, respectively, and the input information is read. is stored in the input information storage area. In addition, the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first start hole 2002, the detection from the second start hole sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second start hole 2004 When each signal is read, the corresponding start-up winning command shown in FIG. 90 and classified as others is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starter sensor 4002, a starter winning command corresponding thereto is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starter sensor 4004. Then, a start-up winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In this embodiment, detection signals from general winning gate sensors 4020 and 4020 that detect game balls that have entered the general winning gates 2001 and 2201, and a count sensor 4005 that detects game balls that have entered the big winning gate 2005 A detection signal from, a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 2002, and a second starting hole sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 2004. The detection signal from the gate 2003 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 2003 are read for the first time when the switch input process is started, and read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs ), each is read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball.

Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003, By performing double reading for a total of two times by comparing the 1st to 3rd times and comparing the 2nd to 4th times, the effect of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible to avoid erroneous detection, detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 Reliability can be improved.

Following step S104, the main control program performs win/lose random number update processing (step S106). In this win-lose random number update process, the above-described random numbers for the big-hit design and random numbers for the small-hit design are updated. Also, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol is also updated. These big hit symbol initial value determination random numbers and small winning symbol initial value determination random numbers are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the random number for the big win pattern and the random number for the small win pattern are related to the win/lose judgment (big win judgment), each counter counts up only each time the win/lose random number update process is performed. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win/lose random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for judging normal symbol hit is counted up to the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for judging normal symbol hit is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit/lose random number update process updates the initial value determination random number for big hit determination. The random number for determining the initial value for judging a normal pattern hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a normal pattern hit. .

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are set to the non The win/lose random number update process and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but each time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-win-lose random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the small-hit symbol initial value determination random number may be updated only in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a prize ball command shown in FIG. When the number of scheduled game balls reaches 10, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area, or A self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for checking the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Or, when the payout control board 951 does not receive the payout ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has received the prize ball command normally, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. A self-check command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 951 . If the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, the number of balls in excess will be added to the number of balls in the next game. In the prize ball control process, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added, and the added number of game balls is calculated. is reached, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, and is stored in the output information storage area as the output information.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program executes various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into the state displays shown in FIG. to send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error generation command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954 .
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to notify the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. store in the area. In addition, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified by state display in FIG. 90 (frame state 1 command, error release The navigation command and frame state 2 command)) are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error generation command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize balls is checked. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input in the non-jackpot game state (when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005), etc. 90 as an abnormal state, a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. (random number) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and this acquired random number is set as a jackpot determination random number. And the big hit judgment random number (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, whether or not (Determine whether or not to generate a big hit game state (referred to as "special lottery")), take out the value of the counter for updating the random number for the big hit pattern, and store it in advance in the main control built-in ROM It determines whether or not it matches the probability variation per determination value (determines whether or not to generate probability variation). Here, "probability change" means that the probability of winning a big hit changes to a high probability (probability variable time) set higher than the normal time (low probability). In this embodiment, as the range of the above-described jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range), a value of 32668 to a value of 32767 is set for a low probability. ~ value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation time determination table. Thus, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step S114, the random number for judging the big hit (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a with built-in main control) and the built-in main control When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) is included in the jackpot determination range.

When these determination results are based on the first start sensor 4002, while creating various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. In some cases, create various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning performance shown in FIG. Set the output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 so as to light the device 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405, and store it in the output information storage area described above as the output information do. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game state, various commands (big win opening command, big winning mouth 1 open Nth time display command, big winning mouth 1) classified as related to big win shown in FIG. Closed display command, large winning opening 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or the opening and closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed. The output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round display lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. At some point, the output of the lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 is set so that the presence or absence of variation is lit in a predetermined color, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the result of this determination, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is extracted as gate information, and the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted. memorize to

This gate information storage area has 0th to 3rd divisions (four divisions), and the gate information is stored in the order of the 0th division, the 1st division, the 2nd division, and the 3rd division. It's like For example, if the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information in the third partition of the information storage is shifted to the second partition of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third partition of the gate information storage becomes a free area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first and second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the first section is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two partitions is shifted to the first partition of the gate information storage, and the second partition of the gate information storage and the third partition of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information so that the total number of the stored gate information is used as a holding ball and the normal symbol storage display 1188 is lit. Based on this, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol memory display 1188 is set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining per normal symbol is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction, so that the second start opening 2004 becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes a game state. The normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, and various commands classified into the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and sent as transmission information. While storing in the above-described transmission information storage area, set the output of the lighting signal to the normal design display device 1402 so as to light the normal design display device 1402 according to the determined normal pattern variation display pattern, and set the output of the lighting signal to the normal design display device 1402 as the output information Store in the output information storage area. In addition, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric role effect shown in FIG. is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. , When the value of the extracted normal symbol per determination random number does not match the normal per symbol determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation is based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random number. Determine the display pattern, create various commands classified into the normal pattern synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the symbol display 1402, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 951 has been normally received, the payout control board 951 , or when in a jackpot game state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2108 that performs the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, and a drive signal is output to the starter solenoid 2107 that performs the opening and closing operation of the movable piece. In addition to outputting, main prize number information output signal, 15 rounds big hit information output signal, 2 rounds big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as time saving information output information, start winning prize information output signal, etc. are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, shown in FIG. Commands, various commands classified as related to big wins (for example, big wins based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball entering the big win opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected Large winning mouth 1 count display command equivalent to mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to general pattern synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role effects, Fig. 90 , various commands classified as notification display (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.), various commands classified as status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation commands and frame state 2 commands), various commands classified into test-related commands, and various commands classified into others are stored. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The data can be transferred to the register 41aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as the main-circumference serial data. When the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. In addition, the power-on status command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM , as main peripheral serial data, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the state command at power-on, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The mode and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, and the game information is read according to this game information. various commands may be stored. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit ) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command having the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command having the form shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame open command (first main body frame open command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame open command (second main body frame open command) is transmitted to (rendering control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame open command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame open command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the production control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

In addition, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is performed by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, the main control built-in WDT 1310af restarts the clocking, thereby preventing the main control MPU 1310a from being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 has the above-described backup function for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup processing was executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. 89, which instructs the driving state of the starting solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108, which are the electrical driving sources, by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine. It is designed to be able to output to That is, the main control board 1310 is the main controller in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored), a power-on state command and a power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command at power-on. Send to Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, sets the game board side effect display device 1600 as the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. effect can be displayed in the display area. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while a player is playing a game and power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a stuck state, a so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the device is out of order because the player sees the device in the broken state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding a malfunction by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. At step S38 in the main control side power-on processing, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same processing, the power-on state command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. and the main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the main peripheral serial data constitutes the power-on state command, The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in that order, and then the main control board inspection is performed in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command at power-on. Send to the inspection equipment in the process. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process configures the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code for specifying which type is the above-mentioned model type from the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (For example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of times of special symbol fluctuation is limited (ST machine), etc.), and detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process.

[16-1. Various control processing of the peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When this peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the performance control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, the hot start/cold start determination process, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing this peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs from the main control board 1310, shown in FIGS. , various commands such as commands relating to the control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) are compared, and effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms), is compared, and Bank3 (1 fr) and Bank4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511cc are compared. The performance backup information (1 fr), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms), and the performance backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 4 (1 ms), are compared, and the contents of the comparison are compared. are identical, the performance backup information (1fr) which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) for Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. While performing a hot start by copying back the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms), to Bank0 (1 ms), when the compared contents do not match (i.e. , mismatch), a value of 0 is forcibly written into each of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, to perform a cold start.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM), and the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the second backup area 1511dc. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is stored in Bank0 (SRAM) which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) is copied back to perform a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value is stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Write 0 forcibly to make a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is forcibly written with a value of 0 to be cleared to zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get caught.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. is set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. In addition, in the current time information acquisition process, the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and sets the brightness of the LEDs included in the acquired brightness setting information to the brightness of the game board. Processing is performed to adjust the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 and turn it on. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, It includes the set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is set to 75%. is lit, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Lights up by adjusting the brightness. In the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device, correction similar to the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the use time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is input from the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. A value of 1 is set in the partial V blank signal interrupt process. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. there is

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is established until the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get caught.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1009). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by starting this 1 ms interrupt timer is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, serial I/O port serial transmission for the lamp drive board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When this lamp drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the data shown in FIG. Game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process to be described later. is set by default.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is sent to the lamp drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to transmit 1 byte of the transmission shift register. data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board The 1-byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is transmitted 1 byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronism with the board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, transmission of 1-byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board.

In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is generated by the lamp data generation process described later. is set by default.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the top address of 1511cab is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial signal via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the I/O port. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Start transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port). 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED is transferred 1 byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , and by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port via the peripheral bus 1511ai, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port receives this written data. The data in the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, transmission of 1 byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this production operation unit monitoring process, in the production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation button 410 etc. is operated based on the detection signal from the various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. determine as appropriate whether or not to reflect

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP with built-in tone generator 1512a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP with built-in tone generator 1512a in the display data creation process, which will be described later, from channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. Output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . In the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is sent to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. Although this makes it possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, so-called dropped frames may occur. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. It is a mechanism that allows you to prioritize synchronization with the production of music and sound effects that match the time.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described later as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When serialized audio data is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame-decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like in accordance with various effects are stereo-reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and notification sounds and notification sounds are also stereo-reproduced.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the performance control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series that constitute the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of screen data from the first screen data is stored in the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series that constitute the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of light emission data from the head light emission data is changed to light emission of various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate which mode to use.

In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of the notification sound and notification sound, which are arranged in time series and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated to indicate what order of the sound command data from the top sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

In the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the first drive data is The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is executed. Update the pointer to the data and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler updating process is forcibly instructed to the drive data that should be originally instructed.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program, the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, various Various commands received in the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means), which will be described later, are analyzed (command analyzing means). Based on the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the performance control program generates screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound. The schedule data for generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. do. In addition, the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, starting mouth winning command for instructing the start of the starting mouth winning effect, the number of normal symbols pending Normal pattern storage command for identifying (0 to 4), pattern synchronization production start command for instructing the start of the pattern synchronization production, pattern storage command output when the number of starting reservations changes, large winning opening 2005 A large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time a game ball is accepted, or a frame state 1 command (second error generation command, It analyzes (command analysis means) whether it is a full tank error generation command or not, and recognizes which game state it is at present. In addition, this effect control program, after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on, the command received by this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is a body frame open command, a body frame close command, a door open command or a door frame close Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. Various commands, shown in FIG. , various commands classified as related to normal figure synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to normal electric role effects, various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 90, door frame open command , door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the second error cancellation command), frame status 1 command (equivalent to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various commands classified, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, furthermore, when the command analyzed by the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, are sent to the peripheral control unit 1511. It extracts from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the commands analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above are classified into the status displays shown in FIG. In the case of various commands, for example, an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal presentation mode accompanying the presentation operation, for example, the game board side Effect display device 1600 (effect device), door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), lamp (effect device) is used to visually warn the outside, or a speaker is used to audibly warn the outside ( error reporting means). By doing so, when a malicious player tries to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 in spite of being in the game state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, it is possible to prevent cheating on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the performance control program stores in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information updating process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and based on the updated time information, the year, month, and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit. date is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs prefetch effect control processing (step S1027). The look-ahead effect control process executes the process related to the look-ahead effect based on the effect command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, when receiving a special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command or a special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command (hereinafter referred to as "prefetch effect command"), for executing the prefetch effect Make settings. Details of the look-ahead effect control processing will be described later.

The look-ahead effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 when the game ball wins the starting ports 2101 and 2102 . In this embodiment, when the peripheral control board 4140 receives the prefetch effect command, the prefetch effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process of step S1022. In the look-ahead effect control process, if the look-ahead effect execution flag is set, it is determined whether to execute the look-ahead effect based on the content of the look-ahead effect command. That is, in this embodiment, even when a prefetch effect command is received from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not to actually execute the prefetch effect.

Then, when the look-ahead effect is to be executed, the state of the pending display of the starting memory is changed as the look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect). In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the normal look-ahead effect is executed, a continuous look-ahead effect is executed to change the state of the pending display each time the starting memory for the preceding execution of the variable display is consumed. do. In the look-ahead effect control process, a process for executing a normal look-ahead effect is performed, and it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous look-ahead effect. The predetermined condition may be, for example, the case where the number of starting memories that have not been digested is equal to or greater than a certain number, or the case where there is a high degree of expectation that the result of the variable display game based on the starting memories to be read ahead will be a big win. may

The content of the look-ahead effect is not only to change the display mode of the starting memory, but also to display effects on the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 470 such as character display and background change, light emission of lamps, and voice output from the speaker. , the motion of a movable body, and the like.

Following step S1027, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer is designated among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. DAT is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. Alternatively, it is created by extracting from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, the screen data indicated by the pointer are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays the effect display device on the game board side. 1600 and the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 are generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound instruction data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source to generate the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated in accordance with the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set in accordance with the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob 1510a is converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the values in 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume. Each is set so that the volume increases toward the volume 6. - 特許庁Control the built-in VDP 1512a of the sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and transmit the audio data as the audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512 c, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 .

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above. For example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are small. However, when there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in a first backup area 1511db and a second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, reception command storage area 1511cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and Effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is used as effect backup information (1fr). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) increments, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs a peripheral control DMA controller. 1511ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank2 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr ) up to the end address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb in sequence from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are successively stored by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously transferred to Bank4 ( 1fr) are copied in order from the first address.

In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. Effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of backup first area 1511db as effect backup information (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed. , and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). 1511ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank0 (SRAM ) up to the end address of Bank2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db in sequence from the start address of Bank2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 1511dc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously transferred to Bank4 of the backup second area 1511dc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). SRAM) are copied in order from the first address.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG as the execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until a value of 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006. Thus, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing, effect control program, first step S1009 peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed and starts from setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG, 1 ms in step S1010 , and step S1036, and finally, in step S1038, the normal processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as execution completion of the peripheral controller normal processing. is set to complete. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the built-in tone generator VDP 1512a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which blank signals are input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 72, the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. A description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is executed with the . When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 96 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

If the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral controller steady-state processing is being executed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), Exit this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when no part-stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. In some cases, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. When the signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Since the peripheral controller steady-state processing is forcibly canceled halfway and the execution of the peripheral controller steady-state processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, in step S1009 in the peripheral controller power-on processing (peripheral controller steady-state processing) of FIG. By setting the value 1 to the processing in-progress flag SP-FLG, the effect that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. By setting the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the processing at the time of turning on (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is indicated by the peripheral control unit V blank which is this routine. By notifying the signal interrupt processing, it is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. It is determined whether or not it is completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V-blank signal is input after the V-blank signal is input, which is a so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within a time of about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that has failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is normally executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit steady process that failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller regular processing of the peripheral controller power-on processing of FIG. 95, will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which blank signals are input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

If the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, that is, if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the priority of the interrupt processing is given to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is incremented by 1 (step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in time series. Of the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration driving amplifier board motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are transmitted. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the production operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. It is set in the amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the area 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. starts transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame-decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame-decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is transferred 1 byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller. 1511ad and via the peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port for writing, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port receives this write data. transfer the data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, start transmitting the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and frame decoration drive amplifier board Continuous transmission is performed by the motor serial I/O port.

In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board. When the motor drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, first, the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. and the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and created. 73 is set in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first byte of the received game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to a register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the data written in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start sending byte data bit by bit.

Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board The 1-byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag are transferred byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. , by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition process, history information (for example, original position history information) of detection signals from various detection switches is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The original position, movable position, etc. of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah.

Following step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, history information (for example, operation Operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, the history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is set in the control MPU 1511a and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When a determination is made, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. , that is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The door frame side effect display device acquires the frequency of failure and the failure occurrence state between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. 460 drawing state can be obtained.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is executed each time a 1ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Each time, Bank0 (1 ms) to be backed up includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah. , and effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, is stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb as effect backup information (1 ms). The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1ms) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) increments, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa executes the peripheral control DMA controller. Copying the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to Bank2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb is specified as the request factor of 1511ac, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) are copied to Bank0 (1 ms). ) up to the end address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb in sequence from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously stored in units of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1ms) are continuously transferred to Bank4 of the backup second area 1511cc (1 1ms) are copied in order from the first address.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt causes the peripheral control unit After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Also, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510 . In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 1-byte (8-bit) information is loaded into the reception buffer by the substrate serial I/O port, and when this loading is completed, an interrupt is generated and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port for the main control board built into the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the value of the reception counter SRXC is not 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the third byte of the main circumference serial data. is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3 in step S1206, that is, the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, is followed by the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and then the 3 bytes of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value of the byte is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation is performed by considering the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second-byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, as numerical values, and summing them (sum value ).

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they generate static electricity and generate noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. in a sanding environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 1310, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310? is determining whether or not As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main-circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. (step S1216) and terminate this routine. This received command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumferential serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumferential serial data are Stored in the 1511cac peripheral controller receive ring buffer. This "peripheral controller reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Remember. It should be noted that the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the status assigned as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the status assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data when storing in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. is stored in association with the mode assigned, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period for receiving 1-byte (8-bit) information out of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 has been exceeded. Alternatively, in step S1214, when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is executed as it is. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 75, a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. Interrupt processing will be described. When this peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this judgment, the routine ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If two macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the routine returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If the signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

If the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started in step S1304, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is extinguished, the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 is turned off, and various LEDs are extinguished. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception waiting process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the commands being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup process, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb. Then, a predetermined byte (for example, , 1 byte) in sequence from the top address of the received command storage area contained in Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb. copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and store in Bank0 (1fr) From the contents stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuous. are copied in order from the first address of the received command storage area contained in Bank2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa stores the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and includes it in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. specified to be copied to the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), and stored from the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). 1511cc of the backup second area 1511cc in sequence from the head address of the received command storage area contained in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and then copy all of the received command storage area sequentially by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and then the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Copying is specified, and the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is specified. Bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied from the start address of the received command storage area contained in Bank 4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

After step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clearing process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. .

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. In other words, it is endlessly determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By endlessly continuing determination in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. is not output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

As described above, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314 to perform the peripheral control immediately before the power failure state. The MPU 1511a is designed not to be reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated for a period of 2 microseconds or more, and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clearing process of step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creating process, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal that is output to notify that fact. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. LOCKN-signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 judges that the drawing data received from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , a transmission request for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is not abnormal (normal data). predetermined data for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the transmission of the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted to the highest bit B7←B6, B6←. B5, B5.rarw.B4, B4.rarw.B3, B3.rarw.B2, B2.rarw.B1, B1.rarw.least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 1 (step S1506), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is converted to the least significant bit B0 in such a manner that the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0. , toward the most significant bit B7 by one bit.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 0 (step S1510), and this routine ends.

In this manner, each time the LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since a value of 1 or 0 is set, it is possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

[16-1-7. Connection failure determination process]
Next, a description will be given of connection failure determination processing executed as one processing of the warning processing in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In this connection failure determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem between the connection between the effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

72, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. FIG. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal output to notify that effect. and to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

Subsequent to step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 (step S1522). This determination is to determine whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. and exit this routine.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. Then, the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver in step S1522. (to count the cumulative number of times). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It is designed to restore the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative count. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of having reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

In step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number of times. If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 (step S1528), and this routine ends. On the other hand, in step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT, it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the calculated cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 1 (step S1530), and this routine ends. The communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not established when the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the upper limit value CC-LMT of the accumulated number of times. is a flag that indicates whether or not a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the accumulated state has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0 respectively. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In some cases, the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG immediately before a power failure occurs is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 will be described. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. and to confirm (restore) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. We will notify you to that effect.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the schedule data for screen generation among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is being activated (step S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, the order of screen data from the first screen data to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is indicated. Then, it is determined whether the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the presentation progresses according to the screen generation schedule data. When performance is completed along with the data and updating of the pointer is all completed, it is determined that the schedule data for screen generation has not started. In addition, in this determination, the period during which the start screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or the time period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It can be judged based on the schedule data for screen generation whether or not it is a period of time, and the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. When the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542 to be described later, while the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. During the period displayed on the effect display device 1600, or when the game board side effect display device 1600 is not in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 (simple state of waiting for customers), This routine is terminated as it is.

In step S1540, when the effect is progressing according to the schedule data for screen generation, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, this routine ends as it is. When the presentation is completed and the pointer has been completely updated, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 (step S1542). 101. As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to the door frame side presentation counter provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed. Count up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (to count the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is even one.

If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, if it has not been determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, then this process is performed as it is. While the routine is terminated, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, even if it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, even once. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication error flag CC-FLG is set when the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. A flag that indicates whether or not a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. is set to 0 when the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection of , does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, when it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the accumulated number of times is the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine ends. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effects provided on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the signal for door frame side effects provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is output. The transmitter IC 1512 d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 . This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (it is 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, communication error display processing is executed. (step S1548) and terminate this routine. In this communication error display process, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. process to draw to the . For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a message is displayed that reads, "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Further, in the communication error display process, the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the game board side effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state are displayed. During the period, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 is LOCKN. As a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") is displayed in the game. In addition to performing processing to display in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem with the upper tray-side liquid crystal display device.") is repeated from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. Do the flow process. At this time, it is also possible to perform a process of lighting all the LEDs for lighting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 .

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

First, a brief description will be given of the decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative pattern is executed by the unit steady processing etc., and the main control side of the main control side power on time processing shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the starting opening 2004 is "big hit", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is 1 round to 15 rounds. Up to 15 rounds in total, and in each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), when game balls enter the big winning opening 2005 and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), The round is completed, and every time one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out.

The first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002, or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second start port 2004, from the main control board 1310 Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that left side decorative symbols are displayed on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and central decorative symbols are displayed in the center. Then, on the right side, the variable display of the right decorative pattern is started, and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is stopped, and the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery. can be recognized by the player, and at this time, the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can be confirmed even in the design or the second special design. When the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are variably displayed, the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design become translucent to the extent that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative design is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the center decorative pattern from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative pattern from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. When the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are stop-displayed, the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design correspond to the stopped-displayed left-hand decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right-hand decorative design. The left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. In this way, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and started to be displayed in the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66, The left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern, which are displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and stopped, are synchronized.

Peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the first start port 2002, or the second lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004 Upon receipt of a command from the main control board 1310 to convey the result of the special lottery, the game board shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady state of the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since the pointer is updated to indicate which screen data is to be output to the built-in tone generator VDP 1512a from the data, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the data is displayed according to the schedule data for screen generation. Since the effect is in progress, the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, and while the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, that is, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. , the determination in step S1540 in the connection recovery process is such that the routine is forcibly terminated.

As a result, the communication check counters CC-CNT are counted during the period from the start of the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to the stop display. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection (that is, the transmitter and (connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the SYNC pattern output processing of step S1546 in the connection recovery processing is not performed, even if it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. There is a problem with the liquid crystal display on the side. Please call the store clerk." In addition to invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door-frame-side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d. display.

When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control section shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the hour process, the effect is completed in accordance with the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated in the scheduler update process, and the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, the power supply to the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the judgment of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. When the value of CNT is 0, that is, when it has not been determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine ends as it is, while the communication check counter When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process. When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the accumulated number of times upper limit value CC-LMT is reached. If not, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, performs the above-described SYNC pattern output process, and terminates the routine. That is, when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, the above-described communication error display process is performed, and the routine ends. In other words, while the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC 1512d are displayed. If there is even one failure in the connection with ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number determined to be present does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, In other words, while processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the accumulated number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is faulty reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), by always performing the communication error display process, for example, " A problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display on the upper tray side. Please call the store clerk." The LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which conveys that the data is valid, is validated.

In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started and stopped, and the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are displayed again. In the interval period until is started, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data, is validated, and the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door-frame-side performance receiver IC DIC0 are validated. A state in which a failure occurs in the connection with the receiver IC SDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be is not reaching the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 In other words, while processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a state of failure reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When it reaches (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process is always performed, so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 A message "A problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper tray side. Please call a clerk."

When the variable display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started again (timing K2), as described above, the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, so the left decorative design and the central decorative design are displayed. , and until the right side decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 The number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if there are times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed. The communication error display processing in step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message "There is a problem with the liquid crystal display on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk." Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device. 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

In this way, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started in the display area of the game board side production display device 1600, and then stopped, and then the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed again. In the interval period until the start of the variable display of the pattern, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is validated. On the other hand, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter is operated until the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is started and stopped. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side rendering receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the IC 1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated. This is because the result of the stop display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the information that the player is most interested in, and the player is profitable. Since the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state in which a Then, until the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed due to the influence of noise, etc., and is not correct. Even if it becomes a state where drawing is not possible, instead of interrupting the production in the middle and recovering to a state where drawing can be performed correctly, the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the By stop-displaying the right decorative pattern, the drawing of the information that the player is most interested in is completed.

In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the startup screen on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the customer waiting state. This is very different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510 during the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is performing a demonstration. This LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or for the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state for a customer to perform a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period of execution, it is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the differential Two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. The forced switching circuit 1512f performs circuit connection so as to transmit the two signals when two signals that are differentially differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 . When the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the received two signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is As described above, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d has a different data format. Output to the control MPU 1511a. As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input, and tells the effect display drive board 4450. While it can be determined that no trouble has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, a trouble has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 assuming that a trouble has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A notification image (for example, "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") is displayed on the game board side effect display device by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. 1600, and by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a and outputting a notification sound to that effect (for example, "There is a problem with the liquid crystal display on the upper tray side") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c A notification sound is emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 . As a result, the notification can be made by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 . At this time, all the various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit is connected so that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which has received the LOCKN signal output request data, outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no failure in the door frame side effect display device 460. When the signal is not input, it can be determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 is malfunctioning because the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is malfunctioning. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the door frame side effect display device 460 is malfunctioning, the communication error display processing of step S1548 in the connection recovery processing of FIG. 102 can be executed as notification processing. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a discovers a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the store clerk or the like of the fact by executing the notification process. A hall clerk or the like can very easily check whether or not the door frame side performance display device 460 has a problem before the player plays the game, and the check can be done without much trouble. ing. Therefore, the malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without much effort.

In addition, as described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined that there is, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, it is used for door frame side effects. When the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d cannot be received normally, the receiver IC SDIC0 receives the image due to a communication failure between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 in order to notify that the drawn data is abnormal. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, generates a connection confirmation signal indicating the start of transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. By outputting to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems during image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect a failure of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure during image communication at an early stage, and can work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to eliminate the problem. It's like Therefore, by finding and eliminating the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Further, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 which receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. When normal reception is not possible, the effect control microprocessor outputs a LOCKN signal, which is a communication problem occurrence signal, to indicate that a communication problem has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, causing a communication problem. This generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. can be displayed and notified. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a quickly discovers a malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication malfunction during image communication, and notifies the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can inform the hall clerk or the like or directly inform the hall clerk or the like who happens to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the hall clerk or the like can be notified when the trouble occurs. You can start working on resolving the problem at an early stage. Therefore, by early detection and elimination of the malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from the timing K1 to the timing K2 (interval period). If there is even one failure in the connection between the side effects receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal and eliminating communication failures during image communication when the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state of being in the state of being in the state of accumulation does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. , can be output repeatedly. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 fluctuates the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period in which the game is not progressed by starting and displaying the stop display, the communication failure can be resolved.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from the timing K1 to the timing K2 (interval period). If there is even one failure in the connection between the presentation receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state of being in the state of being in the accumulated state does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is generated to validate the LOCKN signal and eliminate the communication failure during image communication. A connection confirmation signal is sent from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to inform the start of transmission to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. While continuing to output repeatedly, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts fluctuating the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and plays the game. , the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect stops outputting the connection confirmation signal. (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It's like Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 fluctuates the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 By continuing to output a connection confirmation signal, which is a signal for resolving a problem, only during the period in which the game is not progressing by starting and displaying a stop display, the communication problem can be resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and stops displaying. Only during the period in which the progress of the game is not executed, when the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 displays the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Even if the first special symbol or second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion of the effect progressing on the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 (disturbance of the image) Every time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 restarts and ends the progress of the game (every time (interval period) between timing K1 and timing K2), it can be made to go in the direction of elimination.

According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 comprises the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. The main control board 1310 includes a first start port 2002 and a second start port 2002, which are start regions in which game balls fired by the batted ball shooting device 650 toward the game region 5a defined on the game board 5 are provided in the game region 5a. A main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor for controlling the progress of the game based on the fact that the ball has entered the mouth 2004, is installed. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands shown in FIGS. 70 payout control MPU 952a is mounted.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, has at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store game information even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information on payout even after the power is turned off.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment further comprises an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on to when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, the game information stored in the main control internal RAM is erased. The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, is output as a RAM clear signal in FIG. A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing the stored information related to payout, and a main control side power supply of FIG. When operated after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the process at the time of power-on is performed (or the period during which the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit is performed after the power is turned on) has elapsed, the error that occurred regarding the dispensing device 830 is canceled. 82 as an error cancellation signal for the game control microprocessor to output to the payout control MPU952a payout control microprocessor without outputting the RWMCLR signal to the main control MPU1310a the game control microprocessor, .

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. The RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 for erasing the information about is output to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor, and when the operation is performed within the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from when the power is turned on, A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. When operated after the period during which the determination process of step S16 is performed in the main control side power-on process (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after the power is turned on) has passed, the payout device 830 An error release function to output to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor without outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. Since it has both functions, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function, respectively, by operating one operation switch 954 . Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error cancellation function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input part of the panel relay board 4161 is connected to various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, and the vibration detection sensor. , a circuit to which detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the like are input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is taken as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. do.

Attempts to gain unfair profits by manipulating the falling state of game balls at will by bringing magnets (e.g., permanent magnets or electromagnets) closer to game balls hit into the game area in a game machine. There is no end to illegal gaming behavior.

In order to detect such fraudulent gaming behavior and suppress fraudulent behavior by means of light-emitting means, sound alarms, etc., magnetism detection sensors 4024 capable of detecting magnetism are provided corresponding to predetermined positions in the gaming area. there is

[Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 104 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in a game machine. The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 4161 . As shown, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with a voltage of +5V produced by a +5V production circuit 1310g.

The magnetic detection sensor 4024 is composed of a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is composed of, for example, a magnetoresistive element or the like, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, +5 V) when it does not detect magnetism of a predetermined value or more, and outputs a voltage when it detects magnetism of a predetermined value or more. not (0V).

The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. A collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected via a connector CON1 to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161, and +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. As a result, when the transistor STR is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

The transistor STR is turned on by the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS when the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detecting state in which it does not detect magnetism, and current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. When the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, the transistor STR is turned off by stopping the output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and the current flow from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the resistor IR1 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR0, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. As a result, when the transistor ITR0 is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2.

The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the pull-up resistor IR2 and also to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the connector CON2.

The main control input circuit 1310b is composed of a pull-up resistor NR1, a resistor NR2, and a transistor NTR1. One end of the pull-up resistor NR1 is connected to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor ITR1 of the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON2. , +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. As a result, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 when the transistor ITR in the previous stage is in the off state.

The collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the pull-up resistor NR1 as well as to one end of the resistor NR2, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

In the figure, the detection sensor section corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the voltage output section 4163 corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and to which +12V is applied. The detection circuit unit 4164 is a circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR2 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and to which +12 V is applied, and a transistor ITR1 having a base terminal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. is applicable.

Further, in the preceding stage of the detection circuit section 4164, a sensor signal input section 4162 is configured by a circuit configured by a connector CON1, a voltage output section 4163, a resistor IR1 and a transistor ITR0. Thus, the panel relay board 4161 is provided with the sensor signal input section 4162 and the detection circuit section 4164 .

[Detection operation]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state where it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When transistor STR is turned on, current flows to ground via pull-up resistor IR0, connector CON1, collector terminal of transistor STR, and emitter terminal of transistor STR. Also, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also pulled down to the ground side. This turns off the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the transistor ITR1 is turned on by applying a voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Also, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetism detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal with the transistor NTR1 turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR, thereby turning off the built-in transistor STR. By turning off the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to the +12V side. Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also raised to the +12V side (corresponding to the first voltage). This turns on the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Also, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, a voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 and whose logic is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

The operation states of the magnetic sensor MGS, built-in transistor STR, transistor ITR0, transistor ITR1, and transistor NTR1 described above are shown in tabular form in FIG. When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay board 4161, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on in the same manner as when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. .

By the way, when signal transmission is performed by a connector member, contact resistance occurs when the connector member corrodes or when dust enters the connector connecting portion. Connector members are classified into pin contact type and bellows contact depending on the shape of the contact portion terminal of the connector member. The gap is easier to open than the type. When the gap is opened, dust and the like are likely to enter from this portion.

Contact resistance is also generated when vibration is applied to the connector member. For example, when a game is played with a right hand, fine sliding wear occurs due to vibrations applied to the connector member from a specific portion of the game area where a large number of game balls flow down continuously in a concentrated manner. However, this may cause contact resistance.

Here, the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such contact resistance RR occurs in the connector member (connector CON1) electrically connecting the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output section 4163 of the panel relay board 4161 operation will be described. For example, in FIG. 104, when a contact resistance RR occurs in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is indicated by a dashed line. Incidentally, the magnitude of the contact resistance RR is 100 to 1000 times greater than when the contact of the connector is normal.

As described above, when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to a second voltage), current flows through the contact resistance RR, causing the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR to rise. is lifted. In FIG. 104, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black dot as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

In other words, a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 by current flowing through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. . Then, when the voltage raised by the contact resistance RR reaches a specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 may be turned on even though the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state. That is, in the conventional sensor signal input section 4162 arranged on the panel relay board 4161, there is a possibility of erroneously detecting the signal of the sensor when the contact resistance RR occurs.

[Embodiment 1 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 105 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the game machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of Example 1 in this embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit section 4164, and the main control board of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The main control input circuit 1310b of 1310 has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit configuration parts.

In addition, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is installed in a plurality of places in the game area, for example, near the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning port 2001, the big winning port 2005, the out port 1126, etc. become.

The magnetic sensor input circuit of this embodiment differs from the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit in that when the magnetic sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state where the magnetic sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the voltage (second voltage) at which the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side and lower than the first voltage is applied, the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164 is provided, and the voltage output section 4163 and the detection circuit section 4164 are electrically connected via the voltage raising section 4166 .

The first embodiment is an example in which the voltage booster 4166 is composed of a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 through the connector CON1 in the preceding stage of the connection. It is connected.

The anode terminal of Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit section 4164. Connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the connector CON2. A sensor signal input section 4162 is composed of the connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163, and the voltage raising section 4166. FIG.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state where it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When transistor STR is turned on, current flows to ground via pull-up resistor IR0, connector CON1, collector terminal of transistor STR, and emitter terminal of transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Also, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so the Zener diode ZD0 maintains a non-conducting state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). This turns off the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164, thereby turning on the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Also, by turning on the transistor ITR1, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetism detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal whose transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (OFF) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS section detects magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, thereby turning off the built-in transistor STR. By turning off the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to the +12V side. Also, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, a Zener voltage (corresponding to the first voltage) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. This turns on the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Also, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, a voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 and whose logic is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

Then, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that such an abnormal state exists, in the above example, when it determines that the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal is HI, the main control unit MPU 1310a An error command is transmitted to the control unit 1511, and processing such as outputting a signal to that effect from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer is performed. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies the abnormality by means of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, an alarm lamp, sound or the like.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to a second voltage), current flows through the contact resistance RR, causing the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR to rise. is lifted. In FIG. 105, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black dot as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 by current flowing through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. become. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains a non-conducting state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). This turns off the transistor ITR0. That is, the voltage booster 4166 prevents the detection circuit 4164 from being affected by the predetermined voltage.

The operation of the subsequent detection circuit section 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

Since this does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 (because there is no voltage change), when contact resistance occurs due to fine sliding wear of the connector member, etc., the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance False detection can be prevented.

As in the conventional art, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a transmits an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 responds to the transmitted error command by or that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected, the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, the warning display device, the sound, etc. do. Also, an error signal is output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer.

[Embodiment 2 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 106 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the game machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the second embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit section 4164, and the main control of the main control board 1310 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The input circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit configuration parts.

In the second embodiment, the voltage booster 4166 has one end connected to the first resistor IR1, one end of which is connected to the voltage output part 4163, and the other end of the first resistor IR1, and the other end is grounded. and a second resistor IR3. Comparing the sensor signal input section 4162 of the second embodiment with the conventional sensor signal input section 4162 of FIG. It is different in that it is connected to the connection point with the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. That is, in the second embodiment, the voltage booster 4166 is an example configured with a resistor IR3 that causes a current to flow to the ground when the predetermined voltage is applied.

One end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the preceding stage of the connecting portion. ing.

In the detection circuit section 4164, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR1 to which +12 V is applied to the other end, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the connector CON2. A sensor signal input section 4162 is composed of the connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163, and the voltage raising section 4166. FIG.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Also, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, a voltage pulled down to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. This turns off the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the transistor ITR1 is turned on by applying a voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Also, by turning on the transistor ITR1, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetism detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal with the transistor NTR1 turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR, thereby turning off the built-in transistor STR. By turning off the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to the +12V side.

A voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistor circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR0, a first resistor IR1 of the voltage raising section 4166, and a second resistor IR3, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the voltage raising section 4166 Current flows to ground through the first resistor IR1 and the second resistor IR3. A potential difference generated between both ends of the second resistor IR3 due to the current flowing through the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, thereby turning on the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Also, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, a voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 and whose logic is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to a second voltage), current flows through the contact resistance RR, causing the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR to rise. is lifted. In FIG. 106, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black dot as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, a predetermined voltage that is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor as a current flows through the contact resistance RR that is generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. It will be. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor, current flows through the first resistor IR1, which in turn flows to ground through the second resistor IR3. That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, the current due to the predetermined voltage which is higher than the applied second voltage and lower than the first voltage substantially drops to the ground and the second resistor IR3 is grounded. Almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage of IR3. Therefore, the subsequent transistor ITR0 is not turned on. As a result, the subsequent transistor ITR0 is kept off. That is, the voltage booster 4166 prevents the detection circuit 4164 from being affected by the predetermined voltage.

The operation of the subsequent detection circuit section 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

This does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 (because there is no voltage change). False detection can be prevented.

[Embodiment 3 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 107 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of Example 3 includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. Circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit configuration parts.

In this embodiment 3, the voltage booster 4166 includes two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 that form a Darlington circuit set to an operating voltage higher than a predetermined voltage that is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. and resistors IR1, IR4 and IR5. Compared with the second embodiment described above, in the third embodiment, instead of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded, a series-connected resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 are connected in parallel to the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 forming the Darlington circuit. Connected. That is, the third embodiment is an example in which the voltage booster 4166 is composed of the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5 that cause current to flow to the ground when the predetermined voltage is applied.

More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0 of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the rear stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

The other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0, and also connected to one end of the resistor IR4, and the other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0. One end of the resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage. The collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR2 to the other end of which +12 V of the detection circuit section 4164 is applied, and are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Also, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Since the base terminal of the transistor is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also pulled down to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off, and the transistor ITR2 is also turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164, thereby turning on the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Also, by turning on the transistor ITR1, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetism detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal with the transistor NTR1 turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR, thereby turning off the built-in transistor STR. By turning off the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to the +12V side.

A voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistor circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the resistor IR1 of the voltage booster 4166, the resistor IR4, and the resistor IR5, and the pull-up resistor IR0, the resistor IR1 of the voltage booster 4166, Current flows to ground through resistors IR4 and IR5. A potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0 by the current flowing through the resistor IR4. As a result, the preceding stage transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the preceding transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground through the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. Due to the current flowing through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated across the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2. As a result, the subsequent transistor ITR2 is turned on.

When the subsequent transistor ITR2 is turned on, current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. Also, when the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, a voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 and whose logic is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to a second voltage), current flows through the contact resistance RR, causing the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR to rise. is lifted. In FIG. 107, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1 by current flowing through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. . This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage that is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of resistor IR1, current flows through resistor IR1 and through resistor IR4 and resistor IR5 to ground. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage drops to the ground, and most of the current flows to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the front stage of the Darlington circuit, which is the rear stage of the resistor IR1. do not flow. Therefore, the preceding transistor ITR0 is not turned on. In addition, the subsequent transistor ITR2 is not turned on. As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit remain off. That is, the voltage raising section 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164 .

The operation of the subsequent detection circuit section 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

This does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 (because there is no voltage change). False detection can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 109, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input sections 4162 respectively connected to the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164. ing. When any one of these sensor signal input sections 4162 detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 is turned off.

Similarly, when any one of the connections between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input section 4162 is broken, the sensor signal input section 4162 corresponding to the broken magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned on, thereby turning on the detection circuit section 4164. transistor ITR1 is turned off. Further, when there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output section 4163 is provided for each of these sensors, and the voltage output section 4163 provided respectively is a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, for example, "TD62083AP" (commercially available, manufactured by TOSHIBA). (manufactured) can be used.

The sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 4161 of the present embodiment has been described above, but the detection sensor that can be applied to the sensor signal input unit 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024. Various sensors, for example, general prize winning opening sensor 4020, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, count sensor 4005, vibration detection sensor, contact A sensor or the like can be applied.

[Application example to which the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the panel relay board 4161 can be applied]
The sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments described above prevents erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance that occurs when the contact of the connector is abnormal. By the way, the applicable portion of the sensor signal input portion 4162 of Examples 1 to 3 is not limited to the contact portion of the connector.

As described above, in the gaming machine, there is a situation in which the detection sensors are installed at a plurality of locations in the game area (for example, they are arranged near the starting gate, the winning gate, the big winning gate, the out gate, etc.). . Therefore, the electrical connection between the detection sensor and the detection circuit unit that detects the detection signal from the detection sensor (for example, the transistor of the panel relay board, etc.) can be made by various circuit patterns and wiring (harness) depending on the installation location of the detection sensor. is selected as appropriate. Regarding this point, it takes various forms depending on the model of the gaming machine.

By the way, the electrical parts (for example, connectors and detection sensors) and the wiring patterns that are used change over time, and the length of the wiring (harness) changes the resistance value, which changes the current that flows through the detection sensor. If the values are different, the circuit may not operate normally. Moreover, the resistance value also changes when, for example, the type of detection sensor, location of arrangement, and the length of wiring (harness) are changed due to specification changes during development. Therefore, the current flowing through the detection sensor changes. Also, by changing the location of the detection sensor, extending the length of the harness, or changing the location where the harness is routed, there may be locations where noise is likely to be picked up, and the degree of influence of noise will also change.

If the current flows through the resistance value that changes due to such a cause, the current flowing through the detection sensor may differ from the originally designed value. That is, there is a possibility of erroneously detecting the signal of the detection sensor. In addition, the circuit may not operate normally due to the influence of noise, and there is a possibility that the signal of the detection sensor may be erroneously detected.

The sensor signal input unit 4162 having the voltage raising unit 4166 of Embodiments 1 to 3 is used for electric parts (for example, connectors and detection sensors) and wiring pattern changes over time and wiring (harness). Even if the resistance value changes depending on the length, erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to aging or noise can be prevented, and the detection circuit can be generalized. In addition, in the conventional example of FIG. 104 and the embodiment of FIG. 105, the changing resistance value is indicated by encircling with a chain double-dashed line.

In the following, a case where noise appears on the harness will be described as an example. Also, FIG. 110(A) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input section 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 110(B) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input section 4162 in the embodiment. The left side of FIG. 110A is the signal waveform input when there is no noise, and the right side is the signal waveform input when noise is present.

As shown in FIG. 110(A), in the conventional example, when there is no noise, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is at low level (0.4 V) when no magnetism is detected, and the transistor ITR0 in FIG. 104 is turned on. can be maintained at a level lower than the voltage (0.8V) applied. When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at high level (12 V), which is higher than the voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 turns on, turning on the transistor ITR0.

On the other hand, in the conventional example, when noise is present, even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the peak of the noise waveform reaches the voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 turns on, as indicated by the hatched portion. ), the transistor ITR0 is turned on and cannot be kept off. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

In addition to noise, for example, as shown in FIG. 110A, when overshoot occurs, erroneous detection does not occur when magnetism is detected. and the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

As shown in FIG. 110B, in the embodiment, the voltage booster 4166 raises the voltage that can be input to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in FIG. It is In the detection operation, when there is no noise, when the magnetic sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, it is at a low level (0.4 V), which is lower than the boosted voltage of 2 V, so the voltage at which the transistor ITR0 turns on. (0.8V) can be maintained. When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at a high level (12V), which is higher than the boosted voltage of 2V. 8V), and the transistor ITR0 turns on.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, when noise is present, the peak of the noise waveform exceeds the voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 turns on even when the magnetism detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. is lower than the boosted voltage of 2V, the voltage booster 4166 maintains the off state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be kept off. Therefore, erroneous detection can be prevented.

Next, for example, a case where a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to aging will be described as an example. Also, FIG. 111(A) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input section 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 111(B) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input section 4162 in the embodiment. The left side of FIG. 111(A) is the signal waveform that is input when normal, and the right side is the signal waveform that is input when the voltage rises due to an increase in resistance due to aging.

In the conventional example, when a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in the resistance value due to aging, even if the magnetism detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the voltage input as indicated by the hatched portion is applied to the transistor. Since the voltage (0.8 V) at which ITR0 is turned on is exceeded, the transistor ITR0 is kept on and cannot be kept off. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, even if the voltage rises due to an increase in the resistance value due to aging, the input voltage does not turn on the transistor ITR0 when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. Even if the voltage (0.8 V) is exceeded, the voltage booster 4166 maintains the OFF state because it is lower than the boosted voltage of 2V. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be kept off. Therefore, erroneous detection can be prevented.

As described above, since the sensor signal input section 4162 of Examples 1 to 3 includes the voltage raising section 4166, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to aging or noise. In addition, since the sensor signal input section 4162 is provided with a voltage raising section 4166, noise is generated by changing the location of the detection sensor, extending the length of the harness, or changing the location where the harness is routed. The sensor signal input unit 4162 can prevent the influence of noise even if there is a place where the noise is likely to be picked up. Therefore, the circuit units (the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164) arranged on the panel relay board 4161 can be generalized. Therefore, it is possible to have a margin for design changes during development.

[Sensor signal input unit 4162' of another embodiment]
The magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in the first to third embodiments described above has a built-in transistor STR. A transistor STR that turns off is used. Instead of this, a magnetic sensor whose input is high when no magnetism is detected and whose input is low when magnetism is detected, in other words, a magnetic sensor which is turned off when no magnetism is detected and turned on when magnetism is detected It is also possible to use

FIG. 112 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit of another embodiment. The magnetic sensor MGS is turned off when no magnetism of a predetermined value or more is detected, and is turned on when magnetism of a predetermined value or more is detected.

An input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON1, and +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. Also, the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is grounded.

As the voltage booster 4166, one of the first to third embodiments described above can be used. In this alternative embodiment, the voltage booster 4166 is an example of a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163, and is connected to the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS through the connector CON1 in the preceding stage of the connecting portion.

The anode terminal of Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. It should be noted that in another embodiment, the detection circuit portion 4164' is composed of the transistor ITR0. +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the connector CON2, and is connected to a pull-up resistor NR having +12V applied to one end. there is Here, the circuit configuration of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 is the same as in the first to third embodiments. In another embodiment, the voltage output section 4163 and the voltage raising section 4166 constitute a sensor signal winning section 4162', and the transistor ITR0 constitutes a detection circuit section 4164'.

[Detection operation when normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit section 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0, thereby turning on the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit section 4164', and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0.

Also, by turning on the transistor ITR0, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetism detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal with the transistor NTR1 turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state of detecting magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12 V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

As a result, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163 is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). One end of the pull-up resistor IR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 via the Zener diode ZD0, so that the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so the Zener diode ZD0 is kept off. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). This turns off the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the transistor NTR1 is turned on by applying a voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 and whose logic is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation in case of abnormality caused by change in resistance value]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit section 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0, thereby turning on the transistor ITR0.

At this time, even if there is noise on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, since the voltage applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage) is higher, the Zener diode ZD0 There is no effect on the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 via the anode terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the transistor ITR0 remains turned on. That is, the voltage booster 4166 prevents the detection circuit 4164' from being affected by the predetermined voltage.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state of detecting magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12 V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

As a result, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163 is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). One end of the pull-up resistor IR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 via the Zener diode ZD0, so that the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so the Zener diode ZD0 is kept off. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). This turns off the transistor ITR0.

At this time, even if there is noise on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the predetermined voltage due to the noise applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. It is a predetermined voltage, and this predetermined voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). This turns off the transistor ITR0. That is, the voltage booster 4166 prevents the detection circuit 4164 from being affected by the predetermined voltage. Note that the operation of the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation in the normal case.

[Example in which a plurality of sensor signal input sections 4162 are arranged on a panel relay board 4161]
Next, FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the invention according to claim 1. In FIG. As shown in FIG. 113, an example is shown in which three of a voltage output section 4163, a voltage raising section 4166, and a detection circuit section 4164 are arranged on the same board (on the panel relay board 4161). The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration in which at least one of the voltage raising section 4166 and the voltage output section 4163 and the detection circuit section 4166 are arranged on the same substrate may be employed. FIG. 114 shows a circuit configuration in which a voltage raising section 4166 and a detection circuit section 4164 are arranged on the same board (panel relay board 4161), and a voltage output section 4163 is arranged on another board (for example, a sensor board). FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example;

In FIG. 115, the voltage output section 4163 and the voltage raising section 4166 are arranged on the same board (panel relay board 4161), and the detection circuit section 4164 is arranged on another board (for example, the main control board 1310). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in which; In this manner, the arrangement positions of the voltage output section 4163 and the detection circuit section 4164 can be changed in various ways.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing another example of the circuit configuration of the invention according to the embodiment of the present invention. The resistance value that changes with age and wiring length includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the magnetic sensor MGS, the wiring (harness) from these to the panel relay board 4161, and the connector CON1. The detection sensor section arranged at a predetermined position on the game board 5a is composed of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the first to third embodiments in FIG.

Voltage output section 4163 outputs a first voltage when the detection sensor section is in the first state, and outputs a second voltage lower than the first voltage when the detection sensor section is in the second state. Output voltage. For example, in the circuit shown in FIG. 113, when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, it outputs a low level voltage (for example, 0.4 V). Outputs a high-level voltage (eg, 12 V) when the

The detection circuit unit 4164 switches ON/OFF of output of the detection signal according to the first voltage or the second voltage output from the voltage output unit 4163 . Since the detection circuit unit 4164 of FIG. 113 uses the detection circuit unit 4164 described in the first to third embodiments, the pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to +12 V is connected to the front stage of the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. ing.

Then, the first voltage (for example, 12 V in each embodiment) higher than the second voltage (for example, 0.4 V in each embodiment) is applied to the subsequent stage of the voltage output section 4163. Even if a predetermined voltage (a voltage of 0.8 V or more and less than 2.0 V is shown in FIG. 111 as an example) lower than the detection circuit unit 4164 is applied, the detection circuit unit 4164 is prevented from being affected by the predetermined voltage. A voltage booster 4166 is provided.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 113, one detection circuit section 4164, a plurality of voltage output sections 4163 and a plurality of voltage raising sections 4166 are arranged on the same board (on the panel relay board 4161). . In this example, the voltage output section 4163 and the voltage raising section 4166 disposed downstream of the voltage output section 4163 constitute the sensor signal input section 4162 . Each of the plurality of voltage raising units 4166 , . . . is electrically connected in parallel to one detection circuit unit 4164 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113, a plurality of open-collector type sensor signal input sections 4162 connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 or magnetic sensors MGS are connected to the bases of the transistors ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164. Multiple terminals are connected in parallel. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the connector CON2.

In FIG. 113, when any one of these sensor signal input sections 4162 detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 is turned off, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b. is. Therefore, the detection signal can be detected without erroneously detecting any of the plurality of detection sensor units. Using the sensor signal input section 4162 having the voltage raising section 4166 in this way eliminates the need to consider the resistance value that changes as shown. Therefore, a plurality of sensor signal input units 4162 can be integrated on one board (on the panel relay board 4161), and the panel relay board 4161 can be commonly used (generalized) in various types of gaming machines. becomes possible. Therefore, it contributes to the reduction of man-hours related to design changes and manufacturing during development.

FIG. 116 shows an example in which a plurality of magnetic sensors MGS of another embodiment explained with reference to FIG. Further, in FIG. 116, it is configured with a magnetic sensor MGS of another embodiment. In another example of FIG. 116, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism (the magnetic sensor MGS is on), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a low-level voltage (for example, 0.4 V), while the magnetic sensor When the MGS does not detect magnetism (the magnetic sensor MGS is off), the voltage output section 4163 outputs a high-level voltage (eg, 12V).

On the other hand, in FIG. 116, since the detection circuit section 4164' described in another embodiment is used, the difference is that there is no pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to +12V. The collector terminal of transistor ITR0 is pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistor NR1.

In FIG. 116, when any one of these magnetic sensors MGS detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit section 4164' is turned off, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b. is.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the control of game progress and effects will be summarized below.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the pachinko machine 1 as a whole, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the results of the processes. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the control signal (control command) output by the main control board 1310, the display mode of the effect display device 1600 (design, various background images, characters, display images such as characters, etc.), It controls the display mode and operation mode of various members (the performance operation unit 400, movable members, etc.) that contribute to the performance.

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process every time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, the first and second start opening winning process is performed. In this first and second starting hole winning process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the starting hole, and when it is determined that it has won, the processing of increasing the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side by 1, etc. done.

If the processing flag is 0 when finishing the first and second starting opening winning processing, the fluctuation start processing is executed. In this fluctuation start process, on the condition that the number of reservations is 1 or more, the jackpot determination in the pending state is digested and executed, and after memorizing the result of this jackpot determination (hitting or losing, its type, etc.) , update the processing flag to "1".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when finishing the first and second starting opening winning processing, the variation pattern setting processing is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device based on the stored result of the big hit determination and the current game state ( After determining and setting the fluctuation time from the start of the variable display of the special pattern until the stop display, etc., and the stop pattern (jackpot pattern, losing pattern, etc.), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 2 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, the processing during fluctuation is executed. In this process during fluctuation, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting process is monitored by a timer, and based on the time-out, the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device to stop After that, when the result of the big win determination stored in the variation start process is a big win, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the big win determination stored in the change start process is not a big win (loss). , the process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process is restarted from the fluctuation start process.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 3 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, the jackpot game processing is executed. In this jackpot game processing, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to set the mode of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of jackpot won, Based on this, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, processing is performed to stop the operation of the condition device, and when the type of the jackpot won is a special type, it is controlled to be in an advantageous state such as a time-saving state or a variable probability state. After updating the game state flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the fluctuation start process is restarted.

As the variation pattern, a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol variation of the special symbol, and the effect that appears in the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. It can determine the type of pattern. In this embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a variation pattern for big hit variation, a variation pattern for loss reach variation, and a variation pattern for loss variation. The big win variation is a change that is performed when the result of the big win determination is a big win, and in the performance display device 1600, after the ready-to-win performance, the variable display of the decorative pattern finally develops so that the big win pattern is fixed and stopped. The effect to be performed is executed. The loss reach variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is determined that the reach is performed by the reach determination based on the reach random number. An effect is executed in which the variable display of the symbols is finally developed so that the symbols are fixed and stop-displayed. The loss variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is not determined to perform the reach in the reach determination based on the reach random number, and the effect display device 1600 does not go through the reach effect. , an effect is executed in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is finally expanded so that the missing symbols are fixed and stopped. Further, the variation pattern is defined so as to be able to specify which variation pattern is the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

That is, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires the game information such as the result of the big hit determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to it, thereby making it possible to appear such a variation pattern of decorative symbols. In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to causing the effect display device 1600 to appear a variation pattern of decorative symbols based on the acquired game information, the effect display (background and reserved image) related to the degree of expectation is changed, and the effect It executes control to change the mode (display and movement) in the operation unit 400 and to operate movable members such as the back and bottom movable effect unit 3100 .

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 can acquire operation information on the operation button 410 and operation information of the player in the vicinity of the opening window, and can also execute control related to effects according to these information.

Here, the principle of acquiring operation information in the vicinity of the opening window will be described. FIG. 119 is a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of acquiring operation information in the vicinity of the opening window. These are shown schematically. 120 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 119. FIG.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game board 5 which is housed in the body frame 4 and has the game area 5a in which the game balls flow down, and the game area 5a are made visible. A door frame 3 having an opening window and provided to be openable and closable with respect to the body frame 4 is provided. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the door frame 3 is provided with a reflective vertical wall portion 33 which is erected along the outer periphery of the opening window and is formed so as to be able to reflect light at least on its inner surface. It is Note that the opening window is a portion of the through hole 111 that is on the front side (front side) of the glass plate 192 .

Here, the reflecting standing wall portion 33 is provided as a frame decoration. More specifically, the reflective vertical wall portion 33 is formed by a lower reflective vertical wall portion 338 formed by the lower tray unit base 323 , a left reflective vertical wall portion 538 formed by the left unit base 531 , and a right unit base 551 . These members are arranged in a substantially U-shape along the outer peripheral edge of the opening window (a mode in which the reflecting wall portion is not installed on the upper side of the opening window). It is composed by The inner surfaces of the lower reflective vertical wall portion 338, the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 are all substantially perpendicular to one specific virtual plane P (FIG. 120). It is provided so as to be a light reflecting surface.

According to such a configuration, none of the lower reflective wall portion 338, the left reflective wall portion 538, and the right reflective wall portion 568 are provided among the reflective wall portions 33 formed in a substantially U-shape. The part (upper side of the opening window) is defined as "light from a predetermined light source outside the outer circumference of the opening window travels on the above-mentioned one specific virtual plane P and is taken into the outer circumference of the opening window, and is eventually reflected upright wall part It functions as a first portion that enables "the light reflected by the reflective vertical wall portion 33 to travel on the above-mentioned one specific virtual plane P and travel outside the outer periphery of the opening window. It will also function as a second part that makes it possible to "make it detectable".

Furthermore, in the reflective vertical wall portion 33 according to this embodiment, one reflecting wall portion straddles the inner surfaces of the three separate members (the lower reflective vertical wall portion 338, the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the right reflective vertical wall portion 568). A structure in which a member 36 (e.g., a reflective seal) is attached is adopted, so that the reflective performance of the reflective vertical wall portion 33 including the joints of three separate members is suitably secured.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, a left side base 572a (see FIG. 23) is provided on the upper left side of the door frame 3 outside the outer periphery of the opening window. In the internal space 3435a, a left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and a left outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35a are provided. The left side base 572a itself is provided by a member having extremely low (or zero) light transmittance.

Here, the internal space 3435a is a space including the one specific virtual plane P that intersects with the lower reflective vertical wall portion 338, the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the right reflective vertical wall portion 568, and is provided with an opening window. It is provided as a space that is opened only toward the side so that light can travel toward the side of the opening window and light from the side of the opening window is taken in. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while providing such an internal space 3435a behind the left upper speaker 573, in order to suppress illegal acts from behind the speaker 573, A transmissive member 3436a is provided which is designed to have extremely high transmittance and very little influence on the traveling direction of light.

Further, the left outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34a is unitized with the left outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35a, and emits light toward a wide range of at least the side on which the opening window is provided in the one specific virtual plane P. is provided so that it can proceed.

Further, the left outer peripheral ambient light detection section 35a is unitized with the left outer peripheral outer light emitting section 34a, and is capable of detecting light from the side where the opening window is provided on at least the one specific virtual plane P. It is designed to be

According to such a configuration, the light from the left outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34a is reflected by the reflective vertical wall portion 33 after proceeding toward the opening window side, and becomes the reflected light from the reflective vertical wall portion 33, and becomes the internal space 3435a. be incorporated into In this respect, in the internal space 3435a, the left side base 572a allows only the light from the opening window side to be taken in, so that disturbances are preferably suppressed while the light from the left outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34a The light emitted and reflected by the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 can be detected by the left outer peripheral external light detecting portion 35a.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, a right side base 572b (see FIG. 23) is provided on the upper right side of the door frame 3 outside the outer periphery of the opening window. In the internal space 3435b, a right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b and a right outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35b are provided. The right side base 572b itself is also made of a member with extremely low (or zero) light transmittance.

Here, like the internal space 3435a, the internal space 3435b is a space that includes the one specific virtual plane P that intersects with the lower reflective vertical wall portion 338, the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the right reflective vertical wall portion 568, respectively. and is provided as a space that is opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided so that light can travel toward the opening window side and light from the opening window side is taken in. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while such an internal space 3435b is provided behind the right upper speaker 573, in order to suppress fraudulent acts from behind the speaker 573, A transmissive member 3436b designed to have extremely high transmittance and extremely low influence on the traveling direction of light is provided.

In addition, the right outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34b is unitized with the right outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35b, and emits light toward a wide range of at least the side on which the opening window is provided on the one specific virtual plane P. is provided so that it can proceed.

The right outer peripheral ambient light detection section 35b is unitized with the right outer peripheral outer light emitting section 34b, and is capable of detecting light from the side where the opening window is provided on at least the one specific virtual plane P. It is designed to be

According to such a configuration, the light from the right outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34b is reflected by the reflective vertical wall portion 33 after proceeding toward the opening window side, and becomes the reflected light from the reflective vertical wall portion 33, and becomes the internal space 3435b. be incorporated into In this respect, in the internal space 3435b, the right side base 572b allows only the light from the opening window side to be taken in, so that disturbance is preferably suppressed, while the light from the right outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34b is The light emitted and reflected by the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 can be detected by the right outer peripheral external light detecting portion 35b.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the area ( 120) functions as a special operation receiving portion 3333 capable of detecting an operation by the player, and the mode of operation of the player with respect to this special operation receiving portion 3333 is determined. Effect control according to the determination is executable.

For example, when the special operation receiving portion 3333 is not operated by the player, the light emitted from the left outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34a in a wide angular range is not blocked by any physical object, and the reflecting standing wall portion 33 , (various angles on at least one specific virtual plane P), and travel toward the left outer peripheral ambient light detection section 35a. That is, in the left outer peripheral ambient light detection unit 35a, the reflected light from such various angles is detected by a plurality of light receiving elements (at least a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on one specific virtual plane P) using an optical lens or the like. , and based on the separate detection signal, special operation receiving section 3333 outputs information to peripheral control board 1510 to the effect that no physical object exists.

At this time, the light emitted in a wide angle range from the right outer circumference outer light-emitting portion 34b is also not blocked by any physical object, and can be emitted at various angles (at least on at least one specific virtual plane P) on the reflecting vertical wall portion 33. angle) and travels toward the right outer peripheral external light detection section 35b. That is, the right outer peripheral ambient light detection unit 35b also uses an optical lens or the like to detect the reflected light from such various angles using a plurality of light receiving elements (at least a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on a specific virtual plane P). , and based on the separate detection signal, special operation receiving section 3333 outputs information to peripheral control board 1510 to the effect that no physical object exists.

On the other hand, when the special operation receiving portion 3333 is operated by the player in the manner shown in FIG. The light is blocked by the physical object), and only the light other than the light directed in the blocked direction (angular range) becomes the reflected light from the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 and travels toward the left outer peripheral external light detection portion 35a. That is, in this case, in the left outer peripheral outside light detection section 35a, based on the information from the plurality of light receiving elements (the plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P), the left outer peripheral outside light emitting section 34a By determining the direction (angle) and the size (angle range) in which the light emitted from the outside is blocked, the physical It outputs information to the peripheral control board 1510 as to whether the object exists.

At this time, part of the light emitted in a wide angular range from the right outer circumference outer light emitting portion 34b is also blocked by the player's finger (physical object), and the light directed in the blocked direction (angle range). Only the light other than the above becomes reflected light from the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 and travels toward the right outer peripheral external light detecting portion 35b. That is, in this case, the right outer circumference outside light detection section 35b detects information from the plurality of light receiving elements (the plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P), and the right outer circumference outside light emitting section 34b By determining the blocked direction (angle) and the size (angle range) of the light emitted from the above-mentioned outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b, the physical It outputs information to the peripheral control board 1510 as to whether the object exists.

The peripheral control board 1510 acquires and analyzes the information from the left outer peripheral ambient light detection section 35a and the right outer peripheral ambient light detection section 35b and analyzes them, thereby enabling the special operation receiving section 3333 to perform physical In addition to information on whether an object exists (whether an operation has been performed on the special operation receiving section 3333), if a physical object exists in the special operation receiving section 3333, its coordinate position (x, y) and size It will be possible to obtain information related to As will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment acquires such information on a regular basis. Operation gestures such as changes can be determined, and effect control is executed according to the determination.

Note that these analysis processes do not necessarily have to be performed on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, and may be performed by an external means that acquires information from the left outer peripheral ambient light detection section 35a and the right outer peripheral ambient light detection section 35b. The peripheral control board 1510 may acquire the analysis results from the external means, or the external means and the peripheral control board 1510 may share the analysis results.

In addition, the light emission from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the light emission from the right outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b are set in a blinking mode, respectively, so that the left outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is in a light emitting state and the right outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b is in an extinguished state. A certain period and a period in which the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is in the off state and the right outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b is in the light emitting state may alternately occur. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is in the light emitting state is detected by the left outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35a side, and the reflected light when the right outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 35a is in the light emitting state is detected by the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 35a. If the external light detection section 35b detects and analyzes the information based on the information, the light from the left outer peripheral outer light emitting section 34a and the light from the right outer outer peripheral light emitting section 34b do not interfere with each other. Accordingly, it is expected that detection information with higher precision will be obtained.

Further, the light emission from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the light emission from the right outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b are set in a blinking mode, respectively, so that the left outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is in a light emitting state and the right outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b is in an extinguished state. a period during which the left outer peripheral light-emitting portion 34a is in the off state and the right outer peripheral outer light-emitting portion 34b is in the light-emitting state; A cycle in which periods in the off state occur in sequence may appear repeatedly. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is in the light emitting state is detected by the left outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35a side, and the reflected light when the right outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 35a is in the light emitting state is detected by the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 35a. Detected by the external light detection section 35b side, the offset amount when the left outer peripheral outer light emitting section 34a and the right outer peripheral outer light emitting section 35a are in the off state is also detected and analyzed based on this information, Interference between the light from the left outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34a and the light from the right outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b is eliminated, and it becomes possible to make a judgment after eliminating the detected offset amount, which increases the accuracy accordingly. It becomes expected to obtain high detection information.

Visible light may be used as the light emitted from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the right outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34b. However, in the pachinko machine 1, in view of the fact that effects are performed using light at various locations, using invisible light rays such as infrared rays is effective in reducing disturbances from these effect lights and the effects of the effect light. It is more desirable in suitably suppressing the bad influence on.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, "light from a predetermined light source outside the outer periphery of the opening window travels on the above-mentioned one specific virtual plane P and is taken into the outer periphery of the opening window, a first portion that enables the light to be reflected by the vertical reflecting wall portion 33; The second portion for making it possible to "detect" is provided as the same portion of the reflective vertical wall portion 33 formed in a substantially U-shape. However, a plurality of regions in which light is permitted to travel between the inside and outside of the outer periphery of the opening window are provided on the reflecting vertical wall portion 33, and the outer periphery outer light emitting portion and the outer periphery outer light detecting portion are separately provided in these regions. and may be arranged respectively.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 is formed in a substantially U-shape with an upper opening. You may make it form the reflecting vertical wall part 33 also in the peripheral edge between. However, it is preferable to set the opening direction of the internal space 3435a and the internal space 3435b downward in order to prevent disturbance caused by direct light from illumination. .

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, by using the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the left outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35a, and the right outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34b and the right outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35b, special Although the operation of the operation receiving portion 3333 is made detectable, the present invention is not limited to this. In other words, any structure may be used as long as the operation of the special operation receiving portion 3333 can be detected. It may be detected by a photodetector and the coordinates (x, y) and size of the physical object may be determined from the detection result.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the light from the outer peripheral light emitting portions 34 (the left outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34a and the right outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b) provided outside the outer periphery of the opening window is As reflected light from the reflective vertical wall portion 33, which is erected along the outer periphery of the window and is formed so as to be able to reflect light on at least the inner surface thereof, the outer peripheral external light detection portion 35 (left outer periphery) provided outside the outer periphery of the opening window By detecting with the outside light detection unit 35a and the right outer circumference outside light detection unit 35b), the vicinity of the opening window is made to function as a special operation receiving unit 3333, and an effect according to the operation mode of the player in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is performed. It is executable.

By arranging the outer peripheral external light detection part 35 in the inner space 3435 of the side base 572 that is opened toward the side where the opening window is provided, instead of arranging it in an exposed state, the outer peripheral external light detection can be performed. As described above, when the light is detected by the unit 35, it is possible to suitably exclude the effect light that may become a disturbance.

However, even with such a configuration, the light from the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 was reflected by the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 from the portion of the internal space 3435 that was opened toward the side where the opening window was provided. Since the structure is such that the effect light can be captured in addition to the light, there is concern that the effect light may become disturbance and adversely affect the detection accuracy of the outer peripheral external light detection unit 35 .

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. is arranged at a position where it is not possible to irradiate the traveling light. More specifically, the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 is provided at a position forward of the special operation receiving portion 3333 and has an extremely low (or zero) light transmittance. attached to the side. Since the base portion BL1 is wider than the frame-side light-emitting portion L1, it is difficult for the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 to travel to the rear side (the side where the opening window is provided). , thereby making it difficult for the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435. As shown in FIG.

Moreover, in the right unit base 551 according to this embodiment, the first right decorative base portion 551a made of a material that allows the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 to travel with high transmittance, and the frame-side It has a second right decorative base portion 551b made of a material (for example, metal) with a low transmittance (or a transmittance of 0) that hinders the progress of light from the light emitting portion L1. The first right decorative base portion 551a is formed so as to surround the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 so that the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 can contribute as dramatic light, whereas the second right decorative base portion 551a is formed to surround the frame-side light emitting portion L1. The base portion 551b is formed between the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 and the opening window so that the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 does not easily travel toward the side where the opening window is provided. This also makes it difficult for the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435. As shown in FIG.

In particular, the second right decorative base portion 551b according to this embodiment allows the light from the frame-side light emitting portion L1 to travel toward the player through the first right decorative base portion 551a. It is provided so as to extend to a part of the front side of the right decorative base portion 551a, thereby suitably suppressing light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 from proceeding to the opening window. .

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the right unit base 551 is provided with both the base portion BL1 and the second right decorative base portion 551b, but only one of them is provided. Even in this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435 .

On the other hand, the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 provided on the left unit base 531 of the body frame 4 is attached to the front side of the base portion BL2, which has extremely low (or zero) light transmittance. is at a position where light traveling on a specific virtual plane P can be emitted. However, as is clear from FIG. 120, since the reflecting member 36 is provided between the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 and the opening window, the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 is transmitted through the opening window. This makes it difficult for the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 to be taken into the internal space 3435. As shown in FIG.

However, since the height and width of the reflecting member 36 are small, there is concern that the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 may be reflected by other members and directed toward the opening window. Therefore, in the left unit base 531 according to this embodiment as well, the first left decorative base portion 531a and the frame side base portion 531a are made of a material that allows the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 to travel with high transmittance. It has a second left decorative base portion 531b made of a material (for example, metal) with a low transmittance (or a transmittance of 0) that hinders the progress of light from the light emitting portion L2. The first left ornamental base portion 531a is formed to surround the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 so that the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 can contribute to production light, whereas the second left-side ornamental base portion 531a is formed to surround the frame-side light emitting portion L2. The base portion 531b is formed between the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 and the opening window so as to make it difficult for the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 to travel toward the side where the opening window is provided. This also makes it difficult for the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 to be taken into the internal space 3435. As shown in FIG.

In particular, the second left decorative base portion 531b according to this embodiment allows the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 to travel toward the player side through the first left decorative base portion 531a. It is provided so as to extend to a part of the front side of the left decorative base portion 531a, thereby suitably suppressing light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 from proceeding to the opening window. .

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the left unit base 531 is provided with the second left decoration base portion 531b, and the right unit base 551 is provided with the second right decoration base portion 551b. These members may not necessarily be provided, and even in this case, it is difficult for the effect light to be taken into the internal space 3435, as described above. When the second left ornamental base portion 531b and the second right ornamental base portion 551b are not provided, the reflecting member 36 is not provided with the first left ornamental base portion 531a or the first right ornamental base portion 551a. Instead of being attached to the outer surface (surface that can be contacted from the outside), if it is attached to the inner surface (the surface that cannot be contacted from the outside) of the first left decorative base portion 531a or the first right decorative base portion 551a, the It becomes expected to avoid degrading the reflective performance due to direct physical contact of the . In this case, light from the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 (the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a, the right outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34b) passes through the first left decorative base portion 531a and the first right decorative base portion 551a, and then passes through the above-described light emitting portion 34. The light is reflected by the reflecting member 36 , passes through the first left decorative base portion 531 a and the first right decorative base portion 551 a again, and is taken into the internal space 3435 .

When the second left decorative base portion 531b is provided on the left unit base 531 and the second right decorative base portion 551b is provided on the right unit base 551, the reflecting member 36 is omitted and the second left decorative base portion 531b is provided. The left ornamental base portion 531b and the second right ornamental base portion 551b themselves may also function as reflecting members using a material such as metal. According to such a configuration, only by providing the reflecting members (the second left decorative base portion 531b and the second right decorative base portion 551b), it is possible to prevent the effect light from the frame side light emitting portions L1 and L2 from becoming disturbance. While suitably suppressing, the detection accuracy of the outer peripheral ambient light detection unit 35 can be suitably ensured by the reflected light from the reflecting members (the second left ornamental base portion 531b and the second right ornamental base portion 551b). Become.

In the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, by using such a principle of acquiring operation information near the opening window, it is possible to obtain information such as the coordinates and size of the physical object located near the opening window. As a result, substantially the entire area of the opening window (substantially the entire area that is visible when viewed from the front of the glass plate 192) is used as the special operation receiving portion 3333, resulting in more dynamic and highly flexible operability. It is possible to realize a performance suitable for this.

The operability and performance that can be realized by using such a special operation receiving section 3333 will be described below. 121 to 127 are schematic diagrams for explaining the operability and performance that can be realized by using the special operation receiving portion 3333, and are related to explaining the operability and the performance. In addition to omitting members that do not exist, related members are also shown schematically.

FIG. 121 shows the special operation receiving portion 3333 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, and various effect members A to E arranged at positions overlapping the special operation receiving portion 3333 when viewed from the front. is schematically shown. The arrows in the figure simply indicate the movable ranges of the various movable bodies among the effect members A to E.

As shown in FIG. 121, when the special operation receiving portion 3333 according to this illustrative example is viewed from the front, there is a special operation receiving portion 3333 on the back side of the glass plate 192 that can contribute to an effect according to the result of the big hit determination. As members, movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C, a display portion D, and a board surface light emitting portion E are arranged so as to be capable of emitting light at a portion where game balls can flow down and other portions. . Arrows in FIG. 121 schematically show the movable ranges of the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C. As shown in FIG.

It should be noted that these members are shown as an example for explaining the technology of the present application, and do not necessarily match the embodiment previously described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. However, basically, the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C are composed of "back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, back top left movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back top middle movable production unit 3400, back The display part D corresponds to the "effect display device 1600", and the board surface light emitting part E corresponds to "various decorations provided for the game board 5". It corresponds to "various LEDs mounted on a substrate". Note that the board surface light-emitting portion E does not necessarily have to be provided on the game board 5 , and may be a member (such as a light guide plate) provided on the front side of the game board 5 , for example.

Here, in the peripheral control board 1510, first, the display portion D, in which the effect display corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is performed, is positioned as the target of the operation effect. When the player performs an operation on the overlapping coordinate area and this is detected as a physical object, control is possible so that a change in performance corresponding to the operation appears on the display portion D.

An example of effect control in the case of causing a change in effect on the display portion D by an operation on the special operation receiving portion 3333 will be described below.

[First operation control mode for display unit D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. Of all the coordinate regions (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, the first coordinate region Z1 facing the first display region of the display unit D is set (controlled) to be capable of receiving effects, and is displayed. A specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed in the first display area of the portion D. FIG. Then, during a predetermined period during which the specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly is detected as a physical object, the specific operation instruction image S1 is hidden. At the same time as ending the acceptance of performance for the first coordinate area Z1, a change in performance is caused in the display part D, and the type of the change in performance caused can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of big hit determination.

At this time, when the effect change is caused based on the fact that the special operation receiving portion 3333 is operated anywhere within the first coordinate area Z1, the effect change is applied to at least the display portion D. It is desirable to generate it in the first display area facing the first coordinate area Z1. That is, in this case, when the player makes it difficult to visually recognize the first display area with his/her finger or the like in front view, the effect change occurs at least within the first display area. In the first display area until the finger is moved or the first display area is viewed from an oblique direction (using the space between the glass plate 192 and the display unit D) instead of from the front view It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the appearance change. Alternatively, the player can proceed with the game without checking the effect change in the first display area while placing his or her finger on the first coordinate area Z1, or the player can be positioned in front of the pachinko machine 1. It is also possible to select a way of enjoying the game, such as having a third person who is not in the game confirm the changes in the performance in the first display area, and it is expected that the amusement of the game will be improved.

Note that if the player's operation is not detected during the lapse of a predetermined period of time (the arrival of a specific timing) after the appearance of the specific operation instruction image S1, the specific operation instruction image S1 is not displayed. , and reception of the effect for the first coordinate area Z1 is terminated. At this time, it is possible to cause a change in the effect that appears when the reception of the effect for the first coordinate area Z1 is made, or without causing a change in the effect that appears when the reception of the effect for the first coordinate area Z1 is received. It is also possible to terminate reception of the effect for the first coordinate area Z1.

[Second operation control mode for display unit D]
Further, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, "the second coordinate area Z2 facing the second display area of the display section D" and "the third display area of the display section D Both the area and the third coordinate area Z3 facing the area are set (controlled) to be capable of receiving effects, and the second operation instruction image S2 is displayed in the second display area of the display section D, and the third display area is displayed. , the third operation instruction image S3 is displayed. Then, during a predetermined period in which both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are displayed, the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 of the special operation receiving portion 3333 is displayed. An operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly speaking, a finger or the like is sufficient in the special operation receiving unit 3333, and does not necessarily need to be touched)) is performed, and this is a physical object. When it is detected, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are hidden, and the acceptance of the effect of the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is terminated, and the display section D , a specific effect (effect corresponding to the selected side (coordinate area side where the physical object is detected)) is generated, and in the generated specific effect, it is possible to execute control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit determination. .

It should be noted that the operation by the player was not detected until a predetermined period of time passed (a specific timing arrived) after both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 appeared. In this case, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are hidden, and reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is terminated. ing. At this time, a specific effect that appears when there is an effect acceptance for the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 may be generated, or the specific effect may not be generated. However, in the case of generating a specific effect that appears when there is an effect acceptance for the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3, the operation for the second operation instruction image S2 is accepted prior to the execution of the specific effect. It is desirable to display a display (effect etc.) that is generated when the third operation instruction image S3 is received or a display (effect etc.) that is generated when an operation on the third operation instruction image S3 is accepted. That is, in this case, it is possible to grasp that the rendering on the side where the effect is generated is forcibly executed while neither the second coordinate area Z2 nor the third coordinate area Z3 is operated. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game due to the lack of knowledge of what effect is being executed.

In addition, in the first operation control mode and the second operation control mode for the display unit D, not only is the reception of the effect for the first coordinate area Z1, the second coordinate area Z2, and the third coordinate area Z3 allowed, but also the same During the period, other operation means such as the operation button 410 may be allowed to accept the same effect.

For example, in the first operation control mode for the display unit D, when the first effect condition is satisfied, both the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 can receive the effect, and the specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed. is displayed, the specific The operation instruction image S1 is hidden, and the acceptance of the effect of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is ended, and at the same time, the effect change is caused in the display part D, and the expectation for the result of the big hit determination is made according to the type of effect change that has occurred. It is possible to implement control that can suggest degree.

Note that even when there is an operation (detection of a physical object) with respect to the first coordinate area Z1, the specific operation instruction image S1 is not displayed, and the acceptance of the effect of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is terminated, and the above-mentioned A performance change is caused in the display part D, and control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit determination by the type of the generated performance change can be executed.

In addition, in the second operation control mode for the display unit D, when the second effect condition is satisfied, both the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 and the operation button 410 can receive the effect. do. Then, in a predetermined period during which the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed, an operation (detection of a physical object) on either the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 is not performed. When a pressing operation (detection of a button switch) is performed on the button 410, the second selection image indicating that the specific operation instruction image S2 is selected and the specific operation instruction image S3 are selected. Switching display is performed between the third selected image showing that the user is in the When a predetermined period of time elapses after the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed in a state in which either the second selection image or the third selection image is displayed, the selected image is displayed. A display (such as an effect) is generated that enables the user to recognize that an operation has been accepted for the operation instruction images S2 and S3 on the side where is displayed, and the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are selected. Both the images (the second selected image and the third selected image) are hidden, and reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 and the operation button 410 is ended. Then, after that, a specific effect (the effect of the selected side) is generated on the display section D, and the generated specific effect enables execution of control that suggests the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit determination.

It should be noted that, within the above-mentioned predetermined period, it is made possible to accept an operation (an operation for accepting any decision) for another operating means, and when there is an operation for the other operating means, the selected image appears. The second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selection image (second selection image and the third selected image) may be hidden, and reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, or other operation means may be terminated. Then, after that, a specific effect (the effect of the selected side) is generated on the display section D, and the generated specific effect enables execution of control that suggests the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit determination.

Further, within the predetermined period until the specific effect appears, the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z2 are displayed regardless of whether the second selected image or the third selected image appears. The area Z3 can receive an effect. Then, when an operation on either the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 is detected, the rendering is performed regardless of which of the second selected image and the third selected image appears. The display (effect, etc.) on the side on which the acceptance is made appears, and the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selection images (second selection image, third selection image) are all hidden. Then, reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, and other operation means is ended. At this time, the operation is detected before all of the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selection images (the second selection image and the third selection image) are hidden. The switching display may be performed so that the selected image (the second selected image, the third selected image) appears on the selected side. Then, after that, a specific effect (the effect of the selected side) is generated on the display section D, and the generated specific effect enables the execution of control that suggests the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit determination.

According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to accept effects for the first coordinate area Z1, the second coordinate area Z2, and the third coordinate area Z3, but also for other operation means such as the operation button 410. It is possible to accept the same performance. In this regard, in the second operation control mode, while allowing the reception of the same effect, if an operation is performed with respect to the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3, the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area By accepting only one operation (detection of a physical object) on the area Z3, it is possible to generate a side effect according to the player's preference. That is, in the case of using other operation means, "a side according to the preference of the player is displayed until a predetermined period of time has passed since the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed." '' or ''perform at least two operations using a plurality of operation means'', when a specific operation receiving unit 3333 is used, it is more Since it is possible to make a display mode according to the taste of the player appear with only a small number of operations (one time in this production example), it is possible to realize more complicated effects with simple operability. come to be expected.

In addition, while providing such efficient operability, when simultaneously providing operability that can achieve a desired operation by performing at least two or more operations using a plurality of operation means, The player can ponder which operation to select as the desired operation while performing operations in the process steps leading up to the desired operation. That is, in this case, while performing the operation in the process stage leading to the desired operation, it becomes easier to imagine the effect situation after the selection, and it becomes difficult to decide which operation to perform within a predetermined period of time. be able to In this way, the player can selectively use operation means requiring different numbers of operations depending on whether the player is ready to make a quick decision or is in a troubled state, thereby maintaining the interest in the game. become.

In this way, in the peripheral control board 1510, by making the display part D the target of the operation effect using the special operation receiving part 3333, it is possible to realize an unprecedented interesting effect. However, as described above, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the special operation receiving portion 3333 is set to a larger operation receiving range than the display portion D when viewed from the front (the coordinate range to be detected is the coordinate range of the glass plate 192). By realizing a production that uses such a special relationship, it is possible to realize more dynamic and flexible operability and suitable production. .

[Third operation control mode for display unit D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, the fourth coordinate area Z4 facing the fourth display area of the display unit D is set (controlled) to be capable of receiving effects, and is displayed. A specific operation target image S4 is displayed in the fourth display area of the display unit D, and a specific image prompting an operation to move the specific operation target image S4 to the movable body B is displayed in another display area of the display unit D. indicate.

Then, during a predetermined period after the specific operation target image S4 is displayed, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (for example, a Strictly speaking, it is sufficient if there is a finger or the like in the special operation receiving portion 3333, and it is not necessary to touch)). , the coordinate area in which the effect can be received is not limited to the limited fourth coordinate area Z4 in the display section D, but at least a large fifth coordinate area including the coordinate area facing the movable body B provided outside the display section D. Change the setting to Z5. Note that the fifth coordinate area Z5 in this illustrative example is a coordinate area (not necessarily coincident with the fourth coordinate area Z) facing the fourth display area and facing the movable body B provided outside the display section D. It includes up to the coordinate area where the area is located, and is set so as to straddle the movable body B, the display section D, and the board surface light emitting section E.

Note that at this time, the display mode of the specific operation target image S4 is changed (for example, the color is changed) based on the fact that an operation has been performed on any part of the special operation receiving portion 3333 within the fourth coordinate area Z4. (or displayed in a vibrating mode) so that the player can recognize that the specific operation target image S4 is in a movable state by an operation by the player.

That is, in the third operation control mode, a physical object such as a finger is held in the special operation receiving portion 3333, and the physical object is moved to a coordinate position facing the movable body B in the fifth coordinate area Z5. , the specific operation target image S4 appearing in the display section D acts on the movable body B provided outside the display section D, and the effect on the movable body B is started. We are realizing a production.

Therefore, when a physical object such as a finger is held in the special operation receiving portion 3333 and the physical object is moved within the fifth coordinate area Z5, the peripheral control board 1510 detects such movement of the physical object, It is possible to perform control to move the specific operation target image S4 within the display section D so as to follow the movement of the detected physical object. As a result, the specific operation target image S4 is in the middle of movement in which the physical object has not finished moving to the coordinate position facing the movable body B, and the physical object in the special operation receiving section 3333 It moves within the display section D so as to follow the movement in the front view.

More specifically, while a physical object such as a finger is held within the special operation receiving portion 3333, the physical object is moved from the position shown in FIG. , the peripheral control board 1510 moves the specific operation target image S4 within the display section D so as to follow such movement of the physical object. However, when a physical object such as a finger is at the position shown in FIG. A portion of the image protrudes from the display portion D, and the entire image cannot be displayed. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the specific operation target image S4 is displayed only on the part that can be displayed on the display part D, and the part protruding from the display part D is displayed on the display part D. is controlled to emit light from the corresponding portion of the board surface light-emitting portion E so that is recognizable. More specifically, as the physical object approaches the coordinate position facing the edge of the display section D, the portion where the specific operation target image S4 is displayed on the display section D is reduced. is controlled so as to increase the portion corresponding to the light emitting region of .

With such a configuration, it is possible to express a state in which the specific operation target image S4 on the display section D is about to jump out of the display section D due to the player's operation. More dynamic and highly flexible operability and performance suitable for this, which cannot be contained in a single unit, will be realized.

Especially, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. In spite of being placed, not only the display section D but also a member different from the display section D (board surface light emitting section E) is controlled for the effect. Therefore, even when the physical object is moved in a coordinate area facing a plurality of members in the special operation receiving portion 3333, it becomes easy to recognize that the effect corresponding to the movement is appearing. It is possible to suitably realize performance suitable for dynamic operability.

Note that when a physical object such as a player's finger is moved slightly upward from the position shown in FIG. (Here, board surface light-emitting part E) is placed at a coordinate position facing it. However, in this case as well, instead of suddenly hiding all of the specific operation target image S4 and causing only the board surface light emitting unit E to emit light, as the physical object moves away from the coordinate position facing the display unit D, the specific operation Control is performed so that the portion where the target image S4 is displayed on the display portion D is reduced, and the portion corresponding to the light emitting area of the board surface light emitting portion E is increased. That is, in this case, when the physical object is separated from the coordinate position facing the display section D by a specific distance, only the board surface light emitting section E out of the display section D and the board surface light emitting section E is given an effect (here, light emission). As a result, an effect as if the specific operation target image S4 has moved out of the display unit D can be expressed.

Then, when the physical object such as the player's finger moves further upward within the fifth coordinate area Z5 and reaches the position shown in FIG. The control is performed so that both the board surface light-emitting portion E and the movable body B in the position are caused to emit light. That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the control similar to the effect control between the display unit D and the board light emitting unit E is performed between the board light emitting unit E and the movable body B. I am trying to do it. More specifically, when the physical object in the coordinate area facing the game board 5 (here, the board surface light-emitting portion E) approaches the coordinate area facing the movable body B by a predetermined distance, the physical object Although it is within the coordinate area facing the board surface light emitting part E, the effect control is performed not only for the board surface light emitting part E but also for a member (movable body B) different from the board surface light emitting part E. I have to. Therefore, even when the physical object is moved within the coordinate area facing both the board surface light-emitting portion E and the movable body B in the special operation receiving portion 3333, an effect (here, a display It becomes easy to recognize that the specific operation target image S4) that has moved out of the part D is appearing (moving), so that it is possible to suitably realize the performance suitable for the dynamic operability. .

Then, when the physical object such as the player's finger moves further upward within the fifth coordinate area Z5 and reaches the position shown in FIG. It is determined that the operation as if moving to Z5 has been properly performed, and the conditions in the third operation control mode are satisfied, and the acceptance of the effect for the fifth coordinate area Z5 is ended. In addition, a display that allows recognition of the fact that the condition (the specific operation target image S4 is moved to the movable body B) in the third operation control mode is satisfied appears on the display unit D, and the movable body B is used. Execute the control to start the production. The effect using the movable body B can be realized, for example, by causing the movable body B to emit light in a predetermined manner, or by causing the movable body B to operate in a predetermined manner. It should be possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the results of

Note that in the third operation control mode, when the physical object moves within the special operation receiving section 3333 and the physical object moves out of the fifth coordinate area Z5 (the finger is removed from the special operation receiving section 3333). 123(a), it is desirable to start over from the state shown in FIG. 123(a). In other words, as will be described later, basically, the peripheral control board 1510 periodically acquires the positional information of the physical object regardless of the execution status of the rendering. Information indicating that the object is moving, information indicating that the object has moved outside the fifth coordinate area Z5, and the like are obtained.

In addition, although the specific operation target image S4 is moved so as to follow the movement of the physical object, the present invention is not limited to this. The operation target image S4 may be moved.

Further, the fifth coordinate area Z5 may be the entire coordinate area of the special operation receiving section 3333. FIG. In addition, if there is no site on the opposite side of the coordinate position where the physical object is placed, which can be rendered to suggest the existence of a specific operation target image S4, the coordinate position near the physical object is placed. An effect representation may be made to suggest that a specific operation target image S4 exists at the site.

In addition, in this example of explanation, a board surface light-emitting part E capable of effect expression (light emission) is placed between the display part D and the movable body B. good. That is, in this case, after the specific operation target image S4 is no longer displayed on the display unit D, until the physical object is moved to a coordinate position facing the movable body B (or a nearby coordinate position), the player , the operation is continued while holding in mind the image that the specific operation target image S4 is moving.

In addition, the display unit D displays a map that enables a grasp of the positional relationship between the display unit D and the movable body B, and the position of the specific operation target image S4 is displayed in the map according to the movement of the physical object. You may make it perform the production|presentation display suggested by.

122 to 125, the respective coordinate areas Z1 to Z5 are shown, but the player cannot actually see them.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 1510, among the various production members shown in FIG. When the player performs an operation on the coordinate area overlapping the movable bodies A1, A2, and C in the front view of the operation receiving portion 3333 and this is detected as a physical object, an effect action corresponding to the operation appears. It is controllable. Therefore, the player can select any one of the plurality of movable bodies and operate them in an appropriate manner (speed, amount of movement).

[Fourth Manipulation Control Mode for Movable Body C]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. Of all the coordinate regions (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, the sixth coordinate region Z6 facing a part of the movable body C is set (controlled) to be capable of receiving effects. At this time, in order to allow the player side to recognize that the sixth coordinate area Z6 is capable of receiving effects in order to operate the movable body C, a specific display image appears on the display unit D, or the movable body C is displayed. It is desirable to cause C to emit light in the first mode (for example, to emit light in a flashing mode) or vibrate.

Then, during a predetermined period after the sixth coordinate area Z6 is set to be capable of receiving effects, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly speaking, a special It is sufficient if there is a finger or the like in the operation receiving portion 3333, and it does not necessarily have to be touched.)) is performed and detected as a physical object, as shown in FIG. is set to a large seventh coordinate area Z7 including at least the movable range CT of the movable body C instead of the sixth coordinate area Z6. Here, the seventh coordinate area Z7 is set as a coordinate area including all of the sixth coordinate area Z6.

That is, in the fourth operation control mode, a physical object such as a finger is held in the special operation receiving portion 3333, and the physical object is moved to the end of the movable range CT of the movable body C in the seventh coordinate area Z7. When moved to the coordinate position facing the part, the movable body C is moved so as to follow the movement of the physical object.

Therefore, when the state shown in FIG. 126(b) is reached, a physical object such as a finger is detected in the seventh coordinate area Z7, and the movable body C is moved by the movement of the physical object. It is desirable to perform control that enables recognition of In the example shown in FIG. 126(b), the movable body C is caused to emit light in the second mode (for example, light in the constant mode).

However, the player does not know what kind of movable range CT is provided for the movable body C, and the player does not know what kind of movable range CT is provided in the movable body C. There is a concern that even if the physical object is to be moved along the movable range CT of the movable body C, this cannot be done properly. As a result, if the physical object such as the player's finger deviates from the seventh coordinate area Z7 (special operation receiving unit 126(a) against the player's intention, and the interest in the game may decrease.

In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 126(a) and 126(b), the seventh coordinate area Z7 in the fourth operation control mode is set as the control target. The sixth coordinate region Z6 is set in a range expanded by at least the first distance over all directions in front view, including the direction opposite to the upper side where the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. I'm doing it.

According to such a configuration, even if the player does not grasp what kind of movable range CT is provided for the movable body C, the direction deviated from the movable range CT of the movable body C When the finger (physical object) is moved to the side, the movable body C does not move even though the effect has been accepted (even though the state shown in FIG. 126(a) is not redone). Since the phenomenon occurs, it becomes possible to estimate the movable range CT of the movable body C and perform the operation through confirmation of such a phenomenon.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, within the movable range CT set for the movable body C, the movable body C is positioned at a plurality of predetermined positions (the first position shown in FIG. 126(b) ( the original position), the second position shown in FIG. 126(c), the third position shown in FIG. 127(a), and the fourth position (terminal position) shown in FIG. 127(b)) make it possible to control Then, the seventh coordinate area Z7 is divided into a first driving coordinate area Z7-1 including a portion facing the first position (original position) and a second driving coordinate area Z7-1 including a portion facing the second position. Z7-2, a third drive coordinate region Z7-3 including a portion facing the third position, and a fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4 including a portion facing the fourth position, and drive By determining to which of the coordinate areas Z7-1 to Z7-4 the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 has moved, the movable body C is moved to the driving coordinate area corresponding to the determination. control is executable.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 126(a) and 126(b), the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 including the portion facing the first position (original position) within the movable range CT is the object to be controlled. The movable range CT is set as a range extending from the sixth coordinate area Z6 by at least the first distance in the left, right, and downward directions except for the upper side where the movable range CT of the movable body C extends.

According to such a configuration, after a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)) and the setting is changed to the seventh coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126(b)), the Even if the physical object is moved in a direction different from the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends (moves less than the first distance), the physical object remains within the single first drive coordinate area Z7-1. Therefore, the movable body C does not move and remains at the first position (original position) corresponding to the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 where the physical object was detected. Become. That is, in this case, even though the operation by the player has received the effect (even though the state shown in FIG. 126(a) is not redone), the movable body C does not move. Therefore, by confirming such a phenomenon, the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends can be estimated and the operation can be performed.

On the other hand, after a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)) and the setting is changed to the seventh coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126(b)), the physical object is moved. When the body C is moved in the direction in which the movable range CT of the body C extends (moves less than the first distance), the physical object only moves the second distance shorter than the first distance, and the physical object shown in FIG. from the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 shown in FIG. 126C to reach the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 shown in FIG. 126(c). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the physical object is detected within the second driving coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C moves to the first position corresponding to the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 (Fig. 126 ( b)) to the second position (FIG. 126(c)) corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2.

Here, as shown in FIG. 126(c), the second drive coordinate region Z7-2 including the portion facing the second position within the movable range CT also extends in the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. In the left and right directions orthogonal to , it has a range that extends by the same distance as the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. On the other hand, the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the horizontal direction.

According to such a configuration, when the physical object detected in the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 is moved in a direction different from the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends, the physical object is , it is likely to be detected within a single second driving coordinate area Z7-2, and the movable body C corresponds to the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 in which the physical object is detected without moving. It will continue to stay at the second position to do. That is, in this case, even though the operation by the player has received the effect (even though the state shown in FIG. 126(a) is not redone), the movable body C does not move. Therefore, by confirming such a phenomenon, the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends can be estimated and the operation can be performed.

Moreover, by setting the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 to the left and right ranges shifted from the movable range CT of the movable body C in this way, the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)) can be obtained. After a physical object such as a finger is detected in , the criteria for determining an appropriate operation for moving the physical object along the movable range CT of the movable body C are relaxed. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the difficulty in moving the physical object while guessing what kind of movable range CT is provided for the movable body C without grasping it, and the game is improved. You will be able to maintain your interest.

Note that when the movable body C moves to the second position corresponding to the second driving coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C is positioned at the first position corresponding to the first driving coordinate area Z7-1. It may be made to emit light in a mode (for example, green) different from the light emission mode (for example, blue). Also, at this time, when the physical object is detected within the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 before the movable body C finishes moving to the second position corresponding to the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 (the When the body C starts to move toward the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the light emission mode is changed (for example, from blue to green) to indicate that the operation by the player has been properly received. It becomes possible to recognize this from an early stage, and it is possible to suppress the frustration caused by the delay in behavior of the movable body, which is unavoidable in response to a quick operation by the player's finger or the like.

Also, when the physical object moves at a speed exceeding the moving speed of the movable body, the movable body cannot be moved so as to follow the physical object. Control is performed to move to the latest detected position.

Then, the physical object in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 (FIG. 126(c)) is moved upward by the player's finger operation or the like, and the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (FIG. 127 ( a)), the movable body C moves from the second position (FIG. 126(c)) corresponding to the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 to the third driving coordinate area Z7-3. It will move to the third position (FIG. 127(a)).

Here, as shown in FIG. 126(c), the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 including the portion facing the third position within the movable range CT is the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. In the left and right directions orthogonal to , it has a range that extends over a longer distance than the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. On the other hand, the vertical direction within the third driving coordinate area Z7-3 in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the horizontal direction.

That is, as described above, when a movable body that does not have a technique to indicate the operation direction unlike a display means, etc., is to be operated, it is necessary to understand what kind of movable range is provided. You have to move physics objects by guessing. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, in the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 and the second driving coordinate area Z7-2, the left and right ranges shifted from the movable range CT of the movable body C are accepted for rendering. As described above, by widening the range, the criteria for determining appropriate operation for moving the movable body C along the movable range CT are relaxed.

However, when a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)) and then the physical object is moved along the movable range CT of the movable body C, the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)) There is a tendency for the deviation from the movable range CT to increase as the distance from . Therefore, in the third driving coordinate region Z7-3 (FIG. 127(a)), the first driving coordinate region Z7-1 and the second driving coordinate region Z7-1 and the second By having a range that extends over a longer distance than the driving coordinate area Z7-2, it is assumed that the movement distance of the physical object from the sixth coordinate area Z6 increases and the deviation from the movable range CT gradually increases. Also, this can be accepted as a proper performance operation. As a result, the difficulty in moving the physical object over a long distance while estimating what kind of movable range CT is provided for the movable body C without grasping it can be alleviated. It becomes possible to maintain the interest in the game. For example, even if the physical object moves upward within a coordinate range that does not face the movable range CT of the movable body C, the movable body C moves upward.

Note that when the movable body C moves to the third position corresponding to the third driving coordinate area Z7-3, the light emission mode (for example, blue) when the movable body C is positioned at the first position or the second position It may be made to emit light in a light emission mode (eg, red) that is different from the light emission mode (eg, green) when it is positioned at the position. Also, when a physical object is detected within the third driving coordinate area Z7-3 (movable body C starts to move toward the third drive coordinate area Z7-3), the light emission mode may be changed (for example, from blue to green).

For the same reason, the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4 also extends further to the left and right than the third driving coordinate area Z7-3, perpendicular to the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. It has a range that extends over long distances. However, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 is moved upward by the player's finger operation and moves upward to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-. 4, move the movable body C from the third position (FIG. 127(a)) corresponding to the third driving coordinate area Z7-3 to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4. It is not necessarily moved to the position (FIG. 127(b)). In addition, when the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 is moved upward by the player's finger operation or the like and is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the movable Body C is moved from the third position (FIG. 127(a)) corresponding to the third driving coordinate area Z7-3 to the first position (FIG. 127(c)) corresponding to the first driving coordinate area Z7-1. It can be moved.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the movable body C can be moved to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 based on the result of the big hit determination. It has been decided, and while it is said that it has been decided, such an effect using the movable body C is provided to the player. Then, when the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 by the player's finger operation or the like, the movable body C moves to the fourth position (Fig. 127 ( The degree of expectation (that a specific result has been obtained) depends on whether an effect of moving to b)) appears or an effect of returning to the first position (FIG. 127(c)) without moving to the fourth position appears. (may be deterministically shown).

In the peripheral control board 1510, the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 is moved upward by the player's finger operation and detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. In this case, it is determined that the conditions in the fourth operation control mode have been satisfied, and reception of the effect for the seventh coordinate area Z7 is terminated. Then, when it is determined that the movable body C can move to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. is moved to the fourth position. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable body C cannot move to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. Control is performed to move C to the first position.

However, at this time, even if it is determined that the movable body C can move up to the fourth position, the movement of the movable body C once moving downward (the movement of the movable body C to the fourth position (Fig. 127) (b)) is displayed, and even if it is determined that the movable body C cannot move to the fourth position, the movable body C is once moved upward. It is desirable to show the moving movement (the effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127(b))) in order to improve the amusement of the game.

Then, when the movable body C moves to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4, the light emission mode (for example, blue) when the movable body C is positioned at the first position or the second position The luminescence mode (e.g., green) when positioned in the position 3 and the luminescence mode (e.g., red) when positioned in the third position. However, unlike the case of the first to third positions, the timing is not when the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, but at a later timing (movable body C It is desirable to make it appear after the timing at which it is possible to definitely grasp the movement from the movement to the fourth position. Similarly, when the movable body C moves to the first position corresponding to the first driving coordinate area Z7-1, it does not occur when the physical object is detected in the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4. It is desirable to end the light emission after a later timing (timing at which it can be determined with certainty that the movable body C will not move from the movement to the fourth position).

After moving the movable body C to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the peripheral control board 1510 performs control to move the movable body C to the first position (original position) after a predetermined time has elapsed. By doing so, the fourth operation control mode is terminated.

By the way, in this fourth operation control mode, regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit, the movable body is between the first position (FIG. 126(b)) and the third position (FIG. 127(a)) of the movable range CT. It is possible to move C freely. For example, after moving the movable body C to the second position (FIG. 126(c)), when the physical object is operated to return to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 side, the peripheral control board 1510 returns to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. Control is performed to move the movable body C from the second position (FIG. 126(c)) to the first position (FIG. 126(b)) based on the detection of the physical object again in the coordinate area Z7-1. . Further, when the physical object is operated to return to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 after moving the movable body C to the third position (FIG. 127(a)), the peripheral control board 1510 returns to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. Control is performed to move the movable body C from the third position (FIG. 127(a)) to the second position (FIG. 126(c)) based on the detection of the physical object again in the coordinate area Z7-2. It will happen.

According to such a configuration, as an effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127(b)), the driving mode of moving the movable body C up and down in small steps can be selected by the player's preference. Since it can be made to appear according to the situation and can be performed only for a time that suits the player's taste, it will be possible to manipulate the "pause" until the final result appears in the production, improving the game's interest. It is expected that Note that after the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the reception of the effect for the fourth operation control mode is terminated, so the movable body C cannot be freely manipulated.

It should be noted that the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 is set (controlled) to be capable of accepting effects until a predetermined period of time elapses (a specific timing arrives). If the physical object is not properly detected in , reception of the effect for the sixth coordinate area Z6 or the seventh coordinate area Z7 is terminated. At this time, the behavior of the movable body C that appears when the physical object is properly detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 may be caused, or the movable body C may be moved without causing such behavior. , a plurality of predetermined positions (the first position (original position) shown in FIG. 126(b)).

In addition, in the fourth operation control mode according to this illustrative example, regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit, from the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) of the movable range CT 126(b)) to the fourth position (FIG. 127(b)) of the movable range CT. The degree of expectation for a big hit suggested may be higher as the position is higher. That is, in this case, the peripheral control board 1510 selects one of a plurality of effect patterns with different big hit expectations based on the result of the big hit determination, and positions determined by the selected effect pattern (first position to fourth position ), the movable body C is operably controlled. At this time, when the physical object moves from the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 to the second driving coordinate area Z7-2, or moves from the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 to the third driving coordinate area Z7-3, At times, an effect (behavior going back and forth) may appear to indicate whether or not the movable body C will move to the next position.

In addition, in the first to third operation control modes for the display unit D, when the images S1 to S4 are made available for effect reception, coordinate areas Z1 to Z4 larger than the images S1 to S4 in the front view are generated. On the other hand, in the fourth operation control mode for the movable body C, when the movable body C is enabled to receive the effect, a sixth coordinate area Z6 smaller than the movable body C in the front view is generated. In other words, the movable body often includes a part with a relatively large amount of movement and a part with a relatively small amount of movement. It is desirable to exclude it from the acceptance target in order to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. On the other hand, in the display unit, if the coordinate area is set according to the size of the image that can receive the effect, a large image is required in order to maintain the operability. Since there is a concern that the balance with the display image may be deteriorated, it is desirable to independently set the size of the image to be made available for effect reception separately from the setting range of the coordinate area.

However, when the movement of the physical object is detected within a specific coordinate area (here, the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4) and control is performed to make an effect appear accordingly. , for example, the physical object detected in the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 moves and moves to the fourth driving coordinate area without passing through the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 or the third driving coordinate area Z7-3. It is conceivable that a situation in which Z7-4 is suddenly detected may occur. Such a situation can occur, for example, when the right hand is set as the detection target in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1, and then the left hand is set as the detection target in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 without moving the right hand. Therefore, it should be determined that the physical object is not moving, and an effect (such as moving the movable body C) according to the movement should not be executed.

In this respect, the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment generates an interrupt timer process every 4 ms while executing the above-mentioned peripheral control unit steady process (every 33.3 ms). Information from the left outer peripheral ambient light detection unit 35a and information from the right outer peripheral ambient light detection unit 35b are acquired in the timer process and stored as coordinate information indicating the coordinate position where the physical object is detected. Then, in the above-described peripheral control unit steady-state processing, a specific coordinate area is determined by analyzing a plurality of (8, 9) pieces of coordinate information stored every 4 ms after the end of the previous peripheral control unit steady-state processing. (For example, first driving coordinate area Z7-1 to fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4), it is determined whether or not the physical object is properly moving, and control data for the actuator is determined according to the result of the determination. to set. Then, in the interrupt processing every 1 ms, control is performed to drive the movable body C based on the control data set in this way, so that the movable body C moves to the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4. From the stage in which the physical object is in the middle of the movement and has not finished moving, the physical object starts to move so as to follow the movement of the physical object in the sixth coordinate area Z6 when viewed from the front. Note that the coordinate information is stored in chronological order in which the coordinate positions were acquired.

For example, even if a physical object is detected in the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4 after the physical object is detected in the first driving coordinate area Z7-1, coordinate information indicating that the physical object was detected in the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 and the physical object was detected in the third driving coordinate area Z7-3 at a timing before the physical object was detected in If the coordinate information indicating the detection does not exist, it is determined that the physical object did not move properly, and the movable body C is controlled so as not to move.

That is, in the fourth operation control mode, the movable body C moves from the first position corresponding to the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4. is performed when the physical object detected in the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 is in the second driving coordinate area Z7-2, in the third driving coordinate area Z7-3, and in the fourth driving coordinate area Z7- 4 in chronological order. For example, if there is no detection in the third driving coordinate area Z7-3, only up to the second position corresponding to the second driving coordinate area Z7-2. The movable body C is designed not to move. As a result, only when a proper operation is performed on the special operation receiving section 3333, a proper effect can be produced.

In addition, in the fourth operation control mode, the movable body C is controlled to move depending on whether the physical object is detected in each of the coordinate areas Z7-1 to Z7-4. , movement of the movable body C is controlled according to whether or not movement of a physical object having a vector component in the direction toward the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 is detected within the movable range CT of the movable body C. can be That is, in this case, the vector component of the physical object is analyzed based on the acquired coordinate positions stored in chronological order.

It should be noted that the setting control of the coordinate area, the movement detection of the physical object, and the effect control of the movable body C used in the fourth operation control mode, for example, can be performed in the display section in the third operation control mode described above. may be applied to the image S4 of .

Further, in the third operation control mode and the fourth operation control mode, the detection (acceptance of effect) related to the movement of the physical object after the start of the movement of the physical object in the special operation receiving section 3333 has not ended and is still continuing. During this period, control is performed to move the object to be rendered (display image or movable body) in a manner corresponding to at least the direction and amount of movement of the already detected physical object. With such a configuration, since it is possible to create effects as if the player himself creates the effects, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

By the way, in the first operation control mode, the second operation control mode, the third operation control mode, and the fourth operation control mode, the effect reception for the special operation reception unit 3333 is performed at the coordinates set at that time. Confined within the area. However, the physical object detection itself in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is always performed (every 4 ms), and the detected coordinate information is stored in association with the acquired time series. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 analyzes the position, motion, etc. of the physical object based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series in the peripheral control unit regular processing (every 33.3 ms). In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, any one of a plurality of analysis processes with different analysis contents can be executed. Even if the same movement is detected as the movement of the physical object in the section 3333, different control can be performed according to the analysis result.

FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a control example of the physical object detection information analysis processing executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, first, it is determined whether or not there is an operation effect accepting period generated based on the satisfaction of a specific effect condition according to the result of the big hit determination (step S3301). As a result, when it is in the operation effect acceptance period, as described above, the physical object is detected within the coordinate area in which the effect can be accepted based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series. It is analyzed whether or not there is, and if a physical object is detected within the coordinate area where the effect can be received, the movement mode and size of the physical object are further analyzed (step S3302). Then, based on the analysis results for such effects, control (reset or end) regarding the coordinate area that can receive effects, control to cause changes in effects such as display images and movable bodies, and current conditions control to maintain the effect state (step S3303). As a result of the processing in step S3302, even if a physical object is not detected in the coordinate area that can receive the effect, control (resetting, end), or control to return the display image or the object to be rendered such as the movable body to the original position (for example, control to move the movable body C to the first position shown in FIG. 126(a)).

On the other hand, in the processing of step S3301, if it is determined that the coordinate area in which the special operation receiving unit 3333 can receive the effect is not within the set operation effect receiving period, the analysis content for the effect is determined. Analysis is performed with different content (step S3312). That is, the special operation receiving portion 3333 according to this embodiment is provided in a manner facing the entire game board 5 . Therefore, in order to illegally facilitate the winning of game balls, the act of placing a magnet at a coordinate position facing various winning openings in the special operation receiving portion 3333, or pulling a wire or the like from the gap between the door frame 3 and the glass plate 192 It is conceivable that an act such as breaking in and destroying a speaker that emits an alarm sound at the time of fraud will be performed.

Therefore, in the process of step S3312, it is analyzed whether or not there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed in the special operation receiving section 3333, based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series. I'm trying For example, it is determined whether or not a physical object is detected within the special operation receiving section 3333, and if a physical object is detected within the special operation receiving section 3333, the movement mode, size, etc. of the physical object are determined. It is analyzed whether the movement pattern, size, etc., that may appear when a fraudulent act is performed. If it is determined that there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been carried out as a result of such analysis for fraud countermeasures, an external output indicating that fraudulent activity has been carried out, or an alarm sound or warning light is emitted. (step S3313), and if it is not determined that there is a possibility of fraudulent activity, control is performed so that such fraud countermeasures are not taken (step S3313). ).

As an analysis procedure (step S3312) for such fraud countermeasures, for example, when a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the detected coordinate position is set as a reference position for analysis ( Remember. Next, an analysis coordinate range that includes the analysis reference position and extends by a predetermined distance from the analysis reference position is set, and the detected physical object stays within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). ) (physical object hardly moves). As a result, if the detected physical object continues to stay within the coordinate range for analysis for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), there is a possibility that some kind of fraudulent act is being performed within the coordinate range for analysis. It is possible to adopt a method of determining that there is At this time, if the size of the physical object is such that it is impossible to commit fraud (e.g., it is extremely thin), even if such a movement mode is detected, fraudulent activity will not occur. It is also possible not to determine that there is a possibility that there is As a result, it is possible to prevent an erroneous notification from being made when dirt or the like adheres to the glass plate 192 .

According to such a configuration, during the operation presentation acceptance period, even if any action is performed, it is not judged as a fraudulent act, and the analysis is performed only as a presentation act, and the result of the analysis is performed. On the other hand, if it is not during the operation effect acceptance period, all actions are determined as fraudulent analysis targets, and anti-fraud control can be performed according to the results of the analysis. become. Therefore, even if one event (for example, an event in which a physical object is detected in a specific coordinate area for 30 seconds) occurs in the special operation receiving unit 3333 and is detected, depending on the rendering situation, If it is regarded as a performance act and causes a specific performance change, it is also possible that it is regarded as a fraudulent act and fraudulent notification is issued. In this way, one detection information is used for a plurality of different purposes (here, the purpose of performance and the purpose of countermeasures against fraud) depending on the situation of the game and performance, so that more purposes can be achieved with less detection information. can be achieved, and an efficient control structure can be realized.

In addition, in this example of explanation, when it is not in the operation effect acceptance period that occurs based on the satisfaction of the specific effect condition according to the result of the big hit determination, the effect change is not caused by the operation of the special operation receiving part 3333. However, even when it is not in the operation effect acceptance period (always), the detection of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 changes the display image, or the movable body emits light and moves. good too. However, in this case, when it is not during the operation effect acceptance period, in addition to judging all acts as analysis targets for fraudulent acts, it is also judged as analysis targets for effect acts, and each control is performed according to the results of these determinations. Become. Therefore, when one event occurs in the special operation receiving section 3333, both the effect change and the fraudulent notification can appear.

Also, in the middle of monitoring whether the physical object continues to stay within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), it is determined that a specific effect condition according to the result of the big hit determination is satisfied. If the operation effect acceptance period occurs based on the above, the analysis process for countermeasures against fraud is not terminated, and the physical object continues to stay within the coordinate range for analysis for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). It is desirable to continue even after the operation effect acceptance period has occurred. In other words, in this case, in addition to performing analysis processing for presentation and control according to the results during the operation presentation acceptance period, the physical object continues to stay within the coordinate range for analysis for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will continue to be monitored, and depending on the results of the monitoring, fraudulent reporting will be carried out.

By the way, when the special operation receiving unit 3333 is in the first effect period in which the reception of the effect related to the first effect event (for example, the effect of moving the movable body) is permitted, an operation means different from the special operation receiving unit 3333 ( For example, the operation button 410) may be controlled to further generate a second effect period during which the acceptance of a second effect event (for example, an effect of changing the display image) is permitted.

For example, as shown in FIG. 129(a), at timing t1, the special operation receiving section 3333 permits reception of an effect (reception of a panel operation) related to a first effect event (for example, an effect of moving a movable body). Assume that the first performance period has occurred. It should be noted that, in this first effect period, during the period from the occurrence of the period to the arrival of the timing t2 when the first reception time elapses, the special operation receiving unit 3333 starts moving the physical object. Control to operate the movable body in a manner corresponding to at least the movement direction and the movement amount of the already detected (analyzed) physical object while the movement detection (analysis) is not finished and is still continuing. (For example, control to move a specific movable body so as to follow the movement of the physical object, etc.) can be executed.

In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510, when it is determined that the specific effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the first effect period is generated, and this is continued without being terminated. Furthermore, a second effect in which reception of effect (reception of button operation) related to a second effect event (for example, effect of changing the display image) is permitted in an operation means (for example, operation button 410) different from special operation receiving unit 3333 It is possible to execute control for setting an effect pattern, an advance notice effect, etc. that are determined to generate a period.

That is, in this case, when the timing t11 arrives while the first effect period is occurring, the reception of effect (reception of button operation) related to the second effect event (for example, the effect of changing the display image) is permitted with the operation button 410. control is performed to generate a second effect period. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 is accepted during the period from the occurrence of the second presentation period to the arrival of the timing t12 when the second reception time has elapsed, the second presentation period ends at that time. Let Alternatively, when the operation of the operation button 410 is not accepted until the timing t12 arrives, the second effect period is terminated when the timing t12 arrives.

According to such a configuration, the first effect period during which the reception of the effect related to the first effect event is allowed by the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333) and the reception of the effect related to the second effect event. and the second rendering period allowed by the second operation part (here, operation button 410) occur simultaneously (timings t11 to t12 shown in FIG. 129(a)). Moreover, in the above configuration, the end timings of the first performance period and the second performance period are different, so that the second performance period generated later than the first performance period is ended earlier. That is, in this case, when the second effect period occurs after the first effect period, even if the first operation part is being operated, the operation is interrupted and the second operation part is operated. Therefore, it is required to simultaneously operate the first operation part and the second operation part in different modes, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game by providing an unprecedented interesting performance operability. come to be expected.

It should be noted that, in order to suitably realize such effect operability, as shown in FIG. Reception) is produced when it is detected that a predetermined number of times (preferably once) or a predetermined amount of operation (a finite amount of operation) has been performed on the second operation portion (here, the operation button 410). Assuming that the execution condition is satisfied, it is desirable to perform control to generate a second effect event (for example, effect action that changes the display image) without requiring any subsequent operation. For example, when one pressing operation is detected for the operation button 410, the second effect period is ended before the timing t12 arrives, and after that, no operation is required, and the display image changes the effect. This includes control that causes

On the other hand, regarding the production reception related to the first production event (the production reception on the side that ends after a relatively long period of time has passed), at least until the second production period ends, and even after that Regardless of the number of operations and the amount of operation for one operation part, the reception of the effect related to the first effect event is continued without being terminated, and each time the first operation part is operated during the continuation, the operation is performed. It is desirable to perform control to reflect the change in performance according to the operation. For example, the movement of the physical object detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is analyzed, and depending on the movement mode (movement amount, etc.) of the physical object, reception of the effect is continued without ending. Control for repeatedly executing the process of moving the movable body to the latest analyzed coordinate position each time the movement is analyzed periodically (every 33.3 ms) corresponds to this.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation of the first operation portion is interrupted when the second effect period occurs after the first effect period, the opportunity to operate the first operation portion is lost. Since it is possible to suitably guarantee that the game will not be broken, the decrease in interest in the game due to the interruption can be suppressed. Further, if the second operation part is operated after interrupting the operation of the first operation part, the second effect period can be terminated at a relatively early stage, and after that, the second operation part is operated. Since the effect change (second effect event) corresponding to the operation occurs without requiring the This is also suitably ensured for the operation opportunity for one operation portion.

In this case, when the operation on the first operation part is restarted, the effect change (second effect event) corresponding to the operation on the second operation part is about to start, and the first operation is started. It is possible to generate a special performance situation such that the second performance event can be enjoyed while the operation opportunity for the part is provided. In this regard, "When an operation is performed on the second operation part, a performance event in which the size of the specific display image changes occurs, and when the first operation part is operated, the specific display image is moved to a specific position. If the first effect event is set to affect (change) the aspect of the effect object of the second effect event, such as "make the effect event to move" occur, In a special performance situation, the second performance event can be enjoyed while changing the aspect of the performance object of the second performance event by operating the first operation part, and the second performance event can be enjoyed more dynamically and freely. High operability and performance suitable for this are realized.

Here, as an example of influencing (changing) the aspect of the object to be rendered of the second effect event when an operation is performed on the first operation part, for example, the effect of the second effect event Changing at least one of the movement amount, movement direction, movement speed, light emission mode (light color, traveling direction, light intensity, etc.), size, or shape of an object (display image, movable body, etc.) However, it is not limited to these, as long as it can have some influence on the object of the second effect event (display image, sound effect, movable body, etc.). In other words, even though the target of the operation effect for the first operation part and the target of the operation effect for the second operation part are the same target of the effect, the aspect of the effect produced on the target of the effect (for example, the first operation part The size is changed in the operation effect for the second operation part, and the display position is changed in the operation effect for the second operation part). Further, the first effect period does not necessarily have to be set as a finite time, and the operation to the first operation part is accepted even after the second effect period ends. Any device may be used as long as the first operation portion can be operated when an event is occurring.

Further, in a period in which both the first effect period and the second effect period occur simultaneously, the effect reception related to the first effect event and the effect reception related to the second effect event are related to the second effect event. Only with respect to reception of the performance, a display prompting an operation instruction or a display suggesting the maximum remaining time as the second performance period preferably prompts interruption of the operation of the first operation portion. desirable above.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, in order to suitably realize the relationship of such effects, even if control is performed to generate the second effect period after the first effect period, Control is performed so as not to generate the first presentation period after the second presentation period.

Also, in the above explanation example, both the first effect period and the second effect period are generated at the same time. It may be temporarily terminated, and when the second presentation period ends, the first presentation period may be generated again. Even in this case, it is impossible to realize the above-described operability and performance in such a manner that the mode of the performance object of the second performance event is affected when the first operation site is operated. It is possible.

Further, in the above-described example, each time the operation is performed on the first operation part, control is performed to reflect the effect change corresponding to the operation. When there is, control may be performed to reflect the effect change corresponding to the operation.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the following various operation acceptance effects can be realized by using the control method according to each of the examples described above as appropriate.

[Production example 1 using the special operation receiving unit 3333]
For example, as shown in FIG. 130(a), the effect pattern of the effect example 1 (variation pattern of the effect example 1) is set based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect of the effect example 1 is set on the display unit D. It is assumed that the decorative design SZ is varied in the pattern. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable bodies A1 and A2 in the special operation receiving section 3333 to be capable of receiving the effect during the period when the effect pattern of the effect example 1 appears. Generates an operation performance period to (control).

Here, as the effect pattern of the effect example 1, at least the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 1 that is determined to move the movable body A1 and the effect example 1 that is determined to move the movable body A2 production pattern A2 is included. However, while the movable body A1 is provided on the front side of the game board 5 so as to be visible from the player side, the movable body A2 is provided on the rear side of the game board 5 so that it is difficult for the player side to visually recognize it. It is provided at a position overlapping the movable body A1 in front view. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510, even if either of the effect patterns A1 and A2 is performed as the effect pattern of the above-described effect example 1, the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is displayed on the display unit D. , a suggestion image HG1 is displayed to suggest that an operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, leftward direction) should be performed. Also, in the same way, regardless of which of the production patterns A1 and A2 is being performed, the movable body A1 is made to emit light to suggest that the coordinate area (not shown) facing it should be operated. ing.

Then, when such a slide operation is properly accepted while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 follows the slide operation by the player as shown in FIG. 130(b). Control is performed to start the leftward movement of the movable body A1. Note that even in this situation, the display unit D displays a suggestion image HG1 suggesting that a slide operation should be performed in the moving direction of the movable body A1 (to the left in this case) in a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. is displayed, and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state.

Then, when such a slide operation reaches a specific position while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 moves so as to follow the slide operation by the player, as shown in FIG. 131(a). After the body A1 is moved to a specific performance position, control is performed to end the operation performance period during which reception of performance for the movable body A1 is permitted. In this situation, the display section D displays a display suggesting that the movable body A1 has been successfully moved to a specific performance position and the expectation for the big hit determination is high, and the movable body A1 emits light. It is desirable to perform an effect such as changing the mode or shape of the

However, even if the slide operation by the player reaches a specific position while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the peripheral control board 1510 will perform the operation shown in FIG. 131 ( As shown in b), the movable body A1 is stopped from following the slide operation by the player, so that the operation performance period during which the reception of the performance for the movable body A1 is permitted is terminated, and the movable body A1 is returned to the original position. Control to move back. In this case, the display section D displays a display suggesting that the move of the movable body A1 to a specific performance position has failed and the degree of expectation for the big hit determination is low, and the movable body A1 stops emitting light. It will be controlled so that

On the other hand, when the player's slide operation is properly accepted while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 responds to the player's slide operation as shown in FIG. 130(c). The leftward movement of the movable body A2 is controlled so as to follow it. Note that even in this situation, the display unit D displays a suggestion image HG1 suggesting that a slide operation should be performed in the moving direction of the movable body A1 (to the left in this case) in a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. is displayed, and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state. However, in addition to this, the movable body A2 is also controlled to be in a light emitting state.

Then, when such a slide operation reaches a specific position while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 moves so as to follow the slide operation by the player, as shown in FIG. 131(c). After the body A2 is moved to a specific performance position, control is performed to terminate the operation performance period during which performance acceptance for the movable body A2 is permitted. In this situation, the display section D displays a display suggesting that the movable body A2 has been successfully moved to a specific performance position and that the expectation for the big hit determination is extremely high. It is desirable to perform an effect such as changing the mode or shape of light emission.

However, even if the slide operation by the player reaches a specific position while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to perform the operation shown in FIG. 131 ( As shown in b), the movable body A2 is stopped from following the slide operation by the player, so that the operation performance period during which the reception of the performance for the movable body A2 is permitted is terminated, and the movable body A2 is returned to the original position. Control to move back. In this case, the display section D displays a display suggesting that the move of the movable body A2 to a specific performance position fails and the expectation for the big hit determination is low, and the movable bodies A1 and A2 emit light. is terminated.

According to this production example 1, when the player performs the slide operation while the situation shown in FIG. Instead, the movable body A2, which was made difficult to see, suddenly appears and moves, so the decline in the interest in the game is suppressed by the movable effect with a surprise as if the object of the effect has been replaced. be able to be

Further, although illustration is omitted, according to such production example 1, within the period from the appearance of the situation of FIG. 130(a) to the appearance of the situation of FIG. Although the movable body A2 has started to move, it is still at a position (behind the game board 5) that is difficult to see, and from the player's point of view, there is a situation where it seems as if no change in performance has occurred. become able to appear. That is, in this case, the movable body A2 moves forward of the display section D after causing disappointment that no effect change has occurred even though the slide operation is performed properly by the player. Therefore, the decline in interest in the game can be more suitably suppressed by such a surprise movable effect.

In addition, in the production example 1, as shown in FIGS. 131(a) and 131(c), the movable bodies A1 and A2 are advanced to a position overlapping the decorative pattern SZ in the fluctuating state. , the player is encouraged to shift his gaze from the decoration pattern SZ to the movable bodies A1 and A2, and it becomes difficult to overlook which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the mode of overlap with the decorative symbol SZ differs depending on whether the movable body A1 appears or the movable body A2 appears. Even if the player fails to shift his/her gaze, it is possible to predict which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared by confirming the size, position, etc. of the part where the decorative pattern SZ is made difficult to visually recognize. This makes it possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game when the player misses which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

It should be noted that, in the production example 1, the movable body A1 is arranged on the front side of the game board 5 and the movable body A2 is arranged on the rear side of the game board 5. Both the movable bodies A1 and A2 may be arranged on the back side of the game board 5, or both the movable bodies A1 and A2 may be arranged on the back side of the game board 5.

Here, when both the movable bodies A1 and A2 are arranged on the front side of the game board 5, the movable body A1 is arranged on the front side so that the movable body A2 is difficult to see. It is desirable to keep the movable base portion (the portion that does not move) and the like to remain positioned on the front side of the movable body A2 even when A1 moves, thereby maintaining the difficulty of visually recognizing the movable body A2.

On the other hand, when both the movable bodies A1 and A2 are arranged on the back side of the game board 5, it is possible to give the player enjoyment as to which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 will appear by the player's operation. become. In this case, the portion of the game board 5 located in front of the movable bodies A1 and A2 is made to emit light to prompt the user to operate the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing the portion. is desirable.

Further, in the production example 1, the movable bodies A1 and A2 are set so as to move in the same direction (to the left), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the movable direction of the movable body A1 is set to the left direction and the movable direction of the movable body A2 is set to the upward direction, the player is prompted by an operation instruction (suggestion image HG1) suggesting the left direction to play the game in the left direction. Although the slide operation is performed by the player, the movable body A2 moves upward, and the decline in the interest in the game can be more preferably suppressed by such a surprise movable effect. Alternatively, even though the player is prompted to operate the movable body A1 whose movable direction is set to the left, an operation instruction suggesting an upward direction appears so that the player can perform an upward slide operation. When this is done, the movable body A2, which has been made difficult to see, may move upward and appear.

Further, in the production example 1, when the movable body A2 appears by the player's operation, the movable body A1 does not move, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the movable body A2 is moved by the player's operation, the movable body A1 is also moved following the player's slide operation. Even if only the movable body A1 is moved back to the original position after the movable bodies A1 and A2 have moved by a predetermined distance, the decline in the interest in the game can be more suitably suppressed by the surprise movable performance. become nauseous. Alternatively, when moving the movable body A2 by the player's operation, first, only the movable body A1 is moved following the player's slide operation. After moving the movable body A1 by a predetermined distance, the movable body A1 is moved back to the original position, and the movable body A2 is moved following the slide operation by the player. Decrease in game interest can be more suitably suppressed by a certain movable effect. However, when the player's operation target is switched between the movable bodies A1 and A2, the player's operation is kept at a predetermined position for a predetermined time (the time required for the movable body A2 to move to the predetermined position). It is desirable to execute the production.

Also, in the production example 1 above, when the movable body A2 is moving (see FIGS. 130(c) and 131(c)), the movable bodies A1 and A2 are caused to emit light. In this situation, the movable body A1 does not necessarily have to emit light. That is, in this case, when the physical object is detected in the coordinate area (special operation receiving section 3333) facing the movable body A1, or when the movable body A2 starts advancing to the front side of the display section D and returns to the original position Control is performed to end the light emission of the movable body A1 at a timing that is easier to see than a certain time (timing at which the movable body A1 has moved to a predetermined position).

Also, in the production example 1 and its other examples, the movable body A2 is arranged on the rear side overlapping the movable body A1 in front view, but instead of the movable body A1, the board surface light emitting part E is arranged. You may do so. That is, in this case, when the movable body A2 is moved (in the situation shown in FIG. 130(a)), the board surface light-emitting part E located in front of the movable body A2 is made to emit light, so that the movable body A2 is in a state that is difficult to see. An operation to the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing A2 is prompted.

Further, in the display section D according to the example 1 of presentation, in each of the situations shown in FIGS. The situation (initial situation where none of the movable bodies are moving) is shown. However, instead of this, the display mode of the suggestive image HG1 is changed according to the locations where the movable bodies A1 and A2 are positioned, so that the movement status of the movable bodies A1 and A2 can be recognized just by looking at the suggestive image HG1. can be

[Production example 2 using the special operation receiving part 3333]
For example, now, as shown in FIG. 132(a), the effect pattern of effect example 2 (variation pattern of effect example 2) is set based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect of effect example 2 is displayed on display unit D. It is assumed that the decorative design SZ is varied in the pattern. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 sets (controls) the coordinate area (not shown) of the special operation receiving section 3333 facing the movable body A1 to be able to receive the effect during the period when the effect pattern of the effect example 2 appears. ) is generated.

Here, as the production pattern of production example 2, at least the production pattern A1 of production example 2, in which the movable body A1 is set to move, and the production pattern A1 in which the movable body A1 and the movable body B are set to move respectively. Effect pattern AB of example 2 of effect shown is included. 130(a), (b), and FIG. 131(a) (or FIG. 131(b)). In the mode shown in 1, an opportunity to receive an operation presentation for the movable body A1 is provided, and the movable body A1 moves. On the other hand, in the effect pattern AB of effect example 2, the opportunity to receive the operation effect for the movable body B is provided after the opportunity for receiving the operation effect for the movable body A1 is provided. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510, even if either of the effect patterns A1 and AB is performed as the effect pattern of the above-described effect example 2, the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is displayed on the display unit D. , a suggestion image HG1 is displayed to suggest that an operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, leftward direction) should be performed. Also, in the same way, regardless of which of the production patterns A1 and AB is being performed, the movable body A1 is caused to emit light to suggest that the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 should be operated. ing.

However, in the effect pattern AB of effect example 2, when an operation to a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is accepted (when a physical object is detected), a specific effect event is generated for the movable body A1. is not generated, first, as shown in FIG. 132(b), the suggestive image HG1 on the display unit D is hidden, and control is performed to interrupt the reception of the effect in the coordinate area facing the movable body A1. At this time, it is desirable that the decorative pattern SZ on the display section D is displayed in a manner that is visible but difficult to visually recognize (such as semi-transparent display), and the luminous state of the movable body A1 is also interrupted. It is desirable to let

Then, as shown in FIG. 132(c), in the display section D in which the suggestive image HG1 is thus hidden, an operation means (such as the operation button 410) other than the special operation receiving section 3333 is operated. The prompting operation instruction image SG is displayed, and an operation reception period for a specific effect using the other operation means (such as the operation button 410) is generated. Then, when an operation to another operation means (such as the operation button 410) is accepted during the operation acceptance period of the specific effect, the operation instruction image SG in the display section D is hidden as shown in FIG. 133(a). At the same time, control is performed so that a movable body B different from the movable body A1 initially shown as an object of effect is operated. In addition, in this production example 2, the movable body B is advanced to the front side of the display section D for a predetermined time.

Then, in the effect pattern AB of effect example 2, after the movable body B moves in this way, as shown in FIG. Along with displaying a suggestive image HG2 suggesting that an operation of sliding body A1 in the moving direction (here, leftward) should be performed, a coordinate area (not shown) facing movable body A1 in special operation receiving section 3333 is displayed. is set (controlled) so that the performance can be accepted. At this time, the opportunity for the effect operation of the movable body A1 is given again, but after the situation shown in FIG. 132(a) appears, the movable body B does not move and the movable body A1 moves It is preferable to set the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2 in which the movable body A1 moves after the movable body B moves so that the degree of expectation is higher than the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2 described above. In this case, as shown in FIG. 133(b), the suggestive image HG2 is displayed differently from the suggestive image HG1 shown in FIG. Alternatively, it is desirable to make the lighting mode of the movable body A1 different from the lighting mode of the movable body A1 shown in FIG. .

In addition, in the production pattern AB of production example 2, after the situation shown in FIG. In the mode shown in a) (or FIG. 131(b)), an opportunity to receive an operation presentation for the movable body A1 is provided, and the movable body A1 moves. Further, after the situation shown in FIG. 133(b) appears, as in the case of the effect pattern A2 of the above-described effect example 1, FIG. 130(c) and FIG. ), an opportunity to receive an operation effect for the movable body A1 may be provided, and the effect pattern in which the movable body A1 moves may appear.

In particular, in the production pattern AB of this production example 2, as shown in FIG. Since they are made different, this is also the movement effect that appears when the operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, leftward direction) is performed in the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. is preferably performed in a special execution mode different from the case of effect pattern A1 of example 2 of effect.

According to the production pattern AB of production example 2, the first production opportunity using the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333) is given first (in this situation, the second operation Although the second performance opportunity for the site (for example, the operation button 410) is not granted), when the first operation site is operated and the performance is accepted, it is different from the first operation site. A second performance opportunity for the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) is provided, and the first performance opportunity is temporarily lost. Then, when the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) is operated in a situation where the first performance opportunity is temporarily lost and the performance is accepted, a second performance event ( Here, the movement of the movable body B) occurs. That is, in this case, it is possible to generate a performance as to whether or not the second performance opportunity for the second operation part is granted when the performance reception for the first operation part is made. A novel operability using the operation part of is provided.

It should be noted that, in order to suitably realize novel operability using such a plurality of operation parts, it is desirable to always provide the second operation part in a form that is physically difficult to operate. Then, when it is determined that the second performance opportunity for the second operation part is given, it is difficult to physically operate the second operation part based on the reception of the performance for the first operation part. It is desirable to perform control from a mode to an easy-to-operate mode, and to allow acceptance of an effect for the second operation portion when in the easy-to-operate mode. Here, the term "physically difficult to operate" refers to, for example, a mode in which the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) is covered with another member to make it difficult to operate, or a mode in which the second operation part is difficult to operate is positioned in the same state as when the is already operated, and "control from a physically difficult to operate to an easy to operate" means, for example, that the second operation part itself is Control to operate to a position where it is not covered by other members, control to operate another member covering the second operation portion to a position where the second operation portion is not covered, and operation of the second operation portion It can be realized as a control to operate to a position different from the state when it is pressed. Further, in this case, the trigger for controlling the second operation portion from the state in which it is physically difficult to operate to the state in which it is easy to operate does not necessarily have to be the time when the performance reception for the first operation portion is performed. It may be the time when a specific time has passed since the production pattern of is executed. In any case, in providing the second performance opportunity for the second operation part when the performance reception for the first operation part is made, the second operation part itself or a member provided in the vicinity thereof is operated. It is preferable to do so in order to suggest that the target of operation has been changed from the first operation portion to the second operation portion and that the change will increase the degree of expectation.

Further, in the production pattern AB of the production example 2, after giving the first production opportunity using the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving part 3333), the first operation part is operated to A second performance opportunity is provided based on the fact that the performance has been accepted. However, after a predetermined time has elapsed after the first performance opportunity using the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving part 3333) is provided (or after the suggestive image HG1 is displayed), the first A second performance opportunity may be provided for a second operation portion (for example, the operation button 410) different from the operation portion of , and the first performance opportunity may be temporarily lost. In this case, until the predetermined time elapses, the first effect event is generated by the operation of the first operating part, but the first effect event ends when the predetermined time elapses. (If the object to be rendered is a movable body, the movable body is controlled to return to its original position). Alternatively, the first performance opportunity using the first operation part is not provided, and a second operation part different from the first operation part (for example, A second performance opportunity for the operation button 410) may be provided. That is, in this case, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the effect reception is not performed by the operation of the first operation portion even though the suggestive image HG1 is displayed.

Further, in the production pattern AB of the production example 2, after the suggestive image HG1 is displayed, the suggestive image HG1 is hidden. , may be further displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to depict how the suggestive image HG1 changes to the suggestive image HG2 with a higher degree of expectation, so that the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed. However, at this time, if the suggestive image HG1 is displayed in a state in which no effect is received for the first operation part, the display mode of the suggestive image HG1 is changed (for example, from color display to black-and-white display, translucent display, etc.). It is desirable to use a display mode that is relatively difficult to see). In addition, a timing image showing the remaining display time of the suggestive image HG1 (remaining time for receiving the effect for the first operation part) is also displayed, so that the reception for the effect for the first operation part is not performed. In this state, if the timer image indicates that the remaining time does not decrease, the player can be made to recognize that the remaining period for accepting the effect for the first operation portion does not decrease. Thus, the player can enjoy a game using another operating means (for example, the operating button 410) with peace of mind. In this case, even though the effect is not received for the first operation part, the remaining time for receiving the effect is shown to have decreased by a predetermined amount, and then the remaining time does not decrease. is indicated by the timing image, it is possible to provide a more interesting effect.

Further, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the suggestion image HG1 is displayed, based on the fact that the effect reception for the first operation part is performed, a predetermined effect is not received for the first operation part. A period is generated, and the display mode of the suggestive image HG1 is changed (for example, from color display to black-and-white display, or to a display mode that is relatively difficult to see, such as translucent display, etc.) in the predetermined period, and clocking is performed. The image may indicate that the remaining time does not decrease (eg, the display meter does not decrease and becomes stationary). Also, at this time, it is desirable to change the display mode of the image different from the suggestive image HG1 on the display unit D. In this case, when the predetermined period ends after the second opportunity for effect is provided, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed to a mode with a higher degree of expectation, and the reception of the effect for the first operation site is performed again. You may do so.

Further, in the production pattern of production example 2, after the suggestive image HG1 prompting the operation with the movable body A1 as the object to be produced is displayed (or while the suggestive image HG1 is being displayed), the movable body B is operated. However, the movable body B does not have to be operated by the player. It may be a non-operable movable body that moves. When such a non-operable movable body is adopted, even if it is determined to operate (a special result is obtained), no operation instruction is issued for the non-operable movable body, and the operation is accepted. Nor. In this regard, if the determination of whether or not the predetermined operating conditions for the non-operating movable object are satisfied is appropriately generated regardless of the execution status of the production pattern, other objects to be produced (movable objects, display images, etc.) etc.) is displayed, the decision to operate the non-operable movable body can be secretly made, so that an operation instruction related to another performance object appears and the operation is accepted. While it is possible, it is possible to have the possibility that non-operable movable bodies that are not related to this will suddenly move, and the possibility that special movable bodies and other objects will move at the same time. Therefore, it can be expected that the game interest will be improved by such unexpected operation effects.

Further, when the suggestive images HG1 and HG2 and the operation instruction image SG appear in the display portion D, the target operation portion (the specific coordinate area of the special operation receiving portion 3333, the operation button 410, etc.) is displayed. ), but the effect can be received also in the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing the portion where the suggestive images HG1 and HG2 and the operation instruction image SG appear. good too. According to such a configuration, even when the operation site cannot be recognized, the user can simply operate the specific images (suggestion images HG1 and HG2 and the operation instruction image S) appearing in the display section D. A similar effect can be generated, and a decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment, while the special operation receiving unit 3333 continues to detect the movement of the physical object after the movement of the physical object has started, at least the detected physical object is detected. It is possible to control the movement of the object to be rendered (display image or movable body) in accordance with the direction and amount of movement. Then, the movement speed may be reflected in the movement of the movable body.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, in realizing the operation effect using the special operation receiving portion 3333, the effect is performed in the coordinate area facing the part to be operated in the special operation receiving portion 3333. Although the reception is performed, it is not necessarily the coordinate area facing the part to be operated, and the effect reception may be performed in a specific coordinate area in the special operation receiving section 3333. good.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the change in light caused by the operation (physical object such as a finger) on the special operation receiving section 3333 is detected by the peripheral external light detection section 35 and detected by the peripheral control board 1510. By analyzing, the operation mode (such as movement information of a physical object such as a finger) for the special operation reception unit 3333 is determined. The mode of operation on the portion 3333 (in this case, the mode of touch operation on the glass plate 192) may be determined. However, in this case, there is a concern that the visibility of the game area and the display area through the glass plate 192 may be adversely affected.

Next, game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

Now, assuming that the main control program is shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes the above-described second On the condition that the detection signal by the first starting hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting hole 2002) (YES in step S5231), the random number for judging the first big hit is acquired from the random number counter. The first start opening passage processing such as storing this in the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol ( Second big hit determination random number) is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a big-hit execution flag indicating that the big-hit game state is being controlled is set (step S5235), and if the big-hit execution flag is set, the big-hit game state is controlled. Big hit control processing (step S5240a) is executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting either "8R probability variable jackpot A" or "8R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big winning opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round game) is repeated eight times. Control to 8R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "16R probability variable jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) After that, or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed is repeated 16 times to control to a 16R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol is a mode that suggests "8R probability variable jackpot B", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds ) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have entered the big winning opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern (round game) to be closed is repeated 8 times to control to the 8R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol is a mode suggesting "2R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). A 2R jackpot game state in which an opening/closing pattern (round game) to be closed after playing is repeated twice is controlled.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the situation where the time-saving control is executed, right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than left-handed, and in situations where the time-saving control is not executed, it is more advantageous than right-handed hitting. As described above, hitting left-handed is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port 2002, the jackpot game is open for a long time of 8 rounds at maximum. Only the state (approximately 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, if the jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball into the second start port 2004, the probability is about 50% (the allocation rate of the winning species ), 16 rounds of long open jackpot game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be obtained) are executed, and the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained when winning the jackpot Therefore, when the ball is shifted to the right-handed state, it can be expected to obtain a larger amount of prize balls than in the left-handed state.

In the big hit control process, when starting the opening control of such a big winning hole 2005, first, the process of starting the operation of the condition device, the process of resetting the fluctuation number counter described later, and the like are performed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after such opening control of the jackpot 2005 is performed, as shown in FIG. Execute each set processing of the flag and the time saving flag.

The high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state, and is used in the big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 139 to be described later. It is set when the big hit game state based on the probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B) is ended, and when the next big hit occurs, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 144 to be described later or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) is reset by

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 140, time saving control (high probability time saving state) after the jackpot game state ends It is set when ending the big hit game state based on the big hit (8R probability variable big hit A, 16R probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B), and when the next big hit occurs, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 144 to be described later. Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown). Alternatively, when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning the jackpot after the occurrence of the low-probability time-saving state, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 144 to be described later. Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

The variation number counter is a counter that indicates the number of variations of the special symbols after the variation number counter is reset, and is used in the first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 142 to be described later. It is updated (for example, counted up) when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are changed, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B) It is reset when starting a big hit game state based on.

Also, if the big hit executing flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then as the process of step S5236, whether or not the small hitting executing flag indicating that the small hitting game state is controlled is set. determine whether And as a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, small hit control processing (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In addition, in the small hit control process, the process of opening the big winning opening 2005 only for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of such a big winning opening 2005 is performed, a high probability flag, a time saving flag, a time saving Each set processing such as the number counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140(a), no small win is won in the big win determination.

Also, if the small hit running flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of random numbers for the second big hit determination stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is On the condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, if the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special design reservation storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special design 2nd special design process processing including the lottery processing concerning the display mode at the time of fluctuation display stop is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is played so as not to lose the lottery for the second special symbol in the pending state (unless the value of the second special pending number counter is "0"), the first special symbol Only the lottery for the random number for judging the second big hit is performed continuously without interruption (priority execution), regardless of the pending status of the lottery.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time-saving state (high-probability time-saving state), the player simply maintains hitting the game ball to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (right hitting). Only the lottery (judgment processing) for the two big hit judging random numbers can be performed continuously without interruption.

In addition, the special game (symbol variation) using the second special symbol (second special symbol) is limited to those that are executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (first special symbol) Instead, for example, the execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and the start winning prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the above-mentioned first starting opening passage processing (step S5232).

Now, in the process of step S5231, if it is determined that the first starting hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the first starting hole 2002, as shown in FIG. 2, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S5241, first, each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for judging the big hit, random number for judging the reach, random number for the big winning design, random number for the fluctuation display pattern ) from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value. It is determined whether or not the (upper limit) is "4" (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. , the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Then, as the process of step S5244, each random number obtained in step S5241, the first special design reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM store in

And then, the first special figure prefetching process for executing the first special figure side prefetching effect is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the side of the first special symbol is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or its degree of expectation) of the first special symbol before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure look-ahead processing, the peripheral control board 1510 side is required to determine whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed and the content of the look-ahead effect (information related to win-loss for look-ahead determination, information related to symbol type for look-ahead determination information, information related to the variation pattern number for pre-reading determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510 . At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, the SP reach group of the variation pattern, the normal reach group, the latent hit group of the pattern type, the small hit group, etc., may be transmitted as the look-ahead command before being finally determined.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second start opening passing process (step S5234).

Now, in the processing of step S5233, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 4004 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the second starting hole 2004, as shown in FIG. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5251, first, each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second big hit determination, random number for second reach determination, second big hit symbol random number, random number for the second fluctuation display pattern) is obtained from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value. is "4" (step S5252). In the processing of this step S5252, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. , the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Then, as the process of step S5254, each random number obtained in step S5251, the second special design reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM store in

And next, the second special figure prefetching process for executing the second special figure side prefetching effect is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5255). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the side of the second special symbol is an effect that preliminarily suggests the determination result (or its degree of expectation) of the second special symbol before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special figure look-ahead processing, the peripheral control board 1510 side generates information (win-lose information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required for determining whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect and the content of the effect, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510 . At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, the SP reach group of the variation pattern, the normal reach group, the latent hit group of the pattern type, the small hit group, etc., may be transmitted as the look-ahead command before being finally determined. Further, in the process of step S5255, a process (FIG. 176) for realizing a change effect later described can be performed.

On the other hand, in the processing of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of pending second special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

When the number of reserved first special symbols changes based on the gaming ball entering the first starting port 2002, a command for instructing the number of reserved first special symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) (First hold number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . Further, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the number of reserved second special symbols is indicated in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). (second hold number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 .

FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S5238). In addition, the first special symbol process processing executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control processing are the same. , and only the random numbers and tables used for determination are different, so only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. A random number for judging a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and based on the random number for judging a big hit, a lottery process for a display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. is performed first special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281 )

3. Executed in correspondence with the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern and the special symbol on the performance display device (game board side performance display device) 1600 First variation pattern setting processing (step S5282) in which lottery processing etc. are performed for the variation mode of the effect display to be performed

4. 1st special design fluctuation processing (step S5283) which waits until the fluctuation display of the 1st special design in 1st special design indicator 1403 is stopped

5. So that the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped determined based on the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 First special symbol stop processing (step S5284) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol

In addition, the initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of 2, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the pending state, then as the process of step S5302, it is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The earliest memory of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first jackpot determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first jackpot symbol random number, and the first fluctuation display pattern random number) The random number stored in the area is read from the same main control built-in RAM. And then, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, while counting down the first special reservation number counter, the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM First-in first-in random numbers related to the display mode when the fluctuation display of the pattern is stopped (for example, the first jackpot judgment random number, the first reach judgment random number, the first jackpot pattern random number, the first fluctuation display pattern random number) Shift operation is performed in the First-Out mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and the start winning prize to the first start port 2002 Random numbers extracted according to occurrence are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). . Similarly, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol reservation storage area a to second special symbol reservation storage area d), and according to the occurrence of the start winning prize to the second start port 2004 Random numbers extracted by the first (earliest) area are stored in order. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol occurred is stored so as to be identifiable, and the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

After that, as the process of step S5305, a big hit determination process, which is a process of determining whether or not the big win is hit or lost, is performed based on the read-out first big hit determination random number. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process is terminated.

FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S5305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5311), at the time of high probability shown in FIG. 140 (A) Select the jackpot determination table (step S5312), if the current game state is a low probability state (step S5311), select the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 140 (A) (step S5313), select The big hit determination table and the random number for big hit determination read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 140 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the game state is low probability for each type of special random number (random number for first jackpot determination, random number for second jackpot determination) (Low probability non-time-saving state, low probability time-saving state) Jackpot judgment table at low probability used in the case, and high probability to use when the game state is high probability (high probability non-time-saving state, high probability time-saving state) and a jackpot determination table at the time of probability. In the low-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random numbers, 204 kinds of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332 The random numbers for judging the first big hit (65536 types) are respectively associated so that the random number for judging the first big hit of the type matches the loss judgment value indicating that it is a loss (the probability of a big hit at low probability; "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the second special symbol jackpot determination random number (second jackpot determination random number) in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process In the low-probability jackpot determination table to be referred to, 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the player won the jackpot, and 65,332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are the losers. The random numbers for judging the second big hit are associated with each other so as to coincide with the judgment value indicating that the odds are the same (probability of a big hit at a low probability; roughly "1/321").

In addition, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random numbers, 2,040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination values, and 63,496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match. The random numbers for judging the first big hits are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the judgment value for winning (big hit probability at high probability; approximately "1/32"). On the other hand, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process , 2040 kinds of random numbers for judging the second big hit match the big hit judging value indicating that the big hit has been won, and the random numbers for judging the second big hit of 63496 kinds match with the judgment value showing that the above-mentioned loss. The random numbers for judging the second big hit are associated with each other (probability of big win at high probability; approximately "1/32"). It should be noted that the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number (jackpot determination value The number may be the same and the jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)). In this case, at least one of the low-probability jackpot determination table and the high-probability jackpot determination table may have different jackpot determination values (both may be made different). .

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the jackpot determination random number read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing, and when it is determined to be a jackpot (step S5315 ), a jackpot flag indicating that the variation has won a jackpot is set (step S5316), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

Further, in step S5315, when it is determined that the big hit has been lost, the read-out big-hit determination random number coincides with the small-hit determination value indicating that the small-hit has been won based on the selected big-hit determination table. It is determined whether or not (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) of this example, since the random number for big hit determination that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; 0/65536), and in this step S5317, it is determined that a small hit has not been won (determined as a loss).

On the other hand, if it is determined to be lost in step S5317, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read out in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is in a high probability non-time-saving state. A ready-to-reach judgment table in a high-probability time-saving state used in the case of 1 and a ready-to-reach judgment table in a low-probability state used in a case of a low-probability state of a game state (low-probability non-time-saving state) are provided.

Here, in the reach determination table during the high probability time saving state, one type of reach determination random number matches the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, and the reach determination value indicating that the 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach The random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match with . However, in the reach determination table in the high-probability time-saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game when in the time-saving state, all 72 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination value that indicates that the reach is not reached. By doing so, it may be prevented from matching with the reach determination value indicating reach.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state reach. The random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value shown and match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of random numbers for reach determination do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, at the time of the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased from the time of the high probability time saving state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-time saving state, the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state and the low probability state Five types of reach determination including random numbers The random numbers for reach determination are associated so that the random numbers for reach match with the reach determination values indicating reach, and the random numbers for reach determination of 67 kinds match with the reach determination values indicating that the random numbers for reach do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-working time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is made the same as the low probability non-working time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319), and when it is determined that the reach is lost (YES in step S5120) , a reach flag indicating that the change is a reach is set, and the process ends (step S5121).

FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 141, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the big hit determination process (step S5305) is determined. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the big hit flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. By comparing with the selected symbol determination table, a big hit symbol is determined as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 140 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, the first big hit symbol random number (here, total 200 (random number for the first jackpot pattern) are stored in a form associated with each other. In addition, as shown in FIG. 140 (C), the symbol determination table on the side of the second special symbol contains a random number for the second big hit symbol ( Here, a total of 200 second jackpot symbol random numbers) are stored in association with each other.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired random number for the big win design. The symbol determination table of this example is set so that the kind of big win determined based on the random numbers for the first big-hit pattern and the kind of big-win determined based on the random numbers for the second big-hit pattern are different. . More specifically, the distribution rate (allocation) between the probability variable jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high probability state is the same, but for the first jackpot pattern The expected value of the game balls that can be acquired by the big win determined based on the second big win symbol random number is larger than the expected value of the game balls that can be acquired by the big win determined by the random number. ing.

The following is a concise summary of specific game and performance contents for each type of jackpot.

1. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning hole 2103. By repeating the opening and closing pattern (round game) eight times to be closed when detected, the game ball is controlled to an 8R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 8R big win game state is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big-hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big-hit game state, a battle production (battle victory production) is performed in which a specific character wins, and in the high-probability time-saving state 8R probability variable jackpot A controlled to the production mode shown in the production display device 1600 to be in a relatively advantageous state

2. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning hole 2103. By repeating the opening and closing pattern (round game) eight times to be closed when detected, the game ball is controlled to an 8R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 8R big win game state is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state until the variable display of special symbols is digested 100 times (or a jackpot is won within the period until 100 times are digested), and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state A battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which a specific character is defeated is performed, and in a low-probability time-saving state, the 8R normal jackpot is controlled to a performance mode in which a performance display device 1600 indicates a relatively disadvantageous state.

3. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning hole 2103. By repeating 16 times the opening and closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected in , the game ball is controlled to a 16R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 16R big win game state is controlled to a high probability time saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R jackpot game state, the production of whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) ) is performed, and after a predetermined period of time from being controlled to the high-probability time-saving state has passed, the effect display device 1600 indicates that it is in a relatively advantageous state. 16R variable jackpot

4. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning hole 2103. By repeating the opening and closing pattern (round game) eight times to be closed when detected, the game ball is controlled to an 8R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 8R big win game state is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state, the production of whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) ) is performed, and after a predetermined period of time from being controlled to the high-probability time-saving state has passed, the effect display device 1600 indicates that it is in a relatively advantageous state. 8R probability variable jackpot B

5. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a short period of time (for example, 0.6 seconds), or the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning opening 2103. By repeating the opening and closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected in 2 times, the game ball is controlled to a 2R big win game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 2103, and after this 2R big win game state, special A low-probability time-saving state is controlled until the fluctuation display of patterns is completed 100 times (or a jackpot is won within the period until 100 times are completed), and a specific character is selected during the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state. performs a battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which is defeated, and in a low-probability time-saving state, the 2R normal jackpot is controlled to a performance mode in which the performance display device 1600 indicates that it is in a relatively disadvantageous state.

In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) for opening the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, and only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol. Except for the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 is performed, and the big hits (8R probability variable big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol are generated. Similarly, the game ball does not enter the first starting port 2002 in the right-handed state. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 occurs, and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 except when there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol Only the variable display is executed, and the big hits (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) related to the second special symbol are generated.

In addition, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning hole 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times at maximum, and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out about 2000 game balls by repeating 16 times the opening and closing pattern in which the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) at maximum.

In addition, when the 8R probability variation big hit A is determined in the first special symbol stop pattern setting process, the 8R probability variation big hit A symbol is determined as the jackpot pattern, and when the 8R normal jackpot is determined, the 8R normal jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern. decide. In addition, although not shown, when the 16R probability variation big hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation big hit pattern is determined as the big hit pattern, and when the 8R probability variation big hit B is determined, the 8R probability variation big hit pattern is determined as the big hit symbol. The B symbol is determined, and when the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern.

Also, if the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as the process of step S5333. And as a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process process (step S5239), the small hit symbol ( After determining (step S5334), the process moves to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 decides on the losing design as the aspect of stopping the fluctuation of the special design (step S5336), and then shifts to step S5337. do.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5337, performs the lottery result (type of big win, small win, reach loss, or loss). (It may be one that instructs the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set. And after that, as the process of step S5338, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variably displayed, and the left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → Stop and display in the order of the middle decorative pattern (the left, middle and right decorative patterns may be synchronously displayed with the same pattern and stopped and displayed at the same time)). For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination of three left, middle and right decorative symbols when winning a jackpot of a type other than the 2R normal jackpot. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of left, middle and right decorative symbols is not the same as other symbols) is determined. In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the lost pattern with the reach (the left and right decorative patterns are a combination of the same patterns "0" to "9" and the middle decorative patterns are different; the reach loss When the missing pattern is specified, the missing pattern (a combination of left, middle and right decorative patterns in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different) is determined. The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has passed (when the game effect is finished).

In any case, when a win is obtained as a result of progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes the effect display (special display mode) at the time of the win to appear before the start of the big win game, and the big win game is played. is started, the effect display during the jackpot game is made to appear.

FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag as shown in FIG. If it is (step S5341), select the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop design setting process (step S5342), small hit flag is set (step S5343), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small hit is selected (step S5344), and if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach ( (not shown) is selected (step S5346), and if none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag and the reach flag are set, that is, if it becomes a normal loss (a loss that does not execute the reach effect), at the time of loss is selected (step S5347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 (step S5349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5355) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283), this process is terminated. As a result, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display device 1403 only for the variation time thus determined, and the effect display device 1600 performs the effect control in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. will take place.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is a random number for judging the big hit (random number for judging the first big hit, random number for judging the second big hit) and random number for the big hit design (random number for the first big hit design, random number for the second big hit design). A plurality of types are provided for each determination result based on. In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). They are stored so as to be associated with the random numbers for the first variation display pattern. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a reads in step S5302 of the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal process among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the random number for judging the big hit and the random number for the big hit symbol. By comparing with the random number for the fluctuation display pattern, and obtaining the fluctuation time information associated with the read random number for the fluctuation display pattern from this table, the special design (first special design, second special design) determine the variation pattern of As a result, the determination process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as described above, in this example, since there is no winning of a small hit, the variation pattern table at the time of a small win is not used. In this example, a small win is not won, but a small win may be won.

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, it is set so that the mode type of reach effect to be executed is determined by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the random number for the variation display pattern. It is For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of variable display pattern random numbers out of 241 types of variable display pattern random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 Random numbers for variation display patterns of types are set as determination values (164 to 222) indicating execution of one of super ready-to-win performances with low expectations for big wins, and 18 types of random numbers for variation display patterns have high expectations for big wins. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super ready-to-win effects is executed.

In addition, the super reach performance (SP performance) is a player who has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach performance, and a player who wants to generate a big hit game state when the super reach performance is executed. expectations are rising. That is, such a super ready-to-win effect has the highest selection rate in the variation pattern table at the time of the big win, and even if a loss is finally displayed by this, the player's expectation of the big win game state. will be able to increase However, in reality, in order to sufficiently raise the player's expectations for the jackpot game state, during the period when the super reach effect is being executed, a high-expectation notice effect that is drawn separately from the fluctuation pattern appears. It is required to do (combine).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss used when determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol provided corresponding to the random number for the first big hit determination and the random number for the first big hit pattern, the non-time saving state and the time saving state , and a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set in common. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss provided corresponding to the second big hit determination random number and the second symbol random number and used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, 0.1 seconds to as a time saving state A variable time of 12 seconds can be set, and a variable time of 12 seconds is set as a non-time saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same during the time saving state and during the non-working time saving state, and during the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time saving state, the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2004 As well as prompting, the time for the player to enter the game ball to the second start port 2004 is ensured.

Also, if 0.1 seconds is selected from the variation time at the time of losing the second special symbol, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at intervals of 0.6 seconds in the time saving state (high probability time saving state etc.) Discharge without being subjected to lottery processing is suppressed.

That is, the right-handed game ball is supplied to the area directly above the gate portion 2003 . Then, when the same game ball is received in the gate unit 2003 from this area when in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), a hit as a normal pattern is obtained (for example, winning probability is 100%), The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in an open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation where the second starting port 2004 can be accepted one after another (almost all of the game balls hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received by the second starting port 2004). Even if there is, every time those game balls are accepted, the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) around "approximately 1/32". become possible.

And in this example, since the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds when the player is operating the handle 302, in the time saving state (high probability time saving state etc.), the second Game balls are often received at the starting port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the variation pattern table when the second special symbol is lost based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2004 is extremely It can be set to a short time of 0.1 second. That is, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the pattern variation is completed only in the time (0.1 seconds) less than the shooting interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, so 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where game balls launched at intervals are received one after another in the second starting port 2004, the game balls are prevented from being discharged without being subjected to lottery processing. .

FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As a process of (1), 1 is subtracted from the variable timer in which the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process (step S5282) for the variable pattern is set. As a result, when it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the randomly selected variable time has passed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of this step S5373, this process is terminated when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

If the variable time timer has not reached 0 even though the variable timer has been decremented by 1 (step S5371), Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of , display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined by the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device 1403, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing derived display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

Further, when the big hit flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big win start command indicating to start the big win game state (step S5387), The standby time until the start of the jackpot game state (time for displaying the start of the jackpot game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed is set, and if the high-probability flag is set, the high-probability flag is reset, and if the time-saving flag is set. The time saving flag is reset (step S5389), and the variation counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is the initial value. When the process is updated to the first special symbol normal process (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the jackpot executing flag is set in the processing of step S5235, and the jackpot game is played in the jackpot control processing (step S5240a). state will be executed.

Incidentally, the jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, a jackpot start command (8R variable jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R variable jackpot) according to the type of jackpot (8R variable jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot, 16R variable jackpot, 8R variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) Jackpot command, 8R probability variable jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) are set. As a result, the production of the jackpot game state (battle production or additional challenge production) corresponding to the type of jackpot indicated by the jackpot start command is executed by the production display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers, and the like.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5386, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the low probability time saving state (step S5390). Then, when it is in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether the number of fluctuations of the special symbols digested after being controlled in the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 100 times) ( step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low probability time saving state reaches the predetermined upper limit value (100 times), the conditions for ending the low probability time saving state are satisfied, and time saving The function is stopped and the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) is entered (step S5392).

Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). And as a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small hit start command indicating starting the small hit game state is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is set. Waiting time until the start of the state (time for displaying the effect of starting the small winning game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, set a small winning in-execution flag indicating that the small winning game state is being executed (step S5396), so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value of the first special symbol process flag (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the flag during execution of the small hit is set in the process of step S5236, and in the small hit control process (step S5240b). A small winning game state is executed. Incidentally, unlike when a big win is won, the game state is not changed when such a small win game state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), the first special symbol process is performed without performing the processing related to the big hit or the small hit as a loss. When the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the flag during execution of the big hit or the flag during execution of the small hit is not set (steps S5235, S236), and a new game is started according to the state of suspension. (Lottery and symbol control) processing related to progress is performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310, as the process of step S5402, executes the gate part passing process such as acquiring the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. do.

Then, in the normal design process processing, one of the following five process processing is selectively executed according to the normal design process flag.

1. Ordinary symbol normal processing (step S5403) in which the ordinary random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and lottery processing for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the ordinary symbol is performed based on the read ordinary random number.
2. Ordinary design fluctuation time determination processing (step S5404) in which lottery processing etc. are performed for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the ordinary design displayed on the ordinary design display device 1402 based on the ordinary design fluctuation random number.
3. Ordinary design fluctuation processing (step S5405) to wait until the fluctuation display of the ordinary design in the ordinary design indicator 1402 is stopped.
4. Variation display of the normal symbols so that the mode when the variation control of the normal symbols is stopped determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbols is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402. Normal design stop processing (step S5406) to stop
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the normal pattern becomes a mode suggesting "normal pattern winning", the movable piece is opened and the game ball is accepted to the second start port 2004. Ordinary electric accessary product opening process (step S5407)

In addition, the normal design process flag is operated so that the initial value indicates that the normal design normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S5402).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, the above-described The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value of the normal holding number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S5411. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value of "4".

In the processing of this step S5411, when it is determined that the number of suspensions of the normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 in order to newly suspend the variable display control of the normal symbols processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the normal pending number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S5413, the normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number are obtained from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S5414, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbols is not newly reserved. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended.

FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Based on the counter value of the normal reserved number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the reserved state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the pending state, then as the process of step S5422, the normal symbols stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a The random number stored in the first storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the pattern (for example, normal random number, normal pattern fluctuation random number) is read out from the same RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal reservation number counter is counted down, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal reservation storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped Random numbers related to the display mode (normal random numbers, normal fluctuation random numbers) are shifted in the first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially selected from the first (earmost) area. Remember. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area are satisfied, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area is read. , is moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbols occurs is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426), selects a normal figure hit determination table (not shown) during time saving ( Step S5426), if the current gaming state is non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S5425), select the normal figure per determination table (not shown) during non-time saving ( Step S5427), it compares with the normal random number which is read with normal design normal processing step S5422 with the normal design hit decision table which is selected (step S5428).

In addition, the normal pattern hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is used when the game state is time saving (high probability time saving state). It is provided with a normal pattern hit determination table for non-working time saving used in the case of time (low probability non-working time saving state, high probability non-working time saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern per decision value, which indicates that the normal pattern has been elected. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so as not to coincide with the normal pattern deviation judgment value indicating that it is lost. In this way, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 during the time saving, the game ball is always won in the normal game, and the movable piece is opened and the game ball to the second start port 2004 Acceptance is controlled. Instead of all of the 255 types, more normal random numbers than in the non-time saving state may coincide with the normal pattern per judgment value indicating that the normal pattern is won.

In addition, in the non-short-time normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers can match the normal pattern per decision value indicating that they have been elected per normal pattern. Instead, the normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the normal pattern deviation determination value indicating that the normal pattern is out. In this way, in the non-working hours, even if there is a passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, because there is no winning per normal figure, the movable piece 2106 is in the open state second start opening There is no control over the acceptance of gaming balls into 2004. However, as described above, it may be possible to obtain a normal pattern hit even in a non-time-saving state, in this case, the winning probability is lower than the time-saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the normal pattern is a hit. When the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, for 2 seconds to allow the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, then move forward again to the second You may make it impossible to accept a game ball to the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected normal pattern per determination table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal pattern normal processing, and when it is determined that it is per normal pattern (step S5429 ), after setting the normal pattern per flag indicating that the variation has been elected per normal pattern (step S5430), per normal pattern as a mode of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal pattern (stop pattern of the normal pattern) Design is determined (step S5431), on the other hand, as a result of comparison between the selected normal pattern per determination table and the normal random number read in step S5422 of normal design normal processing, when it is determined that it is lost, the normal pattern fluctuation A general pattern loss pattern is determined as a form (normal pattern stop pattern) at the time of control stop (step S5432). And after that, when the above-described normal design process flag is updated (step S5433) so that the process shifts to the normal design fluctuation time determination process (step S5404), this process is terminated.

While such control by the main control MPU 1310a is being performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-described various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a, thereby performing the above-described peripheral control unit steady-state processing (received command analysis processing ( In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and an effect can be executed according to the game situation.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation in which starting winning has occurred, and when in this situation, performs control related to pending display and look-ahead effects in response to starting winning. And after this, by updating the process flag based on the grasped gaming situation, the following variation pattern designation command reception waiting processing, production design fluctuation start processing, production design fluctuation processing, production design fluctuation stop processing, jackpot display processing , jackpot game processing, or jackpot end effect processing.

Variation pattern specification command reception waiting process: During the period until the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the design is not in a variation state and the control related to the big hit is not performed (demonstration etc.) Along with performing control, when receiving a variation pattern command related to the variation pattern from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the performance symbol variation start process.

Production pattern variation start process: Various production contents (production pattern, advance notice production, etc.) in the pattern fluctuation period are determined based on the fluctuation pattern command, etc., and the variation of the decoration pattern is started based on the determined production contents. to control. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during effect symbol fluctuation.

Production design fluctuation processing: Various production contents determined in production design fluctuation start processing are controlled to start at each timing during the design fluctuation period, and when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the process flag is changed to production design Update to the value corresponding to the fluctuation stop processing.

Effect design fluctuation stop processing: Based on the reception of a command (design determination command) instructing to stop all designs, stop the fluctuation of the decorative design and perform control such as deriving and displaying the display result (stop design). When the decorative pattern is to be stopped by the big win pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the big win display process, and when the decorative pattern is to be stopped by the losing pattern, the value of the process flag is changed to the variation pattern specification command reception waiting process. Update to the corresponding value.

Big win display processing: Controls effects (display effects for informing the occurrence of a big win on the effect display device 1600, etc.) during the period from when the decorative symbols stop with the big win symbols until the start of the big win game. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the big-hit game.

During jackpot game processing: Various effects are controlled during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Big hit end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, the effect (such as a display effect for informing the player that the big win game state has ended) is controlled during the period from the end of the big win game state to the change allowable state. . Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern specifying command reception waiting process.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) referred to in the effect symbol variation start process when the game is in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the determination table T1, an effect pattern (variation effect) is associated with each of the variation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the variation pattern command. Therefore, when the variation pattern command is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the effect pattern (variation effect) associated with the variation pattern command based on the determination table T1, and determines the determined effect pattern. Based on (variation performance), control is performed so that the variation of the decorative pattern is started.

Note that the effect pattern (variation effect) does not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command. For example, one variation number indicated by a variation pattern command is associated with a plurality of production patterns (variation production), and one of these production patterns (variation production) is determined based on the production lottery or game situation. You may make it As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment also associates some of the variable numbers 1 to 22 with a plurality of effect patterns.

In addition, although this will also be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after thus determining the effect pattern (variation effect), a notice lottery (determination process of the notice effect) is performed based on the result of the big hit determination, the symbol type, and the change pattern. , the notice effect won in the notice lottery is controlled to appear at a predetermined timing while the determined effect pattern (variation effect) is performed (process during effect pattern fluctuation), so that a plurality of effect contents are displayed. The degree of expectation for the appearance of the jackpot pattern is suggested by the mode of appearance of these patterns, which can be combined.

And conventionally, among such composite effects, there are cases where the same specific advance notice effect (for example, timer effect) is executed by making a plurality of appearances while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed. Thus, it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained. However, since the advance notice effect can be combined only when the expectation for the appearance of the big hit pattern is high, the frequency of executing a plurality of timer effects while one effect pattern (fluctuation effect) is being executed naturally decreases. , it was considered difficult to sufficiently improve the interest in gaming.

As will be described later, the "timer effect" refers to a predetermined effect that appears during execution of the effect pattern (variable effect), and the count display toward the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed is set to a first predetermined numerical value. (e.g. "60 seconds") to a second predetermined value (e.g. "0 seconds"). is. That is, in this case, when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined numerical value is started as the timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, an effect (for example, a conversation notice or a cut-in A , B, etc.) are subject to the timer effect, it is guaranteed that an advantageous effect result will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (particularly, the advance notice side timer effect executed as a result of the advance notice lottery), at least when the count display is started, which effect is the object of the effect is kept secret. It is desirable to In addition, the ``target of the timer effect'' is the effect that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value as the timer effect reaches the second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds"). That is, in the timer effect, a count display is performed toward the timing at which the effect object occurs.

In the "timer effect" according to this embodiment, the elapsed time from the start of counting is displayed to the second decimal place, and the number of seconds and the like are displayed accurately. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect, and if it is executed as a count effect in which a count display such as count up or countdown is performed, the elapsed time after the count starts ( seconds, etc.).

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (notice side timer effect) as the effect content that appears only when winning the advance notice lottery, the effect pattern ( It is possible to execute a timer effect (fluctuation side timer effect) incorporated in advance as the effect content of the variable effect). That is, in this case, if the count effect display is executed as "the content of the effect of the advance notice effect that functions so as to increase the expectation of the big hit with respect to the effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command", the timer effect on the notice side is executed. However, by executing it as ``the content of the performance pattern itself determined based on the variation pattern command'', the expectation level of the big hit indicated by the performance pattern determined based on the variation pattern command is changed from the expectation level. It is possible to cause the count effect display (timer effect) to appear without wastefully adding up (accumulating the degree of expectation by satisfying the condition of "winning in advance notice lottery"). For example, when the expected degree of jackpot when a specific effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command appears is ``20%'', the expected degree of big win is increased by the function of compound effect when the advance notice side timer effect is further executed. As a result, it becomes "40%", for example, and the appearance frequency has to be reduced accordingly. It is possible to execute the timer effect with the degree set to "20%" (it can appear only by selecting a specific variation pattern), and the frequency of appearance can be preferably maintained.

It should be noted that the degree of expectation for a big hit when an effect pattern (variable effect) appears in the determination table T1 differs depending on the variation number (further, the effect pattern), and basically, the greater the variation number, the greater the expectation for a big win. It tends to be higher. For example, in the effect patterns corresponding to the variable numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), variable side timer effects are executed in which "conversation notice" is the effect target for all of the effect contents. The appearance ratio is variation number 5 (6) > variation number 9 (10) > variation number 17 (18), while the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is variation number 5 (6) < variation number 9 ( 10) It is set so that <variation number 17 (18). Also here, for convenience of explanation, only the determination table referred to in the normal game state will be described in detail, but even in the determination table referred to in the low probability time saving state and high probability time saving state, the effect content of the effect pattern itself A production pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which a variable side timer production can be executed is included, and can appear at a probability different from that in the normal game state.

Also, in the determination table T1, all of the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal ready-to-win effect is performed. It is different from variation numbers 3 and 4 in that respect. In addition, variation numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed, but variation numbers 9 and 10 execute a variable side timer effect for effecting a conversation notice, and variation numbers 11 and 10 12 executes a variable timer effect with cut-in A as the object of effect, and with variable numbers 13 and 14, a conversation notice and cut-in A are executed, and a variable timer effect with them as object of effect is executed. different in that they can be Variation numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP ready-to-win effect is performed. At 20, a variable timer effect is executed with cut-in B as the object of effect, and at variable numbers 21 and 22, a conversation notice and cut-in B are executed, and a variable timer effect with them as the object of effect is executed. different in that they can be Note that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the variable-side timer effect with the cut-ins A and B as the target is performed than when the variable-side timer effect with the conversation notice as the target is performed. is set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit tends to be higher when the variable-side timer effect for both the conversation notice and the cut-ins A and B is executed.

In addition, "conversation notice" is a production that can appear at a relatively early stage after the production pattern (decorative pattern variation production) is executed, and is often accompanied by a relatively low level of expectation. On the other hand, cut-ins A and B can appear at a relatively late stage after the performance pattern (decorative design variation performance) is executed, and have a relatively high degree of expectation. It is a production that is often performed (or a production that always builds up a relatively high degree of expectation). Therefore, the "conversation notice" is set to have a higher appearance rate (execution probability) than other effects (cut-ins A and B, character A and B described later) with higher expectations than this. It is supposed to be In addition, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the variable production is executed to correspond to the cut-in A that appears as the production content of the notice production in character reach, whereas in SP reach, the notice It is executed so as to correspond to cut-in B instead of cut-in A appearing as the effect content of the effect.

Moreover, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, the effect contents (effect pattern ) is assigned as a variable side timer effect. On top of this, if the variation pattern is "predetermined type such as shortened variation or normal reach effect with low expectation (for example, variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.)", the count effect display as the notice side timer effect is displayed. The variation pattern is "variation pattern for executing the variable timer effect ( count variation patterns such as variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22)”, the variation pattern is the predetermined type (for example, variation (numbers 1 to 6, etc.) are designed to be low.

Here, 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared as count variation patterns for which the variation side timer effect is executed, and two of them (0 Only the variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) corresponding to the above-mentioned predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.) correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), so the applicable ratio is "2/14". On the other hand, 8 variation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as variation patterns in which the variation side timer effect is not executed, and 4 variation patterns (variation Numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), so the applicable ratio is "4/8".

In such a configuration, when the effect content of the variation pattern is one that can perform the count effect display (variation side timer effect) (count variation pattern), the advance notice is higher than the case of the variation pattern that does not perform the variable side timer effect. The ratio of determining that the count effect display (notice-side timer effect) cannot be executed as the effect content of the effect is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one production pattern (variable production) without increasing the level of expectation uselessly and lowering the frequency of appearance.

As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is counted as a count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ), the rate at which the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect appears differs depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 148, when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the advance notice timer effect does not appear at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 9 to 14 are executed. The timer effect on the advance notice side can appear with a moderate probability of lottery, and when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 17 to 22 are executed, the timer effect on the advance notice side can appear with a high probability of lottery. ing.

It should be noted that even when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the above-described advance notice-side timer effect may appear at a low probability. In addition, even if any of the performance patterns corresponding to the variable numbers 15 to 22, in which the timer performance on the announcement side can appear with a high lottery probability, is actually executed, the big hit is more likely than the loss. The announcement side timer effect can appear with a higher lottery probability for the performance pattern that wins the 2nd prize, and the variation number 22 can appear with a higher lottery probability than the variation number 16.例文帳に追加ing.

In such a configuration, the count effect display can be performed in advance depending on whether the change pattern is the first count change pattern (for example, change number 10) or the second count change pattern (for example, change number 22). The ratio of execution as the effect content (notice side timer effect) will be different. Therefore, among the count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the ratio of appearance of a plurality of count displays in one production pattern (variation production) is high, the type Depending on the situation, it is possible to further increase the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear, so that it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained in a favorable manner.

In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the same reach type effect content appears in the effect pattern (for example, character reach, SP reach), the variable side timer effect is included as the effect content. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the notice-side timer is set within the execution period of the effect pattern compared to the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) that does not include the variable timer effect as the effect content. The rate at which the effect appears (the rate at which it is determined by the preliminary lottery that the timer effect on the advance notice side is to be executed) is set to be high. That is, in this case, two timer effects (fluctuation side timer effect, advance notice side timer effect) appear in one effect pattern only by requiring the degree of expectation for a big hit that one advance notice side timer effect is won in the advance notice lottery. As a result, the double timer performance opportunity can be realized without uselessly increasing the degree of expectation for a big win.

In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the production pattern (variation production) determined in the production pattern fluctuation start process is the count fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). Even in this case, there are variable side timer effects (variable side count effect display) in which "conversation notice" is the object of production and variable side timer effects (variable side count effect display) in which "cut-in" is the object of production. , the mode of count display (the form and color of count numbers, etc.) is different. That is, in this case, even if a production pattern (for example, variation numbers 9 and 11) having the same ready-to-win production as the production content is executed, the state of count display of the variable side timer production (variable side count production display) is confirmed. By doing so, coupled with ``the ratio of appearance of the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect is set to differ according to which count fluctuation pattern it is,'' the likelihood of appearance of the advance notice timer effect is recognized. can be expected.

Regarding the mode of the count display that appears in the notice-side timer effect (prediction-side count effect display), regardless of whether or not the effect target is the same (conversation notice, cut-in), the variable-side timer effect (variation-side It may be different from (or at least different from) the count display mode (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the count effect display), or may be the same as the same mode (or at least the same as either) .

However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the notice-side timer effect (preview-side count effect display) will be executed in a common manner regardless of the type of effect that is the object of the effect. This is useful in improving the player's sense of anticipation by making the player aware that the forewarning-side timer effect set to a high degree is appearing. In this sense, it is more desirable that the notice-side timer effect be different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the variable-side timer effect (variation-side count effect display). A plurality of modes with different expectations (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) are prepared for the above-mentioned common aspect of the advance notice side timer effect (prediction side count effect display), and one of them is executed. You may do so.

In addition, in order to more preferably recognize that the advance notice-side timer effect is being executed, the count display when the advance notice-side timer effect is executed and the count display when the variable timer effect is executed are displayed. It is desirable to make the count speed (for example, the speed at which numbers change during count-up and count-down) different. With such a configuration, after the timer effect is started, even during the period in which the count display is in progress, the count speed of the timer effect is made to be watched, and the expectation is relatively low. It is possible to make the player interested in which one of the advance notice side timer performance with a high degree of expectation is being executed and to suitably maintain the game interest during the timer expiration period.例文帳に追加

Also, at this time, in the variable timer effect, depending on the effect target (conversation notice, cut-in), the count display is performed at a speed relatively close to (or the same speed as) the count speed of the advance notice timer effect ( cut-in) and a mode (conversation notice) in which the count is displayed at a speed not relatively close to the counting speed of the timer effect on the advance notice side, it is possible to determine whether the timer effect on the notice side is being executed. It is possible to make it more interesting by varying the difficulty of judging. In addition, in the variable side timer effect (or advance notice side timer effect), the count number is displayed by repeating the appearance and disappearance of the count number, whereas in the notice side timer effect (or fluctuation side timer effect), the count number is displayed continuously. You may make it count-display by displaying.

According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable-side timer effect and the count display of the advance notice-side timer effect are executed at the same time, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the advance notice-side timer effect is being executed. It is expected that it will be possible to play games, and that the interest in games will be improved.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count display is performed for the variation patterns (count variation patterns such as variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, and 17 to 22) corresponding to the variation side timer effects. A plurality of production patterns with different start timings or end timings (total count or time required to complete all counts) are set as selectable production patterns. Then, when a variation pattern corresponding to the variable side timer effect is acquired, one of the plurality of effect patterns is determined based on a random number for effect, etc., and the count display of the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer are performed. By making the easiness of simultaneous execution with the count display of the effect different (for example, the larger the total number of counts, the easier it is to overlap), the easiness of determining whether or not the advance notice timer effect is being executed can be made different. I try to make it interesting

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of production patterns (the production target of the timer production and the reach The content of the production is the same), but there are multiple production patterns with different start timings or end timings of the count display (total count or time required to complete all counts) (however, they are not subject to timer production. The type of effect to be executed and the type of ready-to-win effect to be executed as the effect content of the variation pattern may be the same for each effect pattern), and a plurality of different variation patterns may be prepared for one-to-one correspondence.

In addition, the number of counts displayed (total number of counts) when appearing in the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable side timer effect and the notice By making the selection rate of the specific count display number different between the side timer effect and the side timer effect, the difficulty of judging whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is being executed can be differentiated to add interest. .

Further, if the timer effect on the notice side is executed by countdown display, and the timer effect on the variable side is executed by the countup display, it is possible to definitely grasp whether or not the timer effect on the notice side is being executed. It is expected that it will become possible to play games and greatly improve the interest in games. In addition, while the notice-side timer effect is executed with a countdown display, the variable-side timer effect for a specific effect (for example, conversation notice) is executed with a count-up display, and a different effect from the specific effect (for example, (Cut-in) is executed with countdown display, the difficulty of judging whether or not the notice-side timer effect is being executed is made different depending on the effect object, making it more interesting. be able to give.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is targeted for the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect, and there are cases where different effects are targeted for the effect. to control. And when the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is targeted for the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect, compared to the case where different effects are targeted for the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect. It is set so that the rate of lowering the expectation of a big hit is high, and even if the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, each count display The end timing is made different.

That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is the object of effect in the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect, one of the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect is displayed first by a predetermined value. , and the other count display continues, so at this point, it is as if a different effect is being performed (the timer effect is executed in a relatively high-expectation mode). It looks as if Then, after that, the other count display that has been continued will reach a predetermined value in a manner that makes it clear that the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is the object of effect and will be terminated. Even if the timer effect on the end side reveals that a relatively low-expectation conversation announcement is targeted for effect, a different effect that can appear after that is targeted for effect ( It is expected that the sense of anticipation for the fact that the timer effect is being executed in a manner with a relatively high degree of expectation will be maintained, and that the interest in the game will be improved.

Also, in this way, when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for effect in the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect, the timing when the variable timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the advance notice timer effect are predetermined. It is desirable to display separate indications corresponding to the end of the count (for example, "count successful!", "chance up!", etc.) at the timing when the numerical value is reached.

More specifically, a variable-side timer effect and an advance-notice-side timer effect for effecting "conversation notice" executed as a change-side or advance-notice-side effect appear within one effect pattern. In this case, the count display of the variable side timer effect and the count display of the advance notice side timer effect are performed simultaneously. While the count display progresses according to the fluctuation side specific production ("Count success!", Effects according to the appearance of the conversation notice, etc.), the notice side timer production is related to the "conversation notice" Count display according to the notice-side specific effects that occur as the notice-side effects ("Chance Up!", Timer end display that appears according to the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the effect), etc.) By advancing the game, different indications corresponding to the end of the count will appear at different timings.

By the way, the effects of the conversation notice and the cut-in are required to be executed without fail when they are the object of the variable-side timer effect (when the count variation pattern is determined). In particular, conversation notice and cut-in are effects that can be executed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation. It is required to appear in a highly anticipated manner. Therefore, the effect to be the effect target of the variable timer effect is incorporated in advance as the effect content of the above effect pattern (variable effect), and the variable timer effect and the effect object can be changed only by executing the effect pattern. It is desirable to make it possible for each of the effects to be performed (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) to appear. However, instead of this, it is also possible to perform control so that when the variable-side timer effect is executed, the effect (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) to be targeted for the effect is always selected in the advance notice lottery. .

In addition, if each effect of the conversation notice and cut-in is not subject to the effect of the variable timer effect, it will be determined whether or not it will appear as the effect content of the notice in the notice lottery described later. A judgment is made as to what mode (relatively high or low expectations) should be made to appear as the content of the side effect, and the appearance is controlled based on the result of the determination. .

Hereinafter, the production pattern determination processing using FIG. 148 will be summarized.

That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the variation pattern command, the symbol type command, etc. from the main control MPU 1310a, first, based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command and the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command, the current game Refer to the determination table according to the state. For example, if the production pattern is determined based on the pattern type, it is possible to give bias (expectation) to the probability variation expectation when a specific production pattern appears, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state, etc. become.

Then, as the effect pattern associated with the variable number, a plurality of effect patterns (such as a plurality of effect patterns with different start timings or end timings of the count display that appears in the variable timer effect, etc.) are prepared to be selectable. If so, one of a plurality of performance patterns with different start timings or end timings of the count display is selected based on the hit/loss of the big hit determination. At this time, if the jackpot judgment is won, the production pattern is set so that the start timing or end timing of the count display is delayed at a high rate, and by this, the start timing or end timing of the count display is set. The later it is, the higher the possibility that a big hit pattern will appear.

Also, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) is obtained when a special effect condition is established. Even in such a case, a performance pattern set so that the variable timer performance does not appear is selected from among the plurality of performance patterns.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after the production pattern (the production from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the variation) that appears during the pattern fluctuation is thus selected, what kind of advance notice production is to be performed within the execution period of the production pattern. It will be decided whether to additionally execute (combine) in such a manner (advance lottery).

FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing procedure for a lottery (announcement lottery performed in the effect symbol variation start process) relating to the foretelling effect appearing within the effect pattern execution period (symbol fluctuation time). It should be noted that the processing procedure of the advance notice lottery described below is merely an example, and the processing procedure of the advance notice lottery is not limited to this as long as the desired purpose of the advance notice effect can be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 149, at the time of the advance notice lottery, first, it is determined whether or not the variation waiting for the start (suspension to be digested) is subject to the timer prefetch effect to be described later (step S5501). ). As a result, when the timer prefetch effect is targeted, the first timer advance notice lottery is performed (step S5502), and when the timer prefetch effect is not targeted, the second timer advance notice lottery is conducted (step S5502). S5521).

That is, when the timer prefetch effect is targeted (first timer advance notice lottery), compared to the case where the timer prefetch effect is not targeted (second timer advance notice lottery), the notice side timer effect is executed. It is designed to increase the rate at which decisions are made. Note that the ratio may include a ratio determined by 100%. In addition, in both the first timer advance notice lottery and the second timer advance notice lottery, different decision tables are prepared for each game state, thereby making a decision to execute the advance notice side timer effect according to the game state. (For example, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, it is decided to execute the notice side timer effect at a lower rate than the normal gaming state (including the rate determined at 0%)) is different It has become.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of the timer advance notice determination table T2 that is referred to when the change (holding to be consumed) is not targeted for the timer prefetch effect in the normal game state (second timer advance notice lottery). .

As shown in FIG. 150, in the second timer advance notice lottery according to this embodiment, when a predetermined type of variation pattern command (variation numbers 1 to 6 here) is acquired, the advance notice side timer effect does not make a decision to implement This point is the same in the case of the first timer advance notice lottery and other gaming states.

Also, as shown in FIG. 148, in the second timer advance notice lottery, even if the effect pattern (for example, the SP reach corresponding to the variation numbers 15 to 22) appears with the same reach type effect content, the variable side In production patterns that include timer production as production content (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), production patterns that do not contain variable side timer production as production content (for example, SP reach corresponding to variation numbers 15 and 16) Compared to It is set so that the rate at which a determination to the effect that the advance notice side timer effect is to be executed is made high. That is, in this case, two timer effects (fluctuation side timer effect, advance notice side timer effect) can appear in one effect pattern without winning the later-described double timer effect in the advance notice lottery. As a result, the double timer performance opportunity can be realized without wastefully increasing the degree of expectation for the big win (winning the double timer performance). This point also applies to the first timer advance notice lottery and other gaming states.

However, in the first timer advance notice lottery, the percentage of decisions to execute the advance notice side timer effect is generally higher than in the timer advance notice determination table T2 referred to in the second timer advance notice lottery. More specifically, in the first timer advance notice lottery, even if any of the variation numbers 7 to 22 is selected, the timer advance notice determination table T2 referred to in the second timer advance notice lottery is compared to the advance notice side. The percentage of decisions to the effect that the timer effect is to be executed is high.

Further, as will be described later, in the timer prefetch effect according to this embodiment, there are a plurality of modes (low expectation mode, high expectation mode, fixed mode). In the first timer advance notice lottery, first, it is determined in which mode the timer prefetch effect is executed, and even if the prefetch effect is executed in the low expectation mode, the second timer advance notice lottery is performed. Compared to the timer advance notice determination table T2 referred to in , the ratio of decisions to execute the advance notice timer effect is generally set to be higher. Note that when the timer look-ahead effect is executed in the high-expectation mode, the percentage of decisions to execute the advance notice-side timer effect is generally higher than when the timer look-ahead effect is executed in the low-expectation mode, and the timer look-ahead effect is executed. In the case of execution in the definite mode, it is set so that the decision to execute the advance notice-side timer effect is always made regardless of the variation pattern (variation numbers 1 to 22).

As a result of the timer advance notice lottery (first timer advance notice lottery, second timer advance notice lottery), if it is determined to execute the advance notice timer effect (YES in step S5503), step S5504 is processed as the first timer effect. While the 1st mission effect lottery is performed, if it is not decided to execute the advance notice side timer effect (NO in step S5503), the 2nd mission effect lottery is performed as the process of step S5551.

That is, as described above, in the timer effect, the larger the count display number (count total number) displayed when the count display is started (the longer the time required for the timer to consume time), the higher the expectation of a big hit tends to be. is set to have However, in this case, when the count display number (count total number) displayed when the count display is started is small, the expectation of a big hit tends to be low, so the timer effect is executed. It was feared that interest would decline.

Therefore, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment causes the effect display device 1600 to display a "specific display related to the first effect" such as "appear the first effect", and the specific display When the first performance occurs (appears) during the display of , a special display such as ``mission success'' appears, thereby making it possible to execute a mission performance that suggests that the jackpot has been won.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect type that appears at a relatively early stage (here, conversation notice) among the effect types that are targeted for the timer effect is set as the first effect. I am planning to adopt. In other words, in this case, when the timer effect is executed while a specific display such as "Appear the conversation notice (first effect)" appears (while the mission effect appears), the count display is performed. Even if the count display number (total count) displayed when is started is small, the target of the timer notice is "a conversation notice that appears at a relatively early stage" (a big hit due to mission success The number of counts displayed when the count display starts (the total number of counts) is large, and the count display continues even after the conversation notice ends. Since the degree of expectation for a big win can be expected to increase even in the case where the timer performance is executed, the amusement in the game can be stably enhanced.

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in order to more preferably produce a synergistic effect caused by such a timer effect and a mission effect, a specific display related to the first effect (appearing a conversation notice) ) is displayed, an advance notice lottery (each process shown in FIG. 149) is performed so that the appearance ratio of the timer effect is higher than when the specific display related to the first effect (appear the conversation notice) is not displayed. is to be carried out. As a result, it is possible to have a sense of anticipation that the timer effect will be executed only by displaying the specific display (appear the conversation notice) related to the first effect, so that the decrease in the interest in the game can be suitably suppressed. be able to The first effect that is the target of the mission display need not be "conversation notice", and may be executed instead of any of the effects shown in FIG. 160, for example.

In addition, when the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed, the appearance ratio of the timer effect compared to when the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not displayed Although any method may be adopted as a method for increasing , it can be realized by adopting, for example, any one of the following methods.
a. Whether or not to perform the mission performance is first determined, and when it is determined to perform the mission performance, the timer performance is performed so that the appearance rate of the timer performance is higher than when it is not determined to perform the mission performance. A method for determining whether or not to appear b. Whether or not to perform the timer performance is first determined, and when it is determined to perform the timer performance, the mission performance is performed so that the appearance rate of the mission performance is higher than when it is not determined to perform the timer performance. How to decide whether to spawn

In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment employs the method b described above. Therefore, in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) when it is determined in the process of step S5503 that the advance notice side timer effect has been won, it is not determined in the process of step S5503 that the advance notice side timer effect has been won. Compared to the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) in the case of , so that the ratio of the decision to display (mission display) the specific display (appear the conversation notice) related to the first effect is high. It is determined whether or not to display a mission within the variation (effect pattern).

In addition, a specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) and a timer prefetch effect (first precedent mode, second precedence mode, third precedence mode) that suggests that the notice side timer effect will be executed mode) can be displayed at the same time. Further, under a predetermined condition, a predetermined display (mission suggestive display) may be displayed in which, when it appears, a specific display related to the first effect (appear the advance notice of the conversation) is more likely to appear.

In addition, regarding the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear), for example, when the hold information that is the target of the mission effect (hold information that generates the mission effect) is obtained, the hold information It may be arranged to be displayed over a plurality of times of variable display until it is digested. Further, at this time, when the pending information to be the target of the mission performance (the pending information for generating the mission performance) is the pending information for the big win, the variation executed before the pending information for the big win is digested. A special display (mission successful) may be displayed by making a conversation notice appear in the display. However, if the special display (mission success) is displayed in advance in this way (when the mission success is displayed when the pending information that causes the mission effect is not yet digested), the losing variation display is executed. should be limited to when That is, in this case, even though the special display (mission successful) is displayed, the changing display in which the special display appears will show a lost pattern (losing effect), and thus the special display (mission successful) is displayed. The game amusement can be improved by digesting the reservation information to be the object of the mission performance in a state where the player is in a state where the game is played and displaying a big win pattern (big win performance) in the variable display.

According to such a configuration, even if the mission is successful before the count display of the timer effect is started while the mission effect and the timer look-ahead effect are executed over a plurality of fluctuations, the change display shows the missing pattern. It is possible to realize a performance as if the variable display in which the big win pattern appears is carried over until the variable display for starting the count display of the timer performance appears.

FIG. 151(a) is a diagram showing an example of the first mission effect determination table T3a (first mission effect lottery) referred to when the notice-side timer effect is performed in the normal game state, and FIG. 151(b). 10 is a diagram showing an example of a second mission effect determination table T3b (second mission effect lottery) that is referred to when the advance notice-side timer effect is not performed in the normal game state.

As is clear from 151(a) and (b) in FIG. 151, first, in the first mission effect determination table T3a, which is referred to when the advance notice-side timer effect is performed, when the advance notice-side timer effect is not performed, Compared to the second mission effect determination table T3b to be referred to, it is set so that the ratio of the determination to display (mission display) the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first effect is higher. there is This point is the same for each table referred to in other gaming states.

Also, as shown in FIG. 148, even though the variation numbers 5 and 6 correspond to the variation pattern in which "conversation notice" appears as a variation effect, the variation numbers 5 and 6 are acquired. set so as not to execute a mission effect in which a specific display related to the first effect (make a conversation advance notice appear) is displayed in both the first mission effect determination table T3a and the second mission effect determination table T3b. It is That is, since the variable numbers 5 and 6 are so-called normal reach effects (ready reach types with low expectations), both the timer effect and the mission effect are generated in such a reach effect with low expectations, and the mission is successful. In that case, there is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease because the desire "I wanted to see this type of ready-to-win effect with a higher degree of expectation" was not satisfied. For this reason, with variation numbers 5 and 6, although there is a ready-to-win effect in which a variable timer effect is performed with "conversation notice" as the effect target, in either the first mission effect determination table T3a or the second mission effect determination table T3b, Also, it is desirable to set so as not to execute an effect in which a specific display related to the first effect (appear a conversation notice) is displayed. This point is the same for each table referred to in other gaming states.

Also, as shown in FIG. 148, the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 also correspond to the variation patterns in which the "conversation notice" appears as a variation effect, but these variation numbers have not been acquired. Also set so as not to execute a mission effect in which a specific display related to the first effect (make a conversation advance notice appear) is displayed in both the first mission effect determination table T3a and the second mission effect determination table T3b. It is This is because the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 are variation patterns in the event of a loss, and it is not possible to display that the mission has been successful (that the winning of the jackpot is definite). This point also applies to each table referred to in other gaming states.

Also, as shown in FIG. 148, the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 correspond to the hit variation patterns in which the "conversation notice" appears as a variation effect. When the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed when 18 and 22 are acquired, the effect of mission success (confirmation that you have won the jackpot) is displayed. The Rukoto. Therefore, in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is performed, the winning variation pattern (variation numbers 10, 14, 18, 22) is obtained, the execution probability is set (three times) to be significantly higher than that of the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is not performed. there is Through such control, it is possible to give the player an impression that the mission effects are more likely to appear when the timer effects appear. This point also applies to each table referred to in other gaming states.

On the other hand, during the execution of the winning variation patterns (variation numbers 8, 12, 16, 20) in which the "conversation notice" does not appear as the content of the variation presentation, a specific display related to the first production (appear the conversation notice) is displayed, it is possible that a strange production situation may occur, such as ``Even though the mission is displayed, the conversation notice cannot be displayed, and the jackpot pattern is displayed after the mission fails.'' do not have. Therefore, even in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is performed, the hit variation patterns (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that do not appear as the "conversation notice" as the variation effect ) is obtained, the execution probability is set (doubled) so as not to be so high as compared with the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is not performed. there is This point also applies to each table referred to in other gaming states.

However, as will be described later, when it is determined that a winning variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that does not cause the "conversation notice" to appear as a variation effect is acquired and the mission effect is executed, the probability is relatively high. is controlled to increase the probability that "conversation notice" is executed as the effect content of the notice effect (steps S5509 and S5534, which will be described later). In view of the fact that such control is performed, even for hit variation patterns (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that do not cause the "conversation notice" to appear as the content of the variation effect, the "conversation notice" is used as the variation effect. The mission performance may be performed with the same execution probability as compared with the hit variation patterns (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) appearing as contents.

On the other hand, the variation numbers 7, 11, 15, and 19 are the ready-to-win performances in which the "conversation notice" is not displayed as the performance contents of the variable performances. Such a reach production can be performed in the form of a failure in the mission production without causing the "conversation notice" to appear, so refer to when the notice side timer production is performed. In the first mission effect lottery to be executed, the probability of execution is set (three times) to be significantly higher than in the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is not performed. there is Through such control, it is possible to give the player an impression that the mission effects are more likely to appear when the timer effects appear. This point also applies to each table referred to in other gaming states.

As will be described later, it was decided that a reach effect (variation numbers 7, 11, 15, 19, etc.) at the time of failure, in which the "conversation notice" does not appear as the effect content of the variable effect, is acquired and the mission effect is executed. Sometimes, control is performed so that the probability of executing "conversation notice" as the effect content of the notice effect becomes zero. This is because, in the ready-to-win effect at the time of losing, it is not possible to display that the mission has been successful (indicating that the player has won the jackpot).

According to such a configuration of the mission production, always (when the mission production does not appear), the production target of the timer production (count production display) is the second production (conversation notice) rather than the first production (conversation notice). It is more desirable to have a higher expectation (for example, a cut-in or a character action described later) in order to get a sense of expectation, and the timer effect (count effect display) is the first effect. When it is (conversation advance notice), it is not possible to obtain a good sense of expectation. However, if the timer effect (count effect display) is executed when the specific display (appear the conversation preview) related to the first effect (conversation notice) is displayed, the target of the timer effect is the first effect. In both (conversation notice) and the second production (cut-in), it is possible to get a sense of expectation higher than the expectation obtained in at least the second production (cut-in), so timer production can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

Moreover, when such a specific display (appear the conversation notice) related to the first effect (conversation notice) is displayed, the specific display (appear the conversation notice) related to the first effect (conversation notice) in the pattern production Since the appearance ratio of the timer effect (count effect display) is higher than when is not displayed, the specific display related to the first effect (conversation notice) (Appear the conversation notice) It becomes possible to suitably suppress the decrease in interest. In order to realize such effect control, it is not always necessary to prepare the variable timer effect so that it can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, both a conversation notice and a cut-in (or a character action to be described later) can be executed within one production pattern, and the conversation notice is a cut-in (or a role to be described later). It is designed to appear at the timing before the object action). Therefore, if the mission display (make the conversation notice appear) is being executed, even if the count display number (count total) displayed when the count display of the timer effect starts is small, there is a possibility that the mission will succeed. By being conscious, the decline in expectations will be suppressed. In addition, when the number of displayed counts (the total number of counts) displayed when the count display of the timer effect is started is large, the sense of anticipation can be suitably maintained by itself. expected to remain stable.

In addition, although this will also be described later, the timing of displaying (mission display) the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first effect is the period during which the pattern change targeted for the specific display is performed. Not only during the period, but also during the period in which the pattern variation targeted for the specific display is still in a pending state. In addition, in a situation where a specific display related to the first production (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed during the period in which the pattern variation targeted for the mission production is still in a pending state, the first production will be It will also be described later that there are cases where a special display such as "Mission Successful" can be generated (appeared).

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) is performed in this way, next, as the process of step S5505, the advance notice timer type lottery is performed to determine the execution mode of the advance notice timer effect. .

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of an announcement-side timer type determination table T4 referred to in the announcement-side timer type lottery (step S5505).

As shown in FIG. 152, in this advance notice timer type determination table T4, it is acquired whether the advance notice timer effect is to be executed in the single timer mode or in the double timer mode. A production random number is assigned in a different distribution for each variable number. In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment refers to the announcement side timer type determination table T4 based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, and determines whether the value of the acquired effect random number is the single timer mode or the double timer mode. By determining which mode is assigned, the announcement side timer type lottery (step S5505) is executed.

In addition, the "single timer" to be judged in the announcement timer type lottery corresponds to "a mode in which one announcement timer effect is executed within one effect pattern", and is equivalent to "double timer". corresponds to "a mode in which two advance notice-side timer effects with different effects are executed within one effect pattern". In this notice-side timer type determination table T4, performance random numbers are allocated for each variation number so that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when a ``double timer'' appears than a ``single timer''.

Further, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment can execute the above-described variable side timer effect depending on the type of variation pattern (variation number). Therefore, when it is determined that the advance notice-side timer effect is to be executed in the form of a single timer while such a count variation pattern is selected, the fluctuation-side timer effect and the advance notice-side timer effect appear within one effect pattern. As a result, the timer effect is executed in the form of a double timer (or triple timer). Similarly, when it is determined that the advance notice timer effect is to be executed in the form of a double timer when the count fluctuation pattern is selected, the fluctuation timer effect and the advance notice timer effect are included in one effect pattern. By appearing, a timer effect is executed in a triple timer (or quadruple timer) mode.

That is, in this case, if the number of appearances of the advance notice timer effect (single, double) is determined regardless of whether or not the count variation pattern is selected, then "the appearance of the timer effect appearing within one effect pattern The larger the number, the higher the expectation of a big hit." This relationship may collapse, and this makes it impossible to understand the meaning of the performance when the timer performance is executed (which mode is the high expectation?). There is concern that the interest in gaming will decline due to

Therefore, in the advance notice timer type lottery (step S5505) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. When the variation patterns (variation numbers 7, 8, 15, 16) that do not execute the variable side timer effect are selected, the reach type (character reach with relatively low expectations, SP reach with relatively high expectations) , the double timer mode is more likely to be selected for SP reach, which has a relatively high degree of expectation.

On the other hand, among the variation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the advance notice side timer effect can appear, two variation patterns (variation numbers 13, 14, 21, 22) that execute two variable side timer effects for different effects. is selected, depending on the type of reach (character reach with relatively low expectations, SP reach with relatively high expectations), only in the case of SP reach with relatively high expectations, double timer mode is selected. That is, in this case, when the mode of the quadruple timer appears due to the appearance of two variable-side timer effects and two advance-notification-side timer effects, which are different objects of the effect, within one effect pattern, the type of SP reach with a relatively high degree of expectation. It is definitely suggested that the performance pattern will be executed at , and the amusement of the game can be improved. However, instead of this, when a mode of a quadruple timer appears due to two variable side timer effects and two advance notice side timer effects appearing in one effect pattern, it is certain that a big hit pattern appears. It may be suggested.

When the variation patterns (variation numbers 13, 14, 21 and 22) for executing two variable timer effects with different effects are selected, the mode of the single timer is selected in the advance notice timer type lottery (step S5505). Even when is selected, two variable side timer effects and one advance notice side timer effect appear in one effect pattern, thereby appearing a mode of a triple timer. In order to maintain the degree of expectation when such a triple timer mode appears, the aforementioned timer advance notice lottery (first timer advance notice lottery, second timer advance notice lottery) corresponds to a variation pattern with a relatively low degree of expectation. When the variation numbers 13 and 14 are selected, it is determined that the advance notice side timer effect is executed only at a relatively low probability compared to the variation numbers 7 to 12 of the same character reach (decision to make a triple timer). (See the distribution mode of variation number 13 in FIG. 150).

On the other hand, among the variation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the advance notice side timer effect can appear, one variation pattern (variation numbers 9 to 12, 17 to 20) for executing the variable side timer effect is selected. When the character reach (variation number 9 to 12) with relatively low expectations, the selection probability of the double timer mode is set to be significantly low, and the SP reach (variation number 17 to 20) are set so that the probability of selecting the double timer mode is significantly higher. That is, in this case, coupled with the distribution mode of variation number 13 in FIG. To improve amusement in a game by increasing the rate of appearance of SP reach with relatively high expectations rather than character reach with relatively low expectations when a performance and one advance notice side timer performance appear. will be able to

Note that in the announcement timer type lottery (step S5505) according to this embodiment, only the process of selecting either the single timer or the double timer as the announcement timer effect type is performed. However, with respect to the advance notice timer type lottery (step S5505), the lottery processing may be performed so that the advance notice timer effect of the triple timer or more can be executed, or the count display mode of the advance notice timer effect can be changed according to the degree of expectation. It may be executed as a lottery process as to which one of a plurality of different modes (for example, different colors) is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, after the announcement side timer type lottery (step S5505) is thus performed, the result of the announcement side timer type lottery (step S5505) is the single timer mode and the double timer mode. In which of the above is it decided to perform the advance notice side timer effect (step S5506), or is it determined to perform the mission effect as a result of the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) (steps S5507, S532)? A production lottery (steps S5508, S5509, S5523, S5524, S5533, S5534, S5543) targeting the timer object candidate production (announcement production that can be the production target of the advance notice side timer production) in the content (table) according to each result of , S5544).

More specifically, one of the following processes is executed.
If it is in the first processing state in which it is in the single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and it is decided (YES in step S5507) to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear), First, based on the notice number determination table referred to when in the first processing state, how many timer object candidate effects are made to appear as the effect contents of the notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. Determination processing as to whether or not is performed (step S5508). Next, determination processing regarding which types of advance notice effects are to appear as timer object candidate effects by the number determined in the determination process, and furthermore, which advance notice effects among them are to be targeted for timer effect effects. (step S5509).

In the case of the second processing situation in which it is in the single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and a decision (NO in step S5507) to the effect that the mission effect (make the conversation announcement appear) is not executed, First, based on the notice number determination table referred to when in the second processing state, how many timer object candidate effects are made to appear as the effect contents of the notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. Determination processing as to whether or not is performed (step S5523). Next, determination processing regarding which type of advance notice effect is to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process, and which of the advance notice effects is to be the target of the timer effect effect. (step S5524).

In the case of the third processing situation in which the mode is the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the execution of the mission effect (appear the conversation notice) has been determined (YES in step S5532), First, based on the notice number determination table referred to when in the third processing state, how many timer object candidate effects are made to appear as the effect contents of the notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. Determination processing as to whether or not is performed (step S5533). Next, determination processing regarding which types of advance notice effects are to appear as timer object candidate effects by the number determined in the determination process, and furthermore, which advance notice effects among them are to be targeted for timer effect effects. (step S5534).

・If it is in the fourth processing state in which it is in the form of a double timer (NO in step S5506) and it is decided not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5532), First, based on the notice number determination table referred to when in the fourth processing state, how many timer object candidate effects are made to appear as the effect contents of the notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. Determination processing as to whether or not is performed (step S5543). Next, determination processing regarding which types of advance notice effects are to appear as timer object candidate effects by the number determined in the determination process, and furthermore, which advance notice effects among them are to be targeted for timer effect effects. (step S5544).

FIG. 153 shows the reach type when it is decided to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) and when it is not decided to carry out the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear). , and the upper limit number of appearances of the timer target candidate effects determined according to the processing status (the first to fourth processing statuses, as well as the fifth processing status and the sixth processing status described later). be.

As shown in FIG. 153, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when it is determined to execute a mission effect (appear a conversation notice), the mission effect (appear a conversation notice) ) is controlled so that the upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effects is increased compared to when it is not decided to execute ).

That is, whether or not the advance notice-side timer effect is executed, whether or not the advance notice-side timer effect is executed in a single timer mode, whether the reach type is a reach effect with a relatively high degree of expectation, In any case, if the decision to execute the mission production (appear the conversation notice) is made, the decision to execute the mission production (appear the conversation notice) The upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effects is increased compared to when is not performed.

Incidentally, such processing settings are the effect lottery (steps S5508, S5509, S5523, S5524, S5533, S5534, S5543, S5544) when the above-mentioned notice side timer effect is executed, and when the notice side timer effect is not executed, which will be described later. It is realized through the setting of each table referred to in the effect lottery (steps S5553, S5554, S5563, S5564).

According to such a configuration, when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is executed, the appearance rate of the notice effect increases and the average number of appearances increases, so it is expected that the game interest will be improved. Of course, it is also possible to create a sense of expectation such as, ``If there are so many announcement effects, even among those announcement effects, conversation announcements with relatively low expectations may appear, and the mission may be successful.'' become able to. As mentioned above, the production targeted for the mission display is required to be a production with a relatively low expectation such as a conversation notice, but it does not necessarily have to be the one with the lowest expectation. When the types of effects that can be the targets of the timer effects are classified into two groups according to the degree of expectation, it may be classified into a group with a relatively low degree of expectation. Alternatively, compared with a specific performance with a relatively high degree of expectation that appears after the start of the ready-to-win effect, it is a notice effect that has a lower degree of expectation and appears at a timing before the start of the ready-to-win effect. good too.

FIG. 154 shows the first processing state in which the mode of single timer (YES in step S5506) and the execution of the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) has been determined (YES in step S5507). FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5a that is referred to in the process of step S5508 in this case.

First, as shown in FIG. 154, the table T5a is referred to when the advance notice-side timer effect or the mission effect is executed, so it corresponds to a variation pattern in which the advance notice-side timer effect cannot be executed. When the variation numbers 1 to 6 and the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the failure variation patterns (variation patterns in which the mission cannot succeed) that make a conversation notice appear as the performance contents of the variation performance are acquired, the table T5a is never referenced.

In addition, since the table T5a is referred to when the advance notice timer effect is executed in the single timer mode, effect random numbers are set for each variation number so that at least one timer object candidate effect is selected. Allocated. However, for a variable number in which a timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the variable effect, the timer target candidate effect may not necessarily be selected as the effect content of the advance notice effect.

In addition, in the table T5a, among the variable numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, 14 corresponding to character reach effects, a maximum of four timer target candidate effects are assigned to the winning effects of the variable numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, a maximum of three timer target candidate effects are assigned to the winning effects of the variation numbers 10 to 12, and only a maximum of two timer target candidate effects are assigned to the variation number 14. not However, in the variation numbers 7 and 8, the timer object candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in A) do not appear as the effect contents of the variable effect, whereas in the variable numbers 10 to 12, the effect contents of the variable effect are One timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in A) appears, and at the variable number 14, two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in A) appear as the content of the variable effect. It's like Therefore, the variation numbers 10 to 12 are synonymous with each having substantially one more advance notice effect assigned, and the variation number 14 has substantially two more notice effect. It is synonymous with being allocated to each.

Then, for example, in variation number 14, substantially, the effect random number "400" is assigned to the notice number 3, and the effect random number "600" is assigned to the notice number 4. , it can be said that among the variation numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, 14 corresponding to the character reach effects, the number of notice effects is assigned so that the number of advance notice effects is likely to appear.

Incidentally, the performance pattern (character reach + conversation notice) that appears at variation number 10 has a lower expectation of a big hit than the performance pattern (character reach + cut-in A) that appears at variation numbers 11 and 12. As mentioned above. However, in the table T5a referred to when in the first processing situation, the variable number 10 is "as an effect pattern in which a mission success (special display) is displayed and then stopped with a big hit symbol. In view of this fact, the number of appearances and the probability of appearance of the notice effect are set to be higher than in the case of variation numbers 11 and 12 (when the mission success (special display) is not displayed). is intended to improve the amusement of the game when mission success (special display) is displayed by .

On the other hand, even in SP reach (variation numbers 15, 16, 18 to 20, 22) with relatively high expectations, the same relationship as the relationship of each variation number in such character reach is set. . However, the variation number 18 of the SP reach corresponds to the variation number 10, and the variation numbers 19 and 20 correspond to the variation numbers 11 and 12. The variation number 20 at the time of winning has a higher appearance number and appearance probability of the announcement effect than the variation number 18 (the number of announcements tends to increase as the variation number with higher expectation of big win). In SP reach, the appearance ratio (average appearance number) of the number of advance notices is higher than that in character reach.

As will be described later, in the character reach when in the first processing state, up to five timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, role A action , a special timer) can appear. However, one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a jackpot confirmation effect (special timer), and when a conversation notice is selected, it will function as a jackpot effect due to mission success, When four or more candidate performances appear, the advance notice performance of fixing the big win appears. Therefore, in the table T5a, with the variable number 7 that is the character reach (cut-in A) at the time of failure, only up to three timer target candidate effects can appear. 11, only a maximum of two timer target candidate effects (actually a maximum of three) can appear.

On the other hand, in the SP reach when in the first processing state, up to six timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, character A action, The timing is such that the cut-in B, character B action) can appear. However, when the conversation notice is selected, it functions as a jackpot performance by mission success, so when six timer object candidate performances appear, the jackpot determination notice performance appears. Therefore, in the table T5a, with the variable number 15 that is the SP reach at the time of failure, only up to five timer target candidate effects can appear, and the variable number that is the character reach at the time of failure (cut-in B). 19, only a maximum of 4 timer target candidate effects (actually a maximum of 5) can appear.

An example of each effect prepared as the timer target candidate effect will be described below.
・Conversation notice: The lines of a predetermined character are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the degree of expectation for a big win can change according to the content of the lines. It is set lower than the effects (suspension change, cut-in A, action A, cut-in B, action B).
・Reservation change: Display corresponding to the reservation display that became the target of digestion even during the pattern change performed according to the reservation digestion (display corresponding to the reservation display when it was in the reservation state, although it was not already in the reservation state) While is displayed, the display mode (color, etc.) of the pending display that became the target of digestion is changed, and the suggested jackpot expectation may change depending on the display mode after the change. The degree of expectation for a big win at the time when the pending change appears is set lower than that of cut-in A, role A motion, cut-in B and role B motion.
・Cut-in A: The specific image A is displayed in a manner that is prioritized over the effect that is being performed during the pattern change. It is set lower than the motion, cut-in B, and character B motion.
- Accessory A action: Any of the above-described performance movable bodies is operated, and the degree of expectation for a big hit when the Accessory A action appears is set lower than that of the Accessory B action.
・Cut-in B: The specific image B is displayed in a manner that is prioritized over the effect that is being performed during the pattern change. It is set lower than the action and role B action.
・Accessory B action: Any of the above-mentioned performance movable bodies is operated. , Character A, and Cut-in B). The movable body for effect to be operated in the action of the role product B may be different from or the same as the movable body for effect used in the action of the role product A; The mode will be different.

It should be noted that each of these effects can be executed as a timer-targeted effect, and the period before, during, or after the count display is executed, or the variable period during which the timer effect is not executed. Even in , it can be executed as an effect that is not timer-targeted. Further, each of these effects may be executed in any one of a plurality of effects with different degrees of expectation, such as cut-in A in blue and cut-in A in red. Further, the pending change may include a premium mode (special mode) in which a big hit is confirmed when it appears. However, in this case, if the premium mode (special mode) appears while the count display is being executed, the pending change will not be executed as the target of the timer effect when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

FIG. 155 shows the second processing state in which the single timer is used (YES in step S5506) and the mission effect (make the conversation announcement appear) is not executed (NO in step S5507). FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5b referred to in the process of step S5523 in this case.

First, as shown in FIG. 155, the table T5b is referred to when the advance notice-side timer effect is executed. The table T5b is not referred to when .about.6 is acquired. However, since it is referred to when the mission production is not executed, the variation numbers 9, 13, and 17 correspond to the failure variation patterns (variation patterns in which the mission cannot succeed) that make the conversation notice appear as the content of the variation performance. , 21 are also acquired, the table T5b is referred to. Therefore, in the table T5b, effect random numbers are assigned to the variable numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 for each of the advance notice numbers.

Similarly, the table T5b is also referred to when the advance notice-side timer effect is executed in the single timer mode, so that at least one timer target candidate effect is selected. is allocated. However, for a variable number in which a timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the variable effect, the timer target candidate effect may not necessarily be selected as the effect content of the advance notice effect.

Similarly, in the table T5b, among the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to character reach effects, a maximum of two timer target candidate effects are assigned to the variable numbers 7 to 12. Only a maximum of one timer target candidate effect is assigned to the variation numbers 13 and 14 with relatively high expectations. However, in the variable numbers 7 and 8, the timer object candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) do not appear as the effect content of the variable effect, whereas in the variable numbers 9 to 12, 1 is the effect content of the variable effect. Two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice or cut-in) appear, and for variable numbers 13 and 14, two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as the content of the variable effects. It has become. Therefore, in variation numbers 9 to 12, it is synonymous with being assigned substantially one more advance notice effect, and in variation numbers 13 and 14, there are substantially two more notice effects. It is synonymous with the production being assigned to each.

Then, for example, with the variation number 14, it is substantially synonymous with the production random number “1000” assigned to the notice number 3, so the variation numbers 7 to 7 corresponding to the character reach production Among the 14, it can be said that they are allocated so that the largest number of advance notice effects are likely to appear.

It should be noted that in the SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22), which have a relatively high degree of expectation, substantially the same relationship as that of each variation number in the character reach is set. However, in SP reach, the appearance ratio (average appearance number) of the number of advance notices is higher than in character reach.

In addition, in the table T5b, the effect random numbers are distributed in substantially the same manner as in the table T5a, but since it is referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the table is referred to when the mission effect is not executed. The upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effects is set to be smaller than in T5a.

FIG. 156 shows the third processing situation in which the double timer is used (NO in step S5506) and the execution of the mission effect (make the conversation announcement appear) has been determined (YES in step S5532). FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5c referred to in the process of step S5533 in the case of FIG.

First, as shown in FIG. 156, the table T5c is also referred to when the advance notice-side timer effect or the mission effect is executed, so it corresponds to a variation pattern in which the advance notice-side timer effect cannot be executed. When the variation numbers 1 to 6 and the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the failure variation patterns (variation patterns in which the mission cannot succeed) that make a conversation notice appear as the performance contents of the variation performance are acquired, the table T5c is never referenced.

However, since the table T5c is referred to when the advance notice-side timer effect is executed in the form of a double timer, effect random numbers are set for each variation number so that at least two timer target candidate effects are selected. Allocated. However, for a variable number where a timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the variable effect, it is not necessary to assign two timer target candidate effects as the effect content of the advance notice effect. One timer target candidate effect (variation numbers 9 and 17) may be assigned as the effect content of the advance notice effect according to the effect content, or no timer target candidate effect may be allocated (variation numbers 13 and 21).

In addition, in the table T5c, among the variable numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, 14 corresponding to character reach effects, a maximum of five timer target candidate effects are assigned to the winning effects of the variable numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, a maximum of 4 timer target candidate effects are assigned to the winning effects of the variation numbers 10 to 12, and only a maximum of 3 timer target candidate effects are assigned to the variation number 14. not However, in the variable numbers 7 and 8, the timer object candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) do not appear as the effect contents of the variable effect, whereas in the variable numbers 10 to 12, 1 Two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice or cut-in) appear, and at variation number 14, two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as the content of the variable effect. ing. Therefore, the variation numbers 10 to 12 are synonymous with each having substantially one more advance notice effect assigned, and the variation number 14 has substantially two more notice effect. It is synonymous with being allocated to each.

Then, for example, in variation number 14, substantially, the effect random number "400" is assigned to the notice number 4, and the effect random number "600" is assigned to the notice number 5. , it can be said that among the variation numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, 14 corresponding to the character reach effects, the number of notice effects is assigned so that the number of advance notice effects is likely to appear.

Also, in the character reach when in the third processing state, up to five timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, character A action, special timer ) will come. However, one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a jackpot confirmation effect (special timer), and when the conversation notice is selected, it will function as a jackpot effect due to mission success, so the timer target candidate effects When four or more appear, an advance notice effect (mission success or special timer) of the determination of the big hit appears. Therefore, in the table T5c, there are only up to three variable numbers at the time of losing (the total number of timer target candidate effects on the variable side and the number of timer target candidate effects on the notice side is up to three). is not allowed to appear.

Moreover, one of the maximum five timer object candidate performances is a jackpot fixed performance (special timer), so when the number of notices 5 is selected when the variation number is 8, or when the variation numbers are 10 and 12, the notice is given. When the number 4 is selected, when the notice number 3 is selected when the variation number is 14, execution of the big hit confirmation effect (special timer) is decided. Thus, when the advance notice-side timer effect is executed in the double timer mode, the ratio of appearance of the later-described special timer is higher than in the case where the advance notice-side timer effect is executed in the single timer mode. , the players can expect not only to win the jackpot, but also to shift to a high-probability time-saving state and to execute a jackpot game of 16 rounds. In particular, when the double-timer mode and the mission performance are executed, it becomes possible to have such a sense of expectation even more, so it is possible to effectively utilize the mission performance, which originally has a low degree of expectation. You will be able to create a production situation.

Incidentally, the performance pattern (character reach + conversation notice) that appears at variation number 10 has a lower expectation of a big hit than the performance pattern (character reach + cut-in) that appears at variation numbers 11 and 12. This is as described above. However, in the table T5c referred to in the third processing situation, the variable number 10 is "as an effect pattern in which a mission success (special display) is displayed and then stopped with a big hit symbol. In view of this fact, the number of appearances and the probability of appearance of the notice effect are set to be higher than in the case of variation numbers 11 and 12 (when the mission success (special display) is not displayed). is intended to improve the amusement of the game when mission success (special display) is displayed by .

On the other hand, even in SP reach (variation numbers 15, 16, 18 to 20, 22) with relatively high expectations, the same relationship as the relationship of each variation number in such character reach is set. . However, the variation number 18 of the SP reach corresponds to the variation number 10, and the variation numbers 19 and 20 correspond to the variation numbers 11 and 12. The variation number 20 at the time of winning has a higher appearance number and appearance probability of the announcement effect than the variation number 18 (the number of announcements tends to increase as the variation number with higher expectation of big win). In SP reach, the appearance ratio (average appearance number) of the number of advance notices is higher than that in character reach.

As will be described later, in the SP reach when in the third processing situation, up to six timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, role A action , cut-in B, character B action) will come. However, when the conversation notice is selected, it functions as a jackpot performance by mission success, so when six timer object candidate performances appear, the jackpot determination notice performance appears. Therefore, in the table T5c, the variation number corresponding to the SP reach at the time of losing is up to 5 at most (the total number of timer target candidate effects on the variable side and the number of timer target candidate effects on the notice side is up to 5). Only timer target candidate effects are allowed to appear.

FIG. 157 shows the fourth processing state in which the double timer mode is used (NO in step S5506), and a decision (NO in step S5532) is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear). FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5d referred to in the processing of step S5543 in the case of FIG.

First, as shown in FIG. 157, the table T5d is referred to when the advance notice-side timer effect is executed. The table T5d is not referred to when .about.6 is acquired. However, since it is referred to when the mission production is not executed, the variation numbers 9, 13, and 17 correspond to the failure variation patterns (variation patterns in which the mission cannot succeed) that make the conversation notice appear as the content of the variation performance. , 21 are also acquired, the table T5b is referred to. Therefore, in the table T5d, effect random numbers are assigned to the variable numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 for each advance notice number.

Similarly, the table T5d is also referred to when the advance notice-side timer effect is executed in the form of a double timer, so that at least two timer target candidate effects are selected. is allocated. However, for a variable number where a timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the variable effect, it is not necessary to assign two timer target candidate effects as the effect content of the advance notice effect. One timer target candidate effect (variation numbers 9 and 17) may be assigned as the effect content of the advance notice effect according to the effect content, or no timer target candidate effect may be allocated (variation numbers 13 and 21).

Similarly, in the table T5d, among the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to character reach effects, a maximum of four timer target candidate effects are assigned to the winning effects of the variable numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, a maximum of three timer target candidate performances are assigned to the winning performances of the variation numbers 10 to 12, and a maximum of two timer target candidate performances are allocated to the winning performances of the variation numbers 13 and 14. only allocated. However, in the variable numbers 7 and 8, the timer object candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) do not appear as the effect content of the variable effect, whereas in the variable numbers 9 to 12, 1 is the effect content of the variable effect. Two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice or cut-in) appear, and for variable numbers 13 and 14, two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as the content of the variable effects. It has become. Therefore, in variation numbers 9 to 12, it is synonymous with being assigned substantially one more advance notice effect, and in variation numbers 13 and 14, there are substantially two more notice effects. It is synonymous with the production being assigned to each.

Then, for example, with the variable number 14, it is substantially synonymous with the effect random number “1000” assigned to the notice number 4, so the variable numbers 7 to 7 corresponding to the character reach effect Among the 14, it can be said that they are allocated so that the largest number of advance notice effects are likely to appear.

It should be noted that in the SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22), which have a relatively high degree of expectation, substantially the same relationship as that of each variation number in the character reach is set. However, in SP reach, the appearance ratio (average appearance number) of the number of advance notices is higher than in character reach.

In addition, in table T5d, random numbers are distributed in substantially the same manner as in table T5c. The upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effects is set to be smaller than in T5c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, as a result of the announcement timer type lottery (step S5505), it is determined whether the announcement timer effect is to be performed in the single timer mode or the double timer mode (step S5505). S5506), and furthermore, as a result of the first mission effect lottery (step S5504), it is determined whether the mission effect is to be performed (steps S5507, S5532). After determining the number of appearances of effects (notice effects that can be the effect target of the notice-side timer effect) (steps S5508, S5523, S5533, and S5543), any type of notice is given as the timer target candidate effects by the determined number. Determination processing is performed as to whether an effect is to appear, and which of the advance notice effects is to be the object of the timer effect (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544).

FIG. 158 shows the single-timer mode (YES in step S5506), and in the first processing situation in which it has been decided (YES in step S5507) to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear), FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6a-1 that is referred to when it is decided to set the number of advance notices to 1 as a result of executing the process of step S5508 (step S5509);

For example, as shown in FIG. 158, in this table T6a-1 (step S5509: advance notice number 1), what is referred when it is decided to execute the advance notice side timer effect in the single timer mode. Therefore, one notice effect determined to be executed as a timer object candidate effect is automatically set as the effect object of the notice side timer effect (in the figure, the ○ mark is the notice side timer effect). It indicates that it is executed as a production target). On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (2 or more) advance notice effects as timer target candidate effects (step S5509: number of notices N), N as timer target candidate effects The notice effect is determined and one of them is decided as the effect object of the notice side timer effect.

In addition, when it is required to determine N (2 or more) advance notice effects as timer target candidate effects, N-1 of them (1 in single mode, 2 in double mode) ) When the following numbers of effects are to be the effects of the advance notice side timer effects (steps S5509, S524, S534, S544), even if the effects of the same combination of effects for N pieces are selected as the timer object candidate effects, , and it is desirable that the degree of expectation for a big win is different depending on which of these effects is determined as the foretelling-side timer effect. For example, one production pattern appears at a relatively early timing (e.g., conversation notice), and one production pattern appears at a relatively late timing (e.g., character A). is selected as a candidate effect for the timer, the later effect (for example, character A motion) is selected as the effect for the announcement side rather than the preceding effect (for example, conversation notice) as the effect target of the advance notice side effect timer. The setting is made so that the ratio of the appearance of the big-hit symbols (special display mode) is higher when the timer is used for the effect (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544).

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if a variable number for executing "conversation notice" or "cut-in A, B" is acquired as the effect content of the variable effect, "Conversation notice" and "Cut-in A, B" can be determined as the contents of the presentation. However, as a result, if it is decided that the same production will appear in both the production content of the variable production and the production content of the advance notice production, the control to make this appear separately as the production content of the advance notice production is not performed. A process of setting the effects (conversation notice, cut-in A, B) appearing as the effect contents of the effect as the effect target of the advance notice side timer effect is performed (steps S5509, S524, S534, S544).

For example, in the example of the table T6a-1 (notice number 1), when "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect with the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22, and when the change numbers 11 to 14 are "cut If "In A" is determined as the content of the notice effect, or if "Cut-in B" is decided as the content of the notice effect with variation numbers 19 to 22, the content of the change effect and the effect of the notice effect It is decided to make the same effect appear in both the content and the content. However, here, control is not performed to make it appear separately as the effect content of the advance notice effect, and the effect (conversation notice, cut-in A or cut-in B) that appears as the effect content of the variable effect is set as the effect target of the advance notice side timer effect. processing is taking place.

In addition, if it is decided that a specific effect (conversation notice, cut-in A or cut-in B) will appear in both the effect content of the variable effect and the effect content of the advance notice effect, this will be separately added as the effect content of the advance notice effect. , and the specific effect (contents of the advance notice effect) on the side to appear separately may be set as the effect target of the advance notice timer effect.

In addition, since this table T6a-1 (notice number 1) is referred to when it is decided to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear), it is also shown in FIG. As shown, when the variable numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 for executing "conversation notice" are acquired as the contents of the variable effect, or when "conversation notice" is selected as the timer target candidate effect (contents of the notice effect) In the case (PTN1), a special display (mission successful) is displayed to definitely suggest that a jackpot symbol will appear.

In this regard, the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 when the "conversation notice" is executed as the content of the variable production are the variation numbers 8, 12, 8, 12, Compared to 16 and 20, it is set so that the ratio of determining "conversation notice" as the effect content of the notice effect is low. That is, as described above, when "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect at variable numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22, both the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are directed to "conversation notice". However, when the two timer effects target the same effect, basically, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the two timer effects target different effects. This is because it is set to be low. As a result, it is possible to relatively reduce the appearance ratio of the special display (mission success) when both the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect are directed to "conversation notice".

The same applies to the production contents of the variable production other than such "conversation notice". Of 15 and 16, 150 performance random numbers are assigned to the variation number 15 at the time of losing, while 250 performance random numbers are assigned to the variation number 16 at the time of winning. On the other hand, among the variable numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to the SP reach, among the variable numbers 19 and 20 that execute "cut-in B" as the effect content of the variable effect, the variable number 19 at the time of losing has 250 effect random numbers. However, only 200 effect random numbers are assigned to the variation number 20 at the time of winning.

That is, in this case, when "Cut-in B" is targeted for effect only by the variable timer effect at variable numbers 15 and 16, both the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect appear at variable numbers 19 and 20. As a result, the ratio of appearance of the big hit pattern becomes higher than when both of them use "Cut-in B" as the object of presentation. As a result, in situations where two timer effects are counted and displayed at the same time, whether or not the timer effects reach a predetermined value for the same effect object functions as an important effect factor. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the game interest.

In addition, in the variation numbers 8, 10, 12, and 14 at the time of winning among the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach, until the big hit pattern (special display mode) is stopped in the production pattern (during the pattern variation) In the form of a special timer that targets the production that appears after the big hit pattern (special display mode) is stopped in the production pattern instead of the production that appears in It can be decided to execute the advance notice side timer effect. This special timer will be described later, but in this embodiment, even if it is determined to generate a special timer in the process of step S5509, the special timer may not appear. The mode of execution of the special timer, including the presence or absence of, will be determined in the processing of step S5514 later.

Here, even if the total number of counts from the start of the count display to the end of the count display is small, the prediction side timer effect may have a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit (such as when it starts in the middle of the variable display). On the other hand, in the variable timer effect, when the total number of counts from the start of the count display to the end is small, the degree of expectation indicated by the timer effect is always lower than when it is large. may

As will be described later, such a special timer definitely suggests that a jackpot pattern (special display mode) will appear in the production pattern, and when it appears, a high-probability short-time gaming state or a 16-round jackpot It can be said that this is more beneficial to the player than the timer effect, which targets other effects, in that the rate at which the game is executed is relatively high. In addition, you may make it include 100% about this ratio.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the special display (mission successful) appears in the mission effect, the special timer appears at a higher rate than when the special display (mission successful) does not appear. By controlling, the sense of anticipation when the special display (when the mission is successful) appears is played more favorably (steps S5509 and S5534). For example, in the table T6a-1 (notice number 1), among the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reaches in which the special timer can appear, the variable side timer effect (mission success) for the effect of the conversational notice appears. While 100 performance random numbers are assigned to the special timer for the variable numbers 10 and 14 at the time of winning, the variable side timer performance (mission success) with conversation notice as the performance target does not appear at the time of winning. , only 50 effect random numbers are assigned to the special timers.

Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the special display (mission successful) does not appear, when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is performed (steps S5509, S5534), the mission effect (conversation By controlling so that the appearance ratio of the special timer is higher than when "Make the notice appear" is not performed (steps S5524, S5544), the expectation when the mission effect (Make the conversation notice appear) appears. is played more preferably.

Further, when the timer effect is performed in a double mode by the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect, the appearance rate of the special timer is higher than in the case where the timer effect is performed in the double mode by only the notice side timer effect. set to be low. Further, even when the timer effects are performed in a triple mode with one variable side timer effect and two advance notice side timer effects, one of the advance notice side timer effects is the same effect as the fluctuation side timer effect. In this case, the rate of appearance of the special timer is set to be lower than in the case where the same effect is not targeted for the timer effect on the advance notice side and the timer effect on the variable side.

FIG. 159 shows a second processing situation in which a single timer is used (YES in step S5506) and a decision (NO in step S5507) is made to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear). FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6b-1 that is referred to when it is decided to set the number of advance notices to 1 as a result of executing the process of step S5523 (step S5524);

As shown in FIG. 159, in this table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1), out of the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach in which the special timer can appear, the variation numbers 10 and 14 50 effect random numbers are assigned, and 20 effect random numbers are assigned to the variation numbers 8 and 12. - 特許庁Thus, when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not performed (table T6b-1), the special timer It is clear that the appearance ratio of is set to be low.

In addition, since this table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1) is referred to when the mission effect (appear the notice of conversation) is not executed, the notice of conversation is made to appear as the effect content of the variable effect. The table T6b-1 (notice number 1) is also referred to when the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the missing variation pattern (the variation pattern in which the mission cannot succeed) are obtained. Therefore, in table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1), effect random numbers are assigned to the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 for each notice number.

In addition, in the variable numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, and 22, the variable side timer effect appears with "conversation notice" as the effect content of the variable effect. When ``conversation notice'' is selected as the content of presentation, both the variable side timer presentation and the notice side timer presentation are executed with the ``conversation notice'' as the presentation object. Therefore, in table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1), when "conversation notice" is selected for variation numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, and 22, " The performance random numbers are distributed so that the degree of expectation for the big win is lower than when "conversation notice" is selected.

The same applies to the production contents of the variable production other than the "conversation notice". Allocation is made in the same manner as in the above table T6a-1 (1 advance notice).

Similarly, since this table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1) is also referred to when it is decided to execute the notice-side timer effect in the single timer mode, One advance notice effect determined to be executed as a timer object candidate effect is naturally set as the effect target of the advance notice side timer effect. On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (2 or more) advance notice effects as timer target candidate effects (step S5524: number of notices N), N as timer target candidate effects The same applies to the determination of the advance notice effect and the determination of one of them as the effect target of the advance notice side timer effect.

In contrast to the timer-targeted advance notice lottery (steps S5509, S5524) when the advance notice-side effect timer is performed in the single mode, the timer-targeted advance notice lottery (steps S5534, S5524) when the advance notice-side effect timer is performed in the double mode In S5544) as well, when both the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect target the same effect, the big hit is compared to the case where the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect target different effects. The effect random numbers are basically distributed in the same manner, such as the fact that the degree of expectation is set to be low.

FIG. 160 shows the mode of the double timer (NO in step S5506), and in the fourth processing situation in which it has been determined (NO in step S5532) not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear), FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6d-2 that is referred to when it is decided to set the number of advance notices to 2 as a result of executing the process of step S5543 (step S5544);

As shown in FIG. 160, this table T6d-2f (step S5544: advance notice number 2) is referred to when it is decided to execute the advance notice side timer effect in the form of a double timer. Therefore, both of the two advance notice effects determined to be executed as timer target candidate effects are naturally set as the effect targets of the advance notice side timer effect. On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (three or more) advance notice effects as timer target candidate effects (step S5544: number of notices N), N number of timer target candidate effects The notice effect is determined, and two of them are decided as the effect objects of the notice side timer effect. Such processing is also executed in the timer-targeted advance notice lottery in other production situations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 160, also in this table T6d-2f, when both the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect target the same effect, the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect The degree of expectation for a big hit is set to be lower than in the case where a different performance is targeted for performance.

Further, when one of the two notice effects selected as the notice-side effect timer is the same effect target as the variable-side effect timer, one of the two notice effects selected as the special notice-side effect timer is the variable side. The selection ratio of the special timer is low compared to the case where it is not the same effect target as the effect timer.

In particular, in the variation numbers 13, 14, 21, and 22, when both of the two advance notice effects selected as the advance notice side effect timers are the same effect targets as the two fluctuation side effect timers appearing within one effect pattern. , the jackpot expectations are significantly lower.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, as a result of such a timer-targeted advance notice lottery (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544), which of the timer-targeted candidate effects is to appear and the effect of the advance-notice-side timer effect is determined. When it is determined which one to choose, next, a count display lottery is performed as the process of step 510 .

In this count display lottery (step 510), it is determined at which timing within one performance pattern (fluctuation pattern) each performance, which has been determined to appear as a timer target candidate performance, will appear, and furthermore, whether the performance is to be performed. A determination is made as to which timing within one performance pattern (fluctuation pattern) the announcement-side timer effect to be counted and displayed is to be executed. In addition, in this determination, when the appearance timing of the effect targeted for the effect of the advance notice-side timer effect is late, the big hit pattern (special display mode) is compared to when the appearance timing of the effect targeted for the effect of the advance notice-side timer effect is early. ) is desirable to be performed so that the appearance ratio of

FIG. 161 shows a second processing situation in which a single timer is used (YES in step S5506) and a decision (NO in step S5507) is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear). FIG. 10 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of a count display lottery (step 510) that is performed when a variable number corresponding to character reach is selected; FIG.

For example, when variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to character reach are selected in such a second processing situation, as shown in FIG.
・Normal production period during which normal production is performed,
・Normal ready-to-win production period after the decoration pattern becomes ready-to-win with the background of normal production, Character ready-to-win production period in which the production progresses by switching to a different background from the normal production, and winning the jackpot As shown, it has been decided that each period such as a symbol stop period in which decorative symbols are fixed and stopped (big hit symbols, losing symbols) will appear sequentially within a 50 second variation time (period during which symbol variation is performed). (See the lines of "variable time" and "variable PTN effect" in the figure).

In addition, in this processing situation, for example, when the variation number 14 is acquired, as the effect pattern, the variable timer effect is started in accordance with the start of the pattern change, and after displaying this for 10 seconds, "conversation notice" is displayed. , and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable timer effect is started again and displayed for 10 seconds, and then 'Cut-in A' appears.

As described above, even if it is one variation pattern (variation number), the effect pattern is not limited to this, and after a predetermined time from the start of pattern variation, the variable side timer effect is started and this is counted and displayed for 5 seconds. It is also possible to select other production patterns such as making the "conversation notice" appear after the Also, as described above, the selection of such an effect pattern has been executed before the lottery (each process shown in FIG. 149) regarding the advance notice effect.

Then, in the count display lottery (step 510), while the appearance of each effect period and the content of the effect on the variable side have been decided, it is determined in the timer target advance notice lottery (here, step S5524). Determination is made as to at what timing the performance target of the advance notice-side performance timer and the prediction-side performance timer count-displayed toward the performance target are to appear respectively. In addition to the timer target candidate effects that are the target of the effect of the advance timer effect in the timer target advance notice lottery, if timer target candidate effects that are not subject to the effect are further determined, the timer target candidate effects that are not the target of the effect are determined. The appearance timing is also determined by the count display lottery (step 510).

For example, when "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect in the timer object notice lottery (here, step S5524), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the conversation notice and the notice-side timer effect are to be executed respectively in the mode of . In this embodiment, out of conversation notices 1 to 4 in the figure, conversation notice 1 is the mode with the lowest degree of expectation for a big hit. probabilities are set. Therefore, in this count display lottery (step 510), any one of the conversation notices 1 to 4 is selected based on the winning/losing of the jackpot and the variation pattern (variation numbers 7 to 14). It is desirable to perform the count display lottery based on different selection tables.

However, at this time, when the variable numbers 9, 10, 13, and 14 in which the conversation notice appears as the effect content of the variable effect are acquired, the above-mentioned advance notice effect is also performed in the timer target advance notice lottery (here, step S5524). When "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content, the mode of conversation notice 1 is always selected. And in this case, apart from the conversation notice performed as the production content of the variable production, the conversation notice is not displayed as the production content of the variable production, and the count display of the timer production is performed toward the conversation notice carried out as the production content of the variable production. The control to be performed is executed (mode of conversation notice 1 in the figure).

Further, as shown in FIG. 161, when the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, the effect contents of the above-mentioned advance notice effect are set to "hold When "change" is determined, it is determined in which mode of the pending changes 1 to 5 the pending change and the advance notice side timer effect are to be executed respectively, and "cut-in A" is determined as the effect content of the above advance notice effect. If so, it is determined in which mode of cut-ins A1 to 3 the cut-in A and the advance notice side timer effect are to be executed respectively, and "character A action" is determined as the effect content of the above advance notice effect. If there is, it is determined in which of the role A actions 1 to 4 the role A action and the advance notice side timer effect are to be executed respectively, and "special timer" is decided as the effect content of the above advance notice effect. In this case, it is determined in which aspect of the special timers 1 and 2 the announcement-side timer effect is to be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in any of the pending changes 1 to 5, the cut-in A effects 1 to 3, and the character A actions 1 to 4 in the drawing, the mode with the smallest number has the highest expectation of a big hit. The selection probabilities are set so that the higher the number, the higher the expectation of a big win. On the other hand, the special timers 1 and 2 are effects indicating that a big hit pattern (special display mode) always appears.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment selects three timings at which the announcement side timer effect can appear while one effect pattern (here, character reach) is performed. Although it is prepared (at the start of fluctuation, slightly before the appearance timing of notice E2, and slightly before the appearance timing of notice F), their appearance timings can be set for multiple types of timer target notices (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, Accessory A action, and special timer). And at these multiple appearance timings (at the start of fluctuation, a little before the appearance timing of notice E2, and a little before the appearance timing of notice F), a plurality of these are prepared as the total number of count display when the notice side timer effect appears ( 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, 70 seconds, etc.). It is designed to be a difficult configuration.

For example, as shown in FIG. 161, when variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to character reach have been acquired, the timing that arrives slightly before the appearance timing of notice E2 among the plurality of appearance timings is 10 seconds. , 20 seconds, or 30 seconds. However, when the announcement-side timer effect with the total number of count displays of 10 seconds appears, it is difficult to predict which aspect of the conversation announcement 3 and hold change 3 is being executed even within the character reach effect pattern alone. In addition, even when the advance notice-side timer effect with the total number of count display of 20 seconds appears, either mode of hold change 4 or cut-in A2 is executed only in the effect pattern of character reach. It is becoming difficult to predict whether

In this regard, when the advance notice timer effect having a count display total of 30 seconds appears at the timing that arrives slightly before the appearance timing of the notice E2 among the plurality of appearance timings, only the character reach effect pattern is displayed. As you can see, only the mode of Role A action 2 can be executed. However, looking at the effect pattern of the SP reach (see FIG. 162) described later, it is possible to execute the aspect of the character A action 2 at the same timing from the start of the fluctuation, so the appearance timing of the notice E2 is slightly Even if the advance notice timer effect with the total number of count display of 30 seconds appears in the previous timing, the advance notice timer effect is performed in any mode including character reach or SP reach. It is difficult to predict whether it will be implemented.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to keep unclear which effect is to be produced when the advance notice-side timer effect appears (the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the type of effect to be produced). Since it is possible, the game interest can be preferably maintained until the count display of the timer effect reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0). Incidentally, in this embodiment, when the notice-side timer effect with the same total number of count display appears at the same timing, basically (unless there is a balance with the mission effect, etc.), the object of effect is the conversation notice. The degree of expectation for a big hit is the lowest at time, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is set to gradually increase in the order of hold change, cut-in A, action A, cut-in B, action B.

Further, according to the above configuration, when the advance notice side timer effect appears, a plurality of count display totals (the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the length of seconds) is prepared regardless of the appearance timing. When the advance notice side timer effect appears, it is possible to make the player interested in which count display total is, and to improve the game interest when the advance notice side timer effect appears. .

In this embodiment, it is difficult to predict the effect target at the time of appearance, regardless of the timing of the advance notice timer effect that appears. (For example, a special timer) may be associated only with a mode in which the performance target is set to be predictable. Further, the appearance timings at which the advance notice-side timer effect can appear may include appearance timings at which only one count display total number appears.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: notice number 1), for convenience of explanation, when the same effect is targeted for the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect, It is described as if the count display for the same number of seconds is displayed in the side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect, and the count display ends at the same timing. However, as mentioned above, in reality, even if the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is targeted for the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect, the end timing of each count display is made different. , one of the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0) first and ends, whereas the count display of the other is continued.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: notice number 1), it is described as if the count display of the timer effect is performed in units of seconds, but the unit of the numbers appearing in the count display is "seconds is not limited to Therefore, for example, the time required for the numbers to change in the count display may differ between the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect, or the time required for each number to change in the count display that appears in the variable timer effect is constant. It doesn't have to be.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: notice number 1), when "special timer" is determined as the content of the notice effect, the notice side timer effect is performed in either mode of special timer 1 or 2. It is decided whether to carry out That is, in this case, after the big hit pattern (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern (character reach), when 20 seconds have passed (during the execution period of the big win game), the count display becomes a specific numerical value (here, 0). will be reached. After that, a production that suggests that the type of jackpot is advantageous to the player (for example, a hit type that shifts to a high-probability time-saving state, a hit type in which a 16-round jackpot game is performed, etc.) is started. However, the aspect of such a special timer is set in step S5514, which will be described later.

In this embodiment, it is determined in the count display lottery (step S5511) which of the modes of the special timers 1 and 2 is to be selected. It may be set in step S5514.

Also, when the count display is started after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display, instead of the timing at which the variable display corresponding to the hold information is started, the timer prefetch effect described later is not being executed. Also, for a predetermined period of time until the count display is started, a state (for example, timer preparation) displayed in a timer prefetch effect (for example, timer preparation) may appear (for example, appear at a predetermined probability).

FIG. 162 shows a second processing situation in which a single timer is used (YES in step S5506) and a decision (NO in step S5507) is made to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear). FIG. 10 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of a count display lottery (step 510) that is performed when a variable number corresponding to SP reach is selected; FIG.

For example, when variation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to SP reach are selected in such a second processing situation, as shown in FIG.
・Normal production period during which normal production is performed,
・Normal ready-to-reach effect period after the decorative pattern changes to the ready-to-win mode under the background of the normal effect, ・Character ready-to-win effect period in which the background changes to a different background from the normal effect and progresses,
・Decorative patterns are not fixed and stopped during the character reach production period, and the SP reach production period that appears in the form of further development, and ・Decorative patterns are fixed and stopped so that the winning or losing of the jackpot is shown (big hit pattern, lost pattern) Each period, such as a symbol stop period, is determined to appear sequentially within a variation time of 90 seconds (period in which symbol variation is performed) (“variation time” in the figure, See the "Variable PTN Rendition" row).

In addition, in this processing situation, for example, when the variation number 22 is acquired, as the effect pattern, the variable timer effect is started in accordance with the start of the symbol change, and after displaying this for 10 seconds, "conversation notice" is displayed. , and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable timer effect is started again and displayed for 10 seconds, and then 'Cut-in B' appears.

In addition, even in this example (SP reach: number of notices 1), as in the case of the example (character reach: number of notices 1) shown in FIG. is not limited to this, it is also possible to select other production patterns such as starting the fluctuation side timer production after a predetermined time from the start of the pattern fluctuation, displaying it for 5 seconds, and then appearing "conversation notice". ing.

Then, in this example (SP reach: notice number 1), for example, when "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524), the same As shown in FIG. 162, it is determined in which mode among conversation notices 1 to 6 the conversation notice and the notice-side timer effect are to be executed respectively. In this embodiment, out of the conversation notices 1 to 6 in the figure, the mode of conversation notice 1 is the mode with the lowest degree of expectation for a big hit. probabilities are set. Therefore, in this count display lottery (step 510), any one of the conversation notices 1 to 6 is selected based on the big win winning/losing and the variation pattern (variation numbers 15 to 22). It is desirable to perform the count display lottery based on different selection tables.

However, similarly, when the variable numbers 17, 18, 21, and 22 in which the conversation notice appears as the effect content of the variable effect are acquired, the above notice is also obtained in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524). When "conversation notice" is determined as the content of the production, the mode of conversation notice 1 is always selected. And in this case, apart from the conversation notice performed as the production content of the variable production, the conversation notice is not displayed as the production content of the variable production, and the count display of the timer production is performed toward the conversation notice carried out as the production content of the variable production. The control to be performed is executed (mode of conversation notice 1 in the figure).

Also, as shown in FIG. 162, when the variation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, the effect content of the above-noted effect is "hold When "change" is determined, it is determined in which mode of the pending changes 1 to 7 the pending change and the advance notice side timer effect are to be executed respectively, and "cut-in A" is determined as the effect content of the above advance notice effect. If so, it is determined in which mode of cut-ins A1 to A5 the cut-in A and the advance notice side timer effect are to be executed respectively, and "character A action" is determined as the effect content of the above advance notice effect. If there is, it is determined in which mode of role A actions 1 to 4 the role A action and the advance notice side timer effect are to be executed respectively, and "cut-in B" is decided as the effect content of the above advance notice effect. If there is, it is determined in which mode of cut-ins B1 to B5 the cut-in B and the advance notice side timer effect are to be executed respectively, and when "character B action" is determined as the effect content of the above advance notice effect. determines in which form of the role product B actions 1 to 4 the role product B action and the advance notice side timer effect are executed respectively.

In addition, even in this example of SP reach, any of the holding changes 1 to 7, cut-in A1-5, role A operation 1-4, cut-in B1-5, role B operation 1-4 in the figure can be selected. Also in , the mode with the smallest number is the mode with the lowest degree of expectation for a big win, and the selection probabilities are set so that the degree of expectation for a big win increases as the number increases.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 162, six timings at which the advance notice timer effect can appear are prepared while one effect pattern (here, SP reach) is being performed (at the start of fluctuation, notice E2 A little before the appearance timing of the notice F, a little before the appearance timing of the notice F, a little before the end of the normal reach effect period, within the character reach effect period, the timing of the start of the SP reach effect period), the notice side timer at these timings It is the same as the example shown in FIG. 161 that it is difficult to predict which effect will be the target of the effect when the effect appears.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 162, only one effect target is associated with the count display total number, and the effect target is set to be predictable (for example, cut-in B timer 40 seconds). Appearance timings at which the side timer effect can appear include appearance timings at which only one count display total number appears (for example, 10 seconds at the timing when the SP ready-to-win effect period starts).

In this way, in the count display lottery (step S5510), the appearance timing of the advance notice effect and the advance notice side timer effect determined by the timer target advance notice lottery is determined. In this regard, when the number of advance notice effects determined by the timer target advance notice lottery is two or more, in addition to the effects that are subject to the advance notice-side timer effects, the timing of the appearance of effects that are not targeted for the advance notice-side timer effects. are also determined together. In addition, when the advance notice-side timer effect is executed in the double timer mode, at what timing are the two advance notice-side timer effects and their object effects to appear (two advance notice-side timer effects (including whether or not to perform the count display at the same time) will be further determined.

However, in this count display lottery (step S5510), the number of advance notice effects determined by the timer target advance notice lottery, whether or not it is in the mode of a double timer, and mission effects (appear a conversation notice) are executed. It is desirable that the appearance timing of the advance notice effect determined by the timer target advance notice lottery and the timing of appearance of the advance notice side timer effect be determined in different manners depending on the processing status such as whether or not the For example, in a processing situation where a mission production (make a conversation notice appear) is executed, if the conversation notice appears relatively early after the start of the fluctuation, the production lacks excitement. It is desirable to make it easier to select conversational announcements that appear at a later stage. In addition, in the double timer mode, two timer effects are executed when a situation in which each count display proceeds simultaneously rather than when each count display is executed in a non-overlapping period within one effect pattern. Since it is possible to give a sense of the fact that each count display is progressing at the same time, the selection rate will be higher when there is a situation where each count display progresses at the same time than when there is no situation where each count display progresses at the same time. It is desirable to In addition, when the number of advance notice performances determined by the timer-targeted advance notice lottery is two or more, the appearance times of the advance notice performances are determined so that the advance notice performances do not appear at the same time.

In addition, the timing at which the notice-side timer effect can appear (for example, at the start of fluctuation, slightly before the timing of the appearance of notice E2, slightly before the timing of the appearance of notice F, slightly before the end of the normal reach effect period, character reach effect period Of these, the timing at which the SP reach production period starts) is within the period in which each notice production (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, role A action, cut-in B, role B action) can be performed It is desirable to set That is, in this case, even if the advance notice effect does not appear at the specific timing, the advance notice timer effect is started, or even if the advance notice timer effect is not started at the specific timing, the advance notice effect is performed. It can be expected that the decrease in interest in games is suppressed. In addition, an advance notice effect appears at a specific timing, and furthermore, an effect situation in which the notice side timer effect is started can occur, so that it is expected that the game interest will be improved. And in this case, when the notice effect is being executed when the predetermined time has passed since the fluctuation start (at a specific timing), the notice effect is not executed when the predetermined time has passed since the change start. It is desirable to set so that the rate at which the advance notice side timer effect is started is higher than when.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when the count display lottery (step S5510) is performed in this way, next, as the process of step S5511, the form of the advance notice timer effect determined by the count display lottery becomes a special timer. determine if it is possible.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161 and FIG. Non-objective advance notices E1, E2, E3 and non-target advance notice F can be executed as advance notice effects (notice effects that cannot be the object of the advance notice-side timer effect). Of these, the non-target advance notice E2 is set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit is lower than the non-target advance notice F in a situation where the count display of the advance notice side timer effect is not performed, whereas the advance notice side timer effect is set. In the situation where the count display of is performed, it is set so that the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the non-target notice F.

In such a configuration, when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed while the count display is not performed, the non-target notice F (second effect) is executed while the count display is not performed. When the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed while the count display is being performed, the count is counted. A notice-side timer effect (count effect) is provided so that the expectation for the appearance of a big hit pattern (specific pattern mode) is increased compared to when the non-target notice F (second effect) is executed while the display is being performed. display) becomes executable. Therefore, in this way, the advance notice timer effect (non-target advance notice E2 (during the execution period of the count display) in which the count display is performed in such a manner as to significantly increase the expectation level when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears A timer effect) in which the first effect) is started and ended is called a "special timer".

That is, in this case, while the count display is not performed, the non-target announcement E2 (first effect) functions as an effect with a lower degree of expectation than the non-target announcement F (second effect), whereas the count display is performed. While being performed, the untargeted notice E2 (first effect) functions as an effect with a higher degree of expectation than the untargeted notice F (second effect). Therefore, although it is a non-target notice E2 (first effect) that does not become the target of the notice-side timer effect (count effect display) and is originally irrelevant, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is displayed before the count display is completed. This makes it possible to arouse the interest of whether or not a certain effect will appear, thereby maintaining the interest in the game during the period until the count display is completed and the predetermined effect (timer target candidate effect) is performed. It is expected that

In addition, when the count display is started with a small count total number of timer effects on the advance notice side, the expectation of a big hit tends to be lower than when the count display is started with a total count count value with a large amount of timer effects on the notice side. By realizing the control related to such a special timer, even if the count display is started with a small count total number of the timer effect on the notice side, the non-target notice E2 is executed while the count display is being executed. It becomes possible to make the player aware of the possibility of appearing, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. In this sense, if the non-target notice E2 appears while the count display is being executed, the subsequent timer effect (conversation notice, cut-in, character action, etc.) is a premium mode in which the big hit is confirmed. It is desirable to control so that the appearance ratio of is high. In addition, you may make it include 100% about this ratio.

In this embodiment, the non-target notices E1 to E3 are executed as a so-called step effect, and the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is performed on the condition that the non-target notice E1 has appeared. It is possible to appear in Further, the non-target notice E3 can appear on the condition that the non-target notices E1 and E2 respectively appear, and in this embodiment, when the non-target notice E3 appears, the jackpot pattern always appears. I'm trying According to such a configuration, if the non-target notice E1 (specific effect) appears while the count display of the notice-side timer effect is being performed, the player is interested in whether or not the non-target notice E2 will appear. can be performed, and the amusement of the game can be preferably maintained during the count consumption period.

However, the non-target notices E1 to E3 may not necessarily be executed as a so-called step effect, and the above-described effect relationship between the non-target notice E2 and the non-target notice F is not realized. The target notices E1 and E3 do not necessarily have to be prepared. In addition, although the order is such that the non-target notice F appears after the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears, the present invention is not limited to this. A target announcement E2 (first effect) may appear. In short, the non-target notice E2 may appear first in all the notice effects, or may appear last in all the notice effects. should be set appropriately. Also, the non-target announcement E2 may be an image related (suggesting) to the type of ready-to-win effect executed in the variable display.

In addition, when the non-target notice E2 is not realized as a so-called step performance, it is desirable that the non-target notice E2 is performed in one of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation for big wins. At this time, when the non-objective advance notice E2 appears in the mode with the highest degree of expectation for the big win, the degree of expectation for the big hit may be higher than the non-objective advance notice F even if the count display is not performed. . However, when comparing the degree of expectation of a big hit (expectation including all aspects) that can be expected when the non-target notice E2 appears in a situation where the count display is not performed and the degree of expectation of a big win that can be expected when the non-target notice F appears , the degree of expectation for a big hit is required to be higher at the time of appearance of the non-target notice F.

In this regard, when the non-target notice E2 appears in a situation where the count display is performed (in the case of a special timer), the non-target notice E2 appears in one of a plurality of modes including modes with low expectations for big hits. In addition, it is desirable to make the degree of expectation for a big hit higher than the non-target announcement F regardless of which mode appears. That is, in this case, even though the non-target notice E2 is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, the performance situation is created in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is dramatically increased. Even if you are disappointed for a moment by the appearance, it is expected that the confirmation that the count display is being executed will improve the interest in the game in a surprise way. In this sense, even in such a special timer situation, the non-target notice E2 can be executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, and then in any mode including the low expectation, the non-target notice E2 is executed (furthermore, regardless of whether or not another foretelling effect has occurred), it is desirable that the degree of expectation for the appearance of the big hit pattern be the same. Note that the degree of expectation may include 100%. However, even in this case, when the non-target announcement E2 appears while the count display is being performed, it is desirable to set the high-expectation mode to appear more easily among the plurality of modes.

Also, when executing the count display across the non-target notice E2, for example, even if the count display starts with a different count total number (for example, "10" or "5"), the same number (for example, "1"), it is desirable to control so that the non-target announcement E2 appears. Also at this time, among the candidates for the total count appearing at the start of the count display (eg, "20", "10", "5"), less than half of the candidate with the smallest total count (eg, "5") It is desirable to control so that the non-target announcement E2 appears when the number is a number (a number less than 2.5). In this way, by preventing the non-target notice E2 from appearing until the end of the count display, it is possible to preferably maintain the game interest during the period until the end of the count display.

It should be noted that the non-target notice F may also be made executable in one of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation for the big win, but in the situation of the special timer, the non-target notice F has the highest degree of expectation for the big win. Even if it appears in the mode, it is required to set the non-target prediction F so that the degree of expectation for the big win is not higher than the non-target prediction E2 (for example, the mode with the lowest degree of expectation for the big win).

Also, the non-target announcement E2 may be made to appear at any of a plurality of timings from the start of the variable display. That is, in this case, even if the count display appears at the same timing with the same total number of counts, there are times when the non-target notice E2 is straddled and times when it is not straddled, and the game interest when the count display is executed is lost. It is hoped that it will be maintained.

In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, regarding the variable timer effect, the non-target notice E2 appears within the execution period of the count display among the candidates that can be selected as the execution mode (effect pattern). We are trying not to include such an aspect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when it is determined in the process of step S5511 that the form of the advance notice side timer effect determined in the count display lottery (step S5510) can be a special timer, step S5512. As the processing of step S5525, when it is determined that the mode of the advance notice side timer effect determined in the count display lottery (step S5510) cannot be a special timer, the processing of step S5525 is performed. As a result, the second timer non-target advance notice lottery will be performed.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, for example, the case where it is determined that the timer can be a special timer is the production mode shown in bold and italic letters among the plurality of production modes (for example, the 161, conversation notices 2 and 3, pending changes 2 to 4, cut-ins A1 and 2, character actions 1 and 2, etc.) are selected, and whether or not the effect mode can be a special timer. are pre-sorted.

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of the table T7a referred to in the first non-timer advance notice lottery (step S5512), and FIG. 164 is referred to in the second timer non-target advance notice lottery (step S5525). It is a figure which shows an example of table T7b.

As shown in FIG. 163 and FIG. 164, in the non-timer-target announcement lottery (steps S5512, S5525), the announcement-side timer effect cannot be performed based on the result of the big hit or the variation pattern (variation number). Determination processing is performed as to which of the non-objective effects E1 to E3 and F prepared as effects is to be executed.

Of these, in the table T7a (first timer non-target advance notice lottery) referred to when the special timer is used, the advance notice E2 is higher than the table T7b (second timer non-target advance notice lottery) referred to when the special timer is not used. The degree of expectation for a big hit when the mode of execution (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected is significantly high. More specifically, when the mode (PTN3, 4, 8) of executing the notice E2 is selected, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the mode (PTN5, 6) of executing the notice F is selected. ing.

On the other hand, in the table T7b (second timer-untargeted advance notice lottery) that is referred to when the special timer is not used, the advance notice F is executed when the mode (PTN3, 4, 8) of executing the advance notice E2 is selected. Compared to when mode (PTN5, 6) is selected, the degree of expectation for big hit is low.

In this embodiment, comparing the table T7a referred to when the special timer is used and the table T7b referred to when the special timer is not used, when the mode (PTN3, 4, 8) of executing the advance notice E2 is selected, There is a change in the distribution of performance random numbers and a change in the degree of expectation of a big hit, but when the mode (PTN5, 6) of executing the notice F is selected, there is no change in the degree of expectation of a big hit and even the distribution of the performance random numbers is changed. It's not the same.

According to the effect by such a special timer, when the count display is executed in the manner of straddling the non-target notice E2 (the aspect of the special timer), the manner of straddling the non-target notice F without crossing the non-target notice E2 ( Compared to the case of executing the count display in a mode other than a special timer), the ratio of appearance of highly expected performance mode when the count display reaches a predetermined value, and the appearance of the big hit pattern when the pattern performance is stopped. The percentage will be increased.

Furthermore, when both non-target notice E2 (first effect) and non-target notice F (second effect) are executed in one symbol effect in which count effect is not executed, one symbol in which count effect is not executed. While there is a relationship that the ratio of appearance of the big hit pattern is higher than when the non-target notice F (second performance) is not executed and the non-target notice E2 (first performance) is executed in the performance, the non-target notice F Even if the (second effect) is not executed and the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed within one pattern effect, the count effect is performed in the first mode that straddles the non-target notice E2 (first effect). is executed, both the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) are executed within one symbol effect, and the non-target notice F (second effect) is straddled. As compared with the case where the count performance is executed in two modes, the ratio of appearance of the big win pattern is increased.

That is, in this case, even if the "non-target notice E2 (first effect)" and the "count effect" are symbol effects executed respectively, the count effect is "non-target notice E2 (first effect)". Or, "Non-target notice F (second production)" is executed to suggest that the expectation level has risen further without crossing "Non-target notice E2 (first production)" ”, the degree of expectation is higher when “non-target notice F (second effect)” is not performed than when “non-target notice F (second effect)” is performed in one pattern effect will be higher. Therefore, effects (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, role A action, cut-in B, role B action, etc.), and even though it is a non-target notice E2 (first effect) or non-target notice F (second effect) that is originally unrelated, "Count effect is ended Whether the non-target notice E2 (first effect) will appear before” or “Even if the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears after the count effect is finished, the non-target notice F It is possible to arouse interest in whether the second effect) will be further executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game during the period until the count display is completed and the predetermined effect (timer target candidate effect) is performed. It is hoped that it will be maintained.

In this embodiment, when the count effect straddles the non-target announcement E2 (first effect) which is not executed as the effect object of the count effect, it is not executed as the effect object of the count effect. The relationship between the expectations when the count performance straddles the non-target announcement F (second performance) is reversed from the relationship between the expectations when the count performance does not straddle. However, the non-target announcement E2 (first effect) and the non-target announcement F (second effect) may be executed as the effect target of the count effect. According to such a configuration, when the count effect is executed, the effect of whether or not the count effect straddles the non-target announcement E2 (first effect) and the non-target announcement F (second effect) will also be added.

Also, either one of the non-target announcement E2 (first effect) and the non-target announcement F (second effect) can be executed as an effect target of the count effect, and the other can be executed as an effect object of the count effect. It may be something that does not occur.

In addition, when the count performance straddles the notice E2 (first performance), compared with the case where the count performance straddles the notice F (second performance), not only is the degree of expectation for the big hit higher, but it is advantageous to the player. It may be configured so that the ratio to be shifted to a game state (such as a high-probability time-saving game state) is high. At this time, the rate of transition to a game state advantageous to the player (high-probability time-saving game state, etc.) may be 100%.

Also, as described above, the count effect is executed in one of a plurality of manners (total number of counts, display manner, timing of starting counting, etc.). In this regard, regarding the count effect of the specific mode, when it is executed so as to straddle the notice E2 (first effect) and not straddle the notice F (second effect), and when it straddles the notice E2 (first effect) It is desirable that the performance be executed so that there is at least a case where it is executed so as to straddle the advance notice F (second effect). According to such a configuration, for example, even if the count effect of the same number of seconds is started, either the case where only the notice E2 (first effect) is straddled or the case where only the notice F (second effect) is straddled. Since it is possible to advance the count performance while it is unclear whether the count performance is being executed, the game interest can be favorably maintained.

Furthermore, with respect to the specific aspect of the count effect, when it is executed so as to straddle the notice E2 (first effect) and not straddle the notice F (second effect), and when it is executed so as to straddle the notice E2 (first effect) In addition to the case where it is executed so as to straddle the notice F (second effect) and the case where it is executed so that neither the notice E2 (first effect) nor the notice F (second effect) is straddled It is desirable to have According to such a configuration, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the appearance of the notice E2 (first effect) or the notice F (second effect) over the entire period from the start of the count effect to the end of the count effect. become able to. In this case, notice E2 (first effect) and notice F (second effect) may appear within the same symbol variation in which the specific mode count effect is executed, but within the same symbol variation You can make it not appear in .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect), the ratio of the appearance of the big hit pattern becomes higher than when the count effect straddles the notice F (second effect). configured as However, when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect), it is desirable that the ratio of the appearance of the big hit pattern does not change regardless of the manner in which the count effect is executed. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a completely independent performance that is not affected by the performance such as "which aspect appears as the count performance", and the count performance is executed. It is possible to suitably enhance the performance of the time.

On the other hand, when the count performance straddles the notice F (second performance), it is possible to change the ratio of appearance of the big-hit symbols according to the mode in which the count performance is executed. desirable. According to such a configuration, depending on which of the notice E2 (first effect) and the notice F (second effect) is the object to be crossed by the count effect, the aspect of the count effect is the degree of expectation for the big hit. Since it is possible to change the performance of whether or not it has an effect, it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained during the period in which the count performance is being performed.

However, even if the count effect that straddles the notice F (second effect) is the aspect with the highest degree of expectation among the plurality of modes, the expectation level when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect) is exceeded. It is desirable that they are not, for example, that their expectations are the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

In addition, in at least some of the count effects of the plurality of modes, even if it crosses the notice F (second effect), it is configured not to cross the notice E2 (first effect). It is desirable to In this way, the number of modes of the count effect that can cross the notice E2 (first effect) is made smaller than the number of modes of the count effect that can cross the notice F (second effect). By doing so, it is possible to suggest the possibility of crossing the advance notice F (second effect) depending on which mode the count effect is performed. However, it is desirable to prepare at least two or more modes of the count effect that can straddle the notice E2 (first effect).

Further, the notice F (second effect) is executed before the notice E2 (first effect), and the notice E2 (first effect) is executed after the notice F (second effect) is finished. What may be executed is as described above. At this time, when the count effect that straddles the announcement F (second effect) appears when the announcement F (second effect) is executed, compared to the case where the announcement F (second effect) is executed but the count effect that crosses this does not appear, It is desirable to increase the rate at which the count effect that straddles the notice E2 (first effect) appears. According to such a configuration, when the count effect is executed, even if this ends over the notice F (second effect) instead of the notice E2 (first effect), the notice E2 (first effect) is not executed. It becomes possible to anticipate that the crossing count effect will appear further, and the interest in the game can be favorably maintained.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment executes the effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination. In this regard, it is desirable that even if the notice F (second effect) does not appear in the effect pattern, the notice E2 (first effect) and the count effect straddling this may appear. According to such a configuration, even if the notice F (second effect) does not appear, it is possible to maintain the expectation for the appearance of the count effect that straddles the notice E2 (first effect). become. However, when the notice F (second effect) does not appear, the notice E2 (first effect) is more likely to occur than when the notice F (second effect) is executed but the count effect that straddles it does not appear. It is desirable to reduce the rate at which the crossing count effect appears.

In addition, regarding the preparation of a plurality of aspects as aspects of the count effect (the total number of counts, the display mode, the timing at which the count is started, etc.) that can cross the notice F (second effect) As described above, even if the count performance is executed in any one of the plurality of modes, the advance notice F (second performance) is not necessarily executed within the period during which the count performance is being executed. is desirable. According to such a configuration, even if the count effect is executed in a desired manner, whether or not the notice F (second effect) appears within the period during which the count effect is being executed is also determined. Amusement can be provided, and the game interest can be favorably maintained while the count effect is being performed.

In addition, regarding the preparation of a plurality of aspects of the count effect (the total number of counts, the display mode, the timing at which the count is started, etc.) that can cross the notice E2 (first effect) As described above, when the count effect is executed in any one of the plurality of modes, it is desirable to ensure that the notice E2 (first effect) is always executed within the period during which the count effect is being executed. . According to such a configuration, when the count effect is executed in a desired manner, it is suggested in advance that the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect) and the degree of expectation is greatly increased. As a result, it is possible to favorably improve the amusement of the game while the count effect is being performed.

Then, when the timer non-target advance notice lottery (first timer non-target advance notice lottery, second timer non-target advance notice lottery) is performed in this way and it is determined which of the non-target advance notices is to be executed, next step S5513. As the process of (1), it is determined whether or not it is determined that the above-mentioned special timer is to be executed.

That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in a situation where a specific type of reach effect (character reach) is selected, the result of the big hit determination (hitting or losing, variation pattern, etc.) Based on the announcement side timer It is possible to execute control to start the production (count production display) and continue the count display even after the big hit pattern (special display mode) appears in the production pattern (production display). That is, in this case, even after the effect pattern (effect display) according to the result of the big hit determination is finished and hidden, the count display is continued, so the special symbol from the remaining time of the count display. It is difficult to predict the fluctuation time (type of reach), for example, the production during the jackpot game state after the pattern is stopped involves the count display started during the pattern fluctuation. It is possible to make the subsequent development of the production more interesting.

More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, first, after the big-hit pattern (special display mode) appears (for example, the start interval period of the big-hit game and the big-hit game after the pattern is fixed and stopped) Period), when it appears, the first special effect that increases the percentage of winning the type that shifts to a high probability time-saving gaming state, and the number of rounds (16 rounds) with a large expected value that can be obtained as a prize when it appears. A second special effect, which has a high execution rate, can be executed. Note that these percentages may include 100%. Then, the notice-side timer effect, whose object is the effect to be started after such a big win pattern (special display mode) appears, is started before the big win pattern (special display mode) appears, and the timer effect is counted. Control is performed so that the display is continuously performed even after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears.

That is, in this case, the count display of the advance notice side timer effect started before the appearance of the jackpot pattern (special display mode) is not terminated when the jackpot pattern (special display mode) appears and the jackpot pattern (special display mode) appears. When a specific numerical value (here, 0) is reached after continuous execution even after appears, the first special effect or the second special effect appears. Therefore, when such a special timer appears, it definitely suggests that a big hit pattern (special display mode) will appear in the production pattern, and when it appears, a high probability time-saving game state or a 16-round big hit game Since the ratio of execution of is relatively high, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

However, in order to realize such a special timer, first of all, the jackpot has been elected in the jackpot judgment, and the jackpot is of a specific type (a type that generates a high-probability short-time gaming state, or a 16-round jackpot game ), and when it is determined that it is the specific type, control is performed so that the special timer appears with a higher execution probability than when it is determined that it is not the specific type. Desired.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when execution of the special timer has been determined in the processing of step S5513, next processing of step S5514 is to determine whether or not to make the special timer appear. The mode of execution of the special timer is determined, including the presence or absence of it.

For example, in the process of step S5514, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot is a specific type (a type that generates a high-probability time-saving gaming state or a type that generates a 16-round jackpot game). As a result, when the big win is not of the specific type, it is determined with a predetermined probability that the special timer is not to appear, so that when the special timer appears, the degree of expectation that the big win is of the specific type is increased by the thinning-out amount. be able to Note that the degree of expectation may be 100%. In addition, when it is decided not to make the special timer appear, instead of the special timer, other notice effects (timer target candidate effect, non-target notice) or notice-side timer effects may appear.

It should be noted that, in this embodiment, in the process of step S5514 after once the decision to run the special timer in the advance notice lottery targeted for the timer, the type of big hit is determined and the special timer is run based on the result. It was decided to re-determine whether or not to execute a special timer in the processing of step S5514 by performing a timer target advance notice lottery based on the type of the jackpot in addition to the hit or loss of the jackpot. It is also possible not to re-determine whether or not.

In addition, after the big hit pattern (special display mode) appears (for example, the start interval period of the big win game after the pattern is fixed and stopped or the big win game period), the first special effect or the second special effect It may be executed in any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations, which are special types. That is, in this case, when the special timer appears and its count display reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0), the first special effect or the second special effect is executed in a highly anticipated mode among the plurality of modes. It will happen.

Further, in this embodiment, regarding the performance (first special performance or second special performance) after the appearance of the big hit pattern (special display mode), a predetermined time has passed since the big win pattern (special display mode) appeared. (In the example shown in FIG. 161, the timing after 20 seconds have passed). and a second timing after 30 seconds have passed). That is, in this case, as a special timer, when 15 seconds have passed since the appearance of the big hit pattern (special display mode) (or just before that), a first mode that reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0), and a big win pattern When 30 seconds have passed since the appearance of the (special display mode) (or shortly before that), the second mode that reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0) is selected and made to appear.

In this case, setting is made so that the ratio of the special type of jackpot is higher when the performance appears at the second timing than when the performance appears at the first timing, and the jackpot is of the specific type. Sometimes, if it is executed so that the ratio of the special timer to appear in the second mode is higher than in the first mode, it is possible to determine how long the count display after the appearance of the jackpot symbol (special display mode) will continue. It becomes possible to add interest. Note that these percentages may include 100%. Incidentally, if the effect does not appear at either the first timing or the second timing, the ratio of the special type of jackpot is set lower than when the effect appears at the first timing. .

Further, regarding the special timer, during the execution period of the variable display before the big hit pattern (special display mode) appears, for example, it is displayed as "timer preparation", and the "timer preparation" is displayed. The count display may be started after the jackpot pattern (special display mode) is made to appear while the player is standing. That is, during the jackpot game, since the time required to digest each round game fluctuates according to the progress of the game, during the execution period of the variable display before the jackpot pattern (special display mode) appears Once the count display is started, it is difficult to set the count display of the special timer to reach a predetermined value during a specific round game, and to start the performance to be the performance target. In this regard, if the count display is started after the jackpot pattern (special display mode) appears, for example, the state of "timer preparation" is maintained until a specific round game in the jackpot game is started. Then, by starting the count display in accordance with the start of the specific round game, the count display reaches a predetermined value during the specific round game, and the effect to be the object of effect is executed. It becomes possible to set to In this case, the display of "timer preparation" or the like may not be performed until the count display is started after the big hit pattern (special display mode) appears.

In addition, if the count display is started after the big-hit symbols (special display mode) appear in this way, it will be different during the execution period of the variable display before the big-hit symbols (special display mode) appear. The count display of the advance notice side timer effect may be started. As for the other notice-side timer effect, the count display may be completed before the big hit pattern (special display mode) appears, and the effect to be the target of the effect may appear, or the big win pattern ( After the special display mode) appears, the count display is finished and the effect to be the target of the effect appears (double special timer).

In addition, different effects appear between the effect during the variable display and the effect during the jackpot game, and usually between them, a different effect at the time of switching between the effects (for example, the opening effect, etc.) is executed. It is often done. In this respect, during the switching period during which the effects at the time of effect switching are executed, the count display of any timer effect is set so that it does not reach a predetermined value, and the count display is not displayed during the switching period. It is desirable for the player to recognize that the two effects (here, the effect during the variable display and the effect during the jackpot game) are not connected to each other. However, in this case, even while the count display of the timer effect is hidden, the count display will be digested for the amount of time that has elapsed, and when the count display is displayed again, it will be hidden at the time it is hidden. It is desirable to control so that the value is smaller than the numerical value of (larger value when counting up rather than counting down).

Then, if the mode of execution of the special timer is determined in this way (step S5514), or if the execution of the special timer is not determined (NO in step S5513), next step S5515 is performed as the aforementioned advance notice lottery for the timer and counting. After the advance notice effect determined by the display lottery or the like is set in a predetermined storage area, the processing related to the advance notice lottery is terminated. As a result, the drawing data corresponding to the performance determined by the advance notice lottery is created, and control is performed to start each performance at the timing when the performance pattern is being changed.

On the other hand, after the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) is performed when it is determined that the advance notice side timer effect has not been won (NO in step S5503), various lotteries (notice side A timer target candidate effect (announcement An effect lottery (steps S5553, S5554, S5563, S5564) targeting the notice effect that can be the effect target of the side timer effect is performed.

More specifically, one of the following processes is executed.
In the case of the fifth processing situation in which it is decided (YES in step S5552) to not execute the advance notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and to execute the mission effect (make the conversation advance notice appear). First, based on the notice number determination table referred to when in the fifth processing state, how many timer target candidate effects are used as the effect contents of the notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. Determination processing as to whether or not to appear is performed (step S5553). Next, determination processing is performed as to which types of advance notice effects are to appear as the timer target candidate effects by the number determined in the determination process (step S5554).

In the case of the sixth processing situation where it is decided not to execute the advance notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (appear the conversation advance notice) (NO in step S5552). First, based on the notice number determination table referred to in the sixth processing situation, how many timer object candidate effects are used as the effect contents of the notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. Determination processing as to whether or not to appear is performed (step S5563). Next, determination processing is performed as to which type of advance notice effect is to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process (step S5564).

Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 153, even in the fifth and sixth processing situations in which the advance notice timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503), the mission effect (appear the conversation advance notice) is executed. When the decision is made, the upper limit number of timer target candidate effects (average number of appearances) will increase compared to when the decision to execute the mission effect (appear the conversation notice) is not made. I'm trying to control it.

FIG. 165 shows the fifth processing situation in which it is decided not to execute the advance notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and to execute the mission effect (appear the conversation advance notice) (YES in step S5552). FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5e referred to in the process of step S5553 when the . In addition, FIG. 166 shows a sixth timer effect in which it is determined (NO in step S5552) not to execute the advance notice-side timer effect (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (appear the conversation advance notice). FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5f that is referred to in the processing of step S5563 when in a processing state; FIG.

First, as shown in FIG. 165, the table T5e is referred to when the mission effect is executed. When the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the variation pattern) are acquired, the table T5e is not referred to. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 166, the table T5f is referred to when the mission effect is not executed. The table T5f is also referred to when the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the variation patterns that do not exist are acquired. Therefore, in the table T5f, effect random numbers are assigned to the variable numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 for each of the advance notice numbers.

Further, both the table T5e and the table T5f are referred to in the fifth and sixth processing situations in which the advance notice-side timer effect is not executed. It is not essential to select any of the timer target candidate effects that can be targets. Therefore, in both the table T5e and the table T5f, a random number for effect is assigned to each variation number so that it is not always necessary to select a timer target candidate effect (announcement number 0).

In addition, among the contents of the same reach effect (character reach and SP reach) in the table T5e and table T5f, the variable number that does not appear as the effect content of the variable effect (conversation notice and cut-in A) can be changed. Compared to variable numbers where timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in A) do not appear as the effect content of the effect, the ratio of selecting a large number of timer target candidate effects is high, and the character at the time of failure With variation number 7, which is reach, only up to 3 timer target candidate effects can appear, and with variation number 15, which is SP reach at the time of losing, only up to 5 timer target candidate effects can appear. It is the same as the above-described table T5a, etc.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, in the fifth and sixth processing situations in which the advance notice side timer effect is not executed, how many timer object candidate effects are to appear as the effect contents of the advance notice effect. After the determination processing (steps S5553, S5563) is performed, determination processing (steps S5554, S5564) is performed as to which type of advance notice effect is to appear as the timer target candidate effect for the determined number. . However, if it is determined that none of the timer target candidate effects will appear as a result of the above-mentioned number of notice determination processing (steps S5553, S5563) (the number of notices is 0), in the timer target notice lottery (steps S5554, S5564), Regardless of the variable number, one processing result that does not select any of the timer target candidate effects is always selected.

FIG. 167 shows the fifth processing situation in which it is decided not to execute the advance notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and to execute the mission effect (appear the conversation advance notice) (YES in step S5552). 14 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6e-1 that is referred to when it is determined that the number of advance notices is set to 1 as a result of executing the process of step S5553 (step S5554) in FIG. In addition, FIG. 168 shows a fifth timer effect in which it is determined (YES in step S5552) not to execute the advance notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and to execute the mission effect (appear the conversation advance notice). FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6e-2 that is referred to when it is decided to set the number of advance notices to 2 as a result of executing the process of step S5553 in the processing status (step S5554);

In addition, FIG. 169 shows a sixth timer effect in which it is determined (NO in step S5552) not to execute the advance notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (appear the conversation advance notice). FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6f-1 that is referred to when it is decided to set the number of advance notices to 1 as a result of executing the process of step S5563 in the processing status (step S5564); In addition, FIG. 170 shows a sixth timer effect (NO in step S5552) in which it is determined not to execute the advance notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation advance notice appear). FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6f-2 that is referred to when it is decided to set the number of advance notices to 2 as a result of executing the process of step S5563 in the processing status (step S5564);

For example, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, tables T6e and T6f, which are referred to in the fifth and sixth processing situations, are those when it is decided not to execute the advance notice timer effect. Since it is referred to, none of the N advance notice effects determined to be executed as the timer object candidate effects are set as the effect targets of the advance notice side timer effect, and all of them are normal. It will be executed as a form of advance notice effect (in the drawing, the x mark indicates that it is executed as a form of normal advance notice effect).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, in the tables T6e and T6f referred to in the fifth and sixth processing situations, the same effect is produced in the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect. Since it is not targeted, when the variation numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, and 22 corresponding to the variation pattern that makes the conversation notice appear as the effect content of the variable effect are acquired, it is executed A performance random number is assigned to each variation number so that the conversation announcement is not selected as the announcement performance to be performed. Similarly, in the tables T6e and T6f, the variation numbers 11 to 14 and 19 to 11 to 14 and 19 corresponding to the failure variation patterns (variation patterns in which the mission cannot succeed) that cause cut-ins A and B to appear as the effect contents of the variation effect. When 22 is acquired, a performance random number is assigned to each variation number so that the cut-ins A and B are not selected as the foretelling performance to be executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, tables T6e and T6f that are referred to when the fifth and sixth processing situations are present are referred to when the advance notice timer effect is not executed. Therefore, the announcement effects to be selected do not include an effect (here, a special timer) on the premise that the announcement side timer effect is performed.

In addition, the table T6e that is referred to when the fifth processing state is in effect is referred to when it is decided to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear). As shown together, when the variable numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 for executing "conversation notice" are acquired as the content of the variable effect, or when "conversation notice" is obtained as the timer target candidate effect (content of the notice effect) is selected (PTN1), a special display (mission successful) is displayed to definitely suggest that a jackpot symbol will appear, which is the same as in the case of the table 6a described above.

Also, in the table T6f that is referred to in the sixth processing state, it is referred to when the mission effect (appear the conversation notice) is not executed, so the conversation notice appears as the effect content of the variable effect. The effect random numbers are assigned to the respective notice numbers for the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the failure variation patterns (variation patterns that cannot succeed in the mission), and the like. is the same as for

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, even if it is determined in the process of step S5503 that the advance notice-side timer effect is not executed, after the timer target advance notice lottery (steps S5554 and S5564) is performed, Which of the non-objective effects E1 to E3 and F prepared as effects that cannot be the target of the timer effect on the advance notice side based on the result of the big hit and the variation pattern (variation number) is to be executed. Determination processing (third timer non-target advance notice lottery: step S5555) is performed.

Although the table referred to in step S5555 is omitted, it is basically in the same manner as the table T7b (second timer non-target advance notice lottery) referred to when the special timer is not used. When the mode of executing E2 (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected, the degree of expectation for a big win is lower than when the mode of executing advance notice F (PTN5, 6) is selected.

Then, after the third timer non-target advance notice lottery (step S5555) is performed in this way, the timer target advance notice lottery (steps S5554 and S5564) and the third timer non-target advance notice lottery ( After setting the advance notice effect determined in step S5555) and the like in a predetermined storage area, the processing related to the advance notice lottery is terminated. As a result, the drawing data corresponding to the performance determined by the advance notice lottery is created, and control is performed to start each performance at the timing when the performance pattern is being changed.

In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when it is determined in the process of step S5503 that the advance notice timer effect is not executed, the advance notice lottery for the timer and the advance notice lottery not for the third timer are processed separately. I decided to do it as However, if it is determined not to execute the advance notice-side timer effect in the process of step S5503, there is no need to determine the execution mode of the non-target effects E1 to E3, F in relation to the advance notice-side timer effect. The timer target advance notice lottery and the third timer non-target advance notice lottery may be executed within one lottery process.

In addition, the aspect of the above-mentioned special timer (non-target notice E2 is set so that the expectation of a big hit is lower than the non-target notice F in a situation where the count display of the notice side timer effect is not performed. , In the situation where the count display of the advance notice side timer effect is performed, the expectation of the big hit is set to be higher than the non-target notice F) is not adopted. Since there is no need to determine the execution modes of the non-objective performances E1 to E3, F, the timer-targeted advance notice lottery and the third timer-nontargeted advance notice lottery may be executed in one lottery processing.

Further, in this embodiment, after determining whether or not to execute the advance notice-side timer effect, the judgment processing is performed as to which effect is to be executed as the advance notice effect and in what manner. It is also possible to decide whether or not to execute the advance notice side timer effect and the mode of execution after determining in what manner the effect of (1) is to be executed.

By the way, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, when a prize (acceptance of a game ball) to the starting ports 2002 and 2004 occurs, whether to perform a prefetch effect on the pending information corresponding to the prize. Determination processing as to whether or not is performed (steps S5245 and S5255). In this regard, in this determination process, based on information such as the hit and drop of the big hit determination and the variation pattern included in the suspension information, the suspension that changes the display mode (color, form, etc.) of the suspension display that is the target of the look-ahead effect Lottery for changing effects (lottery for execution or not, display mode), lottery for look-ahead zone effects that span multiple fluctuations (lottery for execution or not, execution mode (color, number of consecutive executions, etc.)), etc. In addition, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the variable display corresponding to the pending information is to be targeted for the "timer look-ahead effect".

Here, the timer look-ahead effect is an effect in which, when the variable display (variable display targeted for effect) that has been in a suspended state when it appears is being executed, the rate of appearance of the timer effect on the advance notice side increases within the variable time. For example, in the effect display device 1600, etc., at the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol that is started after the timing of winning (timing of winning the timer prefetch effect), a predetermined image (for example, "timer preparing ”, etc.). The reason why the predetermined image (for example, "preparing timer") does not appear at the timing of winning (timing of winning the timer prefetch effect) is that the player determines which of the pending information the timer prefetch effect corresponds to. This is to make it difficult to recognize

According to such a timer look-ahead effect, it is possible to suggest that the proportion of appearance of the advance notice timer effect is high over a plurality of times of variable displays while unspecified which of the pending displays it corresponds to. Therefore, it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained over a plurality of times of variable display. However, among the preceding effects (read-ahead effects), including such a timer-reading effect, it is a type that continues (or continues) over multiple variable displays without specifying which pending display it corresponds to. When executing a production (preceding period production), if the same type of production (preceding period production) and its execution period overlap, the production will become too complicated, and what is the target/purpose There is a concern that the player will not be able to understand whether it is a performance or not, and the interest in the game will decrease.

Therefore, when determining whether or not to execute such a preceding period effect (prefetching determination at the time of winning), the preceding period effect corresponding to other pending information that has previously won a prize is not executed and is waiting for execution. make a judgment as to whether it is also in the state of Then, on the condition that at least the preceding period effect corresponding to the other pending information that has been won earlier is not executed and is not in a state of waiting for execution, the preceding period effect such as the timer prefetch effect is renewed. It is possible to make a judgment to the effect that it will occur. As a result, overlapping execution of the two preceding period effects can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, as the preceding period effect, for example, in addition to the above timer look-ahead effect, a simultaneous continuous look-ahead effect in which at least a part of the stop pattern appears in the same mode (number color, etc.) over multiple fluctuations, and a background image over multiple changes It is possible to adopt a look-ahead zone effect that changes the to a special mode. Then, in the above process (prediction determination at the time of winning), among these preceding period effects, the preceding period effects of the same type do not overlap, and even if the preceding period effects are of different types, these execution periods are controlled so that they do not overlap. Of the look-ahead effects, for a type of effect that is performed over multiple variable displays by specifying which pending display it corresponds to (for example, pending change effect, etc.), the execution status of these preceding period effects It is desirable to be able to appear regardless of the situation, but if a new win occurs while the preceding period effect is being executed or is waiting to be executed, a new win will occur when this situation does not exist. It is preferable that the prefetching determination at the time of winning is performed so that the appearance ratio of the relevant type of performance (for example, pending change performance, etc.) as the prefetching performance corresponding to the winning is lower than in the case of winning.

In this way, while a preceding period effect such as a timer look-ahead effect (a type of effect that continues (or continues) over multiple variable displays without specifying which pending display corresponds) is being executed Even if a game ball wins a new prize, the preceding period effect corresponding to this is prohibited by performing prohibition control so that this does not occur, so that the two preceding period effects interfere. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. However, if such prohibition control is performed, the frequency of performing the preceding period effect as the preceding effect is reduced by the amount that the preceding period effect is subject to the prohibition control, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease. be.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when executing the preceding period production corresponding to the suspension information while the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the suspension information is not yet started, first, a specific performance Set information indicating that the status is restricted. Then, when the suspension information is newly stored while the information is set by the previously stored suspension information, at least the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the previously stored suspension information is terminated. While the preceding period production corresponding to the newly stored suspension information is not executed until, the newly stored after the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the previously stored suspension information is completed. Control is performed so that the preceding period effect corresponding to the reserved information can be executed.

That is, in this case, even if it is once determined that execution of the performance for the preceding period corresponding to the suspension information is not allowed at the time when the suspension information is newly stored, the game is progressed and stored first. When the game situation becomes such that there is no fear of interference with the preceding period performance corresponding to the hold information, execution of the preceding period performance once determined not to be permitted is permitted. As a result, it is possible to preferably maintain the frequency of performance of the preceding period performance while performing prohibition control for the preceding period performance, thereby suppressing the decline in the interest in the game.

More specifically, in the first special figure prefetching process (Fig. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure prefetching process (Fig. 136: step S5255) when a new winning occurs, first, the first special hold Based on the counter value of the number counter or the second special reservation number counter, it is determined what the reservation order (digestion order) of the new winning prize is. For example, in the case of the first special symbol pre-reading process, first, the reservation information corresponding to the new winning is stored in any of the first special symbol reservation storage area a to the first special symbol reservation storage area d Determine if you are in a state. Then, after that, in the hold information in which the variable display is being executed and the hold information in which the variable display is not executed, which is stored prior to the new winning, the execution target of the preceding period effect Determine if there is something wrong. As a result, even if there is specific pending information for which the preceding period production is to be executed, execution of the preceding period production in response to a new winning is not completely prohibited, and the specified In the period after the end of the variable display according to the pending information, control is performed so that the execution of the preceding period effect according to the new winning is permitted.

Hereinafter, a method for realizing such control will be described in more detail by taking a game situation as an example.

FIG. 171(a) stores hold information (first special symbol) in the state where the variable display is being executed and three hold information (both first special symbols) in the state where the variable display is not executed. It is a diagram showing an example of the table T7a referred to in the first special figure prefetching process when a new winning prize (first special symbol) occurs in the state of being. In addition, FIG. 171(b) shows two pieces of pending information (both first special symbols) in a state where the variable display is being executed (the first special symbol) and the variable display is in a non-executing state. It is a diagram showing an example of the table T7b referred to in the first special figure prefetching process when a new winning (first special symbol) occurs in the stored state.

As shown in the same figure 171 (a), in this table T7a, the holding information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is being executed and the three holding information in which the variable display is not executed (any Also the 1st special pattern), depending on which one is the target of the preceding period production, or whether none of them are the target of the preceding period production, a new winning prize (1st special pattern) It is possible to determine from which timing the corresponding pending information can be the target of the preceding period effect (the number of fluctuations that can be read ahead).

For example, in the table T7a, both of the pending information (first special symbol) in the state where the variable display is being executed and the three pending information (both first special symbols) in the state where the variable display is not executed is not the object of the preceding period production, change display according to suspension 1 (first suspension information stored in the first special symbol suspension storage area a), suspension 2 (first special symbol suspension storage The second pending information stored in the area b) and the variable display according to the pending 3 (the third pending information stored in the first special symbol pending storage area b), and the Over four variable display periods with variable display according to suspension 4 (fourth suspension information stored in the first special symbol suspension storage area d) according to the new winning, targeting the new winning It is determined that the preceding period effect can be executed (determined that the predictive variable number is 4). That is, in this case, at the timing after the variable display in the state of execution ends and the variable display according to the first pending information is started, the variable display according to the pending 4 according to the new winning Execution of the preceding period production targeting is permitted.

Further, in the table T7a, when the hold information in the state where the variable display is being executed is the object of the preceding period effect, the variable display according to the hold 2, the variable display according to the hold 3, and the new It is determined that the preceding period effect for the new winning prize can be executed over the three variable display periods of the variable display corresponding to the holding 4 according to the winning (indicating that the number of possible foreseeing fluctuations is 3 judgment). That is, in this case, the timing after the variable display in the state of execution ends, the variable display according to the first pending information ends, and the variable display according to the second pending information starts. Therefore, execution of the preceding period effect for the variable display corresponding to the suspension 4 corresponding to the new winning is permitted.

Here, even if the hold information in which the variable display is being executed is subject to the presentation during the preceding period, the variable display according to the hold 1, the variable display according to the hold 2, and the hold 3 It is determined that it is possible to execute the preceding period production targeting the new winning over four variable display periods of the variable display corresponding to the new winning and the variable display corresponding to the hold 4 corresponding to the new winning ( (Determination that the prefetch variable number is 4) may be performed. However, in this case, the preceding period effect that appeared in the variable display in the state of being executed and the new preceding period effect that starts with the variable display corresponding to Hold 1 are continuously executed. Whether the preceding period production is the same production (is the previous preceding period production continuing), or is another preceding period production newly started (is the previous preceding period production ending)? Since it is difficult to distinguish between the two, a method of setting this as a prohibited period so that a new preceding period effect does not occur in the first variable display after the preceding period effect is completed (method adopted in table T7a) It is more desirable to adopt Note that such a technique is employed not only in the table T7a but also in other tables T7 (not shown in addition to the table T7b).

In addition, in the table T7a, when Hold 1 is the object of the preceding period effect, two variable displays, a variable display according to Hold 3 and a variable display according to Hold 4 according to the new winning Over the period, it is determined that the preceding period effect targeting the new winning prize can be executed (determined that the predictive variable number is 2). That is, in this case, the variable display that was being executed ends, the variable display according to the first pending information ends, the variable display according to the second pending information ends, and the third At the timing after the variable display corresponding to the reservation information is started, execution of the preceding period performance for the variable display corresponding to the reservation 4 corresponding to the new winning is permitted.

In addition, in the table T7a, if the hold 2 is the target of the preceding period effect, only the period of the variable display corresponding to the hold 4 corresponding to the new winning, the preceding period for the new winning It is determined that the effect can be executed (determined that the prefetching variable number is 1). That is, in this case, the variable display in the state of being executed ends, the variable display according to the first pending information ends, the variable display according to the second pending information ends, and the third pending information At the timing after the variable display according to the further ends and the variable display according to the fourth pending information is started, the preceding period for the variable display according to the pending 4 according to the new winning Execution of the production is permitted.

In addition, in the table T7a, if the suspension 3 is the object of the preceding period effect, it is determined that the preceding period effect targeting the new winning prize is not executable (the number of predictable fluctuations is 0 judgment). That is, in this case, execution of the preceding period effect for the variable display corresponding to the suspension 4 corresponding to the new winning is not allowed.

On the other hand, in the table T7b, the hold 3 is not included as a determination target of whether or not it is subject to the preceding period effect, and the number of predictable fluctuations obtained as a determination result is less than that in the table T7a. However, since it is basically the same as the table T7a, the explanation will be omitted. Also, tables similar to these are prepared when the reservation 2 prize is won and the reservation 1 prize is won, but the explanation is omitted.

By the way, at the time of winning the hold 4, etc., it is assumed that there are two pieces of hold information that are the target of the preceding period production. Decide whether to make the number of read-ahead possible fluctuations. For example, when Suspension 4 wins, if Variable Suspension and Suspension 2 are subject to different preceding period effects in table T7a, Suspension 2, which is on the later side of the suspension order, is subject to the preceding period effect. "Prefetchable variation number = 1" is determined.

Also, as described above, the control related to the prohibition period of the preceding period effect is a type of effect that continues (or continues) over multiple variable displays without specifying which hold display it corresponds to. This is done for the purpose of setting the prohibition period for the type of presentation based on the execution status. Therefore, the prohibition period of the preceding period production does not occur depending on the execution status of the type of production (holding change production) that specifies which suspension display corresponds, and the execution status of the preceding period production (prefetching Even if the number of possible variations is 0), the type of effect (suspended change effect) that specifies which of the pending displays it corresponds to is not prohibited.

In addition, even when the preceding period effect is prohibited, the timer effect on the advance notice side is made to appear for the timer prefetch effect performed in the first preceding mode and the second preceding mode among the timer prefetch effects, which will be described later. Since certainty is not required, it may be made to appear.

In addition, as the prohibition control of the preceding period production, if the holding information on the second special symbol side is included in the holding information in the state where the variable display is not executed, the holding information on the second special symbol side precedes. Even if it is not the target of the period performance, it may be controlled so that the new preceding period performance is not started until the variable display corresponding to the holding information on the second special symbol side is finished. good. Also, at this time, it is not necessary to set the period of the next variable display after the variable display according to the reserved information on the second special symbol side to the prohibited period, and a new preceding period from the time when the next variable display is executed. It is desirable to allow the performance to start.

In addition, regarding the process of checking the status of the prefetch effect set for the hold and determining the possible number of prefetch fluctuations according to the result, each time the hold is digested or a new prize is generated It is desirable to do this every time.

Then, in the first special figure prefetching process (Fig. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure prefetching process (Fig. 136: step S5255), when the number of prefetchable fluctuations is determined in this way, the determined period (prefetchable The number of variations) determines in what form the preceding period effect is to be executed (including whether or not to execute it).

For example, first, it is determined which type of preceding period effect is to be executed for the pending information corresponding to the new winning. As described above, the types of preceding period effects include a pre-reading zone effect that displays related background images across multiple fluctuations, and a specific preceding display that suggests that there is a high possibility that the advance notice side timer effect will be executed. It is possible to prepare a selection candidate such as a timer look-ahead effect displayed across fluctuations. As a result, when the type of the preceding period effect is determined, determination processing is performed as to how the determined type of preceding period effect is to be executed.

FIGS. 172(a) and 172(b) are diagrams showing an example of tables T8a-1 and T8a-2 referred to when determining the mode of execution of the timer prefetch effect in a situation where the prefetch variable number is 4. is. FIGS. 173(a) and 173(b) are diagrams showing an example of tables T8b-1 and T8b-2 which are referred to when determining the mode of execution of the timer prefetch effect in a situation where the prefetch variable number is 3. is.

As described above, the timer look-ahead effect is an effect that increases the probability that the advance notice-side timer effect will appear when the hold information that is the target of pre-reading is consumed when it appears. In the control MPU 1511a, the timer prefetch effect is executed in a first precedent mode, a second precedent mode, a third precedent mode, etc., in which the rate of occurrence of the timer effect on the notice side is different.

Here, the first preceding mode is, for example, the first mode such as "premonition of timer occurrence" being displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when the timer prefetching effect is executed in the first preceding mode The probability that the advance notice-side timer effect is executed is set to approximately 20% (step S5502).

Further, the second preceding mode is, for example, a second mode such as "timer generation chance" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when the timer prefetch effect is executed in the second preceding mode, the forewarning side is displayed. The probability that the timer effect will be executed is set to approximately 80% (step S5502).

Further, the third preceding mode is, for example, a third mode such as "preparing timer" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when the timer prefetching effect is executed in the third preceding mode, the forewarning timer The effect is always executed (even if it is not 100%, the probability may be higher than that of the second preceding mode) (step S5502).

Then, based on the information on the hit/loss of the big hit for the lookahead determination, the information on the variation pattern number for the lookahead determination, and the like, it is determined which execution mode to execute as the timer lookahead effect. For example, in a situation where the prefetch variable number is 4, tables T8a-1 and T8a-2 shown in FIGS. In a situation where one of the modes is selected based on the information and the effect random number assigned to the information, and the number of predictable variable numbers is 3, tables T8b-1 and T8b- shown in FIG. 2, one of the modes is selected based on the look-ahead information corresponding to the variation numbers 1 to 22 and the effect random number assigned to the information.

As shown in FIG. 172(a), in the table T8a-1, the variable display of the pending information targeted for the timer prefetch effect is started in a state where the first preceding mode is finally appearing. The following three modes are prepared as modes.
・When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is in the states of hold 3 and hold 2, the timer prefetch effect does not appear in any mode, and the timer prefetch effect is targeted. A mode in which the timer prefetch effect is displayed in the first precedent mode (premonition of timer occurrence) when the variable display of the pending information is in the state of hold 1 ・The variable display of the pending information targeted for the timer prefetch effect is suspended. In the state 3, the timer prefetch performance is not caused to appear in any mode, and the timer prefetch performance is first precedent when the variable display of the hold information targeted for the timer preread performance is in the hold 2 state. A mode (premonition of timer occurrence) that is displayed and continues even in the state of hold 1 ・Timer prefetch effect when the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is in the state of hold 3 is displayed in the first preceding mode (premonition of timer occurrence), and this mode is continued even in the states of Hold 2 and Hold 1

In addition, in the table T8a-1, the following six modes are used as modes in which the variable display of the hold information targeted for the timer prefetch effect is started in a state where the second preceding mode is finally appearing. prepared.
・When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is in the states of hold 3 and hold 2, the timer prefetch effect does not appear in any mode, and the timer prefetch effect is targeted. A mode in which the timer prefetch effect is displayed in the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) when the variable display of the pending information is in the state of pending 1 ・The variable display of the pending information targeted for the timer prefetch effect is pending 3 When the timer prefetch effect is in the state of (1), the timer prefetch effect does not appear in any mode, and when the variable display of the hold information targeted for the timer prefetch effect is in the state of hold 2, the timer prefetch effect is put in the second preceding mode. Mode of displaying (timer generation chance) and continuing this even in the state of Suspension 1 ・When the variable display of the suspension information targeted for the timer prefetch effect is in the Suspend 3 state, the timer prefetch effect is performed for the second time. 2. Mode of displaying in advance mode (timer generation chance) and continuing this even in the states of suspension 2 and suspension 1 ・When the variable display of the suspension information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is in the status of suspension 3 The timer prefetch effect is not caused to appear in any mode, and the timer prefetch effect is set to the first preceding mode (premonition of timer occurrence) when the variable display of the hold information targeted for the timer prefetch show is in the hold 2 state. ), and the timer prefetch effect is changed from the first preceding mode (premonition of timer occurrence) to the second preceding mode ( Timer generation chance) and displaying it ・When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is in the state of hold 3, the timer prefetch effect is the first precedent mode (premonition of timer occurrence) is displayed and this is continued even in the state of suspension 2, but when the variable display of the suspension information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is in the state of suspension 1, the timer prefetch effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (timer A mode in which the display is changed from a premonition of occurrence) to a second preceding mode (timer chance) ・When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is in the state of hold 3, the timer prefetch effect is performed. In addition to displaying in the first preceding mode (prediction of timer occurrence), when the variable display of the pending information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is in the state of pending 2, the timer prefetching effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (timer generation) premonition) to the second precedent mode (timer generation check mode) to change and display and continue this even in the state of hold 1

Note that the timer look-ahead effect of these first preceding mode and second preceding mode is displayed in the state of suspension 1, and then continues to be displayed even after the suspension information is digested and the variable display is started. It is desirable to In addition, it may be possible to further change the aspect of the variable display started after the pending information is digested. Further, when the advance notice-side timer effect is started in the variable display, the timer prefetch effects of the first preceding mode and the second preceding mode may be hidden, but when the advance notice-side timer effect is started. However, the first preceding mode and the second preceding mode are hidden before the advance notice-side timer effect is started, or the display is continued even after the advance notice-side timer effect is started. If it is made to be hidden at a predetermined timing after that, it is possible to add interest. It should be noted that if the advance notice side timer effect is not executed in spite of executing the timer prefetch effect in either the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode, when a predetermined time elapses after the symbol variation is started, the It will be displayed. Moreover, it is more desirable that the timing of this non-display is the same as the timing of non-display when the advance notice-side timer effect is executed (such as the above-described predetermined timing).

In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the first precedent mode (premonition of timer occurrence) or the second precedence mode, in spite of the timer prefetch effect in which the execution ratio of the advance notice side timer effect increases when any of them appears. The timer look-ahead effect of (timer generation chance) and the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparation) are made to appear as different effects from each other. Therefore, as is clear from the contents of the table T8a-1, in the state where the first preceding mode and the second preceding mode are displayed, the timer prefetch effect is changed from these preceding modes to the third preceding mode. This display mode is not adopted. Further, in a situation where the timer prefetch effect of the third preceding mode (preparing the timer) appears, the timer prefetch effect of the first preceding mode (premonition of timer occurrence) or the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) appears. Or, in a situation where the timer prefetch effect of the first preceding mode (premonition of timer occurrence) or the second preceding mode (timer chance) appears, the timer prefetch effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparation) appears. can occur.

Therefore, in the situation where the predictive variable number is 4, the table T8a-1 shown in FIG. In addition to determining the execution mode regarding the timer look-ahead effect, the execution mode regarding the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparation) is further determined with reference to the table T8a-2 shown in FIG. 172(b). It will happen.

Here, as shown in FIG. 172(b), in the table T8a according to this embodiment, the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect in the state that the third preceding mode is finally appearing Only the following one mode is prepared as a mode in which the variable display is started.
・When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is in the state of hold 3, the timer prefetch effect is displayed in the third preceding mode (timer preparation), and this is changed to hold 2 and hold 1. Mode to continue even in the state

However, in the case of the third preceding aspect, as in the case of the above-described first preceding aspect, not limited to the above-described first aspect, when in the state of suspension 3 or suspension 2, neither timer prefetch effect appears, It may also be possible to select a mode in which the third preceding mode is displayed.

According to such a configuration, when the timer prefetch effect of the first precedent mode (premonition of timer occurrence) or the second precedence mode (timer chance) is executed, and the timer of the third precedence mode (timer chance) is executed. When the look-ahead effect is executed, both the timer look-ahead effect of the first precedent mode (premonition of timer occurrence) or the second precedent mode (timer chance) and the timer look-ahead effect of the third precedent mode (timer preparation) When and where each is executed will appear. Then, when both the timer prefetch effect of the first precedent mode (premonition of timer occurrence) or the second precedent mode (timer chance) and the timer prefetch effect of the third precedent mode (timer preparation) are executed, Since the execution of the advance notice-side timer effect is definitely suggested, the user enjoys the effect such as whether the first preceding mode is changed to the second preceding mode, etc., in a relaxed atmosphere and a sense of security. will be able to

Further, control may be performed such that the timer prefetch effect of the first preceding mode, the timer prefetch effect of the second preceding mode, and the timer prefetch effect of the third preceding mode can appear simultaneously.

It is desirable that the timer prefetch effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparation) is also continuously displayed even after the target pending information is digested and the variable display is started. In this case, after the target hold information is digested and the variable display is started, the third preceding mode (timer preparation) is hidden when the announcement side timer performance is started.

Further, in this embodiment, the third preceding aspect of the timer prefetch effect is adopted as a mode of displaying "timer preparation" in the effect display device 1600. It may be adopted as a mode of starting the count display toward the effect (the effect appearing in the non-executed variable display) which is the target of the timer effect. That is, in this case, for example, the remaining time that the hold 1 state continues (the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol in the state of variable display when in the hold 1 state), and the change display after the hold 1 is digested The count display is carried out over the time obtained by summing the time from the start to the start of the performance targeted for the performance of the advance notice side timer performance, and the timer prefetch performance (third preceding mode) and the advance notice side timer. The effect is executed as one count display in which two variable displays are connected.

In this respect, when the third preceding mode is realized as one count display connected to such a notice-side timer effect, the count display is not executed in the suspension 3 or suspension 2 state, and the count display is performed in the suspension 1 state. It is desirable to execute That is, if the count display is started when it is in the hold 3 or hold 2, depending on the number of holds when it is in the hold 1 state, "the effect that is targeted for the effect of the advance notice side timer effect ( By changing the "remaining time until the production in the unexecuted variable display) starts", the count display for the same production (count display until reaching the predetermined number) can be executed appropriately. This is because there is concern that it will disappear.

Note that the table T8b-1 shown in FIG. 173(a) and the table T8b-2 shown in FIG. 173(b) are the table T8a-1 shown in FIG. Since it has basically the same relationship as the table T8a-2 that is described in Table T8a-2, the detailed description is omitted.

Also as described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the first special figure look-ahead processing (Figure 135: step S5245) and the second special figure look-ahead processing (Figure 136: step S5255) in the determination of the pending change effect Also process. This pending change effect is to change the mode of the pending display corresponding to the pending information acquired according to the winning to one of a plurality of modes different from the normal pending mode, so that the pending display is displayed in any mode. Depending on whether it is displayed, the degree of expectation for a big win when the reserved display is completed is suggested.

More specifically, as the hold display according to this embodiment, in addition to the normal hold mode when the hold change effect is not performed, the mode of displaying in white blinking, the mode of displaying in blue, and the mode of displaying in green It can be displayed in any of the mode of displaying in red, the mode of displaying in rainbow color, and the mode of displaying in rainbow color. is low, and there is a relationship in which the degree of expectation for a big win gradually increases in the order of blue, green, and red. %. In addition, the expectation level of the jackpot is naturally set for the mode of normal suspension, but the expectation level of the jackpot when the normal suspension is displayed should be lower than the mode in which white blinking is displayed. Alternatively, it may be set to be the same as or higher than the white blinking mode.

Therefore, normally, when a mode of displaying in white flashing or blue appears, the first performance situation is provided in which the expectation of a big hit is lower than in the case of displaying in green or red. However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a mode of displaying in white blinking or blue instead of green or red appears under a predetermined condition, a control that can provide a second effect situation in which the expectation of a big hit increases. is executable.

FIG. 174 shows that when there is no holding information in which the variable display is being executed and the holding information in which the variable display is not being executed (for example, Hold 1 to Hold 3), the jackpot pattern appears. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a referenced normal hold change table T9a; In addition, in FIG. 175, some of the pending information in which the variable display is being executed and the pending information in which the variable display is not being executed (for example, Hold 1 to Hold 3) cause a big hit pattern to appear. It is a figure which shows special time suspension change table T9b referred to at times.

In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a new winning (acceptance of a game ball) to the starting ports 2002 and 2004 occurs, the first special figure prefetching process (Fig. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure In the look-ahead process (FIG. 136: step S5255), the pending information stored prior to the new winning and in the state where the variable display is being executed and the pending information in the state where the variable display is not executed (for example, the 1 to hold 3), it is determined whether or not there is a pattern that makes a big win pattern appear (a judgment that a big win will be won as a result of big win judgment or prefetch judgment). As a result, when it is determined that there is no jackpot pattern, the normal table T9a ( 174), by executing the pending change production, normally, for example, when a mode of displaying in white blinking or blue appears, the first production situation with a lower expectation of a big hit than when displaying in red. I am trying to provide it.

However, it is determined that there is a big hit pattern in the reserved information in which the variable display is being executed and the reserved information in which the variable display is not executed, which is stored prior to the new winning. When it does (when a rare event occurs), the second effect situation is provided by executing the hold change effect with reference to the special hold change table T9b (FIG. 175).

That is, as shown in FIG. 175, in the special-time pending change table T9b, first, red and rainbow colors related to the mode of pending display are acquired as pending information corresponding to a new winning prize " The production random numbers are distributed so that the prefetch information and the prefetch information regarding the fluctuation pattern will not be selected regardless of what they indicate.

In addition, regarding the green color related to the form of the hold display, even if it is a variation pattern (variation numbers 7 to 14) in which the production random numbers are distributed so as to be selectable in the normal hold change table T9a, the special hold change The effect random numbers are distributed in the table T9b so as not to be selected. In this regard, if the look-ahead information on the variation pattern corresponds to SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22), green can be selected in the special hold change table T9b, but normal hold The effect random numbers are distributed so that the appearance probability of the green color is low both when winning the big prize and when losing the prize, as compared with the change table T9a.

On the other hand, with respect to white blinking and blue color related to the form of the pending display, in the special pending change table T9b, the probability of their appearance is higher both when winning the jackpot and when losing the lottery than in the normal pending change table T9a. The performance random numbers are distributed to . In addition, with respect to the white blinking and blue colors related to the mode of the hold display, even the variation numbers 1 and 2, which are not selected in the normal hold change table T9a, can be selected in the special hold change table T9b. The production random numbers are distributed as follows.

According to such a configuration, for example, an effect with a high degree of expectation for the appearance of a big hit pattern (for example, an effect in which a notice-side timer effect appears for the character B action in the fluctuation pattern of the SP reach) is executed. When a new winning occurs (under prescribed conditions) while the game is in progress, when a green or red mode appears as a pending display corresponding to the new winning, a jackpot pattern appears in the high-expectation performance being executed. While it becomes difficult to have expectations for , when white flashing or blue mode appears, it is relatively easy to have expectations for the appearance of a big hit pattern in the high-expectation performance being executed Second production situation will be able to provide

In particular, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, as the third preceding aspect of the timer look-ahead effect, the remaining time during which the hold 1 state continues (the variable display state when in the hold 1 state The remaining variable time of the special symbol in ) and the time from the start of the variable display after Suspension 1 is digested to the start of the effect targeted for the effect of the advance notice timer effect. It is possible to display the count of That is, in this case, even if the count display appears on the effect display device 1600, there is a possibility that the variable display will end and the next variable display will start before the count display reaches a predetermined value. Therefore, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be improved in combination with the control using the above-described special-time hold change table T9b.

For example, in a situation where white flashing or blue pending display is displayed as hold 1, if the count display (or timer preparation) of the notice side timer effect appears while the variable display (for example, SP reach) is being executed. , the player can have a feeling of anticipation for the appearance of a big hit pattern more in the second game progress than in the following first game progress.
・The announcement-side timer effect targets the effect in Suspend 1 that only shows low expectations (white flashing or blue), and suspends it after the running variable display (for example, SP reach) ends in a failing mode. The first game progress/notice side timer effect, in which the variable display corresponding to the hold information of 1 is started, is not the effect in the hold 1 showing only a low degree of expectation (white flashing or blue), but the variation during execution. A second game progression that targets the effects in the display (for example, SP reach)

That is, even though the advance notice-side timer effect with a high expectation for a big hit (for example, a jackpot pattern appears with a probability of 10% or more when it appears) is executed, the advance notice-side timer effect has a low expectation (for example, does not appear). Even if the big hit pattern appears only with a probability of about a few percent, if the production in the hold 1 of white blinking or blue) is targeted for production, the possibility of the big hit pattern appearing is greatly reduced. However, according to the second game progress, the chance increases by avoiding the occurrence of such a production situation, and the variable display during execution is a big win, so it is special. Hour hold change table T9b (Fig. 175) is referred to, and the hold display of hold 1 can be expected to be in a production situation in which white blinking or blue (high probability of appearance) is expected to increase the chance (high expectation of big hit) The fact that the timer effect on the notice side targets "the effect in the variable display during execution" also functions as if it backs up that "the variable display during execution is a big hit") doubles the chances. Since it comes to occur, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

It should be noted that the third preceding aspect of the timer prefetch effect may be executed as "timer preparation" instead of the count display. That is, in this case, when the state where "timer preparation" is displayed is switched to the count display, it is possible to recognize that the advance notice side timer effect is executed with the effect in the variable display as the effect target. Therefore, when the count display appears, when there is a white blinking or blue holding display, it can be expected that a big hit pattern will appear in the variable display.

On the other hand, in the situation where green or red (especially red) pending display is displayed, when "preparing timer" is hidden and the count display is started, the notice side timer effect is performed. Not only does it become difficult to have a sense of expectation for the appearance of the big hit pattern in the variable display, but the advance notice side timer is added so as to further increase the expectation for the green and red (especially red) pending display. The performance will not work. Therefore, if "preparing timer" is displayed in a situation where green or red (especially red) pending display is displayed, until the green or red (especially red) pending display is digested It is hoped that the count display will not be started, and it is expected that the game interest will be maintained within the period until the count display (notice side timer effect) is started.

In addition, according to such a configuration, when an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit appears in the variable display during execution, a new prize is generated and the pending display in any mode such as white flashing, blue, green, red, etc. By confirming whether or not appears, it becomes possible to predict with a predetermined probability whether or not a big win pattern will appear in the variable display during execution, so that the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, although the suspension change effect using such a special time suspension change table T9b is executed for the suspension display according to the new winning, the effect target is actually "new "Does the big hit pattern appear in the variable display of the hold information (hold information with hold change) according to the winning?" (Information) will function as a production for whether a big hit pattern will appear in the variable display. Therefore, even if no hold change is executed when a new prize is won or if the above-described preceding period effect is prohibited, the special hold change table T9b is determined by the hold information that is won after that. When a pending change effect using It is expected that the amusement of the game will decrease due to the fact that it is not performed.

In addition, in the special hold change table T9b, the green mode can be selected in some reach types, but as with the red mode, it may not be selected in any variation pattern. . In short, if the appearance ratio of the highly expected mode that can appear as the hold display is a lower ratio (including 0) than the normal hold change table T9a, the white color is displayed when the count display appears. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game when there is a blinking or blue pending display.

Further, the pending change can be generated at a predetermined timing when winning a prize, at the start of variation, or during variation, and may be performed multiple times. In other words, in this case, even if the count display of the notice-side timer effect is started in the variable display corresponding to the pending display that is blinking white or blue, there is a possibility that blinking white or blue will change to green or red. Since there is, it becomes possible to suppress the decline in game interest. It should be noted that in this embodiment, the display corresponding to the pending display that became the target of digestion even during the pattern change performed in response to the pending digestion (although it is not already in the pending state, the pending display when it was in the pending state The corresponding display) is displayed, and the mode of display corresponding to the suspension display is further changed (suspension change) as described above.

However, when the suspension change effect using such a special time suspension change table T9b is realized, a new prize is generated while the high-expectation specific effect is being executed during the execution of the variable display, and the prize is won. When the pending display corresponding to the event happens to be red, the big hit pattern is displayed in the variable display in which the high-expectation specific effect (for example, the timer effect that targets the action of the character B) is being executed. It may lead to a situation that definitely suggests that it will not appear, and there is concern that the interest in gaming will decline.

Therefore, during the period in which the specific timer effect that targets at least the action of the accessory B is being executed (during the period in which the specific effect with a high degree of expectation is being executed) among the timer effects, a new prize is generated. Even if it does, it is desirable to control so that the pending display corresponding to the winning does not appear on the effect display device 1600 and the state of the pending change is hidden. Also, it is desirable to maintain the non-display state for the pending display even after the count display reaches a predetermined value and is finished.

However, in this case, instead of continuing to hide the hidden display until the end of the variable display, for example, during the period of the variable display, a hit production or loss ( It is desirable to make the pending display that has been hidden appear after the timing of the appearance of the losing effect suggesting the loss of the jackpot, and to display the state of the pending change. According to such a configuration, even if the pending display corresponding to the new winning is red, it is already suggested that the player has lost the game. is red, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by including reservation information with a high degree of expectation for a big hit in the reservation.

It should be noted that the control related to the non-display of such pending display does not target all of the timer effects (notice effects), but relatively big hits such as those targeting the action of the character B among the timer effects. It is desirable to target and execute only a specific timer effect with a high degree of expectation (announcement effect with a high degree of expectation).

Further, as described above, when the suspension change effect using the special time suspension change table T9b is realized, for example, while the blue suspension display is appearing, the timer prefetch effect is executed in the third preceding mode (timer preparation etc.) If so, it is desired that the game progresses in which the count display (timer effect) is started in the variable display before the blue pending display is terminated and the big win pattern appears. In this regard, even if the game progresses as described above, is the count display (timer effect) started during the change, or is it not started and the change according to the blue pending display? In the variable display, the count display (timer effect) is started before the blue pending display is completed and the jackpot pattern appears, so that the display gives a feeling of excitement as to whether the count display is started. , count display (timer effect) when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display relative to the ratio (including 0%) at which the count display (timer effect) is started in accordance with the start timing of the variable display. It is desirable to control the rate at which is started to be higher. In addition, you may make it include 100% about this ratio. Alternatively, it is desirable to control so that the rate at which the count display (timer effect) is started when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display is higher than when the red pending display is displayed. . In addition, you may make it include 100% about this ratio.

The count effect (holding change effect using the special hold change table T9b) that causes a chance up with such a double is, in short, "holding information displayed in the second mode among a plurality of modes (for example, In the variable display of the identification information started by digesting the red prefetch pending), the pending information displayed in the first mode among the plurality of modes (for example, blue prefetch pending) is digested The ratio of deriving and displaying the jackpot pattern (specific display result) is higher than the started variable display of the identification information”, but “at least the specific count effect is executed within the period in which the variable display of the identification information is performed hold information whose execution order is later than that of the variable display in the execution state (prefetch hold for the variable display in the state that has not yet been executed when the specific count effect is executed within the execution period of the variable display ) is displayed in the second manner (e.g., red prefetch pending), the execution state is more likely than when the pending information is displayed in the first manner (e.g., blue prefetch pending). It is characterized in that the ratio of derivation display of a specific display result in a certain variable display is reduced.

According to such a configuration, when a red pending display (second mode) is given to a variable display that has not yet been executed because the execution order is late, a specific count is made in the variable display that is already in the execution state. If the count display of the effect reaches a predetermined value ("0" in this case) and ends, blue pending display (first mode) is given to the variable display that has not yet been executed because the execution order is late. Occasionally, when the count display of the specific count effect reaches a predetermined value ("0" in this case) and ends within the variable display already in the execution state, a performance mode with a lower degree of expectation as the effect object appears. the percentage will be higher. That is, in this case, during the period in which the specific count effect is being executed, whether or not the red pending display (second aspect) appears for the variable display that has not yet been executed functions as an important effect factor. Through the special performance relationship between the count performance and the look-ahead performance, it is possible to preferably maintain the game interest over a long period from the start to the end of the specific count performance. come to be expected. In this sense, during the period when the specific count effect is being executed, it is still executed at the time of new winning or pending change effect (for example, the effect of upgrading the blue pending display to the red pending display). It is important that the pending display for the variable display that is not displayed can appear in any of a plurality of modes such as the blue pending display (first mode) and the red pending display (second mode). I can say that there is.

According to such a special effect relationship between the count effect and the look-ahead effect, when the red pending display (second mode) appears for the variable display that has not yet been executed, If the variable display does not end the count effect and continues until the next variable display, the probability that the highly anticipated effect mode will appear when the count effect ends will increase, so the specific count effect will end. Expect not to. On the other hand, when a blue pending display (first mode) appears for a variable display that has not yet been executed, it is preferable to end the count effect with the variable display that is being executed. Since the ratio of appearance of a performance mode with a high degree of expectation when the count performance is completed is higher than when the count performance is ended within the variable display of , it is expected that the specific count performance will be terminated early.

However, the count effect does not necessarily span a plurality of variable displays, and may end within one variable display in which the count effect is started. Even with such a configuration, if a new winning occurs while the count effect is being executed, the variable display that has not yet been executed is displayed in blue pending display (first mode) and red pending display. There is no change in the fact that which of the display (second mode) appears can function as an important performance index for the count performance, so there is no special performance between the count performance and the look-ahead performance. Through the relationship, it is possible to preferably maintain the game interest over a long period from the start of the specific count effect to the end.

In addition, at the start of the specific count effect, a plurality of pending indications are displayed, but none of them are in a specific mode (for example, green, red, etc., prefetch pending) production situation (for example, a situation that has not changed to prefetch pending) Even if is appearing, it may be possible to execute a process (for example, a process of changing from normal hold to red hold) to make the specific mode appear during the period in which the specific count effect is being executed. According to such a configuration, at the start of the specific count effect, a plurality of pending displays are displayed, but none of them is in a specific mode (for example, a situation that has not changed to prefetch pending). Also, until the count display in the specific count effect reaches a predetermined value, there is a possibility that it may change to a hold display with a specific mode (pre-reading hold such as green or red) (a specific display result in the variable display in the execution state is derived and displayed from a state with a high rate to a state with a low rate). be expected to do so.

However, at this time, a plurality of display modes are prepared as the count display by the specific count effect, and when the count display is displayed in the first mode and the count is completed, the second mode is used. A process of causing a specific mode to appear in the hold display until the count display in the specific count effect reaches a predetermined value (for example, normal hold It is desirable to reduce the rate at which the process of changing from red to red hold is executed. According to such a configuration, by confirming the count display by the specific count effect, the display mode can be changed to a hold display with a specific mode (pre-reading hold such as green or red) during the count period. It is possible to recognize the "high possibility" and predict "the high possibility that the specific count effect will continue until after the next pattern change starts" from the remaining count value. As a result, it becomes possible to provide fun by comparing the results of those recognitions and predictions.

On the other hand, on the contrary, at the start of the specific count effect, when a plurality of pending displays are displayed but none of them are in a specific mode (for example, a situation where the look-ahead pending has not changed), During the execution period of the specific count performance, the processing of appearing the specific mode (for example, the processing of changing from normal suspension to red suspension) may not be executable during the period when the specific count performance is executed. According to such a configuration, until the count display in the specific count effect reaches a predetermined value, there is a possibility that it can change to a hold display with a specific mode (pre-reading hold of green, red, etc.) In the variable display, the possibility that the ratio of deriving and displaying the specific display result is high to the low ratio) does not occur. will be able to provide a sense of security.

In addition, there may be a case where a plurality of reserved displays are sequentially digested and a plurality of pattern variations are sequentially digested before the predetermined time required for the specific count effect elapses. According to such a configuration, even when the third pending display is red pending in a situation where the specific count effect is started, the pattern variation corresponding to the third pending display is started. Since there is a possibility that the specific count performance reaches a predetermined value during the execution period, the game interest can be preferably maintained until the specific count performance is finished.

Also, during the period during which the specific count effect is being executed, after the symbol variation is stopped (temporarily stopped), it may be possible to execute the process of changing the symbol variation again. According to such a configuration, for example, when the pattern variation is stopped (temporarily stopped) while the look-ahead suspension is appearing for the variable display that is not yet executed, the identification that is in the executed state Since it functions as a performance as if the next pattern variation is started while the count performance is continued, the amusement of the game can be preferably maintained until the specific count performance is finished. Become.

In addition, in the production example (holding change production using the special holding change table T9b) related to the above-mentioned "double chance up", the holding display is displayed smaller than the count display in the count production, or in front of the holding display By moving the movable decorative body or displaying another display image so as to cover the reserved display, it is possible to make it difficult to notice even if the reserved display changes. It is desirable to suppress the deterioration of the game interest when it occurs.

In addition, as "specific count effect", "first mode requiring relatively long time" and "second mode requiring relatively short time" are prepared, and "effect pattern (symbol fluctuation time)" A plurality of effects based on the result of judging a big hit, ``a specific effect pattern that is shorter than the relatively long time (first mode) but longer than the relatively short time (second mode). A pattern may be selected and executed. According to such a configuration, when a specific effect pattern appears, the specific count effect is continued until the next change depending on which mode (first mode, second mode) the specific count effect is executed. As a result, it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

In addition, in the production example related to the above-mentioned "double chance up" (hold change production using the special hold change table T9b), "hold information displayed in the second mode among the plurality of modes (for example, red In the variable display of the identification information started by digesting the prefetching hold), the pending information displayed in the first mode among the plurality of modes (e.g., blue prefetching hold) Start by digesting The ratio of deriving and displaying the jackpot pattern (specific display result) is higher than the variable display of the identification information that has been set", but "at least the specific count effect is performed within the period in which the variable display of the identification information is performed Suspension information whose execution order is later than that of the variable display in the execution state (prefetch suspension for the variable display that has not yet been executed when the specific count effect is being executed within the execution period of the variable display) is displayed in the second mode (e.g., red prefetch pending), the execution state is higher than when the pending information is displayed in the first mode (e.g., blue prefetch pending) In order to reduce the ratio of derivation display of the specific display result in the variable display, when the pattern variation is executed in a shorter time than the predetermined time required for the specific count effect, and when the predetermined time required for the specific count effect passes There is a case where pattern variation is executed in a longer time than the passage of time. However, in this case, regarding the above-mentioned "specific count effect", "remaining time for specific effect (remaining time until specific effect change occurs for specific effect) is indicated by updating the count value according to the passage of time , for example, may be executed as ``an effect suggesting the remaining time for a specific effect by an image change or the like according to the passage of time''. In short, if it is possible to suggest the remaining time, it is possible to provide interest as to whether the symbol variation will be finished before the remaining time is consumed, and decrease the interest in the game. can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the ``specific count effect'' is not ``effect that indicates the remaining time for the specific effect by updating the count value according to the passage of time'', but rather to ``the remaining time for the specific effect, such as an image change according to the passage of time. Regarding what is realized by other depictions such as "effect suggested by", an example of effect (count production) may be applied.

In addition, regarding the "specific count effect", it is ended in the middle stage before the suggested "remaining time until the specific effect change occurs regarding the specific effect" is digested, and the effect change regarding the specific effect may occur. At this time, it is possible to make a performance change that cannot appear when the "remaining time until a specific performance change occurs for a specific performance" is completely consumed without being terminated in the midway stage. These modifications are also applied to a production example (count production) different from the production example (holding change production using the special holding change table T9b) related to the above-mentioned "double chance up". good too.

Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a new prize is awarded during the period in which the timer prefetch effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is executed. When it occurs and the pending information corresponding to this is newly acquired, the variable display targeted for the timer look-ahead effect is started, and when this is being executed, the proportion at which the advance notice side timer effect is executed is the above. To be different according to the newly acquired pending information (new winning prize), it is supposed to perform the control (control related to the change effect) that can execute the timer prefetch effect.

FIG. 176 is a diagram showing an example of the processing procedure for the processing performed to realize such a change effect. In addition, this process is performed during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is being executed. ) occurs, or within the period before the pending information (pending information that erases and resets the information related to the production) that is withheld before the winning is digested may be performed at a predetermined timing.

As shown in FIG. 176, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not the hold information corresponding to the new winning indicates specific game information as the process of step S5601. In addition, as the specific game information, for example, it may be "game information that causes a specific variation pattern of high expectations such as SP reach to appear when the new hold information is digested", or "the new It may be "game information for winning a jackpot when the reserved information is consumed." Here, for convenience of explanation, "game information for winning a jackpot when the new reserved information is consumed" will be explained as the specific game information.

As a result, if it is determined that the pending information corresponding to the new winning prize indicates specific game information, then as the process of step S5602, the pending information corresponding to the new winning prize is stored before With respect to the pending information targeted for the timer prefetch effect (first preceding mode or second preceding mode) among the reserved pending information, at least part of the information related to the effect is deleted and the change effect is performed. Reset to content.

For example, when the first precedent mode (premonition of timer occurrence) is set as the timer prefetch effect, when the pending information targeted for the timer prefetch effect is digested, the forewarning side timer effect occurs at a probability of approximately 20%. When a second precedent mode (timer generation chance) is set as a timer prefetch effect, there is approximately an 80% probability that the pending information targeted for the timer prefetch effect is consumed. As described above, the advance notice timer effect is executed in . However, in the process of step S5602, all (or at least part) of the information related to the timer prefetch effect is deleted, or the table referred to when determining the effect pattern (such as SP reach) and the advance notice lottery is changed. Settings (set of a temporary change flag, etc.) are made to change to something different from the normal time. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, by performing the control (FIG. 149) related to the effect based on the effect information modified (deleted/set) in this way, the first precedent mode (premonition of timer generation) and the first mode are performed as the timer prefetch effect. In the process of step S5502 (FIG. 149), the advance notice side timer effect is executed at a probability of approximately 50% regardless of which of the 2 preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) is set. Also, when determining the contents of the production pattern and the announcement production, for example, based on the fact that the temporary change flag is set, a table (not shown) at the time of the temporary change production is referred to, and various productions are performed in a manner different from the normal time. will be executed.

Then, after the change processing (step S5602) for the suspended effect information targeted for the timer prefetch effect is performed, as the process of step S5603, the background image is changed to the background image when the completely changed effect is performed. Perform processing to change to At this time, it is desirable to also hide the display (first preceding mode, second preceding mode) appearing as the timer look-ahead effect. That is, in this case, when a new winning occurs (or after the winning has occurred until the pending information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is digested), the background image changes completely. When the image is suddenly changed to an image, the first precedent mode or the second precedent mode that has appeared until then is hidden, but the background image itself at the time of the change effect functions as one mode of the timer look-ahead effect. become nauseous. Then, during the period in which the background image at the time of the sudden effect appears, it depends on whether or not the advance notice timer effect will appear when the pending information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is digested (whether it is fake). It is possible to make the player more interested in the game, thereby maintaining the interest in the game during the period when the timer look-ahead performance is performed.

On the other hand, in the processing of step S5601, if it is determined that the pending information corresponding to the new winning prize does not indicate specific game information, then as the processing of step S5611, whether or not to execute a change false effect Whether or not is determined. This one-change fake effect is an effect in which the background image is changed to the background image when the one-change effect is performed in the process of step S5603, even though the above-described pending information alteration processing (step S5602) is not performed. It's about.

It should be noted that, in the process of step S5611, if it is determined not to execute the sudden change effect, in order to continue the current timer look-ahead effect (first preceding mode, second preceding mode) and determination mode of various effects , the process (FIG. 176) ends without performing any process related to the change effect.

In such a configuration, when a new winning occurs during the period in which the timer prefetch effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is executed (in a specific start area When the game ball is accepted and the corresponding game information is newly acquired), the variable display targeted for the timer prefetch effect is started, and when this is being executed, the notice side timer effect is performed. The above advance notice-side timer effect can be executed so that the ratio of execution differs according to the newly acquired game information (holding information). That is, in this case, when the pending information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer prefetch effect of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is being executed, the new pending information, which is the target of the timer prefetch effect, is not acquired. Acquired pending information is specific game information (information indicating a specific variation pattern such as SP reach, or information indicating a big hit, or information indicating that the type of big hit is to shift to a high-probability short-time gaming state, etc. ), the rate at which the notice-side timer effect is executed during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the timer prefetch effect will change, so it is the target of the timer prefetch effect. It is possible to make the player expect another performance until the variable display is executed, so that the decrease in the interest in the game during the period can be suppressed.

Further, in the above configuration, when the pending information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer prefetch effect of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is executed, the pending information targeted for the timer prefetch effect is not acquired. Depending on whether the newly acquired pending information is specific game information, after performing the alteration process (step S5602), before the pending information targeted for the timer prefetch effect is digested In addition, the background image is changed to the background image at the time of the complete change effect, and the display related to the timer prefetch effect is hidden. That is, in this case, until the start of the change production, the subject of the production is the timer prefetch production, and a production situation is provided that gives a sense of expectation to the pending information that is the target of the timer prefetch production. On the other hand, after the start of the one-change production, the subject of the production is changed to the one-change production, including the above-mentioned timer look-ahead production, in order to give a sense of expectation to the newly acquired pending information. It will shift to a production situation in which various productions are performed. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly change the subject of the production when a hold with a higher expectation than the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch production is acquired, and it is already set. Thus, it is possible to avoid the fact that the rendering time for the highly anticipated pending information is deprived by the rendering that is present.

Incidentally, such a one-change effect may be executed even if the reservation information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect indicates that the jackpot will be won. That is, in this case, even though the subject of the production has moved to the newly winning reservation information, the big hit production appears in the reservation that is digested before that, so a surprise production is realized. As a result, the decrease in interest in gaming can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the hold information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer prefetch effect of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is executed, the process (FIG. 176) relating to the above-mentioned change effect is executed. However, the process (FIG. 176) related to the above-mentioned change effect may be executed even when the hold information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer prefetch effect of the third preceding mode is being executed. .

Further, the background image during the change effect may be continued even after the variable display corresponding to the hold information targeted for the timer prefetch effect ends. That is, in this case, the suspension information to be digested after the variable display corresponding to the suspension information that is the object of the timer prefetch effect is completed, functions as a completely changed fake effect.

Moreover, even when the timer look-ahead effect is not being executed, such a one-change effect may be executed on the condition that the new prize is generated and a specific condition is satisfied. In this case, for example, the table referred to when determining the performance pattern (SP reach, etc.) and the advance notice lottery for all the hold information stored before the new winning is changed to something different from the normal time. Settings (setting of a change flag, etc.) are made to make it happen, and as a result, the appearance probability of various effects will change unless it is a change change effect.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the rate at which the notice-side timer effect is executed is changed at the time of the one-change effect. You may make it change the ratio with which production|presentation is performed. Thereby, even if it is a variable number that does not cause the variable side timer performance to appear when the one change performance is not executed, the variable side timer performance appears when the one change performance is executed, or the variable side timer performance appears when the one change performance is not executed. Even if it is a number, it is possible to perform control so that the variable side timer effect does not appear when the one change effect is executed.

It should be noted that, if such a one-change production is performed, even if the timer production is made to appear when the one-change production is not executed, there is a possibility that the variable-side timer production will not appear when the one-change production is executed. There is also a concern that the interest in the game will decrease, so when the change effect is executed, a lottery will be held regarding a special notice effect that cannot appear at normal times (when the change effect is not executed). You may control so that production may appear.

In addition, the rate at which the notice-side timer effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the timer prefetch effect during the one change effect may not necessarily be constant (here, 50%). It may be controlled differently according to whether or not the big hit pattern appears in the variable display that was set.

177 and 178, the contents of the timer effect will be described in detail. Here, the example of processing related to each effect described above is merely an example. Appearance conditions and the like may be changed as appropriate within the scope of the same technical idea. Therefore, in the production examples described below, there may be cases that are inconsistent with the processing contents related to each production described above, but are within the scope of the same technical idea and within the scope that a person skilled in the art can implement. There is no problem because the contents of the processing are changed appropriately in . In addition, the following "timer effect" basically means that the count display is executed in the notice side timer effect or the variable side timer effect, but in addition to the effect during the count display, It may have the meaning of including the timer look-ahead effect. Also, as a mode of "counting display", although "seconds" are counted below, the present invention is not limited to this.

FIG. 177(A) shows an effect situation in which the effect display device 1600 performs variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with the reserved number being 0 in the normal game state. In FIG. 177(B), two winnings occur during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. The pending display corresponding to 1 is displayed in a normal pending mode, and the pending display corresponding to the pending 2 that has won the second prize is displayed in a red mode. In FIG. 177(C), after the decorative pattern SZ which was in the state of variable display in the production situation shown in FIG. ), and the hold information stored as hold 1 is digested and changed to a variable state. In addition, in this production example, as is clear from the figure, even in the situation where the hold information of hold 1 is digested and the state of change display (state of hold 0) Display control is performed so that the player can recognize the state of the pending display (holding display of hold 0). In addition, as described above, the hold display of hold 0 can further change in the form of hold change (blinking white, blue, green, red, rainbow color) even in such a variable display state. Street.

Here, in the production situation shown in FIG. 177(C), the hold information that was in the hold 1 state at the time of FIGS. or after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variable display, the pending look-ahead effect is executed. The mode of the pending prefetch effect may be any one of the above-described first preceding mode, second preceding mode, and third preceding mode. The fact that the effect has appeared means that the hold information of hold 0 (in the variable display state) or the hold information of hold 1 is targeted for the hold prefetch effect (example here Then, the hold information of hold 1 is targeted for the hold prefetch effect).

In FIG. 177(D), one winning occurs during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. It shows the production situation displayed in the form of . However, assuming that the pending display corresponding to this pending 2 indicates specific game information (here, big hit information) and satisfies the execution condition of the above-mentioned change effect, it is shown in FIG. 177(E). Thus, the control related to the change effect is executed based on the hold information (game information) corresponding to the hold 2.

Incidentally, as described above, the one-change effect means that the content of the hold information (here, hold 1) stored before the hold information (here, hold 2) that generates the one-change effect and is in a hold state is changed and held. It is digestible. On the other hand, the above-mentioned sudden change fake effect is, for example, a hold that occurs when the hold display corresponding to hold 2 does not indicate specific game information (here, big hit information) to generate the sudden change fake effect. The content of the pending information (here, pending 1) that is stored before the information (here, pending 2) and is in the pending state is not altered and is held and digested. That is, in this case, the likelihood of various effects occurring when suspension 1 is completed depends on whether a one-change effect or a one-change fake effect is performed. A player side can guess whether or not a suspension indicating game information is included (whether a one-change performance or a one-change fake performance is being performed), thereby suppressing the decline in the interest in the game. In both the one-change performance and the one-change false performance, it is desirable to control the suspension display (here, suspension 2) corresponding to these performances so that the suspension change does not occur regardless of the result of the big hit determination.

Therefore, the timing at which the control related to the change effect is executed based on the hold information (game information) corresponding to such hold 2 is after the variable display of hold 0, which is not subject to change of the hold information, is completed. , and before the start of the variable display of hold 1, which is subject to alteration of the hold information. In this regard, in this embodiment, after the losing pattern has been stopped by the variable display of suspension 0, but when the suspension display of suspension 1 is not yet shift-displayed, the control related to the temporary effect is executed. , In addition to changing the hold information of hold 1 (especially information related to the effect), as shown in FIG. It is hidden (displayed in a normal pending mode), and the background image is changed to the background image when the change effect is performed. Also, at this time, a predetermined display image (here, "complete change") is displayed for a predetermined time.

In addition, in such an effect situation (Fig. 177 (E)), the timer prefetch effect that has appeared until then until the change display of pending 0 is terminated continues the display without starting the count display. Therefore, it can be recognized that the object of the timer prefetch effect is hold 1.

In FIG. 177(F), after the appearance of the completely changed production background shown in FIG. Shows the performance status.

Here, in the production situation shown in FIG. After a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variable display, the count display of the timer effect is started. Similarly to this, in the production situation shown in FIG. It is Regarding the timing of the specific display (make the conversation notice appear), it may be before the timing when the timer effect (count display) appears, or after the timing when the timer effect (count display) appears. It is also possible to appear at an appropriate timing.

In addition, the timer effect is displayed with priority over other notice effects and decoration patterns, including the case of timer prefetch effect mode (Fig. 177(D)). A part of the display range (left part) of the notice effect that displays "Let the conversation notice appear" in the form of a so-called ticker (slide video) is hidden by a timer effect that is displayed with priority over this. ing.

In addition, in this production situation (Fig. 177 (F)), the timer production starts the count display with a relatively small number of counts, such as "10 seconds". There is a high possibility that it is targeted for a timer effect, and there is concern that the interest in the game will decrease. However, in this production situation (FIG. 177(F)), a specific display (conversation notice) that appears relatively early among the production types targeted for the timer production (conversation notice) appears. ) appears, and the target of the timer effect is "a conversation notice that appears at a relatively early stage", and it is expected that the success of the mission will indicate that you have won the jackpot. As a result, the decrease in interest in games is suppressed.

Moreover, as described above, when the completely changed effect is being executed, the timer effect appears at a probability different from the normal time. For example, when the timer look-ahead effect displayed in FIG. 177(D) is displayed in the first preceding mode (premonition of timer occurrence), the timer effect appears only at a probability of approximately 20% in normal times. On the other hand, the timer effect appears at a probability of approximately 50% when the change effect is being executed. Therefore, if the timer effect appears while such a change effect background is appearing, the change effect (approximately 20%) in which the probability of appearance of the timer effect does not change, but the change effect (approximately 20%) in which the probability of appearance of the timer effect changes Approximately 50%) is executed, and the expectation for winning the jackpot (because it is determined that the reservation information of the jackpot is included when the change performance is executed) is heightened. However, at this time, if the timer effect does not appear while such a change effect background is appearing, the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change, instead of the change effect (approximately 50%) in which the probability of appearance of the timer effect changes. As a result, the degree of concern that a completely changed false effect (approximately 20%) is being executed increases.

It should be noted that when the timer look-ahead effect displayed in FIG. , the timer effect appears only at a probability of approximately 50% when the complete change effect is executed. Therefore, if the timer effect does not appear while such a change effect background is appearing, it is not a false effect (approximately 100%) in which the probability of appearance of the timer effect does not change, but a change in which the probability of appearance of the timer effect changes. It is definitely suggested that the performance (roughly 50%) is being executed and that the reservation information for winning the jackpot is included. However, at this time, if the timer effect appears while such a change effect background is appearing, it is not a change effect (approximately 50%) in which the probability of appearance of the timer effect changes, but a change false effect in which the probability of appearance of the timer effect does not change. As a result, the degree of concern that the effect (approximately 100%) is being executed increases.

FIG. 178(G) shows that the count display of the timer effect being executed in FIG. The display (here, "Yuzo") indicates the production situation in which it appears. Note that the timer-related display (here, "Let's go") suggesting that the predetermined value (here, 0) has been reached may appear after the count display of the timer effect is hidden.

In the production situation shown in FIG. 178(G), since the count display has reached a predetermined value while the mission display (make the conversation notice appear) is still displayed, some kind of production is targeted for the timer production. is about to appear, and it can be said that it is a situation where great attention is focused on whether or not a conversational notice will appear as the effect.

In FIG. 178(H), after the timer effect that has reached a predetermined value and the timer-related display are hidden in FIG. "It might be a chance") shows the production situation that appeared. Immediately after this, a special display indicating that the mission was successful will appear in the mission production (appear the conversation notice).

In the presentation situation shown in FIG. 178(H), the success of the mission is indicated by the mission presentation (appear the advance notice of the conversation), so that the winning of the jackpot is definitely suggested.

In FIG. 178(I), after the mission is successful in FIG. 178(H), the variable display is stopped with a failing pattern in spite of the fact that a special display (here, "Mission succeeded!") appears. It shows the performance situation.

That is, as described above, in this embodiment, for the specific display (here, "make the conversation notice appear") related to the first effect (here, "conversation notice"), the hold information that is targeted for that effect (In the situation shown in FIG. 178(I), it is possible to appear within the period of the variable display according to the variable display (Hold 1 in the situation shown in FIG. 178(I)). ), it is possible to appear earlier even within the period of variable display according to Hold 0). Moreover, the timing of displaying the first effect (here, "conversation notice") and the appearance of the special display (here, "mission successful!") In addition to being able to appear within the variable display period according to the variable display), under certain conditions, within the variable display period according to the variable display prior to the variable display (reserved information that does not become a big hit) It is also possible to appear in advance.

According to such a configuration, even though the special display (here, "Mission successful!") appears in the mission production to definitely suggest that the jackpot will be won, the variable display ends with a failing pattern. (stopped), an unforeseen situation arises for the player. However, after that, when the next variable display is started, the variable display ends (stops) with a big hit pattern, so that the feeling of happiness after being once dropped into a state of despair is given. . As a result, it is possible to add a dramatic inflection even after it is definitely suggested that a big win will occur, and it is possible to maintain the amusement of the game until the big win pattern is stopped. become.

However, when the special display appears first in this manner, there is a concern that the player may complain to the hall when the variable display ends (stops) with the missing symbols. Therefore, in the loss variation in which the special display appears first, the special display does not appear at the rate of execution of the look-ahead effect extending to the next variation display (variation display that becomes a big hit) within the execution period of the variation display. It is desirable to set it so that it is higher than the time. It should be noted that in this production example, as shown in FIG. 178(I), after the mission is achieved in FIG. It is supposed to generate a new look-ahead effect. According to such a configuration, even if the mission is successful before the count display of the timer effect is started, the changing display displays the lost pattern and the variable display for starting the count display of the timer effect appears. It is possible to realize an effect as if the variable display in which the big hit pattern appears is carried over. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of complaints from the player side to the hall side when the variable display ends (stops) with the missing symbols.

However, the look-ahead effect that spans such multiple fluctuation displays (until the fluctuation display becomes a big hit) may not necessarily be executed. In this sense, as shown in FIG. is consumed and the variable display is started, it is desirable to continue to display the special display (here, "mission successful!") appearing within the execution period of the variable display in which the missing pattern appears. In this regard, if such a special display (here, "Mission successful!") is continuously displayed until the big-hit pattern appears in the variable display where the big-hit pattern appears, the effect will be produced until the big-hit pattern is stopped. 178(K), an effect image definitely suggesting that a big win will be won as an effect in the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 178(K). It is desirable to hide the special display (here, "Mission successful!") at a timing before appears. As a result, after the special display (here, "Mission success!") is hidden, the effect image shown in FIG. Until the suggested effect image) appears, the anxiety about the appearance of the big win pattern increases more or less, and the effect situation shown in FIG. ), it is expected that the amusement of the game will be favorably maintained.

In addition, in FIG. 178(J), the count display of the timer effect of 30 seconds is started, and after the effect situation shown in FIG. During the period until the timer effect appears, the count display of the timer effect for 30 seconds ends, and the timer-related display (here, "Yukuzo") is displayed, and the effect to be the effect is occurring. Needless to say.

Next, a timer effect example different from the timer effect examples shown in FIGS. 177 and 178 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 179 and 180. FIG.

FIG. 179(A) shows an effect situation in which the effect display device 1600 performs variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with the reserved number being 0 in the normal game state. In FIG. 179(B), three winnings occur during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. The pending display corresponding to 1 is displayed in a normal pending mode, the pending display corresponding to the second winning pending 2 is in a red mode, and the pending display corresponding to the third winning pending 3 is displayed in a blue mode. showing the situation. In FIG. 179(C), after the decorative pattern SZ which was in the variable display state in the production situation shown in FIG. ), and the hold information stored as hold 1 is digested and changed to a variable state. In this production example as well, as is clear from the figure, even in the situation where the hold information of hold 1 is digested and the state of change display (state of hold 0) is displayed, the state shown at the time of hold 1 Display control is performed so that the player can recognize the state of the pending display (holding display of hold 0). In addition, as described above, the hold display of hold 0 can further change in the form of hold change (blinking white, blue, green, red, rainbow color) even in such a variable display state. Street. Further, in FIGS. 179 and 180, for convenience of explanation, the movable body KT for presentation, which has been omitted in FIGS. 177 and 178, is shown in the drawings. In addition, the movable body KT includes, for example, the back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, the back-top left movable effect unit 3200, the back-left movable effect unit 3300, the back-top middle movable effect unit 3400, the back-bottom front movable effect unit 3500, and the like. It corresponds to "movable member" etc.

Here, in the production situation shown in FIG. 179(C), the hold information that was in the hold 1 state at the time of FIGS. or after a predetermined time has passed since the same variable display is started, the pending look-ahead effect is executed. The pending prefetch effect may be executed in any of the above-described first preceding mode, second preceding mode, and third preceding mode. The fact that the effect appears means that any of the hold information of hold 0 (in the variable display state), the hold information of hold 1, and the hold information of hold 2 is targeted for the hold look-ahead effect. (In the example here, the hold information of hold 1 is targeted for the hold prefetch effect).

Here, as a mode of the hold prefetch effect, the count display may be executed from when the corresponding hold display (here, hold information of hold 1) is still in the hold state. That is, in this case, after the count display reaches a predetermined numerical value (here, "0"), an event may occur in which the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ ends. Since the event that the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ ends before reaching , even if the count display is being executed, the target of the timer effect is any of the pending information. It becomes possible to make it difficult to grasp whether

However, in this production example, any one of the first preceding mode (premonition of timer occurrence), second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance), and third preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) is displayed as the mode of the pending look-ahead effect. can be

In this regard, in the production situation shown in FIG. 179(C), the hold information 1 among the hold information 0, 1, and 2 is in a red mode, and is in the form of the hold display with the highest degree of expectation for a big hit. In view of this, from the player's side, it is desirable that the timer look-ahead effect targets the suspension information 1 and generates a combined effect with the red suspension display. That is, in this case, since the reservation information 1 indicates that the degree of expectation for obtaining a big hit is higher due to the combined effect, the timer prefetches the reservation 0 of the normal reservation mode and the blue reservation 2 with the low degree of expectation. The degree of expectation for the appearance of a big win pattern can be made higher with any one of the reservation information 0 to 2 than in the case where the degree of expectation for a big win is distributed as the object of performance. In addition, if blue hold 2 with low expectations becomes the target of the timer look-ahead effect, there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease. It is also important to develop the production so as not to be the target of the look-ahead production.

Moreover, as described above, in this embodiment, when a new winning occurs while the hold information (jackpot hold) in which the big hit pattern appears is stored, the table T9a (FIG. 174) is not normal, but the big hit hold time A special table (FIG. 175: special hold change table T9b) is referred to and the hold change effect is executed. In the suspension change performance using this special suspension change table T9b, when the big hit suspension is already included (when the suspension 1 in the red mode is a big hit), it is difficult for red or green to appear as the suspension 2 mode. In addition, blue and white flashing modes are relatively likely to appear. Therefore, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), if the timer prefetch effect targets the reservation information 1 and functions to increase the expectation of the big hit, the blue reservation 2 with the low expectation is timer Chance up by avoiding the decline in game interest due to making it a target, and because the hold information of hold 1 in the red mode is a big hit, the special hold change table T9b (Fig. 175) is referred to and the blue mode Chance up by expecting that the pending display of hold 2 is blue (high probability of appearance) The fact that it is targeted for production also functions as if to support that ``the variable display during execution is a big hit''). will be able to

Therefore, in the production situations shown in FIGS. 179B and 179C, when a new prize is generated, a new pending display in blue or white blinking occurs, or a pending display in green or red appears. By confirming whether or not a new prize is generated, it is possible to recognize whether or not a jackpot pending is included.

In FIG. 179(D), while the mode of the timer prefetch effect shown in FIG. 179(C) is maintained (without starting the count), the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ which was in the running state is a lost symbol. After finishing (stopping), the shift operation is performed on each of the suspension information, thereby showing the performance situation in which the suspension information stored as suspension 1 is digested and changed to a variable state.

When the effect situation shown in FIG. 179(D) is reached, the player sees that the target of the timer prefetch effect is the hold information of hold 0 (in the variable display state) in the red form and the hold information in the blue form. It becomes possible to recognize that it is any of the hold information of hold 1, and it is desired that the count display is executed within the execution period of the change display according to the hold information of hold 0, which is the red aspect.

It should be noted that, even in this example of effect, the timer effect is preferentially displayed over other advance notice effects and decoration patterns, including the case of timer prefetch effect mode (Fig. 179(D)). Here, a partial range (left portion) of the dialogue portion of the female character in the advance notice of conversation is hidden by a timer effect that is displayed with priority over this.

FIG. 179(E) shows an effect situation in which the timer look-ahead effect ends and the count display of the timer effect is being executed while the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 179(D) is being executed. .

However, as described above, whether the count display is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ according to the digestion of the red pending information (whether the timer prefetch is for the red pending information ) is a matter of extremely high interest for players. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count display that is in the running state is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the count display is in the running state. It is controllable to move the movable body KT for performance to the front and position it for a predetermined time. According to such a configuration, it is possible to check whether or not the count display of the timer effect is being executed while the timer effect (timer look-ahead effect, count display) is being executed to give the player a thrilling feeling. By making it difficult, it becomes possible to draw more attention to the timer effect and increase the feeling of excitement.

In addition, in order to suitably realize such an effect, in a situation where the timer effect is being executed but the count display is not yet executed (during the execution of the timer prefetch effect, etc.), the above-mentioned effect movable body KT It is desirable to control so as not to operate (move) the In other words, in this case, when the player does not care about the existence of the movable body KT for presentation, the movable body KT for presentation suddenly moves and the count display becomes difficult to see. Such a surprise effect that occurs at the worst timing makes it possible to draw more attention to the timer effect and heighten the excitement.

In addition, regarding the action effect by the movable body KT for effect, it may function only as an effect that makes the timer look-ahead effect easier to see and the count display harder to see among the timer effects. It may be made to function also as the target announcement E2 (first effect). That is, in this case, although the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is not subject to the timer effect and is essentially irrelevant, the effect situation is that the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed during the execution of the count display. By becoming (Fig. 179 (E)), for example, a higher expectation for a big hit than the cut-in production shown in the next production situation (Fig. 179 (F)) is shown, and the game interest is improved. be able to

As described above, it is desirable to execute the non-target announcement E2 (here, the motion effect by the movable body KT for effect) in one of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation. In the non-execution state of the display, it is desirable to indicate the degree of expectation for a big win depending on which of the light emission modes (blue, green, red) appears when the movable body KT for performance is operated. At this time, when the effect movable body KT operates in the red light emitting mode, it may be possible to indicate a higher expectation for a big hit than the cut-in effect shown in the next effect situation (FIG. 179(F)). The expected value of the expected degree of big win when the action effect by the movable body KT for effect occurs is lower than the expected value of the expected degree of big win of the cut-in effect shown in the next effect situation (Fig. 179(F)). It is required that However, as described above, when the action effect by the effect movable body KT is executed during the execution of the count display, even if any of blue, green, and red appears as the light emission mode, the effect motion effect It is desirable to control so that the degree of expectation for a big win indicated by the motion presentation by the body KT is the same (for example, 70%). According to such a configuration, during execution of the count display, attention should be paid to whether the action effect itself by the movable body KT for effect occurs, not what kind of mode appears in the action effect by the movable body KT for effect. As a result, it is possible to avoid lowering the interest in the game due to the manner in which the motion effect by the movable body KT for effect is generated.

By the way, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179(E), the target of the timer look-ahead effect is the red hold 1 instead of the blue state hold 2, so that the double chance has been successfully increased. In addition, the opportunity has been successfully increased by executing the non-target announcement E2 (in this case, the motion effect by the movable body KT for effect) during the execution of the count display. Therefore, if the variable display suggests that there is a high possibility that the jackpot will not be won in spite of the highly anticipated performance situation, the amusement of the game is originally enhanced. In the variable display that should be, it is unavoidable that the interest in the game is remarkably reduced. In this regard, in the above-mentioned special time pending change table T9b (FIG. 175) referred to when the big hit pending (including pending 0) is included, when a new winning occurs, the green or red mode pending Since it is difficult for the information to appear, if suspension 2 corresponding to the occurrence of a new winning prize is displayed in red in the performance situation shown in FIG. A situation may occur in which it is revealed to the player side that the player has not done so.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, during the period during which the count display of a specific timer effect, which is considered to be a mode with a high degree of expectation among the timer effects, is executed, and during the period after that, a new winning prize is displayed. Even if this occurs, it becomes difficult to recognize the mode (white blinking, blue, green, red, rainbow color), and even if the suspension display that was already displayed changes to a further suspension, the mode is difficult to recognize. I am planning to do it. In the example shown in FIG. 179(E) , suspensions 1 and 2 are hidden and displayed by their shadows to make it difficult to recognize the status of the suspension display. may be hidden. As a result, even though the count display with high expectations is being executed, when a new prize is won, the green or red pending display will appear, which will reduce the interest in the game. become.

In FIG. 179(F), after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. It shows an effect situation in which an effect (a cut-in effect by an ally character) that is the target of the timer effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 179(F), even in the situation where the effect (cut-in effect by the ally character) to be the target of the timer effect is being executed, the suspension 1 and 2 remain hidden and are hidden by their shadows. The pending display aspect is obscured.

In FIG. 180(G), after the effect (cut-in effect by the ally character) which is the target of the timer effect in FIG. It shows the production situation indicating that the game is fixed and stopped by the big hit pattern.

In the production situation shown in FIG. 180(G), since it is definitely suggested that a big win will occur, the game interest is lowered regardless of which mode appears as the Suspension 1 or 2 mode. There is no such thing. Therefore, regarding the suspensions 1 and 2 which are difficult to recognize, after the effect indicating whether or not the jackpot will be achieved is displayed, it is displayed in a recognizable manner. It is desirable to ensure that That is, in this case, even if it is indicated that the change display is fixed and stopped due to the fact that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, as a result of the suspension 1 and 2 modes becoming recognizable at that time, the suspension Since it may be recognized that either one of 1 and 2 is in a red or rainbow color mode, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Also, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180(G), a new timer effect is generated and its count display is started. This count display remains the remaining count number (the count number displayed at the start of the count display) even in the production situation shown in FIG. Among them, the number of counts larger than the smallest number of counts (10 seconds) is left), and the effect that is the target of the timer effect is not generated at all, and it continues even after the end of the variable display. It is executed as the special timer effect described above.

However, after this, during the period in which the opening effect is executed in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180(I), the count display of the timer effect is hidden. As a result, the variable display (symbol effect) that ends in the effect situation shown in FIG. It becomes possible to recognize that the performances are not connected to each other, and the player can enjoy the newly started performances with a fresh feeling.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even during the period when the count display of the timer effect is not displayed (execution period of the opening effect), the count display is secretly executed according to the passage of time. When the count display of the timer effect is redisplayed in the effect during the big win game (jackpot game effect) started in the effect situation shown in FIG. I'm trying to be As a result, an effect situation is created as if the remaining time until the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value has suddenly decreased. It is possible to make the display reach a predetermined numerical value, and it is possible to preferably avoid the timer effect continuing from the variable display state becoming boring.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment controls the timer effect continued from the variable display state so that the count display reaches a predetermined value within the execution period of the jackpot game. At this time, a timer-related display (here, "Let's go") indicating that a predetermined numerical value (here, 0) has been reached appears, which is the same as the timer presentation performed within the variable display period.

In FIG. 180(K), after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. It shows a performance situation in which a specific performance (corresponding to the above-described first special performance or second special performance, "CHANCE" is displayed in the figure) to be the performance target of the timer performance.

As shown in FIG. 180 (K), in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a specific effect (display of "CHANCE") can be executed within the execution period of the jackpot game, and the specific effect (" CHANCE" display) is executed, the winning jackpot is an advantageous jackpot type for the player (for example, a type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 16 rounds, or a high-probability short-time gaming state after the jackpot game ends). The type of occurrence) is shown to indicate that the degree of expectation is high. Note that the ratio may be 100%. In this way, when the above-mentioned special timer effect in which the count display is continued until after the start of the big win game is executed, not only is the big win fixed, but the winning big win is of a big win type that is advantageous to the player. Since a certain degree of expectation also increases, it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Then, after that, in a specific round game or the like, an effect is performed in which the friendly character fights against the enemy character, and as a result, the friendly character wins (FIG. 180(L)). It is shown that It should be noted that when the teammate character is defeated in the effect, it is indicated that the winning jackpot is not of a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player.

When the result of the performance during the jackpot game appears in this way, the game proceeds according to the content according to the result. Or, after the end of the big hit game, it is controlled to a high probability time saving state. On the other hand, if the result is that the ally character is defeated, the jackpot game is ended in 8 rounds, or a game state with a lower degree of advantage than the high-probability time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game (for example, low-probability time saving state, etc.) will be controlled.

Here, the effect content of the specific effect (display of “CHANCE”) shown in FIG. 180(K) may be related to the effect in which the friend character fights the enemy character in a specific round game. For example, in the specific effect shown in FIG. 180(K), the content of the effect in which the ally character obtains the weapon is set, and the effect of fighting the enemy character using the obtained weapon in the specific round game is executed. For example, in the specific effect shown in FIG. 180(K), it is possible to imply that the ally character is more likely to win the subsequent battle.

Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself that may appear when such a timer effect is executed and various effects performed in relation to the timer effect will be described. It should be noted that each of the effects described below can be executed by appropriately combining these effects, and can also be executed by appropriately combining with each of the effects described above. Also, in each of the following examples of effects, a case is described in which the effect is executed as the advance notice timer effect, but the variable timer effect may be executed instead of the advance notice timer effect. That is, in this case, the effect contents related to each of the following effect examples are determined in advance as the effect contents of the variation pattern.

[Timer exclusion effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, there are a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A action, special timer, cut-in B, character B action, etc.) as the timer-targeted presentation candidates. ) are prepared, and one of these production modes is set as a timer target (count target) (timer target advance notice lottery), and a timer performance in which a count display is performed toward the timing at which the timer target production mode appears. to run. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, a plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A action (character A notice), special timer, cut-in B, character B action (Accessory B notice)) is performed while it is unclear which one is the target of the timer, and in such a production situation, the production mode that is not the target of the timer (the timer target notice It is possible to perform a display suggesting which one is the effect mode that was not determined as a timer target by lottery (timer target exclusion effect).

That is, in this case, at the stage when the remaining count in the timer effect is being consumed, the speculation material is provided as to which effect mode is the target of the timer. For example, if a low-expectation production mode (for example, conversation notice) is suggested as a production mode that is not timer-targeted, the possibility that the low-expectation production mode will appear as a timer-targeted mode at that time is eliminated. Therefore, even at the stage of consuming the remaining count in the timer performance, the expectation for the appearance of the highly anticipated performance mode (for example, the action of the character B) as the timer target will create a game interest. It is expected that the In addition, if a high-expectation mode (for example, a character B action) is suggested as a mode of performance that is not subject to a timer, at that point in time, it is determined that there is no expectation for the timer performance, and another It is expected that the player will be able to focus on the performance, and that the decrease in interest in the game will be suppressed when the count display reaches a predetermined value. According to such a configuration, while the remaining count is consumed, the expectation for the timer effect can be appropriately changed without changing the mode of the count display itself.

FIG. 181(a) shows a second process in which a single timer is used (YES in step S5506) and a decision (NO in step S5507) is made to not execute the mission rendering (appear the conversation notice). FIG. 148 is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer target exclusion effect performed when variation numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to "no timer, character reach" are selected in the situation; FIG. 181(b) shows a second process in which a single timer is used (YES in step S5506) and a decision (NO in step S5507) is made to not execute the mission rendering (appear the conversation notice). FIG. 148 is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer-targeted exclusion effect performed when variation numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to "no timer SP reach" are selected in the situation;

In the example shown in FIG. 181(a), as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), a specific timer type (one of "holding change 5", "accessory A action 3", and "special timer 1") is selected (see FIG. 161), the timer target exclusion effect is executed, and in the example shown in FIG. 181(b), a specific timer type ( Any one of "holding change 5", "character A action 3", and "character B action 1") is selected (see FIG. 161), the timer target exclusion effect is executed.

However, the timer object exclusion effect is not performed when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). Or it may be performed based on the fact that a special result is obtained in a predetermined effect lottery based on the result of judging a big hit. Also, as will be described later, the timer target exclusion effect may be made to appear within a variation pattern in which it is determined that the timer effect is not executed, or may be made to appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. good. According to such a configuration, when it is assumed that the count display of the timer effect (with respect to the timer target first-out effect) is executed after the fact (it is unknown whether it will be executed), the effect that does not appear as the timer target It becomes possible to indicate in advance which type the mode is. In addition, when the timer effect is not executed yet (the timer prefetch effect is not even displayed) and the timer target exclusion effect appears, the timer effect is later compared to the case where the timer target exclusion effect does not appear. It is desirable that the rate at which is executed is high, and that the timer effect is also executed as an effect that preliminarily suggests that the timer effect is to be executed.

First, among the examples shown in FIG. 181(a), in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of "suspension change 5" or "character A action 3", 20 seconds have passed since the pattern variation was started. At the timing of per, a count display with a count number of 20 seconds is started, and after the count display becomes "0", the production mode ("hold change 5" or "role A action 3”) is to appear.

Further, among the examples shown in FIG. 181(b), even in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of "suspension change 5" or "character A action 3", 20 seconds have elapsed since the symbol variation was started. A count display with a count number of 20 seconds is started at the timing of the elapsed time, and after the count display becomes "0", the production mode that is the target of the timer ("hold change 5" or "accessory A action 3") is to appear.

In this regard, in the case of these examples, at the timing when 10 seconds have passed since the pattern variation was started, the timer effect is in an unexecuted state (a state in which even the timer prefetch effect is not displayed). The first timer target exclusion effect can occur. In the first timer target exclusion effect, for example, it is indicated that "conversation notice" is not a timer target candidate. is narrowed down to one of pending change, cut-in A, role A action, special timer, cut-in B, role B action. That is, in this case, among the plurality of presentation modes (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, role A action, special timer, cut-in B, role B action), the low-expectation presentation mode is excluded from the timer target candidates. Since it becomes possible to recognize that the high-expectation production mode is expected to be a candidate for the timer target, the player wishes that the timer production will occur within the fluctuation. Therefore, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be improved when the timer effect (count display) is not yet executed.

It should be noted that during the period in which the count display is not executed (in this example, the period from the start of the pattern variation until 20 seconds have passed), the above-mentioned timer prefetch effect (first preceding mode, second preceding mode, third preceding mode) may be displayed.

Next, at the timing when 20 seconds have passed since the symbol variation is started, the second timer object exclusion effect can occur in conjunction with the start of the count display in the timer effect. In the second timer-excluded effect, effects other than the effect (conversation notice) already excluded in the first timer-excluded effect are excluded. For example, in the second timer target exclusion effect, when it is indicated that "special timer" is not a timer target candidate, the timer target candidate is a pending change, cut-in A, role A action, cut-in B , and the player can grasp that the action has been narrowed down to one of the accessory B actions. In this case, among a plurality of production modes (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, character A action, special timer, cut-in B, character B action), the production mode in which the big hit is confirmed is selected from the timer target candidates. Since it becomes possible to recognize that it is off, it is possible to incite a sense of anxiety about whether a high-expectation performance will appear as a timer target in a complete change from the time when the first timer target exclusion performance is executed. Become.

Then, at the timing when 30 seconds have passed since the symbol variation was started, the third timer target exclusion effect can occur. In the third timer-excluded effect, effects other than the effects (conversation notice, special timer) already excluded in the first and second timer-excluded effects are further excluded. For example, when it is indicated that "cut-in B" is not a candidate for the timer target, the candidate for the timer target is narrowed down to one of pending change, cut-in A, role A action, and role B action. It becomes possible for the player to grasp that.

Then, at the timing when 40 seconds have passed since the start of the symbol variation, the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0), and the effect mode ("suspended change 5 ', a pending change occurs, and in the case of 'character A action 3', a character A action occurs) is executed as a timer-targeted effect.

By the way, in the timer effects of "suspended change 5" and "character A action 3" shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, in such mode timer effect (timer effect in which a timer object effect is executed when 40 seconds have passed) , it can be seen that there are only three targets for timer effects: conversation notice, pending change, and character action. That is, in this case, when the experienced player confirms that the timer effect in which the count display reaches a predetermined value at the timing of 40 seconds after the symbol variation is started, the timer target is the conversation advance notice. , hold change, cut-in A, role A action, special timer, cut-in B, role B action, but any of three of conversation notice, hold change, role A action It is assumed that the At this time, if two effects out of the conversation notice, pending change, and character A action are excluded by the timer object exclusion effect, either effect will be performed when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It is desirable to execute the timer object exclusion effect so that at least two effects are left as candidates for the timer effect because they appear or are exposed.

According to such a timer object exclusion effect, when the timer effect (count display) is in an unexecuted state or during the execution of the count display, the feeling of anticipation or anxiety (which effect is excluded from the timer target) Therefore, it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained until the count display reaches a predetermined value.

Moreover, in the examples shown in FIGS. 181(a) and 181(b), the timing for generating the timer target exclusion effect is set to the timing when the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (or the timer target effect is set according to the arrival of any of a plurality of timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds from the start of fluctuation, etc.) prepared as candidates for the timing at which

For example, looking at the time charts shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, when 45 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, even if the count display becomes 0 after that, the "role A action" is performed as the effect for the timer. It turns out that there is no possibility of appearing. In this way, in the timer effect, each timing (in this example, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds from the start of fluctuation) prepared as candidates for the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) etc.) passes, the types of effects that can appear as timer targets are also narrowed down. In this regard, by performing the timer target exclusion effect, even a beginner can perform each timing prepared as a candidate for the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc.) pass by, recognizing that the types of effects that can appear as timer objects are narrowed down, and the timer effects can be highly enjoyed. .

Therefore, among the examples shown in FIG. 181(a), an example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of "special timer 1" (a count display with a count number of 70 seconds is displayed in accordance with the start of character reach pattern variation). Example), every time 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, the first timer exclusion effect, the second timer exclusion effect, the third timer exclusion effect, 4 The timer target exclusion effect of the first time is executed respectively. Also, among the examples shown in FIG. 181(b), an example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of "Accessory B action 1" In the example where the display is performed), every time 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, the first timer object exclusion effect, the second timer object exclusion effect, the third timer The target exclusion effect, the fourth timer target exclusion effect, and the fifth timer target exclusion effect are respectively executed.

In addition, in the timer target exclusion effect according to this embodiment, every time a plurality of predetermined timings are reached after the start of the pattern variation, one effect mode that is not subject to the timer is suggested in the count effect. I made it However, it is not always necessary to execute the timer target exclusion effect each time a plurality of predetermined timings arrive, and each time these timings arrive, a predetermined probability , or the timing for executing the timer-targeted exclusion performance may be selected from those timings. Also, at this time, the execution probability of the timer-targeted exclusion effect may be varied for each of a plurality of predetermined timings. For example, at a relatively early timing (for example, the timing at which the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 181(a) may occur) after the symbol variation is started, relatively after the symbol variation is started If the execution rate of the timer-targeted exclusion effect is set to be higher than the later timing (for example, the timing at which the fourth timer-targeted exclusion effect shown in FIG. 181(a) may occur), one effect It allows the count display to be consumed over a relatively long period of time with indications that the aspect is not timered. However, in this case, when the timer-targeted exclusion effect is executed at the timing when the first timer-targeted exclusion effect can occur, and when the timer-targeted exclusion effect is performed at the timing when the fourth timer-targeted exclusion effect can occur. (or at any timing when the timer-target exclusion effect is executed), it is desirable that the ratio (expectation) of the appearance of the big-hit symbols is the same. In this case, the degree of expectation may include 100%. According to such a configuration, the timer object exclusion effect appears at an early timing (while the timer object exclusion effect is executed at a high rate) after the count display is started (after the pattern starts to fluctuate). Since they become conscious of playing games, they are expected to improve their interest in games from the beginning of the production.

In the case of realizing such an effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether the timer target Judgment as to whether to generate an exclusion effect or at which timing (maximum three timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds) in the example of FIG. 181(a)) to generate a timer target exclusion effect process. Next, at each timing when it is determined to generate the timer-targeted non-targeted performance, a determination process is performed as to which performance mode is suggested as a non-timer-targeted performance mode. 149, or after step S5510 and before step S5511. It can be performed based on the result information of the processing.

Alternatively, a dedicated (conversation notice-only) timer target exclusion effect may be performed to suggest that a specific effect mode (for example, conversation notice) is not subject to the timer. That is, in this case, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of variation pattern, or the aspect of the timer effect (for example, character reach "suspension change 5", etc.), a special timer object exclusion effect is performed. Determination processing is performed as to whether or not to generate, and furthermore, at what timing to generate a dedicated timer target exclusion effect.

In any case, when the effect mode suggested as the effect mode not targeted by the timer is the effect mode with relatively low expectations, the suggested effect mode is the effect mode with relatively high expectations. It is desirable that the ratio of appearance of the highly anticipated presentation mode as the timer-targeted presentation is higher than when . According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the dedicated timer target exclusion effect for excluding the low-expectation effect mode (conversation notice) appears.

In addition, at least at a specific timing among the plurality of timings, only a specific presentation mode (for example, "conversation notice", which is an assumedly low-expectation presentation mode) can be suggested as a presentation mode that is not subject to the timer. can be set as That is, in this case, at the time when the timer target exclusion effect occurs at a specific timing, it is understood that a specific effect mode (for example, "conversation notice", which is a hypothetical low-expectation effect mode) is not timer target. Since it becomes possible, it is possible to maintain the interest in the game by giving the player a feeling of anticipation that the performance for the timer target is a highly anticipated performance mode.

In addition, in the timer target exclusion effect according to this embodiment, one effect mode is suggested as the effect that is not subject to the timer. You may make it suggest the production|presentation aspect of. For example, if two low-expectation performances are suggested, it is possible to greatly enhance the amusement of the game even though the remaining count in the timer performance is being consumed.

Also, regarding the "display suggesting which mode is not targeted by the timer", within the period from when the count display is started until the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (or It is desirable to make it appear during the period until the performance targeted by the timer is executed, and to maintain the display during the same period. Furthermore, with respect to the "display indicating which of the effects modes is not subject to the timer", if the display is maintained even after the effect subject to the timer is executed, the timer effect can be achieved. It can be used as a material when remembering which production mode was the target of.

In addition, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, while the remaining count of the count display is being consumed (for example, a specific timer When the type of timer effect is executed, it is hidden at a predetermined timing (when the count display reaches a specific count value before reaching the predetermined value) (such as when a specific count value is reached). is maintained, the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), and an effect subject to the timer may be executed. In other words, in this case, the remaining count of the count display will be consumed without knowing when the "display suggesting which mode of presentation is not subject to the timer" will be hidden. It will be expected to maintain a sense of tension during the same period (a period in which it is easy to get into a rut). In addition, in order to obtain such a function and effect, the hidden "display indicating which mode is not subject to the timer" is subject to the timer when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It is desirable to maintain the non-display state even after the appearance of the presentation mode. However, even if the "display suggesting which of the production modes not covered by the timer" is hidden, the production once suggested as the production mode not covered by the timer will be used as the production for the timer. It is important to control it so that it does not appear, and it is possible to enjoy the timer effect with peace of mind if the memory of the hidden effect mode is not forgotten. In addition, with respect to the hidden "display that suggests which production mode is not subject to the timer", even after the count display reaches a predetermined value and the production mode that is subject to the timer appears. After the non-display state is maintained (for example, after the lapse of a predetermined time), the symbols are displayed again at a timing before the symbols are fixed and stopped to confirm whether the player's memory is correct. It is desirable to be able to do so.

Also, when the timer effect (count display) is in an unexecuted state, and the "display suggesting which effect mode is not covered by the timer" appears, the predetermined effect conditions are not met. When the condition is satisfied, the timer effect (count display) may be hidden while it is in an unexecuted state. That is, in this case, it is possible to create a sense of tension with respect to the timer effect before the count display is started, so that a sharp effect can be provided.

As will be described later, the ``display suggesting which rendering mode is not the target of the timer'' is shown in FIGS. In addition, it is sufficient if it is possible to comprehend that the effect mode will not occur when the count display reaches 0. Other methods include, for example, displaying the name of the effect mode on the effect display device 1600 and marking it with an X mark. A method of suggesting that a conversation notice or cut-in cannot be executed by showing a female character or male character dead, and a black and white pending display before the count display reaches 0 , and show that the characters A and B are inoperable due to a failure at the timing before the count display reaches 0. It is also possible to adopt a method of suggesting that the character A and B cannot be performed. The point is to prepare a special mode that cannot appear at a timing before the count display reaches 0 when it is selected as a timer target effect, and at a timing before the count display reaches 0 By executing an effect that is not subject to a timer, such as a conversation notice or a hold change, in a special mode, it is possible to realize "a display that suggests which mode of effect is not subject to a timer." .

In addition, when the timer target exclusion performance is generated, a high-expectation mode of performance as a timer target is more likely to appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value compared to when the timer target exclusion performance is not generated. If the control is performed in such a manner, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game when the remaining count is consumed by the count display will be more preferably improved.

By the way, if it is suggested in the timer-target exclusion effect that the hit-fixed effect mode (special timer) is not subject to the timer, any other effect mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Even so, there is a concern that it will be compared with the production mode (special timer) of winning determination, and the interest in the game will decrease. Therefore, when it is indicated that the performance mode (special timer) for winning is not subject to the timer, even if any other performance mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the pattern is displayed. Variation may be always stopped at a big hit symbol.

Alternatively, when the timer target exclusion performance is generated, the jackpot pattern appears regardless of which performance mode appears as the timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"). The ratio (expectation) may be the same. In this case, the degree of expectation may include 100%. That is, in this case, since there is no need to pay attention to which effect mode appears as a timer object when the count display reaches a predetermined value, substantially, the time when the timer object exclusion effect appears (remaining count The timer effect can be terminated early at the stage when the time is consumed). As a result, it is possible to shift attention to other effects even while the remaining count of the count display is being consumed, so we have designed the effect design to increase the types of effects that appear per unit time. be able to encourage

In addition, if two or more count displays (timer effect) appear within one pattern variation period and the timer target exclusion effect is executed, and then the effect situation occurs in which they reach a predetermined value at different timings, the timer It is desirable to control so that a performance mode suggested by the object exclusion performance that it is not a timer target does not appear as a timer target in any timer performance (count display).

In addition, regarding the effect mode that indicates that the timer target exclusion effect is not timer target, even if the timing is different from the timing when the count display reaches the predetermined value, it will not appear after that. It is desirable to control (control so that it does not appear even if it is not a timer-targeted effect).

Further, when the timer-targeted exclusion effect is executed, a preceding effect of whether or not to suggest that the game is not subject to the timer may be performed. That is, in this case, when the predetermined mode does not appear in the preceding performance, the timer-targeted exclusion performance is not executed, and the timer-targeted exclusion performance is executed after the predetermined mode appears in the preceding performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the timer target exclusion effect is executed in accordance with one of a plurality of timings prepared as candidates for the timing when the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, 0). However, it is sufficient that the timer target exclusion effect is executed in accordance with any one of a plurality of predetermined timings, and does not necessarily have to be executed in accordance with these timings. However, even during the period when the count display is executed, it is desirable that the timer target exclusion performance is not executed during a specific performance period such as a period when the remaining count is low.

In addition, among the timer types determined by the count display lottery (step S5510), there are those in which execution of the timer target exclusion effect is not permitted during the entire period during which the count display is executed, and during the period during which the count display is executed. Execution of the timer-targeted exclusion effect may not be allowed during a part of the period. By preparing such a special timer type, when the timer type appears, it becomes possible to concentrate on how the count display is digested, and the original timer performance can be enjoyed. become. In addition, in order to obtain such an effect, when there is a special period in which the timer-targeted exclusion effect cannot occur, a different effect mode than when it is not in the special period is made to appear. It can be said that it is important for the player to be able to recognize this fact. On the other hand, even if the timer type does not allow execution of the timer-targeted exclusion effect over the entire period in which the count display is being performed, the user cannot concentrate on the timer effect during the period before the count display is started. Since there is no concern that the player will be killed, it is desirable to allow execution of the timer target exclusion effect.

It should be noted that the period during which the above-mentioned "display suggesting which effect mode is not subject to the timer" is hidden is controlled to be the same period as the period during which execution of the effect excluded from the timer is not allowed. good too.

Further, the count display in the timer effect is executed in one of a plurality of modes including at least the first mode and the second mode, and when the count display is performed in the second mode, the first mode is displayed. Control may be performed so that the proportion of execution of the timer target exclusion effect is higher than when the count display is performed in the mode. In this case, the ratio may include 100%. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest that the timer target exclusion effect will be performed by the count display mode, and it is possible to draw attention to the effect during the count display by the count display mode.

The timer target exclusion effect is not performed when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). It may be performed based on the fact that a special result is obtained in a predetermined effect lottery based on the result of determination or the like. Also, as will be described later, the timer object exclusion effect may be made to appear within a variation pattern in which it is determined that the timer effect is not executed, or may be made to appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. good.

In addition, as described above, when the timer effect is not executed yet (the timer prefetch effect is not even displayed) and the timer target exclusion effect appears, compared to the case where the timer target exclusion effect does not appear. It is desirable that the ratio of execution of the timer performance is increased after that, and that the timer performance is also executed as a performance that preliminarily suggests that the timer performance will be executed. In this sense, the timer target exclusion effect may be executed as the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect of the timer look-ahead effect. That is, in this case, when the pattern variation for which the timer effect is executed has not yet started and is still in a pending state, the timer effect can suggest a specific effect mode that is not subject to the timer, so that the variation Speculations such as whether the timer effect appears due to the pattern variation in the inside, whether the timer effect appears due to the pattern variation in the pending state, or whether the timer effect does not appear, etc., and the specific effect mode is not targeted by the timer. It is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained until the timer effect occurs.

[Timer target first-out effect]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a counts a predetermined performance (performance B action) using a specific decorative member (performance B), and displays the count toward the timing at which the predetermined performance appears. It is executed up to a predetermined value within the period during which the pattern performance is performed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, within the period during which the symbol effect is performed, the specified By making an effect using a decorative member appear, it can be suggested that a predetermined effect is counted (timer-targeted first-out effect).

That is, in this case, by paying attention to what kind of effect appears when the remaining count in the count display is consumed, the type of effect that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. can be predicted, it is expected that the amusement of the game can be favorably maintained from the start of the count display to the time it reaches a predetermined value.

FIG. 182 shows a second processing situation in which a single-timer mode is used (YES in step S5506), and a decision (NO in step S5507) to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made, FIG. 148 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the timer-target first-out effect that is performed when variation numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to "no timer SP reach" are selected;

In the example shown in FIG. 182, for convenience of explanation, when one of the specific timer types (first-out timers 1 to 6) not illustrated in FIG. A timer target first-out effect is executed. Further, in the first-out timers 4 to 6 out of the first-out timers 1 to 6, as an effect for the timer, the character A used in the "character A action" and the character B used in the "character B action" are displayed. An effect such as "character A & B motion" is performed to move both.

However, the timer target first-out effect is not performed when a specific timer type (first-out timers 1 to 6) is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). If one of the timer types is selected, the timer target first-out effect may be performed, or the timer type is irrelevant, and a predetermined effect lottery based on the type of variation pattern and the result of the big hit determination is used. You may make it perform based on having obtained the result. Also, as will be described later, the timer target first-out effect can be made to appear within a variation pattern in which it is determined that the timer effect will not be executed, or it can be made to appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. good. According to such a configuration, when it is assumed that the count display of the timer effect (with respect to the timer target first-out effect) is executed after the fact (it is unknown whether it will be executed), the count display of the timer effect It is possible to indicate in advance which type of presentation mode appears when the value reaches a predetermined value. In this case, when the timer-targeted first-out effect appears in a state where the timer-targeted first-out effect has not yet been executed (a state in which the timer-targeted first-out effect has not even appeared), the timer-targeted first-out effect does not appear after that. It is desirable that the timer effect is executed at a high rate, and that the timer effect is also executed as an effect that preliminarily suggests that the timer effect will be executed.

Among the examples shown in FIG. 182, first, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of first-out timers 1 and 4, the count number of 50 seconds is counted at the timing around 20 seconds after the symbol variation is started. A count display is started, and after the count display reaches '0', a performance mode ('character B action' or 'character A&B action') to be targeted by the timer appears. On the other hand, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of first-out timers 2 and 5, a count display with a count number of 70 seconds is started in accordance with the start timing of the symbol variation, and the count display is "0". After that, the effect mode ("character B action" or "character A&B action") that is the target of the timer appears. On the other hand, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the modes of advance timers 3 and 6, the display of the timer prefetch effect (the first preceding mode, the second preceding mode, or the third preceding mode) is displayed in accordance with the start timing of the symbol variation. At the time when 50 seconds have passed while the display of the timer prefetch effect is displayed, the timer prefetch effect is hidden and a count display with a count number of 20 seconds is started, and the count is started. After the display becomes "0", the effect mode ("character B action" or "character A&B action") that is subject to the timer appears.

In this respect, in the case of the advance timers 1 and 4, at the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds) after the pattern fluctuation is started, the timer effect is not executed (even the timer look-ahead effect is displayed). state), the first timer-targeted first-out effect can occur. In the first timer-targeted first-out effect, for example, the character B used in the "character B action" or the "character A&B action", which are the timer-targeted effects of the first-out timers 1 and 4, is placed at or near the first position. At , an effect of rattling and vibrating (rocket B rattling) is performed.

In other words, the "character object B action", which is the timer-targeted effect of the first-out timer 1, is the "effect of displacing the character B from the first position to the second position", and is the timer-targeted effect of the first-out timer 4. "Character A & B action" is "an effect of displacing character B from the first position to the second position and displacing character A from the third position to the fourth position". In the timer-target first-out effect, although the character B used in these effects is common, an effect different from any of these effects (the character B rattling) is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the timer effect will be performed after that even though it is in the stage before the timer effect is executed. It becomes possible to suggest which presentation mode it is (suggest that it is a presentation using the character B). In addition, in the first timer-targeted first-out effect, a different effect (rocket B rattling) from the timer-targeted effect (role object B action, role object A & B action) is performed using the role object B. While suggesting that the target performance in the timer performance is the performance using the character B, how the character B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value is kept secret. Thus, it is possible to preferably maintain the amusement of the game until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer-targeted effect is performed.

In addition, in the case of the mode of first-out timers 1 and 4, at the timing when the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds) has elapsed after the symbol variation is started, the second timer object is displayed while the count display of the timer effect is being performed. Advance production may occur. In the second timer-targeted first-out effect, for example, the character B used in the "character B action" or the "character A&B action", which are the timer-targeted effects of the first-out timers 1 and 4, is moved from the "first position". An effect of displacing to a "first intermediate position between the first position and the second position" (intermediate movement of character B (small)) is performed.

That is, the second timer-target first-out effect is also common in that it uses the role B used in the "role B action" and the "role A & B action", but is different from any of these effects (role object B midway operation (small)) is to be performed. According to such a configuration, when the count display reaches a specific count value before reaching the predetermined value (when the remaining count is consumed), it is possible to determine which direction the target effect is. It becomes possible to suggest (suggest that the performance using the character B). Also, in the second timer-targeted first-out effect, a different effect (role object B middle action (small)) from the timer object effect (role object B action, role object A & B action) is performed using the role object B. By doing so, it is possible to suggest which production mode the target production in the timer production is, but how the accessory B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value is not specified. It is possible to keep the game confidential, and it is possible to preferably maintain the game interest until the count display reaches the predetermined value and the timer-targeted effect is performed.

Moreover, in the second timer-targeted first-out effect, the range of effects using the role object B (from the “first position” to the “first The range of effects (displacement from the "first position" to the "second position") that appears when the "character B action" or the "character A & B action" is performed ). Therefore, by comparing the first timer-targeted first-out effect and the second timer-targeted first-out effect, the timer-targeted effects ("role object B action" or "role object A&B action") can It will be able to provide inference material as to how it will work.

In addition, in the case of the mode of first-out timers 1 and 4, at the timing when timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds) has passed since the symbol variation was started, the third timer object is displayed while the count display of the timer effect is being performed. Advance production may occur. In the third timer-target first-out effect, for example, the role B used in the "character B action" or "character A&B action", which is the timer-targeted effect of the first-out timers 1 and 4, is moved from the first position to the "first An effect of displacing to a second intermediate position between the intermediate position of No. 1 and the second position (intermediate movement of character B (large)) is performed.

That is, although the third timer-target first-out effect is also common in that it uses the role B used in the "role B action" and the "role A & B action", it is different from any of these effects (role object B midway operation (large)) is to be performed. According to such a configuration, when the count display reaches a specific count value before reaching the predetermined value (when the remaining count is consumed), it is possible to determine which direction the target effect is. It becomes possible to suggest (suggest that the performance using the character B). Also, in the third timer-targeted first-out effect, an effect (role object B middle action (large)) different from the timer-targeted effect (role object B action, role object A & B action) is performed using the role object B. By doing so, it is possible to suggest which production mode the target production in the timer production is, but how the accessory B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value is not specified. It is possible to keep the game confidential, and it is possible to preferably maintain the game interest until the count display reaches the predetermined value and the timer-targeted effect is performed.

Moreover, in the third timer-targeted first-out performance, the range of performance using the role object B (displacement from the "first position" to the "second intermediate position") is greater than in the first and second timer-targeted first-out performances. It is larger, and it is in a mode closer to the range of effects (displacement from "first position" to "second position") that appears when "character B action" or "character A & B action" is performed. there is Therefore, by comparing the 1st to 3rd timer-targeted first-out effects, it is possible to determine how the role B operates in the timer-targeted effects ("role B action" or "role A & B action"). be able to provide more inferences about what to do.

On the other hand, in the case of the advance timers 2 and 5, at timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds), timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds), and timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds), Each effect such as "role object B intermediate action (small)" and "role object B intermediate action (large)" is performed as the first to third timer-targeted first-out effects. However, as shown in FIG. 182, in the case of the mode of first-out timers 2 and 5, at any timing of timings Ta1 to Ta3, the timer-targeted first-out effect is performed in a situation where the remaining count is consumed by the count display. It will be done.

On the other hand, even in the case of the advance timers 3 and 6, at timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds), timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds), and timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds), "role B clatter", "role Performances such as object B intermediate action (small) and character B intermediate action (large) are performed as the first to third timer-targeted advance effects. However, as shown in FIG. 182, in the case of the mode of the advance timers 3 and 6, the count display is not executed and the timer prefetch effect is displayed at each of the timings Ta1 and Ta2. Originally, the first and second timer-targeted first-out effects will be performed. According to such a configuration, although the timer-target first-out effect is executed when the count display is not yet executed, in the case of the first-out timers 1 and 4, even the timer pre-read effect is not displayed. Compared to , the rate of events such as ``the timer effect itself was not executed even though the timer target first-out effect was executed'' is reduced, so the player has a higher sense of expectation. You will be able to enjoy the timer target first-out effect.

Then, in each example shown in FIG. 182, the count display reaches a predetermined value after the first to third timer-targeted first-out effects are executed. After that, the symbol variation is stopped after the timer-targeted effect is executed.

In addition, in the timer target first-out effect according to this embodiment, each time a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3 arrive after the start of the symbol variation, "character B action" or "character A & B action" We decided to perform an effect using the role B used in. However, it is not always necessary to execute the timer target first-out effect each time a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3 arrive, and the timings ta1 to ta3 are determined based on the type of variation pattern and the result of the big hit determination. The timer-targeted first-out effect may appear with a predetermined probability each time it arrives, or the timing for executing the timer-targeted first-out effect may be selected from those timings. Further, at this time, the execution probability of the timer-target first-out effect or the selection ratio of the effect content may be varied for each of a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3.

When realizing such an effect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of variation pattern, or the aspect of the timer effect (for example, "first timer 1" of SP reach), the timer target Determination processing (see FIG. 183) is performed as to whether the first-out effect is to be generated and at which timing the timer-targeted first-out effect is to be generated. Next, determination processing (see FIGS. 184 and 185) as to which performance mode is to be executed as the timer-targeted first-out performance is performed at each timing when it is determined to generate the timer-targeted first-out performance. 149, or after step S5510 and before step S5511. It can be performed based on the result information of the processing.

FIG. 183 is a diagram showing an example of the contents (table T10) of the determination processing as to whether the timer-targeted first-out effect is to be generated and at what timing the timer-targeted first-out effect is to be generated.

As described above, the timer-targeted first-out effect is a period before the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer-targeted effect appears within the period in which the pattern effect is performed. By making the effect using the specific decorative member used in the effect appear, it is the effect that suggests that the effect using the specific decorative member is subject to the timer. Peripheral control according to this embodiment The MPU 1511a prepares three timings Ta1 to Ta3 as timings at which such a timer-targeted first-out effect can appear.

Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first refers to the table T10 shown in FIG. (or not to execute the timer-targeted first-out effect at any one of the timings Ta1 to Ta3) is selected based on the above.

As shown in FIG. 183, in the table T10, as selection candidates for execution of the timer-targeted first-out effect, "no timer-targeted first-out effect is executed at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 ("none" in the figure)"; "Perform the timer-targeted first-out effect only at timing Ta1 out of timings Ta1-Ta3 ("Ta1" in the figure)", "execute the timer-targeted first-out effect only at timing Ta2 out of timings Ta1-Ta3 (see figure 'Ta2' in the middle), 'executing the timer-target first-out effect only at the timing Ta3 out of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 ('Ta3' in the figure)', 'at the timings Ta1 and Ta2 out of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 Execute a timer-targeted first-out effect ("Ta1&2" in the figure), "execute a timer-targeted first-out effect at timings Ta1 and Ta3 of timings Ta1 to Ta3 ("Ta1&3" in the figure)," and "timing Ta1. - Execute the timer-targeted first-out effect at timings Ta2 and Ta3 of ~Ta3 ("Ta2&3" in the figure), "Execute the timer-targeted first-out effect at all timings Ta1 to Ta3 ("Ta1&2&3" in the figure). ” are available for selection.

In the example of the table T10, when the count display is not executed and the timer prefetch performance is not displayed, the performance random numbers are distributed so that the timer-target first-out performance is not performed. Therefore, in the example of the table T10, in the case of the timer types of the special timers 1 and 4, the timer target first-out effect is not performed at the timing T1, the timing T1&T2, the timing T1&T3, and the timing T1&T2&T3. However, as described above, the timer target first-out effect may be performed at these timings.

In addition, in the example of the table T10, when a variation pattern in which a big-hit symbol appears is selected, the rate at which the timer-target first-out performance is executed is higher than when a variation pattern in which no big-hit symbol appears is selected. In addition, it is set so that the number of times the timer target first-out effect is executed tends to increase.

Further, in the example of the table T10, when the specific decorative member used in the timer-targeted production is "Accessory A & B", compared to when the specific decorative member used in the timer-targeted production is "Accessory B", , is set so as to increase the rate at which the timer-targeted first-out effect is executed, and is set so that the number of times the timer-targeted first-out effect is executed tends to increase.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of performing the determination processing based on the table T10 in this way, when it is determined that the timer-targeted first-out effect is to be performed at least at one of the timings Ta1 to Ta3, when the timer-targeted first-out effect appears. A determination process for the effect type of is further performed.

FIG. 184 shows an example of the contents (table T11) of the determination processing regarding which type of effect mode to be generated at that timing when the timer target first-out effect is performed at any one of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. It is a figure which shows.

That is, when it is determined that the timer target first-out effect is to be performed at any one of the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T11 shown in FIG. Then, based on the winning/losing information, information on the type of variation pattern, information on the timer type, and the production random number assigned to the information, any type of production mode ("character B rattling", A determination is made as to whether or not to make the "character object B intermediate movement (small)" and "character object B intermediate movement (large)") appear at the one timing that has already been determined.

FIG. 185 shows an example of the content (table T12) of the determination processing regarding which type of effect mode to be generated at these timings when the timer target first-out effect is performed at any two timings of timings Ta1 to Ta3. It is a figure which shows.

That is, when it is determined that the timer target first-out effect is performed at any two timings of timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T12 shown in FIG. Then, based on the win-lose information, the information on the type of variation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random number assigned to the information, any type of effect mode ("role B rattling → role Object B rattling", "Character B rattling → Character B midway movement (small)", "Character B middle movement (small) → Role B middle movement (small)", "Character B rattling → Role B Intermediate action (large)", "Accessory B intermediate action (small) → Accessory B intermediate action (large)", "Accessory B intermediate action (large) → Accessory B intermediate action (large)") Judgment will be made as to whether or not to appear at each of the two timings that have already been judged.

For example, when it is determined based on the table T12 that "role object B rattling→role object B rattling" appears, "role object B rattling" appears at any of the two timings that have already been determined. It is executed as a timer-targeted first-out effect, and when it is determined based on the table T12 that "Rack of character B → mid-way action of character B (small)" appears, the above-mentioned two judgments have already been made. At the earlier of the timings, "Ranko B Rattling" is executed as a timer-targeted first-out effect, and at the later of the two timings that have already been determined, "Ranko B halfway action (small)" is performed. will be executed as a timer-target first-out effect.

FIG. 186 shows an example of the contents (table T13) of the determination processing regarding which type of effect mode to be generated at these timings when the timer target first-out effect is performed at all timings Ta1 to Ta3. It is a diagram.

That is, when it is determined that the timer target first-out effect is performed at all timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T13 shown in FIG. Then, based on the win-lose information, the information on the type of variation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random number assigned to the information, any type of effect mode ("role B rattling → role Object B rattling → Object B rattling", "Object B rattling → Object B rattling → Object B mid-movement (small)", "Object B rattling → Object B mid-movement (small) → Object B midway action (small)", "role object B midway action (small) → role B midway action (small) → role B midway action (small)", "role object B rattling → role B rattling → role B midway Action (Large)", "Character B rattling → Role B middle movement (small) → Role B middle movement (large)", "Character B middle movement (small) → Role B middle movement (small) → Role B intermediate movement (large)", "Character B intermediate movement (small) → Role B intermediate movement (large) → Role B intermediate movement (large)", "Character B intermediate movement (large) → role Object B mid-way action (large)→Accessory B mid-way action (large)") is to be made to appear at each of the three timings that have already been determined.

For example, when it is determined based on the table T13 that "role object B rattles → character object B rattles → role object B rattles" appears, the "role Object B rattling" is to be executed as a timer-targeted first-out effect, and based on the table T13, it is determined that "Racking of character B → Interim movement of character B (small) → Intermediate movement of character B (large)" will appear. is performed, at the first timing out of the three timings that have already been determined, "role object B clattering" is executed as a timer-target first-out effect, and from the three timings that have been determined, At the second timing of , the "role item B intermediate action (small)" is executed as a timer-targeted first-out effect, and at the third timing out of the three timings that have already been determined, the "role item B intermediate action ( Large)” will be executed as a timer-target first-out effect.

Note that in the examples of tables T11 and T12, the determination process is performed in the same manner (selection ratio) regardless of at which of timings Ta1 to Ta3 it is determined that the timer-target first-out effect will appear. The determination process may be performed in a different mode (selection ratio) depending on at which of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 it is determined that the timer-target first-out effect should appear. For example, if the timing at which it is determined that the timer-target first-out effect is to appear is later, the determination process is performed in such a manner that the ratio of selection of the effect mode with a larger effect range increases. It is possible to estimate how much remaining time is left until the target performance is performed based on the size of the range of the performance that appears in the timer target first-out performance. In this case, as will be described later with reference to FIG. Making it difficult to visually recognize the count display during the execution of the first-out effect (in-process action of character B (small), "in-process action of character B (large)) is a good way to obtain such an effect. As a result, if the timer-targeted first-out effect is executed without paying much attention to the count display, even if the timer-targeted first-out effect is executed at the same timing, the timer-targeted effect will be displayed depending on the type of effect that appears at that time. (when the scope of the production is large), or feel that there is time left before the production of the timer target is carried out (when the scope of the production is small) ), and after that, it is expected that it will be interesting by making it possible for a gap to occur when the accurate remaining count is grasped.At this time, the timer target first-out production The count display may be hidden during execution, and the count display may be redisplayed when the timer-target first-out effect ends.

However, if the specific decorative member (here, the accessory B) is operated in a manner that overlaps the count display of the timer effect when viewed from the front, and the count display is made difficult to see during the execution of the timer target first-out effect ( Alternatively, if the count display is hidden), the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer-targeted effect is being executed even though the timer-targeted first-out effect is being executed. There is a concern that Therefore, it is desirable to make the count display difficult to visually recognize during execution of the timer-target first-out effect, while continuing to execute the count sound generated in accordance with the execution of the count display. In other words, the output of such a count sound is terminated when the count display reaches a predetermined value. By continuously outputting the count sound during the execution of the performance, it is expected to suppress misunderstanding that the performance targeted by the timer is being executed.

In addition, in the examples of tables T11 to T13, when a variation pattern in which a big win pattern appears is selected, a performance with a larger range of performance in the timer target first-out performance is compared to a variation pattern in which no big win pattern appears is selected. It is set so that the rate of mode selection is high.

In addition, in the examples of tables T11 to T13, when the specific decorative member used in the timer-targeted production is "Accessory A & B", when the specific decorative member used in the timer-targeted production is "Accessory B", In comparison, it is set so that the ratio of selection of a rendering mode with a large rendering range in the timer-target first-out rendering is high.

In addition, in the examples of the tables T12 and T13, when the later timing among the timings Ta1 to Ta3 is the earlier timing among the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the rendering mode has a larger rendering range in the timer-target first-out rendering. is set so that the rate of selection is high. Therefore, whether or not there is not much time left until the timer-targeted performance is performed can be estimated based on the size of the range of the performance that appears in the timer-targeted first-out performance.

In addition, in the examples of tables T12 and T13, basically, as time elapses, the range of effects in the timer-target first-out effect ) is expanding, and even if the status quo is maintained (such as role object B rattling → role object B rattling, etc.), the opposite (a mode in which the rendering range narrows) does not occur. That is, in this case, as the time elapses, the range of the effect that appears when the timer-targeted "character B action" or "character A & B action" is performed is approached. By confirming the performance, it becomes possible to recognize that the remaining time until the timer-targeted ``character B action'' or ``character A&B action'' is performed is short.

In addition, in the timer-targeted first-out effect according to this embodiment, the specific decorative member (accessory B) used for the timer-targeted effect (for example, the action of the accessory B) is always used, but the timer-targeted effect ( For example, instead of using the specific decorative member (accessory B) that is used during the action of accessory B, a different decorative member (for example, accessory A) may be used to perform the timer-target first-out effect. That is, in this case, the timer-target first-out effect functions as an effect that suggests with a predetermined accuracy the type of effect that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. In the case of realizing such a timer-targeted first-out effect, the type of effect to appear as the timer-targeted first-out effect (rocket B rattling, role B intermediate action (small), role B intermediate action (large)) Also, it is desirable to vary the rate (precision) at which the type of suggested effect appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value, depending on the number of executions. For example, when a type of effect with a large range of effects (role object B intermediate action (large)) appears, compared to when a type of effect with a small range of effects (role object B rattling) appears When the count display reaches a predetermined value, the ratio of appearance of the performance (the role B action, the role A & B action) using the specific decorative member (the role B) used in the production is increased, or When the number of executions of the timer-targeted first-out performance within the fluctuation is large, compared to when the number of executions is small, the performance (the role B It may be so arranged that the rate of appearance of the action, character A & B action) increases when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, there are a plurality of production modes including "role B action" and "role A & B action" ("role B action", "role A & B action"). On the premise that any of the performance modes that do not use the accessory B) can appear other than the "action", the performance using the specific decorative member (accessory B) is performed as the timer target first-out presentation. and However, on the premise that only one of "Accessory B action" and "Accessory A & B action" is prepared as a production mode using Accessory B, a specific decorative member (Accessory An effect using B) may be performed.

For example, while only "Accessory A & B action" can appear as a production mode using Accessory B as a timer-targeted production, a specific decorative member (Accessory B) is used as a timer-targeted first-out production. In the case of performing the performance using the timer object, only a part of the decoration member (accessory B) used in the timer-targeted performance (accessory A & B operation) is used in the timer-targeted first-out performance. That is, in this case, when the count display reaches a predetermined value due to the timer-targeted first-out effect, while suggesting that the "effect using the character B" will appear, the "effect using the character B" will appear. It becomes more difficult to predict the whole picture (using the role A as well as the role B), and this can be kept secret. Therefore, the performance of the object B when the count display reaches a predetermined value is achieved by performing a plurality of times of the timer target first-out effect (Rack of the object B → Intermediate action of the object B (small) → Intermediate action of the object B (large)). Even if the effect of approaching the range is executed and its prediction is made possible, the effect range and even the existence of the role object A are kept secret, so the timer when the count display reaches the predetermined value. It is possible to suitably maintain the content of the target performance (accessory A & B action) in a secret state. At this time, the operation mode of the accessory B when the accessory A & B action is performed may be performed as a timer-targeted first-out effect.

According to such a configuration, the timer-targeted first-out effect is performed using only a part of the roles A and B (the role B) used in the "role product A & B action", which is the timer-targeted effect. Of course, in the timer-targeted first-out effect, only a part of the objects A and B (object B) used in the "object A&B operation" is used, and the effect range of the object B in the "object A&B operation" is used. Only a part of the production (character B midway motion (small), character B midway motion (large)) appears. Then, after such a small effect range is gradually expanded by a plurality of timer-targeted first-out effects, only the role object B is expanded in a larger effect range by performing the "role object A & B action", which is a timer-targeted effect. Since an effect using the accessory A also appears instead, the novelty of the timer-targeted effect is lost by performing the timer-targeted first-out effect when the remaining count is consumed. It is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained without any problems.

Also, in this embodiment, the specific decorative member used in the timer-targeted first-out effect and the specific decorative member used in the timer-targeted effect (effect when the count display reaches a predetermined value) are completely matched. However, they do not necessarily have to match perfectly, and it is sufficient if the timer-targeted first-out effect can suggest which effect mode will appear as the timer-targeted effect. For example, as the fan-shaped accessory, a "relatively small fan-shaped accessory" and a "relatively large fan-shaped accessory" are overlapped in a front view, and the timer target first-out effect is performed. The specific decorative member used in the above is a "relatively small fan-shaped accessory", and the specific decorative member used in the timer target production is a "relatively large fan-shaped accessory". However, the fan-shaped accessory is used as the timer-target advance effect at the stage before the performance using the fan-shaped accessory is performed as the timer-targeted effect (while the count display is being performed). It is possible to perform.

Also, in this embodiment, the accessory is used as the specific decorative member, but instead of this, the display means may be used as the specific decorative member. When the display means is used as the specific decorative member, the same effect as the above-described effect using the accessory is realized by enlarging the display area (effect range) or by varying the display content. Is possible.

By the way, it is desirable to terminate the "effect using the specific decorative member" performed as the timer-targeted first-out effect after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If the specific decorative member is an accessory, control is performed to return the specific decorative member to the original position after the lapse of a predetermined time, and if the specific decorative member is display means, after the lapse of the predetermined time, Control is performed to hide the display as the timer-target first-out effect. At this time, it is desirable that the predetermined time required for the timer-targeted first-out effect is shorter than the time required for the effect (timer-targeted effect) that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. In this way, by realizing different presentation modes depending on the length of time, in the timer-targeted first-out presentation, the specific decorative member used in the timer-targeted presentation is limited to an unsatisfactory degree of presentation. Therefore, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest in the game by waiting impatiently for the count display to reach the predetermined value.

[Resurrection timer effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the count display is hidden, a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, character A action, special timer, cut-in B, character B , etc.) can be executed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, after the count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden, when the first effect mode (for example, conversation announcement) appears among the plurality of effect modes, Even so, the count display is redisplayed after this to further continue the timer effect. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the count display was redisplayed, the count display is hidden again, and the second effect mode (for example, the character A action (the character A advance notice)) appears among the plurality of effect modes. I'm doing it (resurrection timer effect).

That is, in this case, after showing as if the first effect mode was a timer target (count target), the count display is redisplayed to further continue the timer effect, and the second effect mode different from the first effect mode is displayed. Since it is indicated that the effect mode of is a timer target, even if the count display reaches a predetermined value at the timing when the effect with a relatively low degree of expectation appears and this is hidden , it becomes possible to be aware of the possibility that the timer target will be changed after that, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

FIG. 187(a) shows a second process in which a single timer is used (YES in step S5506) and a decision (NO in step S5507) is made to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear). In the situation, it is determined that the number of advance notices is 2 (step S5523), and it is decided to perform "conversation notice" at the earlier timing and to perform "character A action 1" at the later timing. 148 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of a resurrection timer effect performed when variation numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to , "no timer, character reach" are selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 187(a), for convenience of explanation, when a specific timer type (not only the role A action 1 but also a plurality of timer types may be selected) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). (See FIG. 161), the following processing relating to the resurrection timer effect is executed. However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing regarding the resurrection timer effect is not performed. You may make it perform the following processing about.

As shown in FIG. 187(a), assuming that the timer type of "Accessory A action 1" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the following processing. The selected "role A action 1" is subjected to a plurality of production modes ("role A action 1-1", "role A action 1-2", "role A action 1 -3", "Accessory A action 1-4"). In addition, it is desirable that the determination process is performed based on the result of the big hit determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

In the example shown in FIG. 187(a), in the aspect of "role product A operation 1-1", 20 seconds after the count display with the count number of 40 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the pattern variation. When the time elapses, the "conversation notice" that is not subject to the timer is executed, and when 40 seconds have elapsed, the predetermined value is reached and the count display is hidden, and the timer is subject. "Character A action (character A notice)" is executed.

On the other hand, in the mode of "role item A operation 1-2", after the count display with the count number of 20 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the pattern variation, the predetermined value is reached when 20 seconds have passed. When the count display is hidden, the "conversation notice" (first effect mode) not targeted by the timer is executed, but when the "conversation notice" ends, the count display is After a predetermined period of time has passed (40 seconds after the count display with the count number of 20 seconds has started), the count display is hidden again. "Role thing A action (Role thing A notice)" (second presentation mode) that is subject to the timer is executed.

On the other hand, in the mode of "character A operation 1-3", the count display with the count number of 12 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the pattern variation, and the predetermined value is reached when 12 seconds have passed. While the count display is hidden, the notice E2 (first effect mode) is executed as a non-objective notice that cannot be a timer-targeted effect, but the notice E2 (non-target notice) ends. Then, the count display is redisplayed to continue the timer effect, and after a predetermined period of time (40 seconds after the start of the count display with the count number of 12 seconds), the count display is performed. is hidden again, and the "character A action (character A notice)" (second effect mode) which is subject to the timer is executed.

On the other hand, in the mode of "character A operation 1-4", the count display with the count number of 8 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the pattern variation, and the predetermined value is reached when 8 seconds have passed. With the count display hidden, the notice E1 (first effect mode) is executed as a non-target notice that cannot be a timer-targeted effect, but the notice E1 (non-target notice) is executed. When finished, the count display is redisplayed to continue the timer effect, and after a predetermined time has passed (after 40 seconds have passed since the count display with the count number of 8 seconds has started), the count is counted. The display is hidden again, and the "character object A action (character object A notice)" (second effect mode) that is subject to the timer is executed.

That is, among the plurality of presentation modes prepared corresponding to the "role A action 1", "role A action 1-2", "role A action 1-3", and "role A action 1-4” corresponds to the resurrection timer effect. In these resurrection timer effects, the count display is temporarily hidden after the start of the count display until the timer-targeted effect (role A action) is performed, and the timer-targeted effect ( Since the conversation notice, the notice E2, or the notice E1) appears, it is possible to make the player feel as if the timer effect has ended when the effect appears.

In this respect, in the mode of "character A action 1-2", there are a plurality of production modes that can be employed as timer targets (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, role A action, special timer, cut-in B , role B action, etc.), the resurrection timer production is performed for the production (conversation notice) that has a lower expectation of a big hit than the production (character A action) targeted for the timer (first production mode). I am planning to do it. That is, in this case, after the effect (conversation notice) with a low expectation of a big hit is shown as if it appeared as a timer-targeted effect, it is indicated that the effect (conversation notice) is not a timer-targeted effect (count display is redisplayed), and the production (role A action) with a higher expectation of a big hit than the production (conversation notice) appears as the production for the timer (second production mode) (the count display is turned off again). display), it is expected that such a reversible effect will improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the aspects of "character A action 1-3" and "character A action 1-4", there are a plurality of production modes (for example, notice E1, notice E2, notice E3, notice F etc.), the resurrection timer effect is performed on one of the objects (first effect mode). With such a configuration, when the effect mode (here, notice E2 or notice E1) that cannot be adopted as a timer object appears as if it were a timer object effect, the timer effect is not terminated at this timing. It will be suggested that it will be continued in the future. That is, in this case, especially, the advance notice E1 that appears when the mode of "role product A action 1-4" is executed has a low degree of expectation itself, but the timer effect is continued without ending at this timing. By functioning as an effect that suggests, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the game interest. It should be noted that a plurality of presentation modes (for example, notice E1, notice E2, notice E3, notice F, etc.) that cannot be used as targets for the timer can appear even when timer effects are not performed.

In addition, in each aspect of "Role A action 1-2", "Role A action 1-3", and "Role A action 1-4" according to this embodiment, when the count display is started, Numerical values different from 40 seconds (20 seconds, 12 seconds, 8 seconds, etc.) are displayed. Even while the display is temporarily hidden, the effect timer is internally updated continuously, so that the timer target effect ( The character A action) is made to appear. According to such a configuration, any one of "character A action 1-1", "character A action 1-2", "character A action 1-3", and "character A action 1-4" Even when the role A operation 1 is executed in the mode, the count display can be hidden again at the same timing from the start of the fluctuation, and the performance (the role A operation) for the timer can be made to appear.

And in such a resurrection timer effect, "the count display that appeared before it was hidden once" and "the count display that was redisplayed after being hidden once" are different count digests. It is important to make it possible to recognize that the same count is being consumed, rather than that it is doing so, in order to suggest that the timer effect is continuing and not ending in the middle. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 187(a), in the mode of "character A action 1-2", the count display is hidden when the count display with the count number of 20 seconds becomes "0 seconds". However, after the "conversation notice" ends, the count display is redisplayed with a minus notation, so that at "0 seconds" when it is hidden, I am trying to express the state that the count digestion is not finished and this is continuing.

Also, as shown in FIG. 187(a), in the aspect of "character A action 1-2", the count is secretly continued even while the count display is hidden, The count display is redisplayed after the hidden time has been counted. More specifically, in the aspect of "role A action 1-2", the count display is hidden at "0 seconds", and after the non-display state is maintained for 2 seconds, the count display is redisplayed. However, when the count display is redisplayed, a negative count is performed from "-2 seconds" to 18 seconds.

Then, in each example shown in FIG. 187(a), the pattern variation is stopped after the timer-targeted effect is thus executed.

In the case of realizing such a resurrection timer effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines the result of the big hit, the type of variation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, character reach "character A action 1"). Then, determination processing (see FIG. 187(b)) is performed as to whether the resurrection timer effect is to be generated and in which mode the resurrection timer effect is to be generated. It should be noted that this determination process can be performed, for example, after step S5510 shown in FIG. 149 is performed and before step S5511 is performed, based on the result information of each process before that. It is possible.

FIG. 187(b) shows that when the timer type of "role A action 1" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the "role A action 1" including the aspect of the resurrection timer effect is displayed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the content of determination processing (table T14) regarding which of a plurality of presentation modes is to be executed.

As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the "character A action 1" of character reach is selected, the "character A action 1" is changed to the "character A action 1-1". , "Role A action 1-2", "Role A action 1-3", and "Role A action 1-4".

Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first refers to the table T14 shown in FIG. Based on the effect random number, any mode of "character A action 1-1", "character A action 1-2", "character A action 1-3", and "character A action 1-4" to select whether to execute the timer effect.

As a result, when it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in one of the modes of "role A action 1-3" and "role A action 1-4", in the processing of steps S5512 and S5525 , the type of non-target notice is determined based on the determined type. For example, when it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in the mode of "role A action 1-3", it is determined in the processing of steps S5512 and S5525 that at least the notice E2 is to be executed as the non-target notice. Therefore, when it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in the mode of "accessory A operation 1-4", in the processing of steps S5512 and S5525, at least the notice E1 is executed as a non-target notice. A judgment will be made.

In the example of the table T14, when the resurrection timer effect is executed targeting the effect mode (conversation notice) that can be adopted as the timer object, the effect mode (notice E1, E2) that cannot be adopted as the timer object is executed. It is set so that the degree of expectation for a big win is higher than when the targeted resurrection timer effect is executed. Further, when a resurrection timer effect is executed targeting a highly anticipated effect mode (announcement E1, E2) that cannot be adopted as a timer object, the effect mode (announcement) that cannot be adopted as a timer object is executed. It is set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than when the resurrection timer effect is executed targeting the effect mode with the low degree of expectation among E1 and E2). In addition, in the example of the table T14, when a variation pattern in which a big win pattern appears is selected, the ratio of executing the resurrection timer effect is higher than when a variation pattern in which no big win pattern appears is selected. is set to

According to such a resurrection timer effect, the non-display of the count display causes the effect mode (first effect mode) with a low degree of expectation to appear once, which temporarily gives the player a sense of regret, but after that, the count continues. The display is redisplayed to continue this, and after a predetermined time, the continued count display is hidden again to make the highly anticipated performance mode (second performance mode) appear. As a result, it is possible to give the player, who has been paying attention to the count display, a sense of disappointment temporarily, while at the same time, it is possible to give unexpectedness and surprise by the continuation of the count and the reversal effect, and the interest in the game has decreased compared to the past. can be suppressed.

In this sense, an effect mode with a high expectation (second effect mode) is executed as an effect using two different decorative members, and then an effect mode with a low expectation (first effect mode) is executed. Execution using only one of the above two different decorative members (or a decorative member related thereto) is desirable in order to express the reversibility of the revival timer effect. At this time, one of the two different decorative members may not necessarily be exactly the same when used in the second presentation mode and when used in the first presentation mode. For example, as fan-shaped accessories, a "relatively small fan-shaped accessory" and a "relatively large fan-shaped accessory" are arranged to overlap each other in a front view. The decorative member used in the mode is a "relatively small fan-shaped accessory", and the decorative member used in the second production mode is a "relatively large fan-shaped accessory". However, it is possible to clearly indicate that the performance performed as the first performance mode has a lower degree of expectation.

In addition, in such a resurrection timer effect, "the count display that appeared before it was once hidden" and "the count display that was redisplayed after being hidden" are different counts. In order to make it possible to recognize that you are doing the same count digestion instead of digestion, even while the count display is hidden, the count sound is "hidden once It is desirable to continue execution over "the count display that appeared before it was displayed" and "the count display that was redisplayed after being hidden".

Further, in this embodiment, the resurrection timer effect is performed only once within the period in which one symbol variation is performed, but the resurrection timer effect is performed a plurality of times in the period in which one symbol variation is performed. may be executed over a period of time. Also, at this time, the same effect mode may be repeatedly displayed each time the count display is hidden. Then, as the number of times the resurrection timer effect is executed within the period in which one symbol variation is performed increases, the effect mode (the effect type and the effect content (cut-in mode, etc.)) with high expectations as the effect for the timer. It is desirable that the appearance ratio of is high.

In addition, in the resurrection timer effect, the time from when the count display is hidden until the first effect mode (conversation notice, notice E1, E2, etc.) appears, and after the redisplayed count display is hidden again. By varying the length of time until the second effect mode (personal object A action) appears, it is possible to recognize whether or not the effect targeted by the timer is present. It is desirable to

In addition, in order to improve the game interest as a timer effect, when the resurrection timer effect is executed targeting the effect mode (conversation notice) that can be adopted as the timer object, the effect mode that cannot be adopted as the timer object is executed. Compared to the case where the resurrection timer effect is executed targeting (announcement E1, E2), a more expected effect mode (effect type and effect content (cut-in mode, etc.)) appears as the timer target effect. It is desirable to control so that the ratio is high. Further, when a resurrection timer effect is executed targeting a highly anticipated effect mode (announcement E1, E2) that cannot be adopted as a timer object, the effect mode (announcement) that cannot be adopted as a timer object is executed. E1, E2), compared to the case where the resurrection timer effect is executed targeting the effect mode with the low expectation, the effect mode with the higher expectation (the type of effect and the contents of the effect (cut-in It is desirable to control so that the rate at which )) appears is high.

Further, in the resurrection timer effect according to this embodiment, after the count display reaches a predetermined value ("0" in this case) and is hidden, the first effect mode appears and the first effect is executed. When the mode is finished, the count display is redisplayed, the count display is negatively counted, and after it reaches a specific negative value and is hidden, the second effect mode appears. If the first effect mode or the second effect mode is caused to appear while it is hidden, the count display is hidden when the first effect mode or the second effect mode appears. Each count value may be set as appropriate.

[Restriction control for timer]
In other words, effects that are subject to timer effects (count targets) are often those that can be executed even when timer effects are not being performed. Effects (e.g., conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, character A action, cut-in B, character B action, etc.), predetermined effects (e.g., pending change, etc.) executed at the timing of winning a prize, etc. be prepared. However, among these, "specific effects that are executed at predetermined timing based on fluctuation patterns" are subject to timer effects (count targets), and when the count display reaches a predetermined value, a new prize will be won. occurs by chance and a predetermined effect (for example, a hold change) occurs, the predetermined effect is generated in relation to the count display reaching a predetermined value as the target of the timer effect. Or, it is difficult to understand whether the predetermined effect has occurred due to the occurrence of a new prize as a effect unrelated to the timer effect (confused situation). ) (for example, conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, character A action, cut-in B, character B action, etc.) may be missed.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a specific type of timer effect is executed with a specific type of timer effect as a target, the remaining time until the count display in the specific type of timer effect reaches a predetermined value In the first period when there is a relatively large number of wins, the display of a predetermined effect that is not subject to the timer is allowed when a new winning occurs. In the second period when the remaining time until reaching 0 is relatively short, the display of the predetermined performance not targeted by the timer is not permitted even if a new prize is won (timer targeted suppression control). As a result, in a situation where a specific type of count effect is executed with a specific effect as the target of the timer, the occurrence of the predetermined effect that is not the target of the timer due to the occurrence of a new prize is permitted, but the count display is performed as the target of the timer effect. It is difficult to grasp whether the predetermined effect occurred in relation to reaching the predetermined value, or whether the predetermined effect occurred due to the occurrence of a new winning as a effect unrelated to the timer effect (confused) It becomes possible to suitably avoid such a situation.

FIG. 188(a) shows a second process in which a single timer is used (YES in step S5506) and a decision (NO in step S5507) is made to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear). 10 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of timer-targeted suppression control that is performed when a specific variation number is selected in a situation;

As shown in FIG. 188(a), in a specific timer type, first, a count with a count number of 20 seconds after a predetermined timing (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the pattern variation was started. Display starts. Then, after the count display becomes "0", the specific effect targeted by the timer appears. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the period from the start of symbol variation to a specific count value (for example, "5 seconds") before the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0 seconds") (First period) allows the display of a predetermined effect that is not subject to the timer when a new winning occurs (allowable period), but after the count display reaches a specific count value (for example, "5 seconds") In a predetermined period (second period), even if a new prize is won, a timer-targeted suppression control that does not allow the display of a predetermined effect that is not timer-targeted is performed (suppression period).

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 188(a), in the timer-targeted suppression control according to this embodiment, the suppression period (second period) during which the display of the predetermined effect is not allowed is defined as "the count display is a specific count value ( For example, "5 seconds") until the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds") and the specific effect targeted by the timer is executed (finished)", It is supposed to continue over "the period after the end of the specific effect". That is, in this case, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds") and a specific effect that is subject to the timer occurs, the occurrence of the effect itself is suppressed, so it is subject to the timer. To suitably maintain a game interest when a count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, ``0 seconds'') by making the specific performance function as a valuable performance generation opportunity, improving attention to the specific performance. will be expected.

However, as shown in FIG. 188(a), in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a predetermined time ((for example, "5 seconds") has elapsed after the specific effect targeted by the timer has ended. When the time is up, the suppression period (second period) that does not allow the display of the predetermined effect that is not subject to the timer is terminated.According to such timer-targeted suppression control, the pattern fluctuation stops after the suppression period ends. During the period until a new prize is won, the display of the predetermined effect that is not subject to the timer is permitted again.

By the way, as described above, during the suppression period, even if a new prize is won, the display of the predetermined effect that is not subject to the timer is not permitted. However, in this case, there is a concern that the player may play a game that does not generate a new winning during the suppression period in which the display of the predetermined effect is not allowed even if a new winning is generated, and the progress speed of the game per unit time. is reduced, which may cause disadvantages on the hall side.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if a new winning occurs during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect caused by this is not permitted. does not discard the display of the predetermined effect itself, but rather delays (holds over) the timing of performing the display until the end of the suppression period. According to such a configuration, even if a new winning occurs during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect caused by this is not permitted, but the display of the predetermined effect is preferably executed. Since it becomes possible to play a game that does not generate a new prize during the suppression period, it is suppressed to play a game.

In addition, when a new winning occurs within the allowable period and a predetermined effect is displayed, sound output is performed in accordance with the display of the predetermined effect. In the case of delaying (carrying over) the display of the effect until the end of the suppression period, it is desirable not to output the sound corresponding to the display when the predetermined effect is displayed. As a result, the display of the predetermined effect can be performed secretly at a timing different from normal (at the time of winning), and when the player sees the predetermined effect that is displayed without the player's knowledge, the player will be surprised. It is expected that the provision of the game will improve the interest in the game.

In addition, regarding the suppression period that occurs from the timing (specific count value) before the start of the execution period of the effect that is the target of the timer to the timing after the end of the execution period, the timer target It is desirable to control so that it does not necessarily occur when a certain effect is performed.

For example, when the timer effect is performed, such a suppression period is generated with a predetermined probability, and when the big win is won in the big win determination, it is compared to when the big win is lost. Then, by increasing the rate of occurrence of such a restraint period, when a prize is generated aiming at the timing before and after the timer-targeted effect is performed, a predetermined effect resulting from the win is generated. (whether there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot due to the suppression period), and a new prize is generated during the suppression period Playing a game that does not allow the player to play is suppressed.

In addition, the rate at which the suppression period occurs is made different depending on the type of presentation mode that appears as the presentation for the timer (e.g., conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, role A action, cut-in B, role B action, etc.). In this way, when a winning is generated within a period before the timer-targeted effect is performed, whether or not a predetermined effect due to the winning is generated (a suppression period has occurred and a specific type of effect is likely to be executed as a timer target), and it is suppressed that games that do not generate new winnings are played during the suppression period. will be

FIG. 188(b) is a diagram showing an example of a table (table T15) referred to in the timer-targeted suppression control when the rate at which the suppression period occurs is varied depending on the type of effect mode that appears as the timer-targeted effect. .

As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as the timer-targeted effects, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc. are prepared. .

In this respect, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188(b), basically, the lower the expectation of a big hit is, the lower the ratio of occurrence of the suppression period before and after the performance of the timer-targeted effect. It is set so that the rate of occurrence of the suppression period extending before and after execution of the timer-targeted effect increases as the degree of the effect mode increases.

More specifically, when the timer-targeted effect is "conversation notice", the suppression period is not always generated, and when the timer-targeted effect is "Cut-in A", the suppression period is reduced to 20%. When the effect for the timer is "cut-in B", the suppression period is generated at a rate of 40%, and the effect for the timer is "character A action". At certain times, the suppression period is generated at a rate of 60%. When the effect of is "special timer", the suppression period is always generated.

According to such a configuration, the ratio of generating the suppression period before and after the execution of the timer-targeted performance increases as the performance mode with a higher degree of expectation for the big hit is generated, so that the predetermined performance is generated by the new prize winning. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking a performance mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. To put it the other way around, the lower the expectation of a big win, the higher the possibility of overlooking it, so when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the performance mode with a low expectation of a big win appears. It is possible to proceed with the performance while keeping the fact that the player was playing secret, and it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained until the symbols are stopped.

In addition, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188(b), regardless of whether or not the jackpot has been won, the rate of occurrence of the suppression period is determined according to the type of effect mode appearing as the effect for the timer. there is Therefore, if the type of the performance mode appearing as the timer-targeted performance is the same, the suppression period can be generated at the same rate regardless of whether the jackpot is won or the prize is lost. .

By the way, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188(b), when the effect targeted by the timer is "suspension change", the suppression period is always generated in spite of the fact that the expected degree of big hit is relatively low. I'm trying That is, the "suspension change" according to this embodiment can be displayed not only as a specific effect that is subject to the timer, but also as a predetermined effect that is not subject to the timer when a new prize is won. Therefore, if there is a case where the suppression period does not occur when such a "suspension change" occurs, the "suspension change (fluctuating symbol There is a possibility that "change in pending display corresponding to pending pattern)" and "pending change (change in pending display corresponding to pending pattern)" due to new winnings may occur at the same time, and there is concern that they may be confused. be. Therefore, it is desirable to always generate the restraint period when the effect targeted by the timer is "suspension change". However, as described above, as with the "conversation notice", the possibility of overlooking the "suspended change" is also increased, and when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the production mode with a low expectation of a big hit. If the aim is to proceed with the performance while keeping the appearance secret, control may be performed so that the restraint period does not occur even when the performance targeted by the timer is "suspension change".

In addition, in the example of the table T15 shown in FIG. 188(b), the rate at which the suppression period occurs differs depending on the type of the effect mode that appears as the effect for the timer. Even in this mode, the rate at which the suppression period occurs may be further varied according to the timer type determined by the count display lottery (FIG. 149: step S5510).

For example, even if "conversation notice" is selected as a timer-targeted effect, the "conversation notice" may be "conversation notices 1 to 4" shown in FIG. It is desirable to change the rate of occurrence of the suppression period according to which one of "conversation notices 1 to 6" corresponds. In this case, the rate of occurrence may include 100% and 0%.

Also, the effect for the timer is any of "conversation notice", "hold change", "cut-in A", "special timer", "character A action", "cut-in B", and "character B action". When , at a predetermined rate, the suppression period may be generated not only for a predetermined period before and after execution of the timer-targeted effect, but also for the entire period from the start to the stop of the pattern variation. In particular, when the performance of the timer target is the "special timer" with the highest degree of expectation for the big hit, the suppression period is always generated over the entire period from the start of the symbol variation to the stop, so that the "special timer" is generated. ' may be made to heighten expectations for the performance of '.

Further, in this embodiment, even if a new prize is won during the suppression period, the display itself of the predetermined effect resulting from this is not discarded, and the display is performed only when the suppression period ends. Although control is performed to delay (carry over) until the display of the predetermined effect, the display itself of the predetermined effect may be discarded and not performed.

[Timer effect with new timer as target]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the count display is being executed within the period during which the symbol effect is being performed, a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation notice, pending change, etc.) prepared as candidates to be counted , cut-in A, character A action, cut-in B, character B action, etc.) can be executed to hide the count display in accordance with the timing at which at least one of them appears. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, after preparing a "specific effect mode" as one of the plurality of effect modes that appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the "specific effect mode" is prepared. When "mode" appears, a count display (second count display) different from the count display (first count display) up to that point is newly started.

That is, in this case, since the count display as the timer effect is executed in a form divided into the first count display and the second count display, even if the total time required for the timer effect is the same. , the time required for completing one count display (first count display or second count display) itself can be shortened, and the monotony during the completion of the count display can be eliminated to enhance the enjoyment of the game. It is expected that the decrease in

FIG. 189(a) shows a second process in which a single timer is used (YES in step S5506) and a decision (NO in step S5507) is made to not execute the mission rendering (appear the conversation notice). Time for explaining the specific contents of the timer effect with the new timer as the effect target, which is performed when variation numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to "no timer character reach" are selected in the situation. is a chart. FIG. 189(b) shows a second process in which a single timer is used (YES in step S5506) and a decision (NO in step S5507) is made to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear). A time for explaining the specific contents of the timer effect with the new timer as the effect target performed when the variable numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to "no timer, SP reach" are selected in the situation. is a chart.

In the example shown in FIGS. 189(a) and 189(b), for convenience of explanation, only one pattern of "timer effect with new timer as target of effect" is prepared for each variation pattern. , To prepare multiple types (new timer 1, new timer 2, etc.) with different timings of occurrence of the first count display (for example, a pattern in which the first count display starts in the middle of pattern fluctuation) and end timing and they may be selected by lottery (FIG. 149: step S5510).

In the "timer effect with the new timer as the object of effect" shown in FIG. 189(a), first, the first count display with the count number of 30 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation. Then, after the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden, the "specific effect mode" subject to the timer appears. After the "specific effect mode" appears in this manner, a new count display (second count display with a count of 40 seconds) is displayed separately from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared up to that point. (new timer). In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the "specific effect mode" appears, a count display (second count display) different from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared up to that point is always performed. ) is newly displayed and started. However, even if the first count display reaches a predetermined value in this way, simply starting a new count display (second count display) other than the first count display does not allow execution of the effect that is subject to the timer. There is a concern that the interest in gaming will decline because it may feel as if the game has been entrusted to the player.

Therefore, in the "timer effect with the new timer as the object of effect" according to this embodiment, first, as the "specific effect mode" that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden, A "failure production" that does not show any expectations is to appear. That is, in this case, when the first count display reaches a predetermined value, an effect with a degree of expectation as a timer-targeted effect However, in this production situation, the second count display is newly started, so that the game is played. As a player, the player comes to feel that he or she can challenge the failed timer effect again, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved through such an inflection of feelings.

However, in the ``timer effect with the new timer as the object of effect'' shown in FIG. The pattern is stopped (a big hit pattern or a losing pattern) before the digestion is completed. According to such a configuration, even if the player is looking forward to seeing what kind of expected performance will appear when the second count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the count will not be completed. Since it is possible to completely lose interest in the degree of expectation for a big hit at the time when the symbol stop (hitting or losing the big win) is displayed before the game, the interest in the game is not lowered and no performance appears. The timer effect can be terminated. In the pattern stop appearing before the second count display is completely digested, not only the losing pattern but also the big winning pattern can appear, so especially when the big winning pattern appears, the game interest is completely lost. There is no such thing as a decline.

In other words, in the “timer effect with the new timer as the object of effect” shown in FIG. 189(a), almost the entire period (at least half The count display (first count, second count) will be performed over the above period),
・ In addition to performing an effect (effect that the first count reaches a predetermined value) that makes you aware of the possibility that an effect with some degree of expectation may appear in the middle of the process,
・By having a structure in which the newly started second count display is stopped while the count number remains, the expectation that the timer-targeted effect will soon occur will be almost completely changed. It can be sustained over a period of time. In addition, as described above, a decrease in interest in the game caused by not generating an expected effect in either the first count display or the second count display is preferably suppressed. Street.

On the other hand, in the "timer effect with the new timer as the object of effect" shown in FIG. 189(b), as in the example shown in FIG. A first count display with is started. Then, after the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden, the "specific effect mode (failure effect)" targeted by the timer appears. After the "specific effect mode (failure effect)" appears in this way, a count display (second count display with a count of 40 seconds) different from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared so far is displayed. It is the same as the example shown in FIG. 189(a) in that it is newly displayed and started.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 189(b), the pattern stop occurs after the second count display started after the "failure effect" reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") within the pattern variation period. It is designed to In this regard, the "timer effect with the new timer as the object of effect" is, as described above, a sense of anticipation that the timer-targeted effect will soon occur without the appearance of any effect with a level of expectation as the timer-targeted effect. Since it has a technical feature to be sustained, even if the second count display reaches a predetermined value ("0" in this case) within the period of pattern fluctuation, the production with expectations is to appear. I don't. On the other hand, when the second count display reaches a predetermined value ("0" in this case) within the period of pattern variation, simply performing a process of preventing the appearance of an effect with a degree of expectation will not allow timer-targeted effects to occur. I can't sustain the anticipation that the production is about to happen.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 189(b), when the second count display started after the "failure effect" reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") within the period of symbol variation, the second Instead of hiding the count display, the display is maintained as it reaches a predetermined value ("0" in this case), and the pattern is stopped while the display is maintained. In a state where the second count display reaches a predetermined value and is maintained, when the effect (count target effect) corresponding to the second count display reaching the predetermined value appears from the player side. Since it looks like a normal state, it is possible to preferably maintain the expectation that the timer-targeted performance will soon occur until the symbol stop is performed. And even with such a configuration, it is possible to completely lose interest in the degree of expectation of a big win when the symbol stop (win/loss of the big win) is displayed before the second count display is hidden. As a result, the timer effect can be terminated without any effect appearing without causing a decrease in the interest in the game.

By the way, in the example shown in FIGS. 189(a) and 189(b), for the player who has already confirmed the "timer effect with the new timer as the object of effect", what happens when the failure effect or the second count display occurs? There is a concern that it will be seen through that the production of is not generated. Therefore, only when the jackpot pattern is stopped while the second count display is consuming the remaining count (including the period in which the second count display reaches the predetermined value and the display is maintained), the second A special effect may be generated as the effect corresponding to the 2-count display. Alternatively, the rate at which special effects occur may be increased. According to such a configuration, the second count display has a different counting purpose from the first count display, and whether the jackpot pattern is stopped within a period during which the second count display consumes the remaining count. It becomes possible to give the interest of whether or not. In this sense, the first count display and the second count display may have different display modes (form, position, size, etc.).

A special effect may be generated when the second count display has a remaining count and is in the process of being executed. However, considering that a special effect is generated as an effect corresponding to the second count display, when the jackpot pattern is stopped, after the second count display is hidden (the second count display has left the remaining count) It is desirable to perform a special effect after hiding this even if it is in the state. Then, it is desirable to continuously display the special effect executed in this way, including the execution period of the jackpot game and the subsequent game period. That is, in this case, the special effect is terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a process different from the process relating to the "timer effect with the new timer as the object of effect".

A special effect may be generated within the period of symbol variation. In this case, it is desirable to perform a special performance after making the big-win pattern appear (for example, displaying it in a temporary stop state) and hiding the second count display within the period of pattern variation. However, it is also possible to cause the big winning symbols to appear (for example, to be displayed in a temporary stop state) within the period of symbol variation, and to hide the second count display after performing a special effect.

Then, if the ratio of occurrence of the special effect (including 100%) is to be increased when the jackpot pattern is stopped while the second count display is consuming the remaining count, the pattern is stopped. When the second count display reaches a predetermined value before the second count display is displayed, the second count display may be hidden, and the symbol stop may be performed in the state of the non-display. Even in such a case, the game interest can be maintained while the second count display is being performed. However, after the second count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden, even if a big win pattern appears due to the pattern stoppage, the rate of occurrence of the special performance remains relatively low. In this case, the ratio may include 0%.

When such a "timer effect with the new timer as the object of effect" is realized, a "failure effect" that does not indicate any degree of expectation is caused to appear especially when the first count display reaches a predetermined value. , unlike the above-described timer effect that causes other effects (for example, conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, character A action, cut-in B, character B action, etc.) to appear (these A separate lottery), based on the fulfillment of the predetermined production conditions that have nothing to do with the result of the jackpot judgment or the type of fluctuation pattern, the "timer production with the new timer as the production target" will be performed. It is desirable that the determination of That is, in this case, when the pattern fluctuation is stopped, both the big win and the loss can be stopped (situation where the big win pattern may appear with the probability of the big win lottery). A "timer performance targeted for performance" can be generated, and a failure performance having no degree of expectation can be caused to appear when the first count display reaches a prescribed value. As a result, it is possible to maintain the feeling of expectation for the imminent occurrence of the timer-targeted performance over the period during which the pattern variation is performed without causing any performance with expectation as the timer-targeted player to appear.

However, if it is not desired to achieve such an effect, the "specific effect mode" that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value is not a failure effect that has no expectations. , other effects (for example, conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, character A motion, cut-in B, character B motion, etc.). In this case, through the same processing as in the case of performing the above-described timer effect that makes other effects appear (for example, conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, character A action, cut-in B, character B action, etc.) The "timer effect with the new timer as the object of effect" is executed.

In addition, in FIG. 189(a), in the example in which the first variation pattern (no timer, character reach) is selected, the symbol The variation is stopped, and in FIG. 189(b), in the example where the second variation pattern (SP reach without timer) is selected, the symbol variation is stopped after the second count display reaches a predetermined value. I made it However, in the example in which the first variation pattern (no timer, character reach) is selected, a pattern in which pattern variation is stopped after the second count display reaches a predetermined value may appear. is selected (SP reach without timer), the pattern variation may be stopped before the second count display started after the ``failure performance'' reaches a predetermined value. Further, when a variation pattern different from these variation patterns is selected, "a timer effect with the new timer as the target of effect" may be performed.

In addition, the first count display is executed as a count display with a shorter count number than the second count display, which may be stopped in the middle of the execution of the count display. It is desirable to maintain a sense of anticipation to do.

In this embodiment, in the count display generated after the "failure effect" is performed, if the symbols are stopped before the count display is completed, either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol can appear. However, in the normal count display that occurs irrespective of the ``failure performance'', it is desirable to ensure that the big win pattern appears when the pattern is stopped before the count display is completed.

Regarding the first count display, it has a plurality of modes (for example, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds) as its count number, and may be executed in any one of them, but for the second count display , irrespective of the number of counts executed in the first count display, only one mode (for example, 40 seconds) is executed, the first count display and the second count display are different count displays. It is desirable to be able to recognize that it is executed.

Further, considering that the first count display and the second count display are performed as separate count displays, the period during which the first count display is performed and the period during which the second count display is performed It is possible to perform processing to change the display mode (including color difference and effect) of the background image etc. desirable. In such a process, even if the ready-to-win effect occurs within the period in which the first count display is performed and the background image for the ready-to-win effect occurs, the second count display is performed after that. Therefore, even if the ready-to-win effect occurs and the background image for the ready-to-win effect occurs during the period in which the second count display is performed, the second count display is executed. A display mode different from that which has been made to appear until then is maintained even during the period of the ready-to-win effect, and is maintained until the second count display is hidden.

It should be noted that in the "timer effect with the new timer as the object of effect" according to this embodiment, as the "specific effect mode" that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden, any It was decided to make a "failure effect" that does not indicate the degree of expectation appear, but instead of this, a suggestion to start a different count that suggests that a new count display that is different from the count display that has been executed up to that point will be started. A production may be made to appear. In this case, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the different count start suggestion effect, or the degree of expectation may not be indicated.

[Timer mode effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of presentation modes prepared as candidates for counting (for example, conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, role A action , Cut-in B, Accessory B action, etc.) can be executed in which the count display is performed up to a predetermined value toward the timing at which at least one of them appears. In this respect, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the count display reaches a predetermined value within a period before the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"). A hell timer mode (first timer mode display) in which the rate of appearance of a highly anticipated production mode (production type and production content (cut-in mode, etc.)) that is highly expected as a timer target production when , is relatively low, When the count display reaches a predetermined value, one of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) in which the rate of appearance of highly expected performance modes is relatively high as the performance for the timer can be displayed. There is (timer mode effect).

That is, in this case, when the remaining time of the count display is used up, one of the timer mode displays having different degrees of advantage with respect to the timer effect is displayed. ("0" in this case) is expected to be maintained.

FIG. 190 shows a second processing situation in which a single timer is used (YES in step S5506) and a decision (NO in step S5507) is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear). Variable numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to "no timer SP reach" are selected, and timer mode effect performed when it is decided to perform "cut-in B1" as a timer target effect 4 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of .

In the example shown in FIG. 190, for convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (actually, there are more than just cut-in B1) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 161). , the following processing related to the timer mode effect is executed. However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing regarding the timer mode effect is not performed. You may make it perform the following processing about.

As shown in FIG. 190, assuming that the timer type "cut-in B1" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the selected "cut-in B1" in a plurality of presentation modes ("Cut-in B1-1", "Cut-in B1-2", "Cut-in B1-3", "Cut-in B1-4") including the mode of timer mode presentation. Judgment processing is performed as to which one is to be executed. In addition, it is desirable that the determination process is performed based on the result of the big hit determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

Among the examples shown in FIG. 190, in the mode of "Cut-in B1-1", when 50 seconds have passed after the count display with the count number of "50" is started in accordance with the start of the pattern variation "Cut-in B (notice of cut B)", which is subject to the timer, is executed while the count display is hidden after reaching a predetermined value (here, "0").

On the other hand, in the mode of "Cut-in B1-2", after the count display with the count number of "50" is started in accordance with the start of the pattern variation, 20 seconds have passed and this is the first specific. When the count value (here, "30") is reached, the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) is displayed while the count is being processed, and 50 seconds have passed since the count display started. When it reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), "Cut-in B", which is the target of the timer, is executed while this is hidden, but hell timer mode (first timer mode display) is maintained even after "cut-in B" is hidden without being hidden.

On the other hand, in the mode of "Cut-in B1-3", after the count display with the count number of "50" is started in accordance with the start of the pattern variation, 18 seconds have passed and this is the first specific count value. When the second specific count value (here, "32") is reached, a heaven challenge presentation is performed to determine whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed while the countdown is in progress. As a result of failing the heaven challenge effect, the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) is displayed, and when 50 seconds have passed since the start of the count display and a predetermined value (here, "0") has been reached. "Cut-in B", which is subject to the timer, is executed while the count display is hidden, but the display of the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) is hidden. The display is maintained even after "Cut-in B" is hidden without being displayed.

On the other hand, in the mode of "Cut-in B1-4", after the count display with the count number of "50" is started in accordance with the start of the pattern variation, 18 seconds have passed and this is the first specific count. When the second specific count value (here, "32") before the value is reached, a heaven challenge presentation is performed to determine whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count is being processed. As a result of the success of the heaven challenge effect, the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) is displayed, and the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") after 50 seconds have elapsed since the start of the count display. Then, "Cut-in B", which is subject to the timer, is executed while the count display is hidden, but the display of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) is hidden. The display is maintained even after "Cut-in B" is hidden without being displayed.

That is, among the plurality of presentation modes prepared corresponding to the "cut-in B1", the mode of "cut-in B1-2", "cut-in B1-3" and "cut-in B1-4" is timer It corresponds to mode production. In these timer mode effects, the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode occurs while the countdown is progressing, and the timer target effect is executed while the display of one of these timer modes is displayed. It will be done. Therefore, even when the count display has used up the remaining count, the timer effect can be given effect by the timer mode effect related to the timer effect.

More specifically, when heaven timer mode appears as a type of timer mode effect, the rate of appearance of a highly expected effect type as a timer target effect is higher than when hell timer mode appears. Since the ratio of appearance of highly anticipated aspects (contents of presentation) of cut-in B, which is a timer-targeted presentation, is high, it is hard to wait for the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Thus, it becomes possible to make the user pay more attention to the timer effect. On the other hand, when the hell timer mode appears as a type of timer mode effect, compared to the case where the heaven timer mode appears, the timer target effect itself cannot be expected, so the effect is different from the timer effect. It is possible to turn the player's gaze toward , thereby suppressing the decline in game interest even if a low-expectation performance mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

In order to make the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode function more effectively, it is necessary to have the same effect for the timer when the heaven timer mode is displayed and when the hell timer mode is displayed. Even when the mode appears, it is desirable to control so that the ratio of appearance of the big win pattern when the pattern is stopped is higher when the performance mode appears when the heaven timer mode is displayed.

Also, in the timer mode effect according to this embodiment (in the example shown in FIG. 190, the mode of "cut-in B1-2", "cut-in B1-3", and "cut-in B1-4"), the timer The display of the type of timer mode (heaven timer mode, hell timer mode) is maintained even after the target effect is executed and hidden. Therefore, even after the timer performance is finished, the performance can be progressed while the timer-related performance is being displayed, and the performance situation in which the timer performance is executed in either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode. The symbol stop is performed in a state in which the player recognizes whether or not the symbol is on. Regarding the display of heaven timer mode and hell timer mode, it is hidden before the count display reaches a predetermined value (before the timer target effect occurs), or the pattern stop is displayed. The display may be hidden at the previous timing, or the display may be maintained even when the symbol stop is displayed, and may be hidden when the symbol stop is finished.

Further, the heaven timer mode display, the hell timer mode display, or the heaven challenge effect may be generated before the count display is executed (for example, during execution of the timer look-ahead effect). In addition, when the heaven timer mode or hell timer mode is displayed or the heaven challenge effect is performed while the count display is not being executed, the timer effect is necessarily generated between the execution of those effects and the stop of the pattern. You can choose not to let it happen. However, if the heaven timer mode, the hell timer mode, or the heaven challenge effect is performed while the count display is not performed, compared to the case where the count display is not performed and those effects are not performed, It is desirable that the ratio of execution of the timer performance is increased until the symbols are stopped, and that the timer performance is also executed as a performance that preliminarily suggests the execution of the timer performance.

In addition, in the modes of "cut-in B1-3" and "cut-in B1-4", when the count display reaches the second specific count value, the heaven challenge effect is performed, and then the count display changes to the first value. When the specific count value is reached, the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode is displayed as a result of the heaven challenge production. After that, the hell timer mode is displayed when the count display reaches the first specific count value.

According to such a configuration, after the count display is started, first, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the heaven challenge effect will appear when the second specific count value is reached. As a result, if the heaven challenge effect does not appear when the second specific count value is reached, the possibility of generating the heaven timer mode is lost. That is, in this case, when the count display reaches the first specific count value, either the hell timer mode occurs or the timer mode effect itself does not occur, so the count display reaches the first specific count value. It will be possible to further focus on whether or not hell timer mode occurs when it becomes .

Incidentally, when the timer mode effect itself does not occur, it is desirable to increase the ratio of appearance of the highly expected effect mode as the timer object effect compared to the case where the hell timer mode occurs. However, if the ratio of appearance of highly anticipated effects as timer target effects is set to differ between when the timer mode effect itself does not occur and when the hell timer mode occurs, the opposite is true. Even if a relationship is employed, it is still possible to focus more attention on whether hell timer mode occurs when the count display reaches the first specified count value.

On the other hand, when the heaven challenge effect appears when the second specific count value is reached, heaven timer mode and hell timer mode are provided as timer mode effects when the count display reaches the first specific count value. is executed, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the type of timer mode effect that appears when the count display reaches the first specific count value.

According to such a timer mode effect, not only when the count display reaches a predetermined value, but also some specific count values (first specific count value, second specific count value) different from the predetermined value Even when the count value is reached, the timer effect (count value) and the effect related to this can be made interesting so that the player can pay attention to it. can be suitably maintained.

Then, in each example shown in FIG. 190, when the count display of the timer effect reaches the second specific count value and the first specific count value in sequence, and further reaches a predetermined value, the timer object effect is executed. The symbol variation will be stopped.

In this embodiment, when a specific timer type (actually, there are more than just cut-in B1) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 161), the specific timer type Determine which mode (cut-in B1-1, cut-in B1-2, cut-in B1-3, cut-in B1-4) to execute as the timer type (cut-in B1 in the example shown in FIG. 190) However, instead of cut-in B1, cut-in B1-1, cut-in B1-2, cut-in B1-3, and cut-in B1-4 are prepared as selection candidates for the count display lottery (step S5510). Then, it may be determined which timer type is to be selected from among these candidates. This processing method can also be similarly employed in processing related to execution of other effects (for example, resurrection timer effects, etc.).

In the example shown in FIG. 190, when the timer target effect is performed when the heaven timer mode is displayed, the specific type of effect (cut-in B) is performed compared to the case where the hell timer mode is displayed. We made it so that the rate of content with high expectations (such as cut-in B being performed in highly anticipated colors) will be higher. However, instead of this, when the timer target production is performed when the heaven timer mode is displayed, there are more production types (e.g., conversation notice, pending change) than when the hell timer mode is displayed. , cut-in A, special timer, character A action, cut-in B, character B action, etc.), the ratio of appearance of highly anticipated effect types may be increased. Alternatively, in the heaven timer mode, as the timer-targeted effects, the rate at which the highly anticipated type of effects appears is increased, and the rate at which the highly anticipated contents are displayed may be increased.

In addition, a specific type of effect is selected from a plurality of effect types (for example, conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, special timer, character A action, cut-in B, character B action, etc.) as the effect for the timer. or when a specific timer type is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode must occur within the execution period of the count display. good too. At this time, it is desirable that a pattern in which the hell timer mode is generated without performing the heaven challenge effect can also appear.

Also, an effect may be performed to indicate that either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode will certainly occur within a period before reaching the second specific count value at which the heaven challenge effect is executed.

In addition, when a predetermined production condition is satisfied, there is a heaven high probability mode in which the rate of success in the heaven challenge production when the heaven challenge production occurs (the ratio displayed in the heaven timer mode) is higher than in the normal time. You may make it shift to . That is, in this case, in the heaven high probability mode, the probability of generating the heaven challenge effect itself when not displaying the heaven timer mode is reduced (the probability of generating the hell timer mode without generating the heaven challenge effect, or the timer The high-probability heaven probability mode is realized by increasing the probability that the mode performance is not generated) or by lowering the degree of expectation of the timer-targeted performance itself generated in the heaven timer mode as compared with the normal time.

In addition, in the heaven challenge production, the period during which the player's operation can be accepted is set, and the result of the success or failure of the heaven challenge production based on the operation by the player within that period (heaven timer mode, which hell timer mode will occur) may be displayed.

Also, if the number of completed counts in the count display is relatively small, such as when the count display of the timer effect starts and the heaven challenge effect occurs at the same time, if the heaven challenge effect occurs, the count in the count display will continue. It is preferable that the success rate of the Heaven Challenge effect (the rate displayed in the Heaven timer mode) is higher than when the Heaven Challenge effect is generated when the number of executions is relatively large. . That is, in this case, just before the appearance of the effect targeted by the timer effect, the interest in the game can be maintained by the expectation that the effect will soon occur, and the effect targeted by the timer effect appears. When a long time (number of counts) is required until the game is played, it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained due to the expectation that the heaven challenge effect will occur. In this case, the heaven challenge effect may be generated after the timer object effect is executed. The heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode will occur in the form of chasing.

Further, a heaven challenge effect may be generated as one of the target effects of the timer effect. In addition, when the heaven challenge performance is executed as the target performance of the timer performance, the rate of success in the heaven challenge performance (percentage displayed in the heaven timer mode) is set to 100%, and after the heaven timer mode is displayed. During the pattern fluctuation period, although it was not subject to the timer, among the effects prepared as one of the candidates for the timer target, the rate of appearance of highly anticipated effects (for example, role B action) is the effect should be higher than if did not appear.

[Count output stop control]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the count display is being executed within the period during which the symbol effect is being performed, a plurality of effect modes prepared as candidates for counting (for example, conversation notice, pending change, etc.) , cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.) can be executed by timer effect that hides the count display in accordance with the timing at which at least one of them appears. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a predetermined effect different from the timer effect (preferably a effect with a predetermined degree of expectation, but not necessarily limited to this) is performed during execution of the count display. When it is executed, there is a performance mode in which the output related to the count display of the timer performance is continued until it reaches a predetermined value, and there is a mode in which the output related to the count display is not performed until the predetermined value is reached and this is performed in the middle stage of the execution of the predetermined performance. It is designed to selectively appear one of the presentation mode to stop the output (count output stop control).

According to such a configuration, even if an output related to the count display is performed in the timer effect, the count display is not necessarily performed until the predetermined value is reached, and the output is stopped in the middle and the output related to the predetermined effect is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the game interest will be maintained during the period until the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (counting period).

FIGS. 191(a) to (c) show the mode of single timer (YES in step S5506), and a decision (NO in step S5507) to the effect that the mission rendering (appear the conversation notice) is made. FIG. 10 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of count output stop control performed when a specific variation number is selected in the second processing situation; FIG.

As shown in FIG. 191(a), in a specific timer type, first, a count with a count number of 20 seconds after a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the pattern variation was started. Display starts. After the count display becomes "0", the timer-targeted effect appears.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the situation is in a predetermined specific performance situation. As a result, when there is a specific effect situation, control is performed to stop the output related to the count display of the timer effect and to execute the predetermined effect. Note that the "predetermined specific effect situation" used for determining whether or not to stop the output related to the count display of the timer effect means, for example, that the count display of the timer effect is being executed. This refers to an effect situation in which conflict occurs between the timer effect and the predetermined effect in terms of effect output, such as when executing a predetermined effect using an area.

Further, as shown in FIG. 191(b), when the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the predetermined effect is executed, the timer effect is continued even after the output of the predetermined effect ends. It prevents the count display from being output again. On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, even after stopping the output related to the count display, the time since the count display started (or the time since the fluctuation started) is secretly measured internally. When this reaches a predetermined value (a value when 20 seconds have passed since the count display started), the timing for the stopped count display to reach a predetermined value ("0" in this case) has arrived, and the timer The target production is made to appear.

According to such a configuration, after the predetermined effect is executed, while maintaining the state of stopping the output of the count display, if the count display has not been stopped, the value is set to a predetermined value ("0" in this case). When the timing that should have reached has arrived, the timer-targeted effect will appear. That is, in this case, it is expected that the interest in the game will be improved when the timer-targeted effect appears due to the surprise that the timer effect, which was shown as if it had been terminated halfway due to the execution of the predetermined effect, was secretly continued. will be

However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. When the performance situation at the time of making the performance appear is not in a predetermined specific performance situation, the output related to the count display of the timer performance is continued until it reaches a predetermined value without stopping, and the count display is terminated. A predetermined effect will be executed while

More specifically, the predetermined effect is "effect of making an enemy character appear in a specific area", "effect of attacking toward a specific area", or "display when effect fails in a specific area". and music output", if such a predetermined effect is executed while the count display is being executed in a specific area, the player will not be able to use the timer effect (count display). On the other hand, there is a concern that some kind of adverse effect on the performance (for example, the degree of expectation as a timer performance will be lowered) may be caused. Therefore, when there is an effect situation in which such a concern may arise, the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and a predetermined effect is executed. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect without creating an image as if it would affect the player (the effect mode in FIG. 191(b)). Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect for the timer object is made to appear as a surprise while the state of output suspension related to the count display is maintained. 191(b), it can be expected to improve the game interest.

However, if the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped each time such a predetermined effect is executed, the image of the effect of the predetermined effect itself deteriorates, and there is concern that the interest in the game will decrease. is done. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when executing the predetermined effect, there is an empty area (an area in which no effect is output) different from the specific area where the count display of the timer effect is output. In such a case, the predetermined effect is output not in the specific area but in an empty area while maintaining the output of the count display of the timer effect (Fig. 191 (c ) production mode). As a result, it becomes clear that the predetermined performance is not the performance of stopping the execution of the count display of the timer performance in the middle, and the interest in the game is reduced when the predetermined performance is executed. will be avoided.

In each example shown in FIG. 191, the symbol variation is stopped after the timer-targeted effect is executed.

FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing an example of a processing procedure for implementing such count output stop control.

As shown in FIG. 192, if it is now determined to execute a predetermined effect based on the result of the big hit determination and the type of variation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment First, when the timing for generating a predetermined effect within the execution period of the symbol variation arrives, it is determined whether or not there is a specific effect situation prior to starting the output of the predetermined effect. (Step S5701).

Here, the ``specific effect situation'' means that when a predetermined effect is newly output, the area required for newly outputting the predetermined effect is other various effects (here, count display of timer effect, etc.) As described above, it is a situation in which all of the predetermined effects are used by and there is no space for newly outputting the predetermined effect. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 201(G) and (H), which will be described later, the "bullet shooting effect" by the cannon corresponds to the predetermined effect. In the bullet shooting effect, an empty (unused) area among the upper left area, upper right area, left area, right area, and lower area in the display area can be selectively used as the bullet firing destination. Normally, the unused area is used to produce a bullet firing effect. However, in the situation shown in FIG. 201(G) which will be described later, the areas required to newly output such a bullet firing effect are other various effects (count display (upper left area), pattern variation (upper right area) area), timer mode effect (left area), timer object exclusion effect (right area), pending display (lower area)), and there is no space for newly outputting the predetermined effect. This corresponds to the above-mentioned "specific production situation". If a bullet is fired while in such a specific production situation, the production that is already in an output state (for example, a count display) at the point where the bullet is fired will malfunction or be destroyed by the fired bullet. (competition regarding the output of the performance between the timer performance and the predetermined performance occurs), and as a result, the expectation of the big win may be lowered. was also mentioned above.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192, prior to starting the output of the predetermined effect, when it is determined that the specific effect situation (YES in step S5701), different from the predetermined effect, already The output of the effect in the output state (here, count display) is stopped (step S5702), and the processing for outputting the predetermined effect is performed using the empty area created thereby (step S5703).

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no specific effect situation (NO in step S5701) prior to starting the output of the predetermined effect, another effect is created in the area necessary for outputting the effect. Since there is an unused area that is not used, a process for outputting a predetermined effect is performed using the unused area without stopping the output of a different effect from the predetermined effect. becomes (step S5713).

Here, when the predetermined effect is executed through the process of step S5703, the effect mode is more advantageous to the player after the predetermined effect is executed than when the predetermined effect is executed through the process of step S5713. It is desirable to make the ratio of appearing high. For example, in the example of FIGS. 191(b) and 191(c), when the effect mode of FIG. It is desirable to perform control so that the rate of appearance of highly anticipated effects (type of effect and content of effects) as the effect for the timer is high compared to the case where the effect of FIG. 191(c) appears.

Note that the processes of steps S5702 and S5703 may be executed as one process. For example, if the output data of a predetermined effect is overwritten in the processing area in which the output data of the count display is stored, the output of the count display is automatically stopped. It becomes possible to perform an output related to a predetermined effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when there is a specific effect situation, the output related to the count display is stopped and the predetermined effect is executed. You may make it stop the output concerning production|presentation.

In the process of step S5702, the type of effect whose output is to be stopped is selected from among a plurality of effects that use the area necessary for outputting the predetermined effect (in an output state), and the output of the selected effect is stopped. A predetermined effect may be output by pressing the button. In this case, it is desirable to set priorities in advance for a plurality of effects that are candidates for output stop, and to select the type of effect to stop output based on the priorities. It is desirable that the order of priority be set in advance in the program based on whether the performance is more important to the player. As a result of judging the order of priority, when all the other performances in the output state have higher priority than the predetermined performance, the output of the other performances is maintained and the predetermined performance is not output. .

Then, the type of effect whose output is to be stopped is related to the effect content and executed as a plurality of connected effects (for example, a timer effect connected by count display and timer target effect, etc.). The output of the effect that appears earlier (for example, during the execution of the count display) is stopped, and the predetermined effect is performed before the effect that appears later (for example, the timer-targeted effect) is started. is terminated, it is desirable to execute the effects that appear later without stopping the output.

In addition, regarding the effects and predetermined effects that are subject to output cancellation when executing the predetermined effects, in addition to the effects by image display, even if it is the effects by the actions of the characters, the effects by music, the effects by the board lamps, etc. good. In addition, the performance to be output-stopped when the predetermined performance is executed or the predetermined performance combines at least two or more of the respective performance elements such as image display, character movement, music, and board lamps. When it is executed as a composite effect, output of at least one of the combined effect elements may be stopped. For example, if the predetermined effect is a "bullet firing effect" shown in FIG. Even if you stop only the output related to the image display and maintain the output related to the board lamp, the image display in the display area will have an adverse effect on the effect of the board lamp, which is in a place where the bullet cannot reach. It can be said that there is no concern that (competition due to production) will occur.

[Timer plus effect]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first counts at least one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A action, cut-in B, character B action, etc.). It is possible to display the count display within the period in which the pattern effect is performed, and after displaying the count display for a predetermined time, it is hidden and the effect to be counted appears in the non-display state. It is possible to perform production. In this regard, in the count effect, after hiding the count display that has reached a specific count value (for example, "0"), not only is one of the plurality of effect modes appearing, but also the specific count value (for example, "0" ”), by re-displaying the above-mentioned count display with a larger count value, it is possible to execute an effect to continue the count effect (timer plus effect).

That is, in this case, even if the count display becomes a specific count value (for example, "0") and this is hidden, even if any of the plurality of production modes appear, the count display will not be displayed. Since there is a possibility that it will be redisplayed with a count value greater than the specific count value and the count effect will continue further (the possibility that a more highly anticipated effect mode will appear), the count display It is expected that the game interest will be maintained after it is hidden.

FIG. 193(a) shows a second process in which a single timer is used (YES in step S5506) and a decision (NO in step S5507) is made to not execute a mission presentation (appear a conversation notice). 10 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of a timer-plus effect performed when a specific variable number (no timer, SP reach) is selected in a situation;

In the example shown in FIG. 193(a), for convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (not only cut-in B2 but also multiple timer types may be selected) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 193(a)). 162), the following processing relating to the timer plus effect is executed. However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing regarding the timer plus effect is not performed. You may make it perform the following processing about.

As shown in FIG. 193(a), assuming that the timer type of "cut-in B2" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the following processing. Determination processing is performed as to which of a plurality of presentation modes (“Cut-in B2-1” and “Cut-in B2-2”) including timer-plus presentation mode should be executed for “Cut-in B2”. In addition, it is desirable that the determination process is performed based on the result of the big hit determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

Among the examples shown in FIG. 193(a), in the mode of "Cut-in B2-1", 40 seconds after a count display with a count value of "40" is displayed after the lapse of a predetermined time from pattern variation. When the time elapses, it reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), and under the condition that the count display is hidden, "Cut-in B (Cut B advance notice)", which is subject to the timer, is executed.

On the other hand, in the "cut-in B2-2" mode, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the pattern change, a count display with a significantly smaller count than in the "cut-in B2-1" mode is displayed. there is Generally, in such a timer effect, no effect is often performed during the period from when the count display is executed until the count display reaches a predetermined value, so there is concern that the interest in the game may decrease during that period. be. Therefore, in the timer plus effect ("Cut-in B2-2" aspect) shown in FIG. After the count display with is displayed and hidden, in the non-display state, the first double corresponding effect is displayed for a time longer than the time the count display was displayed (here, 4 seconds) ( for example, 9 seconds).

Here, in the first double corresponding effect, first, as the effect (first timer target effect) corresponding to the count display having the first count value (here, "4"), a cut-in B effect to run. However, in the first timer-targeted effect, as the mode of cut-in B, a mode with a relatively low degree of expectation (a character wearing a blue aura) appears. Then, after that, an effect (second timer object effect) as to whether or not the count display is to be redisplayed is executed in such a manner that the count value is larger than the first count value. Note that the effect of whether or not to redisplay the count display includes, for example, whether or not a specific display image (count-up image) appears, or whether or not a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) operates. It can be realized as a production such as whether or not.

It should be noted that the effect of whether or not to redisplay the count display (count-up effect) is executed prior to each redisplay of the count display in the hidden state. When an image (count-up image) or a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) appears as an effect, the presentation mode (color, light emission mode, etc.) is changed according to the number of times it is redisplayed. It is desirable to In addition, when a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) is adopted as the accessory indicating that the count display is to be redisplayed, the specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) is given the count-up effect In addition, it is desirable to be used for other effects such as, for example, confirmation of a big hit. However, in this case, not only is the operation mode of a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) different, but in addition to the specific movable accessory (count-up accessory), a movable accessory different from this is further operated. It is desirable to let them know that the count-up effect is not being executed.

According to such a configuration, two different effects (a first timer target effect (cut-in B) indicating the degree of expectation and a second effect regarding whether the count display is to be Since a timer-targeted effect (count-up effect) is performed, when a relatively short time count display (count "4") is executed, the timer-targeted effect can be enjoyed for a longer period of time. become able to. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the time required for the count display to be executed while maintaining the total time as the timer effect, and suppress the decline in the interest in the game during the period until the count display reaches a predetermined value. Become so.

In this regard, in the mode of "Cut-in B2-2", the effect result that succeeds in redisplaying the count display appears in the first double corresponding effect. The timer effect is continued by re-displaying the count display with a second count value (here, "5") larger than the count value of . However, in the first double-corresponding performance, a performance pattern in which a performance result that fails to redisplay the count display appears is also prepared, and when the performance pattern appears, the count display is not displayed again. It is desirable to end the timer effect at this point.

After that, when the count display having the second count value (here, "5") is hidden after a predetermined period of time, the second double-corresponding effect is count-displayed in the non-display state. is displayed for a longer time (for example, 9 seconds) than the displayed time (here, 5 seconds).

Also in this second double corresponding effect, first, as the effect (third timer object effect) corresponding to the count display with the second count value (here, "5"), the effect of cut-in B is performed. Execute. However, in the third timer-targeted effect, as the mode of cut-in B, a mode (a character wearing a green aura) with a higher degree of expectation than in the first timer-targeted effect appears. Thereafter, an effect (fourth timer-targeted effect) as to whether or not the count display is to be redisplayed is executed in such a manner that the count value is greater than the second count value.

According to such a configuration, the execution of the count display of the second count value (here, "5") that takes longer time than the first count value (here, "4") is executed. However, in exchange for this, the effect of cut-in B is executed in a mode with a higher degree of expectation than the first timer-targeted effect. Therefore, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game during the period until the count display reaches a predetermined value is suppressed while extending the time required for the count to be consumed in order to maintain the total time as the timer effect. Become.

In this regard, in the mode of "Cut-in B2-2", the effect result that succeeds in redisplaying the count display appears in the second double corresponding effect, and when the effect result appears, the second effect is displayed. The timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display with a third count value (here, "7") larger than the count value of . However, even in the second double corresponding performance, a performance pattern is prepared in which a performance result that fails to redisplay the count display is prepared, and when the performance pattern appears, the count display is not redisplayed. It is desirable to end the timer effect at this point.

Then, after that, when the count display with the third count value (here, "7") is hidden, the count display is displayed with the third double corresponding effect in the non-display state. It is supposed to be executed for a longer time (for example, 9 seconds) than the time (here, 7 seconds).

Here, even in the third double corresponding effect, first, as an effect (fifth timer target effect) corresponding to the count display having the third count value (here, "7"), a cut-in Execute the performance of B. However, in the third timer-targeted effect, a mode (a character wearing a red aura) with a higher degree of expectation than the first and second timer-targeted effects appears as the cut-in B mode. After that, an effect (sixth timer-targeted effect) as to whether or not the count display is to be re-displayed in a manner that the count value is greater than the third count value is executed.

According to such a configuration, the count display of the third count value (here, "7") takes longer time than the first and second count values (here, "4" and "5"). will be executed, but in exchange for this, the cut-in B effect will be executed in a mode with a higher degree of expectation than the first and second timer-targeted effects, so the count display will not be performed. It is expected that the decrease in interest in the game will be suppressed during the period until the predetermined value is reached.

In this regard, in the mode of "Cut-in B2-2", an effect result appears in which the count display fails to be displayed again in the third double corresponding effect, and the timer effect ends at this point. It will be done. That is, in this case, in the timer effect, a cut-in B by a character wearing a red aura is finally executed as a timer-targeted effect. Since the count display of relatively short time is displayed a plurality of times and the performance corresponding to the count display is executed a plurality of times, the time between the start of the timer performance and the end of the timer performance is reduced. Appropriate maintenance of amusement will be expected.

Moreover, each time the count display is redisplayed, the count value is increased to increase the length of the production as a whole. Each time the count display is hidden, the timer-targeted effect is executed in a manner that is more expected, so the timer effect is executed over a long period of time while maintaining the amusement of the game. be able to

In addition, in the mode of "Cut-in B2-2", every time the count display is hidden, the degree of expectation gradually increases by changing the mode (color) for the same effect (cut-in B). Since it was made to express the state of going, it became possible to execute these multiple count displays as one timer effect for "Cut-in B", and the effect that was finally displayed (red It is possible to recognize that the cut-in B) by the character wearing the aura of is the object of the timer effect.

In addition, in the third double corresponding performance, a performance pattern is also prepared in which a performance result in which the count display is successfully redisplayed is prepared, and when the performance pattern appears, the count display is redisplayed and the timer performance is performed. It is desirable to continue However, when the count display reaches the maximum number of times that it is redisplayed, instead of the cut-in B effect that has been executed up to that point, a different effect (the expectation level is higher than any of the cut-in B effects) However, it is desirable to execute a special effect which is not prepared as a candidate for the timer target so that it can be recognized that the maximum number of times has been reached. In this case, after the special effect is executed, the effect of whether or not to redisplay the count display will not appear, but the time required for the special effect will be the double corresponding effect that has appeared so far. It is made to be executed for a longer time than the effect in which the timer-targeted effect is executed), suggesting that the expectations are higher than the effect that has appeared so far (cut-in B by a character wearing a red aura). It is desirable to improve the amusement of the game by doing so. In this case, the degree of expectation may be 100%.

FIG. 193(b) is a time chart for explaining a modification of the timer-plus effect.

The timer-plus effect may be performed in the mode shown in FIG. 193(b). That is, in the mode shown in FIG. 193(b), when the count display with the first count value (here, "4") is started after the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the first count value ( Here, an effect corresponding to the count "4" (4-second timer effect) corresponding to "4") is executed.

Here, in the count "4" corresponding effect (4-second timer effect), the effect period is set for the time required for the first count value (here, "4") to be consumed. A timer-targeted effect such as cut-in B is executed in a predetermined mode (a character wearing a blue aura, etc.) during the effect period.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the timer-targeted effect in a situation where the count display is being executed, so that it is possible to preferably maintain the game interest while the count is being completed. .

Moreover, when the effect corresponding to the count "4" (four-second timer effect) ends, the count display of the count "4" will also reach a predetermined value (here, "0"), so the timer Even without confirming the count display of the production, it is easily recognized that the count display has reached a predetermined value (here, "0") only by confirming the production corresponding to the count "4" (the production at the time of the 4-second timer). be able to

Then, after the timing for ending the count "4" corresponding effect (4-second timer effect) has arrived (after the count display of the count "4" reaches a predetermined value), the first count value ( Here, an effect (first count-up effect) as to whether or not to re-display the above-mentioned count display is executed with a count value greater than "4"). This first count-up effect is executed as the same effect as the "effect as to whether or not to redisplay the count display" in the example of FIG. 193(a). When a performance pattern that fails to be redisplayed appears, the timer performance is terminated at this point without redisplaying the count display.

However, as a result of the first count-up effect, when an effect pattern that succeeds in redisplaying the count display appears, the second count value (here, "4") larger than the first count value ("4") Here, the timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display with "5"). In this regard, in this modified example, when the count display is redisplayed in a manner to have the second count value (here, "5"), the count corresponding to the second count value (here, "5") "5" Corresponding production (5-second timer production) is executed.

Here, in the production corresponding to the count "5" (5-second timer production), the production period is set for the time required for the second count value (here, "5") to be consumed. During the production period, a timer-targeted production such as cut-in B appears in a form (such as a character wearing a green aura) with a higher degree of expectation than in the case of the production corresponding to the count "4" (4-second timer production). will be made.

Then, after the timing for ending the production corresponding to the count "5" (5-second timer production) has arrived (after the count display of the count "5" reaches a predetermined value), the second count value (here Then, an effect (second count-up effect) is executed as to whether or not the count display is to be redisplayed with a count value greater than "5"). This second count-up effect is also executed as the same effect as the "effect as to whether or not to redisplay the count display" in the example of FIG. 193(a). When a performance pattern that fails to be redisplayed appears, the timer performance is terminated at this point without redisplaying the count display.

However, as a result of the second count-up effect, when an effect pattern that succeeds in redisplaying the count display appears, a third count value (here, "5") larger than the second count value (here, "5") Here, the timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display with "7"). In this respect, in this modified example, when the count display is redisplayed in a manner to have the third count value (here, "7"), the count corresponding to the third count value (here, "7") "7" corresponding production (7-second timer production) is executed.

Here, in the count "7" corresponding effect (7-second timer effect), the effect period is set for the time required for the third count value (here, "7") to be consumed. During the production period, a timer-targeted production such as cut-in B appears in a manner (such as a character wearing a red aura) with a higher degree of expectation than in the case of the production corresponding to the count "5" (5-second timer production). will be made.

Then, after the timing for ending the count "7" corresponding effect (7-second timer effect) has arrived (after the count display of count "7" reaches a predetermined value), the third count value (here Then, there is a case where an effect (third count-up effect) as to whether or not the count display is to be redisplayed is given in a manner that the count value is greater than "7"). This third count-up effect is also executed as the same effect as the "effect as to whether or not to redisplay the count display" in the example of FIG. 193(a). When a performance pattern that fails to redisplay appears, the timer performance is terminated at this point without redisplaying the count display.

In this regard, in this modification, after the timing for ending the count "7" corresponding effect (7-second timer effect) has arrived (after the count display of the count "7" reaches a predetermined value), the count is further increased. This shows an example in which the count-up effect itself did not appear, suggesting the possibility of In this way, even if the count-up effect itself does not appear, the count display is not redisplayed in the same way as when the count-up effect fails to redisplay the count display. At this point, the timer effect will end.

According to the count-up effect according to such a modified example, when a count display with a predetermined number of count values is displayed, the count value is displayed and immediately a predetermined number corresponding to the count value is displayed. Since the count-corresponding performance (cut-in B, etc.) having the content of the performance for the current time is started, the amusement of the game can be favorably maintained during the execution of the count display. In addition, when such a counter effect is completed (when the count display reaches a predetermined value), an effect is performed as to whether the count display should be redisplayed with a larger count value, and these two effects are alternately performed. Since the timer performance is executed and continued by appearing, the occurrence of a situation in which the count display is performed only in the timer performance and no performance is performed is suppressed, and the game interest is improved. can be maintained at

It should be noted that, in this modification, a count-corresponding effect (for example, a count of "4") having effect contents for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) corresponding to the displayed count value (for example, "4") is displayed. While the corresponding effect) is being executed, the count display (countdown of 4→3→2→1→0) is also performed. However, as described above, the count corresponding effect (for example, count "4" corresponding effect) according to this modification is finished in accordance with the timing when the displayed count value (for example, "4") ends. Since the count display is executed, only the count value (for example, "4") at the time of appearance is displayed for a predetermined time, and the count display during counting (4→3→2→1 → 0 countdown), it is more desirable that this is not necessarily performed in order to encourage attention to the count corresponding effect (for example, the count "4" corresponding effect).

Then, in each example shown in FIGS. 193(a) and (b), after the timer effect is thus executed, the symbol variation is stopped.

Of the above timer plus effects, in the effect of whether or not to redisplay the count display, a predetermined time period for receiving effects is set, and counting is performed based on the player's operation within the period. An effect suggesting that the display will be redisplayed (success effect) or an effect suggesting that the count display will not be displayed again (failure effect) may appear. In other words, in this case, after the success effect appears, the count display is redisplayed with a larger count to continue the timer effect, and when the failure effect appears, the count display will not be displayed again. do not have. When such an effect is adopted, even if the player does not perform an operation within the effect reception period, a predetermined effect result (success effect or failure effect) is displayed at a predetermined timing after the period has elapsed. will be displayed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the time required for the first to third double corresponding effects is set to the same time, but each count display ("4", "5", "7") corresponds to You may make it set to mutually different time as presentation time to perform. For example, each time the count display is redisplayed, as the count value of each count display gradually increases, the time required for the double corresponding effect corresponding to each count value will gradually increase. , the total time required for the count display can be maintained at a relatively short time, and the length of the entire performance can be preferably extended while maintaining the interest in the game.

In addition, in the effect of whether or not to redisplay the count display, in displaying the effect result, a plurality of effect modes with different ratios (expectations) of redisplaying the count display in a manner that the count number increases. Either one may be displayed.

In this embodiment, each time the count display is redisplayed, a count display having a count value greater than the count value when the previous count display was displayed appears. It is not necessary to redisplay a count display with a count value that is necessarily greater than the count value when the count display was displayed. That is, even when the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer object performance is executed, the count display is redisplayed when a predetermined performance image appears after that, thereby improving the interest in the game. You can expect it to work. However, despite redisplaying the count display with a count value that is smaller than the count value when the previous count display was displayed, there is a higher expected effect as a timer target effect than the previous count display. If the appearance ratio (may be 100%) is increased, the sense of speed from the display of the count display to the appearance of the timer-targeted performance is enhanced, and the amusement of the game is further improved. be able to When the count display with such a small count value is redisplayed repeatedly, the appearance timing of the timer-targeted effect gradually shortens from the time the count display is first displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by such an accelerated timer effect.

[Timer stagnation effect]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A action, special timer, cut-in B, character B action, etc.). A count display is executed within a period during which the pattern performance is performed, and when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the performance mode to be counted among the plurality of performance modes is caused to appear. In this respect, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, the count display can be hidden after the count display is started until it reaches a predetermined value. There are cases where the display is hidden for a first time period, and there are cases where it is hidden for a second time period longer than the first time period (timer stagnation effect).

That is, in this case, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, one of the plurality of presentation modes appears as a count target, and the count display lasts for the first time or this period until the predetermined value is reached. Since the display may be hidden for a second time longer than the above, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time until one of the plurality of production modes occurs, and the tension until the production to be counted is executed. can be sustained.

FIG. 194(a) shows a second process in which a single timer is used (YES in step S5506) and a decision (NO in step S5507) is made to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear). 148 is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer stagnation effect performed when variation numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to "no timer character reach" are selected in the situation.

In the example shown in FIG. 194(a), for convenience of explanation, when a specific timer type (not only role A action 2 but also a plurality of timer types may be selected) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). (See FIG. 161), the following processing relating to the timer stagnation effect is executed. However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing regarding the timer stagnation effect is not performed. You may make it perform the following processing about.

As shown in FIG. 194(a), assuming that the timer type of "Accessory A action 2" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the following processing. The selected ``character A action 2'' is executed in a plurality of production modes including the mode of resurrection timer production (regarding which of ``character A action 2-1'' It is desirable that the determination process be performed based on the result of the big hit determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

Among the examples shown in FIG. 194(a), in the aspect of "character A action 2-1", after the count display with a count value of "30" is started after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation, 30 When the second has passed, it reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") and the count display is hidden, and the timer-targeted "role A action (role A notice)" is executed. be done.

On the other hand, in the mode of "character A action 2-2", after the count display with a count value of "10" is started after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation, the count is counted after 5 seconds have passed. When the value reaches "5", it is hidden, and when the non-display state is maintained for 6 seconds, the count display is redisplayed with a count value of "4". After that, when 2 seconds have passed and the count value reaches "2", it is hidden again, and when the non-display state is maintained for 16 seconds, the count display is redisplayed with a count value of "1". display, and after reaching "0" one second later, the "role A action (role A notice)" that is subject to the timer with the count display hidden is executed. It has become.

According to such a mode of "role object A operation 2-2", as shown in FIG. 194(a), a count display with a count value of "10" starts after a predetermined time from the start of pattern variation. In spite of this, a predetermined value (here, " 0”), and the effect for the timer is executed. That is, in this case, even if a count display with a relatively small count value appears, if an effect (timer stagnation effect) is generated to hide the count display for a predetermined period of time while the count display is being consumed, the count will continue. The speed of progress will be stagnant for that amount of time, and it will be expected to be executed as a timer effect that takes the same amount of time as when a count display with a relatively large count value appears. . As described above, in the timer effect, there is a tendency that the longer the time required for the timer effect, the higher the probability of appearance of the highly anticipated timer object effect mode. By making it possible to generate the stagnation effect, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game when a count display with a relatively small count value appears. In addition, by adding the time during which the count display is hidden, the time of the entire timer effect is extended, so that it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game while the count display is being executed. .

In addition, in the aspect of "role A action 2-2", as shown in FIG. 194(a), the first time (6 seconds) during which the count display is hidden (the period between the count value "5" → "4"), and the count display is hidden for a second time (16 seconds) longer than the first time. period (the period between the count value "2" → "1") can appear, but regardless of the length of these times (first time, second time), the count display is "non- When returning from the "display state" to the "display state", the count value advances (changes) only by a specific number (here, "1"), which is the minimum unit. That is, in this case, the longer the count display is maintained in the "non-display state", the longer the count progress speed will be stagnant for that amount of time, and the higher the rate of appearance of the highly anticipated performance mode. Since it can be expected that it will become better, it will be possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the mode of "role A action 2-2", as the count value in the timer effect progresses, the time during which the count display is hidden and maintained in the "hidden state" becomes longer. is set to That is, in this case, even if the count display with a relatively small count value is being executed and the count is about to end (the predetermined value will be reached shortly), the If the timer stagnation performance appears in , the time required for the timer performance is greatly increased and the degree of expectation is greatly improved, so that the game interest is preferably maintained over the period until the count display reaches a predetermined value. be able to

In addition, in the mode of "Accessory A operation 2-2", after the count display is hidden, the count display is redisplayed, and after reaching a predetermined value, the timer-targeted effect is executed. However, after the count display is hidden, the count display is not necessarily redisplayed so that there may appear a pattern of effect in which the timer effect is terminated halfway at this point without executing the timer object effect. may When this production pattern appears, the ratio of stopping the pattern fluctuation with the big hit pattern is lower than when the predetermined value is reached and the timer target production is executed. It becomes possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of this itself. Moreover, after the count display is hidden (after the timer effect is terminated halfway), while waiting for the count display to be redisplayed, there may be cases where the pattern variation is stopped with the jackpot pattern. Therefore, it is expected that the realization of such a surprise effect will improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the mode of "role A action 2-2", the total time during which the count display is hidden (22 seconds) is longer than the total time during which the count display is displayed (10 seconds). As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game while the count display is being executed.

FIG. 194(b) shows an example of the relationship between the time until the count display is redisplayed (the time during which the non-display state is maintained) and the degree of risk that the count display is not redisplayed. FIG. 11 is a table H1 showing different count values when displayed. FIG. That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the type of timer effect including the mode of timer stagnant effect and its execution mode are determined based on the result of big hit determination and the type of variation pattern so that the relationship shown in Table H1 appears. It is desirable to have it processed.

According to the aspect shown in such table H1, as the count value progresses (as it approaches the predetermined value), there is a tendency for the duration of time when the display is hidden to increase. There is a tendency that the risk that the timer effect will end without the count display being displayed again will gradually increase. That is, in this case, if the count value is hidden at a stage when the count value has not progressed much, the total time as the timer effect is small, but it can be steadily extended with little risk of termination, whereas the count value is large. If it is hidden at an advanced stage, the risk of ending is high, but the total time as a timer effect can be greatly extended, so as the count value progresses, the effect as a timer stagnation effect gradually changes. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game while the count display is being executed.

In Table H1, each count value is associated with one non-display time, but each count value is associated with a plurality of non-display times, and timer stagnation occurs during any one of these non-display times. A production may be generated.

Also, at what timing (count value) while the count display is being executed, the count display is hidden, and the number of times it is hidden depends on the result of the jackpot judgment and the type of variation pattern. It is desirable to make a decision at the start of pattern variation based on this.

Further, in such a timer stagnation effect, an effect corresponding to this may be performed while the count display is hidden. For example, when the display is hidden for 6 seconds with a count value of "6", the non-display effect corresponding to the count value of "6" is performed for 6 seconds, and the display is hidden for 16 seconds with a count value of "2". , the non-display effect corresponding to the count value "2" (the effect different from the non-display effect corresponding to the count value "6") is performed for 16 seconds, The interest in the game can be favorably maintained when the count display is in the non-display state. At this time, an effect as to whether or not the count display is to be redisplayed may appear in the non-display effect, and the count display may be redisplayed or the timer effect may be terminated according to the result of the effect. .

More preferably, during the period from when the count display is started until it reaches a predetermined value, when the count display is in the display state, no new effect (a different effect from the timer effect) indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit is provided. By preventing the start of the count display and making it possible to newly start a performance (a performance different from the timer performance) suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win when the count display is in a non-display state, the remaining count can be taken care of. You will be able to enjoy a production different from the timer production. Also, in addition to raising the level of expectation due to the fact that the timer stagnant effect has occurred, it is possible to enjoy the increased level of expectation due to the performance of a different effect from the timer effect. be able to make it even higher.

Another effect that appears when the count display is in the non-display state may include a new timer effect different from the timer effect. However, in this case, the count progresses at a higher speed than the hidden count progress speed, and a new timer is started before the timing for redisplaying the hidden count display arrives. It is desirable to make the target effect appear when the count display of the effect reaches a predetermined value. As a target effect of the new timer effect, an effect of redisplaying the count display that is in the non-display state may be performed.

[Progress effect leading to timer target effect]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first executes a count display up to a predetermined value within a period during which the symbol effect is performed, and at least one of a plurality of effect modes prepared as candidates for the effect corresponding to the count display. It is possible to execute a timer effect that makes one appear as a timer target effect. In this respect, in the timer effect according to the present application, a series of effects including the above-mentioned timer object effect (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, role A action, special timer, cut-in B, role B action, etc.) is started before the count display reaches a predetermined value, and can be finished after the count display reaches the predetermined value (development performance leading to a timer target performance).

That is, in this case, since a series of timer-related effects corresponding to the timer effect are executed before the count display reaches the predetermined value, the game interest until the count display reaches the predetermined value is preferable. can be maintained at

FIG. 195 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of progress effects leading to a timer-targeted effect.

As shown in 195 of the same figure, a timer effect is currently being executed with a specific timer type within the symbol fluctuation period, and the count value of the count display reaches the first specific value (here, count "6"). Assuming that progress is made, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first creates a progression effect (a series of timer corresponding production) to start.

Here, in this illustrative example, as shown in FIG. 195, a cut-in by a teammate character is performed as a timer-targeted effect that appears after the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"). A display image SEG3-1 to be performed is displayed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this example of explanation, a cut-in is performed by the ally character during the countdown period before the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"). It is designed to display the process leading to the situation where the game is played as an effect image (progress effect leading to the effect content of the timer target effect).

For example, in this illustrative example, the count value in the count display is the first specific value (here, the count is "6") before the count value in the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"). When , a display image SEG1 depicting a person asking for help from the ally character is displayed as a corresponding effect.

Next, when the count value of the count display reaches a second specific value (here, the count is "3") before the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0") As an effect corresponding to this, a display image SEG2 is displayed depicting a situation in which a friend character confronts an enemy character after accepting a request from a person seeking help.

That is, by sequentially displaying such display images SEG1 and SEG2 while the count display progresses toward a predetermined value, when the count display progresses further and reaches the predetermined value, a cut-in (here, , a display image SEG3-1 in which an ally character wears an aura to defeat an enemy character) will be displayed, whereby the game interest during the execution of the count display can be expected. It becomes possible to suppress the decrease in

However, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, even if the display image SEG2 corresponding to the second specific value (here, count "3") appears, the friendly character cuts the display when the count display reaches the predetermined value. There is also prepared an effect pattern in which a display image SEG3-2 depicting a friendly character fleeing from an enemy is displayed instead of the display image SEG3-1 where the in is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to predict which effect will appear as the target of the timer effect in the period before the count display reaches the predetermined value, while the count display reaches the predetermined value. Since it is no longer necessary to specify the effect mode that appears when the count display reaches the predetermined value, the game interest can be preferably maintained even after the count display reaches the predetermined value. Note that the display image SEG3-2 may not necessarily be prepared, and the display image SEG3-1 may always appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

In this regard, in this illustrative example, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, count "6") appears, or after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the second specific value (here, count "3") appears. After the image SEG2 appears, an effect pattern is prepared in which the count display is terminated halfway before reaching a predetermined value without progressing any further. According to such a configuration, the count display progresses while there is a risk that the timer-targeted effect does not appear and the timer-targeted effect ends halfway while the effect progresses appearing before the predetermined value is reached. be able to enjoy It should be noted that an effect pattern in which the timer effect is terminated halfway may not necessarily be prepared, and the timer object effect may appear when the count display always reaches a predetermined value.

Also, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, count "6") is the display image SEG3-1 in which the teammate character cuts in, Although illustration is omitted, it is displayed as an effect image linked to a different display image (for example, a cut-in by a different character) prepared as a timer-targeted effect. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 204(C)-(F) and FIGS. 205(G)-(I) which will be described later, one of the three friendly characters shown in FIG. 204(D) asks for help. A request from a person is accepted, and the friend character who has accepted the request confronts the enemy character and performs a cut-in effect.

Therefore, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, count "6") is displayed, the second specific value (here, count "3") is displayed. ”), a different display image may be displayed instead of the display image SEG2, and when the different display image is displayed, the display image The effect progresses so as to lead to a display image different from SEG3-1 (for example, a cut-in by a different character). It should be noted that the display image SEG1 may be executed as an effect that always leads to the display image SEG3-1 in which the cut-in by the teammate character is performed.

It is preferable to determine which path the effect progresses while the count display is being executed, based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of the variation pattern, etc., when the pattern changes. When a performance pattern in which the timer-targeted performance is not executed appears, the rate of stopping the pattern variation in the jackpot pattern is lower than when the predetermined value is reached and the timer-targeted performance is executed, but such a performance pattern is used. By preparing it, it becomes possible to increase the occurrence frequency of the timer effect itself.

Also, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, count "6") appears, the count display is continued until the count display reaches the second specific value (here, count "3"). The display may be hidden. For example, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, when the count "6" is displayed, the display image SEG1 corresponding to the count "6" is displayed for the time required for the counts "5" to "4" to be completed. While the display image SEG1 is displayed, the count display is hidden. After that, the count display is displayed in accordance with the timing when the count number becomes "3", and the display image SEG2 corresponding to the count "3" is displayed for the time when the count "2" to "1" is completed. , and the count display is hidden while the display image SEG2 is displayed. Then, after that, the count display is displayed in accordance with the timing when the count number becomes "0", and the display image SEG3-1 (timer object effect) corresponding to the count "0" is executed. You can enjoy the performance progress corresponding to the count number without worrying about the count digestion toward the value.

Note that the display image SEG1, the display image SEG2, the display image SEG3-1, and the like may be displayed as still images, or may be displayed as moving images that take a predetermined amount of time. When displaying as still images, a plurality of still images may be sequentially displayed within a predetermined time corresponding to a specific count value (first specific value or second specific value).

Also, the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value is displayed, the display image SEG2 corresponding to the second specific value is displayed, and the display image SEG3-1 corresponding to the predetermined value is displayed. As for the times, it is desirable that they are set as different times.

Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of progression effects leading to any one of a plurality of types of timer-targeted effects are prepared as progression effects leading to a timer-targeted effect, but a specific timer-targeted effect appears. Only when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the progress effect leading to the specific timer-targeted effect may be executed.

In addition, in the explanation example shown in FIG. 195, the progression effect leading to the timer target effect is executed from when the count number is "6", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the remaining count is a first specific count number (for example, "3"), and when the remaining count is a second specific count number (for example, "6"), A progression performance leading to a timer-targeted performance can be executed, and when a second specific count number (for example, "6") with a relatively large remaining count is reached, the progressing performance leading to a timer-targeted performance is executed. If the degree of expectation for a big win is made relatively high, the presentation progresses more while the number of counts continued as if the degree of expectation for a big win becomes higher, and the performance progresses more, which makes the game amusement more suitable. can be maintained at

[In-timer operation effect]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first executes count display up to a predetermined value within the period during which the symbol effect is performed, and can execute the count object effect targeted for the count display. In this regard, in the timer effect according to the present application, it is possible to set a period during which the operation of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be received during the execution of the count display. 410) is performed, any one of a plurality of operation-time presentation modes having different rates of occurrence of a highly anticipated presentation mode (for example, cut-in B) as a presentation to be counted when the count display reaches a predetermined value is selected. or In addition, as a period during which the effect can be accepted, a first period from when the count display is the first count value to when it is the second count value, and a third count value when the count display is counted after the second count value At least a second period from the time of to the time of the fourth count value is prepared as a settable period. On top of this, during the pattern effect period in which it is determined that a highly anticipated effect mode (for example, cut-in B) will appear as the effect to be counted, from when the count display is the first count value to the second count value. When the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated during the first period up to the count value and the effect is accepted, and when the count display is the third count value to the fourth count value. When the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated during the second period up to the time of the count value and the effect is accepted, a specific effect at the time of operation is given as a result of the acceptance of the effect. The rate of occurrence of a mode (for example, a mode suggesting that the rate of appearance of a specific effect with a high degree of expectation as a timer-targeted effect is high) is different (in-timer operation effect).

That is, in this case, even if it has been determined that a highly anticipated effect (for example, cut-in B) will appear as the count-corresponding effect, the time from when the count display reaches the first count value to when it reaches the second count value Specific Since the likelihood of occurrence of the operation effect mode is different, whether the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated from the time when the count display is the first count value to the time when the count display is the second count value. should operate the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) from when is the third count value to when is the fourth count value, or whether the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated by both of them Such a game strategy can be made interesting.

For example, if an operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated within a period during which a specific operation-time presentation mode is likely to occur, it is possible to reduce the effect risk that the specific operation-time presentation mode does not appear. , Even if the specific operation mode is likely to occur, even if this appears, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation for the appearance of a highly anticipated performance (for example, cut-in B) as a count target performance. On the other hand, if the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated within a period in which it is difficult for the specific operation-time presentation mode to occur, the production risk that the specific operation-time presentation mode does not appear increases. When the specified performance mode at the time of operation appears as it is difficult to occur, it is easy to have a feeling of expectation for the appearance of performance (for example, cut-in B) with a high degree of expectation as the performance corresponding to the count.

These two periods with different characteristics (from the first count value to the second count value and from the third count value to the fourth count value) are used until the count display reaches a predetermined value. Since it can appear between these two periods, it is interesting how to operate the operation means (for example, cut-in B) in these two periods to maintain the game interest during the counting. will be expected.

FIG. 196(a) shows a second process in which a single timer is used (YES in step S5506) and a decision (NO in step S5507) is made to not execute the mission rendering (make the conversation notice appear). 10 is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the within-timer operation effect that is performed when a specific variable number (SP reach without timer) is selected in a situation;

In the example shown in FIG. 196(a), for convenience of explanation, when a specific timer type is selected (see FIG. 162) as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing regarding the operation effect within the timer is executed. It's supposed to run. However, considering that the in-timer operation effect functions as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a specific effect will appear as a timer target effect, the specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). When the cut-in B is selected as the timer target effect, the following processing related to the operation effect within the timer is not performed when the cut-in B is performed, but the timer type in which another effect mode appears is determined. Execute. Note that when the timer type in which an effect with a lower degree of expectation than the cut-in B appears as the timer-targeted effect is determined, the effect is higher than in the case where the timer type in which the cut-in B appears as the timer-targeted effect is determined. When the acceptance is made, the ratio of occurrence of the specific presentation mode at the time of operation is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 196(a), assuming that the timer type of "cut-in B2" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the following processing. Determination processing is performed as to which of a plurality of presentation modes (“Cut-in B2-11” and “Cut-in B2-12”) including the mode of operation within the timer should be executed for “Cut-in B2”. In addition, it is desirable that the determination process is performed based on the result of the big hit determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

In the example shown in FIG. 196(a), in the mode of "Cut-in B2-11", 40 seconds after the count display with a count value of "40" is displayed after the lapse of a predetermined time from the pattern variation. When the time elapses, it reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), and under the condition that the count display is hidden, "Cut-in B (Cut B advance notice)", which is subject to the timer, is executed.

On the other hand, in the mode of "Cut-in B2-12", a predetermined value ( Here, "0") is reached and the count display is hidden, and "cut-in B (cut B advance notice)", which is subject to the timer, is executed. However, in the mode of "Cut-in B2-12", the same as the first period from when the count value of the count display is "35 (first count value)" to "25 (second count value)" In the second period from when the count value is "15 (third count value)" to "5 (fourth count value)", when the operation button 410) is operated, regarding the operation effect within the timer , and a display appears to suggest that the reception of the effect is permitted. In addition, as a display suggesting that the effect reception is permitted, in addition to the method of displaying a specific display image, it is possible to change from "35 (first count value)" to "25 (second count value) ”, and further from “15 (third count value)” to “5 (fourth count value)” by changing the display mode (size, shape, color, etc.) of the count value is also feasible.

That is, in the mode of "cut-in B2-12", either the first period (count value is "35" to "25") or the second period (count value is "15" to "5") When the operation button 410 is operated within the period, the reception of the performance as the operation performance within the timer is performed, and based on the reception of the performance, the ratio of appearance of the highly expected specific performance as the performance to be counted differs. Any one of a plurality of performance modes at the time of operation is generated. It should be noted that, with respect to the plurality of manipulation mode effects, for example, it is possible to employ a mode in which a predetermined lamp is lit in either blue or red (a specific manipulation mode effect mode). When it appears, the rate of appearance of a specific effect with high expectations as a production to be counted is the lowest, and the ratio of appearance of a specific production with high expectations as a production to be counted when the mode of lighting up in red (specific operation mode) appears. can be set to be the highest.

FIG. 196(b) determines which effect mode to appear as the effect mode at the time of operation, depending on whether the effect is received during the first period or when the effect is received during the second period. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a table (table T16) that is referred to when

As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment is provided with a state in which a predetermined lamp is lit in either blue or red (specific operation mode) as an operation mode.

In this regard, in the table T16 shown in FIG. 196(b), in the effect pattern (cut-in B2-12) in which "cut-in B" appears as the timer-targeted effect, if the effect is accepted during the first period, " Blue (low expectation mode) is selected at a ratio of 30/100, and red (high expectation mode) is selected at a ratio of 70/100. Then, blue (low expectation mode) is selected at a ratio of "70/100" and red (high expectation mode) is selected at a ratio of "30/100". Therefore, when the operation button 410 is operated in the first period, it is possible to suppress the production risk that the red color (high expectation mode) does not appear, but the red color (high expectation mode) is likely to occur. Even if this appears, it is difficult to have a sense of anticipation for the appearance of an effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, cut-in B) as an effect to be counted. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated in the second period, although the production risk that red (high expectation mode) does not appear increases, red (high expectation mode) is less likely to occur. When this appears, it is easy to have a sense of anticipation for the appearance of an effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, cut-in B) as the effect to be counted.

That is, although illustration is omitted, in a production pattern in which a production mode with a lower degree of expectation than "cut-in B" appears as a timer-targeted production, for example, if the production is accepted during the first period, "50/100 ” to select blue (low expectation mode) and ``50/100'' to select red (high expectation mode). Blue (low expectation aspect) is selected at a ratio of 90/100, and red (high expectation aspect) is selected at a ratio of 10/100. Therefore, when red (high expectation mode) appears in the second period, it is possible to have a sense of anticipation that the production pattern (cut-in B2-12) in which "cut-in B" appears is selected as the timer-targeted production. become.

In this embodiment, when a specific timer type is determined, two periods, the first period and the second period, are generated within the variable time. At least one of the first period and the second period may be generated based on the type of pattern, the type of timer, or the like. For example, when it is set to occur only in the first period, the risk of red (high expectation mode) not appearing when the effect reception is made is reduced, but the degree of expectation when red (high expectation mode) appears is not so high. The opportunity to operate is granted only under the single condition that it does not become high, and if it is set to occur only in the second period, there is a high risk that red (high expectation mode) will not appear when the performance is accepted. However, the opportunity to operate is given only under the single condition that the degree of expectation is high when red (high expectation mode) appears. That is, in this case, depending on the player's preference, even if the player wishes to operate in the first period, the opportunity to operate is given only in the second period, or even if the player wishes to operate in the second period, Since the opportunity to operate is given only on the one period side, the count display is executed by creating a conflict as to whether or not to operate within the period on the side that is not preferred while the count is consumed. It is possible to preferably maintain the amusement of the game while playing.

Also, in the first period and the second period, the display indicating that the reception of the effect is permitted may not necessarily be performed. In other words, in this case, it is counted in a state in which it is unclear whether the performance reception is permitted in the first period or the second period, or whether the performance reception is permitted in either the first period or the second period. Since the display progresses, it becomes possible to make the player more interested in the timer effect, and it is possible to preferably maintain the interest in the game while the count display is being executed.

In addition, it is desirable to set the same length of time for which performance reception is permitted in the first period and the second period. According to such a configuration, the reception of the effect for the same amount of time is allowed in either the first period or the second period, so the count value is a specific number ("10" in this case). ) can be provided as a ``thinking time for whether or not to perform an operation'', and through the addition of such effect elements, it is possible to maintain the interest in the game during the period in which the count display is performed. become.

In addition, in the first period and the second period, it is possible to accept the operation by the player a plurality of times, and the effect mode changes (for example, blue → green → red) through the reception of the effect a plurality of times. The higher the number, the higher the probability of appearance of an effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, cut-in B) as the effect to be counted. However, in this case, even if the performance reception is performed a plurality of times, the easiness of appearance of the performance mode that finally appears is set to be different between the first period and the second period.

[Timer hidden effect]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first executes a count display up to a predetermined value within a period during which the pattern effect is performed, and can execute a timer target effect corresponding to the count display. In this regard, in the present invention, during the execution of the count display, the count forward presentation by the ornament can be executed in front of the count display.

That is, in this case, in a situation where the count target effect is executed when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the decoration is counted in such a manner that the count display is difficult to see until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Since the front production will be performed, the count value by the count display can only be grasped by jumping, and the remaining time until the count target production is executed is only for a short time (during the count front production by the decoration) It is possible to increase interest in the count display by making it difficult to grasp.

In addition, instead of making the count display difficult to see, the anticipation for the appearance of the big hit pattern is heightened through the count front presentation by the decorative body. is expected to suppress this.

FIGS. 197(a) to (c) show the mode of single timer (YES in step S5506), and a decision (NO in step S5507) to the effect that the mission rendering (appear the conversation notice) is made. FIG. 11 is a time chart for explaining specific details of the timer concealment effect performed when a specific variable number is selected in the second processing situation; FIG.

In the example of the timer effect shown in FIG. 197(a), first, a count display with a count number of "30" is started at the timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the pattern variation was started. , after the count display becomes "0", the timer-targeted effect appears. However, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(a), at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count display, the count forward effect by the ornament can be executed on the front side of the count display.

Here, as the count forward effect by such decorations, for example, in the examples of FIGS. It can be implemented as a count number erosion effect or the like to place this across. The decorative body does not necessarily have to be provided as a movable body, and may be one that makes the count display relatively difficult to see during the production than during the non-production.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 197(a), the count front effect by the ornament is executed in the effect state (the state where the count display is difficult to see) until the count value reaches "10". In this effect state, the likelihood of appearance of a specific effect highly expected as a timer target effect is suggested by the operation mode or light emission mode of the ornament.

Then, in the production example shown in FIG. 197(a), when the count front production by the decoration ends, the count value changes from "10" to "0" under the condition that the count display is easily visible. After that, one of a plurality of performance modes appears as a timer-targeted performance.

On the other hand, in the example of the timer effect shown in FIG. 197(b) as well, first, a count with a count number of "30" is reached at a timing after a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the pattern variation was started. After the display is started and the count display becomes "0", the timer-targeted effect that is the target of the timer appears. In addition, while the count display is being executed, the forward count effect by the decorative body is executed on the front side of the count display, similarly to the example of the timer effect shown in FIG. 197(a).

However, in the example of timer effect shown in FIG. , the count value progresses from "15" to "0" under the condition that the count display is easily visible, and then one of a plurality of performance modes appears as the timer target performance.

On the other hand, in the example of the timer effect shown in FIG. 197(c), first, a count display with a count number of "25" is displayed after a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the pattern variation started. After the count display is started and the count display becomes "0", the timer-targeted effect that is the target of the timer appears. 197(a) and 197(b) are the same as in the example of the timer effect shown in FIGS.

However, in the example of the timer effect shown in FIG. 197(c), the forward count effect by the ornament is generated and ended at a relatively early stage, and when the forward count effect by the ornament ends. , the count value progresses from "20" to "0" under the condition that the count display is easily visible, and then one of a plurality of performance modes appears as the timer target performance.

By the way, as described above, in the timer effect, the higher the count value when the count display is started, the higher the probability that the highly expected effect object will appear as the timer object effect. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the count forward effect by the decoration occurs, the count value when the count display is started is not used as a reference, but the count forward effect is completed and visually recognized. A relationship is set such that the larger the count value when the timer target effect is made, the higher the rate at which the highly expected effect target appears as the timer target effect. You may make it include 100% about this ratio.

For example, in the production examples of FIGS. 197(a) and 197(b), the count value when the count display is started is the same at "30" in both production patterns. 197(b), the count value is "10" when the count front effect is finished and it is easy to see. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. Since the count value of is "15", the production example of FIG. 197(b) has a higher rate of occurrence of highly expected effects as the timer target effects.

According to such a configuration, if the count front presentation occurs during execution of the count display, the presentation value as the size of the count number appearing at the start of the count is damaged, and the count number when the count front presentation ends. Since the size of .

For example, in the effect example of FIG. 197(c) described above, a relatively small count value "25" is displayed at the start of the count, but when the count forward effect ends, a relatively large value is displayed for the end of the effect. A count value of "20" is displayed, and the rate at which highly anticipated effects appear as timer target effects is increased compared to the effects shown in FIGS. there is

That is, in this case, if the count forward effect occurs, there is a possibility that the highly anticipated effect as the timer object effect will appear at a higher rate than when a relatively large count value is displayed at the start of counting. Therefore, it is expected to suppress the decrease in interest in the game when a relatively small count value is displayed at the start of counting.

However, if a relatively large count value is displayed at the start of the count, compared to the case where a relatively small count value is displayed at the start of the count, if the count forward effect occurs after that, the count will also be relatively large at the end. It is desirable to set so that the rate at which the value appears is high.

197(a) and 197(b), since a plurality of times are prepared as the time from the start of the count display to the occurrence of the count forward effect, the count display is executed. It is possible to maintain the interest in the game by making the player aware of the possibility that the count forward performance may occur over a long period of time.

In addition, in the production examples of FIGS. 197(a) and 197(b) described above, since a plurality of times are prepared as the time from the start of the count front production to the end, the count front production is started. At the point of time, it becomes difficult to predict the count value at the time of termination, and the interest in the game can be preferably maintained until the count forward presentation is terminated.

Regarding the count forward effect, in addition to the execution of the count display, the period before the count display is executed, for example, when it appears, the timer effect will appear at a higher rate. can be However, in view of the configuration according to the present application, in which the count progress is made difficult to visually recognize by causing the count forward effect to appear during the execution of the count display, and the effect is aimed at making it more interesting, it is more difficult than before the count display is started. , it is desirable to execute the count forward effect at a higher rate after the count display is counted. In addition, when the count front performance is executed while the timer look-ahead performance is being executed in the period within one pattern variation, the count display is not yet started when the count front performance is finished and the timer look-ahead performance is not started. is being executed, compared to when the count display is being executed at the end of the count front production, the rate of appearance of highly anticipated productions as timer target productions will be higher. It is desirable to set

Also, if the count forward effect is executed while the timer prefetch effect is being executed, the timer prefetch effect and the count display are displayed at different positions, and then the timer prefetch effect is displayed. During the execution of the count forward effect by the ornament on the front side of the display position of the timer prefetch effect, and during the execution of the count display, the count forward effect by the decoration is executed on the front side of the display position of the timer prefetch effect. It is desirable to execute That is, in this case, the decoration moves to different positions depending on whether the timer prefetch effect is being executed or the count display is being executed. When the timer prefetch effect ends when the is positioned, the count display starts at a position different from the timer prefetch effect that has been made difficult to see. According to such a configuration, when the count forward effect is generated while the timer look-ahead effect is being executed, the count forward effect is still being executed and the count display is started at the stage where the count forward effect is not finished. Even so, it is possible to make the count value of the count display easy to see from the start, so there is a possibility that the production value as the size of the count at the start of counting will be damaged. You will be able to enjoy the count forward production while being excluded.

In addition, regarding the count forward effect, it is performed at a relatively late stage after a certain amount of time has passed since the count display started, rather than at a relatively early stage when the count display has not passed much since the count display started. It is desirable that the ratio at which the count-forward effect is executed is higher.

In addition, if the count front effect is executed in a situation where the remaining count (remaining time) until the timer object effect is executed is relatively small, the magnitude of the count value that appears when this is finished cannot be expected. In addition, since there is a concern that it may be confused with the timer target production, the count forward production is ended before the remaining count number becomes less than the predetermined number, and the remaining count number is less than the predetermined number. In , it is desirable to prevent the count front presentation from being newly executed.

Further, the count forward effect may be performed in such a manner that, when a plurality of count displays are being executed, the decorative body is positioned on the front side across the count displays.

Of the timer effects, when a specific count value is reached, a predetermined effect image (for example, a timer-targeted exclusion effect, timer mode effect, etc.) or a predetermined effect movable body (timer-targeted first-out effect) appears. When the effect is executed, it is possible to substantially reveal the current count value by those related effects even during the execution of the count front effect by the ornament, so that the count display is visible. It becomes possible to predict how much counting progress has been made since it was hardened. However, in place of this, instead of performing the count forward effect by the decoration only on the front side of the count value, a predetermined effect image (for example, timer target exclusion effect, timer mode effect, etc.) is generated when a specific count value is reached. or a predetermined effect movable body (timer target first-out effect) is positioned in front of it, and the count forward effect is performed so that the count display is difficult to see. It may be made difficult to predict how much counting progress has been made.

The number of ornaments to be produced on the front side of the count display is not limited to one, and the count front production may be performed so that all of a plurality of decorations are positioned on the front side of the count display. In this case, any one of a plurality of modes, such as a mode in which all of the plurality of decorations are positioned in front of the count display, and a mode in which only one of the plurality of decorations is positioned in front of the count display. , the count forward effect may be selectively executed.

Various aspects of the above-described timer effect itself and various effects performed in relation to the timer effect will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 198 to 207. FIG. Here, the example of processing related to each effect described above is merely an example. etc. may be changed as appropriate within the scope of the same technical idea. Therefore, in the production examples described below, there may be some that are inconsistent with the production contents of the above-mentioned productions, but they are within the scope of the same technical idea and within the scope that a person skilled in the art can implement. There is no problem because the contents of the processing are changed appropriately in . In addition, the following "timer effect" basically means that the count display is executed in the notice side timer effect or the variable side timer effect, but in addition to the effect during the count display, It may have the meaning of including the timer look-ahead effect. Also, as a mode of "counting display", although "seconds" are counted below, the present invention is not limited to this.

FIG. 198(A) shows an effect situation in which the variable display (for example, SP reach) of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with the reserved number being 0 in the normal game state. ing. 198 and 199, for convenience of explanation, the specific decorative member SDY for presentation, which has been omitted, is shown in the drawings. The specific decorative member SDY is, for example, a back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, a back-top left movable effect unit 3200, a back-left movable effect unit 3300, a back-top middle movable effect unit 3400, a back-bottom front movable effect unit 3500, etc. It is equivalent to "a movable member of

In FIG. 198(B), during execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. It shows the production situation to be started.

Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 198(B), in accordance with the display of the timer effect (count number), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value, the target of the timer effect is displayed. Candidates for the production type that can appear as are displayed, and while it is unclear which of these candidates will appear as a timer-targeted production while the count display is being executed, any of these candidates is a timer-targeted It is made possible to recognize that it appears as a performance. In addition, "conversation" in the figure corresponds to a conversation notice, "hold" in the figure corresponds to a change in hold, and "cut A" in the figure corresponds to cut-in A. "Role A" in the figure corresponds to the action of the role A, "Confidential" in the figure corresponds to the special timer, and "Cut B" in the figure corresponds to the cut-in B, "Role B" in the figure corresponds to the role B action.

FIG. 198(C) shows an effect situation in which the timer target exclusion effect is executed when the count number shown in FIG. 198(B) reaches "60".

As described above, the timer-targeted exclusion effect refers to the effect mode that is not selected as a timer target while it is unclear which effect mode the timer-targeted effect is. It is possible to perform a display that suggests at least one (two or more may be suggested) of the production modes that have not been determined as a result.

Here, as described above, in the timer effect, each timing (in this example, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, etc.) from the start of the fluctuation, the types of effects that can appear as timer targets are narrowed down. Therefore, in the effect example of FIG. 198(C), the timing for generating the timer-targeted effect is set to a plurality of timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds , 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc.).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 198(B), an effect pattern is described in which the timer effect is displayed with the count number of "70". However, at this timing, the timer effect does not have a count number of "70", but has other count numbers such as "10", "20", "30", "40", or "50". It is also possible to generate a production pattern that is displayed in advance. Assuming that a timer effect with a count number of "10" appears at the timing shown in FIG. 198(B), the count display of the timer effect is shown in FIG. A predetermined value (here, "0") is reached at the timing, and, for example, "conversation notice" appears as a timer-targeted effect. On the other hand, if a timer effect with a count number other than "10" appears at the timing shown in FIG. At the timing shown in FIG. 198(C), when the remaining count number has passed, the "conversation notice" is substantially excluded from the types of effects that can appear as timer objects, and the timer object is It can be said that the candidates that could appear as a production were narrowed down. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 198(C), since the count display is executed with the count number of "60" remaining, at this timing, substantially It is desirable to perform an effect (timer target exclusion effect) that suggests which effect type (conversation advance notice) is excluded from this. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately represent the presentation situation in which the player is placed.

However, in the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198(C), it is suggested that "special timer" is not selected as the timer target effect instead of "conversation notice" at this timing. there is According to such a timer-excluded effect, it becomes clear in the middle of the count that the "effect indicating that the big win is confirmed when it appears" is not selected as the timer-targeted effect. It becomes possible to incite a sense of anxiety about whether a highly anticipated production will appear as a timer target.

198 and 199, the display image (confidential) corresponding to the "special timer" among the display images displaying candidates for the timer effect target effect is locked. By superimposing the padlocks in the state and displaying "Locked!!", it is suggested that the "special timer" is not selected as a timer-targeted effect.

FIG. 198(D) shows an effect situation in which the timer mode effect is executed when the count display reaches a specific count value after the appearance of the first timer object exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198(C). there is

As mentioned above, the timer mode effect is the degree of expectation as a timer target effect when the count display reaches a predetermined value within the period before the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"). Hell timer mode (1st timer mode display), in which the appearance rate of high performance aspects (effect type and effect content (cut-in mode, etc.)) is relatively low, and timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value , or Heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) in which the rate of appearance of highly anticipated presentation modes is relatively high.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 198(D), first, while the countdown is in progress, a heaven challenge effect is performed to determine whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed, and the heaven challenge effect appears. At that point in time, either hell timer mode or heaven timer mode will be shown to occur.

In addition, in the heaven challenge production, it is likely that the transition to hell timer mode or heaven timer mode is likely to occur (for example, the devil and the angel are pushing each other, and which is in the dominant situation) In this case, it is suggested whether the hell timer mode or the heaven timer mode will occur after such an effect.

Incidentally, in the example shown in FIG. 198(D), since the heaven challenge effect is executed while the effect type excluded in the timer target exclusion effect is indicated, any effect type in the timer target exclusion effect Depending on whether it is excluded (whether the production type with low expectations is excluded or whether the production type with high expectations is excluded), is it in a situation where hell timer mode is likely to occur, or heaven It can be said that the presenting situation is one in which it is possible to predict whether the timer mode is likely to occur with a certain degree of accuracy.

FIG. 198(E) shows the display of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) as a result of the success of the heaven challenge production shown in FIG. It shows the state of the production being performed.

In this effect situation, it is shown that when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the transition to heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) has a relatively high rate of appearance of a highly anticipated effect mode as a timer object effect. be Therefore, if the timer-targeted exclusion effect is performed while in heaven timer mode (second timer mode display), a favorable result for the player (here, among the plurality of effect types, the low-expectation effect ) is suggested, and the sense of anticipation when the timer target exclusion effect occurs can be increased.

On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, as a result of failure in the heaven challenge production shown in FIG. In this case, the rate of suggesting a disadvantageous result for the player (here, the high-expectation performance among the multiple performance types is not selected as the timer-targeted performance) is high, so the timer-targeted exclusion is high. It becomes possible to incite anxiety when the performance occurs.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 198(E), the transition to the heaven timer mode (or the hell timer mode) is not expressed as a mode of count display, but is the mode of the changing decorative pattern SZ or related thereto. This makes it possible to recognize that the player is shifting to the heaven timer mode (or the hell timer mode) without overlooking other effects while the remaining count is being consumed. Further, in this case, it is possible to easily confirm the current timer mode even when the timer target exclusion effect is generated.

FIG. 198(F) shows the second to fourth times under the heaven timer mode generated in FIG. is executed, and when the count display reaches "20", the fifth timer-excluded effect is executed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 198(F), five types of effects among the seven types of effects prepared as timer-targeted effect candidates are locked and displayed by timer-targeted exclusion effects (five types of effects is not targeted by the timer), when the count display reaches a predetermined value, one of the remaining two types of effects (suspension change, role B action) occurs. It can be said that it is in a state where it is possible to recognize that However, in the example shown in FIG. 198(F), since the heaven timer mode is displayed, the remaining two types of effect candidates (hold change, Among the actions of the character B), the production of the side with a high degree of expectation occurs at a high rate, and the expectation can be favorably maintained until the count display reaches a predetermined value.

In this case, the heaven timer mode display may be hidden after the appearance of the timer object exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198(F) until the appearance of the timer object effect. According to such a configuration, if it is not remembered that the heaven timer mode was displayed, it becomes unclear which of the remaining production candidates has a high occurrence rate, and as a compensation for not concentrating on the production, the count is counted. It is possible to create a sense of tension until the display reaches a predetermined value.

FIG. 199(G) shows that after the appearance of the fifth timer-targeted effect shown in FIG. By causing an effect using the specific decorative member (here, the specific decorative member SDY as the role item B) to appear within the period, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY (the role item B) is made subject to the timer. It shows the effect situation in which the timer-targeted first-out effect suggesting that the

That is, in this case, since the timer-targeted first-out effect is executed while the timer-targeted exclusion effect is displayed, there is a possibility that any of the effect candidates narrowed down by the timer-targeted effect will appear as the timer-targeted effect. It will be possible to provide further criteria for judging whether the price is high.

In this example, since the "role item B intermediate action (small)" is being executed as the timer-targeted first-out effect, it is specified among the effect candidates (hold change, role B action) narrowed down by the timer-targeted exclusion effect. It is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility (may be 100%) that the “character object B action”, which is an effect using the decorative member SDY (character object B), will be executed as a timer-targeted effect. become. As described above, "Accessory B intermediate action (small)" means that the "Accessory B action", which is the effect for the timer, is "The specific decorative member SDY (Accessory B) moves from the first position to the second position. When it is assumed that it is "displaced", it means "an effect in which the specific decorative member SDY (accessory B) is displaced from the first position to a predetermined position between the first position and the second position".

However, in this example of explanation, as the content of the effect related to the "accessory B action", the first effect with a relatively low degree of expectation, in which the specific decorative member SDY (accessory B) is displaced from the first position to the second position In addition to the contents, in addition to displacing the specific decorative member SDY (accessory B) from the first position to the second position, the second position, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, displaces the accessory A from the third position to the fourth position. Effect contents are prepared, and the effect related to the "character B action" is executed by one of these effect contents.

In this regard, in the heaven timer mode according to this example of explanation, compared to the case where the hell timer mode appears, when the "character B action" is selected as the effect for the timer, the effect content is relatively expected. The rate at which high second performance contents appear is made high, and even if the performance types appearing as timer-targeted performances are completely narrowed down by the timer-targeted first-out performance, the heaven timer mode is set. A function beneficial to the player as a player is played.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 199(G), when the timer-target first-out effect using the specific decorative member (here, the specific decorative member SDY (accessory B)) is executed, the specific decorative member is counting down. The counter display is superimposed on the count display of , thereby making the count display difficult to see. That is, in this case, if such a timer-targeted first-out effect is executed while the count display is not being paid much attention, the specific decorative member SDY (accessory B) used in the timer-targeted effect is in the state of executing the effect. Combined with this, there is a production situation where it is easy to misunderstand that the timer-targeted production is being executed after the count display reaches a predetermined value and this is hidden, rather than the timer-targeted first-out production during the countdown. will be produced. Therefore, when it is recognized that the effect shown in FIG. 199(G) is not the timer-targeted effect but the timer-targeted first-out effect, the specific decorative member SDY (accessory B) is used as the timer-targeted first-out effect. After that, even if no display related to the timer target first-out effect is performed until the count display reaches a predetermined value, the specific decorative member SDY (accessory object) is used as the timer target first-out effect It is expected that the timer-targeted effect will be generated after recognizing that B) has been used. When the timer-targeted first-out effect is executed, the count display may be hidden until the timer-targeted first-out effect is completed instead of making the count display difficult to see.

FIG. 199(H) shows a specific count value (here, " 3”), a new winning occurs, and despite the fact that it has been decided to execute the performance (hold change) according to the winning, the timer for suppressing the performance corresponding to the winning It shows an effect situation in which target suppression control is being executed.

That is, as described above, especially in the example shown in FIG. 199(H), the possibility that "hold change" is selected as the timer-targeted effect by the timer-mode effect or the timer-targeted first-out effect is extremely low. In other words, since there are still "suspended changes" left as candidates for timer-targeted effects, there are times when pending changes occur in response to new winnings near the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value. If so, the player may misunderstand that the pending change is a timer-targeted effect, and as a result, the timer-targeted effect itself may be overlooked. It should be noted that when "hold change" is executed as a timer-targeted effect, it is executed for "hold 0" in the figure, so it is relatively easy to distinguish whether it is a timer-targeted effect. However, there is a high possibility that these pending changes will be misidentified under a situation of desperation with a small number of remaining counts.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the timer effect is executed, the remaining time until the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value is relatively large in the first period (here, the count number is When the remaining period is "3"), the change of hold is allowed according to the occurrence of a new winning, but the remaining time until the count display reaches a predetermined value after the first period ends. When the second period (here, the period after the remaining count number becomes "3") is reached, even if a new winning occurs, the change in the hold corresponding to this is not allowed. By doing so, the above concerns are resolved (timer-targeted suppression control).

FIG. 199(I) shows that the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) in the effect situation in which the timer-targeted suppression control shown in FIG. After the display ("Yukuzo" in this case) is displayed, it shows an effect situation in which the effect (character B action) to be the target of the timer effect is being executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 199(I), under the state that the heaven timer mode is set, the action of the character object B, which is the effect for the timer, is not the first effect content with a relatively low degree of expectation, but the comparative effect. It shows how it is executed as the second production content with high expectations. However, here, as is clear from the fact that the accessory B corresponds to the specific decorative member SDY and the accessory A corresponds to the specific decorative member TGY, it is used for the second production content. The specific decorative member TGY to be used is located on the back side in a front view from the specific decorative member SDY used for both the first effect content and the second effect content, and most of it (at least The area of more than half) overlaps.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine which of the first effect content with a relatively low degree of expectation and the second effect content with a relatively high degree of expectation is being executed (whether or not the specific decorative member TGY is in the state of effect). ) can be made difficult to determine, thereby encouraging the timer target to concentrate on the performance. In addition, in order to obtain such a function and effect, it is sufficient that the second effect content can be produced on the inner side of the specific decorative member SDY (character object B). A specific display effect in the effect display device 1600 is used in place of the specific decorative member TGY (the role A) instead of the combined effect of the member SDY (the role B) and the specific decorative member TGY (the role A), and the specific display is performed. It may be executed as a combined effect of the effect and the specific decorative member SDY (accessory B).

In addition, even in the example shown in FIG. 199(I), the timer-targeted suppression control shown in FIG. In addition, the pending display of winning in FIG. 199(H) is maintained unchanged.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 199(I), out of the "holding change" and the "role object B action" left as timer object production candidates, the "role object B action" is executed as the timer object production. (Blinking display of "B" in the figure) appears, and for "Hold change", a display that allows you to recognize that it is not a timer-targeted effect (" "Hold") is displayed.

FIG. 199(J) shows an effect situation when the timer-targeted suppression control is not executed when a predetermined time has passed since the timer-targeted effect was executed in FIG. 199(I).

That is, when a predetermined time has passed since the timer-targeted effect is executed, there is no concern that even if the "suspension change" is executed, this is mistakenly recognized as the timer-targeted effect. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 199 (J), although it was decided to change the hold according to the winning at the timing shown in FIG. At the timing shown in (J), this is changed pending. As a result, even when a new winning prize to be subject to the pending change occurs near the timing when the timer-targeted effect is executed, the pending change is properly performed while clearly indicating that it is not the timer-targeted effect. be able to execute.

Incidentally, in the example shown in FIG. 199(J), at the timing shown in FIG. However, in view of the above-mentioned special-time pending change table T9b (Fig. 175), which is referred to when the big hit pending (including pending 0) is included, it is unlikely that such a blue pending display appeared. , it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained, since it clearly indicates that the ratio of the appearance of the jackpot pattern is higher in the variation than in the case where the red pending display appears.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 199(J), which effect type is excluded in the timer-targeted exclusion effect even though the predetermined time has passed since the timer-targeted effect was executed? , and the display indicating which effect the timer target was, etc. is continuously executed. In addition, the display suggesting the heaven timer mode is also continuously executed. However, the display suggesting that the player is in heaven timer mode is displayed in a reduced size in accordance with the reduced display of the decorative symbol SZ in the ready-to-win display mode.

In this example of explanation, each display that is continuously executed in this way even in the situation shown in FIG. K)). According to such a configuration, for example, even in a state in which the symbols are stopped (a state in which a big hit symbol appears), the fact that the timer effect has been executed in the effect process up to that point, or the effect targeted by the timer effect It is possible to recognize that was the "character B action".

Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 and 199 and examples of effect other than the various effects performed in relation to the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 200 and 201. .

FIG. 200(A) shows an effect situation in which the variable display (for example, SP reach) of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with the number of reservations being 4 in the normal game state. ing.

FIG. 200(B) shows an effect in which a timer target exclusion effect is executed even though the timer effect is not being executed during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 200(A). showing the situation.

In this timer-target exclusion effect, it is indicated that the "accessory B action" is not a timer-target candidate, so that when the timer effect occurs within the variation, the timer-target candidate becomes a conversation. It is possible for the player to grasp that the selection has been narrowed down to any one of advance notice, pending change, cut-in A, accessory A action, special timer, and cut-in B. That is, in this case, among the plurality of presentation modes (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, role A action, special timer, cut-in B, role B action), the presentation mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is the timer target. Since it becomes possible to recognize that it is out of the candidates, the player comes to hope that the timer effect will not occur within the fluctuation, and the timer effect (count display) is in a non-executed state. It becomes possible to stimulate the amusement interest when playing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, when performing the timer target exclusion effect, a display suggesting various effects prepared as timer target effect candidates is displayed. is not executed, and a display simply appears indicating that at least "character B action" has not been selected as a timer-targeted effect. Therefore, in the timer target exclusion effect according to this example, it is possible to grasp that the "character object B action" is not a timer target effect, but it is unclear what other effect types are available as timer target effect candidates. The Rukoto.

In FIG. 200(C), after the timer target exclusion effect is executed in FIG. Shows the performance status.

Here, in the timer-targeted exclusion effect in this illustrative example, after displaying that at least the "character B action" is not selected as the timer-targeted effect (Fig. 200(B)), the display is changed to a timer effect ( This is continuously displayed without being hidden until the count display) is executed, and the timer effect (count display) is started while the display is displayed. In such a configuration, how much expectation does this have from the time the count display is started (here, the timer effect in which the "character B action", which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is not executed)? become able to recognize

Incidentally, in the examples shown in FIGS. 200B and 200C, when a display suggesting that at least the "character B action" is not selected as the timer-targeted effect, it is displayed continuously. Although the modes of display are made different from time to time, they do not necessarily have to be different, and may be the same.

FIG. 200(D) shows that after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. It shows a production situation in which the "conversation notice (first production mode)" prepared as a production candidate is being executed.

That is, in this case, from the player's side, the effect such as "It might be a chance" as the "conversation notice (first effect mode)" is recognized as being executed as the effect object of the timer effect. Become. However, the "conversation notice" shown in FIG. When finished, the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 200(C) is redisplayed and continued (resurrection timer effect).

That is, in this case, after the "conversation notice (first effect mode)" is shown as if it were a timer target (count target), the count display is redisplayed to further continue the timer effect, and the first effect is performed. Since it is shown that the second effect mode different from the mode is the target of the timer, the count display reaches a predetermined value at the timing when the effect with a relatively low degree of expectation appears, and this is hidden. Even when the game is stopped, the player can be made aware of the possibility that the timer target will be changed after that, and it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained.

In FIG. 200(E), after the "conversation notice" executed with the count display hidden in FIG. It shows the production situation to continue this (resurrection timer production).

Here, in such a resurrection timer effect, the countdown is secretly continued even while the count display is hidden (Fig. 200(D)), and in the example of Fig. 200(E) , the count display is redisplayed from a state in which the hidden time (here, two seconds) has been counted. That is, in this case, after the "conversation notice" ends, the count display is redisplayed with a negative notation (here, "-2"). , it is possible to express that the count is not finished and that it is continuously executed, and that the "conversation notice" that appeared in FIG. be able to recognize.

In addition, in such a resurrection timer effect, "the count display that appeared before it was once hidden" and "the count display that was redisplayed after being hidden" are different counts. In order to make it possible to more reliably recognize that the same count is digested instead of being digested, even while the count display is hidden, the count sound is set to "once It is desirable to continuously execute the count display that appeared before it was hidden and the count display that was redisplayed after being hidden once.

Also, when executing the count display with negative notation (here, "-2"), a display that allows you to recognize how many counts remain (for example, "-2 (remaining 18)") It is desirable to do so. In this case, when the count display reaches "-20 (remaining 0)" as a predetermined value (when negative count is performed for 18 seconds from "-2"), this is hidden and the timer-targeted effect is executed. Become so.

FIG. 200(F) shows the state of the heaven challenge performance (not shown) occurring while the count display shown in FIG. .

With the appearance of such a timer mode effect (heaven challenge effect, heaven timer mode), it is clearer that the timer effect has not ended and is still continuing (situation during execution of count display). will be able to recognize In the examples shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the display indicating the heaven timer mode is not associated with the decoration pattern SZ, but is displayed within the display area. is displayed as a form of stamp notation on the left side of .

FIG. 201(G) shows another effect unrelated to the timer effect ( It shows the effect situation in which the "cannon chance effect" occurs as the predetermined effect).

That is, in this "cannon chance effect", the output of the count display of the timer effect continues until it reaches a predetermined value (-20 in this case), and the output of the count display continues to a predetermined value (-20 in this case). ), and when the ``cannon chance effect'' is executed, the output is stopped in the middle of the execution (count output stop control).

More specifically, in the "cannon chance presentation", after the cannon image is displayed near the center of the display area, the cannon image is displayed in the upper left area, the upper right area, the left area, and the right area within the display area. Effect of selectively using an empty (unused) area among the lower areas as a bullet firing destination to fire a bullet (bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) shown in FIG. 201(H)) is to be carried out. However, in the situation shown in FIG. 201(G), the areas required to newly output such a bullet firing effect (FIG. 201(H)) are other various effects (count display (upper left area), Reach variation (upper right area), timer mode effect (left area), timer object exclusion effect (right area), suspension display (lower area)) are all used, and the bullet firing effect (Fig. 201 ( H) is no longer available for new output (specific rendering situation), and if a bullet were to be fired while in such a specific rendering situation, the destination of the bullet would be lost. Is it possible that the effect that is already in the output state (for example, the count display) will be broken or destroyed by the bullet fired? end), and furthermore, as a result, there may be concerns that the degree of expectation for a big win may be lowered.

Therefore, in this example of explanation, when the bullet shooting effect (predetermined effect) is executed, if there is no space for the output (situation shown in FIG. 201(G)) in a specific effect situation, Out of the areas that can be used as bullet firing targets (upper left area, upper right area, left area, right area, and lower area), the output applied to the count display using the upper left area is set to a predetermined value ( In this case, the output is stopped at an intermediate stage (count output stop control) without performing until -20).

FIG. 201(H) shows an effect situation in which the bullet shooting effect is executed under the condition that the output related to the count display is not performed until it reaches a predetermined value (-20 in this case) and the output is stopped halfway through.

In this way, when the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is executed, unlike the resurrection timer effect described above, the output related to the bullet firing effect is not produced. After the end, the count display of the timer effect will not be output again. On the other hand, even after the output related to the count display is stopped, internally, the time from the start of the count display (or the time from the start of fluctuation) is secretly measured, and this is a predetermined value (Fig. 200 (C), when the count display reaches the value (-20) when 35 seconds have passed since the start of the count display, it is assumed that the timing for the stopped count display to reach the predetermined value has arrived. I'm trying to make the production appear.

In FIG. 201(I), the cut-in A (cut-in effect by the ally character) as a timer-targeted effect has arrived after the timing at which the count display whose output was stopped would have reached a predetermined value if the output had not been stopped. is being executed. Incidentally, in relation to the resurrection timer effect, the cut-in A is executed as the "second effect mode".

According to such progress of the effect, after the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is executed, even if the output related to the count display is kept stopped, if the output of the count display is not stopped, the predetermined value is reached. When the timing that should have been reached, the timer target effect will appear. That is, in this case, the game interest is improved when the timer-targeted effect appears due to the surprise that the timer effect that appears to have ended halfway due to the execution of the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is secretly continued. It is expected that

In the production situation shown in FIG. 201(G), for example, if the display related to the timer mode production is not performed and there is space in the left area, the timer production count display (upper left area) is The output is maintained, and the empty space (left area) is used to output a bullet shooting effect (predetermined effect). In other words, in this case, the count display of the timer effect and the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) are simultaneously output. , is continuously executed until it reaches a predetermined value (-20 in this case).

In this way, the bullet shooting effect (predetermined effect) is output using one of a plurality of areas. There is no change in the degree of expectation for a big hit indicated by the launch effect (predetermined effect), and the same.

Also in this explanation example, a display indicating which effect type is excluded in the timer target exclusion effect executed in FIG. As for the display, while they are being continuously executed, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (Fig. 201(J)).

Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 to 201 and examples of effect other than various effects performed in relation to the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 202 and 203. .

FIG. 202(A) shows an effect situation in which the effect display device 1600 performs variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with the reserved number being 0 in the normal game state.

In FIG. 202(B), during the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. It shows the production situation to be started.

In FIG. 202(C), after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. It shows an effect situation in which an effect (cut-in B) that is the target of the timer effect is being executed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202(C), "Cut-in B" as the timer-targeted effect is executed in a relatively low-expectation mode (blue aura). At this time, since the count display is also in a non-display state, the timer effect is terminated by the appearance of "cut-in B", which is a mode (blue aura) with a relatively low degree of expectation for the player. come to recognize that However, in this production example, after the "cut-in B" as the timer-targeted production (first timer-targeted production) is executed in a relatively low-expectation mode (blue aura), the count display is displayed again. An effect (second timer-targeted effect) regarding whether or not to appear further appears.

FIG. 202(D) shows whether or not to re-display the count display while "cut-in B" is being displayed as the timer-targeted effect (first timer-targeted effect) shown in FIG. 202(C). (second timer-targeted effect) is being executed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202(D), as an effect (second timer-targeted effect) for whether or not to redisplay the count display, an operation system effect in which the player's operation is allowed for a predetermined period of time. is executed, and if an operation is performed by the player within the predetermined time, a first effect result (not shown) indicating that the count display will be redisplayed, or a second effect result indicating that the count display will not be redisplayed A performance result (not shown) is made to appear. In addition, as an operation-related presentation that allows the operation by the player for a predetermined period of time, in addition to displaying an operation instruction image SSG that prompts the operation of the operation button 410, the first display when the operation button 410 is operated An operation expectation image SKG is displayed to suggest the likelihood (proportion) of appearance of the effect result. The ratio may include 100%.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 202(D), among the plurality of presentation modes prepared as the operation expectation image SKG, the presentation mode in which the likelihood of appearance of the first presentation result is the highest character) appears. Therefore, although the "cut-in B" as the timer-targeted effect (first timer-targeted effect) has been executed in a relatively low-expectation mode (blue aura), the count display is redisplayed. It can be said that the situation is such that the player can be strongly conscious of the continuation of the timer effect. Moreover, in the timer-plus effect according to this embodiment, a count value larger than the count value displayed in the first count display (here, the count value "3" shown in FIG. 202(B)) is given. Since the count display is re-displayed in the form, it is expected that more expected effects will appear as timer-targeted effects.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 202(D), while "cut-in B (blue aura)" is displayed as the timer-targeted effect (first timer-targeted effect) shown in FIG. 202(C), (The display is not hidden), and an effect (second timer target effect) as to whether or not to redisplay the count display is executed. After hiding "cut-in B (blue aura)" as the first timer-targeted effect), an effect (second timer-targeted effect) for whether or not to redisplay the count display is executed. good too. However, in this case, the effect is switched from the timer-targeted effect (first timer-targeted effect) shown in FIG. It is preferable to let the player recognize that the timer effect has not ended and is being continued (or may be continued).

FIG. 202(E) shows that after the first effect result (not shown) indicating that the count display is to be redisplayed in the operation system effect shown in FIG. , and the second count display (here, countdown) is displayed. In addition, in the operation system production, in addition to the case where the player's operation is accepted within the predetermined time, even if the player's operation is not accepted within the prescribed time, the same effect result (first Effect result, 2nd effect result) appears after the predetermined time is over.

FIG. 202F shows that after the second count display shown in FIG. It shows an effect situation in which an effect (cut-in B) that is the target of the timer effect is being executed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202(F), "Cut-in B" as the timer-targeted effect is executed in a mode (red aura) with a relatively high degree of expectation. That is, in this example of effect, the first count display and the redisplayed second count display are executed as the same type of target effect, and in the second target effect, the first target effect is executed. It is executed in such a way that it changes (promotes) to a production mode with a higher degree of expectation. According to such a configuration, by executing the same type of effect as the timer-targeted effect, it is recognized that the first count display and the second count display are connected and executed as one timer effect. At the same time, the more the number of times the count display is redisplayed, the more the timer-targeted effect is changed (promoted) to a more expected mode, thereby generating the timer-targeted effect. It is possible to improve the interest in the game from the point in time when the count display is redisplayed instead of the time.

FIG. 203(G) shows an effect as to whether or not to re-display the count display while "cut-in B (red aura)" is displayed as the timer-targeted effect shown in FIG. 202(F). It shows the production situation being executed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 203(G), among the plurality of effect modes prepared as the operation expectation image SKG, the appearance of the first effect result is more likely than in the example shown in FIG. A production mode (a middle-aged ally character) appears. Therefore, in the situation where "Cut-in B" as a timer-targeted effect has been executed in a relatively highly anticipated mode (red aura), the count display may not be displayed again. It can be said that we are in a situation that makes us conscious. In this way, after the count display reaches a predetermined value, as a timer-targeted effect, an effect (cut-in B) having a mode (red aura) that is relatively advantageous to the player is executed. On the other hand, an effect (operation expectation image SKG) having a relatively disadvantageous aspect (middle-aged ally character) for the player is executed. Moreover, in such a timer plus effect, the more times the count redisplay is repeated on one side and the "cut-in B" changes in a manner advantageous to the player, the more the number of times the "cut-in B" changes to a mode advantageous to the player on the other side. Since the operation expectation image SKG having a disadvantageous mode is likely to appear and the rate of re-display is low, the interest in the game and the sense of tension are increased each time the count is re-displayed. It becomes possible to suitably apply both of maintaining

As a result of such an effect, if the count display is not displayed again, the timer effect is terminated at that time, and then the decorative pattern SZ is stopped (FIG. 203(H)).

Next, various aspects of the timer effects themselves shown in FIGS. 198 to 203 and examples of effects other than the various effects performed in relation to the timer effects will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205. .

FIG. 204(A) shows an effect situation in which the effect display device 1600 performs variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with the reserved number being 0 in the normal game state.

In FIG. 204(B), during the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. It shows the production situation to be started.

Here, in the timer effect, in general, the longer the time required to complete the count, the higher the probability of appearance of the highly expected effect as the timer target effect. If a count display with only "10") is displayed, there is concern that the interest in the game may be lowered. Therefore, in this production example, during the execution of the count display, a production is generated in which the count value is hidden for a predetermined period of time, and the progress speed of the count is stagnated for that amount of time. It is possible to execute a timer stagnation effect that maintains expectations by extending the required time.

Figures 204(C) and (D) show when the count display of the timer effect shown in Figure 204(B) reaches the first specific value (here, "5") and when this is hidden. It shows the performance situation at that time.

That is, in this production example, when the count display reaches a first specific value (here, "5"), when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), any type of production ( Start an effect (progress effect leading to a timer target effect) suggesting whether a conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, character A action, special timer, cut-in B, character B action) will appear, The count display is hidden while the effect is being executed. The progression effect leading to the timer-targeted effect may be started after the count display reaches the first specific value while this is hidden.

In this production example, a display image SEG11 depicting a person asking for help from an ally character and a display image SEG12 accepting a request from the person asking for help are sequentially displayed as progress effects leading to a timer-targeted effect. It has become so. Here, when the display image SEG11 or the display image SEG12 is displayed, although it is possible to narrow down to some extent which type of effect will appear as the timer target effect, it is possible to specify which type of effect will appear. It is desirable to prevent this from happening. For example, the display image SEG12 shows three friendly characters accepting a request from a person seeking help. Although it can be done, it is desirable to make it unclear which of the three friendly characters will face the enemy character (for example, cut-in A or B).

In FIG. 204(E), the count display is redisplayed with a count value of "4" after the "development effect leading to timer target effect (first time)" shown in FIGS. 204(C) and (D) is completed. It shows the production situation to be done.

According to such a configuration, the count value is advanced by "1" each time one second elapses while the count value is between "10" and "5." 4", until the end of the "development effect leading to the timer target effect (first time)" that appears when the count value reaches "5" (here, 6 seconds), The progress of the count value is not performed and this can be stalled. In addition, in order to slow down the progress of the count value, the count display may not necessarily be hidden, and the display may be maintained with the same count value (here, "5").

FIGS. 204(F) and 205(G) show when the count display re-displayed in FIG. It shows the production situation when it is turned on.

That is, in this production example, the count display is hidden several times until the count display reaches a predetermined value. The progress production that leads to is to be executed. The progression effect leading to the timer-targeted effect may be started after the count display reaches the second specific value while this is hidden.

In this production example, a display image SEG13 showing the intention of confronting an enemy character among the three friendly characters depicted in FIG. A display image SEG14 depicting a situation in which the friend character of the character confronts the enemy character is sequentially displayed. Here, when the display image SEG13 or the display image SEG14 is displayed, although it can be grasped that a specific type of effect (cut-in B) will appear as the timer target effect, any effect content (blue aura or wearing a red aura, etc.) will appear.

In FIG. 205(H), the count display is a count value of "1" after the end of the "progress effect leading to the timer target effect (second time)" shown in FIGS. 204(F) and 205(G). It shows the production situation to be redisplayed.

According to such a configuration, when the count value progresses from "2" to "1", the "development effect leading to the timer target effect (second )” ends (here, for 14 seconds), the count value is not advanced and can be stalled.

In FIG. 205(I), the count display redisplayed in FIG. 205(H) progresses to reach a predetermined value (here, "0"), and a timer-related display (here, "Yukuzo") is displayed. After that, it shows an effect situation in which the effect (cut-in B) that is the target of the timer effect is being executed.

According to such a configuration, the effect leading to the timer-targeted effect is executed before the count display reaches the predetermined value, so that the game enjoyment is preferable until the count display reaches the predetermined value. can be maintained at In addition, while the effect leading to the timer target effect is being executed, the count display is hidden and the progress of the count value is stagnated, so the time required for the count to complete can be lengthened accordingly. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the interest in the game.

After such a timer-targeted effect is performed, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (Fig. 205(J)).

Next, various aspects of the timer effects themselves shown in FIGS. 198 to 205 and examples of effects other than the various effects performed in relation to the timer effects will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 206 and 207. . 206 and 207, for convenience of explanation, the movable body KT for presentation, which has been omitted in other drawings, is shown in the drawings. In addition, the movable body KT includes, for example, the back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, the back-top left movable effect unit 3200, the back-left movable effect unit 3300, the back-top middle movable effect unit 3400, the back-bottom front movable effect unit 3500, and the like. It corresponds to "movable member" etc.

FIG. 206(A) shows an effect situation in which the effect display device 1600 performs variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with the reserved number being 0 in the normal game state.

In FIG. 206(B), during execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. It shows the production situation to be started.

Here, in the timer effect, in general, the longer the time required to complete the count, the higher the rate of appearance of the highly expected effect as the timer target effect, so such a large count number (here, "40") is displayed, there is a concern that the tension may not be appropriately maintained while the count is completed. Therefore, in this production example, while the count display is being executed, the count front production is generated by the decorative body in a form that makes the count display difficult to see. The greater the count value when is made visible again, the more likely it is that an effect with a high degree of expectation will appear as a timer-targeted effect.

FIG. 206(C) shows that, while the count display is being executed by the timer effect shown in FIG. It shows a production situation that continues to stay for a long time (counting front production with decorations). Also, FIG. 206(D) shows an effect situation in which the count front effect by the movable body KT (decorative body) shown in FIG.

According to such a configuration, even when a large count value is displayed once, it is eroded by the movable body KT (decorative body), and it is as if the count display is repeated with a smaller count value. Since it becomes possible to provide performance, there arises a concern that the sense of tension cannot be suitably maintained while the number of counts is completed.

In addition, in the count forward performance by such a movable body KT (decorative body), the longer the time required for the performance, the smaller the count value that is easy to see when the performance ends, and thus the degree of expectation as a timer-targeted performance. There is concern about a decrease in interest in games due to the difficulty of appearing high performance effects. Therefore, in the count forward production by the movable body KT (decorative body), even on the movable body KT (decoration body) side, a lottery different from the lottery for determining the production mode of the timer production is performed. For example, it is desirable to make one of the operation mode of the movable body KT and the light emission mode appear. According to such a configuration, even if an effect with a high degree of expectation is made difficult to appear as a timer-targeted effect, the effect mode of the movable body KT (decorative body), which is a separate lottery, indicates that the expectation of a big hit is high. If so, it will be possible to favorably maintain the interest in the game.

In this regard, in this example of effect, the count value is returned to a state that is easy to see while maintaining a relatively large count value such as "35". It is possible to expect that the count display will continue in the state where the

FIG. 206(E) displays an operation instruction image SSG when the count display reaches the first count value (here, "30") in the timer effect shown in FIG. FIG. 206(F) shows an effect situation in which a player's operation is accepted for the operation opportunity shown in FIG. ing.

That is, in this production example, during the first period until the count display changes from the first count value (here, "30") to the second count value (here, "20"), it is produced that there is an operation by the player. Acceptance is allowed, and as a result of the reception of the effect, a plurality of performance modes at the time of operation with different rates of appearance of highly expected effects as timer target effects (in descending order of appearance rate, for example, great good luck, good luck, bad luck, etc. ) to appear.

In this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 206(F), when the count value reaches "23", the player performs an operation, and as a result of the effect, the most advantageous effect mode for the player ( Since "Great Good Luck" appears, it is expected that the game interest will be maintained until the count display reaches a predetermined value. In addition, when the player's operation is not received during the first period until the count display changes from the first count value (here, "30") to the second count value (here, "20"), The count display progresses without any effect result appearing.

FIG. 207(G) displays an operation instruction image SSG when the count display reaches the third count value (here, "15") after the performance result shown in FIG. 207(H) shows an effect situation in which the operation opportunity is provided again, and FIG. 207(H) shows the effect reception of the operation by the player at the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 207(G), and the effect result appears. Shows the performance status.

That is, in this example of effect, if the player operates during the second period until the count display changes from the third count value (here, "15") to the fourth count value (here, "5"), the effect is given. Acceptance is allowed, and as a result of the reception of the effect, a plurality of performance modes at the time of operation with different rates of appearance of highly expected effects as timer target effects (in descending order of appearance rate, for example, great good luck, good luck, bad luck, etc. ) to appear.

In this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 207(G), when the count value reaches "8", an operation is performed by the player, and as a result of the effect, a special effect at the time of operation that is most advantageous to the player. Since the mode (good luck) appears, it is expected that the game interest will be maintained until the count display reaches a predetermined value. It should be noted that when the player's operation is not received during the second period until the count display changes from the third count value (here, "15") to the fourth count value (here, "5"), The count display progresses without any effect result appearing.

However, in this production example, the operating means ( For example, when the operation button 410) is operated and the effect is received, and when the count display is from the third count value (here, "15") to the fourth count value (here, "5"). When the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated during the second period up to and the effect is accepted, and as a result of the acceptance of the effect, a special effect mode at the time of operation (good luck) are made to occur at different rates.

More specifically, when the effect is accepted during the first period, the occurrence rate of the special operation mode (good luck) is relatively high, and the effect is accepted during the second period. And the occurrence rate of the special operation mode (great good luck) is relatively low. Therefore, when the operation button 410 is operated in the first period, it is possible to reduce the effect risk that the special operation mode (great good luck) does not appear, but the special operation mode (great good luck) does not appear. Even if this appears as much as it is likely to occur, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation for the appearance of an effect with a high degree of expectation as a timer-targeted effect. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated in the second period, although the effect risk that the special operation mode (great good luck) does not appear increases, the special operation mode (great good luck) occurs. When this appears as much as it is difficult to perform, it is easy to have a sense of expectation for the appearance of a highly expected performance as a timer-targeted performance.

According to such a configuration, according to the player's preference and the effect situation such as the degree of expectation indicated by other effects, the count display is set to the first count value (here, "30"). 2 count value (here, "20"), whether the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) should be firmly operated in the first period with low performance risk until the count display reaches the third count value (here, "15"). ”) to the fourth count value (here, “5”). It becomes possible to add interest to the game strategy such as whether the operation button 410 should be operated.

In FIG. 207(I), the count display progresses further after the effect result shown in FIG. ) is displayed, the effect (cut-in B) to be the target of the timer effect is being executed. After such a timer-targeted effect is performed, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 207(J)).

In each count effect described above, when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the count target effect is not immediately executed, and the count target effect is executed after a short time. I'm trying to be In this regard, during the period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value ("0" in this case) to when the count target effect is executed, the display mode suggests which effect is to be executed as the count target effect. may be made to appear. According to such a configuration, even if a situation occurs in which a plurality of effects are performed in parallel when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), which of these effects is the target of the count effect. You will be able to enjoy it without mistaking what it is running as.

In this regard, during the period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value ("0" in this case) to when the count target effect is executed, instead of the display mode described above, "a few It is desirable that a specific display mode commonly used in different count target productions may appear. In this case, when a specific display mode appears, it is not suggested which of the commonly used count target effects will appear, but when the display mode that should appear as the count target effect is performed It is more desirable to make the ratio of appearance of the big hit pattern higher than that. According to such a configuration, although there is a risk of misidentifying which production is being executed as a count production target, which production is guaranteed to increase the appearance ratio of the big hit pattern. Since it is possible to make it interesting to find out whether the game is being executed as a count effect object, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be improved.

However, when the number of types of effects that can be executed as count target effects is N, the period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") to when the count target effects are executed Even if a specific display mode appears in , it is counted as a count effect to the extent that "one of M (a number of 2 or more) less than N is executed as a count effect". It is desirable to be able to narrow down which effects are to be executed in order to make it interesting to find out which effects are being executed as count effects.

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the already explained sound data creation process (step S1032 in FIG. 95), the automatic channel sound control, which is a part thereof, will be explained later. Therefore, next, the automatic channel sound control according to the present embodiment will be described. First, let me briefly explain the background.

In general pachinko machines, various sounds are output from a speaker in each scene in accordance with the progress of a game, thereby realizing an effect that attracts the player's interest. For example, even if the reach should improve the player's expectations, there are some that output a variety of sounds depending on the type, and others that do not. In such a typical pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound is assigned to a corresponding default channel. Channels are used for playback (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in general pachinko machines, even if there is a vacant channel, there are cases where the sound to be played cannot be assigned to the vacant channel due to channel allocation, and the sound to be played cannot be played. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to realize various sound productions.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the purpose is to effectively utilize empty channels to realize various sound effects and increase the interest of the player. Output means) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means) dynamically assign and manage each channel for each sound to be output, while the number of combinations of sounds scheduled to be output is determined by each channel. When the maximum number of channels (16 channels are exemplified in this embodiment) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds to be output according to a predetermined priority within the range of the maximum number of channels. (channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds scheduled to be output through each channel dynamically allocated within the maximum number of channels in accordance with the predetermined priority (sound output control means). . A specific description will be given below.

[12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
208(A) and 208(B) each show an example of sound control by the fixed channel method as a comparison target for this embodiment. FIG. 208A shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. Sound control by the fixed channel method uses, for example, all 16 channels of reproduction channel 00 to reproduction channel 15 in the same manner as sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, which will be described later. It should be noted that the "reproduction channel" shown in the figure omits the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 208B shows an example of reproduction channel allocation for each sound. In sound control by this fixed channel method, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used, as shown in the figure. Here, as for the basic sound reproduction rule, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural.

As for the "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shown in the figure, the sound that has started to be reproduced should not be silenced until the end of reproduction under any circumstances. As for the channel assignment method, a reproduction channel and a sound are exclusively assigned as a pair so that the sound is not overwritten. On the other hand, the illustrated "normal BGM" to "pending prize winning sound" may be overwritten with another sound during reproduction to be muted. As for the channel assignment method, the same channel is assigned as much as possible so that reproduction timings do not overlap.

In sound control using the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel that is being output, the sound being output is muted and the new sound is output. For sounds that would cause problems if overwritten, independent channels are assigned, or sounds whose playback timings do not overlap are assigned to the same channel.

FIG. 209 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, definitions of playback channel number, left/right pan initial value, up/down pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound category and sound name. there is Since the reproduction channel number has been described above, the explanation is omitted.

The left/right pan initial value represents the sound image localization initial position of the sound by the left and right speakers that are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the setting value of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume output from the left and right speakers individually, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). The difference in volume output from the left and right speakers, which are the combination of 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, a setting of "0xFF" indicates output from only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of vertical panning is the sound image localization of sound by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the set value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers is created, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, if it is set to "0x80", it indicates the volume difference that is individually output from the combination of the upper and lower speakers. becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, a setting of “0xFF” indicates output from only the pair of lower speakers 921 .

The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set within a setting range from "0x00" to "0xFF", for example. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the illustration) that repeatedly plays back the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the drawing) that plays back the target sound once. It represents whether The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is to be reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 210 shows the relationship between game states, playback sounds, and playback channels. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the game state, and the game states are, for example, "first half of variation", "second half of variation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "jackpot in progress". ” can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (reproduction) priority, and the (reproduction) priority increases from bottom to top.

FIG. 211(A) shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 211(B) shows an example of a channel playback time chart, and FIG. An example of a problem is shown. 211(A) to 211(C) have a common horizontal axis as a time axis.

In FIG. 211(A), along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis, the game states are shown in order of "first half of variation", "second half of variation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "jackpot". It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so that it becomes "medium".

In the "first half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 208(B), the "pending winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "preliminary notice A", so "preliminary notice A ' is overwritten with the pending winning sound, and the output of the 'first half notice A' sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

In the "fluctuation latter half" shown in FIG. 208(B), the "pending winning sound" is assigned in advance to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "full screen notice", so the "full screen notice ” will be overwritten with the pending winning sound, and the output of the “full screen notice” sound will stop (in the case of sound control using a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 212(A) and 212(B) respectively show an example of sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment.

FIG. 212(A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel, and the sound control by the above-described fixed channel means that the channel division as the attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to "AUTOch" in the drawing). The difference is that Here, that the channel division is an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically allocated according to the rules described later (see above). (equivalent to "sound control by automatic channel method").

Sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment uses, for example, all 16 channels of playback channel 00 to playback channel 15 in the same way as sound control by the fixed channel method described above. It should be noted that the "reproduction channel" shown in the figure omits the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 212B shows an example of reproduction channel allocation for each sound. In this automatic channel system sound control, each sound is individually assigned a priority as shown. Here, as for the basic sound reproduction rules, as mentioned above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, and one channel when outputting in monaural. Become.

The "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shown in the figure must not be silenced in the middle until the end of reproduction under any circumstances. On the other hand, the illustrated "normal BGM" to "pending prize winning sound" may be overwritten with another sound during reproduction to be muted.

In sound control by the automatic channel method, individual reproduction channels are defined as AUTO group channels (hereinafter abbreviated as "AUTO group"). While multiple AUTO groups can be defined, multiple playback channels can be defined within an AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to play sounds for the AUTO group. When assigning sounds to AUTO groups, each AUTO group can specify an identifier and priority for specifying a particular AUTO group. When a new sound is reproduced, if it is a sound defined in the AUTO group, it is immediately reproduced if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the designated AUTO group.

In the above case, if there is no vacant channel, the effect control program searches all channels currently being reproduced within the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly reproduced. If there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as the sound being reproduced, the performance control program terminates the use of the AUTO channel and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority than or is not the same as the sound being reproduced.

FIG. 213 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel method, for each sound category and sound name, a playback channel number, an initial left/right pan value, an initial up/down pan value, an initial volume value, and a Identifiers and priorities for specifying AUTO groups (also referred to as “playback priority”), initial left/right panning values, initial up/down panning values, initial volume values, sound It manages definitions of number, seek point, playback type setting and output type setting.

First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group indicates in which AUTO group among multiple AUTO groups each sound is reproduced. The priority is an index indicating which sound should be preferentially reproduced when each sound is reproduced at the same time. The order of priority indicates that the higher the numerical value, the higher the priority of the sound to be reproduced, while the lower the numerical value, the lower the priority, the lower the priority of the sound to be reproduced. In this embodiment, as the order of the types of sounds to be preferentially reproduced, for example, notification sounds having a priority of "25" ("notification sound 1", "notification sound 2", and "notification sound 3") , sound effects with a priority of "20" ("jackpot confirmation sound" and "button pressing sound"), BGM with a priority of "15" (such as "normal BGM"), and a priority of "10" Sound effects (such as "full-screen preview sound effect"), sound effects with priority "05" ("first half preview sound effect" to "second half preview sound effect"), pending winning sound with priority "01" and As a result, in a state where there is no idle channel, for example, when an information sound is to be reproduced, there is no need to reproduce it using a predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound with the lower priority (for example, the pending winning sound ) is being played back, the notification sound is preferentially played back.

As already described, the left/right pan initial value represents the sound image localization initial position of the sound from the left and right speakers, which are the combination of the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the setting value of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume output from the left and right speakers individually, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. This left/right pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, if "0x00" is set, it indicates that the signal is output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). , the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, the difference in volume output from the left and right speakers individually becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, a setting of "0xFF" indicates output from only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

Also, as already described, the initial up/down panning value is set to the up/down direction of the pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). represents the initial position of the sound image localization of the sound by the speaker. By dynamically changing the set value of the left and right panning during sound reproduction, a difference in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers is created, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. . This up/down pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, if it is set to "0x80", it indicates the volume difference that is individually output from the combination of the upper and lower speakers. becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, a setting of “0xFF” indicates output from only the pair of lower speakers 921 .

Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be set, for example, in the setting range from "0x00" to "0xFF". ), it is not affected by changes in volume due to the operation of one or more volume control devices installed in the game machine, and the volume is always played back at the initial value. represent. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above.

The seek point represents the reproduction start position number within the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In this embodiment, as the seek points, for example, "0" is set for each of "upper right speaker confirmation sound" to "first half notice A sound effect", while "second half notice A sound effect" and "second half notice B effect" are set to "0". "Sound" is set to "1". When the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source is exceeded by such seek points, it is possible to register sounds exceeding the maximum number that can be registered.

The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the illustration) that repeatedly plays back the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the drawing) that plays back the target sound once. It represents whether The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is to be reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 214 shows the relationship between game states, reproduced sounds, and priorities. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the game state, and the game states are, for example, "first half of variation", "second half of variation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "jackpot in progress". ” can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (reproduction) priority, and the (reproduction) priority increases from bottom to top.

FIG. 215(A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 215(B) shows an example of an AUTO channel playback time chart. 215(A) and 215(B) have a common horizontal axis as a time axis. In FIG. 215(A), the game states are shown in order along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis, in the order of "first half of variation", "second half of variation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and " For example, the game is controlled so as to become a "big hit".

In the "first half of variation" shown in FIG. 215(A), as shown in FIG. equivalent to range A). Here, when trying to reproduce the pending winning sound as a new sound because there was a start winning (corresponding to "suspended winning" in the figure), playback channels 12 and 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. , Since this pending winning sound can be played back using playback channels 12 and 13, none of the sounds being played back are overwritten by the pending winning sound (equivalent to “holding sound playback” in the figure), and other Output of all kinds of sounds continues.

As shown in FIG. 215(B), in the "second half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. equivalent to range B). Here, for example, when a pending winning sound is reproduced as a new sound due to a start winning (equivalent to "suspended winning" in the drawing), playback channels 02 and 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. , all other types of sounds continue to be output without overwriting any of the sounds being played back with the pending prize-winning sound (corresponding to “play on hold sound” in the figure).

In the "latter half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. (corresponding to "notification 2" shown in the figure), as a result of searching for an empty channel, it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing, as shown in FIG. 215(B). Therefore, the sound with the lowest priority among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels reproducing the reserved winning sound with the lowest priority of "01". In these reproduction channels 04 and 05, the pending prize winning sound is reproduced as described above. Since it is higher than the priority (01) of the pending prize-winning sound, the pending prize-winning sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

FIG. 216 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control includes, for each channel, a setting reservation flag, requested sound number, playing sound number, automatic allocation group, priority during automatic allocation, elapsed time since registration, volume control, etc. for each channel as a work name. It contains work for control and work for pan control, and has respective information corresponding to them.

If the setting reservation flag has a value other than "0", it indicates that setting reservation has been made. The requested sound number indicates "-1" for stop, and other than "-1" indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound to be reproduced. The sound number during reproduction indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being reproduced when "-1" indicates stop, and other than "-1".

In the automatic allocation group, a channel is fixedly allocated when the value is "0", and a channel is automatically allocated when the value is "1~" ("Sound control by automatic channel method" described later). equivalent to ). Here, for example, if the automatic assignment group is "1", it indicates AUTO group 1, and if it is "2", it indicates AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority at the time of performing sound control by the automatic channel method, which will be described later.

The elapsed time from registration represents the elapsed time from the time of registration, with the time of registration of the desired reproduced sound set to "0". In addition, the elapsed time from the registration is the time when a new sound is being played in a situation where multiple sounds with the same priority at the time of automatic allocation are being played. Used to determine which sounds should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer period of time is identified, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound to be erased.

Volume control work stores volume values of sounds to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the set values of the left-right pan and the up-down pan described above.

FIG. 217 shows an example of empty channel search processing when performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel method. Note that channels are abbreviated as “ch” in FIG. 217 as well.

When there is a request to reproduce a new sound (step S1100A), the effect control program confirms the automatic allocation group for the new sound (step S1102A), and if the automatic allocation group is "0", a fixed allocation and start playing a new sound on the specified channel.

On the other hand, the effect control program determines that the automatic allocation group is other than "0", and determines whether or not the new sound corresponds to the monaural channel (step S1106A). .

If the new sound is monaural, the effect control program determines whether or not there is an empty (monaural) channel (1 channel) (step S1108A). ) while starting to reproduce the new sound in the channel (step S1109A), and if it does not exist, in the (monaural) channel, a reproduction sound equal to or lower in priority than the new sound is started. It is determined whether the channel exists (step S1110A).

The effect control program terminates the process if there is no channel of the reproduced sound that is the same as or lower than the priority of the new sound in the (monaural) channel being reproduced, while if it exists determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1112A).

If there are multiple applicable channels, the production control program is playing the sound with the longest playback time since registration among the applicable channels based on the elapsed time since the registration. (monaural) channel to start playing the new sound (step S1114A). On the other hand, the effect control program starts playing the new sound on the (monaural) channel that satisfies the desired conditions when there is only one corresponding channel (step S1116A).

On the other hand, in the above-described step S1106A, if the effect control program determines that the new sound is not monaural, it determines whether or not there is an empty (stereo) channel (2 channels) (step S1120A). When the performance control program determines that there is a vacant channel, it selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired conditions and starts playing the new sound (step S1122A).

On the other hand, if the performance control program determines that there is no vacant channel, it determines whether or not there is a (stereo) channel of the sound being reproduced that has the same or lower priority as the new sound (step S1124A) If the sound does not exist, the process is terminated, so the sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the new sound to be reproduced. On the other hand, the effect control program, if it exists, determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1126A).

The effect control program starts outputting the new sound in a (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired conditions if there are not a plurality of applicable channels, and if there are a plurality of applicable channels, Based on the elapsed time since registration, the reproduction of the new sound is started in the (stereo) channel with the longest reproduction time since registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130A).

As described above, the effect control program searches for a vacant channel in order to reproduce new sounds. Such empty channel search processing will be described in a more visually comprehensible manner.

FIGS. 218(A) and 218(B) to FIGS. 221(A) and 221(B) respectively show an example of specific contents of the idle channel search process. As shown in FIG. 218(A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproducing normal BGM with a priority of 15 is generated, and reproduction channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, playback of normal BGM in stereo is started using these playback channels 00-01.

As shown in FIG. 218(B), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the sound effect of the first half notice_A with priority 05 is generated, and reproduces channels 02-03. Since there are vacancies in the channel 02 and 03, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice _A is started in stereo.

Next, as shown in FIG. 219(A), the production control program, triggered by the generation of a request to reproduce a button pressing sound with a priority of 20, searches for a vacant channel and selects the reproduction channels 04-05. Since there are vacancies, these playback channels 04 and 05 are used to start playing back the button pressing sound in stereo.

Next, as shown in FIG. 219(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel in response to a request for reproducing the sound effect of the first half notice_B with priority 05, and reproduces channel 06. . . . 07 are empty, the playback of the effect sound of the first half notice _B is started in stereo using these playback channels 06-07.

Next, the effect control program, as shown in FIG. 220(A), is triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce a jackpot confirmed sound with a priority of 20, searches for an empty channel, and selects the reproduction channel 08-09. Since there are vacancies, these reproduction channels 08 and 09 are used to start reproducing the big hit confirmation sound in stereo.

Next, as shown in FIG. 220(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the sound effect of the first half notice_C with a priority of 05 is generated. Since there are vacancies in channels 10 to 11, playback of the sound effects of the first half notice _C is started in stereo using these playback channels 10 and 11.

Next, the effect control program, as shown in FIG. Since there are vacancies, these playback channels 12 and 13 are used to start playback of the pending winning sound in stereo.

Next, as shown in FIG. 221(B), the effect control program, triggered by the occurrence of a request for reproducing the notification sound 3 with priority 25, searches for an empty channel, and selects the reproduction channels 14 to 15. Since there are vacancies, playback of the notification sound 3 in stereo is started using these playback channels 14-15.

FIGS. 222(A) and 222(B) to FIGS. 225(A) and 225(B) respectively show examples of specific contents of the idle channel search process. As shown in FIG. 222(A), the effect control program, triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce ready-to-reach BGM with a priority of 15, searches for vacant channels, and reproduction channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, reproduction of reach BGM in stereo is started using these reproduction channels 00 to 01. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 222(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing information sound 1 with a priority of 25 is generated. Since it exists, playback of the notification sound 1 in stereo is started using these playback channels 02-03.

After repeating the above-described processing, the effect control program, as shown in FIG. , and since there are vacancies in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, reproduction of the full-screen announcement sound in stereo is started using these reproduction channels 10 to 11. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 223(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing notification sound 1 with a priority of 25 is generated. As shown, there are vacancies in playback channels 02-03 (corresponding to "non-playback (empty)" in the figure), so playback of the effect sound of notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these playback channels 02-03. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 224(A), the effect control program, triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce information sound 3 with a priority of 25, searches for a vacant channel, and reproduces channels 04 to 05 ( Since there are vacancies in the "non-playback (vacant)" shown in the drawing, playback of the notification sound 3 in stereo is started using these playback channels 04 and 05. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 224(B), the production control program searches for a vacant channel when a request to reproduce the character object announcement sound with the priority of 10 is generated, and reproduces channels 12-13. Since there are vacancies in the channels 12 and 13, the reproduction of the character object announcement sound in stereo is started using these reproduction channels 12 and 13.

Next, the effect control program, as shown in FIG. 225(A), is triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce a pending winning sound with a priority of 01, searches for a vacant channel, and reproduces channels 14 to 15 ( Since there are vacancies in the "non-playback (empty)" shown in the drawing, playback of the pending winning sound in stereo is started using these playback channels 14-15.

Next, the effect control program, as shown in FIG. 225(B), is triggered by the generation of the reproduction request for the notification sound 2 whose priority is 25, and searches for a vacant channel, but there is no vacant channel. Therefore, stop using the playback channels 14 to 15 that are playing the lowest priority "pending winning sound" in each channel corresponding to the sound being played, and use these playback channels 14 to 15 in stereo Reproduction of notification sound 2, which is the desired sound, is started.

In this way, each sound scheduled to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a reproduction channel with a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the output schedule with a higher priority is searched. will be played on the playback channel found in the search. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible not only to make effective use of empty channels as described above, but also to use each channel including the empty channels to reproduce each sound to be output as many times as possible. Since it can be played back, it is possible to realize various sound productions and increase the interest of the player.

226(A) and 226(B) to 227(A) and 227(B) each show an example of specific contents of the idle channel search process. As shown in FIG. 226(A), the effect control program searches for a vacant channel in response to the occurrence of a request to reproduce a left symbol stop sound with a priority of 15, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00-01.

As shown in FIG. 226(B), the effect control program, triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce the right symbol stop sound with a priority of 15, searches for an empty channel, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are empty. exists, the playback channels 00 to 01 are used to start playback of the right symbol stop sound in stereo.

Next, the effect control program, as shown in FIG. 227(A), is triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce a middle symbol stop sound with a priority of 15, searches for an empty channel, and reproduces channels 00 to 01. Since there are vacancies, the playback of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these playback channels 00-01.

Next, as shown in FIG. 227(B), the effect control program searches for a vacant channel in response to the occurrence of a request to reproduce the jackpot BGM with a priority of 15, and searches for vacant channels. , the reproduction of the jackpot BGM in stereo is started using these reproduction channels 00-01.

In addition, when the replacement reproduction of the sound according to the priority occurs using a certain reproduction channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound reproduced before the replacement in the reproduction channel after the completion of the reproduction. Needless to say, it is fine to do so.

[12-3. Sound control variations]
In the above embodiment, an example of performing sound control by the automatic channel method using all the reproduction channels corresponding to the maximum number of channels has been described. Sound control may be performed as follows by a combination or the like.

FIGS. 228(A) to 228(F) are diagrams showing variation examples of channel allocation in sound control by the above-described two types of channel methods or a combination thereof.

FIG. 228(A) shows an example of channel allocation in sound control by the fixed channel method for the maximum number of channels (16 channels) described so far as a comparative example with the above-described embodiment, and FIG. 228(B) shows this. It corresponds to the embodiment of the present invention described so far, and shows an example of channel allocation when sound control is performed by the automatic channel method for the maximum number of channels. Since sound control by these two channel assignments has already been explained, detailed explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 228(C) shows an embodiment in which channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed by the automatic channel method (corresponding to "PTN2" in the figure). . FIG. 228(D) shows an embodiment in which channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of playback channels while using one automatic channel group, and sound control is performed by the above-described fixed channel method for some playback channels. (corresponding to "PTN3" in the drawing).

FIG. 228(E) shows an embodiment in which channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed by the above-described fixed channel method for some playback channels. (corresponding to "PTN4" in the drawing). A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 228(E) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 229 and subsequent figures.

FIG. 228(F) uses one automatic channel group, performs channel allocation for the maximum number of playback channels, performs sound control by the automatic channel method, and performs sound control by the fixed channel method described above for some playback channels. However, the difference from the above example is that the number of channels is ensured so that the number of each playback channel is variable. A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 228(F) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 235 and subsequent figures.

As shown in this embodiment, by adopting an automatic channel system in which all channels are grouped together, based on a predetermined criterion, empty channels are assigned or channels being output are replaced, so that sound Sound can be output only by determining the priority of Therefore, unlike the conventional control method that outputs sound by specifying a channel, there is no need to manage the channel, so it is possible to simplify control related to sound output and improve development efficiency. becomes.

In addition, by adopting the automatic channel system, it is possible to minimize the number of channels. For example, it is possible to adopt a low-priced sound source IC with a small number of channels, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the game machine. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, details of another form of the sound control method described above will be described. In the above-mentioned sound control system, by dynamically changing the allocation of sound to each channel as an automatic channel system, it was possible to effectively utilize empty channels and reproduce many sounds, but the game production was poor. In the diversified game machines of recent years, hundreds or thousands of different sounds are selected and output, which may complicate the management of sound sources.

Also, by outputting a plurality of sounds in a superimposed manner, the forewarning effect can be performed redundantly, or a variety of sound effects can be produced with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 228(C), by dividing sounds into a plurality of groups and dynamically assigning a plurality of sounds and playback channels for each group, sounds are reliably output in duplicate. can do. It also has the advantage of facilitating management by dividing sounds by type.

Furthermore, among sounds, there are sounds that should be output with priority over dramatic sounds, such as notification sounds, and sounds that are continuously output, such as BGM. For these sounds, it is convenient to fix the output channel rather than dynamically assigning channels. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 228(D), the sounds that are preferentially output and the sounds that are always output are output by the fixed channel method, and the sounds that change according to the results of the start winning and the variable display are Output by automatic channel method.

By configuring as described above, it is possible to effectively utilize empty channels by the automatic channel system and to prevent unnecessary channel switching control by the fixed channel system. In addition, since it is possible to classify sounds according to the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, notification sound, etc., management of effect data is facilitated.

The sound control method shown in FIG. 228(E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 228(C) and 228(D), and has advantages of each method. The sound control method shown in FIG. 228(E) will be specifically described below.

[15-1. Sound control with mixed fixed channel method and multiple automatic channel methods]
In this embodiment, unlike the example described above, the number of channels in sound source control is set to 32 channels (ch), and includes channels for reproducing sound by the fixed channel method and channels for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method. . Also, the channels for reproducing sound in the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. A specific description will be given below with reference to FIG.

[15-1-1. Configuration of playback channel]
FIG. 229 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in sound source control in this embodiment. As described above, the tone generator control of this embodiment uses 32 channels, and each channel is assigned a unique identifier (channel number).

The channel configuration table includes, for each channel number, "automatic assignment" indicating whether or not automatic assignment is to be performed, "classification" indicating the group to which each channel belongs, and "purpose of use" of each channel. Note that "remarks" is added as a supplement to the configuration table shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 229, the configuration of each channel in this embodiment is such that channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, channel numbers 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, numbers 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and numbers 24 to 29 are fixed channel systems. is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are a fixed channel system.

Further, the automatic channel type channels with channel numbers 8 to 19 are "AUTO group 1", and the automatic channel type channels with channel numbers 24 to 29 are "AUTO group 2".

The game machine in this embodiment can output sound in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, one channel is used for monaural output.

A channel with channel number 0 (hereinafter referred to as "channel 0" and each channel is expressed as "channel" + "channel number") is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting sounds commonly used by manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is the sound that is output along with the manufacturer's logo being displayed when the game machine is started. Channel 1 is paired with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

Channel 2 is a channel used for outputting BGM during a game or in a customer waiting state. Channel 3 is a channel paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channels 4 and 6 are channels used to output BGM, and channels 5 and 7 are channels paired with channels 4 and 6 when BGM is output in stereo. be.

Moreover, in this embodiment, the sound quality of the BGM is improved by not only outputting in stereo, but also by simultaneously outputting a plurality of sounds. Therefore, a plurality (pairs) of channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be output at the same time. Furthermore, as will be described later, BGM can also be output on channel 20 (and channel 21), so it is possible to output 4 BGM simultaneously using a maximum of 8 channels (4 pairs). It's becoming

While the game machine is operating normally, BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly reproduced. Therefore, the channel for reproducing the BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the channel for reproducing the BGM is set to a fixed channel system, and only the BGM is output. As a result, it is possible to simplify the control compared to reproducing sound only by the automatic channel method while preventing the occurrence of empty channels.

Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing sounds that are output when the advance notice effect is executed. In the announcement effect, a sound selected by lottery is output each time according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, and the like. As described above, for sounds that are output each time based on a predetermined condition, channels can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel method.

In this embodiment, unlike the example described above, the channels to which the automatic channel method is applied are grouped. AUTO group 1 is a group of channels for outputting sound during the announcement effect.

When a sound is to be output during execution of the advance notice effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first searches for an empty channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1 . In the case of stereo, two empty channels are searched and, in principle, consecutive channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is a vacant channel, it is set to output a designated sound from the vacant channel. On the other hand, if there is no vacant channel, the channel in use is released to output a new sound, or the output of the specified sound is stopped, based on a predetermined condition. A detailed procedure for channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG.

Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel scheme is applied. Channel 21 is paired with channel 20 for stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM or sound effects. This is used when outputting BGM by superimposing four sounds, or when outputting a specific effect sound. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output in effects other than the advance notice effect output in the automatic channel system.

Channels 22 and 23, like channels 20 and 21, are channels to which the fixed channel system is applied. Channel 23 is paired with channel 22 for stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels through which holding tone is output. The holding sounds output on the channels 22 and 23 are, for example, sounds output regardless of the lottery result at the time of start-up winning, or sounds that are preferentially output when a big win is confirmed. Sounds based on the results of the lottery at the time of start winning are output from channels 24 to 29, as will be described later.

Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel method is applied. Channels 24 to 29 reproduce the sound output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the start of winning and the sound output when the hold display changes at the start of variation. By outputting the channels 22 and 23 in a fixed channel system, even if there are no vacant channels in the channels 24 to 29, it is possible to surely output the sound when the big win is decided, and to attract the attention of the players. can be done.

Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel scheme is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are channels used for the system. A channel 30 outputs a change sound when changing the volume and a notification sound when paying out game media. Also, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. In this way, a fixed channel system is applied in which the output destination is secured in advance so that the notification sound related to the operation of the game machine and the notification sound at the time of abnormality are reliably transmitted to the outside.

As described above, in the present embodiment, fixed channel channels are assigned to sounds such as background music that are constantly output and to signals that need to be reliably output, such as abnormal alarm sounds. On the other hand, by applying the automatic channel method to the sounds that are output flexibly according to the game state, etc., it is possible to prevent the sound from not being output even though there are empty channels, and to use the finite number of channels. It can be used effectively.

[15-1-2. Free channel search process]
Next, a procedure for searching for an empty channel for tone generator control in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 230 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of empty channel search processing when sound output control is executed according to the present embodiment. Although FIG. 217 describes the case where there is one AUTO group, FIG. 230 differs in that it has a plurality of AUTO groups. Description of common processing is omitted.

In the empty channel search processing shown in FIG. 230, in the processing of steps S1108B and S1120B, it is determined whether or not there is an empty channel in the same group of channels when the new sound is of the automatic channel method. That is, if channels in different groups are vacant but there is no vacancy in the same channel group, the results of steps S1108B and S1120B are "No".

Furthermore, in the vacant channel search processing shown in FIG. 230, when there is no vacant channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on the predetermined condition is stopped, and the new sound is output from the channel (step S1118B, step S1132B). Hereinafter, selection conditions for a channel for stopping sound reproduction will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the effect in which the output of the sound is stopped continues to be executed without stopping the image display and the action of the character.

FIG. 231 is a diagram showing an example of conditions for selecting a channel for switching sound output (stopping or releasing sound reproduction) when a channel is not available at the time of outputting a new sound in this embodiment. . As a specific selection condition, the attributes of the sound being reproduced and the new sound are compared, and priority is given to the sound with the higher degree of importance. As will be described later, the attributes include playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, volume level, amount of change in sound during playback, etc. Furthermore, the playback time of sound at the time of channel selection, Remaining playback time is also included. Each condition will be specifically described below.

Condition 1 selects a channel based on the playback time (elapsed time) from the start of playback. For example, as shown in steps S1114A and S1130A of FIG. 217, channels with long playback times are selected. By selecting a channel with a long elapsed time from the start of reproduction in this way, the output of sufficiently executed performance sounds is terminated, and the player can easily recognize that a new performance has been executed.

Condition 2 selects a channel based on the playback time of the entire presentation. For example, since an effect with a longer reproduction time can be an effect with a higher degree of expectation, an effect with a shorter reproduction time is selected. On the other hand, by canceling an effect with a long reproduction time, the effect on the effect to be executed thereafter may be minimized. In this case, determination is made based on the preset total playback time, regardless of the playback time from the start of playback.

Conditions 1 and 2 are conditions related to the reproduction time, but in addition to this, for example, the sound output of an effect with a short (or long) remaining effect time may be stopped. Alternatively, the channel may be selected according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction with respect to the overall time of the effect, that is, the progress ratio of the effect. By setting the conditions in this way, the sound output can be stopped at the initial stage or the final stage of the performance.

Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being played. For example, since an effect in which a sound with a large volume is output may be an effect with a higher degree of importance, a channel in which the volume of the sound being output is low is preferentially selected. On the contrary, it is also possible to preferentially select a channel with a large output sound volume, and make the player recognize that a new effect will be executed.

Condition 4 selects a channel based on changes in the volume of the sound being played. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a fade-in or fade-out sound is output may be an effect with a higher degree of importance, and a channel with a small amount of volume change is preferentially selected. Conversely, channels with frequent volume changes may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

Condition 5 selects a channel based on a dynamic sound image localization position change (panpot). For example, it is possible to create a more three-dimensional sound effect by changing the sound output of the left and right stereo speakers. Select with priority. On the other hand, it is also possible to preferentially select a channel whose dynamic sound image localization position changes frequently, thereby reducing the load of sound control.

Condition 6 selects a channel based on the note number (index). For example, a number with a large (small) tone number is selected. At this time, the priority may be associated with the tone number.

Condition 7 selects channels depending on whether the sound is mono or stereo. For example, a channel for outputting a monaural sound is selected assuming that a performance outputting a stereo sound with good sound quality is expected to have a higher degree of expectation. On the other hand, since only one channel is used for monaural sound, if the number of vacant channels is insufficient even if the channel that outputs monaural sound is released, select a channel that outputs stereo sound to increase the number of vacant channels. can be

Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether volume adjustment is permitted or not. For example, an effect set so as not to be able to adjust the volume may have a higher degree of importance, or an effect set so as to be able to adjust the volume may be given a higher degree of importance.

In addition to the conditions described above, for example, if the priority order is the same, a request to reproduce a new sound may be discarded without changing the channel. Also, by assigning a unique priority to all sounds, the effect data may be set so as not to give the same priority.

Although conditions 1 to 8 are shown as examples in the table shown in FIG. 231, these conditions may be applied alone, or a combination of multiple conditions may be applied. For example, a threshold may be set for each condition to select a channel that satisfies more conditions, or a priority may be set for each condition and the conditions may be applied sequentially.

[15-1-3. volume control]
Next, an example will be described in which channel allocation control is performed based on the priority assigned to the sound to be newly output. Here, an example in which three types of advance notices (first half notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the fluctuation will be described. FIG. 232 is a timing chart showing a production example for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the timing at which sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows the channels from which each sound effect is output. ing. FIG. 233 is a diagram showing an example of the order of priority of sound effects in the production example of the present embodiment.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 232, the first half notice _A is generated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display. At this time, an instruction to operate the effect button is displayed on the display screen, and when the player operates the effect button, the first half notice _B is generated. Further, the first half notice C is generated while the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B are being executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 233, the priority of the first half notice_A is 03, the priority of the first half notice_B is 05, and the priority of the first half notice_C is 20. Furthermore, since the volume suppression flag is set in the first half notice _B and the first half notice _C, when the lower priority notice effect is executed in duplicate in the same group, the volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value. reduced.

To explain the content of each notice, the first half notice _A is, for example, an effect in which a character appears. Along with the character appearing on the display screen, sound effects are output in stereo from channels 08 and 09 .

The first half notice _B is an effect executed by operating the effect button, and when the button is operated, the button pressing sound is played (channels 18 and 19), and the first half notice _B is started, and the effect is performed in stereo from channels 10 and 11. A sound is output.

In the first half notice _C, sound effects are output (channels 12 and 13), screen display is stopped for a predetermined time, and sounds with a lower priority than the first half notice _C, specifically, other notice effects and BGM are temporary. is muted (blackout effect). After that, when the effect screen is displayed, the output of sound effects other than the first half notice _C is resumed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 234, the change in the volume of the sound effect of each advance notice effect will be described in more detail. FIG. 234 is a timing chart showing an example of changes in volume of sound effects in the first half of the present embodiment, where (A) shows output timing of sound effects, and (B) shows changes in volume of sound effects. The horizontal axis represents time, and the vertical axis in (B) represents volume.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display starts at time t0, and the first half notice _A starts at time t1. At this time, the effect sound of the first half notice _A is output at the preset volume V_A.

After that, an instruction to operate the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half notice _B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button pressing sound of the production button is reproduced at the volume V_T, and the production effect sound of the first half notice _B is output at the volume V_B. Further, since the priority of the first half notice _B is higher than that of the first half notice _A, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice _A is suppressed to 50%.

In addition, if the priority of the notice effect executed later is lower than or the same as the priority of the notice effect being executed, the volume may not be lowered, and even if there are few sound effects being output at the same time No need to lower the volume. Also, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a combination of specific advance notice effects.

Further, when the first half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen is darkened and sound effects other than the first half notice_C are muted until time t5. At this time, the sound effect of the first half notice _C is output at the volume V_C.

Also, the effect sound effects of the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B that have been muted from time t3 are resumed at time t5. Normally, the button pressing sound is output until time t4, but since t5>t4, reproduction ends at time t3.

Thereafter, the effects of the first half notice _A and the first half notice _B are continued until the preset end time (time t6, t7). Further, at time t8, the first half announcement_C ends, and the first half of the fluctuation ends.

Note that during the period in which the sound effect is muted, the sound effect may be continuously output with the volume set to 0, or the sound effect may be stopped. When the volume is set to 0, the volume (sub-volume) for each channel may be set to 0, or the main volume that controls the volume of the entire production sound effect is set to 0, and the sound effect of the first half notice _C is output. may be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by control by the main volume. Further, even when the output of other sound effects is suppressed by the first half notice _C, sound effects, warning sounds, and notification sounds with higher priority are output.

As described above, when outputting a new sound and lowering the volume of the sound being played, instead of lowering the volume of the sound specified by the volume suppression flag etc., the volume of the sound being played on all channels is reduced. Alternatively, the volume of the sound being reproduced on the same channel (fixed channel method, automatic channel method) may be lowered. Also, the volume of the sound being reproduced in the channels within the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[15-1-4. effect]
By configuring as described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to preferentially output a sound having a high priority. The high-priority sound is, for example, a sound such as an information sound or a warning sound to be reliably transmitted to a player or an employee of a game hall. It may be a sound effect for increasing the expectation of the game, or a sound effect that has a high production effect and can improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, by classifying each channel used for sound source control into a plurality of groups, it becomes possible to facilitate management of production data relating to production sound effects. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of development, such as preventing the occurrence of bugs through the implementation of systematic tests. In addition, by enabling a stable game, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In particular, in this embodiment, the channels of the automatic channel system are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there is a group (AUTO group 1) that outputs sound effects for advance notice production and a group (AUTO group 2) that outputs sound effects related to holding. The number of sound effects for advance notice production is enormous compared to the number of channels, and moreover, multiple production sound effects can be played back at the same time. In particular, during the first half of the fluctuation, it is possible that the output of sound effect sounds exceeding the number of allocated channels is required, for example, the advance notice of the pending fluctuation is executed together with the notice of the fluctuation. In such a case, the interest in the game can be maximized by outputting the performance effect sound with the low priority while replacing the performance effect sound with the high priority within the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1.例文帳に追加.

Furthermore, the change in the display of the variable display and the accompanying effect output of the effect sound to inform the degree of expectation can greatly increase the player's expectation, and it is desirable that the effect be surely executed. . In the present embodiment, by outputting the effect sound related to such on-hold display (hold sound) from the channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to reproduce more reliably independently of the advance notice effect related to the variable display. can. In addition, unlike the announcement effect in the variable display, the number of effect sounds output at the same time does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 2, so the output of the effect sound is stopped. less likely to be Further, even if the output is stopped, the output of the effect sound with the lower priority is simply stopped. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by surely executing the highly effective effect of increasing the expectation of the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, channels to which the automatic channel system is applied and channels to which the fixed channel system is applied are mixed. As described above, in the automatic channel method, the finite number of channels are effectively used by searching for empty channels, and by setting the order of priority, it is possible to preferentially output sounds with a high degree of importance or effects. is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied to the case of continuously outputting sound such as BGM, or the case of preferentially outputting sound to notify a malfunction of the game machine or a fraudulent act. In this way, by applying a suitable channel system according to the sound characteristics and usage, it is possible to effectively use each channel and perform appropriate control according to the sound output situation. For example, in the control of outputting BGM, regardless of the game state, it is sufficient to output the sound to a pre-assigned channel. output sound directly to . On the other hand, in the automatic channel system, as described above, it is possible to make maximum use of empty channels and to preferentially output sounds with high production effects.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, by controlling the volume of each effect sound (channel), it is possible to emphatically execute a high-priority effect. Also, the effect being executed can be continued while lowering the volume without interruption. At this time, it is possible to return the volume to the original volume if the previously executed lower priority performance is continuing even after the higher priority performance has ended. Also, as described in the embodiment, by stopping other effects and executing a specific effect alone, the effect of the specific effect can be emphasized. In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to increase the variation of effects and improve the amusement of the game.

[15-2. Modified example of sound control in which the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method are mixed]
In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are preset numbers. A modification in which the number of channels set and the number of channels set to the fixed channel system are variable will be described.

[15-2-1. Production example]
When the number of channels is made variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to temporarily output more sounds of the same type than the number of allocatable channels. For example, in the case of a game machine capable of executing an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality (for example, 9 divisions) and different scenes are displayed on each of the divided screens. At that time, it is conceivable to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 235 is a diagram showing a screen configuration example of an effect in a modified example of this embodiment. The example of the effect shown in FIG. 235 is a forewarning effect in the second half after the occurrence of ready-to-win.

In this modified example, the display screen is divided into nine, and an effect (multi-screen effect) is executed in which different scenes are displayed on each screen. Then, one of the scenes is selected, and an effect corresponding to the selected scene is executed. At this time, the BGM (nine kinds) of each scene is output simultaneously. It should be noted that the scene may be selected by lottery, or may be selected by the player.

The gaming machine of this modified example uses 32 channels for sound source control, as in the above-described embodiment. Also, the default channel allocation is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to output up to four types (eight channels) of BGM simultaneously. However, in the multi-screen effect in this modified example, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM at the same time. Therefore, in this modified example, the channels for outputting BGM are reassigned, and the arrangement of the channels is rearranged.

[15-2-2. Channel arrangement]
FIG. 236 is a diagram showing an example of a playback channel configuration table in sound source control according to the modification of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the default configuration and (B) shows the configuration when multi-screen presentation is executed. The default configuration of FIG. 236(A) is similar to the arrangement shown in FIG. 229, as previously described.

In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the arrangement of channels shown in FIG. 236(A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 236(B). Specifically, channels of the fixed channel system for outputting BGM are added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 1 and adopting the automatic channel system is reduced. This is because it is difficult for the player to recognize even if another notice effect is executed while the multi-screen effect is being executed.

After the start of the multi-screen presentation, all the BGM corresponding to each scene are reproduced while all the scenes are being displayed. At this time, if all the BGM is output at a normal volume, the volume will be too high, so the sound is output at a lower volume than normal. Then, when a scene is selected, an advance notice effect (second half advance notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the volume of the BGM of the selected scene is set to a normal volume, and the reproduction of other BGM is terminated. . Also, when the player selects a scene, for example, he/she selects a divided screen using an operation unit provided in the game machine, and until the scene is determined, the BGM of the selected scene is played by another player. The volume of the BGM of the scene may be increased, or the volume of the BGM of other scenes may be decreased.

[15-2-3. volume control]
FIG. 237 is a timing chart showing an example of changes in the volume of sound effects in the second half of variation in the modification of the present embodiment, where (A) is the output timing of sound effects, and (B) is the volume change of each sound effect. indicates

In the production example shown in FIG. 237, at the timing when the execution of the multi-screen production is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation), the channel arrangement changes from the default state (FIG. 236 (A)) to the arrangement for multi-screen production (FIG. 236 (B) )). After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), reach occurs and the second half fluctuation starts. After the start of the second half variation, the multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 235, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display areas, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

When the multi-screen effect is started, BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after being changed to the arrangement for multi-screen effect (FIG. 236(B)) is output. At this time, output is performed at volume V_2, which is smaller than normal volume V_1.

After that, when a scene to continue rendering is selected (time t13), the volume of the BGM corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of other BGM is stopped. In the production example shown in FIG. 237, scene 5 is selected, and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the second half announcement_5 corresponding to scene 5 is executed.

Note that after the multi-screen effect is completed, the channels for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the channel arrangement may be returned to the default. When continuing to output BGM from channels 10 and 11 as in this modification, the channels may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next variation.

Also, the channel arrangement may be changed when necessary. For example, in this modified example, the channel arrangement may be changed immediately before starting execution of the multi-screen effect, or may be changed at the start of the second half variation.

Furthermore, instead of changing the arrangement of channels according to the contents of the effect, it may be changed when the game state (for example, the effect mode such as a big hit state, a time saving state, a background change, etc.) changes.

[15-2-4. effect]
By configuring as described above, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to "variable fixed channels" in FIG. (corresponding to "variable AUTOch" in H.228(F)) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. As a result, it becomes possible to reproduce more notification sounds, BGM, or sound effects depending on the situation. flexible measures such as suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds and increasing the number of BGM and sound effects to be reproduced for presentation.

[16. Control over sounds being output on other channels]
In the embodiment described above, an example of managing channels by grouping them and associating output sounds with each group has been described. Also, if the number of sounds that can be assigned simultaneously in the same group is exceeded, the output of the currently sounding sound is stopped and a new sound is output based on a predetermined condition, or the output of the new sound is stopped. and described the control of the sounds being output belonging to the same group. Here, a case will be described in which, when a sound is newly assigned to a channel and output, control such as changing the volume of the sound being output on another channel is performed.

After the start of the variation of the special pattern, in the state before the reach occurs (during the first half variation), the output of the predetermined effect sound and the output of the BGM being reproduced and the sound due to other effects are regulated (silenced) for a predetermined time. A representative effect for performing such control is a blackout effect in which the output of sound effects is regulated and the screen is darkened. In the blackout effect, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the output of sound effects was regulated, the blackout of the screen is canceled and the output of sound due to BGM and other effects is resumed, thereby newly outputting sound (the relevant sound ) can be emphasized to draw the player's attention and increase the player's expectation for the change.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a new sound is assigned to an empty channel and output instead of canceling the assignment of the channel to which the sound effect is being output and assigning a new sound. In this case, in order to restore the output of BGM and the like to the state before regulation, the volume (sound volume) should be returned without considering processing such as reassignment of sounds to channels. Specific embodiments will be described below.

[16-1. Control when sounds of different groups are being output]
In this embodiment, channels are grouped and priority is set for each group. Next, a case will be described in which sound is output from a channel belonging to a new high-priority group when sound is being output from a channel belonging to a low-priority group.

[16-1-1. Channel group volume control table]
FIG. 238 is a diagram showing an example of a channel group volume control table indicating the priority of volume control for each group in this embodiment. In this embodiment, each channel is divided into fixed channel (fixed ch) 1, fixed channel (fixed ch) 2, automatic channel group (AUTO group) 1, automatic channel group (AUTO group) 2, automatic channel group (AUTO group). Divided into 5 groups of 3.

A group volume priority and a suppression volume value are set for each group. The group volume priority indicates the priority between groups, and the smaller the number, the higher the priority. In this embodiment, a numerical value of 1 or more is set, and "1" has the highest priority.

The suppression volume value is a numerical value that indicates how to change the volume of the other sound being reproduced when the sound is being reproduced in a channel belonging to a group with a low priority. Specifically, when "-1" is set, the reproduction of the sound is continued without changing the other sounds being reproduced. When "0" is set, control is performed so that other sounds being reproduced are muted. When a numerical value other than "0" is set, for example, when "50" is set, the volume of other sounds being reproduced is suppressed to 50%. That is, when a numerical value from 1 to 100 is set, the volume is changed in units of %. It should be noted that control may be performed to set a numerical value of 100 or more to increase the volume more than usual.

Further, referring to FIG. 238, each set value will be described. In this embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, both fixed channel system and automatic channel system channels are mixed. Sounds that are output with priority or are always output, such as notification sounds and BGM, are assigned to the fixed channels. In the automatic channel, grouped production sound effects are assigned according to the type and importance of production.

For fixed ch1, the highest group volume priority is set to "1". Also, since the suppression volume value is set to "0", when sound is reproduced in the fixed ch1, all other sounds being reproduced are muted. The sound reproduced by the fixed ch1 is, as shown as a reference reproduced sound, a notification sound for notifying the outside such as a player or an employee of amusement arcade. It may be an alarm sound for notifying that a failure has occurred in the game machine, or a notification sound for ball clogging or the like. That is, when the sound is output from the fixed ch1, the output of the dramatic effect sound is stopped and only the notification sound is output because the fraudulent act or the occurrence of the failure is the cause. Further, while the notification sound is output from the fixed ch1 having the highest priority, the output of other sounds having relatively low priority is restricted.

In fixed ch2, the lowest group volume priority is set to "4" in FIG. In addition, since the suppression volume value is set to "-1", even if sound reproduction is started on the fixed ch2, other sounds being reproduced are not affected. The sound reproduced by the fixed ch2 is mainly the BGM in the game, and in the state where the BGM is output in the normal game, the effect sound that attracts the player's attention in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. is output.

In AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is set to "2". Also, since the suppression volume value is set to "0", when sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 1, all sounds being reproduced other than the notification sound output from the fixed ch1 are muted. That is, the sound output from the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in the presentation, and is output alone with the other sounds muted.

Specific sounds to be output in the AUTO group 1 are, as shown in the reference reproduction sounds, a big hit decision sound, a blackout effect sound, a V winning sound, and the like. The big-hit decision sound is a sound that notifies that the result of the variable display will be a big-hit at a predetermined timing such as when the player starts winning a prize, and serves as a performance effect sound that maximizes the player's sense of anticipation. The V winning sound is a sound for notifying that a game ball has won a prize in the V zone and, for example, the transition to a high-probability state has been confirmed. can be made

The blackout effect sound is a sound effect that is output in a silent state by suppressing the output of other effect sound effects when the blackout effect is executed. At this time, the display of the effect screen is also darkened. At this time, an effect such as flashing on the screen may be performed along with the output of the blackout effect sound. The jackpot confirmation sound and the V winning sound are suppressed in a short time after the sound is output in order to suppress the output of other sounds so that the player does not miss the output of these sounds. is resumed. On the other hand, as for the blackout effect sound, the player's attention is focused on the blackout effect by setting a state in which the effect sound by another effect is not output for a predetermined time after the output of the blackout effect sound. Further, after the execution of the blackout effect, the effect linked to the blackout effect may be executed with the variation. can be

In AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is set to "3". In addition, since "50" is set as the suppression volume value, when sound is played in AUTO group 2, all sounds being played in groups with priority "4" or lower are halved (50%). output). For example, the BGM output from the fixed ch2 has the group volume priority "4" as described above, so the volume is halved, and the sound of the AUTO group 2 is output at the normal volume. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that attracts the player's attention while continuing the flow of the game without completely muting the BGM. Specific sounds to be output in the AUTO group 2 are, for example, a first-half announcement sound effect and a second-half announcement sound effect.

In AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is set to "2". Also, as in the case of AUTO group 2, since the suppression volume value is set to "50", when sound is played back in AUTO group 3, groups with priority levels of "3" and lower are being played back. All sounds are halved. For example, when the forewarning sound effect is output from the AUTO group 2, the volume of the forewarning sound effect is halved. At this time, if the volume of the BGM output from the fixed ch2 has already been halved, the volume may continue without being changed, or the volume may be further halved (1/4 of the initial volume). may

Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of start winning, a hold change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and a button pressing sound notifying that the production button has been pressed. be. In this embodiment, when the group volume priority is the same, the sound is output as it is at the normal volume. Therefore, even when the blackout effect of the AUTO group 2 is executed and the output of BGM or the like is restricted, sounds belonging to the AUTO group 3 are output. For example, when a game ball enters the starting winning hole, the pending winning sound is output even during the execution of the blackout effect.

[16-1-2. Group volume control processing]
Next, a volume control procedure in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the procedure of group volume control processing for performing sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound belongs according to this embodiment. The group volume control process is executed in the sound data creation process (step S1032) in the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 95) of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. Group volume control processing will be described below.

When the group volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a request to reproduce a new sound (step S1401). If there is no request to reproduce a new sound (the result of step S1401 is "No"), the processing from step S1420 onwards is executed.

On the other hand, when there is a request to reproduce a new sound (result of step S1401 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies a channel group from the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, and creates a volume control table for each channel group. (FIG. 238), the suppression volume value and group volume priority corresponding to the channel group are obtained (step S1402).

Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the obtained suppression volume value is "-1" (no suppression control) (step S1403). If the acquired suppression volume value is "-1" (result of step S1403 is "Yes"), that is, if the sound being reproduced is not to be controlled, the processing from step S1406 onwards is executed.

If the acquired suppression volume value is not "-1" (the result of step S1403 is "No"), that is, if the sound being reproduced is to be controlled, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further controls the volume of the sound requested to be reproduced. It is determined whether or not the tone number, suppression volume value and group volume priority have been registered in the work area (step S1404). If the tone number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority have already been registered (result of step S1404 is "Yes"), the processing from step S1406 onwards is executed.

If the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority order have not been registered (result of step S1404 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a registers the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority of the requested sound. The order is held in the work area (step S1405). In this work area, the parameters (tone number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority) of the currently reproduced sound with the highest priority are recorded.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not there is already a sound being reproduced (step S1406). If there is no sound being reproduced (result of step S1406 is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1407). On the other hand, if there is already a sound being reproduced (result of step S1406 is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing from step S1410.

To explain the control for the sound being reproduced, first, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not a parameter for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced has been registered in the work area (step S1410). If the parameter of the sound for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced has not been registered (the result of step S1410 is "No"), the output of the newly requested sound is set (step S1407).

The sound control executed after step S1410 will be described. The group volume priority of the existing sound is compared with the group volume priority already held in the work area (step S1411).

If the group volume priority of the sound requested for new reproduction is lower than the group volume priority already held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is "<"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a issues the new reproduction request. The volume of the sound with the .

If the group volume priority of the sound requested for new reproduction is higher than the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is ">"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs new reproduction. The sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority of the requested sound are overwritten in the work area (step S1412), and the volume of the newly requested sound is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413). ).

Furthermore, when the group volume priority of the newly requested sound is equal to the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is "="), the peripheral control MPU 1511a While maintaining the content, the volume of the newly requested sound is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the group volume priority of the sound being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority already recorded in the work area (step S1415). If the group volume priority of the sound being played is lower than the group volume priority already recorded in the work area (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"), the volume of the sound being played is recorded in the work area. It is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1416).

When the processing of steps S1415 and S1416 has been executed for all sounds being reproduced (step S1417), or after the processing of step S1407 is finished, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the suppression volume value and the group volume priority are working. It is determined whether or not the area has been registered (step S1420). If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority have not been registered in the work area (result of step S1420 is "No"), this processing ends.

If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority have already been registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area cannot be reproduced. It is determined whether or not the processing has ended (step S1421). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not ended (the result of step S1421 is "No"), this processing ends.

When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has ended (the result of step S1421 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority in the work area. (step S1422). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the original volume values determined in advance (steps S1423 and S1424), and the process ends.

The above is the processing for controlling the volume of the sound being reproduced when the reproduction of the new sound is requested in this embodiment. Next, sound volume control will be described in chronological order. FIG. 240 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in this embodiment in chronological order, where (A) shows execution timing of effects and (B) shows the volume of each effect. FIG. 240 describes an example of executing the notice effect and the blackout effect.

When the gaming machine is powered on, a game is started, and normal BGM is output on a fixed channel (fixed ch2). For fixed ch2, as shown in FIG. 238, the group volume priority is "4" and the suppression volume value is "-1". Since the normal BGM has a suppression volume value of "-1", the sound is reproduced without recording the sound number, group volume priority, and suppression volume value of the normal BGM in the work area.

When the game ball wins the start winning hole (here, the sound output at the time of pending winning is omitted), the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbols is started, and the first half notice A is started (time t21). The effect sound of the first half notice A is output by the channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is "3", and the suppression volume value is "50" (results of steps S1402 and S1403 are "No"). . Since the parameters were not recorded in the work area at the start of the first half notice (the result of step S1404 is "No"), the parameters of the effect sound of the first half notice are recorded in the work area (step S1405).

At the start of the first half notice A, normal BGM is being output (the result of step S1406 is "Yes"), and the sound number of the effect sound of the first half notice A is registered in the work area (the result of step S1410 is "Yes"). At this time, since the group priority of the newly requested sound is the same as the group priority of the work area (the result of step S1411 is "="), the volume of the newly requested sound is set in advance. A defined volume value is set (step S1413).

At this time, since the normal BGM is being played back and the group volume priority is lower than the effect sound of the first half variation (result of step S1415 is "Yes"), the sound is generated based on the parameter of the effect sound of the first half notice A. is suppressed (step S1416). Specifically, the volume of the normal BGM is reduced (suppressed) to 50% output.

After that, when a predetermined condition is established, a blackout effect is executed (time t22). A sound effect for blackout effect is output by a channel belonging to AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is set to "2", and the suppression volume value is set to "0" (step S1402). At this time, the parameters of the first half notice A are recorded in the work area, but since the blackout effect has a higher group volume priority (the result of step S1411 is ">"), the contents of the work area are changed to the blackout effect. (step S1412), and a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the newly requested sound (step S1413).

Furthermore, since the group priority of the normal BGM being reproduced and the effect sound of the first half notice A is lower than the group priority of the sound effect of the blackout effect than that of the blackout effect (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"), these is reduced (step S1416). In the blackout effect, since the suppression volume value is 0, the sound is muted.

Further, the second half notice B is started during execution of the blackout effect (time t23). At this time, since the group volume priority of the second half notice B is lower than the group volume priority of the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is "<"), the second half notice B is started with the sound muted, and the blackout effect is performed. continue until the end of

After that, when the game ball enters the start winning hole, a pending winning sound is output (time t24). The reserved prize-winning sound is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 3, and has a group volume priority of "2" and a suppression volume value of "50". In this embodiment, when the group volume priorities are the same (the result of step S1411 is "="), the parameters recorded in the work area are maintained while output is performed with a predetermined volume. Therefore, even during execution of the blackout effect, the pending prize winning sound is output as usual.

Then, when the blackout effect ends (time t26), the parameters of the blackout effect recorded in the work area are erased (step S1422), and the regulated volume is returned to the predetermined volume (step S1423). . Specifically, the volumes of the normal BGM, the first half notice A, and the second half notice B are returned to the predetermined volumes. After that, the output of the sound of the first half notice A and the second half notice B ends (time t27, t28).

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to emphasize a specific performance by suppressing the output of sound effects with low group priority while sound effects with high group priority are being output. Furthermore, the volume control by the suppression volume value makes it possible for the player to recognize that a plurality of effects are progressing at the same time. By setting a high priority, it becomes possible to execute without impairing the performance effect.

Further, when a new high-priority sound is output and the output of the effect sound being reproduced is suppressed, in the above-described embodiment, the volume of the effect sound being reproduced is immediately output based on the suppression volume value. However, from the timing when a sound with a high priority is output, the volume of other effect sound is gradually lowered to the target value (volume based on the suppression volume value) and faded out. good too. In this case, the starting value (currently playing volume), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be specified. It is also possible to set the time to reach and the amount of change. For example, if the output of the new sound effect is short, the time to reach the target value may be set short to make the sound effect stand out. A longer time may be set to reach the value to reduce discomfort that may occur when the effect sound is switched.

For example, if a newly output sound effect is output for a short period of time, such as a jackpot confirmation sound or a V winning sound, the output of the effect sound being reproduced, such as BGM, is faded out in a relatively short period of time. To make a newly output performance effect sound stand out without disturbing the tempo of a game.

Furthermore, when the output of a new effect sound is finished and the output of another effect sound is restarted, the volume of the other effect sound is immediately returned to the target value (predetermined volume value). Instead, the start value (the volume being regulated), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be specified, and fade-in control may be performed. For example, the output of the normal BGM is suppressed to 50% when the sound effect of the first half notice A is reproduced, but when the output of the normal BGM is resumed, the normal volume is set as the target value, and the start value (volume currently being reproduced. Then, the volume is suppressed to 50%), and fade-in is controlled based on the specified time and amount of change. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the player's sense of incongruity while making the switching of the effect sound stand out, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, although the present embodiment has been described with the effect sound as an example, it can be similarly applied to the case of an alarm sound or an information sound. As an example, when outputting a notification sound with a high degree of importance (priority) (for example, a warning sound for fraud), not only the effect sound but also the notification sound with a relatively low degree of importance (priority) ( For example, the output of the ball clogging notification sound) may be restricted. On the other hand, if a fraudulent act is committed while an alert sound with a low priority (priority) is being output, the output of the alert sound is interrupted and an alert sound (alarm) with a high priority (priority) is output. sound) may be preferentially output.

It should be noted that the alarm sound and notification sound do not have a sound output time set like the effect sound, but continue to be output until the cause of the alarm or notification is eliminated. Therefore, when a situation arises in which multiple types of warning sounds and notification sounds are output, the sound with the highest priority is output, and after the cause of outputting that sound is resolved, another notification sound is output. . At this time, the sound with the next highest priority may be output and the output of the remaining sounds may be restricted, or all the remaining sounds may be output at the same time.

[16-2. Volume control by sound output time (long or short)]
So far, the control of redundantly output sounds according to the priority between groups has been described. Next, a control example of controlling the sound volume based on the sound output time (long or short) will be described.

[16-2-1. Sound effect volume control table]
FIG. 241 is a diagram showing an example of a sound effect volume control table showing volume (sound volume) control for each total sound reproduction time (output time) in this embodiment. A use reproduction channel (ch), a total reproduction time, and a suppression volume value are set for each sound effect.

As in the example shown in FIG. 238, each channel is divided into five groups: fixed ch1, fixed ch2, AUTO group 1, AUTO group 2, and AUTO group 3.

The total playback time is the time from the start to the stop of outputting sound effects. When the total playback time is set to -1, the sound effect is output at a preset volume without being affected by suppression control by other output sound effects. At this time, control is performed so that the volume of the sound effect cannot be suppressed.

If the total playback time is set to 0, the loop playback is repeated, and the output continues until another sound effect is assigned to the same channel. If the numerical value set for the total playback time is any other number (positive number), it is the playback time for the sound effect. Note that the unit of the total playback time is milliseconds (ms).

Similar to the example shown in FIG. 238, the suppression volume value is a numerical value that indicates how the volume of other sound effects that are simultaneously output is changed. Specifically, in the case of "-1", the sound being played continues to be played without being changed, and in the case of "0", the effect sound being played (- Suppresses (silences) the output of sound effects (excluding sound effects set to 1). In the case of a numerical value other than "0", for example, when "50" is set, the volume of the sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%.

Next, referring to FIG. 241, each sound effect will be described. In this embodiment, as in the above-described embodiment, channels of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method are mixed, and the assigned sound effects are the same. is. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 241, the suppression volume value is set for each channel group, but it may be set for each sound effect.

For sound effects assigned to fixed ch1, the total playback time is set to "-1" and the suppression volume value is set to "0". All sounds are muted. The sound reproduced by the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying the outside such as players and employees of the game arcade, and is caused by fraudulent acts and failures, so the output sound effect volume cannot be suppressed, and the output of other sound effects being played is forcibly suppressed (stopped, muted).

For the sound effect assigned to the fixed ch2, the total playback time is set to "0" and the suppression volume value is set to "-1", so the sound effect is repeatedly output from the start of output. These sound effects do not affect other sounds being played. The sound effects assigned to the fixed ch2 are mainly BGM in games.

For sound effects assigned to AUTO group 1, the total playback time is set to a value (playback time) set for each sound effect, and the suppression volume value is set to "0". All sounds that are playing other than are muted. That is, the sound output from the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in the presentation, and is output alone with the other sounds muted. As shown in FIG. 238, specific sounds to be output in the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot confirmation sound, a blackout effect sound, a V winning sound, and the like.

For the sound effects assigned to AUTO group 2 and AUTO group 3, the total playback time is set to a value (playback time) set for each sound effect, and the suppression volume value is set to "50". When a sound is played, the output of all other sounds being played is halved (suppressed to 50% output). As a result, for example, the output of BGM can be halved to make the production stand out while continuing the flow of the game. Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of start winning, a hold change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and a production button pressed. It is a button pressing sound or the like for notification.

[16-2-2. Volume control processing]
In this embodiment, the output of duplicately reproduced sound effects is controlled according to the reproduction time of the sound effects. 242A and 242B are flowcharts showing procedures of volume control processing for performing sound control based on parameters set for each sound effect according to this embodiment. The procedure for controlling the output of sound effects according to this embodiment will be described below.

When the volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a request to reproduce a new sound (step S1501A). If there is no new sound reproduction request (result of step S1501A is "No"), the process from step S1530A onwards is executed.

On the other hand, when there is a request to reproduce a new sound (result of step S1501A is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the sound effect name based on the sound number of the requested sound, and sets the volume of each sound effect. From the control table (FIG. 241), the suppression volume value and total playback time are obtained (step S1502A).

Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the obtained suppression volume value is "-1" (no suppression control) (step S1503A). If the obtained suppression volume value is "-1" (result of step S1503A is "Yes"), that is, if the sound being reproduced is not to be controlled, the processing from step S1506A is executed.

If the acquired suppression volume value is not "-1" (the result of step S1503A is "No"), that is, if the sound being reproduced is to be controlled, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further controls the volume of the sound requested to be reproduced. It is determined whether or not the tone number, suppression volume value, and total playback time have been registered in the work area (step S1504A). If the note number, suppression volume value, and total playback time have already been registered in the work area (result of step S1504A is "Yes"), the processing from step S1506A onwards is executed.

If the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority order have not been registered (result of step S1504A is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a registers the sound number, suppression volume value, and total playback time of the requested sound. is held in the work area (step S1505A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not there is already a sound being reproduced (step S1506A). If there is no sound being reproduced (result of step S1506A is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1507A). On the other hand, if there is already a sound being played back (result of step S1506A is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing from step S1510A.

Sound control based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound will be explained. (step S1510A). If the total playback time of the newly requested sound is "-1" (the result of step S1510A is "Yes"), as described above, an alarm sound is output when an abnormality occurs, and the new playback is requested. To prohibit the suppression of the volume of the reproduced sound and forcibly suppress the output of other sound effects during playback.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a sets a predetermined volume value to the newly requested sound (step S1511A). Furthermore, the work area is overwritten with the tone number, suppression volume value, and total playback time for which a new playback request was made (step S1512A).

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a suppresses the volume of the effect sound being reproduced based on the suppression volume value of the newly requested sound (step S1513A). After suppressing the volume of all the sound effects being reproduced, the processing after step S1530A is executed (step S1514A).

On the other hand, if the total playback time of the newly requested sound is not "-1" (the result of step S1510A is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the total playback time of the sound held in the work area to It is determined whether "-1" or a note number is set in the work area (step S1520A). If the total playback time of the sound held in the work area is "-1" or if the sound number is not set in the work area (result of step S1520A is "Yes"), the processing after step S1530A is executed.

If the total playback time of the sound held in the work area is not "-1" and the sound number is set in the work area (the result of step S1520A is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a It is determined whether or not the suppression volume value of the newly requested sound is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (step S1521A).

If the suppression volume value of the newly requested sound is smaller than the suppression volume value already held in the work area (result of step S1521A is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a The work area is overwritten with the number, suppression volume value, and total playback time (step S1522A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the total playback time of the newly requested sound is shorter than the total playback time held in the work area (step S1523A). If the total playback time of the newly requested sound is shorter than or equal to the total playback time already held in the work area (result of step S1521A is "Yes"), the volume of the newly requested sound is A predetermined volume value is set (step S1524A). On the other hand, if the total playback time of the newly requested sound is longer than the total playback time already held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is "No"), the volume of the newly requested sound is set to the volume value reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area (step S1525A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the suppression volume values of all sounds being reproduced are smaller than or equal to the suppression volume values already recorded in the work area (step S1526A). Then, if the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is greater than the suppression volume value already recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is "No"), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area. It is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1527A).

When the peripheral control MPU 1511a has performed the processing of steps S1526A and S1527A for all sounds being reproduced, it performs the processing from step S1530A (step S1528A).

When the volume control for the newly requested sound and the sound being reproduced is completed (step S1507A, step S1514A, step S1524A, step S1525A, step S1528A), the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the sound number, suppression volume value, and total playback time. is registered in the work area (step S1530A). If the note number, suppression volume value, and total playback time have not been registered in the work area (result of step S1530A is "No"), this process ends.

If the sound number, suppression volume value, and total playback time have already been registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. has ended (step S1531A). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not ended (the result of step S1531A is "No"), this processing ends.

When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has ended (the result of step S1531A is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a removes the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time from the work area. Delete (step S1532A). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the original volume values determined in advance (steps S1533A and S1534A), and this processing ends.

The above is the processing for controlling the sound volume based on the total playback time of sound effects in this embodiment. Next, sound volume control will be specifically described in chronological order. FIG. 243 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in this embodiment in chronological order, where (A) shows execution timing of effects and (B) shows the volume of each effect. In FIG. 243, an example of executing the first half notice effect and the blackout effect will be described.

When the gaming machine is powered on, a game is started and normal BGM is output. Normally, BGM is output by fixed ch2, and the suppression volume value is set to "-1" as shown in FIG. Also, the normal BGM is a loop reproduction in which reproduction is repeated until the BGM is switched, and 0 is set for the total reproduction time. Since the suppression volume value is "-1" (the result of step S1503A is "Yes"), the normal BGM parameters are not registered in the work area. Then, a preset volume value is set, and normal BGM is output (step S1507A).

After that, when the game ball enters the start winning slot and the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, the output of the sound effect of the first half notice A is newly requested in order to execute the first half notice A. (time t31). The sound effect of the first half notice A is output by a channel belonging to AUTO group 2, and the total playback time is set to 15000 ms, and the suppression volume value is set to 50 (the result of step S1503A is "No").

Also, since the parameters are not registered in the work area at this time (result of step S1504A is "No"), the sound effect sound number, total playback time, and suppression volume value of the first half notice A are held in the work area ( step S1505A).

Furthermore, at the start timing of the first half notice A, the normal BGM is being played (result of step S1506A is "Yes"), the total reproduction time of the first half notice A is 15000 ms (result of step S1510A is "No"), and the new The parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A requested to be reproduced has already been registered in the work area (the result of step S1520A is "No", the result of step S1521A is "No", the result of step S1523A is "Yes"). ). Therefore, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice A requested for new reproduction is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1524A).

Subsequently, at this time, the normal BGM is being reproduced and the volume has not been suppressed yet, so the suppression volume value is "100", which is greater than the suppression volume value "50" of the first half notice A recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is "No"), the volume of normal BGM is reduced to 50% based on the suppression volume value "50" of the first half notice A (step S1527A).

Subsequently, since the parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A has already been registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is "Yes"), the first half notice A is continued (the result of step S1531A is "No"). , the process ends.

After that, when a predetermined condition is established, a blackout effect is executed, and a new sound reproduction request for a blackout effect sound is received (time t32). The blackout effect sound is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 1, the total playback time is "8000", and the suppression volume value is "0" (result of step S1503A is "No"). At this time, the parameters of the sound effect of the first half notice A have already been registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is "Yes"), and the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A are being output (step S1506A). result is "Yes").

Furthermore, the blackout effect sound for which a new reproduction request has been made has a total reproduction time of "8000" (the result of step S1510A is "No"), and the total reproduction time of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area. is "15000" (result of step S1520A is "No").

Next, since the suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area is "50" and the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound effect for which the new reproduction is requested is "0" (step If the result of S1521A is "Yes"), the work area is overwritten with the sound number of the newly requested blackout effect sound, suppression volume value "0" and total playback time "8000" (step S1522A).

Also, since the total playback time of the sound effects of the blackout notice effect (8000 ms; a1) is shorter than the total playback time of the sound effects of the first half notice A (15000 ms) (result of step S1523A is "Yes"), the blackout A predetermined volume value is set as the volume of the announcement effect sound (step S1524A).

Subsequently, the suppression volume value of the sound during playback is normally "50" for the BGM, the sound effect of the first half notice A is "100", and the suppression volume value of the blackout notice effect sound effect recorded in the work area is "0". (result of step S1526A is "No"), the volume of the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A is set to "0" (step S1527A).

After that, when a game ball enters the starting winning hole during execution of the blackout effect, a new sound reproduction request for the pending winning sound is received (time t33). The pending winning sound is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 3, and has a total playback time of "2000" and a suppression volume value of "50" (result of step S1503A is "No"). At this time, the parameter of the blackout effect sound has already been registered in the work area (result of step S1504A is "Yes"), and the blackout effect sound, normal BGM, and first half notice A sound effect are being output. Yes (result of step S1506A is "Yes"). At this time, the output of the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A is suppressed.

Furthermore, the total playback time of the pending prize-winning sound requested for new playback is "2000" (result of step S1510A is "No"), and the total playback time of the blackout effect sound held in the work area is "8000". ” (result of step S1520A is “No”).

Next, because the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound held in the work area is "0" and the suppression volume value of the pending winning sound requested for new reproduction is "50" (the result of step S1521A is "No"), the work area is not overwritten, but the total playback time of the pending winning sound (2000 ms; a2) is shorter than the total playback time of the blackout effect sound (8000 ms; a1) (the result of step S1523A is "Yes"), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the pending winning sound (step S1524A). Also, since the work area has not been updated, the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (result of step S1526A is "Yes"). Then, even if the output of the pending winning sound ends (time t34), the output of the blackout effect sound is continued because the parameters of the blackout effect sound are recorded in the work area.

After that, when the blackout effect ends (time t35), the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area ends (result of step S1531A is "Yes"), so the blackout effect stored in the work area The parameter of the effect sound is erased (step S1532A). Then, the volume of the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A whose reproduction was suppressed (the volume was reduced) is returned to the predetermined volume value (step S1533A). At this time, the normal BGM was suppressed during the reproduction of the sound effects of the first half notice A, but the normal volume is restored.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of other sound effects being reproduced is muted, and a specific effect (for example, a blackout effect) can be emphasized. It is possible to provide the player with a performance opportunity even when the output ends. Specifically, if the output of the sound effect is completed during the silence period, the sound effect will be output even while the output of the sound effect of the other effect is being suppressed due to the execution of the specific effect. On the other hand, when the output of the sound effect continues until after the end of the mute period, the output of the sound effect of the performance during the mute period is suppressed to make the execution of the specific performance stand out. be able to.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, which has a finite number of channels, when there is no vacancy in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated (the number of vacant channels is 0), a new sound is generated. When the data allocation condition is established, one of the sound outputs has to be discarded, and there is a concern that the appearance of the sound output unintended in the production design may reduce the enjoyment of the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when the new sound data allocation condition is satisfied when there is no channel vacancy (the number of vacant channels is 0), the preset By controlling to selectively discard sound outputs of lower importance based on the determined priority, appearance of unintended sound output modes in performance design is avoided, thereby reducing the interest in the game. I suggested that it should be suppressed. However, it can be said that it is also important to implement technical measures to make it difficult for the situation in which there are no vacant channels (the situation in which the number of vacant channels is 0) itself to appear.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to allow more channel resources to be allocated to the effect sound (effect sound), various As for the notification sound, it is possible to adopt a channel-saving control structure that can appropriately notify the content of an abnormality using only a single channel. An example of the case where a channel-saving control structure is adopted for the output of various notification sounds will be described below.

FIG. 244 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X) among a finite number of prepared channels for sound control using a fixed channel system for various notification sounds (discharge notification sounds and abnormality notification sounds) excluding effect sounds. ) shows an example of the sound definition table in the case of realizing the process of outputting only in the In this sound definition table, for each sound name, definitions of playback priority, left/right pan initial value, up/down pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed. are doing. For convenience of explanation, only the definitions of the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown here, and the definitions of the other notification sounds and dramatic sounds are omitted. In addition to the definition of the effect sound by the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 209, the definition by the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. It is also possible to use

The priority is a parameter used to determine which of the notification sounds should be assigned to channel X to be output when a plurality of notification sounds respectively satisfy the output conditions. A high notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output regardless of the allocation status of the notification sound having a lower priority numerical value to the channel X. As will be described later, when the priorities are the same, the notification sound assigned first to channel X is given priority, and after the output of the notification sound is completed, the notification sound assigned to channel X is output. It will be done.

The left/right pan initial value represents the sound image localization initial position of the sound by the left and right speakers that are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the setting value of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume output from the left and right speakers individually, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). The difference in volume output from the left and right speakers, which are the combination of 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, a setting of "0xFF" indicates output from only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of vertical panning is the sound image localization of sound by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the set value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers is created, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, if it is set to "0x80", it indicates the volume difference that is individually output from the combination of the upper and lower speakers. becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, a setting of “0xFF” indicates output from only the pair of lower speakers 921 .

The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set within a setting range from "0x00" to "0xFF", for example. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the illustration) that repeatedly plays back the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the drawing) that plays back the target sound once. It represents whether The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is to be reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 245 is a table showing, for each type of notification sound illustrated in FIG. 244, the content of notification, notification mode, notification time, and conditions for termination of notification (cancellation conditions). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for each notification sound. This is a measure to maintain the status and refrain from outputting the notification sound after that.

As shown in FIG. 245, notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) indicates a state in which magnetism is detected by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed). It informs you of something. And, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "boo, magnetism detected", and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "magnetism detected") ) and lighting by various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively. The notification time is 60 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound six times) from the time when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected". However, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps are continued until the cancellation condition "return power on" is satisfied. It's becoming

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly), the vibration sensor 2405 detects vibration (there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed by a pounding act). state), and the count sensor 4005 (first big winning opening sensor or second big winning opening sensor or A notification sound that notifies that the detection by the winning opening sensor) is performed (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed to forcibly open the large winning opening in the closed state to win a game ball) 3 (large prize winning abnormality) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent act has been performed, and the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group are The notification mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration), as its notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Boo-boo vibration detected" and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, , "Vibration detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, respectively. 60 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for 6 times) from when there is, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated. Execution of the lighting is continued until the canceling condition "return power on" is satisfied. In addition, in the notification sound 3 (big prize abnormality), as its notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Boo Boo big prize abnormality detected", Display (for example, "A big winning error has been detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as the notification time, 60 seconds after the detection by the count sensor 4005 (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for 6 times), the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated. The display and the lighting of various lamps are continued until the canceling condition of "turning on the power again" is satisfied.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group each adopt a different display mode. Regarding lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps must be lit) is set for each of the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. It does not have to be a form) is adopted. In addition, for the notification sound to be looped, the notification sound 1, such as "boo-boo", plays a role of notifying that it belongs to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act has been committed). 3, and a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of informing individual identification as to which content of the notification is. The warning sound consists of a monotonous sound to give a warning under a tense fraudulent situation, and the message sound consists of a variety of sounds to clarify the distinction from other notification sounds. It is desirable to ensure that

That is, when reporting something belonging to the first reporting group (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraud has been committed), rather than specifying which reporting type it belongs to, the hall side's response to fraudulent activity It is important to expedite the initial action of In this regard, according to the above-described configuration, only by outputting a "boo-boo" notification sound or lighting modes unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light-emitting devices), those belonging to the first notification group (fraudulent behavior) Since it is possible to recognize that it is a state where there is a high possibility that it has been committed, it is expected to speed up the initial response of the hall side to the fraudulent act. Furthermore, a message sound indicating which type of notification is being output, following the notification sound of "boo-boo", or displaying within the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial response to the hall side will be performed smoothly.

On the other hand, notification sound 4 (door open) is a state in which the door frame open switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4 (the possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed by opening the door). However, it is possible that the door has been opened by the hall side's emergency response measures). The notification mode includes a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "The door is open ping-pong ping-pong" and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "The door is open. ”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively. The notification time is 30 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound three times) from the time when the door frame open switch 618 detects the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "the door is open ping-pong ping-pong." ), the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps are canceled by the release condition "Door closed detection (door frame open switch 618 turns on the main body frame 4 On the other hand, detection of closing of the door frame 3)” is satisfied.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door open), the body frame open switch 619 detects that the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 ( Notification sound 5 (frame open) to notify that there is a possibility that the body frame has been opened due to abnormal measures taken by the hall side, although there is a possibility that fraudulent acts are being performed by opening the body frame. , is regarded as belonging to the second notification group when there is a medium degree of possibility that some fraudulent act has been committed and it cannot be denied, and the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are The mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in notification sound 5 (frame open), as its notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" and a display ( For example, "the frame is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively, and the main body frame opening switch is set as the notification time 619 30 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for 3 times) from the time of detection, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated, while the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, Execution of lighting by various lamps is continued until the release condition "detection of frame closure (detection of body frame 4 being closed with respect to outer frame 2 by body frame open switch 619)" is satisfied. It will happen.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group adopt different display modes. Regarding lighting by various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps must be lit) is set for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be a form) is adopted. However, the lighting mode of the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode of the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the first notification group. In addition, regarding the notification sounds that are the target of the loop processing, message sounds (unique sounds) that play the role of notifying individual identification as to which content of the notification is, and those belonging to the second notification group (fraudulent behavior A state in which there is a medium degree of possibility that the there is

That is, in the case of notifying those belonging to the second notification group (the state in which there is a medium degree of possibility that a fraudulent act has been committed), it is possible to prevent the person who is playing a proper game from feeling disgusted. It is important to be able to take measures to deal with abnormalities on the hall side as quickly as possible. In this regard, according to the above configuration, as the notification sound, first, as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later, a message sound for notifying which notification type it belongs to is output. Therefore, it is expected that a person who is playing a proper game will be less likely to feel disgust. On the other hand, an alarm sound such as "ping-pong ping-pong" follows the message sound, although the alarm sound is different from that in the case of belonging to the first notification group in order to make it difficult for those who are playing a proper game to feel disgust. In order to make it difficult for a player who is playing a proper game to feel disgust, the lighting mode is different from that in the case of belonging to the first information group, but is output in the case of belonging to the third information group. It is expected that the hall side's countermeasures against abnormalities can be speeded up to some extent by performing notification by lighting various lamps that are not used.

On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the non-time-saving state, but the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a. The passage is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (the game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and the situation should be corrected to a proper manner (left-handed)). This is to inform you that The notification mode includes a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed play", and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left-handed play"). ”) are executed respectively. In addition, as the notification time, both the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound "Please return to the left hand" and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in a non-time saving state. It is designed to end in 20 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound twice) from the time when the gate sensor 4003 detects it.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), the full tank detection sensor 279 detects that the lower tray 322 is full of game balls (lower tray A notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) for notifying that the game ball is in a state in which the game ball in the 322 is in a state where the game ball should be removed is performed as a game guide for properly progressing the game although the possibility of cheating is low. It is regarded as belonging to the third notification group when it is in the power state, and for the notification sounds belonging to the third notification group, the notification mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common. and

For example, in notification sound 7 (draw the ball guidance), as its notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please remove the ball from the lower tray" and A display (for example, "Please remove the ball from the lower tray") is executed respectively, and loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please remove the ball from the lower tray" as the notification time, and a game board The display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 is completed in 20 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound twice) after detection by the full tank detection sensor 279. .

However, regarding the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance), the sensor 2401, the When 279 is still in the detection state, the notification processing (notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

In addition, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, only message sounds are output as the notification sounds 6 and 7. More precisely, for example, after the message sounds for 5 seconds have been output, silence for 5 seconds is output. Data is assigned to channel X and a corresponding sound (silent output) is output, and loop processing is performed to repeat the notification sound for 10 seconds with the message sound and the silent data as a set. It has become. Since the notification sounds 6 and 7 both output silent data for the same amount of time, they function as unique notification modes different from those of the first notification group and the second notification group. Even the hall side can properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by confirming the silent data portion instead of the message sound portion which is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. As for silent data, it is desirable to prepare in advance as one sound data (10-second sound data) including a message sound, and to perform loop processing while assigning this to channel X.

By the way, there may be silent portions in the notification sounds used in the first notification group and the second notification group (between the warning sound and the message sound, etc.), but these are very short to give a "pause". It is clear that it is temporal and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned relatively long duration silence (third reporting group) which has a group identification function.

According to such a configuration, an alarm sound such as "boo-boo" or "ping-pong-ping-pong" is not output, and only the message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silence interval intervening. It is possible to notify the player about the game guidance without making the player feel disgust.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 244 and 245, the same priority order is set for the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. You may do so. Also, as the playback type setting, loop playback that repeatedly plays back the target sound is adopted, but this is not necessarily the case, and 1SHOT playback that plays back the target sound once may be adopted. . In addition, "boo-boo", which is commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group, and "ping-pong ping-pong", which is commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, are related to the message sound. The sound data may be prepared separately for each notification sound, or may be prepared as sound data separate from the message sound, and when outputting, sound data is created by combining the message sound and the warning sound. You may assign it to a channel afterward.

FIG. 246(a) shows processing when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced and the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 246(a), at timing tα1 at which no notification sound is output, if there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94), the main The control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that magnetism has been detected. Next, information indicating that magnetism has been detected is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 . As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that magnetism has been detected is output to the outside based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is provided for the notification process in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα1 (or immediately after) when no notification sound is output, the magnetic detection information is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) shown in FIG. (Here, the loop of "boo-boo magnetism detected") is started, and a timer (60 seconds) is set to measure the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetism abnormality).

When assigning notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) to channel X, schedule data for sound generation corresponding to magnetism detection is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control is performed. It is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the RAM 1511c. On top of this, by assigning notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) to channel X, the notification sound such as "boo, magnetism has been detected" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetism detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetism detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are also executed. The display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously performed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "Boo-Boo magnetism detected" is repeatedly executed for 60 seconds from timing tα1, and a display (for example, "Magnetism detected I did") and lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the first notification group) are executed respectively.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 246(a), 60 seconds have not passed since the timing tα1, and at the timing tα2, when the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism was detected" is being reproduced in a loop, step S112 ( It is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 in the process of FIG. In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that vibration has been detected, as in the case of the timing tα1 at which the magnetism was detected. Next, information indicating that vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510 . As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that vibration has been detected is output to the outside based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is provided for the notification process in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is found that vibration detection information is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned to channel X. I don't do that. That is, since notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) with the same priority order is already assigned to channel X, notification sound 2 (vibration anomaly) is not newly assigned to channel X. By doing so, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side already in the allocation state is preferentially executed and is continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the schedule data itself for sound generation corresponding to vibration detection is not set at the timing tα2. Therefore, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) will not be progressed without being assigned to the channel X.

On the other hand, however, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter), a timer (60 seconds ) is set, and if the timer (60 seconds) has not timed out when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is completed, a sound corresponding to the vibration detection is generated. Set the schedule data for generation, assign the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification sound in the notification mode (here, the loop of "Boom vibration detected") Playback is executed.

In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter), although the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to vibration detection is not set, the schedule data for screen generation corresponding to vibration detection and vibration detection are not set. By extracting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the above from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp For lighting, these are executed.

In addition, in the display in the liquid crystal, the display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately from the position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. there is In lamp lighting, although the schedule data for generating the light emission mode corresponding to the vibration detection is set, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode corresponding to the magnetic detection is already set and has the same priority. The lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the magnetism detection, which has already been set, is reflected in the light emission of various lamps, and the lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the vibration detection is varied. They are not reflected respectively by lamp emission. Similarly to the schedule data for sound generation, the schedule data for generation of light emission modes corresponding to vibration detection may not be set at timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter).

However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the magnetism detection and the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the vibration detection have the same data contents, any of them can be used. Even if it is reflected, there is no change in lamp lighting.

After that, at timing tα3 when 60 seconds have passed from timing tα1, the notification sound "Boo-boo magnetism detected" is repeated based on the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetism abnormality) being timed out. The loop processing to be executed is terminated. In this case, the time required to play the notification sound "Boo-boo magnetism detected" is set to 10 seconds, so the timer (60 seconds) for notification sound 1 (magnetism abnormality) is set to the time. At the increased timing tα3, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound "boo-boo magnetism detected" has been played six times.

At this time, since the timer (60 seconds) for notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) has not timed out, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets schedule data for sound generation according to the vibration detection, and By assigning the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for a period of time (the time (α) from timing tα2 to timing tα3 subtracted from 60 seconds), the notification mode (here, “Boooo vibration was detected" loop).

That is, at timing tα2, the timer for notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) is set, but the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to vibration detection is not set, but is set at timing tα3. Therefore, at timing tα3, it is possible to play the notification sound "Boo-boo vibration detected" from the head, and when the timer for notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) times up, "Boo-boo vibration detected." It is possible to prompt that the loop processing is terminated at an incomplete timing (for example, the timing of "Boo-Boo-Shake") of the notification sound such as "Done" and not to be reproduced.

According to such a configuration, when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced (Fig. 246 (a)), when the sixth warning sound (here, "boo-boo") and the sixth message sound (here, "magnetism detected") have finished playing, the seventh warning sound (here, It is possible to realize smooth switching of notification sounds as if "Boo-Boo") was played back. As a result, "boo boo magnetism detected" and "boo boo vibration detected" are connected in a strange place, making it impossible to recognize fraud alerts in a tense situation (for example, If information sound 1 ends with "Boo-boo magnetism" and information sound 2 starts with "Motion detected", meaningless information such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected" It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the content that may confuse the site.

Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the detection of the vibration is shortened, and the notification sound 2 is timed up at the alarm sound of "boo-boo", and the message sound ends. Even if it is not reproduced, it is possible to recognize that some kind of abnormality detection has occurred at the same time because the loop processing is terminated at an incomplete timing and reproduction is not performed (only magnetic abnormality is detected). In the case of notification, the notification sound is terminated at a good timing). As a result, when the notification sound stops halfway, it will be urged to check the display in the liquid crystal, and the display in the liquid crystal will say "magnetism detected" and "vibration detected" respectively. By being displayed, it becomes possible to properly recognize that the magnetism detection and the vibration detection are performed.

FIG. 246(b) shows processing when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied. An example is shown.

Here, the processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. ) while referring to the above-described processing (processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced) ) is roughly the same as

For example, as shown in FIG. 246(b), at timing tβ1 at which no notification sound is being output, frame open detection by the body frame open switch 619 is performed in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). If there is, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the frame opening has been detected. Next, information indicating that frame opening has been detected is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 . As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is output to the outside based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame open detection) is provided for the notification process in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ1 (or immediately after) when no notification sound is output, frame open detection is detected. When it is determined that the information is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 5 (frame open) shown in FIG. Start playing the notification sound in the mode (here, loop of "frame is open ping-pong ping-pong") and set a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of notification sound 5 (frame open) .

When assigning notification sound 5 (frame open) to channel X, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to frame open detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the control RAM 1511c. Then, by allocating notification sound 5 (frame open) to channel X, the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

At this time, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the frame open detection and the lighting mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame open detection are copied from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting and setting in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal and lighting of the lamp are also executed. The display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until frame closed detection, which is a condition for canceling the frame open detection, is performed.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" is repeatedly executed for 30 seconds from timing tβ1, and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "the frame is It is open") and lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group) are executed respectively.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 246(b), 30 seconds have not passed since the timing tβ1, and at the timing tβ2 in which the notification sound "the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" is being played in a loop, step S110 Alternatively, it is assumed that the door frame open switch 618 detects door opening in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the door opening has been detected, as in the case of the timing tβ1 at which the frame opening was detected. Next, information indicating that the door has been detected as open is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510 . As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the door has been detected as being open is output to the outside based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (detection of door opening) is supplied to the process related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 5 (frame open) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is found that the door open detection information is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), notification sound 4 (door open) shown in FIG. do not assign. That is, since notification sound 5 (frame open) with the same priority order is already assigned to channel X, notification sound 4 (door open) is not newly assigned to channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 5 (frame open) on the side already in the allocation state is preferentially executed and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the schedule data itself for sound generation corresponding to the detection of door opening is not set at timing tβ2. Therefore, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door open) will not be progressed without being assigned to the channel X.

On the other hand, however, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (30 seconds ) is set, and when the output state (playback state) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) is completed, if the timer (30 seconds) has not timed out, the door open detection is responded to. Set the schedule data for sound generation, assign the notification sound 4 (door open) to channel X for the remaining time, and perform the notification mode (here, the loop of "the door is open ping-pong ping-pong") It is for executing notification sound reproduction.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), the schedule data for generating the sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is not set, but the schedule data for generating the screen corresponding to the detection of the door opening, and By extracting the schedule data for generating the lighting mode according to the door open detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, These are executed for display and lamp lighting.

In addition, in the display in the liquid crystal, the display corresponding to the opening of the door appears separately from the position where the display corresponding to the opening of the frame is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. there is In lamp lighting, although the schedule data for generating the lighting mode corresponding to the door open detection is set, the schedule data for generating the lighting mode corresponding to the detection of the frame opening is already set and the priority is the same. Therefore, the lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the lighting mode corresponding to the detection of the frame opening which has already been set will be reflected in the light emission of various lamps, and the lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the lighting mode corresponding to the detection of the door opening will be reflected. Aspects are not reflected in each type of lamp emission. Similarly to the schedule data for sound generation, the schedule data for generation of the light emission mode corresponding to the door open detection may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter).

However, as described above, in this embodiment, the schedule data for generating the lighting mode in response to the detection of the frame opening and the schedule data for generating the lighting mode in response to the detection of the door opening have the same data content. No change occurs in the lighting of the lamp even when either of them is reflected.

After that, at timing tβ3, when 30 seconds have passed since timing tβ1, a notification sound such as “frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is played based on the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 5 (frame open) being timed out. A loop process that is repeatedly executed is terminated. In this example, the time required to play the notification sound "frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" is set to 10 seconds, so the timer (30 seconds) for notification sound 5 (frame open) is set to 10 seconds. At the timing tβ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound "the frame is open, ping-pong ping-pong" has been reproduced three times.

At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) for notification sound 4 (door open) has not timed out, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets schedule data for sound generation according to door open detection, and By allocating the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time (time obtained by subtracting the time (β) from timing tβ2 to timing tβ3 from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door is open Ping Pong Ping Pong loop) will be played.

That is, at timing tβ2, the timer for notification sound 4 (door open) is set, while the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to door open detection is not set, but is set at timing tβ3. Therefore, at timing tβ3, it is possible to reproduce the notification sound "The door is open, ping-pong ping-pong" from the beginning, and when the timer for notification sound 4 (door open) times up, "The door is open It is possible to prompt the user to terminate the loop processing at an incomplete timing (for example, the timing of “the door is open, beep”) of the notification sound such as “Ping-pong, ping-pong” so that it will not be played.

According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced (Fig. 246(b)), when the third message sound (here, "the frame is open") and the third warning sound (here, "ping-pong ping-pong") have finished playing, the fourth message sound ( Here, it is possible to realize smooth switching of the notification sound as if "the door is open") was played back. As a result, "the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" and "the door is open ping-pong ping-pong" are connected in a strange place, and it becomes impossible to recognize the content of the notification in a tense situation. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence.

Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the detection of the door opening becomes short, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted halfway, the message sound is reproduced first. As a result, it is possible to reliably grasp that the door is open.

FIG. 246(c) shows processing when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 246(c), at timing tγ1 at which no notification sound is output, the game If it is detected by the gate sensor 4003 that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the area 5a with respect to the center accessory 2500 (right-handed detection in a non-time-saving state), the main In the control MPU 1310a, the information indicating that there was a right-handed detection in a non-time-saving state is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. As a result, in the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (detection of right-handed hitting in the time-saving state) is provided to the processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. become. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated within the main control MPU 1310a, and the information is not externally output to the hall computer.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately after) when no notification sound is output, in a non-time saving state 245 is assigned to channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95) ( set) to start the reproduction of the notification sound in that notification mode (here, the loop of "Please return to left-handed hitting"), and a timer ( 20 seconds).

Regarding the detection of hitting to the right in the non-time-saving state, in this embodiment, the information to that effect is output as a command from the main control MPU 1310a. Only the information that the ball has passed is detected by the gate sensor 4003 is output as a command, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the detection by the gate sensor 4003 was performed in a non-time saving state. You may make it perform the process regarding the information sound 6 (left-handed guidance) based on having detected by the gate sensor 4003 in a non-time saving state.

In addition, when assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the schedule data for sound generation according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is copied to the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The data is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. On top of this, by assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to channel X, the notification sound "please return to left-handed" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

Also, at this time, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, schedule data for screen generation according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM1511b or the peripheral control RAM1511c, and the schedule data of the peripheral control RAM1511c By setting in the storage area 1511cae, the display in the liquid crystal described above is also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal becomes the end of notification (the timer (20 seconds) for timing the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed out), which is the condition for canceling the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). It will continue to run until In addition, regarding the processing of the third notification group, which has a low possibility of fraud, it is important to avoid impeding the progress of the production, and the schedule data for generating the lighting mode according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state is set. will not be

Through such processing, the notification sound "Please return to the left hand" is repeatedly executed for 20 seconds from the timing tγ1, and the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 is continued until the notification sound ends. Display within the area (eg, "Please return to left-handed") will be executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 246(c), 20 seconds have not passed since timing tγ1, and at timing tγ2, the notification sound "Please return to left-handed" is being reproduced in a loop, at step S110 or It is assumed that the lower tray full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a sets the information indicating that the lower tray full state was detected as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, as in the case of the timing tγ1 where the right-handed stroke was detected in the non-time-saving state. As a result, in the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (lower tray full detection) is provided for the notification processing in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that) when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state), the received command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95) outputs a command. As a result of the analysis, even if it is found that the information on the detection of the lower tray being full is included, in the warning processing of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) shown in FIG. Do not assign to X. That is, since notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having the same priority order is already assigned to channel X, notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) should not be newly assigned to channel X. By doing so, the reproduction of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side already in the allocation state is preferentially executed and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the schedule data itself for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the lower tray full state is not set at the timing tγ2. Therefore, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the notification sound 7 (guidance for pulling out the ball) will not be progressed without being assigned to the channel X.

On the other hand, however, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), a timer (20 second) is set, and if the timer (20 seconds) has not timed out when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is completed, the lower plate is full. Set the schedule data for sound generation according to the detection, assign the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to channel X for the remaining time, and set the notification mode (here, "Please remove the ball from the lower tray ” loop) to play the notification sound.

In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), although the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the lower tray full is not set, the schedule data for screen generation corresponding to the detection of the lower tray full is not set. By extracting the schedule data from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the display in the liquid crystal described above is executed. there is

In addition, in the display in the liquid crystal, the display corresponding to the ball pulling guidance appears separately from the position where the display corresponding to the left-hand hitting guidance is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It's becoming

After that, at timing tγ3 when 20 seconds have passed from timing tγ1, a notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed hitting” is produced based on the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having timed up. A loop process that is repeatedly executed is terminated. Here, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound "Please return to left-handed hitting" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set. At timing tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound "Please return to left-handed" has been reproduced for two times.

At this time, since the timer (20 seconds) for the notification sound 7 (ball removal guide) has not timed out, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the schedule data for sound generation according to the detection of the lower tray full. Then, by allocating the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from timing tγ2 to timing tγ3 from 20 seconds), the notification mode (here Then, the loop of "Please remove the ball from the lower plate") will be executed to reproduce the notification sound.

That is, at the timing tγ2, the timer for the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is set, but the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the lower tray full state is not set, and is set at the timing tγ3. As a result, at timing tγ3, the notification sound "Please remove the ball from the lower tray" can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer for notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) times up , "Please remove the ball from the lower tray", the loop processing will be terminated at an incomplete timing (for example, "Please remove the ball from the lower tray") so that it will not be played. be able to encourage

According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced (Fig. 246(c)), when the second message sound (here, "Please return to left-handed hitting") has finished playing, the third message sound (here, "Please remove the ball from the bottom plate") is played. It is possible to realize smooth switching of notification sounds as if they were reproduced. As a result, the occurrence of a situation in which ``Please return to left-handed shooting'' and ``Please remove the ball from the bottom tray'' are connected at a strange point and the content of the notification cannot be recognized can be suitably suppressed. be able to

In addition, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the output of the message sound is completed, silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to channel X, and a corresponding sound is output (silent output). It's like Therefore, when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied, 5 seconds of silence data are interposed. Since the message sound of another notification sound will be played in , it is preferable to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of the warning sound, and the notification content cannot be recognized. be able to evade.

FIG. 247(a) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. is shown.

As shown in FIG. 247(a), at timing t-1 when no notification sound is output, if the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94), As for the processing (magnetic anomaly processing) according to the magnetism detection, the same processing as described with reference to FIG. 246(a) is performed. Therefore, at timing t-1, a loop process is started to repeatedly execute a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected", and the timing when the timer (60 seconds) for notification sound 1 (magnetism abnormality) times out At t-3, the loop processing ends at a good timing when the notification sound "Boo-boo, magnetism has been detected" has been played six times. In addition, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is the condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 247(a), 60 seconds have not passed since timing t-1, and timing t-2 is in the state of loop reproduction of an alarm sound such as "boo-boo magnetism detected". , it is assumed that door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) in response to magnetism detection has a higher priority than the processing of notification sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection (see FIG. 244). ), even if door open detection occurs, the processing of notification sound 1 (magnetism abnormality) is continued.

Usually, for the processing on the side with the lower priority, similarly to the case where the processing with the same priority described with reference to FIGS. A process is performed in which only the timer is set and the schedule data itself for sound generation is not set.

However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after the occurrence of a magnetic anomaly is different from the case where the door is simply opened, and there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent act is taking place. It can be said that the situation is such that it is difficult to say that the notification belongs to the second notification group with a medium degree of fraud possibility. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247(a), at timing t-2, neither the timer for notification sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection nor the sound generation schedule data are set. , Only the flag is set according to the door open detection. Then, at timing t-3, based on the fact that the flag is set, the timer for notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to door open detection and the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to door open detection are set respectively. In addition to setting, the notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to channel X, and the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, the loop of "the door is open ping-pong ping-pong") is started. . It should be noted that execution of display in the liquid crystal and lighting of the lamp in response to door open detection is started from timing t-2.

According to such a configuration, even though the door frame open switch 618 detected the opening of the door by the door frame open switch 618 while the notification sound "Boo-boo, magnetism was detected" was being played back in a loop, "Boo-boo, magnetism was detected." From the timing t-3 when the loop playback of the notification sound such as "" ends, the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to the detection of the door opening is reproduced for 30 seconds, "The door is open ping-pong ping-pong". The loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound has been reproduced three times. In this way, by reproducing the notification sound 4 (door open) in response to the door open detection in a more polite notification mode, which is different from the processing based on the normal priority order, the notification belonging to the second notification group Despite the content (here, the loop of "the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong"), it is expected to promote awareness of the fact that the possibility of fraud is high.

In addition, after the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected", the notification content will start with a message sound (the door is open), so that the first notification group, which is under the most tense situation, It becomes possible to recognize at an early stage that the notification to which the user belongs has ended. On the other hand, by reproducing the warning sound "ping-pong ping-pong" after the message sound, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification does not belong to the third notification group.

FIG. 247(b) shows an example of processing when the output condition (status detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. is shown.

As shown in FIG. 247(b), at timing tδ1 when no notification sound is output, if the door frame open switch 618 detects door opening in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94), As for the processing corresponding to the door open detection (door open processing), the same processing as the “frame open detection processing (frame open processing)” described with reference to FIG. will be Therefore, at timing tδ1, a loop process is started to repeatedly execute the notification sound "Door is open ping-pong ping-pong", and timing tδ3 when the timer (30 seconds) for notification sound 4 (door open) times out. In this case, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound "the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong" has been reproduced three times. In addition, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the closing of the door, which is the condition for canceling the opening of the door, is detected.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 247(b), at timing tδ2, 30 seconds have not passed since timing tδ1 and the notification sound "the door is open ping-pong ping-pong" is being played in a loop. It is assumed that the gate sensor 4003 detects right-handed driving in a non-time-saving state in the processing of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the door open detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state. Therefore (see FIG. 244), even if the right hitting detection occurs in the non-time saving state, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) will be continued.

That is, as described above, for the processing on the side with the lower priority, similarly to the case where the processing with the same priority described with reference to FIGS. is set, and the schedule data itself for sound generation is not set.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (b), at the timing tδ2, while setting the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), sound generation corresponding to right-handed detection in a non-time saving state Do not set schedule data for Then, at timing tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) has not timed out, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state is set, and the remaining time is set. The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X by the number of minutes, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, the loop of "Please return to the left-handed").

According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as "The door is open, ping-pong ping-pong" does not include the warning sound such as "Please return to left-handed" at a good timing after the three times of the notification sound has been reproduced. is played back, it is possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has decreased while continuing the notification state. In addition, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the output of the message sound is completed, silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to channel X, and a corresponding sound is output (silent output). It's like Therefore, even with such silent data, it is possible to easily recognize that the type of notification sound that has been reproduced has ended and that the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. become.

FIG. 247(c) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. is shown.

As shown in FIG. 247(c), at timing tε1 when no notification sound is output, if the door frame open switch 618 detects door opening in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94), As for the processing corresponding to the door open detection (door open processing), the same processing as the “frame open detection processing (frame open processing)” described with reference to FIG. will be Therefore, at timing tε1, a loop process is started to repeatedly execute a notification sound such as "The door is open, ping-pong ping-pong." In this case, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound "the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong" has been reproduced three times. In addition, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the closing of the door, which is the condition for canceling the opening of the door, is detected.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 247(c), 30 seconds have not passed since the timing tε1, and at the timing tε2 when the notification sound "the door is open ping-pong ping-pong" is being reproduced in a loop, step S112 It is assumed that magnetism is detected by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 in the processing of (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of notification sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection has a lower priority than the processing of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) in response to magnetism detection by the magnetic sensor 4024. (See FIG. 244), priority is given to the processing of notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) according to the magnetism detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and regarding the processing of notification sound 4 (door open), both sound and lamp lighting are performed. The contents of the output will not be reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, regarding the display in the liquid crystal, since each notification is displayed at a different position within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, priority is given during the execution of the notification with the lower priority. Even when a high-priority notification occurs, the display in the liquid crystal on the low-priority side is maintained.

Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open), as a method for preventing the output content of either the sound or the lighting of the lamp from being reflected as the operation of each actuator, at the timing tε2, A process of canceling the set state of the schedule data for sound generation and the schedule data for light emission mode generation according to the door open detection may be performed.

In this regard, in this embodiment, at the timing tε2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection are generated. are maintained in the set state, and the schedule data for sound generation, the schedule data for screen generation, and the schedule data for luminescence mode generation corresponding to the magnetic detection whose priority is higher than each of these data are set respectively. state. Then, channel X and various lamp operations are allocated based on the schedule data for sound generation and the schedule data for light emission mode generation according to the detection of the door opening, and the schedule data for sound generation and the light mode generation according to the magnetism detection. By switching to the contents based on the schedule data for use, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetism detection by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 can be performed regardless of whether it is sound, display in the liquid crystal, or lamp lighting. The content is reflected as the operation of each actuator.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 247(c), at the timing tε2, no operation is performed for the processing on the lower priority side (door open processing) that is being executed. It is possible to change the notification contents based on the priority between two different processes (door opening process, magnetic abnormality process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247(c), at timing tδ2, a loop process is started to repeatedly execute a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected". When the time (60 seconds) expires, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound "Boo-boo, magnetism has been detected" has been played six times. In addition, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is the condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

According to such a configuration, as soon as magnetism detection with a high possibility of fraudulent activity occurs, notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is processed by sound, display in the liquid crystal, or lamp lighting. The contents of the output are reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, since the alarm sound such as "boo-boo" is played as the notification sound, the notification belonging to the first notification group is performed, and the fact that the situation has changed to a tense situation is quickly conveyed to the hall side. will be expected.

FIG. 247(d) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. is shown.

As shown in FIG. 247(d), at the timing tζ1 when no notification sound is output, the gate sensor 4003 in the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94) detects a right-handed hit in a non-time-saving state. If there is, the same processing as the case described with reference to FIG. Therefore, at timing tζ1, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound "Please return to left-handed hitting" is started. Then, the loop processing ends at a good timing when the notification sound "Please return to left-handed" has been reproduced twice. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal display and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound, which is the condition for canceling the left-handed guidance, expires.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 247(d), 20 seconds have not passed since the timing tζ1, and at the timing tζ2 in which the notification sound "Please return to left-handed" is being reproduced in a loop, step S110 or It is assumed that door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) in response to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) in response to the door open detection. Therefore (see FIG. 244), priority is given to the processing of notification sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection, and the output content of the processing of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is reflected as the operation of the actuator. to prevent it from being done. In addition, regarding the display in the liquid crystal, since each notification is displayed at a different position in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, priority is given during execution of notification with a low priority. Even when a high-priority notification occurs, the display in the liquid crystal on the low-priority side is maintained.

Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), as a method to prevent the output content from being reflected as the actuation of the actuator, at timing tζ 2, right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state that had been set up until then A process of canceling the set state of the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the set state may be performed.

In this regard, in this embodiment, at the timing tζ 2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state, but also the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state are also maintained in the set state, and the schedule data for generating sound according to door open detection, which has a higher priority than this, as well as the screen generation schedule data and light emission mode according to door open detection Set the schedule data for generation respectively. Then, the allocation to the channel X is switched from the contents based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state to the contents based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection. In the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lighting of the lamp.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 247(d), at the timing tζ2, no operation is performed for the low-priority processing (left-handed guidance processing) that is being executed. It is possible to change the notification contents based on the priority between two different processes (left-hand guidance process, door opening process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247(d), at timing tζ2, a loop process is started to repeatedly execute a notification sound such as "the door is open ping-pong ping-pong", and notification sound 4 (door open) is played. When the timer (30 seconds) expires, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sounds such as "the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong" have been reproduced three times. In addition, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the detection of door closing, which is the condition for canceling the door opening, is performed.

According to such a configuration, as soon as door open detection with a moderate possibility of fraudulent activity occurs, notification sound 4 (door open) processing is performed by sound, display in the liquid crystal, and lamp lighting. , the contents of the output are reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, as the notification sound, the message sound (the door is open) is played first. The notification belonging to the second notification group is performed by the ``ping-pong ping-pong'' alarm sound, and it is expected that the hall will be notified as soon as possible that the situation has changed to the possibility of fraud. .

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a situation arises in which a plurality of notification sounds shown in FIG. Although only a single channel (channel X) is used for the notification sound, it is possible to appropriately notify the content of anomalies, game guidance, etc. (channel-saving control structure). However, as described above, even if the notification sound belongs to the second notification group in which the possibility of fraud is medium, the possibility of fraud may be higher than medium depending on other detection conditions. It is difficult to say that the current state of the game machine is properly notified only by the control based on the priority of .

In addition, the notification sound is output not only when an abnormality with a high possibility of fraudulent activity is detected, but also when an abnormality with a low possibility of fraudulent activity is detected. be. In other words, if an abnormality is detected with a high possibility of fraudulent activity, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state continues. If there is, there is a possibility that such a detection state is maintained for the convenience of the hall side (response to various errors, etc.), so even if the detection state continues, the output of the notification sound will not necessarily be It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing according to the situation of the pachinko machine 1, such as not being required to continue.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each situation illustrated in FIGS. It is intended to realize notification in a manner that allows appropriate expression. The special notification process will be described below for each situation with reference to FIGS. 248 to 253. FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 248, door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 occurs at timing tα11 when no notification sound is output. Then, the schedule data for generating sound corresponding to the door open detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the schedule data for screen generation and the schedule data for generating the lighting mode corresponding to the door open detection are also set. set state. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is emitted for 30 seconds until the timing tα12 arrives. It will play for seconds.

On the other hand, the display in the liquid crystal corresponding to the detection of the door opening is maintained until the timing tα16 at which the door frame opening switch 618 stops detecting the opening of the door.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 248, at the timing tα13 when the reproduction of the notification sound in response to door open detection is completed and the channel X is in the idle state, the priority of the notification is relatively high. Magnetic detection by sensor 4024 occurs. Therefore, with respect to lamp emission in response to door open detection started at timing tα11, the schedule data for generating the emission mode is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 arrives, but allocation to various lamp operations is maintained. , at the timing tα13, the mode is switched to the mode of lamp emission corresponding to the magnetism detection.

That is, at the timing tα13, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the magnetism detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. They are set. At this time, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is generated for 60 seconds until the timing tα14 arrives. will be played throughout.

On the other hand, the display and light emission in the liquid crystal corresponding to the magnetic detection are maintained unless the power is turned off.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 248, when the reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening has ended and the detection of the door opening by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continuing, the magnetic detection sensor Magnetic detection by 4024 is occurring. In such a situation, after a person with the intention of carrying out some kind of fraudulent operation opens the door frame 3 and puts it in the open state, he/she waits until the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the detection of the door opening is finished, and then he/she leaves the door open. It is assumed that there is a possibility that the magnet momentarily entered the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when trying to secretly place a magnet for illegal purposes inside the door frame 3 in a cold state, which is extremely malicious. Therefore, it is feared that merely performing notification sound processing according to magnetic detection is insufficient as a countermeasure. On the other hand, since the state of magnetism detection by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 is already turned off, even if an attempt is made to take some countermeasure, the magnetism detection cannot be used as a trigger.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at the timing tα14 at which the reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetism detection ends, the door frame opening switch 618 continues to detect the opening of the door, Based on this, the "schedule data for sound generation corresponding to door open detection" in which the notification sound reproduction has already completed the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is transmitted to channel X. special processing to reassign to Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for timing the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is continued for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. is played.

With such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to door open detection, which was already in the end state, is reproduced in a manner that is connected to the "reproduction of notification sound corresponding to magnetic detection", which creates a great sense of incongruity in the hall. It comes to be expected to bring about and attract everyone's attention. In addition, even those who commit fraud are relieved that "when the magnetic notification is finished, the playback of the notification sound will be completely terminated, and it will be possible to make it difficult for the fraudulent activity to stand out." By playing a notification sound in response to the door open detection that should have ended, the notification situation becomes unexpected, so it is expected to make people realize that further fraudulent activity is too risky. become.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period when the notification process belonging to the first notification group is being performed and during the period when the notification process belonging to the second notification group is being performed, other channels are used. A process (a process of lowering the volume to a specific value) for suppressing the volume of the assigned effect sound during symbol variation and other game sounds is performed. The specific value may be zero volume. During the period in which the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound during symbol variation assigned to other channels and the volume of other game sounds are not suppressed.

Here, the period during which the notification process is performed (the period during which the volume is to be suppressed) refers to whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormal state). state) and whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being reproduced (reproduction of notification sound) is satisfied. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 248, in the period of timing tα11 to tα13 and the period of timing tα14 to tα16, based on the fact that the notification process by the first notification group is being performed, the symbol variation Processing to suppress the volume of the effect sound and other game sounds (processing to reduce the volume to a specific value) is performed, and in the period of timing tα13 to tα14, the first notification group and the second notification group Based on the fact that it is during the period during which the process is being performed, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and other game sounds (the process of lowering the sound volume to a specific value) is performed.

In this embodiment, during the period (timings tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16) in which only the notification processing by the first notification group is performed, both the notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed. The volume of the effect sound during the pattern fluctuation and the volume of the other game sound are reduced to the same value during the period when the symbol is changed, but the notification processing by both the first notification group and the second notification group is performed. During the period, a process of lowering the value to a lower value than during the period in which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed may be performed. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states just by confirming the effect sound other than the notification, and it is expected that the initial movement on the hall side will be made more rapid.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 248, when the timing tα16 at which door open detection ends, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during pattern fluctuation and other game sounds is ended. However, if the notification sound corresponding to door open detection, which had already ended, is played in a manner that is connected to the "reproduction of notification sound corresponding to magnetic detection", there is a possibility that an extremely malicious act has been carried out. In view of this, even at the timing tα16 when the detection of the door opening is finished, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and other game sounds may be continued without being suppressed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 248, as is clear from the processing in response to the door open detection, the display in the liquid crystal corresponding to the door open detection is displayed during the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is reproduced. The period during which the lighting is performed and the period during which the lamp is illuminated in a manner corresponding to the door open detection have the same start time, but different end times. In this way, the information sound, the display inside the liquid crystal, and the lamp emission are operated so that they have different roles, so that only a single channel (channel X) is used for various information sounds. In spite of this, it is possible to appropriately notify the contents of anomalies, game guidance, and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 249, after the notification sound (timings tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door open detection is completed, at the timing tα23, the gate sensor 4003 right-handed detection in a non-time-saving state occurred. Assuming the case. However, in this example, unlike the case of the example shown in Figure 248, since the possibility of extremely malicious behavior is low, the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state is terminated At the timing tα24, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection, which has already ended, is not reproduced again. In addition, during the period from timing tα22 to timing tα23, there is no change in the mode of suppressing the sound volume of the effect sound during symbol variation and other game sounds. By the way, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door open detection ends, it is extremely malicious even if frame open detection occurs instead of right hitting detection in a non-time saving state by gate sensor 4003 Since there is a low possibility that such action is being performed, the notification sound corresponding to door open detection, which has already ended, will not be reproduced again when the notification sound corresponding to this is finished.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 250, magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα33 after the notification sound (timings tα31 to tα32) corresponding to door open detection ends, as shown in FIG. Same as example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 250, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door open detection ends at timing tα34, which is within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetism detection is being reproduced. there is

In the example shown in FIG. 250, at the timing tα35 at which the reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to magnetism detection ends, the notification sound corresponding to door open detection, which has already ended, is changed to "reproduction of notification sound corresponding to magnetism detection". There is no such thing as being played in a connected form. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 250, as in the example shown in FIG. 248, a person who intends to carry out some kind of fraudulent operation causes the door frame 3 to be opened and puts it in the open state. Waiting for the completion of the reproduction of the notification sound in response to the request, the magnet is momentarily placed within the detection range of the magnetism detection sensor 4024 when an attempt is made to secretly place a magnet for an illegal purpose inside the door frame 3 in a state where the water has cooled down. It is assumed that there is a possibility of being in a situation where However, after the timing tα34, considering that the door frame 3 is closed and the magnetism detection is not occurring and the non-fraudulent state exists, even in such a non-fraudulent state, the magnetism detection is not performed. It is considered that the notification sound processing has played a sufficient role only by continuously reproducing the notification sound until the timing tα35 arrives. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 250, even though only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds, it is possible to appropriately notify the contents of anomalies, game guidance, and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 251, magnetic detection by magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα43 after the notification sound (timings tα41 to tα42) corresponding to door open detection ends, as shown in FIG. is the same as the example above. However, in the example shown in FIG. 251, it is assumed that magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at timing tα44, which is within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 251, an attempt was made to secretly place a magnet for illegal purposes inside the door frame 3 after waiting for the completion of the reproduction of the notification sound in response to the detection of the door being opened, and in a state where the temperature had cooled down. Sometimes, the magnet momentarily entered the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and in response to this, a notification sound of magnetic abnormality was played. It is assumed that the magnet is about to be put down again, and there is a possibility that a more egregious cheating is taking place. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetism detection by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the magnetism detection is maintained in the set state, while the notification sound 1 A process of resetting a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic anomaly) is performed.

According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection over a longer period of time from the time of the first magnetic detection to the elapse of 60 seconds from the timing tα44 of the second magnetic detection. can be played continuously. Further, in this case, the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected" is continuously reproduced without interruption during the period from timing tα43 to timing tα45. And at the end, a notification sound such as "boo boo magnetism detected" does not end the loop processing at a good timing, for example, the loop processing ends at an incomplete timing such as "boo boo magnetism detected" Since it will be done, it will be expected that it will create a great sense of incongruity in the hall and attract everyone's attention.

Furthermore, at the timing tα44 after 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetism was detected, the notification sound reproduction has already completed the notification time (30 seconds). A special process of resetting the "schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection" and assigning the notification sound to channel X again is performed. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for timing the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is continued for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been completed is played back in a manner connected with the "reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetism detection". It will be played in a way that is connected to "reproduction of notification sound according to magnetism detection" whose loop processing ended at an odd timing. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound corresponding to door open detection, which was already in the end state, is raised, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of magnetic detection was stopped in the middle and reproduced. It will be expected that it will cause even greater discomfort and attract everyone's attention.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 252, magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα53 after the notification sound (timings tα51 to tα52) corresponding to door open detection ends, as shown in FIG. is the same as the example above. However, in the example shown in FIG. 252, it is assumed that the vibration sensor 2405 detects vibration at the timing tα54, which is within the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetism detection is being reproduced.

In the example shown in FIG. 252 as well, when an attempt is made to secretly place a magnet for an illegal purpose inside the door frame 3 after waiting for the completion of the reproduction of the notification sound in response to the detection of the door being opened and after the temperature has cooled down. Although the magnet momentarily entered the detection range of the magnetism detection sensor 4024 and a magnetic anomaly notification sound was played accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 was shaken greatly without flinching from such a situation. It is assumed that there is a possibility that more malicious fraudulent acts are being carried out. Therefore, in this example, at the timing tα55 at which the reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetism detection ends, the notification sound corresponding to the vibration detection is reproduced in a manner connected with the "reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetism detection". At the timing tα56 when the reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the vibration detection ends, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening, which has already ended, is reproduced in a form further connected with the "reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the vibration detection". ing.

Moreover, at the timing tα54 when vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is not set, and a timer (60 second), and at the timing tα55 at which the reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetism detection ends, the schedule data for generating the sound corresponding to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. .

According to such a configuration, the loop processing will not end at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Boooo vibration detected" is not terminated at a good timing. Since the processing is to be terminated, it is expected that a great sense of incompatibility will be generated in the hall and everyone's attention will be focused.

Furthermore, at the timing tα56 at which the reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the vibration ends, the reproduction of the notification sound has already finished for the notification time (30 seconds). Schedule data" is set again, and special processing is performed to reassign the notification sound to channel X. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is continued for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to door open detection, which was already in the end state, is further connected to the "reproduction of notification sound according to vibration detection" connected to the "reproduction of notification sound according to magnetism detection". In addition to being played back, it will be played in a form that is connected to "play notification sound according to vibration detection" whose loop processing is terminated at an incomplete timing such as "booboo vibration detected". Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound corresponding to door open detection, which has already been in the end state, is raised, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound for vibration detection was stopped halfway. It will be expected that it will cause even greater discomfort and attract everyone's attention.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253, the magnetism detection by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα63 after the end of the notification sound (timings tα61 to tα62) corresponding to frame opening detection instead of door opening detection. I assume.

In the example shown in FIG. 253 as well, it can be said that the situation in which the magnetic field detection further occurs immediately after the frame open detection is the situation in which there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent act is being performed. On the other hand, however, if a magnet is used for the purpose of cheating, the door frame 3 should be opened, and even if the body frame 4 is opened, it is unlikely that the magnet will be useful. Therefore, it can be assumed that there is a possibility that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 may have erroneously detected the magnetic sensor 4024 when the hall side used a magnet to eliminate ball clogging in the ball tank or dispensing passage.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 253 as well, at the timing tα64 at which the reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to magnetism detection ends, the notification sound corresponding to frame open detection, which has already ended, is the “notification sound corresponding to magnetism detection. By playing back in a manner connected with "playback" (timings tα64 to tα65), it is expected that a great sense of incongruity will be generated in the hall and that everyone's attention will be gathered. However, after that, at the timing tα66 when the body frame 4 is closed and the frame open detection ends, not only each notification processing (notification sound, display in the liquid crystal, lamp) according to the frame open detection, but also the magnetic detection Special processing for terminating each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) is also performed.

According to such a configuration, while the function against fraudulent activity is preferably exhibited, when an erroneous detection is made on the hall side, only by closing the body frame 4, notification processing ( It is expected that the hall will be able to quickly respond to false detections and maintain a favorable atmosphere in the hall. Become.

In the example shown in FIG. 253, even if the body frame 4 is closed during the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetism detection is being reproduced, and the frame open detection is terminated, the frame open detection is not performed. At the end timing, not only each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp) corresponding to frame open detection, but also each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp) corresponding to magnetic detection A special process for terminating the may be performed.

By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with the player side volume control function.

For example, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in the processing of step S1108 (see FIG. 217), it is monitored whether the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated, and the effect selection left button 331 is operated. When it is determined that the volume of the speaker is set by the player (player set value) is decreased, and when it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 has been operated, the volume of the speaker is set by the player. Perform processing to increase the value (player set value). In addition, when the player setting value is lowered and the actually lowered volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Beep!") is output at the lowered volume value. On the other hand, when the player setting value is raised and the actually raised volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "beep!") is output at the raised volume value. , it is possible to grasp how much the volume has changed after the volume adjustment is completed. As for the volume adjustment completion sound, the same sound may be output when the volume value is decreased and when the volume value is increased. By the way, the volume adjustment completion sound is referred to when there are no more empty channels, and has a relatively high priority (for example, "20", which is the same as the button press sound), and the output volume of the effect sound ( A change in the volume of audible sound) can be more reliably transmitted.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, such sound volume adjustment processing is performed during a period (demonstration display, etc.) before the game is started and the symbol variation corresponding to the big hit determination has not yet been performed. Not only during the period during which it can be performed), but also during the period when the game is started and the symbol variation according to the judgment of the big hit is executed, the acceptance by the player is allowed, and a more important effect has appeared. By making it possible to change the setting of the volume value flexibly, the interest in the game can be maintained.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as also described above, in a situation where various effect sound channels are assigned according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol variation, the pachinko machine When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as a magnetic anomaly or door opening, processing is performed to allocate a specific notification sound among a plurality of types of notification sounds according to the detected content to a channel and output it. Also, at this time, it is possible to carry out an effect progress notification process that reduces the output sound volume to a specific value without canceling the channel allocation itself of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound out of a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output, the channel assignment itself of various effects sounds according to the progress of the display effect will not be canceled. Therefore, once the channel allocation of the specific notification sound or the abnormal state is terminated, the performance can be enjoyed again by appropriately restoring the output sound volume of the performance sound according to the progress of the performance display.

However, in the above effect progress notification process, since the channel assignment itself of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect is not canceled, the normal time ( As a result, more channels are used than in the non-notification state), and there are no empty channels to which sound data is not assigned before the end of the channel allocation for a specific notification sound (notification state). tend to be at higher risk. If there is no empty channel to which no sound data is assigned before the channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound is completed, any of the sound data To play back the discarded sound data that cannot be assigned to a channel even if the channel assignment (notification state) of a specific notification sound is completed, since one channel assignment must be discarded. As a result, there is a concern that the interest in gaming will decline.

Concerns about vacant channels related to such effect sound do not cause direct harm if the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the informational sound, but the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the informational sound. or whether to adopt the automatic channel system should be determined from the viewpoint of the design of the game and production, so even if either channel system is adopted, the above production progress notification process It is important to prepare a processing structure that can adopt a common processing program in order to reduce the development cost of the pachinko machine 1 and to improve reliability. Therefore, in the example described below, either the fixed channel system or the automatic channel system may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the effect is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the production sound is not variable and is maintained. That is, in this case, even if there is an operation by the player, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound ("beep!" , it is expected that the risk of running out of vacant channels will be reduced by providing channels with margins corresponding to that amount.

However, in spite of the fact that the pachinko machine 1 is capable of flexibly changing the setting of the volume value when a more important performance appears, the output volume is set while the processing for notifying the progress of the performance is being executed. If it is not possible to change it, when the production progress notification process is executed due to an erroneous detection or a notification due to the convenience of the hall (door opening, etc.), the appropriate volume value according to the content of the production progress It is unavoidable that the game interest will decrease due to the fact that the setting cannot be changed immediately. In addition, as a result of the progress of the production during the period when the production progress notification process is being performed, if a large discrepancy occurs between the appropriate volume value according to the production content and the actual setting value, the output volume (possible Since changing the setting of the listening sound volume) has been permitted, it is necessary to accept the operation multiple times in order to change the volume to an appropriate value. As a result, even though the production progress notification process has finally ended, there is a concern that the production sound will not be output properly due to the lack of empty channels, which will reduce the interest in the game.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, while the production progress notification process is being executed, if the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is operated, the value will decrease to a specific value. While the output volume of the effect sound (volume of audible sound) is not variable and is maintained, the value set by the player regarding the volume (player setting value) itself is allowed to be changed. When the presentation progress notification process (the process of lowering the output sound volume to a specific value) is completed, the output sound volume (the volume of the audible sound) reflecting all the operations up to that point is collectively changed.

According to such a configuration, if the change reception of the setting value (player setting value) by the player is performed in accordance with the progress of the production while the production progress notification process is being executed, a new operation can be performed. , the output sound volume (the sound volume of the audible sound) reflecting all the operations up to that point can be collectively changed when the performance progress notification processing is terminated. In this way, even during the period in which the performance progress notification process is being executed, the change reception of the set value (player set value) by the player is allowed, thereby ending the performance progress report process. It is expected that the decline in interest in games will be suppressed until the game is played. In addition, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in a plurality of steps immediately after the processing for notifying the progress of the production is finished, and the volume adjustment completion sound of each time causes a shortage of empty channels. is also preferably avoided.

In addition, according to the above configuration, when the batch change of the output sound volume to the player setting value is executed when the production progress notification process is completed, the game Regardless of the number of times the player setting value is changed or the number of operations by the player, the volume adjustment completion sound is reproduced only once at the volume after the batch change. You may make it output by the sound (for example, "beep!") of the special mode different from that.

Furthermore, in order to more preferably solve the shortage of empty channels when the lower production progress notification process is completed, the number of times the player setting value is changed during the period when the lower production progress notification process is being executed, Regardless of the number of operations, it is desirable not to reproduce the volume adjustment completion sound itself when the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is to be changed collectively upon completion of the production progress notification process. . According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the production progress notification process caused by the notification due to erroneous detection or the convenience of the hall (door opening, etc.) has finally ended, the appropriate production is not performed due to the lack of empty channels. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation that makes it impossible to enjoy.

An example of the process from execution of such processing for notifying progress of production to collective change of the output volume (volume of audible sound) will be described below.

FIG. 254 is a diagram for explaining the content of the notification processing under production progress separately for each notification state of the pachinko machine 1 .

First, prior to explaining the processing from execution of the production progress notification processing to batch change of the output sound volume (the volume of the audible sound), referring to FIG. Briefly explain. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 244 are shown, and descriptions of the other notification sounds are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 254, in this illustrative example, first, two types of suppression modes (a first volume suppression mode and a second volume suppression mode) are prepared as the volume suppression mode of the effect sound. For example, in the first sound volume suppression mode, when changing the setting value (player setting value) regarding the sound volume, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) can be changed within the range of "20" to "50". Among the possibilities, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to "10". On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the dramatic sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to "0". Therefore, in the second volume suppression mode, the degree of suppression is greater than in the first volume suppression mode. It is exemplified as one that makes

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning abnormality) belonging to the first notification group with a high possibility of fraud When any of the notification processes is executed, the process of suppressing the output volume of the dramatic sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second volume suppression mode, which is on the higher suppression level side. Moreover, when the notification process for any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group (magnetism abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning abnormality) is executed, even if the abnormality detection is turned off, Until a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the abnormality is detected, the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound volume ) is not terminated and is continued.

Note that in this explanation example, when the notification process for any one of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic anomaly, vibration anomaly, big prize anomaly) belonging to the first notification group is executed, the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound The period during which the processing to suppress the sound volume) is continued will be the same as the period from the time the notification sound (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) corresponding to the abnormality detection is played to the end of this. is set to

On the other hand, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group with a medium fraud possibility is executed, the degree of suppression The output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is suppressed in the first volume suppression mode, which is on the lower side of . However, in the case where notification processing relating to one of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group is executed, if the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, Then, the process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the first volume suppression mode, which is on the side of the lower degree of suppression, is terminated.

On the other hand, when the notification process for any of the notification sounds 6 and 7 belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance among the notification sounds 1 to 7 (left-handed guidance, ball withdrawal guidance) is executed, performance is emphasized, and no processing for suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is executed.

In this explanation example, the suppression mode is different between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. does not necessarily have to be different, and the output volume of the effect sound is set in one suppression mode when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. (Volume of audible sound) may be suppressed. However, the conditions for ending the process to be suppressed must be stricter when the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group are performed than when the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are performed. It is important to be able to

FIG. 255 shows the details of the volume adjustment process associated with the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 while the abnormality detection has not occurred and the process related to the notification sound has not been executed. It is a figure explaining.

In this example of explanation, the player's set value is variable by "1" within the range of "1" to "5" by operating the left effect selection button 331 or the right effect selection button 332. It is set such that the smaller the value, the smaller the volume of the effect sound. In addition, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set by the player when the above-described suppression modes (the first volume suppression mode and the second volume suppression mode) are not set for the effect sound. It is set as a numerical value that is 20 times the value. Therefore, in this illustrative example, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is variable within the range of "20" to "100" by the player's operation.

Now, as shown in FIG. 255(A), the player setting value for the sound volume of the effect sound is "3" out of "1" to "5", and no notification flag is set. , the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “60” which is 20 times that. In addition, if the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state, and the jackpot determination is not performed and it is in a state of waiting for start winning, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 simulates the effect selection left button 331. A display image 331a and a display image 332a simulating the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and a volume adjustment guide display OAH indicating that the volume can be adjusted through these operations is performed. At this time, in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, a first sound volume value display OH1 is also executed, which makes it possible to recognize which of the player's current set values is "1" to "5". be. The volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be displayed all the time, or may be displayed during a specific period such as a super reach performance, which is a reach performance performed with the background image changed. It may be so arranged that at least one of the first volume value display OH1 and a second volume value display OH2, which will be described later, appears when there is an operation by the player. Further, both the volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may not necessarily be displayed, and one of them may be omitted and only the other may be displayed.

In the situation shown in FIG. 255(A), when the left effect selection button 331 or the right effect selection button 332 is operated, the player set value is set to "1" each time the operation is performed. As a result, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed by "20". Also, every time the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Beep!") is reproduced at the changed volume.

Also, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a second gauge indicating which of the player's set value range "1" to "5" is the current set value is displayed. volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 255(C)) is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, which will be described later.

If the left effect selection button 331 is operated when the player set value is "1", neither the player set value nor the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is lowered. The user setting value remains "1" (the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) remains "20"). Therefore, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is "1", the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or even if it is assigned to the channel, its volume is set to "1". 0" to prevent audible output. This is also the case when the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player set value is "5".

On the other hand, when a start winning prize is generated and a big hit is judged, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. Further, while the decorative pattern SZ is variably displayed, the predetermined effect is progressed, and the effect sound is output in accordance with the progress of the predetermined effect.

In this regard, in the volume adjustment process according to this embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. It is designed to allow the reception by the player even during the execution period, and for example, when a more important effect such as the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. As described above, the configuration is such that the setting can be changed.

That is, FIG. 255(C) shows the state after the player has operated the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the execution of the ready-to-win effect in the state shown in FIG. 255(B). In the first operation, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", and the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed from "60" to 20 times that value. With the setting changed to "80", the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and reproduced at the changed volume of "80", and in the second operation, the player setting The value has been changed from "4" to "5", and the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) has been changed from "80" to "100", which is 20 times the value, At the changed volume of "100", the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played back.

In addition, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player setting value is changed by such an operation, , the second volume value display OH2, which indicates the current set value by means of a gauge display, is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH. This makes it clear which of the player's set values is between "1" and "5," which is the current set value. The purpose is to prevent an operation error such as repeated operation of the effect selection right button 332 even though the player set value is the maximum value "5". In the gauge display, a numerical range of "1" to "5" is constantly displayed in blocks, and the number of filled blocks out of these blocks increases or decreases according to changes in the player's set value. The current player setting value is indicated by displaying the current value.

255(D), the second volume value display OH2 starts when the left effect selection button 331 or the right effect selection button 332 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 255(C). After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, the display is hidden, and thereafter the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is performed again. Therefore, even if the operation is performed in a manner in which the player set value is not changed (the operation of the right effect selection button 332 when the player set value is the maximum value "5"), the left effect selection button 331 Alternatively, as long as the right effect selection button 332 is operated repeatedly, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation in a manner in which the player's set value is not changed (an operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player's set value is the maximum value "5") is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output each time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is hidden is reset. As a result, even though the player's setting value is the maximum value of "5", it is more preferable to prevent an operation error such as repeated operation of the effect selection right button 332 from occurring. become.

On the other hand, in FIG. 256, the door opening detection occurs during the execution period of the pattern variation, and the processing related to the notification sound corresponding to this is being executed. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the contents of processing related to sound volume adjustment associated with the event;

The situation shown in FIG. 256(A) is the situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 255(A). In such a situation, when a start winning prize is generated and a big hit is determined, as shown in FIG. A decorative pattern SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined production pattern based on the pattern type. Further, while the decorative pattern SZ is variably displayed, the predetermined effect is progressed, and the effect sound is output in accordance with the progress of the predetermined effect.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 256(B), door open detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the corresponding notification sound 4 (door open) processing is executed. More specifically, loop processing (30 seconds) for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong" and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, " door is open"), and various lamps (light-emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are turned on.

Further, as described above, during the pattern fluctuation period, when door open detection belonging to the second notification group occurs and the corresponding notification sound 4 (door open) is executed, the first sound volume suppression mode is performed. A production progress notification process for suppressing the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 256(B), the player setting value is maintained at "3", which is the same as in the situation shown in FIG. 256(A). The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined first specific value (here, "10") lower than the original value (20 times the value set by the player). The contents of the performance will progress under the volume value.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while such effect progress notification processing is being executed, the first specific While the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound), which has been lowered to a value ("10" in this case), is maintained without being variable, the value set by the player regarding the volume (player setting value) is changed. Acceptance of change of itself is allowed, and when the above production progress notification processing (processing to lower the output volume to a specific value) ends, the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point. and are changed collectively as described above.

That is, FIG. 256(C) shows the state after the player has operated the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the execution of the ready-to-win effect in the state shown in FIG. 256(B). Although the player's setting value has been changed from "3" to "5" by operating the right effect selection button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the original value (game It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, "10") lower than the user-set value (20 times the value set by the user) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player operates the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound remains unchanged until the effect progress notification process (the process of lowering the output sound volume to a specific value) ends. is not changed, and the contents of the presentation progress with the sound volume of the first specific value.

Also, at this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, although the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to the first specified value. Since the value (here, "10") is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, "10"), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player's set value itself has changed from "3" to "4", and the player's operation for volume adjustment has been accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 that indicates by a gauge display that the current set value is "4" in the player set value range of "1" to "5", It is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, and the numerical value of the first volume value display OH1 is also changed from "3" to "4".

Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "4" to "5", and since the player's operation for volume adjustment has been accepted, the second volume value In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the player set value range of "1" to "5", and the first sound volume value is displayed. Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

Then, after that, the door frame 3 is closed under the condition that the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door open) and the notification processing under production progress (output volume up to a specific value). 256(D), the output volume (the volume of audible sound) reflects all the operations up to that point in response to the completion of the processing, as shown in FIG. 256(D). change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is stepped from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation and to "5" corresponding to the second operation during the execution period of the performance progress notification process. Therefore, the output volume (volume of audible sound) should be changed from the first specific value (here, "10") to "80" corresponding to the first operation, and to "80" corresponding to the second operation. Instead of changing step by step to "100" according to , the first specific value (here, "10") is collectively changed to "100" reflecting all the operations up to that point.

In this way, even during the period in which the performance progress notification process is being executed, the change reception of the set value (player set value) by the player is allowed, thereby ending the performance progress report process. It is expected that the decline in interest in games will be suppressed until the game is played. In addition, immediately after the performance progress notification process is completed, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in multiple stages, and each time the volume adjustment completion sound causes a shortage of empty channels or a lack of room. Occurrence of such a situation can be suitably avoided.

Moreover, in this illustrative example, when the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is collectively changed (from "10" to "100") in accordance with the end of the presentation progress notification process, the output volume does not change. Despite this, the channel allocation itself for the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the production progress notification process caused by the notification due to erroneous detection or the convenience of the hall (door opening, etc.) has finally ended, the appropriate production is not performed due to the lack of empty channels. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation that makes it impossible to enjoy.

On the other hand, in FIG. 257, when the state detection that occurred in FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the details of processing related to volume adjustment when a right button 332 is operated; FIG.

The situation shown in FIG. 257(A) is the situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 256(A). In such a situation, when a start winning prize is generated and a big hit is determined, as shown in FIG. A decorative pattern SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined production pattern based on the pattern type. Further, while the decorative pattern SZ is variably displayed, the predetermined effect is progressed, and the effect sound is output in accordance with the progress of the predetermined effect.

In the situation shown in FIG. 257(B), the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed accordingly. Specifically, a loop process (for 60 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Boo-Boo magnetism detected" and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, "magnetism detection") , and lighting by various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively.

Also, as described above, during the pattern fluctuation period, when the detection of magnetism belonging to the first notification group occurs and the corresponding notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) processing is executed, the second sound volume suppression mode is performed. Effect progress notification processing for suppressing the output volume of sound (volume of audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 257(B), the player setting value is maintained at "3", which is the same as in the situation shown in FIG. 257(A). The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined second specific value (here, "0") lower than the original value (20 times the value set by the player). The contents of the presentation are developed under the volume value (here, mute).

In this regard, even when the production progress notification process corresponding to such a magnetic abnormality is executed, if the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is operated, the second specific value (here, "0 ”), the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound (here, mute)) is not variable and is maintained, while the value set by the player regarding the volume (the value set by the player) itself Acceptance of change is allowed, and when the above production progress notification processing (processing to lower the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point As described above, the change is made all at once.

That is, FIG. 257(C) shows the state after the player has operated the right effect selection right button 332 twice as the ready-to-win effect is executed in the state shown in FIG. 257(B). Although the player's setting value has been changed from "3" to "5" by operating the right effect selection button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the original value (game It can be seen that the predetermined second specific value (here, "0 (mute)") lower than the user-set value (20 times the value set by the user) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player operates the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound remains unchanged until the effect progress notification process (the process of lowering the output sound volume to a specific value) ends. is not changed, and the contents of the presentation progress with the sound volume of the second specific value.

Also, at this time, among the operations by the player, in the first operation, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound volume) is set to the second specified value. Since the value (here, "0") is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, "0"), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player's set value itself has changed from "3" to "4", and the player's operation for volume adjustment has been accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 that indicates by a gauge display that the current set value is "4" in the player set value range of "1" to "5", It is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, and the numerical value of the first volume value display OH1 is also changed from "3" to "4".

Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "4" to "5", and since the player's operation for volume adjustment has been accepted, the second volume value In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the player set value range of "1" to "5", and the first sound volume value is displayed. Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

Incidentally, in this illustrative example, the magnetic detection itself is already in a non-detection state in the situation shown in FIG. 257(C). However, unlike the case of door detection, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is kept in the second volume suppression mode until a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic field is detected. is continuously executed.

Then, after a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) has passed since the magnetism was detected while the sound volume adjustment guidance display OAH is returned to the state where the sound volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again, the effect progress notification processing (output sound volume is specified) 257(D), the output volume (volume of audible sound) reflects all the operations up to that point in response to the completion of the processing, as shown in FIG. 257(D). change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is stepped from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation and to "5" corresponding to the second operation during the execution period of the performance progress notification process. Therefore, the output volume (volume of audible sound) should be changed from the second specific value (here, "0") to "80" corresponding to the first operation, and to "80" corresponding to the second operation. Instead of stepwise change to "100" corresponding to the second specific value (here, "0"), the second specific value (here, "0") is collectively changed to "100" reflecting all the operations up to that point.

It should be noted that when the notification process corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process corresponding to the door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. Display in the display area of 1600 (here, "magnetic detection") and lighting by various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 remain executed. there is That is, in the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is terminated, the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, and the effect sound is removed from the object to be suppressed and according to the player setting value. On the other hand, in the notification processing in response to the opening of the door, even if the notification sound ends, the effect sound remains to be suppressed while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp continue. It is supposed to be

In this way, even when a magnetic abnormality occurs, the player is allowed to change the set value (player set value) even during the period when the effect progress notification process is being executed. , it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed until the production progress notification process ends. In addition, immediately after the performance progress notification process is completed, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in multiple stages, and each time the volume adjustment completion sound causes a shortage of empty channels or a lack of room. Occurrence of such a situation can also be suitably avoided.

Moreover, in this illustrative example, when the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is collectively changed (from "0" to "100") in accordance with the end of the production progress notification process associated with the magnetic abnormality, the output Even though the volume changes, the channel allocation itself for the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the production progress notification process caused by the notification due to the erroneous detection has finally ended, the lack of vacant channels makes it impossible to enjoy the proper production. can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 244, the notification sound corresponding to the opening of the door, such as "The door is open, ping-pong ping-pong," and the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic anomaly, such as "Boo-boo, magnetism detected." Since "1" (0x1FF) is set in the 3rd byte of the value, it is always played back with the volume set as the initial value regardless of the player's set value.

In addition, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball withdrawal guidance) is executed, the production progress notification processing is not executed. Both the value and the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) can be changed as appropriate. However, as shown in FIG. 244, these notification sounds 6 and 7 are also set to "1" (0x1FF) in the 3rd byte of the volume initial value. It will always be played back at the volume set as the initial value.

Of the notification sounds 1 to 7, for notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) belonging to the third notification group, "1" is not set to the 3rd byte of the volume initial value, You may make it include in the object of sound volume adjustment by a player.

256 and 257, not only during the execution period of the symbol variation, but also the state before the symbol variation is started, and the state detection in the form spanning the timing of the start and end of the symbol variation. Also when the notification process corresponding to is executed, it may be executed in the same manner.

256 and 257, after the production progress notification process is completed, the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button is pressed in the same manner as before the production progress notification process is started. When the player setting value is changed by the operation of 332, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Then, every time the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "beep!") is reproduced at the changed volume.

256 and the processing described in FIG. 257, the mode of suppressing the effect sound during the period in which the process of notifying progress of the effect is being performed is different. It does not have to be different, and the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound as described above.

In addition, in the production progress notification process, the output volume of various game sounds (volume of audible sound) is suppressed. Some game sounds, such as sounds that are reproduced in response to winning (winning sounds), may be reproduced at the initial volume settings without being affected by volume suppression. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hall side to easily grasp whether or not the game is being continued despite the occurrence of an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 1 . In this sense, some of the sound (winning sound) played in response to the game ball winning the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 when the production progress notification process is being executed As for the game sound, it is desirable to reproduce it as a special sound that cannot be output when the performance progress notification process is not being executed.

As described above, in FIGS. 244 to 257, by adopting a channel-saving control structure that enables appropriate notification of abnormal contents, etc., with only a single channel for various notification sounds, situations where there are no available channels (Situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) I proposed that technical measures should be taken to make this situation difficult to appear. However, even if such a control structure is adopted, there may be a situation where there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound effect (effect sound) is to be allocated (the number of vacant channels is 0). Concern over the emergence of the above unintended sound output aspect still remains.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, various technical measures are taken before the situation where there is no vacancy in the channel (situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) occurs regarding the channel assignment of the effect sound. I'm trying to work it out. Various technical ideas applied to the output of dramatic sounds will be sequentially described below. In adopting these technical devices for the pachinko machine 1, the above-described channel-saving control structure, which enables appropriate notification of abnormal contents, etc., with only a single channel for various notification sounds, is not necessarily adopted. You don't have to. In each example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. Also, when the automatic channel system is adopted, the control based on the above-described priority may not necessarily be adopted, and when all the channels are in use, a process of discarding new sounds may be performed. good. Moreover, each example described below can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

[Channel reservation processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine with a finite number of channels, even if a special result is obtained in the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is allocated. In (situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), it is not possible to allocate a special sound to a channel corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained, and there is concern that this inability to output may reduce the enjoyment of the game.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a specific action such as "an act of holding hands over the pachinko machine 1 to pray" or "button operation" has been performed. It is detectable by the detection means. When it is detected that such a specific action has been performed, for example, a predetermined sound that does not indicate any degree of expectation, such as a sound (an output sound with a volume of 0) corresponding to silent data composed only of silent sounds, is generated. By executing a process of allocating sounds to channels for a predetermined period of time (channel reservation process), the channels are kept from being used by other sounds. On the other hand, while the channel reservation process is being performed in this way, as a result of receiving the game ball in the specific winning hole, for example, even if a special effect condition such as a big hit confirmation effect or a look-ahead effect is established, that At this point, no special sound is assigned to the channel according to the effect. After waiting for the channel reservation process to be completed, a special sound is allocated to a channel and played back (post-announcement effect).

That is, in this case, at least one of the channels to which the special sound can be assigned is reserved in advance (channel reservation) with a predetermined sound that does not indicate any degree of expectation due to a specific action by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a special sound cannot be output due to a lack of channels even though a special result is obtained in the judgment according to the prize winning.

Regarding the special sound, for example, in addition to the jackpot confirmation sound that is executed only when the jackpot is won in the jackpot judgment according to the winning, the highly anticipated production mode (for example, , High-expectation notice effect performed during execution of reach effect) is selected, and prefetching when a predetermined judgment result is obtained in the prefetching judgment according to the winning It is possible to exemplify a pre-reading notification sound that is executed as an effect, but in short, it is assigned to a channel and output when a special judgment result is obtained in a judgment by a predetermined judging means according to winning a prize. Anything that can be done is acceptable.

Figure 258 shows, prior to outputting a special sound (for example, queuing) matching the so-called look-ahead effect as a "special sound" when a game ball wins the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004, A channel to which a special sound can be assigned is in a state in which the special sound has not yet been output (more precisely, in a state in which the determination that the special sound is to be output (the determination that the pre-reading effect is to be performed) has not yet been made). 4 is a time chart showing an example of channel reservation processing that is reserved in advance from time to time;

First, prior to explaining an example of channel reservation processing, first, a general look-ahead effect, which is a well-known technique, will be briefly explained.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a winning to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the winning. , the first and second start opening winning processes (steps S5231 to S5234) shown in FIG. 134 are performed. In this first/second start opening winning process (FIG. 134: steps S5231 to S5234), it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the starting opening (first starting opening 2002 or second starting opening 2004). As described above, when it is determined that a prize has been won, the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side is increased by 1, and the like.

Also, as described above, in the first and second start opening winning process (FIG. 134: steps S5231 to S5234), look-ahead processing for executing the look-ahead effect on the winning start opening side is also executed (FIG. 135: Step S5245, FIG. 136: Step S5255).

Here, the look-ahead effect on the first special symbol side is, as described above, a performance that suggests in advance the determination result (or its expectation) of the first special symbol before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. be. In this first special figure look-ahead process, the peripheral control board 1510 side is required to determine whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect and the content of the look-ahead effect (information related to win-loss for look-ahead determination, information related to symbol type for look-ahead determination information, information on the variation pattern number for pre-reading determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510 . At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, the information of the stage before being finally determined, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, and the pattern type, such as the potential hit group and the small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as the look-ahead command.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect on the second special symbol side, as also mentioned above, suggests in advance the judgment result of the second special symbol (or its expectation) before starting the variable display of the second special symbol It is a performance to do. In this second special figure look-ahead processing, the peripheral control board 1510 side generates information (win-lose information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required for determining whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect and the content of the effect, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510 . At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, the SP reach group of the variation pattern, the normal reach group, the latent hit group of the pattern type, the small hit group, etc., may be transmitted as the look-ahead command before being finally determined.

In other words, in the peripheral control board 1510, the judgment processing as to whether or not the jackpot has been won and the pattern variation have not been digested, and when they are in a pending state, the information obtained from the above-mentioned look-ahead command ( Based on the information related to the first special figure side prefetch effect, the information related to the second special figure side prefetch effect) Expectation as to whether the jackpot judgment that is in the pending state will obtain a special result It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests the degree in advance.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation in which starting winning has occurred, and when in this situation, performs control related to pending display and look-ahead effects in response to starting winning. And after this, by updating the processing flag of the special symbol based on the grasped game situation, the above-described fluctuation start processing, fluctuation pattern setting processing, processing during fluctuation, big hit game processing, small hit establishment time shown in FIG. Execute one of the actions. And among these, in the control related to the look-ahead effect, for example, a new pending display according to the start winning is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (for example, blue with relatively low expectations, red with relatively high expectations) Depending on whether or not to display it, it is determined whether or not to perform a specific prefetch effect that suggests the degree of anticipation, and the mode according to the result of the determination (for example, blue, red, or when it is determined that the prefetch effect will not be performed) (normal display mode)). As a result, until the big win determination corresponding to the reserved display is completed, the look-ahead effect is executed in which the degree of expectation for the big win is preliminarily suggested by the display mode.

By the way, in such a look-ahead effect, when a hold display (including a hold display for confirming a big hit) appears with high expectations, a special sound (for example, cuin) may be output in accordance with the look-ahead execution. many. However, since such a special sound (look-ahead effect) is played at the time when the game ball wins, which occurs irregularly, the game ball wins at the timing when there is no vacancy in the channel, and the look-ahead decision is made. If there is a winning, the special sound is not played even though the prefetching judgment is won, and the player cannot recognize that the pending display is appearing in a highly expected mode (blue or red). It is feared that interest in gaming will decline without

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 258, as described above, the special sound is output before the game ball is entered into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the special sound (look-ahead effect) is output. Channels that can be assigned are set in advance from the time when the special sound is not output (more precisely, the determination to output the special sound (the determination to perform the look-ahead effect) has not yet been made) It is possible to execute the channel reservation process that is reserved for each channel.

For example, at the timing tY10 shown in FIG. 258, the number of jackpot judgments (holding number) in the pending state is 0, and the normal background display appears in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Assuming that the variable display of the decorative pattern is being performed under the condition that the player is in a state where the game ball wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 in order to increase the number of reservations. The game (handle operation) is performed so that the As a result, when the game ball wins in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, up to four big hit determinations are put on hold according to the winning, and the big hit determinations are made. Each time the game is placed in the pending state, processing related to the pending display and the prefetch effect corresponding to the winning will be performed.

Here, as a look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, for example, in the order of winning to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the first win (first reservation), the second win ( 2nd suspension), 3rd winning (3rd suspension), and 4th winning (4th suspension) are generated, the processing related to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when those suspensions occur. Then, when the prefetching judgment is won and the prefetching effect is performed, a special sound (for example, cue) is output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (each timing when the prefetching judgment is performed after winning a prize), and a specific mode will cause a pending display to appear.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is executed, for example, in the order of winning to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the first prize (first reservation), the second prize ( 2nd suspension), 3rd winning (3rd suspension), and 4th winning (4th suspension) are generated, the processing related to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when those suspensions occur. However, when the pre-reading judgment is won and the pre-reading effect is performed, the special sound (for example, cue) is not output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (timing when the prize is won), but this is maintained in a state of waiting for execution. Then, a special sound (for example, cueing) is output after waiting for the channel that is the target of the channel reservation process to become vacant. It should be noted that the hold display with a specific mode may appear in accordance with the timing of outputting a special sound (for example, cuin), or may appear at the timing of occurrence of the hold that wins the pre-reading judgment. good. However, if a hold display with a specific mode appears at the timing when the hold that was elected in the prefetch judgment occurs, the prefetch effect when the channel reservation process is being executed and the prefetch effect when the channel reservation process is not executed In both the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect, it is desirable that only one mode (for example, only red) can appear as the specific mode.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a hand is held in front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a non-contact type sensor (for example, an ultrasonic sensor, an infrared sensor, etc.) (not shown) is detected. detects this as an object, and uses this as a trigger to start channel reservation processing.

For example, at timing tY11 shown in FIG. 258, the player's hand is in front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and this is detected as an object. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 generates a prayer presentation mode based on the detection. In this prayer effect mode, first, a prayer mode background display is performed in which a "shrine torii" is displayed as a background image in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and a "countdown" is performed for a predetermined time (30 seconds). A process of assigning "audio" to a predetermined channel and reproducing it is performed. The countdown sound, for example, starts from "30" and ends when the countdown reaches "0" every second. Also, during the period when the prayer mode background display is displayed in this way, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect of variably displaying the decorative symbols in a predetermined effect pattern is continuously executed.

However, the "shrine torii (prayer mode background display)" in such a display area and the "countdown sound" in a predetermined channel are displayed when the player holds his/her hand over the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. This can be triggered by just this (detection by the sensor), and it is not related to the production content (production that suggests the degree of expectation) that is progressing within the pattern variation being executed, It does not depend at all on the result of the big hit determination. Therefore, the display and sound generated when the player raises his/her hand may be changed as appropriate. It is now possible to keep the channel in the state of use (here, the state of use by "countdown sound" that does not indicate any degree of expectation), and until this predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses, It becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which another sound is assigned to a predetermined channel for which it is not known when it will end (channel reservation processing).

Then, until the predetermined time (30 seconds) during which the channel reservation process is executed in this way passes, the player plays the game so that the game ball wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. (handle operation). As a result, as shown in FIG. 258, the first prize (first reserve), the second prize (second reserve), the third prize (third reserve), and the fourth prize (fourth reserve) occur. Then, the processing related to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when those suspensions occur. However, as mentioned above, while the "countdown sound" is being played (while the channel reservation process is being executed), the result of the judgment that the pre-reading effect will be performed as a result of the judgment according to the winning (pre-reading winning) Even if it is obtained, the special sound (for example, cueing) is not assigned to the channel when the prize is won, and is stored as a state of waiting for execution. The special sound (e.g., cue) thus placed in a state of waiting for execution is output as a post-announcement sound that is output after the winning at timing tY12 after a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed from timing tY11. Become.

On the other hand, during the period from when the player raises his/her hand to start the reproduction of the "countdown sound" (channel reservation processing) by his/her own will until this is finished (timings tY11 to tY12), winning occurs. If there is no winning, or if a special judgment result is not obtained even though a prize has been won (the pre-reading effect has not been won), even if the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the "countdown sound" ends arrives, the special No sound is played.

According to such a configuration, during a period (timings tY11 to tY12) from when the player raises his/her hand to voluntarily start the reproduction of the "countdown sound" (channel reservation processing) until the end of this (timings tY11 to tY12), If a prize is generated and a special judgment result (pre-reading win) is obtained in the judgment according to the prize, the special sound (cuin) will not be output at that time, and the "countdown sound" will be played. After the output is aimed at the timing when the channel is finished and the channel becomes empty, it is executed as an announcement effect. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid a situation in which a special sound cannot be output due to the lack of a vacant channel even though a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained. Also, even if a special determination result (pre-reading winning) is obtained at any timing between timings tY11 and tY12, a special sound (cue) corresponding to this is played at one timing when at least one channel has a vacancy. Since playback is aimed at tY12, if it is only confirmed whether or not a special sound (cue) is generated at timing tY12, a special determination result (prefetch Winning) can be easily recognized.

If the special sound (cue) is to be output as such a post-announcement sound, it may be assigned to any of the vacant channels at timing tY12 and reproduced. However, if a special sound (cuin) is selectively allocated to a predetermined channel to which the "countdown sound" has been allocated until then, the channel reservation process and the corresponding post-notification effect can be performed with only one channel. It can be said that it is useful in that it can be realized and the range of production can be expanded within the limited number of channels.

Further, in this embodiment, regarding the prayer mode background display in which the "shrine torii" is displayed as the background image, the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the "countdown sound" ends and the reproduction of the special sound (queuing) are performed. The display is continued even after the end timing has come. This is based on the fact that a person who requests the execution of such channel reservation processing tends to raise their hand so as to cause the channel reservation processing to occur again each time the number of reservations decreases. Because of this, having the "Torii of the shrine" displayed as the background image is beneficial when you hold your hand over it (there is a higher probability that a special sound will be played at the timing of a later announcement). Yes, the prayer mode background display is continued until a specific condition unrelated to the channel reservation process is established (for example, a cancellation operation using a button, etc.). However, in reality, even if the "shrine torii" is displayed as a background image, even if the "shrine torii" is not displayed as a background image, the player holds his or her hand over the torii. When this is detected, the predetermined sound (countdown sound) simply keeps the predetermined channel in the allocated state for a predetermined time. Alternatively, the display may be returned to the normal background display at the timing when the reproduction of the special sound (cue) as the post-announcement sound is finished.

Further, when the player raises his/her hand again during the period of timing tY11 to tY12 and this is detected, the reproduction time of the "countdown sound" until a predetermined time (here, 30 seconds) elapses from the detection again. may be extended, and a special sound corresponding to the prefetch winning may be output when the timing arrives.

In addition, such a prayer production mode is executed based on the detection of a specific action by the player, not only when the pattern variation is in the process of being changed, but also when the pattern variation is not in the state of variation. You may make it Further, the specific action may be an action to be detected by a contact type sensor, such as a predetermined button operation, in addition to an action to be detected by a non-contact type sensor.

However, if the special sound (cuin) is output as such a post-notification sound, the first prize (first hold) and second prize ( 2nd reservation), 3rd prize (3rd reservation), 4th prize (4th reservation), it is difficult to grasp whether a special judgment result (pre-reading winning) was obtained, so pre-reading winning There is concern about a decrease in interest in games due to the suspension being consumed without recognizing that it is a pending suspension. On the other hand, the content that is played as the special sound is not a uniform sound (here, "cuin"), but the first prize (first reserve), second prize (second reserve), third prize It is also conceivable to make it different depending on whether the prefetching win is made in which hold, 3 reserve) or the 4th winning (4th reserve). However, in this case, the content of the sound played in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed (here, "Kuin") will change, so it is possible to grasp that the pre-reading has been won. I am afraid that it will disappear.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a special judgment result is obtained at any timing between timings tY11 and tY12 (first reservation, second reservation, third reservation, and fourth reservation). Depending on whether (pre-reading winning) is obtained, a process of varying the reproduction time of a special sound (here, "cuin") starting at timing tY12 is performed.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 258, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained in the first prize winning (first pending) in which the prize is won at an extremely early timing between timings tY11 and tY12. However, in this case, a special sound (here, "cuin") is reproduced for three seconds from timing tY12.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 259, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained in the second winning (second suspension) in which the winning is at a relatively early timing between timings tY11 and tY12. Assumed, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 6 seconds from timing tY12. In this case, the time required to play "Kuin" once is 3 seconds, and if the special sound (here, "Kuin") is played for 6 seconds, "Kuin" will be played twice. Then, a sound in the form of "cuin cuin" is output.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 260, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained in the third prize winning (third suspension) in which the prize is won at a relatively late timing between timings tY11 and tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 9 seconds from timing tY12. In this case, since the time required to play "Kuin" once is 3 seconds, if the special sound (here, "Kuin") is played for 9 seconds, "Kuin" will be played for 3 seconds. It is designed to output sounds in the form of "queuin queuin queuin" after being reproduced for each batch.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 261, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained in the fourth winning (fourth suspension) in which the winning is very late between the timings tY11 and tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 12 seconds from timing tY12. In this case, since the time required to play "Kuin" once is 3 seconds, if the special sound (here, "Kuin") is played for 12 seconds, "Kuin" will be played for 4 seconds. It is designed to output sounds in the form of "Kuin Kuin Kuin Kuin" after being reproduced for each batch.

According to such a configuration, when the special sound is output at timing tY12, it is possible to grasp that a special determination result (prefetch winning) has been obtained between timings tY11 and tY12. It becomes possible to predict at which timing between tY11 and tY12 the special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained in the prize winning. In this example, the shorter the playback time of the special sound from timing tY12, the more the special judgment result (predictive win) was obtained for the winning that occurred at the earlier timing between timings tY11 and tY12. The longer the reproduction time of the special sound from timing tY12, the more likely it is that the special judgment result (prefetch winning) was obtained by winning at a later timing between timings tY11 and tY12. .

In this example, it is conceivable that only the first winning occurs between timings tY11 and tY12 and a special determination result is obtained according to the winning. Therefore, the length of the reproduction time of the special sound from timing tY12 is varied as described above. However, instead of this, considering that the number of pending is limited to a maximum of 4, if a special judgment result is obtained in the first prize, a special sound will be played ``Kuin'' 1 regardless of the timing of the prize. If a special judgment result is obtained on the second prize, the special sound will be set to the duration of two times of "Kyuin" regardless of the timing of the prize, and a special judgment will be made on the third prize. If a result is obtained, regardless of the winning timing, the special sound will be set to the playback time of 3 times of "cuin", and if a special judgment result is obtained at the 4th winning, the special sound will be made regardless of the winning timing. may be set to the playback time of "cuin" four times.

Further, in this embodiment, when a prefetch win is obtained, the special sound "cuin" is played back. The content of the special sound to be reproduced may be changed depending on whether the second determination result (for example, a prefetch win with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained. For example, if the first judgment result (for example, a prefetch win with relatively low expectations) is obtained in the prefetch judgment when winning a prize, the special sound "Kyuin" is played back, whereas the prefetch judgment when winning a prize If the second judgment result (prefetch winning with relatively high expectation) is obtained in the judgment, if the special sound "Boom" is played back, it will occur at any timing between timings tY11 and tY12. In addition to predicting whether or not a pre-reading win was obtained in a prize, the first judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively low expectations) and the second judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively high expectations) are used as pre-fetching wins. Predictions can also be made as to which one was obtained. In this case, it is desirable to reproduce the special sound "Kyin" or "Boom" in accordance with the determination result even in the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 262, the first judgment result (prefetch winning with relatively low expectation ) has been obtained, and the second judgment result (predictive win with relatively high expectations) is obtained in the prefetch judgment in the fourth prize (fourth suspension) that was won at an extremely late timing. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for three seconds from the timing tY12 in the form of "boom", and then the special sound is reproduced in the form of "boom" for nine seconds.

According to such a configuration, by confirming that the playback time of the special sound in the "Kyuin" mode is 3 seconds, the first prize winning ( It becomes possible to predict that the first determination result (prefetch winning with relatively low expectation) is obtained in the prefetch determination in the first hold). In addition, by confirming that the special sound was played for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), it was confirmed that the 4th prize (4th hold), which was won at an extremely late timing, was prefetched and won. be comprehensible. Furthermore, according to the fact that the first judgment result (prefetch winning with relatively low expectation) was obtained in the prefetch judgment in the first prize (first reservation) that was won at an extremely early timing between timings tY11 and tY12 By confirming that the special sound is being played in the form of "Boom" after the end of the "Kuin" played once, the second It becomes possible to predict that a judgment result (prefetch winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is obtained.

Alternatively, when the first judgment result (prefetch winning on the first special figure side) is obtained in the prefetch judgment according to the winning prize to the first start port 2002, "Kuin" is reproduced as a special sound. , When the second judgment result (prefetch winning on the second special figure side) is obtained in the prefetch judgment according to the winning prize to the second start port 2004, "Boom" may be reproduced as a special sound . In this case, even in the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, either the look-ahead determination according to the winning at the first start port 2002 or the look-ahead determination according to the winning at the second start port 2004 Depending on the presence, it is desirable to play "Kuin" or "Boom" as the special sound.

According to such a configuration, for example, when the situation shown in FIG. 262 occurs, by confirming that the playback time of the special sound in the mode of "cuin" is 3 seconds, timings tY11 to tY12 are confirmed. The first prize (first reservation), which was won at an extremely early timing among the It becomes possible to predict that a pre-reading winning) has been obtained. In addition, by confirming that the special sound was played for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), the pre-reading decision was also made in the fourth prize (4th hold), which was won at an extremely late timing. It is possible to grasp that. Furthermore, according to the first judgment result (prefetch winning on the first special figure side) was obtained in the prefetch judgment in the first prize (first reservation) that was won at a very early timing between timings tY11 and tY12 By confirming that the special sound is reproduced in the form of "boom" after the end of the "cuin" reproduced once, the fourth winning (fourth suspension) is the second start port 2004 side It is possible to predict that the second determination result (prefetch winning on the second special figure side) is obtained by the prefetch determination corresponding to the winning prize.

In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, as an example of channel control when a special determination result is obtained based on the fact that a game ball has been accepted in a specific winning hole while executing the channel reservation process , the case where the prefetching winning in the prefetching effect is obtained is exemplified. However, the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. Channel control (channel reservation processing, etc.) that makes it possible to avoid output failure due to lack of channels when a special sound is output when a judgment result is obtained. Therefore, it is clear that the application example is not necessarily limited to the prefetch winning in the prefetch effect.

[Channel Usage Restrictions]
As described above, in a gaming machine with a finite number of channels, even if a special result is obtained in the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is allocated. In (situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), it is not possible to allocate a special sound to a channel corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained, and there is concern that this inability to output may reduce the enjoyment of the game.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the number of vacant channels is monitored during the progress of the game. A high rate is set to limit the execution of processing related to output (channel usage limit). That is, in this case, for at least some of the game sounds, the execution of processing related to the output is restricted from a stage before the number of empty channels becomes zero, and the execution is executed as the number of empty channels approaches zero. Since the rate of limitation is increased, it becomes difficult to reduce the number of empty channels to zero.

More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, every time the pattern variation corresponding to the big hit determination in the pending state is digested (every time the starting condition is satisfied), the pattern variation to be digested Determine the availability of channels during the execution period. As a result, when there is room in the vacancy of the channel, the rate at which the use of the channel is restricted (channel restriction level) is lowered at least until the pattern variation subject to determination is completed, and the vacancy of the channel is reduced. When the situation is tight, the rate at which channel usage is restricted (channel restriction level) is increased at least until the pattern variation subject to judgment is completed, and the channel restriction is set with such pattern variation as a unit. By executing this, the occurrence of a situation in which the number of empty channels becomes 0 during the execution period of the symbol variation to be determined is suppressed. As will be described later, a plurality of level values are prepared as the channel restriction level, and the higher the level value, the higher the rate at which the execution of processing related to the output of the game sound is restricted.

FIG. 263 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure for setting the channel restriction level.

Assume that it is determined that a pattern command (variation pattern) has been received from the main control board 1310 in the process of step S1022 (FIG. 95). Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, as shown in FIG. 263, as the process of step S3101, the value of the previously set channel restriction level is reset. It should be noted that this reset process (step S3101) may be performed when the symbol variation is terminated.

Then, as the processing of step S3102, based on the type of production pattern in the first half of the variation corresponding to the received variation pattern, the period of the first half of the variation (for example, the period from the start of the pattern variation to the start of the ready-to-win production, and the pattern Specify "X", which is the number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) based on the timing when the channel is the least vacant within the period from the start of fluctuation until the pattern is stopped without starting the ready-to-win effect. do. In addition, as the processing of step S3103, based on the type of production pattern in the latter half of the variation corresponding to the received variation pattern, channel "Y", which is the number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) based on the timing at which there is the most vacant channel, is specified.

However, when the effect pattern is selected in which the symbols are stopped without starting the ready-to-win effect from the start of the symbol variation, the symbol variation corresponding to the "second half of the variation" is not performed. In this case, either the processing of the next step is performed without performing the processing of step S3103 itself, or the maximum numerical value that can be set as the number of empty channels "Y" in the processing of step S3103 (a numerical value that is not subject to channel restriction). will be set.

Then, as the process of step S3104, "X" specified in the process of step S3102 and "Y" specified in the process of step S3103 are compared, and out of these "X" and "Y" The channel restriction level is set at least until the symbol variation subject to determination is terminated, based on the value of the smaller minimum number of vacant channels (the side with less vacant channels). As a result, the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound can be restricted based on the set channel restriction level from the start of the symbol variation to be determined until the end. , it is expected that the number of vacant channels will be less likely to become 0, and that the decrease in interest in the game due to the appearance of an unintended presentation mode will be suppressed.

In this embodiment, when setting the channel restriction level, the "minimum number of available channels" used for the determination is specified separately for the first half of the fluctuation (step S3102) and the second half of the fluctuation (step S3103). I'm doing it. This is because the production contents in the first half of the fluctuation (period from the start of the pattern fluctuation to the start of the reach production, etc.) are shared by multiple production patterns (for example, long reach, super reach A, super reach B, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of data required to specify the minimum number of available channels by specifying the minimum number of available channels in units of the first half of the fluctuation. .

However, regarding the minimum number of vacant channels used for determining the setting of the channel restriction level, it is not necessary to specify the first half of the fluctuation and the second half of the fluctuation separately, and the effect from the start of the pattern fluctuation to the stop With the pattern as a unit, the number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) may be specified based on the timing when the channel becomes the most vacant within the period during which the effect pattern is executed.

In addition, the "minimum number of empty channels" here refers to the sound that is automatically generated when the production pattern (production content) to be judged progresses (related to BGM, symbol stop related to jackpot judgment, It shows how many channels are left free when they are assigned to each channel, targeting only those related to sound effects, etc.). Therefore, button pressing sound (such as sound accompanying production based on button operation), volume adjustment completion sound, various notification sounds, block winning sound (sound accompanying winning to general winning gate), pending winning sound (first The production pattern (production content) to be judged, such as the sound accompanying the winning of the starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004), the general electric production sound (the sound accompanying the production according to the judgment of the normal symbol), etc. Various sounds that are not necessarily executed by simply executing are not included in the judgment target.

FIG. 264 is a diagram showing the value of the channel restriction level set for each of the "minimum number of empty channels" specified in the process of step S3104, and an example of the restriction content determined for each channel restriction level. .

As shown in FIG. 264, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment selects, among various game sounds, block winning sounds (general winning openings) as sounds to be restricted in channel use. Accompanying sound), pending winning sound (sound accompanying winning to the first start port 2002 or second start port 2004), general electric production sound (sound accompanying production according to normal design determination), volume adjustment completion sound is exemplified. Therefore, during the execution period of the pattern fluctuation when there is no spare channel, at least for these game sounds (block winning sound, pending winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) among various game sounds Restrictions on channel usage may occur.

More specifically, when the "minimum number of available channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is 12 or more, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is determined based on the correspondence shown in FIG. Set to '0'. That is, in this case, it is assumed that the pattern variation is executed with a margin in the vacant channel, and the sound (block winning sound, pending winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) that is subject to channel use restriction None of them are limited, and if there is a win in the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol variation, the block winning sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and played, and during the execution of the symbol variation, the first start opening 2002 or If there is a prize to the second start port 2004, the reserved winning sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and reproduced, and when the production according to the judgment of the normal design is performed during the execution of the design variation, the normal according to the production The electric effect sound is assigned to a prescribed empty channel and reproduced, and when the volume adjustment is performed during execution of the pattern variation, the corresponding volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to the prescribed empty channel and reproduced.

On the other hand, if the "minimum number of available channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is any one of 6 to 11, in the process of step S3104, channel restrictions are made based on the correspondence shown in FIG. Set the level to "1". In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which pattern fluctuations are executed with a little margin in the vacant channel, and four sounds (block winning sound, pending winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion A channel usage restriction (25% restriction) is imposed on block winning sounds. That is, in this case, when a winning to the general winning opening is detected during the execution of the symbol variation, the amount of prize balls corresponding to the winning is paid out, but the block winning sound is set to a predetermined value. Processing is performed so as not to allocate to an empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the schedule data for sound generation according to the winning to the general winning slot and not to reproduce the block winning sound itself.

On the other hand, if the "minimum number of available channels" specified in the processing of step S3103 is any one of 2 to 5, in the processing of step S3104, the channel restriction level is set based on the correspondence shown in FIG. Set to "2". That is, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which pattern fluctuations are executed with relatively little margin in the empty channel, and four sounds (block winning sound, pending winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment A channel use restriction (50% restriction) is generated for two sounds of the block winning sound and the pending winning sound among the completion sounds). That is, in this case, in addition to the restriction on the above-mentioned block winning sound, when there is a winning to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 during execution of the symbol variation, and this is detected, the amount corresponding to the winning Although the payout of prize balls and the above-described first and second start opening winning processing are performed, the pending winning sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the schedule data for sound generation according to the winning to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and not to reproduce the pending winning sound itself.

On the other hand, if the "minimum number of available channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is either 0 or 1, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is determined based on the correspondence shown in FIG. to "3". In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which pattern fluctuations are executed in which there is no room for empty channels, and four sounds (block winning sound, pending winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion (100% limit) of channel usage for all sounds). That is, in this case, in addition to the above-described restrictions on the block winning sound and restrictions on the pending winning sound, even if the production corresponding to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, the general electric effect sound is not assigned to a predetermined empty channel. In addition, when the player performs a volume adjustment operation during execution of the pattern variation, the volume adjustment itself is performed according to the volume adjustment, but the volume adjustment completion sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. It will happen. In addition, at this time, for the general electric effect sound and the volume adjustment completion sound, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to them should not be set, and the general electric effect sound and the volume adjustment completion sound themselves should not be played. is desirable.

According to such a configuration, when a pattern variation is executed in which the number of vacant channels to which sounds are not assigned is less than a predetermined number while the game is progressing, the number of vacant channels is reduced to a predetermined number. As compared with the case where the symbol variation is not less than the number, the ratio of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least some of the various game sounds is increased. That is, in this case, some of the game sounds (block winning sound, pending winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) are output from a stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes 0. Execution of related processing is restricted, and as the number of vacant channels decreases, the rate of execution restriction increases, so the number of vacant channels becomes 0 during the execution of pattern variation. It is expected that the occurrence of such a situation can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, in the above configuration, among the various game sounds, the sound that is subject to channel use restriction is not the most important "effect sound related to jackpot determination" in the pachinko machine 1, but other "sound accompanying winning". ”, “directive sound related to normal judgment”, and “sound related to volume adjustment”. That is, even if restriction of channel use is generated during the execution of pattern variation, the performance as to whether or not a jackpot pattern appears in the pattern variation is not restricted and is preferably executed. A decrease in amusement in a game when channel use is restricted is suppressed.

In the above configuration, among various game sounds, a plurality of types of sounds (block winning sound, pending winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) are prepared as types of sounds that are candidates for channel use restriction targets. , the higher the channel restriction level (the smaller the minimum number of available channels is, the smaller the pattern variation), the more the number of types of sounds subject to channel usage restriction. However, before the number of empty channels actually becomes 0, the execution of processing related to the output is restricted, and as the number of empty channels decreases, the rate of execution restriction increases. is not limited to this, and for example, a technique described below with reference to FIG. 265 may be adopted.

FIG. 265 is a diagram showing another example of restriction content determined for each channel restriction level.

As shown in FIG. 265, in this another example, according to the "minimum number of available channels" specified in the process of step S3103 and the channel restriction level specified in the process of step S3104, the number of channels to be used is determined. A limit lottery is conducted to decide whether or not to impose a limit. However, here, when a plurality of sounds that are candidates for channel usage restriction are not prepared, and the determination result of restriction is obtained in the restriction lottery, one game sound (for example, volume adjustment completion sound etc.).

For example, in this another example, if the channel restriction level is 0 (the minimum number of available channels is 12 or more), the probability of obtaining a determination result to the effect that restriction is applied in the restriction lottery is set to 0/100, and the channel usage Channel usage restriction processing is not executed for specific game sounds to be restricted (for example, volume adjustment completion sound).

However, when the channel restriction level is 1 or higher, the higher the value, the higher the probability of obtaining a decision result that the restriction will be applied in the restriction lottery. 6 to 11), the probability of equality is 25/100, and the probability of equality is 50/100 when the channel restriction level is 2 (the minimum number of empty channels is 2 to 5), and the channel restriction level is 3 (the minimum number of empty channels is 0, 1), the probability of the same is 100/100. In this another example, when a determination result indicating that restriction is to be applied is obtained in the restriction lottery, restriction processing for channel use is executed with the same contents regardless of the channel restriction level.

Even with such a configuration, if the number of vacant channels to which sounds are not assigned falls below a predetermined number during the course of the game, the number of vacant channels will decrease. Compared to the case where the symbol variation is not less than the predetermined number, the rate of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least some of the various game sounds is increased. That is, in this case, for some of the game sounds (volume adjustment completion sound), the execution of processing related to the output is restricted from a stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes 0. Since the rate of execution restriction increases as the number of vacant channels decreases, it is preferable to prevent the number of vacant channels from becoming 0 during the execution of pattern variation. suppression is expected.

Further, according to the above configuration, by confirming whether or not the specific sound (volume adjustment completion sound) is reproduced during the execution period of the symbol variation, the minimum empty channel during the execution period of the symbol variation It is possible to guess the possibility that there will be no room left in the number, and it is possible to prompt the game progress (winning, button operation, etc.) corresponding to the guess.

In the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 264 and 265, the minimum number of available channels is identified from the state of occurrence of the advance notice effects after executing the determination processing related to various advance notice effects based on the effect pattern, and the specified minimum free channel number is determined. Although the channel restriction level is set based on the number of channels, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, since it is possible to predict in advance how many sounds will be simultaneously assigned to channels during the pattern fluctuation period for each production pattern, the likelihood of a channel shortage occurring for each production pattern is classified in advance. Keep Then, when an effect pattern is determined, the rate of channel restriction may be increased as the probability of channel shortage for which the effect pattern is pre-sorted increases. In other words, in this case, when a specific type of production pattern that tends to use many channels at the same time is executed, many channels are not actually used and many channels are not used, such as no button operation or various prizes. Even if there is a margin in the number of symbols, the execution of processing related to the output of game sounds may be restricted during the execution of that pattern variation. It is extremely useful in that it is possible to avoid the number of 0 from becoming 0, and even if such processing is performed, "the number of empty channels during symbol fluctuation is relatively When the number is small, the rate at which the execution of processing related to the output of the game sound is restricted increases, and when the number of empty channels during pattern fluctuation is relatively large, the rate at which the execution of the processing related to the output of the game sound is restricted. This is a phenomenon that does not cause any particular sense of incongruity from the player's side. Further, in this case, by confirming whether or not the sound has been limited, it is possible to estimate the possibility of an effect pattern that tends to cause a shortage of channels.

In addition, in the configuration illustrated in FIGS. 264 and 265 and their other examples, the channel restriction is executed with the symbol variation as one unit, but the channel is limited while the production content is developed within one symbol variation. The restriction level may be varied, and channel restriction may be executed according to the channel restriction level each time. Alternatively, when a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied, such as when a specific production mode is executed over a plurality of symbol variations, the channel restriction level is kept constant at a specific value over a plurality of symbol variations, and the channel restriction level is maintained at the specified value. Channel restriction may be performed accordingly.

By the way, in the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 264 and 265 and their other examples, the most important sound in the pachinko machine 1 is not the "effect sound related to the jackpot determination", but other We decided to use only "sounds associated with prize winning", "directed sounds related to normal judgment", and "sounds related to volume adjustment". However, since these sounds include sounds that occur less frequently than the production sounds, in order to realize the restriction processing that can more effectively secure empty channels, It is desired that the "effect sound" is also adopted as a restriction target. However, on the other hand, if the above-mentioned restriction processing is executed for the "effect sound related to the judgment of the big hit", there is a concern that the effect sound will not be played, resulting in a lack of excitement. If the jackpot pattern is stopped in some cases, there is a possibility that the interest in the game is lowered.

In this respect, in the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 264 and 265 and their other examples, among the "effect sounds related to the judgment of the big hit", only the "effect related to the pattern fluctuation that is in the pending state and will be digested in the future" If you limit the use of the sound channel (for example, if you adopt it as a specific game sound that is restricted in FIG. 265 or another example), Therefore, it is possible to adopt, as a restriction target, the effect sound which is frequently generated without any restriction.

For example, during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed, when the winning to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 occurs and the corresponding big hit determination is put on hold, usually the hold Determination processing is performed as to whether or not to carry out a look-ahead effect with respect to the state of the big hit determination. As a result, when a special result is obtained, a look-ahead performance (performance display, performance sound) is performed to preliminarily suggest the degree of expectation as to whether the jackpot determination made in the pending state will win the jackpot. Become.

However, if the number of channels used increases and there is concern about vacancies (e.g., a pattern change with a minimum number of vacant channels of 0 or 1 is in progress), the channel usage will be restricted. If "effect sound corresponding to the effect related to the pattern change to be digested in the future" is targeted, a prize is generated at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the judgment of the big hit is suspended accordingly. To prevent both the read-ahead performance and the corresponding performance sound from being performed by not executing the determination processing itself for the read-ahead performance in relation to the big hit determination held in the pending state even if the state is set.

According to such a configuration, when the number of used channels increases and a situation arises in which vacancies arise, the number of channels assigned to effects related to future symbol variations, not the symbol variations being executed, are being executed. Since it can be supplied to the production sound related to the fluctuation of the pattern, there is no adverse effect on the production related to the result of the pattern fluctuation being executed, and the production sound with high frequency is restricted. be able to In addition, the production to be restricted is only "the production related to the future pattern variation in the unexecuted state", and even if the pattern variation is restricted, it will be restricted when it is held and digested in the future. Since the performance during symbol variation (the performance content corresponding to the performance pattern) which is not changed is always executed, the decrease in the interest in the game due to the restriction of the performance can be suitably suppressed.

Also, when restricting the "effect sound related to judging a big hit", if only the effect sound out of the effect (effect display, effect sound) is restricted (no sound output), the effect will be lacking in excitement. However, in the above configuration, if the number of channels used increases and there is concern about vacancies, a prize is won and the judgment of a big hit is put on hold. Occasionally, the judgment process for the prefetching effect itself is not executed, and both the effect display and the effect sound related to the prefetching effect are not performed. The performance situation (reservation display when the look-ahead performance is not executed) is the same as when the game is played, and it is possible to suitably avoid the deterioration of the game interest due to the execution of the performance lacking excitement.

In addition, when "effect sound related to jackpot judgment" is restricted, when winning and jackpot judgment is put on hold, the judgment processing itself for the prefetching effect is not executed, and the effect display and effect related to the prefetching effect Although it tried not to do both with the sound, it is not limited to this. For example, when "effect sound related to jackpot determination" is restricted, the determination process for the prefetch effect is performed when winning, but even if a special result is obtained, until the specific timing during the pattern fluctuation does not execute both the performance display and the performance sound related to the look-ahead performance, and only the performance display of the performance display and the performance sound is limited when a specific timing in the pattern fluctuation comes. You can do this by clearing the That is, in this case, when the "effect sound related to the judgment of the big hit" is not restricted (normal time), the effect display related to the prefetch effect is performed in a dedicated mode (timing), and a special Since the look-ahead performance is executed after it is shown as if the result (pre-reading winning) is not obtained, the look-ahead performance is performed while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest caused by not outputting the performance sound corresponding to the look-ahead performance. You will be able to do it well.

In addition, as processing related to the future effect under the situation where the use of the channel is restricted, ・When the prize is won, the judgment process for the prefetch effect is performed, but even if a special result is obtained, a specific timing will come during the pattern fluctuation. Both the performance display and the performance sound related to the look-ahead performance are not executed until they are limited, and when a specific timing in the pattern fluctuation comes, the performance display of the performance display and the performance sound is affected. A configuration in which only the restriction is released and this is performed is defined as the first restricted process,
・The game progresses when the processing under the second restriction does not execute the determination process for the prefetch effect itself and does not perform both the effect display and the effect sound related to the prefetch effect when winning a prize. Among them, if the number of empty channels to which no sound is assigned is less than a predetermined number, the pattern variation is executed, compared to the case where the number of the same empty channels is not less than the predetermined number. Therefore, the rate at which either the first restricted process or the second restricted process is executed is increased, and the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the first restricted process was performed Let the expected value of the number of channels used in "A" be the expected value of the number of channels used in the second limited process, and the expected value of the number of channels used within the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the second restricted process was performed is "B". It is more desirable to execute either the first restricted process or the second restricted process so that the relationship between them becomes "A<B". That is, in this case, as the number of used channels increases and vacancies become a concern, both the effect display and the effect sound are subject to restriction, instead of the first restricted process in which only the effect sound is restricted. Since the rate of channel restriction is increased by the second restricted processing, it is expected that anxiety when the number of used channels increases will be suppressed more appropriately.

[Channel special opening process]
As described above, in a gaming machine with a finite number of channels, even if a special result is obtained in the judgment by the judging means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is allocated. In (situation where the number of empty channels is 0), it is not possible to allocate a special sound to a channel corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained, and there is concern that this inability to output may reduce the enjoyment of the game.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of game sounds are assigned to different channels and are in an output state, the volume of at least some of the game sounds is reduced, In the state where the sound volume is lowered (suppressed state), the process of ending the allocation of the specific game sound to the channel can be performed. After the allocation of the specific game sound to the channel is completed in this way, the process of increasing the volume of the other game sounds that continue to be allocated to the channel can be executed (channel special opening process).

According to such a configuration, the usage state is aimed at the timing in which it is difficult to recognize that the mode of channel allocation of the game sound has changed (the state in which the volume of the game sound is reduced (suppressed state)). decrease the number of channels in (increase the number of empty channels). Therefore, for example, even if the number of channels in use is reduced prior to this in order to more reliably output important game sounds, the number of channels in use is reduced. It becomes difficult for the player to notice that the game has been played, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game due to the specific game sound not being output.

FIG. 266 is a time chart showing an example of channel assignment status when such channel special release processing is performed.

As shown in FIG. 266, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is executed, at timing tk11, a predetermined effect pattern is being developed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "normal BGM reproduction" corresponding to is assigned to reproduction channels 02 and 03 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction), and according to the effect A displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of "reproduction A" is assigned to reproduction channels 08 and 09 and is being reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 266(a), among the sounds (normal BGM reproduction, production A reproduction) in these reproduction states, the sound of "production A reproduction" is in the stage where the predetermined production pattern is in the middle of production. At timing tk13 (during execution of pattern variation), it is removed from the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and the reproduction is terminated. In this way, even if the predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of the effect, the effect content of the predetermined effect pattern can be improved by completing the allocation of the effect sound from the channel and quickly changing it to an empty channel. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which new sounds cannot be assigned and reproduced due to lack of empty channels when progressing.

However, as described above, when the predetermined effect pattern corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is in the middle of the effect (in the middle of the execution of the pattern change), when the effect sound is removed from the channel and changed to an empty channel, The number of effect sounds in the reproduced state is reduced, and there is a concern that the degree of expectation for the appearance of a big hit pattern in the effect pattern is lowered by the amount of the reduction.

Therefore, in this illustrative example, as shown in FIG. 266(a), first, the sound of "playback of effect A" is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09, and before the timing tk13 for ending the playback comes. During the period from "timing tk12" to "timing tk14" after timing tk13, the sound of "playback of production B" corresponding to production B displayed on the game board side production display device 1600 is played. It is assigned to the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and set to a state of reproduction (stereo reproduction in this case). Then, as shown in FIG. 266(b), during the period (timings tk12 to tk14) during which the sound of "playback of effect B" is in the state of playback, timing tk13 when "playback of effect A" ends. In accordance with the arrival of , a process of lowering the volume of each of the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of the 'playback of effect B' is kept assigned to the channel (volume control process).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 266(c), the sound of "production B reproduction" in this explanation example is output as a production sound corresponding to a step production that can develop the production content up to four times. After the production content has been successively developed over three times (step 1, step 2, step 3), the production is being executed as to whether it will further develop into the production content according to step 4. Then, while a plurality of performance sounds including the sound of "playback of performance B" corresponding to the step performance are assigned to the channels, the processing of reducing the volume of each sound (volume suppression processing) is performed. When the sound volume suppression process is terminated and the sound volume is returned to the normal level, if a high-expectation effect state that further develops into the effect content corresponding to step 4 appears (relatively high-expectation effect), While a specific effect sound corresponding to the effect contents of step 4 is output as the sound of "play effect B", the step does not develop to the effect contents corresponding to step 4 and the effect contents corresponding to step 3 are output. When a low-expectation performance mode in which the performance ends appears (a performance with a relatively low degree of expectation), a performance sound different from the specific performance sound is output as the sound of ``playback of performance B''.

According to such a configuration, an effect design is made such that the timing tk13 arrives at the time when the volume reduction process is performed for a plurality of effect sounds. The number of channels in use is reduced because the sound of "playback" is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and its playback ends (the sound of "playback A" is in a non-playing state). It becomes possible to make it difficult for people to notice what has been done.

In particular, in the examples shown in FIGS. 266(a) to 266(c), the production content with a relatively high degree of expectation (the production content that progresses to step 4) and the production content with a relatively low degree of expectation (step During the period in which the production content (the production content that does not progress to step 4) and the production content that leads to both (the production content that does not progress to step 4) appears (the period in which it is unclear whether it will develop), the above-mentioned A sound volume suppression process is executed to remove the sound of "reproduction A" from the reproduction channels 08 and 09, thereby terminating the reproduction. According to such a configuration, not only is the volume of the effect sound lowered, but the player's interest itself is strongly attracted to the effect B (the sound of "playing effect B"). Since the effect A (the sound of "Play effect A") will end in , after that, the volume of the effect sound that was subject to volume suppression, including the sound of "Play effect B", was returned. Sometimes, even if the sound of "playback A" is not played, there will be a relatively high-expected effect content (the effect content that progresses to step 4) and a relatively low-expected effect content ( It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice that the sound of "playback of presentation A" is no longer played by attracting the user's interest in which of the presentation content that does not progress to step 4 has appeared.

Moreover, in the volume suppression processing according to this illustrative example, the volume of each of the plurality of effect sounds, including the sound of "playback of effect B", is reduced while remaining assigned to the channel. A specific effect sound (here, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction") is continuously reproduced at the normal volume without lowering the volume. That is, in this case, while some of the effect sounds ("normal BGM reproduction" sounds) are normally reproduced without being suppressed in volume, the volume of the plurality of effect sounds is reduced, thereby distinguishing the sounds. Since the reproduction of the sound of "playback of effect A" is ended while the sound of "playback of effect A" is made more difficult, it is possible to make it more difficult for the user to notice that the sound of "playback of effect A" is no longer played. become.

Furthermore, in this example of explanation, the reproduction of the sound of "playback of production A" is not terminated immediately after the volume reduction processing is performed for the plurality of production sounds, and a predetermined time elapses after the volume reduction processing is started. After waiting for the elapsed timing tk13 to come, the reproduction of the sound of "effect A reproduction" is finished. That is, immediately after the volume suppression process is started, there is a risk that the player's interest will be attracted to the effect sounds A and B in which the change of "volume reduction" has occurred, but the volume will not decrease to a specific value. When the state of not changing at the specific value is maintained for a predetermined period of time, it is assumed that such interest has already faded. By ending the reproduction of , it is possible to make it more difficult for the user to notice that the sound of "reproduction A" is no longer reproduced.

In particular, in this illustrative example, the volume of the effect sound to be subjected to the volume suppression process is gradually lowered, and after the volume becomes 0 (muted), the reproduction of the sound of "play effect A" is terminated. As a result, it is possible to make it even more difficult for the user to notice that the sound of "reproduction A" is no longer reproduced.

In the example shown in FIG. 266, the sound of "playback of effect B" is started to be played while the sound of "playback of effect A" is being played, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the sound of "playback B" is being reproduced, the sound of "playback A" is started to be played, and while the sound of "playback B" is being played in a suppressed state, "playback of production A" is started. ” may be terminated.

Further, the effects A and B do not necessarily have to be accompanied by the effect display on the game board side effect display device 1600, and may be executed as an effect only with sound, for example.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 266, the timing tk12 for reproducing the sound of "effect B reproduction" is assumed to arrive when the variation pattern (effect pattern) corresponding to the big hit determination progresses. Not limited. For example, based on the operation of a predetermined operation means (operation button 410 or the like), the sound of "playback of effect B" is started to be played back, and the sound of "playback of effect A" is played while the sound of "playback of effect B" is being played. may be terminated in the manner described above.

Further, the volume of the effect sound to be subjected to the volume reduction process does not necessarily have to be reduced in stages. Conversely, the processing for returning the volume of the effect sound may be performed in stages. In addition, the volume does not necessarily have to be set to 0 (muted), and if the volume is suppressed to a level lower than normal, it is difficult to notice that the reproduction of the sound of "playback A" has ended. is possible.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 266, a specific effect sound corresponding to the effect pattern (here, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction") is excluded from volume suppression processing, and the normal volume is maintained. Although the sound is reproduced continuously, the sound volume of all effect sounds may be lowered when the sound volume suppression process is performed. Conversely, with respect to the sound of "playback of effect A", the volume may be maintained without necessarily decreasing when the volume reduction process is performed. While attracting the player's interest to the sound of "playback of performance B" in the state of being played, the playback of the sound of "playback of performance A" is ended, and then the sound of "playback of performance B" is included. When the volume of a plurality of production sounds targeted for volume suppression is returned, even if the sound of "production A play" is not played back, the production contents with relatively high expectations (step 4 The sound of ``playback of production A'' is reproduced by attracting interest in which of the production content that develops to step 4) and the production content that has a relatively low degree of expectation (the production content that does not develop to step 4) has appeared. You will be able to make it harder to notice that you are no longer.

In addition, at least during the period during which the volume suppression process is performed during the period in which the effect pattern for reproducing the sound of "playback of effect A" and "playback of effect B" is performed (after the volume of "playback of effect B" is lowered from the normal value) Until the normal value is restored), in order to more preferably maintain interest in the sound of "production B reproduction", even if a prize is won at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 It is desirable not to reproduce the pending prize winning sound in response. Also, even if a special result (prefetch winning) is obtained in the prefetch determination when the winning to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs, the performance sound corresponding to the prefetch performance is not reproduced. is desirable.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 266, the sound reproduction of "effect A reproduction" is ended within the period in which the volume of the effect sound is lowered, and when the period ends, the channel is assigned to the channel with the volume lowered until then. In addition to this, at the end of the period, a special sound that had not been assigned to a channel until then was added to the channel. It may be newly assigned and reproduced (reproduced at normal volume). According to such a configuration, when the volume is turned back, people are more interested in whether or not the special effect sound is played back, and they are more aware of the fact that the sound of "play effect A" is no longer played. It becomes possible to make it difficult. In addition, if the number of channels used after the volume is restored is reduced compared to before the volume is lowered, there is a concern that the degree of expectation for the appearance of a big hit pattern due to the pattern change is lowered, but there is a concern that the special effect sound is newly assigned to the channel and played back (played at normal volume), the same or more before the volume decrease and after the volume recovery (two or more effect sounds for the channel Since it is possible to use the channel (when newly allocated by the player), it is preferable that the player remembers the feeling that the level of expectation has decreased. be avoided. In this case, when the volume is turned back, the special effect sound may or may not be played, suggesting that expectations are relatively high when the special effect sound is played. It is desirable to

When the volume is turned back, if a special effect sound that has not been assigned to a channel is newly assigned to a channel and played back, the channel that became empty due to the sound assignment of "Play effect A" being removed It is desirable to allocate a special sound effect to According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to realize a wide range of presentations with a small number of channel resources.

Further, such channel special opening processing does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. "Production A" is adopted as a special opening of the channel as the number of minimum vacant channels is smaller in symbol variation (when the minimum number of vacant channels in symbol variation is less than a predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than a predetermined number). The rate at which processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in a situation where the number of free channels is sufficient to prevent a feeling of uneasiness due to a lack of channels, the "effect A" can be continuously output without ending in the middle. become.

[Suppressed operation sound output processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine with a finite number of channels, even if a special result is obtained in the judgment by the judging means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is allocated. In (situation where the number of empty channels is 0), it is not possible to allocate a special sound to a channel corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained, and there is concern that this inability to output may reduce the enjoyment of the game.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the pattern variation is started and ended. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 carries out processing to progress the display effect according to the specific effect pattern, and assigns and reproduces the sound of "BGM playback" according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel. process to cause Then, when the display effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of "BGM playback" remains assigned to the predetermined channel and is output in a suppressed mode or silently ( The volume of "BGM playback" is lowered to a specific value and output), and when an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410) is detected in this state, the big hit pattern (the A special effect sound suggesting the degree of expectation that a special display mode in the effect pattern will appear is output in a non-suppressed mode (suppressed operation sound output process). The degree of expectation suggested by the special effect may be 100%.

That is, in this case, when the special effect sound is output in response to the detection of the operation, although the sound of "BGM reproduction" is still assigned to the predetermined channel, it is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state. As a result, it is possible to provide an atmosphere in which the usage of the channel seems to have plenty of room. Therefore, to provide a player with an operation opportunity to output a special performance sound in a state in which a player is freed from feeling uneasy that ``maybe there is no vacant channel and the special performance sound may not be output''. can be performed, thereby suppressing the decline in game interest.

By the way, when a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (“BGM playback” sound) is left assigned to a channel and is to be output in a suppressed mode or silently, in general, the sound assigned to the channel It is assumed that a process of suppressing the volume of the sound (the sound of "BGM playback") (a process of lowering the volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such a volume suppression process is performed prior to providing the player with an opportunity to operate (generating an effective period for accepting effects), a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (" It is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to operate (generate an effective period for acceptance of the effect) after setting the sound of BGM reproduction) to be output in a suppressed mode or silently.

However, as is well known, when an operation opportunity is given to a player, an effective period for reception of effects is generated for a predetermined period of time, and the operation (reception of effects) is performed at any timing within this effective period. is indeterminate (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, when an operation (acceptance of effect) is performed within the validity period, even if it is possible to terminate the volume suppression process and return the volume to the initial value using this as a trigger, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store in advance the sound of "BGM reproduction" so that the reproduction of the sound corresponding to this is started at an indeterminate timing.

In addition to performing processing to restore the volume when there is an operation by the player, the sound data of "BGM reproduction" is switched to the sound data of "BGM reproduction dedicated to reproduction of special effect sound". It is also conceivable to carry out processing for reproduction. However, the sound of "BGM playback" is reproduced in accordance with the contents of various effects until the end of a specific effect pattern and the timing of pattern stop. At which timing the operation (acceptance of effect) is performed is uncertain (depending on the player), and if the operation (acceptance of effect) is used as a trigger to newly reproduce the sound of "BGM playback". , there is a concern that a so-called sound lag occurs between the timing of various effects and pattern stoppages after that, and the interest in the game decreases.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data ( For example, sound data during normal fluctuation, sound data during the first half of the super reach effect, sound data during the second half of the super reach effect, etc.) Perform processing for sequentially assigning to channels. Of the plurality of sound data stored as the "BGM reproduction" sound corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, the specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the sound generation schedule data. When it is assigned to a predetermined channel according to the chronological order, it is assigned to the predetermined channel and playback is started from the timing before the occurrence of the effective period of reception of the effect within the specific effect pattern, and the effective period ends. For a long period of time until the timing after this, the allocation state to the predetermined channel is maintained and reproduced.

In this regard, when the specific sound data (single sound material) is viewed in time series, some sections (special periods) have a suppression mode or a silent sound output process compared to other sections. is set in advance, and when the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel in the time series specified by the sound generation schedule data, a part of the section (special period), the effective period of acceptance of the effect occurs in a chronological relationship. In addition to this, even if the operation is performed by the player at any timing within the effective period of the reception of the effect that occurs within the special period (partial section), from the special period (partial section) to the special period A special effect sound corresponding to the reception of the effect is played over the period (other segment) after the end of the (partial segment) and the two segments in the specific sound data, and the sound of "BGM playback" A channel different from the assigned predetermined channel is used for reproduction in a non-suppressed manner.

According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data (for example, sound data during normal fluctuation, sound data during the first half of the super reach effect, super sound data in the latter half of the reach effect) are sequentially assigned to predetermined channels in chronological order as specified by the schedule data for each sound generation corresponding to these, without adjusting the volume from the initial value. In both cases, it becomes possible to create a "suppressed mode or a state of silent output (special period)". In addition, when the player's operation is received in the "suppressed mode or silent output state (special period)" created in this way, the special mode is performed in a non-suppressed mode by a process with high immediacy triggered by this. While the effect sound is to be started to be played, the sound of "BGM playback" that is being played on a predetermined channel is output in a "suppressed mode or silent state (special period)" regardless of the reception of the effect. ” is maintained for a predetermined period of time. After that, a part of the specific sound data (single sound material) (suppressed mode or silent sound output) ends in a way that the special effect sound is played back. Since the data contents of other sections (unsuppressed sound output) are reproduced, it is possible to secretly return the sound of "BGM playback" to the unsuppressed mode. It is possible to provide a production sound without a sense of incongruity. That is, in this case, when an operation by a player is received in a state where the sound of "playback BGM" is output in a suppressed mode or silently, the special effect sound is not suppressed by highly immediacy processing triggered by this. Although the reproduction is started at , it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of sound lag between the timing of various performances and pattern stop after that.

FIG. 267 is a time chart showing an example of channel allocation when such suppressed operation sound output processing is performed. A specific example of executing such a suppressed operation sound output process will be described below with reference to FIG. 267 .

As shown in FIG. 267(a), during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is executed, at timing ts11, it is specified that the effect progresses on the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the production pattern of 1 is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already being reproduced (in this case, stereo reproduction). This "BGM playback" sound is, for example, one sound data (one It may be reproduced based on the schedule data for sound generation as a sound material), or the entire period of pattern fluctuation is divided into a plurality of periods, and different sound data prepared for each period are used. may be sequentially reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the . In the example shown in FIG. 267, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of "BGM reproduction" is played over the entire period (a part of the pattern variation period) in the figure including the timing ts11. are assigned to channels 02 and 03 and are in a playback state.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 267(a) and 267(b), one sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") allocated to channels 02 and 03 and in a state of reproduction is a special At timing ts12, which is before the timing ts13 in which an operation valid period (effective period of acceptance of an effect) for giving an operation opportunity that triggers the generation of a sound effect (effective period for acceptance of effect) arrives, data content of no sound is set. It is designed to be in a playback state in some sections. As a result, even if the volume of the "BGM reproduction" sound is not adjusted from the initial value, it can be output silently while being assigned to the predetermined channel.

According to such a configuration, at timing ts13, the sound of "BGM playback" is in a playback state within a part of the section set as silent data content, and it seems that there is a margin in the channel usage status. While the atmosphere is being provided, it is possible to generate an operation valid period (effective period for reception of performance) during which an operation opportunity is given to the player. As a result, the player is provided with an operation opportunity to output the special performance sound while eliminating the anxiety that ``there may be no channels available and the special performance sound may not be output''. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Moreover, the operation valid period according to this example of explanation is the timing ts16 at which the partial section in which silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM reproduction" ends even if there is no operation by the player. At timing ts15, which is before the arrival of , the period is terminated so that the operation by the player is no longer accepted. Therefore, even if the player's operation is accepted at any timing within the operation valid period, the playback state is set within the partial interval set as the silent data content of the "BGM playback" sound. A special performance sound corresponding to an operation by a player can be generated in the presence of an atmosphere in which the cage channel seems to be used with plenty of room. Note that the operation effective period ends when the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, and also when the player's operation is received as an effect. When the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, a special effect sound may be generated in the same manner as when the operation is performed by the player at that timing.

In this example of explanation, it is assumed that the operation by the player is accepted as an effect at timing ts14, and based on the acceptance of the effect, the channel 02 to which the sound of "BGM playback" is assigned. , 03, which are different from channels 08 and 03, are assigned special effect sounds and reproduced.

In this regard, in this illustrative example, the maximum time from the start to the end of the valid operation period (time from timing ts13 to timing ts15) is defined as "SY", and the valid operation period ends at this maximum time. to the end of the partial section in which silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM playback" (the time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) is "BF", then within the operation valid period Even if the player's operation is accepted at any timing, the special effect sound is assigned to channels 08 and 09 for a certain period of time "SY+α(>BF)" and reproduced.

According to such a configuration, even if the player's operation is accepted at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing ts16 always arrives when the special effect sound is being reproduced. It is possible to output the sound of "BGM reproduction" in a non-suppressed manner by blending it with the special effect sound. That is, in this case, although the time from the start of the reproduction of the special effect sound until the sound of "BGM reproduction" comes to be output in the unsuppressed mode is variable according to the timing at which the operation by the player is accepted. , the output period of the special effect sound is a buffer period for returning the sound of "BGM playback" in an unsuppressed mode (the sound of "BGM playback" is returned in an unsuppressed mode by being mixed with the special effect sound). By functioning as a period during which it is difficult to notice the fact that the game is played by the player, when the operation by the player is accepted, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is not restored in a non-suppressed mode, and the discomfort caused by returning after a predetermined time is eliminated. It becomes possible to make it difficult to remember.

After the "BGM playback" sound is thus restored as the data content (unsuppressed mode) of the effect sound for BGM playback, the "BGM playback" sound is played back in the non-suppressed mode when the timing ts17 arrives. Playback of the special effect sound is ended while in the state.

In the above explanation example, the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is started" and the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended" are determined by the player's operation, as shown in FIG. 267(b). Depending on the timing to be accepted, it will be variable within the range indicated by the dotted line arrow. , the normal section in which the data contents (unsuppressed mode) of the effect sound for BGM reproduction are set as the sound of "BGM reproduction" is started.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 267, it is possible to further remember the "discomfort caused by restoring the sound of 'BGM playback' after a predetermined period of time without restoring the sound of 'BGM playback' in a non-suppressed mode when the player's operation is accepted." In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound higher than the initial value of the BGM reproduction in the normal section. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secretly shift the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section while attention is focused on the special effect sound with a large initial volume value.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 267, when the operation by the player is accepted for the effect, the special effect sound is generated based on the reception of the effect. A special effect sound may be generated based on the acceptance of the effect only when the conditions are satisfied. Even if a specific effect condition is not satisfied, an operation effective period is generated at timing ts14, and when an effect is accepted by the player within the operation effective period, the effect is accepted. A predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced based on the fact. Then, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation valid period, while a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is being reproduced, the BGM reproduction sound is secretly changed to the reproduction state in the normal section. 267. It is desirable to make the transition to .

However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced, the reproduction time is made shorter than when the special effect sound is played, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced. The sound of the BGM playback may be returned to the playback state in the normal section after the playback of the BGM playback is completed. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation valid period, the timing at which the BGM playback sound returns to the playback state in the normal section is set to the playback of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.). is set to arrive after the According to such a configuration, a silent period (depending on the operation timing) can be obtained from the end of the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) until the sound of the BGM reproduction returns to the reproduction state in the normal section. variable length) can be generated as a buffer period. In addition, if a resurrection performance with a high expectation level (which may be 100%) can occur during this silent period, it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained.

Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is to be reproduced, the pattern variation is stopped in a failing manner without returning the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section. good too. In this case, at the timing ts12, the assignment of the BGM reproduction sounds to the channels 02 and 03 may be ended and these channels may be made empty.

Further, when a special effect sound is generated, a movable effect of moving a predetermined movable body based on the reception of the effect is also performed to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of the BGM reproduction. This is desirable in order to secretly shift the reproduced sound to the reproduction state in the normal section.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 267, the sound of "playback BGM" is silently output in some sections, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a mode in which the sound of "playback BGM" is suppressed more than the sound of "playback BGM" in other sections. Anything that is output by Here, the suppressed mode can be exemplified by a mode in which the sound volume is relatively lowered, or a mode in which the vibration frequency of the cone of the speaker per unit time is reduced.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, by setting a time-series period in which the sound data itself of "BGM playback" assigned to a predetermined channel is suppressed or silenced, "BGM playback" can be performed. It is possible to create a state (special period) in which the sound is output in a suppressed mode or in silence only by reproducing the sound without adjusting the volume of the sound. However, it is not necessary to set the suppression mode or the time-series period of silence in the sound data of "BGM playback" assigned to a predetermined channel. Volume adjustment may be performed to lower the volume to a specific value (which may be mute). That is, in this case, even if the player's operation is accepted as an effect at timing ts14, the process of increasing the volume of the sound of "BGM playback" from a specific value (the process of returning the volume to the initial value) is performed with the acceptance of the effect as a trigger. avoid Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, when a predetermined timing ts16 arrives, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is increased from a specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced. Processing (returning to the initial volume value) is performed. On the other hand, if the specific effect condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of "BGM playback" is specified among the predetermined effect sounds (failure effect sound, etc.) being played, as in the other example described above. A process of increasing the volume from the value (a process of returning the volume to the initial value) may be performed. (processing to return to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the pattern variation may be terminated without raising a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) from a specific value. good.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 267, a restriction process is performed to make it difficult to assign new sounds to empty channels over at least a period from a predetermined timing before timing ts12 to timing ts16. It is desirable to In addition, such restriction processing may be, for example, a block winning sound, a pending winning sound, a general electric effect sound, an adjustment sound, etc., and has nothing to do with the result of whether or not a big winning pattern appears due to the pattern variation being executed. It is desirable to set a specific game sound as a restricted target, and not to reproduce the restricted specific game sound without newly allocating it to a channel.

Further, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a pattern variation according to the result of the big hit determination, a specific effect sound (BGM (preferably not music but a dramatic sound such as a sound effect or dialogue so as not to overlap with the sound), and while the specific dramatic sound is being played, the timing ts12 arrives and the BGM is played. It is desirable to output the sound in a suppressed manner or in silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is mixed in with the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of the BGM reproduction is suppressed or silenced. It should be noted that, with respect to a specific effect sound, the reproduction state thereof should be terminated before the timing ts14 at which the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14). is desirable in terms of alleviating anxiety that the special effect sound is not output.

Further, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the sound of BGM reproduction starts from the timing ts14 when the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable to output dramatic sounds on a plurality of channels until timing ts16 when the suppression mode or the state of silence is terminated. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including the special effect sound are output, the BGM playback sound can be easily blended into these effect sounds, and the BGM playback sound can be normally reproduced. It will be possible to secretly transition to the playback state in the mode.

Further, such suppressed operation sound output processing does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. "Sound of BGM playback" is adopted as a restriction target, and the smaller the number of minimum empty channels is, the smaller the number of pattern fluctuations (when the minimum number of empty channels in the pattern fluctuation is less than the predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than the predetermined number). The rate at which the suppressed operation sound output process is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in a situation where the number of empty channels is sufficient to prevent the feeling of uneasiness that the special effect sound is not output due to the lack of channels, the sound of the BGM reproduction is output without being suppressed or silenced. be able to

[Channel allocation cancellation operation]
As described above, in a gaming machine with a finite number of channels, even if a special result is obtained in the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is allocated. In (situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), it is not possible to allocate a special sound to a channel corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained, and there is concern that this inability to output may reduce the enjoyment of the game.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the process of changing at least one of the channels to which sound data is assigned to an empty channel to which no sound data is assigned is triggered by detection by the detecting means. It is made executable (channel allocation cancellation operation). That is, in this case, since an empty channel is created with the operation by the player as a trigger, the empty channel is created by the player's operation at the timing immediately before the player's favorite effect sound or special sound is generated. By securing in advance, it is possible to reliably output the effect sound or special sound that the player likes through the previously secured empty channel.

It should be noted that the operation (channel allocation cancellation operation) in this example of explanation is not limited to the "button operation", and may be an act of holding a hand over the pachinko machine 1 and praying, for example, with reference to FIGS. 258 to 262. In short, a predetermined contact or non-contact sensor capable of detecting any state change that occurs when such a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) to be detected is performed It is sufficient to use the detection as a trigger to remove the sound assigned to the channel from the channel and terminate the reproduction.

FIG. 268 is a time chart showing an example of channel assignment status when processing related to such channel assignment cancellation operation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 268, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is executed, at timing tw11, a predetermined effect pattern is being developed on the game board side effect display device 1600. (for example, the effect sound reproduced during execution of the super ready-to-win effect) is assigned to the reproduction channels 00 and 01 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction), and The sound of "BGM2 reproduction" according to the production mode (for example, one song that is continuously reproduced across multiple fluctuations in a time-saving game state, etc.) is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction ).

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 268(a) and 268(b), among these sounds in the playback state (BGM1 playback, BGM2 playback), the sound of "BGM2 playback" is the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation). is detected, the channel assignment is forcibly terminated, and during the period in which the pattern variation is being executed, at timing tw12, the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) production acceptance The allowable acceptance period can be generated up to timing tw13. It should be noted that during the acceptance period from timing tw12 to timing tw13, a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) to be detected such as "operate a button to secure an empty channel" in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed.

Here, FIG. 268(a) shows the assignment status of each channel when no specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is performed during the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13 and detection by a predetermined detecting means is not performed. showing.

As shown in FIG. 268(a), if the predetermined detection means does not detect the timing tw13, the sound of "BGM2 playback" is removed from the playback channels 02 and 03. This is continuously reproduced even after the timing tw13 arrives. Further, at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, the operation instruction image (operate the button to secure an empty channel) displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is hidden.

Further, at timing tw13, a process of allocating a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determination sound) to the empty channels (playback channels 10 and 11) and reproducing it is performed. In this illustrative example, even if the reproduction channels 02 and 03 are not changed to vacant channels by the detection by the predetermined detection means, since vacancies have been secured in advance for the other channels (reproduction channels 10 and 11), the vacancies can be determined. It is possible to allocate a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determination sound) to a channel and reproduce it. However, if vacancies have not been secured in advance for other channels, there is no vacant channel to which the predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit confirmation sound) can be assigned, and this cannot be reproduced and output. This raises concerns.

FIG. 268(b) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a during the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13 and detection is made by a predetermined detecting means. showing.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 268(b), when detection is made by the predetermined detection means before timing tw13 arrives, reproduction channels 02 and 03 are detected at timing tw12a at which the detection is made. , the sound of "BGM2 playback" will be removed. As a result, it becomes possible to secure in advance empty channels (playback channels 02 and 03) that can function as allocation targets for a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmed sound) until the timing tw13 arrives. , the concern that a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) cannot be reproduced and output can be eliminated. In addition, when the predetermined detection means detects the sound of "BGM2 playback", the playback state of the sound is forcibly terminated. , until a good cut), the playback ends at a halfway point without being played, so I remember the feeling that an empty channel was secured in advance by a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) by the player. It becomes possible to make it easier, and it becomes possible to wait for the timing at which a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) is reproduced.

At the timing tw12a at which the predetermined detection means detects, the sound reproduction state of "BGM2 reproduction" is forcibly terminated, and the operation instruction image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (Operate the button to secure an empty channel) is hidden, and the reception period during which the performance reception of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is permitted is terminated.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 268(b), at timing tw13, the other channels (reproduction channels 10, 11) is reproduced by allocating a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a big hit confirmation sound). However, if there is no vacancy in other channels at timing tw13, a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) is assigned to the previously secured reproduction channels 02 and 03 and reproduced.

Alternatively, when the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at the timing tw12a and the effect sound is removed from the specific channel based on the detection by the predetermined detection means, the other channel is available. Alternatively, a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a big hit determination sound) may be assigned to the specific channel and played back. That is, in this case, when assigning a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) to a specific channel and reproducing it, a effect sound (here, , BGM 2) is assigned, the assignment state is canceled at that point when a specific action such as a button operation is detected (channel assignment cancellation operation), so one channel (specific channel) It is possible to reproduce the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" and the predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit confirmed sound) only by using it, and it becomes possible to effectively use the reproduction channel which is a limited resource. .

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 268(b), at the timing tw13 when the acceptance period ends, the predetermined effect sound (here, the jackpot confirmation sound) is played back, but the timing is later than the timing tw13. You may make it reproduce|regenerate a predetermined production sound (here, a big-hit determination sound) by .

In addition to the big win confirmation sound, the predetermined effect sound may be a effect sound suggesting the degree of expectation for the appearance of the big win pattern, a effect sound suggesting that the player has lost the big win, or the like. It is desirable that these effect sounds are selectively output based on the type of effect pattern appearing in the symbol variation. Alternatively, in the case of suggesting that the big hit has been lost, even if the timing tw13 arrives, no effect sound may be output and the vacant channel may not necessarily be used.

On the other hand, the sound for ending the channel allocation at the time when the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is detected is not the sound output in any of the multiple modes, but the sound output in only one mode. It is desirable to execute it as a specific sound. That is, in this case, even if you miss the content of the specific sound when the playback state is forcibly terminated, it is possible to easily predict the content of the specific sound and there is no problem. It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest when the state is forcibly terminated.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 268(b), when the predetermined timing within the symbol variation arrives, a reception period is generated in which the performance reception of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is allowed. is not limited to For example, at least during the period in which the specific sound to be excluded from channel assignment is in the reproduction state, the acceptance of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is allowed at any time, and the channel assignment of the specific sound is based on the acceptance. may be resolved. In this case, for example, after maintaining the state of a pre-assigned empty channel for a predetermined period of time, such as at a predetermined timing after a predetermined period of time has passed since the specific sound was played, another sound is played to the empty channel. It is desirable to have it assigned and played back.

Further, as a method of canceling the channel assignment of the specific sound to be forcibly terminated, there is a method of making the channel to which the specific sound has been assigned a vacant channel at that point in time, or a method of canceling the assignment of a predetermined sound (for example, 0 . The channel allocation of the specific sound may be canceled by overwriting the same channel with a very short allocation cancellation acceptance sound such as one second. Even with such a configuration, when the specific action is accepted and forcibly terminated, it is possible to cancel the channel assignment of the specific sound at an earlier stage than when the forcible termination is not performed.

Also, at least during the period from when the reception of the effect of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is permitted until the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound using the empty channel created by the reception of the effect is completed, a new sound In order to prevent the channel from being wasted due to the generation of , look-ahead effects, etc.) should not be output.

In addition, the specific sound ("BGM2 playback" sound) to be forcibly terminated is a non-loop effect sound such as a song or dialogue that is played only for a predetermined period of time without looping. It is preferable to make it easier for the player to feel that an empty channel has been secured in advance by a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) by the player so that the playback ends at a halfway point without being played to the end. .

[Abnormality notification during production according to the production pattern]
As described above, in a gaming machine with a finite number of channels, even if a special result is obtained in the judgment by the judging means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is allocated. In (situation where the number of empty channels is 0), it is not possible to allocate a special sound to a channel corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained, and there is concern that this inability to output may reduce the enjoyment of the game.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to this is not necessarily assigned to a channel and output. is generated in a specific situation, a specific notification sound is assigned to a channel and output. That is, in this case, when a specific abnormal condition occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the condition is not necessarily output, so that the channel has a margin corresponding to it, thereby reducing the risk of running out of empty channels. is expected.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined movable decoration is not at the specific position (origin position) even though it is the timing when it should be at the specific position (origin position). is detected by a predetermined sensor (movable body abnormality), it is determined that a predetermined movable decorative body has abnormality (movable body abnormality). Then, when such a movable body abnormality occurs, as notification processing by the pachinko machine 1, a notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, "a movable body abnormality has occurred") is output and a game is played. Abnormality display (for example, "Abnormal occurrence in the movable effect unit 3200 in the back") in the display area of the board side effect display device 1600 can be executed. It should be noted that it is desirable to display the abnormality in the display area so that it is possible to identify which of the plurality of movable decorations has an abnormality. It may also be possible to identify which group of movable decorations has an abnormality. For example, as the plurality of movable decorations, a plurality of frame-side movable decorations (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 side, and a plurality of board-side movable decorations provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100, , back middle movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back right movable production unit 3400, back upper movable production unit 3500, back lower movable production unit 3700, etc.) are provided, the frame side movable An abnormality is displayed in the display area in such a manner that it is possible to specify which side of the decoration body or the board-side movable decoration body has the abnormality. It should be noted that a plurality of movable decorations refer to movable decorations that are separately provided with different driving sources.

However, such a movable body abnormality is basically caused by a malfunction of the movable decoration, and there is a high possibility that there is no negligence on the part of the player. Therefore, if the notification process is executed while various games (symbol variation, jackpot games, etc.) are being executed according to the judgment of the big hit, the effect during execution This is a disappointment for the player because it has an adverse effect on the player. In addition, since the number of vacant channels is reduced by the amount of output of the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, the player may feel uneasy about not being able to output new sounds. , There is concern that the interest in gaming will decline.

On the other hand, however, the malfunction of the movable decoration often occurs when the movable decoration is in operation, and it is difficult to imagine a situation in which the movable decoration suddenly breaks down when the movable decoration is not in operation. Then, when the movable decoration body is not operating at all, the movable body abnormality occurs when the movable decoration body is removed from the specific position (origin position) due to an illegal act such as a thump or wire entry. There is a possibility that it is in a detected situation, and if it is possible to prevent the output of the notification sound corresponding to the movable object abnormality even in such a situation, it may encourage fraudulent behavior, and it is legitimate. From the point of view of such players, there is a concern that the interest in games will decrease.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such a movable object abnormality occurs during the period when various games (symbol variation, big win game, etc.) corresponding to the big win determination are being executed, and this is detected. Even in such a case, notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 (output of notification sound, abnormal display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, abnormal lighting by various lamps, etc.) can be executed. However, during the period in which various games (symbol variations, jackpot games, etc.) are executed according to the big hit determination, at least the process of operating the movable decorative body by the production control by the peripheral control board 1510 (variation pattern (production pattern) If a movable body abnormality is detected during the movable body drive processing that operates the movable decorative body based on the performance pattern during the jackpot game, etc., the notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 (output of notification sound , abnormal display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, abnormal lighting by various lamps, etc.) are not performed. In addition, the external output (hall side notification) of information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decoration is not performed openly and does not adversely affect the performance, so it may be performed regardless of the situation.

According to such a configuration, even during the period when various games (symbol variation, jackpot game, etc.) corresponding to the jackpot determination are being executed, the movable decorative body is unlikely to malfunction (by the peripheral control board 1510). Movable body abnormality in the situation where the processing to operate the movable decoration by the performance control (the movable body drive processing to operate the movable decoration based on the variation pattern (performance pattern) or the performance pattern during the jackpot game) is not performed) When this occurs, the notification processing by the pachinko machine 1, such as an abnormal notification sound, can be performed. Since the pachinko machine 1 does not perform notification processing such as an abnormal notification sound when it occurs, the person who commits cheating is restrained from committing the cheating, but the game is legal. People are expected to avoid adversely affecting the performance being executed.

For example, even if a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body by performance control by the peripheral control board 1510, the display control in the game board side performance display device 1600, the allocation control of the performance sound to the channel, and the occurrence of the abnormality The light emission control of the light emitting part including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body is executed in the same manner as when the movable body abnormality is not detected, so there is no adverse effect on the performance during execution. What is exerted becomes suppressed. However, even if the timing for reactivating the corresponding movable decoration comes after the abnormality of the movable body is detected, it is possible to operate the movable decoration while the movable decoration is not yet recovered from the abnormal state. No performance is performed.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when an abnormality of the movable body is detected, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is in a state of performing notification processing such as an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body. Regardless, in order to restore the movable decoration from the abnormal state, restoration processing can be executed to perform a predetermined restoration operation (movement to a specific position (original position)) for the movable decoration. This restoration process may be executed with different contents depending on the type of the movable decoration in which the abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, even if the specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state during the execution period of the pattern variation in which the specific movable effect to operate the specific movable decoration is performed, the specific movable effect is started. When the specific movable decoration is restored from the abnormal state in the previous stage, it becomes possible to execute the specific movable effect to operate the specific movable decoration.

It should be noted that, even though the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation (movement to a specific position (original position)) is performed on the movable decoration, the movable decoration cannot be identified within the predetermined time. If it does not return to the position (original position), it is determined that the restoration has failed, and the game or performance progresses while maintaining the abnormal state.

FIG. 269 shows the assignment status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of moving the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination during the period when the pattern variation is performed. , and a time chart showing an example of the situation on the side of the movable decoration.

As shown in FIG. 269(a), during the period when the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing ti11, the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already being reproduced (in this case, stereo reproduction).

In this pattern variation (specific effect pattern), at timing ti12, an operation effective period (effective period of reception of effect) during which an operation opportunity is given to the player can occur over a period up to timing ti14. Then, when the player's operation (for example, the operation button 410) is detected within this period (period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the effective period of operation (effective period of effect reception) is terminated with this as a trigger. Effect control for operating a specific movable decoration is executed. If the player's operation (for example, the operation button 410) is not detected within the operation valid period (effective period of reception of the effect), the effect control for operating a specific movable ornament is executed after timing ti14. Alternatively, the performance control itself for operating a specific movable decoration may not be executed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 269, it is assumed that the player's operation is received as an effect at timing ti13. Therefore, at timing ti13, based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received, the movable object driving process is executed, and the movable effect of performing the effect operation of the specific movable decorative object is performed (see FIG. 269(b)). (see FIG. 269(a)), the effect sounds matching the movable effect are assigned to the channels 08 and 09 and reproduced (see FIG. 269(a)).

Here, as the movable body driving process, for example, when operating a specific movable decorative body, first, it is determined whether or not there is a state in which an abnormality history is stored. As a result, when the abnormality history is stored, the movable body driving process is ended without performing any driving because the restoring process has failed and recovery cannot be expected. On the other hand, when the abnormality history is not stored, information is obtained from a predetermined sensor, and based on the information, it is determined whether or not the specific movable decoration is at the specific position (original position). As a result, when the specific movable decoration is at the specific position (original position), the specific movable decoration is operated in a manner determined by the performance pattern. In such an operation, a specific movable decoration is finally returned to a specific position (original position). When it is determined based on the information that the movable body is returned to the specific position (original position), the movable body driving process is terminated. However, if it is determined in the movable body driving process that the specific movable decoration is not at the specific position (original position), the restoration process is executed to perform a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration. After that, the movable body driving process is terminated. Also, at this time, if the restoration process fails, the abnormality history is stored in a predetermined storage area.

With such a movable body driving process, the specific movable decorative body will perform the performance action from timing ti13. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs and this can no longer operate. In FIG. 269(b), the dotted range indicates the period during which the specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at a timing ti17 after the driving (driving for effect operation) of the specific movable decoration ends, it is determined that the specific movable decoration is not in a state of being returned to the specific position (original position) (the movable body Abnormality is determined), and based on the determination, restoration processing is executed to perform a predetermined restoration operation for a specific movable decoration.

However, as described above, the situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in a specific movable decoration while the specific movable decoration is operating based on the performance pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is the movable decoration. Since it can be said that there is a high possibility that the malfunction is caused by the failure of the decorative body, in this example of explanation, the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is not assigned to a channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the allocation control of the effect sound to the channel, and the light emission control of the light emitting part including the lamp mounted on the abnormal movable decorative body are controlled when the movable body abnormality occurs. Since it is executed in the same manner as when it is not detected, adverse effects on the effect being executed are suppressed.

At timing ti18, restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decoration ends. At this time, it is detected that the movable decoration has returned to a specific position (original position). When it is determined that the abnormality of the movable body has been eliminated, the memory of the abnormality history is erased, and after that, it is possible to execute the movable presentation as usual. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 269(b), it is not detected that the movable ornament has returned to the specific position (original position) (it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been resolved), and recovery fails. In this case, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the game and performance are progressed while the abnormal state is maintained without performing the predetermined restoration operation. That is, in this case, even if the timing for executing the movable effect using the specific movable decoration based on the effect pattern arrives within the same pattern variation or within the pattern variation after the next time, the specific movable decoration will not be displayed. The effect operation is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. In addition, various light-emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the abnormally occurring movable decorative body only emit light in the light-emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. However, in particular, even if the movable decoration itself does not operate, the actuator (lamp) mounted on it is operated (lighted) in the manner in which it is operated, so that when the movable effect is not performed. It has come to be expected to curb amusement interest.

In this way, during the period in which the pattern variation is performed, at least when the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern (drawing pattern) corresponding to the big hit determination, the movable body By not assigning an abnormality notification sound corresponding to an abnormality to a channel and not reproducing it, it is possible to suppress adverse effects on the performance being executed.

On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the same movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) within the same variation pattern (specific production pattern) as the example shown in FIG. When it occurs at a timing different from when a specific movable decorative body is operated by performance control (performance pattern), an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is assigned to a channel and reproduced.

In FIG. 270, during the period in which the pattern variation is performed, the movable body abnormality occurs not in the process of moving the movable decoration according to the variation pattern (performance pattern) according to the big hit determination, but in a process different from this. 5 is a time chart showing an example of the assignment status of each channel and the status of the movable decoration when detected.

As shown in FIG. 270(a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is executed, at timing ti11, as described above, the game board side effect The sound of "BGM reproduction" according to the specific effect pattern being developed on the display device 1600 is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already being reproduced (in this case, stereo reproduction).

Also, as described above, in this pattern variation (specific production pattern), at timing ti12, the operation effective period (effective period of reception of production) during which the operation opportunity is given to the player reaches the maximum at timing ti14. can occur over a period of up to Then, when the player's operation (for example, the operation button 410) is detected within this period (period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the effective period of operation (effective period of effect reception) is terminated with this as a trigger. Effect control for operating a specific movable decoration is executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 270, at the timing ti11a before the timing ti12 at which such a specific movable decoration can perform the performance action, the specific movable decoration is moved by some external force (the action is not based on the performance pattern). It is assumed that the specific movable decorative body is not detected at the specific position (original position) at the timing ti11b when it should be at the specific position (original position) (movable body abnormality). Also in FIG. 270(b), the dotted range indicates the period during which a specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing ti11b, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, restoration processing is executed to perform a predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decoration.

At timing ti13a, restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decoration ends. At this time, it is detected that the movable decoration has returned to a specific position (origin position) If it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved, the memory of the abnormality history will be erased, and after that, it will be possible to execute normal movement effects without any abnormality notification. Become so. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 270, the operation effective period (timing ti12 to timing ti14) occurs so as to straddle such timing ti13a. Therefore, when the player's operation is accepted within the period from timing ti12 to timing ti13a of the operation valid period, the specific movable decoration is still in an abnormal state, and therefore the performance action of the specific movable decoration is performed. Instead, the game board side effect display device 1600 executes the display effect when the movable effect is performed, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced, and an abnormality occurs. Various light-emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body emit light only in the light-emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the player's operation is accepted within the period of timing ti13a to timing ti14 of the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14), the abnormal state of the specific movable ornament is restored by the restoration process. If it is canceled, the usual production control (movable body, display production, production sound, light emission) is executed, including the production operation of the specific movable ornament. Note that this example of explanation is based on the assumption that a movable body abnormality has occurred only in a specific movable decorative body (one movable decorative body) and restoration processing is being executed accordingly. . That is, when a plurality of movable decorations including a specific movable decoration are in the state of executing the restoration process, even if the player's operation is accepted within the period from timing ti13a to timing ti14, the specific movable decoration is restored. Although the performance action of the movable decoration is not necessarily performed, this will be described later with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272. FIG.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 270, it is assumed that at timing ti13a, it is not detected that the movable ornament has returned to the specific position (original position) (it is determined that the abnormality of the movable body has been resolved) and recovery fails. are doing. Therefore, after the timing ti13a, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the game and the performance are progressed while the abnormal state is maintained without performing the predetermined restoration operation.

Also, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in a specific movable decoration even though it is not the timing at which the specific movable decoration is operated based on the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It can be said that there is a possibility that an abnormality has been detected due to a specific movable decoration being removed from a specific position (original position) due to an illegal act such as a thump or wire entry. Moreover, at timing ti13a, even in the restoration process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body, the abnormal state of the movable body was not resolved due to some external force, and there was a possibility that a fraudulent act was carried out. It can be said that it is increasing more and more.

Therefore, at this timing ti13a, although the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) is being executed, the notification process corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is executed. That is, in this case, in the channel, in addition to allocating and reproducing various effects sounds corresponding to a specific effect pattern in accordance with the progress of the effect contents, an abnormality notification sound is played over a predetermined period of time on the reproduction channel 00, 01 will be assigned to and played back. In addition, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display effect corresponding to the specific effect pattern progressing and being executed as it is, an abnormality display corresponding to the movable object abnormality (for example, " Abnormal Occurrence in Back Middle Movable Production Unit 3200”, etc.) will be executed. In addition, in the various light emitting units, as a mode corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, some light emitting parts are caused to emit light in an abnormal mode, and other light emitting parts are made to emit light in a normal mode according to the progress of the production content. It will emit light.

According to the examples of FIGS. 269 and 270, even if the same movable body abnormality occurs during one pattern variation, at least the period during which the control of the performance operation of the movable decoration based on the variation pattern is executed. When the abnormality of the movable body occurs during the operation, there is a low possibility that a fraudulent act is being carried out and there is also a possibility of a failure during the performance operation, so that the performance is output with priority over the abnormality notification. . On the other hand, when the movable body abnormality suddenly occurs when the control related to the performance operation of the movable decoration based on the variation pattern is not executed, there is a high possibility that the fraudulent act is being performed, and the abnormality is more likely than the performance. It has a characteristic configuration assuming that it is more important to output the notification.

In the example shown in FIG. 270, at timing ti11b, the notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality is not performed, and at timing ti13a when the movable body abnormality is not resolved even though the restoration process is executed, the notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality is performed. I decided to do However, at timing ti11b, a movable body abnormality is detected even though the specific movable decorative body is in a situation where it cannot operate based on the effect pattern. Since it can be said that there is a high possibility that the movable body is in a state of being in a state where there is a high possibility that the movable body is abnormal, output of a notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body may be started at this timing ti11b. At this time, notification by display or notification by a lamp may also be performed.

In short, regarding the notification process in response to the abnormality of the movable body, within the period in which the pattern variation is performed, "Even though the specific movable decoration is not performing the production operation based on the production pattern, the specific movable decoration and ``that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decoration while the specific movable decoration is performing a production operation based on the production pattern''. is a sufficient condition to prevent it from being executed, so that the person who commits cheating is restrained from committing the cheating, but the execution is still being performed for the legitimate player. It will be expected to avoid adversely affecting the performance of. In addition, as a condition for performing the notification process according to the abnormality of the movable body within the period in which the pattern variation is performed, "Even though the specific movable decoration is not performing the production action based on the production pattern, the specific movable decoration In addition to at least adopting "the occurrence of an abnormality in the body", for example, "the failure of restoration processing performed in response to the occurrence of an abnormality" or "the occurrence of an abnormality under a specific situation" etc. can be employed as further conditions.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration during the process of operating the specific movable decoration in accordance with the effect pattern. However, if an abnormality occurs when a specific movable decoration is operated according to the production pattern, this will not be used as a trigger for notification processing in response to the abnormality of the movable body. It may be arranged not to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration during the process of moving the decoration according to the effect pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the determination of whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is made periodically at a predetermined timing or every predetermined time.

In addition, the method for detecting abnormality of the movable body is not limited to detecting the position of the movable decoration to be detected. Other techniques such as detection may be employed. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 269, the actuator such as the motor for operating the movable decoration is overloaded at the timing ti17, and as a result, the abnormality of the movable body is detected. Further, in the example of FIG. 270, an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded at timing ti11b, and as a result, an abnormality of the movable body is detected.

Also, in the examples shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, the specific movable ornaments are made to produce effects at the timing of the player's operation. may be performed.

In addition, among the notifications corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to a channel and reproduced for a predetermined period of time. A lowering process may be performed.

It should be noted that if the abnormality notification is not executed under the sufficient condition that ``an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration while the specific movable decoration is performing an effect operation based on the effect pattern'', the abnormality notification will not be executed thereafter. However, even if the abnormal condition remains unresolved, it is desirable that the abnormal condition is not notified at least as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply continues. Moreover, it is desirable that the game or performance progresses while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoration operation.

[Restoration processing of a plurality of movable decorations]
As described above, in a gaming machine with a finite number of channels, even if a special result is obtained in the judgment by the judging means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is allocated. In (situation where the number of empty channels is 0), it is not possible to allocate a special sound to a channel corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained, and there is concern that this inability to output may reduce the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, conventionally, common abnormal sound data (one abnormality By assigning sound data) to channels and playing them back, even in a situation where movable body abnormalities occur simultaneously for multiple movable decorations, the number of channels used does not increase unnecessarily. rice field. It should be noted that the movable body abnormality is a state in which the movable body cannot operate properly, and is the same as the one exemplified in the "abnormality notification during the production according to the production pattern". be.

However, in recent years, the number of movable decorations mounted on game machines has increased, and simply associating common abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) with all movable decorations does not It is becoming difficult to appropriately report the state of the aircraft. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of movable decorations are divided into two or more groups, and different abnormality notification sounds are transmitted to channels depending on which of the groups the movable decoration belongs to which abnormality has occurred. By assigning and reproducible, the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be appropriately notified even when the number of movable decorations mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is increasing.

In this example as well, when a movable body abnormality occurs, as described in the above example of "abnormality notification during performance according to the performance pattern" (see FIGS. 269 and 270) is processed. Therefore, even in this example, even when various games (symbol variations, big win games, etc.) occur during the execution period and are detected, the notification processing (output of notification sound) by the pachinko machine 1 , abnormal display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and abnormal lighting by various lamps) can be executed. Also, similarly, during the period when various games (symbol variation, jackpot game, etc.) corresponding to the big hit determination are being executed, at least processing (variation pattern When a movable body abnormality is detected during the movable body driving process for operating the movable decorative body based on the performance pattern (effect pattern) or the performance pattern during the jackpot game, the notification process by the pachinko machine 1 ( Output of notification sound, abnormal display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, abnormal lighting by various lamps, etc.) are not performed.

However, in this example, if a plurality of movable ornamental objects have movable object abnormalities at the same time, only one abnormal sound data corresponding to a specific group among the above groups is assigned to a channel and set to be reproduced. On the other hand, all of the plurality of movable decorations in which the abnormality has occurred are subjected to the restoration operation. According to such a configuration, it is expected that even if a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, it is possible to reduce the risk of leaving a free channel by providing a sufficient channel. In addition, it is possible to quickly recover from abnormalities for each movable decoration, and it is expected that the channel usage time will be reduced through the efficiency of the processing itself when an abnormality occurs. . In addition, regarding the contents of the restoration process and each process at the time of its success and failure, the above-mentioned "anomaly notification while the effect corresponding to the effect pattern is being performed" (see FIGS. 269 and 270) ).

Here, the mode of dividing the plurality of movable decorations into two or more groups is required to be a mode suitable for informing the state of the pachinko machine 1. For example, it is provided on the door frame 3 side. A plurality of frame-side movable decorations (not shown) and a plurality of board-side movable decorations provided on the game board 5 side (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100, a back middle movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back Right movable production unit 3400, upper back movable production unit 3500, lower back movable production unit 3700, etc.), the frame side movable decorative body that can be contacted without opening the door frame 3 is abnormal. Whether an abnormality has occurred or whether an abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative body, which is difficult to contact unless the door frame 3 is opened, can be transmitted to the hall side by the type of abnormality notification sound. become. In other words, when an abnormality occurs in the board-side movable decoration, it can be said that there is a higher possibility of cheating than in the case where an abnormality occurs in the frame-side movable decoration, as contact is difficult. Therefore, by performing notification sound output based on such grouping, even though it is a notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, depending on the type, the player side does not notice (unpleasant feeling) It is possible to secretly inform the hall side that the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation where the possibility of fraud is high.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment as well, when a movable body abnormality occurs, as notification processing by the pachinko machine 1, in addition to outputting the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, the game board side effect display is performed. As described above, the abnormal display within the display area of the device 1600 can be executed. In this regard, in this example of explanation, among the notification processing in response to the abnormality of the movable body, the notification mode by the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 also divides the plurality of movable decorations into two or more groups, and It is desirable to perform a different notification display depending on whether an abnormality has occurred in the movable decoration belonging to. However, the above-mentioned "notification by display" is inferior to the above-mentioned "notification by sound" in the function of disseminating the occurrence of an abnormality, but is superior in the function of transmitting information to notify the details of the abnormality. It has the properties of Therefore, in the above-mentioned "notification by display", the above-mentioned grouping is performed in a manner different from the case of performing the above-mentioned "notification by sound" by utilizing the difference in nature, in a manner in which the information transmission function is more exhibited. In this way, it is desirable to display differently depending on which of the groups independently divided in this way the abnormalities have occurred in the movable ornaments.

That is, in this case, for example, the movable decorations A and B are grouped according to whether the movable decoration A has a movable abnormality or the movable decoration B has a movable abnormality. Depending on whether there is, "although the abnormality notification sound to be reproduced is the same regardless of the occurrence of any movable body abnormality, the notification content displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is a first notification mode in which different displays are performed," and "a second notification mode in which the notification contents are the same as each other in which an abnormality notification sound is reproduced and displayed regardless of the occurrence of any abnormality of the movable body. and "a third notification mode in which the notification contents are different from each other in which the abnormality notification sound that is reproduced and displayed is displayed even when any abnormality of the movable body occurs" is generated. Thus, it is possible to provide a more detailed notification mode by providing two different contents of notification, that is, sound and display.

FIG. 271 shows an example of the channel allocation status and the status of the movable decorations when movable body abnormalities occur simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorations at a specific timing during the pattern variation period. It is a time chart.

As shown in FIG. 271(a), during the period when the pattern variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing tj11, the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already being reproduced (in this case, stereo reproduction).

In this pattern variation (specific effect pattern), at timing tj13, an operation effective period (effective period of reception of effect) during which an operation opportunity is given to the player can occur up to timing tj15. Then, when the player's operation (for example, the operation button 410) is detected within this period (period from timing tj13 to timing tj15), the effective period of operation (effective period of effect acceptance) is terminated with this as a trigger. Effect control for operating a specific movable decoration is executed. In addition, if the player's operation (for example, the operation button 410) is not detected within the operation effective period (effective period of reception of the effect), the effect control for operating a specific movable decoration is executed after timing tj15. Alternatively, the performance control itself for operating a specific movable decoration may not be executed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it is assumed that the player's operation is received as an effect at timing tj14. Therefore, at timing tj14, the movable object driving process is executed based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted for the effect, and the movable effect of making the specific movable decorative object perform the effect operation is performed. 08 and 09 are assigned with the effect sound corresponding to the movable effect and reproduced.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 271, at timing tj11, a plurality of movable decorations are moved by some external force (movements not based on the production pattern), and the specific movable decorations are moved before timing tj13 when the specific movable decorations can perform the production operation. It is assumed that these movable body abnormalities are detected at the previous timing tj12. In FIG. 271(b) and FIG. 272(b) described later, the dotted range indicates the period during which each movable decoration is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at timing tj12, based on the determination that a movable body abnormality has occurred, the restoration process described above is executed to perform a predetermined restoration operation for each movable decorative body in which a movable body abnormality has occurred. Therefore, in relation to this restoration process, even if the player's operation is received at timing tj14, the specific movable decoration is not necessarily activated. In the example shown in FIG. 271, the board-side movable decoration A provided on the game board 5 side, the board-side movable decoration B provided on the game board 5 side, and the board-side movable decoration C provided on the game board 5 side. , frame-side movable decorative body D provided on the door frame 3 side, frame-side movable decorative body E provided on the door frame 3 side, and frame-side movable decorative body F provided on the door frame 3 side. Assume each situation.

More specifically, in the restoration process according to the example shown in FIG. D, E, and F have different processing modes. For example, regarding the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side, a plurality of movable decorations are arranged in a relatively narrow space, and if they operate simultaneously, they may interfere with each other due to contact. Therefore, after timing tj12, restoration processing is performed based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap each other. On the other hand, the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side operate using the space outside the pachinko machine 1, and the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C are used. Since there is no concern that mutual operations will interfere with each other, including the relationship between them, restoration processing is performed simultaneously at timing tj12 so that each movable decoration can quickly recover from an abnormality.

In such a configuration, the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side are restored over a long period of time from timing tj12 to timing tj18. In the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F provided in , the restoring process can be completed in a relatively short time from timing tj12 to timing tj16.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side until the end of the operation effective period (effective period of effect acceptance) during which the operation opportunity is given to the player. It is assumed that neither restoration processing for A, B, or C nor restoration processing for frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side is completed. Therefore, if the specific movable decoration corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C, it corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C, and the operation is valid. Even if the performance is received at any timing within the period (effective period of reception of the performance), processing is performed so as not to perform the performance action triggered by the reception of the performance.

In other words, in this case, if an effect reception occurs during the period in which restoration processing is being executed for a specific movable decoration, it is clear that the specific movable decoration cannot be caused to perform an effect operation with this as a trigger. In addition, even if the effect reception occurs after the restoration processing for a specific movable decoration is completed, the other board-side movable decorations that are still in the stage of executing the restoration processing may There is concern about interference. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, if the specific movable decoration corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C, any Even if the player's operation is accepted at the timing of , the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the channel On the other hand, a production sound (operation production sound) when the movement production is performed is assigned and played back, and various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decoration that has malfunctioned will perform the movement production. The light is emitted only in the light emission mode when the light is emitted. In short, if a particular movable decoration corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C, after all restoration processes for them are completed (all restoration processes are completed with success), Execution of the performance action is permitted only when the timing for performing the performance action of the specific movable ornament comes.

On the other hand, if the specific movable decoration corresponds to any one of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F, it corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F, and It is processed so that whether or not to perform a performance action triggered by the reception of the performance is changed depending on at which timing the performance is received within the operation effective period (validity period of the performance reception). becomes.

That is, in this case, first, if the specific movable decoration is the frame-side movable decoration E, timings tj13 to tj15 at which the specific movable decoration can perform the performance operation after completion of the restoration process (successful restoration process). always arrives, and even if the other movable decorations A to C, D, and F are in the process of being restored, there is no concern that they will interfere with each other. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, if the specific movable decoration corresponds to the frame-side movable decoration E, the operation by the player is accepted at any time within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is set, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed for the channel. A production sound (operation production sound) is assigned and reproduced when the is performed, and various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the abnormally occurring movable decoration are in the light emission mode when the movable production is performed. Light will be emitted.

On the other hand, if the specific movable decoration is the frame-side movable decoration D, the valid operation period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) occurs so as to straddle the timing at which the restoring process ends. Therefore, when the player's operation is accepted within the operation valid period before the restoration process is completed, the specific movable decoration is still in an abnormal state. The effect motion of the body is not performed, and the display effect when the movement effect is performed is performed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the effect sound when the movement effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. As a result, various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the abnormally occurring movable decoration only emit light in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the player's operation is accepted within the period after the completion of the restoration process (successful restoration process) in the operation valid period, the other movable decorations A to C and F are restored. Since there is no concern about interference between them even during the execution of the will be executed.

On the other hand, if the specific movable decoration is the frame-side movable decoration F, the valid operation period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) will not come after the restoring process is completed (restoring process succeeded). . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the above-mentioned specific movable decoration corresponds to the board-side movable decoration F, the player's operation is accepted within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is set, the performance action of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display performance when the movable performance is performed is performed in the game board side performance display device 1600, and the movable performance is performed for the channel. A production sound (operation production sound) is assigned and reproduced, and various light-emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the abnormal movable decoration emit light in the light-emitting mode when the movable production is performed. will remain at

Here, the notification processing according to the example shown in FIG. 271 will be described. , C, and a plurality of frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side. A different notification sound is output depending on the presence.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it is assumed that the movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in the board-side movable decorative body and the frame-side movable decorative body. However, such a situation cannot normally occur in the course of proper game progress, nor can it occur as a result of cheating. There is a high possibility that it is in a special situation such as manually tampering with all the movable decorations. In any case, in such a special situation, the notification process itself may become troublesome, and early termination of the notification state is required.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it was detected that the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F had movable body abnormalities. At timing tj12, the restoring process for the board-side movable ornament and the restoring process for the frame-side movable ornament are started at the same time as described above. The frame-side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the decorations D, E, and F is not assigned to a channel, and the board-side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C is assigned to the channel. I'm trying to keep it to output.

That is, the time during which the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is reproduced is the time until the abnormality of the movable decorative body to be notified is resolved, or a predetermined period after the abnormality notification sound is output. It is set as the time until the time (for example, 30 seconds common to the board side and the frame side) elapses. Therefore, among the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F, the "board-side movable decorations A, By assigning only the "common board-side abnormality notification sound corresponding to the B and C sides" to the channel, the "common board-side abnormality notification sound corresponding to the board-side movable decorative body A, B, C side" can be generated. Restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F can be terminated while the reproduction is being performed, and "anomaly notification common to the board-side corresponding to the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C side is performed. After the output of the "sound" is completed, the output request for the "frame-side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the frame-side movable ornaments D, E, and F" can be avoided. It becomes possible to end the notification process in a simpler manner.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, while the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F are being restored, the board-side movable decorations A, During the period up to timing tj18 when all restoration processes for B and C are completed, the "board-side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C" is assigned to a channel and played back. As a result, the "frame-side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the frame-side movable ornaments D, E, and F" is not reproduced. At this time, as described above, the allocation control of the sound effects to the channels is performed as usual.

On the other hand, in the notification mode by display on the game board side effect display device 1600 among the notification processing corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, the above-mentioned "notification by sound" is performed by utilizing the difference in nature from the notification sound described above. In a manner different from the above, the above-mentioned grouping is performed in a manner in which the information transmission function is more exhibited, and a different display is performed depending on which of the independently divided groups the movable decorative body belongs to has an abnormality. ing. That is, in this case, for example, if the frame-side movable decoration E is grouped with the frame-side movable decoration F, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decoration E is completed, the frame-side movable decoration E will not be processed. The "notification by display" is maintained, and the "notification by display" ends at the timing when the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body F ends. Similarly, for example, if board-side movable decoration A is grouped with frame-side movable decoration D, even if restoration processing for frame-side movable decoration A ends, this The corresponding "notification by display" is maintained, and the "notification by display" ends at the timing when the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body D ends. Therefore, even if the restoration processing for a specific movable decoration ends first, depending on the execution status of the restoration processing for the movable decorations grouped with the specific movable decoration, It is possible that the "notification by display" corresponding to the movable decoration for which restoration processing has been completed later may be terminated first.

According to the example of FIG. 271, a plurality of notification sounds corresponding to the type of the movable decoration in which the movable body abnormality has occurred are prepared as the notification sounds corresponding to the movable body abnormality. Then, when a plurality of movable ornamental bodies corresponding to each of these notification sounds have a movable body abnormality at the same time, only one of the plurality of notification sounds can be reproduced. Not only the movable decorations corresponding to the notification sounds in the above, but also the movable decorations not corresponding to the notification sounds are executed during the reproduction period. Moreover, when a plurality of movable decorations are in an abnormal state as the movable decorations corresponding to the notification sound in the reproducing state, the restoration processing is performed individually for these movable decorations according to a predetermined order. On the other hand, when a plurality of movable decorations are in an abnormal state as movable decorations that do not correspond to the notification sound in the reproducing state, the restoration process for these movable decorations is simultaneously executed. As a result, it is possible to shorten the total time required for restoration processing of the movable decorations that do not correspond to the notification sound that is being played back, compared to the movable decorations that correspond to the notification sound that is being played back. While one of the notification sounds is being reproduced, all the movable decorations can be restored from the abnormal state to the normal state, and the output of the second notification sound can be prevented. It becomes possible to avoid.

That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of movable decorations are grouped into board-side movable decorations and frame-side movable decorations, and restoration processing corresponding to each group is performed simultaneously. is not limited to The point is that a plurality of movable decorations (A to F in the above example) can be operated in two or more groups (in the above example, the board side and the frame side) to enable restoration processing to be executed independently for each group, and for a plurality of movable decorations (D to F) belonging to at least one group (the frame side in the above example), If it is possible to restore all of them at the same time by selecting movable ornaments that can operate without being affected by each other's operating conditions, see FIGS. 271 and 272. It is possible to configure to obtain the described effects.

In the example shown in FIG. 271, it is desirable that the determination of whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decoration is made periodically at a predetermined timing or every predetermined time. In addition, the method for detecting abnormality of the movable body is not limited to the detection of the position of the movable decoration to be detected. Other techniques such as detection may be employed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the specific movable decorative body is made to perform the performance action at the timing of the operation by the player, but the specific movable decorative body is to perform the performance action at the specific timing determined by the performance pattern. It may be something that causes

In addition, among the notifications corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to a channel and reproduced for a predetermined period of time. A lowering process may be performed.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 271, movable body abnormalities occurred in the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F during the period during which the pattern variation was executed. Although explained assuming the situation, the symbol variation does not necessarily have to be executed. That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, or when the special symbol game is in a state of waiting for progress (for example, during a demo screen), the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorations D, Even if a movable body abnormality occurs in each of E and F, each process corresponding to the movable body abnormality is performed in the same manner as the example described with reference to FIG. 271 .

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 271, all the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side are restored based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap each other. and However, if the board-side movable decorations include a plurality of movable decorations that do not interfere with each other due to contact even if they operate simultaneously, the board-side movable decorations are based on a predetermined order. During restoration processing, restoration processing may be performed simultaneously only for a portion of the movable decorative bodies that do not interfere with each other due to contact.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the timing for determining whether or not a movable body abnormality has occurred in board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the timing for determining whether a movable body abnormality has occurred in frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F are determined. Although it is assumed that the timing for determining whether or not an event has occurred is the same, these timings may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 272, after it is determined that board-side movable decorations A, B, and C have a movable body abnormality, frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F have a movable body abnormality. Even if it is determined to that effect, the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F ends earlier than the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C ends. As long as there is a relationship, after the output of "the board-side common abnormal notification sound corresponding to the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C sides" is completed, "the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F side It is possible to avoid the need to output the corresponding frame-side common abnormality notification sound.

Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 271, after it is determined that the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F have a movable-body abnormality, board-side movable decorations A, B, and C have a movable-body abnormality. A processing structure may be adopted in which it is determined that the processing has been performed. However, in this case, when it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F, notification processing corresponding to the movable body abnormality and restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F are performed. and after waiting until it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C, and then corresponding to the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C side. While the notification process is being performed, it is desirable to perform the restoration process for the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the restoration process for the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F, respectively. It should be noted that as a result of waiting for the execution of the determination process of whether or not the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C have a movable body abnormality, the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C did not have a movable body abnormality. In this case, while the notification process corresponding to the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F is being performed, the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F are restored.

[Automatic multiple operation function (automatic continuous tapping function)]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, there is a case where a plurality of operations (for example, repeatedly hitting the operation button 410) to predetermined operation means are urged, and a plurality of operation presentations are performed according to each of the operations. However, in recent years, during a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity for such multiple operations (such as repeated hits) is provided, the predetermined operation means (operation button 410) can be operated without operating the predetermined operation means (operation button 410) multiple times. is maintained in an operating state for a relatively long time (so-called long press, etc.). An automatic multiple operation function (Auto Continuous hit function) is becoming more and more installed.

In addition, in such an automatic multiple operation function (auto repeat function), when an operation in a long mode such as a so-called long press is performed, a single operation (one operation in a short time) is performed within a relatively short time. ) is being repeatedly performed (such as a feeling of rapid repeated hits). It can be said that this is important in suppressing a decline in interest in games for players, etc., and in encouraging various players to use the function. However, if the player is in the operating state, if a change in the effect (for example, an operation sound) is simply generated every time a relatively short period of time elapses when the effect is received, the player will feel the same. Even if you intend to perform an operation with a single press, the short operation time (the time during which the operation state is slightly maintained with a single press) may slightly lengthen or shorten, resulting in multiple receptions of the production. Occurs (multiple operation sounds occur), or the effect reception occurs only once (one operation sound occurs), and the number of effect receptions for one single operation is stable. There is a concern that the sense of incongruity caused by not playing the game may reduce the interest in the game.

In this regard, in the conventional auto repeated hit function, when a so-called long-press operation is performed, first, similarly to the case of a single-press operation, the effect change (for example, the operation sound etc.) occurs only once. After the first effect change (for example, an operation sound) is generated, no new effect reception (operation sound) is generated until a predetermined interval time longer than a predetermined short time elapses. After waiting for the predetermined interval time to elapse, the effect change (operation sound) when the effect reception is made is repeatedly generated every time a predetermined short time elapses. That is, in this case, a time margin is provided between the generation of the reception of the effect (operation sound) for the first time and the generation of the reception of the effect (operation sound) for the second time. While avoiding the discomfort caused by the instability of the number of receptions for the effect when the operation is performed, it is possible to repeat the operation within a relatively short period of time simply by performing the so-called long-press operation. It will be possible to produce a production that looks like this.

However, from the player's point of view, providing a time margin between the generation of the first performance reception (operation sound) and the generation of the second performance reception (operation sound) is itself a problem. It is useless in terms of operation production, and the number of production acceptance (operation sounds) per unit time is reduced by the amount of such wasted time (pseudo repeated hits when performing so-called long press There is concern about a decrease in interest in games due to the feeling that the speed is slow.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if an operation to the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed only once in a single operation mode, the operation to the operation means takes a long time. As in the case of an operation (such as a long press), a specific sound associated with the operation of the operation means can be intermittently output. In other words, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operation means, regardless of the operation mode, it feels as if a single operation (one operation in a short time) is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time. It is possible to make the player remember the feeling (such as feeling as if rapid repeated hitting is being performed). As a result, all kinds of operation modes can be adopted while stabilizing the responsiveness of the effect (whether the effect is changed once or multiple times) when the single-press operation is performed. Even if there is, it is possible to preferably maintain the number of occurrences of performance changes (for example, operation sounds, etc.) per unit time.

FIG. 273 is a time chart showing an example of the control contents for realizing such an automatic multiple operation function (auto repeat function). Here, it is assumed that the operation button 410 is employed as the operation means. In addition, in other drawings including FIG. 273, the white specific sound output in the drawing indicates the specific sound generated based on the reception of the effect in response to the operation of the button 410. The black specific sound output in the figure indicates a specific sound that is generated following the white specific sound output in the figure when the operation button 410 is not operated and no performance reception is occurring. is. It is desirable that the volumes and timbres of these specific sounds are the same and not different from each other.

First, in the example shown in FIG. 273(a), an operation state is maintained only for a short period of time at timing tx11 within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity for multiple operations (such as repeated hits) is given (single-shot operation). It is assumed that one operation is performed in . Therefore, at timing tx11, it is detected (determined) that the operation button 410 has been operated. Processing for starting the output of the display accompanying the operation (display pattern at the time of operation) is performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after the specific sound (for example, "picone") accompanying the operation of the operation button 410 is output at timing tx11, the player's hand is released from the operation button 410. Even in a situation where no operation is performed (time period tx12 to tx13 in the figure), the specific sound (for example, "picone") associated with the operation of the operation button 410 is intermittent in this situation. It is possible to directly output.

For example, at timing tx12, the operation state (detection state) from timing tx11 is terminated. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a delay time TY1 having a predetermined length of time is set based on the termination of the operation state (detection state). Then, even if the operation by the player is not detected at all until this grace time TY1 elapses, a specific sound (for example, "piccorn ”) is output, a specific sound (for example, “picone”) associated with the operation of the operation button 410 can be output intermittently.

Here, in the grace time TY1 and the automation time TY2 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is set to have a length of time that allows it to output a specific sound (e.g., "picone") of minutes. As a result, even if an operation is performed in a single-shot operation mode within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity for multiple operations (such as repeated hits) is given, a specific sound accompanying the operation (sound corresponding to the reception of the effect) is at least 5 times (N times) (one specific sound output at the timing of operation detection, and after that, 4 times (N- It will be intermittently output for 1 time) and the total number of minutes).

In particular, in this embodiment, the timing at which the grace period TY1 ends during the output of the specific sound (for example, "picone") (in the example shown in FIG. Even if the timing tx13) at which the time TY1 ends, processing (such as output interruption processing or other overwrite processing with sound) is not performed, and even after the timing tx13 arrives, the specific sound that has been output until then (the first to fourth specific sounds in the example shown in FIG. 273(a)) Outputs (sound waveforms) in the same manner are made to appear. That is, if the specific sound associated with the operation is interrupted in the middle, it becomes ambiguous whether the operation has been accepted for a plurality of performances or not. There is a concern that it will be difficult for the player to remember (the player will think that it is nothing more than a specific sound generated artificially in a non-operating state), but according to such a configuration, such a concern can be solved. It is hoped that the problem will be resolved favorably.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the predetermined valid period expires during the period from the start of the grace time TY1 to the elapse of the grace time TY1, and the new operation is no longer accepted for the effect, the Until the grace period TY1 ends, a specific sound (for example, "picone") is output each time the automation time TY2 arrives. That is, in this case, since the specific sound can be output intermittently even after the expiration of the predetermined valid period, it is possible to avoid the unstable number of receptions of the effect when the single-shot operation is performed. In addition, it is possible to make the player feel as if the operation was performed within a period exceeding the predetermined valid period, and it is expected that the game interest will be improved. In this sense, it is necessary to provide a display that allows the player to recognize whether the predetermined validity period is continuing or has ended (such as displaying the remaining time that the validity period continues). It is more desirable to output the specific sound for the remaining number of times (1 to 4 times) under the condition that it is recognizable that the state is finished.

In addition, regarding "specific sound output accompanying operation" in the figure, rather than the signal waveform accompanying the specific sound output, the volume waveform of the specific sound output each time the automation time TY2 elapses (other sound output is ) is conceptually shown. As is clear from the figure, in this embodiment, the automation time TY2 is completed before the time required for the last specific sound to be output to the end. On the other hand, the sound data of the new specific sound is overwritten on the specific channel, and this makes it possible to output the specific sound continuously and intermittently, as if a fast continuous tapping operation is being performed. It will be expected that the player will be made to remember such a feeling.

By the way, as the playback type of the specific sound, in addition to the mode in which 1SHOT playback (equivalent to "1SHOT" in the drawing) is performed every time the automation time TY2 passes, the target sound is played once. Loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the drawing) may be performed in which playback is repeated each time the automated time TY2 elapses. Alternatively, a plurality of specific sounds that are intermittently output continuously may be reproduced as one sound data. In the case of a mode in which a plurality of specific sounds are reproduced as one sound data, all the specific sounds do not necessarily have to be output as the same single pronunciation, and are sequentially output as a plurality of different single pronunciations. There may be.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 273(a), also regarding the display output in the game board side effect display device 1600, after displaying the operation display pattern associated with the operation of the operation button 410 at the timing tx11, the operation button 410 is displayed. Even if the player leaves the hand and does not perform any operation (timings tx12 to tx13 in the figure), the display content of the display pattern at operation progresses multiple times in this situation. It is something that can be done.

For example, at timing tx12, the operation state (detection state) from timing tx11 is terminated. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, based on the completion of the operation state (detection state), the delay time TY1 having a predetermined length of time is set as described above. is. In this regard, in this embodiment, a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order over the time from timing tx11 to the expiration of the set grace period TY1. By executing, it is possible to develop the display contents of the display pattern at the time of operation.

The content of each display scene 1 to 5 can be set as shown in FIG. 274, for example. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 274, "display scene 1" is a moving image depicting a friendly character holding a sword and is about to draw it. This is a moving image depicting how a character draws a sword and iaikiri, and "display scene 3" is a moving image depicting how a friend character engages in a sword fight with an enemy character in the first mode. , "Display scene 4" is a moving image depicting a friendly character fighting with an enemy character with a sword in the second mode, and "Display scene 5" is a video showing a friendly character fighting an enemy character in a third mode. It is a moving image depicting the appearance of fighting with swords in a manner.

After the operation display pattern associated with the operation of the operation button 410 is displayed at the timing tx11, the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially displayed while the specific sound is intermittently output, thereby changing the friendly character to the enemy character. It is possible to make the player feel as if the content of the performance of fighting the character is progressing according to the operations performed a plurality of times. Note that the display scenes 1 to 5 do not necessarily have to be moving images, and may be still images. Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to displaying the operation display pattern, various effect displays (suspension display, operation instruction image, etc.) may be displayed. As one of the effect displays, an image may be included in which the effect changes (color change, etc.) each time the effect reception occurs due to an operation by the player. In order to make the operation difficult, it is important to display the image as a smaller image than the display pattern at the time of operation.

Here, in the operation display pattern (each display scene) and the grace period TY1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The time length is set so that at least five (M) display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) can be sequentially displayed. As a result, even if an operation is performed in a single-shot operation mode within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity for multiple operations (such as repeated hits) is given, at least five (M) display contents of the display pattern at the time of operation are displayed. ) minutes (one display scene 1 displayed at the timing of operation detection, and four (M-1 times) display scenes 2 to 5 that are sequentially displayed (progressed) even in the state of no operation after that. and the total number).

In particular, in this embodiment, the timing at which the grace period TY1 ends during the output of the display scene (in the example shown in FIG. 273(a), the timing tx13 at which the grace period TY1 ends during the output of the display scene 5). When , unlike the case of the specific sound, the display scene 5 is not displayed to the end, but is interrupted in pieces at that point, thereby terminating the display pattern during operation. In other words, unlike the case of a specific sound that does not progress, the operation display pattern with progress in the content of the effect is intentionally interrupted in the middle of the display scene so that the display content can be displayed as long as the operation is continued. It would be expected to give the player the impression that further progress could have been made, thereby encouraging further action by the player. In this sense, regarding the relationship between the operation display pattern (each display scene) and the grace period TY1, all the display scenes 1 to 5 should not be displayed until the grace period TY1 ends. , it is more desirable to encourage the player to perform further operations. In order to encourage the player to perform further operations, only a part of all the display scenes 1 to 5 should be displayed between the start and end of the grace time TY1. is more desirable.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the predetermined valid period expires during the period from the start of the grace time TY1 to the elapse of the grace time TY1, and a new operation is no longer accepted, the predetermined valid period is not received. At the time when the period ends (the remaining time of the grace time TY1 remains), the display scene in the output state is interrupted to display the result of the operation display pattern. , which will be discussed later.

After the display scene 1 is displayed, the display scenes 2 to 5 are sequentially displayed and progress according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the mode of operation. may be set in advance according to the time (automation time TY2) from when the specific sound is output until it is output again, or may be set independently of the time (automation time TY2) can be anything. In this sense, the content of each display scene itself includes display changes such as switching to another display and generation of a new display. There is a display change due to the animation depiction of the state in which the sword is drawn", and in the display scene 3, there is a display change due to "the occurrence of an effect while the ally character fights the enemy character") can be inserted respectively. It can be said that it is more desirable. By using the display scenes having such display changes, it is possible to make the user think that the display changes in each display scene are caused by receiving the effect. It is expected that the sense of incongruity will be eliminated even if it is not strictly matched. Moreover, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of display scenes as the operation display pattern, and the same display scene may be repeatedly displayed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 273(b), at the timing tx21 within the predetermined effective period in which the opportunity to operate the operation button 410 a plurality of times (such as repeated hits) is provided, the operation button 410 is kept in the operation state for a relatively long time. It is assumed that an operation is performed in a long mode that is maintained at . Therefore, at timing tx21, similarly to timing tx11, it is detected (determined) that the operation button 410 has been operated. Processing for starting the output of the accompanying specific sound and the output of the display accompanying the same operation (operation display pattern) are performed.

Also, during the operation maintenance period in which the operation state is maintained from timing tx21 to timing tx22, as in the non-operation period (timing tx12 to tx13), each time the automation time TY2 elapses, the specified A sound (for example, "picone") can be output intermittently, and a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) can be sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order. The display contents of the hour display pattern can be developed in the same manner as the example shown in FIG. 273(a).

That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment first checks whether or not the operation button 410 is being continuously operated (operation state) during the operation maintenance period (period from timing tx21 to tx22). Periodically monitor (determine whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has ended (for example, detection of a falling edge in the detection signal)). Then, as long as the operation state continues, the grace period TY1 having a predetermined length of time is not set, and while periodic monitoring is being performed, "every time the automation time TY2 elapses, A process of outputting a specific sound (for example, "picone")" and a "process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order" are performed respectively. In other words, during the operation maintenance period (the period from timing tx21 to tx22), "every time the automation time TY2 elapses, it is determined whether or not the operation detection state exists. A process such as outputting a specific sound (e.g., "picone") based on the result" or "determining whether the operation is detected each time the automation time TY2 elapses, and notifying that the operation is being detected. The display content is advanced based on the determination" is not performed, but "periodic monitoring (determination) of whether or not the operation button 410 is being continuously operated (operation state)" is performed. , ``a process of outputting a specific sound (for example, "picone") every time the automation time TY2 elapses,'' and ``a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order. "process to cause" is performed respectively. Note that "periodic monitoring (judgment) as to whether or not the operation button 410 is being continuously operated (operating state)" is executed as a process that is executed multiple times while the automation time TY2 elapses. It is what is done.

After that, as a result of "regular monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation button 410 is in a state (operation state) in which the operation is continued", the state in which the operation button 410 is being continued ( When the timing tx22 at which it is determined that the operation state) has ended, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment first determines a predetermined length of time based on the result of the determination. Set the grace time TY1. However, at this time, "a process of outputting a specific sound (for example, 'picone') every time the automation time TY2 passes" and "a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are displayed according to a predetermined time and order. The process of sequentially outputting "is continuously executed for a period from timing tx22 at which the operation state is terminated until timing tx23 until grace time TY1 is terminated. That is, in this case, the state in which the operation of the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx21 to x22) changes to the state in which the player leaves the operation button 410 and does not perform any operation (timing tx22 to x23). In a specific period (timing tx21 to x23) that straddles the transition timing, it is possible to intermittently output the specific sound in one processing mode that is re-output every time the automation time TY2 passes. In addition, it is possible to continuously output the display pattern during operation in a single processing mode in which a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

According to such a configuration, when generating the output mode of the specific sound during the single-shot operation shown in FIG. 273(a) and the output mode of the specific sound during the long-pressing operation shown in FIG. , the processing mode (program) for outputting the specific sound can be made common among them. Similarly, the output mode of the operation display pattern at the time of the single operation shown in FIG. 273(a) and the output mode of the operation display pattern at the time of the long press operation shown in FIG. In creating them, it becomes possible to share a processing mode (program) for outputting the operation display pattern among them. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 273(a), at timing tx12, as a result of "periodic monitoring (determination) whether or not the operation button 410 is in a state (operation state) where the operation is continued" A determination is made that the operation state (operation detection state) has ended. In addition, the state in which the operation of the operation button 410 is continued (timings tx11 to x12) changes to the state in which the player leaves the operation button 410 and does not perform any operation (timings tx12 to x13). In a specific period (timings tx11 to tx13) that straddles the timing, the specific sound is intermittently output in one processing mode that is only re-output each time the automation time TY2 elapses, resulting in a plurality of display scenes. 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order, and the operation display pattern is continuously output in one processing mode.

As a result, even when the operation button 410 is operated only once in a single-press mode, the operation button 410 can be operated in the same manner as when the operation button 410 is operated in a so-called long-press mode. A specific sound is intermittently output as the operation button 410 is operated. That is, in this case, when the operation button 410 is operated, regardless of the operation mode (single press, long press), the single press (one operation in a short time) is repeated within a relatively short time. It is possible to make the player remember the sensation as if it were being played (such as the sensation as if rapid repeated blows were being made). As a result, while stabilizing the responsiveness of the performance when a single-press operation is performed (whether it is a single performance change or a plurality of performance changes), any operation mode (single-press, Even if long press is employed, it is possible to preferably maintain the number of occurrences of effect change (specific sound) associated with the operation per unit time.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 273, the case where the operation button 410 is operated only once in a single-press mode (FIG. 273(a)) and the case where it is operated in a so-called long-press mode (FIG. 273 (b)), although the same effect change is produced, in fact, in the example shown in FIG. While the sound output is performed only once, in the example shown in FIG. 273(b), the effect reception is performed four times each time the automation time TY2 elapses from the timing tx11. A specific sound output without the sound is performed four times. Therefore, in order to make a specific effect result appear within a predetermined effective period, at least a specific number of receptions of the effect are required, or each time the effect is received, a lottery is performed and a specific effect is obtained according to the result. In the case where a type of effect that causes the effect to appear is being performed, in the example shown in FIG. You can't expect much. However, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment intentionally outputs the specific sound shown in black in the drawing even when no reception for performance occurs, so that there are actually many receptions for performance. Even if the situation is such that it is not possible to expect much for a specific production result to appear, it is possible to operate multiple times by creating a production situation as if many production receptions are occurring. Even if a player who is not good at (such as a slow repeated hitting speed) performs a single operation, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, it is difficult to recognize how many production receptions have occurred only by confirming the specific sound output once. By confirming how many specific sounds were output during the period, it is possible to give an estimate of how many production receptions have occurred.

Further, in the operation display pattern according to this embodiment, after the display scene 1 to the display scene 5 are sequentially output, the display scene 3 is output again. By repeatedly outputting the display scenes 3 to 5 until a predetermined effective period ends or until a specific effect result appears within the predetermined effective period by satisfying the rendering conditions, the ally character can interact with the enemy character and the sword. I'm trying to make a depiction of a single meeting with each other appear. Therefore, it is desirable that the specific performance result depict a situation in which the friend character wins over the enemy character as a result of such a sword fight, and the specific performance result can be obtained within a predetermined valid period. When does not appear, it is desirable to display a performance result at the time of failure, depicting a state in which the friend character is defeated by the enemy character as a result of such sword fighting at the end of the game.

In this way, when the operation button 410 is operated only once in a single-press mode (Fig. 273(a)), and when the operation button 410 is operated in a long-press mode (Fig. 273(a)). 273(b)), the specific sound associated with the operation is intermittently output a plurality of times, and the operation display pattern associated with the operation is displayed sequentially according to a predetermined schedule. By doing so, even a player who is not good at performing multiple operations can be encouraged to perform the operations with confidence. However, in practice, during the above-described predetermined effective period, the operation button 410 is often operated as a repeated pressing operation over a plurality of times in the form of a single push. It is important to improve the interest in the game that the player remembers the operation feeling that the performance reception is generated by one operation. However, if the feeling of operation, in which the acceptance of the effect is generated by one operation, is completely reflected in the effect, a player who is good at performing multiple operations has an advantage over a player who is not good at performing multiple operations. Since the performance becomes as if it exists, it is required to achieve both performance elements (operation feeling, performance fairness) in such a trade-off relationship.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, in order to ensure the operation feeling that the reception of the effect is generated with each operation, as an immediate effect to the operation, "operated Focusing on the fact that "whether a sound is generated (or changed) when operated" is a more important parameter than "whether the display is generated (or changed) when Each time an operation on 410 is performed in a one-time push mode, a specific sound corresponding to reception of the effect is output in accordance with the operation timing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 275(a), during the period from timing tx31 to tx32 in the predetermined effective period, the operation button 410 is operated as a repeated pressing operation for a plurality of times in a single-shot mode. Suppose Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, each time an operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the detection triggers the production of a new specific sound in response to the previous output specific sound (the specific sound in the output state). A new specific sound is output in such a manner that the sound data is overwritten on the specific channel. In this manner, even when the operation button 410 is operated only once in a single-press mode, the specific sound is intermittently output a plurality of times, and such an output is performed. When the operation button 410 is operated again while the player is in the game, a new specific sound is output in such a manner that the specific sound in the output state is intentionally cut off (interrupted) in the middle of the output state. It becomes possible to explicitly suggest that the specific sound is newly output at the timing when the is performed and that the performance has been accepted.

In this embodiment, even if the operation button 410 is operated only once in the form of a single push, or if the operation is a long push, the specific sound output last time will be output to the end. The automation time TY2 is consumed before the time required for the above has passed, and the sound data of the new specific sound is overwritten on the specific channel with respect to the specific sound output last time. This is as described above. However, in this case, the specific sound is output with an accurate rhythm at regular time intervals (automation time TY2), whereas the operation button 410 is operated as a continuous tapping operation over a plurality of times in a single-shot mode. In this case, the specific sound in the output state is chopped up and a new specific sound is output every time the irregular operation timing by the player arrives. It is possible to make the player preferably remember the operational feeling that the performance reception is occurring.

Incidentally, in the example shown in FIG. 275(a) as well, every time the operation button 410 is operated within a predetermined effective period, it is periodically checked whether or not the operation is being continued (operating state). A process of monitoring (determining whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has ended) is performed. In this regard, during the period of timings tx31 to tx32 in which the operation button 410 is operated as a series of repeated hits in the form of a single push, the operation is continued each time the operation button 410 is operated. As a result of the periodical monitoring of whether or not the operation state is in the (operation state), it is immediately determined that the continuation of the operation state has ended. A grace period TY1 is set (not shown).

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is newly operated before the grace period TY1 ends (time is up), the setting of the grace period TY1 is cancelled. Then, the operation button 410 is returned to the state in which the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation of the operation button 410 is being continued (operation state) is performed. Therefore, during the period between timings tx31 and tx32, every time the operation button 410 is in the operated state or in the non-operated state, a process for periodically monitoring whether or not the operation button 410 is in the operated state is performed. , and a state in which a delay time TY1 (not shown) having a predetermined length of time is set.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 275(a), after performing the continuous hitting operation for six times between the timings tx31 and tx32, the player becomes tired of the repeated hitting operation for a plurality of times, and after that, he/she does not repeat the operation. It is assumed that the required time has become significantly longer. From the point of view of a player who is not good at such multiple operations, after timing tx32, it becomes impossible to successfully perform multiple consecutive hit operations, so the number of receptions of effects is greater than that of a player who is good at multiple operations. There is concern about a decrease in interest in games due to the reduction in the number of players. However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the player's operation is not detected until the grace time TY1 elapses from the end of the operation state, the specific sound is generated each time the automation time TY2 elapses. As described above, the output processing is performed. Therefore, according to the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the time required for the repeated operation becomes significantly longer after the timing tx32, at least the grace period TY1 after the end of the previous operation state is set. As long as the repeated operation can be performed within a time shorter than , it is possible to intermittently output the specific sound associated with the operation so that the player can feel as if a fast repeated operation is being performed. become.

For example, at timing tx33, as a result of periodic monitoring whether or not the operation state continues from timing tx32, it is determined that the continuation of the operation state has ended. , a grace period TY1 having a predetermined length of time is set. After that, although the time required for repeated operations becomes significantly longer, the specific sound is output each time the automation time TY2 elapses while the player is not performing any operations. By performing the processing to cause the operation, the specific sound accompanying the operation is continuously and intermittently output. However, these specific sounds are output as black specific sounds (seventh to ninth specific sounds) in the figure in a situation where no effect reception is occurring.

In this regard, the black-outlined specific sounds (seventh to ninth specific sounds) in the figure can be generated only during the grace period TY1 after the end of the previous operation state. However, in the example shown in FIG. 275(a), for the grace period TY1 set at the timing tx33, the operation button 410 is again operated at the timing tx34 before the grace period TY1 elapses. The setting is canceled (no time up) based on the operation. Along with this, at timing tx34, a white specific sound (10th specific sound) in the figure accompanying the reception of the effect is output by interrupting (interrupting) the specific sound that was in the output state. At the same time, the state is returned to the state in which the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation state is continued is performed.

However, such an operation state is terminated at timing tx35, and a determination to that effect is made as a result of the above monitoring. will be set again. Then, in a situation where no operation is performed by the player, each time the automation time TY2 elapses, the black specific sound (the 11th to 14th specific sounds) in the figure is output again. At the timing tx36 before the time TY1 expires, when the player finally makes an operation, the specific sound (the 14th specific sound) shown in black in the drawing in the output state is cut off (interrupted). In this way, the white specific sound (the 15th specific sound) in the figure is output.

As described above, even if the time required for the repeated operation becomes significantly longer after the timing tx32, the repeated operation can be performed within a time shorter than at least the grace time TY1 after the end of the previous operation state. As long as it can be done, a specific white sound in the figure at the timing when the player's operation is performed, and a regular black specific sound in the figure while the player is not performing an operation. are output, the specific sounds associated with the operation can be output intermittently, and the player can be made to feel as if a rapid repeated hitting operation is being performed. Therefore, according to such a mode of outputting the specific sound, not only is it possible to ensure the operation feeling that the performance acceptance is generated by one operation, but even a player who is not good at multiple operations can play. Even if there is, it is possible to output the specific sound accompanying the operation continuously and intermittently by outputting the specific sound shown in black in the figure in the non-operating state. , production fairness) will be expected.

However, even in the case where the specific sound is output in this manner, the display pattern during operation, which has a role of notifying the effect result based on the operation within the predetermined valid period, may be repeated multiple times. If a player who is good at manipulating operations and a player who is not good at manipulating multiple times are allowed to greatly differ in the manner in which the display content progresses, then in the end, the player who is not good at manipulating multiple times will not be able to do so. There is concern that the performance may be such that a player who is good at performing multiple operations has an advantage, and that the interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as for the display pattern at the time of operation, the grace time TY1 is timed out instead of gradually progressing the display contents in accordance with the timing of the generation of the specific sound accompanying the operation. Until the end timing (specific end timing) arrives, the display content can be advanced by a predetermined dynamic display output regardless of the mode of operation.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 275(a), as described above, it is assumed that the time required for repeated operations becomes significantly longer after timing tx32 within the predetermined effective period. However, until the set grace period TY1 expires, the operation button 410 is operated again to cancel the setting of the grace period TY1. Therefore, the timing (specific end timing) at which the grace period TY1 expires and ends within the predetermined effective period does not come.

When the operation is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 275(a), the display of the operation display pattern (game board side effect display device 1600) is started based on the operation by the player at timing tx31. Thereafter, the display scenes 1 to 5 shown in FIG. It is only displayed sequentially and progresses according to the scheduled schedule, and by this, it appears that the fairness of presentation is maintained between the player who is not good at multiple operations and the player who is good at multiple operations. be able to

However, even if the manner in which the display content as the operation display pattern progresses is the same, the number of times that the reception of the effect accompanying the operation actually occurs differs from that of the player who is not good at operating multiple times. It is inevitable that there will be differences between players who are good at Therefore, in order to make a specific effect result appear within a predetermined effective period, there are cases where at least a specific number of performance receptions are required, or each time a performance reception is performed, a production lottery is held and a specific production is performed according to the result. In the case where a type of effect that causes a performance result to appear is performed, a player who is good at multiple operations is likely to cause a specific effect result to appear, and this makes it easier for a player who is good at multiple operations to make a specific effect appear. meaning is preserved. That is, while maintaining the significance of such effects, in terms of effects such as sounds and displays, the fairness of effects is maintained between a player who is not good at performing multiple operations and a player who is good at performing multiple operations. It can be said that there is a technical feature in that it is possible to prevent a player who is not good at performing multiple operations from losing interest in the game by making it look like it is being operated.

In addition, according to such a configuration, even if the continuous hitting operation is performed earlier than the interval (automation time TY2) at which the effect is accepted when the long-pressing operation is performed, the display pattern at the time of operation will not progress. Since it is considered the same, it is expected to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the buttons are deteriorated more quickly due to the repeated pressing operation being performed too quickly.

Incidentally, the example shown in FIG. 275(b) assumes that the operation button 410 is not operated in time for the grace period TY1 set at the timing tx33 to elapse. That is, in this case, a timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace period TY1 expires and ends within a predetermined valid period arrives, and at the timing tx37 (specific end timing), the dynamic display output (processing for sequentially displaying display scenes 1 to 5 according to a predetermined schedule and progressing) is interrupted and terminated at that point.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, regarding the output of a specific sound (for example, "picone"), timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which grace time TY1 ends when in the output state arrives. Even if it does, the processing (output interruption processing, processing to interrupt by overwriting with other sounds, etc.) that cuts off the specific sound in the output state at the timing tx37 ((for example, "pico")) As described above, the output (sound waveform) is made to appear in the same manner as the specific sound that has been output until then even after the timing tx37 arrives. Therefore, regarding the output of the specific sound, even after the timing tx37 (the specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 ends, the final specific sound (the 10th specific sound in the figure) is If the operation button 410 is operated until the sound is muted, the specific sound associated with the operation can be output continuously and intermittently, and the player will feel as if a fast repeated operation is being performed. It is possible to let

In fact, in the example shown in FIG. 275(b), before the black specific sound (tenth specific sound) output across timing tx37 (specific end timing) is silenced, After the output of the tenth specific sound is interrupted, the specific sound outlined in white in the drawing is generated twice, and then the specific sound outlined in black in the drawing is intermittently output again, thereby producing a specific sound associated with the operation. is output continuously and intermittently. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 275(b), the specific sound is output intermittently in this way, whereas in the operation display pattern, progress of the display content is temporarily terminated at timing tx37. . After that, it is clear that the progress of the display contents is restarted from the first display scene (display scene 1) in accordance with the timing tx38 at which the white specific sound is output again.

Fig. 276 shows a predetermined validity period during which an operation opportunity for multiple operations (such as repeated hits) is given in the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic repeated hits function) described in Figs. is a time chart showing an example of an effect that appears when an operation is performed within the predetermined effective period (timings tx41 to tx48) when a specific effect pattern that generates is executed.

As shown in FIG. 276, now, at timing tx41, a predetermined effective period occurs during which an operation opportunity for multiple operations (such as repeated hits) is given, and at timing tx42 within the predetermined effective period, the player Assuming that an operation is started, in this production example as well, based on the detection of the operation, the output of a specific sound accompanying the operation of the operation button 410 and the output of the display (in-operation display pattern) accompanying the same operation are respectively performed. Processing to start will be performed.

However, in this example of effect, when the operation of the operation button 410 is received within a predetermined valid period, in addition to generating a specific sound output in white in the figure, a special sound different from the specific sound is produced with a predetermined probability. The output process is made executable.

That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even in a situation where the operation button 410 is not operated and no effect reception is generated, the black-outlined specific sound output is generated. The black specific sound output in the figure makes it difficult to distinguish from the white specific sound output in the figure that is generated at the timing of reception of the effect (in this example of effect, the same mode is used). ) to be output. In addition, as described above, the operation display pattern that appears on the game board-side effect display device 1600 progresses the display content according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the mode of operation. Therefore, from the player's side, even if an operation in the form of a long press or multiple operations is performed within a predetermined effective period, the player cannot recognize how many effects have been received due to these operations. It can be said that we are in a difficult situation. Therefore, in this example of effect, when the operation of the operation button 410 is received within a predetermined valid period, in addition to generating a specific sound output in white in the figure, a special sound different from the specific sound is output with a predetermined probability ( For example, 50%, etc.) is performed, so that it is possible to predict to some extent how many performance receptions have occurred through the output state of such special sounds.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 276, when it is in a relatively early period (timings tx41 to tx45) after the start of the predetermined effective period, two continuous hitting operations at timings tx42 and tx43 and from timing tx44. By performing a long press operation, a total of nine effects receptions occur, and corresponding to these, a specific white sound output in the figure is continuously generated nine times specific sound), and the number of times the performance reception occurs per unit time is relatively large. On the other hand, in a relatively late period (timings tx45 to tx48) after the start of the predetermined valid period, it takes such a long time that the operation in the single-shot operation mode cannot be said to be a continuous operation, and the timing tx46 , tx47, two performance receptions are generated, and the specific sound output in white in the figure corresponding to these is generated two times with a gap of time (in the figure, the tenth , the eleventh white specific sound), the number of times the effect acceptance occurs per unit time is relatively small.

However, when checking the output status of the specific sound and the output status of the display pattern at the time of operation, the specific sound is compared after the predetermined effective period starts by outputting the above-mentioned black specific sound. It is continuously output during both the early period (timings tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timings tx45 to tx48). In both of the early period (timings tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timings tx45 to tx48), the display scenes are switched according to the predetermined schedule. It can be seen that it is difficult to determine whether the number of receptions of performances per unit time is high or low only by checking the output status.

In this regard, when checking the output status of the special sound that is output with a predetermined probability when the specific sound output shown in white in the figure occurs, a relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45), the number of occurrences per unit time is greater than in the relatively late period (timings tx45 to tx48) after the start of the predetermined effective period. It is possible to predict to some extent how many performance receptions have occurred through the output status of . In addition, according to such an output mode of the special sound, it is possible to conceal to some extent which of the white specific sound output in the figure and the black specific sound output in the figure is occurring. Therefore, it is expected that the interest in the game of a player who is not good at performing multiple operations can be favorably maintained. In this sense, the special sound can be generated when a specific sound output is generated, but is output based on the fulfillment of an output condition other than the specific sound output being generated. For example, even if the specific sound is output, the special sound is not necessarily generated.

Further, the predetermined probability of whether or not to generate a special sound when the performance reception is generated may be changed according to the number of performance receptions occurring within a predetermined effective period. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it more difficult to predict which of the white specific sound output in the drawing and the black specific sound output in the drawing is occurring.

In addition, considering that the special sound is output less frequently than the specific sound, the special sound has a time value longer than the time from the output of the specific sound until it is silenced or the automation time TY2. It is desirable to be set as In this example, it is set as a time value twice as long as "automation time TY2". Moreover, when outputting a new special sound while the previous special sound is being output, it is desirable to cut off (interrupt) the previous special sound and output a new special sound.

However, in such a pachinko machine 1, the same effect as when the operation is performed multiple times can be enjoyed simply by performing the operation by long pressing, so the number of players who perform the operation multiple times is reduced. , there is a concern that the significance as an effect that requires multiple operations will be lost. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 276, in the predetermined effective period (timings tx41 to tx48), at least in the period after the player's operation is started at timing tx42, the operation by the player is a long press mode. In the state of continuous operation (timings tx44 to tx45) and in the state of single operation (timings tx42 to tx44, tx45 to tx48), the state of being performed as a single operation mode Display of a specific image (specific display) is permitted only when there is a specific display condition and a specific display condition is satisfied.

In other words, in this case, in order to check the specific image, it is required to perform the operation as a single-shot operation mode, not at least the long-press operation. It becomes possible to give meaning to performance in performing a rolling operation (such as repeated hits), and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

Moreover, in this presentation example, in order to confirm the specific image, the specific image is not necessarily displayed unless the specific display condition is satisfied, rather than only operating as a one-shot operation mode. In other words, in this case, since the difficulty of appearance of the specific image itself is increased, multiple operations (such as repeated operations) are performed without using the auto repeated operation (automatic multiple operations) function every time a predetermined effective period occurs. ), it seems that you are trying to display a specific image that is very difficult to appear, and you dare to operate multiple times without using the auto repeated (automatic multiple operations) function. It will be expected to encourage people around them to understand what they are doing.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 276, a specific non-operation time (here, twice the "automation time TY2") has passed without a new effect reception occurring from the timing when the previous effect reception occurred. and a specific image is displayed within a predetermined valid period ( specific display) will appear. In this regard, in the predetermined lottery, when a big hit is won in the jackpot determination (or, depending on the operation mode within the predetermined effective period, the success display can be displayed (the expectation of the big win is high) In the case of the production situation), there is a probability of 70% to get the production hit, whereas when the big hit is lost in the big hit judgment (or the operation is performed within the predetermined effective period) In a performance situation in which a success display cannot appear no matter how many times it is performed (in a performance situation in which the degree of expectation for a big win is low), a performance hit can be obtained only at a probability of 30%. Therefore, when the display of the specific image (specific display) appears within a predetermined effective period, it is suggested that the expectation of the appearance of the big win pattern is high, and the game interest can be favorably maintained. The above-mentioned "specific display condition" is not limited to this, and "a specific non-operation time (here, "automation time TY2" without occurrence of a new effect reception from the timing when the previous effect reception occurred) Twice the time) has passed" and "the effect hit is obtained in the predetermined effect lottery" is adopted as the "specific display condition", and when this is satisfied A display of a specific image (specific display) may appear, or another condition may be adopted as the "specific display condition".

In addition to the above-mentioned type of the predetermined lottery mode, for example, there is a performance situation (a performance situation where the expectation of a big hit is low) in which a success display can appear depending on the operation mode within a predetermined effective period. In some cases, a performance win can be obtained with a probability of 0% (or the performance lottery itself is not performed), but a performance situation in which no matter how many operations are performed within a predetermined valid period, a success display cannot be displayed. It may be a mode in which a performance hit is obtained with a probability of 60% when in (a performance situation in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is low). According to this aspect, since it is definitively indicated that the success display does not appear when the specific display appears, there is no need to perform a useless operation to make the specific display appear. becomes recognizable within a given validity period. In this case, it is desirable to use, as the specific display, the same display content as the failure display that appears when the predetermined effective period expires without the success display appearing.

Further, in this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 276, when a new effect reception occurs (timing tx46) while the specific image is being displayed (specific display), the specific image is displayed at that time. The display is hidden, and the output is continued under the condition that the state in which no operation is performed by the player (the state in which no new effect reception has occurred) is maintained. there is

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 276, in order to cause a specific production result (success display) to appear within a predetermined valid period (timings tx41 to tx48), at least a specific number of receptions of production or more are required. At the timing tx47 when the 11th performance reception (the 11th white specific sound output) occurs, the appearance condition is satisfied, and the display scene 3 that was in the display state at that time is cut off ( interruption), and the process of making a success display appear as the operation display pattern is performed. The content of this success display includes the production content of the portions (display scenes 3 to 5) that are repeated in the operation display pattern, such as defeating the enemy character who was fighting with a sword in display scenes 3 to 5. It should be related. Also, when the success display appears, it is desirable that the jackpot judgment suggests that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high.

Further, when the appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx47 at which the eleventh effect reception (the eleventh white specific sound output) occurs, the predetermined effective period is terminated at that time, and a new effect reception is performed. It will be prevented from occurring. Therefore, at the timing after the timing tx47, the white specific sound or special sound in the drawing is not newly generated, nor the specific display newly appears.

FIG. 277 is executed under the same processing conditions as the effect example shown in FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing an example of an effect that appears when the action is repeated after an unbelievably long time; FIG.

As shown in FIG. 277, even if the player repeats the single-shot operation taking a long time, as long as the operation is repeated at intervals shorter than the grace time TY1, After timing tx52 when the operation is started within a predetermined effective period (timings tx51 to tx56), the specific sound is continuously and intermittently output, and the display pattern at the time of operation is the display content according to the predetermined schedule. will be advanced. According to such an effect mode, even if the operation is performed only four times within the predetermined effective period, it is possible to create an effect situation as if the continuous hitting operation is performed about 20 times. become able to. However, in this case, there is a concern that a person who is seriously performing the repeated hitting operation cannot understand the meaning of performing the repeated hitting operation, and the interest in the game is reduced.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the length of the predetermined effective period is "Tx1", the length of the grace time TY1 is "Tx2", and a specific performance result (success display) is displayed within the predetermined effective period. Assuming that the minimum required number of receptions for the effect to appear is "EU", these numerical values are set so that the relationship ["Tx1/Tx2"<EU] is established. According to such a configuration, even if the operation is repeatedly performed just before the grace time TY1 elapses to create an effect situation in which the specific sound and the operation display pattern are continuously output, these operations The number of receptions of performance received becomes less than the minimum number of receptions of performance (EU) required to cause a specific performance result (success display) to appear within a predetermined effective period. In other words, in this case, since it is possible to prevent the appearance of a specific effect result (success display) when the operation is performed in such a malicious manner, it is possible to seriously perform the continuous hitting operation. It will be expected to favorably maintain the amusement of those who are in the game. In addition, in order to obtain such effects more reliably, the minimum number of receptions of production reception (EU) required for the appearance of a specific production result (success display) within a predetermined effective period is Strictly speaking, it is required to set the numerical value calculated by "Tx1/Tx2" as a numerical value larger than the integer value obtained by rounding up the numerical value.

In this regard, in this production example, the minimum required number of receptions of production (EU) in order to cause a specific production result (success display) to appear within a predetermined valid period is calculated by "Tx1/Tx2". Since "11 times" is more than twice the integer value when the numerical value is rounded up, a failure display is displayed at the timing tx56 when the predetermined effective period ends. Become. In other words, in this case, since the failure display appears due to the lack of the number of operations, the production situation is such that it is not possible to recognize whether the degree of expectation for a big hit is low or high.

Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a specific image only when it is in a single operation mode and when specific display conditions are satisfied, as described above. is. In this regard, in this production example, when the above-mentioned "specific non-operation time" required minimum for displaying the specific image is "Tx3", the relationship ["Tx1/Tx3"<EU] is established. Each of these numerical values is set so that With such a configuration, if an attempt is made to cause the specific display to appear each time the operation is performed once within the predetermined effective period, the number of receptions of effects that occur within the predetermined effective period is limited to within the predetermined effective period. , the minimum required number of receptions of production (EU) to make a specific production result (success display) appear. In other words, in this case, there is a performance selection function of whether or not to attempt to make the specific display appear even if there is a risk that the specific performance result (success display) will not appear, and the specific display will be performed. By making it impossible to casually try to make it appear over and over again, it is possible to enhance the performance when trying to make it appear, so it is expected to improve the entertainment of the game. become.

Also, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 277, when the timing tx55a at which the predetermined valid period ends without the success display appearing, the display scene 4 that was in the display state at that time is cut off ( interruption), a process for causing a failure display to appear as an operation display pattern is performed. The content of this failure display includes the production content of the portions (display scenes 3 to 5) that are repeated in the operation display pattern, such as the fact that the enemy character who was fighting with a sword in display scenes 3 to 5 is defeated. It should be related. Also, when the failure display appears, it is desirable that the big win determination suggests that the expectation of winning the big win is low.

On the other hand, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, even if either the success display or the failure display appears, the specific sound that is being output when the predetermined effective period ends is not truncated (interrupted), as described above. However, even if these specific sounds are output intermittently after that, those specific sounds will be muted while the success display or failure display is being performed, and the success display or failure display will be performed after that. It is set to be a hidden relationship.

In this embodiment, a grace period TY1 is set after the operation state by the player is completed, and until this grace period TY1 elapses, a black specific sound in the non-operating state is output. Although it is assumed that this is performed at least four times or more, the number of times that the "specific sound output in black in the figure" is generated in the non-operating state is not limited to this. For example, if the delay time TY1 is set to be at least twice as long as the automation time TY2, the specific sound shown in black in the figure is output at least twice in the non-operating state. Since it will occur, it is possible to make the user feel as if the continuous hitting operation (multiple operations) were continued even in the non-operating state.

Further, in this embodiment, as the operation display pattern, after the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially output, the display scenes 3 to 5 are repeatedly output so that the display scenes 1 and 2 are not displayed. In this way, a depiction of a ally character and an enemy character intently fighting with swords is made to appear. Therefore, in at least one of the display scenes 1 and 2, a specific display showing the degree of expectation for a big win may be performed. According to such a configuration, if the specific display is missed, it cannot be reconfirmed unless the non-operating state is continued until the grace time TY1 elapses. It is possible to provide the effect of choosing between the demerit of wasting the amount of is wasted and the demerit of not being able to confirm the specific display.

In addition, in this embodiment, repeated hitting operations are allowed in such a manner that the effect acceptance occurs at intervals shorter than the interval (automation time TY2) at which the effect acceptance occurs when the long-pressing operation is performed. This makes it possible for the player to realize an effect at the time of operation with a high degree of freedom (see FIG. 275). However, on the other hand, even when such a high-speed repeated operation is performed, the progress of the display scene in the operation display pattern is the same as when the long-press operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it less attractive to perform high-speed continuous hitting operations, and it is expected that this will suppress excessive operation of the operation button 410 and reduce the risk of damage. It will be done.

In addition, in the case of performing a type of effect that requires at least a specific number of receptions of the effect in order to cause a specific effect to appear within the predetermined effective period, it is only necessary to perform a long press operation within the predetermined effective period. It is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the reception of the effect occurs the specific number of times or more. More preferably, it is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the specified number of receptions or more of the effects are generated only by long-pressing for half the period of the predetermined effective period.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, a time (a specific non-operation time) that is twice the "automation time TY2" elapses without a new performance reception occurring from the timing at which the previous performance reception occurred. Although the display of the specific image (specific display) is made to appear when the operation is performed, the specific non-operation time is not limited to this. For example, as the specific non-operation time, any time value within a range that is at least twice the "automation time TY2" and has the grace time TY1 as the upper limit (below the grace time TY1) can be used. , in a state in which a specific sound (outlined in black in the figure) is output two or more times when in a non-operating state (a state as if a continuous tapping operation is being performed while in a non-operating state), It is impossible to create an effect as if a specific image (specific display) appeared based on the number of pseudo-operations in the non-operation state (the number of outputs of specific sounds shown in black in the figure) reaching a predetermined value. It is possible.

[A game machine equipped with a plurality of production operation units]
By the way, in the above description, the gaming machine having the plate unit 320 provided with the effect operation unit 400 capable of being pressed by the player and capable of presenting the effect image to the player has been described. With reference to 278 to 329, a game machine capable of further motivating the player to operate will be described. Note that the effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510 .

FIG. 278 is a front view of a game machine equipped with a sword rendering operation unit 5000. FIG. FIG. 279 is a right side view of a game machine provided with a sword rendering operation unit 5000. FIG. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 arranged on the door frame 3 of the game machine 1 will be described, and the same reference numerals will be given to the same components as those described above, and the description will be omitted as appropriate.

The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword effect operation unit 5000 contains a blade part 5010 having a blade part 5011, a handle part 5012, and a collar part 5013 sandwiched between the blade part 5011 and the handle part 5012, and the blade part 5011 of the blade part 5010. A sword decoration 5001 is composed of a sheath 5020 that can be used.

The sword decoration body 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 so that the sheath part 5020 can be moved in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. In addition, the blade portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword drawing direction and the sword retracting direction. The sword portion 5010 is normally in a sheathed state in which the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, and in the sword drawing effect, the sword blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player by drawing the sword. Then, the sword section 5010 in the drawn state can function as an operation means for receiving the player's sword sheathing operation and returning to the sword sheathed state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 280, a description will be given of an execution opportunity for the drawing effect involving the movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword ornament 5001). FIG. 280 is a diagram showing an example of a selection table of effect patterns in the effect mode in which the sword drawing effect can be executed. (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of the drawing effect.

The production patterns described here include a pattern in which the sword drawing preparation transition production is performed after the sword drawing preparation transition production is executed, a pattern in which the sword drawing preparation transition production is performed without performing the sword drawing preparation transition production in advance, and a sword drawing preparation transition production is performed in advance. In spite of this, there is a pattern in which the sword drawing production is not performed, a pattern in which the sword drawing preparation transition production is performed and the sword drawing production is not performed. Two patterns are provided: a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member.

As shown in FIG. 280(A), whether or not to execute the drawing preparation transition effect is determined by the main control board 1310 and is determined according to the type of variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . Here, the plural kinds of variation patterns are classified into a variation pattern for big win variation at the time of big win, a variation pattern for small win variation at the time of small win, and a variation pattern for loss variation at the time of loss, and variations that result in advantageous results for the player. The pattern is set so that the probability of execution of the drawing preparation transition effect increases as the pattern increases. Specifically, the drawing preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% in the case of the fluctuation pattern for big hit fluctuation, executed with a probability of 30% in the case of fluctuation pattern for small hit fluctuation, and executed with a probability of 30% in the case of fluctuation pattern for loss fluctuation. 20% chance of execution. In addition, the variation pattern at the time of losing variation may change the probability according to the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect so that the probability of executing the sword drawing preparation transition effect is higher when the ready-to-win effect is performed than when it is not performed. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 280(B), whether or not to execute the sword draw main effect is selected according to the type of variation pattern and the presence or absence of the sword draw preparation transition effect. Even if the types of variation patterns are the same, when the sword drawing preparation transition performance is executed, the probability of execution of the sword drawing preparation transition performance is set to be higher than when the sword drawing preparation transition performance is not executed. In addition, it is set such that the probability of execution of the sword draw main effect increases as the variation pattern becomes more advantageous for the player. Here, even if the advantage of the variation pattern is low, the execution of the sword drawing preparation transition effect is set to increase the probability of execution of the sword drawing main effect. Specifically, when the sword draw preparation transition performance is executed in the variation pattern for losing variation, the probability of execution of the sword draw preparation transition performance is higher than when the sword draw preparation transition performance is not executed in the small hit variation variation pattern. In addition, in the case of the variation pattern for the big hit variation, regardless of the presence or absence of the drawing preparation transition presentation, the sword draw main presentation is always executed.

In addition, when the main draw effect is executed, the draw preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the probability of executing the main draw sword effect with the aura member increases as the variation pattern becomes more advantageous for the player. is set to It should be noted that here, in the case of the variation pattern for the small hit variation, the drawing main effect of the form with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and operation of the aura member by drawing the sword ornament)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 281 to 284, the sword drawing action of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword drawing effect (sword drawing preparation transition effect and sword drawing main effect) will be described. In addition, when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) capable of receiving the sheathing operation by the player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 281, 282), the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is united with the member (aura member 5035) on the door frame 3 side. The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described in the case of forming an integral decoration (FIGS. 283 and 284).

FIG. 281 is a state transition diagram for explaining the drawing operation of the sword ornament 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) itself. (C) shows the second drawn state. FIG. 282 is a vertical cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. FIG. 282 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to facilitate understanding of the operation of the aura member 5030. FIG.

The sword ornament 5001 in the normal state is in a sheathed state in which the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, as shown in FIG. 281(A). As shown in FIG. 281(B), only the habaki 5011a portion of the sword ornament 5001 after the sword draw operation in the sword draw preparation transition presentation is pulled out of the sheath 5020 and visible to the player. It becomes the first unsheathed state. Then, as shown in FIG. 281(C), the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword draw operation in the sword draw main effect is the second sword draw where the blade portion 5011 is further drawn from the scabbard portion 5020 and most of it becomes visible to the player. state. Here, the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state can function as an operation means capable of accepting the player's sheathing operation.

The aura member 5030 provided on the blade portion 5011 is configured to be operable independently of the action of drawing the blade portion 5011 . In the case where the sword ornament 5001 is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is sheathed when the blade portion 5011 changes from the sheathed state (Fig. 281(A)) to the first drawn state (Fig. 281(B)). Inside the portion 5020, the movable range is moved from the closed state (Fig. 282(A)) to the open state (Fig. 282(B)) as much as possible (maximum movement), and the blade portion 5011 is deformed. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even when the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 changes from the first drawn state to the second drawn state (FIG. 281(C)). As will be described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be positioned below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even when it is fully moved, the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first drawn state.

The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is contained in the blade portion 5011 as shown in FIG. 282(A). The aura member 5030 is provided below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011, and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. and a pinion 5033. In the aura member 5030, the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by driving means (not shown), and the rotational force is converted into a rightward linear motion of the rack 5031a and a leftward direction of the rack 5032a. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 each stop at a position (open state) projecting outward from the outline of the blade portion 5011 .

In addition, an LED board 5011c having a plurality of LEDs is included in the blade shaft 5011b below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011. As shown in FIG. By emitting light from these LEDs, it is possible to decorate the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030) with light emission.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword ornament 5001 (sword portion 5010) changes from the sheathed state to the first drawn state, the closed state changes to the open state, Although the example in which the sword ornament 5001 changes from the first sword-drawn state to the second sword-drawn state is shown, the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start to operate (deform) after the sword ornament 5001 is in the second drawn state. The final mode based on the production pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state functions as the operation means (not limited to the mode of maximum movement, but also includes the mode of stopping the movement in the middle) ).

FIG. 283 is a state transition diagram for explaining the sword drawing operation of the sword ornament 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath 5020. (A) sword sheathed state, (B) first sword drawn state, (C) The second drawing state is shown. FIG. 284 is a vertical cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. FIG. 284 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 to facilitate understanding of the operation of the aura member 5035. FIG. 282 and 283 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 283(A) to (C), the aura member 5035 provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) is similar to the blade portion 5010 (blade portion 5011). While the aura member 5030 provided in itself is movable in the horizontal direction, it is movable in the vertical direction. Also, the aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer circumference of the blade portion 5011 . In the case where the sword ornament 5001 is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 maintains the relative positional relationship between the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sheathed state, and changes the state of the blade portion 5011 (sword sheathed state). ⇔ first drawn state ⇔ second drawn state). As a result, the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) can be united with the frame-side member (aura member 5035) to appear as an integral decoration.

The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely housed state) is housed in the sheath 5020 as shown in FIG. 284(A). The aura member 5035 is provided so that the upper end is below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in the fully housed state, and a hollow columnar surrounding aura member 5036 is provided so as to surround the outer circumference of the blade portion 5011. and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. The enclosing aura member 5036 rotates the right pinion 5037a counterclockwise in front view and the left pinion 5037b clockwise in front view by driving means (not shown). This is converted into upward linear motion of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a completely appearing state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable (maximum movement) to the upper limit of the movable range.

Although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be decorated with light.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, according to the state change of the sword ornament 5001 (sword portion 5010) (sword sheathed state ⇔ first sword drawn state ⇔ second sword drawn state), the relative positional relationship is maintained. 5011 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start to operate (combine) after the sword ornament 5001 is in the second drawn state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state functions as an operation means (including the form with aura member of the state). Also, the aura member 5035 may be united with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player in the state from the sheathed state to the first drawn state.

(Example of drawing a sword using a sword decoration)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 285 to 290, the sword drawing effect using the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword ornament 5001) will be described. Below, a production pattern ((X6) and (X7) in the figure) in which the drawing preparation transition production is executed in the ready-to-win production ((X1) to (X5) in the figure) and the main drawing production is not executed ((X6) and (X7) in the figure) , screen transitions of the effect display device 1600 and operation transitions of the sword ornament 5001 will be described with respect to the effect patterns ((A1) to (D2) in the drawing) in which the sword drawing effect is executed. Figures 285 to 289 are effect transition diagrams of drawing effect. FIG. 290 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 and the valid operation period of the operating means.

In the ready-to-win effect, first, the left side decorative pattern and the right side decorative pattern that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, "7"), and only the central decorative pattern is variably displayed. It starts by forming a reach state (Fig. 285 (X1)). Subsequently, the ready-to-reach decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size in the upper right part of the display area, and an effect image suggesting the execution of the drawing effect (moving the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in the central display area. Specifically, after an image (Fig. 285 (X2)) in which two samurai face each other and start iai is displayed, one of the samurai holds the hilt and holds the sword in its scabbard (Fig. 285 (X2)). 285 (X3)) is displayed. Here, the image in the display area of the effect display device 1600 provides an effect suggesting that the sword ornament 5001 is movable. During this time, the sword ornament 5001 of the sword rendering operation unit 5000 maintains the sheathed state (FIG. 281(A)).

Next, when the sword drawing preparation transition effect is executed by lottery based on the type of variation pattern sent to the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIGS. 286 (X4) and (X5), the sword drawing preparation transition effect When started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the face of the samurai with his sword held up with his eyes closed is displayed in the image described above, and the eyes are enlarged as time elapses. At this time, when the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the first sword drawn state, a sword drawing preparation transition presentation is performed. It should be noted that when the sword drawing preparation transition effect is performed, the sword drawing main effect is more likely to be executed after that than when it is not performed. Therefore, the sword drawing preparation transition effect can be said to be an expectation level effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the sword drawing main effect will be executed by moving the sword decoration body 5001 . In the sword drawing preparation transition presentation, the sword ornament 5001 in the first sword drawing state is swung up and down to arouse the player's expectation that the sword decoration 5001 will change to the second sword drawing state. good. Note that the vertical swing of the sword decoration 5001 in the first drawn state is performed to such an extent that the aura member 5030 (5035) is not visually recognized by the player in the case of the form with the aura member. On the other hand, if the sword drawing preparation transition presentation is not executed, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the sword sheathed state, and the image shown in FIG. 285 (X3) is kept displayed.

Here, if the sword ornament 5001 in the subsequent sword drawing main effect is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is closed inside the sheath 5020 at the timing of this sword drawing preparation transition effect (Fig. 282 (A )) to the open state (FIG. 282(B)) as much as possible (maximum movement), and the blade portion 5011 is deformed. At this time, the sword ornament 5011 in the first drawn state is visible to the player from the hand of the blade portion 5011 to the habaki 5011a. Since the aura member 5030 is provided downward, there is no possibility that the aura member 5030 will be visually recognized by the player even if the aura member 5030 makes the maximum movement. Furthermore, the aura member 5030 is configured to be visible to the player at approximately the same timing as when the sword ornament 5001 changes from the first drawn state to the second drawn state. Therefore, the sword decoration body 5001 in the second drawn state functions as an operating means capable of accepting the sword sheathing operation by the player, and at the same time, the form of the operating section (sword section 5010) operated by the player raises expectations. It is possible to suggest

After the sword draw preparation transition effect is completed, if the sword draw main effect is not executed by lottery based on the type of variation pattern and the presence or absence of the sword draw preparation transition effect, the eyes are enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The samurai's forehead is dripping with sweat (Fig. 286 (X6)), and at the timing when the central decorative pattern that has been variably displayed is stopped, an image of the samurai giving up his iai and the central decorative pattern in the center of the screen is displayed on the left side. 286 (X7). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned from the first drawn state to the sheathed state at the time of FIG. 286 (X6), and maintains the sheathed state. That is, the ready-to-win effect ends without the sword ornament 5001 functioning as an operating means.

On the other hand, when the sword draw main effect is executed, after the sword draw preparation transition effect is completed, an image of Iai-giri being performed is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword ornament 5001 is displayed as the second sword draw. state. Here, the form of the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state includes a form with an aura member that is visible in a form in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030, and a form with an aura member 5030 that is invisible. A mode without an aura member is provided in which the undeformed blade portion 5011 can be visually recognized.

First, with reference to FIGS. 287 and 288, the case where the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state is without the aura member will be described. When the main effect of drawing the sword starts, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and has sharp eyes is displayed from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai with his eyes closed in FIG. 287 (A1)), an image is displayed in which the sword is drawn and the opponent samurai is cut (Fig. 287 (A2)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the first drawn state to the second drawn state at the time of FIG. 287 (A1), and the blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player.

Next, when the sword ornament 5001 enters the second drawn state and a predetermined period of time elapses, the sword ornament 5001 is sheathed by the player. In order to function as an operation means capable of accepting the motion of grasping the blade portion 5011 and pushing it downward so that the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, an operation effective period for validly detecting the sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001 is generated. At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation prompting effect for prompting the sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword in the same shape as the second drawn state of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed along with the message "Put away the sword!" (FIG. 287 ( A3)). Note that the sword decoration 5001 blinks the LED of the internal LED board 5011c to indicate that the operation is valid. Also, the image in the operation promotion effect is preferably a series of images related to iai, and the operation effect image is displayed in front of the image of the previous iai sword scene (Fig. 287 (A2)). (See later-described FIG. 293 (G2)).

Then, during the effective period of operation, the player performs the sheathing operation of grasping the handle portion 5012 of the sword ornament 5001 and putting the blade portion 5011 into the sheath portion 5020. A post-operation effect is performed according to the degree of expectation that will result in an advantageous result, and the effect ends with a winning/losing notification of the symbol type (FIG. 288). Specifically, when the symbol type is a big hit, the cut effect image is flashy displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (Fig. 288 (C1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped. At the timing, the opponent's samurai is defeated and the Iai is settled, and the central decorative pattern in the center of the screen stops in the same stopping mode as the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern, that is, in a big hit mode ("7" in this case). is displayed (Fig. 288 (C2)). On the other hand, when the symbol type is lost, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the cut effect image is displayed more plainly than in the case of a big hit (Fig. 288 (D1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variably displayed is replaced. At the timing of the stop display, there is an image in which the opponent's samurai cannot be defeated and the match cannot be settled, and at the center of the screen, the central decorative pattern is different from the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern, that is, a lost mode (here, "6"). is stopped and displayed (Fig. 288 (D2)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 289, the case where the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state is in the form with an aura member will be described. When the main effect of drawing the sword starts, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and has sharp eyes is displayed from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai with his eyes closed in FIG. 289 (B1)), an image is displayed in which the sword is drawn and the opponent samurai is cut (FIG. 289 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first drawn state to the second drawn state at the time of FIG. becomes visible to the player. Although the blade portion 5011 is already deformed by the aura member 5030 when the state changes from the first drawn state to the second drawn state, the present invention is not limited to this. First, even if only the blade portion 5011 is in the second sword-drawn state so that it can be visually recognized by the player, the aura member 5030 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the blade portion 5011 is deformed to form the form with the aura member. It is only necessary that the sword ornament 5001 is in the state with the aura member in the second drawn state by the time the valid operation period starts. However, since the sword ornament 5001 is already in the second sword-drawn state in which the player can sheathe the sword, the appearance of the aura member 5030 makes it possible for the player to surely recognize the change in the degree of expectation. If the action takes time, there is a concern that an erroneous operation may be induced by the player. Therefore, as in this example, the aura member 5030 is made recognizable by the player while the series of movements from the first sword drawn state to the second sword drawn state is performed, and when the sword ornament 5001 enters the second sword drawn state, It is preferable to have the operation valid period start as soon as possible.

289(B1) and (B2) are the same as the images shown in FIGS. 287(A1) and (A2). I'm trying not to judge whether it's not. By actually looking at the sword ornament 5001, the player can grasp whether it is in the form with the aura member or the form without the aura member. As a result, the sword decoration 5001 can be noticed before the sword decoration 5001 is made to function as an operation means, and the player can easily recognize the sword decoration 5001 as an operation means, and can enjoy the operation presentation without confusion. can be done. It should be noted that the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 at this time does not have to be the same as described above, and may be an image similar enough to induce the player to look at the sword ornament 5001. . For example, there may be partial differences in samurai images (differences in eye color and effects).

Then, when the player's operation of the sword decoration 5001 reaches an effective operation valid period, the image of the sword in the operation promotion effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the same as the sword decoration 5001 with an aura member. It will be displayed (Fig. 289 (B3)). The subsequent rendering is the same as in FIG. 288 described above, so the description is omitted. In addition, in the case of the mode with the aura member, the effect images in FIGS. 288(C1) and (D1) may be displayed brighter than in the mode without the aura member.

Next, with reference to FIG. 290, the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 and the operation valid period in the sword draw effect in which the sword draw preparation transition effect and the sword draw main effect are performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 290, when the ready-to-win effect is started (time t0), the iai effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. First, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved from the sheathed state to the first state as a sword drawing preparation transition effect. The state changes to the sword drawn state (time t1). At this time, when the effect pattern of the mode with the aura member is set, the aura member 5030 changes from the closed state to the open state. It is designed so that it cannot be seen by anyone. Therefore, at the stage of the first sword drawn state, the player grasps whether or not the sword decoration 5001 further changes to the second sword drawn state, and if it changes, whether the sword decoration 5001 is in the form with an aura member. I can't. However, when the sword draw preparation transition effect is executed, the sword draw main effect is executed, and the possibility of becoming a form with an aura member increases, so the player's expectation can be enhanced. Further, even if the sword draw main effect is not executed, the sword movement suggesting effect (FIG. 285 (X3)) is executed by the effect display device 1600 before the start of the sword draw preparation transition effect, so that the player is prompted to move the sword. As a movable object effect corresponding to the suggestive effect, it is possible to capture the state change (movable) of the sword ornament 5001 from the sheathed state to the first sword drawn state.

Then, when the sword draw preparation transition effect ends, the sword draw main effect is started, and the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword draw state to the second sword draw state (time t2). After that, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the valid operation period starts, and the sword ornament 5001 functions as an operation means (time t3). When the operation valid period comes, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promoting effect using a sword related to a series of iai effect is performed. Then, when the sword sheathing operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period (time tx), the post-operation effect is performed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 returns from the second drawn state to the sheathed state by the player's sheathing operation. Then, the ready-to-reach state ends with the expiration of the preset operation valid period (time t4), and the series of iai production is completed by notifying the symbol type in the display area of the production display device 1600 ( time t5). It should be noted that the valid period of operation may end upon detection of an operation by the player, as indicated by a dashed line in the drawing. Further, if no operation is detected during the valid operation period, the sword decoration 5001 is automatically returned from the second drawn state to the sheathed state when the valid operation period expires.

Here, the predetermined period (time t3-t2) from when the sword decoration 5001 enters the second drawn state to when the valid operation period starts is the mode (aura member A period longer than the valid operation period (time t4-t3) is ensured as a mode confirmation period during which it is possible to confirm whether or not the display is in the attached mode, the light emission mode, and the like. That is, even if the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operable by the player is in the operation position (second sword drawing state) where it functions as an operation means, it is possible to immediately start accepting operations (generate an operation effective period). Instead, the player can operate after confirming the final state of the operation unit at the operation position. As a result, the player can confirm the final mode before operating the sword ornament 5001, and the player can have a sense of anticipation for the subsequent development (for example, in the case of a form with an aura member, the sense of anticipation will increase), or prepare mentally. Therefore, there is a concern that the operation valid period will start as soon as the second sword is drawn, and the game will become less interesting due to the hasty transition to the operation presentation without being able to confirm the mode of the operation means. can be wiped out.

In addition, the drawing effect of the sword decoration 5001 is performed in a series of Iai effects performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decoration 5001 is movable as a movable body (time t0 to t3). The operation effect (time t3 to t4) as the operation means is related to the effect. As a result, it is possible to impress the player with unexpectedness and diversity of presentation in the switching of the function of the sword ornament 5001, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game caused by the uniform presentation by the conventional operation means. can be done.

In the above-described production example, the case where the aura member 5030 is provided in the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) itself and the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030 has been described. The same applies to the case where the sword portion 5010 provided in 5020 is united with a frame-side member (aura member 5035) to form an integral decoration.

In this way, the sword decoration 5001 of this example constitutes an operating means that can change (deform or combine) the members (the sword portion 5010 and the aura member 5030) of the same system as the general decorative movable body in appearance. are doing. The mode of the sword ornament 5001 (sword sheathed state, first sword drawn state, second sword drawn state, form without aura member, and form with aura member) is the state of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is determined based on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by acceptance (see Figure 280). Therefore, the sword decoration 5001 can suggest the degree of expectation that the variable display will result in an advantageous result for the player due to the change in its own mode, and raises the player's interest in the operation means (sword decoration 5001). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, before the sword decoration 5001 becomes the second drawn state (operation position) where the sword decoration 5001 can be operated by the player, the degree of expectation is suggested by changing the state of the sword decoration 5001 from the sheathed state to the first drawn state. are doing. In addition, the degree of expectation is suggested by causing the aura members 5030 and 5035 to appear in the state change from the first drawn state to the second drawn state. In this way, the sword ornament 5001 of this example changes to the expected suggestion mode (the first drawn state and the appearance of the aura member) in the process of changing from the sheathed state to the second drawn state (operating position). , the player becomes strongly interested in the operation means until the operation means becomes operable. Further, when the state change of the operating means and the expectation level suggestion are performed separately, specifically, when the expectation level suggestion is performed first and then the movement to the operation position is performed, the expectation level is high. In this mode, there is a concern that the player may operate the operation means even though the operating means has not yet reached an operable operating position when the player grasps the mode, but the sword ornament 5001 of this example can be operated. Since the state change to the position and the expectation degree suggestion are performed simultaneously, it is possible to prevent the above-described erroneous operation.

In addition, in the above-described first sword-drawn state, only the habaki 5011a portion of the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5012 so that the aura member 5030 (5035) cannot be visually recognized by the player. A part of the aura member 5030 (5035) may be visible in the single-sword state. At this time, the amount of withdrawn sword in the first withdrawn state should not be less than the maximum withdrawn amount in the second withdrawn state (operating position). Here, the aura member 5030 (5035) is fully exposed when the second sword is drawn. Since the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) indicating that the degree of expectation is high from the first drawn state, the player has a higher sense of expectation at the time of the first drawn state. It can increase interest in subsequent changes.

In addition, in the case where a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) is visible to the player in the first draw state, it is assumed that the form with the aura member is attached (the degree of expectation is high) at the stage of the sword draw preparation transition effect. Since the player can grasp it and have great expectations, the disappointment when the sword draw main effect is not executed in the subsequent development will be greatly increased. Therefore, when the sword draw preparation transition effect is performed, the presence or absence of the sword draw main effect greatly shakes the player's feelings, and a highly entertaining game effect can be provided.

(Modification 1-Sword drawing performance using operation buttons)
291 to 294, in the case where the sword drawing effect is executed in the ready-to-win effect, the sword drawing action of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword drawing effect is triggered by the player's pressing operation of the operation button 410. A case will be described. 291 to 293 are examples of effect transition diagrams of the drawing effect of Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 294 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 and the operation timing of the operation means in Modification 1. FIG. Note that the same description as the above-described drawing effect (FIGS. 285 to 290) will be omitted as appropriate.

Here, there is a production pattern ((Y1) to (Y3) → (E1) and (E2) in the figure) in which neither the sword drawing preparation transition production is performed nor the sword drawing main production is performed, and after the execution of the sword drawing preparation transition production Screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the state of the operation button 410 for the effect pattern ((Y1) to (Y3) → (F1) to (F3) → (G1) to (G4) in the figure) in which the sword drawing effect is performed Transition and operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 will be described.

When the ready-to-win effect is started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the iai effect is started (FIG. 291 (Y1)), and the operation button image to which the effect is added is displayed to suggest the operation of the operation button 410. is performed (FIG. 291 (Y2)). Then, when the operation effective period of the operation button 410 is started, the image display of the operation button to be operated and the gauge display of the operation effective period are performed, and an operation prompting effect is performed to prompt the player to operate (Fig. 291 ( Y3) At this time, the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated, and the operation buttons for the image display are also displayed in the same light emission mode, so that the player can easily perform the operation effect of the operation button 410. It should be noted that light emission of the operation button 410 is terminated when an operation by the player is detected.

In the case where the sword drawing preparation transition effect and the sword drawing main effect are not performed and the result is a loss, when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the ready-to-win effect is finished in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image notifying the result of the deviation ("767") is displayed (FIGS. 292(E1) and (E2)), and the effect is terminated. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 and the operation button 410 are unchanged.

In addition, when the sword draw main effect is performed after execution of the sword draw preparation transition effect, when the player's pressing operation to the operation button 410 is detected, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the first sword draw state. A sword drawing preparation transition effect is performed (FIGS. 292 (F1) and (F2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, white letters of "Tenchu" are displayed on the blackout screen (Fig. 292 (F1)), and an image of a friendly samurai about to put his hand on the sword is displayed. (Fig. 292 (F2)). Next, the sword decoration body 5001 starts to change from the first sword drawn state to the second sword drawn state (form with aura member) (Fig. 292 (F3), Figs. 293 (G2) and (G2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the sword ornament 5001 changes from the first sword-drawn state to the second sword-drawn state (form with an aura member) due to the sword drawing main effect, FIG. 293 (G1), a blackout screen as shown in FIG. ) and the strength of the lightning bolt indicates the degree of expectation to win (hit) the iai.

287 (A2), (A3) and 288 described above. In order to function as an operation means capable of effectively accepting the operation of the sword ornament 5001, an operation effective period for validly detecting the sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001 is generated. Then, the player is urged to sheathe the sword within the effective period of operation (FIG. 293 (G2)), and the symbol type (hit or miss) is notified by the sheathing operation by the player (FIG. 293 (G3) or ( G4)).

Next, the operation of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 by the player and the state change of the sword ornament 5001 will be described with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. Modification 1 is characterized in that the operation of the operation button 410 by the player causes the sword ornament 5001 to start changing its state. When the ready-to-win effect is started (time t0), the operation effective period of the operation button 410 occurs at an early stage, and an operation promotion effect is performed to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 (time t1). Then, when the player operates the operation button 410 within the effective period of operation (time t1 to t2) (time ty), the sword ornament 5001 starts to change state, and first goes from the sheathed state to the first drawn state. Here, in the first drawn state, the player cannot determine whether or not the aura member 5030 appears (whether or not the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030). After that, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword-drawn state to the second sword-drawn state (time t2), and after a predetermined time has passed, the sword decoration 5001 is operated to function as an operation means. An effective period occurs, and an operation promoting effect is performed to prompt the player to operate the sword ornament 5001 (time t3). At time tx), the ready-to-win decorative symbols are stopped, the result is reported, and the presentation is terminated (time t5). Note that if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is not detected within the preset operation valid period of the operation button 410 (time t1 to t2), the sword ornament 5001 will be in the final form (second You may transform and change the state at once to the form with aura member in the two-sword drawn state). In addition, the state change timing from the first drawn state to the second drawn state corresponds to the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, that is, the state changes to the second drawn state after a certain period of time has passed from the first drawn state. can be In addition, when the operation of the sword decoration 5001 by the player is not detected within the preset operation effective period of the sword decoration 5001 (time t3 to t4), the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the second position at the end of the operation effective period. The sword is returned from the drawn state to the sheathed state.

In Modification 1, the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 by the player. The timing to start drawing the sword decoration 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 (time ty), and the timing to start the sheathing operation of the sword decoration 5001 is determined by the operation of the sword decoration 5001 (time tx). In this way, the movement of the sword ornament 5001 is reversed (sword drawing action and sword sheathing action) depending on which operation means, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001, is to be operated. The periods (time t1 to t2 and time t3 to t4) are provided so as not to overlap. Therefore, even if the other operation means is operated during the operation valid period of one of the operation means, the operation becomes invalid.

Thus, in Modification 1, the state change of the sword ornament 5001 is started based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Therefore, the operation of the operation button 410 by the player determines the form (final form) in which the sword decoration 5001 functions as an operating means (for example, the sword decoration 5001 is deformed and changes its state to form a form with an aura member). It can be shown as if it is in the second drawn state of As a result, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further increased, and the player's desire to operate can be enhanced.

In addition, based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, effect images (Fig. 292 (F1) to (F3) → Fig. 293 Since (G1) and (G2)) are displayed, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be enhanced and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

(Modification 2 - Step-by-step aura drawing effect using operation buttons)
295 to 299, based on Modification 1, the degree of appearance of the aura member 5035 in the form of the sword decoration 5001 with the aura member, specifically, the combination of the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011 A case in which the degree (aura level) is changed according to the number of times the operation button 410 is operated by the player will be described. FIGS. 295 to 299 are examples of effect transition diagrams of the drawing effect of Modified Example 2. FIG. It should be noted that the description of the same effects as those described above will be omitted as appropriate.

There are 0 to 3 stages for the aura level provided here. Aura level 0 indicates a completely housed state (FIG. 284(A)) in which the aura member 5035 is not visually recognized by the player. At aura level 3, the aura member 5035 is united with the blade 5011 in the second drawn state while maintaining the relative positional relationship in the sheathed state. 284(B)). Aura level 1 indicates a ⅓ appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears to be visually recognizable to the player by ⅓ of the full appearance state. Aura level 2 indicates a 2/3 appearing state in which the aura member 5035 is visible to the player by 2/3 of the fully appearing state.

Here, there is a production pattern ((Z1) to (Z3) → (H1) and (H2) in the figure) in which neither the sword drawing preparation transition production is performed nor the sword drawing main production is performed, and there is no sword drawing preparation transition production. is a case in which the actual drawing of the sword is performed, and the effect pattern (in the figure (Z1) ~ (Z3) → (I1) and (I2) → (G1) ~ (G4)), multiple operations of the operation button 410 are required, and the aura level of the sword ornament 5001 changes step by step. For the effect pattern ((Z1) to (Z3) → (J1) to (I2) → (G1) to (G4) in the figure), the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration Operation transition of 5001 will be described.

In Modification 1 described above, the final form (form at the time of operation) of the sword ornament 5001 is determined by operating the operation button 410 once. It is characterized in that a staged operation effect is performed in which the aura member 5035 is united with the blade portion 5011 to change the aura level of the sword ornament 5001.例文帳に追加

First, in the effect pattern in which neither the sword drawing preparation transition effect is performed nor the sword drawing main effect is performed, that is, the state of the sword ornament 5001 does not change even if the operation button 410 is operated, the effect pattern shown in FIG. (Y1)-(Y3)→The same production transition as in FIG. 292 (E1) (E2) is traced (FIG. 295 (Z1)-(Z3)→FIG. 296 (H1) and (H2)).

In addition, in the case where there is no sword drawing preparation transition effect but the sword drawing main effect is performed, one operation of the operation button 410 brings the sword decoration 5001 into the final form (completely appearing state (aura level 3) with aura member). ), the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected after the same effects as in FIGS. Then, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state. At this time, the aura member 5035 of the sword decoration 5001 is united with the blade portion 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship with the blade portion 5011 in the sheathed state, and appears completely when the sword decoration 5001 enters the second drawn state. It becomes a state (aura level 3) (FIG. 296 (I1)). The form with the aura member of the sword ornament 5001 of Modification 1 described above is composed of the aura member 5030, and Modification 2 is different in that it is composed of the aura member 5035; FIG. 292 (F1) (F2)→The same effect transition as in FIG. 293 is traced (FIG. 296 (I1) (I2)→FIGS. 293 (G1) to (G4)).

In addition, in the case where there is no sword drawing preparation transition effect but the sword drawing main effect is performed, the operation button 410 is required to be operated a plurality of times, and the aura level of the sword ornament 5001 changes step by step. Until the operation of the operation button 410 for the first time, the same production transition as before is followed (Fig. 295 (Z1) to (Z3)), but after the first operation, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state. , but the aura member 5035 is completely accommodated (aura level 0) in which the player cannot see it. The image displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 at this time is the same image as in FIG. 296 (I1) described above (FIG. 297 (J1)).

Then, the operation effect of the operation button 410 for the second time is started. When the operation effective period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. is performed (FIG. 297 (J2)). Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the following effects are performed according to preset aura levels 0-3.

First, when the aura level to be set is "0" (that is, in the case of the mode without the aura member), the aura member 5035 is maintained in the completely accommodated state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the effect is produced. In the display area of the display device 1600, the staged operation effect is terminated (no further operation request for the operation button 410), and the return to the sword draw effect (iai effect) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state is notified. An image (here, white characters of "Iza" on the blackout screen) is displayed (Fig. 297 (J3)). After that, the sword ornament 5001 is in the form without an aura member, and follows the same effect transition as in FIG. 292 (F2) → FIG. (Fig. 297 (J4) → Fig. 293 (G1) to (G4)).

On the other hand, if the set aura level is any one of "1" to "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the fully contained state to the 1/3 appearing state. Become. Then, in the display area of effect display device 1600, an image showing aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 297 (J5)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is decorated with green light indicating aura level 1.

Next, the operation effect of the operation button 410 for the third time is started. When the operation effective period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light emission. is done. At this time, an image showing aura level 1 is displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 (Fig. 298 (K1)). At this time, the emission color of the operation button 410 may be green, which indicates an aura level of one. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the following effect is performed according to the preset aura level.

When the aura level is "1", even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 maintains the 1/3 appearing state, and the staged operation effect ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( After that, there is no request to operate the operation button 410), and an image notifying that the sword decoration body 5001 in the second drawn state will return to the drawing effect (Iai effect) white characters) are displayed, and an image showing an aura level of 1 is displayed (Fig. 298 (K2)). 292 (F2) → FIG. A similar effect transition is traced (FIG. 298 (K3)→FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating aura level 1 is always displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 .

When the aura level is "2" or "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 1/3 appearing state to the 2/3 appearing state. Then, in the display area of effect display device 1600, an image showing aura level 2 is displayed (Fig. 298 (K4)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is decorated with red light indicating aura level 2.

Next, the operation effect of the operation button 410 for the fourth time is started. When the operation effective period of the operation button 410 starts, an image indicating the aura level 2 and an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 to be operated is displayed. An operation prompting effect that is decorated with light is performed (Fig. 298 (K5)). At this time, the emission color of the operation button 410 may be red, which indicates the aura level 2. FIG. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the following effect is performed according to the preset aura level.

When the aura level is "2", even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 maintains the 2/3 appearing state, and the staged operation effect ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600. (After that, there is no request to operate the operation button 410), and an image notifying that the sword decoration body 5001 in the second drawn state will return to the drawing effect (Iai effect) (here, "Iza" is displayed on the blackout screen) ) is displayed, and an image showing the aura level is displayed (FIG. 299 (M1)). 292 (F2) → FIG. A similar effect transition is traced (FIG. 299 (M1)→FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating aura level 2 is always displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 .

When the aura level is "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 2/3 appearance state to the full appearance state. Then, in the display area of effect display device 1600, an image showing aura level 3 (MAX) is displayed (Fig. 299 (L1)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is decorated with a rainbow color indicating an aura level of 3. Subsequently, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the staged operation effect is terminated (there is no request to operate the operation button 410 thereafter), and the sword draw effect (iai effect) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state is started. An image notifying the return (here, white characters of "Iza" on the blackout screen) is displayed, and an image indicating aura level 3 is displayed (Fig. 299 (L2)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a fully appearing state, and the production mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 3 is the same as in FIG. 292 (F2) → FIG. Follow the effect transition (Fig. 299 (L3) → Fig. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image showing an aura level of 3 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

In the above description, the degree of combination of the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011 is changed each time at the operation timing when the aura level rises, thereby widening the range visually recognized by the player (increasing the degree of appearance). is not limited to Even if the aura level rises, the appearance frequency of the aura member 5035 does not increase, and when the aura level is confirmed (specifically, when the white characters of "Iza" are displayed on the blackout screen), the confirmed aura is displayed. A stock-type combination may be performed in which the aura member 5035 is combined with the blade portion 5011 at once so that the degree of appearance corresponds to the level. Further, the object whose appearance degree is increased in stages is not limited to the aura member 5035, and may be the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011). For example, the blade portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) may be changed stepwise from the first drawn state to the second drawn state.

In this way, in Modification 2, while the sword decorative body 5001 functioning as the operating means is in the movable state, the player is requested to operate the other non-movable operation button 410. It is possible to provide various operation effects, and the interest in the game can be further enhanced as compared with the first modification. In addition, since a plurality of operation opportunities are given to the player to gradually develop the performance, it is possible to impress the player with a great deal of involvement in the performance and to prevent the player from losing interest in the performance. be able to. In addition, since the determined aura level is notified so as to be recognizable even in the subsequent performance, the player can feel the afterglow of the operation performance.

(Other production pattern 1 using sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 300 to 302, another ready-to-win effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 300 to 302 are diagrams for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device 1600 and motion transitions of the sword ornament 5001 in the princess ready-to-win effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the aforementioned sword decoration body 5001 . First, the sheathed sword ornament 5001 functions as an operation means, and detects the player's sword drawing operation. Secondly, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. It is possible to operate up to the front center.

When the changing pattern forms the ready-to-win state, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the three decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win state (Fig. 300 (A1)), and the start image of the princess ready-to-win is displayed (Fig. 300 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In a normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and is stationary above the display area in a state (initial state) in which a part of the blind is visible to the player. there is Further, at this time, the sword ornament 5001 is in the sheathed state.

In the princess ready-to-win effect, after an image of a princess facing behind a blind is displayed (Fig. 300 (A3)), an operation effect suggesting image suggesting an operation effect is displayed (Fig. 300 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 is started, and the operation effective period for accepting the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started, and at the same time, the display area of the effect display device 1600 prompts the player to draw the sword decoration 5001. An operation prompting image and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed (FIG. 301 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY are moved up and down in small steps from the display of the operation effect suggestion image to the display of the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation effective period. good too. Then, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

The sword drawing operation by the player means an operation of pulling out the blade part 5011 from the sheath part 5020 by grasping the handle part 5012 of the sheathed sword ornament 5001 and lifting the sword part 5010 upward. When the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state, the player's sword draw operation is detected, and a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection. The detection notification action may be any action that the player can feel through the handle 5012 gripped by the player, such as moving the sword 5010 (or the handle 5012) up and down, vibrating, and other actions other than the action of drawing the sword. Just do it. Also, the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player releases the handle 5012 . Therefore, since the player can visually confirm the detection of the operation, unnecessary contact with the sword ornament 5001 (grabbing again to confirm the detection, etc.) can be reduced, and failure or damage of the movable body can be prevented. can be done.

Here, when the player draws the sword, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear. However, when the player draws the sword, the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player according to the degree of expectation. You may do so.

When the end pattern is performed, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 and remains stationary above the display area (initial state). state) is maintained, and a screen showing the end of the operation presentation by the sword ornament 5001 is displayed (Fig. 301 (C1)). Then, the decorative pattern is stop-displayed in the missing mode "767" (Fig. 301 (C2)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sheathed state at the timing when the stop result in FIG. You may do so.

On the other hand, when the development pattern is performed, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is placed in the center of the front overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600 (below the display area). (D1 in FIG. 301), in which only the reserved display area can be viewed (completely dropped state).Then, the shadow of the princess is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the sword ornament is displayed. 5001 maintains the second sword drawn state (Fig. 301 (D2)).At this time, the display of the shadow of the princess projected in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided in a plurality of patterns. By changing the color of the shadow, the size of the shadow, and the comments to be displayed afterwards, the degree of expectation of the lottery result by Princess Reach (expectation of winning, game profit when winning, etc.) may be suggested. .

Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the sword ornament 5001 was in the second sword drawn state by the player's sword drawing operation, that is, after the shadow of the princess was projected in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword drawn state is reached. The sword decoration 5001 moves to the center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in the front-left and right direction by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (Fig. 301 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the completely fallen state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 with good visibility becomes An image of a surprised princess with the blinds removed is displayed (Fig. 302 (D4)). After that, the sword ornament 5001 returns to the original position where the sword drawing operation was performed, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of the variable display this time is a win, the win is announced with a smiling princess. An image is displayed (FIGS. 302 (E1) and (E2)), and an image announcing the loss is displayed along with a sad princess (FIGS. 302 (F1) and (F2)).

In addition, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above. If the player cannot move because the player is holding the sword when executing , an announcement or display such as "please release the sword" is performed. Even if the player does not stop gripping the sword decoration 5001, the effect itself proceeds. If it is held in the performed position, it will cause a delay in the left and right direction movement effect. However, regardless of whether or not the movement effect in the horizontal direction of the sword decoration body 5001 has been executed, the effect executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the falling movement effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) progress. Since it is configured so that the progress of the game is not stagnated. Note that the sword decoration 5001 may be configured such that when the player releases the holding of the sword decoration 5001, the movable effect in the horizontal direction is immediately performed, or the movable effect is not performed. may

As described above, in the princess ready-to-win production, the specific decorative member SDY that suggests the operation production (effective operation) of the sword decoration 5001 is dropped and moved by the player's drawing operation (vertical movement) of the sword decoration 5001. At the same time, the sword decoration 5001 itself, which has been operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600, is moved forward of the effect display device 1600 (to the operation position) by moving the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3. to the left). That is, based on the player's sword drawing operation, the sword decorative body 5001 itself can be moved to an operating position different from the operating position where the sword drawing operation was performed, thereby increasing the player's operational value and increasing the player's desire to operate. can suppress the decline of In addition, since one operation means can be operated in different stages (vertical direction during operation, horizontal direction after operation) according to the operation by the player, it provides an effect using a plurality of movable modes. It is possible to increase the operational value of the operating means compared to the conventional operating means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

It should be noted that the effect of moving the sword decorative body 5001 in the horizontal direction is for the purpose of performing an effect integrally with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain). Although the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the action position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the sword decoration 5001 is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the sword is drawn, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to be positioned outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is also possible to perform a left-right movement effect in which the player is displaced to the left (the left end of the frame). In addition, since the operation of the sword decoration 5001 of this example by the player is a movement in the vertical direction (the action of drawing the sword portion 5011 upward from the bottom), the sword decoration 5001 is operated after the operation based on the operation. For the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword ornament 5001 moves in a direction (horizontal direction, etc., as in this example) different from the motion direction (here, vertical direction) at the time of operation by the player.

Further, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so the player can accurately determine the operation end timing. can be judged. In addition, since the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time so that the player can visually confirm it, it is possible to suppress unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again to confirm the detection. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation, delaying the movement performance of the sword ornament 5001, or damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Furthermore, even after the detection notification operation, if the movement effect cannot be executed due to contact with the sword ornament 5001, a warning such as an announcement is made to the player to let go of the player's hand, and the operation is requested during the operation valid period. Since even the contact is prohibited after the operation means finishes the detection notification operation, the operational value of the operation means can be increased.

(Other production pattern 2 using sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 303 to 305, another ready-to-win effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 303 to 305 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the ready-to-win effect including the operation effect of the operation button 410, which is used in many ways. be. Here, as the operation effect of the operation button 410, there is a pattern ((A) (B) → N in the figure) in which an expectation level suggestive effect is performed that suggests the level of expectation that the variation during execution will be a big hit, and the operation of the operation button 410 is performed. A pattern ((A) (B)→M in the figure) in which the suggestion and development of the operation presentation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed as the presentation will be described.

In the ready-to-win effect here, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the variable display of the three decorative patterns is in the ready-to-win state (Fig. 303(A)), first, the operation effective period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is Then, an operation prompting effect is performed to prompt the player to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 303(B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and an operation effective period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the sheathed state. Then, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern.

First, in the pattern in which the expectation degree suggesting effect is performed by pressing the operation button 410, when the player's pressing operation to the operation button 410 is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that (Fig. 303 (N1)), an image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed (Fig. 304 (N2)). After that, the result of the current variation display (big win, loss) is reported (Fig. 304 (N3) or (N4)). It should be noted that a look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the expectation level suggesting effect for the variable display being executed. A character that changes the displayed pending display may appear.

In addition, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is suggested and developed by pressing the operation button 410, when the player's pressing operation to the operation button 410 is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 303 (M1)) in which an effect image is displayed suggesting that an operation presentation requesting sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001 will be performed. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image of the operation effect of the sword ornament 5001 (here, a message of the title "Chance to draw the sword" and the operation explanation "I want you to put the sword away") is displayed. At the same time, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state. The sword ornament 5001 at this time is in the form with an aura member in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the maximum movement of the aura member 5030 (Fig. 305 (M2)). Subsequently, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second drawn state and a predetermined period of time elapses, and the effective period of operation of the sword ornament 5001 begins, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory) is moved up and down in small steps in the initial state, producing an effect. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation prompting image for prompting the player to sheathe the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective period of operation are displayed (FIG. 305 (M3)). Then, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, an effect is performed based on the results of the current variable display.

If the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved from the initial state to the completely falling state ( Figure 305 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned to the initial state, a big hit is notified in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is cancelled. An image (decorative pattern stop mode “777”, message “Good job”) is displayed (Fig. 305 (M5)). On the other hand, if the result of the variable display this time is a failure, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) simply stops moving in small increments in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (decorative pattern stop mode "767") is displayed to notify the loss (FIG. 305 (M6)).

In this way, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation or developing an operation effect of other operation means (sword ornament 5001) are possible. Subsequent expansion cannot be specified at the time of manipulating . Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the desire to operate and the decrease in interest in the game, which are concerns due to the monotonous presentation after the operation.

In addition, in the series of ready-to-win effects, the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sword sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001) have different operation modes (pressing operation and sword sheathing operation). (press operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and to suppress the decrease in interest in the game, which is a concern due to monotonous operation.

In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As the first operation opportunity, the sword sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001 may be an effective operation. In this case, the operation means to be effective for the second operation opportunity is the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410 with a relatively lower degree of expectation than the sword decoration 5001 of the first time. is desirable.

(Other production pattern 3 using sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 306 to 310, another ready-to-win effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 306 to 310 are diagrams for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, state transitions of the operation buttons 410, and operation transitions of the sword ornament 5001 in the ready-to-win effect. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the drawing) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 Even if the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) does not move and is displayed in the missing mode based on the pressing operation of , the pattern display in the missing mode is changed again, and the player is given an opportunity to operate again. Patterns ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) → Q when given the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 / R when given the opportunity to operate the operation button 410) will be explained.

In the ready-to-win effect here, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the ready-to-win state (FIG. 306(A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here , and the message ``Move the movable body with a single push of the button'') is displayed (Fig. 306(B)). An operation facilitating presentation to prompt is performed (Fig. 306(C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the effective period of operation are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the sheathed state. Then, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern. Note that the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one hit (one time), and may be repeated hits (multiple times). In addition, in order for the player to easily grasp the object (movable body) that is moved by the operation, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved up and down in small steps in the initial state during the operation valid period of the operation button 410. You may do so. If the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated later, the sword decoration 5001 may be changed from the sheathed state to the second drawn state at this point.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is movable and becomes a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is completely dropped from the initial state. (Fig. 307 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, an image (decorative pattern of A stop mode "777" and a message of "good job") is displayed (Fig. 307 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (blinds) is not movable, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative members SDY (blinds) are only stopped moving in small steps, and can be dropped. not. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the decorative pattern in the shifted mode ("767") is oscillatingly displayed in the center of the screen (Fig. 308 (P1). The decorative pattern is developed into a pattern (Fig. 308 (P2)) in which the decoration pattern is displayed in a stopped state ("767"), or a resurrection pattern in which the ready-to-win state is revived.

In the resurrection pattern, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a resurrection start image (saying "not A samurai image) is inserted (Fig. 308 (P3)), and the decorative pattern is again in a ready-to-reach state and displayed in a reduced size in the upper right corner of the screen. 308 (P4) is displayed. As time elapses, the eyes of the displayed samurai are enlarged and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved up and down in small steps in the initial state (Fig. 308 (P5)). As a result, the player's sense of expectation for performance using the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is heightened. Also, at this time, the operation button 410 may be decorated with light emission in a high-speed flashing mode, or the sword decoration 5001 may be moved up and down by changing from the sheathed state to the first drawn state. Then, depending on the effect pattern to be set, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 functions as an effective operation means. (Sudare Yakumono) is performed. The pattern in which the operation button 410 is operated is set to have a lower degree of expectation than the pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is operated.

When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmation image) in which the samurai's forehead is dripping with sweat in the operation effective suggesting image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed, and the operation button is pressed. 410 is decorated with light emission (Fig. 309 (R1)). Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) continues to move in small steps, the operation button 410 is decorated with light, and the operation effective period of the operation button 410 starts, prompting the user to press the operation button 410. Promotion effect is performed (Fig. 309 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of an operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of times of operation, and an effective period of operation are displayed. Here, when the operation button 410 is operated a required number of times, it is no longer illuminated.

Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the player's pressing operation of the operation button 410 is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved from the initial state to the completely falling state. (Fig. 309 (R3)). At this time, the decoration pattern displayed on the upper right of the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed on the lower right of the screen so as to be visible to the player. It should be noted that at this time, it may be made difficult for the player to grasp the mode of the decoration pattern, as in the case described above (FIG. 305 (M4)). Next, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned to the initial state from the completely fallen state, and the screen An image (decorative design stop mode “777”, message “Good luck”) announcing a big hit is displayed in the center (Fig. 309 (R4)).

On the other hand, when the result of the variable display is a failure, when the player's pressing operation of the operation button 410 is detected, the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the display area, a decorative design in a displaced mode ("767") is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen (Fig. 309 (R5)).

When the sword ornament 5001 is used as the operation means, an image (sword ornament finalized image) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sheathed state to the second drawn state with the aura member attached (Fig. 310 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 may be decorated with light. The player can understand from the image in the display area that the sword decoration 5001 is valid to operate, not the operation button 410. At this point, the sword decoration 5001 is in a form with an aura member. can be understood by actually looking at the sword decoration 5001 . Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved in small steps, the second sword is drawn and a predetermined period of time elapses. In the area, an operation prompting image prompting the player to sheathe the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective period of the operation are displayed (FIG. 310 (Q2)).

Then, if the result of the current variation display is a big hit, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, the effect transition similar to the above-described FIGS. 309 (R3) and (R4) follows (FIG. Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, if the result of the variable display is a loss, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, the effect transition similar to that of FIG. 309 (R5) described above is traced (FIG. 310 (Q5)).

In this way, since the degree of expectation is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the degree of expectation is more powerful than the degree of expectation suggested by the image. Suggestions can be provided, and a decrease in interest in games can be suppressed. Also, even if the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) does not drop and move based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given the opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 again. be done. Since the degree of expectation can be suggested by the operating means to which the opportunity to operate is provided, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game, which is a concern due to monotonous operation presentation without changing.

300 to 310 described above show three examples of production patterns for ready-to-win production using the sword ornament 5001, but various production modes may be combined. As a result, it is possible to provide a wide variety of presentations, and to increase the interest in the game.

(Pseudo continuous performance using sword ornaments)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 311 to 325, a pseudo-continuous effect using a sword ornament 5001 that changes its form step by step according to the number of continuations of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) will be described. The pseudo-continuous performance is a performance in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and re-varied. and so on. Here, the temporary stop described above indicates a state in which the variable display appears to have stopped, but actually continues to fluctuate slightly. In this example, when the main control board 1310 selects a variation pattern that performs pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the pseudo-continuous effect of the effect pattern that can be selected by the lottery of the effect content by the peripheral control board 1510 will be described below. to explain.

(Form of sword decoration)
First, referring to FIG. 311, the form of the sword decoration 5001 of this example will be described. The form of the sword ornament 5001 described above has two types, a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member. are provided in two types.

FIG. 311 is a diagram for explaining the form of the sword ornament 5001 used for pseudo-continuous effect. The sword decoration 5001 here is provided so as to be able to change its shape in two stages by deformation of the handle 5012, and is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3, and the player can see from the left and right sides of the sheath 5020. It is characterized by having an aura member 5040 that appears visibly in the The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 in the same manner as the aura member 5035 described above, but its operation mode is the same as that of the aura member 5030 described above. 311(A) to (D) are diagrams showing the types (step changes) of the form of the sword ornament 5001 in the sheathed state, showing the stage 0 form to stage 3 form in order. The sword ornament 5001 takes any form from stage 0 to stage 3 depending on the presentation.

As shown in FIG. 311A, the stage 0 configuration is the configuration in the normal state similar to FIGS. showing morphology. As shown in FIG. 311(B), the stage 1 configuration shows a configuration in which the aura member 5040 appears outside the side surface of the sheath 5012 due to the action of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 configuration. As shown in FIG. 311(C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle 5012 from the stage 1 form spreads and moves so as to be divided into left and right from the center, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from inside. show. As shown in FIG. 311(D), in the stage 3 form, the second decorative part 5012b is moved upward from the inside of the handle part 5012 in the stage 2 form to form a decoration integrated with the first decorative part 5012a. showing morphology. Here, the stage 1 to stage 3 forms allow the form change without the sword ornament 5001 being in the second drawn state. Furthermore, since the sword part 5010 capable of receiving the operation by the player as the operation part of the operation means and the sheath part 5020 which does not operate operate together to form an integral decoration, a more powerful operation means can be provided. can be done.

(Example of pseudo-continuous performance)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 312 to 325, an example of effect transition for the effect pattern for performing the pseudo-continuous effect will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 320, the types of effect patterns will be described. FIG. 320 is a diagram for explaining the types of effect patterns that can be selected based on variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 320(A), by the main control board 1310, the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, and the sword LV3 strong fluctuation. A pseudo-continuous effect is performed when one of the six variation patterns of patterns is selected. The production patterns for pseudo continuous production include basic production patterns corresponding to six types of variation patterns (sword LV1 weak production pattern, sword LV1 strong production pattern, sword LV2 weak production pattern, sword LV2 strong production pattern, sword LV3 weak In addition to the production pattern and the sword LV3 strong production pattern), specific production patterns (pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern, and pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern) are provided. When the variation pattern is a weak sword LV1 variation pattern (strong sword LV1 variation pattern), a weak sword LV1 effect pattern or a weak pseudo sword LV1 effect pattern (strong sword LV1 effect pattern or strong pseudo sword LV1 effect pattern) is selected, When the variation pattern is the weak sword LV2 variation pattern (sword LV2 strong variation pattern), the weak sword LV2 effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern) is selected, and the variation pattern is the weak sword LV3 variation pattern (strong sword LV3 variation pattern). ), any of the weak sword LV3 production pattern, the weak pseudo sword LV1 production pattern, and the pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern, and pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern) selected.

The effect pattern includes the number of times (1 to 3 times) of continuous pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation), whether or not to give the opportunity to operate the sword decoration body 5001 according to the number of times of continuation, and the operation opportunity when given. The mode of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is set (see FIG. 320(B)). Effect pattern names “LV1” to “LV3” correspond to the number of times the pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) continues from 1 to 3 times. Also, "weak" and "strong" correspond to the drop position (half drop, full drop) in the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain). In addition, "pseudo sword LV1" gives an opportunity to select and operate the sword decorative body 5001 at the first pseudo continuous variation (re-variation), and the player selects not to operate the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation). Indicates that it is a production that can be acquired. In addition, "pseudo resurrection sword LV1" follows the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern of the basic effect pattern that gives the opportunity to operate the sword decoration body 5001 at the first time of the pseudo continuous change (re-change). After the special decorative member SDY (blind curtain) drop effect based on the first change operation opportunity is completed, it indicates that the simulated continuous change (re-change) is performed again. Details of the effect content of each effect pattern will be described later.

Here, the basic effect pattern is set such that the greater the number of times the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) continues, that is, the more the shape change of the sword ornament 5001 progresses, the higher the degree of expectation. It is set so that the lower the falling position of the object) is, the higher the expectation is. The degree of expectation is set to be the same as in the case where the falling position of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is the full drop in the production pattern with fewer times. Specifically, the expectation for the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) continuation number 1 and the half-falling sword LV1 weak production pattern is 29%, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) continuation number 1 and the full-fall sword The expectation level of the LV1 strong effect pattern is 40%, the number of continuous pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variation) is 2 times, and the expectation level of the half-falling sword LV2 weak effect pattern is 40%, the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variation) is 2. The expectation level of the sword LV2 strong production pattern of times and full drops is 50%, the expectation level of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) 3 times and the half-fall sword LV3 weak production pattern is 50%, pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re- Variation) is set to continue 3 times and the expectation level of the full drop sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set to be 65%. The specific performance pattern is set so that the degree of expectation differs according to the selected variation pattern even if the performance pattern is the same, and the degree of expectation is set to be higher for a variation pattern with a higher degree of expectation. The degree of expectation of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern that gives the player the opportunity to select and operate is 38% and 53% respectively when the selected variation pattern is the weak sword LV1 variation pattern and the weak sword LV3 variation pattern. becomes. The expectations of the simulated sword LV1 strong effect pattern are 47% and 74% respectively when the selected variation pattern is the sword LV1 strong variation pattern and the sword LV3 strong variation pattern. In addition, the expectation level of the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is restored after following the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set to 100% regardless of the variation pattern.

Below, the pseudo-continuous effect of each effect pattern shown in FIG. 320(B) will be described with reference to effect transition examples shown in FIGS. 312 to 319 and effect execution timing charts shown in FIGS. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing an example of pseudo-continuous effect transition common to all effect patterns. FIGS. 313 to 315 are diagrams showing examples of transitions of presentations as to whether or not an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given while pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is being performed. Also, FIG. 316 is a diagram showing an example of a transition of an effect after operation of the sword decoration body 5001 (a specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) falling effect) during the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) common to all the effect patterns. be. Also, FIGS. 317 and 318 are diagrams showing examples of effect transitions that feature the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. Also, FIG. 319 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition which is a feature of the simulated resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern. 321 to 325 are operation execution timing charts of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) in the pseudo continuous effect, and FIG. 321 is a sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern). 322 is a weak sword LV2 effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern), FIG. 323 is a weak sword LV3 effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern), and FIG. 324 is a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern). , FIG. 325 shows a simulated resurrection sword LV1 rendering pattern. Below, it demonstrates along the example of an effect transition when a simulated continuous effect is executed in the effect before the variable display is started and the ready-to-win state is reached.

(common to all production patterns)
As shown in FIG. 312(A), when the variable display is started, three decorative symbols are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a variable manner. At this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and a part of the blind is visible from the player above the display area (initial state). ). Also, at this time, the sword ornament 5001 is in the sheathed state of the stage 0 form (initial form).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 312B and 312C, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image indicating the start of the pseudo-continuous effect (effect content notification "Great chance if you can defeat 100 bodies" message, samurai is displayed, suggesting to the player that the pseudo-continuous effect will start. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a blind accessory) and the sword decorative body 5001 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 312(D), the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous mode, and the decorative symbols are changed again for the player. to notify. Here, of the three decorative patterns, the central decorative pattern is a pseudo-continuous sword pattern that is not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the form of the sword decoration 5001 and the production level (the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations). By displaying in the form of the pseudo chained sword pattern, the player can easily recognize the re-fluctuation of the decoration pattern (the start of the pseudo chained swing). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) and the sword decoration 5001, but the pseudo-continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change). ), a sword image showing in advance the form of the sword ornament 5001 (stage 1 form) is displayed. In this way, the form of the sword ornament 5001 and the rendering level (the number of times of pseudo continuous variation) in the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) are notified at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) starts. It is possible to grasp which stage of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) it is.

Then, when the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is started, as shown in FIG. The pseudo consecutive sword pattern is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 0 form (initial form) to the stage 1 form in which the aura member 5040 becomes visible. The shape change of the sword decoration 5001 at this time is the timing when the player's line of sight shifts to the sword decoration 5001 from the effect display that is displayed moving toward the sword decoration 5001 after pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is started. , that is, after the start of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). The timing of changing the shape of the sword ornament 5001 may be before the start of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). Pseudo-continuous variation (re-fluctuation) may be started at .

After that, as shown in FIG. 312(F), the sword image of the pseudo-reamed sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sheathed state to the second drawn state while the sword image is enlarged and displayed. , the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 312(G), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second drawn state, in which the player can sheathe the sword, is activated as an operation means. An operation opportunity suggesting image (samurai image with closed eyes) showing the determination result of whether or not to give the player an operation opportunity is displayed. After that, depending on the effect pattern set in advance, the pattern in which the sword decoration 5001 is operationally valid (effect pattern with "LV1" in the name) and the pattern in which the sword decoration 5001 is not operationally valid (name , and an effect pattern with "LV2" or "LV3"). In the following, an example of the effect transition will be described in order for the nine types of effect patterns.

(Sword LV1 weak effect pattern / Sword LV1 strong effect pattern)
First, referring to FIGS. 313 and 316, a weak sword LV1 effect pattern or a strong sword LV1 effect pattern that activates the sword decoration body 5001 as an operation means is set in the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change). An example of effect transition in this case will be described. When these effect patterns are set and the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 is given in the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), the display area of the effect display device 1600 shows the above-mentioned FIG. 312 (G ) is displayed (FIG. 313 (T1)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“Good opportunity!!” message) indicating that an operation opportunity for asking the player to actively perform an operation is given is displayed (FIG. 313 (T2)). . Then, an operation effective period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, and an operation promoting effect for prompting the sheathing operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 . Specifically, a sword image in the second drawn state (stage 1 form), which is the same as the sword ornament 5001, is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation valid period is displayed together with the message "Put away the sword!" (Fig. 313 (T3)). Then, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, an expectation level notification effect is performed by a specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) falling effect according to the set effect pattern.

Here, when the set effect pattern is the "strong" effect pattern, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, as shown in FIG. ) is moved from the initial state to the full drop state. Then, the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the second drawn state to the sheathed state by the player's sheathing operation, and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). After that, as shown in FIG. 316 (U2), the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned from the completely fallen state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is shown in FIG. 312 (B). An expectation level notification image (“Defeat 100 bodies!”) is displayed to notify the expectation level of the result of the variable display in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo-continuous effect shown. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the fully fallen state is set to be higher than the degree of expectation indicated by the later-described half-fall state. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 does not change. Here, the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) by displaying the expectation level notification image.

In addition, when the set effect pattern is the "weak" effect pattern, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, as shown in FIG. is moved from the initial state to the half-fall state. The half-fall state refers to a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is dropped to an intermediate position between the initial state and the fully-fall state, and overlaps the upper half of the display area of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. . Then, the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the second sword drawn state to the sword sheathed state by the player's sword sheathing operation, and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). After that, as shown in FIG. 316 (U4), the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned from the half-dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is shown in FIG. 312 (B). An expectation level notification image (“Destroy 50 bodies!”) is displayed for informing the degree of expectation of the result of the variable display in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo-continuous effect shown. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 does not change. Then, similarly to the "strong" effect pattern, the display of the expectation level notification image at this time allows the player to grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation).

In addition, when the sword sheathing operation by the player is not detected within the effective period of operation of the sword ornament 5001, regardless of whether the set production pattern is the "strong" production pattern or the "weak" production pattern. In the display area of the production display device 1600, a runaway image (“Enemy runs away!”) indicating that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended without the fall production of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain). is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)). In other words, if the player's sword sheathing operation is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the degree of expectation of the variable display result. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the initial sheathed state when the effective period of operation ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation).

Then, when the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is completed, as shown in FIG. 316 (U5), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative pattern of the normal mode, and the ready-to-win effect is started. be. As for the ready-to-win effect at this time, the same ready-to-reach effect is executed for the "weak" effect pattern and the "strong" effect pattern. In this way, by operating the sheathing operation of the sword decoration 5001 when requested, the player can grasp the degree of expectation based on the falling position of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) and perform the ready-to-win effect. can welcome Therefore, even if the subsequent ready-to-win performance is the same, the player can have different expectations every time, so that the player's desire to operate is suppressed, and further, the decline in the interest in the game due to the uniform performance is suppressed. can do.

Next, referring to FIGS. 320(B) and 321, operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) when the weak sword LV1 effect pattern or the strong sword LV1 effect pattern is set. Execution timing will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 320(B), in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the sword LV1 strong effect pattern, during the period T1 during which the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 of the stage 1 form is operated. It is made effective as a means to give the player an opportunity to operate. Then, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is half-dropped by the player's operation. In addition, when the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is completely dropped by the player's operation. In addition, when there is no operation by the player, the falling effect (expectation level notification effect) is not performed in either effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 321, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) starts ( See FIG. 312(E)). After that, the state of the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (see FIG. 312(F)), and the operation is validated by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. 312(G)→FIG. 313(T1)→(T2 )), an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 313 (T3)).

Then, when the player performs the sheathing operation during the valid period of operation, the sword ornament 5001 changes its state from the second drawn state to the sheathed state, and also changes its form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) changes from the initial state to the half-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) returns to its initial state, corresponding to the half fall in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expectation notification image of the degree of expectation to be played is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. In addition, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) changes from the initial state to the fully falling state (see Fig. 316 (U1)), and the expectation level corresponding to the fully falling state is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

On the other hand, if the player does not perform the sword sheathing operation during the valid operation period, the sword ornament 5001 changes state from the second drawn state to the sheathed state when the valid operation period ends, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. It changes shape. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation), that is, at the timing of the end of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 318 ( See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Sword LV2 weak effect pattern / Sword LV2 strong effect pattern)
Next, referring to FIGS. 313 and 314, in the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or a sword LV2 strong effect pattern that activates the sword ornament 5001 as an operation means is set. An example of effect transition in the case of being present will be described. A description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

When the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is not given at the timing of giving the operation opportunity of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). 312A to 312G, after following the effect transitions shown in FIGS. 312A to 312G, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is not given an operation opportunity from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 312G. A continuation image (image of the samurai with his eyes closed) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001, which was in the second drawn state, is returned to the sword sheathed state while maintaining the form in the stage 1 form (Fig. 313 (S1)).

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous mode, and the player is informed that the decorative symbols will be changed again (Fig. 313 (S2). ). Here, among the three decorative patterns, the central decorative pattern is a pseudo-continuous sword pattern that is not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the form of the sword decoration 5001 and the production level (the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations). By displaying in the form of the pseudo chained sword pattern, the player can easily recognize the re-fluctuation of the decoration pattern (the start of the pseudo chained swing). Then, in the pseudo chained sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a sword image showing in advance the form (stage 2 form) of the sword ornament 5001 in the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) is displayed. be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a blind accessory) and the sword decorative body 5001 . Also, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the stage 1 form. In this way, during the temporary stop display immediately before the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) starts, the form and effect level (pseudo-continuous variation number) of the sword ornament 5001 in the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are changed. Since the notification is given, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) and face it.

Then, when the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is started, the pseudo-continuous sword pattern displayed at the time of FIG. At the same time, the effect display is displayed moving toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form in which the handle 5012 splits left and right and the first decorative part 5012a becomes visible (Fig. 313 (S3)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-concatenated sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sheathed state to the second drawn state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually changed from the sheathed state to the second drawn state. (S4 in FIG. 313). It should be noted that the form change timing of the sword ornament 5001 from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form and the state change timing from the sheathed state to the second drawn state may be set to be the same. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the sword decoration 5001 changes at once when the player's line of sight is turned to the sword decoration 5001. It is possible to impress a powerful action and attract the player's interest.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state (stage 2 form) in which the player can sheathe the sword is enabled as an operation means is displayed. An operation opportunity suggesting image (samurai image with eyes closed) indicating the result of determination as to whether or not to give the player an operation opportunity is displayed (FIG. 314 (V1)).

Here, when the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given in the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (image with the samurai's eyes open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 314 (V1) is displayed ( Figure 314 (V2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“Good opportunity!!” message) indicating that an operation opportunity for asking the player to actively perform an operation is given is displayed (FIG. 314 (V3)). . Then, an operation effective period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, and an operation promoting effect for prompting the sheathing operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 . Specifically, a sword image in the second drawn state (stage 2 form), which is the same as the sword ornament 5001, is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation valid period is displayed together with the message "Put away the sword!" (Fig. 314 (V4)). Then, when the sheathing operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 described above, an expectation notification effect is performed by a specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) falling effect according to the set effect pattern. This allows the player to know that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) has ended. Further, when the sword sheathing operation by the player is not detected during the operation valid period, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is the "strong" effect pattern or the "weak" effect pattern, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, a run-away image (“Enemy runs away!”) indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) has ended without the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is displayed (Fig. 318 (W2)). In other words, if the player's sheathing operation is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the degree of expectation of the variable display result. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the initial sheathed state when the effective period of operation ends. The escape image is displayed here so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation).

Next, referring to FIGS. 320(B) and 322, operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) when the sword LV2 weak rendering pattern or the sword LV2 strong rendering pattern is set. Execution timing will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 320(B), in the sword LV2 weak effect pattern and the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the opportunity to operate the sword decorative body 5001 is not given during the period T1 during which the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is performed. , during the period T2 in which the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the stage 2 form of the sword ornament 5001 is made effective as an operating means, and the player is given an opportunity to operate. Then, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation level notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is half-dropped by the player's operation. In addition, when the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation level notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) completely falls is performed by the player's operation. Incidentally, when the player's operation is not detected, the falling effect (expectation level notification effect) is not performed in either effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 322, when the sword LV2 weak production pattern is set, at the same time as the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) starts, the sword decoration 5001 changes form from the initial form to the stage 1 form ( See FIG. 312(E)). After that, the state of the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (see FIG. 312(F)), and the operation is validated by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The sword ornament 5001 in an operable state (second sword drawn state) does not generate an operation effective period for effectively accepting the player's operation, although it enhances the player's excitement (see FIG. 312 (G)). is returned to the sheathed state (see FIG. 313 (S1)). Then, the sword ornament undergoes the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S2)).

Then, simultaneously with the start of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 undergoes a form change from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). After that, the state of the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and whether the operation is validated by the operation opportunity suggesting image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After increasing the excitement of the player and making the player fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword drawn state) (see FIG. 314 (V1) → (V2) → (V3) ), an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 314 (V4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword sheathing operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword drawn state to the sword sheathed state, and also changes form from the stage 2 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) changes from the initial state to the half-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) returns to its initial state, corresponding to the half fall in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expectation notification image of the degree of expectation to be played is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2. In addition, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) changes from the initial state to the fully falling state (see Fig. 316 (U1)), and the expectation level corresponding to the fully falling state is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

On the other hand, if the player does not perform the sword sheathing operation during the valid operation period, the sword ornament 5001 changes state from the second drawn state to the sheathed state when the valid operation period ends, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. It changes shape. Then, at the end of the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation), that is, at the timing of the end of the period T2, an escape image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to indicate that the degree of expectation is not notified (see FIG. 318 ( See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2.

(Sword LV3 weak effect pattern / Sword LV3 strong effect pattern)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 314 and 315, a weak sword LV3 effect pattern or a strong sword LV3 effect pattern that activates the sword ornament 5001 as an operation means is set in the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change). An example of effect transition in the case of being present will be described. A description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

When the set effect pattern is the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, at the second pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) operation opportunity given timing shown in FIG. Since the operation opportunity of 5001 is not given, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to (G) → FIGS. In the display area, a continuation image (image of the samurai with his eyes closed) indicating that no operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. The sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sheathed state while maintaining the second stage form (Fig. 314 (V5)).

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo continuous mode, and the player is informed that the decorative symbols will be changed again (Fig. 314 (V6). ). Here, of the three decorative patterns, the central decorative pattern is a pseudo-continuous sword pattern that is not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the form of the sword decoration 5001 and the production level (the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations). By displaying in the form of the pseudo chained sword pattern, the player can easily recognize the re-fluctuation of the decoration pattern (the start of the pseudo chained swing). Then, in the pseudo chained sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a sword image showing in advance the form (stage 3 form) of the sword ornament 5001 in the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) is displayed. be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind) and the sword decorative body 5001 . Also, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the stage 2 form. In this way, during the temporary stop display immediately before the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) starts, the form and effect level (pseudo-continuous variation number) of the sword ornament 5001 in the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are changed. Since the notification is given, the player can grasp which stage of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is and face it.

Then, when the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is started, the pseudo-continuous sword pattern displayed at the time of FIG. At the same time, the effect display is displayed moving toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form in which the second decoration part 5012b protrudes above the first decoration part 5012a and both decoration parts are visible as an integral decoration ( Figure 314 (V7)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-concatenated sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sheathed state to the second drawn state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually changed from the sheathed state to the second drawn state. (Fig. 314 (V8)). It should be noted that the form change timing of the sword ornament 5001 from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form and the state change timing from the sheathed state to the second drawn state may be set to be the same. Further, the shape of the sword ornament 5001 does not have to be changed each time according to the number of pseudo-continuous changes, and the shape may be changed in a plurality of steps collectively when reaching the final stage. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the sword decoration 5001 changes at once when the player's line of sight is turned to the sword decoration 5001. It is possible to impress a powerful action and attract the player's interest.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state (stage 3 form) in which the player can sheathe the sword is enabled as an operation means is displayed. An operation opportunity suggesting image (samurai image with eyes closed) showing the result of determination as to whether or not to give the player an operation opportunity is displayed (FIG. 315 (X1)).

Here, when the set effect patterns are the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given in the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image with the samurai's eyes open) indicating that an operation opportunity is granted from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 315 (X1) is displayed ( Figure 315 (X2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“Good opportunity!!” message) indicating that an operation opportunity for asking the player to actively perform an operation is given is displayed (FIG. 315 (X3)). . Then, an operation effective period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, and an operation promoting effect for prompting the sheathing operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 . Specifically, a sword image in the second drawn state (stage 3 mode), which is the same as the sword ornament 5001, is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation valid period is displayed along with the message "Put away the sword!" (Fig. 315 (X4)). Then, when the sheathing operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 described above, an expectation notification effect is performed by a specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) falling effect according to the set effect pattern. This allows the player to grasp that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) has ended. Further, when the sword sheathing operation by the player is not detected during the operation valid period, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is the "strong" effect pattern or the "weak" effect pattern, the effect display device 1600 In the display area of , a runaway image ("Enemy runs away!") indicating that the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) has ended without the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is displayed ( See FIG. 318 (W2)). In other words, if the player's sheathing operation is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the degree of expectation of the variable display result. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the initial sheathed state when the effective period of operation ends. The escape image is displayed here so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation).

Next, referring to FIGS. 320(B) and 323, operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set. Execution timing will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 320(B), in the sword LV3 weak production pattern and the sword LV3 strong production pattern, the period T1 during which the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) is performed and the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) are performed. During the period T2, the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is not provided, and during the period T3 during which the third pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is enabled as an operation means, and the game is played. Give the person the opportunity to operate. Then, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is half-dropped by the player's operation. In addition, when the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is completely dropped by the player's operation. Incidentally, when the player's operation is not detected, the falling effect (expectation level notification effect) is not performed in either effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 323, when the sword LV3 weak production pattern is set, at the same time as the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) starts, the sword decoration 5001 changes form from the initial form to the stage 1 form ( See FIG. 312(E)). After that, the state of the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (see FIG. 312(F)), and the operation is validated by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The sword ornament 5001 in an operable state (second sword drawn state) does not generate an operation effective period for effectively accepting the player's operation, although it enhances the player's excitement (see FIG. 312 (G)). is returned to the sheathed state (see FIG. 313 (S1)). Then, the sword ornament undergoes the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S2)).

Then, simultaneously with the start of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 undergoes a form change from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). After that, the state of the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and whether the operation is validated by the operation opportunity suggesting image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The sword ornament 5001 in an operable state (second sword drawn state) does not generate an operation effective period for effectively accepting the player's operation, although it enhances the player's excitement (see FIG. 314 (V1)). is returned to the sheathed state (see FIG. 314 (V5)). Then, the sword ornament undergoes the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see Fig. 314 (V6)).

Then, simultaneously with the start of the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 undergoes a form change from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 314 (V7)). After that, the state of the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (see FIG. 314 (V8)), and whether the operation is validated by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After making the player fully recognize the sword decoration body 5001 in the operable state (second sword drawn state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3) ), an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword sheathing operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second drawn state to the sword sheathed state, and also changes form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) changes from the initial state to the half-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) returns to its initial state, corresponding to the half fall in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expectation notification image of the degree of expectation to be played is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. In addition, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) changes from the initial state to the fully falling state (see Fig. 316 (U1)), and the expectation level corresponding to the fully falling state is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

On the other hand, if the player does not perform the sword sheathing operation during the valid operation period, the sword ornament 5001 changes state from the second drawn state to the sheathed state when the valid operation period ends, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. It changes shape. Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-fluctuation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 318 ( See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

(Pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern / Pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIGS. 317 and 318, in the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword decorative body 5001 is enabled as an operating means, but the player selects not to operate it, so that the pseudo-continuous variation is activated. A description will be given of an effect transition example when a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern that can obtain the continuation of (re-variation) (level-up effect) is set. A description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

When the set effect pattern is the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is provided at the timing of providing the operation opportunity of the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation). . However, the operation opportunity at this time is not an operation opportunity to ask the player to positively operate as described above, but a selection operation opportunity to ask the player to select whether or not to operate. Therefore, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to (G) → FIG. 313 (T1), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is provided with the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 313 (T1). 317 (Z1 )). Then, an operation valid period of the sword ornament 5001 is generated, and an operation selection promoting effect for prompting selection of sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 . Specifically, a sword image in the second drawn state (stage 1 form), which is the same as the sword ornament 5001, is displayed, and the operation direction and operation valid period are indicated along with the message "Please choose whether to put away the sword." An image is displayed (Fig. 317 (Z2)).

Here, the set pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is any of the weak sword LV1 fluctuation pattern and the weak sword LV3 fluctuation pattern (strong sword LV1 fluctuation pattern and strong sword LV3 fluctuation pattern). Depending on whether or not the effect pattern is set based on the pattern, subsequent effect transitions differ greatly.

In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) set based on the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the player can sheathe the sword during the operation valid period. When detected, the effect transition (FIG. 316) similar to the sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern is traced.

On the other hand, if the sheathing operation by the player is not detected during the operation valid period, regardless of the set effect pattern ("weak" or "strong"), the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. When the valid operation period ends, the sword ornament 5001 is returned from the second sword drawn state of the stage 1 form to the sword sheathed state of the initial form, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 shows that the current selection operation opportunity is An image indicating that it was an opportunity to operate (“Was it a good opportunity?”) is displayed (Fig. 318 (W1)). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a runaway image (“Enemy runs away!” ) is displayed (FIG. 318 (W2)). Then, when the pseudo continuous variation (re-fluctuation) is completed, the ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative symbols in the normal mode in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the ready-to-win effect is started (FIG. 318 (W3)).

In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) set based on the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the sheathing operation by the player is performed during the operation valid period. When it is detected, in the same way as when an operation is detected at an operation opportunity in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern, Fig. 316 (U3) → (U4) (Fig. (U2)), the remaining performance period (the total period of the periods T2 and T3) is a variable display of decorative symbols in the normal mode (not shown). Then, at the same timing as the predetermined timing in the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative pattern of the normal mode, and then the ready-to-win effect is started (Fig. 316 (U5) reference).

On the other hand, if the sheathing operation by the player is not detected during the operation valid period, regardless of the set effect pattern ("weak" or "strong"), the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. is performed, the operation pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is continued by obtaining the level-up effect. The effect transition at this time is a transition to a continuation image (FIG. 313 (S1)) indicating that the operation opportunity is not given at the timing of the first operation given from FIG. 313 (S2) to (S4) → FIG. 314 (V1) → FIG. ) → FIG. 315 (X1) to (X4) → FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2) or (U3) → (U4) → FIG. 316 (U5).

In this way, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) greatly differs in the effect development after the selection operation opportunity is provided according to the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310 . If the selected variation pattern is a weak sword LV1 variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the player should select to operate at the selection operation opportunity, and if the operation is performed at the selection operation opportunity, the basic production pattern and Similarly, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation and face the reach production. On the other hand, if you choose not to operate, not only will you not be able to acquire the level-up effect described later, but you will also enter the reach effect without being able to grasp the expectations that you would have been able to know if you had actually operated. . Also, if the selected variation pattern is the weak sword LV3 variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the player should select not to perform the selection operation opportunity. If you do not operate at the opportunity of selection operation, you can enjoy the performance by the continuation of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) as in the basic performance pattern. On the other hand, if you operate it, you will miss the production (morphological change of the sword decoration 5001 due to the level-up production) due to the continuation of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) that could have been obtained without the operation, and the form of the sword decoration 5001 will be initialized. It will return to form. In the operation at the selection operation opportunity, the operation effect obtained according to the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, which is unknown to the player, is exactly the opposite, and the operation during the operation valid period in which the operation is effectively accepted is the game. It provides a novel production that brings the operation result that is disadvantageous to the user. Further, the operation at the selection operation opportunity of the specific effect pattern has a greater influence on subsequent development of the effect than the operation at the operation opportunity of the basic effect pattern. Therefore, the player faces the operation in the selection operation opportunity with a sense of tension and anticipation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to operate the machine, and to suppress the decrease in interest in the game caused by the uniform operation effect.

In particular, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak rendering pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong rendering pattern) is set based on the weak sword LV3 variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), in the first pseudo continuous variation (re-fluctuation) When the player operates the sword ornament 5001 at the opportunity of selection operation, the level is lowered from the stage 1 form at the time of the selection operation opportunity to the stage 0 form (initial form) instead of the level 3 form. On the other hand, if the player does not operate the sword ornament 5001, the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is continuously performed twice, the level is raised to the stage 3 form, and the opportunity to operate is given again. Conventionally, operations are required to be performed a predetermined number of times in the production pattern, but in this example, two operation opportunities (LV1 and L3) can be provided in advance. The granting ends at an opportunity, and a novel performance that reflects the intention of the player can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to operate the same operation effect, and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

In other words, even if an effect pattern is set in which the sword decoration body 5001 can change from the initial form to the stage 3 form according to the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, the initial form to the stage 1 form can be changed depending on the operation of the player. You can only see the change up to the reach production. Since the player can make the operation selection without being bound by the selected variation pattern (the set performance pattern), the player can feel that the performance is determined by the player's own operation selection. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to operate the game and the decrease in the interest in the game.

In addition, when the sword decoration 5001 is operated at the opportunity of selection operation, the form of the sword decoration 5001 returns to the initial form, but the degree of expectation can be grasped by the drop performance of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain). . If you do not operate the sword decoration 5001, you will not be able to grasp the degree of expectation, and the form will change in stages (level up), and you will be able to operate at the operation opportunity given after reaching the third stage. In some cases, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation from the drop performance of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain). Thus, the operation selection at the selection operation opportunity produces the same normal operation effect as the basic performance pattern, and the selection without operation produces an effect lower or higher than the normal operation effect. Therefore, it is preferable to set the degree of expectation higher when the effect is high than when the effect is low. In FIG. 320(A), the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is changed according to the variation pattern, but it is not limited to this. For example, the degree of expectation for the same effect pattern may be made constant regardless of the variation pattern. In addition, in order to provide an appropriate effect more suited to the player's own sense of selection, it is preferable to change the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern according to the variation pattern and effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's desire to operate the game and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 320(B) and 324, a sword decorative body 5001 and a specific decorative member SDY (sudare role) when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. will be described.

As shown in FIG. 320(B), in the pseudo sword LV1 weak rendering pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong rendering pattern, during the period T1 during which the first pseudo continuous variation (re-fluctuation) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 of the stage 1 form is displayed. is made effective as an operating means, and the player is given an opportunity to operate. When the simulated sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is half-dropped by the player's operation. In addition, when the simulated sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) completely falls is performed by the player's operation. Further, when the variation pattern selected at this time is the weak sword LV3 variation pattern or the strong sword LV3 variation pattern, since three pseudo-continuous variations (re-variation) are originally provided to be executable, the specific decoration After the falling effect of the member SDY, the normal pattern variation is performed in the remaining effect period (period T2+period T3).

Incidentally, when the player's operation is not detected, the falling effect (expectation level notification effect) is not performed in either effect pattern. Then, if the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, the second and third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is continued, and the second pseudo-continuous variation During the period T2 during which the (re-variation) is performed, the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 is not given, and during the period T3 during which the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration 5001 in the stage 3 form is operated by the operating means. to give the player an opportunity to operate. Then, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation level notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is half-dropped by the player's operation. In addition, when the simulated sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) completely falls is performed by the player's operation. Incidentally, when the player's operation is not detected, the falling effect (expectation level notification effect) is not performed in either effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 324, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the first pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) starts. (See FIG. 312(E)). After that, the state of the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (see FIG. 312(F)), and the operation is validated by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. 312(G)→313(T1)→317 (See Z1)), and an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (See FIG. 317 (Z2)).

Then, when the player performs the sheathing operation during the valid period of operation, the sword ornament 5001 changes its state from the second drawn state to the sheathed state, and also changes its form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) changes from the initial state to the half-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) returns to its initial state, corresponding to the half fall in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expectation notification image of the degree of expectation to be played is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Also, although illustration is omitted, in the case of the "strong" production pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) changes from the initial state to the completely falling state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), corresponding to the completely falling state. The difference is that an expectation notification image of the degree of expectation is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

On the other hand, if the player does not perform the sword sheathing operation during the operation valid period and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) continues (when set based on the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the sword The ornament 5001 changes state from the second drawn state to the sheathed state when the effective period of operation ends, but maintains the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S1)).

Then, simultaneously with the start of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 undergoes a form change from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). After that, the state of the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and whether the operation is validated by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The sword ornament 5001 in an operable state (second sword drawn state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation, although it enhances the player's excitement (see FIG. 314 (V1)). is returned to the sheathed state (see FIG. 314 (V5)). Then, the sword ornament undergoes the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see Fig. 314 (V6)).

Then, simultaneously with the start of the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 undergoes a form change from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 314 (V7)). After that, the state of the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (see FIG. 314 (V8)), and whether the operation is validated by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After making the player fully recognize the sword decoration body 5001 in the operable state (second sword drawn state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3) ), an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword sheathing operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword drawn state to the sword sheathed state, and also changes form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" production pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) changes from the initial state to the half-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) returns to its initial state, corresponding to the half fall in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expectation notification image of the degree of expectation to be played is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Also, although illustration is omitted, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) changes from the initial state to the fully falling state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), corresponding to the fully falling state. The difference is that an expectation notification image of the degree of expectation is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

On the other hand, if the player does not perform the sword sheathing operation during the valid operation period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes state from the second drawn state to the sheathed state when the valid operation period ends, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. It changes shape. Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 318 ( See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

In addition, when the player does not perform the sword sheathing operation during the operation valid period and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is not continued (when set based on the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the sword The decoration body 5001 undergoes a state change from the second drawn state to the sheathed state at the end of the effective operation period, and changes form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 318 ( See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 319, following the same effect transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak effect pattern, after showing as if entering the ready-to-win effect as it is, the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is revived. An example of effect transition when the sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. A description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

The pseudo resurrection sword LV1 rendering pattern is a rendering pattern that can be set by the peripheral control board 1510 when the main control board 1310 selects the weak sword LV3 variation pattern or the strong sword LV3 variation pattern.

When the set effect pattern is the pseudo-resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern, similar to the above-described sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the above-described FIGS. 312 (A) to (G) → FIGS. Follow the production transition. Then, when the player's operation is detected at the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of the variation pattern, the same effects as those shown in FIGS. After tracing the effect transition of UA1)→(UA2)→(UA3), the pseudo continuous variation by the pseudo chained sword pattern is resumed again. If the player's operation is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state to the sheathed state of the initial form upon expiration of the operation effective period, similar to other production patterns. Instead of (UA1)→(UA2) in FIG. 319 described above, the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) ends without the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) falling effect being performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An escape image (“Enemy, escape!”) indicating that the enemy has escaped is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)).

Resurrection and resumption of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) is performed by center Temporary stop display with a pseudo-continuous sword pattern that is not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, a pseudo-continuous sword pattern that indicates the form of the sword decoration body 5001 and the effect level (pseudo continuous fluctuation number) By doing so, the player is notified (FIG. 319 (UA4)). At this time, a sword image of the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form and the production level 3 are displayed in the simulated sword design. At this point, the sword ornament 5001 remains unchanged and maintains its initial form (sword sheathed state). In this way, in the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern, when the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is revived, without performing the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 of the stage 1 form and the stage 2 form, A pseudo-continuous change (re-change) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 in the stage 3 form is performed. Then, at the temporary stop display (FIG. 319 (UA4)) immediately before the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) in the stage 3 form starts, the form and effect level of the sword ornament 5001 in the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are notified. Therefore, the player can grasp which stage of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) is and face it.

Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the simulated sword pattern displayed at the time of FIG. It is displayed moving toward 5001, and the re-variation of the decorative design is displayed. Then, the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 3 form in which the aura member 5040, the first decoration part 5012a and the second decoration part 5012b operate and both decoration parts become visible as an integral decoration. (FIG. 319 (UA5)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-concatenated sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sheathed state to the second drawn state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually changed from the sheathed state to the second drawn state. (FIG. 319 (UA6)). Here, since the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 3 form all at once in a plurality of stages, it is possible to impress a powerful action and attract the player's interest.

After that, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second drawn state (stage 3 mode), in which the player can sheathe the sword, is enabled as an operation means, and the operation opportunity is given (see Figures 315 (X1) to (X5) described above). After tracing the effect transition of , if the operation by the player is detected, although not shown, regardless of the type of variation pattern, the specific decorative member SDY ( The type of the falling performance of the bamboo blinds) is determined. If the operation is detected at the first operation opportunity, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is once in a half-fall state, so level up and go to the above-described FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2). → The same specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) as in (U5) is completely dropped, and the expectation notification effect is performed, and the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is completed. On the other hand, if the operation is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the degree of expectation due to the half-drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain), which is the same as in FIG. 316 (U3) → (U4) → (U5) A notification effect is performed, and the pseudo-continuous variation (re-fluctuation) ends.

It should be noted that if the player's operation is not detected at the operation opportunity to activate the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword drawn state (stage 3 form) as the operation means, the operation effective period ends in the same manner as other production patterns. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes state to the sheathed state of the initial form, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed without the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) falling effect. is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)) to indicate that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) has ended.

In this way, in the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern, the same production transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak production pattern is followed, and when the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is restored again, the level of the stage 2 form is skipped and the stage 3 form Since the same development as the level of production (the third pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) production in the basic production pattern) is performed, the player is surprised and has a stronger expectation than other production patterns. can come to In addition, even if the player is given an operation opportunity in the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), or if the subsequent drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is half-dropped, the player will not lose heart. The game can be enjoyed in anticipation of the revival of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 320(B) and 325, operation execution timings of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain role) when the simulated resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. .

As shown in FIG. 320(B), in the simulated resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern, during the period T1 during which the first simulated continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the stage 1 form of the sword ornament 5001 is activated as the operation means, To give a player an opportunity to operate. At this time, regardless of the selected variation pattern (Sword LV3 Weak variation pattern or Sword LV3 Strong variation pattern), the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is half-dropped by the player's operation (expectation level notification) performance) is performed. Incidentally, when there is no operation by the player, the falling effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed.

Then, after the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is completed and once returned to the variable display of the decorative pattern in the normal mode, the period during which the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in another production pattern is performed. A pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is performed using the sword ornament 5001 that corresponds to T3, that is, changes in form to the stage 3 form. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 of the stage 3 form is made effective as an operating means, and the player is provided with an opportunity to operate it. At this time, if the specific decorative member SDY (blinds) is dropped during the period T1, the player's operation causes the specific decorative members SDY (blinds) to drop completely (expectation notification). performance) is performed. In addition, during the period T1, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is not dropped during the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is half-dropped by the player's operation. An effect (expectation level notification effect) is performed. In addition, when there is no operation by the player, the falling effect (expectation level notification effect) is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 325, when the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 undergoes a form change from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous variation (re-variation). (See FIG. 312(E)). After that, the state of the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (see FIG. 312(F)), and the operation is validated by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. 312(G)→FIG. 313(T1)→(T2 )), an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 313 (T3)).

Then, when the player performs the sheathing operation during the valid period of operation, the sword ornament 5001 changes its state from the second drawn state to the sheathed state, and also changes its form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) changes from the initial state to the half-fall state (see FIG. 319 (UA1)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) returns to its initial state, corresponding to the half fall in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expectation notification image of the degree of expectation to be played is displayed (see FIG. 319 (UA2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

On the other hand, if the player does not perform the sword sheathing operation during the valid operation period, the sword ornament 5001 changes state from the second drawn state to the sheathed state when the valid operation period ends, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. It changes shape. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 318 ( See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, once the ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative pattern of the normal mode (see FIG. 319 (UA3)), the pseudo-continuous variation (re-fluctuation) is restored (see FIG. 319 (UA4 )reference).

Simultaneously with the restart of the pseudo-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 undergoes a form change from the initial form (stage 0 form) to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 319 (UA5)). After that, the state of the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (see FIG. 319 (UA6)), and whether the operation is validated by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After increasing the excitement of the player and making the player fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword drawn state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3) ), an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword sheathing operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second drawn state to the sword sheathed state, and also changes form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, if the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is performed in the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is completely dropped from the initial state. A changing falling effect is performed (see FIG. 316 (U1)). Then, at the end of the revival pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) returns to the initial state, corresponding to the full drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expectation degree notification image of the degree of expectation is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Also, although not shown, in the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), when the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) does not drop down, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is changed from the initial state. It is different in that it changes to a half-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U3)) and an expectation notification image of the degree of expectation corresponding to the half-fall is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)).

On the other hand, if the player does not perform the sword sheathing operation during the valid operation period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes state from the second drawn state to the sheathed state when the valid operation period ends, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. It changes shape. Then, at the end of the revival pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 318 (W2 )), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

In this way, in the pseudo-continuous effect using the sword ornament 5001, in the sword LV2 effect pattern and the sword LV3 effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous change (re-variation) is performed multiple times, the pseudo-continuous change times are 2 and 3, respectively. In the case of less than, the state of the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state for each pseudo continuous change (re-change) to make it possible for the player to operate, but an operation valid period is provided. It is characterized by returning to the sword sheathed state without giving the player an opportunity to operate. For this reason, the player has a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the sword ornament 5001 will be operable even if the sword ornament 5001 becomes operable. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in motivation to operate and the decline in interest in the game.

Further, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is characterized in that the sword decoration 5001 returns to the initial form when the player sheathes the sword decoration 5001 whose form has changed from the initial form. Therefore, it is possible to give a novel impression to the player, which is different from the conventional uniform operation effect of providing a beneficial effect to the player through the player's operation. To make a player carefully select an operation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the operation of the sword ornament 5001, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the desire to operate and the decline in the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, since the sword ornament 5001 can change its form step by step until an operation opportunity is given (until an operation valid period is generated), the expectation and interest of the player are gradually increased, and the game is played. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. Note that the period from when the sword decoration 5001 is in the operation mode and second sword drawing state (operation position) to when the operation effective period is generated is the operation mode (form, light emission, movable state, etc.) at the operation position. etc.) should be provided for a sufficient period of time. As a result, since the player can confirm the mode of operation before operating the sword ornament 5001, the effective period of operation is generated as soon as the second sword is drawn, and the mode of the operation means cannot be confirmed. It is possible to dispel the concern that the amusement of the game is lowered due to the hastily transitioning to the operation presentation.

In addition, although the above-mentioned step change of the sword decoration body 5001 was shown by a form, it is not restricted to this. Each effect mode, such as a change in the lighting mode or the action mode of the sword ornament 5001, may be changed in steps corresponding to the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation).

(Application to look-ahead effect)
In addition, although the drawing effect in the pseudo continuous reach effect has been described above, it can also be executed as a look-ahead effect. A case of applying to the look-ahead effect will be described below. In the following, an example will be described in which the third hold is targeted for the look-ahead effect, and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set as the look-ahead effect pattern.

When the suspension to be the object of the pre-reading effect occurs as the third suspension 3, the same effects as those shown in FIGS. It should be noted that the sword ornament 5001 is different in that the sword ornament 5001 enters the second drawn state only when an operation opportunity is given (an operation valid period is generated). Then, in the next variable display (that is, the variable display of Hold 1 when Hold 3 occurs), the same effects as those shown in FIG. 312(G)→FIGS. Furthermore, in the next variable display (that is, the variable display of suspension 2 when suspension 3 occurs), the same effects as in the above-described FIG. 314 (V1) → (V5) → (V8) → FIG. will be As described above, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state in the look-ahead effect only at the timing of occurrence of the valid operation period. Here, the operation effective period is generated at the timing when the variable display of hold 3, which is the target of the prefetch effect, starts, and the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. to the second drawn state) is performed. After that, the effect transition similar to FIG. 316 (U1)→(U2)→(U5) is traced, and the look-ahead effect ends.

The state change of the sword ornament 5001 from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state is limited to the occurrence timing of the valid operation period. It may be done at the start. The look-ahead effect has the same effect as the pseudo-continuous reach effect.

(Suggestion effect before operation using specific decorative member SDY)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 326 to 329, the pre-operation suggestive effect executed before the operation valid period during which the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 becomes operational valid in the ready-to-win effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 among the plurality of operation means will be operationally valid by the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory). . Specifically, as a suggestive pattern by the pre-operation suggestive effect using the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain), the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is positioned at the initial position. There are a first suggesting pattern and a second suggesting pattern that generates an operation valid period in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved from the initial position to the suggesting position. ) is operationally effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestive effect of the first suggestion pattern (Fig. 326(B)) that generates the operation valid period with the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) positioned at the initial position even during the operation valid period. is performed, the sword ornament 5001 becomes operable with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 becomes operable with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (Fig. 328 (AA1)) generated by the operation valid period is performed in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to the suggestion position. , the sword ornament 5001 becomes operable with a probability of 70% (including the step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 becomes operable with a probability of 30%. A description will be given below of a production transition example corresponding to the action of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) in the first suggestive pattern and the second suggestive pattern of the pre-operation suggestive production.

(First suggested pattern)
326 and 327 show either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 during the ready-to-win effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the variable effect (ready-to-win effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. is a diagram showing a transition example of a ready-to-win effect in which a pre-operation suggestive effect of the first suggestive pattern is executed when it is determined that the operation is valid. In this ready-to-win effect, when the three decorative symbols in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are in the ready-to-win state (Fig. 326(A)), the operation button pre-determined to be operationally valid by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510 The pre-operation suggesting effect of the first suggesting pattern is executed before the operation valid period for the operating means of either 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is generated. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggesting image (aura rotation) suggesting that the operation means becomes operationally valid is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. is displayed (Fig. 326(B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) maintains its initial position. Also, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 .

Then, with the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) maintained at the initial position, an operation effective period is generated for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) whose operation is predetermined to be effective. Let In this example, when the operation button 5001 is activated, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation valid period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is in the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated at a higher rate than the sword ornament 5001. It becomes possible to suggest to the player.

When the operation button 410 becomes operationally valid, as shown in FIG. 326(C), the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) maintains its initial position. Let At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation prompt effect is performed in which an operation prompt image prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. Also, at this time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Further, even when the sword ornament 5001 is operationally valid, the pre-operation suggesting effect may be executed in the first suggesting pattern, although at a lower rate than the operation button 410 . At that time, as shown in FIG. 326(D), an effective period of operation for the sword decoration 5001 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (a bamboo blind) maintains its initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation prompting effect is performed in which an operation prompting image prompting the player to sheathe the sword decorative body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (a form with an aura member), and the player can sheath the sword.

326(C) or (D), when an operation to an operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) that is effective for operation is detected, and if the result of this variation display is a big hit, The specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved to fall from the initial state to the fully fallen state (Fig. 327 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned to the initial state, a big hit is notified in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is cancelled. An image (decorative pattern stop mode "777", message "Good job") is displayed (Fig. 327 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variable display this time is a failure, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) remains in its initial state and is not moved, and the failure is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image (decorative design stop mode "767") is displayed (Fig. 327 (CC3)).

(Second suggested pattern)
FIG. 328 shows that when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is to be activated during the ready-to-win effect, the pre-operation suggestive effect of the second suggestive pattern is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach production|presentation performed. In addition, in FIG. 329, even though the second suggestion pattern is performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is not enabled, and the operation button 410 is once enabled. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a pre-operation suggestion effect of a step-up pattern in which a body 5001 becomes operationally valid.

As shown in FIG. 328 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001, which is pre-determined to be operable by a lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. is executed before the operation validity period for the operation means of is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggesting image (aura rotation) suggesting that the operation means becomes operationally valid is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggesting image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggesting pattern, but in the second suggesting pattern, the operation effect suggesting image is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is displayed. It operates from the initial position to a small drop state (suggested position) overlapping the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view, and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) moves up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. It is moved in small steps in a direction. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

Then, with the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) moved to the suggested position, the effective period of operation for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) whose operation is predetermined to be valid is set. generate. In this example, when the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is enabled, the second suggestive pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestive pattern as the pre-operation suggestive effect. In other words, when the operation valid period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is in the suggested position, the sword ornament 5001 is operated at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It becomes possible to suggest to the player.

When the sword decoration 5001 becomes operationally valid, as shown in FIG. 328 (AA3), the operation valid period for the sword decoration 5001 is set while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare role) is moving to the suggested position. generate At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation prompting effect is performed in which an operation prompting image prompting the player to sheathe the sword decorative body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (aura-attached state), and the player can sheath the sword. Further, even when the operation button 410 becomes operationally valid, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, albeit at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. In the display area, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. In the second suggestive pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation prompting effect, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved from the suggestive position to the initial state. Also, the movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind) to the fully fallen state or the initial state may be performed from the state of operation to the suggested position without being returned to the initial state.

328 (AA2) or (AA3) described above, when an operation to the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is detected, the above-described FIG. 326 (C) or (D) Similarly, when the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved from the initial state to the fully fallen state (Fig. 327 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned to the initial state, a big hit is notified in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is cancelled. An image (decorative pattern stop mode "777", message "Good job") is displayed (Fig. 327 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of this variable display is a failure, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) remains in its initial state and is not moved, and the failure is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image (decorative design stop mode "767") is displayed (Fig. 327 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation-promoting effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation-promoting effect in the first suggestion pattern.

Note that the operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) in the second suggestive pattern is not limited to the pattern in which it is moved to the suggested position, and a plurality of operation patterns may be provided. For example, when a plurality of types of action patterns are provided so that the rate at which the sword decoration 5001 becomes operationally effective, the player's interest in the action can be heightened. It is possible to enhance interest in the used pre-operation suggesting effect and operation promoting effect.

(step up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern generated by the operation effective period is performed in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved to the suggested position, and the sword decoration 5001 becomes operationally valid, 328 (AA1) → (AA3) until the sword decoration 5001 becomes operationally valid. A step-up pattern is provided to enable operation.

As shown in FIGS. 329(BB1) to (BB4), the step-up pattern pre-operation suggestion effect is an operation valid period for the sword ornament 5001 whose operation is pre-determined by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. is generated, that is, before the presentation for promoting the operation of the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. 328 (AA3) is performed.

In the step-up pattern, first, an image suggesting operation effect (rotation of aura) similar to that in FIG. 328 (AA1) is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved in small steps (FIG. 329 (BB1). ). Next, an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved to the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emission, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. (Fig. 329 (BB2)). Here, even if the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the operation effective period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. A suggested image (most blackout image) is displayed (Fig. 329 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or when the effective period of operation of the operation button 410 expires. After that, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (with aura), and the display area of the effect display device 1600 shows that the operation buttons 410 to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. 329 (BB4). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is in the suggested position. Then, when the operation effective period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, the operation promoting effect of the sword decoration 5001 shown in FIG. 328 (AA3) is performed. The effect transition after the operation-promoting effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation-promoting effect (FIG. 327) in the above-described second suggestion pattern.

It should be noted that only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the button operation 410 (no operation prompting effect) at the time of FIG. 329 (BB2) described above. It is sufficient if the player can be made to operate the sword ornament 5001 after turning the player's attention to the button operation 410 once. Also, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestive pattern, but also when it becomes the first suggestive pattern.

In this way, in the pre-operation suggesting effect of this example, before the operation effective period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is operational-effective is generated, the specific decorative member SDY ) can be changed, and an operation means that can be operated according to the position is suggested. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 326(B)) in which the operation valid period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is positioned at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated. The second suggestion pattern (in FIG. 328 (AA1), the sword decoration body 5001 Therefore, the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) in order to grasp which operation means is effective. It is possible to enhance the interest of the performance.

In addition, in the second suggestive pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestive effect. Since the effect of the action (falling effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is also used for the notification of the result after the operation of the operating means (Fig. 327), a sequence of the motion effect (falling effect) from the suggestive effect before the operation, from the up and down small movements to the falling effect. It is possible to show the performance of the game, and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain), that is, the degree of expectation that the operating means that becomes operable by the movable body is operable is shown. A display may be provided to indicate expectations. In addition, when the operation means to be effective is determined, the operation button 410 is turned on, or the sword ornament 5001 is changed to the second drawn state, and the operation means to be effective is moved by vibration or the like. You can

In addition, in the second suggestive pattern, in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is located at the suggestive position, the operation button 410 is once activated (or after it is pretended to be activated). 2) A step-up pattern is provided in which the sword ornament 5001 becomes operable. As a result, the player is interested in both operating means. In addition, even if the operation button 410 becomes operationally valid immediately after the pre-operation suggesting effect, it is possible to have an expectation that the sword decoration 5001 may become operationally valid after that, so that the desire to operate is reduced and the interest in the game is reduced. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation effect suggestion image before the operation valid period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is valid is displayed. At the timing (FIG. 326(B)), similar to the second suggestive pattern (FIG. 328(AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is displayed from the initial position in the front view of the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is also possible to operate in a small drop state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper portion, and move in small increments in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. It should be noted that the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned to the initial position (rest) when the valid operation period is to be generated thereafter. As a result, the motion of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) in the first suggestion pattern is partly the same as the motion in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that the player is suggested an operation effect according to the first suggestion pattern. Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make the user think that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to expect that the operation of the sword ornament 5001 will be valid even when the pre-operation suggestive effect based on the first suggestion pattern is being executed. Since the player strongly desires that the operation effective period occurs in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) that is operated at the timing of displaying the operation effect suggesting image is moved to the suggesting position, the pre-operation suggesting is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained in the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a specific effect Execute the rendition with the pattern. During the performance period during which a specific performance pattern is executed, a specific performance reception period (effective period) for establishing a specific performance execution condition by an operation by a player can be generated, and the operation is performed within the specific performance reception period. , it is possible to execute a specific operation-time effect (such as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for granting a privilege) based on the establishment of a specific effect execution condition. The degree of expectation for awarding a privilege suggested as a result of a specific operation-time effect may be 100% or 0%.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation means provided for such an effect at the time of operation (such as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for granting a privilege when operated), an operation In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further provide operating means (such as the sword ornament 5001). In this regard, in a specific production pattern, based on the result of the production determination, the operation button 410 is provided with an opportunity to operate (when the operation button 410 is operated, a specific production execution condition is established). There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.) (when a specific effect execution condition is established when another operation means is operated). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001, etc.), even if no operation is performed at the operation opportunity, the pre-operation effect in which the operation opportunity is given is generated. The player can recognize that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for awarding the privilege is higher than when the operation button 410 is given the opportunity to operate. The degree of expectation for awarding a privilege suggested when an opportunity to operate another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.) may be 100% or 0%.

According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001), the operation time corresponding to the operation to the other operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) It is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the pre-stage where the performance is not yet performed and when the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, the desired performance result (such as a performance result suggesting that the degree of expectation for awarding a privilege is high) does not appear in the operation time performance corresponding to the operation of another operation means (such as the sword decoration body 5001). Even if the operating means cannot be operated within the specific effect acceptance period (effective period), the game interest can be improved through such operation-related effects. Become.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of the plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, sword ornaments 5001, etc.) having such effects. In this case, a common operation-related effect can be executed when the operation opportunity is granted.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least
・After the “specific operation-related effect” that can appear even when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is activated (makes it possible to receive the effect), the operation of the operation button 410 is activated (it becomes possible to receive the effect). ), and the operation of the operation button 410 is enabled without the “specific operation-related effect” being started (making the effect acceptable). A plurality of effect modes are prepared, such as a second effect mode that generates an effective period (effect reception period) that is set, and by executing one of these effect modes, the operation of the operation button 410 is validated (effect It is designed to generate an effective period (drawing acceptance period) during which the performance can be accepted.

According to such a configuration, there may be a period during which the operation of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be received for the effect. In either case of a period during which an operation means other than the specific operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) can receive the effect, a common (specific ) can be executed, so it is possible to make it interesting to see which of the specific operation means and another operation means can receive the effect. By allowing the player to perform the operation while the is being performed, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, in such a common (specific) operation-related effect, when a predetermined time elapses after the effect is started, one of the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001) is activated. At least at the time when the effect is started, it is determined which of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001) the effect reception period will occur. should be kept confidential.

Hereinafter, several presentation modes that can be employed when carrying out such common (specific) operation-related presentation will be sequentially described. In each of the following explanation examples and their other examples, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are used as a plurality of operation means for common (specific) operation-related effects. The types of operation means are not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as a plurality of operation means to be subjected to a common (specific) operation-related effect. In addition, the following production examples and their separate examples mainly show the production contents in the case where one of the production acceptance periods occurs after the common (specific) operation-related production is executed, and the common (specific ), the contents of the effect may be omitted if any of the effect receiving periods occurs without execution of the operation-related effect. However, the contents of the effects in the case where any of the effects reception periods occur without executing the common (specific) operation-related effects are as shown in FIGS. . That is, in this case, an operation instruction image prompting an operation of the operation button 410 appears, or an operation instruction image prompting an operation of the sword ornament 5001 appears, without executing a specific operation-related effect. Furthermore, in each of the following production examples and their separate examples, a common (specific) operation-related production is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed and the reach production A common (specific) operation-related effect may be generated as an image different from the effect image displayed as the ready-to-win effect during the period of execution, or common during the execution period of the jackpot game. A (specific) operation-related effect may be generated.

It should be noted that each of the effects described below can be executed in appropriate combination with the different effects described later, and can also be executed in appropriate combination with each of the effects described above. It is possible. Each effect described below can be combined with another effect described later by replacing a part thereof, and each effect described below is performed when the first effect pattern is executed. Therefore, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is also possible to perform different effects, which will be described later. The same thing can be said between the productions of the different examples described later.

[First effect mode]
Figures 330 and 331 show that at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can receive the effect during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is being executed after the specific operation-related effect has started. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation (1st production|presentation mode) performed.

In FIG. 330(a), in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 330(b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 330(a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 330(b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A display that moves within each is performed. In this way, by simultaneously displaying a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword-decorated image SYG) respectively corresponding to different kinds of operation means within the display area, the operation button 410 and the sword can be displayed simultaneously. While it remains unclear which of the ornament 5001 and the decoration 5001 can receive the effect, it suggests that the operation of any of the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) will soon be able to receive the effect. be able to

In FIG. 330(c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 330(b) progresses, and both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed. In a state where they are stopped and displayed within the area, an instruction display (here, a character display such as "operate" and an effect reception prompting to operate one of these operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) This shows the production situation in which the bar display indicating the remaining time of the possible period) appears.

According to such an effect mode, even though the operation of at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can receive the effect, these operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) It is possible to make it unclear which of the above is allowed to receive the performance. This means that the same rendering mode (Fig. 330(c)) can be used in both the situation in which the operation of the operation button 410 can be accepted as an effect, and the situation in which the operation of the sword ornament 5001 can be accepted as an effect. It's because it's displayed. That is, in this production example (first production mode), the operation of at least one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) is performed before the production can be accepted. (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001), common (specific) operation-related as shown in FIGS. I'm trying to execute the production.

Therefore, not only in this example of effect, but also in each example of effect described below and other examples thereof, the effect contents of the specific operation-related effect are limited to those shown in FIGS. 330(b) and (c). do not have. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect middle). With such a configuration, at least one of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) remains unclear as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can receive the effect. It is possible to suggest that the operation for one is made rendition-acceptable. For example, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means do not necessarily have to be displayed at the same time. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

However, in order to more reliably conceal which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can receive the effect, it is necessary to consider the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect for the sword decoration 5001. It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution (start of performance) of a specific operation-related performance to the occurrence of the performance reception period in the case where the reception period occurs.

In addition, as for the operation instructions displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is unclear which of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting the operation of one of the operation means ("operate ”, etc.), or always operate a specific operation means out of a plurality of operation means, regardless of how each of the plurality of operation means is enabled to receive the effect. may be displayed to prompt the user to In short, as an operation instruction, the same effect mode appears in both the situation where the operation to the operation button 410 can be accepted for the effect and the situation where the operation to the sword decoration body 5001 can accept the effect. By doing so, it is possible to give an operation opportunity while concealing which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect.

In addition, in the production example (first production mode) shown in FIG. , even when the operation to the sword decoration 5001 can be received for the effect, and when the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is not allowed to receive the effect (in any of the first to third situations described later) ), only the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is in a luminous state, and the operation of the operation button 410 is encouraged. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 may be put in a non-luminous state, or light emitting means may be provided on the side of the sword decoration 5001 so that the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are illuminated. Both may be made to emit light.

Here, in this production example (first production mode), the production situation in which the image shown in FIG. Is it in the first situation where the effect can be accepted, or in the second situation where only the operation on the sword decoration 5001 can accept the effect, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword decoration 5001 are set to be in one of the third situations in which the performance can be accepted. Of these multiple situations, if the second situation (situation where the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 is given) occurs, the first situation (the opportunity to operate the operation button 410 is given The degree of expectation for granting the privilege is set to be higher than when the situation) occurs. Therefore, the ratio of occurrence of the second situation (situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001) within the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is the first situation (operation opportunity to the operation button 410). It is desirable to lower the rate of occurrence of the situation where

In this example of presentation (first presentation mode), the operation button 410 is operated in either the first situation (operation button 410) or the third situation (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001). is performed ("FF" progresses in the figure), the second situation (sword ornament 5001) or the third situation (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) When an operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001 (when "GG" in the figure progresses), an effect reception is performed, and an operation-time effect corresponding to the operation (Fig. 331(d), Fig. 331(f)) is to be carried out.

331(d) and (f), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and a predetermined display effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (“Chance!!”) is executed. Note that the predetermined display effect may be, for example, "Chance!!" suggesting a relatively low degree of expectation, and "Extreme heat!!" suggesting a relatively high degree of expectation. By preparing a plurality of presentation modes such as , and displaying any one of these presentation modes in response to reception of the presentation, it is also possible to suggest the degree of expectation for awarding of the privilege. As for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, similarly, for example, by giving an effect mode that does not move to the front of the display area and making one of these effect modes appear in response to the reception of the effect. , may indicate the degree of expectation for awarding the privilege. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

Moreover, in the operation-time effect according to this example of effect (first effect mode), the effect is accepted by the player's operation in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 331(d) and (f). Then, based on the operation, the operation means can be controlled to be in an operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation).

More specifically, first of all, in the effect situation shown in FIG. Control for reciprocating the sword ornament 5001 on the side not being performed between the first position and the second position can be executed. According to such a configuration, although there is a situation in which an effect reception is generated as a result of the operation of the operation button 410 by the player and the effect at the time of operation of the operation button 410 is executed, the "operation Even if the button 410 was not operated and the sword ornament 5001 with a higher degree of expectation was operated, an effect acceptance occurred and the sword decoration 5001 side operation effect was executed. ” can be appealed to the player.

On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 331(f), as a result of the player performing an operation to draw the sword decoration 5001, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the sheathed position in response to the reception of the effect. It is possible to execute control to maintain the sword at the unsheathed position (sword unsheathed state) instead of returning to the sheathed state. As a result, the sword ornament 5001 moves from the sword sheathed position (sword sheathed state) to the sword drawn position (sword drawn state) based on the player's operation, and is maintained in such a sword drawn state. Occasionally, an effect will be performed at the time of operation. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is executed in the effect at the time of operation on the operation button 410 side and the effect at the time of operation on the sword decoration 5001 side, the sword decoration at that time By confirming the operation state of 5001, it is possible to make the player feel that the effect at the time of operation caused by the operation on the side of the sword ornament 5001 is being executed.

Then, after the effect at the time of operation (FIGS. 331(d) and (f)) is performed in this way, as shown in FIG. 331(e), the ready-to-win state is formed and the ready-to-win effect can be performed. However, since there is a possibility that an effect using the sword decoration 5001 is executed during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect, either the effect when the operation button 410 is operated or the effect when the sword decoration 5001 is operated is selected. Even if it is executed, when a predetermined time has passed (before the ready-to-win effect is started), the sword decorative body 5001 is put into a non-operating state (sword sheathed position (sword sheathed state)). Control will be performed to return to However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decoration 5001 must be at least half the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves toward the display area to when it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operating state (reciprocating motion or maintenance with the blade drawn) for a period of . As for the sword decoration 5001, it is necessary to end the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decoration member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. It is more desirable in relation to the amount (movable load).

According to the production example (first production mode) shown in FIGS. 5001) is allowed to accept the effect or not, the common (specified) operation-related effect is started, and the common (specific) effect started While the operation-related effect is being executed, a specific operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) is allowed to receive the effect, or the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is not allowed to receive the effect. Since the operation button 410 will be able to accept the effect, the specific operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) will be able to receive the effect. It becomes possible to give an operation opportunity in a state in which whether or not the user is in a state of confidentiality.

In this production example (first production mode), in particular, a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is allowed to receive the production, or the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is the production Regardless of whether the operation button 410 is not allowed to accept the effect and the operation button 410 is allowed to receive the effect, when an operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the operation button 410 and Combined with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decoration 5001 is designed to emit light, even if the sword decoration 5001 is capable of receiving an effect, the sword decoration 5001 is capable of receiving an effect. You will be able to deceive yourself as if it weren't there. In other words, in this case, it is possible to prompt the user to operate the operation button 410 on the lower side instead of the sword decoration body 5001, which is on the side of the side where the effect with relatively high expectations is performed, when the effect is accepted. When a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed, it will be expected to provide interest in determining which operation means should be operated.

It should be noted that, while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, if the operation means on the side that is not allowed to receive the effect (the side that has not generated the effect reception period) is operated, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the demerit that the effect acceptance period is consumed by the amount of such an erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

However, if the operation means on the side that is not allowed to receive the effect (the side that does not have the effect reception period) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the above operation time Although the acceptance of effects required for execution of effects (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effects, etc.) is not established, the detection of the operation itself is performed, and the operation on the side that can receive the effect based on the detection. A control may be performed to end the effect reception period for the means at that time. According to such a configuration, there is a risk that the operation opportunity will be lost. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the user to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect and operate it carefully. become able to.

In addition, in the above-described production example (first production mode), the same production (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display production, etc.) is provided for the operation button 410 side operation production and the sword decoration 5001 side operation production. Although it is executed, these presentations at the time of operation may have different content of presentations. For example, in the effect at the time of operation on the sword decoration 5001 side, in addition to the effect mode performed in the effect at the time of operation on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting part different from the effect display device 1600 emits light) , the generation of a unique effect sound, etc.), it is possible to more appropriately improve the amusement of the game when the operation to the sword ornament 5001 is received.

Also, when preparing another effect mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is operated, When the effect reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001), the effect reception period related to the occurrence of the other effect mode is not set. Effect acceptance period for the second operation means (for example, if the first operation means is the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, and if the first operation means is the sword decoration 5001, the operation button 410) is set. In either case, when there is an operation on the first operating means in the situation shown in FIG. 330(c), an effect upon operation may be performed. That is, in this case, when the first operation means is operated while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and the effect acceptance period related to the occurrence of the different effect mode is set, When a different effect mode is executed as an effect at the time of operation, while a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the effect reception period related to the occurrence of the above-mentioned different effect mode is not set (second When there is an operation for the first operating means (when the effect acceptance period for the second operating means is set), another effect mode is not executed as the effect at the time of operation, but when the operation button 410 is operated. The same production at the time of operation will be performed. In short, when the effect reception period related to the occurrence of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period related to the generation of the effect at the time of operation on the side of the second operation means is set to the second effect reception period. It is to be set for both the operation means and the first operation means. It should be noted that when another effect mode is to appear as the effect at the time of operation, the effect mode is not made to appear in addition to the effect mode performed in the effect at the time of operation on the side of the second operating means. The performance at the time of operation may be performed as a performance content different from the performance at the time of operation on the means side.

In the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the situation in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being Of these, the first situation in which only the operation to the operation button 410 can receive the effect, the second situation in which only the operation to the sword decoration 5001 can receive the effect, and the operation to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 It is set to correspond to any of the third situations in which both the operation for and the operation for the effect can be accepted. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, when the reception of the production is made, the same operation-time production appears. It is desirable that the effect or another effect mode described above (also different from the effect at the time of operation of the first situation and the second situation) appears. However, in the production example described above, the third situation does not necessarily have to be present.

Further, although the operation button 410 according to the above-described presentation example is not provided as an operation means to which a driving force is applied under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means. Above, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 331(f) among the above effect examples (first effect mode), as in the effect situation shown in FIG. Alternatively, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the other side may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side not operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it should be designed appropriately. However, the control for operating the operating means on the side not operated by the player is performed at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 side returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to end the action state so that the player's gaze is naturally returned to the game board 5 side.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the driving source for applying the driving force to the operation button 410 and the driving source for applying the driving force to the sword ornament 5001 are different. may be the same drive source.

[Second effect mode]
332 to 335, specific operation-related effects are executed as effects showing the progress of effects until either the first effect result or the second effect result appears. When the first effect result appears as a result of (1), it is suggested that the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means occurs, and when the second effect result appears as a result of the effect, the plurality of operation means It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation (2nd production|presentation mode) suggesting that the production|presentation acceptance period with respect to the sword decoration body 5001 generate|occur|produces among them.

In FIG. 332(a), in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 332(b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 332(a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 332(b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. are simultaneously displayed within, and how the lightning image IZ acts on these images BTG and SYG is depicted. In this way, by simultaneously displaying a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword-decorated image SYG) respectively corresponding to different kinds of operation means within the display area, the operation button 410 and the sword can be displayed simultaneously. While it remains unclear which of the ornament 5001 and the decoration 5001 can receive the effect, it suggests that the operation of any of the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) will soon be able to receive the effect. be able to

In FIG. 332(c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 332(b) progresses, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed as an effect. An effect is performed in which players push each other within the display area of the device 1600 to push the other party out of the display area.

That is, the specific operation-related effects (Figs. 332(b) and (c)) related to this example of effect (second effect mode) are such that "the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG push each other, and the images Which of BTG or SYG will be left in the display area?" When the effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears, the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed. When a period occurs and an effect result (second effect result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. Therefore, in this production example (second production mode), the production shown in FIGS. Even if is generated, it corresponds to "a specific operation-related effect that can appear prior to the occurrence of those periods".

332(c), the left figure depicts a state in which the button image BTG remains in the display area, but the situation is dominant, and the right figure shows the sword decoration image SYG. It depicts the prevailing situation for remaining in the area. In a specific operation-related presentation, such inferior/superior status changes moment by moment according to the passage of time.

FIG. 333(d) shows how the effect shown in FIG. 332(c) is performed, and as a result, the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG is left in the display area. (first effect result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 does not occur, and only the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs.

That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332(b) and (c)) is executed that suggests that an operation opportunity will soon be given while concealing which of the plurality of operating means is allowed to receive the effect. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (Fig. 333(d)). is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means can receive the effect (the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs).

Also, at this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, an instruction display prompting the operation (character display such as "press", bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. It is possible to recognize that the operation for the operation button 410 of the operation means is in a state where the effect can be accepted (during the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this presentation example, only the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is made to emit light, thereby prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 .

It should be noted that the effect shown in FIG. 333(d) is a case where the effect progresses through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332(b), (c), etc.), or without going through the specific operation-related effect. Effect development (for example, effect progress from the effect state shown in FIG. 332(a)) may occur. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 333(d) is performed, if the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, if the effect is performed without a specific operation-related effect It is desirable to make the degree of expectation for awarding higher than that.

In addition, regarding the length of the effect receiving period, if the effect (FIG. 333(d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is performed through a specific operation-related effect, the specific operation-related effect The rate at which the length of the effect acceptance period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than when the effect (FIG. 333(d)) is performed in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 without going through should be high. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the later-described delay in the effect when the specific operation-related effect is performed.

FIG. 333(e) shows that, while the effect shown in FIG. 333(d) is being performed, as a result of operating the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means, the effect is received and the operation is accepted. This is a depiction of how the production at the time of operation is performed.

The effect at the time of operation shown in FIG. 333(e) is the same as that shown in FIG. 331(d). 333(e), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect ("Chance!!") is executed on the effect display device 1600. It has become. Also, at this time, even though the operation button 410 is operated by the player, the sword ornament 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is moved to the first position and the second position in response to the reception of the effect. It is also the same in that it is possible to execute control for reciprocating motion between the positions (control for setting the operating state). As the predetermined display effect, for example, "chance!!" suggesting a relatively low degree of expectation, and "great heat!!" suggesting a relatively high degree of expectation. By preparing a plurality of presentation modes such as , and displaying one of these presentation modes in response to reception of the presentation, it is also possible to suggest the degree of expectation for awarding of the privilege. As for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, similarly, for example, an effect mode is provided in which the action of displacing to the front side of the display area is not performed, and one of these effect modes is made to appear in response to the reception of the effect. , it is also possible to suggest the degree of expectation for awarding the privilege. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

Then, after such an effect at the time of operation (Fig. 333(e)) is performed, as shown in Fig. 333(f), a ready-to-win state is formed and a ready-to-win effect can be performed. However, since there is a possibility that an effect using the sword decoration 5001 is executed during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect, when a predetermined time has passed since the operation-time effect is executed (the ready-to-win effect is started In the stage before), control is performed to return the sword ornament 5001 to the non-operating state (sword sheathed state). However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decoration 5001 must be at least half the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves toward the display area to when it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operating state (reciprocating motion or maintenance with the blade drawn) for a period of . As for the sword decoration 5001, it is necessary to end the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decoration member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. It is more desirable in relation to the amount (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 334(g), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area as a result of the effect shown in FIG. An effect depicting the state of being left is being performed (second effect result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs.

That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332(b) and (c)) is executed that suggests that an operation opportunity will soon be given while concealing which of the plurality of operating means is allowed to receive the effect. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed in the display area (Fig. 334(g)). is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decoration 5001 among the plurality of operation means can receive the effect (the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs). .

At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display prompting an operation (character display such as "Draw your sword" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect acceptance period) is displayed. Then, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the sword ornament 5001 among the plurality of operating means is in a state in which the effect can be accepted (during the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001). In particular, in this production example, only the operation unit having the sword decoration 5001 (the sword decoration 5001 itself may be made to emit light) out of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is made to emit light. By doing so, the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is also prompted.

In addition, the production shown in FIG. 334(g) is a case where the production progresses through a specific operation-related production (FIGS. Effect development (for example, effect progress from the effect state shown in FIG. 332(a)) may occur. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for awarding the privilege is made higher than that. Furthermore, when the effect shown in FIG. 333(d) is performed through the specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 334(g) is performed without the specific operation-related effect. The degree of expectation for awarding the privilege is higher than in the case, and the degree of expectation for awarding the privilege is set to be lower than in the case where the performance shown in FIG. desirable.

FIG. 334(h) shows that, while the effect shown in FIG. It is a depiction of how the production at the time of operation is performed.

334(h) is basically the same as the operation effect shown in FIG. 333(e), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, At 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. In addition, here, a production mode such as "Super heat!", which suggests a relatively high degree of expectation, is displayed according to the reception of the production, but it is suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low. "Chance!!" As for the action of the specific decorative member SDY, similarly, for example, an effect mode is provided in which no action of displacing the display area to the front side is performed, and one of these effect modes is made to appear in response to the reception of the effect. By doing so, it is also possible to suggest the degree of expectation for awarding the privilege. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

However, in the effect at the time of operation shown in FIG. 334(h), based on the operation on the sword decoration 5001, the effect mode of the sword decoration 5001 itself changes to one of the multiple modes described above ( It is possible to change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 311 to any of the stage 1 to stage 3 forms, and depending on which of these forms appears, the degree of expectation for giving benefits such as a big hit Height is suggested.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 334(i), even if the operation effect (FIG. 334(h)) ends and the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-driving position), The sword ornament 5001 is not returned to the sheathed state, but is maintained in the drawn state. That is, in this production example, although illustration is omitted, the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in the unsheathed state, and thereafter (for example, during the reach production period), the sword decoration 5001 is put into the sheathed state. An operation opportunity to operate is further provided, and at that time, it is possible to further execute a performance at the time of operation according to the operation to the sword sheathed state.

According to such a configuration, one operation means (sword ornament 5001) is provided with two stages of operation opportunities, and the first stage operation (operation to draw the sword) and the second stage operation. (Operation to the sword sheathed state) Since the operation effect will be performed according to each operation, not only when operating the operation means (sword ornament 5001), but also when performing the first step (operation to draw the sword) until the second stage operation (operation to sheath the sword) is performed, it is expected that the game interest in the operation is preferably maintained. Become so. It is desirable that the first step operation and the second step operation are different operation modes (in this case, operations in opposite directions). Further, it is desirable that the presentation at the time of operation corresponding to the operation of the first step and the presentation at the time of operation corresponding to the operation of the second step have different presentation contents.

In addition, when an operation effect (FIG. 334(h)) corresponding to the operation of the first step is performed, the sword ornament 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the drawn state, and is not maintained in the drawn state. In this case, it is desirable not to give the opportunity to operate the second stage. In the operation-time presentation corresponding to the first-stage operation, is the sword ornament 5001 maintained at a position (sword-drawn state) that allows the second-stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword-drawn state to the sword-sheathed state)? It may be executed as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of whether or not. That is, when the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sheathed state without being maintained in the sheathed state, it is substantially impossible to provide the second-stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sheathed state to the sheathed state). It is clear that The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

As a result of performing the operation stage effect (Fig. 334(h)) corresponding to the operation of the first step, if the sword decoration 5001 is not maintained in the unsheathed state, after a predetermined period of time has passed (reach effect is started), control is performed to return the sword ornament 5001 to the non-driving state (sword sheathed state). However, in this case, the sword decoration 5001 remains in its operating state (reciprocating motion) for at least half of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves toward the display area to when it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the movement, or maintenance in the state of drawing the sword). As for the sword decoration 5001, it is necessary to end the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decoration member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. It is more desirable in relation to the amount (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 335(j), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 332(c), the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area, as in the case shown in FIG. 333(d). Then, an effect depicting a state in which the button image BTG is left within the display area is performed. That is, in this production example (second production mode), when a predetermined time elapses after the production shown in FIG. 332(c) is performed, the production shown in FIG. , or the effect shown in FIG. 335(j). It should be noted that which effect content appears is determined in advance in the effect pattern determination process according to the result of the big hit determination.

However, in the production shown in FIG. 335(j), unlike the production shown in FIG. (Here, the lightning image IZ) is continued, suggesting the possibility that such a lightning image IZ will cause some change to the button image BTG.

In addition, in the effect shown in FIG. 335(j), the instruction display prompting the operation (character display such as "press" and bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect acceptance period) are not displayed. ) is different from the production shown in . As a result, although the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG remains within the display area, the effect reception period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. Something becomes recognizable.

FIG. 335(k) shows that as a result of the development of the rendering shown in FIG. 335(j), the lightning image IZ acts on the button image BTG, and the button image BTG is enveloped in a haze MY, and even its outline is lost. A production that will be broken is being performed.

That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 335(k), all the effect elements (button images BTG) suggesting that the operation of the operation button 410 can receive the effect are removed. Therefore, although the effect shown in FIG. 335(j) once suggests that the operation of the operation button 410 can accept the effect, the effect shown in FIG. 335(k) appears. By doing so, it is possible to make the player doubt whether the effect receiving period for the operation button 410 will actually occur.

Note that, even in the effect shown in FIG. 335(k), the effect display (here, the lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332(b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the state of the lightning image IZ is changing (disappearing), and the remaining time until it is clearly shown for which of the plurality of operation means the effect acceptance period will occur becomes shorter. It suggests that

In FIG. 335(i), as a result of the development of the rendering shown in FIG. 335(k), the outer shape of Mist MY approaches the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) instead of the operation button 410 (button image BTG). A performance depicting the situation is being performed.

According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not yet displayed, the shape of the haze MY suggests the possibility that an effect acceptance period will occur for the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410. be able to

Also, in the effect shown in FIG. 335(i), the effect display (here, lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332(b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the state of the lightning image IZ is further changed (immediately before it disappears) than in FIG. This suggests that the remaining time for

Then, in this production example (second production mode), when the production shown in FIG. An effect shown in (g) is performed.

According to such a configuration, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332(b) and (c)), the effect display device 1600 does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG. 333(d), 335(j)), there is still a possibility that the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 will occur, so that the interest in the game can be maintained. will be able to

In particular, in this production example (second production mode), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the production display device 1600, and the button image BTG is displayed (Fig. 333(d), Fig. 335(j)). 332(b), (c)), the effect for the sword decoration 5001 is confirmed by checking whether the effect display by the lightning image IZ that appeared in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332(b) and (c)) is still continued. It is possible to grasp whether there is still a possibility that the reception period will occur, and this also makes it possible to maintain the interest in the game.

In addition, in this production example (second production mode), when the production shown in FIG. When the effect progresses, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 334(g) always occurs. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 335(j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and causes the button image BTG to be displayed. It can also be said that this is an effect suggesting that the effect accepting period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, when the rendering shown in FIG. 335(k) progresses, the outer shape of the haze MY is set so that it does not necessarily approach the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG ), and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG is displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 333(d) may be performed. In addition, when such an effect pattern can be performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 335(j) and (k) are also made confidential as to which one of the plurality of operating means can receive the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

In addition, after providing the operation button 410 as an operable operation means, in the production situation shown in FIG. 3, it may be possible to execute control for operating the operation button 410 on the side not operated by the player. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side not operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it should be designed appropriately.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the driving source for applying the driving force to the operation button 410 and the driving source for applying the driving force to the sword ornament 5001 are different. may be the same drive source.

[Third effect mode]
Figures 336 to 339 are diagrams showing examples of effects (third effect mode) that are basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to specific operation-related effects, but are different from the second effect mode. is.

FIG. 336(a) shows that in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 336(b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 336(a). However, as shown in FIG. 336(b), in the specific operation-related effect related to this example of effect (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the effect display device 1600 is operated. indicates that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 will soon be able to receive the effect.

Particularly, in this production example (third production mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are adopted as such predetermined movable members, and the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are operated respectively. This makes it easy for either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 to soon be able to accept the effect from the time when the effect display related to the operation is not yet performed on the effect display device 1600 side. Make it recognizable. Here, control is performed to move the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 from the initial position to the operation position. It is designed to operate each at a slow speed.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation means still has time left until the effect reception period occurs, or the operation means does not generate the effect reception period until the pattern change ends. Regardless, these operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) will operate respectively. Therefore, from the situation where there is still time left until the production reception period occurs, or the situation where the production reception period does not occur until the pattern change ends, the game interest for those operations is increased. It can be maintained well.

Then, in this example of effect (third effect mode), a specific operation-related effect is produced not by the effect display on the effect display device 1600, but by each action (Fig. 336(b)) of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001. After the start, basically the same production progress as in the second production mode is performed.

For example, first, among the effects shown in FIG. , the content of the presentation is as described with reference to FIG.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 336(c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. It has become. The effect shown in FIG. 336(c) suggests that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 can receive the effect even with such a movable effect.

In addition, in the effect shown in FIG. 336(c), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are positioned at positions different from their initial positions (positions during non-driving) after a specific operation-related effect is started. , and is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from the operating position when an operation opportunity is given.

That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is delayed compared to the case where the operation-related effect is not performed and the operation opportunity is given immediately. When the operation means is adopted, even if such an operation-related performance is finally finished, it is necessary to operate the operation means on the side where the performance can be received at least to the operation position. Therefore, the performance related to the operation is further delayed by the time required for such actions, and there is a concern that such delays may reduce the interest in the game.

Therefore, in this production example (third production mode), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are set to both the initial position (the position when not driven) and the operation position during the period in which the specific operation-related production is performed. It is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a different position (for example, an intermediate position). As a result, when a specific operation-related performance ends and a performance reception period occurs, the operating means on the side where the performance reception period has occurred is moved to the operation position in a shorter time, or the performance reception period does not occur. The operation means on the other side can be operated to the initial position in a shorter time, and the deterioration of the game interest due to the delay of the performance related to the operation can be suppressed. In addition, until the production reception period occurs, the operation means on the side to be operated is positioned in a position different from the operation position as an operating state, so that the production reception period is set even though it is in the operation state. It becomes possible to easily recognize that this itself has not yet occurred.

Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 336(c) develops and the effect shown in FIG. 410”, the effect content is as described with reference to FIG. 332(c). However, even in the effect shown in FIG. 336(d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. , and is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied).

336(b) and (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 are in the initial position (non-driving position). While the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in imitation, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are positioned in an operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driving position). In this way, by intentionally making the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 different from the mode of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, they will be aligned in the near future. It becomes possible to suggest that the intended effect (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is changed, or whether the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are operated) will occur.

Further, when the effect shown in FIG. 336(d) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. Except for the display corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time, the contents of the presentation are as described with reference to FIG. 333(d).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 337(e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. It is in a state of operation at a position different from the (non-driving position) and the operating position. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 has moved toward the operation position from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving), the delay of the operation-related presentation is preferably suppressed. Become so.

As for the effect shown in FIG. 337(e), first, "display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (it is desirable that it is displayed in a manner that it is moved to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed." After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is moved to the operation position, and an instruction display prompting the operation by generating an effect reception period for the operation button 410 (character display such as “press”, effect A bar display indicating the remaining time of the reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of executing a specific operation-related effect is displayed in a "mode moved to the operation position", whereas the operation button image BTG at the time of display is displayed. The state 410 is different from the "state of moving to the operation position". In this way, by intentionally displaying the button image BTG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect in a mode different from the mode of the operation button 410 at that time, the discrepancies between the modes will soon be filled. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position) can be suggested in advance.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 337(e), the effect shown in FIG. 337(f) is performed. The contents of the street performance will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 337(f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. Also, the sword ornament 5001 is in a state of being operated at a position different from the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) and the operating position.

After such an effect at the time of operation (Fig. 337(f)) is performed, as shown in Fig. 337(g), a ready-to-win state is formed and a ready-to-win effect can be performed. is as described with reference to FIG. 333(f).

On the other hand, as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 336(d), when the performance shown in FIG. 334(g), except that the instruction content is "push" and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the "mode moved to the operation position". It has content.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 338(h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. It is in an activated state, and the sword ornament 5001 is in an activated state at the operating position. That is, in this case, since the sword ornament 5001 has moved from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (the position when not driven) toward the operation position, it is preferable to suppress the delay of the operation-related presentation. will be

Note that the effect shown in FIG. 338(h) is also "display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (preferably displayed in a mode in which it is moved to the operation position)". After performing the display effect, move the sword decoration 5001 to the operation position, and generate an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 to prompt the operation. display, or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect receiving period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of executing a specific operation-related effect is displayed in a "mode moved to the operation position", whereas the sword decoration image SYG at the time of display is displayed. The decoration image SYG is in a mode different from the "mode moved to the operation position". In this way, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of executing a specific operation-related effect is displayed in a manner different from the manner of the sword decoration 5001 at that time. It becomes possible to pre-suggest that it will soon be buried (here, the sword ornament 5001 moves to the operating position).

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 338(h), when the effect shown in FIG. 338(i) is performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. The contents of the street performance will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 338(i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. and the sword ornament 5001 is returned from the operating position to the initial position (non-driving position).

After such an effect at the time of operation (Fig. 338(i)) is performed, as shown in Fig. 338(j), a ready-to-win state is formed and a ready-to-win effect can be performed. is as described with reference to FIG. 333(f).

On the other hand, as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 336(d), when the performance shown in FIG. Except for the display corresponding to the "movable operation button 410" at a certain time, the content of the effect is as described with reference to FIG. 335(j).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339(k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335(j) and the effect shown in FIG. The operating position is different from the non-driving position) and the operating position. Even with such an operating situation, it is suggested that the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has not yet occurred, and that there is still a possibility that the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 will occur. be able to

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 339(k), when the effect shown in FIG. The contents of the street performance will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339(l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. Both are operating in different positions.

Then, as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 339(l), when the performance shown in FIG. 339(m) is performed, the performance display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. The contents of the street performance will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339(l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. Both are operating in different positions. In the rendering shown in FIG. 339(m), it is more desirable to make the outer shape of Haze MY closer to the sword decoration 5001 at the operating position than to the sword decoration 5001 at the initial position.

Incidentally, when the effect shown in FIG. 339(m) is further developed, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 338(h) always occurs. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 339(k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and causes the button image BTG to be displayed. It can also be said that this is an effect suggesting that the effect accepting period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, when the rendering shown in FIG. ), and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 337(e) may be performed. In the case where such an effect pattern can be performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 339(k) and (l) are also made confidential as to which one of the plurality of operating means is allowed to receive the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

In this production example (third production mode), the drive source that applies the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies the drive force to the sword decoration 5001 are different drive sources. may be the same drive source.

In each of the above-described rendering modes and their other examples, when a "button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410" appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related rendering, basically , only the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is provided with an operation opportunity, and when the operation of the operation button 410 is accepted, the operation effect on the button side is performed. Become. Further, when a "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001" appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are displayed. Of the body 5001, only the sword decoration 5001 is provided with an operation opportunity, and when the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is received, the sword role side is operated. In this regard, in the button-side operation effect, a success effect (the specific decorative member SDY is activated) and a failure effect (the specific decorative member SDY is not activated) are selected based on the result of the effect lottery corresponding to the big hit determination. On the other hand, in the production at the time of operation on the side of the sword role, the production at the time of success (activating the specific decorative member SDY) and the production at the time of failure are based on the result of the lottery according to the judgment of the big hit. (the specific decorative member SDY is not activated), and the contents of their effects are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side different from the side desired by the player, out of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 .

It should be noted that the effect at the time of operation on the button side and the effect at the time of operation on the sword role side are the same as each other in terms of the effect of whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates or not, as well as the display effect performed by the effect display device 1600. You may make it the content.

In addition, in each of the examples of effects described above with respect to specific operation-related effects, effects are performed as to which one of the plurality of operation means is given the opportunity to operate, and the operation means on the side corresponding to the result of the effect is performed. Opportunity is given to the player. However, there are cases where a specific operation-related production is performed with the production content that gives an operation opportunity to a specific operation method regardless of which production result appears, such as pushing each other between specific operation methods. You can let it be.

For example, one operation means can be operated in any manner (for example, an operation in which the sword decoration 5001 in the sheathed state is in the sword drawn state, or an operation in which the sword decoration 5001 in the sword drawn state is in the sword sheathed state. (operation)) may be performed, and an operation opportunity may be provided to the operation means in a mode corresponding to the result. In this case, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved to a state different from the sheathed state and the drawn sword state while the specific operation-related effect is being performed, and the operation is performed in either mode in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable to move the sword ornament 5001 to the sheathed state or the sword unsheathed state when the effect result of whether the sword is to be drawn is displayed.

In addition, when the pattern variation in the pending state is digested, a specific operation-related effect is performed within the execution period of the pattern variation. You may make it perform the production|presentation suggested from (within the execution period of pattern variation). According to such a configuration, although only one of the plurality of operation means is given an operation opportunity, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given and the operation means to which the operation opportunity is not given. It becomes possible to sustain the game interest related to the operation for both of them for a longer period of time. In addition, as such an effect, when the pattern variation for which a specific operation-related effect is performed is in a pending state (within the execution period of the pattern variation digested before this), the specific operation-related effect It is desirable to operate each of the plurality of operating means provided.

In the above-described second and third production modes and their other examples, as a specific operation-related production, a plurality of images (button images BTG, Although the sword decoration image SYG) is displayed, these images do not necessarily have to be displayed. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, either the effect reception period for the operation button 410 or the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 should be generated after that. With such a configuration, while suggesting that the effect reception period occurs for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, those operations are not allowed until the effect reception period occurs. It becomes possible to keep secret which of the means the performance reception period occurs for. Therefore, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means do not necessarily have to be displayed simultaneously, and the button image BTG and the sword decoration are not necessarily displayed simultaneously. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

However, even in the case of adopting an effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not simultaneously displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being executed, the button image is displayed when the specific operation-related effect ends. Either the BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed to indicate which of these operation means the effect acceptance period will occur. It will happen. In this case, the button image BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) thus displayed is displayed during the execution period of the specific operation-related effect. By executing the specific operation-related effect as the effect content related to the specific image (for example, the lightning image IZ, etc.), it is possible to determine which of the plurality of operation means the effect reception period occurs for. It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestive production. For example, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of shooting lightning at one of two rocks, and when lightning strikes one rock, a button image BTG appears from the rock, and the other rock is struck by lightning. By making the sword-decorated image SYG appear from within the rock when lightning strikes the rock on the side, it is possible to progress the rendering to that shown in FIGS. 333(d) and 334(g). . Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is executed as a effect of shooting lightning at one rock, and when the lightning strikes the rock, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears from within the rock. 333(d) or 334(g). In short, it is desirable to develop the effect such that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

In addition, in the above-described second and third effect modes and their other examples, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and when the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs, a specific It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution of the operation-related effect (start of the effect) to the occurrence of the effect reception period. In addition, it is desirable to set the effect receiving period to occur for the same amount of time after a specific operation-related effect is performed, regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity.

In addition, a plurality of performance modes are prepared as specific operation-related effects, and a performance reception period during which a specific performance (operation-time performance) can be generated depends on which of these performance modes the performance is performed. The ratio set for the specific operating means among the plurality of operating means may be different. The percentage may be 100% or 0%.

In addition, in the above-described second and third rendering modes and their other examples, based on the fact that the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related rendering has been operated, the operation is not performed. When operating the operating means on the side (e.g., FIG. 333(e)), control is performed to return the operating means on the non-operated side to the initial position after a predetermined period of time based on when the operation was performed. can be However, not based on the time of the operation, but depending on the timing of the operation during the performance reception period, from the operation of the operation means on the side that did not operate to the end of the operation. are of different lengths.

That is, when the operating means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated as the remaining time of the effect reception period is shorter. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player has conflicted whether to operate the operation means on the side that was not shown in the specific operation-related effect. Therefore, depending on the timing of the operation during the performance reception period (depending on the possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side that did not operate is operated and then the operation is terminated. length of time up to (Possibility such as ``Even if the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect was operated, the effect reception occurred and the effect at the time of operation was executed.'' (length of time for appealing to the player) is made different, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest in the game.

Further, if none of the plurality of operating means provided for the performance is operated after a specific operation-related performance is performed, the plurality of operating means provided for the performance when the performance reception period ends. may be operated.

Also, during the period from the start of a specific operation-related effect to the display of the effect result (the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG, etc.), there is a high degree of expectation for the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. It is also possible to perform a predetermined effect suggesting a rate at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed. A movable body effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, but in this case, a specific movable body (here , the specific decorative member (SDY), the specific movable body can be more reliably operated based on the performance acceptance within the performance reception period after the specific operation-related performance is performed. It is desirable when possible.

Also, during the period from the start of a specific operation-related effect to the display of the effect result (the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG, etc.), any one of the images that can appear in the effect result is displayed. An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is used to generate the effect acceptance period related to the specific effect (effect such as operating the specific decorative member SDY) is generated. While the related effects are being performed, the effect reception period is generated only for one side of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410). As a result, it is possible to create a special performance mode as if the performance result is shown and the performance is finished even though it is in the middle of a specific operation-related performance, and the performance is performed. It is possible to suitably maintain the amusement of the game while playing. Note that, while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, if an effect is received for an operation on one side of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410), a predetermined effect is performed based on the received effect. Therefore, it is desirable to indicate the ratio of the highly expected effect image (sword decoration image SYG) to be displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Here, as the above-mentioned specific operation means to which an operation opportunity is provided during execution of a specific operation-related effect, the degree of expectation is relatively high among the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001). It is desirable to use the lower operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the amusement of the game when the player grasps that a specific operation-related effect is in progress. .

In addition, in the midst of performing the above-mentioned specific operation-related effects related to a plurality of operation means, if the effect reception period is generated only for the operation buttons 410 of these operation means, the effect reception period may be set. When the operation button 410 is operated, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, The degree of expectation for awarding the privilege may be the same regardless of which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) appears as a result of the effect. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, the effect of the specific operation-related effect can be lost from the start of the effect of the specific operation-related effect until the result of the effect is shown. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means with a relatively low degree of expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and the privilege is given more than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means with the higher expectation among the plurality of operation means. It is desirable to raise such expectations.

In addition, during each effect reception period described above, when an operation is performed by a player, an effect is normally generated based on the operation, but the effect reception period elapses even if such an operation is not performed. It may be possible to set an automatic button effect state described later in which control is performed to start the same effect as when the operation was performed before. According to such an automatic button effect state, every time the effect reception period occurs, the effect at the time of operation is generated even if the user does not operate the button. Become. Then, when the specific operation-related effect is performed while the automatic button effect state is set, the effect reception period occurs for any of the plurality of operation means as a result of the effect. Even if there is, even if the operation means on the corresponding side is not operated within the effect acceptance period, the same effect at the time of operation as when the operation means is operated will be executed.

However, even if it is set to the automatic button effect state, which will be described later, the effect reception period is limited only to the operation buttons 410 of these operation means while a specific operation-related effect is being performed. is generated, it is desirable that the special operation effect is not executed (the automatic button function is disabled) unless the operation button 410 is operated within the effect accepting period. After that, even if an effect acceptance period occurs for any of the plurality of operation means as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, the operation means on the corresponding side is operated during the effect acceptance period. It is desirable to execute the same effect at the time of operation as when the operation means is operated even if the operation is not performed (to enable the automatic button function to function). According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp whether or not the player is in the middle of performing a specific operation-related effect depending on whether or not the automatic button function is functioning. It is expected that the decrease in

In addition, regarding the setting change related to ON/OFF of the automatic button effect state, for example, by operating the operation button 410, it is possible not only during the period when the symbol variation is not executed, but also during the period when the symbol variation is executed. It is desirable that For example, if the operation button 410 is operated when the automatic button effect state is off and the effect accepting period for the operation button 410 has not occurred, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be changed from the off state to the on state. When the effect state is ON, an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, and if the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period, an operation-time effect corresponding to the operation is performed, and the automatic button effect state is activated. It is possible to change the setting from the ON state to the OFF state. However, since it is conceivable that there may be cases where the player wants to generate an operation-time effect by an operation while maintaining the ON state of the automatic button effect state, for example, the automatic button effect state is set to the ON state. During the effect accepting period for the operation button 410 at the time, not only the operation button 410 but also the operation for the operation means other than the operation button 410 are enabled, and when the other operation means is operated, Unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, it is desirable to change the effect being executed while the automatic button effect state is maintained in the ON state. At this time, it is more desirable to generate the same effect at the time of operation as when the operation button 410 is operated.

The operation mode may differ between when the automatic button effect state is changed from the off state to the on state and when it is changed from the on state to the off state.

In addition, in the above-described second and third production modes and their other examples, the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is displayed as the production result of a specific operation-related production. While the sword decoration images SYG are displayed, the operation opportunities corresponding to them are given, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (a first display mode and a second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed among the display modes, an operation opportunity (reception of effect) is given to the operation button 410. period), and when the second display mode is displayed, the sword ornament 5001 is given an operation opportunity (drawing acceptance period), the first display mode and the second display mode Any display content may be adopted as the

For example, in the above-described second and third effect modes, instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 334(g) and 338(h), and the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 340(b) is displayed instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. good too. According to such a configuration, while the specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect part and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started). Both are suddenly replaced with the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is 333(d), 334(g), 337(e), and 338(h), partial display modes (button image BTG, sword Unlike the case where the decoration image SYG) appears, the effect display related to giving the operation opportunity is performed using substantially the entire display area (even by hiding other effect images such as the background part that can suggest the degree of expectation). By doing so, it is expected that the game interest in the operation will be improved.

Note that in the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. A character is displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. A second character is displayed to suggest which operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) should be operated. Thus, as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), there is no need to prepare the effect image imitating the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 itself. It is desirable to display as an effect image that incorporates aspects such as at least part of the shape and part of the design of these operating means.

Further, regarding the effect image CG (first display mode) and effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area, the effect image CG (first display mode) and effect image TG Depending on which one of the (second display mode) is displayed, the effect may also be performed to suggest a different degree of expectation. For example, when the performance image TG (second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for giving the privilege is higher than when the performance image CG (first display mode) appears. In addition, as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), a plurality of effect modes (such as different colors) are prepared, and depending on which of these effect modes is displayed, may be used to indicate the degree of expectation. In this case, even if the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, when it is displayed in a specific display mode, the degree of expectation is higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears. can be

Regarding the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as a result of that effect (it is desirable that the effect is relatively high in expectations) When the operation-related effect is not executed (for example, after the precursor effect described later, which is not a specific operation-related effect, is executed) (it is desirable that the effect is relatively low in expectations). You can let it be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as a result of the effect, the effect is produced only for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means. While the acceptance period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed). When it is displayed, in addition to the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG, the effect acceptance period is also applied to other operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) that does not correspond to the button image BTG. may be generated. According to such a configuration, even when the button image BTG appears in an effect situation in which the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the degree of expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the operation with a different interest from the case where the button image BTG appears in the production situation where the degree of expectation is relatively high, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. Another operating means may be an operating means different from the sword ornament 5001 .

In addition, when the button image BTG appears in a relatively low-expected effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed, another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG is operated within the effect acceptance period. is received, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, "a specific operation-related effect is executed and relatively It is desirable to suggest that the player is in a production situation with a high degree of expectation than in the production situation in which the sword decoration image SYG appears in the production situation with a high degree of expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

Here, if the button image BTG appears in a situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the degree of expectation is relatively low, an operation means (an operation button) corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect reception period 410) is operated, the effect receiving period for another operation means occurring at the same time is also terminated so that the special operation effect is not executed, and in response to the operation of the operation means (operation button 410) It is desirable that the effect at the time of operation is executed.

On the other hand, when the button image BTG appears in a relatively low-expected effect situation where no specific operation-related effect is executed, what is the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period? When another operation means is operated, the effect reception period for the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is also terminated, and when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the special operation effect is executed. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not executed. An effect at the time of operation may be executed when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is operated even though the operation means other than the means is being operated.

If a specific operation-related effect is executed while the above automatic button effect state is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG will be displayed as a result of the effect. Even if an effect reception period occurs for one operation means, during the effect reception period, the same effect at the time of operation as when the corresponding operation means is operated is executed without operating the operation means on the corresponding side. (so that the automatic button function works). However, when the button image BTG appears without executing a specific operation-related effect when the above-described automatic button effect state is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG and , even in the case where the effect reception period is generated for both the operation means and the other operation means, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is displayed even if no operation is performed. It is desirable to execute only the same operation performance as when the button image BTG is operated, and not to execute the special operation performance that can appear only when another operation means not corresponding to the button image BTG is operated.

However, within the effect reception period, before the specific timing at which the operation effect (effect when the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means are operated) will appear by the above-mentioned automatic button function, another When an operation is performed on the operation means and a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, a special operation effect is performed in response to the reception of the effect, and it is assumed that a specific timing has arrived. Also, it is desirable that the effect at the time of operation (the effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) does not appear. In this case, the automatic button function described above does not substantially function during the period for which the effect is accepted, but the automatic button effect state is continued in the ON state even after the period for which the effect is accepted ends. is desirable.

Further, in the example of the effect described above, the button image BTG and the sword-decorated image SYG may be reversed, and then each of the effects described above (operation-time effect, automatic button function, etc.) may be applied. That is, in this case, when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed) If the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without execution of a specific operation-related effect (for example, after execution of a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect), In addition to the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG, another operation means (for example, the operation button 410, etc.) not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG is also caused to generate an effect reception period. becomes.

Further, as described above, in each of the above-described rendering modes and their other examples, the effect result of performing a specific operation-related rendering is a "button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410", or When any of the "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001" is displayed, and when the effect reception is performed by the operation means on the displayed side, relative The first operation-time effect (for example, the effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates), which is assumed to be the effect content that suggests that the degree of expectation is high, and the effect content that suggests that the degree of expectation is relatively low. It is possible to make any one of the second operation-time effect (for example, the effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate) appear. That is, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the degree of expectation is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation-time effect having the effect contents suggesting is executed. However, when the first operation-time effect is executed based on the reception of the effect within the effect reception period that occurs through a specific operation-related effect, the first operation-time effect is the button image BTG (the first display mode) is displayed, and when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the effect reception for the sword decoration 5001 is performed. It is desirable to suggest the same expectations when executed based on The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, even when the effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) with relatively low expectations is displayed as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect. However, as long as the first operation-time effect is executed based on the reception of the effect, the effect image (sword decoration Compared to the case where the image SYG (second display mode)) is displayed, no demerit is caused in terms of the performance result, so that the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in the above-described timer effect (FIGS. 148 to 207), it is possible to set "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means" as the object of the effect (one of the plurality of effect modes that are subject to the timer). be. In other words, in the timer effect for which the object of effect is "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means", when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the operation opportunity is given to the operation means soon. It becomes possible to enjoy the production at the time of operation by this. In this case, in the "opportunity to operate the operation means" prepared as a candidate for the effect object of the timer effect, when the operation means is operated, the result of the effect is advantageous to the player according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery. It should be made possible for either of the unfavorable performance results to appear. However, when the "opportunity to operate the operation means" is given as the object of the timer effect, the ratio of the effect effect that is advantageous to the player appears is high compared to the case where the timer effect is not targeted. It is more desirable to The percentage may be 100%.

In this regard, when a production pattern appears in which a timer production is executed with the production target of "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001)", the production target "gives an operation opportunity to the operation means" A specific operation-related effect using "applying" may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the sword decoration image SYG appears and the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 is provided. , a specific operation-related effect as to whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears before the sword decoration image SYG appears.

According to such a configuration, since the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are executed for the same effect respectively, an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001). It is possible to improve the amusement of the game when it is played.

However, at this time, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously developed for one effect object (providing an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001) until immediately before. , there is a concern that the player will not be able to understand which performance to pay attention to, and the attention will be distracted, which will conversely reduce the interest in the game.

Therefore, when executing a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect for one effect object (providing an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. , until the count display of a specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), the "specific operation-related effect" is not executed, and the count value is reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), it is desirable to start the "specific operation-related presentation".

FIG. 341 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect when executing a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect for one effect object (providing an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001). Note that the following timer effect corresponds to the above-described advance notice-side timer effect, and is executed as a result of various processes corresponding thereto.

FIG. 341(a) shows that in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 341(b) is an effect in which the timer effect is started (here countdown display) with a specific numerical value (here "3") during execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 341(a). showing the situation. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 341(b), the "specific operation-related effect" has not yet been executed, and it is unclear which effect the timer effect is intended for. there is

That is, in the timer effect according to this example of effect, the count value is set to a predetermined value ( Here, the count "0") is reached so that it is displayed. Then, after "0 (predetermined value)" is displayed as the count value, as shown in FIG. It should be noted that the count value is not even "0" and is hidden at the time when the "specific operation-related effect" is started.

According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) are displayed. A specific operation-related effect will be executed as to which of the and is displayed. That is, in this case, although two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect object (giving an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001), those effects are timed. Since overlapping in series is avoided, each different production can be enjoyed.

However, if the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0") while a specific operation-related effect is not yet executed, the timer effect will target any effect. There is a concern that it will not be possible to recognize whether it was performed as a game, and the interest in the game will decrease. Therefore, in this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 341(c), after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0") and before a specific operation-related effect is started, An effect suggesting the type of effect (providing an opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001) targeted by the timer effect is performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 341(c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), the effect display device 1600 first displays "sword sheathed". This suggests that the timer effect was directed to "providing an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 (opportunity to operate by 'sheathing the sword')".

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 341(d), an effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed ("sword sheathed image SYG (second display mode))". ”) is given to the player), and the ``specific operation-related effect'' is started in the effect situation, so that the interest in the game can be improved. become. When the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), the count display (count "0") is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when "sword sheathed" is displayed. may also be displayed continuously.

Also, in this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 341(c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), the sword ornament 5001 performs a predetermined operation (here, It is designed to perform a reciprocating motion in the vertical direction). I am trying to suggest.

It should be noted that the predetermined action by the sword decoration 5001 is counted and displayed not only when the timer effect is directed to "give an opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001" but also when other effects are targeted. becomes 0. That is, in this case, the predetermined action by the sword ornament 5001 does not function as an effect suggesting the type of effect targeted by the timer effect, but as an effect suggesting that the count display has reached 0. becomes. In this sense, the predetermined action by the sword ornament 5001 is after the count display becomes 0 and before the start of the effect to be performed, and the timer effect is to be performed. The timing is the same as or earlier than the timing at which the effect suggesting the type of effect is started, and during the execution state, the effect suggesting the effect type targeted by the timer effect is also being executed. It can be said that it is important to ensure that

FIG. 341(d) shows an effect situation in which a "specific operation-related effect" is started.

In this effect situation, as described above, not only is the count value already hidden, but also the effect suggesting the effect type targeted by the timer effect is also hidden. Further, the predetermined action by the sword ornament 5001 is also completed. However, it is important to execute the effect suggesting the type of effect targeted by the timer effect and the predetermined action by the sword ornament 5001 before the specific operation-related effect is started. The execution state may be continued even after the operation-related presentation of is started.

After the "specific operation-related effect" is started, the effects progress in the order shown in FIGS. 341(e) to 341(h). ), FIGS. 334(g) to (i), or FIGS. 336(d) and 338(h) to (j), the details are omitted.

As the timer effect that is performed in relation to a specific operation-related effect, either the timer effect shown in FIG. It may be made executable. That is, in another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started, which is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. The count value does not reach a predetermined value (here, "0") in accordance with the start timing (strictly speaking, a little earlier than this), and the specific operation-related effect continues even after the effect is started. It has become. In this case, even if either the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, the bonus ( The degree of expectation for the jackpot) is the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

According to such a separate timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are developed at the same time. Even if either the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed as the effect result, their effect value is the same the same). That is, in this case, since it is possible to substantially lose the performance of the specific operation-related effect itself, even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously developed, any effect can be produced. You will not be able to understand what you should pay attention to, and you will be able to avoid the occurrence of situations where your attention is distracted. However, in order to improve the amusement of the game, when a performance pattern in which a specific operation-related performance and a timer performance are developed simultaneously appears, the benefits are given more than when the performance pattern shown in FIG. 341 appears. It is desirable to raise such expectations.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 341(c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), the effect display device 1600 first displays ( "sheaths sword") is performed, but the display suggesting such an effect target may also be performed when another effect mode is set as the effect target as the timer effect. However, when a specific performance among a plurality of performances that can be targeted by the timer is targeted by the timer, the display suggesting which performance is targeted for the timer performance may not be displayed.

Further, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, prior to giving an operation opportunity to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001, an operation opportunity is given to any of these operation means. We decided to perform a specific operation-related effect as to whether it is granted. However, prior to granting the operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (prior to the occurrence of the rendering reception period), the first omen performance that does not appear when the sword ornament 5001 is granted the operation opportunity , prior to giving the operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001 (prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period), it does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 An effect pattern such as performing a second omen effect may appear. When performing these sign effects (first sign effect, second sign effect), the time required for the effect (prediction effect) is set shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed, and the It is desirable to lower the degree of expectation for awarding the privilege when the effect appears, in order to increase the interest in the game when the specific operation-related effect is performed.

Here, as an indication effect, for example, fog appears before an effect image (for example, button image BTG) imitating the operation means (for example, operation button 410) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears. A specific image is displayed, such as one that expresses a state of being overwhelmed. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position (position behind the specific image on the layer) that is difficult to see due to overlapping with the specific image. After that, by gradually hiding the specific image (increasing the transmittance, decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed, etc.), the button image BTG gradually becomes It is possible to execute it as a production etc. to be exposed to. It should be noted that an example of a specific depiction mode for such an omen effect will be described later.

At this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, etc.) with different expectations for awarding a privilege (big hit), It is possible to make it interesting as to which display mode the button image BTG will appear while the precursor effect in which the button image BTG is gradually revealed is developed.

A first omen effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is not given an operation opportunity, and an operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration is given. The second omen effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001. It is important that each of them is executed as different presentation contents. Moreover, it is desirable that not only the content of the presentation but also the time required for the presentation be different.

In the sense that such an indication effect is "performed as an effect related to the provision of an operation opportunity when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means", the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" is used. It can be said that it is a high-level concept that includes As for the predictive effect including the "specific operation-related effect", a plurality of effect modes are prepared as described below with reference to FIG. Suggesting how long the performance acceptance period generated corresponding to the sign performance is, depending on whether the game is played, improves the amusement of the game when the sign performance is performed. It is more desirable in terms of trying to

FIG. 342 is a time chart for explaining an example of effect contents for each type of effect when a plurality of types (predictive effect A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as the predictive effect.

First, in the example (predictive effect A) shown in FIG. 342(a), the predictive effect A is started when the first predetermined time elapses after the symbol variation is started. This portent effect A is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 the operation opportunity is given. When A is executed, an effect acceptance period (effective period) T1 occurs for the specific operation means indicated as the result of the effect. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 342(a) (predictive effect A), when the predictive effect A is performed, the same length of time is given to any operation means regardless of whether the operation opportunity is given. An effect accepting period (effective period) T1 is generated.

During the effect reception period (effective period) T1, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt the operation of the specific operation means on the side indicated as the result of the precursor effect A. ) is displayed. Then, when the effect reception is performed by operating the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T1, the above-described effect at the time of operation (for example, FIGS. 331 (d), (f), or , FIG. 333(e), FIG. 334(h), FIG. 337(f), FIG. 338(i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T1 at that time is executed. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, in the example (predictive effect B1) shown in FIG. An indication effect B1 is to be started. This premonition effect B1 is not a "specific operation-related effect", but something that is executed prior to when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (a specific operation is not executed when an operation opportunity is given to the means), and when the precursor effect B1 is executed, a effect reception period (effective period) T2 for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is supposed to occur.

During the effect reception period (effective period) T2, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt the operation of the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B1. be done. Then, when an effect reception is performed by operating a specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T2, a predetermined operation-time effect different from the above-described operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, processing for ending the period T2 at that point is performed.

In this regard, in this production example, the production reception period (effective period) T2 corresponding to the precursor production B1 is the production reception period corresponding to the precursor production A, as shown in FIGS. (Valid period) It occurs as a period having a time length (here, a short time length) different from T1. Thus, it is suggested how long the performance receiving period generated corresponding to the portent performance is, depending on in which mode (the portent performance A, the portent performance B1) the portent performance is performed. Thus, it is possible to preferably maintain the amusement of the game when the omen performance is performed.

On the other hand, in the example (predictive effect B2) shown in FIG. 342(c), the predictive effect B2 is started when the second predetermined time elapses after the symbol variation is started. Like the portent effect B1, the portent effect B2 is also executed prior to when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) instead of the "specific operation-related effect". (things that are not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the portent effect B2 is executed, the effect reception period (for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a different time length from the effect reception period (effective period) T2 corresponding to the portent effect B1 Production reception period) T3 is generated.

It should be noted that even during this effect reception period (effective period) T3, an instruction display (character display such as "Press" or a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) prompting the operation of the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B2 is displayed. display) is displayed. Further, when a performance reception is performed by operating a specific operation means within the performance reception period (effective period) T3, based on the performance reception, the performance at the time of operation is different from the case where the portent performances A and B1 are executed. is executed, and a process for ending the period T3 at that time is performed.

In this regard, in this production example, the production reception period (effective period) T3 corresponding to the precursor production B2 is the production reception period corresponding to the precursor production A, as shown in FIGS. (Valid period) It occurs as a period having the same length of time as T1. That is, in this case, even though the premonitory effect B2 with relatively low expectations for granting a privilege (jackpot) is executed, the time is the same as when a specific operation-related effect with relatively high expectations is executed. Since it is suggested that a lengthy effect reception period (effective period) T3 occurs, an effect situation is created as if a specific operation-related effect was performed, and the precursor effect B2 is performed. It becomes possible to preferably maintain the amusement of the game when it is played. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting the privilege is different between when the effect reception period (valid period) T2 occurs and when the effect reception period (valid period) T3 occurs.

It should be noted that the portent effects B1 and B2 are set so that the same effect mode appears from the start of the effect until a timing in the middle thereof, and a different effect mode appears after the timing has passed. The operation means may be provided with an effect as to which of the effect reception period (effective period) T2 and the effect reception period (effective period) T3 is to be generated. However, it is not always necessary to have such effects, and the timing at which the indication effects B1 and B2 are started may be set to start when different times have passed since the pattern fluctuation started. Alternatively, the portent effects B1 and B2 may have different lengths of time.

On the other hand, in the example (predictive effect C) shown in FIG. 342(d), the predictive effect C is started when the third predetermined time elapses after the symbol variation is started. This portent effect C is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 the operation opportunity is given. When C is executed, an effect acceptance period (effective period) T4 occurs for the specific operation means indicated as the result of the effect. That is, in the example (predictive effect C) shown in FIG. A performance receiving period (effective period) T4 is generated.

Even during the effect reception period (effective period) T4, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt the operation of the specific operation means on the side indicated as the result of the precursor effect C. ) is displayed. Then, when the effect reception is performed by operating the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T4, the above-described effect at the time of operation (for example, FIG. 331 (d), (f), or , FIG. 333(e), FIG. 334(h), FIG. 337(f), FIG. 338(i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T4 at that time is executed. It is supposed to be done.

In this respect, in this production example, the production reception period (effective period) T4 corresponding to the portent production C is the production reception period corresponding to the portent production A, as shown in FIGS. (Valid period) It occurs as a period having the same length of time as T1. That is, in this case, even if the length of time required for the precursory effect C itself is shorter than the precursory effect A, as long as the precursory effect is executed as the aforementioned "specific operation-related effect". Since it is suggested that a performance receiving period (effective period) T4 having the same length of time as the portent performance A occurs, the game interest when the portent performance C is performed is favorably maintained. be able to

In the production example shown in FIG. 342, by associating the length of the production acceptance period (effective period) with the types of the precursor productions A, B1, B2, and C in a one-to-one relationship, the production reception period It was made to suggest the length of (effective period). However, by setting the rate of occurrence of a specific effect reception period (for example, effect reception period T2) having a predetermined length for each type of omen effect, the effect reception period (effective period ) may be suggested.

In addition, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, after a specific operation-related production is performed, a When the effect acceptance period (effective period) occurs, a effect image (for example, button image BTG) imitating the specific operation means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to imitate the same state as the specific operation means at that time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 337(e), the operation button 410 is in the operating position and the button image BTG is also displayed in the operating position. In the example shown in (h), the sword ornament 5001 is in the operating position (sword unsheathed state), and the sword decoration image SYG is accordingly displayed in the operating position (sword unsheathed state). It is

However, the specific operating means (for example, the operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating its appearance. If this happens, even though a specific operation-related effect with relatively high expectations is being performed, when displaying the result of the effect, the range of the effect will be significantly narrowed, and the interest in the game will decrease. Concerned.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, as described below with reference to FIGS. 343 and 344, a effect image (for example, button image BTG), the state of the specific operating means at that time is not necessarily represented as it is, and it is desirable to display it as a state different from the specific operating means at that time.

FIG. 343 is a diagram showing examples of performance contents when a precursor performance that is not a specific operation-related performance is performed and performance contents when a precursor performance as a specific operation-related performance is performed.

First, FIGS. 343(a) to 343(c) show the effect contents when a premonitory effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, now, in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Suppose you are in a situation Then, in the production situation, as shown in FIG. 343(a), only the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 side correspond to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, instead of the "specific operation-related production". Assuming that the omen effect is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 will be given soon. In addition, in the portent effect (similar to the portent effect in other examples), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity will be given soon is performed, a effect image imitating the operation means does not necessarily have to be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 will soon be given from the time when the sword decoration image SYG to be displayed during the effect acceptance period is not yet displayed. It comes to be.

Note that in the omen effect shown in FIG. 343(a), the sword decoration image SYGa with a blue aura with a relatively low degree of expectation and the sword decoration image SYGb with a red aura with a relatively high degree of expectation. are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect content as to which of them is finally left in the display area appears. Therefore, in this production situation, although it is possible to recognize that the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 will soon be given, the sword ornament image SYG with a low expectation or the sword ornament image SYGa with a low expectation Which of the high sword decoration images SYGb is displayed is kept secret.

FIG. 343(b) shows the effect result in which the sword decoration image SYGb with a red aura is finally left. It is suggested that there will be a production reception period for. In the display shown in FIG. 343(b), a final effect is displayed that suggests that the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura will not change to another effect image (such as the sword decoration image SYGa). .

FIG. 343(c) shows an example of an effect when the effect accepting period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs. ” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed. Further, when the effect accepting period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the sword drawn state. I am trying to change the state to the state. It should be noted that when an effect is accepted within the effect acceptance period, a predetermined effect at the time of operation is performed based on the effect acceptance, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration 5001 is in the sheathed state. maintained. In addition, a process for ending the production reception period at that time is performed.

According to such a configuration, in the case where an indication effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is performed, when the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the operation target side (here, , sword decoration 5001) is displayed in the same state (sword drawn state) as the operation means (here, sword decoration 5001) on the operation target side at that time. Become so. In particular, during the effect reception period according to this example of effect, a effect image (here, sword decoration image SYGb) imitating the operation means on the operation target side and the operation means on the operation target side (here, sword decoration body 5001) are displayed. are stopped at predetermined positions.

On the other hand, FIGS. 343(d) to 343(g) show the effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as the precursor effect. For example, now, in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Suppose you are in a situation Then, in the production situation, as shown in FIG. It becomes recognizable that an opportunity to operate will soon be given to someone.

FIG. 343(e) shows an effect situation in which the premonitory effect as the "particular operation-related effect" progresses and the result of the effect appears. In this production situation, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the production result of the "specific operation-related production" to suggest that the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity. It is In the display shown in FIG. 343(e), a final effect is displayed that suggests that the sword decoration image SYG will not change to another effect image (button image BTG, etc.).

FIG. 343(f) shows an example of an effect when the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs. ” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production acceptance period) are displayed. Further, when the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the sword drawn state, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the sword drawn state.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 343(f) and 343(g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained (sword decoration image SYG is stopped), while the sword ornament 5001 continues to slowly move upward until the end of the rendering reception period. I'm trying to

In addition, during the effect acceptance period, regardless of the position of the sword ornament 5001, the effect is accepted when an operation is performed on the operation target accessory 141 to bring the sword into a sheathed state, and the effect is accepted. Based on the reception, a predetermined effect at the time of operation is performed, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sheathed state. Further, a process for ending the production reception period at that time is performed.

According to such a configuration, when the effect acceptance period occurs after the specific operation-related effect has passed, one side of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to operate and is used for the effect. In contrast, the other side does not operate and can be made to play the role of accurately communicating the current situation. In the examples of FIGS. 343(f) and 343(g), the sword decoration image SYG is set to a stopped state and the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously operated during the effect acceptance period. The decoration image SYG may be continuously operated, and the sword decoration 5001 may be in a stopped state.

Thus, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 343, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed during the effect acceptance period (FIG. 343(c)) that occurs without a specific operation-related effect. In contrast to the stopped state, during the effect receiving period (FIG. 343(f)) that occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is stopped. , and on the other side, this is continued as a dynamic state so that it can be used for production. Therefore, when the performance acceptance period occurs after a specific operation-related performance, the range of the performance can be widened, and the game interest can be preferably maintained.

In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which a driving force is imparted by the control by the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the operation While the button 410 itself is in a stopped state, if the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 is set to a dynamic state and its depiction is continued, a specific operation-related presentation is performed. It is expected that the width of the effect when the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs will be greatly improved.

Either the sword decoration image SYGa with a blue aura with a relatively low degree of expectation or the sword decoration image SYGb with a red aura with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed as the sword decoration image SYG. The technique may be employed not only when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a precursor effect is performed. That is, in this case, in the specific operation-related effect, in addition to the effect of which one of the button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG that imitates the sword decoration 5001 appears, When an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) appears, whether the effect image (button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode with a relatively high degree of expectation or in a display mode with a relatively low degree of expectation. It becomes possible to further provide the performance of. This method may be appropriately employed in each of the above-described rendering modes and their other examples in addition to the rendering example of FIG. 343 .

Then, in the case of giving such two effects to a specific operation-related effect, first, which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is selected as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. It is in a state where it is possible to recognize whether it appears or not, and it is unclear whether the display mode of the effect image on the appearing side is highly expected (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined in white and only the outline is displayed). recognizable display state, etc.) will appear according to the development of the production. Then, after that, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the side that appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is highly expected (for example, a white effect image imitating an operation means). It is desirable that the state is canceled and the color can be confirmed, etc.) are made to appear sequentially by further production progress. In addition, when the button image BTG is displayed after such development progresses, under predetermined conditions, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode is highly expected (for example, the operating means is operated). After that, the button image BTG is hidden, and it is possible to recognize that the sword decoration image SYG will appear as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. In addition, it is unclear whether the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG is highly expected (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in white so that only the outline can be recognized). It is also possible to generate an effect pattern that further progresses the effect. It should be noted that after this, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that has appeared as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is highly anticipated (for example, a white-out state of the sword decoration image SYG to make it possible to check the color, etc.). In this case, when the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is the display mode of the high expectation side (for example, red), it is more likely than the display mode of the low expectation side (for example, blue). Also, it is desirable to increase the rate of occurrence of such further performance progress.

FIGS. 344(a)-(e) are diagrams showing another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 343(d)-(g) as the effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as the precursor effect. That is, in FIG. 344(a), an indication effect as a "specific operation-related effect" is started, and in the indication effect, a shield (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 is held. A first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and a second character holding a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration 5001 (effect image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001). are depicted facing each other, suggesting which of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 will be given the opportunity to operate depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. I'm trying

FIG. 344(b) shows an effect situation in which the effect result of the precursor effect as "specific operation-related effect" appears. In this production situation, the first character (the production image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed, and the second character (the sword decoration) is not displayed in order to suggest that the sword decoration 5001 is given an opportunity to operate. An effect image corresponding to the body 5001) is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 344(b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. While an operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect part (characters confronting each other) and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect started) The effect image (the display image shown in FIG. 344(b)) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is suddenly replaced (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

FIGS. 344(c)-(e) show examples of effects when the effect reception period occurs for the sword ornament 5001. When the effect reception period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 344(c) , an instruction display (character display such as "push in" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect acceptance period) is displayed to prompt the operation of the sword ornament 5001. FIG.

Here, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 344(c), when the production acceptance period occurs, the sword ornament 5001 starts moving from the sword sheathed state to the sword drawn state. As shown in FIG. 344(d), the sword ornament 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword sheathed state to the sword drawn state after a relatively short period of time has passed since the effect receiving period started. It is designed to Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 344(e), the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the unsheathed state until at least the end of the performance acceptance period, unless the player operates the sword decoration body 5001. It will wait for the operation (operation from the sword drawn state to the sword sheathed state) by.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 344(c) to 344(e), a movement (swing in a rotational lowering motion), the second character swings down the sword decoration image SYG. It is designed to work. The sword decoration image SYG according to this production example loops a series of displays from the start of the swinging action (Fig. 344(c)) to the end (Fig. 344(e)) within the production acceptance period. Processing is repeated.

However, even if this loop processing is performed, the display change of the bar indicating the remaining time of the effect receiving period will progress by the amount corresponding to the passage of time without being affected by it. Also, regarding the sword ornament 5001, the sword is pulled out while a series of displays from the start of the swing-down action (Fig. 344(c)) to the end (Fig. 344(e)) are being performed. However, even if the loop process is performed, it will be maintained in the unsheathed state without being affected by it. In addition, when an operation to put the sword in the sword-sheathed state is performed on the operation target accessory 141 within the effect reception period, the effect reception is performed, and a predetermined effect at the time of operation is performed based on the effect reception, and the above-mentioned effect is performed. The loop processing is ended, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sheathed state. In addition, a process for ending the production reception period at that time is performed.

According to such a configuration, when an omen effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG operate within the effect acceptance period. The operation modes (operations that play a role in accurately conveying the current situation (operations until moving to the operation position), loop operations that are provided for production) are different from each other, and the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is completed. After that, the sword-decorated image SYG does not end its operation and continues it. As a result, when an effect reception period (Fig. 344 (c) to (e)) occurs after a specific operation-related effect occurs, the effect contents of the specific operation-related effect are continued until after the effect reception period occurs ( It is possible to expand the range of effects, such as making it possible to execute the game by continuing the background as well, so that the interest in the game can be favorably maintained.

Also, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. The effects (FIGS. 344(c) to (e)) are executed when the effect acceptance period occurs in such a manner that both the background image and the background image are changed. In particular, during the production acceptance period according to this production example, a production image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means and a character (sword decoration image SYG different from the specified Since the display is performed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both the image and the image, it is possible to improve the performance during the performance reception period. In this sense, even in the portent effect, the effect is performed using at least one of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) simulating the operation means and the character. It can be said that it is more desirable in terms of further improving the performance by providing a dramatic connection between them. Further, the exclusive background (full moon) has a plurality of display modes with different degrees of expectation for awarding the privilege, and may be displayed in any one of these display modes.

It should be noted that, in the indication effect as a specific operation-related effect and the effect within the effect reception period, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as those effects, and the effect reception is performed according to which of these effect modes appears. A suggestion may be made as to whether a highly expected mode will appear as an effect at the time of operation when the effect reception is made in the period. A background image that appears when the premonition effect is performed may be used to indicate the degree of expectation for the provision of the privilege.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 344, when an indication effect as a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect reception is performed in such a manner that both the content of the effect appearing in the precursor effect and the background image are changed. It was decided to execute the effect within the period, but when the above-mentioned precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is being performed, both the content of the effect that appeared in the precursor effect and the background image are changed. , an effect may be executed when the effect reception period occurs.

In the production example shown in FIG. 344, the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started after the production reception period occurs, but the operation of the sword decoration 5001 starts before the production reception period occurs. Alternatively, the action of the sword decoration 5001 that started before the production reception period occurs will be completed before the production reception period occurs (the role of accurately communicating the current situation is It is also possible to complete the performed action before the production acceptance period occurs, and then maintain the stopped state.

In addition, even when giving an operation opportunity to a specific operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001), when the background image is changed when the effect reception period occurs, and when the background image is changed There may be cases where the display to cause is not performed. In this case, if the display for changing the background image is performed when the effect reception period occurs, the expectation for granting the privilege will be higher than when the display for changing the background image is not performed when the effect reception period occurs. It is desirable to

In addition, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, after a specific operation-related production is performed, by operating a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) indicated as a result of the production When an effect is accepted, a specific decoration member SDY (a movable body provided on the game board 5 side) is operated as an effect at the time of operation based on the effect acceptance. 331(d), 333(e), and 334(h), for example, sword decoration 5001 (or operation button 410) is also operated to improve the effect of the operation-time effect when a specific operation-related effect is passed. In this way, in order to improve the effect related to the operation-time effect when a specific operation-related effect has been passed, the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect has been passed As a result, either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the side of the door frame 3 (the side of the game machine main body) are both activated, or the effect state at the time of success appears, or the movable body provided on the game board 5 side appears. In contrast to the production situation where both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate, the production situation at the time of failure appears. In the operation stage effect after the premonition effect which is not the operation-related effect is performed, either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side or the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side is selected according to the result of the effect. It is possible to make a performance situation appear at the time of success in which only one operates, or to appear in a failure performance situation in which both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate. desirable.

In addition, in the specific operation-related effects related to each of the above effects modes and their other examples, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the effect, the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the effect. We are trying to have a higher expectation for the granting of benefits. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of a specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. The image BTG is displayed in some cases, and when the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation for privilege provision is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the performance result of the specific operation-related performance. is increased, it is possible to favorably maintain the interest in the game when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Also, the manner in which the princess character is displayed (specific presentation manner) may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG, as shown in FIG. 345(b). In this case, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific presentation mode, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for awarding the privilege is higher than when it is displayed in the normal mode.

In addition, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern (Fig. 345(a)), and a second production pattern (FIG. 345(b )) may be prepared respectively. In this case, it is set so that the degree of expectation for awarding the privilege is the same between when the first effect pattern appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect and when the second effect pattern appears. It is desirable to According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide interest in which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect. Regardless of whether the decoration image SYG or the decoration image SYG appears, it is possible to provide a completely different interest, such as whether or not a specific presentation mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, in the case where such a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) can appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 345(c), when the specific effect mode is at a stage where the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears) has not yet appeared. This may be displayed first (for example, when a specific operation-related effect is being produced). According to such a configuration, although a specific operation-related effect is being performed as to which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG will appear, a specific effect mode (a princess character is displayed) is performed. The button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG will have the same performance value (the same degree of expectation). In other words, in this case, the performance of the specific operation-related production itself is lost, so even though the specific operation-related production is being performed, it is possible to say "predictive production by the princess character". It becomes possible to provide performance with a completely different purpose.

In addition, the sword decoration 5001 according to each of the above-described production modes and their other examples is a second type in which the sword portion (handle portion 5012, blade portion 5011) of the sword decoration 5001 can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. It is provided so as to have a mode (second operation mode). Therefore, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword ornament 5001 provided as one operation unit? As an effect for , the specific operation-related effect may be performed. The sword portion (handle portion 5012, blade portion 5011) and the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) are both operably (operably) supported by a main body support portion (not shown) provided on the door frame 3, and Even if one side of the sword portion (handle portion 5012, blade portion 5011) and sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) is in a state of being operated (operated), the other side can be operated (operated). formed.

However, when a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a manner, the operation mode is different regardless of which effect result appears, and it is impossible to operate the sword ornament 5001. Since there is no change, there is a concern that the possibility of an operation error occurring on the player side increases. In particular, even if the operation opportunity is given to any of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, for example, an effect image imitating the sword part of the sword ornament 5001 (and its If an instruction display prompting an operation is displayed, there is an increasing concern that the player may make an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Become. In other words, in this case, as the remaining time of the performance reception period is getting shorter, the player should first perform an operation to correct the operation error, and then perform the operation in the original correct mode. It is difficult to do so, and even if a specific operation-related effect with relatively high expectations is performed, if the effect acceptance period ends before the effect is accepted , there is a concern that the interest in gaming will decrease.

Also, in the sword ornament 5001, there is a mode of "vertical movement" depending on the sword part and a mode of "horizontal movement" depending on the scabbard part. In the operation unit that can provide the mode, if the wrong side operation is performed when the operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform the correct side operation, and the effect reception period ends. It can be said that the risk of losing the opportunity to operate is increased.

Therefore, when performing the specific operation-related effect as a effect regarding which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 provided as one operation unit. 346 and 347, an operation error occurs on the player side between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, it is desirable to properly accept the performance and to execute the performance at the time of operation according to the reception of the performance.

Figures 346 and 347 show examples of effects when an operation error occurs on the player side between the first operation mode and the second operation mode in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a diagram.

In FIG. 346(a), in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 346(b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 346(a).

Here, the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 346(b) is a first effect that imitates the first operation mode of operating the sword part of the sword ornament 5001 from the drawn state to the sheathed state. An image OX and a second effect image TX imitating a second operation mode in which the sheath portion of the sword ornament 5001 is moved laterally are displayed within the display area of the effect display device 1600. Simultaneously displayed, it is suggested that an operation opportunity for one of these operation modes will soon be available for presentation. In this respect, in the first effect image OX, although the image portion imitating the sword part of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed larger than the second effect image TX, the first effect image OX and the first effect image OX are displayed. 2, the sword part is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

In FIG. 346(c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. The effect image TX pushes each other within the display area of the effect display device 1600, and an effect is performed in which the opponent is pushed out of the display area. When the effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, the effect acceptance period for the first operation mode occurs, and the effect result (second effect) in which the second effect image TX is left appears. result) appears, an effect acceptance period for the second operation mode occurs.

It should be noted that, in the specific operation-related effect according to this example of effect, as shown in FIG. When the second effect image TX is left in a dominant situation, a display such as "slide" is made visible. The details of the operation contents are made easy to recognize according to the situation of the production. However, since there is a concern that these displays are erroneously recognized as prompting the operation at the timing when the effect receiving period has not yet occurred, they may not necessarily be displayed.

In FIG. 346(d), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 346(c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is displayed within the display area. A production depicting the situation left behind is being performed (first production result). When progressing to this production content, even if an operation is performed in the second operation mode, a specific operation-time production (such as a movable production by the specific decorative member SDY) does not occur, and the first operation mode is performed. When an operation is performed, an effect reception is made, and a specific operation-time effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY) corresponding to the effect reception is generated.

That is, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 346(d), the effect acceptance period related to the specific effect at the time of operation occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Therefore, during the effect reception period, in addition to the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display prompting the operation (character display such as "push in" and a display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period bar display) will be displayed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 moves from the sword sheathed state to the sword drawn state so that the operation in the first operation mode can be performed.

FIG. 347(e) shows that although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (erroneous operation) is performed in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode. It shows the production situation when performed by the player.

That is, in this example of the effect, even if the effect reception period related to the specific effect at the time of operation occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the Operation detection of operation mode 2 itself is enabled. Then, when the operation in the second operation mode is detected during the performance acceptance period, it is assumed that there is an operation error by the player, and the specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in the first operation mode is accepted for the performance. (here, "as is").

Also, as shown in FIG. 347(f), such a specific notification changes the content of the notification according to the passage of time (here, "calm down") so that the player can regain his composure. It's like According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, it can be notified sequentially with short words, so even if the player side is in a panic state, this can be preferably performed. suppression is expected. As a result, even if the sword decorative body 5001 in the state of the second operation mode is operated in the first operation mode in the state as it is, the player side is informed that the effect is properly received. be able to recognize.

FIG. 347(g) shows that the proper side operation (first operation mode) is performed in the production situation (production acceptance period when in the erroneous operation state) of FIG. 347(e) or FIG. 347(f). As a result of the operation, an effect reception is made, and the above-described operation-time effect corresponding to the operation is performed. However, at this time, when the player's hand is released from the sword ornament 5001 (when the operation is terminated), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the state of the second operation mode to the non-operated state (normal state). ).

According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs on the player side between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, and the state of the operation error is not corrected, and the original correct operation remains as it is. Even if the game is performed from the state (state of operation error), the reception of the performance is properly performed, so that the decline in the game interest when the operation error occurs is suppressed.

In the above example of effect, when the player performs an erroneous operation, the player is notified that the operation should be performed without correcting the operation error. It is not necessary to give detailed notification for the purpose of That is, as described above, since the player may be panicking in a situation where an erroneous operation has been performed, giving a notification of complicated content may have the opposite effect. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player during the effect reception period, as a specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in a proper mode is received, the effect or sound alone is used instead of the display by the message. It is desirable to make a simple notification such as In this case, there is a possibility that the player side does not recognize that an operation error has been performed, but it is possible to confirm a special situation such as a specific notification being performed based on the operation being performed and an effect at the time of operation being not performed. Therefore, it can be said that it is possible to fully expect to switch the operation to the operation on the proper side.

On the other hand, it is conceivable that some players (particularly elderly players) may mistakenly operate a specific operation-related effect before the effect acceptance period occurs. For example, when an operation (such as lateral movement of the sheath portion) is performed on the second operation portion (for example, the sheath portion) even though no operation instruction regarding the second operation portion (for example, the sheath portion) is given, the first It is conceivable that a situation may occur in which an effect acceptance period related to a specific operation effect occurs only on the operation part (for example, the sword part) side of the game. There is a concern that it will not be possible to recognize whether it is good or not.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is being performed as to which of the first operation portion (sword portion) and the second operation portion (sheath portion) the operation opportunity is given, the second 346(b), (c), etc.), the second operation unit Even when an operation is performed, it is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in a proper mode is received. This specific notification may be "a message display to the effect that the proper side of the operation unit that will soon be given an operation opportunity should be operated while maintaining the operation state", or a message display may be used. Instead, it may be an effect or a simple notification such as notification using only sound. In any case, by confirming a special situation in which a specific notification is performed based on the operation and the effect at the time of operation is not performed despite the operation being performed, the operation is then performed on the appropriate side. It can be said that it is possible to fully expect that it will be an opportunity to go.

In this case, for example, the first operation part (for example, , sword part), even if the effect acceptance period for a specific operation effect occurs only on the side, the second operation part (for example, the scabbard part) is operated (sword ornament 5001 moved to the left), when the first operation unit (for example, the sword part) side is operated, an effect reception is made, and the above-mentioned effect at the time of operation is performed according to the operation. becomes.

According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect reception occurs while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period and the original correct operation is performed as it is, the performance reception will be properly performed, so the operation error can be made before the performance reception period occurs. Also when is generated, the decline in the interest in the game is suppressed.

However, within the period during which a specific operation-related effect is performed as to which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit the operation opportunity is given, the effect result is indicated and the effect acceptance period If the above-mentioned specific notification is performed in the period immediately before the occurrence of the effect, the information will be mixed with the content notified (instruction display, etc.) during the effect acceptance period, and the player will be further confused. There is a concern that Therefore, in the specific operation-related effect in which the effect result suggesting that the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is finally displayed, the period until the effect result is displayed , the above-mentioned specific notification is executed when the second operation mode is operated in spite of the fact that the operation instruction regarding the second operation part (for example, the sheath part) is not displayed. A period and a second period during which the above-mentioned specific notification is not executed even if an operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, and after the first period and the second period have sequentially passed, the above-mentioned second period It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for one operation unit.

In the example of the effect described above, when the specific notification is performed, the degree of expectation for awarding of the privilege may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the sword decoration 5001 according to each of the above-described rendering modes and their different examples, the rendering mode of the sword decoration 5001 itself changes to one of the above-described multiple modes (for example, FIG. 311 A change from the stage 0 form shown in ) to any of the stage 1 to stage 3 forms) is possible. In this regard, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword ornament 5001 is changed to one of the plurality of modes described above, and an effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated in the changed state. You can let it run. Alternatively, the sword ornament 5001 may be changed to any one of the plurality of modes described above when the effect accepting period occurs after a specific operation-related effect is performed.

In this case, in the effect display device 1600 during the effect reception period, an instruction display prompting the operation of the sword decoration 5001 (character display such as "push" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period), and the sword decoration 5001 However, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001 at that time (stage 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 311). It will happen.

However, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if it is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, it is possible to make the checking of the sword decoration image SYG interesting. Therefore, the performance during the performance acceptance period is poor. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG can be displayed in a manner different from that of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. This is desirable in terms of securing performance during the performance acceptance period.

At this time, by setting the mode represented by the sword decoration image SYG to have a higher degree of expectation than the mode of the sword decoration 5001, the performance during the performance reception period can be improved. It is desirable in order to secure it properly. For example, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form and a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form instead of the stage 1 form. make it visible. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it is possible to grasp that the degree of expectation is higher by checking the form of the sword decoration image SYG. As a result, the amusement in the game during the performance acceptance period is favorably maintained.

In order to obtain such effects, the number of presentation modes on the sword decoration image SYG side should be larger than the number of presentation modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of presentation modes on the sword decoration 5001 side may be one. Further, when a plurality of presentation modes are prepared as the sword ornament 5001, the plurality of presentation modes do not necessarily have to change the form.

However, if the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001 and the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG are simply made different in this manner, some players may feel uncomfortable because of false display. This is a concern, and this may reduce the interest in gaming. Therefore, more preferably, the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG is a special aspect that is different from any of the aspects prepared as aspects of the sword decoration 5001 (here, stage 0 to stage 3 shown in FIG. 311). is prepared, and when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode instead of the mode of the sword decoration 5001 at that time, so that the mode of the sword decoration 5001 and the sword It is desirable to make the mode of the decoration image SYG different from each other. The special mode may be a mode in which the outer shape of the sword decoration image SYG is changed by further transforming or combining the sword decoration image SYG, an operation in a mode that does not appear in the sword decoration 5001, or a mode in which the sword decoration 5001 It may be one that emits light in a manner that does not appear.

According to such a configuration, since the rendering expression that is difficult due to the structure of the sword decoration body 5001 is realized by the sword decoration image SYG, it is possible to suppress the concern that the user will feel uncomfortable because of the false display. In addition to the fact that the sword ornament 5001 can be used, it is expected to improve the amusement of the game by providing performance beyond the player's imagination when looking at the structure of the sword ornament 5001.例文帳に追加

Even in the case where the sword decoration image SYG has a special aspect in this way, the sword decoration image SYG may have each aspect prepared as an aspect of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, shown in FIG. It is desirable to be able to display in stage 0 form to stage 3 form). That is, in this case, basically, while the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed only when a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special mode. In addition, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode, it is desirable to indicate that the degree of expectation for awarding the privilege is higher than when it is displayed in other modes. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

In addition, regarding the method of displaying the sword decoration image SYG in a special mode, in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed, another effect (for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 312 to 319) may be applied.

For example, if we are now in the production situation shown in FIG. 315 (X1), the next production development destination is the production situation shown in FIG. A production pattern that progresses with production is prepared. Then, when the effect progresses to the effect pattern, first, as shown in FIG. A continuation image (image with the samurai's eyes closed) indicating that the opportunity is not given is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001, which was in the second sword-drawn state, changes to the sword-sheathed state while maintaining the stage 3 form. returned.

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous mode, informing the player that the decorative symbols will be changed again (Fig. 348(b)). ). Here, among the three decorative patterns, the central decorative pattern is a pseudo-continuous sword pattern that is not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the form of the sword decoration 5001 and the production level (the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations). By displaying in the form of the pseudo chained sword pattern, the player can easily recognize the re-fluctuation of the decoration pattern (the start of the pseudo chained swing).

However, here, as shown in FIG. 348(c), the pseudo-continuous sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the shape of the sword ornament 5001 in the fourth pseudo-continuous change (re-change). (special aspect) is displayed, but this special aspect can appear only in the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration 5001 in the display area. The body 5001 itself is immutable. The special mode according to this production example is a mode in which the sheath portion is divided into two. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 348(c), even if the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) simulating the sword decoration 5001 in the display area changes to a special mode, the sword decoration 5001 remains in the stage 3 form. While maintaining , it will change from the sheathed state to the second drawn state.

After that, the effective period of operation of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, and an operation promoting effect for prompting the sheathing operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 . Specifically, while the sword decoration 5001 is in the second drawn state (stage 3 mode), a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration 5001 in a special mode is displayed, An image (bar display) indicating the operation direction and the operation valid period is displayed together with the message "Put away your sword!" (Fig. 348(d)). Then, as shown in FIG. 348(e), when the sword sheathing operation by the player is detected during the operation effective period, the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is performed according to the set effect pattern. Along with the expectation level notification effect, the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. As a result, the player can grasp that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) has ended.

In addition, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, for example, when the pattern variation is performed in the first production pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, within the pattern variation, the operation button 410 It is possible to execute the first omen effect that appears when the opportunity to operate is given and the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is not given. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is not given the opportunity to operate the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the pattern variation. A second omen effect that appears when an opportunity is granted is made executable. Further, when the pattern variation is performed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the third omen that appears when the operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001. Production (specific operation-related production) can be executed.

In this regard, these portent effects are executed as different effect contents, and the effect contents include, for example,
Displaying the specific image so as to cover at least the area where the effect image appears before the effect image simulating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is granted appears in the display area,
・After that, at a position that is difficult to see due to the specific image, an effect image that imitates the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is given is displayed,
・After that, the specific image is gradually changed from the display area to non-display (increase the transparency of the specific image itself, reduce the area where the specific image is displayed, etc.) You may make it change. For example, in the first omen effect, the specific image is a “cloud effect” display effect (a display effect that gradually makes it easier to see the effect image imitating the operation means), and in the second omen effect, the specific image is “flame Effect” display effect (a display effect that mimics the operation means is gradually displayed to make it easier to see). If the type of the specific image is made different, for example, by performing a display effect that gradually makes it easier to see, it is possible to make the portent effects different from each other. When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the first sign effect is being performed before the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the display effect by the "flame effect" is performed. , it is possible to recognize that the second omen effect is being performed before the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001, and when the display effect by the "water effect" is performed, the operation is performed. It becomes possible to recognize that a third omen effect (a specific operation-related effect) is being performed as to which of the button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 will be given an operation opportunity.

Then, in the case where an omen effect (at least one of the first omen effect, the second omen effect, and the third omen effect) is performed with such effect contents, an effect image simulating the operation means is created by the specific image. It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for the operating means during the period when the visual recognition is made difficult. When such a configuration is applied to either the first omen effect or the second omen effect, the effect image simulating the operation means is displayed in a highly expected display mode (for example, red) and a low expected display mode. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where it is not certain whether it will be displayed in any of the display mode (for example, blue), the effect during the effect acceptance period sexuality can be improved. Also, when such a configuration is applied to the third omen effect (specific operation-related effect), there is no certainty as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 will be given the operation opportunity. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage when the player cannot have the command, the performance during the performance reception period can be improved.

FIG. 349 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the first omen effect is performed with such effect contents, and FIG. 350 shows an example of an effect when the first omen effect is performed with the same content. It is a time chart showing. 349 and 350, an example of the effect when the first omen effect is performed will be described below. It is also possible to apply to an omen effect.

FIG. 349(a) shows that, in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 349(b) shows an effect situation in which the first omen effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 349(a).

Here, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 349(b), the display rendering by the “cloud effect” is performed in a large range within the display area of the rendering display device 1600. FIG. 350, the display effect by such a “cloud effect” gradually changes from the display area to non-display (the transmittance of the specific image itself is increased). or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed).

Then, in this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 350, at timing t2, which is an intermediate stage in which the display effect by the "cloud effect" is gradually changed to non-display, the effect accepting period for the operation button 410 is At the same time, a button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 and an instruction display (a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect acceptance period) prompting the operation of the operation button 410 are displayed ( Figure 349(c)).

In this production example, the button image BTG can be displayed in one of a plurality of modes. , blue), the ratio of the operation-time effects to be performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation is higher than when the button image BTG is displayed. In this regard, in the production situation shown in FIG. 349(c), it is not certain whether the button image BTG will be displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the "cloud effect". When the operation button 410 is operated in spite of the fact that the operation button 410 is operated, an effect reception is made, and an operation-time effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. That is, in this case, even in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect at the time of operation is executed in such a manner that the content of the effect is switched from the precursor effect. It is possible to progress the performance without being sure of which of the two display modes will be displayed.

In addition, in the production situation shown in FIG. 349(c), it is not certain whether the button image BTG will be displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the "cloud effect". In spite of this, the instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 continues to change the length of the bar display so as to suggest that the remaining time of the effect acceptance period is gradually decreasing.

On the other hand, at timing t3 when a predetermined period of time has passed since the production situation shown in FIG. 349(c) occurred, the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (Fig. 349(d)). In such a situation, while it is possible to easily recognize whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode, it is possible to operate the operation button 410. become able to. That is, in this case, the effect at the time of operation is executed in such a manner that the content of the effect is switched from the effect shown in FIG. 349(d).

According to such a configuration, the period from when the button image BTG is displayed to when the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timings t2 to t3) in the effect receiving period (timings t2 to t4) ), it is possible to provide an effect by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to see.

In addition, in order to enhance the performance during the performance acceptance period (timings t2 to t4), the "cloud effect" is completely hidden during the period (timings t3 to t4) , it is desirable to perform an effect display that is not performed during the period from timing t2 to t3. In this production example, when the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timings t3 to t4), a message such as "press" is displayed. To more favorably enhance the performance during the period (timings t3 to t4) by dynamically displaying the button image BTG, which was displayed in a stopped mode during the period, during the period from timings t3 to t4. will be able to

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 349, the instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 and the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 are displayed at the same time (when the effect acceptance period occurs). The button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 may be displayed before the effect reception period occurs. In other words, in this case, after the effect display by the "cloud effect" is performed, an effect situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to see appears first. Until then, an effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs, and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 appears.

At this time, when the button image BTG is in an effect situation in which it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BTG before the effect reception period occurs, the effect pattern (the third omen) in which the display mode of the button image BTG changes to a more expected mode In the case of an effect, an effect pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to such a configuration, when the button image BTG is in a production situation in which it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BTG, it is possible to provide an amusement in which the value of gazing at the button image BTG becomes higher, thereby increasing the interest in the game. It can be maintained well.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 349, the button image BTG is made difficult to see by the “cloud effect”, but the instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 is affected by the “cloud effect”. We decided to display it so that its visibility is maintained without being affected. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the change in the visibility of the button image BTG without anxiety while grasping the remaining time of the effect acceptance period.

However, the instruction display prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 may also be affected by the "cloud effect" and may be made difficult to see until timing t3. That is, in this case, it is possible for the player to have a conflict as to whether or not to operate the operation button 410 without being sure of the display mode while the remaining time of the effect receiving period cannot be grasped well. It becomes possible to provide unprecedented novel performance.

In addition, in any of the first omen effect, the second omen effect, and the third omen effect, when such effect is applied, the effect image simulating the operation means is clearly displayed after the omen effect is started. Even if the length of time until it becomes visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is different from each other, the effect image is clear after the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed. It is desirable that the time until the specific image is made visible to the user (the time until the specific image is hidden) are set to the same time. In addition, when applying such a performance to any one of the first omen effect, the second omen effect, and the third omen effect, the effect imitating the operation means is performed after the omen effect is started. For the length of time until the image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden), prepare multiple times to create multiple effects with different expectations. However, the time from when the effect image simulating the operating means is displayed until the effect image becomes clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is the same It is desirable to set the time.

Further, as a method of making the effect image imitating the operating means difficult to see, it is not always necessary to use another image (specific image). For example, by changing the transmittance setting of the effect image simulating the operating means itself, the effect image simulating the operating means is made to appear in a display mode (timing t2) that makes it relatively difficult to see, and then the relative It may be gradually changed toward a display mode (timing t3) that is visually easily visible. However, the timing at which the effect image simulating the operation means appears in a display mode that makes it relatively difficult to see may be a timing prior to timing t2. may be performed as an omen effect, or while another display is performed as an omen effect, an effect image imitating the operating means may be made to appear in a display mode that makes it relatively difficult to see. good too.

Also, when a specific effect pattern corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, the specific operation-related effect described with reference to FIGS. ) is occurring. That is, at the time when a specific operation-related effect starts to be produced, it is kept secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect, and as a result of the progress of the production, a plurality of Since an effect acceptance period corresponding to only one of the operation means occurs, if there is a delay in determining which one of the plurality of operation means should be operated, it will be more difficult for the player to operate it. There is a possibility that the performance acceptance period will end before the end of the remaining time. In this regard, if a specific operation-related effect can be executed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later is occurring, the effect after the specific operation-related effect is performed During the acceptance period, even if an image corresponding to any operation means appears as the effect result of a specific operation-related effect, the operation by the player on the operation means on the side of the operation target and the automatic effect function. Since the performance reception is performed by any of the above and the performance after the operation is surely executed, the game interest when the specific operation-related performance is performed can be preferably maintained.

[Auto button effect status]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). When the effect reception period for the operation button 410 (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the big hit determination, the effect reception period Even if the player's operation is not accepted for the performance in the performance acceptance period, it is possible to execute a process (automatic performance function) that causes the same change to the performance as when the player's operation is accepted for the performance within the performance acceptance period. there is According to such an automatic button effect state, even if the user does not operate the button each time the effect reception period occurs, the post-operation effect is generated when the button is operated, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest in the game due to forgetting to operate the button. be able to As for the automatic effect function, the same effect reception as when the operation is actually performed may be generated when the automatic effect function functions, so that the process corresponding to the effect reception may be performed, or the effect reception may be generated. Alternatively, the same processing as when the reception of the effect is received may be performed.

In the embodiments relating to the "automatic rendering function" described below, the techniques, renderings, and settings related to the operations described above may be used in appropriate combination or may be used in place of each other.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the automatic button is operated by operating the operating means a plurality of times during the period in which the demo screen in which the pattern variation is not executed is displayed. Setting to the performance state can be made. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation of the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation of the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The "Various Settings" screen is displayed by selecting the "Various Settings" screen, and the "Various Settings" screen is displayed by the third operation of the operation button 410 (or by an operation means different from the operation button 410). When the "automatic button effect state setting" displayed inside is selected, the automatic button effect state is set. It should be noted that only the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, or the operation of the operation button 410 and the operation of a different operation means may be operated a plurality of times.

On the other hand, during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 is operated only once to set the automatic button effect state. It is possible to set an automatic button performance state while keeping an eye on the progress of performance during pattern variation. However, there are some players who want to actively operate the operation buttons 410 regardless of whether or not the valid period has expired. If the automatic button effect state is set just by operating the button, the interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button effect state during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed, the operation state of the operation button 410 must be held for a predetermined time ( Here, it is required to operate this once in a mode (so-called "long-press mode") that is maintained for 2 seconds). As a result, even if the operation button 410 is positively operated irrespective of whether or not the effective period has occurred during the period in which the pattern variation is in the execution state, the automatic button presentation state is entered. It becomes possible to make it difficult to cause erroneous setting. It should be noted that it is desirable that the automatic button effect state is not set even if the operation is performed in the long-pressing mode when at least the effect acceptance period is occurring during the period in which the pattern variation is in the execution state. .

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if the method of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is set, the demo screen in which the pattern variation is not executed is displayed. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed.

That is, during the period in which the demo screen is displayed in the state where the pattern variation is not executed, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operating means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation of the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation of the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The "Various Settings" screen is displayed by selecting the "Various Settings" screen, and the "Various Settings" screen is displayed by the third operation of the operation button 410 (or by an operation means different from the operation button 410). When the "cancel the automatic button effect state" displayed inside is selected, the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled.

On the other hand, during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation button 410 only once. It is possible to cancel the setting of the automatic button performance state while keeping an eye on the development of the performance during the pattern variation. However, unlike the case of setting the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 can be positioned to the operation state without maintaining the operation state for the operation button 410 for a predetermined time (even if the operation mode is not long press). The setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled only by detecting that the button has been pressed (only by operating in a single-shot operation mode). That is, it can be said that the fact that an operation button 410 has been operated in some way indicates that there is a desire to operate the operation button 410. By canceling the setting of the state and returning to the normal presentation state early, it is expected that the game interest is favorably maintained.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is configured with a plurality of operation means including the operation button 410 . In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is in the automatic button effect state set by the operation, the operation button 410 differs from the operation button 410 based on the result of the big hit determination. An effect reception period during which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001, etc.) (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001, etc. is set) occurs, and even if the player's operation (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is not received within the effect reception period, the player's operation (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is not performed within the effect reception period. It is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change to the effect as when the effect is received. According to such a configuration, whether there is a period during which the operation of the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) can receive the effect, or whether another operation means (for example, , sword decoration 5001), the above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350)) regarding whether there will be a period during which the effect can be accepted, the effect result Even if either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 can receive the effect, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate it, so you can enjoy such a specific operation-related effect without worry. .

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
When a first-side effect reception period occurs in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is set as an operation target while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). , when the first operation means is not operated within the first side effect acceptance period, automatic processing can be executed to cause the same change in the effect as when the first operation means is operated. Yes (first automatic production means),
・The second side effect receiving period set as the operation target for the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) among the plurality of operation means when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) When it occurs, when the second operation means is not operated within the second side effect acceptance period, automatic processing is executed to cause the same change in the effect as when the second operation means is operated. Possible (second automatic production means)
With such a configuration, regardless of whether the first-side effect reception period or the second-side effect reception period occurs, when the same specific time has passed since the period occurred, the second Automatic processing by the first automatic effect means or automatic processing by the second automatic effect means can be executed.

According to such a configuration, when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is controlled, the first side effect acceptance period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target, and the second operation means is the operation target. Even if any of the second side effect reception period set as occurs within the execution period of the pattern fluctuation, the automatic effect function can function when the same specific time has passed since the occurrence of those periods As a result, you will be able to enjoy the production with peace of mind.

However, in the event that a first-side effect reception period occurs in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as an operation target, when a specific time has passed after the occurrence of the first-side effect reception period When the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed, and when the time different from the specific time has passed since the first side performance reception period occurred, the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed. It is also possible to make the performance progress within the pattern variation as there is a case. According to such a configuration, it was assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means would be executed when the specific time has passed since the first side effect acceptance period occurred, but the timing is different from this. Since the production reception is made and the production after the operation is automatically generated, it can be made to function as a surprise production.

In addition, when it is controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state), the operating means is given more opportunities to operate within the pattern fluctuation period than when it is not controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state). You may make it so that the ratio which the production|presentation acceptance period which is carried out generate|occur|produces becomes high. That is, in this case, as the frequency of occurrence of the production reception period increases, it can be assumed that the frequency of forgetting to operate within the production reception period also increases, but even if the operation is forgotten, automatic production Since the performance after the operation is executed by the functioning of the function, the performance reception period can be generated with a higher frequency while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to frequent forgetting to operate. Incidentally, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable to increase the rate of occurrence of both the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means. However, it is more desirable to make the degree of increase in the rate of occurrence different between the effect receiving period for the first operating means and the effect receiving period for the second operating means.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
When the effect acceptance condition is satisfied within the effect acceptance period, the post-operation effect can be executed (post-operation effect execution means),
・It is possible to execute a process for establishing a performance reception condition based on the fact that the player has performed an operation within the performance reception period (player operation reception means),
・When the player does not perform an operation within the effect acceptance period, it is possible to execute a process to establish the effect acceptance condition without receiving an operation by the player at a specific timing within the effect acceptance period (automatic effect acceptance means )
However, the specific timing within the effect reception period is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the effect reception period has passed since the effect reception period started. I am planning to As a result, it is possible to give the player a sufficient margin to operate the player himself until the automatic effect function functions, and it is possible to leave the option of causing the effect acceptance by the player's operation. , the game interest can be maintained favorably.

In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when a specific time has passed since the first side effect reception period occurred, and the case where the first side effect reception period has occurred and the specific time When the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when a different time has passed, when the effect progresses within the pattern variation, the above "specific time" or the above "specific time Any of the "time different from" is set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first-side effect reception period.

Here, if an effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the pattern variation when the automatic button effect state is controlled, and the effect is accepted for the operation of the operation button 410 within the effect acceptance period. , the process of generating the post-operation effect in response to the reception of the effect is executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect in response to the acceptance of the effect, the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may also be performed.

Also, in this case, during the execution period of the pattern variation when the automatic button effect state is controlled, an effect acceptance period occurs for an operating means (sword ornament 5001, etc.) different from the operation button 410, and the effect acceptance occurs. Even when the operation to the sword decoration body 5001 is received during the period, the processing for generating the post-operation performance corresponding to the acceptance of the performance and the processing for canceling the setting of the automatic button performance state are executed respectively. is desirable. Also in this case, regarding the "post-operation effect in response to the effect reception", the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs during the period when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, and the sword decoration is performed during the effect reception period. It will be executed as an effect having the same content as the post-operation effect that is executed when the operation to the body 5001 is accepted.

That is, after being controlled to the automatic button production state (specific production state), the desire to return to the production state (normal production mode) in which the production can progress depending on the player's own operation (specific production state) a desire to terminate the state) may arise. Such a desire often arises when an effect reception period occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the player, but there is a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end of the effect reception period. It is difficult to perform both an operation to end a specific production state and an operation to accept an operation within the system, and as a result, the opportunity to operate may be lost. If so, the interest in gaming may decline. In this regard, in the above configuration, when an effect reception period related to a specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation buttons to which the operation opportunity is given during the effect reception period 410 or sword ornament 5001 is operated only once (by being operated in a single-shot operation mode), the process of ending the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and the process of causing a change in the effect. (processing to execute the effect after the operation) and are performed respectively, so that the desire to end the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and progress the effect depending on the player's own operation is received. Even if it occurs within the period, it is possible to smoothly switch the presentation state.

However, regarding the setting change (setting change to automatic button effect state, setting cancellation of automatic button effect state) related to automatic button effect state during the period when the demo screen is displayed (symbol change is not executed) , the settings can be changed without requiring any operation on the sword ornament 5001 . In other words, the sword ornament 5001 has a lower frequency of being given an operation opportunity than the operation button 410 during the execution period of the pattern variation, and when the operation opportunity is given by that amount, the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the operation button 410. It is made high. Therefore, the sword ornament 5001 is not allowed to be operated only for the purpose of changing the setting of the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and thus the sword ornament 5001 is given an opportunity to operate. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the amusement of the game by enhancing the sense of premium when playing the game. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while the demo screen in which the pattern variation is not yet executed is displayed, among the plurality of operation means, operation means (operation buttons) other than the sword ornament 5001 410 or another operation means) can be set to or canceled from the automatic button effect state by operating the button a plurality of times.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic button effect state can be entered without requiring the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 even during the execution period of the pattern variation when the automatic button effect state is not controlled. Settings can be changed. That is, as described above, if the operation button 410 is operated once in the "long-press mode", it is controlled to the automatic button effect state. For the purpose of this, operations on the sword ornament 5001 are not permitted.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the setting related to the automatic button effect state can be changed by operating the sword ornament 5001 means that the pattern when it is controlled to the automatic button effect state. It is limited to a case where an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs during the execution period of the variation, an operation for the sword decoration 5001 is accepted for an effect during the effect acceptance period, and a corresponding post-operation effect appears. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting to the automatic button presentation state by operating the sword decoration 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when the sword decoration 5001 is given an opportunity to operate. become.

In addition, as a plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when in the automatic button effect state, "auto In addition to operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) that can be subject to the "effect function", special operation means that are not subject to the "automatic effect function that generates the effect at the time of operation without being operated within the effect reception period" may further include. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, an effect accepting period occurs during which an opportunity to operate the special operating means is given, and if the effect is accepted during the effect accepting period, the operation for the special operating means is accepted. The degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested by the post-operation production in response to the acceptance of the production. However, even if the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state, if the operation for the special operation means is not received within the effect acceptance period, the same effect after the operation as when the above effect is accepted will appear. no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is accepted does not appear, but if the effect is different from when the effect is accepted, it may be made to appear.

In addition, regarding the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in the mode of long pressing), the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the pattern variation is in the execution state. In addition to the time, the effect reception period for the operation means other than the operation button 410 (the effect reception period in which the degree of expectation is suggested by operating the sword ornament 5001, or the degree of expectation is suggested by operating the special operation means It is desirable that this is not allowed even if a performance reception period, etc.) is occurring. That is, if the automatic button effect state is generated by operating the operation button 410 (operating in the form of a long press) during the effect acceptance period for an operation means different from the operation button 410. In the middle of the performance reception period, the original performance reception (operating means different from the operation button 410) is activated by activating the "automatic performance function that generates the performance at the time of operation without operating within the performance reception period". If the player is unfamiliar with the automatic button effect state, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 may occur without any operation. This is because the user may be puzzled as to whether there is an effect receiving period for an operating means different from the above, and there is concern that this will reduce the interest in the game.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the precursor effect can be executed prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period. A sign effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when it is not, and a sign effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). You may enable it to be performed as a display mode different from. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to preliminarily recognize whether or not there is a performance state in which the automatic performance function can function within the specific performance reception period, and the performance can be enjoyed without anxiety.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image suggesting the remaining time (for example, "bar display" suggesting the remaining time) is displayed during the effect acceptance period. However, when the effect reception period occurs, at least until the specific image (for example, "bar display" indicating the remaining time) is displayed, the specific image is displayed so that the specific area is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image in which lightning strikes the specific region) may be displayed outside the area (forecast effect). That is, in this case, when the effect reception period occurs, by confirming the movement of the effect image different from the specific image, the user can pay attention to the part where the hidden "specific image indicating the remaining time" will appear. can be urged, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's operation is not completed in time and the specific effect acceptance period ends, and furthermore, Even if the operation by the player is not in time, the automatic effect function functions to execute the effect after the operation, so that it is expected that the interest in the game is preferably maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the state setting and setting cancellation related to the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player. Based on this, the state may be set to the automatic button effect state or the setting of the automatic button effect state may be canceled according to the progress of the game or effect. As an example of the state setting and setting cancellation according to the progress of the game or effect, for example, "While it is controlled in the normal game state, it is controlled as an automatic button effect state, but the jackpot game state Or, when the state is shifted to a high-probability time-saving state, the automatic button production state is canceled."Or,"generate an automatic button production state within the execution period of the pattern variation, and the pattern variation in the execution state ends. A control mode such as "generate an effect pattern that cancels the setting when a predetermined time has passed since the occurrence" or "generate an automatic button effect state over a period in which multiple symbol variations are executed" It is possible to employ a control mode such as . Further, the pachinko machine 1 may be always controlled to the automatic button presentation state, and in this case, the automatic button presentation state is not canceled.

In addition, the timing at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions may be when the remaining time of the effect reception period is exhausted, or at a predetermined timing after that, or when the remaining time of the effect reception period is left. It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). When the remaining time of the production reception period is consumed, or when the above-mentioned automatic production function functions at a predetermined timing after that, the production after the operation will be performed as if the production reception was made after the production reception period ended. will be executed. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the middle timing (specific timing) when the remaining time of the effect acceptance period is left, the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function in the same way as when there is an actual operation. At the point of time (specific timing), the effect acceptance period ends and the post-operation effect is executed.

However, in order to ensure a sense of security that a post-operation effect will occur even if the button is not operated when it is controlled to the automatic button effect state, it is necessary to wait until the effect reception period ends (effect reception It is important to make the above-described automatic effect function function at a specific timing within the period, and to start the post-operation effect corresponding to this. That is, in this case, when the above-described automatic effect function does not function even though the specific timing within the effect reception period has arrived, the player himself/herself operates after the specific timing arrives to generate the post-operation effect. This makes it possible to reduce the feeling of uneasiness when being controlled to the automatic button effect state It is possible that the effect after the operation is recognized, and the effect after the operation may not be confirmed”, “The automatic effect function may not function due to some trouble, and the effect after the operation may not be confirmed”, etc.) be able to

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button effect state. Characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be described in order below. You may make it use combining suitably.

It should be noted that, in explaining each of the characteristic techniques below, as a premise, in a specific production state (automatic button production state), when it is not controlled to the specific production state (automatic button production state) When a performance reception period occurs, the same post-operation performance as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the performance reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the big hit determination) that can be executed only when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared, When a specific effective period related to the specific display effect occurs while the specific display effect is being performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the specific effective period. can be According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance (improvement of the performance by permitting the occurrence of a specific display performance) when being controlled to a specific rendering state (automatic button rendering state). Of course, even if a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is occurring, the automatic effect function may not function during a different effect acceptance period set when the specific display effect is not being performed. On the other hand, during a specific valid period when a specific display effect is being performed, the automatic effect function works to save the trouble of operating, so that the VIP feeling can be enjoyed. Therefore, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be suitably enhanced. It should be noted that it is not necessary to prevent the automatic effect function from functioning during all of the different effect reception periods set when a specific display effect is not being performed, and at least part of the effect reception period is an automatic effect. If the function is disabled, the above effects will occur when the specific effective period occurs while the specific display effect is being performed (when the effect reception period occurs during which the automatic effect function always functions). can be expected. Further, even when such a specific effective period occurs, if there is no operation by the player until the specific timing within the specific effective period arrives, the above-described automatic effect function is activated at the specific timing. It is desirable to start the post-operation production corresponding to this.

Further, after preparing at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the big hit determination,
・When the first specific effective period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the automatic effect described above occurs at the timing when the first predetermined time has passed since the first specific effective period occurred. While the function functions to terminate the first specific validity period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding to this,
- If the second specific effective period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined period longer than the first predetermined period after the occurrence of the second specific effective period. At the timing of the elapse of, the above-described automatic effect function functions to end the second specific valid period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding to this, and further,
・If the third specific effective period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific effective period is reached despite being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Each processing may be performed in a specific state of performance such that if there is no operation until the end of the operation, the same post-operation performance as when the operation was performed cannot appear. According to such a configuration, even if an effect reception period (specific valid period) occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the effect reception period starts from the time when the effect reception period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic effect function functions when the predetermined time elapses, or the above-described automatic effect function does not function until a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time elapses, Even if the performance acceptance period ends, the above-described automatic performance function may be disabled in the first place. Therefore, even if it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is confirmed which type of specific display effect was performed when the effect acceptance period (specific valid period) occurred. For example, when the above-described automatic effect function does not function even after the first predetermined time has passed, the above-mentioned It is possible to develop the performance with a sense of tension such as whether the automatic performance function of the above functions or whether the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function in the first place. Note that the first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period are all set when the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in an operated state (so-called When the one-shot operation is performed), the effect is accepted and the effect after the operation is generated.

It should be noted that the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect can only be executed when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). There may be. In this way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a display mode that cannot appear when not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) can be displayed. In this case, it is possible to favorably maintain the amusement of the game in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In addition, a first specific display effect (first specific effective period) and a second specific display effect (second specific effective period) are prepared, and a third specific display effect (third specific effective period) is prepared. does not necessarily have to be prepared. Further, the post-operation effects that occur when the effects are accepted in the first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period may have different effect contents.

In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated to generate the effect after operation, the timing within the effect acceptance period when the automatic effect function functioned (when the effect is accepted, what is the effect acceptance period The automatic effect function functioned for the bar display (display that changes the image (here, the area changes) with the passage of time) to indicate the remaining time of the effect acceptable period so that it can be recognized whether there was enough time left. The post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the display is not hidden at this time. According to such a configuration, for example, by checking the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that is continuously displayed when the automatic effect function functions, the effect reception period is the first specified effective period ( A period in which the automatic effect function functions when the first predetermined time, which is a relatively early stage after the effect reception period occurs, and a second specific effective period (relatively after the effect reception period occurs) It becomes possible to recognize whether it was a period in which the automatic effect function functions when the second predetermined time, which is a late stage, has passed.

In this sense, when the first specific effective period (the period in which the automatic effect function functions when the first predetermined time has passed since the effect acceptance period occurred) occurs, and the second specific effective period ( A period in which an automatic performance function functions when a second predetermined time elapses after the occurrence of the performance acceptance period) is different in the degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, the second specific valid period is more advantageous). It is desirable to Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, when the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect are executed, a big hit is expected when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. different degrees (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the player's operation within the effect acceptance period, the "bar display" may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the automatic effect function described above may be used. function, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the "bar display" is displayed instead of being hidden. The post-operation effect may not be executed as a display change on the effect display device 1600, but may be executed as light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an action by a movable decorative body, for example. good too.

Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the functioning of the above-described automatic effect function, the player does not get involved in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the object of operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-described automatic effect function is activated to generate the post-operation effect, first, an operation target suggesting image (for example, an operation target operation image display simulating means, etc.), and even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, the operation target suggesting image is not hidden, but is displayed, and the post-operation effect is generated. It is desirable to In this case, the display mode (for example, color or transmittance) of the operation target suggestion image before and after the post-operation effect is generated may not necessarily be the same. It suffices if it can be recognized even in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, if a post-operation effect occurs due to an operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation object suggesting image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic display may be performed. As in the case where the effect function functions, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggesting image is displayed instead of being hidden. When the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, such as when the automatic effect function functions within the above-mentioned first specific effective period or when the automatic effect function functions within the above-described second specific effective period, always The post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggesting image is displayed instead of being hidden.

Further, at this time, if the post-operation effect is generated in a state in which the operation object suggesting image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation for the big win, both the mode of the operation object suggesting image and the mode of the post-operation effect can be generated. can be confirmed at the same time, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Further, the effect after the operation may not be executed as a display change on the effect display device 1600, but may be executed as light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an action by a movable decorative body, for example. There may be.

In addition, when the effect that generates the effect acceptance period in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) is referred to as "operation-related effect", the operation-related effect is not related to this. It may be executed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, movable body effect, count effect, etc.) without. However, in this case, when the "operational effect" is executed but "another specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operational effect" and "another unrelated effect" It is desirable that the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a higher rate than in the effect situation in which the "specific effect" is paralleled. In other words, when there is a production situation in which "operation-related production" and "another specific production unrelated to this" are performed in parallel, it is assumed that the production reception is not performed in the "operation-related production" and the post-operation production is not executed. Also, since ``another specific effect unrelated to this'' is in the execution state, the decline in gaming interest can be suppressed, whereas the ``operation-type effect'' is executed but ``another specific effect unrelated to this'' is being executed. When there is a production situation in which the "specific production" is not executed, if the production reception is not performed in the "operation system production" and the production after the operation is not executed, it will be in a situation where no production is executed. Therefore, a decline in interest in gaming is inevitable. Therefore, when the "operational effect" is executed but "another specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operational effect" and "another specific effect unrelated to this" By making the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions higher than in the effect situation in which "effect" is paralleled, it is possible to preferably maintain the game interest when the operation system effect occurs. become. The percentage may be 100%. By the way, the premonition effect that is performed before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect that the operation means to be operated operates are executed as "operation system effect" or related effects. It can be said that it is a thing. In addition, as the ``other specific effect'', for example, if it is generated before the start of the effect acceptance period (preferably, the premonitory effect), it is suggested in advance that the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function more often. be able to In this case, it is desirable that the effect be executed as an effect that ends after the effect reception period (preferably, the post-operation effect) ends. On the other hand, as "another specific effect", for example, if it is executed as an effect that occurs after the start of the effect reception period (preferably, a sign effect) and ends before the end of the effect reception period, It becomes possible to recognize only immediately before whether the situation is such that the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a high rate, so that the effect can be provided in a tense atmosphere. In this regard, as "another specific effect", if it is to be generated before the start of the effect acceptance period (preferably, the sign effect), the "another specific effect" is repeated multiple times within one symbol variation. If it is done, it will be executed even when the production acceptance period does not occur, so the ratio of the automatic production function to function when "another specific production" is executed is high. It will be possible to create a sense of tension about whether the production acceptance period will occur.

In addition, when it is in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of times of execution is a specific value (for example, 999 times). Until reaching the 1000th losing variation), an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) based on the result of the big hit determination can be generated with a predetermined probability. In addition, even if the performance acceptance period occurs, when there is no operation by the player, the above automatic performance function may or may not function. On the other hand, when it is in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of times of execution is a specific value (for example, 999 times). , and when reaching the 1000th loss variation), in the pattern variation (production pattern) that reaches the specific value, regardless of the result of the big hit determination, an operation opportunity for the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) is always generated, and even if there is no operation by the player within the effect reception period, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioned, and there is an operation by the player within the effect reception period. A process for always generating the same post-operation effect as the time may be executed. According to such a configuration, when the number of times of continuous execution of the losing variation reaches a specific value, "The player should be operated every time the effect reception period occurs while the losing variation is being continuously performed. As if he felt responsible for what he had done so far, the pachinko machine 1 itself always functioned automatically even if there was no operation by the player. Since it is realized as an effect to make the game play, the interest in the game can be preferably maintained. It should be noted that at this time, in the effect acceptance period that occurs when the losing variation is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th losing variation), the losing variation is sequentially digested and executed. A special display image (for example, It is desirable to make a message such as "If it is troublesome, I will operate it for you"). Further, even after the symbol variation (production pattern) reaching a specific value is digested, the symbol variation is repeated every time the symbol variation is digested until a specific condition (for example, the occurrence of a jackpot game state) is satisfied. Within (production pattern), regardless of the result of the big hit determination, the production acceptance period in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) is always generated, and a special display image (for example, " If it is troublesome, I will operate it on your behalf." It is desirable to execute a process that always generates the post-operation effect.

In addition, when in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of times of execution is a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive times). The number of remaining variations until reaching the 1000th lost variation) may be displayed.

In addition, while in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested and until the number of executions reaches a specific value, during the pattern variation, the first operation Both the effect receiving period for the means and the effect receiving period for the second operating means can occur. , the effect progress may be made so that only one of the effect receiving period for the first operating means and the effect receiving period for the second operating means always occurs, and the other side cannot occur. According to such a configuration, since the operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the effect reception period itself, which causes expectations. become nauseous. However, in this production example, ``Even though the player was urged to operate each time the production acceptance period occurred while the losing variation was being continuously executed, no results were obtained. As if he felt responsible for what he had done so far, even if there was no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as an effect that always functions the automatic effect function. In order not to have such expectations any longer, the effect reception period is generated for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) with a relatively low degree of expectation at the time of occurrence, and the second operation means (for example, It is desirable not to generate an effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001).

Further, for the first effect acceptance period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) of the plurality of operation means is given the opportunity to operate, it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Although it can occur both when it is not activated and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) among the plurality of operation means Regarding the second effect acceptance period in which the operation opportunity is given to, it cannot occur when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be possible to generate it when it is being done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and when in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) game interest can be maintained favorably.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when generating the effect reception period based on the result of the big hit determination,
Displaying a model image imitating the operating means (an operation target suggesting image suggesting the operating means to be operated) (model image display means),
When the player performs an operation while the model image is being displayed after the effect reception period has occurred, the post-operation effect can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means),
・After the production acceptance period has occurred, if a specific timing arrives while the model image is being displayed and the player has not performed any operation, the post-operation production can be executed without receiving any operation by the player ( automatic production reception means)
However, the model image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different ratios (expectations) at which the post-operation effect is executed in a "mode advantageous to the player" when the effect is accepted. It is desirable to be able to According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be recognized in both the case where the player's operation receiving means generates the post-operation effect and the case where the automatic effect receiving means generates the post-operation effect. It will be possible to generate a post-operation production while it is being done.

Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the functioning of the above-described automatic effect function, the player does not get involved in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the object of operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-described automatic effect function is activated to generate the post-operation effect, first, a model image (an operation target suggestive image that suggests the operation means to be operated) is displayed within the effect reception period, Even when the automatic effect function described above functions, it is desirable to generate a post-operation effect while the model image is displayed instead of being hidden. In this case, the display mode (for example, color or transmittance) of the operation target suggestion image before and after the post-operation effect is generated may not necessarily be the same. It suffices if it can be recognized even in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, if a post-operation effect occurs due to an operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation object suggesting image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic display may be performed. As in the case where the effect function functions, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggesting image is displayed instead of being hidden. The effect after the operation may be executed using an area of the effect display device 1600 that is different from at least the area where the simulated image is displayed, or may be performed by light emitted by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or by a movable decoration. may be executed as an operation by

At this time, if the model image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations, the level of expectation (model image display mode) can be confirmed.

The model image that continues to be displayed in this manner is hidden after the post-operation effect occurs. However, the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when the specific time has passed after the first side effect reception period has occurred, and the specific time after the first side effect reception period has occurred When the automatic processing is executed by the first automatic performance means when different time passes, the time from the execution of the post-operation performance to the non-display of the model image is also different from each other. is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation effect has been generated by automatic processing when the specific time has passed, or whether the post-operation effect has been generated by automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has passed. Even if there is no post-operation effect, by checking the time from when the post-operation effect is executed until the model image is hidden, it becomes possible to recognize at what time the post-operation effect occurred. .

In addition, when a post-operation effect occurs by automatic processing when a specific time has passed, and when a post-operation effect occurs by automatic processing when a time different from the specified time has passed, a big hit is determined by the jackpot judgment. may be different.

In addition, when an effect reception period is generated in which an operation opportunity is given to the player while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), two displays are displayed during the effect reception period. Any one of the modes (for example, a low-expectation display mode with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win, or a high-expectation display mode with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win) can appear, and a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image ) appears, even if no operation is performed within the effect acceptance period, the effect is always accepted (the automatic effect function always functions), and the effect after the operation corresponding to the effect acceptance is executed, but the low expectation is displayed. When a mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, an effect reception (automatic effect function functions) is performed when no operation is performed within the effect reception period, and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. The effect may be developed in such a manner that there are cases where the effect is not received (the automatic effect function is functioned) and the effect after the operation is not executed. That is, if you forget to operate when a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears, it is inevitable that the effect after the operation will not be confirmed, which will inevitably reduce the interest in the game. When a display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, it is assumed that even if an operation is forgotten, the interest in the game will not decrease so much, so a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) has appeared. Sometimes, if you forget to operate it, the automatic production function will always function within the production acceptance period to avoid a decrease in the interest in the game due to forgetting to operate it. If you forget to operate when the image) appears, the automatic effect function will not necessarily function within the effect reception period so that you do not forget to operate. It is expected that the player's sense of participation will be enhanced. Note that when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the low-expectation display mode (for example, blue operation image) appears, but the high-expectation display mode (for example, red operation image) appears. You may make it so that it cannot appear. In addition, any one of three or more display modes may appear during the effect acceptance period.

Further, in each of the characteristic techniques described below, other examples related to these automatic button rendering states may also be appropriately applied and implemented.

[Suggestion of expectations by automatic production function]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state, even if the player does not perform an operation within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when applying the above-mentioned another example), A process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change to the effect as when the operation is performed can be executed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, when the player's operation is not received within the effect acceptance period, the same change as when the effect is accepted to the effect (automatic effect function) is not executed. At this time, in the automatic button production state, when the automatic production function does not function when the operation by the player is not accepted within the production reception period, the pattern variation is higher than when the automatic production function functions. It is possible to execute a process in which the performance within the symbol variation is developed so that the expectation (ratio) of the appearance of the big hit symbol is lowered. At this time, the degree of expectation (percentage) of the appearance of the jackpot pattern may be 0%.

According to such a configuration, when an effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function is activated when the operation of the operation button 410 is intentionally not performed within the effect acceptance period. By confirming whether or not it functions, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the big hit pattern will appear in the pattern variation in the execution state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, ``the post-operation effect itself, which could have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation on the operation button 410) had been received within the effect reception period, could not be confirmed.'' In the midst of the risk of possible production demerits, novel performance characteristics such as making the player exercise a performance selection such as ``do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the performance acceptance period''. It is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the operation of the operation button 410 out of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can receive an effect. The above-described effects (specific operation-related effects (Figs. 330 to 350 )) is executable. In this regard, in the automatic button effect state, in the effect reception period that occurs in response to such a specific operation-related effect, these effects It is possible to execute the process of developing the production within the symbol variation so that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic production function to function when there is no operation (reception of production) within the acceptance period is increased. At this time, the ratio of the functioning of the automatic effect function may be 100%.

According to such a configuration, the fact that a specific operation-related effect is executed before the effect reception period occurs also functions as a effect that suggests that the above-described automatic effect function functions at a high rate. As a result, it is possible to more preferably improve the amusement of the game when a specific operation-related effect is executed.

Also, as described above, in the specific operation-related effect, the operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001 is given more than when the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity as a result of the effect. It is set so that the degree of expectation for the appearance of a big hit symbol in the symbol variation in the running state is higher when it is indicated that it will be granted. However, in the automatic button effect state, when there is no operation (reception of effect) within the effect reception period that occurs corresponding to a specific operation-related effect, the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function. It is more desirable to set the same ratio between the case where it is indicated that the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given and the case where it is indicated that the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given.

According to such a configuration, even if an effect situation with a relatively low degree of expectation (suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, However, since the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions does not change due to this (the production result of a specific operation-related production), the expectation for the above-mentioned automatic production function to function It becomes possible to maintain it in a favorable manner. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects and expectation level suggestion by the automatic effect function) that are not affected by each other's effects are performed in parallel, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

A specific example of an effect suggesting the degree of expectation by such an automatic effect function will be described below with reference to FIGS. 351 to 353. FIG.

FIG. 351(a) shows that in the automatic button production state, the number of reservations is in the state of 3, and the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ (special pattern) is displayed on the production display device 1600 in a specific production pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the performance being performed. As shown in the figure, during the period when the automatic button effect state is being controlled, the display area of the effect display device 1600 indicates that the automatic button effect state is being controlled (here, "auto button Setting in progress”) appears continuously.

FIG. 351(b) shows an effect situation in which a specific effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 351(a). As shown in the drawing, during a specific effect reception period, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, "Press ” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific effect acceptance period). At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a luminous state, and this also prompts the user to operate the operation button 410 .

Here, assuming that the operation of the operation button 410 is received within the specific effect acceptance period shown in FIG. etc.), and multiple modes with different expectations within the display area (for example, "chance!" with relatively low expectations, "great heat!" with relatively high expectations, etc.) Either one will be displayed. At this time, the setting of the automatic button performance state is canceled to return to the normal performance state, and the specific performance acceptance period is also terminated when the performance is accepted without consuming the remaining time.

On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 351(b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the specified effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the ratio is 60%. , the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a rate of 40%.

In other words, when the above-described automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. As such, the post-operation effect that would have occurred if only the effect reception had been performed is not executed. After that, after a predetermined period of time from the occurrence of the specific effect receiving period, the effect progresses in such a manner that the ready-to-win state is formed.

On the other hand, when the automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%, as shown in FIG. , the post-operation effect having the same contents as when the operation is performed within the specific effect acceptance period and the effect is accepted is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect that occurs when the effect is received within a specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtains, etc.) is effected, and the degree of expectation differs within the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!", "hot heat!", etc.) is displayed, but a post-operation production occurs according to the operation within a specific production reception period In both the case where the automatic effect function is activated and the post-operation effect is generated, the manner of display in the display area is the same. After that, as shown in FIG. 351(e), the effect progresses in such a manner that the ready-to-win state is formed after a predetermined period of time from the occurrence of the specific effect reception period.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific effect receiving period is generated as "a effect receiving period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions", or "the above-described automatic effect function As for whether or not to generate the "effect reception period in which the function does not function", when executing the pattern variation, it is determined (selected) based on the result of the big hit determination, and as a result, 60% during the specific effect reception period , the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a ratio of 40%. For example, when the jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for the winning time is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions. "Period" or "Period for acceptance of effect in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work" is generated, and when the big win is lost as a result of the judgment of the big win, the selection table for the time of losing is referred to, and the selection table for the time of losing is referred to. Based on the allocation ratio in the selection table, "the effect acceptance period in which the above-described automatic effect function works" or "the effect acceptance period in which the above-described automatic effect function does not function" is generated. As a result, 60% of the time, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function, and 40% of the time, the above-described automatic effect function functions during the specific effect receiving period.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific effect reception period is generated as "the effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions", the "above-mentioned Which of these periods should be generated so that the ratio of the appearance of the jackpot pattern will be higher when the pattern fluctuation is stopped than in the case of "the effect acceptance period in which the automatic effect function does not function" is determined (selected) based on the result of the big hit determination.

According to such a configuration, the automatic effect function functions when the effect reception period occurs during which it is determined that a highly anticipated mode ("Super heat!" etc.) will appear as a post-operation effect when the effect is received. However, when the performance acceptance period occurs, it is determined that a low-expectation mode (“Chance!” etc.) will appear as a post-operation performance when the performance is accepted. The rate at which the function works becomes relatively low. Therefore, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, whether or not the automatic effect function functions when the operation for the operation button 410 is intentionally prevented during the effect reception period is determined. By confirming it, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the big winning pattern will appear in the pattern variation in the execution state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, it is impossible to confirm the post-operation effect itself, which could have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation on the operation button 410) had been received within the effect reception period. In the midst of the risk of possible production demerits, novel performance characteristics such as making the player exercise a performance selection such as ``do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the performance acceptance period''. It is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained.

However, as shown in FIG. 351(d), even if the automatic effect function functions when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the effect reception period, the effect after the operation is expected. Since low-level aspects (such as “Chance!”) can also appear, even if the function of the automatic production function suggests a relatively high level of expectation, this Such a continuous suggestion of expectations (suggestion due to the functioning of the automatic presentation function, suggestion due to the mode of presentation after operation) realizes a production performance that does not let you down, and it is possible to maintain the game interest in a suitable manner. come to be expected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 351(c), even if the automatic effect function does not function when the operation of the operation button 410 is intentionally prevented during the effect reception period, the effect is not even received. Since there is still a possibility that a high-expectation aspect appeared in the post-operation effect that would have appeared if the game had been set, it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained. However, when the production situation shown in FIG. 351(c) (situation where the automatic production function does not function and the production does not appear after the operation) appears, the production situation shown in FIG. 351(d) (automatic production function functioned, but it is desirable that the degree of expectation is lower than when the state of low expectation appeared as a post-operation effect.

Figures 352 and 353 show that when an effect accepting period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see Figures 330 to 350) occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function suggests the degree of expectation. A specific example is shown.

FIG. 352(a) shows that in the automatic button production state, the number of reservations is in the state of 3, and the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ (special pattern) is displayed on the production display device 1600 in a specific production pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the performance being performed. In this example as well, as shown in the figure, during the period when the automatic button effect state is being controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is being controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600 , “Auto button setting”) is continuously displayed.

FIG. 352(b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect illustrated in FIGS. . That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. , and while the common display effect is being performed, which one of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is given the opportunity to operate is kept secret. . However, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of a specific operation-related effect, does an effect situation appear indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as a result of the first effect with a relatively low degree of expectation? As a result of the second effect with a relatively high degree of expectation, a state of effect indicating that the sword ornament 5001 should be operated appears. Which of the sword ornaments 5001 with a high value is given an operation opportunity is shown.

FIG. 352(c) shows that the operation button 410 should be operated as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. appears, indicating that an effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 has occurred. In this effect situation, as shown in the drawing, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, "press" is displayed). A character display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific effect acceptance period) appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a luminous state, and this also prompts the user to operate the operation button 410 .

Here, assuming that the operation of the operation button 410 is received within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. In addition to performing the performance operation, one of a plurality of modes with different expectations within the display area (for example, "chance!" with relatively low expectations, "great heat!" with relatively high expectations, etc.) will be displayed. At this time, the setting of the automatic button performance state is canceled to return to the normal performance state, and the specific performance acceptance period is also terminated when the performance is accepted without consuming the remaining time.

On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 352(c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the above-mentioned The automatic effect function does not work, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a rate of 80%.

That is, in a specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player side is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is to be activated, and as a result, an appropriate operation is performed within the effect acceptance period. A situation may occur in which the operation cannot be performed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, if the effect reception period corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect occurs (see FIG. 352 (c)), the effect that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect Compared to the reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)), the production within the pattern fluctuation so that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic production function to function when there is no operation (reception of production) within the production reception period is increased. is capable of executing a process that is advanced. According to such a configuration, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration can be suppressed while suppressing the anxiety that "a proper operation may not be performed within the effect reception period and the effect corresponding to the operation may not appear." It becomes possible to provide the interest of which of the bodies 5001 is activated through the specific operation-related presentation. In order to obtain such a function and effect, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration that indicates the degree of expectation depending on whether or not the automatic presentation function has functioned.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period during which the automatic button effect state is controlled, the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect) is executed. Until the end, as shown in the figure, the display (here, "auto button high probability") indicating that the automatic effect function is functioning at a high rate will continue. It is designed to appear

It should be noted that, if the above-described automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. The post-operation effect that would have occurred if only the effect reception had been performed is not executed. After that, after a predetermined period of time from the occurrence of the specific effect receiving period, the effect progresses in such a manner that the ready-to-win state is formed. However, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 352(c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the automatic effect function does not function. 351(b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the automatic effect function described above functions. Expectations should be set higher than they would otherwise have been.

Further, when the above-described automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%, the effect is generated as shown in FIG. The post-operation performance having the same contents as when the performance is accepted by performing the operation within the acceptance period is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect that occurs when the effect is received within a specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtains, etc.) is effected, and the degree of expectation differs within the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!", "hot heat!", etc.) is displayed, but a post-operation production occurs according to the operation within a specific production reception period In both the case where the automatic effect function is activated and the post-operation effect is generated, the manner of display in the display area is the same. After that, as shown in FIG. 352(f), the effect progresses in such a manner that the ready-to-win state is formed after a predetermined period of time from the occurrence of the specific effect acceptance period.

On the other hand, in FIG. 353(g), as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. It shows that an effect situation indicating that the sword decoration 5001 is in effect has occurred, and the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 has occurred. In this rendering situation, as shown in the drawing, a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display (here, " Put away your sword" and a bar display showing the remaining time for a specific production acceptance period) will appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the operating state, and this prompts the user to operate the operating button 410, and the sword ornament 5001 is moved from the operating state to the original position. operation is allowed.

Here, assuming that the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is received within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. The same post-operation effect as when the button is pressed will be executed. However, when the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is received within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 352(g), the operation of the operation button 410 is effected within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. Among the multiple aspects with different expectations (for example, “chance!” with relatively low expectations and “hot heat!” with relatively high expectations) The appearance rate in the display area is high. This percentage may be 100%. Further, when the operation to the sword decorative body 5001 is received during the performance reception period, the automatic button performance state is canceled and returned to the normal performance state, and the remaining time of the specific performance reception period is consumed. It is the same as the case of the effect reception period shown in FIG.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 352(c), even though the production situation is expected to be higher than when the production situation shown in FIG. As in the case of not doing so, 20% of the time the automatic effect function does not work, and 80% of the time the automatic effect function works.

According to such a configuration, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, the effect situation (Fig. 352) indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as a result of the first effect with a relatively low degree of expectation. (c)) appears, the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions does not change due to this (the production result of a specific operation-related production), so the above-mentioned automatic production It becomes possible to preferably maintain the expectation that the function will work. In this way, two different effects that are not affected by each other's effects (specific operation-related effects, and expectations suggested by the automatic effect function) are performed in parallel, resulting in a disadvantageous effect on one side. It becomes possible to suppress the decline in the game interest at times. However, in this case, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 352(c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the automatic effect function described above functions. 353(g), in the production situation shown in FIG. Expectations are lower than if it worked.

It should be noted that if the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. , the post-operation effect that would have occurred if only the effect reception had been performed is not executed. After that, after a predetermined period of time from the occurrence of the specific effect receiving period, the effect progresses in such a manner that the ready-to-win state is formed. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 353(g), when the sword decorative body 5001 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the automatic production function described above functions. 351(b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the automatic effect function described above is activated. Expectations should be higher than if it didn't work.

Also, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. The post-operation performance having the same contents as when the performance is accepted by performing the operation within the performance acceptance period is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect that occurs when the effect is received within a specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtains, etc.) is effected, and the degree of expectation differs within the display area. If one of multiple modes (for example, "chance!", "hot heat!", etc.) is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs in response to the operation within the effect reception period In both the cases where the post-operation effect occurs due to the functioning of the automatic effect function, the manner of display within the display area is the same. After that, as shown in FIG. 353(j), the production progresses in such a manner that the ready-to-win state is formed after a predetermined time from the generation of the production acceptance period corresponding to the specific operation-related production.

It should be noted that the effect reception period (see FIGS. 352(c) and 353(g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect is generated as "the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions" or "the above-mentioned 351 (b)), similar to the effect acceptance period that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect (see FIG. 351 (b)). At the time of execution, determination (selection) is made based on the result of judging the big hit, and as a result, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 20% during the effect acceptance period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect. However, 80% of the time, the automatic effect function described above functions. For example, when the jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for the winning time is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions. "Period" or "Period for acceptance of effect in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work" is generated, and when the big win is lost as a result of the judgment of the big win, the selection table for the time of losing is referred to, and the selection table for the time of losing is referred to. Based on the allocation ratio in the selection table, "the effect acceptance period in which the above-described automatic effect function works" or "the effect acceptance period in which the above-described automatic effect function does not function" is generated. As a result, during the effect acceptance period (see FIGS. 352(c) and 353(g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect, the automatic effect function does not function 20% of the time, and 80% The above-mentioned automatic effect function is designed to function at a ratio of .

Similarly, the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 352(c) and 353(g)) is also generated as "the effect reception period in which the automatic effect function described above functions." If this happens, the ratio of the appearance of the big hit pattern when the pattern fluctuation is stopped will be higher than in the case of "the production acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function". , which of these periods is to be generated is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

Note that the post-operation effect occurs during the effect acceptance period (see FIGS. 352(c) and 353(g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect, and when the specific operation-related effect is not executed. A different effect may be executed during the effect acceptance period (see FIG. 351(b)). However, even if different effects are executed, it is desirable that any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations can appear in the post-operation effect. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Also, the sword decoration 5001 used in the rendering examples shown in FIGS. 351 to 353 may be the sword decoration 5001 of the type shown in FIG. Also, in FIGS. 352 and 353, an example in which the “effect using the automatic effect function” is applied to the specific operation-related effects shown in FIGS. Effect using function” may be applied to any specific operation-related effect shown in FIGS.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 352 and 353, when a specific operation-related production is executed in a state in which control is not performed to the automatic button production state, the production acceptance period corresponding to the specific operation-related production is displayed. In addition, the "setting operation to the automatic button effect state is not accepted" state is performed before the effect reception period occurs. , at least when it is in the production situation shown in FIG. According to such a configuration, even if an attempt is made to set the automatic button effect state after confirming that a specific operation-related effect has started, this will not be accepted. It is now possible to provide ``effects using the automatic effect function'' only for those who continue to play while maintaining the automatic button effect state. You will be able to provide dramatic value to what you do.

In addition, an effect reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect, and an effect reception period (FIG. 352 (c), FIG. 353 (g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect )), the first display mode (for example, the blue button image BTG and the blue sword decoration image SYG) and the second display mode (for example, the green button image BTG and the green sword decoration image SYG) can appear, and when the second display mode appears, compared to when the first display mode appears, ``the effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions'' is occurring. It is desirable to have a high percentage of

In addition, an effect reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect, and an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 352 (c), FIG. 353 (g) )), a third display mode (for example, a red button image BTG or a red sword decoration image SYG) can appear, and when the third display mode appears, the "automatic presentation described above A state in which the "performance receiving period in which the function functions" is always occurring may be set.

According to these configurations, in the automatic button effect state, it is no longer possible to confirm the post-operation effect itself that could have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation on the operation button 410) had been received within the effect reception period. To provide materials for judgment as to whether or not to exercise a performance selection such as ``Do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the performance acceptance period'' in the midst of the risk that a performance demerit may occur. can be done, and it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the "effect using the automatic effect function" is applied, the effect reception period corresponding to each "specific operation-related effect" illustrated in Figs. 330 to 350, Figs. is preferably generated as a period having a longer time than the effect receiving period (FIG. 351(b), etc.) that occurs without execution of a specific operation-related effect. That is, in a specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player side is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is to be activated, and as a result, an appropriate operation is performed within the effect acceptance period. Although there is a possibility that an operation cannot be performed, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed by giving a long time to the performance acceptance period corresponding to the "specific operation-related performance". is expected.

In particular, in the examples of FIGS. 352 and 353, in the effect acceptance period corresponding to the “specific operation-related effect”, the automatic effect function is set to function at a relatively high rate. For example, whether or not the automatic effect function functions by setting the effect reception period to have a longer time than the effect reception period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related effect" It can be said that it is desirable in order to improve the amusement of the game by sustaining the performance of the game for a longer time. In this case, regarding the timing at which the automatic effect function functions, in the effect reception period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related effect", it will come when the first time has passed since the period occurred. On the other hand, in the effect acceptance period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect", the automatic effect function is to arrive when the second time longer than the first time has passed since the period occurred. It is important to maintain the effect of whether or not the function works for a long time.

In addition, between the effect reception period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related effect" and the effect reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect", the time from the start to the end of these periods are made different, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is displayed in the same manner (bar display of the same length), and the gauge remaining amount is reduced. It is desirable to only have different speeds. That is, in this case, even if an effect reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect" occurs, the period continues for the same amount of time as the effect reception period that occurs without the "specific operation-related effect" being executed. Since it can make you think that it is like this, combined with the “irritation” caused by continuing for a longer period of time than expected, the performance of whether or not the automatic performance function functions is preferably maintained. You will be able to

According to the example shown in FIGS. 351 to 353, the first production reception period (specific operation means (operation button 410) production reception period) when it is controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state) occurs, and even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated within the first effect acceptance period, the processing by the first automatic effect means (automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is not necessarily Although it is not always executed, in the effect reception period that occurs when a predetermined time has passed since the specific display effect (specific operation-related effect) is executed, the specific display effect is not executed. When the operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not performed within the first effect reception period than the 1 production reception period (the production reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)), the first The rate at which the process by the automatic effect means (the automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is executed is increased.

In this regard, as for such an automatic button effect state, the rate at which the automatic effect function functions ("60%-40%", "20%-80%") differs depending on the type of effect acceptance period as described above. When the automatic button effect state to be set is the "first automatic button effect state", the ratio at which the automatic effect function functions differs depending on the type of the effect acceptance period ("50%-50%", "10 %-90%”), and set the automatic effect function to always function when the effect acceptance period occurs regardless of the type of the period. A third automatic button presentation state may be further prepared, and any one of these presentation states including a normal presentation state in which the automatic presentation function does not function may be set. In addition, the game is always played in the automatic button production state (first automatic button production state, second automatic button production state, third automatic button production state) without preparing a normal production state in which the automatic production function does not function. or an effect may be executed.

Also, the examples of effects shown in FIGS. 351 to 353 may be modified as follows. That is, when the automatic effect function functions in the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 351(b), the timing (the first ), the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions to terminate the first effect receiving period and generate a corresponding post-operation effect. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 351(b), the timing (the first 1 timing within the production reception period), the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function, and after that, the first production reception period is ended without the post-operation production being executed (the post-operation production is not executed after that). ). On the other hand, if the automatic effect function functions in the second effect reception period shown in FIG. 352 (c) or the third effect reception period shown in FIG. 353 (g), the second effect reception period or At the timing when a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time elapses after the occurrence of the third effect reception period, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, and the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period is performed. To end a performance acceptance period and to generate a corresponding post-operation performance. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the second effect reception period shown in FIG. 352 (c) or the third effect reception period shown in FIG. 353 (g), the second effect reception period or At the timing when the second predetermined time has passed since the occurrence of the third effect reception period, the above-described automatic effect function does not function, and after that, the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period is continued without the post-operation effect being executed. (After that, the post-operation effect is not executed).

According to such a configuration, the automatic effect function can function at a relatively early stage in the first effect acceptance period in which the ratio of the functioning of the automatic effect function is low, and the automatic effect function is activated. Even if it does not function, the player will be given enough time to receive the effect by his/her own operation until the end of the first effect reception period. You will be able to play games with your heart. On the other hand, in the second effect receiving period or the third effect receiving period, in which the ratio of the functioning of the automatic effect function is high, the automatic effect function can function only at a relatively late stage, and the automatic effect function is not effective. To provide a game with a sense of tension even though the functioning ratio of the automatic performance function is high because the player does not have much time to operate the function when the function does not work. will be able to

In addition, regarding the above modification, in the first effect reception period, at the timing when the first predetermined time has passed (timing within the first effect reception period), the above-mentioned automatic effect function may or may not function. However, in the second production reception period and the third production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production function always functions at the timing when the second predetermined time has passed (timing within the second production reception period). You may do so. Even with such a configuration, the automatic effect function can only function at a relatively late stage, and if the automatic effect function does not function (due to some trouble), it takes time for the player to operate. Since it is thought that the player fantasizes that there is not much room left, it can be expected that the same effect will be achieved.

In addition to the examples of effects described above with reference to FIGS. 351 to 353, in other examples of effects as well, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not necessarily performed by the player's operation. For example, it may be controlled based on the result of the big hit determination, or it may be always controlled as an automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Alternatively, the game machine may be provided as a gaming machine in which the setting itself to the automatic button presentation state is not performed and the automatic presentation function can always function at a predetermined rate.

[Operation unification control when in automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when applying the above-mentioned another example) Even if is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change in effect as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can progress depending on the player's own operation (want to end the automatic button effect state) desire) may occur. Such a desire often arises when an effect reception period occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the player, but there is a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end of the effect reception period. It is difficult to perform both the operation to end the automatic button effect state and the operation to accept the operation, and as a result, the opportunity to operate may be lost. If so, the interest in gaming may decline.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the effect reception period related to the specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the effect reception A process for terminating the automatic button effect state by performing only one operation on the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) to which the operation opportunity is granted within the period, and after the operation in response to the effect acceptance. Effect (processing that can change the effect) and (operation unification control in the automatic button effect state) are performed. Thus, even when the desire to end the automatic button performance state and progress the performance depending on the player's own operation occurs within the performance reception period, the loss of the operation opportunity is avoided and the performance mode is switched. can be performed smoothly.

As described above, when setting the automatic button effect state when the pattern variation is in the execution state, the setting operation is allowed only for the operation button 410 among the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001. .

On the other hand, as described above, in the case of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state when the pattern variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are operated in the state where the effect acceptance period has not occurred. Only the button 410 is allowed to be operated for canceling the setting. On the other hand, in a state in which an effect reception period is occurring, if an operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) to be given an operation opportunity is operated within the effect reception period. , a process for ending the automatic button effect state and a post-operation effect (process that can cause a change in the effect) in response to the acceptance of the effect are performed respectively (operation unification control). Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is operated while the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 is occurring, the operation is not accepted and the process for ending the automatic button effect state is not executed.

However, some players use selfish game methods such as ``while maintaining the automatic button production state (without switching the production mode), you can operate yourself only when you want to advance the production.'' It can be assumed that some wish to Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the door frame 3 is further provided with a special operation means (automatic mode continuation button) that is different from both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. When the operation button 410 (or the sword ornament 5001) is operated within the effect reception period for the specific effect when it is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button effect A process to terminate the state (specific effect state) and a process to cause a change in the effect are performed respectively (operation unification control in the automatic button effect state), but control is performed to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). If the above special operation means is operated within the effect reception period for the specific effect when it is being done, the process for ending the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not performed, and the effect changes according to the operation. It is designed to perform processing that can cause

According to such a configuration, when it is desired to end the automatic button effect state and actively play the operation game thereafter, the user operates the operation button 410 (or the sword ornament 5001) within the effect acceptance period. If you only want to rarely operate while maintaining the automatic button production state (without switching the production mode), you can operate the special operation means within the production acceptance period. The game desired by the player can be realized only by selectively using the operating means as described above.

Operation unification control in such an automatic button presentation state will be described below with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 354(a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of reservations is in the state of 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows how an effect receiving period for receiving a pressing operation of the operation button 410 has occurred in a ready-to-win state in the effect situation being performed. As shown in the figure, during the period when the automatic button effect state is being controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is being controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, "auto button Setting in progress”) appears continuously.

Further, as shown in the drawing, even during this effect reception period, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, the lower An arrow display in the direction and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect acceptance period) appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a luminous state, and this also prompts the user to operate the operation button 410 . However, in reality, not only the operation button 410 in the luminous state, but also the special operation means (the button labeled as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 that has not undergone any change is allowed to be operated.

354(b) to (d) show that the operation button 410 was not operated during the production reception period generated in FIG. It shows that the post-operation effect having the same contents as when the operation is performed inside and the effect is accepted is being executed. It should be noted that, when the automatic effect function described above is activated, the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. Any opportunity to operate the pressed button 1410 is lost.

That is, in the post-operation effect according to this example of effect, a stepwise progress of the effect appears, and any effect result of a plurality of modes with different expectations (FIGS. 354(c) and 354(d)) can be displayed. Even if it is determined at the start of the symbol variation that it will finally appear (determined based on the result of the big hit determination), first, as shown in FIG. smoke image) is displayed. After that, if the effect progresses to a effect result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. While the smoke image by smoke) gradually disappears, it is decided to display a production image (here, a “lucky” omikuji) that suggests that the result is a production with relatively low expectations. 354(d), the specific effect image shown in FIG. 354(b) (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) gradually disappears. In the process, a performance image (in this case, an omikuji of “Nakayoshi”) is displayed, which suggests that the performance results are relatively highly expected.

354(a) to 354(d) appears as a basic effect progress when the effect acceptance period occurs in the automatic button effect state, and the automatic effect function described above. Even after the post-operation effect (FIGS. 354(b) to 354(d)) is executed by , the automatic button effect state is maintained without being terminated unless the player performs an operation. .

However, as described above, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode that allows the effect to progress depending on the player's own operation (automatic button effect state desire to terminate) may arise. Such a desire often arises when an effect reception period occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the player, but there is a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end of the effect reception period. It is difficult to perform both the operation to end the automatic button effect state and the operation to accept the operation, and as a result, the opportunity to operate may be lost. If so, the interest in gaming may decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. (Detection that the operation button 410 is positioned at the operation position), the process of ending the automatic button effect state and the post-operation effect in response to the reception of the effect are performed (automatically operation unification control in the button production state). It should be noted that the effect receiving period generated in FIG. 354(a) ends when the effect is received by operating the operation button 410, and the automatic effect function described above is disabled, and the special operation means ( The opportunity to operate the button 1410 described as "PUSH" in the figure is also lost.

Even if the operation button 410 is operated within the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 354(a), the operation is performed within the effect acceptance period and the effect is accepted as shown in FIG. 355(e). As a post-operation effect corresponding to the event, first, a specific effect image (here, an image of smoke caused by an explosion) is displayed. After that, if the effect progresses to a effect result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. While the smoke image by smoke) gradually disappears, it is decided to display a production image (here, a “lucky” omikuji) that suggests that the result is a production with relatively low expectations. 355(g), the specific effect image (here, smoke image due to explosion) shown in FIG. 355(e) gradually disappears. In the process, a performance image (in this case, an omikuji of “Nakayoshi”) is displayed, which suggests that the performance results are relatively highly expected.

However, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect accepting period generated in FIG. 354(a), processing for ending the automatic button effect state based on the operation is also performed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 355(e) to (g), after the operation of the operation button 410 has been received, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is controlled to the automatic button effect state. The display shown (here, "auto button setting in progress") is hidden. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. A suggestive display (here, "auto button release") appears (see FIG. 355(e)).

Also, as described above, during the effect acceptance period that occurred in FIG. button) 1410 is allowed. And this special operation means (the button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is "operating by itself only when desired while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode). As mentioned above, it is prepared to make selfish game techniques such as "advance the performance by using

Therefore, even if the special operation means (the button marked as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated within the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 354(a), as shown in FIG. First, a specific performance image (here, an image of smoke caused by explosion) is displayed as a post-operation performance in response to the reception of performance by performing an operation within the performance reception period. After that, if the effect progresses to a effect result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. While the smoke image by smoke) gradually disappears, it is decided to display a production image (here, a “lucky” omikuji) that suggests that the result is a production with relatively low expectations. 356(j), the specific effect image shown in FIG. 356(h) (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) gradually disappears. In the process, a performance image (in this case, an omikuji of “Nakayoshi”) is displayed, which suggests that the performance results are relatively highly expected. It should be noted that when the special operation means (the button labeled as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is accepted for the effect, the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. The function is disabled and the opportunity to operate the operation button 410 is also lost.

However, if a special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated within the effect reception period that occurred in FIG. is not performed at the same time. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 356(h) to (j), even after the operation of the operation button 410 has been received, the automatic button effect state is controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display shown (here, "auto button setting in progress") is continuously displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the special operation means (the button labeled as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is When an operation is performed, when the above-described automatic effect function functions (Fig. 354(b)), or when an operation on the operation button 410 is performed (Fig. 355(e)), special effects that cannot appear It allows the performance to appear. Such a special effect may be an effect using a movable body, a lamp, etc. In the example of effect shown in FIG. In addition to the effect image (post-operation effect) that appears when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 355(e)), a glittering effect display is additionally displayed. I'm trying to Instead of the glittering effect display, an effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like may be additionally implemented.

According to such a configuration, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect acceptance period regarding the omikuji effect when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the change contents of the effect are generated. Then, when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is being controlled, the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated within the effect reception period for the Omikuji effect. The content of the change in the effect produced in the case is made different from each other. In this case, when the above-mentioned special effect (in this case, a glittering effect display) appears, it is possible to say, "The operation means has been operated and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception has appeared, but the automatic button effect state is While enjoying the post-operation production, it becomes possible to recognize that the setting is not canceled and this is continued. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 356(i), even in the case of displaying an effect image (here, a “lucky” omikuji) that suggests a result of a effect with a relatively low degree of expectation, a special An effect (here, a glittering effect display) can appear.

In addition, such a special effect (here, a glittering effect display) is made to appear additionally to the above-described post-operation effect at a predetermined rate based on the result of the big hit determination, and the special effect is displayed. When the performance additionally appears, it is desirable to make the ratio of the appearance of the big win pattern due to the pattern variation higher than when the special performance does not appear. However, in this case, it would be beneficial for the player to operate the special operation means (the button labeled as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 instead of the operation button 410. There is concern that operations on Therefore, when the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated during the effect acceptance period that occurred in FIG. If the effect display) does not appear, any effect will appear by operating the operation button 410 within the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. It is desirable to make the ratio of the appearance of the big hit pattern lower than in the case of the pattern variation.

According to such a configuration, by operating the "special operation means (the button labeled 'PUSH' in the figure)" 1410, "an operation was performed on the operation means and a post-operation effect appeared in response to the reception of the effect. In order to create a state where the automatic button production state is not canceled and this is continued, there is a production disadvantage such as 'it can be suggested that the ratio of the appearance of the jackpot pattern due to the pattern fluctuation is extremely low'. Since the player is exposed to possible risks, it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained by having the player exercise such a choice of presentation.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 356(i), although the same presentation mode as the example shown in FIG. 354(c) and 355(f), it is possible to recognize that the ratio of the appearance of the big hit pattern due to the pattern variation is low. However, in the example shown in FIG. 356(i), while making it possible to recognize that the expectation level is low, the effects are shown in FIGS. 354(c) and 355(f). By making it the same as the case, a third person who does not operate the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 will be in a production situation in which the production selection has failed. is difficult to grasp, and it is expected that this will suppress the decline in gaming interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if any effect selection is made within the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. e), as shown in FIG. 356(h), etc., a specific effect image (here, an image of smoke caused by an explosion) is displayed. It may be displayed in one of a plurality of modes in which the rate at which the highly anticipated performance mode (here, the omikuji of "Nakayoshi") appears or the rate at which the special effect appears differs.

In addition, even if any of the performance selections are made within the performance acceptance period that occurred in FIG. (here, either "good luck" or "medium good luck") may be made to appear directly as a post-operation effect. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to grasp that the production situation (Fig. 356(i)) in which the production selection fails (Fig. 356(i)) appears, the production mode with different expectations ( Here, it is desirable to first display a specific effect image (here, an image of smoke caused by an explosion) when one of the fortune slips of "Good luck" or "Nakayoshi") appears as a post-operation effect.

In addition, it is possible to perform an effect suggesting the degree of expectation even within the effect acceptance period that occurred in FIG. may

Also, the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the drawing) 1410 is not necessarily prepared as a dedicated operation means for continuing the automatic button effect state. Alternatively, another operation means that has already been prepared may be used.

354(a), is there a period during which the operation of the operation button 410 out of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can receive the effect? Alternatively, the above-described effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350)) is executed as to whether there is a period during which the effect can be accepted for the operation of another operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001). may occur as a result of

In addition, during the effect acceptance period in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, a first effect is also given to the special operation means (the button labeled as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410. Even if the reception period (see FIG. 354(a)) and the second effect reception period during which the operation opportunity for the special operation means (the button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is not given are included. good. In this case, when the first effect reception period (see FIG. 354(a)) occurs, the above-described specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 330 to 350) ) is desirably made to appear at a higher rate until the symbol variation is stopped. According to such a configuration, the rate at which the above-described specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 330 to 350) appear depends on whether the first effect receiving period or the second effect receiving period occurs. It comes to function as a suggested production.

[Stable side automatic effect processing]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when applying the above-mentioned another example) Even if is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change in effect as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, special effects such as "a plurality of operation means can receive effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operation means are operated" are performed. It is possible to generate the production acceptance period. Therefore, such a special effect receiving period occurs when the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and during the special effect receiving period, for any operation means If there is no operation, for which of the multiple operation means will the automatic effect function be activated? becomes a problem.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, special effects such as "a plurality of operation means can receive effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated" are provided. If the production reception period occurs, it is not ``whether or not there is a possibility that a more expected production result will appear'', but rather ``whether there is a possibility that a lower expected production result will appear''. Based on the standard, the process of activating the automatic production function for the operation means different from "the operation means on the side that can generate the production that has the possibility of producing a production result with a lower degree of expectation" (stable side automatic production processing) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, the effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation among the plurality of effect modes that can occur when the effect reception is performed for any of the plurality of operation means within the special effect reception period is Since it will not appear when the automatic effect function is activated, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation such as "when you forget to operate, the automatic effect function will cause the least expected effect mode to appear." It will be possible to avoid it.

Hereinafter, the stable side automatic effect processing in such an automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 357-359.

First, a description will be given of an example of an effect when a special effect reception period occurs while the game is not controlled to the automatic button effect state and is in the normal effect state. In FIG. 357(a), in the normal effect state, the number of reservations is in the state of 3, and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. In the effect situation being performed, the player side can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001 under the condition that the ready-to-win state is formed. It shows a production situation in which a production display suggesting the start of a special production reception period is shown. In this production situation, neither the reception of the production for the operation button 410 nor the reception of the production for the sword ornament 5001 has been activated yet. The operation button 410 is illuminated and the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the unsheathed position in order to prompt the user to decide which of the decoration 5001 should be operated. Further, the effect display device 1600 displays a button image BTG and a sword decoration image SYG.

FIG. 357(b) shows a special effect acceptance period suggested by the effect display shown in FIG. It shows the production situation in which the production reception period that can be selected by the side) has occurred. In this production situation, at least a part of the production display on the production display device 1600 that has appeared since the production situation shown in FIG. 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are kept as they are, an instruction display prompting the operation of either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 (here, the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG A downward arrow that is displayed correspondingly, a bar display that indicates the remaining time of the special effect acceptance period, etc.) appears.

Here, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 357(b), a character image such as "stable" is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a character image such as "random" is displayed corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. It is However, instead of this, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may not be displayed, and a dedicated mark may be displayed when both of the two operation means are capable of accepting effects.

That is, in this example of effect, when the effect reception for the operation button 410 is made within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. After what has been done is displayed (Fig. 357(c)), the effect result is "destroy 50 bodies", which suggests that the fewer the number of enemies defeated, the lower the expectation, and the greater the number of enemies defeated, the higher the expectation. and "destroy 100" based on the result of the big hit determination (Fig. 357(d), Fig. 357(e)) is executed. For example, in the effect after the button side operation when the jackpot is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 357(d) appears at a rate of ``60%'' in the performance after the button side operation when the jackpot has been lost, and at a rate of ``40%''. 357(e) can be made to appear.

On the other hand, if the effect reception for the sword decoration 5001 is made within the special effect acceptance period, the effect after the sword side operation is first displayed after the effect reception for the sword decoration 5001 has been made ( FIG. 358(f)) shows that the lower the number of kills, the lower the expectation, and the higher the number of kills, the higher the expectation. An effect (FIGS. 358(g) to 358(i)) is executed in which one of "Defeat 777" appears based on the result of the big hit determination. For example, in the effect after the sword side operation when the jackpot is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 358(i) is made to appear at a rate of "40%", and in the after-sword-side operation performance when the big hit is lost, the rate is "40%". 358(g) appears, the effect shown in FIG. 358(h) appears at the rate of "50%", and the effect shown in FIG. 358(i) appears at the rate of "0%". Aspects can be made to appear.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, regardless of which of the effects after the button side operation and the effects after the sword side operation was performed, the number of defeats is small. has a lower degree of expectation than the mode of production in which the number of defeats is large. In addition, when the number of defeats is the same production mode (for example, the production mode shown in FIG. 357 (e), the production mode shown in FIG. 358 (h), and the production mode shown in FIG. 359 (e) described later) , the degree of expectation may be different, but it is desirable to make it the same.

In such a configuration, a special effect acceptance period is generated for both the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means), and the special effect acceptance period is allowed to accept the effect. Since it is possible to generate different operation effects (effect after button side operation, effect after sword side operation) according to the type of operation means operated on the operated side within the effect acceptance period, one operation means can be operated. The monotonous performance of just playing the game is improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In particular, instead of showing the same degree of expectation by operating either the operation button 410 (first operation means) or the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means), the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means) 2 operation means) is operated, a specific effect mode (here, shown in FIG. 358 (g) " I want to see the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means) side effect (sword side operation after effect) at the risk of taking such a risk. It is expected to maintain the interest in games by giving conflicts and stimuli about whether.

In this case, the effect after the button side operation is "the specific effect mode with the lowest expectation" among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special effect acceptance period. (Here, the effect mode of "destroy one body" shown in FIG. 358(g))" is eliminated. In addition, the after-sword-side-operation effect is defined as "a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (here, Then, in the sense that there is a risk of the appearance of the "destroy one body" production mode)" shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in this production example, during the period from the appearance of the production situation shown in FIG. 357(a) to the appearance of the production situation shown in FIG. 357(a-b) can be made to appear based on the result of the big hit determination. , when an operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001, the appearance rate of "the specific mode with the lowest degree of expectation (here, the mode of "destroy one body" shown in FIG. 358(g))" appears is low. It is possible to implement the production progress in various ways. This percentage may be 0%.

According to such a configuration, even at the risk of the appearance of the "specific presentation mode with the lowest degree of expectation (here, the presentation mode of "destroy one body" shown in FIG. 358(g))", As a material for determining whether to operate the sword ornament 5001 instead of the operation button 410, it is possible to use the effect result of whether or not the effect mode shown in FIGS. 357(a-b) appears. , it is expected that the amusement of the game will be favorably improved when the special effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 357(b) occurs.

It should be noted that, in the normal effect state, even though the special effect acceptance period shown in FIG. The function does not work, and the effect progresses without executing any of the effect after the button side operation and the effect after the sword side operation.

On the other hand, FIGS. 359(a) to 359(e) show examples of effects when such a special effect accepting period occurs while the automatic button effect state is being controlled.

As shown in FIGS. 359(a), 359(a-b), and 359(b), even when the automatic button effect state is being controlled, the automatic button effect state is maintained. Except for the fact that the display indicating that (here, "Auto button is being set") is continuously appearing on the effect display device 1600, the effect display suggesting that the special effect acceptance period will start appears. 357(a), 357(a-b), and 357(b), the contents are the same as those in the above-described normal production state (Fig. 357(a), Fig. 357(a-b), and Fig. 357(b)). progressed.

However, as described above, when neither the operation button 410 nor the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special effect acceptance period shown in FIG. Activate the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 different from the sword decoration body 5001 on the side that can generate the effect that may appear in the effect mode of "destroy one body" shown in 358(g). It is possible to execute the process (stable side automatic effect process) to cause it.

That is, in this case, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated even though neither the operation button 410 nor the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 359(b). By doing so, the same change as in the case where the operation of the operation button 410 is received during the special effect acceptance period is caused in the effect. Therefore, as the effect after the button side operation, first, after the fact that the effect reception for the operation button 410 has been received is displayed (Fig. 359(c)), the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the expectation and the larger the number of defeats. 359(d), 359(e) ) will be executed.

According to such a configuration, the expectation is the lowest among a plurality of possible effects modes that can occur when the effect reception is performed for either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 within the special effect reception period. Since the effect mode (here, the effect mode of "destroy one body" shown in FIG. 358(g)) cannot appear when the automatic effect function functions, It is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of such a situation that the lowest expected performance mode appears due to the automatic performance function.

Here, due to the convenience of the automatic effect function, there is a concern that the player will not operate either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 in order to maintain the automatic button effect state. However, as described above, during the special effect acceptance period, the effect modes shown in FIGS. , ``the lowest expected specific effect mode (here, the effect mode of ``destroy one body'' shown in FIG. Since the opportunity to have fun is given, it is expected that the sword ornament 5001 will be favorably urged to operate.

357 to 359, the period during which the operation of the operation button 410 is received and the period during which the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is received are generated simultaneously and ended at the same time. Although it has been decided to control it as the production acceptance period, it is not necessary to make these periods occur at the same time. For example, if the period during which the operation of the operation button 410 is received and the period during which the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is received partially overlap, these periods are separated. You may make it generate|occur|produce with timing.

In addition, when a specific effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns based on the result of the big hit determination, "a plurality of operation means can receive the effect, and different effects are performed depending on which operation means is operated. The above-mentioned special effect acceptance period such as "is executed" may be always generated. That is, in this case, at a relatively early stage from the time when the pattern variation starts with a specific effect pattern, "Which of the plurality of operation means should be operated within the special effect reception period, and furthermore, the special effect reception period occurs. You will be able to think about the production strategy on the premise that a special production acceptance period will occur, such as whether you should perform the setting operation to the automatic button production state before doing . For example, since it is possible to confirm "how much advance notice performance was performed in what kind of performance mode (expectation)" before the special performance acceptance period occurs, these confirmations It became possible to use the result as a judgment material for ``which one of the plurality of operation means should be operated within the special effect reception period,'' and the game was played until the special effect reception period occurred. Interest can also be favorably maintained.

However, even if a specific effect pattern is selected, when the operation button 410 is operated within the special effect reception period, when the sword decoration body 5001 is operated, furthermore, the automatic effect function As for which production mode to appear when functioning, it is decided by lottery (judgment) based on the result of the big hit judgment at the start of the pattern fluctuation or when the production reception occurs (or when the automatic production function functions). It is desirable to

In addition, even if there is an effect situation in which the special effect acceptance period has not yet occurred, it is possible to allow the player to select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001. In the production situation where the production display (Fig. 357(a), Fig. 359(a)) suggesting the start of the special production acceptance period, setting to the automatic button production state is permitted. It is desirable to control this as a prohibition period so as not to According to such a configuration, it is suggested that a special effect acceptance period is started in which the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001. Even if you try to set the automatic button effect state after confirming that the "effect display" has started, this will not be accepted, so the game can be continued while maintaining the automatic button effect state. It is now possible to provide ``stable side automatic effect processing when in the automatic button effect state'' only for those who are playing, and it is possible to continue playing the game while maintaining the automatic button effect state. be able to provide significant value.

357 to 359, the "specific effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation" (Fig. 358(g)) that can appear when the effect is performed after the sword side operation is performed. Although it was decided to execute it as a unique effect mode different from any of the effect modes that can appear when the post-effect is performed, the "specific effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation" will be executed after the button side operation. It may be executed in the same manner as the production mode that can appear when it is performed (for example, ("destroy 50 bodies" shown in Fig. 357(d)). That is, in this case, the production after the sword side operation Even if the ``lowest expected specific effect mode'' appears as a result of performing Therefore, it is difficult for a third party who does not know whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is operated to recognize that the expectation level is extremely low. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, it is expected that a specific effect mode is displayed based on the reception of the effect. Although the effect situation is only appearing, the pattern changes depending on whether the effect situation is generated by operating the operation button 410 or by operating the sword ornament 5001. Since the degree of expectation for the appearance of the big winning pattern is different depending on (variation of the pattern in the execution state), it is possible to make the performance using a plurality of operating means more interesting.

However, this is the case where the "specific effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation" in the post-sword side operation effect is executed as the same effect mode that can appear even when the button-side post-operation effect is performed. However, with regard to the "most highly anticipated special effect mode" in the post-sword side operation effect, it is a unique effect mode that is different from any of the effect modes that can appear when the button-side post-operation effect is performed (e.g., ("Defeat 777 bodies" shown in Fig. 358(i)).According to such a configuration, in the production after the sword side operation, "the specific production mode with the lowest expectation" appears, it is difficult to perceive that the third party, who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 has been operated, has a remarkably low level of expectation. On the other hand, when "the most expected special effect mode" appears in the effect after the operation on the sword side, even a third person who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 has been operated. It becomes possible to easily recognize that the player is in a production situation in which the degree of expectation is remarkably high. You will be able to enjoy the effect (effect after operating the sword side) on the side of the sword ornament 5001 (the second operating means). Anything that is recognizable may be used. For example, uniqueness with other effects may be ensured by executing movable body motions or lamp lighting.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the production after the sword side operation (FIGS. 358(f) to 358(i)) is performed as a result of the production mode of "defeat 777 bodies" (FIG. 358 ( i)) can appear, and when the production mode of "destroy 777 bodies" (Fig. 358(i)) appears, any other production mode (Fig. 357(d), Fig. 357(e) , FIG. 358(g), FIG. 358(h)), the ratio of the appearance of the big hit symbols in the relevant symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) is higher than when the figure 358(g), FIG. 358(h)) appears. This percentage may be 100%. However, it is not necessary to make the effect mode of "defeat 777 bodies" (Fig. 358(i)) necessarily appear. The appearance ratio of the production mode shown in FIG. 358(h) is made higher than the appearance ratio of the production mode shown in FIG. becomes.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the production after the button side operation (FIGS. 357(c) to 357(e)) and the production after the sword side operation (FIGS. 358(f) to 358(i) ), the common production mode (here, the production mode of "defeat 100 bodies") can appear, but the common production mode is prevented from appearing. good too. Also, while only the display change appears in the button-side post-operation effect, in the sword-side post-operation effect, in addition to the display change, it may also be possible to perform movable body movements, lamp lighting, and the like. Also, the effects after the button side operation and the effects after the sword side operation do not have commonality as the effect contents related to the number of defeats, and the effect contents themselves may be executed as mutually different effects.

357 to 359, when the production is accepted, including when the production is accepted by the functioning of the automatic production function, first, either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 A display (Fig. 357(c), Fig. 358(f), Fig. 359(c)) suggesting whether or not the performance has been accepted was made to appear. You may make it perform the production|presentation which makes the production|presentation result appear.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the production after the sword side operation (FIGS. 358(f) to 358(i)) is performed as a result of the production mode of "Defeat 777 bodies" (FIG. 358 ( When i)) appears, the specific operation-related operations described above are more important than when any other presentation mode (Fig. 357(d), Fig. 357(e), Fig. 358(g), Fig. 358(h)) appears. The rate of appearance of the production (see FIGS. 330 to 350) until the pattern fluctuation is stopped, and when the specific operation-related production appears, the operation means of the side with higher expectations (sword ornament 5001), it is desirable to increase the ratio of giving the operation opportunity. According to such a configuration, in the examples of effects shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, it is possible to favorably prompt the player to operate the sword ornament 5001 on the side with the higher risk of effect.

[Production reception processing according to display type]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when applying the above-mentioned another example) Even if is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change in effect as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
The first display effect can be displayed within the effect reception period during which the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted, and the operation button 410 is operated while the first display effect is being displayed. a process of generating a first expected effect (a post-operation effect suggesting the degree of expectation) based on the fact that the effect has been accepted by the operation; It is possible to display the second display effect within the period, and when the operation button 410 is operated while the second display effect is being displayed, the second display effect is displayed based on the reception of the effect by the operation. It is possible to execute processes related to a plurality of different operation effects such as a process of generating a second expected effect (a post-operation effect suggesting the degree of expectation) different from the first expected effect.

In such a configuration, the expected effect (post-operation effect) that appears at the time of operation is different depending on the display effect (first display effect, second display effect) displayed during the effect acceptance period. As a result, not only the amusement of the game at the time of operation is enhanced, but also the amusement of the game from the occurrence of the performance acceptance period to the operation can be suitably enhanced.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, within the effect reception period during which the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted When the effect situation in which the first display effect is displayed or the effect situation in which the second display effect is displayed appears within the effect reception period in which the effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410 is permitted, the effect reception is performed. A process of generating the same expectation performance (here, first expectation performance or second expectation performance) as when the operation button 410 is operated even if the operation button 410 is not operated within the period. is executable.

According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled and the effect situation in which the first display effect is displayed appears within the effect reception period, the operation button 410 is operated. The first display effect is executed regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated. Regardless, the second display effect is executed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if either the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed within the effect acceptance period, there is concern about forgetting to operate it. You will be able to enjoy the performance without having to worry about it.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the first display effect can be displayed only when the effect acceptance period for generating the post-operation effect occurs. However, the second display effect can be displayed even when the effect reception period for generating the post-operation effect does not occur. and,
- An effect situation in which the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, an effect reception period that permits effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 has occurred, and the first display effect is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated at , a process for generating a first expected effect (post-operation effect) and a process for terminating the automatic button effect state are performed (effect shown in FIG. 360 described later). see progress),
- An effect situation in which the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, an effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 has occurred, and the second display effect is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated at , the process for generating the second expected effect (post-operation effect) is performed, but the process for terminating the automatic button effect state is not performed (as shown in FIG. 361, which will be described later). See production progress),
An effect in which the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 has not occurred, and the second display effect is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated in this situation, neither the processing for generating the first expected effect (post-operation effect) nor the processing for generating the second expected effect (post-operation effect) is performed, and the automatic button is pressed. The process of ending the production state is also not performed (see the production progress shown in FIG. 362 described later),
・The automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 has not occurred, and the first display effect and the second display effect When the operation button 410 is operated in an effect situation in which none of the above is displayed, a process for generating a first expected effect (post-operation effect) and a process for generating a second expected effect (post-operation effect). None of the above is performed, and processing for terminating the automatic button rendering state is executed according to each rendering situation (rendering reception processing according to the display type).

According to such a configuration, when the operation button 410 is operated while the first display effect has appeared and the second display effect has not appeared, the first display effect appears. and the operation button 410 is operated while the second display effect is appearing. The first expected performance and the second expected performance) are made different, and the expected performance (post-operation performance) itself does not appear even if it is operated only when the second display performance appears. If there is a possibility, the process of ending the automatic button effect state will not be performed. Therefore, the variety of effects using the operation buttons 410 can be ensured, and the amusement of the game when the effects using the operation buttons 410 are performed can be favorably improved.

360 to 364, description will be made below regarding the processing for receiving an effect according to the display type when in such an automatic button effect state.

In FIG. 360, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the period of timings tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 360(a)) in the execution period of the pattern variation is changed to "reception of effect for operation button 410 (operation). It shows an example of the effect when the first effect pattern that can be set as "the effect reception period that allows

In this first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the "effect reception period for allowing the reception (operation) of the effect on the operation button 410" arrives, as shown in FIG. , a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, a downward arrow display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect acceptance period) appear. (First display effect).

Then, at the timing tb12 before the timing tb13, if the operation of the operation button 410 is received as an effect, as shown in FIG. A first post-operation effect ("Nakayoshi" omikuji in the figure) indicating the degree of expectation that a big hit pattern will appear in the symbol variation) is executed (first expectation effect). At this time, the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled based on the effect reception, and the normal effect state is restored, and the effect reception is performed without consuming the remaining time of the effect reception period generated from the timing tb11. It will end at that point. Therefore, at the timing tb12 when the effect is received, the "display indicating that the automatic button effect state is being controlled" (in this case, "auto button setting in progress") that has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. )” will also be hidden.

However, in this case, even if the effect is accepted at any time during the period from timing tb11 to tb13, at timing tb13, as shown in FIG. The first expected performance) is not yet finished and is in the middle of execution, so that the game interest is favorably maintained over the period of timings tb11 to tb13 regardless of the timing at which the performance is received. desirable in doing so.

In FIG. 361, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the period of timings tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 361(a)) in the execution period of the pattern variation is changed to "reception of effect for operation button 410 (operation) It shows an example of the effect when the second effect pattern that can be set as "the effect reception period that allows the" is executed.

In this second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 for generating the "effect reception period for allowing the reception (operation) of the effect on the operation button 410" arrives, as shown in FIG. , "Ghost OBK holding a gift box" appears (second display effect).

Here, when the "ghost OBK with a gift box" is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation is necessarily generated when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect acceptance period) does not appear.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIG. 361, a ghost OBK holding a gift box can be displayed during the period from timing tb21 to tb23. When the operation button 410 is operated at timing tb22, the effect is accepted, and as shown in FIG. A second post-operation effect (in the drawing, character display of "hot heat") suggesting the degree of expectation to appear is executed (second expectation effect).

However, at this time, the effect reception period that has occurred from timing tb21 ends at the point when the effect reception is received without consuming the remaining time, whereas the automatic button effect state is not canceled. This is maintained. Therefore, at the timing tb22, the "display indicating that the automatic button effect state is being controlled (here, "auto button is being set")" appearing in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues to be displayed. It will be done.

It should be noted that even if the effect is accepted at any time within the period of timings tb21 to tb23, at timing tb23, as shown in FIG. ) is not yet finished and is in the middle of execution, in order to preferably maintain the game interest over the period of timings tb21 to tb23 regardless of the timing at which the reception of the performance was received. is desirable.

FIG. 362 is for generating the second post-operation effect during the period of timings tb31 to tb33 (see FIG. 362(a)) in the execution period of the symbol variation while being controlled to the automatic button effect state. This shows an example of the effect when the third effect pattern of displaying "Ghost with a gift box OBK" is executed even though the effect acceptance period of (1) has not occurred.

In this third effect pattern, when timing tb31 arrives, as shown in FIG. 362(b), the effect display device 1600 causes a ghost OBK holding a gift box to appear (second display effect).

However, as described above, in the effect situation where the ghost OBK holding the gift box is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, even if the operation button 410 is operated, the post-operation effect suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed. Since it is not necessarily generated, an instruction display (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance acceptance period) prompting the operation of the operation button 410 does not appear.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIG. 362, it is possible to display a ghost OBK holding a gift box during the period from timing tb31 to tb33, but the ghost OBK is displayed as shown in FIG. During the period during which the operation button 410 is activated, the "effect reception period for allowing the reception (operation) of the operation button 410" does not occur. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 361(a) and 361(c), even if the operation button 410 is operated while the ghost OBK holding the gift box is being displayed, after the operation corresponding to the operation, The effects (first post-operation effect, second post-operation effect) do not appear, and the ghost OBK holding the gift box is displayed during the period of timings tb31 to tb33.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the operation button 410 is operated in the automatic button effect state when the effect acceptance period regarding the post-operation effect has not occurred. 362, the automatic button effect state is basically terminated (set is canceled). If the operation button 410 is operated in such a production situation (a production situation in which a ghost OBK holding a gift box is displayed), a process for generating a post-operation production and an automatic button production state are performed. The presentation progresses so that neither the ending process is performed.

Therefore, when the mode (ghost OBK with a present box) shown in FIG. 362(b), which is the same mode as FIG. 361(b), is displayed, the second operation shown in FIG. Even if the operation button 410 is operated in anticipation of the occurrence of the post-performance (second expected performance), the setting of the automatic button performance state is not canceled although the performance change does not occur. You will be able to continue this. At this time, as a method of not canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state,
The detection of whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated is enabled even in a state where the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect has not occurred, and the effect is detected when the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect has not occurred. If there is detection, it is determined whether or not the timing of the detection is "within the period of timing tb31 to tb33 when the ghost OBK holding the gift box is displayed". If it is within the period tb31 to tb33 when the ghost OBK is displayed, the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is not performed, and "the timing at which the ghost OBK with a gift box is displayed A method of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state when it is not within the period of tb21 to tb23 (The period of timing tb31 to tb33 is set as a prohibition period for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect method)
・In the period of timing tb21 to tb23 when the ghost OBK holding a gift box is displayed, a method such as a method of not performing the detection of whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated, etc. should be adopted. is possible, and any implementation method may be used.

In FIG. 363, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the period of timings tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 363(a)) in the execution period of the pattern variation is changed to "receiving effect (operation) for the operation button 410. Although the above-described first effect pattern that can be set as "permissible effect receiving period" is executed, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of timings tb11 to tb13.

As described above, in this first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the "effect reception period for allowing the reception (operation) of the effect on the operation button 410" arrives, the effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 363(b). In the device 1600, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (in this case, a downward arrow and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect receiving period) are displayed. display) appears (first display effect).

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIG. 363, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of timings tb11 to tb13, but when timing tb12′ earlier than timing tb13 arrives, the automatic production function described above is executed. function, and this causes the same change to the performance as when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 363(c), at timing tb12', the degree of expectation for the appearance of a big hit pattern in the relevant pattern variation (symbol variation in execution state) is calculated based on the functioning of the above-described automatic effect function. The suggested first post-operation effect (in the drawing, the omikuji of "Nakayoshi") is executed (first expected effect). However, at this time, the effect reception period that has occurred from timing tb11 is terminated when the automatic effect function functions without consuming the remaining time, but the automatic button effect state is not canceled and continues. Become. Therefore, at the timing tb12′, the “display indicating that the automatic button effect state is being controlled (here, “auto button is being set”)” that has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues. will be displayed.

Further, even when the above-described automatic effect function functions at timing tb12′, at timing tb13, as shown in FIG. ) is not yet finished and is in the middle of execution, in order to preferably maintain the game interest over the period of timings tb11 to tb13.

In FIG. 364, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the period of timing tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. This shows an example of the effect when the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timings tb21 to tb23 although the above-described second effect pattern that can be set as the "permissible effect reception period" is executed.

As described above, in this second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 for generating the "effect reception period for allowing the reception (operation) of the effect on the operation button 410" arrives, the effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 364(b). In the device 1600, a "ghost OBK with a gift box" appears (second display presentation).

Here, as also described above, when "ghost OBK with a gift box" is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the degree of expectation is suggested when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect acceptance period) may appear. no.

In this respect, in the production example shown in FIG. 364, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of timings tb21 to tb23, but when timing tb22′ earlier than timing tb23 arrives, the automatic production function described above is executed. function, and this causes the same change to the performance as when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 364(c), at timing tb22', the degree of expectation for the appearance of a big hit pattern in the relevant pattern variation (symbol variation in execution state) is calculated based on the functioning of the above-described automatic effect function. The suggested second post-operation effect (in the drawing, character display of "hot heat") is executed (second expected effect). However, even in this case, the effect reception period that has occurred from timing tb21 ends when the automatic effect function functions without consuming the remaining time, but the automatic button effect state is not canceled and continues. becomes. Therefore, at the timing tb22′, the “display indicating that the automatic button effect state is being controlled (here, “auto button is being set”)” that has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues. will be displayed.

Further, even when the above-described automatic effect function functions at timing tb22′, at timing tb23, as shown in FIG. (expected effect) is not yet finished and is in the middle of execution, in order to preferably maintain the game interest over the period of timings tb21 to tb23.

Incidentally, although illustration is omitted, although the above-described third effect pattern (see FIG. 362) is executed while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is When the operation is not performed, the effect reception period for generating the second post-operation effect has not occurred in the first place, so the above-described automatic effect function cannot function, and the automatic button effect state is also canceled. It goes without saying that it will be continued without interruption (that is, no change will occur).

360 to 364, the first display effect shown in FIG. 360 and the second display effect shown in FIGS. 361 and 362 are performed with different contents. , depending on whether the operation button 410 is operated while the first display effect or the second display effect is being displayed, the type of post-operation effect when the operation is performed (first Expected effect of 1 and second expected effect) are made different, and expected effect (post-operation effect) itself may not appear even if the operation is performed only when the second display effect appears. If there is a possibility, the process to end the automatic button effect state will not be performed. Therefore, the variety of effects using the operation buttons 410 can be ensured, and the amusement of the game can be preferably improved when the effects using the operation buttons 410 are performed.

Note that the first display effect may have a plurality of effect modes with different degrees of expectation, and may be executed in any one of these effect modes. Further, the second display effect may also have a plurality of effect modes with different expectations, and may be executed in any one of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first display effect and the second display effect are executed as display contents having no relationship with each other. In the example effects shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, in the first display effect, the button image BTG and the instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 are displayed, whereas in the second display effect, the button Neither the image BTG nor the instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 is displayed, and a specific background image (a ghost holding a gift box) that is not displayed when the first display effect is performed is displayed. It's becoming

Further, the first expected effect may have a plurality of effect modes with different degrees of expectation, and may be executed in any one of these effect modes. Further, the second expected effect may also have a plurality of effect modes with different degrees of expectation, and may be executed in any one of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first expected effect and the second expected effect are executed as effect contents having no relationship with each other. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, the omikuji image is displayed in the first expected production, while the omikuji image is not displayed in the second expected production, and the expectation level by character display is shown. is being suggested. By executing either the first expected effect or the second expected effect as a motion effect or a lamp display effect, the contents may have no relation to each other.

360 to 364, as the effect pattern for causing the second display effect to appear within the execution period of the symbol variation, when the second display effect is appearing, "the effect for the operation button 410 A second effect pattern that is predetermined (for example, by a determination process that is performed at the start of pattern variation) and a second display effect appear. A third effect pattern that is predetermined (for example, by a determination process performed at the start of pattern variation) that "a effect reception period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410" does not occur when the was prepared. However, after preparing a second effect pattern in which it is determined in advance that an "effect reception period for allowing the reception of effects (operations) on the operation buttons 410" occurs when the second display effect is appearing, Determination (lottery) as to whether or not to generate the second expected effect is performed based on the fact that the effect is received within the ``effect receiving period for which the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted'', A second expected effect is generated when a specific result is obtained in the determination, and the second expected effect is not generated when a specific result is not obtained in the determination. 364 may be realized. In addition, apart from the second effect pattern according to such another example, when the second display effect is appearing, it is possible that the "effect reception period during which the effect reception (operation) on the operation button 410 is permitted" does not occur. It is also possible to further prepare the above-described third effect pattern that is determined in advance (for example, by a determination process that is performed at the start of symbol variation).

It should be noted that if the second expected effect occurs as a result of effect acceptance (operation) on the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the second expected effect is generated while the first display effect is being performed. As a result of receiving (operating) the performance for the operation button 410, the ratio of appearance of the big winning pattern in the relevant pattern variation (the pattern variation in the execution state) is higher than when the first expected performance occurs. desirable.

Further, when the second display effect is performed, the above-described specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350) is performed until the symbol variation is stopped than when the first display effect is performed. It is desirable to increase the ratio of appearances between According to such a configuration, even if the second expected effect does not occur as a result of receiving the effect (operation) on the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the specific operation can be performed. It becomes possible to have a sense of anticipation for the execution of the related effects (see FIGS. 330 to 350), and it becomes possible to suitably suppress the interest in the game.

Also, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, when the first display production (see FIG. 360(b)) is displayed (b)) is displayed. However, even if there is an operation, the second expected effect does not necessarily occur. If the effect function is made to function, when the second display effect (see FIGS. 361(b) and 362(b)) is displayed, the above-described automatic effect function is used to perform the operation. I am afraid that it will disappear. Therefore, when the first display effect (see FIG. 360(b)) is displayed, the automatic effect function described above functions, but the second display effect (FIGS. 361(b) and 362(b) ) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is disabled, and if the second display effect is displayed, even if it is operated, the second expected effect will occur, but at least it must be operated. Alternatively, the second expected effect may be prevented from occurring.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, when the ghost OBK is displayed, an "effect reception period for allowing the reception of the production (operation) to the operation means" is generated while the ghost OBK is being displayed. You may do so. Also, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, when the ghost OBK is displayed, the automatic production function functions within the "production reception period that allows reception of production (operation) for the operation means", or Even if the operation is performed, the effect of displaying the ghost OBK may be continued even at the timing tb23 or the timing tb33 without hiding the ghost OBK.

[Automatic continuous hit function in automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when applying the above-mentioned another example) Even if is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change in effect as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of operations (for example, repeatedly hitting the operation button 410) to predetermined operation means are prompted, and each time such operations are performed, an effect reception is generated, and a plurality of operation effects are performed accordingly. sometimes Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, the problem is how to function the above-described automatic effect function when the specific effect acceptance period occurs in which the operation effect is performed multiple times.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, during a specific effect receiving period in which an operation opportunity for multiple operations (such as repeated hits) is given, predetermined operation means (for example, operation button 410) A presentation when multiple operations are performed simply by performing a long mode operation (such as a so-called long press) that maintains the predetermined operation means in an operation state for a relatively long period of time without having to operate multiple times. Equipped with an automatic multiple operation function (auto repeat function) that makes the mode appear, and the automatic multiple operation function (auto repeat function) is activated by operating a predetermined operation means in the long operation mode. When the operation state is maintained, every time a predetermined time elapses, an effect reception is performed, and a process of generating a post-operation effect corresponding to these for a plurality of times can be executed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity for multiple operations (such as repeated hits) is given when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. When the specific effect reception period occurs, even if the operation means is not operated within the specific effect reception period, the operation means is automatically operated in the long operation mode within the specific effect reception period. Similar to when the multiple-time operation function (automatic repeat function) functions, each time a predetermined time elapses, a process for generating an effect corresponding to the reception of the effect is executed (automatic effect function).

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 activates the automatic repeated hitting function when a so-called long-pressing operation is performed within the specific effect acceptance period in which an operation opportunity for a plurality of operations (such as repeated hitting) is given. Therefore, at least when the automatic button performance state is controlled, the same performance mode as when the auto repeated hitting function is validated appears even if the long-pressing operation is not performed within the specified performance acceptance period. Therefore, even if the automatic effect function is activated when a specific effect reception period requiring multiple operation receptions occurs in the automatic button effect state, the specific effect (operation reception) within the specific effect reception period The player can enjoy the performance without being dissatisfied with the frequency of occurrence of .

In FIG. 365(a), when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the period of timings tc11 to tc13 in the execution period of the symbol variation is given as an "opportunity to operate the operation button 410 multiple times (such as repeated hits)." is executed, and the operation button 410 is operated a plurality of times in a single operation mode in which the operation state is maintained only for a relatively short period of time during the specified effect reception period. It shows an example of the effect when it is performed over.

As shown in FIG. 365(a), in this example of effect, every time the operation button 410 is operated in the single-shot operation mode within the specified effect reception period (timings tc11 to tc13) (the operation button 410 is Every time it is detected that the position changes from the position to the operating state (here, every time the rise is detected), an effect corresponding to the operation is accepted, and a specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed according to the effect reception. . Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, such as the number of times that operation detection (reception of effect) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained in a lottery when the effect is received. When the specific performance condition is satisfied, a performance mode suggesting the degree of expectation appears, and the specific performance receiving period is terminated at that point without consuming the remaining time. .

Here, although omitted in the figure, within the specific effect acceptance period (timings tc11 to tc13), a specific effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception is started to end. A new performance reception (operation detection) may be made within. In such a case, when the performance is accepted, the specific performance (post-operation performance) in progress is interrupted, and the specific performance (post-operation performance) corresponding to the reception of the performance is newly generated. Thus, it is desirable to preferably maintain the feeling of operation (response to performance) when the player operates. It should be noted that the newly generated specific effect (post-operation effect) is terminated when a specific time elapses after starting, unless a new effect acceptance occurs again during the execution of the specific effect. Become.

In FIG. 365(b), when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the period of timings tc11 to tc13 in the execution period of the symbol variation is given as an "opportunity to operate the operation button 410 multiple times (such as repeated hits)." A specific effect pattern that can be set as a "specific effect reception period" is executed, and the operation state is maintained for a relatively long time within the specific effect reception period. It shows an example of the effect when the button 410 is operated.

As shown in FIG. 365(b), during the specific effect acceptance period (timings tc11 to tc13), while the operating state of the operating button 410 is maintained in the long-press mode, the operating button 410 is in the operating state. After the first specific effect (post-operation effect) has occurred based on the operation detection (reception of effect) when it is, a process for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time a predetermined time t1 elapses ( Auto continuous hit function) is to be executed. As this processing (automatic continuous hitting function), for example, "every time a predetermined time t1 elapses, the operation detection (reception of effect) is performed on the condition that the operation button 410 is in the operating state, and the operation detection (effect reception) is performed. It is possible to execute a process such as "generate a new specific effect (post-operation effect) based on the reception". Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, such as the number of times that operation detection (reception of effect) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained in a lottery when the effect is received. When the specific performance condition is satisfied, a performance mode suggesting the degree of expectation appears, and the specific performance receiving period is terminated at that point without consuming the remaining time. .

In FIG. 366(a), when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the period of timings tc11 to tc13 in the execution period of the symbol variation is given as an "opportunity to operate the operation button 410 multiple times (such as repeated hits)." A specific effect pattern that can be set as "a specific effect reception period" is executed, and an effect example is shown when no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period.

First, if no operation is performed during the specified effect acceptance period (timings tc11 to tc13) when the automatic button effect state is not being controlled, the specific effect will not be executed even once, and at the timing tc13 At the time when it reaches, the specific effect reception period will be terminated.

On the other hand, if no operation is performed during the specific effect receiving period (timings tc11 to tc13) while the automatic button effect state is being controlled, as shown in FIG. At the timing tc12 when a predetermined time has passed since the effect acceptance period occurs, the automatic effect function described above functions. That is, in this case, after the first specific effect is generated at timing t12, the automatic effect function generates a new specific effect ( A post-operation effect) is executed.

In addition, as this processing (automatic effect function), for example, "an operation detection (reception of effect) is performed each time a predetermined time t1 elapses, and a new specific effect ( It is possible to execute it as a process such as "generate a post-operation effect)". Also, when the above-described automatic effect function functions at timing tc12, the automatic continuous hitting function is activated, and by using this, "operation detection (reception of effect) is performed each time a predetermined time t1 elapses, and these operation detections are performed. A new specific effect (post-operation effect) may be generated based on (reception of effect). Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, such as the number of times that operation detection (reception of effect) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained in a lottery when the effect is received. When the specific performance condition is satisfied, a performance mode suggesting the degree of expectation appears, and the specific performance receiving period is terminated at that point without consuming the remaining time. .

In FIG. 366(b), when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the period of timings tc11 to tc13 in the execution period of the symbol variation is given as an "opportunity to operate the operation button 410 multiple times (such as repeated hits)." A specific effect pattern that can be set as a "specific effect reception period" is executed, and the operation button 410 is pressed and held while the above-described automatic effect function is functioning during the specific effect reception period. It shows an example of the production when it is performed.

In the production example shown in FIG. 366(b), as in the production example shown in FIG. After that, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated every time a predetermined time t1 elapses, in the same way as when the above-described automatic repeated hitting function functions (or by functioning the automatic repeated hitting function). Then, the process to cause the

However, in this production example, it is assumed that the operation button 410 is operated in a long-press mode at timing tc12a when the process by the automatic production function is being executed. Therefore, at timing tc12a, the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (finished) by detecting an operation on the operation button 410 while the automatic button effect state is in effect. However, in this example of effect, even though the player's operation is detected at timing tc12a, the effect is not accepted. Then, after preventing the specific effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the reception of the effect from occurring at the timing tc12a, the process that has been executed before the automatic button effect state is canceled (predetermined time t1 The process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time elapses is continued without ending.

According to such a configuration, in the automatic button effect state, when the above-described automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect reception period, the operation by long pressing at any timing during the state Even if is started, the operation will not cause a change in the rhythm or tempo for the generation of the specific effect (post-operation effect), and the delay in the progress of the effect will not occur. The process (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed in a manner that it is handed over to after the operation mode by long pressing is started. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, even if the above-described automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect acceptance period, the player can operate the effect without worrying about adverse effects on the effect in the execution state. As a result, the player's operation is favorably prompted. That is, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 366(b), the effect situation is different from the example of effect shown in FIG. The same mode appears as the mode of the specific effect that appears within the specific effect acceptance period.

It should be noted that the process that has already been executed in this way (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is carried over after the long-pressing operation mode is started. It is possible to execute it in the form of an auto repeated hit function that functions when a long-press operation is performed within the specified effect reception period, and a function that functions when no operation is performed within the specific effect reception period. The same process (a process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time a predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed regardless of whether the automatic effect function functions. nothing but from

However, after the long-pressing operation by the player is started at the timing tc12a, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in the operating state each time the predetermined time t1 expires. On the condition that the determination is made, the process that has been executed since the automatic button effect state (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time a predetermined time t1 elapses) is continued. It will happen. Therefore, when the operation button 410 is not in the operating state at the time when the predetermined time t1 based on the specific performance executed last time has expired, a new specific performance (post-operation performance) is generated at that time. Instead, the process that has been executed since the automatic button effect state (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is terminated.

It should be noted that, in the example of the production using the automatic continuous hitting function shown in FIG. 365(b) and the automatic production function shown in FIGS. Although the processing (automatic repeated hitting function, the first mode as the automatic effect function) is executed to generate a new specific effect (post-operation effect) after the lapse of time, instead of this, the timing at which the specific effect starts is used as a reference. Alternatively, after a predetermined time t2 has elapsed, a process (auto repeated hitting function, second mode as an automatic effect function) of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) may be executed. In this case, the predetermined time t2 may be longer than the specific time required from the start of the specific effect to the end, but preferably from the start to the end of the specific effect. set to be shorter than the specified time required for According to such a configuration, when the specific effect is in the middle of execution, a new specific effect is executed by interrupting this. It is possible to make the player feel as if one-shot operations are being repeatedly performed at high speed even though no operation is being performed, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

In the production example shown in FIG. 366(b), when the operation button 410 is operated before the timing tc12 at which the automatic production function functions (within the period between timings tc11 and tc12), The setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (finished). Also, at this time, the first specific effect is generated according to the operation of the operation button 410, and after that, if the operation is in the form of a long press, each time a predetermined time t1 (or a predetermined time t2) elapses. A process (auto repeated hitting function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed, and if the operation is a single-shot mode, it is detected that the operation button 410 is in the operated state. Each time, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 365 and 366, when the production is accepted while the specific production is in the middle of execution, the production is responded to by interrupting the specific production in the middle of execution. However, it is also possible to generate a new specific performance in response to the reception of the performance in parallel without ending the specific performance in the middle of execution.

365 and 366, when a new single-shot operation is performed and the performance is accepted while the previous specific effect generated by the single-shot operation is in the middle of execution, the performance is accepted. While a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated according to the reception of the effect, when the previous specific effect generated by the functioning of the automatic effect function (or the automatic repeated hitting function) is in the middle of execution. Even if it is detected that the operation button 410 has changed from the original position to the operating state by a single operation or a long-pressing operation, at the time of the detection, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is not generated and the execution state is already established. (a process that generates a specific effect every time a predetermined period of time elapses) is continued. After that, if the operation state is maintained after a predetermined time based on the previous specific effect (in the case of a long press operation), the process that is already in the execution state (the specific effect Since the processing generated every time the game passes) is further continued, the player can terminate the automatic button presentation state while suitably continuing the operation system presentation which is in the execution state from the time of the automatic button presentation state. It is possible to shift to a state in which an operation system effect is performed by the operation of , and it is expected that this will increase the player's participation awareness.

[Setting process related to automatic button effect state according to type of effect pattern]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when applying the above-mentioned another example) Even if is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change in effect as when the operation is performed can be executed. Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of symbol variation, by operating a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) It is possible to set and cancel the automatic button production state, and by simplifying the operation in this way, it is possible to set and cancel the automatic button production state while maintaining attention to the progress of the production during the pattern change. I am making it possible.

However, if the automatic button effect state is set or canceled during the execution period of the pattern variation, the processing load will increase due to the setting change that was not expected at the start of the pattern variation. There is a concern that this may adversely affect the progress of the determined performance. In this regard, the types of the ``effect pattern executed based on the result of the big hit determination'' include at least a ``first effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation can be set,'' "Second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the prompting instruction display appears cannot be set" is prepared. There may be cases where no problem arises. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, depending on which of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern is in the execution state, during the execution period of the symbol variation, By differentiating the processing mode for setting and canceling the automatic button effect state, an increase in the processing load during the execution period of the symbol variation is suppressed.

Figure 367 shows that when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of reservations is in the effect situation of 3, the pattern changes in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation can appear" can be set. is started, and an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting it (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation. . Note that the first effect pattern may be either a winning variation or a losing variation.

As shown in FIG. 367, when the automatic button effect state is being controlled and the pending number is in the effect situation of 3, the "specific effect acceptance period during which the instruction display prompting the operation appears" can be set. It is assumed that the pattern variation is started in the “production pattern”. Then, although it is during the execution period of the symbol variation, the effect progresses as the first effect pattern in the state where the automatic button effect state can be canceled (the state in which the release operation is permitted). .

In this example of effect, it is assumed that the player's release operation is detected at timing td11 shown in the drawing, and the setting of the automatic button effect state is released based on the detection of the release operation. (end). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting cancellation of the automatic button effect state during symbol variation is executed based on detection that the operation button 410 is in the operated state. be done.

Also, in this example of effect, after the automatic button effect state is thus canceled, at timing td12 within the specific effect acceptance period shown in the figure, the operation button 410 is operated (when the operation button 410 is in the operated state). ) is detected. When the operation to the operation button 410 is detected within the specific performance reception period, the performance reception is performed, the performance after the operation corresponding to the performance reception is executed, and the specific performance reception period ends without consuming the remaining time. It will be done. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the specified effect acceptance period when the automatic button effect state is not set, the effect is accepted when the operation button 410 is operated. It will never be accepted as a setting operation to the automatic button effect state. On the other hand, during the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is set, when the operation button 410 is operated, the effect is received and the post-operation effect is executed, and the automatic button effect state is canceled. It is also accepted as an operation, and the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (finished).

Furthermore, in this example of effect, it is assumed that the setting operation by the player is detected at the timing td13 shown in the figure after the specific effect acceptance period ends in this way, and although the symbols are fluctuating, , the automatic button effect state is set based on the detection of the setting operation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting to the automatic button effect state during pattern variation is performed by maintaining the operation button 410 in the operation state for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). It is set to run when it detects However, instead of this, setting to the automatic button effect state during symbol variation may also be executed based on detection that the operation button 410 is in the operated state.

Then, in this production example, when the pattern variation is stopped after the setting to the automatic button production state is made, a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the pattern variation is stopped, the system is in the pending state. The next symbol variation is digested (variation start). Then, during the period in which the next symbol variation is being executed, unless the player performs a release operation, the effect progresses in the state set in the automatic button effect state.

Thus, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 367, in a state where the first effect pattern is being executed without being controlled to the automatic button effect state, during the period during which the first effect pattern is executed, the specific effect When the operation button 410 is operated when the reception period is not set, the control to the automatic button performance state can be executed while the first performance pattern is in the execution state. According to such a configuration, even if the symbol variation is started in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period can be set in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears" in the state of being controlled to the automatic button effect state. Also, by performing a cancellation operation before the specific effect reception period occurs, it is possible to cause the specific effect reception period to occur in a state where the automatic button effect state is canceled, and the player himself/herself operates. It is possible to preferably maintain the interest in the game when the desire to play is generated. In the production example shown in FIG. 367, it is assumed that the cancellation operation is accepted before the start of the specific production reception period. It is also possible to end the automatic button effect state within the period of one effect pattern.

Further, according to the above configuration, during the period in which the pattern variation is executed in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation can be set" is performed, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is performed. is also allowed. In the effect example shown in FIG. 367, it is assumed that the setting operation is accepted after the specific effect accepting period ends. is performed, the setting operation is accepted. Therefore, when the symbol variation is started in the state of not being controlled to the automatic button performance state, the specific performance reception period is generated in the ``first performance pattern in which the specific performance reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation can be set can be set''. By operating the operation button 410 so that the setting operation to the automatic button presentation state is detected in the period before, the specific presentation acceptance period is generated in the state set to the automatic button presentation state. Also, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest in the game when the player wants to enjoy the post-operation presentation by the automatic presentation function.

In addition, in order to obtain such an effect, when the first production pattern is selected at the start of the pattern variation, any production judgment result regarding the judgment (lottery) related to the production content in the first production pattern Even if is obtained, it is desirable to always generate this during the specific effect reception period. In addition, the specific performance display can appear within the period of the pattern variation, and when the specific performance display appears, the specific performance reception period always occurs until the pattern variation in the execution state is finished. It is desirable to make the performance progress as follows. According to these configurations, by confirming the content of the effect that appears within the execution period of the symbol variation, it becomes possible to recognize that the specific effect reception period occurs, and until the specific effect reception period occurs. It becomes possible to select whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

Further, at this time, with respect to the specific effect display, it is possible to suggest whether or not there is a high possibility that the post-operation effect will be performed in a highly anticipated mode when the effect is accepted within the specific effect acceptance period. , it will be expected that it will be used for the selection of whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

Further, with respect to the specific effect display, there are at least a first specific effect display and a second specific effect display, and when the first specific effect display appears, the first specific effect display appears. It is permissible for the player to set (or cancel) the automatic button effect state by operating the player during the period from 1 to 12 until the specific effect reception period occurs, but when the second specific effect display appears, the If it is not allowed to set (or cancel) the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player during the period from the appearance of the second specific effect display to the occurrence of the specific effect acceptance period, the specific effect It is possible to suitably maintain the game interest from the appearance of the display to the generation of the specific performance acceptance period.

Fig. 368 shows a second effect pattern in which "a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears and a specific effect acceptance period cannot be set (loss fluctuation )”, and an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation. It is a time chart showing.

As shown in FIG. 368, when the automatic button effect state is being controlled and the pending number is in the effect situation of 3, "the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set. It is assumed that the symbol variation is started in "2 effect pattern". Then, even in this example of effect, as in the case shown in FIG. The effect progresses as the second effect pattern.

In this example of effect, it is assumed that a cancellation operation by the player is detected at timing td21 shown in the drawing, and the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled based on the detection of the cancellation operation. (end). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting cancellation of the automatic button effect state during symbol variation is executed based on detection that the operation button 410 is in the operated state. be done.

That is, it seems that there is little advantage in ending the automatic button effect state when the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is in the execution state, but for example, there is a effect mode with a high expectation of a big hit in a look-ahead effect. When it appears, it is usually highly likely that "the first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is set" will appear when the pattern variation in the pending state is eliminated. At this time, the player may desire to return to the normal performance mode (desire to end the specific performance state) in which the performance can be progressed depending on the player's own operation.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, not only during the period when the first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set is executed, but also during the period when the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is executed. Also, the automatic button presentation state can be terminated by the player's operation. Therefore, it is possible to pre-terminate the automatic button effect state when the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set" is still in the pending state, and thereby the "in the first effect pattern It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the automatic button performance state is ended immediately before the specified performance reception period is set, and the operation means (operation button 410) must be operated in a hurry.

Furthermore, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 368, it is assumed that the setting operation is performed by the player at timing td23 shown in the figure after the setting of the automatic button effect state is cancelled. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is being executed. (Even if the operation button 410 is operated from the original position and the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (here, two seconds)), at least the second production pattern is being executed, the setting operation by the player is not accepted (the automatic button effect state is not set). Instead of this, regarding the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol variation, even if it is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operating state, The setting operation by the player is not accepted during the period in which the second effect pattern is being executed.

That is, even if the "setting from the normal effect state to the automatic button effect state" is performed immediately before the specific effect reception period occurs, it is not necessary to perform any operation during the specific effect reception period. In addition, even if the operation is performed, the effect is accepted and the effect after the operation is executed. In view of this fact, it is not necessary to quickly set the automatic button effect state even if the setting operation is performed during the period in which the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is being executed. It is conceivable that no problem will occur if the automatic button effect state is set until the specific effect acceptance period that can occur after the next pattern variation is digested is started.

In this respect, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, during the period during which the second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect reception period is not set is being executed, the setting operation is performed by the player during the period. However, until the period ends (while the symbol variation is being executed), the automatic button effect state is not set, and the symbol variation according to the second effect pattern is terminated and the symbol is stopped (losing). When the game is in the state of symbol stop (timing td24 in the drawing), the automatic button effect state is set based on the setting operation. In this way, during the period in which the symbol variation of the second effect pattern is being executed, even if the player performs an operation, the setting to the automatic button effect state is not permitted, and the timing to be set is determined by the symbol. Since it is carried over after being stopped, the processing load increases due to the setting change related to the performance state that was not determined at the start of the pattern variation (by the player's operation) during the execution of the pattern variation. Such things can be suitably suppressed.

Then, in the production example shown in FIG. 368, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed since the symbol variation was stopped, the state is set to the automatic button production state, and the state is changed to the pending state. The next symbol variation that was there is digested (variation start). Then, during the period in which the next pattern variation is being executed, unless the player performs a release operation, the effect progresses in the state set in the automatic button effect state.

Thus, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 368, in the state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the second effect pattern is being executed, Even when the operation button 410 is operated at any timing, the control to the automatic button performance state is not executed while the second performance pattern is in the execution state, and the second performance pattern ends. After that, the control to the automatic button effect state can be executed. As a result, an increase in the processing load caused by a setting change (due to an operation by the player) occurring during the execution of the symbol variation, which was not determined at the start of the symbol variation, can be suitably suppressed. become.

In addition, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 368, it is assumed that after the symbol variation of the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is stopped, the next symbol variation that was in the pending state is started. However, even if the next pattern variation is not in a pending state at the time when the pattern variation of the second effect pattern is stopped (loss pattern stop), the automatic button is pressed when the pattern is in a pattern stop (loss pattern stop) state. Setting to the production state is made.

In addition, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 368, when the setting operation is performed by the player during the period during which the second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is executed, the second effect pattern Although the setting to the automatic button effect state is made when the symbol variation is stopped, it is not necessarily limited to this, in short, the automatic button within the period in which the second effect pattern is executed It is sufficient that the setting to the performance state is not allowed and the timing to be set is carried over after the symbol is stopped. For example, it is desirable to set the automatic button effect state when the symbol is stopped (losing symbol is stopped) or within the period during which the next symbol variation is being executed. That is, when the next symbol variation is started, if it is in the effect situation such as "It is decided to change the setting related to the effect state within the symbol variation", the effect is performed according to the determined schedule. Since it is only necessary to progress, it is possible to preferably avoid an increase in the processing load due to an unintended state change during execution of the symbol variation.

In this case, even if the next pattern variation is executed as the second production pattern (the same production pattern as the previous one), when the pattern is stopped (losing pattern is stopped), or the next pattern variation is executed. It is desirable that the automatic button effect state is set within the period. According to such a configuration, when the setting operation is performed by the player within the period during which the symbol variation is executed in the second effect pattern, it is determined in which effect pattern the next symbol variation is to be performed. , the timing of setting to the automatic button presentation state after the pattern is stopped can be carried over.

Further, when the operation button 410 is put into the operation state within the period during which the second effect pattern is executed to set the automatic button effect state, at least a predetermined time has passed since the second effect pattern was terminated. The automatic button effect state may be set only after that. That is, in this case, when the second effect pattern is terminated while the next symbol variation is in the pending state, the automatic button effect state is set within the execution period of the next symbol variation, but the next symbol variation is performed. is not in the pending state, the automatic button effect state can be set in the state of symbol stop (losing symbol stop).

In addition, apart from the "second effect pattern (loss variation) in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears cannot be set," a second effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears cannot be set. 3 production pattern (hit variation)" is further prepared, and when a setting operation is performed by the player during the period in which the pattern variation is executed in the third production pattern, the pattern is stopped or the execution period of the jackpot game. The setting to the automatic button effect state may be performed within.

[Prohibited period for setting automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when applying the above-mentioned another example) Even if is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change in effect as when the operation is performed can be executed. Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of symbol variation, by operating a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) The automatic button production state can be set, and by such simplification of the operation, the automatic button production state can be set while keeping an eye on the progress of the production during the pattern change. ing.

However, including the setting process to such an automatic button effect state, if the specific process related to the effect such as the effect setting is permitted at any time by the player's operation during the execution period of the pattern variation, the tension will be increased. There is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease due to the lack of performance. Therefore, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is executed, at least when the specific effect acceptance period has not occurred, the specific processing related to the effect such as the effect setting is performed by the player's operation. In a permitted game machine, it is desirable to allow a prohibition period during which specific processing related to the performance is not permitted to occur between the start of symbol variation and the occurrence of a specific performance acceptance period. In other words, in this case, there is a concern that the prohibition period will occur, so that even in a state where the specific effect reception period has not occurred, the operation means (such as the operation button 410, etc.) can be operated while the prohibition period has not occurred. ), and it becomes possible to favorably maintain the player's sense of participation in the game and performance.

In the following, an example of an effect that employs the "automatic button effect state setting process" as the "specific process related to effect" will be described in detail, but the "specific process related to effect" is not limited to this. Other processes may be applied, such as a process of changing the production mode in which the first character is the main character) to another production mode (the production mode in which the second character is the main character).

In FIG. 369, when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the pattern variation is started in the "third effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period (specific valid period) can be set in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears", and the pattern is changed. FIG. 370 is a time chart showing an example of processing when an operation for setting the automatic button effect state is performed within the execution period of variation, and FIG. It is a figure which shows. It should be noted that the third effect pattern may be either a winning variation or a losing variation, and may be the same as the above-described first effect pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 369 and 370(a), when the current state of the effect is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, there is a third effect in which a specific effect acceptance period can be set in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears. It is assumed that the pattern variation is started in "Pattern". Then, although it is during the execution period of the symbol variation, the effect progresses as the third effect pattern in the state in which the automatic button effect state can be set (the setting operation is permitted). .

However, in this example of effect, if the symbol variation is performed in the "third effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period can be set in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears", timing te11 ( (See FIG. 369), the operation reception itself for setting the automatic button effect state or the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed to occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 370(b), during this prohibition period, a specific effect (in-prohibition image) that can appear only when the prohibition period occurs is displayed. Note that the specific effect (prohibited image) shown in FIG. 370(b) is executed as a button lock effect in which an image of a padlock with a chain wrapped around it is displayed, and characters such as "auto setting disabled" are displayed. It is

The prohibition period thus generated ends when timing te12, which is the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) after timing te11, arrives. However, no matter how many operations (operations on the operation button 410) are performed until the timing te12 arrives, the specific effect (prohibited image ) are not allowed to undergo any changes.

Then, when the prohibition period ends at timing te12, the specific effect (prohibited image) is not displayed, and the setting process to the automatic button effect state is allowed. Then, after that, when the above-mentioned "predictive effect" or "specific operation-related effect" is performed (see FIG. 370(e)), at timing te13, a specific effect acceptance period occurs in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears. (See FIG. 370(f))). In the example shown in FIG. 370(f), the period is set as an effect reception period during which an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. It may be set as a period.

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 369 and 370(f), the specific production acceptance period occurs in a state where the automatic button production state is not set, so the specific production reception period The automatic effect function described above does not work at a specific timing. However, even if the "third effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period can be set in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears" is executed in the effect situation shown in FIG. If the automatic button effect state is set to be set to the automatic button effect state, it is possible to generate the specific effect acceptance period while the automatic button effect state is set. In this case, the specific effect It becomes possible to operate the above-described automatic effect function at a specific timing within the acceptance period.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting to the automatic button effect state during symbol variation is not the timing when the operation button 410 is in the operation state, but the timing when the operation button 410 is in the operation state. It may be executed when it is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) after becoming. However, in this case, if the operation button 410 is put into the operated state and this is maintained for two seconds within a period of less than two seconds before the timing te11 shown in FIG. Therefore, setting to the automatic button effect state is permissible. Therefore, the specific effect (prohibited image) is not generated at the timing te11 when the prohibited period starts as in the example of effect shown in FIG. 369, but is generated after the timing te11. is desirable.

FIGS. 371 and 372 are diagrams showing modified examples of the prohibition period (here, the prohibition period for setting the automatic button effect state) related to the "specific process relating to effect such as effect setting".

That is, as described above, in the production example described above with reference to FIGS. seconds) has elapsed and until this is terminated, no matter how many operations (operations on the operation button 410) are performed, the setting operation will not be accepted, and the specific effect (prohibited image) will be displayed. is prevented from making any changes.

371 and 372, however, the prohibition period "requires a first specific period of time (for example, 25 seconds) to end". is the same, but when a second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the first specific time elapses after the prohibition period occurs, the player's operation (operation button 410) can be executed, which is different from the above-described rendering example detailed with reference to FIGS.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 371 and 372(a), when the present state is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, the specific effect acceptance period during which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set. It is assumed that the symbol variation is started in the 3 effect pattern. Then, even in this modified example, although it is during the execution period of the pattern variation, the effect progresses as the third effect pattern in the state where the automatic button effect state can be set (the setting operation is permitted). will be done.

Also, at the timing te11 (see FIG. 371) before the occurrence of the specific effect reception period, the operation acceptance itself for setting the automatic button effect state or the setting process to the automatic button effect state is permitted. 369 and 369, a specific effect (prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibition period occurs is displayed during the prohibition period. This is similar to the rendering example described above with reference to 370 .

However, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 371, the period from the timing te11 to the timing te11a when the second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the timing te11 (the period during which cancellation is prohibited). Then, no matter how many operations (operations on the operation button 410) are performed within this period, no change will occur in the specific effect (prohibited image) (see FIG. 372(c)). ), during the period from timing te11a to timing te12 (timing at which the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) has elapsed since the occurrence of the prohibition period) (the period during which cancellation is permitted), the player's operation When (operation on the operation button 410) is performed, it is possible to execute processing that can end the prohibition period early.

More specifically, when the timing te11a arrives and the prohibition period can be terminated early by the player's operation (operation on the operation button 410), the effect display device 1600 first reaches the timing te11a. A special image that has not appeared during the period until (the period during which cancellation is not possible) is displayed. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 372(d), an image NJG indicating the remaining time as the prohibition period is displayed as the special image.

That is, in the prohibition period according to this modified example, when the timing te11a arrives, such an image NJG appears (see FIG. 372(d)), so that the prohibition period cannot be canceled ( From the timing te11 to te11a), it can be suggested that the cancellation of the prohibited period is permitted (timings te11a to te12). It will be possible to function as a production for whether to end early.

Then, when the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within the period (timings te11a to te12) during which the cancellation of the prohibition period is permitted within the prohibition period, the operation button 410 enters the operable state. Based on this fact, a process for early ending the prohibition period is executed. As a result, after the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed, the setting operation by the player can be accepted even if the timing te12 has not yet arrived.

Here, in this modification, when the prohibition period is terminated early by the player's first operation (operation on the operation button 410), the effect display device 1600 also changes the effect based on the first operation. It is possible to execute the process that causes In this modification, as shown in FIG. 372(e), the image of the chain wrapped around the padlock is destroyed and characters such as "successfully unlocked" are displayed to cause a change in presentation. As a result, the specific effect (prohibited image) is also hidden before timing te12 arrives.

Then, in a state where the prohibition period is terminated early in this way, if the second operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within a period before the arrival of the timing te12, as shown in FIG. When the second operation is performed (here, when the operation state is maintained for 2 seconds), the setting processing to the automatic button effect state can be performed. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, a display accompanying the setting of the effect (here, "auto button setting in progress") appears.

Then, after that, when the above-mentioned "predictive effect" or "specific operation-related effect" is performed (see FIG. 372(f)), at timing te13, a specific effect acceptance period occurs in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears. (See FIG. 372(g))). Note that in the example shown in FIG. 372(g), the period is set as an effect reception period during which the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given. It may be set as a period.

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 371 and 372 (g), the specific production reception period occurs in the state where the automatic button production state is set. If no operation is performed by the player before the arrival of the specific timing, the above-described automatic effect function will function. However, even if it is the production example shown in FIG. 371 and FIG. 369 and 370(f) unless the processing for setting the automatic button effect state is performed by performing the second operation in the early end state. Needless to say, the same production situation will appear.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, the specific production acceptance period is generated after a predetermined time has passed since the end of the ``prohibited period in which the setting processing to the automatic button production state is not permitted''. A specific effect acceptance period may be generated (connected to the prohibition period) immediately after the "prohibited period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not permitted" is terminated. That is, in this case, if the prohibition period occurs when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect acceptance period occurs while the opportunity to set the automatic button effect state remains prohibited. It is possible to raise the player's willingness to participate when the performance reception period is not generated.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, during the "prohibited period in which the setting process to the automatic button production state is not permitted", when the production is accepted within the specific production acceptance period that occurs after that, Any one of a plurality of performance modes having different rates of appearance of a performance mode with a relatively high degree of expectation as a performance after operation and a rate of appearance of a big hit pattern in a pattern variation in an execution state may appear.

Also, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 371 and 372, based on the result of the big hit determination,
・When in the third state in which the effect image shown in FIG. Multiple production modes with different degrees of destruction of the image with a chain attached to it", etc.)
・When in the second state where the effect image shown in FIG. A plurality of second effect modes (for example, "a plurality of effect modes with different colors of the image NJG", etc.) with different rates (expectations) of appearance of the third effect mode that is most advantageous to the player among the modes. make any appear
372(b) and (c), when in the first state in which the effect images appear, when the second state is entered, out of the plurality of second effect modes, "a specific second effect mode (a plurality of A plurality of first effect modes (for example, "a plurality of effect modes with different background image colors , etc.), and so on. According to such a configuration, while the performance progresses within the prohibition period or the process of ending the prohibition period early is executed, the degree of expectation can be suggested step by step by the performances related to each other. As a result, it is expected that the interest in the game during the prohibition period can be preferably maintained, and that the early termination of the prohibition period will be promoted to increase the player's willingness to participate. In this sense, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are executed as effects in which the movable decorative body cannot move, and only the third effect mode, which directly leads to the early termination of the prohibition period, is allowed to move in a predetermined manner. It is desirable to be able to execute it as an effect mode for moving the decoration. A predetermined movable decorative body is operated when a specific third performance mode among a plurality of third performance modes appears, and a predetermined movable decoration when a third performance mode different from the specific third performance mode appears. You may choose not to move your body.

370(e), (f) and FIGS. 372(f), (g), the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) The above-mentioned effect (specific operation It may be executed as a related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350)).

Also, in the examples of effects shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, it has been explained that the specific effect acceptance period is always generated after the ``prohibited period in which the setting processing to the automatic button effect state is not permitted'' is generated. However, it is not always necessary to generate a specific effect reception period, and after generating a ``prohibited period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed'', the pattern fluctuation will stop without the specific effect reception period occurring. You may make it prepare the production|presentation pattern which can be performed.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, the "prohibited period in which the setting processing to the automatic button production state is not allowed" is a production pattern with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, super reach state It is desirable that a performance pattern with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, a performance pattern in which a super ready-to-win state occurs) has a higher appearance rate than a performance pattern in which a . In other words, in this case, even though a performance pattern with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit appears, the opportunity to execute the setting process to the automatic button performance state is forcibly lost for a predetermined period of time. It is expected that the player's participation in the operation can be urged, and the player's willingness to participate in winning a big win will increase.

However, if the process of setting the automatic button effect state is completely prohibited for a predetermined period of time, the player's interest in the automatic button effect state will inevitably decrease. As shown, when a certain amount of time has passed, the player can cancel the prohibition period early, and when the cancellation is made, the player's setting operation to the automatic button effect state is allowed again. It is desirable to

Regarding the setting operation to the automatic button effect state, the operation target set by the player's operation may be other operation means such as the touch panel, the sword ornament 5001, the cross key, etc. in addition to the operation button 410 . Alternatively, the prohibition period may be terminated early by operating an operation object other than the operation object used when setting the automatic button effect state, or when setting the automatic button effect state. The prohibition period may be terminated early by operating the operation target to be used. However, if the prohibition period is terminated early by operating the operation target used when setting the automatic button effect state, the mode of operation (single press, long press, etc.) should be different from each other. is desirable.

As described above, FIGS. 369 to 372 show examples of effects that employ the "automatic button effect state setting process" as the "specific processing related to effects". is not limited to However, regarding the "specific processing related to the effect", even if the pattern variation is performed in any type as the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination, within the execution period of the pattern variation, the operation means It is desirable to be able to perform operations.

[Automatic presentation function for movable operating means]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when applying the above-mentioned another example) Even if is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change in effect as when the operation is performed can be executed. Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of symbol variation, by operating a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) The automatic button production state can be set, and by such simplification of the operation, the automatic button production state can be set while keeping an eye on the progress of the production during the pattern change. ing.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the operation means include the operation button 410 and a movable operation device provided to be operable between the original position and the operation position by a predetermined driving force. means (here, sword ornament 5001), and in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player can operate the movable operation means (here, sword ornament 5001) within the effect acceptance period. Even if the operation is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change in the effect as when the operation is performed.

By the way, when the effect receiving period for the movable operating means (here, the sword ornament 5001) occurs, the movable operating means is moved to the original position by a predetermined driving force, as shown in FIG. In some cases, the player is given an opportunity to operate the movable operating means so as to first move the movable operating means from the position to the operating position and then operate the movable operating means in the moved state. Note that, in this operation opportunity, the performance reception may be performed by an operation of moving from the operation position to a position different from the original position instead of the operation of returning from the operation position to the original position.

However, when such an effect reception period occurs, there is a possibility that some abnormality or failure has occurred in the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001), which causes the movable operation means (here, If the sword decorative body 5001) cannot be driven from the original position to the operating position, the operation opportunity shown in FIG. There is a concern that the corresponding post-operation production cannot occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) has some kind of abnormality/failure. Even if the effect receiving period as shown in FIG. When the effect reception period is set, a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the specific operation by the player from the operation position is detected within the effect reception period can be executed. .

According to such a configuration, even if the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) becomes inoperable due to some kind of abnormality or failure, the movable operation means can be moved by using the automatic presentation function. It is possible to properly make the post-operation performance using the operation means appear.

However, when the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is in a state of being unable to operate due to some abnormality or failure, the operation of the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration 5001) itself cannot be performed. Since this is a difficult situation, if it is required to operate the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) in order to set the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button Setting to the effect state (specific effect state) cannot be performed, and after all, the effect after the operation corresponding to the effect reception to the movable operating means (here, the sword ornament 5001) cannot be generated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, first, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) Even if the performance reception period occurs for any of the above, the same performance change as when the operation means (here, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is operated. Processing can be executed (automatic effect function). On top of this, the setting to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed only by operating the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001). It is supposed to be

That is, in this case, only by operating the general push-type operation button 410 instead of the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) that may become inoperable when an abnormality or failure occurs, An automatic button effect state (specific effect state) corresponding to both the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) can be generated. Therefore, even if an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) during the execution period of the pattern variation, the operation of the operation button 410 sets the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). is performed, it is possible to appropriately generate the post-operation effect in response to the reception of the effect to the movable operating means (here, the sword ornament 5001).

In order to appropriately ensure operability in the event of such an abnormality or failure, the operation means (here, the operation button 410) used for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) , it is important that it is provided as an operation means that is basically non-driven (to the extent that it vibrates even if there is a drive system) that is not subject to the above-mentioned restoration process in the event of an abnormality or failure. I can say.

However, even if the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) has an abnormality or failure, as long as the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) maintains a stopped state, the abnormality or failure Since it is difficult for the player side to recognize that it is in this state, it cannot be expected that the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) will be set.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when an abnormality/failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) at the start timing (or end timing) of the pattern variation , the restoration process is executed to return the movable operating means (here, the sword ornament 5001) to the normal state (original position). It should be noted that the restoration process can be executed as the processing contents described above. , is repeatedly executed up to a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) until a proper return to the original position is achieved.

According to such a configuration, by confirming that the restoration process is started for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) at the start timing (or end timing) of the pattern variation, the movable operation can be performed. The player side can recognize that the means (here, the sword ornament 5001) is abnormal or out of order. Furthermore, as a result of the execution of the restoring process, by confirming whether or not the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has been properly returned to the original position, the movable operating means (here, the sword The player side determines whether the restoration process for the ornament 5001) has succeeded and the abnormality/failure state has been resolved, or whether the restoration process has failed and the abnormality/failure state continues. be able to recognize. That is, in this case, when the player side recognizes that the restoration process has failed and the state in which the abnormality/failure has occurred continues, the operation button 410 is operated to switch to an automatic button effect state (specific effect state). By setting , even if the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is in a state of abnormality or failure, the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) It is possible to properly generate a post-operation performance in response to the reception of the performance.

However, after confirming that the restoration process has failed for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) in the state where an abnormality or failure has occurred, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. Even if it is done, before the automatic button effect state occurs (for example, during the execution period of the restoration process), the effect acceptance period for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) will occur. If there is, there is a concern that it will not be possible to properly generate the post-operation effect in response to the reception of the effect to the movable operating means (here, the sword ornament 5001).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of , the maximum time (restoration operation (5 Second operation) is repeated up to the maximum number of times (for example, 3 times)) and the time required for setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) (here, 2 seconds). It is possible to execute the process of developing the performance so that the special performance acceptance period is generated only after the period has elapsed.

According to such a configuration, when the pattern variation is started in the effect pattern that can generate the special effect acceptance period in which the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) is provided with an operation opportunity, the movable operation is performed. Even if the means (here, the sword ornament 5001) has an abnormality/failure, the player recognizes that the abnormality/failure has occurred before the special effect acceptance period occurs. Then, since it becomes possible to perform the setting operation to the automatic button production state (specific production state), the operation after operation corresponding to the reception of the production to the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is appropriate. can be generated at That is, in the automatic button production state (specific production state), even if the special production reception period occurs in a state where the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) is abnormal or broken, the special production The same change as when the movable operating means is operated within the reception period is caused in the performance.

FIG. 373 is a time chart showing an example of such effect processing.

As shown in FIG. 373, in the example of this effect processing, when an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operating means (here, the sword ornament 5001), the movable operating means (here, the Now, restoration processing for restoring the sword ornament 5001) to normal is executed for a maximum of 15 seconds. Also, it takes two seconds for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state. In addition, the special effect reception period can be continued for a maximum of 3 seconds, and the post-operation effect in response to the operation of the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) being received is , 10 seconds.

In view of these time setting values, first, the effect patterns (fluctuation patterns) that can cause the special effect reception period are 15 seconds (restoration processing), 2 seconds (setting operation), 3 seconds (special effect reception period), and 10 seconds (effect after operation), respectively, which is longer than “30 seconds”, and 15 seconds (restoration processing) and 2 seconds (setting operation) are added to “17 If the effect is not developed so as to generate the special effect acceptance period at a timing later than the second, the pattern change ( It is not possible to ensure the above-mentioned performance when the performance pattern that can generate the special performance reception period) is started.

Therefore, in the figure, as a plurality of production patterns that can be selected based on the result of the big hit determination, production patterns A to E to which different times (symbol fluctuation time of 11 seconds to 60 seconds) are assigned are exemplified. However, in the production patterns A to C to which only a time shorter than the above-mentioned additional time "30 seconds" is allocated, only the production progress in which the special production acceptance period cannot occur is executed. . On the other hand, in the effect patterns D and E to which a time longer than the above-mentioned additional time "30 seconds" is assigned, the special effect reception period can be generated, but the symbol variation is started. 17 seconds (additional time of 15 seconds (restoration processing) and 2 seconds (setting operation)) after 10:00 to 10:00. In order to ensure the above-mentioned performance when the pattern variation (a performance pattern that can cause a special performance reception period) is started in a state where the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) is abnormal or out of order. I have to.

In this example of the effect processing, the special effect reception period can be generated in all of the plurality of effect patterns to which the time longer than the above-mentioned additional time "30 seconds" is allocated. A special effect receiving period may be generated only in a part of a plurality of effect patterns to which a time longer than "30 seconds" is allocated.

However, in fact, if the special effect reception period occurs immediately after the additional time of 15 seconds (restoration processing) and 2 seconds (setting operation) has passed since the pattern fluctuation started, the restoration processing fails. If the setting operation to the automatic button production state (specific production state) is not performed immediately after recognizing that it has been done, the special production acceptance period is generated in the state where the setting has been changed to the automatic button production state (specific production state). Impossible and unrealistic. That is, when the player recognizes that the restoration process has failed, it usually takes time to determine whether or not to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Unless the above time setting values are designed with such time values in mind, it can be said that the above effects are not effective.

In this regard, what is designed including such a time value is a multiple operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds), and a long-press effective period (for example, 10 seconds) during which an effect is accepted and an effect after operation is generated when the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given is maintained in an operating state for a predetermined time or longer. During the valid period (effect acceptance period), even if the operation is started after the occurrence of the valid period, it is possible to operate multiple times or press and hold for an appropriate number of times and for an appropriate time until the valid period ends. It is possible to do it over a period of time.

In view of this fact, in the time setting described above, instead of two seconds (setting operation), a multiple operation effective period (e.g., 8 seconds) or a long press effective period (e.g., 10 seconds) should be used. It is desirable to That is, in this case, the effect pattern (variation pattern) that can cause the special effect acceptance period is "15 seconds (restoration process)", "8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation valid period or long press valid period)", A time longer than "36 seconds" or "38 seconds" obtained by adding "3 seconds (special effect acceptance period)" and "10 seconds (post-operation effect)" respectively, and "15 seconds (restoration process)" and "8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation valid period or long press valid period)" are added to generate a special effect acceptance period at a timing later than "23 seconds" or "25 seconds". Only the effect pattern E among the effect patterns A to E can be executed as the effect pattern that satisfies the condition.

Note that the effective period of multiple operations (e.g., 8 seconds) and the effective period of long press (e.g., 10 seconds) do not necessarily occur in the effect patterns (fluctuation patterns) that can generate the special effect acceptance period. Alternatively, it may occur in a different effect pattern. Also, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) may generate only one of the multiple operation valid period (eg, 8 seconds) and the long press valid period (eg, 10 seconds). will set the length of the effective period on the generating side instead of 2 seconds (setting operation). Also, if the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) is capable of generating both a multiple operation effective period (e.g., 8 seconds) and a long press effective period (e.g., 10 seconds), these effective periods It is desirable to set the long side of , instead of 2 seconds (setting operation).

In addition, in the game state in which the time saving function is valid, it is required to digest the pattern fluctuations one after another in a shorter time, so in the game state in which the time saving function is valid, each time setting The design may not necessarily be performed. However, in this case, there is a concern that the special effect acceptance period will occur during the period during which the restoration process is being executed for the movable operating means (here, the sword ornament 5001). Therefore, even during the period in which the restoration process is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001), the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled by the player's setting operation. It is desirable to be able to According to such a configuration, even during a period in which restoration processing is being performed on the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the post-operation effect as the effect using the movable operating means can be executed, and efficient processing can be realized in which both restoration processing and post-operation effects for the movable operating means (here, the sword ornament 5001) are performed in parallel. Note that this process is not limited to the game state in which the time saving function is enabled, and may be applied to the game state in which the time saving function is not enabled. will not be performed.

In addition, in the example of the effect processing described with reference to FIG. 373, the effect using the movable operation means may be executed as one of the effects shown in FIGS. 279 to 350. . When a specific operation-related effect is executed, the "effect using the movable operating means" shown in the figure is realized as a effect that sequentially performs the specific operation-related effect, the special effect acceptance period, and the post-operation effect. The Rukoto.

Also, the special effect reception period during which the operation opportunity is given to the movable operating means (here, the sword ornament 5001) only when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled does not occur. When the special performance acceptance period occurs, even if no operation is performed, the performance acceptance for the movable operating means may be always performed within the special performance acceptance period, and the performance after the operation may appear. In addition, when it is not controlled to the automatic button production state (specific production state), at least during the pattern fluctuation in the normal game state, there is an opportunity to operate the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001). To generate an effect receiving period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operating means (here, the operation button 410) which is not subject to the restoration process described above in the event of an abnormality or failure, although no special effect receiving period is generated. is possible. During the effect acceptance period in which operation opportunities are given to operating means (here, operation buttons 410) that are not subject to the above-described restoration processing in the event of an abnormality or failure, the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. It can also occur when When such a configuration is adopted, the above-described design for each time setting may be performed. It is possible to ensure the above-mentioned performance when the performance pattern that can generate the special performance reception period is started in the state where abnormality/failure occurs.

In addition, in the example of this effect processing, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed by the player's setting operation, but control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not necessarily performed by the player's operation, for example, it is controlled based on the result of the big hit determination, or the setting itself to the automatic button production state is not performed, and the automatic production function always functions It may be provided as a game machine that can play.

[Movable production triggered by the establishment of conditions different from the conditions of the symbol game]
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a), when a game ball is received in the starting port (the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004), the hit is determined. As a result, when a big win is won, a big win game is executed in which a large amount of game balls can be obtained after executing a pattern change to display the big win pattern, and after the big win game, it is advantageous to the player. It can be controlled to a game state (time saving state, variable probability state). In addition, while such a symbol game is being performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a provides effects (for example, in addition to effects patterns, timer effects, operation effects, anticipation effects, etc.) according to the results of determinations about winning. etc.) can be executed, thereby maintaining the interest in the game until the big hit game is performed, as described above.

However, if the main control MPU 1310a only performs the effect according to the symbol game, the display change in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decoration (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back inside movable effect unit 3200, and the specific There is a concern that the decoration member SDY (blind blinds, etc.) will become monotonous, making it difficult to maintain the pachinko machine 1 at a high operating rate over a long period of time.

Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, even when another condition that is not related to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol variation (symbol game start condition) is satisfied, the display content and the movable state on the effect display device 1600 are satisfied. It is possible to execute a process that can change the behavior of the decoration. That is, in this case, display changes and movable body motions appear in a mode beyond the category of the symbol game, and by eliminating the monotony, the pachinko machine 1 can be maintained at a high operating rate for a long period of time. can be expected.

Here, when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol variation (symbol game start condition) is established, the display contents and the behavior of the movable decoration on the effect display device 1600 change. As a method for generating, for example, each method listed below can be assumed. It should be noted that any of the following methods may be used to change the display content and the behavior of the movable decoration on the effect display device 1600 when another condition unrelated to the starting condition of the symbol game is satisfied. Alternatively, a method different from any of the methods listed below may be adopted, but the situation where the symbol variation is not temporarily executed (the processing flag shown in FIG. 256 is “0” and the number of pending is "0"), the above-mentioned another condition must be able to be satisfied, and even if another condition is satisfied in this situation, the display content on the effect display device 1600 It must be possible to change the behavior of the movable decoration.
・Periodically execute a lottery that has nothing to do with pattern fluctuations, and the above-mentioned “satisfaction of another condition” means that a specific result is obtained in this lottery ・Accumulated number of operations for a specific operation means reaches a predetermined number as described above as "establishment of another condition" ・Time is measured by the RTC (real time clock) function or arithmetic processing in the peripheral control MPU 1511a (or the main control MPU 1310a) (for example, when the power is turned on) Measure the time from

Generally, in a pachinko machine, when the time measured using the RTC function reaches a predetermined time, it is assumed that another condition has been established, and a method of causing a change in the display content and the behavior of the movable decoration on the effect display device 1600. are often adopted. However, regardless of which method is adopted, if a change is caused to the display content or the behavior of the movable body when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, the change timing will come. Since it is common to require a relatively long time (at least several hours, etc.) for the If there is a situation where it is impossible to play, it is feared that the interest in the game will decrease.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a specific state (for example, RTC state) in which the movable body operation timing for operating the movable decorative body in a specific manner is set in advance is set as a condition for starting the symbol game. can occur based on the establishment of another specific condition (for example, the time measured by the RTC function reaches a predetermined time). In addition, in a situation where the movable decoration is in an abnormal state (for example, it is not in the original position even though it should be in the original position, etc.) and the specific state does not occur, the pattern variation does not occur. When the time for the corresponding restoration operation arrives, it is possible to start the process of causing the movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation. In such a situation, it is possible to start the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time within the specific state without starting the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation even when the predetermined restoration operation time arrives. .

That is, in this case, in a specific state that can occur based on the establishment of a specific condition other than the condition for starting the symbol game, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol fluctuation side is prohibited. Since it is possible to start the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in the specific state, the movable body abnormality is corrected in a predetermined procedure in the specific state without being affected by the execution status of the pattern variation. It is expected that the movable ornament will be restored and the operation in the specific mode (the operation when another condition is satisfied) will be executed more reliably.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 374, an example of processing contents when the movable decoration is operated when such a specific condition is satisfied will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 374, for convenience of explanation, "RTC state in which different display contents appear when it is determined that the elapsed time from power-on has reached a predetermined time using the RTC function ( A specific state) is generated, and three movable decorations A, B, and C are sequentially operated in accordance with the generation timing of the RTC state (specific state)”. As described above, the method of causing a change in the display contents of the effect display device 1600 or the behavior of the movable decoration when another condition (specific condition) unrelated to the game start condition is established is not limited to this. That is, even when other methods are adopted, it is possible to appropriately adopt each technique described below.

Assuming that the current state is before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines the remaining time until the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time (until the RTC state occurs). remaining time) will be updated periodically. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 374, the RTC state (specific state) is generated at timing Rt2 when the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time. It is possible to execute a process of sequentially operating the three movable ornaments A, B, and C based on what has been done. In this way, the three movable decorations A, B, and C are sequentially operated based on the establishment of the condition (the establishment of the second condition) irrelevant to the situation of the pattern fluctuation, so that the flow of the game so far is changed. You will be able to have a sense of expectation as if it will change. At this time, the content displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be changed.

In addition, in order to more preferably increase the sense of expectation when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, for example, the RTC state is functioned as a presentation period limited to a predetermined time (10 minutes), and the presentation is performed. If a big win is won during the period (RTC state) from the occurrence to the end, the production progress ( It is more desirable to have an effect privilege such as enabling a special effect mode).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 374, a condition irrelevant to the situation of symbol fluctuation is established at timing Rt1 which is a little before such timing Rt2 (for example, 5 seconds before). Based on the establishment of the condition (the establishment of the first condition), a pre-display indicating that the RTC state will soon occur (the second condition will be established) can be executed. That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this example, by periodically confirming the passage of time after power-on, it is determined whether or not the timing Rt1 has arrived in addition to the timing Rt2. When it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, the previous display (display change) appears, and when it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, processing (behavior of the movable decoration) corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is executed. . As the "previous display", for example, it is possible to execute a display such as "RTC status coming soon" or a countdown display toward timing Rt2.

According to such a configuration, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in accordance with the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, these movable body movements are the result of the big hit determination. Since it is suggested to the player in advance that it is not based on (has no expectation of a big hit), it is possible to suitably avoid the decline in the interest in the game due to the player's recognition error. be able to

In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at least during the period between timings Rt1 and Rt2, only the display showing no degree of expectation (display not conforming to symbol variation) appears as the display content on the effect display device 1600. This is hidden so that the decorative pattern (effect pattern) itself is not displayed. That is, in this case, the three movable decorations A, B, and C are sequentially operated while only the display that does not show any degree of expectation (display that does not conform to the pattern variation) is displayed as the display content on the effect display device 1600. Since the process of making the game is started, it is expected that the loss of interest in the game due to the player's misrecognition can be more suitably avoided.

Here, "pre-display that appears at timing Rt1" and "movable object action that appears at timing Rt2" respectively correspond to "display that does not conform to pattern variation" and "behavior of the movable ornament that does not conform to pattern variation". It is something to do. Therefore, at the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the display and the behavior of the movable body respectively occur regardless of the execution status (including execution/non-execution) of the symbol variation at those timings. However, depending on the execution status of the pattern variation, there may be a situation in which preparations for moving the movable decorations A, B, and C are not complete (even though the timing Rt2 has arrived, the movable decorations A, B, and C have returned to their original positions). , etc.) may occur, and even though the timing Rt2 has finally arrived, it is feared that the process of sequentially moving the movable decorations A, B, and C cannot be performed.

For example, when one of several variation patterns is selected as the pattern variation according to the result of the big hit determination, during the period during which the pattern variation is performed, the movable decoration A, the movable decoration B, A movable effect using the movable decorative body C may be executed. If this happens, at least the movable decorations that are in the middle of execution among the movable decorations A, B, and C cannot be used as the above-mentioned "behavior of the movable decorations that does not conform to the pattern fluctuation". can be assumed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern variation comes, not only the movable decorations A, B, and C, but also various movable It is possible to determine whether or not the decorative body is in the original position (normal state) or not. Then, when it is determined (abnormality determination) that there is a movable decoration that is not in a normal state in this movable abnormality determination, a predetermined action is performed on the movable decoration determined as the determination target in a manner following the abnormality determination processing. By executing a restoration process for performing a restoration operation (movement to the original position, etc.), it is possible to quickly restore the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. Therefore, during the execution of restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation (movement to the original position, etc.) for the movable decorative body, the movable body movement timing within the above-described RTC state may come. If there is, at least the movable decorations that are in the middle of the restoration operation among the movable decorations A, B, and C cannot be used as the above-mentioned "behavior of the movable decorations that does not conform to the pattern fluctuation". can be assumed.

In addition, as the "restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern variation", for example, the start timing of the pattern variation (timing to acquire the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the pattern variation is started), and the symbol variation It is possible to execute (execute the restoration process based on the acquisition of the command) at least one of the stop timing (timing to acquire the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the pattern fluctuation is stopped). is.

Therefore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. mode (here, the three movable decorations A, B, and C operate sequentially), the movable decorations (movable decorations A, movable decorations B , movable decorative body C) is prohibited from being used as a movable effect according to the effect pattern on the pattern fluctuation side, so that the movable body operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (movable decoration that does not conform to the pattern change It is possible to suppress the situation where the body behavior) cannot be performed due to the movable effect on the symbol variation side.

However, at this time, there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered if the movable effect is not executed in the effect pattern even though the effect pattern corresponding to the movable effect is displayed. In this regard, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. I mentioned above that there are

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, when the timing Rt2 arrives, when there is a pattern variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) in the middle of the execution, the "no expectation" that has been displayed until then is displayed. The display that is never shown (display from timing Rt1)” is not hidden at this time, and this is continued until timing Rt2a when the pattern variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) is stopped. I try to keep it.

According to such a configuration, at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a, despite the fact that the RTC state (specific state) occurs and the pattern variation is actually performed, in the effect display device 1600, the decoration Effect patterns based on symbols are hidden, and only a display that does not show any degree of expectation appears. Then, while such a display is appearing, the movement of the movable decorations (here, the sequential movement of the three movable decorations A, B, and C) progresses according to the occurrence of the RTC state. It is expected that the decline in the interest in the game due to the movable effect corresponding to the effect pattern not being executed within the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a can be suitably suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 374, when the timing Rt2 arrives, the symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution is terminated (stopped) (when the timing Rt2a arrives). , Even if it is within the operation period of the movable decoration corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the "display that does not show any degree of expectation (display from timing Rt1)" that has been displayed until then is not displayed at this point. , a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) can appear after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state). After that, when a new pattern variation (variation C (loss) in the figure) is started, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decoration corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the pattern variation will be applied. The display showing the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern and the advance notice effect is started as usual.

However, even if a new pattern variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started and the effect pattern is displayed in this way, the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs has arrived. , and until the movable ornaments operate in a specific manner (here, the three movable ornaments A, B, and C sequentially operate) depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. Needless to say, the movable performance on the side of pattern variation using any one of the movable decoration A, the movable decoration B, and the movable decoration C is prohibited. In this state, the movable performance on the symbol variation side is prohibited, but since the movable body motion corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is in the middle of execution, the game by prohibiting the movable performance on the symbol variation side. The decline in interest will be suppressed.

As such a prohibition process, it is determined whether the situation should be prohibited at the start of the pattern variation (C variation in the figure), and when it is determined that the situation should be prohibited, the corresponding symbol variation ( Among them, C variation) itself may be set as a prohibition target for movable effects (movable effects using at least one of movable decoration A, movable decoration B, and movable decoration C). That is, in this case, after the timing Rt2 at which the "RTC state (specific state) occurs" in the middle of the corresponding symbol variation (variation C in the figure), the movable ornament is activated by the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. Even if the period until the operation in a specific mode (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorations A, B, and C) is completed, the movable effect ( Execution of the movable effect using at least one of the movable decoration A, the movable decoration B, and the movable decoration C) is not permitted.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 374, the timing to make the specific background (for example, during the RTC state) appear after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is the timing Rt2a later than the original timing Rt2. There are concerns about a decline in However, although the RTC state itself occurs at timing Rt2, the special effect mode is controlled to the special effect mode if the jackpot is won between the occurrence of the RTC state and the end of the RTC state. etc.) does not occur at timing Rt2, and only symbol variations after the first symbol variation (C and D variations in the figure) that are digested after the occurrence of the RTC state are targeted. , it can be said that it is appropriate to cause the specific background (for example, during the RTC state) to appear when the timing Rt2a arrives.

By the way, until the timing Rt2 arrives, the pattern variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution is completed (stopped) (until the timing Rt2a arrives) ), "After the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable ornament operates in a specific mode depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (here, three movable ornaments A, B, It is also possible to assume a case in which a period of time" elapses until the sequential operation by C) is completed. However, even in this case, as long as the timing Rt2a does not arrive, the state in which the "display showing no degree of expectation (display from the timing Rt1)" appears is maintained. In the example shown in FIG. 374, the pattern variation (variation B in the figure) that is executed across the occurrence of the RTC state (before and after timing Rt2) is subject to the RTC effect privilege. because they are not.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), at least after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the "RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable ornament is in the specific state according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. (Here, the three movable decorations A, B, and C sequentially operate) are in the "period until the end of the operation", even if the timing of the restoration operation corresponding to the pattern fluctuation has arrived, the restoration process is triggered by this. By prohibiting this (processing to perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decoration in an abnormal state) so that this is not performed, the movable body operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (not according to the pattern fluctuation) (behavior of the movable decoration) can be prevented from occurring due to the restoration processing on the side of pattern variation.

According to such a configuration, in an RTC state (specific state) that can occur based on the establishment of a specific condition other than the game start condition, a predetermined restoration operation corresponding to the pattern fluctuation side is performed. Influence of the execution status of symbol fluctuation It is expected that the abnormal state of the movable body will be restored in a predetermined procedure within the RTC state (specific state) without being affected, and that the movable decorative body will perform the operation in the above-mentioned specific mode more reliably. .

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 374, when the control is in the normal game state and the symbol variation (in the figure, A variation (losing) in the figure) corresponding to the big hit determination is being performed. It is assumed that the above timing Rt1 arrives. As described above, first, at the timing Rt1, as a display that does not conform to the pattern variation, for example, a display such as "RTC state coming soon" appears in the background display of the effect display device 1600. FIG. Then, the symbol variation (variation A (losing) in the figure) ends after the display of "RTC state coming soon" until the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs, and a new symbol is generated. Variation (variation B (loss)) is started. Then, the timing Rt2 arrives when the pattern variation is in the middle of the process. A process for sequentially operating the decorations A, B, and C is executed. It should be noted that the "display not conforming to symbol variation" from timing Rt1 is continued until the new symbol variation (variation B (loss) in the figure) is stopped.

Also, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 374, "3 movable decorations A, During the period until the sequential operations of B and C are completed (normal: timings Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal: timings Rt2 to Rt5′), at least movable decorations A, B, and This is prohibited so that neither the movable effect on the symbol variation side using C nor the restoration processing on the symbol variation side is performed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, in the period from timing Rt2 to Rt2a, although the symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) is executed, the effect display on the symbol variation side ( The display showing the degree of expectation), the movable effect on the symbol fluctuation side (the movement of the movable body showing the degree of expectation), and the restoration process on the side of the symbol fluctuation are controlled as a period in which neither is executed (second one limitation). On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 374, during the period from timing Rt2a to Rt5, the effect display on the symbol variation side (display indicating the degree of expectation) is executed, but the movable effect on the symbol variation side (expectation level) is executed. It is controlled as a period in which neither the movable body motion indicating the degree of movement nor the restoration process on the symbol fluctuation side is executed (second restriction).

It should be noted that the control at such timings Rt2 to Rt2a (both the effect display on the symbol variation side (display indicating the degree of expectation) and the movable effect (motion of the movable body indicating the degree of expectation) are not executed). Even if the symbol variation in the period is based on the winning of the big win (jackpot variation) instead of the loss variation, it is carried out. That is, in this case, at timing Rt2a when no expected performance is being executed and the sequential actions of the three movable decorations A, B, and C are in the middle of execution, the jackpot pattern suddenly appears. Therefore, the player who expected to enter the RTC state can enjoy the surprise performance that exceeds the expectation. After the appearance of the big win pattern, the big win game state occurs while the three movable decorations A, B and C are sequentially operated.

Also, as described above, regarding the display from the timing Rt1 (only the display that does not show even the variation of the decoration pattern and does not show any degree of expectation), the symbol variation that was being executed when the timing Rt2 came. It is hidden at the timing Rt2a when it is stopped, and instead of this, a specific background after the occurrence of the RTC state (such as "in RTC state") is displayed. In addition, when a pattern variation (variation pattern C in the figure) is newly started in a state where a specific background (such as "in RTC state") is displayed, an effect display (expectation degree is shown) according to the variation pattern. displayed) will now run normally. However, as for the movable effect on the design variation side using the movable decorations A, B, and C, unless the processing of sequentially operating the three movable decorations A, B, and C is completed, after the timing Rt2a arrives. is also maintained as a prohibited state. Therefore, based on the result of the big hit determination, even if an effect pattern in which the movable effect on the symbol variation side using any one of the movable decorations A, B, and C is temporarily selected, the movable effect is performed. Although the display in the liquid crystal, sound, lamp lighting, etc. are performed as usual, the corresponding movable decoration is made not to operate.

Also, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 374, after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the three movable decorative bodies A and B , C until the sequential operation is completed (normal: timings Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal: timings Rt2 to Rt5′)”, the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation (here, the start of the symbol variation This is prohibited so that restoration processing (processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation to the movable ornament in an abnormal state) will not be performed even if the timing, stop timing) arrives. . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at the timing Rt2a, the symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) is stopped (restoration operation time), the symbol variation (C variation (loss) is )), the start timing (restoration operation timing) of )) arrives, but at these restoration operation timings, even if there is a movable decoration that is in an abnormal state, the movable decoration will be restored. No processing is performed.

However, during the period of timings Rt2 to Rt5 (timings Rt2 to Rt5' in the event of an abnormality), instead of prohibiting the restoration process on the symbol fluctuation side, first, at timing Rt2, the movable decoration A enters an abnormal state. Determine whether or not Then, in the example shown in FIG. 374(f), it is determined that the movable decoration A is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decoration A is operated in the normal operation mode. A process for operation (normal operation) is executed. Here, the normal operating mode of the movable decoration A is, for example, moving the movable decoration A from its original position to a predetermined rendering position (first position) and then moving it to the predetermined rendering position. It can be realized as an operation mode for moving the movable decoration A to the original position.

Next, at a timing Rt3 after the normal operation of the movable decoration A ends, it is determined whether or not the movable decoration B is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 374(f), it is determined that the movable decoration B is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decoration B is operated in the normal operation mode. A process for operating (normal operation) is executed. Here, the normal operating mode of the movable decoration B is, for example, moving the movable decoration B from its original position to a predetermined rendering position (second position) and then moving it to the predetermined rendering position. It can be realized as an operation mode of moving the movable decoration B to the original position.

Then, at a timing Rt4 after the normal operation of the movable decoration B is completed, it is determined whether or not the movable decoration C is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 374(f), it is determined that the movable decoration C is not in an abnormal state. A process for operating (normal operation) is executed. Here, the normal operating mode of the movable decoration C is, for example, moving the movable decoration C from its original position to a predetermined rendering position (third position) and then moving it to the predetermined rendering position. It can be realized as an operation mode for moving the movable decoration C to the original position.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 374(e), when the timing Rt5 comes after the respective operations of the movable decorations A, B, and C are sequentially completed, the RTC state (specific state) occurs. The "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not correspond to the pattern variation" is ended, and the prohibition of the restoration process on the side of the pattern variation is cancelled.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable decorations A, B, and C are in an abnormal state in any one of the abnormality determinations, the movable decorations in the abnormal state are processed to perform a predetermined restoration operation. is executable. However, during the execution of a series of movable body motions (here, sequential motions by the three movable decorations A, B, and C) when the RTC state occurs, a predetermined If the player senses that the restoration operation is being performed, the player loses interest in the game, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in an abnormal state is performed as a series of movable body movements (here, three movable body movements) when the RTC state occurs. Instead of being executed independently as a separate action from the sequential action of the decorations A, B, and C), it is executed as a special mode of action including the action of restoring the movable decorations in an abnormal state. . That is, in this case, it is possible to make it appear as if the predetermined restoration operation itself for the movable ornament in the abnormal state is an operation incorporated in a part of the operation when the RTC state occurs. Thus, it is possible to suitably avoid a decrease in amusement in a game when a predetermined restoration operation is performed on a movable ornament in an abnormal state.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 374(f), it is assumed that it is determined that the movable decoration B is in an abnormal state at the timing Rt3 after the normal operation of the movable decoration A ends. However, based on the result of the abnormality determination, it is not a process to operate the movable decoration B in the normal operation mode (normal operation), but an abnormal time including an operation to restore (restore) the movable decoration B. It is possible to execute a process of operating (special operation) in the operation mode of . After that, the restored (restored) movable ornament B is not operated (normal operation) again in the normal operation mode, and timing Rt4 (movable) shown in FIG. Timing after the normal operation by the decoration B is completed), it is determined whether or not the movable decoration C is in an abnormal state, and if the movable decoration C is not in an abnormal state, the movable decoration is determined. A process for causing the body C to operate in a normal operation mode (normal operation) is executed. The time required for normal operation by the movable decoration B and the time required for the special operation by the movable decoration B may or may not be the same.

According to such a configuration, even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decoration B after the RTC state has occurred (for example, during operation of the movable decoration A), the movable decoration B in which the abnormality has occurred can be detected. Until the timing to operate the comes, regardless of the situation on the symbol fluctuation side, it will be intentionally left as it is in an abnormal state. Then, when the timing to operate the movable decoration B comes, the movable decoration B is operated in a special mode including a restoration operation instead of the normal operation mode. It is possible to restore the abnormally generated movable decoration B while suitably maintaining the performance mode at the time of occurrence of the RTC state such as "sequential operation by the movable decorations A, B, and C". That is, in this case, since it is possible to make it appear as if one of a plurality of operation modes prepared as an operation when the RTC state occurs is executed, a predetermined restoration operation is performed for the movable ornament in an abnormal state. A decrease in amusement in the game when performing is preferably avoided.

In addition, the pattern variation (variation C (loss) in the figure) that starts at timing Rt2a is performed sequentially by the three movable decorations A, B, and C according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. It is started at an intermediate stage and continues until after the sequential operations of the three movable decorations A, B, and C are completed. Therefore, the timing of stopping (restoration operation timing) of pattern variation (variation C (losing) in the figure) and the start timing (restoring operation timing) of the next pattern variation (variation D (losing) in the figure) have arrived. At that time, since the prohibition of the restoration process on the symbol variation side has already been canceled, if there is a movable decoration that is in an abnormal state at that time, the restoration process is performed on the movable decoration. The Rukoto.

In the example shown in FIG. 374(f), when the movable decoration B is operated in the "special mode including the restoring action", the "special mode including the restoring action" is described as the "normal operation It is sufficient that the movable decoration B is restored (returned to the original position) in an operation manner different from the "mode", and for example, the minimum operation mode required to return the movable decoration B to the original position may be used.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at timing Rt1, only a display showing no degree of expectation (for example, "RTC status coming soon") appears as display content on the effect display device 1600. FIG. The display is maintained until the timing Rt2a arrives, but the display contents differ based on the occurrence of the RTC state at the timing Rt2 (for example, "RTC preparation state"). You may make it switch to. However, even if the display content is switched at the timing Rt2 and a new display appears, during the period from the timing Rt2 to Rt2a, the display content on the effect display device 1600 does not show any degree of expectation (symbol fluctuation). It is important to ensure that the display that does not conform to the standard) appears.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 374, the case where an abnormality occurs in the movable decoration B has been described. Instead, it is desirable to operate each in a special manner that includes restore operations.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 374, the movable body operation timing for operating the movable ornament in a specific mode is set as the generation timing of the RTC state (specific state). However, the movable body operation timing may be set to a timing when a predetermined time has passed since the RTC state (specific state) occurred.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 374, based on the arrival of the timings Rt1 and Rt2 where the condition is satisfied based on the function (RTC function) that does not conform to the symbol variation on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side, the "non-symbol variation display" and "behavior of the movable decoration that does not correspond to the pattern variation". However, instead of this, based on the command transmitted based on the function that does not conform to the pattern variation on the main control MPU 1310a side, "display that does not conform to the pattern variation" or "behavior of the movable decoration that does not conform to the pattern variation" may be started.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 374, "after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode (here, 3 During the period until the three movable ornaments A, B, and C complete the sequential operation, restoration processing on the side of pattern fluctuation is prohibited so that this is not performed, and this is the RTC state. It is made difficult to cause a situation in which the movable body movement in a specific mode in (specific state) (behavior of the movable decorative body that does not correspond to the pattern variation) cannot be performed due to conflict with the restoration process on the side of the pattern variation. However, if restoration processing for any one of the three movable decorations A, B, and C is started immediately before the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the restoration processing is executed. Among them, an RTC state (specific state) may occur, and eventually the movable body operation timing within the RTC state (specific state) may come. That is, in this case, the restoration process started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) causes the movable body to move in a specific manner (behavior of the movable decoration that does not correspond to the pattern variation) in the RTC state (specific state). It is feared that it will not be obtained. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, restoration processing is performed for at least three movable decorations A, B, and C among the various movable decorations provided in the pachinko machine 1 during the period from timing Rt1 to Rt2. It is desirable to prohibit this so that it is not executed.

FIG. 375 is a modification of the example shown in FIG. This is different from the example shown in FIG. 374 in that the restore process is not executed.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 375, during the period from the arrival of timing Rt1 to the occurrence of the RTC state (timings Rt1 to Rt2), abnormality determination (or , restore process). As a result, even if one of the three movable decorations A, B, and C is in an abnormal state while a display (such as "Coming soon RTC state") is being displayed that does not correspond to the pattern change, this is restored. Instead, it will be left in an abnormal state.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 375, when the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs, first, three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state (first abnormality determination).

As a result of the abnormality determination, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in any of the three movable decorations A, B, and C, it is assumed that the movable body operation time (second abnormality determination) within the RTC state has arrived. The above-described processing (processing related to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state) is performed with reference to . Therefore, when the three movable decorations A, B, and C are sequentially operated, the abnormality determination is again individually executed to determine whether the movable decorations to be operated are abnormal. When it is determined, the operation in the normal mode (see FIG. 374(e)) appears, and when it is determined that there is an abnormality, the operation in the special mode (see FIG. 374(f)) appears. That is, in this case, for example, in the movable ornament B, the first abnormality determination is executed prior to the start of the processing related to the movable body motion in the RTC state, and the processing related to the movable body motion in the RTC state is started. Even after that, the second abnormality determination is executed before the movable decorative body B is operated.

On the other hand, as a result of the above-described abnormality determination prior to executing the processing related to the movable body operation in the RTC state, it is determined that one of the three movable decorations A, B, and C has an abnormality. When the movable ornament is in the abnormal state, restoration processing is executed by delaying the arrival of the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. In other words, the situation in which the abnormality determination is made is "the situation in which the movable body operation timing within the RTC state has not yet arrived and the movable decorative body has not yet started to operate in a specific mode". By restoring the abnormal state of the movable decoration while maintaining the situation, the movement of the movable decoration in the specific mode can be executed in the "normal mode" instead of the above-mentioned "special mode". Become so.

For example, as shown in FIG. 375(f), at the timing Rt2 when the RTC state occurs, "the time for moving the movable body within the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the movable decoration will not operate in a specific mode." Suppose that it is determined that one of the three movable decorations A, B, and C has an abnormality as a result of the abnormality determination in the state where "the operation has not yet started." Then, the movable decoration that is determined to be abnormal remains in a state where the movable decoration has not yet started to operate in the RTC state, and the movable decoration has not yet started to operate in a specific mode. will be restored.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 375(e) and 375(f), compared to when it is determined that none of the three movable decorations A, B, and C are abnormal, in the RTC state The arrival of the movable body operation timing is delayed (delay from timing Rt2 to timing Rt2b in the figure), but the period created by such a delay (timings Rt2 to Rt2b in the figure) can be used. Then, after restoring the movable decorative body determined to be abnormal, the movable body operation time within the RTC state can be reached. After that, when the time for moving the movable body within the RTC state arrives, the processing as described above with reference to FIG. 374 is performed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 375(f), it is assumed that when the three movable decorations A, B, and C are operated in sequence, it is determined that none of the movable decorations is abnormal. are doing. That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorations A, B, and C will sequentially operate in the manner described with reference to FIG. 374(e). Then, when the timing Rt5b comes after the three movable decorations A, B, and C have sequentially operated in the normal mode, the "movable decorations that do not correspond to the pattern fluctuation" at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) "behavior" is ended, and the prohibition state (prohibition state from timings Rt1 to Rt5a) for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is released.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 375(g), when the three movable decorations A, B, and C are sequentially operated, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decoration B (timing After the abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) at Rt2 (or after restoration), a new abnormality occurs in the movable decoration B). That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorations A, B, and C will sequentially operate in the manner described with reference to FIG. 374(f). Then, after the three movable decorations A, B, and C have sequentially operated in a mode corresponding to each determination result (the movable decorations A and C are in the normal mode, and the movable decoration B is in the special mode) When the timing Rt5b arrives, the "behavior of the movable decoration that does not correspond to the pattern variation" at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is terminated, and the restoration process on the side of the pattern variation is prohibited (prohibited state from timings Rt1 to Rt5b). ) will be canceled. That is, in this case, for example, if an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B also in the first abnormality determination, restoration processing (restoration operation) according to the first abnormality determination and restoration processing according to the second abnormality determination and the operation in the special mode are executed respectively.

According to such a configuration, even if a movement abnormality occurs during the movement of the movable body immediately before or immediately after the start of the RTC state, a series of movable body movements (here, three Sequential operations by the movable ornaments A, B, and C) can be properly executed, and the expectation for the occurrence of the RTC state can be preferably maintained.

In the example shown in FIG. 375, when a plurality of movable decorations are found to be abnormal in the abnormality determination at timing Rt2, restoration processing is sequentially executed for the abnormal movable decorations, and then the RTC state is restored. It is desirable to execute a series of movable body motions (here, sequential motions by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) at the time of occurrence. In this case, as the number of movable decorations to be restored increases, a series of movable body movements (in this case, sequential movements by three movable decorations A, B, and C) when the RTC state occurs. ) will be delayed for a longer period of time, but it will be possible to execute a series of movable body operations in the normal mode when the RTC state occurs. Restoration operations for a plurality of movable ornaments may be executed in parallel. In this case, the delay time until a series of movable body operations are started when the RTC state occurs can be suppressed. become.

However, even in the example shown in FIG. 375, if the player senses that the movable ornament is being restored in an abnormal state, the player loses interest in the game. There are concerns about a decline in Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 375(f) and (g), when the "restoration action" is completed, the "sequential action by the three movable decorations A, B, and C" is executed (sequential execution). ) so that the series of movable body motions up to timings Rt5a and Rt5b including the restoration motion appearing at timing Rt2 can be seen as "a series of movable body motions when the RTC state occurs", It is made difficult to recognize that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, when an abnormality occurs in a situation different from these abnormal occurrence situations, a display (such as an error code) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decoration can be performed. In the examples shown in FIGS. 375(f) and 375(g) as well as in the example shown in 374(f), during the period during which the restoration operation (restoration process) is being performed for the movable decoration in an abnormal state, An abnormality occurs in the movable decoration (during the restoration operation according to the first abnormality determination) or during the period during which the movable decoration B is operated in a special mode (during the operation in the special mode according to the second abnormality determination). There is no display (such as an error code) that indicates that Further, the timing at which the operation in the special mode is started after the operation in the normal mode is finished, the timing at which the operation in the normal mode is started after the operation in the special mode is finished, and furthermore, FIG. At the timing at which the three movable decorations A, B, and C start to sequentially operate after the restoring operation shown in f) and (g) is completed, the display contents on the effect display device 1600 are triggered by the occurrence of these timings. It does not cause any change in These are also made to look like "a series of movable body movements at the time of occurrence of RTC state" are being performed, and that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed for the movable ornament in an abnormal state. It can be said that it is important to make it difficult to recognize.

In addition, in FIG. 374 and its another example, and FIG. 375 and its another example, as the movable body motion based on the occurrence of the RTC state, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially moved. Not limited to, the movable decorative body (one, two, three or more, etc.) that is also used in the movable effect on the pattern fluctuation side is based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition (start condition) It is sufficient that the movable body is operated in a specific manner at the time when the movable body is operated within the specific state that occurs.

In addition, as a movable decorative body that is operable at the movable body operation timing in such an RTC state (specific state), a frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, an operably provided Operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) and board-side movable decorations provided on the game board 5 side (for example, back front decoration unit 3100, back middle movable production unit 3200, specific decoration member SDY (blind curtain) ) and so on) may be used respectively.

However, for example, in FIG. 374 and its other examples, and FIG. If the frame-side movable decoration (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) that can also be used as a frame-side movable decoration is used, even after the timing Rt2a arrives, the frame-side movable decoration that can also be used as such an operation means will not be used. A situation may occur in which "movements that do not conform to pattern fluctuations" are performed.

That is, as described above, at timing Rt2a, even if it is within the operation period of the movable ornament corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the "display that does not show any degree of expectation (display from timing Rt1)" that has been displayed up to that time is displayed. Display)" is hidden at this point, and a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) can appear after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state). After that, when a new pattern variation (variation C (loss) in the figure) is started, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decoration corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the pattern variation will be applied. It has also been described above that the display indicating the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern and the advance notice effect is started as usual. Therefore, during the period when such a new pattern variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is performed, the frame-side movable decorations (operation buttons 410, sword decorations 5001, etc.), which are also used as operating means, are In spite of being in a state of being provided for a specific action according to the occurrence of the RTC state, depending on the effect pattern, the frame-side movable decorative body, which is also used as an operating means, may be given an opportunity to operate. It can lead to dramatic confusion. It should be noted that during the period of timings Rt2 to Rt2a (and the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2 prior to that), there is only a display that does not correspond to the pattern variation (a display that does not show any degree of expectation). Even if symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the drawing) is performed, an operation opportunity is not given within the period.

Therefore, in spite of the fact that the specific operation means (frame-side movable decorative body) is in a state of being subjected to a specific action corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the result of the big hit determination for the specific operation means is determined. When it is time to give an operation opportunity, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific display (operation instruction image) that prompts the user to operate the specific operation means. It is desirable that the effect is not accepted even if a specific operation means is operated while a specific action is being performed. According to such a configuration, when the specific action corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is being executed, it is possible to detect that the specific operation means should have been given an opportunity to operate the game. It is possible to make appropriate suggestions to people. In addition, by not accepting the effect of the operation for the specific operation means, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a failure or abnormality due to the operation being performed for the specific operation means in the operating state. come to be expected.

However, during the execution period of the specific action corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the operation of the specific operation means is not performed even though the specific display prompting the user to operate the specific operation means is displayed. If such a situation occurs frequently, the entertainment of the game may decrease due to the lack of progress in the presentation. Therefore, among the frame-side movable decorations provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation button 410 provided to be operable, the sword decoration 5001, etc.), the operation performance within the pattern variation according to the big hit determination is performed. Operation means with a relatively high rate of occurrence (for example, the operation button 410) should not be used as one of the movable ornaments that are operable during the movable body movement period in the RTC state (specific state). It is desirable to In this case, during the operation period of the movable ornament corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, there is an opportunity to operate the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) with a relatively high occurrence rate of the operation effect within the pattern variation. When given, it is desirable that the display of the operation instruction image and the acceptance of the effect when the operation is performed (predetermined effect corresponding to the reception of the effect) are executed as usual.

That is, among the frame-side movable decorations provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation button 410 provided to be operable (for example, vibration, etc.), the sword decoration 5001, etc.), the pattern variation according to the big hit determination A movable decoration that can operate a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) with a relatively low rate of occurrence of operation effects in the RTC state (specific state) at the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (specific state). By using it as one, the movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation in response to the occurrence of the RTC state, but the movable decoration ( For example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the timing of presentation for granting an operation opportunity according to the result of the judgment of a big hit comes to the sword ornament 5001).

In addition, the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (preferably, a specific operating means with a relatively low rate of occurrence of the operation effect within the pattern variation) is set as a movable body within the RTC state (specific state). In the case of using it as one of the movable decorations that are operable at the time of operation, when the RTC state occurs, as an operation independent of the sequential operation by the three movable decorations A, B, and C, It is desirable that the movement is performed by the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001). According to such a configuration, even if a special action (see FIG. 374) or a restoration action (see FIG. 375) is performed on any of the three movable decorations A, B, and C, Also, it is possible to perform an action that does not conform to the pattern variation by the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) without being affected (delayed, etc.) by these actions. In this case, it is desirable that all of the three movable decorations A, B, and C are used as board-side movable decorations. As a result, even if any one of the three movable decorations A, B, and C is in the restoring operation, the possibility of interference with the movable decorations is eliminated, and the door frame 3 side is provided. The operations by the frame-side movable decoration can be executed in parallel.

On top of this, after the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the frame side movable decoration (preferably, specific operation means (for example, sword decoration) with a relatively low rate of occurrence of operation effects within the pattern fluctuation 5001)), when the time required to complete the operation (operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state) that does not conform to the pattern variation is "specific time", which of the production patterns according to the big hit determination is executed Even in this case, as long as at least the "specific time" has not passed since the pattern variation started (the production pattern started), the predetermined operation opportunity grant timing in the production pattern (here, the frame side movable decoration It is desirable to set each effect pattern (inside operation opportunity giving timing) so that the object (for example, the operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001) does not come.

According to such a configuration, in FIG. 374 and its other examples, and in FIG. When the opportunity to operate the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is given, the operation of the frame-side movable decoration in response to the occurrence of the RTC state ( Since the action) has already been completed and the performance can be accepted, the performance at the time of occurrence of the RTC state can be enhanced without sacrificing the performance on the symbol variation side.

In addition, as described above, in view of the fact that normal effect control is permitted only for symbol variations after the first symbol variation after the occurrence of the RTC state, frame-side movable decorations (for example, , sword ornament 5001) can be started based on the occurrence of the RTC state. Since the pattern variation that is digested first after this has to start after this, the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001 ), it is possible to give a margin to complete the operation that does not conform to the pattern variation by preceding.

Also, when the operation when the RTC state occurs by the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is executed as an operation independent of the sequential operation by the three movable decorations A, B, and C, When executing this, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative body, and when it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, a special mode including a restoration operation is performed instead of the normal mode operation. It is preferable to execute the operation by the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) as the operation of (1), or perform the restoration operation and then perform the operation in the normal mode. In this case, the "special mode including the restoration action" also restores (returns to the original position) the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) in a different action mode from the "normal operation mode". For example, it may be the minimum operation mode required to return to the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001).

Then, the operation when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is "normal mode", "special mode including restoration operation", and "after performing the restoration operation. In any mode of "a mode in which the operation of the normal mode is performed in a continuous manner", as long as the operation is not completed, the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) It is more desirable to set each effect pattern so that the timing of giving an operation opportunity does not come. According to such a configuration, even if any of the effect patterns corresponding to the big hit determination is executed at the timing Rt2a, when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) Regardless of whether the operation is performed in a normal mode or in a mode when an abnormality is determined, the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) can be moved only after the operation is completed. It is possible to give an operation opportunity to the user.

In addition, when an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is received as an effect, at least one of the three movable decorations A, B, and C is operated based on the effect reception. A specific movable presentation may be made executable. However, in this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) within the pattern change started at timing Rt2a, the operation (RTC Even if the operation corresponding to the occurrence of the state) has already been completed, the sequential operation by the three movable decorations A, B, and C is still in the process of being executed. It becomes impossible to receive the performance, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease. Therefore, when the time from the timing Rt2 required until the sequential operation of the three movable decorations A, B, and C is completed in the normal mode is defined as "special time", the judgment of the big hit is made. Even if any of the production patterns according to is executed, as long as neither the above "specific time" nor the "special time" has passed since the pattern variation started (production pattern started) , each production pattern (operation opportunity giving timing) so that the predetermined operation opportunity giving timing in the production pattern (here, the frame side movable decoration (for example, the operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001) does not come. It is desirable to make such settings.

If the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is also in an abnormal state within the period of timings Rt1 and Rt2, restoration processing is performed on the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001). is prohibited so that timing Rt2 arrives while the abnormal state is intentionally maintained.

On the other hand, among the three movable decorations A, B, and C, specific movable decorations (for example, movable decoration A whose operation order is fast, movable decorations that require a long restoration operation, etc.) When an abnormal state exists within the period from timing Rt1 to Rt2, restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable decoration is prohibited, but a movable decoration different from the specific movable decoration (for example, the operation order is late) is prohibited. If the movable decoration B (or the movable decoration C) or the movable decoration whose restoration operation takes a short time is in an abnormal state during the period from timing Rt1 to Rt2, restoration of the movable decoration is performed. The processing (restore operation) may be performed without being prohibited. This is because, for example, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration B (or the movable decoration C) does not need to be completed by timing Rt2, and the movable decoration A moves when the RTC occurs. This is because if the three movable ornaments A, B, and C can be completed in the normal state, the sequential operations can be performed in the normal mode.

Also, the timing at which the series of operations of the three movable decorations A, B, and C is started after the RTC state occurs, and the operation of the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is started. The timing may be different.

[Restoration processing for movement abnormality with reduced influence on movement effect]
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more precisely, in a state where the specific state does not occur), it is possible to cope with pattern variations. When the restoration operation timing (for example, the timing of starting or stopping the pattern variation) arrives, it is possible to perform a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration. However, if such restoration processing is executed regardless of the state of the presentation, there is a concern that the interest in the game may be lowered.

For example, it is assumed that the above-described "symbol variation start time" is set as the "restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation". Now, as shown in FIG. 376, when timing tm1 at which a new pattern variation is started in a situation where a specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs at least the following processes. will be executed.
・On the basis of acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the symbol variation is started, the effect pattern corresponding to the symbol variation is set, and the set effect pattern is used for the symbol variation. Among them, based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the pattern variation is started (based on the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern variation), specified Processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decoration of

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 376, it is assumed that the effect pattern is set as "a specific effect pattern in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation". Therefore, when the timing tm1 arrives, the performance progresses according to the ``specific performance pattern that allows the specific movable decoration to operate at the specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation'', and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decoration is performed. A situation will arise in which the processes to be executed are executed in parallel.

In general, in the pachinko machine 1 that can execute such a specific effect pattern, the effect pattern (relatively expected A low production pattern) is prepared. Then, in the production pattern having a pair relationship (the production pattern with a relatively low degree of expectation), although the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation, the movement toward the specific timing tm2 The same mode of production as in the case of "a specific production pattern (a production pattern with a relatively high degree of expectation) in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation" is performed. be. In this way, by preparing two production patterns (a production pattern in which a specific movable decorative body is operated and a production pattern in which a specific movable decorative body is not operated) that are in a paired relationship in terms of production, at the specific timing tm2 is (for example, a predetermined time until the arrival of the specific timing tm2), a predetermined effect (for example, a display of whether or not a specific movable ornament will operate) with a effect of whether or not the specific movable ornament will operate. can be executed, and the amusement of the game can be favorably maintained by such effects.

However, after the pattern variation is started, even when the specific timing tm2 arrives, if the process for causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoration operation is still being executed, the specific timing Even though tm2 has arrived, it becomes clear that the specific movable decoration is in a situation where it cannot perform the performance operation. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation, the function of the predetermined effect with the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. , there is a concern that the interest in gaming will decline.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 376, among the production patterns, "a specific production pattern that allows a specific movable decoration to operate at a specific timing tm2" and a predetermined When a situation appears in which the processing for performing the restoration operation (the restoration processing based on the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation) is performed in parallel, the "specific "The process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable ornament" is terminated. Various methods can be adopted as the ``processing for causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation''. It is assumed that the process of repeatedly performing restoration operations on a specific movable decoration until reaching a predetermined upper limit number is executed.

More specifically, with respect to the ``processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decoration'', restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree to which the specific movable decoration is abnormal. The time required to complete the process will be different. For example, when a specific movable decoration is restored (restored) to its original position after the abnormal state is resolved only by executing the first restoration operation, the "predetermined restoration for the specific movable decoration" is performed. The timing tx at which the "processing to perform the action" is completed also arrives relatively early, but the number of times the restoring action for a particular movable decoration fails and is restored (restored) is limited. As the number increases, the timing tx at which the ``process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable ornament'' is completed is postponed to a later time. At the latest, when the restoration operation for a specific movable decoration has failed and has not yet been restored (restored), but if the restoration operation is performed again, the timing tx will be exceeded. By terminating the process of performing the predetermined restoration action while the body is in an abnormal state, the process of performing the predetermined restoration action is terminated before the arrival of the specific timing tm regardless of the state of restoration. become.

In addition, when it takes x time to restore a specific movable decoration once, the pattern is set once so that the relationship of "x time x n times<time of timing tm1 to tm2" is established. An upper limit number n for repeating a predetermined restoration operation within a fluctuation is set, and even if the restoration (restoration) has not been performed when the upper limit number n is reached, the process for performing the predetermined restoration operation is terminated. By doing so, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation may be terminated until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration situation.

According to such a configuration, the development of the specific production pattern that allows the specific movable decorative body to operate at the specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation, and the predetermined restoration action for the specific movable decorative body are performed in parallel. When such a situation appears, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is terminated until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration situation. That is, in this case, even if the specific movable decoration is not restored until the specific timing tm2 arrives, the specific movable decoration is restored at the specific timing tm2. Since the movable decorative body is brought to a stopped state, it is possible to preferably maintain the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if a specific movable decoration is in a stopped state at a position different from the original position, when the specific timing tm2 arrives, this may trigger some behavior, or the movable decoration may not move. However, it is possible to give hope that the lamp of the movable decoration may emit light (assuming that the lamp of the movable decoration emits light when the performance action by the movable decoration is performed). .

However, in reality, if a specific movable decoration is performing a restoration operation while the predetermined effect is being performed, the specific movable decoration has the effect of whether or not to operate. The function as the predetermined effect may be lost. Therefore, regarding the timing tx at which the "process for performing a predetermined restoration action on a specific movable ornament" is completed, regardless of the state of restoration, it should be completed before the predetermined effect is started. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the amusement of the game.

As a predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable ornament operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result that an attack hits) appears in the super reach effect, and operates when the specific display result does not appear. When it is provided as a "thing that does not", it is possible to exemplify "a display effect that appears in advance in a way that arouses whether or not a specific display result will appear", and a specific movable decoration " When it is provided as a thing that operates based on the fact that the performance is accepted by the player's operation (or does not operate even if the performance is accepted), ``a performance that causes a specific display to prompt the player to operate.'' can be exemplified.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 376, at the timing tx at which the “process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration” is completed, the specific movable decoration recovers (restores) from the abnormal state. It is assumed that the In this way, even if the abnormal state occurs at the start of the fluctuation (or the "restoration operation timing" such as the previous stop of the pattern), the specific timing tm2 within the pattern fluctuation arrives after the normal state is restored. Then, at the specific timing tm2, it becomes possible to perform the performance operation of the specific movable ornament.

On the other hand, at the timing tx when the "process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration" is completed, the specific movable decoration cannot be recovered (restored) from the abnormal state, and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation comes, at least from the specific timing tm2 (more precisely, the timing tx) the symbol variation is terminated and the stop state is maintained until the next restoration operation time arrives. becomes. That is, in this case, although the specific movable decoration cannot be operated at the specific timing tm2, the effect of whether or not the specific movable decoration is operated can be preferably maintained. When the specific performance pattern is based on the big win variation, a surprise performance is provided by stopping the big win pattern even though the specified movable decorative body did not perform the performance operation at the specific timing tm2. be able to

However, in recent years, pachinko machines have been equipped with movable ornaments that have a more complicated structure and move in multiple stages, and in such movable ornaments, it takes longer to complete the restoration process. It often takes time. However, on the other hand, in a specific production pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation, or in a production pattern that is in a pair relationship with this, when those production patterns are started Even if the specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state, within a time shorter than the time required from the start of pattern variation until the arrival of the specific timing tm2 (more preferably, the time until the predetermined effect is performed) As described above, it is required to end the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decoration. That is, in this case, every time a particular movable decoration becomes abnormal, it can only be restored in a simple manner as an emergency measure, which accelerates the deterioration of the particular movable decoration. It can also be

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect pattern (reconstruction/diagnosis effect pattern) is prepared, and when the symbol variation is started, the main control MPU 1310a side When the special effect pattern is selected based on the sent command, while the special effect pattern is being developed (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special effect pattern is being performed), a specific movable Control is performed so that the ornaments are not operated and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display as to whether or not they are to be operated) does not appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 377(a) and 377(d), as a result of the timing tm11 at which the pattern variation is started in the situation where the specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state, the effect progresses according to the special effect pattern. and a process of performing a predetermined restoration action on a specific movable ornament, respectively, at least while the special effect pattern is being performed (period until the pattern is stopped). causes the restore process to continue without terminating.

More specifically, in the restoration process started at timing tm11, the abnormal state is eliminated and the movable decoration returns (restores) to the original position only by executing the first restoration operation. Even in such a case, the restoration process is not terminated at least while the special effect pattern is being performed, and the restoration process for the specific movable decoration is executed over the entire period.

According to such a configuration, when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration process in a more full-fledged mode (for example, normal diagnosis even after restoration) is performed aiming at the time when the above-mentioned special effect pattern is performed. Since it is possible to carry out additional execution, etc.), the special production pattern will function as a production pattern for restoration and diagnosis, and the player will also be carefully restored in this way. You will be able to enjoy the performance after that without worrying about the situation. In this sense, it is desirable to prepare a special effect pattern that can be selected only when the player loses the big hit determination. In addition, it is desirable that the display contents of the effect display device 1600 appear in a unique display mode such as "This is the effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis. Please wait for a while."

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. When the above special effect pattern is performed, the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is continued without ending even after the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern ends. According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the constraint that "although a specific movable decoration has an abnormality, the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the pattern is changed." Therefore, it becomes possible to perform restoration processing in a more full-fledged manner.

However, at the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern ends, if the pending digestion is not interrupted and the effect pattern corresponding to the new pattern fluctuation is performed, the next restoration operation time (here, the next Design fluctuation start time) will come. At this time, if the restoration process started at timing tm11 is still continuing, it is determined that the specific movable decoration is still in an abnormal state (not at the original position, etc.). It will be done. If the restoration process for a specific movable decoration is newly started based on the determination, it can be completed substantially within the time when one pattern change is performed. Since only the restoration process can be performed, the contents of the process are naturally limited, and the inability to adequately deal with the abnormality may accelerate the deterioration of the particular movable decoration. .

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is in a state of executing restoration processing for a specific movable decoration, as shown in FIGS. 377(b) and (d). When the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol fluctuation start timing) arrives, the restoration processing in the execution state is not terminated and is continued across the next restoration operation timing. . According to such a configuration, regardless of the state of suspension during execution of restoration processing for a specific movable decoration, "Even though an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration, Since the constraint such as "the restoration process must be executed for each unit where the symbol variation is performed" is eliminated, it becomes possible to perform the restoration process in a more full-fledged manner.

However, as shown in FIGS. 377(c) and 377(d), as a result of the start of a new pattern variation while the restoration process is being executed for a specific movable decoration, the new pattern variation As such, there may be a case where "a specific production pattern that allows a specific movable decoration to operate at a specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation" appears. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 377(a) to 377(c), regardless of the state of the game or effect after the special effect pattern is terminated (furthermore, the state of restoration, etc.), the timing tm11 is started. In addition, the timing tx at which the "process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable ornament" is completed is the time required until the next specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation (more preferably, It is desirable to finish within a time shorter than the time until the predetermined effect is performed. Even with such a configuration, in addition to the time between timings tm11 and tm12 (the time required for the execution of the special effect pattern), the specific movement is performed for a relatively long time until the time between timings tm12 and tx ends. It becomes possible to continue the restoration process for the decoration.

It should be noted that, after the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is terminated, if a situation appears in which the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is continuously executed, Do not end the restoration process in a new special production pattern (production pattern for restoration/diagnosis), straddle three or more pattern variations (production patterns) (after one restoration process is started, the one One restoration process may be continued in such a manner that the restoration process spans two or more restoration operation periods.

In the example shown in FIG. 377, at the timing tx when the ``processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decoration'' is completed, the specific movable decoration is recovered (restored) from the abnormal state and is normal. I'm assuming the situation. In this way, by continuing one restoration process across the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol fluctuation start timing), a serious abnormal state that could not be restored in the past can be prevented. However, this can be restored, and at a specific timing tm2, it is possible to perform the performance operation of the specific movable ornament.

On the other hand, although one restoration process is continued across the next restoration operation timing (here, the next pattern fluctuation start timing), at the timing tx, the specific movable decoration is abnormal. When it is not possible to return (restore) from the state, the stop state is maintained until the timing of the next restoration operation comes after the symbol variation is finished from the timing tx. That is, in this case, although the specific movable decoration cannot be operated at the specific timing tm2, the effect of whether or not the specific movable decoration is operated can be preferably maintained. When the specific performance pattern is based on the big win variation, a surprise performance is provided by stopping the big win pattern even though the specified movable decorative body did not perform the performance operation at the specific timing tm2. be able to

In addition, in a situation where a specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state and restoration processing is not being executed for the specific movable decoration, each time the restoration operation time (here, the pattern fluctuation start time) arrives, the specific If the restoration process for the movable decoration is started many times, if the specific movable decoration is broken to the extent that it cannot be restored, the specific movable decoration cannot be restored. There is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease due to the repeated repetition of the restoration process for the body. Therefore, even though the restoration operation timing has reached the predetermined upper limit number after the specific movable decoration has been put into an abnormal state (the number of executions of the restoration process (specific movable decoration) has reached the predetermined upper limit number). When the abnormal state has not been restored, it is desirable not to start the restoration process for the specific movable decoration anew even if a new restoration operation time comes.

However, on the other hand, after the specific movable decoration is put in an abnormal state, only the special production pattern (the production pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) for the predetermined upper limit number. , When a situation arises in which a production pattern (for example, a specific production pattern) different from the special production pattern (production pattern for restoration/diagnosis) appears, a predetermined upper limit number of special production patterns and their One restoration process may be continued across the next production pattern. In other words, in this case, after the specific movable ornament is placed in an abnormal state, the restoration operation timing has not reached the predetermined upper limit number, but the abnormal state has not been restored. +1"-th restoration operation time has arrived, the restoration process for the specific movable decoration is not terminated and is continued. As described above, in the mode in which one restoration process is continued across the restoration operation timings, no matter how many times the restoration operation timings come during the continuation of the one restoration operation, the predetermined upper limit number It is desirable to handle the count for one time of restoration processing so as not to end the restoration processing so as not to hinder the execution of restoration processing in a more full-scale mode.

By the way, regarding such restoration processing (restoration processing performed based on restoration operation timing corresponding to pattern fluctuation), board-side movable decorations provided on the game board 5 side (for example, back front decoration unit 3100, back front decoration unit 3100, back In addition to the middle movable production unit 3200, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain), etc.), the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the manner described above. be. However, among the frame-side movable decorations provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorations that are also used as operation means (for example, the operation button 410 provided operably, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) , it may be restored (restored) in a manner different from the case of the above-described specific movable decoration (board-side movable decoration).

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, during the period in which the symbol variation is performed, a movable operation in which an operation opportunity giving effect is executed to give an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001 System production patterns (for example, the production pattern shown in FIG. 341) are prepared. Also, as described above, in such an operation opportunity imparting effect, "the process of moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 341(f))", "Process for generating effect acceptance period for sword ornament 5001 (see FIG. 341 (f))", furthermore, "display prompting operation (character display such as "push" and bar display indicating remaining time of effect acceptance period ) (see FIG. 341(f))” are performed respectively. As a result, when the sword decorative body 5001 in the state of being moved to the operating position is operated (in this case, an operation of pushing) and the production is accepted, based on the production reception, "specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) ) and the like (see FIG. 341(g))” and “the process of changing the display content (see FIG. 341(g))” are performed respectively. Become. It should be noted that the board-side movable decorations to be effected in this process may be the specific movable decorations described with reference to FIG. 376 and FIG.

However, among such operation opportunity imparting effects, the ``process of moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position with a predetermined driving force'' is not executed when the sword decoration 5001 is in an abnormal state. ``Processing to generate an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001'' and ``Process to display a display prompting an operation'' can be executed when the sword decoration 5001 is in the normal state. It can be executed both when there is an abnormality and when there is an abnormality. Therefore, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword ornament 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the player who sees the "display prompting the operation" operates the sword ornament 5001 and accepts the effect, "Processing for effecting a board-side movable decorative body such as a specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain)" and "Processing for causing a change in display content on the effect display device 1600" are performed respectively. In addition, in the production pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decoration 5001 receives an external force due to such operation by the player, and the operation part is moved, and the abnormal state is generated. may be resolved by itself.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the frame-side movable decorations (for example, the operation buttons 410 provided operably, the sword decorations 5001, etc.) that are also used as operation means are In the event of an abnormal state, return processing for applying a driving force to the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) to return it to the original position (in the manner described with reference to FIGS. 376 and 377). Restoration processing) is performed at the respective timings of "the above-described restoration operation timing (here, the start timing of symbol variation)" and "after the effect is accepted by the player's operation within the effect pattern of the movable operation system". It is executable.

According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable decorative body can be moved by aiming at timing such as the start or stop of the pattern variation (more strictly, after the start or after the stop). In contrast to the process of restoring the decoration, when the frame-side movable decoration is in an abnormal state, not only the timing of the start and stop of the pattern variation, but also a unique timing different from this (during the variation period) Of these, the frame-side movable decoration (operation means) is controlled by aiming at the timing at which an external force (operation by the player) may be applied to the frame-side movable decoration (operation means) and the abnormal state may be resolved. means) will be restored (returned), it is expected that the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) in an abnormal state can be returned to its original position at an early stage. .

FIG. 378 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword decoration 5001 is returned to its original position when the sword decoration 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable decoration (operating means). be.

As shown in FIG. 378, the production pattern of the movable operation system (the production pattern in which the operation opportunity giving production for giving the operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001 is executed during the period when the pattern variation is performed) is executed. , and at timing tm21, "the process of moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position" is executed. Then, when the sword decoration 5001 is in the operation position, "processing for generating the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001", "display prompting the operation (character display such as "push", display of the effect reception period While the bar display indicating the remaining time of ) is being executed, if the player operates the sword decoration 5001 and receives the effect (timing tm22), "Specific decoration member SDY (blind role) etc. A process for making the board-side movable decorative body perform an effect operation" and a process for causing a change in the display contents of the effect display device 1600 are performed respectively. Incidentally, in the example shown in FIG. 378, based on the reception of the effect, the specific movable decoration described in FIGS. 376 and 377 is made to act as the board-side movable decoration.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 378, at the timing tm22 at which the effect is accepted, an abnormality occurs in the sword decorative body 5001, and it is not returned to its original position, and the specific movable decoration that performs the effect operation based on the effect reception. It is assumed that another abnormality occurs in the body (board-side movable decorative body) and it cannot be returned to its original position. At this time, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 and that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decoration. With regard to the determination to that effect, neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is executed, and the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 is accompanied by a specific notification sound and display. It is desirable to perform at least one of the notifications. This is because the sword decoration 5001 is "placed within the reach of the player (door frame 3)", and if it is made to notify that an abnormal state has occurred, repair work from the abnormal state can be performed. While it is expected to be performed by the player's hand, the specific movable decoration is "placed out of the reach of the player (game board 5)", and this has become an abnormal state. This is because the player cannot help in any way, and merely emphasizing that the movable effect is not being executed may encourage a decrease in interest in the game. However, it is desirable that such notification be ended when a predetermined time has elapsed.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 378, an abnormality occurs in the specific movable decoration during the “process for causing the specific movable decoration to perform an effect operation” based on the reception of the effect at timing tm22. However, by executing the "processing to change the display contents of the effect display device 1600" as usual, it is possible to recognize that a specific movable decoration has an abnormality. It is desirable to make it difficult. After that, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed while both the sword decoration 5001 and the specific movable decoration remain in the abnormal state, and the pattern variation is stopped at timing tm23. .

In the example shown in FIG. 378, at timing tm23, the pattern variation already in the pending state is digested (started) immediately (for example, after 0.6 seconds), and the new pattern It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described in FIG. 376 is executed as the effect pattern corresponding to the variation. That is, in the specific production pattern, the specific movable decorative body is produced at the timing tm2 when a predetermined time has passed since the pattern variation started, but the restoration operation time (here, at the time of the pattern variation start) ) is completed within a time period shorter than timing tm2 (more preferably, It is as described above that the process is terminated until the predetermined effect is started).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation time (here, at the start of pattern variation) has arrived for the sword decoration body 5001, the "specific movable decoration It is possible to perform a process of causing the body to perform a predetermined restoring action and a process of causing the body to return to its original position (applying driving force) in parallel with at least a part of the action. Moreover, the timing at which such "processing for performing a predetermined restoration action on the sword decoration 5001" is completed is also within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, a predetermined effect is performed) regardless of the restoration situation. is started).

According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable decoration is resolved and the movement effect by the specific movable decoration is performed at timing tm2, the restoration operation by the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Since there is no such thing as being continued, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of disappointment when the restoration action and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

In the example shown in FIG. 378, the timing at which restoration processing for a specific movable decoration is started/finished is the same as the timing at which restoration processing for sword decoration 5001 is started/finished. However, only one of those timings may be the same, or both of those timings may be different.

In addition, regarding the "process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable ornament", as described with reference to FIG. It is possible to continue even after the special effect pattern is terminated, and the pattern fluctuations in the pending state are digested (started) immediately (for example, 0.6 seconds later) after the special effect pattern is terminated. In a situation where the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol fluctuation start timing) is straddled, the processing (first restoration processing) is not finished and can be executed in the form of continuing this. It is desirable that the processing for causing the ornament 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation can also be executed in the same mode (the mode described with reference to FIG. 377). That is, in this case, the "process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the sword ornament 5001" also extends over the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol variation start timing) when a special effect pattern appears. However, it should be terminated regardless of the restoration status until the time required from the start of the next symbol variation to the arrival of the timing tm2. Become.

In addition, after the sword ornament 5001 is brought into an abnormal state, only the special effect pattern (reconstruction/diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number, and then the special effect pattern ( When a situation arises in which a performance pattern (for example, a specific performance pattern) different from the performance pattern for restoration/diagnosis is executed, a predetermined upper limit number of special performance patterns and the next performance pattern are straddled. One restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 may be continued.

In the example shown in FIG. 378, it is assumed that at timing tx, restoration processing for a specific movable decoration and restoration processing for sword decoration 5001 are terminated, but restoration fails in both cases. Therefore, at the timing tm2, the movement effect by the specific movable decoration is not performed, and the specific effect pattern is developed while both the sword decoration 5001 and the specific movable decoration remain in the abnormal state. As a result, the symbol variation is stopped at timing tm24.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, within the period of timing tx to tm2 in the specific effect pattern, the specific movable ornament is externally applied (no driving force is applied by a motor or the like). Even if it is returned to the original position (brought to a normal state) by , at the timing tm2, the specific movable decorative body will not perform an effect operation. In other words, it can be said that the fact that an external force (driving force is not applied by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable decoration during the period from timing tx to tm2 itself is an abnormal situation. In such a situation where reliability is low, there is a high possibility that even if a performance action by a specific movable ornament is performed, it will fail. It can be said that it is desirable in terms of

Further, when restoration processing for the sword ornament 5001 fails and an abnormal state occurs again, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification associated therewith is performed. In other words, if the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 fails and notification is given each time an abnormal state occurs again, the player may be misunderstood as if the player is responsible for the abnormal state not being resolved. Therefore, the above notification (at least one of a specific notification sound and display notification) is performed only when an abnormality occurs for the first time when the normal state changes to an abnormal state, so as to encourage the player to perform repair work. is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 378, the sword decoration 5001 and the specific movable decoration are restored by the restoration process triggered by any of the restoration operation timing (here, the design fluctuation start timing) arriving after timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable decoration recovers from an abnormal state. Now, while only the sword decoration 5001 is in an abnormal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again, and as shown in FIG. Assuming that the effect is accepted by the player's operation, it can be expected that the abnormality occurring in the sword decoration 5001 has been resolved by such an operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state receives the effect by the player's operation at timing tm25, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the original state. A driving force can be applied so as to return it to the position (stay at the original position). At this time, in view of the fact that the movement effect is performed by the specific movable decoration based on the reception of the effect, the period (once The period when the return action is successful) is generated after the start of the movable effect by the specific movable decoration, and the end of the movable effect by the specific movable decoration (the specific movable decoration returns to the original position It is desirable to end the process before the process is executed so as to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being executed. However, considering that there is a rare chance that the possibility of returning the sword decoration 5001, which could not be returned until now, due to such an external force (operation by the player) is increasing, it is necessary to move the sword decoration 5001 to the original position. If the process (return action for the sword decoration 5001) to give the driving force to return to the original position fails, the sword decoration 5001 will be returned to the original state until the period after the movable effect by the specific movable decoration ends. By continuously executing the process of applying the driving force so as to return to the position (executing the return operation to the sword ornament 5001 again), the player can easily recognize the abnormal situation. It is desirable to encourage assistance. However, even if this recovery process fails, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this failure be performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 378, it is assumed that the return processing (return to the original position) of the sword ornament 5001 using such an external force (operation by the player) is successful. , the sword decoration 5001 and the specific movable decoration remain in the normal state, the production pattern of the movable operation system is developed, and the pattern variation is stopped at timing tm26.

Thus, according to the example shown in FIG. 378, the frame-side movable decoration (sword decoration 5001), which is also used as operation means, is set with respect to the board-side movable decoration (specific movable decoration). In addition to the restoration operation timing (at the start of pattern variation), the restoration operation timing (timing after receiving the effect) using an external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decoration (sword decoration 5001), which is also used as an operation means, is likely to be in an abnormal state because it is directly touched by the player, but even if it is in an abnormal state, Since the opportunity for position return is given more often and various modes are used as the return method (a mode for returning only by applying a driving force, a mode for returning by using at least an external force), an abnormal state can be eliminated. As a result, the decline in interest in gaming can be suppressed.

Note that the process of applying a driving force for returning the sword decoration 5001 to the original position after the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state receives the effect by the player's operation is the symbol fluctuation start. A driving force may be applied to the sword ornament 5001 with a different content (different operation mode) from the restoration process performed when the timing (for example, timing tm23) arrives. That is, since this processing is to restore the sword ornament 5001 by using an external force (operation by the player), it is possible to perform the processing with a different content from the processing when the external force is not used. It can be said that it is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, the processing is executed in a simple manner such that the recovery processing is completed within the pattern variation regardless of the recovery situation, and if the recovery fails, the next recovery operation time will be more serious. It is desirable to ensure that proper recovery processing is performed.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 378, even if the restoration operation timing (here, the symbol variation start timing) arrives by the predetermined upper limit number and the restoration processing for the sword ornament 5001 is executed for that number of times. However, it is not restored from the abnormal state, and even if a new restoration operation time (here, design fluctuation start time) arrives, the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 is not newly started. Even if the effect pattern of the operation system is started and the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state is received by the player's operation at the timing tm25, the sword decorative body 5001 is removed after the effect is received. It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (stay at the original position). That is, as described above, the return processing after reception of the effect is performed when there is an increased possibility of returning the sword ornament 5001 that has been unable to return due to an external force (operation by the player). Therefore, it is desirable to perform the processing without giving up even in the situation described above in which recovery without an external force is given up. Therefore, "process for generating effect reception period for sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 341 (f))" and "display prompting operation (character display such as "push" and bar indicating remaining time of effect reception period It is important that the processing (see FIG. 341(f)) for performing display) is performed as usual even in the above-described situation in which return without external force is given up.

In addition, when the first operation opportunity is given so that the sword ornament 5001 is pushed in the operation position (moved to a specific detection position), and when it is in the original position, it is pushed (to a specific detection position). When the operation means is provided so as to provide a second operation opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001, even if the reception of the effect occurs at the second operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001 in the abnormal state. The driving force for returning to the original position is not applied, and the driving force for returning to the original position is applied only when the production acceptance occurs at the first operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001 in the abnormal state. It is desirable to That is, even if the performance is accepted when the second operation opportunity is given, the amount of movement of the operation part is relatively small, so the possibility that the abnormal state has been resolved is naturally expected to be low.

In addition, after the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state receives the effect by the player's operation, the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decoration 5001 to the original position does not necessarily require the effect reception. It does not have to be executed on the condition that it has been performed, for example, it may be executed after the effect acceptance period has ended.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 374 to 378, the symbol variation start timing (furthermore, the timing after receiving the effect) is illustrated as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation. A predetermined timing that arrives under at least the condition that the symbol variation is executed may be used, for example, it may be used as at least one of the symbol variation start time and the symbol variation stop time. If the symbol variation stop timing is used as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation, the restoration process is started based on the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the symbol variation is stopped. The restorative process is terminated before timing tm2 in the reserved specific performance pattern arrives, or is executed so as to straddle until after the end of the reserved special performance pattern. Each of the above-described processing is performed.

In addition, the frequency of appearance of the special effect pattern (restore/diagnosis effect pattern) may vary according to the state of the game. For example, when a special effect state occurs in which the frequency of operation of the movable decorative body increases, abnormal states are likely to occur as much as the frequency of operation is increased. It is desirable to make the game possible so that the appearance frequency of the special effect pattern (the effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is higher than when it is in .

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) and the specific movable decoration, which are also used as operating means, are in an abnormal state. When the special production pattern (production pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is performed, as shown in FIG. It is possible to continuously execute one restoration process for the movable decoration in the state. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation timing (for example, pattern fluctuation start timing) arrives while one restoration processing is being continuously executed, the restoration processing for the movable decoration in the abnormal state is performed again. Since it does not start one restoration process that is already in the execution state and continues it without ending it, it is possible to separate the movable decoration from the movable decoration that is the target of the restoration process. The problem is at what timing the restoration process for the other movable decoration should be started when the decoration is newly in an abnormal state.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 377, the restoration process for a specific movable decoration started at timing tm11 is executed at a new restoration operation timing (next The start time of the pattern fluctuation) is designed to be continued without ending even when it straddles. In this regard, a new abnormality occurs in a movable decoration different from the specific movable decoration during the period from the passage of timing tm11 to the arrival of a new restoration operation timing (starting timing of the next pattern variation). In this case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3, or "both methods 1 and 2", or "both methods 1 and 3" is used to restore the other movable decoration. It is desirable to execute

Method 1: At least if there is a relationship such as ``a specific movable decoration is provided as a board-side movable decoration, and the above-mentioned another movable decoration is provided as a frame-side movable decoration'', specify When a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change) arrives while one restoration process for the movable decoration is continuously executed, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change) ) has arrived, the restoration process for another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) is newly started.

According to Method 1, the new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next pattern variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state. Another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) for which the restoration process has not yet been executed is treated as valid, and the timing (new restoration operation timing) is used as a trigger to restore the movable decoration. It becomes possible to newly start the restoration process for the body (frame-side movable decorative body). That is, in this case, a situation arises in which restoration processing for a specific movable decoration (board-side movable decoration) and restoration processing for another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) are simultaneously executed. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable decorations, and early recovery of the movable decorations can be expected.

Method 2: At least when there is a relationship such as ``both a specific movable decoration and another movable decoration are provided as board-side movable decorations'', one restoration process for the specific movable decoration continues. Even if a new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next pattern variation) arrives during execution, the restoration processing for another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) is not started at that time, and the specific restoration operation is performed. After waiting for the completion of one restoration process for the movable decoration, another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) is executed based on the arrival of the new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next pattern change). to restart the restoration process for the body).

According to Method 2, the new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next pattern variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state. Other movable decorations (frame-side movable decorations) for which restoration processing has not yet been executed are treated as being valid. In this respect, before starting the restoration process for another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration), it is arranged to wait for the completion of one restoration process for a specific movable decoration. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable decorations, and early recovery of the movable decorations can be expected.

Method 3: At least when there is a relationship such as ``both a specific movable decoration and another movable decoration are provided as board-side movable decorations'', one restoration process for the specific movable decoration continues. Even if a new restoring operation time (starting time of the next pattern change) comes during execution, another movable decoration is triggered by the arrival of the new restoring operation time (starting time of the next pattern change). instead of executing restoration processing for a specific movable decoration, and after waiting for the completion of one restoration processing for a specific movable decoration, using the timing of the restoration operation that comes after that as a trigger, another movable decoration (frame side movable decoration) is newly started.

According to Method 3, the new restoration operation timing (starting timing of the next pattern variation) is determined by restoring processing for a specific movable decoration that is already in an execution state and another movable decoration that is not in an execution state yet. is treated as invalid for both the restoration process for the movable decoration, and unless one restoration process for a specific movable decoration is completed, even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decoration No processing for the abnormal state is executed. That is, in this case, even if another movable decoration becomes abnormal while one restoration process for a specific movable decoration is being executed, the movable decorations can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it is expected that the speed of deterioration of the movable decoration can be suppressed by sufficiently coping with the abnormality.

(Operation button operation confirmation period)
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a), as an effect corresponding to the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a, the operation button 410 and the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword ornament 5001) can be operated by driving. As described above, it is possible to execute an operation-time effect using a drive-type operation means (such as an effect that indicates the degree of expectation for awarding a privilege by not only the operation but also the drive). However, even if such an effect at the time of operation can be executed, if some kind of abnormality occurs in these operation means and various operation means cannot operate normally, the effect at the time of operation can be experienced by the player in a manner intended by the designer. As a result, there is a concern that it will lead to a decrease in interest in games. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, as part of the maintenance regarding whether or not to execute the effect at the time of operation, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an operation confirmation period (an arbitrary operation confirmation period and an automatic operation confirmation period), which will be described later, is generated. It is confirmed that the player can experience the performance at the time of operation of the mode intended by the designer, and the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

Specifically, the operation confirmation period during which the operation of the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 and the sword ornament 5001 of the sword effect operation unit 5000 can be confirmed will be described with reference to FIG. For the sake of convenience, the operation confirmation of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 will be described below. The operation confirmation period for the operation button 410 and the operation confirmation period for the sword ornament 5001 may occur in parallel, or may occur sequentially. In addition, in order to realize a more reliable confirmation work for each member, there is no overlapping period between the operation confirmation period for the operation button 410 and the operation confirmation period for the sword decoration 5001 (avoid overlapping periods). ), preferably sequentially. FIG. 379 is a time chart showing operation states of the operation button 410 during a series of operation confirmation periods (optional operation confirmation period and automatic operation confirmation period).

As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) not protruding from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) protruding from the effect operation unit 400. - 特許庁Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this is done, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In addition, when the operating button 410 is in a protruding state, if the player presses it until it reaches the normal position, the operating button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 to a normal state from the protruded state, and when the operation button 410 is protruded, a predetermined protrusion If the operation button 410 is not operated to return to the normal state until the termination condition is met (until a predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is met), the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state by the drive mechanism. state will be returned.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruded state. ing. That is, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in the normal state. In such a case, the normal position sensor detects that the operation button 410 is in the normal state. By detecting this, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position. On the other hand, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the protruding state. By detecting this, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a press detection sensor 440 capable of detecting that the operation button 410 has been pressed. Such detection by the press detection sensor 440 makes it possible to determine whether the operation button 410 is pressed in the normal state or whether the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed to the normal state. .

In addition, as effects set in the variation patterns, effects using the operation button 410 in the normal state and effects using the operation button 410 in the protruded state are provided. In the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, for example, during the execution of the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed or hit repeatedly according to the instruction. The pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. On the other hand, in the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruded state, for example, during the execution of the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruded state, By pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to the normal state according to the instruction, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. The performance using the operation button 410 in the protruded state is a performance with a higher degree of expectation (expectation for big hit) than the performance using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in a protruding state, the user can press the operation button 410 with more expectation than in the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 379, in the optional action confirmation period of the action confirmation period, the operator (player or hall operator) confirms whether the operation button 410 is protruding from the normal state and operates normally. (administrator) can be realized at will. Specifically, when the conditions for generating an operation confirmation period, which will be described later, are satisfied, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is started, and the operation button 410 in the normal state for a predetermined period of time (10 seconds in the present embodiment) during which the operation confirmation period is generated. The press detection state (operation detection state) is monitored, and when the press (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state is detected, the operation button 410 is projected based on the press detection (operation detection). change to On the other hand, pressing (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state was not detected for a predetermined period of time even after the conditions for generating the arbitrary action confirmation period were established (while generating the arbitrary action confirmation period). In this case, the optional operation confirmation period is terminated after the predetermined time has elapsed. According to this, a player or a hall manager who wants to check whether the operation button 410 normally detects and operates can press the operation button 410 during the optional operation confirmation period. It is possible to provide confirmation that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated, and to execute and provide an effect at the time of operation using the operation button 410 with peace of mind.

Then, after the operation button 410 is pushed to the protruding state, the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pushed and pressed to the normal state before the predetermined time elapses. , the normal state is restored, and the optional operation confirmation period is terminated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. On the other hand, if it is not detected that the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed before the predetermined time elapses, the operation button 410 is forcibly returned to the normal state by being driven after the predetermined time elapses. will be returned. After the arbitrary action confirmation period is generated, the operation button 410 is pressed to make it protrude, and when the operation button 410 is pressed again to return to the normal state, the arbitrary action confirmation period is terminated. In such a case, it is possible to prevent unnecessary time from occurring until a predetermined time elapses after it is confirmed that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated.

The operation confirmation period (optional operation confirmation period) described above occurs when a predetermined occurrence condition is established. In this example, the condition for generating the operation confirmation period is set so that the condition for generating the operation confirmation period is met when the demonstration effect is executed in order to avoid overlap with the effect at the time of operation. Specifically, in the demonstration effect, after the effect set in the variation pattern is completed, the effect set in the variation pattern is performed without entering the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for a certain period of time. This is an effect of waiting for customers when it is not started (information about the progress of the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a is not received on the side of the peripheral control MPU 1511a for a certain period of time), and is suitable for avoiding overlap with the effect at the time of operation. In this way, by using the execution time of the demonstration effect to generate the optional action confirmation period in the confirmation action period, the boring time when the effect set in the variation pattern is not started can be eliminated by the operation button 410. It can be changed to a meaningful confirmation time whether or not is normally detected and operated.

It should be noted that the demonstration effect is started when the symbol game is not progressing and the ball does not enter the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for a certain period of time. A start command) may be transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and the confirmation operation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) may be generated on the peripheral control MPU 1511a by receiving it. Also, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, an instruction (for example, a demonstration effect start command) by the main control MPU 1310a is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a side, and by receiving it, the peripheral control MPU 1511a side performs a confirmation operation period (optional operation confirmation period) may be generated, thereby avoiding overlapping occurrence with the effect at the time of operation, and confirming whether the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated before the player starts the game. This makes it possible to execute and provide an effect at the time of operation using the operation button 410 with more peace of mind.

In addition, LEDs (each LED of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button) are mounted on the operation button 410, and whether or not the optional operation confirmation period has occurred, and the progress stage of the optional operation confirmation period (optional operation confirmation period) (state of the operation button 410 in )), the light emission mode is changed in a plurality of stages. Specifically, when the arbitrary action confirmation period has not occurred, the LED of the operation button 410 is turned off. Then, when the arbitrary action confirmation period occurs, the LED of the operation button 410 is lit in a specific color (for example, red) and with a predetermined amount of light (confirmation period light emission mode A indicating that an arbitrary action is possible). ) to emit light. As a result, it is possible to inform the outside that the arbitrary action confirmation period has occurred and that the pressing of the operation button 410 is requested. When the operation button 410 is pressed to protrude after the arbitrary action confirmation period has occurred, the LED of the operation button 410 is the same color as when the operation button 410 is not pressed even once. However, it is caused to emit light in a mode in which the amount of light is increased by one step (light emission mode B for confirmation period suggesting that an arbitrary operation is being performed). As a result, even after the operation button 410 has been pressed and protruded, it is possible to inform the outside that further pressing of the operation button 410 is required. After that, when the operation button 410 is put into the normal state by pressing the operation button 410, the LED of the operation button 410 is turned on and the operation button 410 is pressed once until at least the remaining arbitrary operation confirmation period (predetermined time) elapses. Although the color is the same as when it is not pressed, light is emitted in a mode (light emission mode for confirmation period C suggesting completion of arbitrary operation) in which the amount of light is weakened compared to the light amount for verification period A and B described above. As a result, it is possible to inform the outside that the confirmation work in the optional operation confirmation period has been performed normally. The operation button 410 may emit light in a predetermined mode even when the optional operation confirmation period has not occurred. etc. can be exemplified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 379, after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed after the arbitrary action confirmation period has ended, the operation button 410 is operated without being pressed by the player, and the operation button 410 is placed at the normal position. An automatic operation confirmation period is provided to confirm the origin so that it is positioned at . In the automatic operation confirmation period, first, the operation button 410 is moved up and down several times in the vicinity of the normal state, and the normal position sensor detects that the operation button 410 in the normal state is in the normal position. Check the origin. After confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is put in a protruded state, and the protruded state is returned to the normal state. At this time, by detecting that the operation button 410 is in the normal state by the normal position sensor, it can be grasped that the operation button 410 is operating at the normal position. According to this, it is possible to ensure that the operation button 410 operates at a normal position, and to prevent the operation of the operation button 410 from being deviated when the performance using the operation button 410 is executed.

Further, the optional operation confirmation period is set to be longer than the automatic operation confirmation period. Specifically, the arbitrary action confirmation period is set to a predetermined time of "10 seconds" as described above, while the automatic action confirmation period is a short time of "5 seconds" as the time required for a series of actions. is set. During the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is operated to confirm the origin regardless of pressing by the player, in other words, the operation confirmation of the driving system proceeds automatically. On the other hand, during the arbitrary action confirmation period, if the player does not press the operation button 410 in the normal state, the operation button 410 does not change to the protruded state, and if the player does not press it in the protruded state, The projecting state is maintained until the optional operation confirmation period elapses. For this reason, by setting the optional operation confirmation period longer than the automatic operation period, the operation button 410 is not missed to be pressed. While it is possible to have players and hall managers carefully check over a long period of time in a situation where there are no It is possible to increase the efficiency of a series of checking operations for the drive-type operating means.

In the standby period between the arbitrary action confirmation period and the automatic action confirmation period, the left effect selection button 331 and the right effect selection button 332 are operated to operate the frame side lens 417 provided on the periphery of the operation button 410 and the second A peripheral confirmation period is provided in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the button decoration portion 411b (the LEDs of the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423) is lit. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided on the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 as described above, and can be operated by the player when the effect is presented. Also, during the peripheral confirmation period, when either the left effect selection button 331 or the right effect selection button 332 is pressed, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b light up. The manner in which the frame side lenses 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b are lit (for example, the manner of light emission such as brightness and color) differs depending on the state. Therefore, during the peripheral confirmation period, by pressing the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, it is possible to confirm whether or not the pressing is normally recognized. It is possible to confirm whether or not the two-button decoration part 411b lights up normally, and confirm the drive-type operating means itself through a series of operation confirmation periods (optional operation confirmation period, peripheral confirmation period, automatic operation confirmation period). Not only that, it is also possible to check related members around it.

In addition, if the operation button 410 is not pressed or protruded during the optional action confirmation period, the peripheral confirmation period may not be provided thereafter. In such a case, even if the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are pressed, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b will not light up, and the series of operation confirmation periods will be shortened. becomes.

Further, before the series of operation confirmation periods, a vibration confirmation period is provided in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the vibration motor 424 provided in the production operation unit 400 operates by operating the operation button 410. there is During the vibration confirmation period, when the operation button 410 is pressed, the vibration motor 424 operates and the effect operation unit 400 vibrates. Therefore, during the vibration confirmation period, by pressing the operation button 410, it is possible to confirm whether or not the vibration motor 424 operates and the effect operation unit 400 vibrates normally. In addition, by generating the series of operation confirmation periods at times that do not overlap with the vibration confirmation period, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the series of operation confirmation periods from being hindered by the vibration during the vibration confirmation period, and to efficiently perform various confirmation work. realizable.

In addition, when the predetermined projecting start condition that is established in the process of progressing the symbol game is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the normal state, but due to some abnormality, the operation button 410 is detected by the normal position sensor. In some cases, the normal state is not detected and the operation button 410 is not in the normal position. For example, when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state when a predetermined projection end condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 may be intentionally prevented from returning to the normal state by the player. It is conceivable that the In such a case, it is determined that the operation button 410 is abnormally protruding, and control is performed to restore the operation button 410 to its normal state.

As shown in FIG. 380 (A), other than a series of operation confirmation period, at the start of the special symbol variation corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the production based on the variation pattern), special corresponding to the end of the symbol game At the end of the pattern variation (at the end of the performance based on the variation pattern), at the timing of the start of the demonstration performance (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods), is the operation button 410 abnormally protruding? (whether it is in a normal position), and if it is determined that it is in an abnormally projected state (it is not in a normal position), control is performed to return the operation button 410 to its normal state. will be According to this, even if the operation button 410 is abnormally projected, the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state at a timing unrelated to the performance based on the variation pattern. This prevents the misunderstanding that the operation button 410 has been operated as part of the performance based on the above. Even if the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state and the operation button 410 is used for the performance, the operation button 410 is guaranteed to operate normally, and the interest in the performance is reduced. prevent you from doing so.

As described above, if it is set to generate an arbitrary action confirmation period within the confirmation action period using the execution time of the demonstration effect, the operation button 410 is abnormal when the demonstration effect is started. When the operation button 410 is in the protruding state and control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state (control for returning to the normal position) is performed, the start of the series of operation confirmation periods may be delayed. For example, if the operation button 410 is abnormally protruding at the timing of the start of the demonstration effect (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods), the operation confirmation period will be canceled even at the start timing of the series of operation confirmation periods. is not started, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state (control to return to the normal position) is performed preferentially, and the operation button 410 returns to the normal state (returns to the normal position) In addition, based on this fact, the entire series of operation confirmation periods may be started with a delay.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 380 (B), in a series of operation confirmation period, when the pattern game starts to fluctuate (at the start of production based on the fluctuation pattern) of the special pattern corresponding to the start of the pattern game, it corresponds to the end of the pattern game. At the timing of the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol (at the end of the production based on the fluctuation pattern), it is not determined whether the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether it is in a normal position). Even if it is in the protruding state (not in the normal position), no control is performed at that time to return the operation button 410 to its normal state. This is to give priority to the confirmation of whether or not the operation button 410 is pushed and protruded during the arbitrary operation confirmation period described above. This is to maintain the protruding state of 410 so as not to end due to the progress of the symbol game. As described above, when the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded during the operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is pressed at the end of the operation confirmation period, as in the case where the operation button 410 is pressed and protruded by the player. Control for returning the button 410 is performed. Note that if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruded state is pressed to the normal state before the predetermined period of time as the operation confirmation period has passed, the abnormal state can be detected without waiting for the predetermined period of time to pass. The operation button 410 in the projected state is returned to its normal state.

(Detection of anomalies in sword decorations)
Next, the abnormality when the sword blade portion 5011 (see FIGS. 278 to 281) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the above-described sword rendering operation unit 5000 is not in the sheathed state even though it should be in the sheathed state. Detection will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 381 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the sword ornament 5001 and the detection of abnormality.

The sword ornament 5001 can be changed between a sheathed state in which the blade portion 5011 is retracted and a drawn state (second drawn state) in which the blade portion 5011 is exposed. It should be noted that, in the above-described production example, a state between the sword sheathed state and the sword drawn state (first sword drawn state) was used as the production using the sword ornament 5001, but such a state is used in this example. Not used. The sword ornament 5001 is provided with a sheathed position sensor capable of detecting that the blade portion 5011 is in the sheathed state, and a sword-drawn position sensor capable of detecting that the blade portion 5011 is in the drawn state. ing. Further, the sword ornament 5001 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the blade portion 5011 from the drawn state to the sheathed state. In this example, the sheathed state corresponds to an operable state in which the player can draw the blade portion 5011, and the drawn state corresponds to an inoperable state in which the player cannot draw the blade portion 5011. .

Also, as an effect set in the variation pattern, an effect using the sword ornament 5011 is set. As shown in FIG. 381(A), in the production using the sword decoration 5001, an operation reception period is generated during which the sword decoration 5001 in the sheathed state can be drawn. During the operation acceptance period, the blade portion 5011 in the sheathed state is drawn in accordance with an instruction (for example, display of "draw the sword") on the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600, thereby performing a predetermined effect. You can get results. Then, when the player draws the sword ornament 5001 and puts the blade 5011 in the drawn state during the operation reception period, control for returning the blade 5011 to the sheathed state is performed at the end of the presentation time. done. Further, if the player does not draw the sword ornament 5001 during the operation reception period and the blade portion 5011 remains in the sheathed state, the sword blade portion 5011 will be in the sheathed state at the end of the operation reception period. hold. Of the effects using the operation button 410, the effect using the sword ornament 5001 has a higher degree of expectation (expectation for a big hit) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. there is That is, when the effect using the sword decoration 5001 is performed, the sword decoration 5001 can be drawn with more expectation than when the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed.

As shown in FIG. 381(B), the blade portion 5011 should be in the sheathed state except during the operation reception period, but the period during which the sword is not sheathed is a predetermined period (in this example, , 2 seconds), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001, and sheathed restoration control is performed to return the blade portion 5011 to the sheathed state. That is, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001 when the blade portion 5011 is in the drawn state or in the state between the drawn state and the sheathed state, except during the operation acceptance period. It has become. In this example, after the detection state of the sheathed position sensor described above becomes the OFF state (the state in which the blade portion 5011 is not in the sheathed state), the above-mentioned predetermined period (except for the operation reception period) is the sheathed state. period that is not

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 381(C), during the operation acceptance period, unless the player draws the sword ornament 5001, the blade 5011 should be in the sheathed state, but the sword is not in the sheathed state. has reached a predetermined period (two seconds in this example), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001, and sword sheath restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sheathed state is executed. done. That is, during the operation acceptance period, when the player draws the sword decoration 5001, the blade portion 5011 is in the drawn state. 5001 is determined to be abnormal, and in this case, the sword ornament 5001 is operated so that the detection state of the sheathed position sensor is in the ON state (a state in which the blade portion 5011 is in the sheathed state). . In this example, the processing time for one cycle for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sheathed state is set to "0.5 seconds" in the sheathed restoration control.

Further, the operation acceptance period is set to a period (4 seconds in this example) that is longer than the period until it is determined that the sword ornament 5001 has become abnormal. During the operation reception period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001, sword sheath restoration control is performed to return the blade portion 5011 to the sheathed state. The remaining period of the period is likely to occur, and the player can draw the sword ornament 5001 during the remaining period. Therefore, even if it is determined that the sword decoration 5001 has an abnormality within the operation acceptance period, it is possible to prevent the player from being hindered from participating in the presentation of drawing the sword decoration 5001.例文帳に追加

As described above, the determination of whether or not the operation button 410 is abnormally protruding (whether or not it is in the normal position) is made at the start of the special symbol variation corresponding to the start of the symbol game (based on the variation pattern). At the start of the effect), at the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the effect based on the variation pattern), and at the start of the above-described demonstration effect. In other words, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is abnormally protruding (whether or not it is in a normal position) during the operation acceptance period of the operation button 410 in which the operation button 410 can be pressed. not On the other hand, the judgment as to whether or not the sword decoration 5001 has an abnormality is also made during the operation reception period during which the sword decoration 5001 can be drawn. Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in the sword ornament 5001 during the operation accepting period, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player cannot draw the sword ornament 5001 as much as possible. In addition, the effect using the sword ornament 5001 has a higher degree of expectation (expectation for big hit) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state at least among the effects using the operation button 410. , it is possible to prevent overlooking the effect result of such highly expected effect.

In this example, the period during which the blade portion 5011 is not in the sheathed state reaches a predetermined period (2 seconds in this example), except when the player draws the sword ornament 5001 during the operation acceptance period. In this case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001. Of these, only when the blade portion 5011 is not in the sheathed state at the start of the operation reception period, it is determined that the sword decoration 5001 has an abnormality. You can make a decision. For example, the blade portion 5011 is in a sheathed state at the start of the operation reception period, and the player does not know whether the sword decoration 5001 should be completely drawn after the start of the operation reception period, so the blade portion 5011 is drawn. There is a possibility that the sword decoration 5001 will be left in a state between the sheathed state and the sheathed state for a predetermined period of time. .

In addition, when instructing the drawing of the sword decoration 5001 in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600, etc., the instruction is continued regardless of whether the abnormality of the sword decoration 5001 occurs or is resolved within the operation reception period. It may be executed. For example, during the operation reception period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001, sheathed sword restoration control is performed to return the blade portion 5011 to the sheathed state. The instruction on the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 is continued even during the period until the blade portion 5011 is returned to the sheathed state and the remaining period of the operation reception period. Further, if the player draws the sword ornament 5001 according to the instruction ``until the sheathed sword restoration control ends'', the sword blade portion 5011 is in the drawn state, so that the sword sheathed restoration is restored. Forcibly terminate the control and end the instruction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the timing of participating in the effect of drawing the sword decoration 5001 from being hindered due to the abnormality of the sword decoration 5001 .

In addition, in this example, although sheathed restoration control is performed to return the blade portion 5011 to the sheathed state, it is possible that the blade portion 5011 cannot be returned to the sheathed state due to catching of a foreign object or the like. In this case, one cycle of sheathed-sword restoration control, which should be completed in 0.5 seconds, may be repeated for a plurality of cycles (for example, 10 cycles). In this case, the sheathed-sword restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sheathed state continues beyond the operation acceptance period. It is only necessary to derive the result performance at the end of the reception period, and continue the sheathed-sword restoration control even after the result performance is derived. As a result, even in a situation where the abnormality of the sword decoration 5001 cannot be resolved, it is possible to suppress the possibility of a decline in the interest in the game without impeding the development of the presentation.

(Operation button abnormality determination timing)
Next, the abnormality determination timing of operation button 410 in production operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 382 is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 and the movable ornaments provided on the game board 5. FIG. In this example, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 that the player can operate will be explained in comparison with the abnormality determination timing of the movable ornament that the player cannot operate.

The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and can be in a normal state (initial position) in which it does not protrude from the production operation unit 400 and a state in which it protrudes from the production operation unit 400 (operation position). ) and can be changed to Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this is done, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In addition, when the operating button 410 is in a protruding state, if the player presses it until it reaches the normal position, the operating button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruded state. ing. Moreover, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the projected state to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 382 (A), at the start of the special symbol variation corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the production based on the variation pattern), at the end of the special symbol variation corresponding to the end of the symbol game (variation pattern At the end of the production based on the above), at the timing of the start of the demonstration production described above, the operation button 410 should be in the normal state without the predetermined projection start condition being satisfied. It is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally projected state (whether it is in a normal position). is controlled to return to its normal state. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in a state of being abnormally protruded, at least when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, it is returned to the normal state, so the production using the operation button 410 is performed as the production based on the fluctuation pattern. It is possible to prevent inhibition of participation in the presentation by pressing the operation button 410 when the player is called.

On the game board 5, around the game board side effect display device 1600, a back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, a back top left movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back top middle movable effect unit 3400, and a back bottom movable effect unit 3400 are arranged. A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as a front movable effect unit 3500 is provided. These movable decorations are members that cannot be operated (touched) by the player, and are in a non-operating state (standby position) in which the player waits around the game side effect display device 1600, and the game side effect display device 1600 can be changed to an operating state (display position) that is displayed in front of the display area of 1600 . Also, these movable decorations change from a non-operating state to an operating state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

It should be noted that the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, the back top left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back top middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 do not have movable decorative bodies. A stand-by position sensor is provided that can detect an operating state. In addition, the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state in the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, the back top left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back top middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back bottom front movable effect unit 3500. A drive mechanism (eg, a drive motor) is provided for moving between the operating state and the operating state.

As shown in FIG. 382 (B), at the start of the fluctuation of special symbols corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of production based on the fluctuation pattern), at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbols corresponding to the end of the symbol game (variation pattern at the end of the production based on the above), at the timing of the start of the demonstration production described above, the predetermined operation start condition is not satisfied and the movable decoration should be in a non-operating state, but at those timings, It is determined whether or not the movable decoration is in a non-operating state (whether it is in a normal position). A determination is made and control is performed to return the movable decoration to the non-operating state. In this way, if the movable decorative body is not in the non-operating state due to the occurrence of an abnormality, it is returned to the non-operating state at least when the special pattern starts to fluctuate, so the production using the movable decorative body is performed as the production based on the fluctuation pattern. When performing, the movable decorative body does not operate, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the presentation from being spoiled. Also, during execution of the effect based on the variation pattern, if the movable decorative body remains positioned in front of the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 due to the occurrence of an abnormality, the display area is obstructed. However, by returning to the non-operating state at least when the special symbols start to fluctuate, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

The operation button 410 is a member that can be touched by the player, and at the timing of control to the normal state or the protruding state, the player can block the change to that state. It is a member that cannot be touched by the player, and the player cannot block the change to that state at the timing of controlling to the non-operating state or the operating state. Therefore, the operation button 410 is more likely to malfunction than the movable decoration. In this respect, the operation button 410 has more chances of abnormality determination for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred than the movable decorative body, so that even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, it can be detected at an early stage. Allows it to return to its normal position. Therefore, even though there is a high possibility that an abnormality will occur in the operation button 410, when an effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on the variation pattern, it is possible to participate in the effect by pressing the operation button 410. It is possible to prevent being hindered.

In addition, as effects set in the variation patterns, effects using the operation buttons 410 in the normal state, effects using the operation buttons 410 in the protruded state, and effects using the movable decorative body are performed. However, the effect using the operation button 410 has a higher appearance rate than the effect using the movable decoration. For this reason, the operation button 410 tends to be used more frequently than the movable decorative body. Anomalies are more likely to occur. However, as described above, the operation button 410 has more opportunities for abnormality determination to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred than the movable ornament. Therefore, even though the frequency of using the operation button 410 is high, when an effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on the variation pattern, the occurrence of an abnormality prevents the user from participating in the effect. can be prevented.

(Occurrence of abnormal operation button during operation)
Next, an operation effect performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 383 and 384. FIG. FIG. 383 is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button 410 in the operation effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, and FIG. 384 is the operation effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. 4 is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button 410 in .

As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) not protruding from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) protruding from the effect operation unit 400. - 特許庁Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this is done, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In addition, when the operating button 410 is in a protruding state, if the player presses it until it reaches the normal position, the operating button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 to a normal state from the protruded state, and when the operation button 410 is protruded, a predetermined protrusion If the operation button 410 is not operated to return to the normal state until the termination condition is met (until a predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is met), the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state by the drive mechanism. state will be returned.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruded state. ing. That is, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in the normal state. In such a case, the normal position sensor detects that the operation button 410 is in the normal state. By detecting this, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position. On the other hand, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the protruding state. By detecting this, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a press detection sensor 440 capable of detecting that the operation button 410 has been pressed. Such detection by the press detection sensor 440 makes it possible to determine whether the operation button 410 is pressed in the normal state or whether the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed to the normal state. .

In addition, as effects set in the variation patterns, effects using the operation button 410 in the normal state and effects using the operation button 410 in the protruding state are provided. The performance using the operation button 410 in the protruded state is a performance with a higher degree of expectation (expectation for big hit) than the performance using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in a protruding state, the user can press the operation button 410 with more expectation than in the normal state.

First, when an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruded state is executed, an operation acceptance period is generated in which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed. At the start, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is positioned in a normal state, that is, whether or not it is in a normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 383(A), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button in the normal state is determined. 410 is changed to the projected state. In addition, during the operation acceptance period, an instruction (for example, a projected display of the operation button 410 in the state, a message display such as "Push the protruding operation button!" are performed in combination.

During the operation reception period described above, by pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to the normal state, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. As described above, when the operating button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation accepting period, the operating button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. Note that if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is not pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation reception period. done. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the aforementioned instruction effect A for the protruding operation may be ended.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 383(B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in the normal state (not in the normal position) at the start of the operation acceptance period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 is abnormally protruding. Further, even when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the instruction effect B for the projecting operation is performed during the operation reception period at the same timing as when no abnormality has occurred. The instruction effect B at the time of the projecting operation informs the player that although it is an abnormal projecting, it is equivalent to a normal projecting. (For example, a copy of the operation button 410 in a protruding state, a message display such as "This is a real protrusion! Press the operation button without worrying about it!"), or an instruction by voice from a speaker (for example, , ``This is a real protruding! Don't worry about pressing the operation button! As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation of changing the operation button 410 from the normal state to the protruding state is not performed. It is not possible to recognize whether an effect is being performed using a certain operation button 410 or an effect is being performed using an operation button 410 in a protruding state, and furthermore, an operation in a protruding state. There is a risk that the player will hesitate to operate the button 410 . However, the display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 and the instruction effect B at the time of the projecting operation are performed by the sound from the speaker, so that at least the operation button 410 in the projecting state can be detected from the display and sound. It is possible to recognize that the effect using the image is being performed. That is, even when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the degree of expectation for the effect using the operation button 410 from being hindered. Note that the instruction effects A and B at the time of the projecting operation are not limited to those composed of different effects as described above, but rather inform the player that the abnormal projecting is equivalent to the normal projecting. If possible, the instruction effects A and B may be configured with the same effect contents.

Further, when the performance using the operating button 410 in the protruding state is executed, even if an abnormality occurs in the operating button 410, the operating button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state. By doing so, the pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. Further, when the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. If the abnormally protruding operation button 410 is not pressed to the normal state within the operation accepting period, the abnormally protruding operation button 410 is returned to the normal state at the end of the operation accepting period. Control for returning to the state is performed. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the above-described instruction effect B at the time of the protruding operation may be terminated.

Next, when the performance using the operation button 410 in the normal state is executed, an operation acceptance period is generated in which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed. At the start of , it is determined whether the operation button 410 is in the normal state, that is, whether it is in the normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 384A, when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is in the normal state. to maintain In addition, during the operation acceptance period, an instruction (for example, normal A display that replicates the operation button 410 in the state, a message display of "Press the operation button!" will be Further, during the operation reception period, by pressing the operation button 410 in the normal state, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the instruction effect C for the normal operation described above may be terminated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 384(B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in the normal state (not in the normal position) at the start of the operation acceptance period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 is abnormally protruding. Further, even when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the instruction effect D for the normal operation is performed during the operation reception period at the same timing as when no abnormality has occurred. This instruction effect D for the normal operation informs the player that the current projection is not equivalent to the normal projection. For example, a display replicating the operation button 410 in a normal state, a message display such as "This projection does not matter, but press the operation button!" is performed in combination with a voice such as "Press the operation button!" As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, an unnatural situation occurs in which the operation button 410 is abnormally projected. Alternatively, an instruction effect at the time of normal operation is performed by voice from the speaker, so that it is possible to recognize from the display and voice that the effect is being performed using at least the operation button 410 in the normal state. . Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the instruction effect D for the normal operation described above may be ended. Note that the instruction effects C and D at the time of normal operation are not limited to those composed of different effect contents as described above, and can inform the player that the current protrusion is not equivalent to the regular protrusion. , the instruction effects C and D at the time of normal operation may be configured with the same effect contents.

Further, when the performance using the operation button 410 in the normal state is executed, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally projected state is pressed to the normal state. By doing so, the pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. However, unlike the execution of the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruded state, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruded state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the operation The button 410 is not locked by the locking mechanism and is maintained in its abnormally projected state. Further, even at the end of the operation acceptance period, the control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed.

As described above, in a case where an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, during the performance using the operation button 410 in the protruded state, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruded state is operated within the operation acceptance period. When pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returned to the normal state. On the other hand, when an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is executed, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally projected state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 is locked. It is not locked by the mechanism, and its abnormal protruding state is maintained. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the appearance of the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state does not indicate whether an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is being performed. However, depending on whether or not the normal state is restored when the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed, It is possible to recognize whether the production of is being performed.

When an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state can be used during a period other than the operation reception period, similarly to the operation reception period during the execution of the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. Even if the operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism, and the abnormally projected state is maintained. Thus, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, as will be described later, at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the production based on the variation pattern), the symbol game At the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end (at the end of the performance based on the variation pattern), at the timing of the start of the demonstration performance described above, the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed.

Also, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, during the operation reception period during execution of the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, the instruction effect for the normal operation is performed. However, such an instruction effect during normal operation may not be performed. This is because the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is less expected than the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruded state, so the instruction effect at the time of normal operation is performed. This is because even if the degree of expectation for the effect cannot be confirmed because the player is not caught, the player hardly suffers a disadvantage.

Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is returned to the normal state during the operation reception period during the execution of the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state. When the operation button 410 is pressed down to the lock mechanism, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. may be prevented from being locked to maintain its abnormally protruding state. That is, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the abnormal projection is performed regardless of whether an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state or an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruded state is performed. When the operation button 410 in the pressed state is pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 may not return to the normal state. For example, when the operation button 410 is returned to its normal state, the player intentionally prevents the operation button 410 from returning to its normal state. However, until the control timing for returning the operation button 410 to its normal state arrives, by leaving a trace that the operation button 410 has abnormally protruded, It can be called attention.

(Notification when operation button malfunction occurs)
Next, referring to FIG. 385, a description will be given of a notification mode performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400. FIG. FIG. 385 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the operation button 410 and the notification mode when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. FIG.

The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and can be in a normal state (initial position) in which it does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state in which it protrudes from the effect operation unit 400 (operation position). ) and can be changed to Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this is done, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In addition, when the operation button 410 is in a protruding state, if the player presses it until it reaches the normal position, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruded state. ing. Moreover, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the projected state to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 385(A), when an effect is executed using the operating button 410 in the protruding state, an operation receiving period is generated in which the detection of the pressing detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operating button 410 is pressed. However, at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the projected state. Then, when the operating button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation accepting period, the operating button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

However, if the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism due to some abnormality even though the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pushed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 returns to the normal state. Dont return. In such a case, the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded, but control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state at the end of the operation accepting period. Note that even if the operation button 410 in the protruded state is not pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation reception period. done.

Further, when the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism due to some abnormality even though the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation reception period, the normal operation is performed. not return to the state Thus, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state after the end of the operation accepting period, as will be described later, at the start of the special symbol variation corresponding to the start of the symbol game (based on the variation pattern At the start of the production), at the end of the special pattern fluctuation corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the production based on the fluctuation pattern), at the start of the above-mentioned demo production (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods) Then, the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed again.

As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, the control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is repeated after the end of the operation reception period. done. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation acceptance period, an effect for notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, which will be described later, is not performed. In other words, during the operation acceptance period, it is highly possible that the operation button 410 has been operated abnormally due to the operation of the operation button 410, and it is highly possible that the operation button 410 is not intentionally malfunctioning. An attempt is made to eliminate the malfunction of the operation button 410 without making the occurrence conspicuous.

On the other hand, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during a period other than the operation reception period, the response is different from the case where an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period. For example, in addition to the operation acceptance period, the above-described automatic operation confirmation period is provided when the above-described demonstration effect is executed, and during the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is operated without being pressed by the player. , the origin is confirmed so that the operation button 410 is positioned at the normal position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 385(B), in the automatic operation confirmation period, first, the operation button 410 is moved up and down several times in the vicinity of the normal state, and the operation button 410 in the normal state The origin is usually confirmed by a position sensor so that it can be detected as being in a normal position. After confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is put into a protruded state, and the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism by returning the protruded state to the normal state.

However, if the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism due to some abnormality, even though the operation button 410 in the protruded state is returned to the normal state during the automatic operation confirmation period, Doesn't return to normal. In such a case, the abnormally protruding operation button 410 is returned to its normal state unless the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state returns to its normal state. control is repeated. Then, if the operation button 410 does not return to the normal state when the control for returning the abnormally projecting operation button 410 to the normal state is performed a plurality of times (five times in this example), The automatic operation confirmation period is terminated, and after the automatic operation confirmation period is terminated, control for returning the abnormally projecting operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, and the abnormality continues after the automatic operation confirmation period ends, the pattern may not be displayed as after the operation reception period ends. At the start of the special design fluctuation corresponding to the start of the game (at the start of the production based on the fluctuation pattern), at the end of the special design fluctuation corresponding to the end of the design game (at the end of the production based on the fluctuation pattern), demonstration production At the start timing (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods), control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed.

Further, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, an effect is performed to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 . Specifically, notification by display in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 (for example, display of "abnormality has occurred in the operation button"), blinking of the lamp / LED provided in the main body frame 4 (For example, the lamp/LED blinks more violently than during normal effects), thereby appealing to the outside that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 .

As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, the control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is performed after the end of the automatic operation confirmation period. Not done. Also, during the automatic operation confirmation period, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, an effect is performed to notify that the operation button 410 has an abnormality. In other words, during periods other than the operation confirmation period, there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred due to the player operating the operation button 410 even though the operation of the operation button 410 is not requested as in the automatic operation confirmation period. Since there is a high possibility that this is done intentionally by the player, a trace is left to indicate that the operation button 410 has abnormally protruded, thereby calling attention to such a player.

Note that in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, an effect is not performed to notify that the operation button 410 has an abnormality. can be However, in such a case, during the automatic operation confirmation period, it is preferable to suppress the degree of appeal to the outside rather than the effect of notifying when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 . As a result, even after the end of the operation reception period, the player is not disturbed by the effect of notifying that the operation button 410 has become abnormal, and the user can pay attention to the effect related to the progress of the game (the effect based on the variation pattern). can.

(Confirmation effect at the time of abnormal occurrence of movable decoration)
Next, referring to FIG. 386, a description will be given of the confirmation effect performed when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body provided on the game board 5. FIG. FIG. 386 is a time chart showing the flow of effects when an abnormality occurs in the movable decoration.

On the game board 5, around the game board side effect display device 1600, a back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, a back top left movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back top middle movable effect unit 3400, a back bottom A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as a front movable effect unit 3500 is provided. These movable decorations are members that cannot be operated (touched) by the player, and are in a non-operating state (standby position) in which the player waits around the game side effect display device 1600, and the game side effect display device 1600 can be changed to an operating state (display position) that is displayed in front of the display area of 1600 . Moreover, these movable decorations change from a non-operating state to an operating state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

It should be noted that the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, the back top left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back top middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 do not have movable decorative bodies. A stand-by position sensor is provided that is capable of detecting an operating state. In addition, the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state in the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, the back top left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back top middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back bottom front movable effect unit 3500. A drive mechanism (eg, a drive motor) is provided for moving between the operating state and the operating state.

As shown in Figure 386, at the start of the special symbol variation corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the production based on the variation pattern), at the end of the special symbol variation corresponding to the end of the symbol game (based on the variation pattern At the end of the production), at the timing of the start of the demonstration production described above (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods), the predetermined operation start condition is not satisfied and the movable decoration should be in a non-operating state. However, at these timings, it is determined whether or not the movable decoration is in a non-operating state (whether it is in a normal position), and it is determined that it is not in a non-operating state (not in a normal position). In this case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and control is performed to return the movable decoration to the non-operating state.

However, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decoration, if the movable decoration does not return to the non-operating state despite the control for returning the movable decoration to the non-operating state, the movable decoration cannot be moved. An effect is performed to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the decoration. Specifically, the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and the display contents such as the decorative pattern and the background image that have been displayed are changed to non-display. Also, the lamps/LEDs provided on the body frame 4 are flashed violently. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decoration, the occurrence of the abnormality in the movable decoration is appealed to the outside.

In addition, when the movable decoration does not return to the non-operating state, in addition to the effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decoration, confirmation is made as to whether or not the game is to proceed in the state in which the abnormality has occurred. A confirmation performance is performed. Specifically, in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600, a message such as "press the operation button to end the abnormality notification and continue the game" is displayed. Then, unless the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, not only does the movable decorative body not operate, but also the display contents such as decorative patterns and background images remain hidden in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600. , lighting of the lamps/LEDs provided on the body frame 4, sound from the speaker, and other effects associated with the display contents are not performed.

On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body, or a confirmation effect of confirming whether or not to proceed with the game with the abnormality occurring. terminate. Then, after pressing the operation button 410 in the confirmation effect, there is no change in that the movable decorative body does not operate, but display contents such as decorative patterns and background images are displayed in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600. , and effects associated with the display contents, such as the lighting of the lamps/LEDs provided on the body frame 4 and the sound from the speaker, are performed. For example, after pressing the operation button 410 in the confirmation effect, when the effect of activating the movable decoration is performed, the display area display, lamps, etc. are displayed more than when there is no abnormality in the movable decoration. Although there is no change in the lighting of the LED and the sound from the speaker, the movable decoration does not move at the timing of the movement of the movable decoration. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decoration, a confirmation effect is performed, and the game is advanced after recognizing that the movable decoration does not operate when the effect using the movable decoration is performed. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to the movable decorative body not operating. The same confirmation effect is performed not only when the movable decoration in the operating state does not return to the non-operating state, but also when an abnormality occurs such as when the movable decoration stops working from the non-operating state. It is

In this example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect is performed in which the movable ornament can be moved by pressing the operation button 410. FIG. However, if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, during the operation reception period in the performance using the operation button 410 (the period during which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 is valid when the operation button 410 is pressed), the operation Even if the button 410 is pressed, the movable decoration does not move from the non-operating state to the operating state. Even in such a case, the operation button 410 can be operated by performing an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body or a confirmation effect of confirming whether or not to proceed with the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. Even if the operation button 410 is pressed when the effect using is performed, the user can be made to recognize that the movable decoration does not move.

Note that, in this example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect is also performed in which a predetermined effect result can be derived without moving the movable decorative body by pressing the operation button 410. FIG. Even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decoration as described above, the display in the display area, the lighting of the lamps and LEDs, and the sound from the speaker are not affected. The effect that the movable decorative body does not have an abnormality can be performed in the same way as when the movable decorative body does not have an abnormality.

Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decoration, control is performed to return the movable decoration to the non-operating state. There is a production to notify that an abnormality has occurred, and a confirmation production to confirm whether or not to proceed with the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. You may make it perform such production. In such a case, after the confirmation effect is started, control is performed to return the movable decoration to the non-operating state. The confirmation effect may be ended even before the operation button 410 is pressed.

(Interference Avoidance Operation of Multiple Movable Objects)
Next, interference avoidance operation when an abnormality occurs in any one of a plurality of movable bodies that are in a state where they may interfere with each other will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 387 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of operation button cover 419 and the operation state of operation button 410 during the operation reception period. In this example, in addition to the operation buttons 410 that can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 is provided as an opening/closing member for determining whether or not the operation buttons 410 can be operated. I will explain the case where

The operation button cover 419 is provided on the upper part of the operation button 410 in a normal state. It can be changed to an open state in which the operation button 410 is exposed so that it can be used. The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is closed and an open position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is open. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning it from the open state to the closed state.

The operation button 410 can change between a normal state (initial position) not protruding from the production operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) protruding from the production operation unit 400, like the operation button 410 other than this example. It's becoming Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this is done, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In addition, when the operating button 410 is in a protruding state, if the player presses it until it reaches the normal position, the operating button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruded state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the projected state to the normal state.

Moreover, the effect using the operation button 410 is set as the effect set in the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 387(A), in the effect using the operation button 410, an operation reception period during which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the effect time, and when the operation reception period occurs, The operation button cover 419 in the closed state is changed to the open state. Then, when it is determined that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruding state. During the operation reception period, by pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to the normal state according to the instruction, a predetermined effect result can be obtained.

If the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the normal state is restored. If the operation button 410 is not pressed until the end of the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 is forcibly returned to the normal state. At the end of the operation reception period, when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 from the open state to the closed state.

In this example, after the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is opened, the operation button 410 in the normal state is made to protrude so that the operation button 410 in the protruded state can be pressed. However, when the operation button cover 419 is opened, there may be a problem such as the operation button cover 419 stopping between the closed state and the open state. In other words, the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other when operated at the same time. In such a case, if the operation button 410 is controlled to protrude without opening the operation button cover 419, the operation button 410 that is about to protrude interferes with the operation button cover 419, causing the operation button to close. 410 and the operation button cover 419 may cause further problems. Therefore, when the operation button cover 419 does not open, control is performed to avoid interference between the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 387B, when the operation reception period occurs, control is performed to open the operation button cover 419 from the closed state. If it is determined that there is no operation button cover 419, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419, and the control to protrude the operation button 410 in the normal state is not performed (control to protrude the operation button 410). ). This prevents interference between the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 when the operation button cover 419 does not open. Note that even if the operation button cover 419 is stopped between the closed state and the open state before the operation reception period occurs, as long as the operation button cover 419 does not open when the operation reception period occurs. , the operation button 410 in the normal state is not protruded (control is prohibited to protrude the operation button 410).

Further, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened at the time when the operation reception period occurs, the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the player's own finger touch. , it is determined that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 has been resolved, the operation button 410 is permitted to be in the protruded state, and control is performed to protrude the operation button 410 in the normal state. In this way, even though the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other, when the interference is resolved by the contact, the operation button 410 is brought into a projected state. In the remaining period of the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 in the projected state can be pressed. Therefore, even if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419 at the time of occurrence of the operation reception period, the player can make an effect of pressing the operation button 410 in the protruded state by self-help efforts of the player. Participation can be prevented from being inhibited. After the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in the abnormal state to the closed state, and the operation button cover 419 is returned to the normal state. This prevents the situation where the button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other from occurring again.

It should be noted that if the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the player's own finger touch even though the operation button cover 419 has not been opened at the time when the operation reception period occurs, normal However, if the operation button 410 in the protruded state is not pushed to the normal state, the operation button 410 and The operation button cover 419 is forcibly returned to the normal state. Specifically, when the operation acceptance period ends, control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state. Control is performed to return the cover 419 to the closed state. This prevents the situation where the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other again later.

On the other hand, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened at the time of occurrence of the operation reception period and the player leaves it in that state, the operation button 410 in the normal state is not protruded. In such a case, it is not possible to participate in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 in the projected state. Further, at the end of the operation reception period, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in which an abnormality has occurred to the closed state, so that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 is resolved. and the operation button cover 419 are prevented from occurring.

(Operation when an error occurs in the operation button according to the game state)
Next, the operation when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 when the standby position of the operation button 410 is changed according to the game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 388 is a time chart showing the operating state of operation button 410 when an abnormality occurs in operation button 410 in the non-time saving state and the time saving state. In this example, in addition to the operation buttons 410 that can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 is provided as an opening/closing member for determining whether or not the operation buttons 410 can be operated. I will explain the case where

The operation button cover 419 is provided on the upper part of the operation button 410 in the normal state. It is possible to change to an open state in which the operation button 410 is exposed so that it can be used. The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is closed and an open position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is open. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning it from the open state to the closed state.

The operation button 410 can change between a normal state (initial position) not protruding from the production operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) protruding from the production operation unit 400, like the operation button 410 other than this example. It's becoming The effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism. In this example, in the non-time-saving state (normal state), the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, and is in the normal state, whereas in the time-saving state, the locking mechanism is locked. The operation button 410 is positioned in a protruded state by the spring mechanism. The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruded state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the projected state to the normal state.

In this example, in the non-time-saving state (normal state), an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state can be performed. In the performance using the operation button 410 in the normal state, an operation reception period during which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the performance time, and the operation in the closed state is generated when the operation reception period occurs. By changing the button cover 419 to the open state, it becomes possible to press the operation button 410 in the normal state. Then, during the operation reception period, by pressing the operation button 410 in the normal state according to the instruction, a predetermined effect result can be obtained. At the end of the operation reception period, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 from the open state to the closed state.

Moreover, while the operation button cover 419 exists in a closed state at the time of a non-time-saving state (normal state) except an operation reception period, the operation button 410 should be in a normal state. However, as shown in FIG. 388(A), when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state and the operation button 410 is in the projected state at the predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. After returning the operating button 410 in the protruding state to the normal state, control is performed to return the operating button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state. If the operation button 410 is in the normal state but the operation button cover 419 is in the open state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, only control for returning the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state is performed. is done. In addition, the predetermined abnormality determination timing is, as in the case other than this example, when the special symbols start to change (at the start of the effect based on the variation pattern), which corresponds to the start of the symbol game, and when the special symbols correspond to the end of the symbol game. When the variation ends (when the effect based on the variation pattern ends), it is the timing when the above-described demonstration effect starts.

On the other hand, during the time saving state, an effect using the operation button 410 in the projected state can be performed. In the performance using the operation button 410 in the protruded state, an operation reception period during which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the performance time, and when the operation reception period occurs, the operation button 410 is in the protruded state. By pressing the operation button 410 to the normal state according to the instruction, a predetermined effect result can be obtained. In addition, as long as it is in the time saving state, even if the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 is returned to the protruded state without being locked by the lock mechanism. Become.

Further, in the time-saving state, the operation button cover 419 should be in the open state, and the operation button 410 should be in the projected state. However, as shown in FIG. 388(B), when the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state at the predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. After returning the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state, control is performed to return the operation button 410 from the normal state to the projected state. Note that if the operation button 410 is in the normal state but the operation button cover 419 is in the open state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, control is performed to return the operation button 410 in the normal state to the projected state. only is performed.

As described above, in the non-time saving state (normal state), the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state, while in the time saving state, the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. and the operation button 410 should be in a protruded state. Thus, in the non-time saving state and the time saving state, it is determined that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 wait at different positions, but one of the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 If any of the above abnormalities occur, by changing the position of the return destination of the member in which the abnormality has occurred, the operation button 410 can be operated at the position corresponding to the game state when the effect using the operation button 410 is performed. It is possible to prevent the participation in the performance of operating 410 from being hindered.

[18. Production control by scheduler]
2. Description of the Related Art Gaming machines perform various effects during games by outputting sound, lighting/flashing of lamps, displaying images, and the like, and various elaborate effects have been attempted in order to make the games more interesting. As described above, the game machine controls a plurality of types of production devices by the peripheral control board 1510, which is a production control device, based on commands output from the main control board 1310, and executes production according to the game state of the game. do. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected by a unidirectional signal line for unidirectional signal transmission.

In order to coordinate and execute a plurality of types of effects, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-313694 discloses a control technique for realizing various effects displays using scenario data. Scenario data is data that sequentially defines patterns to be displayed on the screen in chronological order. By preparing control processing for realizing general-purpose processing for sequentially displaying designated patterns according to the scenario data, there is an advantage that a wide variety of presentation displays can be easily realized simply by switching the scenario data. Scenario data can also include specification of BGM. In this case, by outputting BGM for which the sound source IC is designated, it is possible to output sound corresponding to the display screen.

However, game machines are required to provide more elaborate presentations. With the above-described conventional technology, it is difficult to perform various effects such as sound output, lamp lighting, image display, etc. by interlocking a plurality of effect devices. For example, BGM cannot be changed while image display according to scenario data is being executed. In addition, when sound effects are to be output in response to a user's operation during image display, image display and BGM output are stopped, and sound effects are output. When the output of the sound effects ended, the BGM and image display were restarted from the beginning regardless of how far the BGM had been played, providing a sense of discomfort. The lighting and blinking of the lamp is controlled by a separate program according to the game state, regardless of the content of the image display. there were.

[18-1. Software Configuration in Peripheral Control Unit]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1530 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 and executes the game effect. In this embodiment, each configuration for executing effects based on the received main command is configured as software, but may be configured as hardware. Hereinafter, after explaining the configuration and outline of the functions for realizing the effect control in this embodiment, the details of each function will be explained.

[18-1-1. Configuration and overview of each function]
FIG. 389 is a functional block diagram for explaining the configuration and outline of functions for executing effect control in this embodiment. Peripheral control unit 1530 includes input command analysis unit 5010, effect control unit 5020, layer data storage unit 5030, effect block control unit 5040, effect block data storage unit 5050, scheduler execution unit 5060, scheduler data storage unit 5070, and output module unit. 5080.

The input command analysis unit 5010 receives input of a main command and analyzes the input command. The effect control unit 5020 acquires layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command, and determines block control information (effect block number). Explaining the layers, in the present embodiment, layers are set for each effect division such as background and characters, each effect element is drawn on each layer, and these layers are displayed in an overlapping manner to create an image on the liquid crystal display device. to output As a result, for example, if only the background is different and the display (movement) of the character is the same, it is possible to use a common layer for displaying the character. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of performance data (scheduler data) and improve development efficiency. The layer data storage unit 5030 stores information for specifying effects for each layer.

The effect block control unit 5040 receives block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020 and acquires effect block data corresponding to the effect block number from the effect block data storage unit 5050 . The effect block data includes scheduler data for executing the effect. The scheduler data stores a plurality of functions that instruct predetermined processes to be executed among the plurality of processes required according to the production device in order to control the production in each production device in the order to be executed. Data. The production block data consists of "liquid crystal production block data" for executing the production to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, "liquid crystal pattern block data" for changing and displaying the identification pattern on the liquid crystal display device, sound, There are three types of "sub-effect block data" for controlling lamps, accessories, and the like. Effect block control section 5040 executes control according to the type of effect block data, and transfers scheduler control information including effect block data to scheduler execution section 5060 .

The scheduler execution section 5060 acquires the scheduler data included in the effect block data from the scheduler data storage section 5070 . Then, the scheduler data is executed, the function corresponding to each effect device is called, and the effect device control information is transmitted to the output module section 5080 .

The output module unit 5080 receives effect device control information from the scheduler execution unit 5060, and transmits effect device drive data to each effect device based on the effect device control information. Each effect device performs an operation based on the effect device drive data. The output module unit 5080 has a CPU (peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided in the production control device (peripheral control board 1530), and the production control unit 5020 is configured as software, and the CPU executes another computer program. realized by It should be noted that the effect control unit 5020 may be configured by an arithmetic circuit separate from the effect control unit 5020 and configured as hardware.

[18-1-2. Module configuration]
Next, the details of the configuration of the modules and the like that implement the functions described above will be described. FIG. 390 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of modules and the like in the peripheral control unit 1530 of the gaming machine of this embodiment. Each configuration is configured as software by a computer program executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1530, but may be partially or wholly configured as hardware.

In this embodiment, the system module 5100 for driving each production device is processed by the peripheral control section 1530 . The system module 5100 includes a command analysis module 5200, a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600, a driving device module 5700, etc., as modules related to presentation. Also included is an effect control unit 5020 for creating effect device control information for driving each effect device based on a main command.

System module 5100 includes main command buffer 5110 , liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120 , lamp data output buffer 5130 , motor data output buffer 5140 and serial control IC 5150 . The main command buffer 5110 receives a main command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and transfers it to the command analysis module 5200 . In this embodiment, the main command is 3-byte one-set information, which is a command status value, a command mode value, and a checksum value of the command status and mode value in order from the first byte. The main command buffer 5110 receives this signal, evaluates the checksum value, and discards the received command if the received command is not determined to be correct. If determined, it is passed to the command analysis module 5200 .

The main command includes information representing contents related to effects among the game state and the operation state of the game machine. For example, the main command can include whether or not a game ball has entered a starting winning hole, the result of a special figure lottery, the variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol, and the like. Further, when the present embodiment is applied to a slot machine, door opening and other sensor outputs, operation of a start lever and a stop button, rotation and stop of reels, success/failure of a combination at the time of stop, and the like are included. Note that the commands listed here are examples, and various commands can be included depending on the model of the game machine and the contents of the presentation.

The command analysis module 5200 is included in the input command analysis unit 5010, analyzes the contents of the main command, and determines whether or not the command is related to the production. If the command is determined to be related to production, it is transferred to the production control unit 5020. - 特許庁

The effect control unit 5020 identifies a layer to be controlled for effect from the layer data table based on the analysis result of the main command. Then, the block data number (effect block number) is acquired from the specified layer, and the block data number corresponding to each layer is transmitted to the effect block control section 5040 .

The effect block control section 5040 includes a liquid crystal effect block control section 5310 and a sub-effect block control section 5320 . The liquid crystal effect block control section 5310 determines control information for executing the effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device. The sub-effect block control section 5320 determines control information for executing sound output, lighting/flickering of lamps, actions of characters, and the like.

When the effect block number is determined, the liquid crystal effect block control section 5310 executes the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The liquid crystal effect block data is block data for executing the liquid crystal display effect, and includes one or more drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, the background, characters, identification patterns, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

The liquid crystal effect block control section 5310 activates the scheduler execution section 5060 corresponding to the control (display) object, and executes the drawing scheduler data included in the block data. The liquid crystal display scheduler execution unit 5060 includes a liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 for displaying effect elements such as backgrounds and characters, and a liquid crystal design 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 for displaying identification patterns. included.

The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 are executed at a frame cycle (1f=approximately 33.334 milliseconds) which is a screen update cycle. The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal effect block data by the drawing scheduler, and the liquid crystal module 5400 generates a liquid crystal display list command. The liquid crystal display list command is passed through the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120 to the effect display device (game board side effect display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460).

The sound source built-in VDP 1540a generates display data based on the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, and outputs it to the effect display device (game board side effect display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460). The display data is generated, for example, by developing character data specified by a liquid crystal display list command on a specified position on the frame buffer.

When the effect block number is determined, the sub effect block control section 5320 executes the sub effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The sub effect block data is block data for executing each effect of lamp, sound, and motor, and includes one or more sub effect scheduler data. By executing the sub-effect scheduler data, each effect device such as a lamp, a sound, and a motor performs operations defined in advance in the sub-effect scheduler data.

The sub effect block control section 5320 activates the scheduler execution section 5060 according to the execution cycle of various effect devices, and executes the sub effect scheduler data included in the sub effect block data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 for controlling various effect devices includes a sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 that controls the effect device at 1 frame intervals and a sub effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 that controls the effect device at 1 millisecond intervals. included. Thus, by providing the scheduler execution unit corresponding to the execution interval, it becomes possible to execute the effect according to the configuration of the game machine and the required specifications of the effect device. For example, since 1f corresponds to the drawing update interval, it is possible to synchronize the sound output, character action, etc. with the liquid crystal display. Further, if the detection interval of the sensor is in units of 1 ms, it is possible to quickly deal with any malfunction in the action of the character.

The sub-effect block control unit 5320 executes control of effects other than the liquid crystal display. explain. Note that the effect control by the sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 and the sub effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 will be described without particular distinction, assuming that they are the same except for the execution cycle. An outline of control according to the type of effect device will be described below.

First, a case of executing an effect by sound output will be described. If the sub-effect block data contains scheduler data for sound output, the scheduler executing section 5060 activates the scheduler for sound output and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a function for sound output (for example, SPLAY) is executed, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data (sound source command) based on specified parameters. A plurality of schedulers can be activated. For example, by controlling the output of BGM and effect sound by different schedulers, sound source driving data can be generated in parallel and sounds can be output at the same time. . The VDP 1540a with built-in sound source reads the sound source data specified by the sound source drive data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b, and outputs it from the speakers 921 and 573 by the audio data transmission IC 1540c.

Next, a case of executing an effect by a lamp will be described. If the sub effect block data includes scheduler data for lamp control, the scheduler execution unit activates the scheduler for lamps and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a function for lamp control (eg, HPLAY) is executed, the lamp module 5600 generates lamp drive data based on the specified parameters. As in the case of sound output, multiple schedulers can be activated, and multiple lamps and layers can be controlled in parallel.

The lamp module 5600 creates lamp driving data for each period (one frame or one millisecond) and outputs it to the lamp data output buffer 5130 . Lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores lamp drive data generated by lamp module 5600 , and outputs the data to serial control IC 5150 . By making the ramp data output buffer 5130 a double buffer, it is possible to simultaneously generate and output ramp data in a single cycle. By configuring in this way, the lamp control processing time increases due to an increase in the number of lamp systems or superimposition of lamp layers. By setting the period as a cycle, it is sufficient that the processing related to the creation of the lamp data is completed within the processing cycle.

Specifically, when the lamp data output buffer 5130 is configured by a buffer A and a buffer B, for example, if the lamp driving data generated last time is stored in the buffer A, the data for the next cycle is stored in the buffer B. , and outputs the previously created lamp driving data from the buffer A to the serial control IC 5150 by DMA to turn on/blink each lamp. In the next cycle, the buffers are switched, the lamp driving data is output from the lamp module 5600 to the buffer A, and the lamp driving data stored in the buffer B is output to the serial control IC 5150 . Controlling the lighting and blinking of LEDs is the same as for lamps, and the description of the control of lamps can be replaced with LEDs unless otherwise specified.

Finally, a case of controlling a driving device (for example, a motor, a solenoid) for operating the accessory will be described. If the sub effect block data includes scheduler data for driving device control, the scheduler execution unit activates the scheduler for driving device (motor scheduler) to execute the scheduler data. Then, when a driver control function (eg, MPLAY) is executed, the driver module 5700 generates lamp driving data based on the specified parameters. As in the case of sound output, it is possible to activate a plurality of schedulers, so that a plurality of driving devices can be controlled in parallel.

The drive module 5700 creates motor drive data for each cycle and outputs it to the motor data output buffer 5140 . In this embodiment, the motor drive data is created and output in a cycle of 1 millisecond. Motor data output buffer 5140 temporarily stores motor drive data generated by drive module 5700 and outputs it to serial control IC 5150 . The motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a without using DMA. However, the output of the latch signal for reflecting the motor data in each driving device is not the same timing as the timing of output from the motor data output buffer 5140 to the serial control IC 5150, but the latch signal is output at the next cycle after transmission of all the motor data. output. This is because the output timing of the latch signal is after the serial transmission of all motor data is completed, so as the serial transmission time of the motor data becomes longer, the waiting time until the serial transmission is completed becomes an overhead, and the total processing time for each frame period becomes This is because there will be a shortage of In this embodiment, by shifting the timing of the motor data serial transmission and the corresponding latch signal output, the waiting time until the completion of the serial transmission is reduced to 0. However, depending on the CPU used, multiple DMAs can be used. In this case, by serially transmitting motor drive data using DMA and outputting a latch signal in response to a DMA completion interrupt, the waiting time until completion of serial transmission can be similarly reduced to zero. Simultaneously with the output of the motor driving data, effect driving photo information is input to the driving device module 5700 (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Each effect driving photo information is received by serial communication via a parallel serial control IC.

[18-2. Data structure]
In this embodiment, the scheduler data can take various structures. For example, a call function may be provided to retrieve other scheduler data as part of the scheduler data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes specified by the scheduler data, and when executing the call function, once executes other scheduler data specified by the call function, and then continues the processing of the original scheduler data. and execute it. By doing so, it becomes possible to utilize general-purpose presentation contents in various situations in the same way as calling a subroutine in a general program.

This function is not only capable of reducing the load of creating scheduler data, but also has effects unique to gaming machines, as described below. In the game machine, various lotteries and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Some players are able to guess the result of the lottery by finding subtle differences in the contents of the lottery. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by using the call function, it is possible to utilize general-purpose presentation contents in various situations, so that it is possible to eliminate such subtle differences and make it difficult to predict the results of the lottery. It is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

As another configuration, the scheduler data may include a conditional branching function for switching the effect content according to the game state. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes specified by the scheduler data, and when executing the conditional branching function, determines the game state based on the main command, and executes the effect contents according to the game state. . By doing so, it is possible to deal with a wide variety of branching game states with one scheduler data. The game state used for conditional branching includes, for example, the result of a lottery performed during the game, and whether or not the player has operated a button or the like. In a reel-type game machine, the stopped state of the rotating reels may be used, and in the pachinko machine, the winning state of the starting winning hole may be used. Further, conditional branching may be performed depending on whether or not an error occurs during the game.

Various configurations are possible for the contents of the presentation after conditional branching. For example, after conditional branching, the configuration may be such that two or more processes are completely separated. Further, after performing a predetermined process by conditional branching, the process may be returned to the process before branching. According to the latter aspect, for example, when a button is pressed during a game, after executing a process of temporarily outputting a sound effect, it is possible to return to the previous presentation without discomfort.

As described above, the gaming machine can include various effects devices, and as an example, it can include a display device for displaying images. Various devices capable of displaying images, such as liquid crystal panels, CRTs, organic EL panels, and plasma displays, can be used as display devices. The display contents of the display device are controlled by the image processing device. An image processing device is a device that develops an image into a bitmap according to a predetermined display command and generates display data for displaying the image on a display device. For example, it can be configured by combining a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a character ROM in which characters and the like to be displayed on the screen are prepared as bitmaps.

[18-3. Basic Concept of Production Control]
FIG. 391 is an explanatory diagram showing the basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Here, the main effect control will be explained in the case of the sub-effect executed by executing the scheduler data containing the function, and in particular, the sound output will be explained as an example.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 (sub production scheduler execution unit 5320) activates the type and number of schedulers 5502 according to the production device when executing production. The scheduler execution section 5060 acquires the scheduler data designated as the sub effect block data from the scheduler data storage section 5070, and executes the function contained in the scheduler data. The structure of scheduler data will be described later.

The sound functions executed during sound output include "SPLAY" for playing a phrase, "STOP_PH" for stopping a phrase being played, and "VOL_PH" for setting a volume level during phrase playback. These sound functions are processed by the sound module 5500, and controls specified by parameters and the like are executed. When the sound module 5500 accepts execution of the function for sound, it generates sound source driving data and outputs the sound source driving data to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

The functions processed by the sound module 5500 control the sound output corresponding to the designated channel. Although the game machine of this embodiment is provided with 32 channels, the number of channels is assumed to be 4 for easy understanding. Sounds output by each channel are output from speakers [1] to [4] via volume 5506v[1] to [4]. The speakers [1] to [4] illustrated here schematically represent the outputs of the respective channels Ch1 to Ch4, and correspond to any one of the physical speakers provided in the gaming machine. It does not mean that

The correspondence between the scheduler 5502 and the output channels is managed by channel management works 5507[1] to 5507[4] provided in association with the channels Ch1 to Ch4. An example of the data structure of the channel management work 5507 is shown in the lower right of the figure. A work 5507 stores a phrase number, a stereo reproduction flag, an output volume, and a loop attribute. A phrase number is information indicating which phrase is currently being reproduced. The stereo reproduction flag indicates whether or not stereo output is to be performed. Output volume is the volume per channel. A loop attribute is a designation as to whether or not to repeat playback. These information are specified by the sound module 5500 based on the function for sound.

As described above, FIG. 391 shows the basic concept of effect control in this embodiment by taking sound output control as an example. The sub-rendering scheduler execution unit activates the scheduler designated by the sub-rendering block data, and executes the scheduler data on the scheduler. When the scheduler data is executed, a function for controlling each effect device is called and processed by the modules (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to each effect device.

[18-4. Data flow in production control]
So far, the basic concept of the module configuration and control in the performance control of the gaming machine has been described. Next, the flow of effect control from the reception of the main command to the acquisition of the scheduler data will be described.

[18-4-1. Acquisition of data necessary for production control]
FIG. 392A is a diagram for explaining the configuration up to acquisition of data required for effect control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. 390, when the main command is received from the main control board 1310, the effect control unit 5020 analyzes it by the command analysis module 5200 and notifies the effect control unit 5020 of the analysis result.

Based on the layer data table, the effect control unit 5020 includes each layer, a variation pattern layer (a layer that performs effects related to the variation pattern), a pending layer (a layer that performs effects related to the pending effect), a game instruction layer (a game instruction based on the analysis results by the command analysis module 5200 for each layer), communication error layer (layer for notifying communication errors), notification layer (layer for various notifications), and abnormality notification layer (layer for notifying anomalies) , Acquisition and update management of effect block data number corresponding to each layer. Also, the obtained effect block data number is transferred to the effect block control unit 5040 . For example, if it is a variation pattern layer, the effect block number is based on the variation pattern number, liquid crystal effect block data combination number table by variation pattern, liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table by variation pattern, sub effect block data by variation pattern Determined from the combination number table. The division unit of the performance block is divided into predetermined units (blocks) which are common performances in a series of performances (for example, performances executed from the start to the end of the variation of the special symbols). Further, block data including control information such as effect content and effect time for each effect device is defined for each block. By controlling the performance for each performance block based on the performance block number, the performance by each performance device can be synchronized. Also, the arrangement of the layers corresponds to the layers on the liquid crystal display, and in this embodiment, the variation pattern layer is the backmost layer, and the abnormality notification layer is the frontmost layer. It is a configuration for

When the effect block control unit 5040 receives the block data number (effect block number) corresponding to each layer, the scheduler control unit (liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, liquid crystal pattern block control unit 5311, sub effect block The corresponding block data (liquid crystal effect block data 5051, liquid crystal design block data 5052, sub-effect block data 5053) is acquired by the control unit 5320). Each block data includes scheduler data for executing effects, as described above.

For example, when the main command is the starting winning command, the pending layer is specified, and the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 for performing the pending display on the liquid crystal display screen and the sub effect block data for outputting the effect sound at the time of starting winning 5053 is obtained. Also, when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, a fluctuation start command or the like is transmitted, and the fluctuation pattern layer is specified. Furthermore, a command is also sent when notifying an error or warning, and the anomaly detection layer is specified. Also, by performing effects for each layer, a plurality of effects can be superimposed at the same time.

Based on the liquid crystal effect block data number, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 obtains the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table corresponding to each layer. Start the production 1f scheduler. The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 further acquires the liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071 . By executing the liquid crystal presentation schedule data 5071 on the liquid crystal presentation 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal presentation schedule data 5071 . The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and displays the game board. An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. - 特許庁The processing in the liquid crystal presentation 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

Further, based on the liquid crystal pattern block data number, the liquid crystal pattern block control section 5311 obtains the liquid crystal pattern block data 5052 from the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table corresponding to each layer. to activate the liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler. The liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 further acquires the liquid crystal pattern schedule data 5072 . By executing the liquid crystal design schedule data 5072 on the liquid crystal design 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal design schedule data 5072 . The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and displays the game board. An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. - 特許庁The processing in the liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

After obtaining the sub effect block data 5053, the sub effect block control section 5320 specifies the execution cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond) based on the information specified in the sub effect block data 5053 and the like. Then, when the execution cycle is 1 frame, the sub performance 1f scheduler is activated by the sub performance 1f scheduler execution unit 5333, or when the execution cycle is 1 millisecond, the sub performance 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 executes the sub performance 1ms. Start the scheduler.

Further, the sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 acquires the sub effect schedule data 5073 and executes it on the corresponding scheduler. The sub performance schedule data 5073 does not differ depending on the execution cycle, and all functions can be executed by the schedulers of all execution cycles. This makes it possible to create scheduler data that is commonly used by schedulers with different execution cycles, thereby reducing the data volume. In addition, it is possible to quickly respond to changes in the execution cycle of the production device. In addition, the same schedule data can be executed simultaneously by different schedulers, which makes it possible to share the scheduler data, prevent the same type of failure from occurring in multiple places, and reduce the data volume. can.

A specific example of simultaneously executing the same schedule data by different schedulers will now be described. FIG. 392B is a diagram for explaining the step-up notice liquid crystal drawing effect of the present embodiment. For the step-up notice, four types of step-up notice 1 to 4 can be executed, and by executing the production that develops the production content step by step, the player can expect the result of the variable display of the pattern. suggest degrees.

In the step-up notice 1, the notice performance ends when the step-up 1 performance is executed. In the step-up notice 2, the step-up 2 performance is generated just before the step-up 1 performance ends, and after the step-up 2 performance ends, the notice performance ends. The effect is similarly executed for the step-up notices 3 and 4, and the notice effect is finished after the step-up 3 effect and the step-up 4 effect are finished, respectively.

In the step-up notice, sound and lamps also execute the step-up notice effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the sound production, different sounds are output in each stage of the step-up production, so four types of scheduler data from step 1 to step 4 are defined for each progress (stage) of the production. On the other hand, in the ramp effect, the same ramp pattern is displayed in each stage of the step-up effect, so it is sufficient to define one type of common ramp scheduler data.

In addition, when the liquid crystal effect of the step-up notice develops to the next stage, the next step-up notice will start just before the end of the current step-up notice, so multiple step-up effects will be temporarily performed at the same time. There is a period of time. As described above, in the ramp effect, it is necessary to execute the same scheduler data for subsequent step-up effects. It's becoming Therefore, when the same effect is executed in each stage, one type of common scheduler data may be defined even if the effect execution periods overlap.

Specifically, when the step-up notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by the ramp scheduler (LMP_SCH01) in the step-up 1 effect, the same step-up is performed when the step-up 2 effect that starts just before the end of the step-up 1 effect occurs. The advance lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by another lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH02). With this configuration, the same scheduler data is not defined redundantly, and the same scheduler data is simultaneously (overlapped) executed, so that in a series of performances, the same pattern of performance is performed in parallel. Realized to run.

The sub production 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub production 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 calls the modules (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, driving device module 5700) corresponding to the production device to be controlled, and defines them in the sub production schedule data 5073. Instructs the processing of the specified function. Each module processes a function instructed to be executed based on designated scheduler data, creates data necessary for driving the rendering device, and outputs the driving data to the rendering device.

[18-4-2. Overview of execution of scheduler data]
FIG. 393 is a diagram for explaining the flow of scheduler data during execution in this embodiment. The production control unit 5020 determines the content of production based on the analysis result of the main (main board) command by the command analysis module 5200, and various production devices are operated by the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source, the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 and the driving device module 5700. Control. FIG. 393 shows the structure of scheduler data 5401 referenced to set this command.

In this embodiment, the scheduler data 5401 is prepared for each effect number specified by the effect block control section 5040 and stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b. The correspondence relationship between the scheduler data 5401 and the performance number is defined in the performance management table. As shown on the left side of the figure, the effect management table has a effect management pointer that indicates the storage address of the scheduler data. Although the number of effect management pointers corresponding to the effect number is prepared, only five pointers are illustrated here. In the illustrated example, for example, the effect management pointer [1] initially stores the start address A1 of the scheduler data 5401. In the example shown in FIG. As the processing of scheduler data is executed, the value of effect management pointer [1] shifts to A1 and A2 in sequence.

In this embodiment, the effect number uses the address value of the effect management pointer. In the example of FIG. 393, the performance numbers 01H, 02H, etc. represent the storage addresses of the performance management pointers [1], [2], etc., respectively. Note that the effect number is not limited to the address value, and arbitrary identification information can be used. In this case, the effect management table may be configured so that the effect number and the effect management pointer are associated with each other. Processing should be performed. Further, if the address value of the effect management pointer is used as the effect number, the amount of data in the effect management table can be reduced, and the above search is not required, so the load required for processing the scheduler data can be reduced.

Each command that constitutes the scheduler data 5401 is basically composed of a function and a parameter, as shown in FIG. A function, as described above, is a command for controlling the effect device, for example, for instructing each module to operate the effect device. A parameter is a variable that specifically indicates the processing content of a function. It should be noted that a function that does not need to specify parameters may be provided.

Functions are categorized into groups such as sequence control, lamp, sound, motor (drive) and user. Sequence control is a basic function for effect control, and lamps, sounds and motors are functions for controlling each effect device. A user is a function that does not belong to these groups. A detailed description of the functions will be given later with reference to FIGS.

In the example shown in FIG. 393, the "call" function is specified at address A2. The "call" function belongs to the sequence control group, saves the pointer value of the next function, and sets the address specified by the parameter to the performance management pointer. The scheduler execution unit 5060 can temporarily move to the address specified by the parameter, process the scheduler data, and then return to the previous process based on the saved pointer value.

After address A2, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes address A31 specified by the parameter of the "call" function. A liquid crystal command is set at address A31, a voice operation number is set at A32, a lamp operation number is set at A33, and return is performed at A3n. After finishing these processes, the effect command returns to the address A2 where "call" is specified, and shifts to the process of the next address A3.

Thus, by utilizing the "call" function, it is possible to incorporate the contents of a series of blocks BL3 specified by addresses A31-A3n into various parts of the scheduler data. By doing so, the capacity of the scheduler data can be reduced, and the load for creating the scheduler data can be reduced. 2. Description of the Related Art In game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various lotteries and the like are performed during a game, and the development of the game changes according to the results. Some players are able to guess the result of the lottery by finding subtle differences in the contents of the lottery. On the other hand, according to the present invention, since it is possible to utilize general-purpose presentation contents in various situations by calling, it is possible to eliminate such subtle differences and make it difficult to predict the lottery results. , it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

Although it is possible to use the "call" function in this way, the scheduler data 5401 of this embodiment is different from the interpreter program. As described above, the main function used in the scheduler data 5401 is to set the contents of instructions to other schedulers, such as "Set character action number", "Voice action number set", and "Lamp action number set". , the scheduler execution unit 5060 only specifically instructs very limited functions that can be realized.

In the example shown in FIG. 393, NOP (wait) is then executed at address A3. The "NOP" function waits for the specified number of frames and continues processing the scheduler data. Here, processing of the scheduler data waits until the time specified by the parameter Prm[031] has passed. As will be described later, in this embodiment, processing is repeatedly executed by timer interrupts. Therefore, in the "NOP" function, if the value of the parameter Prm[031] is not 0, the scheduler execution unit 5060 once terminates the processing of the scheduler data without performing subsequent processing. , processing to move to the function of the next address.

In this embodiment, a work having the same format as the work area 5301 shown in FIG. 392A is used to specify the voice action number and the like. The work area 5301 used by the system event and the work used by the scheduler execution unit 5060 are prepared separately, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 stores the voice operation number and the like in each work according to the scheduler data specification. Also, the layer designated by the effect control unit 5020 is provided separately from the layer for the system module (see FIG. 392A). Also in the work for each module, it is possible to designate a plurality of voice operation numbers and lamp operation numbers from among these layers in parallel.

Similarly, the scheduler data after the conditional branch address A11 are defined by functions and parameters. In the example shown in FIG. 393, no conditional branch is provided from address A11 of the conditional branch to the end of the rendering (address An). Since this range is a block BL2 different from the block BL1 described above, it is possible to specify a character command (address A22), a voice action number (address A21), etc. without considering conflict with the block BL1. . Instead of these settings, a "call" function may be used to fetch block BL3 and the like.

The scheduler data may use a combination of conditional branching and a "call" function. For example, a random number may be generated for switching the effect content, and a different address may be called according to the value of the random number. In the example shown in FIG. 393, if a condition of "random value ≤ Th1?" Also, after address A2 (address A2+1), if address A41 (not shown) is called with the condition "Th1<random number≤Th2?" is executed differently. In this way, by calling a different address with conditional branching according to the random number, it is possible to switch the contents of the effect at random according to the random number, making it possible to enhance the interest of the game. In the present specification, hereinafter, such switching of the effect content is referred to as "effect lottery".

In the effect lottery, all of the display, sound, lamp, and driving device may be switched, or only part of them may be switched. To switch all of them, it is sufficient to specify all the contents of display, sound, and lamp in the scheduler data called by the "call" function. When switching only a part, specify only the part to be switched in the scheduler data called by the "call" function, and specify the other parts uniformly after returning from the "call" function. do it.

Also, within the scheduler data, conditional branching and a "call" function may be used to call different scheduler data according to the random number for the effect lottery. In this case, the display, sound, lamp, and driving device perform the lottery for effects independently, and as a result, there is an advantage in that the combination of the effects provides a wide variety of effects, which enhances the interest of the player.

However, regardless of the result of the display, sound, lamp, and driving device effect lottery, it is preferable that these effects end at the same time in order to realize a natural effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the scheduler data to be selected for the effect lottery is such that the effect ends at the same time. It should be noted that it is not an essential requirement that the performances end at the same time, and these performance times may not be the same.

The effect lottery based on the scheduler data has the advantage that the effect contents can be diversified and the lottery mode can be switched according to the output status of the display, sound, lamp, and driving device. For example, when an effect lottery is instructed, the driving device is executing a figure-of-eight sorting operation and other operations are restricted, the driving device module 5700 prohibits the effect lottery related to the driving device. may Similarly, with respect to display, sound, and lamp, the effect lottery may be prohibited depending on the situation when the effect lottery is instructed. Further, in the effect lottery prohibition, the effect lottery may be partially prohibited by prohibiting the selection of some scheduler data.

As described above, the effect lottery only switches the effect contents by the control processing of the peripheral control board 1510, and does not affect the game itself. However, by enabling the effect lottery in this way, it is possible to realize a more diverse effect than the types of commands output from the main control board 1310, and to further enhance the interest.

[18-4-3. Overview of sound output control]
Next, the function of the sound module for controlling sound output will be described. FIG. 394 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of the sound module 5500 of this embodiment. The sound module 5500 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes the process designated by the function included in the scheduler data, and outputs sound. The sound module 5500 can receive and process requests from multiple schedulers 5502 . Each scheduler 5502 is provided in association with a sound layer for audio. Each scheduler 5502 is provided with a work 5507 for operation management. The contents of the work 5507 will be described later.

After specifying the voice action number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the voice action number table to specify the scheduler data 5505 to be executed. The voice action number table is a table in which sound pointers and sound layers are associated with voice action numbers. In this embodiment, the voice action number corresponds to the storage address of the voice action number table. Any identification information can be used as the voice action number, but as in the case of the effect number described above, it is better to correspond to the storage address to reduce the capacity of the voice action number table and reduce the processing load when referring to the table. has the advantage of enabling

The sound pointer designates the storage address of scheduler data 5505 . In this embodiment, the address SA1 is stored in the sound pointer [1].

Scheduler data 5505 consists of functions and parameters. Functions used in scheduler data 5505 for controlling sound output will be described later in FIGS.

In the example shown in FIG. 394, a "call" function is defined at address SA2. After executing a series of blocks after address SA31 (not shown), scheduler execution unit 5060 processes address SA3 next to address SA2.

At address SA3, phrase reproduction is defined. The scheduler execution unit 5060 reads the phrase data 5508 corresponding to the phrase number 00H designated by the parameter and reproduces it.

An example structure of phrase data 5508 is shown on the right side of FIG. A phrase number is identification information attached to each phrase data. Although arbitrary identification information can be used in this embodiment, the storage address of the phrase data 5508 may be used as the phrase number. In this case, it is possible to omit the phrase number from the phrase data 5508 .

A channel is an output channel specified during phrase playback. The left/right panpot and the up/down panpot are the left/right/up/down output balance of each speaker provided in the gaming machine. Volume is the output volume. The song number is the identification number of the audio to be reproduced. When the music number is notified to the VDP 1540a with built-in tone generator, the VDP 1540a with built-in tone generator reads the tone generator data corresponding to the music number from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b, and reproduces the sound. "Loop" is a designation as to whether or not the audio is to be played back repeatedly. Stereo is a designation as to whether or not stereo output is to be performed.

Each scheduler 5502 is associated with a work 5507 for operation management. Work 5507 stores various information shown in the figure. The operating state indicates whether or not each layer is operating. The voice number represents the number of scheduler data 5505 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5505 is used. The sound pointer is the address of scheduler data 5505 that scheduler 5502 is executing. In the example shown in FIG. 394, as the process progresses, the value of the sound pointer sequentially shifts to SA2 and SA3. The timer value represents the waiting time before executing the next function. It is set when the wait time is designated by the scheduler data 5505, and is decremented sequentially as time elapses. The sound module 5500 executes the following functions when this value becomes 0.

The number of call nests and the number of loop nests represent the number of nests of calls and loops designated multiple by the scheduler data 5505 and the phrase number. That is, for example, in the processing after address SA31 called by the "call" function (first call) of address SA2, if the scheduler data 5505 of another address is further called by the "call" function (second call), the call nest The number becomes 2. After completing the second call and returning to the first call, the call nest number is reduced to one. The same is true for loops. The call return address is a return address from the called party and is provided according to the number of call nests. The loop start address is the start address of the loop range, and the loop count is the loop repeat count. A loop head address and the like are provided according to the number of loop nests.

[18-4-4. Overview of lamp output control]
Next, the function of the lamp module that controls the output of the lamp will be described. FIG. 395 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of the lamp module 5600 of this embodiment. The lamp module 5600 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes processing specified in the function included in the scheduler data, and performs lamp output, ie, lamp lighting/flickering control. Like the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 can also receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5602 and process them. Each scheduler 5602 is associated with a lamp layer for lamps. Each scheduler 5602 is provided with a work 5603 for operation management. The contents of the work 5603 will be described later.

After specifying the lamp operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the lamp operation number table to specify the scheduler data 5601 to be executed. The lamp operation number table is a table in which lamp pointers and lamp layers are associated with lamp operation numbers. In this embodiment, the lamp operation number corresponds to the storage address of the lamp operation number table. Although arbitrary identification information can be used for the lamp operation number, it is better to use a storage address, as in the case of the performance number described above, to reduce the capacity of the lamp operation number table and to reduce the processing load when referring to the table. It has the advantage of allowing

The lamp pointer designates the storage address of the scheduler data 5601 . In this embodiment, the address LA1 is stored in the lamp pointer [1].

The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters, similar to the performance data (FIG. 393). The functions used in scheduler data 5505 for controlling lamps are described later in FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 395, a "call" function is defined at address LA2. After executing a series of blocks after address LA31 (not shown), scheduler execution unit 5060 processes address LA3 next to address LA2.

At address LA3, a gradation pattern setting is defined. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sets the gradation pattern data 5606 stored at the address LA11 specified by the parameter. A gradation scheduler 5604 is associated with each ramp scheduler 5602. The lamp is lit with the specified gradation data 1, and when the time specified by the timer value elapses, the lamp is lit with gradation data 2. light up. Here, an example in which two types of gradation data are specified is shown, but even when three or more are specified, the lamp is lit while sequentially switching the gradation data at the time interval of the timer value. By preparing a plurality of gradation pattern settings after address LA12, it is possible to light the lamp with various gradation patterns while changing the timer value for switching between gradation data. It is also possible to provide a loop within the gradation pattern data. When the gradation scheduler 5604 executes a series of processes for the addresses LA11 to LA1n, it ends lighting of the lamp. The ramp scheduler 5602 returns to the processing of the address LA3 of the scheduler data 5601 and executes the processing of the next address until it stops (address LAn).

Each scheduler 5602 is associated with a work 5603 for operation management. The work 5603 stores various information shown in the figure. The scheduler status indicates whether the scheduler is running. The operation pattern number represents the number of scheduler data 5601 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5601 is used. The scheduler timer represents the waiting time before executing the next function. It is set when the wait time is specified in the scheduler data, and is decremented as the time elapses. The lamp performs the following functions when this value reaches zero. The grayscale data timer represents the waiting time until the next grayscale data is executed when the grayscale pattern data 5606 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 395, when the gradation data specified by the address LA11 is executed, when the timer value set in the gradation data timer becomes 0, the gradation data 1 is shifted to the gradation data 2. Then, when the timer value becomes 0 again, the processing of address LA11 is terminated and the processing of address LA12 is started.

The ramp pointer is the address of the scheduler data 5601 that the scheduler 5602 is executing. In the example shown in FIG. 395, as the process progresses, the value of the lamp pointer sequentially shifts to LA1, LA2, and LA3. The grayscale data pointer is the address of the grayscale pattern data 5606 being executed by the grayscale scheduler 5604 . In the example shown in the figure, the value of the gradation data pointer sequentially shifts to LA11 and LA12 as the process progresses. The loop count is the number of repetitions of the loop, and the loop start address is the start address of the loop range. As with sounds, loops may be nested.

[18-4-5. Outline of drive device control]
Next, the function of the drive module 5700 that controls the operation of the drive will be described. The driving device is, for example, a stepping motor. Since the control is the same as that of the lamp module 5600, illustration is omitted. The driving device module 5700 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes the processing designated by the function included in the scheduler data, and controls the operation of the driving device. The drive module 5700 can also accept and process requests from multiple schedulers.

The control items of the driving device include, for example, movement amount (rotation step angle of stepping motor), movement time, movement speed (motor rotation speed), excitation method, trapezoidal driving, rotation direction, and the like. In addition, instructions to execute a return operation to return to the origin position and instructions to stop the mechanical end (when the movable range of the drive device is mechanically limited, stop it while being biased to the limit position of the movable range) are given. included. In the trapezoidal drive, the rotation speed is changed by a predetermined angular acceleration instead of changing the speed in a step function at the start and stop of rotation.

Scheduler data consists of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data to control the drives are described below in FIG.

[18-5. function]
In the above, the example which uses a function in the module used for production|presentation control was demonstrated. Other functions will now be described. Figures 396 to 398 are diagrams showing examples of functions in the effect control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. As before, the functions are categorized into sequence control, lamp, sound, motor and user groups. Functions belonging to each group will be described below.

[18-5-1. Function details (sequence control)]
Functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of presentation. FIG. 396 provides an example of a sequence control function. An outline of each function will be described below.

"STOP" is a function representing the end of scheduler data. "NOP" is a wait function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of times of execution by specifying the number of times of execution as a parameter. The time corresponding to the number of executions varies depending on the processing cycle for executing the "NOP" function. If 30 is specified, it will wait for about 1 second, and if it is executed at a cycle of 1 ms, if 30 is specified for the number of times of execution, it will wait for about 30 ms. "NOP_F_VALUE" uses the execution count (frame number), scheduler memory number, mask value, and comparison value as parameters. When the conditions based on the scheduler memory number, mask value, and comparison value are satisfied, the "NOP_F_VALUE" function ends and the conditions are satisfied. It is a conditional wait function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions if the conditions are not met.

"MEMW" is a function that takes the target scheduler work number and value as parameters and writes the specified value in the corresponding scheduler work area. "LOOPST" is a function for repeating processing (loop), specifying the head of the loop and setting the number of loops as a parameter. Note that if the number of loops is set to "0", it becomes an infinite loop. "LOOP" is a function for designating the end of repetitive processing (loop).

"RET" is a function for returning processing to the block (function data) that called it. The pointer value saved by the "call" function is set in the performance management table. "CALL" is the aforementioned "call" function, which executes processing from a specified address (block) and sets information specifying a call destination such as an address value and label as a parameter. In "CALL", the pointer value of the function to be executed next is saved, and the address of the call destination is set in the performance management pointer. Then, after executing the called process, the address saved by the above-mentioned "RET" function is set in the performance management pointer, and the previous process is returned to.

"SUBC" selects a process to be called (block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index based on the target scheduler work number and branch table specified as parameters, and executes the selected process. That is, it executes a "call" function based on specified conditions. A specific example using "SUBC" will be described later with reference to FIG. When the "SUBC" function terminates the called process, it returns to the caller process (the process following the "SUBC" function).

"SUBJ" selects a process to be called (block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index based on the target scheduler work number and table specified as parameters, and executes the selected process. That is, the "JUMP" function, which will be described later, is executed based on the specified conditions. A specific example using "SUBJ" will be described later with reference to FIG. It does not return to the processing of the caller that executed the "SUBJ" function, but continues the processing of the callee. "JUMP" sets the address specified by the parameter to the performance management pointer, and continues processing from the specified address or label.

"REQ" is a function for activating another scheduler specified by a parameter. A specific example using "REQ" will be described later with reference to FIG. "REQF" is a function for activating another scheduler specified by a parameter like "REQ", and other scheduler data is overwritten until the overwrite prohibition time specified by the parameter elapses. to start up. In "REQ", control by multiple scheduler data can be executed in parallel. On the other hand, "REQF" allows the processing of the scheduler data to be executed to be executed independently for a specified period. You can prevent it from becoming disabled.

[18-5-2. Function Details (Lamp)]
The functions belonging to the lamp group are functions for controlling the flow of lamp effects. FIG. 397 shows an example of functions related to lamp control, and an outline of each function will be described.

"HPLAY" is a function for executing lamp gradation data reproduction processing for lighting a lamp based on gradation data specified by a parameter. In "HPLAY", even if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, it is reset and the reproduction of the lamp is started from the beginning when the function is executed. The gradation data is specified by setting the gradation pattern data address, and the execution of the gradation data is instructed by clearing the gradation data timer in the work 5603 .

"KPLAY", like "HPLAY", is a function for executing lamp gradation data reproduction processing for lighting a lamp based on gradation data specified by a parameter. In "KPLAY", if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, the reproduction of the lamp being executed is continued without resetting.

"HPLAY2" is a function that designates a layer in addition to gradation data with a parameter and executes ramp gradation data reproduction processing. The processing is the same as "HPLAY". "KPLAY2" is a function that, like "HPLAY2", designates a layer in addition to gradation data with a parameter and executes ramp gradation data reproduction processing. The processing is the same as "KPLAY".

"HPLAY" and "KPLAY" execute designated ramp gradation data reproduction processing for reproducing ramp gradation data designated by parameters. If the ramp gradation data has already been reproduced, reproduction of the ramp gradation data is interrupted during reproduction by "HPLAY" and the same ramp gradation data is reproduced from the beginning. continue playing without interruption. That is, while the ramp gradation data is being reproduced, even if the same ramp gradation data is executed using "KPLAY", no particular processing is executed.

'HPLAY2' has the same function as 'HPLAY' except that a layer for reproducing ramp gradation data is designated by a parameter in addition to the function of 'HPLAY2'.

"KPLAY2" has the same function as "KPLAY" except that the layer for reproducing ramp gradation data is designated by a parameter in addition to the function of "KPLAY2" described above, and the layer is designated by a parameter.

[18-5-3. Function Details (Sound)]
Functions belonging to the sound group are functions for controlling sound output. 397 and 398 show an example of functions related to sound control, and an outline of each function will be described.

"SPLAY" is a function for executing phrase reproduction processing for outputting sound based on the phrase number designated by a parameter. In "SPLAY", even if the sound of the same phrase number is being reproduced, it is reset and the reproduction of the sound is started from the beginning when the function is executed. "SXPLAY" is a function for executing phrase reproduction processing for outputting sound based on the phrase number designated by the parameter, like "SPLAY". In "SXPLAY", when the sound of the same phrase number is being reproduced, the reproduction of the sound is continued without resetting. "STOP_PH" is a function for executing phrase stop processing for stopping the reproduction of sound based on the phrase number designated by the parameter.

"PAN_PH" moves the currently playing phrase specified by the parameter from the voice output coordinate position at the start of execution of the "PAN_PH" function, using the transition time and panpot end coordinate position also specified by the parameter, to end the panpot. This is a function for moving the voice output coordinate position at the specified transition time to the coordinate position. In addition to the functions of the "PAN_PH" function, "PAN_PH2" can specify the panpot start coordinate position with a parameter. This is a function for moving the voice output coordinate position from the panpot start coordinate position specified by the parameter to the panpot end coordinate position in the specified transition time.

"VOL_FADE_PH" specifies the phrase being played back specified by the parameter from the volume value at the start of execution of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function to the fade end volume value using the transition time and fade end volume value also specified by the parameter. This function is used to increase or decrease the volume value during the transition time. "VOL_FADE_PH2" has the functions of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, but also allows you to specify the fade start volume value with a parameter. This function increases/decreases the volume value in the specified transition time from the fade start volume value specified by the fade start volume value to the fade end volume value.

"VOL_PH" is a function that increases or decreases the volume value of the phrase being reproduced specified by the parameter with the volume value specified by the parameter. "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" is a function that mutes the volume of a phrase specified by a parameter. "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" is a function that cancels muting of the volume of a phrase specified by a parameter.

"SCPLAY" and "SXCPLAY" execute designated channel music reproduction processing for reproducing the phrase corresponding to the phrase number designated by the parameter on the designated channel. When the same phrase has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the phrase is interrupted and the same phrase is reproduced from the beginning during reproduction by 'SCPPLAY', and the reproduction of the phrase is continued without interruption during reproduction by 'SXCPLAY'. In other words, even if the same phrase is executed using "SXCPLAY" while the phrase is being reproduced, no particular processing is executed.

"PAN_CH" performs panpot for ch (channel), whereas "PAN_PH" described above performs panpot for phrase. Other than that, the processing is the same as "PAN_PH". As for "PAN_CH2", while "PAN_PH2" described above performs panpot for phrases, panpot for ch is performed. ” and the process does not change.

"VOL_FADE_CH" performs a fade for the ch, whereas the "VOL_FADE_PH" described above performs a fade for the phrase. Processing remains the same. Regarding "VOL_FADE_CH2", while "VOL_FADE_PH2" mentioned above fades the phrase, it fades the ch. Processing remains the same.

"VOL_CH" increases or decreases the volume value for the phrase, while "VOL_PH" described above increases or decreases the volume value for the ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_PH". Regarding "VOL_MUTE_ON_CH", "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" mentioned above mutes the phrase, while mute the ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH". As for "VOL_MUTE_OFF_CH", "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" mentioned above cancels muting for phrases, whereas mute for ch is canceled. is changed to ch, the processing is the same as "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH".

[18-5-4. Function details (motor)]
Functions belonging to the motor group are functions for controlling the output of motors and solenoids. An example of functions related to motor control is shown in FIG. 398, and an outline of each function will be described.

"MPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number designated by the parameter. "MMPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor designated by the parameter to reproduce the operation based on the motor data number. "SOL_ON" executes a solenoid ON process that causes the solenoid to perform an operation based on the solenoid data number designated as a parameter. "SOL_OFF" executes solenoid OFF processing to stop the operation of the solenoid based on the solenoid data number designated as the parameter.

[18-5-5. Function details (user)]
A function belonging to a user's group is a function for executing control not belonging to any group described so far. An example of these functions is given in FIG. 398, and an overview of each function will be described.

"MBUF_SET" executes a motor output buffer scheduler work value set process for setting a scheduler work value in the motor output buffer. "COMMAND" and "COMMAND0" are processes for issuing commands from within the scheduler. "COMMAND" issues a command to the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a. For example, it issues a command to start drawing to the liquid crystal display device. On the other hand, the command issued by "COMMAND0" is analyzed by the command analysis module 5200 and performs the same operation as the main command. "MEMC" executes scheduler memory copy processing to copy the contents of the work area of the scheduler being executed to the work area of another scheduler.

[18-6. Scheduler]
Next, the scheduler that calls each function will be described. The scheduler is used to execute scheduler data, which is a data string defining functions required for executing a series of processes in order of execution. One or more schedulers are provided for each use for management purposes, but all schedulers can execute all functions. There is no difference other than the processing cycle (frame or 1 ms) in the schedulers provided for each use, which are capable of executing sound functions, and all functions can be mixed and executed. There is no limit to the number of schedulers that can be executed, and multiple registered schedulers can be executed simultaneously.

FIG. 399 is a diagram showing an example of a scheduler definition according to this embodiment. Schedulers can be conveniently classified according to state transitions and devices to be controlled. An outline of typical types of schedulers will be described below.

First, an example of a scheduler relating to state transition will be described. There is a special figure state scheduler (special figure state SCH, TOK_SCH) for executing main state transition scheduler data for controlling the transition of the game state of the entire game. In the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510 , the transition of the game state is controlled based on the command received from the main control board 1310 . The processing cycle of the special figure state scheduler is 1f (frame).

There is also a sub-state scheduler (sub-state SCH, SUB_SCH) for executing sub-state scheduler data that controls transitions of internal states (sub-internal states) in the peripheral control board 1510 . The internal state transitions when a predetermined condition is established, for example, when the player operates a production button, wins a lottery for execution of the production, or when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the state transitions to another state. do. The processing cycle of the sub-state scheduler is 1f (frame).

The scheduler for sound includes a background that controls the output of sounds that are output along with the background display and the changing display of patterns, a scheduler (SND_SCH01) for executing the pattern sound scheduler data, and a scheduler (SND_SCH01) that is output when the notice effect is executed. There are a scheduler (SND_SCH02, 03) that controls the output of sound that is played, and a scheduler (SND_SCH04) that controls the output of sound when the announcement is executed by the role object. The processing cycle of the scheduler for sound is 1f (frame).

Similar to the sound-related scheduler, the lamp-related scheduler includes a background display and a scheduler (LMP_SCH01 ), a scheduler (LMP_SCH02, 03) for controlling the lighting and blinking of lamps during the execution of the announcement effect, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH04) for controlling the lighting and blinking of the lamps during the execution of the announcement by the character. The processing cycle of the scheduler for lamps is 1f (frame).

A scheduler is also defined to control sounds and lamps in tandem. Such a scheduler has a sound and lamp notification layer that outputs sounds and lights and flashes lamps in order to notify the outside of bulbs out and clogged, and alarms due to abnormalities detected by magnetic sensors, etc. There is a scheduler (INF_SCH01-03) for executing scheduler data for each layer. In addition, there is a sound/lamp general-purpose scheduler (SNDLMP_SCH01-05) that is used for a general purpose to execute effects in which sound output and lamp lighting/flashing are interlocked. The processing cycle of these schedulers is 1f (frame).

The scheduler for motors includes a scheduler (MOTSYS_SCH) for executing motor system scheduler data for executing system operations, and a scheduler (MOTSYS_SCH) for executing motor RAM clear scheduler data for making settings when clearing RAM. MOTRAM_SCH), a scheduler (MOTINI_SCH) for executing motor role item initialization scheduler data for initializing the placement of role items, and a motor role item correction scheduler data for correcting the position of role items. , and a scheduler (MOT_SCH) for executing the action of a character by means of a performance or the like.

The scheduler for executing the action of the role by the performance etc. includes the scheduler (MOT_SCH01 to 05) for controlling the action of a specific role, and the general-purpose scheduler that is used independently of the type of role. There is a scheduler (MOT_SCH05-10).

Note that the processing cycle of the scheduler for motors is 1 ms (milliseconds), which is shorter than the processing cycle of the scheduler for game state management, sounds and lamps (this embodiment, 1f = about 33.334 ms). It's becoming

Although the number of schedulers that control each target device is fixed in this embodiment, the number of schedulers may be controlled to dynamically increase or decrease according to the game state or notice. As a result, each scheduler can be activated without depending on the number of accessories provided in the game machine and the number of effects, and restrictions for executing effects can be reduced.

[18-7. Application example of scheduler data (effect 1)]
The functions used in production control and the outlines of the types and functions of the scheduler that performs a series of controls by combining these functions have been described above. Specific application examples of scheduler data and functions will be described below with reference to the drawings. explain.

[18-7-1. Production overview]
FIG. 400A is a diagram showing an example of the action of a character object controlled using the scheduler data of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 400A, the game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a logo character 5001, a star character 5002 (a left star character 5002a, a middle star character 5002b, a right star character 5002c) and a hatchet character 5003. is placed.

The logo accessory 5001 is arranged in the upper left part of the game area. When the logo accessory 5001 operates, it falls (moves) from the initial position (upper position) to the intermediate position, and returns to the initial position after the effect is completed. Furthermore, the logo accessory 5001 can perform not only vertical movement but also vertical and horizontal vibration effects before and after movement.

The star character 5002 is arranged above the game area, the left star character 5002a is arranged on the left side, the middle star character 5002b is arranged in the center, and the right star character 5002c is arranged on the right side. Each star character 5002 can operate independently, and one or a plurality of star character 5002 operates at a predetermined timing according to the content of the presentation.

The left star accessory 5002a moves to the lower left, and can be moved to a position slightly lower left in the center of the game area. In addition, the middle star role 5002b moves downward and can be moved to a position slightly above the center of the game area. The right star accessory 5002c moves to the lower right, and can be moved to the center or lower right position of the game area. Note that each star role object 5002 may stop before moving to the final arrival position, or after reaching the final arrival position, may return to an intermediate position and stop.

The machete accessory 5003 is arranged above the center of the game area. The machete accessory 5003 can drop (move) from the initial position (upper position) to the intermediate position and lower position. It moves from the initial position to the intermediate position, stops temporarily, and then moves to the lower position, or moves from the initial position to the lower position at once, depending on the operation of the production button by the player or the lottery result of the hatchet role announcement production. The operation mode is set to As with the logo accessory 5001, the hatchet accessory 5003 can also perform an effect of vibrating vertically and horizontally before and after movement.

Next, the flow of the advance notice effect executed with one symbol change will be described. First, step-up notice, button (BTN) cut-in notice, group notice, star character object notice, and button (BTN) logo character object drop notice will be described with reference to FIG. 400B. Note that the flow of the notice effect including the hatchet notice effect will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 400B shows an example of the execution timing of the advance notice effect executed in a series of variable display from the start to stop of the special symbol variation in this embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the scheduler and scheduler data used at this time. be. In the series of variable display shown in FIG. 400B, step-up notice and button (BTN) cut-in notice are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. After that, a reach occurs, and in the latter half of the fluctuation, a group notice, a star character object notice, and a button (BTN) logo character object drop notice are executed. Scheduler data for controlling the lighting of lamps, sound output, image output, actions of characters, etc. is executed for each notice effect.

Below, a part of the scheduler data for executing each of the advance notice effects will be extracted, and the functions controlled and configured by the scheduler data will be described. Specifically, the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" (Fig. 401) for controlling the lamp in the step-up notice, the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" (Fig. 402) for controlling the lamp in the button cut-in notice, and the star role in the star role notice Motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" (FIGS. 403 to 405) that controls the operation of 5002, and motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" (FIG. 406) that controls the operation of the logo accessory 5001 in the button logo accessory drop notice.

[18-7-2. Lamp control in step-up notice]
In the step-up notice of the present embodiment, control is performed so that the lighting mode of a predetermined lamp changes step by step according to the degree of expectation (lottery result value of the step-up notice). As shown in FIG. 400B, step-up warning lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" belongs to warning group 01 and is driven by the scheduler for warning group 01 lamp scheduler data (lamp SCH warning 01) "LMP_SCH02".

FIG. 401 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" that controls the lighting and blinking of the lamp in the advance notice of step-up according to the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is started, first, the function "SUBC: YKK_STP: TBL_LMP_STP" is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the subject scheduler work number "YKK_STP" and the step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the specified step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP” and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP”. The step-up notice work area "YKK_STP" stores the step-up notice lottery result value, which corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP".

The step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" stores addresses of step-up notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 indicating addresses of scheduler data are stored. SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that no processing is to be performed. By preparing an address for a dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the advance notice is not won. . SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing step-up notices corresponding to the step-up numbers (1 to 4).

In this embodiment, the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP" stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice with the step-up number of 4, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" designates the gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1-4) corresponding to each step, executes ramp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and waits 90 frames (approximately 3 seconds) for each step. Execute the process. As a result, at each step, the lamp is lit and blinked in the corresponding gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data 'SUBC_LMP_STP4' is driven using the scheduler 'LMP_SCH01' for the background and pattern lamp scheduler data.

Thereafter, the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" to return to the process of the caller (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Furthermore, the function "STOP" is executed to terminate the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP".

In this embodiment, the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP" stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice with the step-up number of 4, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" designates the ramp gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1-4) corresponding to each step-up and executes the ramp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), 90 frames (approximately 3 seconds) for each step. wait processing. Thus, in each step, the lamp is lit and blinked in the corresponding lamp gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data 'SUBC_LMP_STP4' is driven using the scheduler 'LMP_SCH02' for advance notice group 01 lamp scheduler data.

Thereafter, the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" to return to the next process of the caller (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Furthermore, the function "STOP" is executed to terminate the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP".

The step-up notice has been described above, and the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" will now be described. First, it is possible to call scheduler data for a plurality of lottery results with a single action based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (previous lottery result values in this embodiment). be. Depending on the content of the notice, the range of lottery result values may be several hundred, and with binary branching such as an IF statement, the amount of scheduler data for judgment increases and becomes too complicated, making management such as correction difficult. On the other hand, "SUBC" easily solves the above problem by using the contents of the work memory as an index. In this embodiment, the number of the work memory and the number of call address tables for branching are one each. Secondly, since it takes the form of "CALL", it is possible to execute common scheduler data after executing the "SUBC" function. By describing one scheduler data, the same processing can be executed after all branches. Further, in order to deal with program defects, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the "SUBC" function may be terminated without executing the branching process.

That is, the function "SUBC" can select the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the values stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in table format, and call the selected scheduler data. With a simple conditional branch, it is necessary to define conditions according to the number of branches and set scheduler data for each branch destination, but with the function "SUBC", branch destinations can be easily added or deleted. , it is possible to easily cope with additions and changes in the contents of the production, and to improve the development efficiency.

[18-7-3. Lamp control in button cut-in notice]
The button cut-in notice of the present embodiment is started in the first half of the fluctuation, and the notice is executed to the end by accepting the operation input of the effect button by the player within a predetermined period. Further, similarly to the step-up notice, the lighting mode of the predetermined lamp is controlled according to the degree of expectation (lottery result value of the button cut-in notice).

The button cut-in notice belongs to notice group 02, and lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is driven by notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 02) "LMP_SCH03" as shown in FIG. 400B. It belongs to a different notice group than the step-up notice, and the scheduler data is driven by a different scheduler, so it is possible to execute notices in parallel.

FIG. 402 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" for controlling the lamp in the button cut-in notice of this embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is started, the function "KPLAY:LMP_SCH03:PTA_CUT_STA" is first executed, and then the wait process "NOP:30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the specified lamp lights (blinks) for one second based on the gradation pattern data "PTA_CUT_STA". At this time, the ramp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used.

Subsequently, loop processing for 3 seconds is executed in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. Since each loop corresponds to one frame, 90 loops correspond to 3 seconds. In the loop processing, the functions from "LOOPST" indicating the start of the loop to "LOOP" indicating the end of the loop are executed up to a specified number of times. Therefore, the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_LMP_CUB" is executed up to 90 times.

Regarding the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button cut-in notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB” and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. The button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" stores the operation state of the effect button. When the effect button is not operated, "0: button OFF", and when the effect button is operated, "1: button ON". is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". The content of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" is rewritten by a program for button processing outside the scheduler data.

While "0: Button OFF" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" at button cut-in notice button OFF is selected in the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". be. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB" (function "LOOP") of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" of the calling source. Therefore, when no effect button input is detected during the 90 loop processes, the loop process is exited, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is terminated.

On the other hand, when "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" when the button cut-in notice button is ON is set in the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" is the function "SUBJ: YKK_CUT: TBL_LMP_CUT", and the scheduler work area index branch jump "SUBJ" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_CUT" and the button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT". is executed as a parameter.

The button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT" stores addresses of button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBJ_NON, SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 indicating addresses of scheduler data are stored. SUBJ_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that no processing is to be performed. By preparing an address for a dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the advance notice is not won. . SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing a lamp lighting pattern (color, lighting time) corresponding to the button cut-in notice lottery result value.

In this embodiment, the button cut-in notice work area "YKK_CUT" stores the lottery result value indicating the button cut-in notice pattern (PTN) 4, and the scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed. In the scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4", first, the lamp is lit in red (gradation data pattern "PTA_CUT_RED") by the lamp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and then the wait process is executed for 150 frames to continue for 5 seconds. Let At this time, the ramp scheduler 'LMP_SCH03' is used to drive the scheduler data. At this time, the scheduler data 'SUBC_LMP_STP4' is driven using the scheduler 'LMP_SCH03' for advance notice group 02 lamp scheduler data.

Since the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is called by JUMP instead of CALL, the execution of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data is terminated by the function "STOP", and the caller scheduler "SUBC_LMP_YKK_CUT" is returned to. do not. Therefore, there are two types of termination of the scheduler "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT": when the "STOP" function included in "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is executed, and when the "STOP" function included in the schedulers "SUBJ_LMP_CUT1" to "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed. There is

The button cut-in notice has been described above. Here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch jump "SUBJ" will be described. First, it is possible to call scheduler data for a plurality of lottery results with a single action based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (previous lottery result values in this embodiment). However, depending on the content of the notice, the range of lottery result values may be several hundred, and with binary branching such as IF statements, the amount of scheduler data for judgment increases and becomes too complicated to manage corrections, etc. . "SUBJ" easily solves the above problem by using the contents of the work memory as an index. In this embodiment, the number of the work memory and the number of call address tables for branching are one each. Secondly, since it takes the form of "JUMP", it is possible to execute different processes for each branched scheduler data after execution of the "SUBJ" function. Also, as with "SUBC", in order to cope with program failures, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the "SUBC" function is terminated without performing branch processing. You may do so.

That is, the function "SUBJ" selects the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the values stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in table format, and the selected scheduler data , and the same effect as the function "SUBC" can be obtained.

Also, unlike the function "SUBC", the function "SUBJ" continues to process the schedule data of the callee and does not return to the caller process, so it is suitable for alternatively executing processes. ing. For example, when the content of the effect to be executed differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated, it is possible to suppress the redundant execution of the effect by using the function "SUBJ". On the other hand, since the function "SUBC" returns to the processing based on the scheduler data of the caller, it is possible to execute the common post-processing after executing the callee's processing, thereby simplifying the processing.

Therefore, by using the function "SUBC" and the function "SUBJ", it is possible to simplify the structure of the scheduler data and to provide a structure that can flexibly cope with processing branching. Furthermore, additions and changes can be easily handled by simply changing the branch destination in the table format, so development efficiency can be improved, and changes in game machine specifications can be easily handled.

[18-7-4. Motor control in star role announcement]
Next, the control of the star role announcement performed in the latter half of the variation in the present embodiment will be described. Reach occurs in the variable display of the special pattern, and when it shifts to the second half of the variation, a group notice is generated, and the star role item notice is executed independently of the group notice. The star role announcement includes a plurality of types of star roles 5002 (in this embodiment, three types of left star role 5002a, middle star role 5002b, and right star role 5002c) that can be operated by a driving body (motor). By operating, the degree of expectation of pattern variation is notified. Specifically, the greater the number of appearances of star accessories 5002, the higher the degree of expectation.

As shown in FIG. 400B, the star role announcement of this embodiment is executed by driving the star role announcement motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" with the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH02" (left star role scheduler data scheduler). be done. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a dedicated scheduler (MOT_SCH02-04) for operating the star role 5002 is provided in advance, but a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05-09) can also be used. .

FIGS. 403 to 405 are diagrams for explaining the contents of scheduler data for motor control in the star role announcement of this embodiment. Figure 403 shows the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" that controls the overall flow and the left star role 5002a, Figure 404 shows the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" that controls the right star role 5002c, and Figure 405 shows the scheduler that controls the middle star role 5002b. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3”;

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is started, first, the function "SUBC: YKK_HYA: TBL_MOT_HYA" is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the subject scheduler work number "YKK_HYA" and star role announcement branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the specified star role announcement branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA", and based on the contents of the star role announcement work area "YKK_HYA", specifies the address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination. . The star role announcement work area "YKK_HYA" stores the lottery result value of the star role announcement and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the star role announcement branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA".

The address of the star role appearance scheduler data is stored in the star role announcement branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA". Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 indicating addresses of scheduler data are stored. It should be noted that SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that no processing will be performed, and by preparing an address for a dummy call, it is possible to disable the accessory when the advance notice is not won. there is SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are addresses of scheduler data for executing the star role announcement. SUBC_MOT_HYA3 is scheduler data for operating all three types of star role 5002 .

In this embodiment, in the star role announcement work area "YKK_HYA", a lottery result value indicating execution of a star role announcement that makes the left star role 5002a, the middle star role 5002b, and the right star role 5002c appear. "3" is stored, and the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" is executed. In addition, when only the left star role 5002a is operated, the lottery result value of the star role announcement is "1", and when the left star role 5002a and the right star role 5002c are operated, the star role announcement lottery "2" is set to the result value.

The scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" first specifies the parameter "PTA_HYA_LEF" indicating the pattern of the appearance motion of the left star role 5002a, and executes the function "MPLAY" corresponding to the motor regeneration process. At this time, the function "MPLAY" is executed by the motor scheduler "MOT_SHC02" in which the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is executed.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" for the appearance of the right star role 5002c by the function "REQ". The function "REQ" is a function for executing scheduler data specified by a parameter with a scheduler also specified by a parameter. Here, the right star role 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star role 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03". Similarly, the function "REQ" executes the appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" of the middle star role 5002b using the scheduler "MOT_SHC04" for the middle star role 5002b scheduler data. In addition, in the present embodiment, motor reproduction processing (function "MPLAY") for operating the right star character 5002c and the middle star character 5002b is executed within the same frame as the motor reproduction processing for the left star character 5002a. ing. As described above, each star role product 5002 can be controlled in parallel by causing the scheduler data for operating each star role product 5002 to be executed by different schedulers.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes wait processing "NOP: 300" for 300 frames (10 seconds). During this wait time, the left star role 5002a operates in a specified manner. After completion of the wait process, the function "RET" is executed to return to the star role announcement motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" from which it was called.

Next, control of the right star role 5002c will be described with reference to FIG. The right star role 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star role 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03" specified at the time of execution by the function "REQ".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is started, as shown in Fig. 404, the parameter "PTA_HYA_RGT" indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the right star character 5002c is specified, and the motor regeneration process "MPLAY" is executed. . Subsequently, wait processing "NOP: 300" for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time is the operation time of the right star role 5002c. After completion of the wait process, the process ends by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the process of the scheduler data of the calling source.

Finally, the control of the middle star role 5002b will be described with reference to FIG. The medium star role 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is executed using the medium star role 5002b scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC04" specified at the time of execution by the function "REQ".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is started, as shown in Fig. 405, the parameter "PTA_HYA_MID" indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the middle star character 5002b is specified, and the motor regeneration process "MPLAY" is executed. . Subsequently, wait processing "NOP: 300" for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time is the operating time of the middle star role 5002b. After completion of the wait process, the process ends by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the process of the scheduler data of the calling source.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the scheduler data for operating the left star role 5002a, the scheduler data for operating the right star role 5002c and the scheduler data for operating the middle star role 5002b are combined with the function "REQ". By executing using , it is possible to operate each role in parallel. In other words, the action of each character can be executed in parallel without special control by executing individually defined scheduler data as needed. The advantage of executing scheduler data in parallel is, first, that it is possible to describe a single character action without being conscious of other schedulers. Furthermore, when performing multiple operations corresponding to the notice pattern with one scheduler, the number of combinations becomes enormous, and the scheduler data becomes complicated and the number of data becomes enormous. By calling the scheduler data in parallel with each other, the minimum number of scheduler data is created and called, thereby enabling easy control. In the present embodiment, an example of operating three types of role products in parallel has been described, but more role products can be executed in parallel if there is no problem with the operation of the role products. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to operate a plurality of accessories in parallel without requiring complicated control, and it is possible to easily realize an effect rich in variations.

[18-7-5. Motor control in the notification of the falling logo]
Next, the control of the logo accessory drop notice executed in the latter half of the variation in the present embodiment will be described. The logo character object drop notice is executed independently of the group notice and the star character object notice. The notice of the falling of the logo accessory is a notice effect in which the logo accessory 5001 imitating the logo of the game machine falls vertically in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the probability of occurrence of a big hit is higher than usual. is high.

As shown in FIG. 400B, the logo accessory drop notice of this embodiment is achieved by driving the logo accessory drop notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" with the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" (logo accessory scheduler data scheduler). executed. It is also possible to operate the logo accessory 5001 with a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05-09).

FIG. 406 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” that performs motor control in the logo accessory drop notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is started, first the function "MPLAY:PTA_LGO_GAT" is executed, and then wait processing "NOP:30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated operation is performed for one second based on the operation pattern data "PTA_LGO_GAT". Specifically, the logo accessory 5001 rattles. At this time, the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used.

Subsequently, loop processing for 3 seconds is executed in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in loop processing, the functions between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" are repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC:YKK_LGO:TBL_YKK_LGO" is executed up to 90 times.

To explain the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_LGO" and the button logo accessory drop notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO" as parameters. be.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory drop notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”, and based on the contents of the button logo accessory notice work area “YKK_LGO”, determines the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify. The result of the execution lottery for the button logo accessory drop notice work area "YKK_LGO" is stored in the button logo accessory drop notice work area. If the lottery for execution of the notice of the fall of the logo accessory is won, "1: Execution of the notice of the fall of the logo" is set. The result of the execution lottery for the button logo accessory drop notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo accessory drop notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO".

While "0: Unexecuted" is set in the button logo event notice work area "YKK_LGO", in the button logo event drop notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the motor scheduler when the logo event drop notice is not executed. The data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" (function "LOOP") of the caller scheduler "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". Therefore, if the execution lottery for the button logo accessory drop notice is lost, the loop processing is executed 90 times, the loop processing is exited, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is terminated. .

On the other hand, when "1: logo drop notice execution" is set in the button logo accessory notice work area "YKK_LGO", that is, when the lottery for execution of the button logo accessory drop notice is won, the button logo accessory drop In the announcement lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" at the time of execution of the logo accessory drop announcement is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button logo and object drop notice button branch call address table. It is executed with "TBL_MOT_LGO" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory drop notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO” and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. As in the case of the button cut-in notice, the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" stores the operation state of the production button, and when the production button is not operated, "0: button OFF", the production button is operated. If the button is ON, "1: button ON" is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo accessory drop notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO".

While "0: Button OFF" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" is set in the button logo object drop notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO" when the logo object drop notice button is OFF. ” is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_LGO" (function "RET") of the caller scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN". This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". Therefore, even if the execution lottery of the button logo accessory drop notice is won, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the loop processing of 90 times, the loop processing is exited and the function "STOP" is executed. Executed and scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the motor scheduler when the button logo accessory drop notice button is ON is set in the button logo accessory drop notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO". The data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" first executes the function "COMMAND: COM_LGO_ON". A function "COMMAND" is a function for issuing a command when scheduler data is executed. Here, the command "COM_LGO_ON" is issued. The command “COM_LGO_ON” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the logo accessory 5001 falls, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020 .

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY:PTA_LGO_DOWN" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_LGO_ON". A parameter “PTA_LGO_DOWN” is pattern data for performing an action of dropping the logo accessory 5001 . Furthermore, wait processing for 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP: 120". At this time, the logo accessory 5001 performs a falling motion for 3 seconds and stops at the falling position for the remaining 1 second.

Furthermore, by executing the function "MPLAY:PTA_LGO_INI", the logo accessory 5001 moves from the falling position to the initial position. Subsequently, the function "NOP:90" executes wait processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds), during which the logo accessory 5001 is returned to the initial position. After the wait process is completed, the function "MEMW: YKK_LGO: 0" is executed because the execution of the logo accessory drop operation is completed, and the button logo accessory lottery result is rewritten to "0: not executed", and the calling scheduler is called. It returns immediately after the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_LGO" (function "RET") of the data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN". This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". It returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO", but since the button logo accessory lottery result is rewritten to "0: Not executed", the scheduler data "PTA_LGO_DOWN" that drops the button logo accessory is executed. The remaining number of loops is processed, and the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is terminated by the function "STOP".

As described above, by internally issuing a command when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped, an effect can be displayed on the liquid crystal only when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped and at the timing when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped. realizable. In this embodiment, by using the function "COMMAND", it is possible to cooperate with a plurality of types of production devices and execute them as needed at appropriate timing, and to execute more interesting productions. .

In this embodiment, the function "COMMAND" is used to display the effect on the liquid crystal on the VDP 1540a with built-in tone generator. By returning once, performing complicated processing that cannot be handled by the function command, and writing the processing result in the work area used by the subsequent scheduler, it is possible to perform processing that cannot be controlled by the function command. An advantage of issuing a command within the scheduler data is that the command issuing timing is used as the processing timing as it is, so there is no need for time management or execution determination by a program. In addition, it is possible to interactively process external inputs (buttons, jog dials, touch pads) by the user that are not predetermined at the start of fluctuation, issue commands using the function "COMMAND", and perform processing.

Also, in this embodiment, the function "COMMAND" is a function to send a command with a fixed value. may

[18-8. Application example of scheduler data (at power on)]
Next, the scheduler data executed by the peripheral control board 1510 when the game machine is powered on will be described. Here, the control from the power-on of the game machine to the start of the game and the start of the first variable display will be described.

[18-8-1. Outline of processing]
FIG. 407 is a drawing for explaining scheduler data executed when the game machine of this embodiment is powered on. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, a power-on command is output from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 .

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 receives the power-on command, it drives the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" with the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH".

When the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" is executed, the sub-internal state transition scheduler is executed in a predetermined order, and the scheduler data corresponding to the sub-game state (sub-internal state) is activated. As the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" progresses, the liquid crystal display screen displays screens corresponding to sub-internal states, such as the standby screen, manufacturer demo screen, model demo title screen, and anti-theft screen, as shown in FIG. be done. At this time, the main game state is a waiting state. When the waiting state ends, the game is started, and when the game ball wins in the starting winning hole, the main game state and the sub internal state transition to the changing state.

[18-8-2. Power-on control]
Next, a configuration for processing various commands and scheduler data will be described. FIG. 408 is a diagram for explaining the configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming machine of this embodiment and the relationship between these configurations.

As described above, when the game machine is powered on or when a predetermined event occurs in the game control in the main control board 1310, the main command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received by the peripheral control board 1510. be. The main command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 of the system module 5100 and analyzed by the main command analysis process in the command analysis module, as described with reference to FIG. The command analysis module identifies the type of event generated by the main command analysis process, activates the corresponding scheduler, and executes the scheduler data.

Also, when the function "COMMAND0" (Fig. 397) is executed and a command is output from the scheduler, the output command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 and analyzed by the main command analysis processing, just like the main command. be done.

When a main command or a command output by the function "COMMAND0" is received, a command for executing control in the peripheral control board 1510 is generated by main command analysis processing. The generated commands include commands for starting the scheduler and commands for controlling various production devices (sub-internal output commands).

In the command to start the scheduler, for example, the scheduler data for performing control corresponding to the change of the game state in the main control board 1310 and the change in the sub-internal state due to the progress of control in the peripheral control board 1510, the main control board such as start winning Scheduler data for executing production corresponding to the event notified from 1310, scheduler data defined so that various production devices operate in a series of modes, etc. are executed. In this embodiment, in addition to directly starting a scheduler from a command, another scheduler can be started by a function "REQ" included in scheduler data.

On the other hand, the command for controlling the rendering device (sub-internal output command) is, for example, a liquid crystal command for displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display device. A command for controlling the effect device is output by the function "COMMAND" included in the scheduler data, in addition to being output based on the result of analyzing the main command. Commands for controlling the rendering device are temporarily stored in a sub-internal output command buffer, and are processed in the order stored from the top of the buffer.

As described above, in this embodiment, by further activating other schedulers from the scheduler, it is possible to hierarchically combine and execute a plurality of schedulers by receiving one main command. As a result, various controls in the peripheral control board 1510 can be componentized in units of scheduler data. It is possible to improve the development efficiency of the game machine, such as making the debugging work more efficient.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the command output by the function "COMMAND0" makes it possible to share the command analysis processing. This makes it possible to share the scheduler data selection logic and function parameter determination logic by command analysis, which creates the problem of having to manage a huge number of combinations of scheduler data in a table. can be suppressed.

Next, startup of the scheduler and execution of scheduler data when a power-on command is received from the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 409 is a diagram illustrating the process of executing scheduler data when power is turned on in this embodiment.

As described with reference to FIG. 408, when the game machine is powered on and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the power-on command is analyzed by the main command analysis process, and the scheduler The activation process activates the sub-state schedulers and sequentially executes the corresponding scheduler data. When executing each scheduler data, execute the function "COMMAND0" and issue a command to create a sub-internal state, and if necessary, output a lamp or sound corresponding to the sub-internal state. .

Specifically, the scheduler to be executed is first executed by using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH" to execute the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON". In the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON", the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_TAIKI" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state standby scheduler data 'SCH_STS_TAKI' is executed using the sub state scheduler 'SUB_SCH', the function 'KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_TAIKI' is executed. As a result, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" in the standby state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", it becomes a standby state for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues the command "COM_STS_MDEMO" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_MDEMO" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data 'SCH_STS_MDEMO' is executed using the sub-state scheduler 'SUB_SCH', the function 'KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_MDEMO' is executed. As a result, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" in the maker demonstration state. After that, the function "NOP: 300" is executed to enter a standby state for 300 frames (10 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues the command "COM_STS_KDEMO" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state model demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data 'SCH_STS_KDEMO' is executed using the sub-state scheduler 'SUB_SCH', the function 'KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_KDEMO' is executed. As a result, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" in the model demonstration state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", it becomes a standby state for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_GOTO" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state goto prevention scheduler data 'SCH_STS_GOTO' is executed using the sub-state scheduler 'SUB_SCH', the function 'KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_GOTO' is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data "PTA_LAMP_GOTO" in the stuck prevention state. Furthermore, by executing the function "SPLAY:PTA_SND_GOTO", sound reproduction is started based on the sound data "PTA_SND_GOTO" in the Goto prevention state. After that, the function "NOP: 450" is executed to enter a standby state for 450 frames (15 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_TAIKI" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed. At this stage, the gaming machine becomes ready to play, starts a game, and loops in this standby state until a game ball wins.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to set the internal state in the peripheral control board 1510 only by receiving the power-on command transmitted from the main control board. Specifically, the function "COMMAND0" enables control as if the main control board 1310 issued a command. For example, the initialization command at power-on may have fixed parameters, and is sent from the main control board 1310 by outputting the command with the function "COMMAND0" instead of the main command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to reduce the number of main commands. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce the capacity of the game control program of the main control board 1310, which is effective especially when the capacity of the game control program is restricted.

[18-9. Application example of scheduler data (effect 2)]
Next, an example of executing a hatchet accessory drop notice instead of a button cut-in notice and a button logo accessory drop notice will be described. The hatchet accessory drop notice is divided into the first half and the second half, and the first half notice and the second half notice are executed in cooperation. At this time, the control that is different from the control described so far is performed in that the parameters used in the first half announcement are carried over to the second half announcement.

[18-9-1. Production overview]
Figure 410 is a diagram showing an example of an advance notice effect in a series of variable displays from the start to the end of the variation of the special symbol in this embodiment, and (A) shows the effect executed from the start to the end of the variation It shows the scheduler data for executing the production and the scheduler to be executed, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the position of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the hatchet accessory drop notice.

In the series of variable displays shown in FIG. 410(A), the step-up notice and the first half drop notice of the hatchet accessory, which is the first half of the step-up notice and the hatchet accessory drop notice, are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. After that, a reach occurs, and in the second half of the fluctuation, the group notice is executed, and the button hatchet accessory first half drop notice continued from the first half is followed by the hatchet accessory second half drop notice. Scheduler data for controlling the lighting of lamps, sound output, image output, actions of characters, etc. is executed for each notice effect. The content of the step-up notice is as described above.

Next, the content of the hatchet accessory drop notice will be described with reference to FIG. 410(B). As described above, the hatchet accessory drop notice is divided into the button (BTN) hatchet accessory first half drop notice and the hatchet accessory second half drop notice.

In the first half of the button hatchet accessory drop notice, the notice effect progresses by operating the effect button. Therefore, even if the execution lottery of the button hatchet accessory first half drop notice is won, unless the presentation button is operated, the hatchet accessory 5003 drop presentation is not executed. On the other hand, in the latter half of the hatchet accessory fall notice, the effect is executed based on the result of the execution lottery for the hatchet accessory fall notice in the second half regardless of the operation of the production button.

When the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet accessory is won and the performance button is operated at a predetermined timing, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls to the middle stage position. Further, when the hatchet accessory 5003 falls to the middle position and wins the execution lottery for the second half drop notice of the hatchet accessory, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls to the lower position. That is, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the top (upper position, initial position) to the center (middle position) in the first half of the hatchet accessory drop notice, and falls to the bottom (lower position) in the second half. It should be noted that, if the hatchet accessory 5003 wins the execution lottery for the second half drop notice, the hatchet accessory 5003 will drop to the bottom regardless of its position. Further, when the hatchet accessory drop notice ends, the hatchet accessory 5003 returns to the upper portion (initial position).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 410(B), the hatchet accessory drop notice is produced in six different patterns. Specifically, when the result of the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet accessory is not won, it does not depend on the operation of the production button, so when the second half drop notice of the hatchet accessory is not won (Pattern 1) And there is a case of winning (pattern 2). In the case of pattern 1, since the first half drop notice of the button hatchet accessory and the second half drop notice of the hatchet accessory are not won, the hatchet accessory 5003 is maintained without falling and moving from above. In the case of pattern 2, while the machete component 5003 did not fall and was positioned at the top in the machete component fall notice, the execution lottery was won in the machete component latter half fall notice, so that the machete component 5003 spread from the top to the bottom. fall at once.

When the execution lottery of the button hatchet accessory first half drop notice is won, the presentation mode of the button hatchet accessory first half drop notice is different depending on whether or not the presentation button is operated. Therefore, the hatchet accessory drop notice can be executed in four patterns depending on whether or not the performance button is operated and the result of the execution lottery for the hatchet accessory drop notice in the second half.

When the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet accessory is won, the production button is not operated, and furthermore, the result of the lottery for the second half drop notice of the hatchet accessory is not won, the hatchet accessory 5003 does not fall. remains positioned at the top (pattern 3). When the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet accessory is won, the production button is operated, and furthermore, when the result of the lottery for execution of the latter half drop notice of the hatchet accessory is not won, the hatchet accessory 5003 is displayed when the production button is operated. falls from the top to the middle, and remains in the middle until the hatchet accessory drop notice ends (pattern 4).

If you win the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet role, do not operate the production button, and win the lottery for the second half fall notice of the hatchet role, the production button is not operated. The hatchet accessory 5003 does not fall and is positioned at the top until the latter half drop notice is started, and falls from the top to the bottom at the latter half drop notice (pattern 5). If the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet accessory is won, the performance button is operated, and furthermore, if the execution lottery for the second half drop notice of the hatchet accessory is won, the hatchet accessory 5003 is dropped from above when the performance button is operated. It falls to the middle, and then falls from the top to the bottom in the latter half of the hatchet accessory drop notice (pattern 6).

As described above, the machete component drop notice of the present embodiment can appear in six patterns of effects. Hereinafter, the scheduler data for controlling the operation of the machete component 5003 in the machete component drop notice will be described. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 410(A), the motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" for controlling the operation of the hatchet toy 5003 in the forewarning of the fall of the button hatchet toy, and the second half of the hatchet toy The second half fall notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" for controlling the operation of the hatchet 5003 in the fall notice will be described.

[18-9-2. Various controls in the notice of the fall of the machete]
FIG. 411 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" for performing motor control in the first half of the button hatchet accessory drop notice, which is the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice in this embodiment. . As described above, when the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet accessory is won, the operation of the production button is accepted for 3 seconds by the function "LOOP", and when the production button is operated, the hatchet accessory 5003 is operated. Execute the production to let you. If the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet accessory is not won, and if the production button is not operated even if the winning is won, the hatchet accessory 5003 is not operated and the process ends. Motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used to execute button hatchet accessory first half drop notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is started, first, the function "COMMAND:COM_NTA1_STA" is executed, and drawing of the effect when rattling the hatchet accessory 5003 on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. After that, the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_GAT" is executed, and then wait processing "NOP:30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the specified motion is performed for one second based on the motion pattern data "PTA_NTA_GAT". Specifically, the hatchet accessory 5003 rattles.

Subsequently, in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player, loop processing for 3 seconds is executed. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in loop processing, the functions between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" are repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC:YKK_NTA1:TBL_YKK_NTA1" is executed up to 90 times.

To explain the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" uses the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA1" and the button hatchet part first half drop notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" as parameters. executed.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" for the first half drop notice lottery result of the button hatchet accessory, and based on the contents of the first half drop notice work area "YKK_NTA1" for the button hatchet accessory scheduler data to be the branch destination. specify the start address of In the work area "YKK_NTA1" for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet, the result of the lottery for execution of the first half drop notice of the button hatchet is stored. Not won", and "1: execution of the first half drop notice of the hatchet accessory" is set when winning the button hatchet accessory first half drop notice execution lottery. The result of the execution lottery of the button hatchet accessory first half drop notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button hatchet accessory first half drop notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1".

If "0: not won" is set in the button hatchet first half drop notice work area "YKK_NTA1", the button hatchet jackpot first half drop notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" is set. The motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is selected when the first-half drop notice is not executed. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is only the function "STOP", and the result of the button hatchet first half drop notice lottery is "non-winning", so the scheduler data is executed without executing the button hatchet first half drop notice. end the execution of

On the other hand, if "1: execution of the first half fall notice of the button hatchet accessory" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA1", that is, if the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet accessory is won. , the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" at the execution of the button hatchet accessory fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" is the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_NTA1", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and button branch call address It is executed using the table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button branch call address table 'TBL_MOT_NTA1' for notifying the fall of the first half of the button hatchet accessory, and based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area 'YKK_BTN', specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination. . As in the case of the button cut-in notice and the button logo character drop notice, the operation state of the production button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", and when the production button is not operated, "0: button OFF ”, and “1: button ON” is set when the effect button is operated. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button hatchet accessory first half drop notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1".

While "0: Button OFF" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", in the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1", the motor scheduler when the button is OFF. The data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_NTA1" of the caller scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1". Therefore, even if the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet accessory is won, if the input of the production button is not detected during the loop processing of 90 times, the loop processing is exited and the function "STOP" is executed. is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the button for the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice button ON is set in the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1". The time motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" is selected. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" first execute the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-MID" and issue the command "COM_NTA_STA-MID". The command “COM_NTA_STA-MID” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the hatchet accessory falls, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020 .

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-MID" within the same frame as the command "COM_NTA_STA-MID" is issued. The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-MID" is pattern data for the operation of dropping the machete 5003 to the intermediate position. Furthermore, the function "NOP: 120" executes wait processing for 120 frames (about 4 seconds), during which the machete 5003 falls to the intermediate position.

Finally, by executing the function "MEMW:SCH_MEM_NTA:1", "1" is written in the scheduler hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" to record that the hatchet 5003 has moved to the intermediate position. After that, the function "STOP" terminates the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

When the first half of the button hatchet accessory drop notice, which is the first half of the hatchet accessory drop notice, ends, the latter half of the hatchet accessory drop notice is started. FIGS. 412 and 413 are diagrams for explaining the contents of the second half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" for controlling the motor in the latter half of the hatchet fall notice, which is the second half of the hatchet fall notice in this embodiment. be. The motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used for execution of the machete accessory second half drop notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" in the same way as the button hatchet accessory first fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is started, first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA2_STA" is executed to start drawing an effect suggesting whether or not the hatchet accessory 5003 will fall on the game board side effect display device 1600. . After that, wait processing "NOP: 90" for 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed. When the machete accessory 5003 falls, the expectation of a big win increases, so the player's expectation is heightened by performing effect drawing for 3 seconds.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "SUBC:YKK_NTA2:TBL_YKK_NTA2". In the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA2" and the hatchet handball latter half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" as parameters. .

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the hatchet accessory second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2", and based on the contents of the hatchet accessory latter fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2", determines the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify the start address. In the work area "YKK_NTA2", the result of the execution lottery for the late notice of the falling of the hatchet is stored in the work area "YKK_NTA2". ', and if the lottery for execution of the latter half of the hatchet accessory drop notice is won, "1: Execution of the latter half drop notice of the hatchet accessory" is set. The result of the execution lottery for the second half drop notice of the hatchet accessory corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" for the second half drop notice of the hatchet accessory.

If "0: not won" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA2" for the second half of the fall of the hatchet, the second half of the fall of the hatchet is set in the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" for the latter half of the fall of the hatchet. The motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON" at the time of notice non-execution is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON", the function "SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler and the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" when the result of the lottery result of the latter half of the fall of the hatchet is not won. branch based on

When "0: initial position" is set in the scheduler hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", the hatchet accessory fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" indicates that the hatchet accessory fall notice has not yet been set. Run-time motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed to return to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

When "0: initial position" is set, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" when not executing the latter half fall notice of the hatchet accessory is selected in the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" for the latter half drop notice lottery result of the hatchet accessory. be. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed to return to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2". After that, the value of the scheduler knife position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" is overwritten to "0: initial position", and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is completed.

On the other hand, if "1: Intermediate position" is set in the scheduler's hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", the hatchet's first half drop is set in the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" for the latter half of the hatchet's drop notice lottery result. The motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is selected when the advance notice is not won.

In the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" when the first half drop notice is executed and the second half drop notice is not won, wait processing "NOP: 120" for 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is first executed. In the wait process executed here, as will be described later, when the hatchet accessory 5003 is at the lower position, it becomes a waiting time for returning to the intermediate position. Here, since the machete accessory 5003 is originally in the middle position, it waits for 4 seconds.

After completion of the wait process, the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_MID-TOP" is executed to return the hatchet accessory 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. Furthermore, in order to secure the operation time of the machete 5003, wait processing "NOP: 120" for 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed, and the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

In addition, when "1: hatchet late fall notice" is set in the hatchet role fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2", in the hatchet role fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2", the hatchet Motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN" is selected at the time of winning the second half drop notice. In the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN", the function "SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" is executed, and branching is performed based on the value of the scheduler's hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" and the hatchet object fall notice 2 branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN". .

When "0: initial position" is set in the scheduler hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", the hatchet accessory fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" indicates that the hatchet accessory first half drop notice has not yet been set. The motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" is selected when the execution/second half fall notice wins.

In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" (Fig. 413), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-END" is executed to issue the command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-END" within the same frame as the command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is issued. The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-END" is pattern data for dropping the hatchet accessory 5003 to the lower position. Further, the function "NOP: 240" executes wait processing for 240 frames (about 8 seconds), during which the hatchet accessory 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position.

Then, at the timing when the hatchet accessory 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_END" is executed to issue the command "COM_NTA_END". The command "COM_NTA_END" is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect that the hatchet accessory 5003 has reached the lower position. Furthermore, the function "NOP: 90" executes wait processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds) to allow the effect display device 1600 on the game board side to continue drawing the effect.

After that, the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed. The parameter "PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is pattern data for returning the machete 5003 from the lower position to the middle position.

Subsequently, the function "CALL:SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed to call the aforementioned scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON", thereby returning the machete 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. After that, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

On the other hand, if "1: middle position" is set in the scheduler's hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", the hatchet's first half drop is set in the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" for the latter half of the hatchet's drop notice lottery result. The motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" is selected at the time of announcement execution/second half drop announcement winning.

In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" (Fig. 413), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_MID-END" is executed to issue the command "COM_NTA_MID-END". The command "COM_NTA_MID-END" is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the middle position to the lower position.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-END" within the same frame as the command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is issued. The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-END" is pattern data for dropping the hatchet accessory 5003 to the lower position. Furthermore, the function "NOP: 120" executes wait processing for 120 frames (about 4 seconds), during which the hatchet accessory 5003 is dropped from the middle position to the lower position.

Then, at the timing when the hatchet accessory 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_END" is executed to issue the command "COM_NTA_END". The command "COM_NTA_END" is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect that the hatchet accessory 5003 has reached the lower position. Furthermore, the function "NOP: 90" executes wait processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds) to allow the effect display device 1600 on the game board side to continue drawing the effect.

Here, the function "NOP: 120" controls 120 frames (approximately 4 seconds) wait processing is executed. This time is the time it takes for the hatchet accessory 5003 to move from the initial position to the intermediate position.

After that, similarly to the case of "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN", the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed to return the hatchet accessory 5003 from the lower position to the middle position. Furthermore, the function "CALL:SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed to return the machete accessory 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

When the machete accessory 5003 returns to the initial position and returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2", the function "MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 0" is executed, and the value of the machete position information work area for the scheduler "SCH_MEM_NTA" is set to "0: initial position". to end the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

In the machete role drop notice, the scheduler data is divided into the first half and the second half, and the operation of the machete role 5003 differs in the second half depending on whether or not the player operates the production button in the first half. Therefore, by using the function "MEMW" in the first half to write the position of the machete component 5003 and acquiring the written position information in the second half, it is possible to specify the position of the machete component 5003. . As a result, the moving amount of the motor can be determined for each position of the hatchet accessory 5003, and by calling the corresponding scheduler data, it is possible to execute an effect according to the operation result of the effect button.

In addition, since common scheduler data is called for the movement from the intermediate position to the initial position in the movement of the machete 5003 to the initial position after the action, the scheduler data as a whole can be simplified.

The function "MEMW" can refer to a common value by writing a fixed value in a predetermined area when executing scheduler data and referring to it when executing other scheduler data. As a result, it is possible to specify the values that indicate the state that changes due to the execution of multiple scheduler data at the time of execution of each scheduler data. The process can be completed only by defining the scheduler data without creating the scheduler data in the This makes it possible to minimize the required number of scheduler data that requires different processing depending on the state, streamlines the creation and debugging of scheduler data, and facilitates management. Also, in this embodiment, the function writes a fixed value, but by specifying the work name in the function parameter instead of the fixed value, it is possible to transfer data from the program side and perform processing based on command information. can be performed on the scheduler, and more complicated processing can be performed by the scheduler. A unique feature of the function "MEMW" is that even information that has not been determined at the start of execution of the scheduler data containing the function "MEMW" can be processed if the information is determined by the time the function "MEMW" is executed. This enables effective time control and interactive control.

[18-10. Configuration example of scheduler data (fluctuation pattern)]
The flow of executing a series of advance notice effects has been described above. The details of execution of such a series of advance notice effects are drawn based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 . Furthermore, specific production contents are drawn for each advance notice production.

Hereinafter, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the procedure for controlling the execution of a series of advance notice effects and the basic effects related to these series of notice effects and the fluctuation pattern (regardless of the lottery other than the notice effect) The structure of the scheduler data for executing the effect related to the background effect and the pattern effect that are produced and are one-to-one with the variation pattern will be described.

In the present embodiment, the period from when the special symbols start to change to when the change stops is managed in units of blocks (effect sections) divided into predetermined structural units. Blocks, for example, from the start of pattern fluctuation until reach occurs, or until the pattern stops if reach does not occur (first half fluctuation), between reach occurrence and until the pattern stops (second half fluctuation ), and the period from the stop of the design to the end of the variation. Each block is assigned a time corresponding to a variation pattern, and the execution timing and execution time of the advance notice effect within the assigned time are defined. The time corresponding to each block and data relating to the basic performance to be executed are collectively referred to as block data.

In addition, the rule of block division is that when comparing the basic effects related to fluctuations in multiple fluctuation patterns, the same basic effects are treated as common block data, and the parts with different basic effects on the liquid crystal display are divided as block data. do. Referring to FIG. 414A, in the variation pattern liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores combinations of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment, the variation pattern “10H01H” is normal variation 6 seconds. It is a loss, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 6 seconds, and then the design of the loss is performed. Since the normal variation 6-second performance and the failure stop performance are also used in other variation patterns, they are divided into liquid crystal performance block data (LCD01_BLK) for 6 seconds of normal variation and liquid crystal performance block data for failure stop (LCD02_BLK).

The variation pattern “10H02H” is a normal variation 12 seconds lost, and the normal variation is performed for 12 seconds, and then a losing pattern effect is performed. Since the normal fluctuation 12-second effect is also used in other fluctuation patterns, it is divided into the normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal effect block data (LCD03_BLK), and the losing pattern effect is exactly the same as the fluctuation pattern "10H01H". , Loss stop liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK), which is divided into liquid crystal display blocks with a variation pattern "10H01H", is commonly used. As for the other variation patterns, similarly, the parts that have already been converted into block data for the basic performance are used in common, and the different parts are newly converted into block data.

As described above, by making blocks, the common basic effect part becomes a unique number of block data, and all variation patterns and basic effects such as big hits other than variations are combined with unique liquid crystal effect block data. , all variation patterns and basic effects such as big hits other than variations can be realized. It is also important to greatly reduce the total amount of effect data to be created, but the main purpose of blockization is to create a liquid crystal effect that contains a specific basic effect when there is a change in a specific basic effect. The change is reflected in all fluctuation patterns that use block data.

Regarding the liquid crystal display in this embodiment, since the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source is controlled, the format and function are completely different from the scheduler data for sounds, lamps, and characters in this embodiment. The configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for effect and the drawing scheduler data for advance notice effect are combined is the same as the sub-effect block data for controlling sounds, lamps, accessories, and the like. In addition, the drawing scheduler data for the liquid crystal display includes frame information, still image and moving image material IDs, display position information, enlargement/reduction information, rotation angle information, color information, alpha information, etc., for generating a display list command for the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. The information shown is embedded.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the block data for variably displaying the identification pattern on the liquid crystal display device is defined as liquid crystal pattern block data separately from the block data for performing other liquid crystal effects. This makes it possible to make the control for variably displaying the identification pattern independent from the control of other liquid crystal effects, for example, even when the shape of the identification pattern is changed and variably displayed, a common advance notice effect can be performed. It becomes possible to execute on a liquid crystal display device. The drawing scheduler data for pattern display has the same format and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal presentation. Also, the structure in which drawing scheduler data for basic effects and drawing scheduler data for advance notice effects related to symbols are combined for each block data is the same as the above-described sub-effect block data and liquid crystal effect block data. The drawing scheduler data for design display has the same configuration and functions as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display, and additionally, information specifying the mode of variable display of identification patterns is embedded.

FIG. 414A is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores combinations of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to variation pattern commands in this embodiment. FIG. 414B is a diagram for explaining the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number by variation pattern (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) storing the combination of the liquid crystal pattern block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. FIG. 415 is a diagram for explaining a sub effect block data combination number table by variation pattern (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores combinations of sub effect block data corresponding to variation pattern commands in this embodiment.

The liquid crystal effect block data combination number table by variation pattern (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) is a table that holds information indicating the combination of liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern. For example, a unique number specifying the constituent liquid crystal effect block data is held in chronological order with respect to the variation pattern number. For example, if the variation pattern number is "10H03H", it consists of "LCD03_BLK" that indicates normal variation for 12 seconds in the first half variation, "LCD04_BLK" that indicates normal short reach in the second half variation, and "LCD02_BLK" that indicates when the deviation is stopped. be done. At this time, "LCD03_BLK", "LCD04_BLK", and "LCD02_BLK" are stored in this order. In this way, by connecting the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern, it is possible to define (realize) the configuration of the basic effect and the advance notice effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 414, the same liquid crystal effect block data is used in the same effect section. For example, when the first half variation is the normal variation of 12 seconds, "LCD03_BLK" is used regardless of the details of the announcement effect that is actually executed. As a result, the number of liquid crystal effect block data can be realized with a unique number corresponding to the type of variation, and the liquid crystal effect block data can be uniquely specified for each variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 414B, the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table for each variation pattern (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) holds information indicating block data combinations for each variation pattern, similar to the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. . Also, the sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined in a structure corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data of the same variation pattern number one-to-one (same combination, same effect time).

Also, as shown in FIG. 415, the sub effect block data combination number table by variation pattern (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) contains information indicating block data combinations for each variation pattern, similar to the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table by variation pattern. Hold. Also, the sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined in a configuration (same combination, same effect time) corresponding one-to-one with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal pattern block data of the same variation pattern number.

Next, the execution procedure of the announcement effect based on the scheduler data corresponding to the variation pattern will be explained. Here, the execution procedure of the basic effect and the advance notice effect based on the effect scheduler data corresponding to the variation pattern "10H03H" will be described. First, the outline of the procedure for executing the effect control based on the liquid crystal effect block data, the effect control based on the liquid crystal symbol block data and the effect control based on the sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 416 is a diagram illustrating an overview of effect control of the first half variation (normal variation of 12 seconds) of the variation pattern “10H03H” in the present embodiment.

When the variation pattern command (main variation related command) "10H03H" is received from the main control board 1310, the variation pattern number "10H03H" is specified by analyzing the command received by the command analysis module 5200, and the effect control unit 5020 Notice.

Effect control unit 5020, as described in FIG. 392A, determines the layer to be used, determines the block data number corresponding to the layer, based on the determined block number, to each variation pattern number "10H03H" The corresponding block data number is acquired from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table by variation pattern (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table by variation pattern (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), and the sub effect block data combination number table by variation pattern (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO). do. By setting all the block data numbers corresponding to the respective effect devices to the same number, it is possible to synchronously execute the effects of the respective effect devices.

Then, the effect control section 5020 transmits the block data numbers for all the layers to the liquid crystal effect block control section 5310, the liquid crystal pattern block control section 5311 and the sub effect block control section 5320.

After that, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 is the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal pattern block control unit 5311 is the liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332, and the sub effect block control unit 5320 is the sub effect 1f (1ms) scheduler execution unit. 5333 (5334) executes the block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number in chronological order. Specifically, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 is the normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal effect block data "LCD03_BLK" corresponding to the first half fluctuation, and the liquid crystal design 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 is the normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal design block data "ZUG03_BLK". ', the sub-effect 1f (1ms) scheduler executing section 5333 (5334) executes the normal fluctuation 12-second sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK".

When the processing of the liquid crystal effect block data is started, one or a plurality of liquid crystal effect 1f schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data are started, and the drawing scheduler data specified according to the content of the effect is executed. The drawing scheduler data includes liquid crystal function information for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device, designates parameters according to the content of the effect, and transmits the liquid crystal function information to the liquid crystal module 5400 in a predetermined order. The liquid crystal module 5400 analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, and transmits a display list to the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source, thereby performing drawing on the liquid crystal display device.

Further, when processing the liquid crystal pattern block data, the liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler is activated, and the drawing scheduler data corresponding to the variable display mode of the identification pattern is executed. The procedure for drawing on the liquid crystal display device is the same as in the case of processing the liquid crystal effect block data.

On the other hand, when the processing of the sub-effect block data is started, one or a plurality of sub-effect 1f (1ms) schedulers corresponding to the sub-effect block data are activated, and the scheduler data specified according to the contents of the effect are executed. Note that the scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or may be shared and the execution cycle may be set at startup.

As described above, the scheduler data includes performance data designation functions for controlling performance devices such as lamps (“KPLAY”), speakers (“SPLAY”), and accessories (“MPLAY”). Designated effects are executed by sequentially executing the effect data designation functions in a defined order. The performance data designation function is transmitted to the modules (lamp module 5600, sound module 5500, driving device (motor) module 5700, etc.) corresponding to the performance devices to be controlled, and each module executes performance by various performance devices.

It is also possible to call other scheduler data from the scheduler data by the functions "REQ, REQF". Various production devices can be controlled by executing the production data specifying function in the called scheduler data at this time. Furthermore, by using the command transmission function "COMMAND" or "COMMAND0", control by commands instead of functions is possible. For example, by transmitting a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module 5400 at the timing of executing a performance data specifying function that controls the movement of the character, the movement of the character and the drawing are coordinated like the above-mentioned hatchet character fall notice effect. It is possible to execute the production that was done.

Here, the procedure for executing the effect control using the sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 417 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern sub effect block data control start process relating to the variation pattern layer of the present embodiment.

The production block control unit 5040 selects a variation pattern layer in the production control unit 5020 based on the variation pattern number notified from the command analysis module 5200, and changes the control of the block data number by variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern. Control is started using the pattern-by-pattern sub effect block data combination number table (Fig. 415). The row position of the sub effect block data combination number table by variation pattern (FIG. 415) is set to the row index of the sub effect block data combination number table by variation pattern (step S7001). For example, in the table shown in FIG. 415, if the variation pattern number is "10H01H", "0" is set in the sub effect block data combination number table row index by variation pattern, and if the variation pattern number is "10H03H". Since it is the third row, for example, "2" (row -1) is set in the sub effect block data combination number table row index by variation pattern.

Next, the effect block control unit 5040 initializes the sub effect block data combination number table column index by variation pattern to "0" (step S7002). It starts from the sub effect block data corresponding to the first column of the specified row (variation pattern sub effect block data combination number table row index). Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 causes the scheduler execution unit 5060 to execute a variation pattern sub effect block data control scheduler activation process (step S7003). As a result, the scheduler for executing the sub effect block data classified by variation pattern is activated, and the scheduler data included in the sub effect block data is executed.

FIG. 418 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern-specific sub effect block data control activation process of the present embodiment.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 first acquires the number of the sub effect block data number table by variation pattern based on the row and column indexes from the sub effect block data combination number table by variation pattern (step S7011). Further, the sub effect block data number table row index is initialized to "0" (step S7012). As a result, processing is started from the top record of the sub effect block data number table by variation pattern specified from the sub effect block data combination number table by variation pattern.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler data registered in the sub effect block data classified by variation pattern (step S7013). The scheduler data is registered in the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect registered in the sub effect block data number table classified by variation pattern (FIG. 420(B)). Specifically, based on the sub-effect block data number table row index, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) is extracted from the sub-effect block data number table. get. One or a plurality of scheduler data are registered in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice), and a scheduler corresponding to each scheduler data is defined. ing. When a plurality of scheduler data are registered, one or a plurality of scheduler data are associated with each other based on the result of lottery of advance notice or the like.

Furthermore, scheduler executing section 5060 updates the sub-effect block data number table row index when activation of all scheduler data defined in the sub-effect block data is completed, and the sub-effect block data number table row index changes to a variation pattern. It is determined whether or not the number of elements in the row of the separate sub effect block data number table has been exceeded (step S7014). When the number of elements in the row of the sub effect block data number table by variation pattern is exceeded (the result of step S7014 is "YES"), the sub effect block data control activation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it does not exceed the number of sub effect block data number table row elements by variation pattern (result of step S7014 is "NO"), the next sub effect block data is processed.

FIG. 419 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern-specific sub effect block data control update process of this embodiment. In the sub-effect block data control update process by variation pattern, in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) that constitutes the sub-effect block data number table by variation pattern This is a process for executing the next sub effect block data classified by variation pattern when the execution of all the scheduler data is completed. The variation pattern sub effect block data control update process is periodically executed to monitor the execution status of the variation pattern sub effect block data.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 first acquires the number of the sub effect block data number table by variation pattern from the sub effect block data combination number table by variation pattern using the row and column indexes of the sub effect block data combination number table by variation pattern. (step S7021). As a result, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) constituting the sub-effect block data number table by variation pattern is specified, and defined in the sub-effect block data. It is determined whether or not the currently scheduled scheduler is running (step S7022). If it is being executed (the result of step S7022 is "YES"), the execution of the scheduler continues, and the sub effect block data control update process ends.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 performs all scheduler operations for the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the notice) defined in the sub effect block data by variation pattern. is completed (the result of step S7022 is "NO"), the sub effect block data combination number table column index by variation pattern is incremented, and whether or not the next column data is end data ("DATA_END"). is determined (step S7023). If it is end data (the result of step S7023 is "YES"), a series of effects are completed, and thus the sub effect block data control update process for each variation pattern is ended.

On the other hand, if the next column data is not the end data (result of step S7023 is "NO"), the scheduler execution unit 5060 starts executing the sub effect block data by variation pattern corresponding to the next column data. , Sub effect data block control scheduler start processing for each variation pattern is executed (step S7024).

As explained in FIGS. 414A, 414B and 415, the sub effect block data by variation pattern is defined in association with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal pattern block data, and the corresponding block data are executed at the same timing, By setting the execution time of each block data to be the same, the effect control by the drawing scheduler, the effect control by the sub effect scheduler, and the effect control by a plurality of schedulers can be synchronized. In addition, by making blocks, if the same variation pattern is used, regardless of the combination of effects and the presence or absence of the appearance of effects, the number of activations of the scheduler defined in the effect block and the effect block will always be the same. can be reduced, resulting in improved quality.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by synchronizing the effects control by one or a plurality of drawing schedulers and sub-production schedulers, it is possible to coordinate the operations of various production devices, and to execute various productions without discomfort. can do. In addition, since scheduler data having the same execution time can be executed in parallel, scheduler data for controlling various production devices can be developed and checked independently for each production device and for each block data. is possible, and development efficiency can be improved.

FIG. 420 is a diagram for explaining the procedure for executing the basic effect and the advance notice effect of the variable display corresponding to the change pattern “10H03H” of the present embodiment. Execution time of the notice effect, (B) shows the configuration of sub effect block data classified by variation pattern. The sub-effect block data by variation pattern includes background sub-effect block data and notice sub-effect block data for executing the background effect and the notice effect. In FIG. 420(B), two types of sub effect block data, background block data and notice block data, are combined, but the number of sub effect block data can be varied.

As shown in FIG. 420, the sub effect block data by variation pattern that constitutes the variation display of the variation pattern “10H03H” is “SCH03_BLK” (normal variation 12 seconds), “SCH04_BLK” (normal short reach), “SCH02_BLK” ( lost stop). The variation pattern sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK" corresponds to 12 seconds from the start of variation until the left and right symbols stop. The variation pattern sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK" corresponds to a period during which the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same identification symbol and the normal short reach is executed. The variation pattern sub performance block data "SCH02_BLK" corresponds to a period during which the middle symbol is stopped, the result of the variation display is determined as a failure, and the determined symbol is displayed.

In the sub-effect block data by variation pattern "SCH03_BLK", as shown in FIG. Block data is defined. In the sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK", sub effect block data for cut-in notice and group notice and sub effect block data related to background are defined. Furthermore, in the sub effect block "SCH02_BLK", the sub effect block data relating to the background is defined without defining the preliminary effect sub effect block data. In the drawing, the execution of the forewarning effect is not duplicated, but a plurality of forecast block data may be defined and executed so that a plurality of the forewarning effects are overlapped. The content of each announcement effect shown in FIG. 420 is as described above.

Effect control based on each sub effect block data will be described below. As shown in FIG. 420(B), two types of sub effect block data in the variable display of the variable pattern "10H03H" are executed in parallel. First, the variation pattern sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” will be described.

In the background-related sub-effect scheduler data, normal fluctuation 12-second background sub-effect block data is defined. In the normal fluctuation 12-second background sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the normal fluctuation 12-second background are defined. Since the normal fluctuation 12-second background sub effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, it has the same effect time as the sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK". Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK" is completed.

The function "NOP", step-up notice sub-effect block data, BTN logo accessory drop notice sub-effect block data, and symbol stop notice sub-effect block data are defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the notice. The function "NOP" serves as a wait for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined to perform a sub-effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. The step-up notice sub-effect block data defines a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data relating to the step-up notice. The step-up notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the BTN logo accessory drop notice sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the BTN logo accessory drop notice are defined. The BTN logo accessory drop notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the BTN logo accessory drop notice liquid crystal effect block data. The symbol stop notice sub-performance block data defines a sub-performance scheduler number and sub-performance scheduler data relating to symbol stop notice. The symbol stop notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the symbol stop notice liquid crystal effect block data. The variation pattern sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK" is formed by combining and executing the above sub effect block data.

By executing the sub effect block data synchronously with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data for each sound, lamp and motor defined in the sub effect block data are executed synchronously with the liquid crystal effect block data. It will be.

At this time, from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the first liquid crystal effect block data (step-up notice), from the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to each liquid crystal notice effect to the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the next liquid crystal notice effect Until the start of the function A "NOP" is executed and waits for the specified time. In this way, by controlling the appearance timing of the sub-effect scheduler data corresponding to each liquid crystal effect block data in the scheduler block for each variation pattern by the function "NOP", the scheduler can be executed sequentially at the execution timing of each advance notice effect by a program etc. By starting the corresponding scheduler data without instructing the execution of the data, it becomes possible to execute the effects of each effect device corresponding to the liquid crystal preview effect at the designated timing. Also, the function "NOP" at the end of each scheduler data in the sub effect block data classified by variation pattern may be omitted.

The execution time of the notice effect set by the scheduler data for controlling the effect devices such as lamps, sounds, and accessories is defined as a common time for each notice effect. As a result, the time from the start of the control by the sub-effect block data to the execution of each advance notice effect is uniquely determined, so that the control timing of each effect device can be synchronized.

Further, the time information at the time of execution of the sub effect block data by variation pattern is managed by a relative value from the start of execution of the sub effect block data by variation pattern, not from the start of variation. As a result, when the same sub-effect block data by variation pattern is used in a plurality of variation patterns, each effect in the sub-effect block data by variation pattern for each variation pattern has the effect start time from the start of variation. Although it will be different, it can be processed without problems because the time value is managed relatively within the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern. In the case of the liquid crystal effect block data by variation pattern, similarly, the liquid crystal effect block data by variation pattern is managed by a relative value from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block data by variation pattern, and the liquid crystal design block data by variation pattern is similarly managed. Managed as a relative value from the start of data execution.

Next, the variation pattern sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK" will be described. The sub effect block data by variation pattern "SCH04_BLK" corresponds to normal short reach, and at this time, two types of sub effect block data are executed in parallel.

Normal short reach background sub-effect block data is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background. A sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data relating to the normal short reach background are defined in the normal short reach background sub effect block data. Since the normal short reach background sub-effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, it has the same effect time as the sub-effect block data by variation pattern "SCH04_BLK". Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern is completed.

The function "NOP", cut-in notice sub-effect block data, and group notice sub-effect block data are defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the notice. The function "NOP" serves as a wait for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined to execute a sub-effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. The cut-in notice sub-effect block data defines a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data relating to the cut-in notice. The cut-in notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the cut-in notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the group announcement sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to group announcement are defined. The group announcement sub effect block data has the same effect time as the group announcement liquid crystal effect block data. The variation pattern sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK" is constructed by combining and executing the above sub effect block data.

By executing the sub effect block data synchronously with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data for each sound, lamp and motor defined in the sub effect block data are executed synchronously with the liquid crystal effect block data. It will be.

Also, in the variation pattern sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK", the number of sub-effect block data columns is the same as in the variation pattern-specific sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK", but the number of sub effect block data columns cannot be increased or decreased. no problem.

Finally, in the sub-effect block data classified by variation pattern "SCH02_BLK", since the effect related to the announcement is not performed, only the losing stop background sub-effect block data is executed. Loss stop background sub-effect block data is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background. A sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the normal fluctuation 12-second background are defined in the losing stop background sub-effect block data. Since the losing stop background sub-effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, it has the same effect time as the sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK". Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub effect block data "SCH02_BLK" is completed.

FIG. 421 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between liquid crystal effect block data classified by variation pattern and liquid crystal design block data classified by variation pattern according to the present embodiment. The liquid crystal effect block data by variation pattern and the liquid crystal pattern block data by variation pattern differ only in the function executed by the scheduler data in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the function executed by the scheduler data in the sub-effect block data. , and the data format and control method are common, so the description is omitted.

Next, the configuration of the sub-effect block data will be described by taking the step-up effect described with reference to FIG. 392B as an example. First, an outline of creating liquid crystal display scheduler data for step-up notice will be described. FIG. 422 is a diagram showing an image of creating a drawing data file for step-up advance notice for liquid crystal display of this embodiment in step-up effect units (step-up effect 1 to step-up effect 4) using a video synthesis/motion creation graphic tool. be.

The drawing data file is created for each step-up effect and consists of a series of effects combining still images and moving images. Also, as shown in FIG. 422, the drawing data file is converted by the tool into the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data in this embodiment in units of step-up presentation.

The reason why the drawing data file is not created one-on-one with the liquid crystal notice effects (step-up notices 1 to 4) is that, for example, if only the step-up 1 effect is changed, there are four types of step-up notices as in this embodiment. is executable, it is necessary to change 4 drawing data files. Considering the work time required for change and the risk of omission of correction, create a unique number of drawing data files for each step, This is because it is more efficient to realize the advance notice in combination.

FIG. 423 is a diagram for explaining the structure of effect block data for a step-up notice according to the present embodiment. (A) shows the configuration of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, and (B) shows the configuration of the step-up notice sub-effect block data. As described above, four types of step-up notices can be executed in this embodiment, and step-up notices 1 and 2 are shown in (A) and (B). In step-up notices 3 and 4, step-up 3 effects and step-up 4 effects are executed at predetermined timings.

To explain the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, first, based on the step-up notice lottery result value obtained at the start of the fluctuation, it is determined which step-up notice of step-up notices 1 to 4 is to be executed. be. If the lottery result value of the step-up notice is not won, the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is not executed and the process ends, so the step-up notice is not executed and drawing on the liquid crystal display device is not performed.

On the other hand, if the step-up notice lottery result value is step-up notice 1, step-up notice 1 of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and if the step-up notice lottery result value is step-up notice 2, The step-up notice 2 of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and the corresponding effect block data is selected. The effect block data of the step-up notice 2 operates in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 for executing the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 for executing the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in parallel.

When the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 executes the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the data to be executed next is "DATA_END", so the operation of the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 ends.

Also, the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 executes the function "NOP", waits for the time specified by the parameter, and then executes the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. After the execution of the step-up 2 liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is finished, the data to be executed next is "DATA_END", so the operation of the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 is finished.

As described above, multiple variations of a single announcement can be realized by combining the announcement effect scheduler data in the smallest structural units.

Next, the step-up notice sub effect block data will be described with reference to FIG. 423(B). The step-up notice sub effect block data, the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, the block configuration and the execution time are all in one-to-one correspondence. As a result, it is possible to dynamically synchronize all the effect devices with respect to combinations of fluctuation patterns and advance notice lottery results, and to realize a effect with a sense of unity.

The step-up notice sub effect block data differs from the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data only in the functions executed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the functions executed by the sub effect scheduler data. Since the data format and control method are common, the description is omitted.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a variation pattern command is received from the main control board 1310, the sub effect block data stored in the data access order is obtained from the sub effect block data combination table by variation pattern "SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO". By executing the scheduler data included in the acquired sub-effect block data in accordance with the data access order, it is possible to execute the defined basic effect and preview effect in a predetermined order and at a predetermined timing. .

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler data for controlling various effect devices can be executed in parallel, and the scheduler data that are executed at the same timing are defined to have the same execution time. You can synchronize the performance. Furthermore, once execution of the scheduler data is started, a predetermined operation is performed at the timing set in the scheduler data thereafter. As a result, simply by executing the corresponding block data based on the information that specifies the content of the production, such as variation patterns, the hierarchically defined scheduler data is automatically obtained, and the production is executed at the defined timing. It is possible to

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, multiple schedulers can be activated and schedule data can be executed independently by each scheduler. Therefore, it is possible to develop multiple types of scheduler data in parallel, which greatly improves development efficiency. can be substantially improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, the scheduler analyzes the scheduler data described in a predetermined format, and is configured to control the rendering device. Therefore, even if the control mechanism of the game machine (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 and the arithmetic unit included therein) is updated, a common schedule can be achieved by installing a scheduler corresponding to the new game machine. data can be used. In other words, the scheduler has a function as middleware for executing common schedule data on different platforms, making it possible to utilize software assets related to the performance control of gaming machines over a long period of time.

Note that the scheduler in this embodiment may be implemented by software or by hardware. When the scheduler is implemented by software, the scheduler that is activated when the scheduler data is executed may be stopped after use to release the used memory area. Memory usage can be reduced by stopping the scheduler. For example, the scheduler may be released when a predetermined time has elapsed after execution of the schedule data is completed, or the scheduler other than the minimum scheduler may be stopped when the gaming machine is in a customer waiting state.

[19. Production control by liquid crystal production scheduler data]
Next, the details of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data will be explained. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data, like the sub effect block data, is composed of a combination of functions for controlling the object of effect. In the sub-effect block data, sound output, lighting of the lamp, operation of the driving device, etc. were controlled, but in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, drawing on the liquid crystal display device is controlled.

[19-1. LCD display scheduler function]
First, functions (liquid crystal effect scheduler functions) constituting the liquid crystal effect scheduler data will be described. The scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation is an instruction (function, command) for control of presentation described in the scheduler data for liquid crystal presentation which constitutes the aforementioned liquid crystal presentation block data. Send and perform the rendition. Also, when executing the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation, it is possible to change the attributes of the object to be displayed (for example, color, shape, operation content, etc.) by specifying parameters.

[19-1-1. LCD display scheduler function]
FIG. 424 is a diagram showing an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation of this embodiment. An outline of each liquid crystal effect scheduler function will be described below.

Each liquid crystal presentation scheduler function is managed for each group. In this embodiment, there are groups of coordinate setting, scale setting, rotation angle setting, α setting, frame setting, Z index setting, effect SW setting, and sub-scheduler setting.

First, functions belonging to the coordinate setting group will be described. The functions belonging to the coordinate setting group, for example, specify the coordinates of the display area of the liquid crystal display device and set the liquid crystal display object. This makes it possible to designate and display the position of the object to be displayed on the liquid crystal display.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSY", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSZ" specify the X-axis coordinate position, Y-axis coordinate position, and Z-axis coordinate position, respectively, and set the display position of the liquid crystal display object.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORX" specifies the X-axis coordinate position, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORY" specifies the Y-axis coordinate position to set the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions and sets the liquid crystal display object anchor point position. The liquid crystal display target anchor point position is the center position of the liquid crystal display target.

Next, the group to which the function for performing scaling (scale setting) of the display object (still image, moving image) belongs will be described. Scaling refers to, for example, setting the center of the display area that is to be enlarged or reduced when displaying on a liquid crystal display device from the size of still images or moving images stored in CGROM, or converting the unit of coordinates. It is to do. By setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area and performing drawing processing, the object to be displayed on the liquid crystal display can be displayed at an appropriate position and size.

The scale setting group includes the functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ". The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX" specifies the X-axis value and sets the coordinates of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY" designates the Y-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ" designates the Z-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ" specifies the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object.

Next, a description will be given of the group to which the functions for setting the angle at which the object to be displayed on the liquid crystal display is rotated and displayed belong. By storing only the reference liquid crystal display object in the CGROM and displaying it by designating the angle, it becomes unnecessary to store a plurality of liquid crystal display objects after rotation, and an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed. can.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ" and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ" belong to the rotation angle setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX" specifies the X-axis value, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY" specifies the Y-axis value, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ" specifies the Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object. Also, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ" designates the X-axis value, Y-axis value, and Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object.

Next, other functions will be explained. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ALPHA" is α setting processing, and specifically specifies the α value to set the transparency of the liquid crystal display object. The α value is a numerical value that indicates transparency, and can be set from transparent (colorless) that completely transmits the background color to completely opaque that does not transmit the background color at all.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAME" is a frame setting process, and more specifically, sets a frame value, which is the drawing update interval of the object to be displayed on the liquid crystal display. A frame value is a numerical value indicating an interval for redrawing an object to be displayed on the liquid crystal display during animation processing.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ZINDEX" sets the Z index of the liquid crystal display object. The Z index is a hierarchy for displaying the liquid crystal display object, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display object is displayed on the front side or moved to the back side on the screen. For example, when the object to be displayed on the liquid crystal display is the background, the Z index is set so that it is drawn on the backmost surface.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW" belong to the effect SW setting group for setting information about the effect SW. The effect SW, which will be described later in detail, is information embedded in control information for drawing (images, moving images). Upon detecting this information, a predetermined process is called back to switch the effect contents. , or perform another production. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW" sets the effect SW information to the still image index number on the CGROM and the moving image index number on the CGROM in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW" sets frame effect SW information to the entire liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW" sets SW information defining special control information, which will be described later, in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SUBSCH" is a function for calling the sub-scheduler. By defining highly versatile processing as a sub-scheduler and calling it back at a predetermined timing, it is possible to simplify processing and improve development efficiency.

[19-1-2. Scheduler function parameter for liquid crystal presentation]
An example of the liquid crystal presentation scheduler function used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described above. Next, an example will be given of the parameters that are specified when the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation is executed. 425 and 426 are diagrams showing an example of parameters for the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation in this embodiment.

The parameters of the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation are managed for each group similarly to the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation. The group of scheduler functions for liquid crystal presentation and the group of parameters are grouped differently. The parameter group includes sequence control, effect SW, footage setting, symbol replacement related, sub-effect scheduler function, and the like.

The sequence control parameter group includes: AAD_FRAME, AAD_POS, AAD_POS2, AAD_POS3, AAD_ALPHA, AAD_ANGLE, AAD_ENTRY, AAD_ENTRY_B, AAD_SKIP, AAD_SKIP_B, AAD_SCALE, AAD_SCALE2, AAD_SCALE3, AAD_SIZE ” and so on. Each parameter will be described below.

"AAD_FRAME" is a parameter for designating a frame value and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS" is a parameter for designating the X-axis coordinate position and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS2" is a parameter for setting the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions, each of which is 16 bits long. "AAD_POS3" is a parameter for setting the X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis coordinate positions, each of which has a length of 16 bits.

"AAD_ALPHA" is a parameter for designating the α value, which is the transparency of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 8 bits. "AAD_ANGLE" is a parameter for designating the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_ENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of parameters to be set, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_ENTRY_B" is a parameter that designates the total number of data of parameters to be set, and is divided into two parameters with a length of 8 bits.

"AAD_SKIP" is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to skip, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SKIP_B" is a parameter that designates the number of frames to be skipped during liquid crystal display, and is divided into two parameters with a length of 8 bits.

"AAD_SCALE" is a parameter that specifies a scale value when the coordinate system of the display area is uniaxial, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SCALE2" is a parameter that specifies an enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area is biaxial, and each has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SCALE3" is a parameter that specifies an enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area is three axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SIZE" is a parameter that specifies the size of the liquid crystal display object on the XY two axes, and each has a length of 16 bits.

A group of parameters of the effect SW includes "AAD_LCDSWENTRY", "AAD_LCDSW", "AAD_LCDSW_PARAM", "AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY", "AAD_KICKLCDSW", "AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY", "AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM", and the like.

"AAD_LCDSWENTRY" is a parameter designating the total number of registrations of effect SW, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_LCDSW" is a parameter that designates the number of the effect SW, and designates two numerical values of 16-bit length. "AAD_LCDSW_PARAM" is a parameter for passing the effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

"AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY" is a parameter designating the total number of registered kick effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_KICKLCDSW" is a parameter that specifies the kick effect SW number, and specifies two 16-bit numbers. "AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY" is a parameter designating the total number of registered frame effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM" is a parameter for passing the frame effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

A group of parameters for footage settings includes "AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY", "AAD_SEQFOOT", and so on. "AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY" is a parameter specifying the number of still images to be registered in a predetermined area, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SEQFOOT" is a parameter specifying the index number of the still image stored in the CGROM, and has a length of 16 bits.

A group of parameters related to symbol replacement includes "AAD_ZUGARA" and the like. "AAD_ZUGARA" is a parameter designating a pattern index number, and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameters of the scheduler function for sub-effects includes "AAD_SUBENTRY", "AAD_SUB" and the like. "AAD_SUBENTRY" is a parameter specifying the number of sub-scheduler function parameters, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SUB" is a parameter specifying a sub-scheduler function number and has a length of 16 bits.

[20. Callback control based on image information]
Effect control in a game machine has conventionally been realized by executing a combination of a program for individually controlling various effect devices, a program for linking a plurality of effect devices, and the like. These programs were created by highly skilled programmers, and were written in program code representing the operation details and control procedures of the production device for each notice content in addition to the command associated with the variation pattern. In the liquid crystal drawing, individual effect drawing data is called in the frame in which the effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawings (background, pattern, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

However, recent game machines are required to execute a wide variety of effects in order to improve the performance of the hardware and enhance the interest of the game machines, and it is necessary to realize complicated effect control. As a result, individual programmers are required to have advanced skills, and development man-hours have increased, making it difficult to secure the necessary number of personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Furthermore, the increase in the total amount of program code of the effect control program increases the number of man-hours required for testing for the purpose of checking the operation of the game machine and improving the quality.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, it is possible to realize the effect executed in cooperation with the liquid crystal drawing (image display) by program code. Instead, the development period is shortened and the quality is improved by outputting the program data for the game machine by a tool for creating the liquid crystal drawing performance and controlling the performance based on the output program data.

Specifically, by allocating images and moving images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in chronological order, a tool capable of creating data for executing the liquid crystal rendering effect is used. In this tool, a single production drawing data (notice, background, pattern, hold, etc.) is defined as one production block, and production blocks are grouped for each state such as fluctuation pattern and big hit to create a production common block. By combining a plurality of common performance blocks, a series of performance drawings such as a variation pattern and a big hit are realized.

However, due to the configuration of the game machine, there are effects such as display or non-display of effects related to the lottery, replacement of effects and patterns, and interactive effects in response to external input by the player. Then, it is impossible to realize all productions.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when creating the effect common block using the above-described tool, a effect switch (effect SW ) can be set (incorporated). The effect SW is a flag on the RAM and is set to ON or OFF. When the effect SW set in the effect data for drawing is set, a callback is always generated regardless of whether the effect SW is "ON" or "OFF". Further, when the effect SW is ON in the callback destination function, predetermined control is performed based on the defined effect SW information corresponding to the effect SW. The effect SW is set to ON by a command issued inside the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510 . The effect SW is set for each display object, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, liquid crystal effect common block, liquid crystal effect block, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

When the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes and analyzes the effect blocks included in the effect common block at the time of liquid crystal drawing, and detects the incorporated effect SW, it dynamically calls the program function based on the detected effect SW (callback do). Then, based on the information processed by the called-back program function, a display list command can be created to realize ON/OFF of the effect display and replacement of the effect. It should be noted that program functions called by callbacks can also execute effects other than liquid crystal effects (eg, sound output, lighting of lamps, movement of characters, etc.). In addition, processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent effect control, such as setting of flags and updating of data in a predetermined area, is also possible. As described above, by calling a program function upon detection of the effect SW, it is possible to display or hide drawings by a plurality of effect blocks, replace effects and patterns, and implement interactive effects in response to external inputs by the player. .

The program functions for turning on/off the liquid crystal effect and replacing the effect called by the callback are preliminarily incorporated in the peripheral control unit 1530 and need not be newly created. Therefore, by setting the presentation SW to call a predefined program function while setting the presentation elements such as images and moving images at the time of designing the presentation, designers and planners who do not have advanced knowledge of programs, Complex performance specifications can be realized. Furthermore, by using the effect creation tool to create effect blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) for each component of the effect, it is possible to significantly shorten the development period. By performing the test using the effect SW without performing the test, it is possible to simplify the test process and greatly reduce the time required for the test.

[20-1. Configuration of production switch]
Next, the configuration of the effect switch (SW) will be described. FIG. 427 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of effect switches in this embodiment. The effect SW is uniquely identified by the effect SW number, and is associated with information necessary for replacing the effect, a program function called by a callback, and the like.

A performance SW number is associated with a performance SW group ID, a performance SW reset group ID, a performance SW attribute, a performance SW activation command address, a performance replacement information table address, and the like.

An effect SW group is a set of effect SW grouped according to the execution mode of the effect, and the effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group, and defines which effect SW group it belongs to. The production SW reset group has the same configuration as the production SW group, and by specifying the production SW reset group ID, the production SW groups belonging to the production SW reset group are set to OFF, and the productions belonging to the production SW group are collectively turned off. Can be hidden. The effect SW reset group ID is an identifier of the effect SW reset group. Since the effect SW group ID and the effect SW reset group ID have a bit configuration, a plurality of effect SW groups can be specified.

FIG. 428 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect SW group of this embodiment. Further, as described above, the effect SW includes active and passive effects, and the effect SW group is composed of one or a plurality of active effect SWs and passive effect SWs. Specifically, the head group number of active effect SW belonging to the effect SW group and the number of active effect SW, and the head group number of passive effect SW and the number of passive effect SW are included.

The effect SW attribute is information indicating the attribute of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal effect SW all reset information, replacement information, special control information, passive/active information, and the like. The liquid crystal effect SW all reset information is information specifying whether or not to set OFF the effect SW belonging to the specified effect group at the time of evaluation of the effect SW. The replacement information is information that designates whether or not to call a callback function for replacement of effects when the effect SW is evaluated. The special control information (special control behavior) is information specifying whether or not to call a predetermined callback function when the effect SW is evaluated. The passive/active information indicates the evaluation method of the effect SW. The passive effect statically evaluates the effect SW, and the active effect dynamically evaluates the effect SW.

The effect SW activation command address is the address of the effect SW activation command table. The effect SW activation command is a command sequence for setting the effect SW to ON, and commands for setting the effect SW to ON are defined in the effect SW activation command table. FIG. 429 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW activation command table of this embodiment. FIG. 429 illustrates an effect SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_en_ykk_b051_crs_charge_suc” and an effect SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_act_b056_cmc_su3_out_red”. Each table is composed of the number of commands and data for the number of commands for determination.

[20-2. Control by production switch in step-up notice production]
Next, the effect control using the effect switch will be described by taking the step-up notice effect as an example. FIG. 430 is a diagram showing an example of a step-up notice in the present embodiment, (A) showing the stage in which the step-up notice effect is executed, and (B) a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device at each stage. shows an example of

As shown in FIG. 430(A), the step-up notice of this embodiment can be executed up to four stages, and at the end of the step-up notice of each stage, the development effect to the next stage is executed. . When the step-up notice develops, the step-up notice performance of the next stage is continuously executed, and when it does not develop, the step-up notice ends as it is.

Here, variations of the step-up notice effect at each stage will be described. In step-up notice 1, which is the first stage after the start of the step-up notice effect, an effect in which the display screen is painted with ink is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested by the color of the ink and the pattern of the filling. For example, when the color of ink is black, the degree of expectation is low, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of white, red, and rainbow. As for the pattern of filling, the degree of expectation increases as the number of positions where filling is started increases, and the degree of expectation may change depending on the position itself where filling is started. For example, if the filling starts only from the bottom left, the expectation is low. Expectations increase in order, and are highest when filling starts from the four corners.

Also, as described above, at the end of the step-up notice of each stage, the development effect to the step-up notice of the next stage is executed. The development effect is executed in a common manner halfway through in order to increase the player's sense of expectation regardless of whether or not the game actually progresses to the next stage. To explain the case of the step-up notice 1, first, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with a combination of black color and filling pattern determined by lottery. After that, when the screen is completely painted over, the ink gradually fades (becomes lighter), and the characters to be displayed in step-up notice 2 emerge. When the step-up notice 2 develops, the ink is removed as it is and the character display becomes darker, and the effect is continued. On the other hand, if the development effect fails, the characters are not darkened and the ink is removed and the characters are not displayed.

In the step-up notice 2, characters corresponding to expectations are displayed. Expectations are higher in the order of "Change", "Osu", "Kai", "Continuation", and "One-hit Kill". In the step-up notice 2 presentation mode, first, in the state where the characters are displayed, the screen is filled while enlarging the region to be filled with the combination of the ink color and the filling variation in the step-up notice 1.例文帳に追加After that, when the screen is completely painted over with black, the step-up notice 3 is entered. On the other hand, if the development stage fails, the ink will gradually peel off before the screen is completely painted with the ink, and finally the ink will completely peel off and the displayed characters will disappear. I will put it away.

In the step-up notice 3, the liquid crystal display screen is in a state where it is filled with black by the step-up notice 2, and an effect is executed in which the black gradually disappears from this state. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the pattern in which the ink is peeled off. For example, if the ink comes off only from the bottom left, the expectation is low. The degree of expectation increases in the order of the number of cases, and the degree of expectation is highest when the ink is peeled off from the four corners. Characters are displayed in the process of removing the ink, and when the characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink is removed, the development effect is successful, and the step-up notice 4 is entered. On the other hand, if the character is not displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink has been removed, the development effect has failed.

The step-up notice 4 is the final stage of the step-up notice, and the degree of expectation is suggested by the content (pattern) and color of characters displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. For example, the character patterns have the highest expectations in the order of "game", "opportunity", "development", "enthusiastic fight", "heat", and "happiness". In terms of character colors, expectations are high in the order of black, white, red, and rainbow. In the effect mode of step-up notice 4, an animation or the like in which the displayed characters are enlarged is executed.

Next, a procedure for executing the above-described step-up notice by means of the effect SW will be described. Figures 431 to 433 are diagrams for explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in this embodiment. FIG. 431 is a diagram showing the correspondence between all the effect contents and the effect SW in step-up notice 1. FIG. FIG. 432(A) shows step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and drawing image for executing step-up notice 1 that fills the screen with black ink from four directions, and (B) shows red ink from the upper right and lower left of the screen. 10 shows the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the drawing image for executing the step-up notice 1 filled with . FIG. 433 is a diagram showing the relationship between the effect SW for replacing the effect related to step-up notice 1 and the effect.

FIG. 431 shows all the effects produced in step-up notice 1, each drawing (lower left black drawing, upper left black drawing, lower right black drawing, upper right black drawing, character failure, character success). The name of the effect SW and the content of the effect are described in association with each category. The total number of step-up effects shown in the figure is a total of 16 effects with 4 effects each for the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right drawing categories, and a total of 10 effects with 5 effects each for the character failure and character success drawing categories, for a total of 26 effects. It has become. In addition, there is always one effect that can be executed at the same time in each drawing division, and only one of the drawing divisions "character failure" and "character success" is executed, so the maximum effect that is executed at the same time in step-up notice 1 There are 5 renderings in total: drawing section "lower left", drawing section "upper left", drawing section "lower right", drawing section "upper right" and drawing section "character failure" or drawing section "character success".

Also, the effect determination method for each drawing division will be specifically described in accordance with the advance notice lottery result value of the step-up advance notice 1. FIG. First, lottery for step-up notice 1 is conducted to determine the contents of the effect related to black drawing. Specifically, the effect content related to the ink drawing is the selection of the position where the ink appears from the drawing division “lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right”, and the color of the ink that appears from the selected ink appearance position. Become. In addition, it becomes either the rendering division "character failure" or the rendering division "character success" and the contents of the characters displayed at this time.

Next, the configuration of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the step-up notice 1 drawing image when the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without any control will be described with reference to FIG. 432(A). . As described above, the total number of effects for step-up notice 1 is 26 in total. is defined. When the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without any control, that is, when all the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed at the same time, as shown in the drawing image of the step-up notice 1 , black ink spreads from the bottom left, top left, bottom right, and top right of the screen at the same time, and the characters "change" are faintly displayed in the drawing classification "character failure" and the drawing classification "character success", and then the drawing classification "character The characters "change" are erased in "failure", and at the same time the characters "change" are clearly displayed in the drawing section "character success".

Further, in FIG. 432(B), according to the lottery result of step-up notice 1, the drawing section “lower left” is “red”, the drawing section “upper left” is “none”, the drawing section “lower right” is “none”, and the drawing section “lower right” is “none”. A command is issued in which the division "upper right" is "red", the drawing division "character failure" is "strike", and the drawing division "character success" is "none". As a result, the drawing image spreads red ink from the drawing section "lower left", and red ink spreads from the drawing section "upper right", and the drawing section "character failure" and the characters "kiai" are displayed lightly. , the character "Kaiai" is erased in the drawing category "character failure".

At this time, the effect SW corresponding to the corresponding effect is set to ON according to the content of each issued lottery command. Specifically, "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to ON when the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing division "lower left" is set to "red", and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing division "upper right" is set to "red". Accordingly, "LEDSW_RIGUP_S1_RED" is set to ON, and "LEDSW_MOJI_NGS1_KIA" is set to ON for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing classification "character failure is spirit". On the other hand, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing classification “upper left” is “none”, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing classification “lower right” is “none”, and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing classification “character success” is “none”. ' command does not produce an effect, so none of the effect SWs are set to ON and are set to OFF.

As a result, red ink spreads from the drawing section "lower left" from the entire production of step-up notice 1, and red ink spreads from the drawing section "upper right", and the drawing section "character failure" and "spirit" It is realized that the effect SW corresponding to the case of displaying characters is set to ON corresponding to the command based on the lottery result of step-up notice 1. - 特許庁

Subsequently, referring to FIG. 433, using the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data of FIG. A mechanism for effect replacement will be explained.

FIG. 433 is a diagram for explaining the master data defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each drawing section in this embodiment, and the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data to be replaced with the master data. Specifically, referring to the lower left black effect replacement group in FIG. 433, the effect SW corresponding to the master data of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is the index number on the CGROM of the moving picture where black ink spreads from the lower left. and corresponding effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK". On the other hand, the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data corresponds to the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image where white ink spreads from the lower left, and the index number on the CGROM of the moving image where red ink spreads from the lower left. effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED", and effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_REI" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the animation in which rainbow ink spreads from the lower left. The replacement data is not defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data, but is separately defined in the lower left black effect replacement table. Also, the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image where black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data is defined in both the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left black effect replacement table.

The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 analyzes and executes the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the process of creating a display list command for drawing the effect, and executes the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Triggered by (detected) the present effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK", a callback is generated, and control is transferred from the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 to the program function for effect replacement.

The replacement program function called by the callback refers to the lower left black effect replacement table, determines all the effect SWs registered in the lower left black effect replacement table, and identifies the effect SW set to ON. do. In this embodiment, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing classification "lower left" is "red", and the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to ON, so "from the lower left" corresponding to the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" The moving picture number on the CGROM of "red ink" is specified.

The program function for replacement called by the callback passes the specified moving picture number on the CGROM in red ink from the lower left to the liquid crystal presentation 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and ends the execution. When the control returns to the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 again, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 executes a CGROM corresponding to the moving image in which black ink appears from the lower left corner defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Instead of creating a display list command using the above animation number, a display list command is generated using the animation number on the CGROM corresponding to the animation in which red ink appears from the lower left handed over from the replacement program function. create.

The feature of the replacement of effects by callback in this embodiment is that from a low-level control structure (in this embodiment, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, a data structure that is easy to change and suitable for tooling) to a high-level control structure (this embodiment By calling a callback program function for replacement, a program function that is unsuitable for change but can execute complicated processing), it is possible to separate detection of replacement timing and replacement control, making it simple Complicated processing is realized by using liquid crystal effect scheduler data, which is a data structure.

Further, in this embodiment, regardless of the identifier for callback (the ON/OFF set value of the effect SW in this embodiment), the process is always executed by the callback. Instead of executing the same control as the effect control of the present embodiment by callback, a structure for performing complicated control is incorporated into the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side, and the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit side has a complicated liquid crystal effect scheduler. If the performance control is realized by analyzing and executing the data, the complexity of the program code processed by the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit increases, and furthermore, when adding new functions or changing functions, be sure to It is necessary to change the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. In this case, it is necessary to change both the program code and the data, and not only can problems occur due to the change in control, but also functions that were operating normally before the change can be affected, causing new problems. There is a risk of

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, regardless of the callback identifier (ON/OFF set value of the effect SW), the callback always executes the process, and the multiple functions executed by the callback are executed. In the callback function of , determine whether it can be executed and the content of processing. By creating a corresponding callback function to realize a single function, even if a new function is added or a function is changed, there is no need to change the liquid crystal display scheduler data structure, and the call corresponding to the new function It can be achieved by creating a callback function or modifying an existing callback function. Therefore, the range of influence of the change or addition of functions is limited to the callback function to be newly added or changed, and the possibility of affecting other callback functions and causing malfunctions is reduced. In addition, compared to the case where the execution analysis of the liquid crystal display scheduler data is centrally executed with a single large program, the method of performing the execution analysis by multiple callback functions and the liquid crystal display scheduler data for realizing each function. However, the structure and composition of the program can be simplified more.

In the present embodiment, the explanation was focused on replacement of effects, but the mechanism of control by callback in this embodiment is not limited to replacement of effects, but also replacement of patterns, control of display or non-display of effects, and control of drawing targets. It can also be applied to conversion of drawing data, execution of scheduler data of other effect display devices, and conversion of scheduler data.

Here, the purpose of defining the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data to both the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left black effect replacement table. explain. If the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW is not defined in the effect replacement table, the relationship between the master and the replacement target, that is, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW must be determined by the liquid crystal effect scheduler. It exists only on the data, and the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the replacement effect SW corresponding to the master exists only in the effect replacement table. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, several thousands of effect replacement tables and effect SW are defined. In a situation where game specifications are frequently changed or added between the planning and development of a game machine and its introduction into the market, the consistency between the index numbers of moving images (images) on the CGROM and the effect SW. is extremely difficult to maintain.

As for the relationship between the index number on the CGROM and the effect SW, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW may be erroneously defined in the effect replacement table. It is possible that the above index number is mistakenly registered in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. In this case, a difference occurs in the number of data of the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the command value of the performance lottery and the performance SW on the replacement table, and the replacement is performed with a performance different from the performance selected by the performance lottery. . Since the degree of expectation is set for each effect, it is possible that an effect dedicated to the big win, which does not appear due to fluctuations in failure, will appear, which is a fatal defect for the game machine. As in this embodiment, by defining the effect replacement table including the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW, it is possible to confirm consistency by comparing the total number of effects and the replacement table. Become. In addition, in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, any data in the replacement table can be defined without problems, so it is a control method that is extremely unlikely to cause problems. In this embodiment, even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is drawn as a result of the effect lottery, the index number on the CGROM of the master on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used and is always replaced. Using the index number on the CGROM of the master defined in the table, a display list command is created and an effect is drawn.

In the step-up announcement 3, as described above, ink is gradually erased from part or all of the vertices of the display area from the painted-out state, and characters emerge when the development effect is successful. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the ink is completely erased without displaying the characters, and the step-up notice ends as it is. In either case of success or failure, since the effect of gradually erasing the ink from the vertex of the display area is executed, there are effect SW flags for four types of drawing patterns for gradually erasing the ink from each vertex. (Layer) is defined. Also, two types of effect SW flags (layers) corresponding to the result of the development effect are defined.

The upper left black replacement group, lower right black replacement group, upper right black replacement group, character failure effect replacement group, and character success effect replacement group other than the lower left black replacement group shown in FIG. 433 have the same configuration and control method as the lower left black replacement group. is.

In the step-up notice 4, since the step-up notice is not continuously executed thereafter, a production SW flag (layer) may be defined according to the aspect of the displayed character animation, or one type of production SW flag (layer) may be defined. Layer) only, and the type of character animation may be set with a parameter.

As described above, in the present embodiment, different types of effects are produced by individually defining the drawing effect pattern for each character content or the appearance position of black, and setting ON the effect SW flag corresponding to the effect to be executed. can be executed or combined renditions can be executed. Since the switching and combination of effects can be done by simply switching the settings of the effect SW flags individually, there is no need for technology such as creating a new program. Production of various variations can be realized. For example, in the step-up notice 1, it is possible to realize dozens of drawing patterns simply by combining four types of drawing patterns according to the appearance position of black and two types of display patterns as a result of development effects. As a result, the types of programs to be developed are minimized, the development efficiency of the performance control program for the game machine is improved, and the inspection of the developed performance control program can be made efficient, thereby improving the quality. can be done.

[20-3. Overview of Control Based on Production Switch]
Next, an outline of control based on the production switch will be described. FIG. 434 is a diagram for explaining the control procedure by the effect switch of this embodiment, and particularly shows the evaluation procedure for setting the effect SW to ON. In this embodiment, first, when the main command (main control command) that triggers the start of production from the main control board 1310 is received, the peripheral control internal issued to the configuration in the peripheral control board 1510 by the peripheral control unit 1530 Issue commands are generated. The peripheral control internal issue command is a command for executing the advance notice lottery or executing the effect by the peripheral control unit 1530 .

The effect SW command analysis module of the peripheral control board 1510 evaluates the analyzed main control command and the received sub-internal issue command, and sets the corresponding effect SW to ON. Specifically, it is compared with the effect SW determination data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and it is determined whether data matching the received command is registered. It is determined whether or not data matching the received command is registered in the command string of the effect SW determination data, and if the matching data exists, peripheral control is performed based on the effect SW number corresponding to the command string. The effect SW flag stored in the RAM 1530c is set to ON.

The effect SW determination data is composed of two kinds of information, and the first information is a effect SW determination command sequence for turning ON the effect SW. The effect SW determination command string is not fixed length, and it is possible to combine multiple command values, a main control command value and a sub-internal command value, or a combination of a peripheral control internal issued command value and a peripheral control internal command value. . For example, a variation start designation command value and a probability state designation command value transmitted from the main control board 1310 are defined side by side, or a background designation command of the peripheral control internally issued command value and a command value of the lottery result of the mini character notice are defined side by side. It is possible.

By defining multiple commands side by side, for example, if the same mini character notice has different mini characters displayed in different backgrounds, the background command value is determined, and after the background is specified, the mini character command value is determined. For the first time, it will be possible to specify the mini character's production corresponding to the background, but it will be necessary to make multiple judgments for the number of commands. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by defining the command value of the background designation command and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character notice side by side, the effect SW corresponding to the command value can be the mini character corresponding to the background. There is no need to make judgments multiple times, and the corresponding effects can be specified in the same manner as the effects defined by a single command, even for effects defined by a combination of multiple commands. Moreover, since it is possible to define a plurality of effect SWs for the same command value, a plurality of effect SWs can be activated simultaneously with a single command value.

The second information of the effect SW determination data is the effect SW number and the index number of the effect SW flag array. The effect SW determination data is registered with respect to all the effect SW by combining the effect SW determination command value and the effect SW number.

From the above, as shown in FIG. 434, when the command “0x103001” is received, “LCDSW_LEFDW_S1” of the effect SW number 100 is registered in the effect SW determination data, so the effect SW flag stored in the RAM Set lcdsw_flg[LCDSW_LEFDW_S1] to ON.

As described above, by setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the command, as shown in FIGS. 431 to 433, predetermined processing is called when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for executing the corresponding advance notice effect is executed. be

A function for executing an effect based on the effect SW is defined in the effect SW command analysis module. Examples of these functions are described below. FIG. 435 is a diagram illustrating an example of functions defined in the effect SW command analysis module of this embodiment. Each function takes an effect SW number (LEDSW number) as an argument.

LEDSW_TST is a function that determines whether or not the effect SW number is ON from a regular program or a called-back program. LEDSW_SET is a function for turning on the effect SW from a regular program or a called-back program instead of activation of the effect SW by a command.

LEDSW_OFF is a function for turning off the effect SW from a regular program or a called-back program. In addition, if the attribute of the effect SW defines the attribute of "reset all", based on the "reset target effect SW group ID" of the "effect SW information table" corresponding to the effect SW number, reset target effect SW All effect SWs belonging to the group are set to OFF.

LEDSW_GET is a function for acquiring attribute information of a target effect SW from a regular program or a called-back program. LCDSW_ATIMER is a function that acquires the frame time from when the active effect SW is activated from the regular program or the called-back program.

[20-4. Implementation example of production switch]
Next, an implementation example of control using the production switch will be described. Figures 436 to 441 are diagrams showing part of program code for executing control using effect switches in this embodiment. The program code shown in each drawing is written in C language.

As described above, the effect SW is set for each display object, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Since the effect SW is set for all the effect blocks, the process based on the effect SW is always called back when the effect block is executed. To execute a callback even when there is no need to execute a specific process, and to terminate the callback function after determining not to perform the specific process within the callback function.

FIG. 436 is a diagram for explaining the details of the configuration of the effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of program code defining the effect SW information table, and (B) is bit assignment of effect SW control information. , (C) is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW group.

The effect SW information table is configured based on the effect SW information table management structure shown in (A), and includes effect SW group ID, effect SW group ID to be reset, effect SW control information (effect SW attribute), effect SW. Includes command information address and effect replacement information table information.

The effect SW group ID is identification information of the effect SW group to which the corresponding effect SW belongs. The effect SW group is grouped according to functions, such as effect SW for performing the same (similar) advance notice effect, effect SW for pending display, effect SW for notification, and the like. ing. The effect SW group ID is represented by bits, and one effect SW can belong to a plurality of effect SW groups.

The reset target effect SW group ID is identification information for designating the effect SW group whose effect SW is set to OFF when "all effect SW reset" is specified in "attrib bit assignment" described later. This makes it possible to collectively designate the effect SWs whose processing is interrupted (reset) at the time of switching the effect SWs. Like the effect SW group ID, the reset target effect SW group ID is represented by bits, and it is possible to designate a plurality of groups.

The effect SW control information is information that defines the functions of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal effect SW all reset information, replacement information, special control information, and passive/active information. The effect SW control information is composed of 16 bits, and each bit defines the function of the effect SW. The bits corresponding to the functions of the effect SW are as shown in FIG. 436(B), and the contents will be explained below.

The passive (PASSIVE)/active (ACTIVE) information indicates the evaluation method of the effect SW, and when the bit is "0", it is "PASSIVE", and when it is "1", it is "ACTIVE". In the passive mode, even if a command for activating the effect SW is received multiple times during the period in which the effect SW is defined, the drawing effect corresponding to the effect SW is performed only once, and in the active mode, the effect is produced during the period in which the effect SW is defined. When the command for starting the SW is received a plurality of times, the corresponding performance is re-executed for the number of commands received. Active is used, for example, when a drawing effect corresponding to the button presses is displayed when the button is pressed multiple times within the button valid period.

The special control information (special control behavior) is information specifying whether or not to call a predetermined callback function when the effect SW is evaluated. If the bit is set to "1", the user callback function is called instead of the system callback function.

The replacement information is information for calling a callback function for replacement of effects when the effect SW is evaluated. If the bit is set to “1”, the pre-defined callback function for replacement is called when the effect SW defined for each display object, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is evaluated. be

The liquid crystal effect SW all reset information is information specifying whether or not to set OFF the effect SW belonging to the specified effect group at the time of evaluation of the effect SW. When the bit is set to "1", the effect SW belonging to all the groups set by the "reset object effect SW group ID" is set to OFF when the effect SW is evaluated.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 436(A). As for the performance SW command information address, defined command information is output when the performance SW is set to ON at the time of performance SW evaluation. The command to be output is stored in the reference destination of the effect SW command information address, and the control of the new effect SW and the effect are executed by the output command.

The effect SW replacement table information is a replacement table in which data to be replaced is defined when "1" is set in the bit of the replacement information of the effect SW control information (when "with replacement" is specified). address is stored. Details of the replacement table will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the effect SW group will be explained. In this embodiment, when setting a plurality of related effects SW, etc., they are managed as a effect group. The production group includes an production SW group ID, an active production SW head ID, an active production SW number, a passive production SW head ID, and a passive production SW number.

The effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group. In the effect SW group, active effect SW and passive effect SW are stored in a continuous area. The active effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW positioned at the head among the active effect SWs belonging to the effect SW group. The active effect SW number is the number of active effect SW arranged from the effect SW corresponding to the active effect SW head ID. The passive effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW positioned at the head among the passive effect SWs belonging to the effect SW group. The passive effect SW number is the number of passive effect SW arranged from the effect SW corresponding to the passive effect SW head ID. As described above, by defining the effect SW group ID as the effect SW group ID to be reset, when "all effect SW reset" is specified in "attrib bit assignment", the continuous switch belonging to the effect SW group ID It is possible to simultaneously turn off a plurality of passive effect SWs and a plurality of continuous active effect SWs.

FIG. 437 is a diagram showing an example of program code defining effect SW numbers corresponding to effect SWs in this embodiment. In the program code shown in FIG. 437, enumeration types (enum) are used to define specific numerical values for the effect SW numbers. In this embodiment, the work area and the effect information table can be referred to by using the effect SW number as an index.

By defining the effect SW numbers in the enumeration type in this way, it is no longer necessary to directly handle numerical values when setting or referring to the effect SW numbers in the program, and the readability of the program can be improved.

Next, the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table will be described. FIG. 438 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table of this embodiment, where (A) shows the effect SW flag and (B) shows the effect SW information table.

The effect SW flag is a flag indicating (ON/OFF) whether or not the process based on the corresponding effect SW is executed on the callback function side. As shown in (A), the effect SW flag is stored in a byte-type array variable, and the index of the array corresponds to the effect SW number. When the effect SW corresponding to the effect SW number is executed, "1" (ON) is set, and when not executed, "0" (OFF) is set.

The effect SW information table is defined by the effect SW information table management structure shown in FIG. It has become. Also, the effect SW information table is stored in an array indexed by the effect SW number, like the effect SW flag, and stores data corresponding to all effect SWs.

Subsequently, the effect SW replacement table information and the effect SW replacement table for effect replacement will be described. The effect SW replacement table information is included in the effect SW information table as shown in FIG. 436(A). FIG. 439 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the effect SW replacement table information and the effect SW replacement table included in the effect SW information table of this embodiment. ) indicates an effect SW replacement table.

FIG. 439(A) is program data showing the structure of effect SW replacement table information "lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1". The effect SW replacement table information stores the address of the effect SW replacement table, effect SW master data, and effect SW replacement data. The address of the effect SW replacement table is the address of the table in which the number of the actual replacement material is stored.

The effect SW master data is effect SW data defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and in the case of "lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1", the black color corresponds to this (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK). The replacement data is information indicating the material to be replaced from the master data. For example, there is a case where the color of black is replaced with white (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI), and the material information is replaced with the corresponding replacement data by evaluating the effect SW.

FIG. 439B is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table "lcdsw_cchanege_lefdw_s1". The effect SW replacement table first defines the number of columns and the number of rows of the material numbers defined in the replacement table. In this embodiment, the number of columns is one and the number of rows is four. After defining the number of columns and rows, information indicating replacement material is stored. In this embodiment, the replacement information has a one-dimensional table structure, but there is no problem with a two-dimensional or three-dimensional table structure.

A specific replacement method first refers to the effect SW replacement table information, and evaluates all of the effect SW effect switch master data and the effect SW replacement data defined in the effect SW replacement table information. At this time, one of the effect SW defined in the effect SW replacement table information is set to ON by a command issued as a result of the effect lottery. Here, it is assumed that the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is set to ON. The same line of the effect SW replacement table is specified by using the number of lines of the effect SW set to ON in the effect SW replacement table information as an index. A material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI) corresponds to a line of effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) in the effect replacement data, and the material number to be replaced is specified. A material number is an index number that identifies a still image or moving image on the CGROM.

[21. layer configuration]
Next, layers for displaying images and videos will be described. Layers allow the general use of display results by dividing the liquid crystal display object into a plurality of regions (layers) and drawing them. For example, by separating the background layers, it is possible to draw in a common method even if the characters to be displayed are changed.

In this embodiment, a table (layer information table) for storing layer information is individually stored and managed so that changes in some layers do not affect other layers. can be done.

FIG. 440 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is a list storing addresses for storing each layer information table, and (B) is a layer information table (background data). for use). The effect SW described above is also defined in the layer information table. A callback function is called with the effect SW as a trigger, and whether or not to execute the corresponding liquid crystal layer table is determined based on the information of the effect SW in the callback function. decide. For example, when the effect SW (LEDSW_BG_RIV) is ON, the river background layer table (direct_layer01_common0002) is executed. Also, FIG. 441 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of this embodiment. The contents of the first half 2) are shown. The layer information tables of the first half of the notice 1 and 2 both determine the layer table to be executed by the effect SW, like the layer information table for the background.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 440(A), layer information tables for background, pattern display, first-half notice, jackpot effect, character action, pending display, etc. are defined.

In addition, FIG. 440(B) shows a layer information table for the background, and in the effect in this embodiment, the sea background, the mountain background, and the river background are defined. medium background, high probability medium background) are also defined. Furthermore, variations such as partial background color change can be added by the effect SW.

FIG. 441(A) shows the layer information table for the first half of the notice, in which the roulette notice, the blackout notice, and the window notice are defined, and a command for clearing the notice is also defined. FIG. 441(B) shows the layer information table for the first half of the notice, in which step-up notice, button mini character notice, and conversation notice are defined. is also defined. The advance notice clear layer table is used to end the advance notice drawing executed in each advance notice layer table defined in each advance notice layer information table. Specifically, the effect SW group ID of the notice layer is defined as the reset target effect SW group ID of the effect SW control information of the effect SW described above, and the "attrib bit assignment" defines "all effect SW reset". Then, when the effect SW (LEDSW_YKK_CLR) is set to ON, all the notice effect SWs belonging to the effect SW group ID defined in the effect SW group ID to be reset are set to OFF, and drawing corresponding to the effect SW is performed. ends and disappears. In addition, the layer table for clearing the advance notice is empty data because there is no effect.

At the end of the area allocated to the list storing the layer table and the table storing the layer information, a record for judging the termination is stored. When the record for judging the termination is detected, it is judged that the data reading is completed. It becomes possible to This makes it possible to dynamically change the amount of data (the number of records) without setting the number of elements for each list or table in advance.

[22. Implementation example of step-up notice]
Next, an implementation example of the advance notice effect using the liquid crystal effect block data (common block) will be described by taking the step-up notice effect as an example.

[22-1. Effect layer table/LCD effect block data]
FIG. 442 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the liquid crystal layer table and the liquid crystal effect common block in this embodiment, (A) is the liquid crystal layer table for the step-up notice effect, and (B) is the liquid crystal effect common block. shows the configuration of

As shown in FIG. 442(A), the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the step-up notice effect has the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks corresponding to the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks. It is defined as a pair with the total number of drawing frames and effect SW. In this embodiment, the total drawing frame number (580) frames, the effect SW "LCDSW_STEPUP", and the common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" are defined. A callback is executed based on the effect SW "LCDSW_STEPUP", and whether or not to execute the common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" is determined in the callback function based on the information of the effect SW "LCDSW_STEPUP".

The liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" is defined in the order of the effect SW, the total number of drawing frames, the loop start frame position, the playback time, and the liquid crystal effect block. As shown in FIG. 442(B), when there are a plurality of liquid crystal rendering blocks, multiple lines are defined in the same format. After step-up notice 4, a terminal is set, and the number of steps can be increased or decreased by adding or deleting liquid crystal effect blocks. For example, when step-up notice 5 is added, data corresponding to step-up notice 5 may be added between step-up notice 4 and the end.

The effect SW, like the effect SW defined in the layer table, controls whether or not to execute the corresponding liquid crystal effect block based on the set value. The total number of rendering frames defines the total number of rendering frames of the liquid crystal rendering block. To explain using step-up notice 1 on the first line, it is defined that the liquid crystal effect block of step-up notice 1 is reproduced for (150) frames. The loop start frame position is a frame position for determining which display data frame to return to after the end of the reproduction of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" on the first line.

The playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1". The relationship between the total playback time, the loop start frame position, and the playback time is that the playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1", so after the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" finishes playing, the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" will be played again. When performing loop reproduction from the beginning or middle of the program, the number of frames to be looped is added to the reproduction time, and the added number of frames is defined as the total reproduction time. Step-up notice 1 "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" LCD effect block playback time is (150) frames, so if you loop the second half 50 frames twice after playing the LCD effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1", it will be played for the total playback time. It can be realized by defining (250) frames of time (150) frames+loop playback time (50×2) frames and defining (100) frames at the loop start frame position. An effect such that the pattern fluctuates without being fixed during the pseudo-continuous effect can be realized by using the loop reproduction function.

Also, the reason why the loop start frame is defined as the frame immediately before the end of the playback even though the total playback time and the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" in this embodiment are the same is due to some kind of problem. If the next production common block is not executed, the drawing is not updated, and in order to prevent the liquid crystal screen from stopping, the drawing is repeated based on the loop start point when the total playback time is exceeded.

In the present embodiment, the control by the liquid crystal presentation common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" in the case of executing the effects from step-up notice 1 to step-up notice 3 is performed after the peripheral control board 1530 executes the notice lottery related to the step-up notice. A peripheral control internal command, a step-up notice 1 command, a step-up notice 2 command, and a step-up notice 3 command related to the notice performance are issued. Subsequently, the step-up 1 effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1", the step-up 2 effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2", and the step-up 3 effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3" are set to ON corresponding to the issued command. On the other hand, the step-up 4 effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4" remains set to OFF because the step-up notice 4 command has not been issued.

After setting the effect SW, a callback is executed based on all the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" to call the callback function. In the called callback function, it is determined whether or not each effect SW is set to ON, and a liquid crystal effect block corresponding to the effect SW set to ON is executed. Since 'LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1', 'LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2' and 'LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3' are set to ON in the liquid crystal presentation common block 'LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP', the liquid crystal presentation blocks 'LCD_YKK_STEP_SU1', 'LCD_YKK_STEP_SU2' and 'LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU3' are executed respectively. On the other hand, since "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4" is set to OFF, "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU4" is not executed. As described above, since it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal effect blocks in the liquid crystal effect common block and control whether or not to execute the liquid crystal effect blocks using the effect SW, it is possible to combine and execute a plurality of notices. , and furthermore, switching between display/non-display of each effect is possible.

Subsequently, the contents of the liquid crystal effect block of each step in the step-up notice will be explained. FIG. 443 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining liquid crystal presentation blocks (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 to 4) for each step of step-up notice.

As for the contents of the liquid crystal effect block, first, the total number of data defined in the liquid crystal effect block is defined. The number of execution frames, the function, or the function used in the liquid crystal effect block that becomes the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is the two types of "LCD_NOP" and "LCD_NULL" and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. "LCD_NOP" is a function that waits for the number of execution frames, and "LCD_NULL" is a function that indicates the end of the liquid crystal presentation block.

Next, the liquid crystal effect block will be described in detail. Referring to the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2", (3) at the top indicates that "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2" consists of 3 lines of data (the number of steps is 3). Since the next line is "LCD_NOP" specifying the number of execution frames (120), it waits for (120) frames from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block. (120) After waiting for the frame, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" is executed for frames corresponding to the number of execution frames (175). After that, "LCD_NULL" in which the number of execution frames (1) is specified is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2" is ended.

As explained in FIG. 430, when the step-up notice of each stage of the step-up notice ends, the wait of "LCD_NOP" is used to realize the execution of the development effect to the step-up notice of the next stage. are doing.

Specifically, the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1" does not wait, and starts executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1". The liquid crystal effect block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" executes the wait by "LCD_NOP", and after waiting for (120) frames, by starting the execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2", the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1" When (120) frames have passed since the start of execution, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" starts execution. As a result, at the end of the step-up notice 1, it is possible to repeatedly execute the development effect to the next step step-up notice 2. - 特許庁

In addition, it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data in chronological order in the liquid crystal effect block. to execute the LCD effect scheduler data in the next line.

After the total number of functions is defined in the effect scheduler data for the step-up notice 2, the function NOP for waiting while the step-up notice effect 1 is being executed, the function LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2 for executing the step-up notice effect 2, Finally the function LCD_NULL is defined which indicates the end of the scheduler data. Step-up notice 3 and step-up notice 4 are similarly described.

[23. Implementation example of button mini character production]
The liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the step-up notice effect has been described above. Next, a description will be given of an effect in which a mini character appears on the liquid crystal display screen by prompting the player to operate the effect button while the pattern is changing and by operating the effect button within a predetermined period.

[23-1. Aspect of button mini character production]
FIG. 444 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the button mini-character effect of this embodiment. The button mini-character effect is performed when a lottery is drawn for execution when a main command is received or when a variation is started, and a prize is won. In the button mini character effect, when the effect button is operated during the button operation input acceptance period, a predetermined character (mini character) is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. In addition, a first half valid period and a second half valid period are set for the button operation input acceptance period, and the mini characters are displayed in different modes.

To explain further, when the execution lottery for the button mini character effect is won and 90 frames (f) elapse from the start of the variation, the first half of the button mini character valid period starts. The effective period of the first half of the button mini-character is 90 frames, and an image (moving image) prompting the pressing of the button is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen when the first half of the effective period of the button mini-character is started. If you press the button during the first half of the button mini character valid period, the mini character will be displayed. Specifically, as will be described later, when the button is operated during the first half of the valid period of the button mini-character, the effect SW for displaying the mini-character is set to ON, and the corresponding liquid crystal effect block is executed by the callback.

If you press the button during the second half of the button mini character's valid period, the mini character will be displayed in the same way as during the first half of the button mini character's valid period. In FIG. 378, the character is displayed in a different manner from when the button is operated during the first half of the effective period of the button mini character. Characters may be displayed in different modes as much as possible.

If the button is operated during the second half of the button mini character validity period, the mini character will be displayed in the same way as during the first half of the button mini character validity period. In FIG. 444, the character is displayed in a different manner from when the button is operated during the first half of the effective period of the button mini character. Characters may be displayed in different modes as much as possible.

[23-2. LCD production common block]
FIG. 445 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining a liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character effect in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 445, the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002" corresponding to the button mini character effect is the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table, and the liquid crystal effect common block corresponding to the number is the total drawing frame of the liquid crystal effect common block. It is defined in pairs with the number and the effect SW. In this embodiment, the total drawing frame number (180) frames, the effect SW "LCDSW_BTN_MINIBEF", and the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" are defined. Subsequently, the total drawing frame number (150) frames, effect SW "LCDSW_BTN_MINIAFT", and liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT" are defined. In the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002", first, the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" is executed for (180) frames. Thereafter, during (150) frames, the liquid crystal presentation common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT" is executed, and execution of the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002" is terminated.

Next, the configuration of each liquid crystal effect common block for the button mini character effect will be described. FIG. 446 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining individual common blocks for button mini character effects in this embodiment.

The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect common blocks "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" and "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT" in FIG. 446 are the same as the effect layer table and liquid crystal effect block data described in FIG. The effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" that call the callback function for determining whether to execute the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" are active effects that define active attributes in the effect SW control information. Become SW. Therefore, the drawing effect (effect block) corresponding to the effect SW is executed as many times as the button is operated.

[23-3. LCD production block data]
FIG. 447 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining liquid crystal effect block data for executing the button mini character effect in this embodiment.

The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINBEF" and "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" shown in FIG. 447 are the same as the liquid crystal effect block data explained in FIG. First, in the first half of the effect, "LCD_NOP" defined at the beginning of the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINBEF" is executed, and it waits for (90) frames from the start of the fluctuation. . Subsequently, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINBEF" corresponding to the button mini character first half effective period is executed for (90) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINBEF" is completed. In the latter half of the effect, "LCD_NOP" defined at the head of the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" corresponding to the button mini-character latter half effective period is executed, and waits for (30) frames from the start of fluctuation. After that, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIAFT" corresponding to the button mini character latter half effective period is executed for (120) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" is finished.

As described above, since the production SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are active production SW, the production SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are set to ON while the liquid crystal production scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINBEF" and "LCD_DIR_MINIAFT" are being executed. When the command to do is issued multiple times, the drawing effects corresponding to the effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are executed for the number of times issued. Also, the effect SW always generates a callback every frame, and the corresponding callback function is called. The control at the time of pressing the button is executed in the called callback function, and the callback is executed for each frame even after the button pressing control is completed until the execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is completed. By creating liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for drawing presentation during the button valid period and controlling it with the active presentation SW, the period during which the callback is executed is set as the button valid period without judging the button valid period separately. becomes possible. For example, by repeatedly hitting a button, the number of repeated hits can be counted, and an effect corresponding to the number of times can be executed. Also, the lamp can be turned on according to the button operation by calling the sub production scheduler data including the function for controlling the lamp within the callback function. Furthermore, by calling sub performance scheduler data including a function for controlling a character, an operation corresponding to the number of button operations is performed, and the scheduler data for returning to the initial position after the expiration of the button operation effective period can be executed. The procedure for returning the character to its initial position is, for example, to wait by "LCD_NOP" until the expiration of the valid period of button operation, and then execute a production block including a function to return the character to its initial position.

[24. Liquid crystal effect scheduler for patterns]
As described above, in the present embodiment, when executing the notice effect, it is possible to replace the drawing contents according to the game state and the degree of expectation of the variable display game to be the notice target. Similarly, it is also possible to replace the identification symbols to be variably displayed in the variable display game when predetermined conditions such as the game state are satisfied. The outline of the procedure for replacing identification symbols will be described below.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the variable display of identification symbols is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle symbols, and reels on which identification symbols are arranged in a predetermined order are assigned to each row. Identification symbols are drawn on each reel in a mode corresponding to the game state, and each reel is defined for each mode. The variable display of identification symbols is realized by sequentially displaying identification symbols drawn on each reel together with a background image.

The display of the identification pattern is updated for each frame, and the effect SW is assigned, as in the previous notice effect. In the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for displaying the identification pattern, the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image for displaying the identification pattern and the effect SW corresponding to the index number on the CGROM are defined as master data. . A reel number is defined in the effect SW for replacement of identification symbols. The reel number represents a unique identification number displayed for each game state or effect. For example, if the identification patterns displayed for the mountain background, the river background, and the sea background are different, the left pattern of the mountain background is R0, the middle pattern is R1, and the right pattern is R2, and the left pattern of the river background is R3, and the middle pattern. is R4, the right design is R5, the left design of the mountain background is R6, the middle design is R7, and the right design is R8. By using the reel number, it is possible to individually correspond to the game state and the effect, and it is also possible to specify the display position of the identification pattern.

Additionally, the reel number includes a reel index number. A reel index number is defined for each reel arrangement number of identification symbols. The reel arrangement is the identification pattern design and the identification pattern when the identification patterns are displayed in order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, and then return to 1 after 0. A reel index is defined by defining the total number and the display order of identification symbols. Multiple reel indexes can also be defined.

The identification symbol replacement table includes an identification symbol replacement table corresponding to a reel number and a reel index number corresponding to the reel number, and a reel replacement work number table for reel replacement. In the identification symbol replacement table, index numbers on the CGROM of still images or moving images corresponding to the reel arrangement are defined for each reel index.

Replacement of identification symbols is carried out using a reel index replacement work number table in addition to the replacement table of identification symbols. In the reel index replacement work number table, one or a plurality of work numbers for reel replacement on the RAM corresponding to each reel index are defined. On the reel replacement work, the temporary stop symbol number value of the identification symbol related to the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the fixed symbol number value of the identification symbol, etc. are displayed when the identification symbol is stopped or can be recognized by the player as if it is stopped. The identification pattern number value is stored in advance at the start of fluctuation by the peripheral control program according to the contents of the performance.

To explain the specification of the data for replacing the identification pattern, when a callback is executed based on the effect SW for replacing the identification pattern, the reel index number corresponding to the reel number is specified in the callback function for replacing the identification pattern. Based on this, the target reel index replacement work number is specified from the reel index replacement work number table. Further, the identification symbol number value stored in the reel index replacement work is taken out, and the reel index replacement work number is corrected based on the number of displayed identification symbols produced in the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data. Similarly, based on the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, the replacement table corresponding to the replacement table of the identification pattern is specified, and the reel in which the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image to be replaced in the specified table is corrected. It is specified using the index replacement work number.

Also, in the replacement of the identification pattern, even if the effect of the master defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected, the index number on the CGROM of the master on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used in the same way as the effect replacement. A display list command is always created using the index number on the CGROM of the master defined in the replacement table, and the effect content is drawn.

Furthermore, by replacing the identification pattern every frame, even if an erroneous identification pattern is displayed due to the occurrence of noise or the like, it is possible to immediately restore the normal display. In addition, by setting the reel according to the game state, even if an error occurs in replacement of the identification symbols, the player can grasp the game state regardless of the contents of the identification symbols. , it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

[25. callback timing]
Next, a description will be given of the timing at which the callback is generated when the effect SW is detected. In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine the drawing division by the parameters passed to the callback function in the callback function.

FIG. 448 is a diagram showing an example of drawing divisions that can be determined within the callback function when the callback is executed by the effect SW of this embodiment.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_A" generates a callback before the start of liquid crystal A drawing, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_A" generates a callback after the liquid crystal A drawing starts. Also, "LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_B" generates a callback before the liquid crystal B drawing starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_B" generates a callback after the liquid crystal B drawing starts. The liquid crystal A and the liquid crystal B are different liquid crystals, and by making it possible to determine the completion of drawing before starting the drawing of each liquid crystal, the completion of drawing of the liquid crystal A triggers drawing on the liquid crystal B, and the drawing of the liquid crystal B ends. , drawing can be performed on the liquid crystal A.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM" causes a callback before all drawing is started, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM" causes a callback after all drawing is completed. By judging before the start of drawing, it is possible to initialize the frame buffer with the necessary background color before drawing, and by judging the end of drawing, it is possible to instruct other rendering devices to execute rendering when rendering is completed. It becomes possible.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM" causes a callback before the drawing of the corresponding layer is started, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM" causes the callback after the drawing of the corresponding layer is completed. Predetermined processing can be performed before or after the drawing of a particular layer is started. For example, if a plurality of notifications occur at the time of drawing the notification layer by making a determination before starting layer drawing, it is possible to enlarge and draw the display of the notification with the highest priority. In addition, by performing the determination after the start of layer drawing, by drawing the effect around the pattern drawn in accordance with the timing when the pattern with high expectation stops before the start of drawing the pattern layer, the pattern with high expectation It is possible to display the effect around the symbol only when the is stopped.

As described above, it is possible to specify a drawing section and execute a predetermined process before or after drawing is started. It is also possible to generate a callback for each common block. As shown in FIG. 448, "LCD_EFF_BEF_COMBLK" can generate a callback before starting common block drawing, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_COMBLK" can generate a callback after common block drawing is completed. Execution of a specific liquid crystal effect block corresponding to a single effect constituting the liquid crystal effect common block is stopped by making a determination before the common block drawing is started, and the liquid crystal effect common block is not drawn. By performing the determination after drawing, it becomes possible to execute a liquid crystal presentation common block different from the liquid crystal presentation common block scheduled to be executed which was determined in advance at the start of the variation.

In addition, "LCD_EFF_BEF_DIR" generates a callback before the liquid crystal effect block drawing in the liquid crystal effect common block starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_DIR" generates a callback after the liquid crystal effect block drawing is completed. By making a determination before starting drawing of the liquid crystal effect block, it is possible to change the liquid crystal effect block to be executed according to the result of an external input by the player. Further, by making determination after the start of drawing of the liquid crystal presentation block, it is possible to add new drawing to the content drawn in the liquid crystal presentation block based on the drawing content of the liquid crystal presentation block that draws a single presentation. Furthermore, 'LCD_EFF_BEF_CAST' can generate a callback before the start of drawing still and moving images in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and 'LCD_EFF_AFT_CAST' can generate a callback after the completion of drawing the still and moving images. Various effects can be replaced by judging before the start of rendering of still images and moving images. Further, by performing the determination after the drawing of the still image or the moving image is completed, it is possible to add the drawing of the effects according to the contents of replacement of various effects.

As described above, since the control that can be realized differs depending on the drawing section, it is very important to determine the drawing section within various callback functions.

[26. Production switch group management]
As described so far, in this embodiment, multiple procedures (functions) are managed by liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each liquid crystal effect block, and images and videos are drawn for each layer based on the state of the gaming machine and the classification of effects. be done. Also, as described above, one or a plurality of effect SWs are set for each layer.

When the effect is executed, images and the like are drawn in a plurality of layers in parallel, and a plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed in parallel. For example, in the step-up announcement effect, when the step-up announcement 1 is executed, the background layer background is drawn, and the identification pattern is drawn in the pattern layer. Further, the step-up announcement 1 is drawn on the announcement layer (notice_first half 1 layer). FIG. 449 is a diagram showing an example of drawing results of individual layers and drawing results of all layers when the advance notice effect of this embodiment is executed.

At this time, one or a plurality of effect SWs are set for each layer, but if it is attempted to manage these effect SWs individually, the processing may become complicated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect SW is grouped and managed for each layer, state of the game machine, and effect classification.

For example, the effect SW assigned to each layer is grouped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 449, the effect SW group background, the effect SW group pattern, and the effect SW group notice are configured corresponding to the background layer, the pattern layer, and the notice layer. These effect SW groups may be further grouped and managed, and the effect SW may be managed for each state of the game machine and each effect category.

By grouping and managing the effect SW in this manner, individual effect elements can be collectively controlled. For example, if you want to change the background currently displayed and the pattern display and pending display that match the background to a different background when starting a new fluctuation, the background layer, pattern layer, and pending layer are divided according to the background. The effect SWs are grouped, and the effect SWs belonging to the group are collectively set to OFF within a callback function using a callback. As a result, it is possible to hide the pattern display and reserved display that match the current background together with the background, and by performing the pattern display and reserved display that match the new background in the corresponding layer, multiple It is possible to switch the drawing of only the required effect display among the plurality of effect displays superimposed and displayed in layers.

In addition, in the production that spans the game state, for example, in the big hit production after the start of the fluctuation and the end of the fluctuation, the pattern is hidden and the background is changed to the big hit production. It is also possible to display continuously. In such control, the effect group to be hidden is defined as the reset target effect SW group ID, and the effect SW specified to reset all the effect SW is changed to the liquid crystal effect common block at the time of starting the fluctuation. It can be realized by defining it in the liquid crystal presentation common block at the start of the jackpot presentation.

[27. exception common block]
In the present embodiment described so far, all effects are managed as common blocks in units of blocks of a certain length for the purpose of increasing the efficiency of control of complicated game effects in order to increase the interest of the players. As a result, by selecting a production block according to the fluctuation pattern and the result of the advance notice lottery, and drawing based on the selected production block, a series of productions such as a variable display of patterns and a big hit can be realized, and complex control can be achieved. Control was realized to synchronize sub-effects such as accessories, lamps, and sound output with the drawing content. The common block is set with a period separated by a predetermined timing from the start of pattern fluctuation to the finalization of the pattern, and these periods correspond to, for example, the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation, and are assigned to the fluctuation pattern. It was set according to the fluctuation time of the pattern.

By configuring in this way, it has become possible to use a common block for general purposes with a plurality of types of variation patterns. Furthermore, by securing the independence of the advance notice effect executed in the first half variation and the notice effect executed in the second half variation, the degree of freedom in combining common blocks can be increased.

However, since the common blocks are separated by a predetermined period as described above, it is difficult to realize an effect that continues from the start of the variation to the end of the variation only by combining effect blocks of a certain length. When executing such effects over multiple periods, the preceding common block and the succeeding common block are associated with each other, and versatility is reduced. In addition, each common block is executed independently. Therefore, there is a possibility that the control becomes complicated in order to maintain the continuity of the presentation. Therefore, in order to realize such effects, it was necessary to create individual program codes for control instead of setting program data.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in this embodiment, not only are performance blocks of a certain length combined in all performances to perform a series of performances such as variable display of symbols and a series of performances of big hits, but also the length of the performance blocks is exceptionally configured to allow a performance block length that matches the performance period instead of a fixed length. Furthermore, by making it possible to draw a combination of performance blocks with different performance times, and to simultaneously draw a performance block straddling the combined performance blocks, a continuous drawing performance is realized from the start of variation to the end of variation.

The effect spanning a plurality of periods includes, for example, a countdown effect in which numbers are counted down when the pattern starts to fluctuate, and the countdown display continues from the first half fluctuation to the second half fluctuation. FIG. 450 is a diagram illustrating an example of a common block that spans a plurality of periods according to this embodiment. (A) is the execution timing of symbol display and notice effect, (B) is a liquid crystal notice effect block by a common block, and 4 shows the configuration of a liquid crystal preview effect block with common blocks spanning multiple periods.

In the example shown in FIG. 450, the first half fluctuation is "normal fluctuation 12 seconds" and the second half fluctuation is "normal short reach" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "10H03H". As shown in FIG. 450(A), step-up notice and BTN logo character object drop notice are executed in the first half change, and cut-in notice and group notice are executed in the second half change. The content of each notice effect is as described above. Also, a countdown notice is executed from the start of the step-up notice to the end of the group notice.

In FIG. 450 (B), the liquid crystal effect block data of the notice effect (step-up notice, BTN logo character drop notice, cut-in notice and group notice) using the common block, and the group notice from the start of the step-up notice It shows the configuration of the effect block of the countdown notice to be executed during the period until the end. Each block data corresponding to the common block is as described above.

The effect block of the countdown notice is composed of a function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data starts, a function NOP that waits until the latter half fluctuation ends after the end of the liquid crystal effect notice block data and the liquid crystal effect notice block data. . The function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data starts is a NOP that is executed before the step-up notice is started, and the function NOP that waits until the second half fluctuation is completed is a NOP that is executed after the group notice is finished. The same wait time is set.

As described above, by making it possible to set an exception to the execution period of the effect block, it becomes possible to operate the common block more flexibly. Also, by setting the waiting time before and after the start of the effect, it is possible to minimize the influence of deviation of the execution timing of other effect blocks due to the exception setting. The exception common block is also controlled by a callback function using the effect SW in the same manner as other common blocks.

[28. Image conversion]
Drawing data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is extracted from the frame buffer and stored separately from the frame buffer in the storage area for capture of the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game and shortening the processing time related to drawing. , the image was reused, and processing such as deformation and additional drawing was performed. In this way, drawing data is temporarily stored in another area and used for drawing in the next frame, thereby efficiently realizing various rendering expressions.

FIG. 451 is a diagram illustrating a conventional configuration for writing an image in a frame buffer by writing an image written in each layer. As shown in FIG. 451, conventionally, images drawn on each layer are superimposed and written in a frame buffer, and then output to a display device.

Specifically, first, moving images and still images displayed on the background layer are written to the frame buffer using the display list command. Next, a moving image or still image displayed on the pattern layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using a display list command. Furthermore, the video and still images displayed in the preview layer are overwritten on the frame buffer using the display list command. Finally, a display list command is used to overwrite moving images and still images related to the reserved layer on the frame buffer to create drawing data for one frame.

After that, the peripheral control board 1530 copies the drawing data for one frame to be displayed created in the frame buffer to a capture buffer separately allocated to the RAM of the VDP 1540a with built-in tone generator. After newly adding an effect around the pattern to the drawing data stored in the buffer for capture, the data is written back to the frame buffer to create one frame of drawing data for the next display.

By doing so, the drawing data to be displayed in the next frame can be easily created simply by adding an effect to the created drawing data. However, in image conversion according to such a conventional technique, only image conversion for one frame of drawing data can be realized. It is limited to enlargement and reduction of the entire liquid crystal drawing screen. It is impossible to perform image conversion on the drawing elements drawn on each layer on the buffer for capture or on each drawing element within the layer.

The reason why image conversion cannot be performed for each drawing element is that the drawing elements in each effect, such as backgrounds, patterns, notices, etc., are overwritten on the frame buffer in the order of layers. It will be overwritten by the drawing elements of the layer drawn from . Also, since the drawing element is a collection of colored dots (points) when it is drawn on the frame buffer, even if you try to extract the drawing element with a rectangle, it will be overwritten with another drawing element. , the data of the drawing elements of the overwritten part is lost.

Nowadays, with the improved processing power of VDP, there is little need to reuse image data for one screen of a liquid crystal display that has already been drawn. Therefore, an increase in load was expected in order to execute complicated drawing processing.

In this embodiment, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and perform more diverse effects, image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display in the frame buffer that has already been created is captured, and the captured image is transformed and new drawing is performed. Instead of adding , when drawing new image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display, for each effect display unit that makes up the image data for one liquid crystal display screen, dynamically change the image during drawing Complicated performance expression is realized by adding new drawing.

Specifically, a single effect drawing data (announcement, background, pattern, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and the effect SW is stored in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for displaying by the effect block in units of effect blocks. incorporate. Then, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed and analyzed during liquid crystal drawing, and processing (program function) is dynamically called (callback) based on the information of the effect SW incorporated in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

When changing the image, instead of drawing the effect block corresponding to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the program function called back on the frame buffer, it is allocated on the RAM of the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source separately from the frame buffer. Drawing is performed on an off-screen buffer (temporary storage means for image display information). After changing the image or adding a new image to the image on the off-screen buffer, the image is written back to the frame buffer. By configuring in this way, in addition to changing the image of only a specific notice, adding a new image, and replacing the effect of only the background, changing the image of the image in which multiple effects are superimposed, and creating a new image. Additions can be realized.

Hereinafter, a configuration for storing an image drawn on each layer in an off-screen buffer, converting the image stored in the off-screen buffer, and writing the image to a frame buffer will be described in detail. FIG. 452 is a diagram for explaining the procedure for converting an image file stored in the off-screen buffer and then writing it to the frame buffer in this embodiment.

As described above, one or a plurality of image conversion buffers called off-screen buffers, which are different from frame buffers, are allocated to the RAM of the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. Then, image conversion is performed in the image conversion buffer, and complex image conversion is made possible by combining the image converted on one or more off-screen buffers and the image drawn on the frame buffer.

To explain further, the effect SW is embedded in the liquid crystal effect block data constituting each layer corresponding to the effect and in each liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data. A callback function is called by a callback based on the provided effect SW, and image conversion is performed in the callback function.

In FIG. 452, first, before starting the drawing of the background layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A within the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element of the background layer, a display list command for enlarging each effect element of the background layer is created and sent to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. , each enlarged background is drawn on the off-screen buffer A.

Subsequently, before starting the drawing of the pattern layer, the drawing object is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A and drawn in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element of the pattern layer, an effect is added to the pattern drawn on the background drawn on the off-screen buffer A within the function called back based on the effect SW. Create a display list command. By transmitting this display list command, an effect can be added to the background and pattern drawn on the off-screen buffer A, and the image drawn on the off-screen buffer A is overwritten on the frame buffer.

Subsequently, before starting the drawing of the preview layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer B in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the timing when the drawing of all effect elements related to the notice layer is completed, a display list command to rotate the notice drawing of each effect element of the notice layer is executed in the function called back based on the effect SW. create. By sending this display list command, each rotated preview is drawn in the off-screen buffer B, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer B is overwritten in the frame buffer.

Finally, write all the rendering elements of the reserved layer to the frame buffer to create a liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame to be displayed this time.

By the above procedure, unlike the conventional image conversion described above, the image conversion is not performed for the entire screen, but for each layer drawing unit, the drawing element unit constituting the layer, and the image conversion regardless of the order of drawing to the frame buffer. It can be performed.

This embodiment is characterized in that callbacks based on the same effect SW are performed multiple times at each drawing timing within a period from the start of drawing of the liquid crystal screen for one frame to the end of drawing. The details of the drawing timing types are as described above with reference to FIG.

Further, by performing image conversion using callbacks, it is not necessary to determine or monitor whether or not the image being drawn is subject to image conversion. Furthermore, at the timing of creating a display list command that draws the image to be converted, instead of starting a series of variable-related drawing, the image is displayed based on the result of the lottery result value of the advance notice lottery and the result of the interactive operation by the user's external input. It becomes possible to determine the method of conversion.

[29. RAM-less transfer]
Conventionally, a display list command is created based on the animation data stored in the CGROM, and the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source processes the created display list command, thereby drawing during execution of the game effect. At this time, the display list commands created while analyzing the animation data stored in the CGROM are stored in a buffer assigned to the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and after completion of the display list command creation for one screen, the external request DMA (transfer means) was used to send the contents of the buffer to the VDP.

However, at present, production specifications are becoming more complicated and the processing load is increasing, which increases processing time such as advance notice lottery processing at the start of fluctuations. The processing time for the motor data creation process is also increasing due to the increase in the number. Since the processing time for peripheral control such as effects is executed at a fixed cycle, there is a risk that the processing may not be completed within the cycle if the above-mentioned high-load processing is executed repeatedly. .

Aside from exceptions when the processing cannot be completed within the cycle, when the processing cannot be routinely completed within the cycle, the game control by the main control device and the performance control by the peripheral control device are synchronized based on the processing cycle. The progress of the game and the performance of the game by each performance device are separated from each other, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game is remarkably reduced.

Therefore, it has been necessary to shorten the processing time of the peripheral control processing, such as by reducing the time required for high-load processing in the peripheral control processing such as effects. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing time for analyzing the animation data on the CGROM and creating the native display list commands that can be processed by the VDP 1540a with built-in tone generator, which is relatively high-load drawing processing in the peripheral control processing, is time-consuming. A means for reducing the processing time of the entire peripheral control processing will be described.

First, a conventional procedure for transferring a display list command group for displaying an image on a liquid crystal display device to the VDP 1540a with built-in tone generator will be described. FIG. 453 is a diagram for explaining the procedure for temporarily storing a display list command group in the peripheral control RAM 1530c and then transferring it to the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 453, first, the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list control module acquires various liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and analyzes and converts the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into a VDP native display list command group. The purpose of converting the liquid crystal effect scheduler data to the VDP native display list command group is that the liquid crystal effect scheduler data contains information (VDP register number and parameter value corresponding to the register number) related to the display list command to be sent to the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. Therefore, it is necessary to convert the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into VDP native display list commands that can be executed by the VDP 1540a with built-in tone generator. The converted VDP native display list command group is temporarily stored in peripheral control RAM 1530c. Also, when the callback function called by the presentation SW is executed when the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is executed, the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group as necessary and stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the display list transfer to the external request DMA in the process of processing the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data. As a result, the VDP native display list command group stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c is acquired from the peripheral control RAM 1530c by the external request DMA and transferred to the VDP with built-in sound source 1540a.

When the VDP with built-in tone generator 1540a receives the transferred VDP native display list command, it temporarily stores it in the display list FIFO. The VDP 1540a with built-in sound source processes the display list stored in the display list FIFO from the top, and outputs an image (moving image) to the liquid crystal display device.

As described above, the display list command group for one frame is stored in the buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and the display list command group is transferred from the buffer to the VDP 1540a using the external request DMA in the next processing cycle after the display list command group is created. Drawing is realized by sending. However, the process of analyzing and converting a huge amount of liquid crystal effect scheduler data for one screen into a VDP native display list command group results in a large processing load. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which a plurality of VDPs from different manufacturers are installed in one game machine, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the intermediate data format is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group corresponding to the VDP of each manufacturer. becomes possible.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration is applied in which part or all of the display list command group can be transferred to the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. FIG. 454 is a diagram for explaining the procedure for transferring the display list command group to the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a without storing it in the peripheral control RAM 1530c in this embodiment.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 454, first, the display list transfer setting is performed for the external request DMA by the liquid crystal presentation scheduler display list selection management module. The external request DMA acquires the set display list command group not from the peripheral control RAM 1530c but from the peripheral control ROM 1530b.

The peripheral control ROM 1530b stores liquid crystal presentation scheduler data in the same manner as when the display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c, but each liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is a converted VDP native display list command group. and an interrupt display list command.

The external request DMA acquires the designated liquid crystal presentation scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b based on the transfer setting by the liquid crystal presentation scheduler display list selection management module, and transfers it to the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a. The VDP with built-in tone generator 1540a temporarily stores the transferred VDP native display list command and interrupt display list command in the display list FIFO.

The sound source built-in VDP 1540a extracts the VDP native display list command from the display list FIFO, analyzes and executes the extracted VDP native display list command, and writes the image to the frame buffer. Furthermore, when the interrupt display list command transferred together with the VDP native display list command group is analyzed and executed, the analysis of the display list is interrupted, and a transfer interrupt request is issued to the external request DMA. After that, an interrupt is generated to the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

When the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects an interrupt from the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a, the interrupt processing module determines that the interrupt is caused by an interrupt display list command, and executes a callback. The callback function refers to the callback information table corresponding to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and replaces the effects and patterns. The effect replacement method is the same as the explanation using FIG. 439 and the like, and the pattern replacement method is the same as the explanation using FIG. 439 and the like. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding callback information table defines the effect SW corresponding to the number of interrupt display list commands defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The replacement information is determined by the callback function, a display list command is created based on the determined replacement information, and is transmitted to the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a. After that, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits a display list command for resuming display list analysis to the tone generator VDP 1540a. The tone generator built-in VDP 1540a analyzes the display list analysis restart display list command, generates a transfer restart request to the external request DMA, and restarts display list command analysis.

By using the callback function to process only the replacement part of the presentation as described above, the peripheral control RAM 1530c (temporary storage means) can be used without performing any conversion of the VDP native display list related to all presentations other than the replacement. Therefore, it becomes possible to transfer from the peripheral control ROM 1530b to the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a using the external request DMA (transfer means).

With the configuration as described above, the VDP native display list command group can be transferred to the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a without storing it in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. This makes it possible to reduce the load on the peripheral control MPU 1511a associated with image display, and speed up the image processing. In addition, since the used area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c can be saved, the storage area can be used effectively.

It should be noted that the peripheral control ROM 1530b may store only VDP native display list command groups with high frequency of use, and the VDP native display list command groups with low use frequency may be processed according to the conventional procedure. As a result, processing of frequently used display list commands can be shortened, thereby improving the processing speed as a whole and suppressing an increase in the capacity of the peripheral control ROM 1530b. In addition, display list commands corresponding to highly versatile images (moving images) are stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and image processing that differs depending on the model and version is performed according to the conventional procedure, thereby improving development efficiency. is also possible.

[30. Alignment adjustment]
A processor (CPU, MPU) used for game control and peripheral control (performance control) of a game machine can basically handle data types of integer type and floating point type. Integer types that can be used with a 32-bit CPU are char (character, character) type, int (integer) type, and long (long integer) type, with sizes of 1 byte, 2 bytes, and 4 bytes, respectively. . Floating point types are float (single precision) type and double (double precision) type, and have sizes of 4 bytes and 8 bytes, respectively.

Whether the processor used for peripheral control of the game machine is a CISC processor or a RISC processor, the data on the memory (ROM, RAM) can be read and written in units of 1 byte at all addresses. It has become a machine. Note that addresses for reading and writing multiple bytes of data are not limited to this. When the processor reads multiple bytes of data, it always reads from a byte boundary, and an alignment violation occurs when accessing across a byte boundary. The behavior when an alignment violation occurs depends on the processor. Relax.

However, in the current development of game machines, when a program that controls a game is executed, a data structure consisting of multiple pieces of information on the memory (ROM, RAM) is created without being aware of the alignment. I had a lot of things to do. As a result, an alignment violation may occur during program execution, and the program execution speed may decrease. In the peripheral control of game machines, it is necessary to complete all processes within a predetermined processing period, so a decrease in the execution speed of the program sometimes poses a serious problem. In particular, since the presentation of a game machine is based on multiple elements, it is necessary to collectively manage various information related to each element, and store various information in different types of data types. data structure is used.

In order to solve the above problems, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in a data structure composed of a plurality of information used for game control, when storing data corresponding to the data structure on the memory, each information Explicitly embed empty data between or at the end of the area that stores the . By adjusting the starting position of data access by the processor and arranging information so that the processor always accesses from the byte boundary address, alignment violations are prevented and program execution speed is prevented from decreasing. can be done. Alignment adjustment for all ROM and RAM data structures is a huge amount of work, so the load on the processor is large and the processing time is long. It is desirable to adjust the alignment using the data structures on the ROM and RAM related to the processing for rendering, the control processing for drawing the liquid crystal, the lamp control processing, and the like. Also, there is no problem in performing alignment adjustment other than the process described above.

[31. Configuration for displaying a plurality of identification patterns]
By the way, in recent years, since a wide variety of effects have come to be demanded in order to increase interest in games, the contents of effects on the effect display device have become more complicated and the contents of drawing have become more diversified. In the embodiment described so far, only one set of identification symbols for informing the result of the variable display is displayed, and the game is played by adding a relatively wide variety of effects to the variable display of the set of identification symbols. Although it was mainly to progress, there are players who do not like a wide variety of effects. There is a possibility that the game interest may be lowered in a configuration in which a wide variety of presentations are frequently performed. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that meets the needs of a wide range of players, a configuration capable of displaying a plurality of unique sets of identification symbols will be described below. Specifically, a plurality of display areas for performing variable display of identification symbols on the effect display device 1600 are allocated to one or a plurality of display devices (display screens), and any player's needs among different player needs are determined. In order to be able to cope with , the variable display of the identification pattern of another set is simultaneously progressed. Each display area is common in that the result of the variable display is notified by the identification pattern, but is displayed in a different effect mode such as a variation mode of the identification pattern.

[31-1. Aspect of display area of identification pattern]
FIG. 455 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration having a plurality of display areas for displaying the above-described identification symbols when the above-mentioned plurality of sets of identification symbols are variably displayed under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a in this embodiment. (A) is a configuration example having a display area A and a display area B of identification symbols on one display screen in the effect display device 1600; This is a configuration example having a display area A and a display area B. FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 455(A), one screen has a display area A and a display area B of identification patterns, and the display area A is assigned to the upper part of the screen and the display area B is assigned to the lower part of the screen. A first identification pattern 8010 is displayed in the display area A, and a second identification pattern 8020 is displayed in the display area B. In the example shown in FIG. 455(A), the display area A and the display area B are configured as display areas of the same size, and the display area A and the display area B are separated by a wavy border extending in the lateral direction of the center. It is Also, the first identification pattern 8010 is composed of three-digit patterns of a first left pattern 8010a, a first middle pattern 8010b and a first right pattern 8010c. Similarly, the second identification pattern 8020 is a three-digit pattern of a second left pattern 8020a, a second middle pattern 8020b, and a second right pattern 8020c in accordance with the fact that the first identification pattern 8010 is a three-digit pattern. Configured. Note that the sizes of the display areas A and B are not limited to the same size, and may be different sizes.

The variable display of the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020 is started at the same time and stopped at the same time. The individual symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of each identification symbol may be stopped at any timing, but the timing at which the stop mode of all the identification symbols is finally determined is the same. In addition, the final stop pattern is a combination of the same stop patterns (lottery result) so that the player does not misunderstand any of the identifying patterns and does not feel uncomfortable. For example, when deriving a winning result as a result of a lottery, all the individual identification patterns of the first identification pattern 8010 become the same pattern combination (for example, "777" etc.), and in line with it, the second All the individual identification patterns of the identification pattern 8020 are also the same pattern combination (such as "777" equivalent to the first identification pattern 8010). Also, when deriving the no-reach result as a result of the lottery, the individual identification patterns of the first identification pattern 8010 do not constitute the reach display (the left pattern and the right pattern are the same). "224" etc.), and in line with it, the individual identification patterns of the second identification pattern 8020 also do not constitute a reach display (the left pattern and the right pattern are the same) A pattern combination (equivalent to the first identification pattern 8010 "135", "224", etc.). Also, when deriving the result of the lottery with reach out, the individual identification patterns of the first identification pattern 8010 constitute the reach display (the left pattern and the right pattern are the same), but the patterns are not all the same. In addition to becoming a combination (for example, "131", "242", etc.), the individual identification patterns of the second identification pattern 8020 also form a reach display (the left pattern and the right pattern are the same). "135", "224", etc. equivalent to the first identification pattern 8010).

It should be noted that the first identification pattern 8010 displayed in the display area A and the second identification pattern 8020 displayed in the display area B may be any pattern display mode in which the player can recognize that they are equivalent pattern combinations. For example, one display area is configured to display a combination of symbols in a pattern display mode (such as "123") consisting of "Chinese numerals", while the other display area is configured to display a pattern consisting of "alphanumeric characters". The symbol combination may be displayed in a display mode (such as "123"). Also, the combination of symbols may be displayed in the same kind of symbol display mode in both display areas (for example, "123" is displayed in both display areas). Also, when displaying the same type of pattern display mode, the display mode (font) may be the same or different. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of digits of the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020 is set to three digits. For example, the number of digits of the first identification pattern 8010 and the number of digits of the second identification pattern 8020 are both configured with 2 digits, or the number of digits of the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020 are both 4 It may be composed of the same number of digits or more. Although details will be described later, the first identification pattern 8010 may have the same number of digits as the second identification pattern 8020 when the stop mode of the second identification pattern 8020 is finally determined. In the variable display process of the 1 identification pattern 8010, the number of digits may be temporarily changed from the final number of digits.

In this embodiment, although the same type of pattern display mode (alphanumeric pattern in this embodiment) is adopted in the display areas of both the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020, each identification pattern The mode of the additional decoration display added to each pattern is made different. Specifically, the first identification pattern 8010 has an additional decoration display for each identification pattern, giving impact to each identification pattern itself, and various effects are also executed by these additional decoration displays ( high decorative dynamic display). On the other hand, the second identification pattern 8020 does not display an additional decoration like the first identification pattern 8010, or at least displays a simpler additional decoration than the first identification pattern 8010 (lower decorative dynamic display).

Furthermore, the kind of the pattern forming the first identification pattern 8010 and the kind of the pattern forming the second identification pattern 8020 do not necessarily have to exactly match or strictly correspond one-to-one. For example, according to the effect mode, the first identification pattern 8010 has a number pattern (0 to 9) and a character pattern (for example, a pattern imitating an airplane) as patterns that are variably displayed in each identification pattern, The second pattern may be only number patterns (0 to 9). Further, in this case, when the first identification pattern 8010 stops at the character pattern, the pattern is changed again, and the final stop pattern is controlled to be a number pattern. Character designs may include special game elements different from number designs, and while number designs are directly linked to the final lottery results, character designs are not the final lottery results but are used exclusively. It can be positioned as one that is used specifically for presentation in the process of variable display.

In the first identification pattern 8010 displayed in the display area A, various effects are performed until the result display (derivation of the lottery result) of the variation display (symbol variation) (high decoration dynamic display). For example, in the variable display of identification symbols, a high-speed display mode in which the player has difficulty in recognizing the details of the identification symbols is switched to a low-speed display mode in which the player can recognize the details of the identification symbols at a predetermined timing. Specifically, as described above, by executing a callback based on the effect SW for replacement of the identification symbol, the replacement table of the identification symbol is displayed based on the stop symbol or the stop timing of the symbol at the switching timing of the identification symbol. And the identification pattern is replaced by using the reel index replacement work number table, the identification pattern is finely decorated until just before the stop, and the player who pays attention to the first identification pattern 8010 is given interest until just before the stop. and

In addition, the first identification pattern 8010 displayed in the display area A can change all or part of the identification patterns that constitute the first identification pattern 8010 depending on the game state, the production mode, or the type of the special pattern variation pattern. , and the first identification symbol 8010 is changed variously during the progress of the game, depending on the game state, the effect mode, or the type of variation pattern of the special symbol. Specifically, a plurality of symbol row data of the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A are provided (for example, symbol row data of 0 to 9, symbol row data of 0 to 9, etc.), and the game state At the time of switching, effect mode switching, or special symbol variation pattern selection, symbol row data selection effect SW (for example, symbols corresponding to symbol row data of 0 to 9) individually corresponding to the types of the plurality of symbol row data By setting the row data selection effect SW1 and the symbol row data selection effect SW2) corresponding to the symbol row data of 0 to 9 to ON and setting the other effect SW to OFF, it is used for displaying the first identification symbol 8010. The pattern row data can be changed in various ways, and various performances can be executed.

Further, as described above, in the first identification pattern 8010, on the premise that the number of digits is the same as that of the second identification pattern 8020 when finally determined, the final digit It may be configured to temporarily change to a number of digits different from a number. For example, although it will be 3 digits in the end, it is possible to display 2 digits only during a specific period during variable display (for example, a reach swing period that incites whether or not the reach will be reached after the left symbol stops). etc. can be exemplified. This may be executed based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern. As the effect SW to be defined, digit number data selection effect SW corresponding to digit number data (for example, digit number data selection effect SW corresponding to digit number data of 3 digits, digit number data selection effect SW corresponding to digit number data When two digits are displayed using the selection effect SW2, etc., various effects can be executed by setting the digit number data selection effect SW2 to ON and setting the other effect SW to OFF. .

In the first identification pattern 8010, not only the identification pattern itself is changed to change the display mode, but also an effect using the additional decorative display made to the identification pattern as described above is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 455(A), by displaying a star-shaped additional decoration 8011 on the left identification pattern 8010a of the first identification pattern 8010, advantageous lottery results (such as winning) can be obtained in the variable display being executed. You may make it suggest that there is a high possibility that it will be derived. At this time, the degree of expectation may be notified according to the number and color of the additional decorations 8011 or the type of action (for example, the degree of expectation increases in the order of one, three, and five additional decorations 8011). The degree of expectation for the additional decoration 8011 is set to increase in the order of white, blue, and red, or the degree of expectation for the operation of the additional decoration 8011 is set to increase in the order of static, vibrating, and rotating. ). In addition, by displaying a similar additional decoration 8011 on the right identification pattern 8010c, the player is made to pay more attention to the effect of the first identification pattern 8010, and the degree of expectation is raised more clearly. good too. Further, different additional decorations may be applied to each identification pattern, and the degree of expectation for deriving an advantageous lottery result from any of the first identification patterns 8010 may be reported.

As another example, effect display control is performed to superimpose a flame effect image (white, blue, red), which is an additional decoration display different from the above-described star-shaped additional decoration 8011, on each pattern included in the first identification pattern 8010. Then, an effect of changing the color of the flame according to the degree of expectation may be executed (for example, the degree of expectation increases in the order of white→blue→red). Thus, when a plurality of additional decorative displays are provided for the first identification pattern 8010, the peripheral control board 1510 performs a lottery to determine which additional decorative display to display based on the result of the winning lottery. By reflecting the determination result, it is possible to execute based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern or the like.

In the display area A, the additional decoration display added to the first identification pattern 8010 is drawn on a layer different from the layer displaying the identification pattern. As a result, the identification pattern display control can be performed in common regardless of the presence or absence of the additional decoration display and the type thereof. In addition, by drawing the identification pattern and the additional decoration display on different layers, it is possible to specify whether the additional decoration display is displayed on the front side or the back side of the identification pattern, and is set by the liquid crystal display scheduler data. By doing so, it is possible to automatically control when the performance is executed. Furthermore, as described above, whether or not to display the additional decoration display is determined at the time of execution based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern, etc., and the corresponding process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to achieve a more effective presentation without complicating the presentation control.

Furthermore, in the display area A where the first identification pattern 8010 is displayed, the character effect display may be executed independently of the identification pattern. For example, in a ready-to-reach state in which the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c are stopped at the same symbol, an effect of displaying a character according to the degree of expectation (the possibility of deriving an advantageous lottery result depending on the character type, action, etc.) Suggested pattern effect) may be executed.

In addition, the background display in the display area A may be changed according to the degree of expectation of the lottery result in the variable display (design effect suggesting the possibility of deriving an advantageous lottery result depending on the type of background display). Alternatively, instead of changing the background display itself, an effect may be executed in which only the background display color is changed (for example, expectations are higher in the order of white→blue→red).

As described above, in the display area A, the character effect display and the background display are also drawn on a layer different from the layer on which the identification pattern is drawn, so that the identification pattern is displayed on the front side. It is possible to specify whether to display or to display on the back side (for example, the character effect display is on the front side, the background display is on the back side, etc.). can be controlled automatically. This makes it possible to independently control the variable display of identification symbols regardless of the mode of character effect display, whether or not the background display is changed, and the type of background display.

As another effect mode in the display area A, the operation instruction image of the operation unit is displayed on the front layer of the first identification pattern 8010 independently of the first identification pattern 8010, and the player operates the operation unit. An operation presentation corresponding to the mode is executed (a pattern presentation suggesting the possibility of deriving an advantageous lottery result by an operation corresponding image or the like). For example, when the player presses the effect button after the button operation instruction image is displayed, the character is displayed according to the degree of expectation, and an operation effect of performing a specific action is executed.

Furthermore, in the display area A, an effect linked with the movable body provided on the game board 5a may be executed (a effect suggesting the possibility that an advantageous lottery result may be derived by the action of the movable body). For example, by moving the movable body arranged in the upper part of the game area 5a to a position where part or all of the first identification pattern 8010 is blocked from the player's line of sight, it is suggested that the expectation is high. good too.

Next, the display area B will be explained. In the second identification pattern 8020 displayed in the display area B, when the variation start command is received and the variation display of the identification pattern is started, the variation display of the identification pattern is started after the variation stop command is received or after the variation time elapses. End and stop at the designated stop symbol. While the identification pattern is being variably displayed, the display mode is a high-speed display mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the contents of the identification pattern, and the display mode is simple (low decorative dynamic display).

In the display area B, the additional decoration display made to the first identification pattern 8010, the character effect display for notifying the degree of expectation during the variable display of the identification pattern, and the operation effect are displayed. no. Furthermore, unlike the first identification pattern 8010, control for changing the display mode of the second identification pattern 8020 from the high-speed display mode to the low-speed display mode is not executed. Further, even when the first identification pattern 8010 temporarily stops and changes again, the variable display of the second identification pattern 8020 continues.

Therefore, in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for controlling the display of the second identification pattern 8020, the effect SW for changing the display mode such as pattern replacement is not defined, and the scheduler data is extremely simple. In addition, since the effect control program only sequentially executes the contents defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, even with such simple scheduler data, the same effect control as in the case of highly decorative dynamic display is executed. , and the execution of the effect by the effect SW or the like is simply skipped.

The mode of the second identification pattern 8020 may be changed as long as the display mode is not changed during the variable display. For example, the aspect of the second identification pattern 8020 corresponding to the game state and the production mode may be prepared in advance, and the aspect corresponding to the start of variation may be selected.

As for the background display, the background display for the display area B (the background other than the display area A) may be drawn. In this case, a background corresponding to the game state or the production mode may be prepared. In addition, in order to simplify the control surface, the background portion of the display area B is made transparent, and the background display of the display area A is enlarged to perform the common background display with the display area A. may

Thus, the variable display of the second identification pattern 8020 in the display area B differs from the first identification pattern 8010 in that after the start of the fluctuation, a callback is executed based on the production SW for replacing the identification pattern, or additional decoration is performed. There are no various effects such as display, but it is a simple one that specializes in waiting for which symbol combination to stop and display. Therefore, in the display area B, the player does not get excited and depressed by the types of various effects, but the game progresses with the game nature of watching with bated breath which symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the display area B, the additional decoration display made for the first identification pattern 8010, the character effect display for notifying the degree of expectation during the variable display of the identification pattern, and the operation effect are displayed. Since it is sufficient to set the background display to be transparent, various layer settings such as the first identification pattern 8010 (display area A) are not required.

455, a fourth pattern 8030 different from the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020 is displayed. The fourth symbol 8030 indicates the period from when the variation of the special symbol is started to when it is stopped. During the variable display, a special symbol variation explicit display is performed to indicate that the special symbol is being variably displayed, and when the special symbol variation stops or is stopped, the first identification symbol. 8010, while the second identification symbol 8020 is stopped and displayed, a special symbol stop explicit display is performed to indicate that the special symbol is being stopped. For example, even if the identification symbol is apparently stopped (temporary stop), the fourth symbol 8030 clearly displays the special symbol variation until the display of the result of the variation display is completed. While the fourth pattern 8030 is being clearly displayed with the special pattern variation, the triangular pattern is rotated by 90 degrees at a predetermined interval and displayed in vertical stripes. Further, while the special symbol stop clear display of the fourth symbol 8030 is being performed, the triangular symbol is displayed in a state filled with a predetermined color. It should be noted that the fourth pattern 8030 is drawn on a higher layer independent of the layer for drawing on the display area A or the display area B described above. Further, unlike the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020, the fourth pattern 8030 in this embodiment is displayed so as to be recognizable from the outside under all circumstances including the customer waiting state. In the example shown in FIG. 455, the fourth pattern 8030 is provided so as to overlap the display area A. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the fourth pattern 8030 is provided so as to overlap the display area B. Alternatively, a display device (lamp device) or the like different from the effect display device 1600 may perform control corresponding to the special symbol change explicit display of the fourth symbol 8030 and the special symbol stop explicit display.

As described above, the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020 tell the player what kind of lottery result was obtained, including the details (hit, loss without reach, loss with reach, etc.). While the fourth symbol plays a role of transmission, the fourth symbol indicates what kind of game situation (whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variable display, is being displayed stopped, or is waiting for customers). It plays a role of transmitting information to the designer or manager of the gaming machine (or the player). In other words, although the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020 have similar roles, they have a role that the fourth pattern cannot play in terms of transmitting the details of the lottery result to the player. there is Further, although the details will be described later, the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020 may be temporarily erased or hidden during the variable display of the special symbols or during the customer waiting state. On the other hand, the 4th symbol is a 4th symbol that may be temporarily erased or hidden during the variable display of the special symbol or during the customer waiting state in terms of always communicating the game situation to the player. It has a role that cannot be fulfilled by the 1st identification pattern 8010 and the 2nd identification pattern 8020 .

In addition, a pending memory display 8040 is drawn at the bottom of the screen shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the reserved memory display of the first special symbol is drawn in the lower left part of the screen, and the reserved memory display of the second special symbol is drawn in the lower right part of the screen, although not shown. In addition, in FIG. 455(A), the reserved memory display 8040 overlaps the display area B, but there is no problem as long as it does not overlap with the identification pattern. Note that the reserved memory display 8040 is drawn on an independent layer and arranged on the front side of the layer corresponding to the display area B, as described above. As with the fourth pattern 8030, it is not necessarily limited to such a form, and the reserved memory display 8040 may be substituted by a display device (lamp device) or the like different from the effect display device 1600.

As described above, in this embodiment, a layer is defined for each display area. As a result, it is possible to execute the drawing effect independently for each display area, and the highly decorative dynamic display with high effect executed in the display area A and the low decorative dynamic display executed in the display area B. can be performed in any combination. Since the combination of the high decoration dynamic display and the low decoration dynamic display can be defined by the liquid crystal production scheduler data, there is no need to change the production control program itself, and the production configuration can be easily created and changed. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 455(B), an example of having a display area A and a display area B of an identification pattern on each display screen when there are two display screens will be described. In FIG. 455B, display areas are assigned to physically different display devices, and display area A and display area B are composed of display devices of the same size. It should be noted that configurations having functions common to those in the example shown in (A) are given the same reference numerals and explanations thereof are omitted. The sizes of the display area A and the display area B are not limited to the same size, and may be different sizes.

In the example shown in FIG. 455(B), a plurality of effect display devices are provided on the game board 5, the display area A is assigned to the main liquid crystal display device, and the display area B is assigned to the sub liquid crystal display device. In the display area A, a first identification pattern 8010 is displayed, and a fourth pattern 8030 and a reserved memory display 8040 are drawn. On the other hand, in the display area B, a second identification pattern 8020 is displayed.

Instead of using the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device as the display area A, the area for displaying the fourth pattern 8030 and the reserved memory display 8040 may be an area different from the display area A. Also, the fourth pattern 8030 and the reserved memory display 8040 may be allocated to the display area B. FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 455(B), the first identification pattern 8010 is in the reach state, and decorations 8011 are drawn on the left identification pattern 8010a and the right identification pattern 8010c. Furthermore, a preview image 8050 is displayed that suggests that there is a high possibility of deriving an advantageous lottery result in this variation.

In addition, all of the second identification symbols 8020 are in a high-speed display mode during the variable display, so that the player cannot recognize all of the identification symbols. In the display area A, the first identification pattern 8010 is in a ready-to-win state, and the notice effect such as the display of the notice image 8050 is executed. The 8020 low-decoration dynamic display is only continued.

[31-2. Emphasis Mode of Display Area]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the identification symbols are variably displayed in different display modes in the display area A and the display area B, respectively. In the following, while the variable display of identification symbols displayed in each display area is executed in parallel, a selection operation is performed by the player (a switching operation unit (not shown) is operated), so that either one of the The control for emphasizing the variable display executed in one display area more than the other display area will be described (emphasis mode, large setting).

FIG. 456 is a diagram for explaining the highlighting mode of the display area for executing the variable display of the identification pattern in this embodiment. A normal pattern to be displayed, (B) is an emphasized pattern A that displays the display area A in an emphasized manner, and (C) is an emphasized pattern B that displays the display area B in an emphasized manner. In the present embodiment, the display area on the non-emphasized side is reduced in wipe display (small setting, suppression mode), and the display area on the non-emphasized side is also made recognizable by the player during the progress of the game. there is It should be noted that the switching of the display area to be highlighted is made possible by operating a predetermined switching operation unit (such as a switching button), and even in a state where the special symbols are not variably displayed, the special symbols fluctuate. Switching is possible even during display.

The player can switch between (A) the normal pattern, (B) the emphasis pattern A, and (C) the emphasis pattern B by operating the switching operation unit. As a switching mode, (A) the normal pattern, (B) the emphasized pattern A, and (C) the emphasized pattern B may be switched in a predetermined order each time the player operates the switching operation unit. Alternatively, the player may immediately select a desired display pattern. As a configuration for allowing the player to immediately select a desired display pattern, for example, the switch destination display pattern is set so as to correspond to each of a plurality of types of operation modes of the switching operation unit by the player, The display mode is configured to be immediately switched to the display mode desired by the player, depending on the operation mode for the switching operation section. Specifically, in response to a first operation (for example, a long press of 5 seconds or longer) on the switching operation section, the display pattern of the switching destination is set to a normal pattern, while a second operation (for example, less than 2 seconds) on the switching operation section is set to a normal pattern. (short press), set the display pattern of the switching destination to emphasize pattern A, and display the switching destination in response to the third operation (for example, long press for 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds) on the switching operation unit Emphasize pattern Set pattern B. For example, by performing the third operation on the switching operation unit, when the game is progressing in the emphasis mode (emphasis pattern B) of the display area B shown in FIG. The symbol variation due to progresses. At this time, as shown in FIG. 456(C), in the display area A displayed on the wipe, a display corresponding to the high-decoration dynamic display is performed. By performing the second operation on the switching operation unit when the player recognizes that the emphasis pattern A is being displayed, the player can immediately switch to the emphasis pattern A at his/her will. An example of the "unusual effect" is a notice effect in which the character pattern (airplane) temporarily stops at the medium identification pattern 8010b. By performing the second operation on the switching operation unit, it is possible to immediately change to the emphasis mode of the display area A (emphasis pattern A). It should be noted that when shifting to emphasis pattern A, a character effect or role action that was not displayed in the reduced area may be performed (FIG. 456(C)→(B)).

Further, even when the display area A is reduced (wiped) and displayed as shown in FIG. . When the display area A is reduced (wiped) and displayed, it is assumed that the operation has been performed after a specified time has elapsed since the start of the operation effect, even if the player does not actually operate the switching operation unit. , the operation performance may be automatically advanced in the same manner as when the switching operation unit is operated. On the other hand, when the display area A is reduced (wiped) and displayed as shown in FIG. Execution of the effect of shielding and making it visible at a predetermined timing is suppressed (discontinued) because it is necessary to change the action mode of the character and the control becomes complicated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 456(B), when the mode (emphasis pattern A) for emphasizing the display area A is selected, the reduced (wiped) displayed display area B is a low-decoration dynamic display and the pattern fluctuates. progresses, the above-mentioned "unusual effect" is not performed. Therefore, when highlighting pattern A is selected, the background of display area B is made transparent, or the background of display area B is also combined with the background of display area B. may be improved. Even when the display area B is wipe-displayed, the visibility of the identification pattern in the display area B must be maintained. It is preferable to set it to a higher layer than the displayed layer.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect sound is output in response to the variable display of the identification pattern in each display area. Specifically, since the first identification pattern 8010 in the display area A is displayed with a variety of effects, the effect sound is output based on the effect mode, the game state, the variation pattern, etc. in accordance with the effects. be done. Here, sounds (BGM, effect sound) output accompanying the variable display of the identification pattern in the display area A and the effect to be executed are managed as one AUTO group, and the sound is controlled by the automatic channel system. As a result, the upper limit of the channels to be used is limited even when the effects in the display area A are duplicated, so that resource consumption due to the execution of the effects of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Moreover, since it becomes possible to output automatically the sound with a high priority, complication of control of production|presentation can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the second identification pattern 8020 in the display area B is displayed in a high-speed display mode, and the effect sound output is simple (fluctuation BGM, stop sound only). Therefore, when both the display area A and the display area B are in a normal pattern (FIG. 456(A)) in which the display area A and the display area B are not reduced (wiped), the effect sound corresponding to the display area B is not output, or Control is performed in such a manner that the output of the effect sound corresponding to the display area B is suppressed by, for example, reducing the output sound. Also, when one of the display areas is displayed in an emphasized pattern, only the effect sound in the display area displayed in the emphasized pattern is output, and the effect sound in the reduced (wiped) display area is output. is not output, or the output sound is reduced to suppress the output of the dramatic effect sound corresponding to the reduced (wiped) display area.

In the case of the standby state where the variable display of the pattern is not performed (the start memory is not suspended), one display area is reduced (wiped) as shown in FIGS. 456 (B) and (C). , each display area is displayed in a normal pattern as shown in FIG. 456(A). This is because there is little significance in emphasizing one display area in a state in which the variable display of the identification pattern is not performed, and the screen for displaying the customer attraction is designed on the premise of full-screen display.

Further, when the power is turned off while the variable display of the special symbols is being performed and then the power is turned on, each identification symbol is displayed in a predetermined manner. For example, it may be an emphasis pattern A that highlights the display area A, or it may be a normal pattern. At this time, the combination of symbols to be displayed is set to the combination of symbols for the initial state (for example, "123") regardless of the result of the previous variation. In addition, when the power is turned off while the pattern is not changed and then turned on, the wipe display is not displayed until the pattern starts to change (without displaying with emphasized patterns A and B), and the normal pattern is used. Display the identification pattern. This is because, as described above, it is meaningless to highlight one of the display areas when the pattern is not variably displayed.

In this embodiment, as described above, each display area is composed of different layers. In each display area, the area to be drawn differs depending on whether it is drawn in an emphasized mode or in a reduced display. Specifically, the overall size of each layer is the same as the overall size of the display screen, and is drawn within a specified display area (for example, display area A). At this time, by transforming the coordinate system of the drawing area, it is possible to draw with a common means even if the sizes of the areas are different. Therefore, if the drawing content is the same, the display area will be can be drawn by a common means (program or data) even if the actual sizes of the

Therefore, only when displaying a specific object (for example, a decoration image) in a specific display mode (for example, only an emphasis mode), it is sufficient to draw a new object. For example, when adding a decoration image to the identification pattern, a new layer for drawing the decoration image may be prepared and combined with the layer for drawing the identification pattern. At this time, by setting the priority of the layer for drawing the decoration image higher than the priority of the layer for drawing the identification pattern, the decoration image can be arranged on the front side of the identification pattern when each layer is synthesized. can.

As described above, in the present embodiment, common programs and data are used for objects (for example, identification patterns) that are displayed in the same image regardless of whether they are displayed in an emphasized mode or in a reduced display. On the other hand, when displaying a decorative image superimposed on the identification pattern, prepare a layer with a higher priority than the identification pattern, draw the decoration image on that layer, and place it on the front side of the identification pattern layer. An emphasis mode is drawn by arranging. This makes it possible to use common programs and data for objects such as identification patterns that have common drawing contents in each display mode, without the need to separately prepare programs and data for each display mode. It is sufficient to prepare a minimum program and data to be the difference. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an increase in image data accompanying the diversification of presentation contents, suppress complication of presentation control, and suppress an increase in storage capacity.

[31-3. Screen transition]
Subsequently, the mode of variable display of the identification symbols from the start to the stop of the variation of the special symbols will be described. FIG. 457 is a diagram for explaining an example of screen transition in a configuration in which the variable display of the identification pattern is performed in the display area A and the display area B of the present embodiment. An example is shown in which the variation of the identification pattern stops in the display area B in conjunction with the case where the symbol is displayed. FIG. 458 is a diagram for explaining an example of screen transition in a configuration in which the variable display of identification symbols in the present embodiment is performed in display area A and display area B respectively. An example of displaying all the stop symbols in the display area B is shown. Each screen shown in FIGS. 457 and 458 is a screen showing the same state, and both are displayed in a normal mode. Each screen will be described below.

(A) shows the state immediately after the variable display of the symbols is completed in the state where the starting memory number is 3. FIG. At this time, as described above, the triangular fourth symbol 8030 is statically displayed in a blacked out state. Also, the first identification pattern 8010 displayed in the display area A and the second identification pattern 8020 displayed in the display area 2 are stopped and displayed with the identification pattern set to "125".

(B) is a state in which the starting memory is consumed (the number of starting memories is 3→2) and the variable display of symbols is started. The first identification pattern 8010 in the display area A and the second identification pattern 8020 in the display area B are displayed in a high-speed display mode. When the variable display of the pattern is started, the triangular fourth pattern 8030 is changed from solid to vertical stripes and rotated.

(C) shows a state in which the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped. In FIG. 457(C), when the left identification pattern 8010a of the first identification pattern 8010 stops, the left identification pattern 8020a of the second identification pattern 8020 is also stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 458(C), even if the left identification pattern 8010a of the first identification pattern 8010 stops, the left identification pattern 8020a of the second identification pattern 8020 continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Also, the variable display stops after the left identification pattern 8010a of the first identification pattern 8010 changes from the high-speed display mode to the low-speed display mode. On the other hand, when the left identification pattern 8020a of the second identification pattern 8020 is to be stopped, it is stopped and displayed without transitioning to the low speed display mode. This is because the purpose of the variable display of the identification symbols in the display area B is to notify the player that the symbols are changing and to clearly display the stop symbols rather than to enhance the performance effect.

(D) shows a state in which the right identification symbol 8010c of the first identification symbol 8010 is further stopped from the state of (C). At this time, the left identification pattern 8010a and the right identification pattern 8010c are stopped at the same pattern, and the ready-to-win state is reached. In the display area A, the ready-to-win effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed, while in the display area B, the variable display of the second identification pattern 8020 is continued without executing any special effect.

(E) shows a state in which the medium identification pattern 8010b of the first identification pattern 8010 is stopped (temporarily stopped) at the character (airplane) pattern in the reach state. Here, the airplane pattern is a pattern indicating that the variable display is restarted, and indicates execution of so-called pseudo-continuous variation. Therefore, even in the state where the medium identification pattern 8010b is stopped, the fourth pattern 8030 is continuously displayed, and as shown in FIG. The variable display is continued in the high-speed display mode. When the first identification pattern 8010 continues to be temporarily stopped for a predetermined time, then, as shown in (F), the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020 start to change again. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 458, regardless of the display mode such as re-variation of the first identification pattern 8010, the variable display of the second identification pattern 8020 in the high-speed display mode is continued.

(G) shows a state where the left identification pattern 8010a of the first identification pattern 8010 is stopped after the re-variation of the first identification pattern 8010 is started. At this time, a decoration 8011 is superimposed on the left identification pattern 8010a to notify that there is a high possibility (expectation) of obtaining an advantageous lottery result in the variation. In addition, for the second identification pattern 8020, the effect corresponding to the degree of expectation is not particularly executed, and in FIG. The pattern 8020a stops, and the variable display in the high-speed display mode is continued in FIG. 458(G).

(H) shows a state in which the right identification symbol 8010c of the first identification symbol 8010 is further stopped from the state of (G). At this time, the left identification pattern 8010a and the right identification pattern 8010c stop at the same pattern ("5") to enter a ready-to-win state, and the decoration 8011 is also displayed on the right identification pattern 8010c. After that, as shown in (I), the middle identification pattern 8010b also stops at the same pattern ("5") as the left identification pattern 8010a and the right identification pattern 8010c, and when the stop pattern is confirmed, the second identification pattern 8020 is also the first It stops at the symbol corresponding to the identification symbol 8010, and a big hit effect is executed.

When the identification pattern is displayed by highly decorative dynamic display, it is possible to realize a rich variety of effects and enhance the interest of the game. On the other hand, when the identification pattern is displayed by the low-decoration dynamic display, it is possible to avoid gorgeous effects and maximize the expectation for the pattern variation. In this embodiment, a display area A in which the identification pattern is variably displayed with high decoration dynamic display and a display area B in which the identification pattern is variably displayed with low decoration dynamic display are provided, and either one or both is provided. By concurrently executing the variable display in the display mode of (1), the player can play the game in a mode that suits his or her taste.

In addition, since it is possible for the player to freely switch between the high-decoration dynamic display and the low-decoration dynamic display during the variable display, for example, when the ready-to-win occurs, a display that notifies the degree of expectation is executed. By highlighting the area A and highlighting the display area B in other states, the game can be played according to the situation.

In the above-described embodiment, the high-decoration dynamic display and the low-decoration dynamic display are executed in parallel, and the game progresses in a manner that the player can see both. may For example, while the high-decoration dynamic display and the low-decoration dynamic display are executed in parallel, the display on the other side can be displayed by the player so that the player can visually recognize only the display on the one side desired by the player. A movable body or the like (one side concealing means) having a function of concealing the display so as to make it invisible or difficult to view may be provided, and the display on the other side may be hidden by such a movable body. For example, in FIG. 455(A), the cover position that overlaps all or at least part of the display area A and the area where the movable body overlaps the display area A is smaller than the cover position, and the effect display performed in the display area A is easy to see. 455(A), the covering position overlapping all or at least part of the display area B in FIG. 455(A), and the display area The area where the movable body overlaps with B is small, and the retracted position (lower position of the display area B) where the effect display performed in the display area B is easy to see and the lower covering movable body that can move are provided. When the covering condition A for hiding the area A is satisfied (eg, the player performs a first specific operation on the switching operation unit), the covering condition B for hiding the display area B is satisfied by moving the upper covering movable body to the covering position. By doing so (the player performs a second specific operation on the switching operation part, etc.), the lower covering movable body can be moved to the covering position. As a result, for example, the game can be progressed by concentrating only on one side of the display desired by the player without complicated control such as switching of the effect display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the high-decoration dynamic display and the low-decoration dynamic display are executed in parallel in the process of progressing the game. During the period during which high-decoration dynamic display and low-decoration dynamic display do not need to be executed in parallel, for example, only high-decoration dynamic display capable of actively appealing to the outside is left, and low-decoration dynamic display is left. For example, the decorative dynamic display may be erased. For example, as shown in FIG. 456(A) of the above-described embodiment, the game progresses in a normal pattern in which the display area A and the display area B are displayed in a standard manner (prescribed size), and after a predetermined time, the customer waits. When shifting to the state, the display area B is erased while the display area A remains, or the display area B is erased and the display area A is enlarged to a large area. It should be noted that if a new starting condition is met while the vehicle is waiting for a customer, the display in the display area B, which is a low-decoration dynamic display, may be restored.

[32. Application of production block to production that continues over multiple fluctuations]
Next, an example of applying the effect block to the effect that continues over multiple variations will be described. In the above-described example, the period from the start to the stop of pattern fluctuation is divided into predetermined periods, and the production blocks corresponding to each period are defined. By combining these performance blocks, it is possible to suppress complication of performance control while realizing various performances. In addition, an example was explained in which it was possible to define a production block that exceeds a predetermined period, but it is limited to production blocks that fall within one variation, and for production that is executed over multiple variations Not enough to apply the production block.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, an example of applying effect blocks to a series of effects executed over a plurality of variations will be described. Here, as a series of effects that are executed over multiple variations, there is a timer effect and background effect that are executed as a look-ahead effect (pre-notification effect) at the start of winning a prize, and a mini character effect that is executed when switching the effect mode and continues until a predetermined condition is met. will be explained.

[32-1. Control of look-ahead effect (advance notification effect)]
Before explaining the timer effect and the background effect which are executed as the look-ahead effect at the time of starting winning, the control of the look-ahead effect will be supplemented.

When the game ball wins the starting winning opening, the main control board 1310 executes the first starting opening passing process (Fig. 135) or the second starting opening passing process (Fig. 136) according to the starting winning opening, and starts A random value is extracted (obtained) as a memory (steps S5241 and S5251). Then, in the first special figure prefetching process (S5245) or the second special figure prefetching process (S5255), based on the extracted random number or the lottery result based on the random number, special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command or special symbol 2 A memory prefetch effect command (refer to FIG. 90, hereinafter referred to as “special figure prefetch effect command”) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 .

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the special figure prefetch effect command, it determines whether or not to execute the prefetch effect based on the received command. Commands from the main control board 1310 are stored in the peripheral controller reception ring buffer by the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing (FIG. 98). Then, the received command is analyzed by the received command analysis processing (S1022) of the peripheral control unit regular processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (FIG. 95).

When the special figure prefetch effect command is received, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the prefetch effect control process in the reception command analysis process. In the look-ahead effect control process, a process for executing a normal look-ahead effect of changing the starting memory display, and a process for executing the timer effect and the background effect described above are executed. It should be noted that the prefetch effect control process may be called in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 95) by setting a flag indicating that the prefetch effect command has been received in the received command analysis process. good.

In the processing for executing the normal prefetching performance for changing the starting memory display, a lottery is drawn based on the special figure prefetching performance command, and the mode of the starting memory display after the change is selected based on the lottery result. At this time, the mode of the starting memory display may be changed only when shifting to the ready-to-win state in the variable display of the special symbols corresponding to the special figure prefetch effect command. The mode of the starting memory display changes color and shape, for example. Then, a normal look-ahead effect setting process for changing the mode of the starting memory display is executed. In the normal look-ahead effect setting process, settings are made to change the display color of the start memory display, as well as settings for outputting sound effects, lighting lamps, and moving characters at the timing of the change. . Processing for executing timer effects and background effects will be described later.

[32-2. Timer effect]
The timer effect is a pre-suggestive effect that indicates by countdown display that the execution time of the suggestive effect suggesting the result of a lottery for a specific starting memory or the possibility of winning is approaching. Broadly speaking, there are two kinds of timer effects, which are controlled as one of the above-mentioned look-ahead effects, and the variable display for the specific starting memory is started before the variable display for the specific starting memory is started. A timer effect that counts down the period until a predetermined timing (hereinafter referred to as a look-ahead timer effect) and the above-mentioned look-ahead effect are controlled based on a variation pattern, and are controlled based on a specific start memory. A timer effect that does not straddle multiple fluctuations (hereinafter referred to as a timer effect within fluctuations) that counts down the period from a predetermined timing after the start of the fluctuation display to this specific starting memory to another timing of the fluctuation display for this specific start memory. ,have. In other words, both the look-ahead timer effect and the within-variation timer effect are pre-notification effects in which the symbol variation for a specific starting memory has not been completed. Although it is common in that a predetermined effect is performed when it becomes, the look-ahead timer effect is different from the intra-variation timer effect in that the countdown display is performed on the display screen over a plurality of symbol changes. Also, the initial value of the countdown display performed in the look-ahead timer effect and the timer effect within the fluctuation may be set to various values, but since it spans multiple fluctuations, the average value of the initial value used in the look-ahead timer effect is relatively larger than the average value of the initial values used in the within-variation timer effect. In this embodiment, since the look-ahead timer effect includes characteristic elements, the look-ahead timer effect will be described in detail below.

In the processing for executing the look-ahead timer effect, first, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead timer effect. Since the look-ahead timer effect is a look-ahead effect that can be executed across multiple fluctuations as described above, it is enough to execute the look-ahead timer effect before the variable display corresponding to the received special figure lookahead effect command is started. determine whether sufficient time is secured. That is, it is determined whether or not the sum of the variation times of all starting memories held until the variation is started is longer than or equal to a specific time (40 seconds or longer in this embodiment). Furthermore, based on the winning/losing with respect to the starting memory of the performance execution target and the variation pattern of the starting memory, the performance contents are determined together with whether or not the look-ahead timer performance can be executed. Also, when determining the contents of the performance, the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer performance is also determined. As the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect, for example, it is the time when the fluctuation starts corresponding to the start memory stored before the start memory for the look-ahead effect, or before the start memory for the look-ahead effect. Either the start time of the fluctuation corresponding to the memorized start memory or the end time of the fluctuation corresponding to the start memory memorized before the start memory of the look-ahead performance object is set.

The look-ahead timer effect is composed of a timer count effect for displaying a countdown and a timer end effect executed when the time is up. The timer counting effect and the timer end effect are continuously executed. In addition, the execution time of the timer counting effect, that is, the execution timing of the timer end effect varies depending on the length of the timer counting effect. And so on.

When the execution of the look-ahead timer effect is determined, first, the execution time of the timer counting effect is determined. The execution time of the timer count effect is determined based on the time from the start winning to the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the start memory of the look-ahead effect target. For example, in the present embodiment, 10 seconds is added to the total variation time of the starting memory held before the starting memory for the look-ahead effect, and the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect is set. A predetermined time calculated by subtracting the time based on the timing is set as the execution time of the timer count effect (initial value of the countdown display). Furthermore, the content of the production (in-countdown production pattern) to be executed as the timer counting production is set. As the effect pattern during the countdown, for example, a pattern 1 in which the lighting mode of a specific lamp provided on the game board 5 is gradually changed to high-speed blinking as the countdown display progresses, or a specific lamp provided on the game board 5 is displayed. Examples include pattern 2 in which the color of light emitted from the lamp changes as the countdown display progresses, and pattern 3 in which a specific movable body provided on the game board 5 moves as the countdown display progresses. It corresponds to the hit expectation degree of the variation of the performance object, and is set by lottery. For example, pattern 1→pattern 2→pattern 3 is set so that the probability of winning increases in the order. Both cases are selected at the same rate, and pattern 3 is more likely to be selected in the case of winning than in the case of losing.

After setting the content of the effect (during countdown effect pattern) executed as the timer counting effect, the content of the timer end effect (post-countdown effect pattern) is set. In the timer end effect, for example, the characters "End!!" are superimposed on the identification pattern in colors corresponding to the degree of expectation on the display screen (for example, the degree of expectation increases in the order of black → blue → red). To make a player surely recognize that the time is up by displaying it for a predetermined time. The post-countdown production patterns include, for example, pattern 1 in which the text color of "End!!" is black, pattern 2 in which the text color of "End!!" is blue, and pattern color of "End!!" Pattern 3, which is red, can be exemplified. These patterns 1 to 3 correspond to the hit expectation degree of the variation of the look-ahead effect target, and are set by lottery. For example, pattern 1→pattern 2→pattern 3 are set so that the probability of winning increases in the order. Both cases are selected at the same rate, and pattern 3 is more likely to be selected in the case of winning than in the case of losing. Note that the post-countdown effect pattern is not limited to this, and not only the character color but also the characters may be decorated or characters may be displayed. Different expectations may be accommodated.

As described above, after various settings related to the look-ahead timer effect are performed, the look-ahead timer effect is executed (started) when a predetermined start condition (arrival of start time of the look-ahead timer effect) is satisfied. As described above, the look-ahead timer effect is composed of a timer count effect and a timer end effect, and effect blocks corresponding to the timer count effect and the timer end effect are individually defined. These performance blocks are defined in advance, and when the execution of the look-ahead timer performance is determined, the performance block of the timer count performance and the performance block of the timer end performance are selected based on the execution time and the degree of expectation of the timer count performance. The effect block for the timer count effect and the effect block for the timer end effect may be selected individually, or the effect block for the timer count effect and the effect block for the timer end effect may be managed as a set and selected for each set. can be When the effect block of the timer count effect and the effect block of the timer end effect are selected, the effect block of the timer count effect is executed, and after the end of the effect block, the effect block of the timer end effect is executed.

Also, in the effect block of the timer count effect, only the content of the effect is defined, and the execution time can be set variably. As a result, there is no need to redundantly hold performance blocks with the same content that differ only in execution time, and an increase in storage capacity due to diversification of performance content can be suppressed. The look-ahead timer effect is based on the execution time calculated based on various conditions as described above, unlike the effect in which the execution timing and the end timing are strictly determined like the effect block corresponding to the variable time described above. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly cope with the calculated execution time of the effect. Specifically, the calculated execution time of the effect is stored in a predetermined storage area, and the execution time of the effect stored in the predetermined storage area is read at the start of the effect block of the timer counting effect.

Moreover, when the execution time of the timer count effect can be covered, the effect block may be prepared in advance so as to cover the execution time of the timer count effect. Since the execution time of the timer count effect may be within a predetermined range, even if all patterns are covered based on the number of holds and variation patterns (variation time), it may be possible to limit the realistic number of effect blocks. be. For example, if the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect is one pattern, the time from the start winning to the start of the variation of the look-ahead effect target is set as the lower limit, and the variation time of the variation is added to this time, Furthermore, by setting the time obtained by subtracting the execution time of the timer end effect as the upper limit, it is possible to specify the range of the execution time of the timer counting effect. Since at least one effect block whose execution time is included in this range should exist, there is a possibility that the minimum number of effect blocks should be prepared. Also, only the effect blocks with high execution frequency may be prepared in advance, and the effect blocks with low execution frequency may be set as effect blocks in which the fluctuation time can be variably set, thereby suppressing the number of effect blocks to be managed.

FIG. 459 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of effect blocks for the look-ahead timer effect of this embodiment. FIG. 460 is a diagram showing an execution example of the look-ahead timer effect of this embodiment. The execution example of the look-ahead timer effect shown in FIG. 460 corresponds to FIG.

FIGS. 459 and 460 show an example of executing the look-ahead timer effect over the variation 1 and the variation 2. FIG. Variation 1 has a "normal variation" in the first half and no reach, and variation 2 has a "normal variation" in the first half and becomes a big hit after occurrence of a reach. In addition, since it is as having mentioned above about the case where production|presentation is performed within each fluctuation|variation, description is abbreviate|omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 460(A), when variation 1 is started, variation display of all identification symbols is started (time t0). At this time, the number of pending symbol variations is zero. Variation 1 is normal variation in which reach does not occur, as described above.

Further, the variable display of the symbols is continued, and the variable display of the left symbols is stopped at a predetermined timing. After that, a starting prize is generated, and the number of pending symbol variations becomes 1. It is determined whether or not the look-ahead timer effect can be executed at the time of starting winning, and here, the execution of the look-ahead timer effect is determined, and a timer count effect block and a timer end effect block are selected. At this time, as shown in FIG. 460(B), only the left symbol is stopped and the other symbols are being variably displayed, and a timer display portion is arranged at the lower right portion of the screen (time t1). In addition, in FIG. 460(B), "START" indicating the start of the timer effect is displayed instead of the remaining time of the look-ahead timer effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 460(C), variation 1 ends, and the stop symbols of all the identified symbols are determined (time t2). At this time, the timer counting effect continues, and the remaining time of the look-ahead timer effect (timer counting effect) is displayed on the timer display section.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 460(D), the prefetch target variation 2 is started, and the remaining time displayed on the timer display is continuously updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 460(E), when the execution of the timer counting effect is completed, the remaining time "0.00" is displayed on the timer display section, and the timer end effect block is executed to start the timer end effect. (time t3). At this time, as a timer ending effect, a message "END!!" indicating the end of the timer effect is displayed on the screen, or a notice image such as a character is displayed. As described above, the text color of the message displayed here is set according to the degree of expectation of the change. Also, the content of the message may be set according to the degree of expectation of the change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 460(F), while the timer ending effect continues, the game stops at the same symbol "5" of the left symbol and the right symbol, and reach occurs. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 460(G), after the end of the timer end effect, the variation of the middle symbols is stopped, and all the symbols are determined. After that, as shown in FIG. 460(H), the game shifts to a big hit state.

In the example shown in FIGS. 459 and 460, the timer end effect is executed before the occurrence of the ready-to-win game, but the timer end effect may be executed after the occurrence of the ready-to-win game. At this time, since the ready-to-win effect and the timer end effect are executed in duplicate, the content of the timer end effect may be determined based on the content of the variable ready-to-reach effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production effect from being reduced due to the duplicate execution of the production.

As described above, it is possible to define the effects to be executed over a plurality of variations by the effect blocks, and it is possible to operate the common blocks more flexibly. By defining the effect that is executed as a look-ahead effect at the time of starting winning, such as a look-ahead timer effect, as the common block described above, it is possible to standardize and simplify the effect control, and the development of the game machine can be made more efficient. can be

In addition, the control of the effect block that spans multiple fluctuations is also controlled by the callback function using the effect SW in the same way as other common blocks. As a result, it is possible to move the character and output sound in accordance with the progress of the look-ahead timer effect, and it is possible to realize a variety of effects.

[32-3. Background effect]
Next, similar to the look-ahead timer effect, the background effect, which is the pre-notification effect suggesting the lottery result for the starting memory in which the symbol variation has not been completed, will be described. As an overview of the background effect, the background of the display screen is changed over a plurality of pattern changes, and the background effect is terminated at a predetermined timing during the change of the look-ahead object. In this embodiment, the background is restored when the reach develops while the prefetch target is changing.

FIG. 461 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of effect blocks for the background effect of this embodiment. FIG. 462 is a diagram showing an execution example of the background effect of this embodiment. The execution example of the background effect shown in FIG. 462 corresponds to FIG.

FIGS. 461 and 462 show an example of executing the background effect across variation 1, variation 2, and variation 3. FIG. Variation 1 and variation 2 are “normal variation” in the first half and have no reach, and variation 3 is “normal variation” in the first half and develops to reach. Description of the latter half of the variation 3 is omitted. As with the look-ahead timer effect, the case where the effect is executed within each variation is as described above, so the description is omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 462(A), when variation 1 is started, variation display of all identification symbols is started (time t0). At this time, the number of pending symbol variations is one. As described above, Variation 1 is a normal variation in which reach does not occur. After that, the variable display of the symbols is continued, and the left symbols are stopped. Then, at time t1, a starting prize is generated, and the number of pending symbol variations becomes two. Here, execution of the background effect is determined at the time of starting winning, and a background effect block is selected. At this time, as shown in FIG. 462(B), the background is changed from "mountain" to "sea".

After that, as shown in FIG. 462(C), variation 1 ends and the stop symbol is determined (time t2). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 462(D), variation 2 is started, and variable display of identification symbols is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 462(E), variation 2 ends and the stop symbol is determined (time t3). During this time, the background changed by executing the background effect is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 462(F), variation 3 to be prefetched is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 462(G), as the symbol variation develops into reach, the background presentation ends, and the background of "sea" returns to the background of "mountains" (time t4).

An effect block for executing a background effect is selected and executed when a start winning to be a look-ahead object occurs, similar to the timer effect. The end timing is the timing when the prefetch target fluctuation develops into a reach, that is, the remaining time of the fluctuation being executed at the time of the start winning, the total fluctuation time of the fluctuation executed until the prefetch target fluctuation is started, and the prefetch It may be set by calculating the total value of the first half fluctuation time of the target fluctuation. Also, the execution time may not be set in the effect block for executing the background effect, and the background effect may be continuously executed until the end condition is satisfied. The termination condition in this case is to detect that the change in the prefetch target has developed into a reach state. The termination condition is determined by a callback, and when the termination condition is satisfied, the process for terminating the background rendering is called.

As described above, in the background effect of the present embodiment, the background display is continuously changed from the start of the background effect to the development of the reach in the variation targeted for the look-ahead effect. When the reach develops, the background returns to the original state, so that the player recognizes that the degree of expectation for the change is high, and the degree of attention to the change in the latter half of the game increases.

On the other hand, if a reach occurs due to a change before the change targeted for the look-ahead effect starts, the background is temporarily restored when the reach occurs, and after the change ends, the background display is switched, and the background Resume the performance. As a result, even if the player is disappointed after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the expectation can be heightened again, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[32-4. Mini character production]
Next, a description will be given of the mini character effect that is started when the effect mode is switched. The mini-character effect is a effect in which a character (mini-character) corresponding to the effect mode appears. Since the mini-characters displayed at this time are displayed only during the pattern variation, when the pattern variation ends in a state where the number of pending variations becomes 0, the mini-characters are hidden. Note that the hidden mini-character may be displayed again when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, the mini character is continuously displayed across multiple variations until it shifts to the customer waiting state. The mini-character effect will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 463 is a diagram showing an example of mini-character effects according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 463(A), the game continues in the "mountain" mode. In this state, as shown in FIG. 463(B), when the "mountain" mode is changed to the "sea" mode, the mini character "whale" is displayed at the left center of the screen. The mode is switched by operating an operation unit (production button) (not shown) or the like.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 463(C) and 463(D), the suspended symbol variation is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 463(E), when all the reserved pattern variations are completed, the state shifts to the customer waiting state, and the displayed mini characters are hidden.

Since the execution condition of the mini-character effect is that the pattern variation continues, the mini-character effect is continued as long as the pattern is changing even if there is no pending variation. The condition for executing the mini character effect may be, other than when the mode is changed, such as when a start winning occurs after the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined period. By controlling in this manner, the mini-characters appear even when the mode is not changed, giving the player a sense of surprise and making it more interesting. In addition, the game state may be added to the determination conditions as a condition for executing the mini character presentation. For example, in a game state in which the probability state is not clearly notified, the current game state can be suggested to the player by facilitating the appearance of mini-characters if the probability state is high.

In addition, the end condition of the mini character presentation may be, for example, the case where the display of the mini character continues for a predetermined period of time, in addition to the case of shifting to the customer waiting state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a premium feeling in the appearance of the mini character.

The mini-character presentation is defined in the presentation block, and the end condition of the mini-character presentation is determined by a callback during execution of the mini-character presentation, and when the termination condition is satisfied, the mini-character presentation is terminated. By constructing in this way, it is not necessary to set the continuation time of the mini character presentation in advance, and it is possible to flexibly decide whether or not to continue the mini character presentation according to conditions such as the transition to the customer waiting state and the game state. In this way, it is possible to dynamically determine the end condition of the mini character presentation by callback, so there is no need to define individual presentation blocks corresponding to the execution time of the mini character presentation, and a presentation block is defined for each character. to facilitate management.

It should be noted that the effect blocks for effects that can span multiple variations, such as the look-ahead timer effects, background effects, and mini-character effects described above, may be set in duplicate, in which case the look-ahead timer effects, background effects, and mini-character effects overlap. will be executed. In addition, a plurality of effect blocks for effects that can span multiple variations may be overlapped at different timings. Even if it is, it becomes possible to make the start timing of each production different. As a result, it is possible to maintain the expectation for the subsequent variation even after the end of one of the performances, and further increase the expectation for the variation when the same starting memory is the target of pre-reading. be able to.

In addition, when outputting the effect sound by applying the automatic channel method in the effect that spans multiple fluctuations, it is different from the effect sound that is output in the effect executed in one variation (for example, reach effect) AUTO groups may be assigned. For example, by assigning the sound effects of a production performed with one variation to an AUTO group that can be assigned to more channels, it is possible to prioritize the output of the production sound effects of the variation, while the output of the production sound effects of the variation is configured with a small number of channels. Sound effects that span multiple fluctuations in an AUTO group that is connected (for example, the sound of “start!”, which is the start sound of the look-ahead timer effect, the counting sound (tit-tit-tit, etc.), which is the sound during the countdown, and the sound effect of the end of the timer , etc.), it is possible to prevent many channels from being occupied for a long period of time.

Furthermore, different AUTO groups may be set for each type of effects that span multiple variations. For example, an AUTO group consisting of two channels is defined for look-ahead timer effects, and an AUTO group consisting of two channels is defined for mini-character effects. As a result, even when the look-ahead timer presentation and the mini-character presentation are executed in parallel, the presentation effect sound of each presentation can be output without being hindered. The effect sound in the background effect is output constantly during the effect like BGM, or it is only output when the background is switched. channel (AUTO group) may be substituted.

Controls such as the output of sound effects, the movement of movable characters, and the lighting of lamps, etc., can be executed in accordance with the liquid crystal display by the production SW in the production that spans multiple variations such as the look-ahead timer production, background production, and mini character production. is. In particular, when the end timing of the effect cannot be specified at the start of the effect, it is difficult to control the effect device at the timing preset by the sub-effect block data. By controlling the , it is possible to realize a production with a sense of unity. In addition, in the case of outputting the effect sound of the effect for which the end timing of the effect is not specified at the start of the effect, the sub effect block data for outputting the corresponding effect sound is repeatedly executed while the effect continues, and when the effect ends, Execution of the sub effect block data may be stopped.

On the other hand, when it is possible to specify the end timing of the effect at the start of the effect, such as the look-ahead timer effect, the liquid crystal effect block data that performs the display effect and the sub effect block data that performs the effect with sound, accessories, etc. can be executed as As a result, it is possible to independently define the display effect and the effect using sounds, accessories, etc., and to configure the effect by freely combining various effect block data. For example, a plurality of types of liquid crystal effect block data defining the display mode of the timer in the timer counting effect and sub-effect block data defining the notification sound to be output when the timer counting effect is executed are prepared and combined freely. It is possible to diversify the variations of production.

[33. Configuration 2 for displaying a plurality of identification patterns]
By the way, in recent gaming machines, the effect display device 1600 executes a wide variety of effects in order to enhance the interest of the game. There was a possibility that the production area would be narrowed depending on the area where it was set. In order to prevent this, the area where the identification pattern is displayed is temporarily reduced. However, continuing the variable display while changing the display area of the identification pattern may complicate the control or increase the load on the control. Furthermore, it is necessary to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by making the aspect of reducing or enlarging the identification pattern suitable for the content of the presentation.

Therefore, the production display device 1600 is provided with a plurality of display areas for performing variable display of the identification symbols, and is configured so that the variable display of a plurality of sets of identification symbols is performed at the same time. The configuration for displaying a plurality of sets of identification symbols in different modes (high-decoration dynamic display, low-decoration dynamic display) in order to meet the needs of the player has been described with reference to FIG. In the embodiment, it is configured so that the player can visually recognize the variable display of the identification symbol in at least one of the display areas during the symbol variation. At this time, the decoration mode of the identification pattern in each display area may be the same or may be different.

[33-1. Example of configuration for simultaneously displaying identification patterns in multiple areas]
FIG. 464A is a diagram showing an example in which identification symbols variably display in a plurality of display areas according to this embodiment. The display area A occupies about 70% of the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 from the top. In addition, the display area B occupies the lower right area of the entire display area when viewed from the front. In addition, the pending display is arranged in the lower left part of the screen. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the fourth pattern is not displayed within the display area of the effect display device 1600, but is displayed by a light emitter such as an LED or a lamp (not shown).

In the example shown in FIG. 464A, first, as shown in (A), the starting memory is digested and the variable display of identification symbols is started. At this time, the variable display of the first identification pattern is started in the display area A (first display area), and the variable display of the second identification pattern is started in the display area B (second display area). In this embodiment, the first identification pattern displayed in the display area A and the second identification pattern displayed in the display area B are displayed in substantially the same manner, but the first identification pattern displayed in the display area A And the second identification symbols displayed in the display area B may be in a symbol display mode in which the player can recognize that they are equivalent symbol combinations.

Further, the variable display of the first identification pattern and the second identification pattern is started at the same time and stopped at the same time, and the timing at which the stop mode of all the identification patterns is finally determined is the same. In this embodiment, the individual patterns (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern) of each identification pattern are stopped at the same time, but if the fixed timing of the patterns is the same, the stop timing of each pattern is arbitrary. good too.

The layers of the screen shown in FIG. 464A are composed of a background layer, a pattern layer (first identification pattern), a pattern layer (second identification pattern), an announcement layer, and the like. In this embodiment, since the first identification pattern and the second identification pattern are displayed in the same manner, it is possible to use other drawing information by changing the coordinates and size for displaying the identification pattern. As a result, the drawing data can be shared, and the data volume can be reduced. Moreover, it becomes possible to share drawing processing, and to suppress the complication of the program structure.

As in the above-described example, the first identification pattern is subjected to various effects up to the result display (derivation of the lottery result) of the variable display (symbol variation, dynamic display). For example, when switching the identification pattern from the high-speed display mode to the low-speed display mode, the identification pattern can be replaced by executing a callback based on the production SW for replacing the identification pattern, and the identification pattern can be decorated until just before the stop. can. Further, in the present embodiment, the second identification symbol is also variably displayed in the same effect mode as the first identification symbol, but it is also possible to change the effect content by adapting it to the display area. Further, the display mode of the second identification symbol may be changed based on the effect SW defined for the first identification symbol. As a result, the variable display of the first identification pattern and the variable display of the second identification pattern can be smoothly interlocked.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of symbols is started, the left identification symbol, the right identification symbol, and the middle identification symbol are stopped in this order. FIG. 464A(B) shows a state in which the left identification symbols of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol are stopped. At this time, an airplane-shaped announcement character is displayed on the upper right side of the display area, and a tree-shaped announcement character is displayed on the lower part of the display area. Note that each preview character is drawn on a different layer, and the image can be changed or deleted individually. As a result, it is possible to independently execute a plurality of advance notice effects according to the degree of expectation of the variable display.

The character of the airplane displayed as the advance notice effect is displayed while being enlarged by executing the effect in which the character is visually recognized so as to approach the front of the screen according to the degree of expectation of the big win. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 464A(B), an airplane character is displayed in a reduced state in the upper left part of the display area, and is gradually enlarged as the variable display progresses. FIG. 464A(C) shows a state in which the variable display of the right identification symbol has stopped and reach has occurred. The airplane character has moved to the upper center and is displayed larger than the character shown in FIG. 464A(B). After that, as shown in FIG. 464A(D), in the ready-to-win state, an advance notice effect is executed in which the first identification symbol is additionally decorated.

After that, as shown in FIG. 464A(E), the display of the airplane character is further enlarged and displayed on the front side of the first identification pattern. At this time, the identification pattern inside the first identification pattern is hidden by the airplane character, and thereafter, the airplane character is further enlarged, and as shown in FIG. 464A (F), the display of the first identification pattern is interrupted. be done. At this time, the variable display of the first identification pattern may be continuously displayed on the back side of the enlarged airplane character without stopping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 464A(G), the variable display of the identification symbols is finished, and the fixed display is performed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 464A(H), the result of the variable display is a big win, and the game shifts to a big win game state.

Subsequently, the second identification pattern will be further described. As shown in FIGS. 464A(A) and 464A(B), the second identification pattern is also displayed in a variable manner in the same manner as the first identification pattern. Further, as shown in FIG. 464A (C), when the left identification pattern and the right identification pattern stop at the same identification pattern "5" and reach occurs, as shown in FIG. 464A (D), the first identification pattern Similarly, the second identification pattern is also displayed with additional decoration.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 464A (E) and 464A (F), the variable display of the second identification pattern even if the player cannot visually recognize the first identification pattern due to the advance notice effect in the variable display after the occurrence of the reach. is in a state where the player can visually recognize it.

In this embodiment, the player can visually recognize at least one of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol during the variable display of the identification symbols. Therefore, even if the first identification pattern or the second identification pattern cannot be visually recognized, the second identification pattern is displayed with additional decoration in the same manner as the first identification pattern, so that the decoration mode of the identification pattern changes. To surely notify a player of the degree of expectation of a big win.

Also, the additional decoration of the first identification pattern and the additional decoration of the second identification pattern may be different. The maximum number of stars for the additional decoration may be set to 3 for the second identification symbol so as to be easily recognized by the player. The player can determine that the state in which only the second identification symbol is displayed is the state in which the preview image with the high expectation that the first identification symbol is hidden is displayed, or the second identification symbol is displayed. If there is no additional decoration of the pattern, it may be judged that the prediction image that hides the first identification pattern is displayed as a so-called fake performance with a low expectation.

For the first identification pattern and the second identification pattern, common image data may be used and drawn on a layer corresponding to each display area, and the additional decoration may be set for each display area. In this way, identification patterns are variably displayed in a plurality of areas, and part of the image data required for variably displayed images is shared, thereby saving the capacity for storing image data and increasing the variety of effects. can be done.

Further, not only the image data but also the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for variably displaying the identification pattern in each display area may be made common. For example, by parameterizing the display position (coordinates) of identification patterns, layer-related information, etc., and processing them in a common procedure, the development efficiency of programs related to production can be improved and changes in production specifications can be flexibly handled. becomes possible. Furthermore, whether or not to display the additional decoration is determined at the time of execution based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern or the like, and the corresponding process is simply executed. A more effective performance can be realized without complicating the performance control.

In the example shown in FIG. 464A, the notice image (character) is displayed on the front side of the identification pattern so as to hinder the recognition of the identification pattern. This is the same even if the recognition of the variable display of the identification pattern is obstructed by the action of the character. For example, the movable area of the character may be set so that the display area B is visible even when the character moves to the front side of the display area and becomes difficult to see except for the lower part of the screen.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a period in which the first identification symbol becomes difficult to see due to the advance notice effect, and only the second identification symbol can be seen by the player. Therefore, a callback is executed based on the identification symbol replacement effect SW of the second identification symbol, and the replacement table and reel index replacement work number of the identification symbol are performed based on the stop symbol and the stop timing of the symbol at the switching timing of the identification symbol. By using the table to replace not only the second identification pattern but also the first identification pattern, the identification pattern is decorated until just before the stop. As a result, the decoration for the first identification pattern and the decoration for the second identification pattern can be executed at the same timing or interlocked timing, so that the performance effect can be increased and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, the display area B for displaying the second identification pattern may not be fixed. The arrangement of the display area B may be changed according to the type of the advance notice effect, and the position where the second identification pattern is displayed may be changed. For example, the coordinates of the layer corresponding to the display area B are set to values corresponding to the preview effect. Also, a plurality of layers corresponding to the display area B may be prepared. At this time, a plurality of types of layers are prepared corresponding to the position where the second identification pattern is displayed, a parameter for displaying the corresponding layer is set to ON according to the type of the advance notice effect, and a parameter for the layer not to be displayed is set. to OFF. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to display the second identification pattern at a preset position, it is also possible to display the identification pattern separately from the first identification pattern and the second identification pattern, and By setting the parameters of all layers to OFF, it is also possible to display only the first identification pattern.

The display of the layer corresponding to the display area may be executed based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern, the advance notice effect, and the like. For example, when the movable accessory moves to the left front of the screen and the left side of the screen becomes difficult to see, the effect SW that sets the display area B on the right side of the screen is set to ON to display the second identification pattern. However, the effect SW displayed at another position may be set to OFF.

In addition, the effect sound is output corresponding to the variable display of the identification pattern in each display area, but in this embodiment, the variable display of the first identification pattern and the variable display of the second identification pattern are executed in a similar manner. Therefore, a common effect sound may be output. In addition, when only the narrow display area B is displayed, such as when the announcement effect is executed in front, the volume of the effect sound is lowered, or the output of the effect sound is stopped. Alternatively, the sound output related to the variable display may be suppressed by giving priority to the output related to the advance notice effect.

Furthermore, the sounds (BGM, effect sound) related to the variable display of the identification pattern are managed as one AUTO group, and the sounds (BGM, effect sound) related to the notice effect are managed as another AUTO group, and an automatic channel system is used. sound control by At this time, by setting the priority of the AUTO group outputting the sound related to the notice performance to be high, it is possible to automatically prioritize the output of the sound output by the notice performance, and the performance control becomes complicated. can be suppressed. As described above, by setting parameters such as whether or not to output sound and the volume suppression value, it is possible to suppress the output of other effect sounds that are output while the sound related to the announcement effect is being output. can.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if it becomes difficult to visually recognize the identification pattern during the variable display due to an advance notice effect or the like, by performing the variable display of the identification pattern in a plurality of display areas, any one of the Since it suffices for the player to be able to visually recognize the variable display of the identification pattern, the restriction on the area in which the notice effect is executed can be relaxed. In addition, it is possible to relax restrictions on the range in which the movable accessory operates.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, variable display is performed in a plurality of display areas in the same manner, so drawing can be performed using a common program and image data. On the other hand, even when the decoration image is displayed superimposed on the identification pattern in each display area, a layer to be displayed on the front side of the identification pattern is prepared for each display area, and only the program and image data corresponding to the decoration image are prepared. can be realized by As a result, it is only necessary to prepare a minimum program and data that will be the difference, suppressing the increase in image data accompanying the diversification of the performance content, suppressing the complication of performance control, and suppressing the increase in storage capacity. can be

[33-2. Modified example 1 of configuration capable of simultaneously displaying identification patterns in multiple areas]
In the above-described configuration example, the identification pattern is variably displayed in the same manner in the display area A and the display area B from the time when the identification pattern starts to change until it stops. An example will be described in which identification symbols are variably displayed, and variably displayed in the same manner (synchronized) in each display area when a predetermined condition is established.

FIG. 464B is a diagram showing an example in which identification patterns are independently variably displayed in a plurality of display areas according to the present embodiment, and variably displayed in the same manner at a predetermined timing. In this modification, the variable display of identification symbols is started simultaneously in each display area. Fluctuating display continues. Similarly, as shown in (C), even if the right symbol stops in the display area A and the left and right symbols form the ready-to-reach mode, the variable display of all identification symbols continues in the display area B.

Subsequently, after the ready-to-win state is formed in (C), after the ready-to-win effect for a predetermined period progresses, all the left, middle, and right patterns are re-changed, as shown in (D), the identification pattern is re-changed. ("Next") is displayed in the middle symbol, and as shown in (E), the variable display of all identification symbols is started again. Subsequently, as shown in (F), the right and left symbols are stopped so as to form a ready-to-win mode. It should be noted that the second identification pattern in the display area B does not form the ready-to-win state at the timing of this ready-to-win state. As described above, after the first identification pattern displayed in the display area A forms the ready-to-win state, the pattern indicating the re-fluctuation of the identification pattern is displayed in the middle pattern, so that the re-fluctuation is performed. Therefore, at the timing when the first identification pattern displayed in the display area A becomes the reach state, if it changes again, the second identification pattern does not form the reach state, and if it does not change again, the second identification If the symbols form a ready-to-win mode, it becomes possible for the player to determine whether or not the player will be re-varyed by looking at the display of this second identification symbol, which may lead to a decrease in interest (especially the above-mentioned re-varying symbols). It is necessary to maintain as much as possible the player's interest in the possibility of re-fluctuation because of the game specifications that increase the expectation of a big hit by repeatedly stopping and re-fluctuation). Therefore, in this modified example, at the timing when the first identification symbol forms the ready-to-win state, the second identification symbol does not form the ready-to-win state, thereby solving such a problem. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the ready-to-win state is formed in the first identification symbol (for example, when a high-expectation ready-to-win effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is performed after becoming a ready-to-win), as shown in (G), the second The identification pattern is displayed in the same manner as the first identification pattern in the reach mode, and after that, the display area B is displayed with additional ornamentation in the same manner as the display area A, and the display area B is displayed in the same display mode as the display area A. An identification pattern is displayed. (H) and (I) are the same as (G) and (H) in FIG. 464A. In addition, in FIG. 464B, for example, after the high-expected reach effect is performed, the second identification pattern is displayed in the same manner as the first identification pattern in the display area B (in other words, the first identification pattern is For a predetermined period after reaching reach, the first identification pattern and the second identification pattern are in different display modes), and in the display area B, the additional decoration display is performed in the same manner as in the display area A. , this timing can be triggered by another predetermined condition.

The predetermined condition may be, for example, the point in time when the final re-fluctuation is started while repeatedly executing the temporary stop of the identification pattern, or the start timing of the re-fluctuation after the last temporary stop in the pseudo-continuation. can also Also, the start timing of the ready-to-win effect may be the timing when the display modes of the respective display areas are made the same.

As another predetermined condition, the predetermined condition may be established when the advance notice effect by a specific movable accessory is executed, for example, when there is a possibility that part of the display area may become invisible. At this time, the display mode of each display area may be set to be the same from the beginning assuming that a predetermined condition is established from the start of fluctuation, or the execution timing of the advance notice effect by a specific movable accessory may be matched. The execution timing of the advance notice effect is, for example, the elapsed time from a specific timing such as the start of fluctuation. Furthermore, when the movable accessory is operated by the operation of the effect button, the operation of the effect button may be set as a predetermined condition so that the display modes of the respective display areas are controlled to be the same.

Further, when the expectation of a big hit is high, a predetermined condition may be established. This is because there is a high possibility that a flashy presentation other than the presentation by the movable accessory will be executed. Also in this case, the predetermined condition may be established from the start of fluctuation. Furthermore, the various timings described above may be combined, for example, the timing of executing a ready-to-win effect with a high expectation of a big hit, or the timing of starting the final temporary fluctuation when executing a performance with a movable accessory. .

As described above, according to this modification, similar to the above-described embodiment, the display mode of the identification pattern in each display area is made the same while maintaining the effect of alleviating the restriction on the area where the announcement effect is executed. By adjusting the (synchronized) timing, it is possible to realize various effects. In addition, in the first half, where the execution frequency of production with movable accessories is low, the control load is reduced by simplifying the display mode of some display areas (low-decoration mode), and in the second half, where the production with high expectations is performed. To increase interest in a game by making it possible to suppress the restriction of performance contents such as restriction of the movement range of a movable accessory by setting the same display mode (high decoration mode) in all display areas. can be done.

[33-3. Modified example 2 of configuration capable of simultaneously displaying identification patterns in multiple areas]
In the example described above, the identification pattern is variably displayed in the same display mode in each display area, and then the same pattern is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the modified example described here, it is possible to stop-display the identification symbols in different modes (designs) after the identification symbols are variably displayed in each display area.

FIG. 464C is a diagram showing an example in which identification patterns are displayed in a variable manner in each of a plurality of display areas according to this embodiment, and stopped at different patterns. Since (A) to (F) are the same as the example shown in FIG. 464A, illustration of (C) to (E) is omitted. It should be noted that the game machine may display identification symbols in a variable manner in the same manner as in Modification 1 shown in FIG.

In this modified example, when a plurality of types of winning types are prepared, and when the same mode (identification pattern) is stopped and displayed in each display area, the "first win" is displayed, while each display area has a different mode. When the (identification symbol) is stopped and displayed, it indicates a "second win" (for example, a "minor win") different from the "first win". As shown in FIG. 464C (G), in the display area A, the identification symbols are all stopped at the same "5", "5", and "5". ”, “V”, and “5” are stopped. In this modified example, when a small win is prepared as the second win, as shown in FIG. A game ball can be received in the V zone arranged in the game area. When a game ball wins in the V zone, for example, it becomes possible to shift to a high probability state.

As described above, according to this modified example, it is possible to inform the player of the details of the winning by indicating the winning type by combining the identification symbols stopped and displayed in a plurality of display areas. . For example, it is possible to indicate whether or not the stop symbol in the display area A is "win", and to indicate the type of "win" by the stop symbol in the display area B.

Also, the combination of stop symbols in each display area makes it difficult for the player to misunderstand the result of the variable display. Specifically, when the stop symbol in the display area A indicates "hit", the same identification symbol is stopped and displayed so that the player can clearly recognize the win. The display area B should also be prevented from being misunderstood by the player. For example, when the result of the variable display is "missing", the same identification pattern may be stopped and displayed to prevent the player from being misunderstood. In the case of a so-called "big hit", the same identification pattern is stopped and displayed in the display area A. On the other hand, in the case of a "minor win", which gives less game value than the "big hit", the same identification is displayed only in the display area B. You may make it stop-display by a pattern.

When the type of "hit" is suggested by the display mode of the display area B, for example, when the same identification pattern as the display area A is stopped and displayed, it is "probability variable big hit", or the same different from the display area A When the identification symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be set as a "normal jackpot" that does not shift to the variable probability state. Furthermore, only the medium pattern may be used as another identification pattern to recognize the type of the big hit. The number of rounds may be suggested by stopping the symbols corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the middle symbols.

Furthermore, the display area B may be made non-display when the identification pattern is stopped, and the player may have a sense of anticipation without notifying the type of "hit" while announcing the "hit". For example, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation by making it ambiguous whether or not the probability fluctuates after the big hit. Also, the display area B may suggest an advantageous game state (probability change state, time reduction state, etc.) to be generated after the end of the big win game.

Further, after informing the player of the big win in the display mode in the display area A, the display of the identification pattern may be continued only in the display area B. If the display in the display area B is continued, the player can recognize the big win, and after notifying the big win, the identification pattern in the display area A is hidden to perform subsequent effects. area can be secured. In this case, the display of "5", "V" and "5" at the start of the big win in the display area B is changed to "5", "5" and "5" which were displayed in the display area A from the middle of the big win game. It may be displayed so as to match the In addition, this display may be displayed until the big win game ends and the identification pattern starts to change in the game after the big win game ends, or the display may be stopped at a predetermined timing in the middle of the big win game. . However, even when the display is stopped in the middle of the big win game, it is preferable to display the winning symbols in the display area A or the display area B when the game is started after the big win game ends. In this case, for example, ``5'', ``V'', and ``5'' are displayed at the winning timing in the display region B, but after the big winning game is finished, ``5'', ``V'', and ``5'' may be similarly displayed. The display may be changed to "5" "5" "5" with a game intervening.

According to this modification, similarly to the above-described embodiment, by performing a variable display of identification symbols in a plurality of display areas, it is possible to relax the restriction on the area in which the announcement effect is executed, and stop symbols in the plurality of display areas. By combining , it becomes possible to inform the player of the result of the game in detail, and furthermore, it becomes possible to realize various notification modes. As a result, the expectation of the player can be heightened, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[34. Substrate as a constituent element of the decorative body]
By the way, in recent gaming machines, in order to realize a wide variety of presentations, the number of accessories (decorative bodies) mounted on the gaming machine has been increased, or the game has been enhanced by enlarging the size or transforming the machine. However, since the size of the game machine is set to a predetermined size, the game area is limited, and factors such as the increase in size of the liquid crystal display device have limited the size and arrangement of characters. Therefore, there is a possibility that the performance becomes monotonous and the interest in the game is lowered. The embodiments described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a means for increasing the size of accessories and improving the flexibility of arrangement.

The accessories provided in the game machine are visually recognizable from the front side of the player, and are provided with decorative parts rich in decorativeness in order to enhance the interest of the game, and are provided with light emitters such as LEDs inside. , light is emitted in a mode according to the game state, the degree of expectation of the variable display, and the like. If the luminous body is arranged on a substrate like an LED, the decorative section has a transmission section through which the light output from the luminous body can be transmitted. The transmissive portion may be, for example, a transparent member that allows light to pass through, or may be a member having a mesh of holes through which light passes.

On the other hand, by providing the transmissive portion, the player can visually recognize the board on which electronic components such as LEDs and resistors are mounted through the transmissive portion. Usually, the board is mounted with electronic parts necessary for exhibiting the production effect, and is not premised on being visually recognized by the player. However, in the decorative portion having a transparent portion through which light can pass, there is a possibility that the board arranged inside the decorative portion will be visually recognized by the player, and the decorative effect will be reduced.
On the other hand, if the transparency of the transmissive part is reduced, or if the surface of the transmissive part is made of a material that reflects light from the outside, the expected effect may not be obtained if the substrate is not visible. be. Furthermore, if the LEDs are arranged in a position where the player cannot see them from the outside of the decorative portion or the transmissive portion, the size of the decorative portion may unintentionally increase in size.

Therefore, an object of the present embodiment is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a reduction in the decoration effect even if the substrate is viewed through the transparent portion that constitutes the decoration portion.

[34-1. game board]
FIG. 465 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game board 5 of the game machine in this embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 465, an effect display device 1600 (on the game board side) is arranged in the center of the game area 5a. Also, although not shown, in the game area 5a, like the game board 5 described above, there are a plurality of general prize winning openings which are always open to accept the hit game balls, and a plurality of general prize winning openings. The mouth is a starting opening that is always open to accept game balls at different positions in the game area 5a, a gate part that detects the passage of the game ball, and a game ball to the first starting opening or the second starting opening. It is equipped with a big prize winning opening etc. that can accept game balls in any of them according to the result of the lottery.

Furthermore, in the upper right part of the game area 5a, a character role object 9100 in the shape of a character reading "Super heat" is arranged. FIG. 466 is a perspective view showing the shape of the character accessory 9100 in this embodiment. The character accessory 9100 is, as shown in FIG. 466, a plate-like accessory that imitates the character shape of "Super heat". The production by the character role 9100 is executed in a mode according to the degree of expectation of the pattern variation. For example, it may emit light in a color corresponding to the degree of expectation, or may change the light emission mode such as repeating turning on and off in a predetermined pattern. In addition, alternately lighting up "strong" and "heat", and if the expectation is high, light up both characters to notify a big hit, and finally turn off both characters to execute a so-called fake effect You may

As will be described later, the character accessory 9100 has a cover member (cover body) 9110 that is visually recognized by the player, and is composed of a transparent portion 9111 and a non-transparent portion 9112. The transparent portion 9111 can emit light by a light emitter provided inside. In this embodiment, the transmissive portion (first region) 9111 is the portion corresponding to the character, the non-transmissive portion (second region) 9112 is the outer edge portion of the character, and the transmissive portion 9111 is substantially colorless and transparent. . The non-transmissive portion 9112 may also be transmissive, eg, colored with a different degree of transparency than the transmissive portion 9111 . Details of the character role product 9100 will be described with reference to FIG. 468 and subsequent drawings.

In addition, the character role 9100 partially overlaps the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600, and the light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 is irradiated to the back side of the character role 9100. At this time, by making the back side of the character accessory 9100 a reflective member, it is possible to execute an effect combined with the effect executed by the effect display device 1600 . Also, part of the character role 9100 may be configured to be transmissive, and an effect may be performed in which the light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 is transmitted through the character role 9100 .

In addition, a space is formed between the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a, and a snowman role 9200 imitating the shape of a "snowman" is formed on the front side of the lower left part of the effect display device 1600. are placed. The snowman accessory 9200 is formed in the shape of a three-dimensional doll, and the player can visually recognize a part of the side and back sides of the snowman accessory 9200 from the side.

FIG. 467 is a perspective view showing the shape of the snowman accessory 9200 according to this embodiment, where (A) is a view from the front and (B) is a view from the back. The snowman accessory 9200 is formed of a member having a transparent appearance, and exerts a production effect by transmitting light from a light-emitting body (LED) provided inside to the outside.

The snowman accessory 9200 is composed of a hat, a head, and a body. The head and body are made of a permeable member so that the player can see the inside. The hat part has a bucket shape and is provided on the upper side of the head. The hat portion is made of a colored member, and in this embodiment, can transmit light emitted from a light emitting body such as an LED provided therein. Details of the snowman accessory 9200 will be described with reference to FIG. 480 and subsequent drawings.

The snowman role 9200, like the character role 9100, is executed in a mode corresponding to the degree of expectation of pattern variation. For example, it may emit light in a color corresponding to the degree of expectation, or may be repeatedly turned on and off. Also, only the head may be lit, or only the body may be lit. Also, at the first stage of the notice performance, only the hat part may be lit to increase the player's expectation, and the head part may be sequentially lit from the head part to the body part.

[34-2. Character role (extreme heat)]
Next, a detailed configuration of the character role product 9100 will be described. FIG. 468 is an exploded perspective view of the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment. The character role object 9100 includes a cover member (cover body) 9110 arranged on the front side visible to the player, and a character role object substrate arranged on the back side of the cover member 9110 and equipped with a light emitter 9301 such as an LED. 9120 and a base member 9130 attached to the back side of the cover member 9110 and the character and character board 9120 .

[34-2-1. cover member]
The cover member 9110 is formed with a peripheral wall portion 9113 protruding rearward on the outer periphery, and the space on the back side surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 can accommodate the character accessory board 9120 . FIG. 469 is a view of the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment viewed from the back side. The state in which the character accessory board 9120 is housed will be described later with reference to FIG. As described above, the cover member 9110 is formed of a transmissive portion 9111 imitating the character of “hot” which can transmit light, and a non-transmissive portion 9112 which is formed around the periphery of the transmissive portion 9111 and which hardly transmits light. ing.

In addition, the peripheral wall portion 9113 forming the outer peripheral portion of the character object 9100 is made of a material that does not easily transmit light, like the non-transmissive portion 9112, and may be the same member as the non-transmissive portion 9112. In addition, when the characters are individually lit, it is necessary to provide a peripheral wall portion 9113 between the characters in order to separate the characters. At this time, the character accessory board 9120 may be prepared for each character, or the board may be integrated.

The transmissive portion 9111 is made of a colorless and transparent material so that the inside of the character accessory 9100 can be visually recognized. At the time of performance execution, light is transmitted through the transmissive part 9111 and the light is blocked by the non-transmissive part 9112 by means of a light emitting body 9301 provided inside, thereby making the characters of "extreme heat" stand out and heightening the expectation of the player. be able to. In addition, it is possible not only to transmit light from a light emitting body (LED) 9301 arranged on the character role board 9120, but also to allow the player to visually recognize the character role board 9120 itself. .

In this embodiment, a light diffusing portion that diffuses light is formed in the non-transmissive portion 9112 on the back side of the cover member 9110 . Instead of forming the light diffusion portion, a light guide member may be provided between the cover member 9110 and the character board 9120, and the diffusion member is provided by guiding the light from the light emitter 9301 to the transmission portion 9111. It is possible to obtain the same effect as in the case of A modification using a light guide member will be described later.

With the above configuration, the light inside the character object can be efficiently collected with a small number of light emitters, so that the number of light emitters 9301 arranged on the character character object board 9120 can be reduced, and the light emission can be reduced. The degree of freedom of arrangement of the body 9301 can be increased.

Furthermore, the non-transmissive portion 9112 may be formed of a transmissive material having a lower transmittance than the transmissive portion 9111 without forming a light diffusing portion. For example, by using a colored material having transparency, the entire character accessory 9100 is made to emit light, and the difference in the degree of transparency makes the character part stand out while producing a production effect different from that in the case of using the light diffusing part. be able to.

[34-2-2. Character accessory board]
Figure 470 is a diagram showing the front side of the character role product board 9120 of the character role product 9100 of the present embodiment. Also, FIG. 471 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory board 9120 is accommodated in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment, and shows the back side of the character accessory board 9120. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 470 and 471, the character accessory substrate 9120 does not have a general rectangular shape, but has the shape of the character accessory 9100 according to the contour shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110. It has a similar shape. Also, the surface of the character and role board 9120 is coated with a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color). Although various information is displayed on the character board 9120, it may be displayed by silk printing or the like, or may be displayed by etching characters.

Further, the back side of the character role board 9120 is covered by the base member 9130 when attached to the game board 5, so that the player cannot see it. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the color of the substrate to a specific color, but the manufacturing cost for processing the front and back surfaces separately rather than the cost of the material should be compared to decide whether to apply the resist only to the front surface or both surfaces. You just have to decide.

The character/accessory board 9120 is visible from the transparent portion 9111 of the cover member 9110 as described above. Therefore, if the color of the board does not match the decoration mode of the accessory, the decorative effect may be reduced, or the electronic components arranged on the board may interfere with the decorative effect. Therefore, in this embodiment, the character accessory board 9120 itself is used as one of the decorative elements. For example, the character and role board 9120 is colored in a color (specific color) that matches the decoration mode of the character instead of the general green color, or the electronic components mounted on the character and role board 9120 are used to create the character pattern. Arrange so as to form an eggplant. The color in line with the decoration mode of the character is, for example, a color related to the character or theme appearing in the performance of the character (gaming machine). Hereafter, it demonstrates concretely, referring drawings.

First, a specific mode for using the shape, color, etc. of a substrate provided on a decorative body such as a accessory as a decorative element will be described. Since the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment has the transparent portion 9111 as described above, the character accessory substrate 9120 provided inside can be visually recognized. Therefore, by coloring the character accessory substrate 9120 in a specific color that matches the decoration mode of the character accessory 9100, the overall color of the character accessory 9100 is configured. For example, if the surface of the character role board 9120 is blue, the entire character object becomes blue when the light emitter 9301 does not emit light, and the light emission color of the light emitter 9301 when the light emitter 9301 emits light, thereby giving a completely different impression to the game. can give to anyone. In particular, when the transmissive portion 9111 occupies a large area in the entire accessory, a greater effect can be obtained.

[34-2-3. Luminous Body/Electronic Component]
A plurality of light emitters (LEDs) 9301 are arranged on the surface (front) side of the character and role board 9120 . The light emitters 9301 may all have the same emission color, or may have a plurality of different emission colors. The luminous body 9301 may be lit according to the progress of the game, and the lighting position may be changed according to the content of the effect. When there are different kinds of emitted colors, the colors may be emitted in accordance with the degree of expectation, or different kinds of emitted colors may be emitted at the same time.

In this embodiment, as described above, the character/accessory board 9120 is colored in a specific color. Therefore, since the color changes depending on the combination of the specific color of the character and role board 9120 and the luminescent color of the light emitter 9301, various effects can be realized by causing the light emitter 9301 to emit light of a plurality of colors. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the light emitting body 9301 is turned off, the specific color colored on the character role board 9120 is recognized. The specific color applied to 9120 and the light emission color of light emitter 9301 can be alternately recognized as different colors. For example, when the character and object substrate 9120 is colored blue as described above, if the light emitting body 9301 is slowly blinked in red, the light and darkness are provided, and the red and blue character objects are alternately displayed. It can be recognized as a character with a completely different color.

Electronic parts other than the light emitter 9301 are mounted on the back side of the character and role board 9120 . Specifically, they are a resistor 9302 , an IC 9303 and a connector 9304 . In the present embodiment, since these electronic components cannot be visually recognized by the player, any arrangement that does not cause any technical problems may be used. Further, as shown in FIG. 471, on the back side of the character and character board 9120, information about the light emitter 9301 arranged on the front side is printed, and the electronic parts arranged on the front side even from the back side are printed. can recognize information about Information indicating the position of the light emitter 9301 is indicated by a dotted line to prevent misidentification.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 470, only the light-emitting bodies 9301 are arranged on the front side, and no information regarding electronic components is displayed. This is to prevent the decoration effect from being reduced by the player visually recognizing the silk-printed characters (for example, the part number of the electronic component (“LED1” in FIG. 471, etc.)). The information may be displayed in a color that is difficult for the player to visually recognize as necessary, such as for efficiency of the display. For example, when the color of the character and role board 9120 is colored blue as described above, a similar color such as light blue that has been adjusted to make it identifiable from light and shade is used as the information display. Just do it. Alternatively, the information may be formed by etched characters.

In addition, in the character accessory 9100 according to the present embodiment, electronic parts other than the light emitter 9301 are arranged on the back side of the board that cannot be visually recognized by the player, so the electronic parts such as the resistor 9302 and the IC 9303 are black. . In addition, when the electronic parts must be arranged on the front side, at least a part of the electronic parts such as the back side of the non-transmissive part 9112 is arranged so that it is difficult for the player to see, or the color or color is difficult to see for the player. You may employ|adopt the electronic component of a shape. For example, electronic components having the same color as the specific color may be arranged on the front side.

On the other hand, as described above, the present invention is configured so that the player can visually recognize the board provided inside the accessory. Therefore, an example in which electronic components arranged on a board are used as decorative elements of a character will be described.

Electronic parts are arranged on the surface side of the character role board 9120 at positions visible to the player through the transparent portion 9111 of the cover member 9110 . At this time, the electronic parts are arranged so as to form the character pattern displayed by the character accessory 9100 . For example, electronic components are placed at regular positions to decorate characters.

Also, the arrangement of the light emitters 9301 may prevent the player from recognizing the patterns of the characters when they emit light. Furthermore, by selectively emitting light from light emitters 9301 at positions where electronic components can be recognized even when emitting light and light emitters 9301 at positions where electronic components cannot be recognized when light is emitted, patterns can be obtained. It may be configured to be switchable between presence and absence.

Moreover, it is good also as a decorative element by arrange|positioning an electronic component of colors other than black on the surface side. Although the transmissive part 9111 is colorless and transparent, it may be a lens member or a diffusing member that allows light to pass through, while making it difficult for the player to recognize the pattern by making it difficult to clearly distinguish the electronic components. Note that another specific example will be described with a snowman accessory 9200 to be described later, as to how the arrangement of the electronic components exhibits a decorative effect.

It is also possible to use characters printed on the front surface of the substrate as a pattern. Instead of printing characters in a color that is difficult for the player to recognize in order to prevent the decorative effect from being hindered, the characters that indicate information on electronic parts and boards can be recognized by the player as decorative elements. You may print in a mode (color, shape). This makes it possible to make the pattern of the accessory more complicated, or to change the color by printing in a color different from that of the cover member 9110, thereby enhancing the decorative effect. In addition, by concentrating the characters printed on the board, the player is made to recognize that an area having a color different from that of the cover member 9110 and other parts of the board is formed on the board, thereby enhancing the decorative effect of the entire character. You can make it higher.

[34-2-4. Arrangement of luminous bodies]
Next, the positional relationship between the light emitter 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 will be described. FIG. 472 is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the light emitter 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the luminous body 9301 is arranged at a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 and at a position behind the non-transmissive portion 9112 that is difficult for the player to see. Here, the light emitter 9301 arranged at a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 is assumed to be a light emitter 9301a, and the light emitter 9301b arranged on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 is assumed.

For example, when it is desired to emit strong light, the light emitter 9301a is arranged at a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 so as to irradiate the light directly to the outside. 469, since the light diffusing portion is provided on the back side of the non-transmitting portion 9112, by arranging the light emitter 9301b on the back side of the non-transmitting portion 9112, the light is diffused and softened. It is possible to emit light.

In this manner, the position of the light emitter 9301a may be determined according to the type of role, and by selecting the light emitter 9301 and causing it to emit light, it is possible to switch the light emission mode for one role. Specifically, when it is desired to make the entire role object emit strong light, only the light emitter 9301a or all of the light emitters 9301 are allowed to emit light. All you have to do is

Alternatively, the transmittance of the transmissive portion 9111 may be adjusted so that the luminous body 9301a is slightly difficult to see without being completely colorless and transparent. For example, the transmissive portion 9111 may have a slightly lower transmittance (colored transparent, for example, pale blue) to make it difficult to see the inside, or the surface of the transmissive portion 9111 may be processed (eg, texturing) to diffuse light. You may make it hard to visually recognize the inside in this way. By configuring in this way, the luminous body itself becomes difficult to see, but it can emit more intense light than when it is arranged on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 . In addition, since the degree of freedom in the position of the light emitter 9301 is increased, the degree of freedom in design is increased, and development efficiency can be improved.

In addition, the character/accessory board 9120 itself may not be used as a direct decorative element, but may indirectly enhance the presentation effect. For example, when the specific color of the character and role board 9120 is white, it is possible to increase the reflectance even when the arranged light emitter 9301 is not lit, and when the light emitter 9301 is lit Of course, it is possible to prevent the inside of the character role object 9100 from becoming too dark by reflecting the light from the outside.

Further, since the specific color of the character role board 9120 is white, the character color of the character role product 9100 can be recognized as white as a feature when the light is turned off. In this case, if full-color LEDs (R, G, and B LEDs) are used for the light emitter 9301, the character colors can be expressed in various colors. By superimposing and fusing the light reflected (diffused) from the light diffusing part provided in the substrate surface and the light reflected from the substrate surface, a fantastic effect that cannot be expressed with a single type of light emitter 9301 can be performed. can. At this time, since various effects can be achieved without using multiple types of light emitters 9301, costs can be reduced.

As described above, the character accessories of the present embodiment are configured to be visible to the player by using the color of the board and the electronic components mounted thereon as decorative elements. Since there is no need to In addition, electronic parts that do not serve as decorative elements may be arranged on the back side of the substrate, and by arranging electronic parts other than light emitters such as LEDs on the back side, only the color of the substrate may be used as a decorative element.

[34-2-5. Base material]
The base member 9130 has the same shape as the cover member 9110 when viewed from the front when attached. The peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are brought into contact with each other and fixed by a mounting member (not shown). At this time, the character object substrate 9120 may be fixed to the cover member 9110 or the base member 9130, or the character object substrate 9120 may be accommodated in the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 without being fixed. You may make it Wiring for transmitting signals and supplying electric power to the character board 9120 is omitted from the drawing. just form it.

Alternatively, the cover member 9110 may be directly attached to the game board 5 without using the base member 9130 by providing the cover member 9110 with an attachment portion. In this case, the character accessory board 9120 is attached to the cover member 9110 .

[34-3. Variation 1 of Character Accessory]
Subsequently, the shape of the character object board 9120 does not completely resemble the shape of the character object 9100, and the outer edge of the character object board 9120 matches the contour shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall part 9113 of the cover member 9110. I will explain the case where it is not. In this case, since the light emitter 9301 cannot be arranged over the entire character object 9100, the light guide member 9140 is arranged between the cover member 9110 and the character object substrate 9120 to diffuse the light. It compensates for the lack of light quantity in the portion where 9301 is not arranged. Note that the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are the same as in the example described above.

FIG. 473 is a diagram showing an example of a light guide member 9140 that diffuses the light from the light emitter 9301 in the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment. The light guide member 9140 is surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110, similar to the shape of the character and role board 9120 described above, in order to diffuse the light over the entire back side of the cover member 9110 of the character and role object 9100. It has a shape similar to the shape of the character accessory 9100 according to the contour shape of the space.

Figure 474 is a diagram showing the front side of the character role product board 9120 of the character role product 9100 of the modification 1 of the present embodiment. Also, FIG. 475 shows a state in which the character accessory board 9120 is accommodated in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of Modification 1 of the present embodiment, and is a view showing the back side of the character accessory board 9120. In addition, the configuration other than the shape of the character and role board 9120 is the same as the above-described embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 474 and 475, the character accessory board 9120 is formed with a notch 9122 in which a part of the contour shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall 9113 of the cover member 9110 is missing. In addition, a mounting hole 9121 for fixing to the base member 9130 is formed in the central portion of the character board 9120 . As shown in FIG. 475, the attachment portion of the cover member 9110 is inserted through the attachment hole 9121 and attached to the base member 9130 .

Similarly, the light guide member 9140 is also formed with a mounting hole through which the mounting portion of the base member 9130 is inserted. Note that if the ratio of the notch 9122 is small and the position of the substrate does not shift, the substrate may be fixed by being sandwiched between the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 without providing a mounting structure.

FIG. 476 is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the light emitter 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character accessory 9100 of the modified example of this embodiment. In this modification, since the light emitter 9301 cannot be arranged in the notch 9122, the entire character accessory 9100 is caused to emit light by guiding the light through the light guide member 9140. FIG. At this time, a light diffusion portion may be provided on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 to assist the light guide member 9140 .

Therefore, in the character accessory 9100 of this modification, a part decorated with the character accessory substrate 9120 by using the color of the character accessory substrate 9120 and electronic components as decorative elements, and a notch 9122 are formed. Therefore, parts that are not decorated with the character and role board 9120 are mixed. At this time, the decorative effect can be maintained by performing optical decoration with the light diffusion portion provided on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the light guide member 9140 and the cover member 9110 .

As described in this modification, the shape of the character role board 9120 does not have to be similar to the character role board 9100, and the part not decorated with the character role board 9120 is a light guide member 9140, a light diffusion part, etc. A reduction in the decorative effect may be suppressed by providing and performing optical decoration. Also, the color of the base member 9130 may be made the same as the specific color of the character board 9120 to suppress the reduction of the decorative effect. This makes it possible to make the shape of the character board 9120 relatively simple instead of making it complicated, and increases the degree of freedom in the size of the board, thereby reducing manufacturing costs such as processing of the board. Increase can be suppressed.

In addition, without using the base member 9130, light from the decorative portion can be transmitted through the notch portion 9122 by the decorative portion that can emit light disposed on the back side of the character accessory 9100. good. For example, when the character role object 9100 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600 as in the present embodiment, by displaying an image in the upper right part of the screen, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 and the character role An effect integrated with the light emitting effect by the object 9100 may be executed. Also, by using a transparent member for the base member 9130, a similar effect can be executed. An example using the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described in more detail in Modified Example 2. FIG.

[34-4. Variation 2 of Character Accessory]
Although the notch part 9122 was formed in a part of the substrate in the modified example 1, in the modified example 2, an example in which the character accessory substrate 9120 described above is about half the size of the character accessory 9100 will be described. In addition, the cover member 9110 is configured to directly attach the game board 5 without using the base member 9130. It is configured by member 9140 .

In this modified example, the light guide member 9140 guides the light to a portion where the light emitting body 9301 cannot be arranged, similarly to the modified example 1, thereby performing the optical decoration. Further, in this modified example, since the base member 9130 is not provided, if a luminous body is provided on the back side of the character object 9100, the light of the luminous body can be transmitted.

FIG. 477 is a diagram showing the front side of the character accessory board 9120 of the character accessory 9100 of Modification 2 of the present embodiment, in which the character accessory board 9120 and the light guide member 9140 overlap. state. Also, FIG. 478 shows a state in which the character accessory board 9120 is accommodated in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of Modification 2 of the present embodiment, and shows the back side of the character accessory board 9120. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 477 and 478 , the character accessory board 9120 is configured to occupy about the upper half of the character accessory 9100 . Therefore, when the character role object 9100 of this modification is attached to the game board 5, the upper half is decorated with the specific color colored on the character role object board 9120, but the lower half is not decorated with the character role object board 9120. becomes. On the other hand, since the lower half of the character accessory 9100 can be transmitted through the transparent portion 9111, the back side of the character accessory 9100 may be made to have a specific color to suppress discomfort.

Also, different effects may be executed in the upper and lower areas. For example, in the case of a character character in which characters are written in two stages, the character character object board 9120 is arranged on the upper side, and the light emitter is arranged on the back side of the lower side to perform different effects on the upper and lower stages. Also, if this accessory is movable, different effects can be executed for each stop position by arranging different light emitters for each stop position on the back side.

Furthermore, the luminous body is not limited to LEDs and lamps, but may be the liquid crystal display device 1600 as described above. When moving downward to , the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 can be used to transmit light from the lower part of the role object to perform an effect.

The image displayed on the back side of the character role 9100 is the same color (character role It is preferable to display an image having the same color (the same color as the specific color) and the same shape at a portion where the physical substrate 9120 is exposed. This is because the image is displayed even if the character role object 9100 has some kind of trouble, so the game can be played without giving the player a sense of unease due to the trouble.

By configuring as described above, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of effects with one accessory, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 479, a part of the liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized by the player through a character accessory 9100 . Therefore, in addition to the light guided by the light guide member 9140, the light of the image (video) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed from the back side of the character accessory 9100, and the character accessory substrate 9120 emits light. , the display effect by the liquid crystal display device 1600 can be executed in cooperation. By configuring in this way, the lower side portion of the character and role board 9120 serves as a boundary, and can be used as one element that constitutes the decoration.

FIG. 479 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory 9100 of Modification 2 of the present embodiment is attached to the game board 5. FIG. The upper part of the character object 9100 diffuses the light emitted by the light emitter 9301 mounted on the character object substrate 9120 by the light guide member 9140 . On the other hand, the lower part of the character object 9100 diffuses the light (displayed image) output from the liquid crystal display device 1600 by the light guide member 9140 . At this time, by fusing the light from the light emitter 9301 and the light from the liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect that integrates the effect from the character role object 9100 and the effect from the liquid crystal display device 1600 can be executed.

It should be noted that effects other than the character role object 9100 and the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be combined. For example, when the game board 5 is made of a transparent member, and the decoration effect is enhanced by arranging a light-emitting body on the back side or pasting a sticker or the like, the accessories can be visually recognized through the transparent portion and combined. The decorative effect can be further enhanced by

[34-5. Snowman role]
Next, the snowman accessory 9200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 467, the snowman accessory 9200 is a snowman-like accessory (decorative body), and has a shape in which a spherical head is placed on a slightly larger spherical body than the head. It has become. Furthermore, a bucket-shaped hat portion is placed on the head in an inclined state. The hat portion is made of a colored member, and in this embodiment, it is capable of transmitting light emitted from a luminous body such as an LED provided therein.

FIG. 480 is a diagram showing a cross-sectional view of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment. The snowman accessory 9200 accommodates a substrate (snowman substrate 9220) on which electronic components including light emitters 9301 such as LEDs are mounted inside the cover member 9210 divided into a front side cover member 9210a and a back side cover member 9210b. be done.

The snowman accessory 9200 is used in an effect that is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, since the cover member 9210 is made of a material that allows light to pass through and is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect of transmitting or reflecting the displayed image is executed. good too. Each configuration of the snowman accessory 9200 will be specifically described below.

FIG. 481 is a view of the front side cover member 9210a of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment as seen from the back side. FIG. 482 is a diagram showing the back side cover member 9210b of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment. FIG. 483 is a diagram showing the front side of the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment. FIG. 484 is a diagram showing the back side of the snowman board 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment.

The cover member 9210 (front side cover member 9210a, back side cover member 9210b) of the snowman accessory 9200 is substantially colorless and transparent except for a part, and the substrate (snowman substrate 9220) accommodated inside from the front. ) can be visually recognized from the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 483 and 484, the snowman board 9220 has the shape of the snowman accessory 9200, and has a very well-designed shape. Also, the snowman board 9220 is coated with a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color) in the same manner as the character and character board 9120 . In addition, the structure of the board itself is the same as that of the character board 9120, and various electronic components are mounted on the front side and the back side. As for the codes of the electronic components on the board, the same codes as those of the character accessory 9100 are used.

In this embodiment, the shape of the snowman substrate 9220 is a shape that occupies the interior of the snowman accessory 9200 so that the back side of the snowman accessory 9200 cannot be viewed from the front. As a result, the entire snowman accessory 9200 is recognized as the specific color of the snowman substrate 9220, and the color of the entire accessory is determined. On the other hand, a notch or a hole may be formed in a part of the snowman substrate 9220 so that the back side of the snowman accessory 9200 can be viewed. At this time, an image may be displayed by the liquid crystal display device 1600 from the back of the snowman role object 9200, or a decoration such as a light emitter may be arranged to increase the diversity of presentation.

In addition, the snowman role 9200 has a three-dimensional shape, and the player can visually recognize the side of the snowman role 9200 simply by slightly tilting the line of sight from the front. Since the cover member 9210 has transparency, the player can visually recognize the back surface beyond the side surface of the snowman board 9220 . In the character accessory 9100 configured so that the substrate cannot be visually recognized from the back side, the back side of the substrate does not have to be colored in a specific color, but the back side of the snowman substrate 9220 is also colored in a specific color. As a result, even when the player approaches the liquid crystal display device 1600 and visually recognizes the snowman role 9200 from the side, it is possible to prevent the decorative effect from being reduced. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the form of the accessory, improve the performance effect, and improve the amusement of the game.

Since the player can visually recognize the back surface beyond the side surface of the snowman board 9220, the luminous body 9301 may be arranged on the back side of the snowman board 9220 to cause the entire snowman accessory 9200 to emit light from the back side. . Furthermore, by coloring the back side of the snowman board 9220 in a color different from that of the front side, it is possible to give the player a different impression from when only the light emitters 9301 on the front side emit light. A similar effect can be expected by arranging the light-emitting bodies 9301 having different emission colors while the color of the snowman substrate 9220 is the same. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the light emitting modes of the character and enhance the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 480, the hat portion of the snowman accessory 9200 is provided with an opening, and a cord for transmitting electric power and signals to the snowman substrate 9220 housed inside the snowman accessory 9200 is inserted. there is Various effects are executed by causing light emitters (LEDs) 9301 arranged on the snowman board 9220 to emit light according to the supplied power and signals from the effect control device.

In addition, as described above, the hat portion of the snowman accessory 9200 is colored (eg, red) and has transparency. The permeability of the hat portion is lower than that of other portions of the snowman accessory 9200, making it difficult to visually recognize the inside. Therefore, the connectors 9304 arranged on the snowman board 9220 and the cords connected to the connectors 9304 are arranged in the hat portion so as to make them difficult for the player to see.

The cover member 9210 (front side cover member 9210a) is provided with transparent portions B9211b having different transmittances at portions corresponding to the eyes of the snowman when viewed from the front by the player. The transparent portion other than the hat portion is assumed to be a transparent portion A9211a. In this embodiment, the transmissive portion B9211b is configured such that the interior of the snowman character 9200 can be visually recognized in a blurred state with aberration remaining like a soft focus lens. Therefore, the contours of the electronic components arranged on the snowman board 9220 housed inside the snowman accessory 9200 can be obscured and visually recognized.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 483, in this embodiment, electronic components (resistors 9302) are collectively arranged on a snowman board 9220 corresponding to the eyes of the snowman accessory 9200. FIG. Resistors 9302 are black electronic components, densely arranged in a circle. When the player looks at the snowman accessory 9200 during the game, it is visually recognized through the transparent portion B9211b, and the outline of the electronic component appears blurred. As a result, the electronic components (resistors 9302) aggregated and arranged on the substrate can be recognized as the black eyes of a snowman and constitute a decorative element.

In addition, the part number of the electronic component (the part number printed by silk-screening such as "R1") is silk-printed with white, which is the same specific color as the resist of the snowman board 9220, and yellow, which is the same type, so as to be identifiable. there is In the present embodiment, the resistors 9302 are printed densely like the resistor 9302, so that they are identifiable and function as reflecting light because they are densely printed.

In the present embodiment, the part number of the electronic component (the part number printed by silk-screening such as "R1") may also be silk-printed in black in the same manner as the resistor. As described above, the effect of the lens makes it possible to recognize the eyes of the snowman together with the resistor 9302 .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 484, an electronic component (IC9303 etc.) are placed. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the electronic parts that have a low decorative effect or that may reduce the decorative effect, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game due to the reduction in the performance effect. . At this time, by directing the snowman board 9220 toward the center of the game machine, it is possible to make the electronic components arranged on the back side more difficult to see.

Here, the configuration of the snowman accessory 9200 will be described by focusing on the cover members 9210 (the front side cover member 9210a and the rear side cover member 9210b). The front-side cover member 9210a and the rear-side cover member 9210b do not need to be split evenly in the front-rear direction. good. An example of forming one side (inner side) of the front side cover member 9210a over the snowman base plate 9220 toward the rear will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 485 is a top view of a horizontal cross section of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 485, if the inner cover member of the front side cover member 9210a is formed to extend backward beyond the side surface of the snowman board 9220, most of the appearance of the snowman accessory 9200 visually recognized by the player is is composed of the surface side cover member 9210a. As a result, the attachment point of the front side cover member 9210a to the back side cover member 9210b (the joint between the front side cover member 9210a and the rear side cover member 9210b) is located on the deep side behind the snowman board 9220, which is highly decorative. You can fulfill your role.

In addition, since the colorless and transparent (or substantially colorless and transparent) front side cover member 9210a extends to the rear of the snowman substrate 9220, the snowman substrate 9220 colored in white (specific color) is a snowman accessory 9200 not only on the front surface but also on the back surface. are decorated in white. Although it is desirable that both sides are white as in the present embodiment, only the front side may be white because the player mainly views from the front side.

Also, in FIG. 485, only the inner cover member of the front side cover member 9210a extends backward over the snowman board 9220, but depending on the decoration of the character used, only the outer side may extend behind the board. A mode in which both the inner side and the outer side extend to the rear of the substrate may be adopted.

Further, a configuration for attaching each component of the accessory to each other and attaching the accessory to the game board will be described. In the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 485, the snowman board 9220 is attached by a board attachment portion 9213 and an attachment member 9214 formed on the back side cover member 9210b. At this time, it is preferable to provide the board mounting portion 9213 outside the snowman accessory 9200, which is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Furthermore, the front side cover member 9210a is attached to the back side cover member 9210b by a cover attachment portion (not shown). Also, the back side cover member 9210b is attached to the structure of the game board 5 (not shown), and like the board attachment portion 9213, it is preferable that the attachment portion for the structure is provided outside the snowman accessory 9200. In this way, by arranging the attachment portions of each component of the accessory and the attachment portion of the accessory and the game board 5 on the outside where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, it is possible to suppress the obstruction of the decorativeness of the accessory. can be done.

In addition, not only the outside of the role, but also the part that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, the part made of a colored member (the hat part in the snowman role 9200 of this embodiment), the lens cut for decoration, etc. By providing an attachment portion at a location where the deterioration is lowered, a location where the accessory shape is bent (a boundary portion between the head and the body in the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment, etc.), the decorativeness depending on the attachment location can be suppressed from being damaged.

In the example shown in FIG. 485, the snowman accessory 9200 is composed of the front side cover member 9210a and the back side cover member 9210b, but as shown in FIG. You may do so. FIG. 486 is a top view of a horizontal cross-section of a snowman accessory 9200 in a modified example of this embodiment.

In the modification shown in FIG. 486, the cover member 9210 and the snowman board 9220 are attached to the game board 5 via the base body 9230 . As in the example shown in FIG. 485, both surfaces of the snowman substrate 9220 are preferably white in this modification, but only the surface side may be white.

In this modification, the inner cover member not only extends backward beyond the snowman board 9220, but also extends backward beyond the base body 9230, so that not only the snowman board 9220 but also the base body 9230 can becomes visible from Therefore, in this modification, the base body 9230 can also be configured as a decoration by using the same specific color (for example, white) as the snowman board 9220 . Regarding the attachment of the cover member 9210 and the snowman board 9220 to the base body 9230, as described above, by providing an attachment portion at a location that is difficult for the player to visually recognize and attaching with an attachment member or the like, Impairment of decorativeness can be suppressed.

In this modified example, only the inner side of the cover member 9210 extends backward beyond the snowman board 9220 and the base body 9230. It is also possible to employ a mode in which it extends only to the rear of the substrate or the base or a mode in which it extends to the rear of the substrate or the base on both the inside and the outside.

[34-6. effects, etc.]
In general, electronic circuit boards have a raw board of a basic size, and the cost is greatly affected by how many boards can be obtained from one raw board based on this raw board. In a very simple way, it is designed in a rectangular shape, but the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment has a very well-designed shape. In other words, it can be said that all the elements that make up the board, from the resist and the color of the board to the electronic parts, are used as decorations for the role.

Note that the character role board 9120 of the character role object described above has a substantially rectangular shape. Compared with the snowman board 9220, it has a simpler design, but it can be said that the cover body covering the board has a more designable function.

As described above, in recent years, the inside of the role-thing has not only a light-emitting body (LED), but also a board on which an electronic circuit consisting of electronic parts for controlling the light-emitting body is formed, which is almost in the shape of the role-thing. prepared together. In the first place, the substrate on which the electronic circuit is formed has wiring that electrically connects the electronic components that make up the electronic circuit, and the substrate surface is covered with a protective film ( resist).

Therefore, we focused on the color of the resist, which is the protective film, that is, the color of the substrate, as a way to color the role. Even so, when the transparent part is provided on the front side, the electronic components mounted on the board are visible through the transparent part, and the decorative effect as a character may be reduced. As exemplified by the object 9100 and the snowman accessory 9200, the color of the board, all the elements that make up the board, and the mounted electronic components themselves are also used as decorative elements to prevent the reduction of the decorative effect and improve the game performance. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in

2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is equipped with a plurality of substrates on which electronic components are mounted. Among these, the main board and the payout control board provided on the back side of the game machine are generally housed in a colorless and transparent case, which facilitates inspection and confirmation. On the other hand, in the light-emitting decoration substrate adopted for the movable or non-movable decorative member mounted on the game board panel, the surface facing the player on the front side has a lens that reflects and scatters the light from the light-emitting decoration substrate. Members and the like are provided, and are attached to the game board panel in a state facing the performance display device attached to the game board panel on the rear side. In addition, on the back side of the light emitting decoration board, in order to realize the function of light emitting decoration, connectors for connecting flat cables for receiving control signals from peripheral control means, control elements, drivers, resistors, capacitors, etc. of electronic components are mounted. When such a gaming machine is installed in an amusement arcade, it is difficult to check whether or not there is a problem with the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the light-emitting decoration board in the gaming machine after installation. . This is because the rear surface of the light-emitting decorative substrate faces the surface forming the display area of the effect display device. Therefore, means for solving such problems are shown below.

FIG. 487 is a diagram showing the entire game board 5 in this embodiment. The game board 5 includes a game panel 1100 made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and a game board side performance display device 1600. - 特許庁Also, the game panel 1100 includes a game area 5a, a rail member 5950, and a game panel opening 1100a. The game panel opening 1100 a is formed by punching out a physical opening in the game panel 1100 . A space is formed between the game panel side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 on the front side thereof, and a plurality of accessories are arranged in layers in this space. Specifically, from the front side, at positions close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the board back grass role 6800, the first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second A cloud object 6750 is provided. The first giant tree accessory 6600 consists of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 consists of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. there is In addition, a first grass role 6470 and a second grass role 6475 are provided behind these, a rabbit role 6000 is provided behind them, and a mountain role 6500 is provided behind them. A game board side effect display device 1600 is provided behind 6500 . By arranging a plurality of accessories in layers in this manner, a sense of depth can be created.

FIG. 488(A) is a front view of the rabbit character 6000. FIG. FIG. 488(B) is a perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. FIG. 488(C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. The rabbit character 6000 is configured as a unit by a face cover portion 6010 on the front side, a face substrate 6020 provided on the back side of the face cover portion 6010, and a body portion 6030. FIG. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitting part 6023a and a second face light emitting part 6023b as the face light emitting part 6023 on the front surface. In addition, the face substrate 6020 has a mouth decoration portion 6024 shaped like a rabbit's mouth. A first arm portion 6016 and a second arm portion 6017 made of opaque white synthetic resin are attached to the vertical bottom surface of the face cover portion 6010, imitating the left and right front legs of a rabbit. At the lower end of the face substrate 6020, there is provided a body part 6030 which imitates the body part of a rabbit and is a plate-like member made of opaque white synthetic resin.

FIG. 489(A) is a front view of the face substrate 6020. FIG. FIG. 489(B) is a rear view of the face substrate 6020. FIG. The face substrate 6020 is a plate-shaped member configured by a printed circuit board, and the front and rear surfaces of the face substrate 6020 are entirely covered with a white protective film for protecting the electric circuit provided on the surface. . In addition, on the front side of the face substrate 6020, LEDs forming the first face light emitting portion 6023a and LEDs forming the second face light emitting portion 6023b are provided. A resistor 6027a to a sixth resistor 6027f, a first capacitor 6028a, a second capacitor 6028b, and a connector 6029 are surface-mounted.

As shown in FIG. 489(A), the face substrate 6020 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and two rectangular portions extend upward as a first ear portion 6021 and a second ear portion 6022 on the upper side of the rectangle. It has a shape. A horizontally long rectangular portion imitates a rabbit's face, and a first ear 6021 and a second ear 6022 imitate rabbit's ears. When the face cover portion 6010 is attached to the face substrate 6020, the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are not covered with the face cover portion 6010, and the face substrate 6020 is exposed.

The first ear part 6021 and the second ear part 6022 respectively have a first ear decoration part 6021a and a second ear decoration part 6022a which imitate the inside of a rabbit's ear. The first ear decoration part 6021a and the second ear decoration part 6022a are formed by printing with brown ink on the white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and are visible brown areas. ing. In the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, regions other than the first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are covered with the white protective film described above. Electronic parts such as the control element 6025 are not mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, and the printed circuit board is used only for decoration. .

The face substrate 6020 is provided with a first face light emitting portion 6023a and a second face light emitting portion 6023b. Specifically, the first face light-emitting portion 6023a and the second face light-emitting portion 6023b are configured by LEDs mounted on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, respectively. The first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b can emit light under the control of the peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later in detail.

A mouth decoration part 6024 is provided on the face substrate 6020 . Specifically, the mouth decoration part 6024 is formed by printing with pink ink on the white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and the shape imitating a rabbit's mouth is visible in pink. It has become. On the front surface of the face substrate 6020, the first ear decoration part 6021a and the second ear decoration part 6022a are brown, the mouth decoration part 6024 is pink, and the other area is white.

FIG. 489(B) is a view showing the rear side of the face substrate 6020. FIG. As described above, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is also entirely covered with a white protective film for protecting the circuits, as with the front surface of the face substrate 6020 . A first face light emitting unit 6023a and a second face light emitting unit 6023b are provided on the upper left and right sides of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b provided on the front side. Dotted lines indicating the mounting locations of , and character strings "LED1" and "LED2" indicating the names of the mounted members are formed by printing black ink on a white protective film. . A driver 6026 is surface-mounted between the character string "LED1" and the character string "LED2." Under the driver 6026, a character string "DR1" is formed by printing with black ink on a white protective film.

A capacitor 6028 (a first capacitor 6028a and a second capacitor 6028b) is surface-mounted between the dotted line indicating the mounting location of the first face emitting portion 6023a and the dotted line indicating the mounting location of the second face emitting portion 6023b. Character strings "C1" and "C2" are formed by printing black ink on the white protective film in correspondence with the first capacitor 6028a and the second capacitor 6028b.

Resistors 6027 (first resistor 6027a to sixth resistor 6027f) are surface-mounted on the lower left side of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. FIG. Character strings “R1” to “R6” are formed by printing black ink on the white protective film corresponding to the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f.

A control element 6025 comprising a microcomputer is surface-mounted to the right of the area where the resistor 6027 is mounted. Also, corresponding to the control element 6025, a character string "IC1" is formed by printing with black ink on the white protective film. The control element 6025 drives the driver 6026 based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, and performs lighting control of the LEDs forming the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the LEDs forming the second face light emitting unit 6023b.

A connector 6029 is surface mounted on the lower right side of the rear surface of the face board 6020 . Also, corresponding to the connector 6029, a character string "CN1" is formed by printing with black ink on the white protective film. Through the connector 6029 , control signals from the peripheral control board 1510 are transmitted to the control elements 6025 and power from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the face board 6020 . The power supplied to the face substrate 6020 through the connector 6029 is supplied to the control element 6025, the driver 6026, the LEDs forming the first face light emitting section 6023a and the second face light emitting section 6023b, and the like.

A control element 6025, a driver 6026, a resistor 6027, a capacitor 6028, and a connector 6029 each have a black body and metallic terminals. Metal terminals of the control element 6025, the driver 6026, the resistor 6027, the capacitor 6028, and the connector 6029 are surface-mounted on the face substrate 6020 by soldering. In FIG. 489(B), the main bodies of these electronic parts are shown in black, and the metal terminals and solders of these electronic parts are shown in white.

490 is a perspective view of the face covering portion 6010. FIG. The face cover portion 6010 has a box shape with an open rear side and is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The face cover portion 6010 includes a face cover front portion 6011 forming the front surface, a face cover portion upper surface portion 6012 forming the upper surface, a face cover portion right surface portion 6013 forming the right surface, and a face cover forming the lower surface. It is composed of a lower face portion 6014 and a face cover left face portion 6015 forming the left face.

As shown in FIGS. 488 to 490, a first face light scattering part 6011a and a second face light scattering part 6011a resembling the eyes of a rabbit are provided on the front side of a face cover part front part 6011 that constitutes the face on the front side of the face cover part 6010. As shown in FIGS. A face light scattering portion 6011b is provided. The first face light scattering portion 6011a is provided at a position overlapping the first face light emitting portion 6023a provided on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 when viewed from the front. In addition, the second face light scattering portion 6011b is provided at a position overlapping the second face light emitting portion 6023b provided on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 when viewed from the front. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 488(A), the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b are closer to the front view than the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b, respectively. , and the outlines of the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b in front view are surrounded by the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b, respectively. is configured as

The first facial light scattering portion 6011a and the second facial light scattering portion 6011b are formed by forming fine lens cuts on the front side of the face cover portion front portion 6011, or performing processing such as a satin finish to form the first facial light scattering portion. When the light emitted from the portion 6023a or the second face light emitting portion 6023b is incident, it is formed with a rough surface capable of diffusely reflecting the light. In the face cover front part 6011, light incident on the parts other than the first face light scattering part 6011a and the second face light scattering part 6011b like the first face light scattering part 6011a and the second face light scattering part 6011b The face substrate 6020 located behind is not provided with a structure that diffusely reflects the light, and the face substrate 6020 positioned behind is configured to be directly visible from the front. The rectangular portion forming the region of the face substrate 6020 excluding the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 and the rectangular portion forming the face cover portion 6010 have the same vertical and horizontal flow and just overlap when viewed from the front. placed in position. The face substrate 6020 is screwed from behind into screw holes provided in the face-cover upper surface 6012, the face-cover right surface 6013, the face-cover lower surface 6014, the face-cover left surface 6015, and the like. is attached with

The rear face of the face cover front part 6011 and the face light emitting part 6023 are provided with a predetermined gap (about 1-2 mm). With such a configuration, heat generated in the face light emitting unit 6023 can be easily dissipated, and it is possible to prevent the face light emitting unit 6023 from malfunctioning due to the heat generated by itself. Become. In other examples, such a configuration may also be adopted in the relationship between the light emitting section and a member such as a cover provided corresponding to the light emitting section.

As described above, the rabbit accessory 6000 is composed of the face substrate 6020, the face cover portion 6010 covering the front of the face substrate 6020, and the body portion 6030 provided at the lower end of the face substrate 6020. On the front side of the face substrate 6020, LEDs functioning as a first face light emitting portion 6023a and a second face light emitting portion 6023b are surface-mounted, and face cover portions constituting the front side of the face cover portion 6010 covering the front respectively. A first face light scattering portion 6011a and a second face light scattering portion 6011b provided in the front portion 6011 are configured to irradiate light. Electronic components such as a control element 6025 , a driver 6026 , a resistor 6027 , a capacitor 6028 and a connector 6029 are surface-mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 .

A flat cable (not shown) is connected to the connector 6029 and receives a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 for driving the LEDs constituting the face light emitting section 6023 mounted on the front surface of the face board 6020 . Electric power for driving each electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 is supplied from the flat cable. Based on the control signal received from the peripheral control board 1510 , the control element 6025 controls the driver 6026 to control the light emission mode of the LEDs forming the face light emitting section 6023 .

The LED that constitutes the face light emitting portion 6023 is formed by encapsulating three LED chips, an LED chip capable of emitting red light, an LED chip capable of emitting green light, and an LED chip capable of emitting blue light, with a colorless and transparent resin. . In addition, the LEDs constituting the face light-emitting portion 6023 are provided with three metal terminals serving as anodes and three metal terminals serving as cathodes of each LED chip. In addition, current flows from the driver 6026 to the anode of each LED chip, so that each LED chip can emit light. Specifically, by controlling the current flowing through each LED chip by the driver 6026, red, green, and blue light can be emitted independently.

Between the circuits connecting the driver 6026 and the anode of each LED chip, a resistor 6027 is provided as a limiting resistor for adjusting the current flowing through the LED chip. Specifically, first resistors 6027a to third resistors 6027c are provided between the circuits connecting the anodes of the LED chips included in the driver 2026 and the face light emitting unit 6023a to form the driver 2026 and the face light emitting unit 6023b. A fourth resistor 6027d to a sixth resistor 6027f are provided between the circuits connecting the anodes of the respective LED chips of the LEDs. By providing the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f corresponding to the anode of each LED chip in this manner, the current flowing through each LED chip can be adjusted, and when a short circuit occurs inside the LED, the circuit can be overloaded. It prevents current from flowing.

The first capacitor 6028a is connected to the power supply terminal of the control element 6025, and the second capacitor 6028b is connected to the power supply terminal of the driver 6026 in parallel in an electric circuit. It has a function to operate

The rabbit role 6000 is controlled to move between a waiting position on the lower front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 and a moving position near the center on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 by a drive mechanism (not shown). It is possible to This drive mechanism is also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 . The predetermined game content is notified to the player according to the movement mode and light emission mode of the rabbit role object 6000 . For example, the rabbit role object 6000 is moved from the standby position to the moving position, and in a state where the rabbit role object 6000 is in the moving position, the first face emitting unit 6023a and the second face emitting unit 6023b mounted on the face substrate 6020 are turned on. is lit in red, and the first face light scattering part 6011a and the second face light scattering part 6011b are lit in red, so that the stop mode of the changing decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a big hit. It may be configured to suggest that the degree of expectation is higher than usual. In the other embodiments, examples are shown in which the part of the accessory or the member constituting the accessory is movable, or the light-emitting part provided in the accessory is controlled in a predetermined light emission mode. function as a performance, and by the performance, the stop mode of the decorative pattern during variation suggests that the expectation of stopping and displaying in a mode showing a big win is higher than usual.

As described above, there is a risk that the luminous decorative substrate (face substrate 6020) included in such a decorative member (rabbit character 6000) may have a malfunction in its luminous function. For example, in the process of surface-mounting the printed circuit board that constitutes the face board 6020, the amount of solder on the solder surface was insufficient, and the electrical connection between the circuit on the printed circuit board and the electronic component to be mounted was not properly performed. In some cases, there is a risk that other members, tools, or the like will come into contact with the electronic components mounted on the back side of the printed circuit board during assembly at a factory, causing the mounted electronic components to fall off. In addition, there is a risk that the electronic parts may malfunction due to deterioration over time after the game machine is installed in the game arcade.

For example, in an LED functioning as a face light emitting unit 6023 capable of full-color light emission by emitting red, blue, and green light in multiple gradations using a driver 6026, one of the six metal terminals is electrically connected. When such a connection is lost, although one of the three colors is intended to emit light in terms of control, only two colors are actually emitted, and one color is emitted. As for , a non-light emitting state occurs. Such a state can occur when the LED chip fails and current does not flow, or when the resistor 6027 functioning as a limiting resistor is removed from the face substrate 6020 and the circuit becomes disconnected. .
Such a situation may give the impression that the movable decorative member does not look good to the player playing the game. In particular, when a plurality of LEDs are controlled to emit light of the same color, there is a risk that only the defective LED will emit light of a different color. In addition, there is a risk of causing a situation in which players are misunderstood as to the degree of expectation of a big win.

Further, the flat cable connected to the connector 6029 provided on the face substrate 6020 is bent many times due to the repeated movement of the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable decorative member, thereby deteriorating the strength of the flat cable at a predetermined portion. , the flat cable becomes disconnected, and it is possible to assume a situation in which signal transmission and power supply to the rabbit character 6000 are not properly performed. Alternatively, repeated movements of the rabbit accessory 6000 may repeatedly apply stress to a portion of the connector 6029, which may cause the connector 6029 to break. In this case, an unintended control signal is sent to the rabbit role object 6000, and an unintended light emission mode is shown to the player, or power supply is completely stopped. In this case, the face light-emitting part 6023 provided in the rabbit roler 6000 does not take the lighting mode, and moves from the standby position to the moving position or from the moving position to the standby position in the off state. There is a risk that the appearance of the product will deteriorate.

Therefore, in the present invention, when the game machine is turned off, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized in black, and the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 positioned in front is reflected on its surface. It is configured to reflect Specifically, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to specularly reflect incident light. Alternatively, a colorless and transparent reflector (reflecting sheet) is installed close to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 so as to cover the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, the reflecting plate may be configured to mirror-reflect the incident light. With such a configuration, when there is some abnormality in the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit character 6000 positioned in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 positioned behind the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. By visually recognizing , the content of the abnormality can be confirmed. Alternatively, it is possible to check whether an abnormality has occurred.

FIG. 491(A) is a perspective view showing the state where the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position. In FIG. 491(A), the rabbit role 6000 is provided in the game machine so that the electronic components mounted on the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit role 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. shows an example.

In this example, a rabbit character 6000 is arranged on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the front surface forming the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the face substrate 6020 provided on the rabbit character 6000 are arranged. A predetermined distance (specifically, about several centimeters) from the rear surface is positioned. In the example shown in FIG. 491(A), part of the driver 6026 mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 and the entirety of the first resistor 6027a and the second resistor 6027b are displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It shows the state of being reflected in the

Although FIG. 491(A) shows the rabbit role object 6000 viewed obliquely from the upper right, it is also possible to visually recognize the mounted state of other electronic components by looking into it from other angles. For example, when the rabbit character 6000 is viewed from above at the center in the horizontal direction, it is possible to visually recognize the entire driver 6026, the entire first capacitor 6028a, and the entire second capacitor 6028b. Alternatively, when the rabbit character 6000 is obliquely viewed from the upper left, the entire connector 6029 and the flat cable connected to the connector 6029 can also be viewed. In this example, it is difficult to confirm the mounting mode of the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, but this point will be described later.

FIG. 491(B) is a perspective view showing the state where the rabbit accessory 6000 is at the standby position. In FIG. 491(B), the rabbit role 6000 is provided in the game machine so that the electronic components mounted on the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit role 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. example. In this example, electronic components such as the control element 6025 and the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are difficult to see, and the entire driver 6026 and the first capacitor 6028a are invisible. It is possible to verify the implementation of only a portion and only a portion of the second capacitor 6028b. A method for visually recognizing electronic components mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 will be described later.

Thus, in the gaming machine in the power-off state, the back surface of the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit character 6000 serving as the decoration means is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. , the state of the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face board 6020 can be confirmed even after the game machine is installed in the game shop. In addition, since the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is covered with a white protective film and is visible in white, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is visually recognized as black is visually recognized. It is configured easily.

An example in which the entire surface and the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are covered with a white protective film has been shown, but the circuit on the face substrate 6020 may be covered with a protective film of a bright color such as cream instead of white. may This is because, compared to the case of adopting a dark-colored protective film, the case of adopting a bright-colored protective film makes the difference in brightness clearer with respect to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is black. Therefore, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be easily visually recognized.

In the process of coloring the face board 6020, a circuit structure is formed on the printed circuit board by copper plating, and then a white protective agent is used as a protective agent to protect the wiring structure, and the portions where the through holes are provided are removed. Except for this, it is desirable to form a white protective film by coating the entire surface of the printed circuit board with this protective agent, thereby making the entire surface of the face substrate 6020 white. When a protective agent other than white is used as the protective agent for protecting the wiring structure, white ink is applied on the non-white protective agent so that the surface of the face substrate 6020 is white. You may Alternatively, by combining these modes, a white protective agent is applied to form a protective film, and then white ink is applied on the white protective film, making the surface of the face substrate 6020 whiter. It may be configured as By forming the face substrate 6020 in such a manner, the face substrate 6020 can be made visible in white. A similar method can be employed when it is desired to make the substrate visible not only in white but also in other colors such as black and green. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the substrate is of a specific color.
Although an example in which both sides of the face substrate 6020 are entirely white is shown, only a part of the face substrate 6020 may be colored white. Only a predetermined area on which electronic components are mounted on the rear surface may be white. The back of the face substrate 6020 is covered with a thin plate-like cover, and a punched opening is provided in the cover so that the electronic component whose mounting state is to be checked can be visually recognized. In this case, the back surface of the face board 6020 and the specific electronic component whose mounting mode is to be checked may be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . If a colorless and transparent cover is used as such a cover, light is diffusely reflected on the surface of the cover, and the visibility of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is lowered. In addition, when a colored opaque cover is used as such a cover, the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 are hidden by the cover, making it extremely difficult to check the mounted state. . Therefore, it is preferable to provide punched openings so that at least some of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be visually recognized. With such a configuration, the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 are protected by the cover, and the mounting state of the electronic components whose mounting state should be checked can be confirmed through the opening provided in the cover. can. In addition, by providing such an opening, heat generated from the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be released to the outside, thereby preventing damage or deterioration of the mounted electronic components due to heat. It is possible to suppress the occurrence. It should be noted that it is preferable that the electronic component is configured so as not to protrude from the opening while protruding rearward from the surface forming the back surface of the cover. Further, as the color of the cover, black opaque or dark opaque may be adopted. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to visually recognize the white face substrate 6020 exposed from the cover.

It is desirable that the color of the electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 has a contrast with the color of the protective film covering the face substrate 6020 . Specifically, the color of the face substrate 6020 may be a bright color such as white or cream, and the color of the electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 may be a dark color such as black or dark blue. By adopting such a configuration, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be easily visually recognized with respect to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is black. Also, since the face board 6020 is light-colored and the mounted electronic components are dark-colored, the face board 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted on the face board 6020 and the face board 6020 . It becomes possible to distinguish and visually recognize the electronic parts.

Note that the LED capable of emitting multicolor light is made of a white member in order to increase the reflectance. In this case, if the color of the face substrate 6020 is white or bright, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the mounting state of the LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 . As described above, when the electronic component to be mounted is white, the color of the face substrate 6020 may be black or dark. In this case, although the face substrate 6020 reflected in the game board side effect display device 1600 becomes difficult to see, the LED mounted on the face substrate 6020 becomes easy to see. Alternatively, the mounted electronic components or the electronic components before being mounted may be coated with black or dark ink, and the electronic components may be mounted on a white or light colored substrate.

In the present specification, white refers to a color that becomes visible when visible rays of all wavelengths of incident natural light are diffusely reflected almost uniformly (approximately 100 to 80%) by an object. A bright color refers to a color that can be visually recognized, for example, cream color or light gray, by absorbing a specific wavelength region to some extent and reflecting the remaining wavelength region diffusely. On the other hand, black refers to the color that becomes visible when an object uniformly absorbs most of the visible light of all wavelengths of incident natural light and partly (about 20 to several percent) is diffusely reflected. there is In addition, dark color means that the majority of visible light of all wavelengths is uniformly absorbed, and only a part (about 20 to several percent) is diffusely reflected. It refers to a color that can be visually recognized as a close color, for example, dark blue.

The rabbit role product 6000 shown in FIGS. 491(A) and 491(B) may be configured to be manually movable from the standby position to the upward movement position. In this case, the rabbit accessory 6000 at the standby position is not rendered immovable by the lock mechanism when power is cut off, and the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 is not provided with a so-called light guide plate. is configured as

As a configuration for manually moving the rabbit role object 6000, first, the immovable state will be described. In general, if the movable decoration is configured to be freely movable between the moving position and the standby position, the movable decoration is subjected to a large acceleration when the game machine is transported or installed in an amusement arcade. In addition, there is a risk that the movable decorative body will be damaged. Therefore, a mechanism is provided to lock the movable decoration when it is in the standby position while the power is on. A method of making the body immobile is being considered. However, when such a locking mechanism is provided, it becomes difficult to manually move the rabbit accessory 6000 as the movable decoration. Therefore, it is possible to manually move the rabbit accessory 6000 by configuring it so as not to provide such a locking mechanism.

Next, a light guide plate will be described as a configuration for manually moving the rabbit character 6000. FIG. The light guide plate is a plate-shaped decorative member that diffusely reflects light incident from the side surface in a predetermined pattern provided on the surface, so that the player can visually recognize the lighting of the predetermined pattern. Also, such a light emission pattern is configured to be visible to the player as a predetermined effect. However, when such a light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a of the game panel 1100, it becomes difficult or impossible to manually move the rabbit accessory 6000 as the movable decoration. Therefore, by constructing such a game panel opening 1100a so that such a light guide plate is not provided, it becomes possible to move the rabbit character 6000 by hand.

With such a configuration, when power is cut off, the rabbit character 6000 can be directly moved by the clerk's hand through the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100, and the face board can be used. Different areas on the rear surface of 6020 can be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 491(A), after moving the rabbit role 6000 upward by hand, the user visually recognizes the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 as if looking into the rabbit role 6000 from below. This makes it easy to check the mounting mode of the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, which have been difficult to see. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 491(B), by moving the rabbit character 6000 upward by hand, the control element 6025 mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, which was invisible until then, It is possible to visually recognize electronic components such as the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f.

An example in which the light guide plate is not provided in the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 is shown, but when the light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a, the entire game panel opening 1100a is covered with the light guide plate. Instead, it may be configured to cover only a part of the game panel opening 1100a. Specifically, when the waiting position of the rabbit role 6000 is in front of the lower side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the moving position of the rabbit role 6000 is in front of the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, the guidance is performed. It is preferable to arrange the light plate so that only the upper half of the game panel opening 1100a is covered. As described above, even if the light guide plate is provided, a part of the game panel opening 1100a is not covered with the light guide plate. By manually moving the 6000, it is possible to achieve both of the functions of being able to change the area in which the face substrate 6020 is reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG.

An example has been shown in which the area where the face substrate 6020 is reflected is changed by directly moving the rabbit role object 6000 by hand. The light plate may be enlarged, in which case an object smaller than a hand may be used to move the rabbit character. For example, a rod-shaped member with a diameter of about 5 mm, or a thin plate-shaped member with a width of about 1 cm and a thickness of about 1 mm is inserted into the area of the game panel opening 1100a not covered by the light guide plate, and the rabbit accessory 6000 can be moved. It may be configured as In this case, the area of the game panel opening 1100a that is not covered with the light guide plate may be set to a size that allows such a bar-shaped member or plate-shaped member to be inserted. It is sufficient that an opening of about 0.0 cm and 1.0 cm in length is provided. With such a configuration, the area of the game panel opening 1100a covered by the light guide plate can be increased, and the area in which the light guide plate can be used can be expanded.

If the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is not equipped with a lock mechanism that prevents the rabbit accessory 6000 from moving when the power is cut off, and if the game panel opening 1100a is not provided with a light guide plate, the clerk can hold the hand An example has been shown in which the rabbit character 6000 can be directly moved by the member. In the case where a light guide plate is provided, the rabbit character 6000 cannot be manually moved, and the area where the face substrate 6020 is reflected with respect to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is changed. I can't. Such a problem is a big problem in an example in which the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are not or hardly reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the rabbit character is in the standby position. becomes.

Therefore, in such an example, by turning off the power switch provided in the game machine during the initial check of the movable decoration executed when the power is turned on, the control unit and the drive unit of the game machine are turned off. When forcibly creating a state in which no power is supplied to the power switch, the movable decoration in a position other than the standby position does not return to the standby position due to its own weight, and the power switch is turned off or the power switch It is preferable to stop at a position a little moved by its own weight from the position where is turned off. Specific examples are shown below.

At the time of the initial check, first, the rabbit toy 6000 at the standby position is unlocked by the lock mechanism and changed from the immovable state to the movable state, after which the rabbit toy 6000 starts moving to the upper moving position. do. After the rabbit character 6000 completes the movement to the upper movement position, it stays at the movement position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds), then starts moving to the lower standby position, and then the rabbit character 6000 waits. It stops at the position and changes from the movable state to the non-movable state by the lock mechanism, and the initial check is completed. When the game is started and the rabbit role product 6000 is moved as an effect in response to the starting prize or the like, the rabbit role object 6000 at the standby position first changes from the immovable state to the movable state, and then the rabbit role object 6000 is moved. is controlled to move between the standby position and the moving position in a predetermined movement mode, control is performed to move the rabbit accessory 6000 to the standby position, and then the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the unlocked state to the locked state. and

In the gaming machine with such a configuration, by intentionally generating a power-off state, the rabbit character 6000 can be mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit character 6000 without the clerk moving the rabbit character 6000 directly by hand. It is possible to make the electronic parts that are displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 appear. In addition, since the rabbit rolex 6000 is configured to stay at the movement position for a predetermined time at the time of the initial check, the rabbit rolex 6000 is forcibly turned off at the timing when the rabbit rolex 6000 stays at the movement position. can be stopped at the moving position as it is, and the timing of turning off the power switch provided in the game machine to turn off the power does not become severe. In addition, since the rabbit role object 6000 can be stopped at a predetermined position, it is possible to form a pattern for confirming the face substrate 6020 .

In addition, in the initial check, not only does it stay at the movement position for a predetermined time, but when moving from the standby position to the movement position, a predetermined position between the standby position and the movement position (for example, an intermediate position between the standby position and the movement position) position) so that the rabbit accessory 6000 stays for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds) and then moves to the moving position, and when it is at the predetermined position, the power switch provided in the game machine is turned off to put it in a power-off state. The rabbit character 6000 may be configured to remain at a predetermined position when the rabbit character 6000 is moved. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily stop the rabbit accessory 6000 at different positions, and it is possible to visually recognize the electronic components reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 from different angles. becomes. In addition, since the rabbit role object 6000 can be stopped at a predetermined position, it is possible to form a pattern for confirming the face substrate 6020 .

An example has been shown in which the rabbit role object 6000 stays at the moving position or the predetermined position at the time of the initial check. The first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b may be configured to light up in a predetermined manner. Alternatively, when the initial check is started, the rabbit role object 6000 is in the standby position and before starting to move to the moving position, the first face emitting part 6023a and the second face emitting part 6023b are lit in a predetermined manner. You may For example, as a lighting mode, the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b may be lit in the same color. Moreover, white is desirable as the emission color at this time. With such a configuration, the store clerk can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the light emission mode of the first face light emitting section 6023a and the second face light emitting section 6023b. It is possible to confirm what kind of abnormality has occurred by visually recognizing the back side of the face board 6020 with the game machine in which the accessory 6000 is at a predetermined position or a moving position in a power-off state. Also, when a player complains about the lighting mode, it is possible to quickly identify the cause of the abnormality.

Although an example in which the first face light-emitting portion 6023a and the second face light-emitting portion 6023b are lit in the same color is shown, three or more face light-emitting portions 6023 may be provided and configured to emit light in the same color. In this case, the light emission color should preferably include at least white. In such a configuration, if one of the resistors provided corresponding to the plurality of face light emitting units 6023 is missing, one face light emitting unit 6023 is different from the other plurality of face light emitting units 6023. Emit different colors (for example, if the resistor provided in series with the LED chip capable of emitting green light is missing, the LED can only emit blue and red light, and it is a mixture of those colors. Therefore, it is possible to easily identify the defective face light-emitting portion by the color of the emitted light.

When the power cut-off state is forcibly generated, the rabbit role model 6000 is not in the standby position. When the power is turned on in such a state, it is preferable to once move the rabbit accessory 6000 to the standby position and then perform the above-described initial operation check again from the beginning. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to stop the rabbit role object 6000 at an appropriate position where the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be easily visually recognized.

Various embodiments are conceivable for the aspect of the rabbit role 6000 itself, the movement aspect of the rabbit role 6000, and the positional relationship between the rabbit role 6000 and the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG. Several examples are given below.

FIG. 492 shows an example of a rabbit character 6000. FIG. In this embodiment, the area of the face substrate 6020 reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600 changes as the rabbit character moves from the lower standby position to the upper movement position. In this example, the rabbit character 6000 is composed of the face cover portion 6010 and the face substrate 6020, and is movable between the standby position and the moving position. It is configured not to move with respect to 1100 . FIG. 492(A) shows a state in which the rabbit character 6000 is in the standby position, and in this state, only the upper half of the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected in the game board side effect display device 1600. . Also, the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f are not reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 because the body part 6030 is positioned immediately behind these electronic components. FIG. 492(B) shows a state in which the rabbit character 6000 is at the moving position, and in this state, almost the entire back surface of the face substrate is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. there is

It should be noted that, when the rabbit toy 6000 is in the standby position, the rabbit toy 6000 may be configured to slowly rotate about the front-rear direction by a driving mechanism (not shown). Alternatively, the rabbit toy 6000 may be configured to be manually rotated about the front-rear direction when the rabbit toy 6000 is in the standby position. With such a configuration, it is extremely easy to visually recognize the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, which are located below the face substrate 6020 and are difficult to confirm the mounting mode. Become.

FIG. 493 shows an example of a rabbit character 6000. FIG. In this embodiment, a first ear portion 6021 and a second ear portion 6022 are provided separately from the face substrate 6020 that constitutes the rabbit accessory 6000 . The first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 are in the shape of a vertically long rectangle. When the rabbit character 6000 moves, the face cover part 6010 and the face substrate 6020 do not move, and the first ear part 6021 and the second ear part 6022 move to the upward movement position, thereby executing a predetermined effect. will do.

FIG. 493(A) shows a state in which the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are in the standby position. Only part of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 are reflected in the state hidden by the second ear portions 6022 . FIG. 493(B) shows a state where the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are in the moving position. The whole area is reflected. In this way, by moving the member between the member whose mounting state of the electronic component is desired to be confirmed and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the visual recognition state of the member whose mounting state of the electronic component is desired to be confirmed can be changed. becomes possible. In addition, in another embodiment, aspects of the rabbit character 6000 have been described, but these aspects may be applied to the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 in the example shown in FIG.

FIG. 494 shows an example of a rabbit character 6000. FIG. In this embodiment, the body part 6030 of the rabbit accessory 6000 is vertically long. When the rabbit toy 6000 is at the standby position, the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the rabbit toy 6000 are made invisible by the body part 6030, and when the rabbit toy 6000 is at the moving position, the body part A rabbit character 6000 is positioned above 6030 . In this state, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured so that almost the entire rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected.

In the embodiments described so far, the area of the face covering portion 6010 of the rabbit character 6000 does not change, but when it is moved to the moving position, the member corresponding to the face covering portion 6010 is made of an opaque member. In addition, the movable decorative member, which expands in the horizontal direction with respect to the game panel 1100, increases in area when viewed from the front. A situation may occur in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize the reflection of the substrate in the display area. Therefore, when such a movable decorative member is employed, the area in the front view may be manually reduced in the state where the power is forcibly cut off during the initial check. Alternatively, when moving to the movement position during the initial check, the state before the area when viewed from the front increases is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 2 seconds) so that the area when viewed from the front does not increase. Later, it may be configured to increase the area when viewed from the front. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to check whether the face board 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is cut off.

An example in which the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown. On the other hand, it is not preferable for the player to see the state in which the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected. For example, when an effect is executed to darken almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 as an effect indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high, an electronic display mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is executed by the player. The parts will be visible, and there is a risk that the player will lose interest in spite of the fact that the player is trying to liven up the game by executing the performance. In addition, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed for the purpose of marking a break in the game when a so-called reach loss occurs, that is, the decorative pattern stops in a state indicating a loss after forming a ready-to-win state. Even when the effect of darkening almost the entire surface is executed, the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are visually recognized by the player, and when the reach is out of reach, which is unfortunate for the player, Furthermore, there is a possibility that the player will be in a state of disinterest.

Therefore, when the rabbit character 6000 is positioned at the standby position at the timing of executing the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is expected that such reflection will be visually recognized. It is preferable to employ a configuration that suppresses this. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 493, the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are positioned between the display areas of the face substrate 6020 and the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 Hidden by the ears 6022, the reflection of the face substrate 6020 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is suppressed. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 494, the body part 6030 is located between the face substrate 6020 and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Reflection of the face substrate 6020 in the display area is suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 492, in the case of executing an effect that darkens almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the driver 6026, the first capacitor 6028a, the second capacitor 6028b, etc. There is a risk of being seen. Therefore, by performing some kind of display only in the lower front part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player loses interest in accordance with the effect of darkening the display area. becomes. In the lower front part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, for example, it is preferable to display decorative patterns, display the number of reserved games, or display the reserved image indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit related to the variation. . In this case, the color of the image may be made darker or the size of the image may be made smaller than when displaying the decorative pattern, the number of reservations, or the reserved image. Also, instead of statically displaying these, they may be dynamically displayed like animation. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the reflection that occurs in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 inconspicuous during the game.

After the darkening effect is started, while the darkening effect is being performed, the rabbit role model 6000 is moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 492(A) to the moving position shown in FIG. The first ear portion 6021 and the first ear portion 6022 are moved from the standby position shown in 493(A) to the movement position shown in FIG. 493(B), or from the standby position shown in FIG. may be configured to perform an effect of moving the rabbit role object 6000 to the moving position shown in . However, in this case, the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face substrate 6020 become easily visible.

Therefore, when executing an effect to move the rabbit role 6000 from the lower standby position to the upper movement position, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 overlaps the rabbit role 6000 in a front view. It may be configured to display a reflection suppression image that suppresses reflection. In this way, when the rabbit role object 6600 moves, an image that makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the reflection of the face substrate 6020 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed as a game board side effect display. By displaying it in the display area of the device 1600, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player loses interest.

The size of the reflection suppression image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the same size as the rabbit character 6000 when viewed from the front, or one size (about 1-2 cm) larger than the rabbit character. When viewed from the front, the outer shape of the reflection-suppressed image completely overlaps with the outer shape of the rabbit character 6000, or the image is displayed in such a manner that the reflection-suppressed image protrudes about 1 to 2 mm from the periphery of the rabbit character when viewed from the front. do it. Also, the glare suppression image may be composed of white or bright color. By using white or light color, it is possible to make the reflection inconspicuous. In addition to white or bright colors, black or dark colors may also be used to form a glare-suppressed image. Furthermore, it may be an image in which a glare-suppressed image is dynamically displayed.

The timing for starting the display of the reflection suppression image may be before the start of the darkening effect, at the start of the darkening effect, or when the rabbit character 6000 starts moving during the darkening effect. When the rabbit role object 6000 is moved from the standby position to the moving position, it is preferable to move the reflection suppression image while maintaining the positional relationship with the rabbit role object 6000 . It is preferable to display the reflection suppression image until the dark transition effect is completed. For example, when the rabbit character 6000 is stopped at the standby position during the darkening effect, it is preferable to continue displaying the reflection suppression image. Thereafter, even when the rabbit role object 6000 returns from the standby position to the moving position, it is preferable to continue displaying the reflection suppression image as long as the darkening effect is being performed.

It should be noted that a plurality of modes of such reflection suppression images are prepared, different degrees of expectation for big wins are assigned to the modes of the reflection suppression images, and one of the reflection suppression images is displayed when the rabbit character moves. , it may be configured to function as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit. For example, blue and red may be prepared as the colors of the reflection suppression image, and the red reflection suppression image may indicate that the expectation of the big win is higher. In this case, since the player also pays attention to the display mode of the reflection suppression image itself, even if some electronic parts are reflected, it is possible to make such reflection less noticeable. .

It should be noted that the display of the reflection suppression image when moving the rabbit role object 6000 has been described. good.

In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 493, it is desirable to set the back surface color of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 to black or dark. Moreover, it is desirable that electronic components are not mounted on the rear surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 . When electronic components are mounted on the rear surface of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, the electronic components are preferably dark-colored. With such a configuration, the rear surface of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, which are members for suppressing the reflection of the face substrate 6020 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, is the same as that of the game board. Even if it is reflected in the display area of the side effect display device 1600, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the reflection.

In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 494, it is desirable that the color of the back surface of the body portion 6030 is dark. Also, it is desirable not to mount electronic components on the rear surface of the body portion 6030 . When electronic components are mounted on the rear surface of the body portion 6030, it is desirable to use a dark color. With such a configuration, even if the rear surface of the body portion 6030, which is a member that suppresses the reflection of the face substrate 6020, is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the player is affected by the reflection. can reduce the impact on

The moving position of the rabbit accessory 6000 at the time of the initial check may be configured to be in front of the central portion of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . In this case, the reflection in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be confirmed from all directions, and the entire area behind the face substrate 6020 can be visually recognized.

On the other hand, when executing the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 described above, the rabbit role 6000 is moved forward in the central part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It may be configured to execute this effect after moving to the position. In this case, the rabbit role 6000 is positioned exactly in the middle between the direction of the player's line of sight and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the player moves his/her face to force the rabbit role 6000 to appear. As long as the state is not viewed, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the state reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . In addition, when ending the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is brightened, and then the rabbit character 6000 waits from the moving position. By moving to the position, it is possible to reduce the influence of the reflection on the player.

The face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit role 6000 is shown as an example of the member reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It may be configured such that the state of the rear surface of the member can be confirmed by reflecting it in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600 . For example, the rear surface of a relay board (not shown) provided for transmitting control signals from the peripheral control board 1510 to the face board 6020 and for supplying power from the power supply board 931 is the game board side effect display. It may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the device 1600 . Further, on the rear surface of the relay board, connectors, control elements, and the like to which flat cables used for transmission of control signals and power supply are connected are surface-mounted. It is preferable that these are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . With such a configuration, it is possible to check whether there is any abnormality in the electronic components mounted on the relay board.

Although an example in which the relationship between the waiting position and the moving position of the rabbit rolex 6000 is in the vertical direction has been shown, the rabbit rolex 6000 may be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction, and between the rear standby position and the forward transfer position. It may be configured to move. Alternatively, the rabbit role 6000 provided in the front lower part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 rotates around a rotation shaft provided below the rabbit role 6000, thereby rotating the rabbit role 6000. The upper portion of 6000 may be configured to be movable so as to tilt forward. The rabbit role 6000 is configured to be movable between a standby position in which the rabbit role 6000 is in a positional relationship parallel to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and a moving position in which the upper part of the rabbit role 6000 is tilted forward. You may Even in such a configuration, by moving the rabbit role object 6000 from the standby position to the moving position, the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be widened. becomes possible.

Although the game board side effect display device 1600 is fixedly provided and the rabbit role 6000 is movable with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600, the rabbit role 6000 is fixedly provided, The game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be movable. For example, the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be movable backward, or the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be rotatable about a predetermined movable axis. Alternatively, the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be horizontally movable in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the fixedly provided rabbit character 6000 may be positioned in the direction of movement. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to widen the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 that is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 even for the fixedly provided rabbit character. Become.

An example in which a game board side effect display device 1600 is fixedly provided and a rabbit role 6000 is movable with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600, and an example in which the rabbit role 6000 is fixedly provided and the game board side Although an example in which the effect display device 1600 is movable has been shown, both the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit character 6000 may be configured to be movable. For example, the game board-side effect display device 1600 may move backward, and the rabbit character 6000 may move forward. Alternatively, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit role object 6000, which are not superimposed when viewed from the front, may be configured to move closer to each other in the horizontal direction and become superimposed when viewed from the front. good. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 that is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

Although an example in which one game board side effect display device 1600 is provided has been shown, a plurality of effect display devices may be provided. The rear surface of the face substrate 6020 may be reflected in at least one of the display areas of the plurality of effect display devices. In addition, the plane formed by the display area of one effect display device and the plane formed by the display area of the other effect display device are configured to face different directions, and the rabbit accessory 6000 can be moved to the front side thereof. may be configured. With such a configuration, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 can be reflected from different angles in the display areas of a plurality of effect display devices, making it easier to find the cause of the abnormality.

In addition, by configuring to provide a plurality of movable effect display devices and by moving the effect display devices, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit character 6000 can be a display area of at least one effect display device or a plurality of effect display devices. It may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the display device.

An example has been shown in which the rear surface of the face board 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is forcibly turned off. By darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 may be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

FIG. 495 shows a modification of the example shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the position where the rabbit character 6000 shown in FIGS. 487 to 494 is provided is not the lower front center of the game board side effect display device 1600, but the left lower side front side of the game board side effect display device 1600. It's becoming In addition, a stump accessory 6100 shaped like a stump is provided in front of the lower right side of the game board side effect display device 1600 . As for the game board 5 as a whole, a space is formed between the game panel 1100 and the game panel 1100 on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. are arranged in layers. Specifically, from the front side, at positions close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the board back grass role 6800, the first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second A cloud object 6750 is provided. The first giant tree accessory 6600 consists of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 consists of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. there is In addition, the first grass role 6470 and the second grass role 6475 are provided behind these, and the third grass role 6480 is provided behind these, so that the third grass role 6480 overlaps behind this. A fourth grass role 6485 is provided, behind which a rabbit role 6000 and a stump role 6100 are provided, behind these a mountain role 6500 is provided, and behind the mountain role 6500 a game board side effect display. An apparatus 1600 is provided. By arranging a plurality of accessories in layers in this way, it is possible to create a sense of depth.

A stump portion 6200 shaped like a stump and a first grass movable portion 6360 and a second grass movable portion 6370 shaped like grass are provided on the lower right front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 . , the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 constitute the stump accessory 6100 as a unit.

FIG. 496 shows a stump accessory 6100. FIG. A first grass movable portion 6360 is provided on the front left side of the stump portion 6200 , and a second grass movable portion 6370 is provided on the front right side of the stump portion 6200 . The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are plate-shaped and formed of green transparent synthetic resin. The first grass movable portion 6360 has an exposed surface formed of a green transparent synthetic resin in the outer edge portion excluding the lower end portion, so that the member positioned behind can be seen through and visually recognized. On the other hand, a portion other than the lower end portion and the outer edge is provided with a first grass decoration portion 6360a coated with green ink, and the rear side of the first grass decoration portion 6360a is invisible. . The second grass movable portion 6370 also has the same configuration as the first grass movable portion 6360, and includes a second grass decoration portion 6370a.

The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are arranged in a state where the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are positioned in front of the stump portion 6200 as shown in FIG. As shown in 496(B), the first grass movable part 6360 moves leftward from the position in front of the stump part 6200, and the second grass movable part 6370 moves rightward from the position in front of the stump part 6200. It is possible to take the state of moving to The first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 can be moved by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

In the state shown in FIG. 496(A), the end surface forming the right end portion of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the end surface forming the left end portion of the second grass movable portion 6370 are in contact with each other, and the stump portion 6200 positioned behind is in contact with the end surface forming the left end portion of the second grass movable portion 6370. The lower half is difficult to see. At this time, a partial region of the stump opening 6210a is a region where the first grass decoration portion 6360a of the first grass movable portion 6360 is not provided and a second grass decoration portion 6370a of the second grass movable portion 6370 is provided. visible through unobstructed areas. In this state, a rear wall substrate 6352 and a rear wall cover 6356 that constitute the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 provided behind the stump opening portion 6210a, and a rear wall cover 6356 provided in front of the rear wall substrate 6352. A part of the wall light emitting part 6354 is configured to be visible.

In this state, the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is set to the light emitting mode as the first light emission effect, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 emits light from the first grass movable portion 6360 where the first grass decoration portion 6360a is not provided. The area and the area where the second grass decoration part 6370a of the second grass movable part 6370 is not provided are illuminated, and the area where the first grass decoration part 6360a of the first grass movable part 6360 is not provided and the second grass movable part 6370 are irradiated. It may be configured so that the player can be illuminated by passing through the region where the second grass decoration portion 6370a of the portion 6370 is not provided.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 496(B), the first grass movable portion 6360 moves leftward from the state in front of the stump portion 6200, and the second grass movable portion 6370 is positioned in front of the stump portion 6200. Since the stump portion 6200 is in a state of being moved rightward from the state of being drawn, the visibility of the lower half of the stump portion 6200 is enhanced. In this state, the stump box portion 6300 is visible through the stump opening 6210 a provided in the stump portion 6200 . In this state, a rear wall substrate 6352 and a rear wall cover 6356 constituting the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 provided behind the stump opening portion 6210a, and a rear wall provided in front of the rear wall substrate 6352. The light-emitting portion 6354 has changed from a difficult-to-see state to an easy-to-see state compared to the state before the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 move.

In this state, as the second light emission effect, the rear wall light emitting section 6354 is set to the light emitting mode, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting section 6354 passes through the stump opening 6210a and is directed forward where the player is positioned. It may be configured so that it can take a state of being directly irradiated. In the second lighting effect, the light passes through the area where the first grass decoration part 6360a of the first grass movable part 6360 is not provided and the area where the second grass decoration part 6370a of the second grass movable part 6370 is not provided. Compared to the first light emitting effect in which the player is illuminated with light, it is possible to give the player a visually strong stimulus.

In addition, the first game state and the second game state (for example, the probability variable game state advantageous to the normal game state, the time-saving game state, and the jackpot game state that are more advantageous to the player than the first game state (for example, the normal game state) ), in the case of the first game state, the period during which the first light emitting effect is executed is longer than the period during which the second light emitting effect is executed, In this case, the period during which the second light emitting effect is executed may be longer than the period during which the first light emitting effect is executed. Alternatively, the first light emitting effect is executed for a relatively long period in the first game state compared to the second game state, and the second game state is relatively long in comparison to the first game state. It may be configured such that the second light emitting effect is executed during the period. Further, even if only the first light emitting effect is performed in the first game state, and both the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect or only the second light emitting effect is performed in the second game state. good. The second light emission effect, which is more visually stimulating than the first light emission effect, functions as an effect that gives the player an interest (an effect that gives a special feeling), so it is used only when the game state is advantageous. Also, when the game state is advantageous, the effect period is used longer, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Thus, in the second game state, which is advantageous to the player, the player experiences visually strong stimuli for a longer period of time than in the first game state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. , it is possible to further increase the excitement of the player who is in an excited state due to the occurrence of an advantageous state.

FIG. 497(A) shows the stump portion 6200 . The stump portion 6200 is composed of a stump plate portion 6210 which is a colored and opaque plate-shaped member provided on the front side, and a stump box portion 6300 having a box-like shape provided on the back side. The stump plate portion 6210 is a plate-like member having an outer shape that imitates a tree stump, and a stump opening portion 6210a is provided in the center thereof.

FIG. 497(B) shows the positional relationship between the stump plate portion 6210 and the stump box portion 6300 when viewed from the front. In the drawing, the stump plate portion 6210 and the stump opening portion 6210a are indicated by dotted lines. The front side of the stump box portion 6300 is arranged so as to correspond to the stump opening portion 6210a provided in the stump plate portion 6210, simulating a state in which the side surface of the stump has a hole.

FIG. 498(A) shows the stump box portion 6300. FIG. The stump box portion 6300 includes a box upper wall portion 6310 forming the upper wall, a box right wall portion 6320 forming the right wall, a box lower wall portion 6330 forming the lower wall, and a box forming the left wall. It is composed of a left wall portion 6340 and a box rear wall portion 6350 forming a rear wall. The box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 have a trapezoidal shape in a plan view, the back side and the front side are parallel, and the length of the front side is longer than the back side. long configured. The box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are provided so that the front sides thereof are inclined outward. Further, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of depth.

FIG. 498(B) is an exploded view of the stump box section 6300. FIG. The box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rear wall cover 6356 located on the front side and a rear wall substrate 6352 located on the rear side. In this figure, a dotted line with respect to the rear wall substrate 6352 schematically shows a position where the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 provided in the rear wall cover 6356 is located.

FIG. 498(C) is a front view of the rear wall cover 6356. FIG. The rear wall cover 6356 has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. A rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 shaped like a root vegetable is formed on the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 . The rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 is composed of a first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a shaped like a root of a root vegetable and a second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b shaped like a leaf of a root vegetable.

FIG. 498(D) is a front view of the rear wall substrate 6352. FIG. The rear wall substrate 6352 is a horizontally long rectangular printed circuit board. The front and rear surfaces of the rear wall substrate 6352 are white. A rear wall light-emitting portion 6354 configured by surface-mounting a plurality of LEDs is provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 . The rear wall substrate 6352 has the same size as the rear wall cover 6356 when viewed from the front. The light emitted from the LEDs forming the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is directed forward perpendicularly to the surface forming the rear wall substrate 6352 . The rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is provided at a position overlapping the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 when viewed from the front. Specifically, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a corresponds to the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a shaped like the root of a root vegetable, and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6354a shaped like the leaf of a root vegetable A second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is provided corresponding to the portion 6358b. As shown in FIG. 496(A), in a state in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are positioned in front of the stump portion 6200, each LED constituting the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is It is configured so that it is provided at a position that does not overlap the area where the first grass decoration part 6360a of the first grass moving part 6360 is not provided and the area where the second grass decoration part 6370a of the second grass moving part 6370 is not provided when viewed from the front. do it. In this case, even if the rear wall light-emitting portion 6354 is in the light-emitting mode as an effect, the player is not directly illuminated with light, so that the player is given a visually weak stimulus.

The rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 are not completely in contact with each other, but are provided with a predetermined gap (approximately 1-2 mm). At this time, it is desirable to set the distance between the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the rear wall substrate 6352 so that the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b do not come into contact with the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 . With such a configuration, the heat generated in the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 can be easily dissipated, and the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 can be prevented from malfunctioning due to the heat generated by itself. It becomes possible.

The stump accessory 6100 is used for an effect of notifying the degree of expectation for a big hit in the game machine. Specifically, from a state in which the stump opening 6210a is difficult to see, the first grass movable portion 6360 moves to the left and the second grass movable portion 6370 moves to the right, so that the stump opening 6210a becomes easy to see. Then, when the stump opening 6210a becomes easily visible, the light emission of the box rear wall portion 6350 located on the back side of the stump box portion 6300 becomes visible through the stump opening 6210a. (For example, whether the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 appears to glow red or white, or the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 located behind in the off state (whether it is visible in white), the stop mode of the changing decorative pattern is configured to suggest that the degree of expectation for stop display in a mode indicating a big win is higher than usual. For example, in each light emission mode of the rear wall substrate 6352, the degree of expectation that the stop mode of the changing decorative pattern will stop and display in a mode indicating a big win may be set differently. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to arouse the player's great interest in the lighting mode of the rear wall substrate 6352 .

An example has been shown in which the degree of expectation for stopping and displaying the changing decorative pattern in a manner indicating a big hit is reported by the light emission mode of the rear wall substrate 6352. However, the first rear wall light emission part 6354a and the second rear wall light emission part Such notification may be performed by using a different light emission mode from the portion 6354b.

For example, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a does not emit light, and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b emits weak green light. , the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b shaped like a root vegetable leaf is green and visible to the player. In addition, by causing the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a to emit weak white light and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b to emit weak green light, the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating roots of a root can be obtained. The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which is white and shaped like a root vegetable leaf, is green and visible to the player. In addition, by causing the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a to emit weak red light and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b to weakly emit green light, the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating roots of a root can be obtained. The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which is red and has a shape imitating a root vegetable leaf, is green and can be visually recognized by the player.

The reason why the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a emits weak light is to prevent the light emitted from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a from strongly decorating a portion other than the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a. Because. In addition, the reason why the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b emits weak light is to prevent the light emitted from the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b from strongly decorating a portion other than the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b. Because. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to realize an effect as if only the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 is substantially in the light emitting mode.

By adopting such a light emission mode, it is possible to realize an expression imitating a root vegetable, radish, in the first light emission example and the second light emission example, and a root vegetable, carrot, in the third light emission example. In addition, in the first light emission example, although the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a is not caused to emit light, the color of the rear wall substrate positioned behind the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the color of the first rear wall substrate 6358a The shape of the wall cover light scattering portion 6358a makes it possible to express a predetermined motif (radish root in this example). In addition, in the relationship between the second light emission example and the third light emission example, a plurality of motifs (in this example, radish and carrot) are expressed by using different light emission colors in the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a. making it possible to

By causing the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b to emit weak light, it is possible to realize an effect as if only the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 is substantially in the light emitting mode. However, by making the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b emit strong light in such an effect, the entire inner surface of the stump box portion 6300 is illuminated with the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354a. It may be configured so that the light from the light emitting portion 6354b reaches there strongly. In this case, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b may be configured to emit light of the same color (for example, white).

The light from the rear wall substrate 6352 may be reflected by the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box bottom wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 to be visible to the player side. good. For example, in the transparent synthetic resin forming the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340, a light scattering portion capable of scattering the inner surfaces forming the stump box portion 6300 It may be configured as follows. Alternatively, in the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340, at least the inner surfaces constituting the stump box portion 6300 are plated to form a metal thin film such as aluminum. You may make it comprise a reflection part by performing a process. With such a configuration, the light emitted from the rear wall substrate 6352 and applied to the entire inner surface of the stump box section 6300 can be efficiently reflected toward the player. In this case, the white rear wall substrate 6352 itself also has a function of diffusely reflecting light forward.

A rear wall substrate 6352 that constitutes the box rear wall portion 6350 is visible in white through a colorless and transparent rear wall cover 6356 . Therefore, when the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are moved to their respective movement positions, and the box rear wall part 6350 is visible from the stump opening 6210a, the rear wall light emitting part Even when 6354 is in the off state, the box rear wall portion 6350 can be visually recognized by the player as being decorated with the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself. In addition, the rear wall cover 6356 is provided with a rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 that imitates the shape of a root vegetable. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the box rear wall portion 6350 in a decorated state.

Although an example in which the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 has a shape that imitates the shape of a root vegetable is shown, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured as a light scattering portion. Alternatively, in the rear wall cover 6356, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 has a smooth shape without providing a portion that scatters the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is may pass through as it is. Even in such a configuration, the box rear wall portion 6350 can be visually recognized by the player as being decorated with the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself as in the above example.

An example in which the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 includes the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356 is shown, but instead of the box rear wall portion 6350, the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, A structure corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 or the rear wall cover 6356 may be provided on either the box lower wall portion 6330 or the box left wall portion 6340 . Alternatively, for at least one of the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box bottom wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the box rear wall portion 6350 that constitute the stump box portion 6300, A structure corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be provided. , the box left wall portion 6340 and the box rear wall portion 6350 may all be provided with a structure corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356 . Further, in these examples, when a structure corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is provided on a predetermined wall portion, other wall portions are not provided with a structure corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354. It may be configured such that only a configuration corresponding to the rear wall cover 6356 is provided.

A box upper wall portion 6310, a box right wall portion 6320, a box lower wall portion 6330, and a box left wall portion 6340, which constitute the stump box portion 6300, are made of transparent or translucent synthetic resin, and the stump plate portion 6210 is made of transparent or translucent synthetic resin. It is made of translucent synthetic resin, and when the first grass moving part 6360 and the second grass moving part 6370 are in the standby position, the rear wall light emitting part 6354 is in a light emitting state, so that the rear wall light emitting part 6354 emits light. The irradiated light may illuminate the rear surface of the stump board portion 6210 . With such a configuration, the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 passes through the stump plate portion 6210, and the player can visually recognize the stump plate portion 6210 decorated with the light. The box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the stump plate portion 6210, which constitute the stump box portion 6300, may be formed of colored transparent or colored translucent synthetic resin. good. For example, they may be made of brown synthetic resin. Alternatively, a tree pattern may be printed on the rear surface of the stump board 6210 with brown ink to form an opaque or translucent area on a portion of the stump board.

Although an example in which the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 is white has been shown, other colors may be adopted. For example, the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 may be brown, similar to the stump plate portion 6210 . In such a mode, by turning off the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a, the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 can represent root vegetables with soil adhered thereto.

When the first grass moving part 6360 moves leftward and the second grass moving part 6370 moves rightward, the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate part 6210 is exposed, and the box rear wall part located behind is exposed. Although an example in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 can be visually recognized has been shown, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are rotated with the left-right direction of the lower ends of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 as the rotation axis. The upper parts of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are configured to be drivable so as to fall forward. , the box rear wall portion 6350 positioned at the rear may be configured to be visible.

An example in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are provided in front of the stump portion 6200 has been shown, but only one of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 is provided in front of the stump portion 6200 . The stump opening 6210a may be exposed by moving to the right or left movement position. Alternatively, the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are configured as an integral member, and this member moves to the right or left movement position so that the stump opening 6210a is exposed. may be configured.

The box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rear wall substrate 6352 and a rear wall cover 6356, but the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured to be rotatable. Specifically, the upper side of the rear wall cover 6356 is used as a rotation axis, and the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated by a driving source (not shown) so that the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 comes into contact with the inner surface of the box upper wall portion 6310. The left side of the wall cover 6356 may be used as a rotation axis, and a drive source (not shown) may rotate the rear wall cover 6356 so that the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 comes into contact with the inner surface of the box left wall portion 6340 . With such a configuration, the rear wall cover 6356 is positioned on the front side of the rear wall substrate 6352, and the rear wall substrate 6352 can be visually recognized by the player through the rear wall cover 6356. The box rear wall portion 6350 can be visually recognized by the player in any manner in which the rear wall cover 6356 is not positioned on the near side of the box 6352 and the rear wall substrate 6352 is directly visible. In addition, since the stump accessory 6100 is positioned at the lower right side of the game board side effect display device 1600 as viewed from the player's eye level, the rear wall cover 6356 can be rotated about the upper side and the left side as axes, so that the rear wall after movement can be displayed. The cover 6356 becomes inconspicuous. Note that the right side or the variable may be rotated as an axis.

The rear wall substrate 6352 may have a larger shape than the rear wall cover 6356 . For example, the rear wall substrate 6352 may be configured to have the same size and shape as the stump plate portion 6210, and the respective outer edges may overlap when viewed from the front. In this case, the rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape expanded from its original shape. In this case, in the portion where the white rear wall substrate 6352 is extended to the periphery, the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is emitted from the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall. It is possible to reflect the light reflected backward by the portion 6340 or the like toward the player in front again.

Also, the light emitting portion may be provided in a portion other than the area covered by the rear wall cover 6356 . For example, in the stump plate portion 6210, a light-emitting portion is provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 behind the part imitating a root or the part imitating a cut end of a tree, and the rear wall light-emitting portion 6354 is made to emit light at the same time. can be configured to With such a configuration, it is possible to make the effect of causing the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 to emit light more lively. Alternatively, the rear wall substrate 6352 may be configured such that no light emitting portion other than the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is provided. In this case also, in the portion where the white rear wall substrate 6352 is extended to the periphery, the light reflected backward by the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box bottom wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, etc. It is possible to reflect again toward the player in front.

In the example shown using FIG. 498, the box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rectangular rear wall cover 6356 provided on the near side and a rectangular rear wall substrate 6352 provided on the far side. On the other hand, in the example shown below with reference to FIG. 499, the box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rear wall cover 6356 positioned on the front side, a rear wall substrate 6352 positioned in the middle, and a rear wall plate portion 6380 positioned on the back side. and In this example, the rear wall cover 6356 has a shape imitating a root vegetable, a first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having an external shape imitating a root of a root vegetable, and a second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having an external shape imitating a leaf of a root vegetable. A wall cover light scattering portion 6358b is provided. The rear wall cover 6356 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin so that the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 positioned behind can be visually recognized.

The rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape that resembles a root vegetable as a whole, and is composed of a first rear wall substrate 6352a that imitates the root of a root vegetable and a second rear wall substrate 6352b that imitates the leaf of a root vegetable. A white protective film is formed with a white protective agent on the front and rear surfaces of the first rear wall substrate 6352a. A green protective film is formed on the front and rear surfaces of the second rear wall substrate 6352b with a green protective agent. Four LEDs are surface-mounted on the first rear wall substrate 6352a as the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a. Two LEDs are surface-mounted on the second rear wall substrate 6352b as the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b. A rear wall cover 6356 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 . The rear wall plate portion 6380 has a rectangular shape, and a rear wall substrate 6352 is attached to the front surface thereof. In this example, the rear wall plate portion 6380 forms the rear wall of the stump box portion 6300 .

Alternatively, the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b may be formed as separate printed substrates and attached to the rear wall plate portion 6380 so as to function as the rear wall substrate 6352. Alternatively, the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b may be formed by separately coating one printed circuit board with a white protective agent and a green protective agent.

In the stump box section 6300 having such a configuration, it is preferable to perform an effect of moving the first grass movable section 6360 and the second grass movable section 6370 to the movement positions as described above. Also in this embodiment, the light emission mode when the first rear wall light-emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting section 6354b are used for presentation is a weak light-emitting mode that makes it visible as if root vegetables are emitting light, A strong light emission mode may be adopted in which the stump box section 6300 as a whole can be visually recognized as emitting light.

In addition, even when the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b are turned off, the color and shape of the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b may cause the light in the stump box portion 6300 to change. It is possible to express a predetermined motif. In this example, through a first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a, which simulates a root, the first rear wall substrate 6352a is white, and through a second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which simulates a leaf. The rear wall substrate 6352b is green and visible. In this way, one decorative body can be configured only by the outer shape of the substrate and the color of the substrate.

In this example, a plurality of grass accessories 6400 are provided in front of the lower side of the game board side effect display device 1600 in front of the rabbit role and the stump role.

In the example shown in FIG. 495, the first grass role 6470 to the fourth grass role 6485 are provided as the grass role 6400 between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a as described above. there is Several implementations of such a grass tool 6400 are shown below.

The grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 500(A) is composed of a grass substrate 6420 that is colored and opaque, has a plate-like shape, and has an outline shape imitating grass. In this example, grass substrate 6420 includes grass substrate front light emitter 6422 . The grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is formed by an LED surface-mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 . The grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 500(B) is provided with a grass substrate 6420 which is colored and opaque, has a plate shape, and has an outline shape imitating grass. In this example, the grass substrate 6420 includes a grass substrate rear surface emitter 6424 . The grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is formed by an LED surface-mounted on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420 . In the example shown in FIGS. 500(A) and 500(B), the grass substrate 6420 has an outer shape that imitates grass, and the outer shape itself has a function of decoration. White may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . In this case, the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 by causing the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 to emit green or brown light. Green or brown may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . Green can represent the color of live grass, and brown can represent the color of dead grass. Thus, both the color and the shape of the grass substrate 6420 can be used to realize a decoration imitating grass.

As the LEDs mounted on the grass substrate 6420, LEDs of the same color as the grass substrate 6420 are used. Specifically, when the grass substrate 6420 is white, white LEDs are used as the mounted LEDs. With such a configuration, the LEDs mounted on the grass substrate 6420 can be made inconspicuous. In another example, such a configuration may also be adopted when an LED is provided as a light-emitting portion on the substrate.

The light emitted from the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is directed forward perpendicularly to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize an effect that gives a visually strong impression. When the grass front cover 6440, which will be described later, is provided, the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 are mounted on the grass substrate 6420 so that light is emitted horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. can be configured to be implemented in With such a configuration, light is emitted toward the upper end of the front grass cover 6440 , so that the light emitted from the front light-emitting portion 6422 of the grass substrate is transmitted to the entire front cover 6440 . , the effect as if the entire grass front cover 6440 were illuminated can be visually recognized by the player. Note that, in another example, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing the light emitting portion on the substrate.

On the other hand, the light emitted from the LEDs constituting the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is irradiated horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420 . In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize an effect as if the grass board 6420 were illuminated by a halo. When a rear weed cover 6460 (to be described later) is provided, light is emitted toward the upper end of the rear weed cover 6460 . The light emitted from the rear cover 6460 is transmitted, and the player can be made to visually recognize an effect as if the entire back cover 6460 were illuminated. Note that, in another example, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing the light-emitting portion on the substrate.

Through holes (not shown) forming an electronic circuit are provided on the front and rear surfaces of the grass substrate 6420 . In addition, the metal that constitutes the electronic circuit provided on the printed circuit board is exposed in the through-hole, and when copper is used as the metal, the through-hole will be visually recognized in brown, which is the color of copper. . Here, if at least a part of the grass substrate 6420 is visible to the player, there is a risk that the through holes will also be visible to the player. In particular, when white is used as the color of the grass board 6420, the brown color of the through-holes provided on the front surface of the grass board 6420 is visually recognized by the player. is lost. Therefore, in order to solve such problems, the following configuration may be employed. For example, on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, the through-holes are preferably arranged so as to be distributed over the entire front surface of the grass substrate 6420, instead of concentrating them at predetermined locations. Alternatively, by arranging the through-holes along the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 or on the extension of the contour line forming the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420, the through-holes can be aligned with the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. It becomes possible to visually recognize as if it is a part. A decorative shape resembling grass may be formed by linearly arranging through holes in the same shape as the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 . Also, one or more patterns having the same color as the through holes may be formed on a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 . Alternatively, one or more patterns having the same shape as the through holes may be formed on a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 . For example, if the through-holes are brown and circular, one or more circular patterns may be formed on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 with brown ink. The above example is preferably applied to all the through holes provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, but may be applied to at least some of the through holes. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the function as a decoration is impaired. It should be noted that a through hole may be provided in a substrate included in a accessory in another example, and an embodiment relating to such a through hole may be applied.

500(C) to 500(E) show an example in which a grass front cover 6440 is attached to the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 constitute the grass accessory 6400. FIG. The grass front cover 6440 is made of synthetic resin and has a decorative shape that resembles grass. In addition, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 on which the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is mounted is configured to be covered with the grass front cover 6440 when viewed from the front.

In the example shown in FIG. 500(C) , the front grass cover 6440 is smaller in size than the grass substrate 6420 , and the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is partially covered by the front grass cover 6440 . In the example shown in FIG. 500(D), the grass substrate 6420 and the front grass cover 6440 have the same size, and the entire front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the front grass cover 6440 . In the example shown in FIG. 500(E), the grass front cover 6440 is larger in size than the grass substrate 6420, the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the grass front cover 6440, and the grass is positioned outside the outside of the grass substrate 6420. In the example shown in FIG. The front cover 6440 protrudes.

In the example shown in FIG. 500(C), both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the front grass cover 6440 realize a decorative aspect imitating grass. Also, a sense of depth can be produced. In the examples shown in FIGS. 500(D) and 500(E), the grass front cover 6440 is made of colored transparent or colorless transparent synthetic resin so that the grass substrate 6420 positioned behind can be visually recognized. may be In that case, both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the front grass cover 6440 can realize a decorative aspect. Also, a sense of depth can be produced.

500(F) to 500(H) show an example in which a rear grass cover 6460 is attached to the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass substrate 6420 and the rear grass cover 6460 constitute the grass accessory 6400. FIG. The grass rear cover 6460 is made of a synthetic resin and has a decorative outer shape that resembles grass. In addition, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 where the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is mounted is configured to be covered with the grass rear cover 6460 .

In the example shown in FIG. 500(F), the rear grass cover 6460 is smaller in size than the grass substrate 6420 and the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the rear grass cover 6460 . In the example shown in FIG. 500(G), the grass substrate 6420 and the rear grass cover 6460 have the same size, and the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the rear grass cover 6460 . In the example shown in FIG. 500(H), the size of the rear grass cover 6460 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420. The rear cover 6460 protrudes. In this example, the outer shape of the rear cover 6460 is visible in a front view.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 500(F) and 500(G), the grass accessory 6400 may be configured to be rotatable about the vertical direction. For example, the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 may be configured such that the grass accessory 6400 rotates 180 degrees and the rear grass cover 6460 faces forward. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes a viewing mode as shown in FIGS. 500(C) and 500(D), and the same effects as the examples shown in FIGS. Become. In the example shown in FIG. 500(H), both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the rear cover 6460 can realize a decorative aspect. Also, a sense of depth can be produced.

FIGS. 501(A) to 501(G) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 500(C). In these examples, the size of the front grass cover 6440 is smaller than the size of the grass substrate 6420. Further, modified examples of the specific structure of the front grass cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 501(A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420 . The surface forming the front cover 6440 is not subjected to lens cutting or satin finishing, and is formed smoothly. there is A grass front cover transparent portion 6442, which will be described later, is also configured in a similar manner so that passing light can pass through without irregular reflection. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 positioned behind the front grass cover 6440 can be directly visually recognized.

In this example, by setting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 in a light emitting state, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the light emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . For example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 emits green light, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated in green.

In the example shown in FIG. 501(B), a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420 . The weed front cover 6440 is formed of an upper weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is formed from a colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is formed from a colored transparent synthetic resin. The grass front cover 6440 may be configured by assembling the cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Alternatively, the entire front cover 6440 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a colored transparent sticker is pasted on a part of the front surface of the front cover 6440, or a colored transparent print is applied to the front cover 6440. A portion 6442b may be formed. An example of forming the colored transparent part 6442 b of the front cover 6440 by attaching a colored transparent seal or printing a colored transparent part on a part of the front surface of the front cover 6440 has been described. The colored transparent portion 6442b of the front cover may be formed by affixing a colored transparent seal or printing colored transparently on a part of the . Further, it is preferable to adopt green as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Further, the color of the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be the same color or substantially the same color as the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the fact that the grass substrate 6420 is a printed circuit board can be made inconspicuous. Note that, in another example, such a configuration may also be adopted when the colored transparent portion is provided.

In this example, the white grass substrate 6420 is visible through the front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. In addition, the green grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is positioned in front of the white grass substrate 6420, so that the white grass substrate 6420 can appear green. In addition, since the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is positioned in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 become difficult to see from the player, and the grass substrate front surface in the off state. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player loses interest when the player directly looks at the light emitting unit 6422 . On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned on, the intensity of the light from the light source is reduced by the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, which prevents the player from feeling dazzled. It can be suppressed. In addition, by causing the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 to emit light, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the luminescent color.

Fig. 501(C) shows the example shown in Fig. 501(B) in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed to the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is changed to the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example modified to In this example, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express white, green, and white modes from above in a front view.

In the example shown in FIG. 501(D), a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420 . The front grass cover 6440 includes a front grass cover light scattering portion 6444 in this example. Specifically, the front cover 6440 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and is composed of a front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a provided at the upper portion and a colorless light scattering portion 6444a provided at the lower portion. It is The weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444 a is formed by subjecting at least one of the front surface and the rear surface of the weed front cover 6440 to lens cutting or satin finishing. Preferably, the front grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed on the front surface of the front grass cover 6440 or on both the front and rear surfaces. In this way, the colorless and transparent synthetic resin is made translucent by applying lens cutting and satin finishing, so it is difficult or impossible to see the shape of the members located behind, but the color are visible to the player without change. Although an example in which the light scattering portion is formed in a colorless and transparent synthetic resin has been shown, the light scattering portion may be formed in a colored and transparent synthetic resin. In this case, the color of the colored transparent synthetic resin positioned in front is mixed with the member positioned in the rear and can be visually recognized. Further, the color of the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b may be the same color or substantially the same color as the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the fact that the grass substrate 6420 is a printed circuit board can be made inconspicuous. Further, in the front weed cover 6440 and the rear weed cover 6460, a light scattering portion may be provided so as to border the end portion forming the outer peripheral edge in a front view. In this case, the light from the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light-emitting portion 6424 can be diffusely reflected at the end portions of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460. can highlight the external shape of Note that, in another example, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing the light scattering section.

In this example, since the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is positioned in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are in a state where it is difficult for the player to see them, and the light is turned off. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player loses interest when the player directly looks at the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned on, the light from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is scattered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, so that the player feels dazzled. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of

Although the weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the front surface of the weed front cover 6440, with this configuration, the weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the rear surface of the weed front cover 6440. Compared to the case where the electronic components mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 (LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422) appear blurred, the presence of the electronic components becomes less conspicuous, and the player It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which interest is lost. Note that when the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed on both the front surface and the rear surface of the front cover 6440, the electronic components mounted on the front surface of the front cover 6420 (the LEDs constituting the front light emitting portion 6422 of the front cover 6422) ) can be made less conspicuous. In addition, the color of the grass substrate 6420 in the rear becomes visible through the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover, and the color of the grass substrate 6420 is used as a decoration while obscuring the shape of the electronic components mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. It is a mode that exhibits the function of.

FIG. 501(E) shows, in the example shown in FIG. 501(D), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a to the grass front cover colorless transparent portion. This is an example modified to the portion 6442a. In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in white, green, and white modes from above in a front view.

The example shown in FIG. 501(F) is an example in which the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 501(B) is modified. In this example, a weed front cover opaque portion 6446 is provided instead of the weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the front cover opaque portion 6446 is formed from an opaque synthetic resin. A cover 6440 may be constructed. Alternatively, the entire front cover 6440 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a part of the front surface of the front cover 6440 is provided with a seal or print that makes the rear invisible, thereby forming the front cover opaque portion 6446. may In addition, by applying a sticker or printing to a part of the front surface of the front surface of the front cover 6440 to make the rear invisible, instead of forming the front cover opaque portion 6446, the front surface of the front surface of the front cover 6440 has a rear part. The grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be formed by applying an invisible sticker or printing. In this case, in front of the grass front cover 6440, the state of the front side of the portion where the sticker or print is applied can be visually recognized. For example, when the front grass cover 6440 is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin, it is possible to make the color of the colored transparent synthetic resin visible while making the rear of the front grass cover 6440 invisible. . Further, when the front weed cover light scattering portion 6444 is provided on the front surface of the front weed cover 6440, the front weed cover light scattering portion 6444 should be visible, but the rear of the front weed cover 6440 should be invisible. becomes possible. Yellow or brown may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . Note that, in other examples, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing an opaque portion.

In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass substrate 6420 is white and directly visible, and the white of the grass substrate 6420 is indirectly visible through the front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. visually visible. On the other hand, regarding the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 , the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is visible regardless of the color of the grass substrate 6420 . An example in which yellow or brown is used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 has been shown, but in this aspect, it is possible to express an aspect in which snow is piled up on dry grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light emitting state, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated with the emitted light color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422. FIG. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color, it becomes possible to decorate the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 in green, and the grass grows. can be expressed.

As the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, a silver member capable of specularly reflecting light may be employed. For example, the front cover opaque portion 6446 is made of a synthetic resin plated entirely with an aluminum thin film. The grass front cover 6440 may be configured by assembling the portion 6442a. Alternatively, the entire front cover 6440 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a part of the front surface of the front cover 6440 is affixed with a silver seal, printed with silver paint, or plated with an aluminum thin film. The grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be configured by providing the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . The silver-colored opaque portion has a function of reflecting light. In addition, it may be configured such that a colored paint is applied to the opaque portion formed in silver or a colored transparent seal is attached. For example, by applying a thin layer of yellow paint, the opaque portion can be made visible in gold. Note that, in other examples, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing an opaque portion or a reflective portion.

In the example shown in FIG. 501(F), the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is configured to be visible in silver. In this case, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the front surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is silver, and the front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 are white. It is possible to express a mode in which frost or snow falls on the grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the light emitting mode, the light emitted forward from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is reflected backward by the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . Furthermore, since the grass substrate 6420 is white, the light reflected backward by the front grass cover opaque portion 6446 is incident on the grass substrate 6420 and scattered. will be decorated. In this way, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 can be efficiently used for decoration. By providing a colored transparent layer as the foremost layer of the front cover opaque portion 6446, the front cover opaque portion 6446 can be made visible in silver and in a predetermined color.

FIG. 501(G) shows the example shown in FIG. 501(F), in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the front cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example of In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in white, silver, and white modes from above in a front view.

FIG. 502(A) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 501(A). Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . In this case, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass by the part visible in white by the grass substrate 6420 and the green aspect by the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It's becoming

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is made to emit light, it is desirable that the light emission color is the same as or similar to the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, such as green or yellowish green. It is desirable to emit light. In this case, it is possible to perform a dynamic presentation while keeping the color of the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b as it is. In addition, the white grass substrate 6420 is decorated with the reflected light that does not pass through the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b, so that the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized in green.

FIG. 502(B) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 502(A) is modified into a front cover cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. As the color of the grass front cover 6440, green may be adopted. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, grass can be expressed in white, green, and green modes from above. In addition, since the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is positioned in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the white color of the grass substrate 6420 is mixed with the green color of the front grass cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. , the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 itself is configured to be difficult to see.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is scattered in the front grass cover colored light scattering portion 6444b to decorate the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It becomes possible to make it an aspect. In addition, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be made visible with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 .

FIG. 502(C) shows the example shown in FIG. 502(B) in which the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b is replaced with the front cover cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the front cover cover light scattering portion 6444 is replaced with the front cover colored transparent portion. This is an example modified to 6442b. As the color of the grass front cover 6440, green may be adopted. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, grass can be expressed in white, green, and green modes from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 passes through the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and part of the light does not pass through. The light is reflected and scattered at the front grass cover light scattering portion 6444, and the front grass cover light scattering portion 6444 can be made into a decorative mode. In addition, diffusely reflected light reaches the exposed white grass substrate 6420 , and the white grass substrate 6420 can be made visible with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 .

FIG. 502(D) is an example in which the front cover cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is modified to the front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. As the color of the grass front cover 6440, green may be adopted. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express white, green, yellow, brown, or silver grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light emitting mode, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is reflected on the back surface of the front grass cover opaque portion 6446, and the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b is reflected. It becomes possible to set it as a decoration mode. In addition, by decorating the exposed white grass substrate 6420 with the reflected light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 in green with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422. , can express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 502(E) shows the example shown in FIG. 502(D), in which the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b is changed into the front cover cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover cover opaque portion 6446 is changed into the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b. This is an example of As the color of the grass front cover 6440, green may be adopted. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express white, yellow, brown, silver, or green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be set to the decorative mode. In addition, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 scatters on the back surface of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b or is reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, thereby exposing the white light. By decorating the grass substrate 6420 , the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 in green with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422. , can express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 503(A) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 501(A) is modified into a front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the front grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a can be set to the decorative mode. In addition, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is scattered on the back surface of the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, so that the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated. 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated in green with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. , and it is possible to express the mode in which the grass is growing.

FIG. 503(B) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is modified into a front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 503(A). Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass can be expressed in white, white, yellow, brown, or silver from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the luminous mode, the front grass cover light scattering portion 6444 can be set to the decorative mode by the light reflected from the back surface of the front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, by scattering light on the back surface of the front grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. becomes. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 in green, and the grass grows. can be expressed.

FIG. 503(C) shows the example shown in FIG. 503(B) in which the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is replaced with the front cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover opaque portion 6446 is replaced with the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. This is a modified example. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in white, yellow, brown, silver, or white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light emitting mode, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the light scattered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the white grass can be displayed. It becomes possible to decorate the substrate 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 in green, and the grass grows. can be expressed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 503(A) to 503(C), the front cover 6440 is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin, so that the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is replaced with the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. You may make it comprise the part 6444b. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 is preferably made of green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 503(D) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is modified to the front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 503(C). Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, white, yellow, brown, or silver grass can be represented from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light emitting mode, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the light reflected from the back surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the white grass can be displayed. It becomes possible to decorate the substrate 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 501(A) to 503(D), the outer shape of each of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having a larger outer shape than the grass front cover 6440 is visible to the player as a decorative shape. is configured to In addition, the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422 includes a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Although it is provided at a position where only one of the members is covered when viewed from the front, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is arranged behind the position forming the boundary line of these members. may By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to notice that the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are mounted on the grass substrate 6420 in the off state.

For example, in the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 501(B), an LED that constitutes the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is placed behind the boundary formed by the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b. When configured so as to be arranged, the presence of the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 becomes less conspicuous. It becomes possible for the player to visually recognize it clearly.

Similarly, the relationship between the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the relationship between the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the front cover opaque portion 6446, the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the front cover color. Relationship with light scattering portion 6444b, relationship between weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and weed front cover opaque portion 6446, relationship between weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and weed front cover opaque portion 6446, and weed front cover colored light In the relationship between the scattering portion 6444b and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, when the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are arranged behind the boundary line between these, the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 It is possible to make the presence of the LEDs constituting the inconspicuous.

Further, the relationship between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the relationship between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the relationship between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The relationship between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the weed front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the weed front cover In the case where the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are arranged behind these boundary lines in relation to the cover opaque portion 6446, the presence of the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 becomes inconspicuous.

In the combination described above, in the combination of the front weed cover opaque portion 6446 and the member forming the boundary line in combination with the weed front cover opaque portion 6446, the light of the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is In combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, it is possible to efficiently transmit to the member forming the boundary line.

The light from the LEDs forming the grass-substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 may be applied perpendicularly to the grass-substrate 6420, or the boundary line at the position where the LEDs forming the grass-substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 are mounted. You may make it irradiate in the direction perpendicular|vertical to the tangential line of .

For example, when both of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a are combined, the light from the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 may be used. It is preferable that the direction of light irradiation is perpendicular to the grass substrate 6420 . On the other hand, in the combination of the weed front cover opaque portion 6446 and the member forming the boundary line in combination with the weed front cover opaque portion 6446, the boundary line at the position where the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are mounted. It is preferable to irradiate the light in the direction of the member that is perpendicular to the tangent line and combined with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 to form the boundary line.

Note that when rectangular LEDs are used as the LEDs that constitute the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the longitudinal direction of the LEDs coincides with the direction of the boundary line or the contact of the boundary line at the position where the LED is arranged. should be placed as follows.

In addition, in the case where the two parts forming the boundary line are formed by one member, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 has a size of about the same width at the part corresponding to the boundary line so that it does not protrude when viewed from the front. It may be configured to provide a V-shaped groove. With such a configuration, when viewed from the front of the LEDs forming the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the LEDs forming the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are refracted by the V-shaped grooves and visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to make the presence of the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 inconspicuous. Note that the shape is not limited to the V-shaped groove, and any structure that can be bent may be used. On the other hand, when a boundary line is formed by combining a plurality of members, the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are refracted and visually recognized without providing such grooves. It is possible to make the presence of the LEDs constituting the substrate front light emitting portion 6422 inconspicuous.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 501(A) to 503(D), the outer shape of each of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having a larger outer shape than the grass front cover 6440 is visible to the player as a decorative shape. is configured to This makes it possible to give a sense of depth. In the weed front cover 6440, the weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the weed front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the weed front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. Decorative shapes are also formed at the boundaries.

In addition, since the grass substrate 6420 is in an exposed state, the grass substrate 6420 is decorated with the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself, and the grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . will be In particular, when the grass substrate 6420 is made white and light of a color other than white is emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be changed to the irradiated color to make it visible.

In addition, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 positioned in front of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass substrate 6420 , so that the light is directed toward the edge of the grass substrate 6420 . is configured to reflect light, it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the front grass cover 6440 and that is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . In addition, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 can be decorated in a different color depending on whether the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state or in the light-emitting state. In addition, by mounting the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 on the grass substrate 6420 so that the light is emitted horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420, the light emitted from the grass substrate 6420 can be More light can reach the edge.

FIGS. 504(A) to 506(D) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 500(D). In these examples, the size of the grass substrate 6420 and the front grass cover 6440 are configured to be the same. Further, modified examples of the specific structure of the front grass cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 504(A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420 . The surface forming the front cover 6440 is not subjected to lens cutting or satin finishing, and is formed smoothly. there is In this example, the entire front weed cover 6440 functions as a colorless transparent front cover portion 6442a. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 positioned behind the front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be directly visually recognized. In addition, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass accessory 6400 as a whole can express white grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color.
For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 in green, thereby representing a mode in which grass is growing. can.

FIG. 504(B) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified into a front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504(A). Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express white and green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 504(C) shows the example shown in FIG. 504(B) in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed to the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is changed to the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example modified to Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, green and white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 504(D) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified into a front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 504(A). In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

FIG. 504(E) shows the example shown in FIG. 504(D) in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is replaced with the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is replaced with the front cover colorless transparent portion 6444a. This is a modified example of the portion 6442a. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

FIG. 504(F) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified into a front cover cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 504(A). Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, white, yellow, brown, or silver grass can be represented from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 504(G) shows the example shown in FIG. 504(F), in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed to the front cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover opaque portion 6446 is changed to the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example of Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 505(A) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504(A). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass accessory 6400 as a whole can represent green grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 505(B) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504(D). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In this case, the front grass cover 6440 has a green front grass cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

FIG. 505(C) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504(E). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In this case, the front grass cover 6440 has a green front grass cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 505(D) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504(F). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, green, yellow, brown, or silver grass can be represented from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 505(E) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504(G). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express yellow, brown, silver, or green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 506(A) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 504(A). In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass accessory 6400 as a whole can represent white grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated with green. It is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 506(B) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 504(F) is modified into a front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in white, green, yellow, brown, or silver from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated with green. It is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 506(C) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 504(G). Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

In the example shown in FIGS. 506(A) to 506(C), the front cover 6440 is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin to replace the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. You may make it comprise the part 6444b. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 is preferably made of green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 506(D) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the grass accessory 6400 as a whole can express yellow, brown, or silver grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 to the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass accessory 6400. The light reaches and it becomes possible to decorate the end of the grass accessory 6400 with a predetermined color. More specifically, when the grass accessory 6400 is viewed obliquely, the edge of the grass substrate 6420 appears to be exposed, so that the exposed portion can be visually recognized as glowing in a predetermined luminescent color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass accessory 6400 in green, and to express the mode in which grass grows. It should be noted that even in an example in which another grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is provided, it is possible to make it visible in such a manner.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 504(A) to 506(D), the external shapes of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having the same size as the grass front cover 6440 are visible to the player as decorative shapes. It is configured. In the weed front cover 6440, the weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the weed front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the weed front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. Decorative shapes are also formed at the boundaries.

In addition, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible through the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself is used for decoration. At the same time, the grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . In addition, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the front grass cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, the color of the front grass cover 6440 and the color of the grass substrate 6420 are different. The grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 .

In addition, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 positioned in front of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass substrate 6420 , so that the light is directed toward the edge of the grass substrate 6420 . is configured to reflect light, it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the front grass cover 6440 and that is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . In addition, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 can be decorated in a different color depending on whether the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state or in the light-emitting state.

FIGS. 507(A) to 509(D) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 500(E). In these examples, the front grass cover 6440 is larger in size than the grass substrate 6420, and the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the front grass cover 6440. Although it is configured to protrude, a modified example of the specific structure of the front grass cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 507(A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420 . The surface forming the front cover 6440 is not subjected to lens cutting or satin finishing, and is formed smoothly. there is In this example, the entire front weed cover 6440 functions as a colorless transparent front cover portion 6442a. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 positioned behind the front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be directly visually recognized. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless, transparent, and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 in green, thereby representing a mode in which grass is growing. can.

FIG. 507(B) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified into a front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 507(A). Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in colorless and transparent, white, and green forms from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 507(C) shows the example shown in FIG. 507(B) in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed to the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is changed to the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example modified to Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass can be expressed in transparent green, green, and white modes from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 507(D) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified into a front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 507(A). In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express the grass in colorless and transparent, white, and white modes from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

Fig. 507(E) shows the example shown in Fig. 507(D) in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is replaced with the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is replaced with the front cover colorless transparent portion 6444a. This is an example modified to the portion 6442a. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express the grass in colorless and translucent, white, and white modes from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

FIG. 507(F) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified into a front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 507(A). Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless and transparent, white, yellow, brown, or silver mode from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 507(G) shows the example shown in FIG. 507(F), in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed into the front cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover opaque portion 6446 is changed into the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example of Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 508(A) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 507(A). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a green transparent or green mode from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 508(B) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 507(D). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in green transparent, green, and green modes from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

FIG. 508(C) shows the example shown in FIG. 508(B) in which the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is replaced with the front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is replaced with the front cover colored transparent portion 6444b. This is an example modified to the portion 6442b. Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass can be expressed in semi-transparent green, green, and white modes from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored light diffusion portion 6444b, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

FIG. 508(D) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 507(F). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to represent grass in green transparent, green, yellow, brown, or silver mode from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 508(E) shows the example shown in FIG. 508(D), in which the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b is changed into the front cover cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover cover opaque portion 6446 is changed into the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b. This is an example of Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, yellow, brown, silver, or green grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 509(A) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 507(A). In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express the grass in a manner that is colorless, transparent, and white from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated with green. It is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 509(B) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 507(F). Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless and transparent, white, yellow, brown, or silver mode from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated with green. It is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 509(C) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 507(G). Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated with green. It is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

In the example shown in FIGS. 509(A) to 509(C), the front cover 6440 is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin to replace the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. You may make it comprise the part 6444b. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 is preferably made of green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 509(D) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the grass accessory 6400 as a whole can express yellow, brown, or silver grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, so that the light reaches the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420. reaches the upper end of the grass substrate 6420, and it becomes possible to irradiate the light upward and backward. This makes it possible to decorate other members by irradiating light of a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the members located above and behind the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420 in green. In this example, it can be said that the grass substrate 6420 is provided not to decorate the grass accessory 6400 itself, but to decorate other members.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 507(A) to 509(D), at least one of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 has a decorative shape that can be visually recognized by the player. In the weed front cover 6440, the weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the weed front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the weed front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. Decorative shapes are also formed at the boundaries.

In addition, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the front grass cover light scattering portion 6444, decoration is performed with the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. The grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . In addition, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 positioned in front of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass substrate 6420 , so that the light is directed toward the edge of the grass substrate 6420 . is configured to reflect light, it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the front grass cover 6440 and that is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . In addition, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 can be decorated in a different color depending on whether the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state or in the light-emitting state.

FIGS. 510(A) to 510(D) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 500(H). In these examples, a grass substrate rear surface emitting portion 6424 is provided on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420 . In addition, the rear grass cover 6460 is larger in size than the grass substrate 6420, and the front surface of the rear grass cover 6460 is covered with the grass substrate 6420. However, a modified example of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 510(A), a colorless and transparent grass rear cover 6460 is provided behind a white grass substrate 6420 . The surface forming the rear cover 6460 is not subjected to lens cutting or satin finishing, and is molded smoothly. In this example, the entire front weed cover 6440 functions as a colorless transparent front cover portion 6442a. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the grass rear cover located behind the grass substrate 6420 can be directly viewed. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless, transparent, and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is set to the light emitting mode, the rear grass cover colorless transparent portion 6462a can be decorated. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424, it is possible to decorate the portion of the rear grass cover colorless transparent portion 6462a that is exposed in the front view with green, and the grass grows. You can express the mode.

FIG. 510(B) is an example in which the rear cover cover colorless transparent portion 6462a is modified to the rear cover cover colored transparent portion 6462b in the example shown in FIG. 510(A). Green may be adopted as the color of the rear cover cover colored transparent portion 6462b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in green transparent and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is set to the light emitting mode, the rear grass cover colored transparent portion 6462b can be decorated. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424, it is possible to decorate the portion of the rear grass cover colored transparent portion 6462b that is exposed in the front view with green, and the grass grows. You can express the mode.

FIG. 510(C) is an example in which the back cover cover colorless transparent portion 6462a is modified to the back cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6464a in the example shown in FIG. 510(A). In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless, translucent, and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 is made to emit light, the rear grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6464a can be decorated. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424, it is possible to decorate the portion of the rear grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6464a that is exposed in the front view with green, and the grass grows. You can express how you are.

FIG. 510(D) is an example in which the rear cover cover colorless transparent portion 6462a is modified to the rear cover cover opaque portion 6466 in the example shown in FIG. 510(A). Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the rear cover opaque portion 6466 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 is set to the light emitting mode, the light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass rear cover opaque portion 6466, so that the light reaches the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420. reaches, and the periphery of the edge of the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the periphery of the edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 in green, and to represent a mode in which grass is growing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 510(A) to 510(D), the grass substrate 6420 and the rear grass cover 6460, which has a larger outside shape than the grass substrate 6420, are visible to the player as decorative shapes. It is configured. This makes it possible to give a sense of depth.
In addition, since the grass substrate 6420 is exposed, decoration is performed using the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. Further, when the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 is set to emit light of a predetermined color, the light from the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 reaches the upper end portion of the rear grass cover 6460 and the upper end portion of the rear grass cover 6460 is illuminated. is decorated with a predetermined color can be visually recognized.

FIGS. 511(A) to 512(G) show modified examples of the examples shown in FIGS. 500(A) to 501(G). Specifically, in the example shown in FIGS. 511A and 511B, grass substrate 6420 is provided with grass substrate opening 6426 having a decorative shape resembling the head of a rabbit. Through the substrate opening 6426, the rear side is configured to be visible.

511(C) to 511(E) and FIGS. 512(A) to 512(G), the front grass cover 6440 is positioned in front of the grass substrate 6420, A grass front cover opening 6448 having a decorative shape imitating a rabbit's head is provided in the front grass cover opening 6448 so that the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized through the grass front cover opening 6448 .

511(F) to 511(H), the grass back cover 6460 is positioned behind the grass substrate 6420, and the grass substrate 6420 has grass in a decorative shape resembling a rabbit's head. A substrate opening 6426 is provided. The grass rear cover 6460 is configured to be visible through the grass substrate opening 6426 .

FIG. 511(A) is an example in which a grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 500(A). The grass substrate openings 6426 are formed in the grass substrate 6420 in such a manner that physical openings in the form of punched holes are provided. The grass substrate opening 6426 is shaped like a rabbit's head. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided, and in this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also the grass substrate opening 6426 can have a decorative shape. In addition, it becomes possible to visually recognize the rear through the grass substrate opening 6426 .

FIG. 511(B) is an example in which a grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 500(B). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in such a manner that a physical opening in the shape of a punched hole is provided in the grass substrate 6420, and a member located behind the grass substrate opening 6426 is configured to be directly visible. there is The substrate grass substrate opening 6426 is shaped like a rabbit's head. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided, and in this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also the grass substrate opening 6426 can have a decorative shape. In addition, it is possible to directly view the rear from the grass substrate opening 6426 .

FIG. 511(C) is an example in which a front weed cover opening 6448 is provided in the front weed cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 500(C). The grass front cover opening 6448 is formed in a manner in which a punched hole-shaped physical opening is provided in the grass front cover 6440 , and the grass substrate 6420 positioned behind is directly visible through the grass front cover opening 6448 . configured as possible. The grass front cover opening 6448 is shaped like a rabbit's head. A plurality of weed front cover openings 6448 may be provided, and in this example, a weed front cover first opening 6448a and a weed front cover second opening 6448b smaller than the weed front cover first opening 6448a are provided. ing.

The front weed cover first opening 6448a is provided at a position overlapping with the first weed substrate front light emitting portion 6422a forming part of the weed substrate front light emitting portion 6422 when viewed from the front. The grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is configured to be directly visible through. On the other hand, the grass front cover second opening 6448b is positioned so as not to overlap the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, which constitute a part of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, when viewed from the front. is provided. With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the front cover 6440 but also the front cover opening 6448 can have a decorative shape. Further, the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized from the front grass cover opening 6448, and depending on the shape of the front grass cover opening 6448 and the color of the grass substrate 6420 visually recognized from the front grass cover opening 6448, decoration is done.

When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the grass exposed at the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a of the grass front cover 6440 and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The substrate 6420 is directly decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are configured to emit light, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422b, It is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the front grass cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. It is decorated with light emitted from the second front light emitting portion 6422b and the third light emitting portion 6422c on the grass substrate front surface.

FIG. 511(D) is an example in which the grass front cover 6440 is modified to have the same size as the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511(C). FIG. 511(E) is an example in which the size of the grass front cover 6440 is changed to be larger than that of the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511(C). In these examples as well, similar effects can be obtained by adopting a mode similar to that of the grass front cover opening 6448 in the example shown in FIG. 511(C).

FIG. 511(F) is an example in which a grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 500(F). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in such a manner that a punched hole-shaped physical opening is provided in the grass substrate 6420, and the grass rear cover 6460 positioned behind the grass substrate opening 6426 is directly visible. It is configured. The grass substrate opening 6426 is shaped like a rabbit's head. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided, and in this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. The grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is not provided around the grass substrate first opening 6426a. Further, a grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a and a grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b are provided so as to sandwich the grass substrate second opening 6426b.

With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also the grass substrate opening 6426 can have a decorative shape. Also, the rear cover 6460 can be visually recognized from the opening 6426 of the grass substrate. Also, decoration is performed by the shape of the grass substrate opening 6426 and the color of the grass rear cover 6460 visually recognized from the grass substrate opening 6426 .

When the grass-substrate rear surface first light-emitting portion 6424a and the grass-substrate rear-surface second light-emitting portion 6424b are configured to emit light, the grass-substrate rear surface first light-emitting portion 6424a and the grass-substrate rear surface second light-emitting portion 6424a are exposed from the grass substrate rear surface cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate second opening portion 6426b. The grass substrate rear surface is decorated with light emitted from the second light emitting portion 6424b. On the other hand, the rear grass cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate first opening 6426a is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a and the grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b. The amount of light that reaches the portion exposed from the grass substrate second opening 6426b is smaller. Therefore, the portion exposed from the first grass substrate opening 6426a of the rear grass cover 6460 is decorated with a smaller amount of light than the portion exposed from the second grass substrate opening 6426b of the rear grass cover 6460.

It should be noted that it may be possible to perform an effect in which the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a is turned off and only the grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b is lit in a predetermined color (for example, green). In this case, the portion exposed from the first grass substrate opening 6426a of the rear weed cover 6460 is substantially not in a decorative state because the light does not reach the second opening of the grass substrate 6460. Only the portion exposed from 6426b can be decorated.

FIG. 511(G) is an example in which the size of the rear cover 6460 is changed to the same size as the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. FIG. 511(H) is an example in which the size of the grass rear cover 6460 is changed to be larger than that of the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511(F). In these examples as well, similar effects can be obtained by adopting a mode similar to that of the grass substrate opening 6426 in the example shown in FIG. 511(F).

FIG. 512(A) shows an example in which a front weed cover opening 6448 is provided in the front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 501(A). In this example, a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420 . The front weed cover first opening 6448a is provided at a position overlapping with the first weed substrate front light emitting portion 6422a forming part of the weed substrate front light emitting portion 6422 when viewed from the front. The grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is configured to be directly visible through. On the other hand, the grass front cover second opening 6448b does not overlap the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, which constitute a part of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, when viewed from the front. , and the grass front cover 6440. As shown in FIG.

In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the front grass cover opening 6448, and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the front grass cover is visible. The grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as white because it is interposed. Therefore, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the rabbit-like shape formed by the front grass cover opening 6448 is not conspicuous. In addition, since the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is composed of white LEDs that are the same color as the grass substrate 6420, the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 stands out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing the presence of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 .

When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is the grass substrate. It is directly decorated with the light emitted from the front first light emitting part 6422a. For example, when brown is adopted as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are Although the edge faces are brown and decorative, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 not exposed is viewed by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are configured to emit light, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422b, It is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the front grass cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. It is decorated with light emitted from the second front light emitting portion 6422b and the third light emitting portion 6422c on the grass substrate front surface. For example, when green is adopted as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the edge surface forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b is green. However, the vicinity of the center of the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second grass front cover opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the grass substrate 6420 .

FIG. 512(B) shows an example in which a front grass cover opening 6448 is provided in the front grass cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 501(B). In this example, the weed front cover 6440 is formed by an upper weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. 6448 is provided. It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the front grass cover opening 6448. Through 6442b, the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as green. As a result, it is possible to express an aspect as if there is a white rabbit in green grass.

When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is the grass substrate. It is directly decorated with the light emitted from the front first light emitting part 6422a. For example, when brown is adopted as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are Although the end face is brown and decorative, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as the white grass substrate 6420 green. Alternatively, when green, which is the same color as that of the grass front cover colored transparent portion, is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass is exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The end face forming the base plate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a is decorated with green luminescent color, and since it has the same color as the grass front cover colored transparent part, it expresses a form as if a rabbit is hidden in the grass. be able to.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are configured to emit light, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422b, It is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the front grass cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. It is decorated with light emitted from the second front light emitting portion 6422b and the third light emitting portion 6422c on the grass substrate front surface. For example, when green is adopted as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the edge surface forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b is green. However, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate.

FIG. 512(C) shows the example shown in FIG. 512(B) in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is replaced with the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is replaced with the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example modified to In this example, it is possible to express grass in white, green, and white modes from above when viewed from the front. Further, regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 512(A).

FIG. 512(D) shows an example in which a front weed cover opening 6448 is provided in the front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 501(D). In this example, the weed front cover 6440 is formed by an upper weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. An opening 6448 is provided. In this example, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the front grass cover opening 6448, and the front grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is visible. , the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as white. This makes it possible to express a mode as if a white rabbit is hidden in white grass.

When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is the grass substrate. It is directly decorated with the light emitted from the front first light emitting part 6422a. For example, when green is adopted as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are Although the edge faces are green and decorated, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a is visible to the player as the white grass substrate 6420.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are configured to emit light, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422b, It is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the front grass cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. It is decorated with light emitted from the second front light emitting portion 6422b and the third light emitting portion 6422c on the grass substrate front surface. For example, when green is adopted as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the edge surface forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b is green. However, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate. As a result, it is possible to express an aspect as if there is a white rabbit in green grass.

FIG. 512(E) shows, in the example shown in FIG. 512(D), the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a to the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a to the front cover colorless transparent portion. This is an example modified to the portion 6442a. In this example, it is possible to express the grass in white, white, and white form from above when viewed from the front. Further, regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 512(A).

FIG. 512(F) is an example in which a front weed cover opening 6448 is provided in the front weed cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 501(F). In this example, the weed front cover 6440 is formed by an upper weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442 a and a lower weed front cover opaque portion 6446 . are provided. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the front grass cover opening 6448, and the front grass cover opaque portion 6446 is yellow. or brown or silver. This makes it possible to express a mode as if a white rabbit is hidden in yellow, brown, or silver grass.

When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is the grass substrate. It is directly decorated with the light emitted from the front first light emitting part 6422a. For example, when yellow or brown is adopted as the light emission color of the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a, or when white blinking is adopted as the light emission mode, in the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided, The end face forming the exposed grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a is decorated in yellow, brown, or white blinking mode. In addition, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the first grass front cover opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as yellow, brown, or silver, which is the color of the front grass cover opaque portion 6446 . As a result, the grass front cover first opening portion 6448a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are in the same decorative mode. aspect can be expressed. On the other hand, when white is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are The end face to be formed is white and decorated. In addition, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the front grass cover first opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as yellow, brown, or silver, which is the color of the front grass cover opaque portion 6446 . As a result, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided, which has been visually recognized as white only by the color of the substrate, when such a light emission mode is set from the above-described light-off state, The light emission color of the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a can also be white, and the white rabbit can be expressed in a manner that emphasizes it more.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are configured to emit light, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422b, It is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the front grass cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. It is decorated with light emitted from the second front light emitting portion 6422b and the third light emitting portion 6422c on the grass substrate front surface. For example, when white is adopted as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the edge surface forming the grass front cover second opening portion 6448b is surrounded by the opening. The grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate, although the grass substrate 6420 is white and decorated. As a result, it is possible to emphatically express the appearance of a white rabbit hiding in yellow, brown, or silver grass.

FIG. 512(G) shows the example shown in FIG. 512(F) in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed into the front cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover opaque portion 6446 is changed into the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example of In this example, it is possible to express grass in white, yellow, brown, or silver, white form from above when viewed from the front. Further, regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 512(A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 511(A) to 512(G), decorative members provided in front (grass substrate 6420 and front grass cover 6440) have decorative shaped openings (grass substrate opening 6426 and grass front cover 6440). By providing a front cover opening 6448) so that the members provided at the rear can be seen, the decoratively shaped opening is conspicuous and visible to the player. In addition, since the member provided in front and the member provided in back have different colors, transparency, etc., the shape of the opening can be made more conspicuous. In addition, it may be configured to use such an opening in a decorated state as an effect.
In the examples shown in FIGS. 500(A) to 500(H) and FIGS. 501(A) to 501(G), modified examples in which openings are provided are shown in FIGS. 511(A) to 512(G). However, in the examples shown in FIGS. 502(A) to 510(D), it is also possible to provide openings in the same manner.

An example has been shown in which a physical punched opening is provided in the front cover 6440 to form the front cover opening 6448 to form an area that allows the rear to be visually recognized. Instead of the method of providing, the external shape of the visible area may be formed by the boundary line between the area where the rear is invisible or difficult to see and the area where the rear is relatively easily visible.

For example, the outer invisible area may be composed of the weed front cover opaque portion 6446 and the inner easily visible area may be composed of the weed front cover transparent portion 6442 . Alternatively, the outer difficult-to-visually-visible area is configured by the colored grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the inner easily-visible area is configured by the grass-front-cover light scattering portion 6444, or the outer difficult-to-visually-recognized area is configured by the colored grass. The front cover light scattering portion 6444 constitutes the inner easily visible region, and the outer difficult-to-recognize region is composed of the colorless front cover light scattering portion 6444. The easy-to-recognize area is composed of the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the outer, difficult-to-recognize area is composed of the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the inner easy-to-recognize area is composed of the front cover colorless, transparent portion 6442a. You may make it comprise by. Alternatively, the weed front cover 6440 includes a weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442 a, a weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442 b, a weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444 a, a weed front cover colored light scattering portion 6444 b, and a weed front cover opaque portion 6446 . may be provided, and an inner easily visible region may be provided across two or more of these regions. With such a mode, it is also possible to provide a region that has a decorative shape and allows easy visibility of the rear side.

512(B) to 512(G), the location where the weed front cover opening 6448 is provided is one of the weed cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the weed cover light scattering portion 6444, the weed cover opaque portion 6446, and the like. Although only the area is provided, the front weed cover opening 6448 may be provided across a plurality of areas constituting the front weed cover 6440 . Specifically, the weed front cover 6440 includes a weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a weed front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a weed front cover opaque portion. 6446, and may be configured to provide front grass cover openings 6448 across areas of two or more of them.
FIGS. 500(A) to 512(G) show an example in which the grass accessory 6400 can be visually recognized as a decoration mode in a light-off state or a light-emitting state, but these states are used as an effect in a game. For example, one of these states may be configured to notify the player of a predetermined event in the gaming machine. Alternatively, the player may be notified of a predetermined event by changing when these states change from the above-described one state to the above-described other state. The predetermined event may be, for example, an indication of the expected degree of a big hit, or an advance notice indicating that the operation button 410 will become operable.

500(C) to 500(E), 501(A) to 509(D), and 511(C) to 512(G), an example in which a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the grass substrate 6420. showed that. 500(F) to 500(H) and FIGS. 510(A) to 510(D) show an example in which the grass rear cover 6460 is provided behind the grass substrate 6420. Any one of the embodiments in which the grass front cover 6440 is provided in the rear of the grass substrate 6420 and any one of the embodiments in which the grass rear cover 6460 is provided behind the grass substrate 6420 are combined. may

When the embodiments are combined, it is preferable that the grass substrates 6420 have the same size. 500(C) and 500(F), when the front weed cover 6440 and the rear weed cover 6460 are configured to be smaller than the grass substrate 6420, the front weed cover 6440 and the rear weed cover 6460 It is preferable to combine the embodiments with the rear cover 6460 having the same size. In this case, the outer edges of the front weed cover 6440 and the rear weed cover 6460 just overlap when viewed from the front. If the grass substrate 6420, the front grass cover 6440, and the rear grass cover 6460 have the same size as in the embodiments shown in FIGS. , Examples may be combined. In this case, the outer edges of the front weed cover 6440, the weed substrate 6420, and the rear weed cover 6460 just overlap when viewed from the front. 500(E) and 500(H), when the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 are configured to be larger than the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 It is preferable to combine the embodiments with the rear cover 6460 having the same size. In this case, the outer edges of the front weed cover 6440 and the rear weed cover 6460 just overlap when viewed from the front. In addition, the front weed cover 6440 and the rear weed cover 6460 are preferably made of the same color of synthetic resin. is preferably made of a synthetic resin. Further, when the front cover 6440 is made of a transparent green synthetic resin, the rear cover 6460 may be made of a transparent green synthetic resin.

When the embodiments are combined, the grass substrate 6420 includes both the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 . It may be configured so that one side is not provided. For example, when the examples shown in FIGS. 500(E) and 500(H) are combined, the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 are larger than the grass substrate 6420 in front view. Therefore, it is possible to decorate the rear cover 6460 with the light from the front light-emitting portion 6422 of the grass substrate. It is also possible to decorate the front grass cover 6440 with the light from the rear grass substrate light-emitting portion 6424 . In this case, it is desirable to provide a light scattering portion so as to border the end portion forming the outer peripheral edge in the front view of the front cover 6440 and the rear cover 6460 . Note that the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear surface emitting portion 6424 may not be provided. In this case, the grass board 6420 may be configured, for example, to have a function of relaying the signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to another role.

Any one example of the grass accessory 6400 described above may be applied to each of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 shown in FIG. Specifically, the outer shapes of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are not changed, and the area other than the first grass decoration portion 6360a constituting the outer area of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are not changed. , and the first grass decorative portion 6360a that constitutes the inner region in the first grass movable portion 6360, the member that constitutes the outer region and the inner region in any one example of the grass accessory 6400 It is better to apply the member. In addition, with respect to the area other than the second grass decoration portion 6370a that constitutes the outer area of the second grass movable portion 6370 and the second grass decoration portion 6370a that constitutes the inner area of the second grass movable portion 6370, the grass It is preferable to apply the member configuring the outer region and the member configuring the inner region in any one example of the accessory 6400 .

Also, any one example of the grass accessory 6400 may be applied to both the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 . For example, the example shown in FIG. 510B may be applied to both the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. FIG. In this case, the left and right white grass substrates 6420 are in contact with each other to form one decoration. In addition, the left and right transparent green rear covers 6460 are in contact with each other to form one decorative body. On the other hand, even when the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 move left and right, the left and right white grass substrates 6420 and the left and right green transparent grass rear covers 6460 each form a single decorative body. are doing.

In FIG. 495, a third grass role 6480 is provided, and a fourth grass role 6485 is provided behind it. It is configured to be hidden in the grass role 6480 . Here, any one example of the above-described grass role 6400 may be applied to each of the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 . At this time, it is desirable that the grass substrates 6420 of the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 have the same size. In addition, one or both of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 that can be provided in the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 can be made to emit light as in the above example. may be configured.

510(A) as the third grass role 6480 and the grass role 6400 shown in FIG. 507(E) as the fourth grass role 6485 are shown below. In this case, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 included in the grass substrate 6420 of the third grass role 6480 provided in front is illuminated, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a provided in the fourth grass role 6485, It is possible to illuminate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the white grass substrate 6420 from the front side. In addition, the fourth herb accessory 6485 efficiently diffusely reflects the light emitted from the third herb accessory 6480 to the front to enhance the interest of the player as an effect.

On the other hand, it is possible to decorate the rear cover 6460 of the third grass role 6480 by emitting light from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided in the fourth grass role 6485 . At this time, only the peripheral portion such as the upper side of the rear cover 6460 is visible to the player as a decorative aspect, but the light passing through the rear cover 6460 is directed backward by the white grass substrate 6420. The light is diffusely reflected and irradiated toward the fourth grass role 6485 to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the fourth grass role 6485 .

In this way, light is diffusely reflected alternately between the third grass role 6480 provided in front and the fourth grass role 6485 provided in the rear, thereby making the position of the light source invisible to the player. It is possible to efficiently reflect light forward while arranging. In particular, when a silver member capable of mirror-reflecting light is employed as the front cover opaque portion 6446 and the opaque back cover cover 6466, light can be reflected more efficiently.

An example in which the third grass role 6480 provided in front and the fourth grass role 6485 provided in the back partly overlap in a front view is shown, but the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 may be configured to completely overlap when viewed from the front. Also, the third grass role 6480 may be configured to be larger than the fourth grass role 6485 . The fourth grass role 6485 may be completely hidden behind the third grass role 6480 when viewed from the front. Alternatively, they may be arranged at positions that are adjacent to each other but do not overlap when viewed from the front.

One or both of the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided behind may be configured to be movable as a presentation. For example, an example in which the third grass role 6480 provided in front and the fourth grass role 6485 provided in the back partly overlap in front view has been shown, but from this state, the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 may be configured to completely overlap when viewed from the front. In this case, by moving one of the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 in the horizontal direction, the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 completely overlap when viewed from the front. By moving both the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 in the left-right direction, the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 can be viewed from the front. may be configured so that they completely overlap with each other. In this case, the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 may be configured so that they can move from a state in which they do not overlap at all in a front view to a state in which they overlap. Moreover, as for the movement direction, it may be configured so as to be movable not only in the horizontal direction but also in the vertical direction. In this case, it should be configured such that it can move upward or downward by the height of the grass accessory itself. Even in such a configuration, the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 can be configured so that they can move from a state in which they do not overlap at all in a front view to a state in which they overlap. Then, it is preferable to configure such that the light emission modes as described above can be taken in a state where the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 are superimposed in a front view.

An example in which the grass accessory 6400 is movable has been shown, but by moving the grass accessory 6400, the openings (grass substrate opening 6426 and grass front cover opening 6448) are difficult to see or invisible. A change to a visible state may be employed as an effect. Specifically, the relationship between the third grass role 6480 provided in front and the fourth grass role 6485 provided in the rear and provided with the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 is shown in the front view. From the state where the grass substrate opening 6426 and the front cover opening 6448 of the fourth grass role 6485 are located behind the third grass role 6480, the third grass role 6480 is positioned behind the third grass role 6480 in front view. The grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 provided in the 4-grass accessory 6485 change to a state where they are not positioned, and the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 can be visually recognized from the front view by the player. It is preferable to configure such that

Although an example in which the grass accessory 6400 is movable has been shown, the grass accessory 6400 may be configured to move to a position overlapping the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 as an effect. At this time, a predetermined image may be displayed as an effect in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . Specifically, when the grass role 6400 moves from below to a position overlapping the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the outline of the grass role 6400 is modeled according to the movement of the grass role 6400. The image may be moved upward and displayed. At this time, it is desirable to move while displaying an image simulating the outline of the grass role 6400 slightly above the grass role 6400 in a front view. By adopting such a configuration, the front grass cover 6440 is constituted by an image simulating the outline of the grass accessory 6400, the outer shape of the grass accessory 6400 configured by the front grass cover 6440, the grass substrate 6422, or the rear cover 6460. There are a plurality of grass-like shapes represented by a boundary line between a plurality of members or a grass substrate 6420 that is smaller than the transparent grass front cover 6440 and visible through the grass front cover 6440 from top to bottom when viewed from the front. The provided decoration mode can be made visible to the player. In this way, one decoration mode can be realized as an effect by three elements, ie, the image displayed on the display device, the outer shape of the character, and the shape provided inside the character. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 502(B) and 507(B), etc., when the grass accessory 6400 has two shapes in front view, one decoration mode is realized as an effect by a total of four shapes. be able to.

The back surface of the grass substrate 6420 may be configured to mount the same electronic components as the rabbit character 6000 has. Further, the grass substrate 6420 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 are attached to the grass substrate 6420 with an adhesive, and power is supplied to the LEDs. The wiring may be similarly attached to the grass substrate 6420 with an adhesive. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 is provided with a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b so as to make the wiring difficult to see from the player. , the LED and the wiring may be arranged behind them. In addition, by printing or engraving a pattern having the same shape as the LEDs and the wiring on the transparent grass substrate 6420, the transparency of the grass substrate 6420 is ensured while making it difficult for the player to see the LEDs and the wiring. may be configured. In this case, by causing the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 to emit light, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, or the LED or the A pattern having the same shape as the wiring may be illuminated to be in a decorative state. With such a configuration, these members can realize both the function of hiding the presence of the LEDs and wiring and the function of decoration.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 500(C) to 512(G), one grass substrate 6420 and one grass front cover 6440, or one grass substrate 6420 and one grass rear cover 6460, or one 6420, one front grass cover 6440, and one rear grass cover 6460 constitute one grass accessory 6400. At least one member of may be increased to a plurality to configure one grass accessory 6400 . For example, two grass front covers 6440 may be attached to one grass substrate 6420 to configure one grass accessory 6400, or two grass substrates 6420 may be attached to one grass front cover 6440, It is also possible to configure one grass accessory 6400 . Further, when a plurality of grass substrates 6420, front grass covers 6440, and rear grass covers 6460 are provided, the embodiments shown in FIGS. may apply. For example, the mountain function 6500, which will be described later, provides two front covers on one substrate, and one of the front covers has an opening so that the substrate located behind can be visually recognized, and the substrate also has an opening. It is an example in which a part is provided.

In the example shown in FIGS. 507(A) to 509(D), a grass front cover 6440 larger than the grass substrate 6420 is provided in front of the grass substrate 6420 . In this case, the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the front cover 6440. The front cover light scattering portion 6444 and the front cover opaque portion 6446 are provided at least in front of the front cover 6444, and in the front view of the grass substrate 6420, the front cover colorless transparent portion is provided in front of the portion other than the outer edge. 6442a and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be provided. Even with such a configuration, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be used for decoration. In this case, a front grass cover light scattering portion 6444 and a front grass cover opaque portion 6446 may be provided so as to cover the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 in a strip shape. Alternatively, in the example shown in FIG. 507(D), the area occupied by the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the front cover 6440 is enlarged upward so that the area in front of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b. It may be configured to be covered by the portion 6444b. In the example shown in FIG. 507(E), the area occupied by the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the front cover 6440 is reduced upward so that the area in front of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b. It may be configured to be covered by the scattering portion 6444b. 507(F) and 507(G), similarly, by expanding or contracting the area occupied by the front cover opaque portion 6446 upward, the front portion of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 becomes the front cover. It may be configured to be covered by an opaque portion 6446 . Alternatively, the front weed cover light scattering portion 6444 and the opaque front cover cover 6446 are formed so that at least a part of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the front cover light scattering portion 6444 and the opaque front cover cover 6446 . A similar effect can be obtained even when the portion 6446 is provided.

487 and 495 show an example in which the grass role 6400 is provided in the area between the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100, but the grass role 6400 is provided in a position other than this. It may be configured as For example, a grass accessory 6400 may be provided in the area between the game panel 1100 and the glass unit 190 . Alternatively, the door frame 3 may be configured such that the member forming the door frame 3 is provided with the grass accessory 6400 . For example, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, and the door frame top unit 570 may be configured to provide grass accessories. It should be noted that not only the grass accessory 6400 but also other accessories may be provided at the same position as the grass accessory 6400 .

In this way, in the grass accessory 6400, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it visible in green, white, yellow, brown, silver, etc. by the plurality of members that make up the grass accessory 6400. You can express the appearance of green grass, withered grass, and withered grass with frost and snow. In addition, it is possible to express how the grass has changed from one of these modes to another.

In the example shown in FIG. 495, a rabbit role 6000 and a stump role 6100 are provided in front of a mountain role 6500 . In these examples, the rabbit character 6000 has a face light emitting part 6023, and the stump character 6100 has a first rear wall light emitting part 6354a and a second rear wall light emitting part 6354b. It is possible to take a production state by irradiating forward. By the way, in these examples, the light from the light emitting unit is diffusely reflected by the members provided around the light emitting unit, and part of the light emitted from the light emitting unit is directed backward, and the light from the light emitting unit is reflected. There is a problem that the light cannot be efficiently irradiated forward, and the utilization efficiency of the irradiated light is reduced. Therefore, an example in which the efficiency of using the light from the light-emitting unit can be improved by reflecting forward the light directed backward on the front side of the decorative object 6500 will be described.

FIG. 513 shows a modification of the rabbit character 6000 shown in FIG. 488 and the like. FIG. 513(A) is a front view of the rabbit character 6000. FIG. FIG. 513(B) is a perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. FIG. 513(C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. The rabbit character 6000 is configured as a unit by a face cover portion 6010 on the front side, a face substrate 6020 provided on the back side of the face cover portion 6010, and a body portion 6030. FIG. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitting part 6023a and a second face light emitting part 6023b as the face light emitting part 6023 on the front surface. In addition, the face substrate 6020 has a mouth decoration portion 6024 shaped like a rabbit's mouth. A first arm portion 6016 and a second arm portion 6017 made of opaque white synthetic resin are attached to the vertical bottom surface of the face cover portion 6010, imitating the left and right front legs of a rabbit. At the lower end of the face substrate 6020, there is provided a body part 6030 which imitates the body part of a rabbit and is a plate-like member made of opaque white synthetic resin. The face covering portion 6010 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a first face light scattering portion 6011a and a second face light scattering portion 6011a at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b, respectively. A portion 6011b is provided. Up to this point, the configuration is the same as that of the rabbit character 6000 shown in FIG. 488 and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 513(A), the face substrate 6020 does not have the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 and has a horizontally long rectangular shape. In addition, the face substrate 6020 is recessed toward the rear formed by the face-cover upper surface 6012, the face-cover right surface 6013, the face-cover lower surface 6014, and the face-cover left surface 6015 of the face cover 6010. It is attached so that it fits in the part where it is attached. In the face cover portion 6010, the upper surface of the face cover portion upper surface portion 6012 has a shape that protrudes upward at two locations on the left and right, thereby forming a first ear portion 6021 and a second ear portion 6022. As shown in FIG. A first ear decoration portion 6021a and a second ear decoration portion 6022a are formed by printing on the front surface of the face cover portion 6010 with brown ink.

When the rabbit character 6000 takes such a form, the light from the first face light emitting part 6023a and the second face light emitting part 6023b is irregularly reflected by the first face light scattering part 6011a and the second face light scattering part 6011b. After that, the face-cover upper surface 6012, the face-cover right surface 6013, the face-cover lower surface 6014, the face-cover left surface 6015, the first ear 6021, the first ear decoration 6021a, and the second ear 6022. , the second ear decoration portion 6022a, and the like, the light may be reflected many times and be directed backward.

Also, when the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b included in the stump accessory 6100 shown in FIGS. The light from the light emitting portion 6354b diffusely reflects at the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, and then reaches the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, and the box lower wall portion 6330. , box left wall 6340, etc., the light may be reflected and directed backward.

Therefore, an example of increasing the light utilization efficiency by reflecting the light that has traveled backward from the rabbit character 6000 and the stump character 6100 forward again on the front side of the mountain character 6500 will be described below.

FIG. 514(A) shows a mountain role 6500. FIG. The dotted lines in the figure indicate the positions where the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 are provided. Also, for the rabbit character 6000, the outer shape of the face substrate 6020 is also indicated by dotted lines. The mountain accessory 6500 is composed of a mountain substrate 6520 , a first mountain front cover 6540 provided on the front left side of the mountain substrate 6520 , and a second mountain front cover 6560 provided on the front right side of the mountain substrate 6520 .

The mount board 6520 is composed of a printed circuit board with white front and rear surfaces. In addition, on the front surface of the mount substrate 6520, a plurality of LEDs constituting the mount substrate front light emitting portion 6522 are mounted. A mountain substrate opening 6524 is provided at substantially the center of the mountain substrate 6520 in the left-right direction. The mountain substrate opening 6524 is formed by punching out a physical opening in the mountain substrate 6520 . Members positioned behind can be visually recognized through the mountain substrate opening 6524 .

The first crest front cover 6540 is made of colored transparent synthetic resin, and includes a first crest front cover colored transparent portion 6542 , a first crest front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 , and a first crest front cover opening 6548 . there is With such a configuration, the white mountain substrate 6520 can be visually recognized in the color of the first mountain front cover 6540 . Specifically, the color of the first crest front cover 6540 may be blue. In this case, it is possible to express a state in which a mountain is covered with snow or a mountain has a glacier. The first crest front cover opening 6548 is formed by punching out a physical opening in the first crest front cover 6540 . Also, the first crest front cover opening 6548 is formed across the first crest front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and the first crest front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 . The peak substrate 6520 positioned behind through the first peak front cover opening 6548 is visible in white. The second ridge front cover 6560 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and includes a second ridge front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and a second ridge front cover colorless light scattering portion 6564 . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to express a mode in which snow is piled up on a mountain or a mountain has a glacier. In addition, the mountain substrate opening 6524 and the first mountain front cover opening 6548 decoratively express the aspect of having a cave in the mountain by their shapes.

On the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520, as the mountain substrate front surface light emitting portion 6522, a mountain substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6522a to a mountain substrate front surface ninth light emitting portion 6522i are provided. A first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 is provided in front of the mountain substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6522a. A first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 is provided in front of the mountain substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6522b. A first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 is provided in front of the third light emitting portion 6522c on the front surface of the mountain substrate, and a face substrate 6020 provided in the rabbit character 6000 in the standby position is located in front of it. are doing. A first peak cover colored transparent portion 6542 is provided in front of the fourth light emitting portion 6522d on the front surface of the peak substrate, and a face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit character 6000 in the standby position is located in front of it. there is A stump accessory 6100 is positioned in front of the mountain board front surface fifth light emitting portion 6522e. A stump accessory 6100 is positioned in front of the mountain board front surface sixth light emitting portion 6522f. A second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 is provided in front of the mountain substrate front surface seventh light emitting portion 6522g, and a stump accessory 6100 is located in front of it. A second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 is provided in front of the mountain substrate front surface eighth light emitting portion 6522h. A second ridge front cover colorless light scattering section 6564 is provided in front of the ridge substrate front surface ninth light emitting section 6522i.

When viewed from the front, the mountain board 6520 is exposed and visible in white, and the front of the mountain board 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and visible in light blue. , the area in front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 and is visible in light blue, and the area behind the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 is blue transparent because the mountain substrate 6520 is not positioned. , a region where the mountain substrate 6520 is not positioned behind the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6542b and is visually recognized as semi-transparent blue, and the mountain substrate opening 6524 are provided. A region in which the rear member can be visually recognized in a hole shape, a region where the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the second front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and is visually recognized in white, and a front of the mountain substrate 6520 are the second. It consists of a region covered by the second front cover colorless light scattering portion 6564 and visible in white, and a region behind the second peak front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 where the peak substrate 6520 is not positioned and visible transparently. ing.

FIG. 514(B) shows a state in which the above-described rabbit role 6000 and stump role 6100 are provided in front of such a mountain role 6500 . At the rear of the rabbit character 6000, there is an area where the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed and visible in white, and an area in front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and visible in light blue. , the front side of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 to provide an area visually recognized in light blue. By diffusely reflecting the light from the face light-emitting portion 6023a and the second face light-emitting portion 6023b forward, it is possible to increase the light utilization efficiency. In addition, behind the stump accessory 6100, the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed and visible white, and the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and visible white. In these areas, the light from the first rear wall light emitting part 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting part 6354b provided in the stump accessory 6100 provided in front is diffusely reflected forward. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of light utilization. Thus, in this embodiment, one substrate is configured to have a plurality of reflective areas corresponding to the plurality of members having the light-emitting portions.

It should be noted that when the light from the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 can be reflected forward by the mountain substrate 6520 positioned behind the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100, the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 can be reflected forward. It is desirable to increase the reflection efficiency in substrate areas obscured by object 6000 and stump feature 6100 . Specifically, it is desirable to use white or bright color as the color of the mountain substrate 6520 . In addition, in the substrate area hidden by the rabbit character 6000 and the stump character 6100, the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed without providing a cover in front, or when a cover is provided, a colorless and transparent cover is provided. It should be configured to In the example shown in FIG. 514(A), the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed in the region corresponding to the right side of the rabbit character 6000 when viewed from the front. Further, in the area where the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed, the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520 is configured so as not to mount electronic components such as the front surface light-emitting portion 6522 of the mountain substrate. In addition, in the area corresponding to the stump accessory 6100, the mountain substrate 6520 is either exposed or covered with the colorless transparent portion 6562 of the second front cover. By adopting such a mode, it becomes possible to further increase the reflection efficiency of forward light.

Of the mountain substrate front surface light emitting portions 6522 provided on the mountain substrate 6520, the mountain substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6522a and the mountain substrate front surface fourth light emitting portion 6522d have the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 in front of them. For the front surface second light-emitting portion 6522b and the mountain substrate front surface third light-emitting portion 6522c, the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 is located forward, and for the mountain substrate front surface ninth light-emitting portion 6522i, the second mountain front cover is located forward. A colorless light scattering portion 6564 is provided. In this way, by providing a colored or light-scattering cover in front of the board front light-emitting portion 6522, the light from the light-emitting portion is prevented from directly illuminating the player's eyes. On the other hand, the front surface fifth light-emitting portion 6522e and the sixth light-emitting portion 6522f of the front surface of the mountain substrate are exposed at the front surface of the surface substrate 6520 without a front cover. This is used to illuminate the stump accessory 6100 positioned in front of the light from the mountain board front surface fifth light emitting portion 6522e and the mountain board front surface sixth light emitting portion 6522f. This is because the player is not directly irradiated with light from the sixth light-emitting portion 6522f on the front surface of the mountain board. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the presence of the mountain substrate front light emitting portion 6522 inconspicuous. Thus, in the ridge board 6500, instead of arranging the ridge board front light-emitting portions 6522 evenly on the front surface of the ridge board 6500, the first ridge front cover 6540 positioned in front of the ridge board front light-emitting portions 6522, They are unevenly distributed corresponding to the second mountain front cover 6560 , the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 .

FIG. 514(C) shows the rabbit role object 6000 moved from the waiting position to the moving position with a dotted line. In this state, the mountain board front surface third light emitting portion 6522c and the mountain board front surface fourth light emitting portion 6522d, which have overlapped behind the rabbit accessory 6000 when viewed from the front, are configured to be visible to the player when viewed from the front. It is The rabbit character 6000 can emit light not only in the standby position as described above, but also in the moving position as an effect by emitting light in a predetermined color. At this time, the effect display device 1600 on the game board side may perform an effect display in the same luminescent color as that of the rabbit character 6000 . For example, when the rabbit role 6000 is made to emit white light, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured to display a white line radially extending from the position where the rabbit role 6000 is positioned. good too.

FIG. 514(C) shows the rabbit role object 6000 moved from the waiting position to the moving position with a dotted line. A mountain substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6522c and a mountain substrate front surface fourth light emitting portion 6522d are provided behind the rabbit role object 6000 in a front view, so that even when the rabbit role object 6000 is at the standby position, the rabbit role object can be Even when the 6000 is at the moving position, it is possible to emit light in a predetermined color as an effect. For example, when the rabbit character 6000 is at the moving position, the board side effect display device 1600 may display a white line and at the same time, the mountain board front light emitting portion 6522 may emit white light.

In the state where the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, when the mountain substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6522c and the mountain substrate front surface fourth light emitting portion 6522d are in the light emitting mode as an effect, the upper surface of the face cover portion of the rabbit accessory 6000 6012 , face cover portion right surface portion 6013 , face cover portion lower surface portion 6014 , face cover portion left surface portion 6015 . , the outline of the rabbit's face becomes a luminous mode. At this time, on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit character 6000, the light emitted from the front third light emitting portion 6522c and the fourth front light emitting portion 6522d of the mountain substrate and directed forward is diffusely reflected backward. As a result, this light is diffusely reflected forward from the front surface of the mountain object 6500 again. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the utilization efficiency of the irradiated light.

In the example shown in FIG. 514, the area of the mountain role 6500 is larger than that of the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 in front view. An accessory smaller than the object 6100 may be arranged behind the rabbit accessory 6000 or the stump accessory 6100 so as to exhibit the same function as the mountain accessory 6500 . For example, such accessories may be arranged so as to fit within the area formed by the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump plate portion 6210 of the stump accessory 6100 when viewed from the front. In addition, as such an accessory, for example, a white accessory such as the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. The front surface of the grass substrate 6420 may be exposed, or the front surface of the white grass substrate 6420 may be covered with the colorless transparent front cover portion 6442a. Even with such a configuration, the white grass substrate 6420 that is exposed or the white grass substrate 6420 whose front surface is covered with the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a prevents the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 from It is possible to diffusely reflect light forward.

In the rabbit role product 6000 shown in FIG. 513, the entire face substrate 6020 is completely accommodated in the face cover part 6010 when viewed from the front. Such an aspect may be applied to the relationship between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 in the grass accessory 6400 described above. In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 is housed in the front grass cover 6440 when viewed from the front. Alternatively, it may be applied to the relationship between the grass rear cover 6460 and the grass substrate 6420 in the grass accessory 6400 . In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 is housed in the rear grass cover 6460 when viewed from the front. Specifically, for example, a plurality of substrates having a flower-like shape are provided so that each substrate does not overlap the rear surface of the front cover 6440 and the front surface of the front cover 6460 in a front view. Each substrate may be attached so as to be completely housed in the cover 6440 or the rear cover 6460 . Even with such a configuration, it is possible to achieve decoration by combining the substrate and the front grass cover 6440 or by combining the substrate and the rear grass cover 6460 . Note that in other examples, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing the substrate and the cover.

As shown in FIG. 495, in the game board 5, a space is formed between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 provided in front of the game board side effect display device 1600. A plurality of accessories are provided in the space. Among these accessories, the first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second cloud role 6750, and the back grass role are located near the back of the game panel 1100. 6800 is provided. These are visible through the game panel 1100 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and have the function of decorating the rear surface of the game panel 1100 .

The first giant tree role 6600 and the second giant tree role 6650 are provided so as to cover the left and right sides of the back surface of the game panel 1100 . Specifically, it consists of a first giant tree role 6600 positioned on the left side of the back of the game panel 1100 and a second giant tree role 6650 positioned on the right side of the back of the game panel 1100 . The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630 . The first giant tree trunk board 6610 is a brown printed board, and the first giant tree leaf board 6630 is a green printed board. A plurality of LED light sources are arranged on the rear surfaces of the first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and these light sources are oriented rightward. The second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680 . The second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 is a brown substrate, and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680 is a green substrate. A plurality of LED light sources are arranged on the rear surfaces of the second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6680, and these light sources are oriented leftward. The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. However, for each of these substrates, the structure related to the grass substrate 6420 of the grass role object 6400 shown in FIGS. 500(A) to 512(G) may be adopted.

The first cloud object 6700 and the second cloud object 6750 are provided so as to cover the back surface of the game panel 1100 . Each of the first cloud object 6700 and the second cloud object 6750 is composed of a white printed circuit board. For each of these substrates, the structure related to the grass substrate 6420 of the grass role object 6400 shown in FIGS. 500(A) to 512(G) may be adopted.

The first giant tree leaf board 6630 forming the first giant tree role 6600 and the second giant tree leaf board 6680 forming the second giant tree role 6650 are arranged from the end of the game panel 1100 into the game area 5a and further into the game area. It is configured to be continuously visible to the player over the panel opening 1100a. In addition, the second cloud role object 6750 is configured to be continuously visible to the player from the outside of the game area 5a, to the inside of the game area 5a, and further to the game panel opening 1100a. On the other hand, the first giant tree leaf board 6630 forming the first giant tree role 6600 and the second giant tree leaf board 6680 forming the second giant tree role 6650 are arranged to overtake the game board side effect display device 1600 at the upper left and upper right. , and is configured so that the game board side effect display device 1600 does not look square. In addition, the mountain role 6500 is also provided so as to overtake the lower left and lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600 so that the game board side effect display device 1600 does not look square. Further, the mountain role 6500 is provided at a position closest to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the various roles provided in front of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

FIG. 515 shows the back grass accessory 6800. FIG. The back grass accessory 6800 is provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100 so as to cover the bottom of the back surface of the game panel 1100 . The back grass accessory 6800 is composed of a back grass substrate 6820 and a back grass front cover 6840 . The board back grass front cover 6840 is preferably made of, for example, a colored transparent synthetic resin, and more specifically, preferably made of a green transparent synthetic resin. Regarding the relationship between the back grass substrate 6820 and the back grass front cover 6840, the structure related to the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 of the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. It may be configured to Similarly, the structure related to the rear cover 6460 may be adopted for the back grass accessory 6800 .

The board back grass accessory 6800 has a passing portion for passing a game ball that has entered a prize winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 positioned on the front side and has passed through the opening provided on the game panel 1100. A circular weed substrate opening 6824 and a weed front cover opening 6848 having a circular shape are provided. A game ball that has passed through the back grass substrate opening 6824 and the back grass front cover opening 6848 is detected by a sensor provided in the back grass accessory 6800 . In addition, sensors for detecting game balls are attached to the lower side of each passing portion and to the rear surface of the back grass substrate 6820 . With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the presence of the sensor. As shown below, the back grass substrate first opening portion 6824a to the back grass substrate fourth opening portion 6824d serve as the back grass substrate opening portion 6824, and the back grass substrate front cover opening portion 6848 serves as the back grass front cover opening portion 6848. A first opening portion 6848a to a fourth opening portion 6848d in front of the board back grass front cover are provided.

The back grass board first opening 6824a and the back grass front cover first opening 6848a are circular with the same size, and are provided at positions overlapping each other in the back grass accessory 6800 when viewed from the front. Then, the game ball enters the winning slot provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the back grass substrate first opening 6824a and the back grass front cover first opening 6848a and moves to the back surface of the game panel 1100. to pass through.

The back grass substrate second opening 6824b has a front surface not covered with the front grass front cover 6840, and constitutes a passing portion for allowing a game ball to pass directly through the exposed back grass substrate 6820. - 特許庁

The board back grass front cover second opening 6848b does not have the board back grass substrate 6820 positioned behind it, and constitutes a passing part for directly passing game balls only by the board back grass front cover second opening 6848b. are doing. In this example, the back grass substrate 6820 has a shape that follows the contour of the bottom of the back grass front cover second opening 6848b. By adopting such a configuration, while the shape of the back grass substrate 6820 is made into a decorative outer shape, a passage that guides the game ball that has passed through the back grass front cover second opening 6848b to the sensor located below. can be made as difficult to see as possible.

The back grass board third opening 6824c and the back grass front cover third opening 6848c are circular with the same size, and are provided at positions overlapping each other in the back grass accessory 6800 when viewed from the front. Then, the game ball enters the winning slot provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the board back grass board third opening 6824c and the board back grass front cover third opening 6848c and moves to the back of the game panel 1100. to pass through. In this example, two elliptical regions are formed in the back weed front cover 6840 above the passing portion formed by the back weed substrate third opening 6824c and the back weed front cover third opening 6848c. By doing so, it is possible to visually recognize a decorative shape that imitates a rabbit's head. In this way, by using the shape of the passing portion through which the game ball passes as part of the decorative shape, the presence of the passing portion can be made inconspicuous, and the decorative function of the back grass accessory 6800 It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the

The back weed substrate fourth opening 6824d and the back weed front cover fourth opening 6848d have the same size and shape, and are shaped like two elliptical portions protruding from the upper part of a circular outer shape. None. In addition, these are provided at positions overlapping each other in the front view of the back grass accessory 6800 . Then, the game ball enters the winning slot provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the board back grass board fourth opening 6824d and the board back grass front cover fourth opening 6848d, and moves to the back of the game panel 1100. to pass through. In this example, the shapes themselves of the back grass substrate third opening 6824c and the back grass front cover third opening 6848c are configured to be visible as decorative shapes imitating a rabbit's head. In this way, by using the shape of the passing portion through which the game ball passes as part of the decorative shape, the presence of the passing portion can be made inconspicuous, and the decorative function of the back grass accessory 6800 It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the

In addition, it is preferable that a cylindrical member formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged in the passage portion through which the game ball passes so that the game ball can pass through. In addition, it is preferable that the cylindrical member is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin, and the color of the synthetic resin is the same as that of the back grass front cover 6840 or the same color as that of the back grass substrate 6820 . With such a configuration, it is possible to make the presence of the cylindrical member inconspicuous, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the decorative function of the back grass accessory 6800 is impaired. .

The first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second cloud role 6750, and the back grass role 6800 are attached to the front of the game panel 1100 when viewed from the front. It is located behind the game panel 1100 in a manner straddling the rail member 5950 that is mounted. As a result, each accessory can be visually recognized as a decoration without being conscious of the presence of the rail member 5950 . Note that the rail member 5950 as a whole may be made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Alternatively, the rail member 5950 may be composed of a plurality of members in the longitudinal direction, at least one of which may be composed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. By adopting such a configuration, the visibility of each accessory located in the back is improved, and it becomes possible to widen the range in which decoration is performed. Also, the rail member 5950 may be made of a synthetic resin of the same color as the accessories positioned behind. For example, when the back grass accessory 6800 is green and visible, the rail member 5950 provided at a position overlapping the back grass accessory 6800 in front view may be made of green transparent synthetic resin.

When the game ball hit into the game area 5a is charged, discharge occurs at an unintended place, and the high voltage causes electronic parts to malfunction, or the electromagnetic pulse generated by the discharge causes the control element to malfunction unintentionally. There is a risk of control. In particular, the first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second cloud role 6750, and the backside grass role 6800 are provided with printed circuit boards on which electronic components are mounted. When objects are provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the possibility of such a situation occurring in the electronic components mounted on these substrates becomes higher.

Therefore, in the case of these accessories having a front cover, at least a part of the front cover may be provided with a silver-colored opaque portion formed of the metal thin film described above. More specifically, it is preferable to provide the front cover so that the opaque portion is located in front of the portion where the electronic component is mounted on the substrate. Further, each accessory may be provided so that the front surface of each accessory, which may be affected by such charged game balls, does not come into contact with the back surface of the game panel 1100 . Alternatively, at least in the area overlapping the game area 5a where the charged game ball rolls and falls when viewed from the front, each character is provided so that the front surface of each character does not come into contact with the back surface of the game panel 1100. may be configured.

Further, it is desirable that the ground path of the ground wire (not shown) provided on the game panel 1100 and the ground path of the ground wire (not shown) provided for each accessory be separated as much as possible. For example, a ground wire (not shown) provided on the game panel 1100 is finally installed on the island facility via a ground circuit provided for each role, or conversely, the ground wire for each role is provided on the game panel 1100. It is not preferable to have the island facility finally installed via a ground circuit that is connected to the ground. Therefore, it is preferable to provide a ground circuit board having a static elimination function at a predetermined location on the back surface of the game machine so that the ground path from the game panel 1100 and the ground path from each accessory join on the ground circuit board. . With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the influence of a charged game ball hit into the game area 5a.

487 and 495 show an example in which the grass role 6800 is provided on the lower side of the back surface of the game panel 1100. Instead of the grass role 6800 behind the board, a mountain role 6500, a rabbit role 6000, and a stump role are shown. The object 6100 may be arranged below the back surface of the game panel 1100 . In this case as well, the light diffusely reflected backward from the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 can be reflected forward again to increase the light utilization efficiency. By utilizing the reflection function of the mountain board 6520, another decorative accessory or a winning opening unit having a winning opening may be arranged in front of the mountain accessory in the same manner as the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100. can be configured to In this case also, the light emitted from the light-emitting parts provided in the decorative accessories and the winning school units and diffusely reflected backward can be reflected forward on the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520 .

In addition, by providing a plurality of cylindrical spacers on the back surface of the front cover that constitutes these accessories, the front surface of the substrate contacts the top of the spacers and does not directly contact the back surface of the front cover. You may As the structure of each spacer, specifically, a cylindrical structure having a height of about 2 mm and a diameter of about 2 mm vertically from the rear surface of the front cover may be adopted. Also, the spacer and the front cover are preferably integrally molded from the same material. Further, when the front cover has a plurality of regions, the spacers are preferably arranged in regions where it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side. For example, the colored transparent portion, the colored light scattering portion, and the spacer of the front cover may be molded integrally with a green transparent synthetic resin. At this time, the spacer becomes green and transparent. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the colored transparent portion is not provided with the spacer and the colored light scattering portion is provided with the spacer. By providing the spacer having such a configuration, the front cover and the substrate are arranged parallel to each other while being separated by the height of the spacer. With such a configuration, the portion closest to the back surface of the game panel 1100 is decorated with the front cover, and the substrate is decorated at a position several millimeters behind the front cover. At this time, compared with the case where the board is decorated at the part closest to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the board is located at the rear side, so that the decoration effect by the color of the board and the external shape of the board is exhibited. Also, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to notice the presence of through holes and electronic parts provided on the board. Further, by separating the back surface of the game panel 1100 from the substrate, it is possible to reduce the influence of the electric discharge from the charged game ball and the electromagnetic pulse on the substrate.

The back grass role 6800, the first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, and the second cloud role 6750 are provided close to the back side of the game panel 1100. . Specifically, it is arranged on the front side of the intermediate position between the surface forming the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back surface of the game panel 1100 . In addition, in the space between the back grass role 6800, the first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second cloud role 6750 and the game board side effect display device 1600 is provided with a rabbit accessory 6000 and a stump accessory 6100 as movable accessories. Note that the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 600 may be provided below the game panel 1100 where the grass role 6800 is provided.

The first giant tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, and the second cloud role 6750, which do not have a front cover, are configured so that a light emitting part is provided on the front surface of the board. In this case, a scattering section may be formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100 overlapping the light emitting section in front view to scatter the light emitted from the light emitting section. Alternatively, in these accessories, even if a colored transparent or colorless transparent front cover is provided at a position overlapping the light emitting part when viewed from the front, the scattering part is similarly formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100. You may

496 to 499 show an example in which the stump accessory 6100 is provided, but the members forming the stump accessory 6100 may be configured to be movable as an effect. For example, the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box bottom wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the box rear wall portion 6350 that constitute the stump box portion 6300 may be configured to be movable as a presentation.

516(A) to 516(D) show that, in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIGS. 498(A) and 499(A), the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are respectively moved from the standby position. It is the figure which showed the state moved to the position. FIG. 516(A) shows an example in which the box top wall 6310 is moved rearward until the front end of the box top wall 6310 contacts the top of the box rear wall 6350 . FIG. 516(B) shows an example in which the box right wall portion 6320 is moved left rearward until the front end of the box right wall portion 6320 contacts the right end of the box rear wall portion 6350 . FIG. 516(C) shows an example in which the box bottom wall 6330 is moved rearward until the front end of the box bottom wall 6330 contacts the bottom end of the box rear wall 6350 . FIG. 516(D) shows an example in which the box right wall section 6320 is moved to the right rearward until the front end of the box right wall section 6320 is in contact with the left end of the box rear wall section 6350 . Note that only one of the box upper wall 6310 to the box left wall 6340 may be configured to be movable as shown, and the other walls may be configured to be immovable. A plurality of wall portions among the portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be movable. For example, all of the box top wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be movable.

With such a configuration, the stump plate portion 6210, the first grass movable portion 6360, and the second grass movable portion 6370 provided in front of the stump box portion 6300 can be connected to the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354a. The mode of light irradiation from the light emitting portion 6354b can be changed. For example, in a state before the box upper wall portion 6310 is moved backward, light is reflected on each inner wall of the stump box portion 6300, and the stump plate portion 6210 is illuminated in a shape corresponding to the front shape of the stump box portion 6300. The Rukoto. On the other hand, when the box top wall portion 6310 is moved backward, the light from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is not reflected by the box top wall portion 6310, so that the rear wall light is emitted. The light emitted obliquely upward from the portion 6354 travels straight to illuminate the back side of the stump plate portion 6210 . Therefore, in addition to the shape corresponding to the shape of the front surface of the stump box portion 6300, the stump plate portion 6210 is also illuminated in the area above the front surface of the stump box portion 6300. FIG. By moving the box top wall portion 6310 in this way, it is possible to change the area to be illuminated. Note that even when the box right wall portion 6320 to the box left wall portion 6340 are slid backward instead of the box top wall portion 6310, the area to be illuminated is changed corresponding to each moved wall portion. It is possible to

Further, the box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction while maintaining its inclination. For example, from the state shown in FIG. The box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be movable forward so as to be in contact with the front ends. Further, it may be configured to be movable backward from the state shown in FIG. 498(A).

Further, the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be rotatable with respect to the box rear wall portion 6350 . For example, the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are formed in a rectangular shape having the same size as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the side formed by the box right wall portion 6320 and the box rear wall portion 6350 and the box left wall portion 6340 and the box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be rotatable around the axis. By rotating the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 inward, the front surface of the box rear wall portion 6350 can be covered with the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340, or the box can By rotating the right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 outward, the box rear wall portion 6350 and the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 may be in a parallel state. In addition, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 are formed in a rectangular shape having the same size as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the box rear wall portion 6350 is formed in the same manner as the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340. You may comprise so that rotation is possible with respect to.

An example in which the box rear wall portion 6350 can be moved has been shown, but in the examples shown in FIGS. A rear wall cover 6356 that constitutes the wall portion 6350 may be configured to be rotatable or movable in the front-rear direction in the same manner as the box rear wall portion 6350 described above. When the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated, the stump opening 6210a can be directly irradiated with the light from the rear wall light emitter 6354 without passing through the rear wall cover 6356. FIG. On the other hand, when the rear wall cover 6356 is moved forward, a distance is created between the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356, and the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 spreads radially. It becomes possible to illuminate the entire cover 6356 . In the case of adopting such a mode, it is preferable that the regions of the rear wall cover 6356 other than the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b also serve as scattering portions. With such a configuration, the rear wall cover 6356 can be moved in the front-rear direction, so that a state in which a part of the rear wall cover 6356 is illuminated and a state in which the entire rear wall cover 6356 is illuminated. may be visible to the player.

In the example shown in FIGS. 499(A) to 499(D), the rear wall plate portion 6380 is fixedly provided, and the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 are attached to the rear wall plate portion 6380 in the box described above. Like the rear wall portion 6350, it may be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction.

Examples have been shown in which the members that are fixedly provided can be made movable. The second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b may be configured to continue to maintain a predetermined light-emitting mode. As the predetermined light emitting mode, for example, the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a or the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b may continue to light, may blink periodically, or may adopt a light-off state in which no light is emitted. You may make it Further, in the case of executing such a light emission mode of continuous lighting or periodic blinking, it may be configured to continuously emit light of the same color. By adopting such a configuration, instead of changing the light emission mode of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b, the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 are arranged. By moving such members, it is possible to change the performance mode visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, it is also possible to change the light emission mode of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b during the period from the timing when the movement of the member is started to the timing when the movement of the member is finished. good. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to realize a more complicated presentation mode.

498 and 499, the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350, the rear wall cover 6356, and other members are moved as an effect. By moving members such as the wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 as an effect, a predetermined member that has been moved may be configured to be in the state shown in FIG. 498 or 499 . Even with such a configuration, it is possible to change the presentation mode visually recognized by the player.

Although an example in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 move in the left-right direction is shown, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 may be configured not to move. Even with such a configuration, by moving members such as the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356, the light emission mode of the stump accessory 6100 can be diversified. Also, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 may be configured as one member. In this case, the first grass decoration portion 6360a and the second grass decoration portion 6370a may be configured as one decoration portion, or may be configured as a plurality of decoration portions. In addition, the first grass decoration portion 6360a and the second grass decoration portion 6370a are colored and translucent by a method such as painting or attaching a seal, and when the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is irradiated forward, the first grass decoration portion 6360a and the second grass decoration portion 6370a The decoration portion 6360a and the second grass decoration portion 6370a may be configured to be in a staged state by being illuminated with light.

Further, as described below, the stump accessory 6100 is configured by the stump box portion 6300 and the grass plate portion 6381 without providing the first grass movable portion 6360, the second grass movable portion 6370, and the stump plate portion 6210. can be configured to

FIG. 517 shows an example in which the stump plate portion 6210 is not provided in front of the stump box portion 6300, and a fixed grass plate portion 6381 is provided instead of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. is shown. The grass plate portion is preferably made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. In addition, the grass plate portion 6381 has a plurality of decorative portions. Specifically, the grass plate colored transparent portion 6381a imitating the outline shape of grass, the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a imitating the shape of an animal's face, the grass plate upper decorative portion 6382b, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c, It has a grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d, a grass plate left decoration portion 6382e, and a colorless and transparent grass plate colorless and transparent portion 6381b which is an area other than these. The colored transparent grass plate 6381a, the central grass plate decorative portion 6382a, the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b, the right grass plate decorative portion 6382c, the lower grass plate decorative portion 6382d, and the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e are each made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. It is constructed by attaching a print or a seal to the front or rear surface of the grass plate portion 6381 to be constructed. The grass plate central decorative portion 6382a is linearly formed in the shape of an animal's face and ears, so that the rear wall substrate 6352 positioned behind can be visually recognized. On the other hand, the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b, the right grass plate decorative portion 6382c, the lower grass plate decorative portion 6382d, and the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e have a shape imitating an animal's face, and are translucent or colored transparent through which light can pass. is configured to

In such a configuration, members such as the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, the box rear wall portion 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356 are moved as described above. By doing so, it is possible to change the lighting mode of the central grass plate decorative portion 6382a, the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b, the right grass plate decorative portion 6382c, the lower grass plate decorative portion 6382d, and the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e. In particular, the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b, the right grass plate decorative portion 6382c, the lower grass plate decorative portion 6382d, and the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e were irradiated with light from a state in which they had hardly been irradiated until then. The shape can be changed in various ways, and the shape imitating the face of each animal can be configured to be visually recognizable to the player.

The stump box portion 6300 is a box-shaped box having a box top wall portion 6310, a box right wall portion 6320, a box bottom wall portion 6330, a box left wall portion 6340, and a box rear wall portion 6350, and having no front facing surface. Although shaped, at least one of these members may be configured to vary in position, size, or shape.

FIG. 518 shows a modification of the example shown in FIG. In this example, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 are rectangular with the same width as the box rear wall portion 6350 , and the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are formed with respect to the box rear wall portion 6350 . By providing the stump box 6300 at right angles, the stump box 6300 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the stump board 6210 is not provided, and the grass plate 6381 is positioned in front of the opening of the stump box 6300. are doing. In such a configuration, as described above, as an effect, the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is made to emit light, and the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 By configuring to rotate or slide in the front-rear direction, it is possible to change the irradiation mode of the light emitted from the rear wall light-emitting portion 6354 to the grass plate portion 6381 . In addition, in accordance with the cuboid shape of the stump box portion 6300, the right grass plate decoration portion 6382c is moved to the left side, and the left grass plate decoration portion 6382e is moved to the right side, compared with the example shown in FIG. position.

519 to 521 show modifications of the example shown in FIG. The examples shown in FIGS. 519 to 521 differ from each other in the shape of the box rear wall portion 6350 and the manner of mounting. In the example shown in FIG. 519(A), the box rear wall portion 6350 is provided at a position that is half shifted leftward when viewed from the front. FIG. 519(B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box section 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 519(A).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 520(A), the entire box rear wall portion 6350 is configured to be doubled in length in the front view. FIG. 520(B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box section 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 520(A). FIG. 522(A) is a view showing the rear wall cover 6356 in the modification shown in FIG. 520(A). FIG. 522(B) is a diagram showing the rear wall substrate 6352 in the modified example shown in FIG. 520(A).

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 521(A), the box rear wall portion 6350 is configured to be reduced to half its size in the front view. FIG. 521(B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box section 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 521(A). FIG. 522(C) is a diagram showing the rear wall cover 6356 in the modification shown in FIG. 521(A). FIG. 522(D) is a view showing the rear wall substrate 6352 in the modified example shown in FIG. 521(A).

On this premise, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b provided in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIGS. 499(B), FIG. 522(A), and FIG. 522(B)), the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e are illuminated from behind. It becomes possible to Here, by moving the box top wall portion 6310 rearward, it is possible to bring the grass plate top decorative portion 6382b into the luminous decorative state. On the other hand, the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a is relatively inconspicuous because the amount of light irradiated is reduced. Further, when the box right wall portion 6320 and the box bottom wall portion 6330 are moved backward instead of the box top wall portion 6310, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c and the grass plate bottom decorative portion 6382d are brought into the luminous decoration state. can do. Although an example in which both the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are made to emit light has been shown, in the example shown in (A) of FIG. The protruding region may be configured not to emit light. In this case, only the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a can be brought into the luminous decorative state. From this state, as described above, the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, and the box bottom wall portion 6330 may be moved rearward.

In addition, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b provided in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIG. In this state, the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a can be in a light-emitting decorative state in which it is illuminated from behind. Here, by moving the box top wall portion 6310 rearward, it is possible to bring the grass plate top decorative portion 6382b into the luminous decorative state. On the other hand, the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a is relatively inconspicuous because the amount of light irradiated is reduced. When the box right wall portion 6320, the box bottom wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are moved backward instead of the box top wall portion 6310, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c and the grass plate bottom decorative portion 6382d and the grass board left decorative portion 6382e can be brought into the luminous decorative state.

In this way, in the state where the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a is decorated with light, by moving the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 backward, The upper plate decoration portion 6382b, the right grass plate decoration portion 6382c, the lower grass plate decoration portion 6382d, and the left grass plate decoration portion 6382e can be brought into the luminous decoration state. Also, at this time, the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a is in the luminous decorative state with a weaker amount of light than before. In this way, by setting the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b, the right grass plate decoration portion 6382c, the lower grass plate decoration portion 6382d, and the left grass plate decoration portion 6382e into the luminous decoration state, a certain state of the game machine is suggested or notified. It may be configured as For example, when four states with different degrees of advantage for the player are occurring or are in a state that can occur, the grass board top decoration portion 6382b is set to the light emitting decoration state corresponding to the most advantageous state, and the second most advantageous state. The right grass plate decorative portion 6382c is set to the luminous decoration state corresponding to the most favorable state, the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e is set to the luminous decoration state corresponding to the third most favorable state, and the fourth most favorable state is set to the light decorative state. The lower grass board decorative portion 6382d may be configured to be in the light emitting decorative state. By adopting such a mode, it becomes possible for the player to have a sense of anticipation as to which wall portion will move in the state where the central grass plate decorative portion 6382a is decorated with light.

Alternatively, the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b are turned off, and the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a is not decorated with light. , the box bottom wall portion 6330, or the box left wall portion 6340 is moved backward, and after a predetermined time has passed, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are set to the light emitting state. good. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to know which of the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b, the right grass plate decorative portion 6382c, the lower grass plate decorative portion 6382d, and the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e can be visually recognized. It is possible to notify in advance. In this case, each wall is set upright with respect to the front direction, and the player cannot necessarily notice that each wall has moved. Therefore, the player who can notice the movement of one of the wall parts watches the subsequent change of the one of the decoration parts to the luminous decoration mode with a great sense of anticipation, thereby improving the amusement of the game. becomes possible.

Further, for example, in a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (so-called normal game state, etc.), the box top wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are set to the front position (non-operating position), and the front grass plate center decorative portion 6382a is set. Only the box top wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion is limited to the shipping decoration mode, and only when the state is advantageous for the player (for example, the probability fluctuation state, the time saving game state, the jackpot game state). 6340 may be moved backward to irradiate light on the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b to the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e, thereby increasing the area of the luminous decorative mode. As a result, the appearance of the light-emitting area can be changed according to the interest of the player who improves by shifting from a disadvantageous game state to an advantageous game state.

In the examples shown with reference to FIGS. 519(A) and 521(A), the opening is provided on the right side of the box rear wall 6350. It may be configured such that the moving decorative member appears and disappears from the opening.

With reference to FIGS. 519(A) to 522(D), an example is shown in which the box rear wall portion 6350 is displaced to the left or expanded or contracted. It may also be configured to be shifted in the same way, or to be provided by enlarging or reducing it. Further, the structure of the stump box section 6300 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 498, and the example shown in FIG. 499 may be employed.

498 and 499 show an example in which the box rear wall portion 6350 is provided with the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b. ∼ At least one wall portion of the box left wall portion 6340 may be provided with a configuration related to light emission such as a light emitting portion and a light scattering portion.

517(A) to 522(D), the box upper wall portion 6310 includes the light emitting portion and the light scattering portion described with reference to FIGS. 498 and 499. may be provided to illuminate the interior of the stump box section 6300 and the grass board section 6381 . At this time, at least one of the box right wall 6320, box bottom wall 6330, and box left wall 6340 is moved backward as shown in FIGS. should be configured to By adopting such a configuration, in the grass plate portion 6381, only the front region corresponding to the opening of the stump box 6300 is mainly illuminated, and in addition to the front of the opening of the stump box 6300, It is also possible to illuminate the right side, the lower side, and the left side. An example in which the box top wall portion 6310 is provided with a light emitting portion and a light scattering portion to illuminate the inside of the stump box portion 6300 has been shown, but instead of the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320 is provided. , the box bottom wall portion 6330 and the box left wall portion 6340 may be provided with a light emitting portion and a light scattering portion so that the lighting mode can be changed by moving each wall portion.

The box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are each configured in a plate shape with the same thickness. A structure in which the inner wall of the wall portion is slanted toward the outside may be employed so that the thickness of the wall portion is reduced. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further reflect the light reflected in the stump box section 6300 forward.

In order to move the box top wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 and change the light irradiation mode to the grass plate portion 6381 as described above, the box top wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are colored and opaque. or by plating the inner wall with an aluminum thin film to provide a reflecting portion capable of reflecting light or a scattering portion capable of scattering light. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode in which the light irradiation mode to the grass plate portion 6381 changes more conspicuous. Even when the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are formed of a colorless transparent or colored transparent material and the inner wall and outer wall thereof are made smooth, the light irradiation state to the grass plate portion 6381 changes. It is possible to let

As described above, the members such as the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be deformed so as to be movable. Alternatively, any plurality of members may be movable, or all members may be movable. For example, only the box upper wall portion 6310 may be movable, and the other members may be fixed and immovable. Alternatively, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box right wall portion 6320 may be movable, and the other members may be fixed and immovable. . Further, all of the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be movable. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to change the luminous decoration mode for the grass board portion 6381 .

The movement of the box top wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350, the rear wall cover 6356, and the like may be performed by driving means (not shown) by the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. Further, it is preferable that the peripheral control board 1510 controls the light emission of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a, the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b, and the like.

487 to 522, various movable bodies (rabbit character 6000, stump character 6100, etc.) used for presentation and decoration on the game board 5 provided in the pachinko machine 1 are hereinafter referred to as movable bodies in the game board. In the following, the movable body (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the frame movable body) used for presentation and decoration with respect to the door frame 3 provided in the pachinko machine 1 is shown. Fig. 3 shows an embodiment provided;

523(A) to 523(E) show a door frame top unit 570 that constitutes the door frame 3 and a right ear frame movable body 7100 that imitates the ears of an animal (specifically, a rabbit) as a frame movable body. An embodiment in which a left ear frame movable body 7200 is provided is shown. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are movable in the vertical direction, and specific structures and operation modes will be described later.

523(A) and 523(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 523(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 523(D) and 523(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 523(A), 523(C), and 523(D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. 523(B) and 523(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570. FIG. FIG. 523(D) shows a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570 .

In this embodiment, a door frame top unit 570 is provided above the door frame 3 . A glass unit 190 is provided in the central part of the door frame 3. Through the glass unit 190, the game area 5a located behind, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and various movable bodies in the game board are displayed. (rabbit character 6000, stump character 6100, etc.) can be visually recognized. A plate unit 320 and a handle unit 300 are provided below the door frame 3 . In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has an operation button 410, and can receive an operation input by the player. In the figure, illustration of the upper tray 321, the lower tray 322, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, etc. is omitted.

The door frame top unit 570 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, and its upper surface, right side surface and left side surface correspond to the upper surface, right side surface and left side surface of the door frame base unit 100 constituting the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3, respectively. They are provided so as to overlap when viewed from the front. The door frame top unit 570 is made of a white translucent synthetic resin with a thickness of several millimeters and is capable of transmitting light. The door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 corresponding to a vertically movable right ear frame movable body 7100 and a door corresponding to a vertically movable left ear frame movable body 7200. and a left ear opening 7010 on the frame top unit.

As shown in FIGS. 523(A) to 523(E), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment includes a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side in a front view. there is Specific structures and operation modes of these are shown below. Since right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 basically have the same structure, only right ear frame movable body 7100 will be described as a representative in the following description.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 facing forward and a right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 facing backward. ing. The right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is composed of a right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7112 made of an inner colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin and an outer white translucent synthetic resin. The right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114 is provided. The surfaces of the right ear frame movable body 7100 other than the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 (top surface, left side surface, right side surface, right ear frame movable body second surface 7120) are outside the right ear frame movable body first surface. It is made of the same white translucent synthetic resin as the decorative portion 7114 . The left ear frame movable body 7200 has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100 .

Inside the right ear frame movable body 7100, a right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116 is provided at a position overlapping the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7112 in a front view. In addition, a right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118 is provided at a position overlapping the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114 in a front view. The light-emitting part 7116 inside the right ear frame movable body is specifically composed of a printed circuit board coated with a white protective film on both sides, and a light-emitting diode capable of emitting light toward the player is mounted on its surface. It is The right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116 and the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7118 are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 so as to emit light forward in a predetermined light emitting manner. The inner decorative portion 7112 of the right ear frame movable body first surface can be decorated by the inner light emitting portion 7116 of the movable body, and the outer decorative portion 7114 of the first surface of the right ear frame movable body can be decorated by the outer light emitting portion 7118 of the right ear frame movable body. is. The left ear frame movable body 7200 has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100 .

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are driven by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIGS. 523(B) and 523(E) from the standby position (first state) in the door frame top unit 570, vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. It is possible to control to a state (second state) protruding to the side. The upper surfaces of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are flush with the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position. It is The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have a shape imitating an animal's ear, and project vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 when stored in the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal's ears move by taking the state of moving.

In this embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is made of white translucent synthetic resin with a thickness of about several millimeters. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 523(A), when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body inner light-emitting portion 7116 and the right ear frame movable body 7116 When the movable body outer light emitting portion 7118, the left ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7216, and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7218 are caused to emit light in a predetermined manner, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is dimly illuminated. It is possible for the player to visually recognize it in the state where it is held. The same structure may be adopted for the door frame top unit 570 in other embodiments. The light is reflected and scattered within the unit 570, and the front and side surfaces of the door frame top unit 570 can be vaguely illuminated for the player to see.

On the other hand, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7116, the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118, and the left ear frame movable body When the movable body inner light emitting part 7216 and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7218 emit light in a predetermined manner, the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part of the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 7112, right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114, left ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7212 of left ear frame movable body first surface 7210, and left ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7214 can be visually recognized by the player in a predetermined lighting effect state.

In this way, by moving the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the frame movable body), a part of the frame movable body moves from the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100. Since it is located above the top surface, the area occupied by the player's field of vision when looking up increases, and the volume of the housing appears to have increased, giving the player unprecedented surprises and fun. It is possible to give to

Next, with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B), a specific operation mode of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the game board side according to the motion mode of the frame movable body. The display mode of the frame movable body simulation image, which is an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an operation unit). Mode of accepting player's operation, right ear-frame movable body inner light-emitting portion 7116, right ear-frame movable body outer light-emitting portion 7118, left ear-frame movable body inner light-emitting portion 7216, left ear-frame movable body outer light-emitting portion 7218 (hereinafter referred to as frame Shown here is an example of a presentation that combines the light emission mode, etc., of a movable body light emitting section.

FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B) respectively show the operation mode of the movable frame and the display of the simulated image of the movable frame, which is an image simulating the movable frame displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. 16 is a time chart showing a state, a reception state of an operation unit, a display state of an operation instruction display displayed on a game board side effect display device 1600, and a light emission effect state of a movable frame light emitting unit.

Note that in the time charts shown in FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B), t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the effects. The time between each timing is 1 second. 533(A) to 534(B), FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B), and FIGS. 548(A) to 549(B), which will be described later. The same applies to each drawing etc. in which the is modified.

FIG. 524(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 524(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 525(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 525(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each production pattern shown in FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B), the manner in which the frame movable body moves, the manner in which the frame movable body simulated image is displayed, the timing at which the operation acceptance for the operation unit becomes effective, and the operation instruction display are displayed. The start timing and the timing at which the light-emitting portion of the movable frame body changes from the light-emitting effect state to the extinguished state are the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends and the timing at which the light-emitting portion of the movable frame body changes from the off state to the light-emitting effect state or the specific light-emitting effect state may differ depending on the effect pattern. Specific examples of effects in each effect pattern will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B).

524(A) to 525(B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 in the initial state (before timing t0). state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as first state or standby state). In this state, when the ready-to-win effect state corresponding to the result of the special lottery occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 rise at the same time. is started (timing t7).

At the same time, in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, display of the simulated image of the movable frame is started. At the same time, display of a simulated door-frame top unit image, which is an image simulating the door-frame top unit 570, also starts. The frame movable body simulated image is specifically composed of an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 . As for the simulated image of the movable frame, the image simulating the movable right ear frame 7100 and the image simulating the movable left ear frame 7200 rise in accordance with the actual rise of the movable right ear frame 7100 and the movable left ear frame 7200. It is dynamically displayed in a manner that The simulated image of the movable frame is an image simulating the movable right ear frame 7100 and the movable left ear frame in accordance with the timing (timing t9) when the rising of the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 ends (timing t9). The rise of the image simulating the body 7200 is completed, and after that it continues to be displayed in a mode indicating a stopped state (after timing t9). The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete their rising at timing t9 two seconds after starting to rise at timing t7 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a second state or rising state). Become.

On the other hand, at timing t9, the reception of the operation to the operation unit becomes valid, and the display of an image instructing the operation of the operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. be. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string (for example, a character string "Push!!") instructing to operate the operation unit may be displayed. may Note that the operation valid period continues until an operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Also, at timing t9, all the frame movable body light-emitting sections are turned off from the light-emitting state.

FIGS. 524(A) and 524(B) show the effects when the operating section is operated at timing t14 after the period in which the operation to the operating section is valid starts (timing t9). showing. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, and the frame movable body light-emitting section enters a predetermined light emission production state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 524(A) is a production pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the light emitting unit of the movable frame changes from the off state to the normal state. It becomes a specific light emission effect state different from the light emission effect state. In this way, when the frame movable body light-emitting portion enters the specific light-emitting effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a big win.

On the other hand, FIG. 524(B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost. It will be in a light emitting state. In this way, the movable frame body light-emitting portion is brought into the normal light-emitting effect state, thereby indicating to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In the specific lighting effect state, compared to the light emitting state in the normal lighting effect state, the flashing state of the light becomes faster, the amount of light becomes stronger, and the number of colors increases, so that the player feels more stimulation. It is preferable to employ a light emission mode. In this way, the special lottery result indicates a big win to the player by allowing the player to visually recognize the effect state of the specific light emission mode which is different from the normal state. Specifically, in the specific lighting effect state, the inner portion of the movable frame body and the outer portion of the movable frame body may be set to the light emitting state in different manners. For example, the inner portion of the movable frame body may be configured to be visually recognizable in a more irritating light emission mode than the outer portion of the movable frame body. It should be noted that this definition of the specific light-emitting effect state and the normal light-emitting effect state may be applied to other embodiments.

525(A) and 525(B), after the period during which the operation to the operation unit is valid starts (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period, It shows an effect mode when the operation valid period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined time has passed. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the frame movable body light-emitting section enters a predetermined light emission production state according to the special lottery result.

Fig. 525(A) shows a production pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the frame movable body light-emitting part emits specific light different from the normal light-emitting production state. It is in the production state. In this way, when the frame movable body light-emitting portion enters the specific light-emitting effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a big win.

On the other hand, FIG. 525(B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the light emitting part of the frame movable body becomes a normal light emitting effect state. . In this way, the light-emitting portion is brought into the normal light-emitting effect state, thereby indicating to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the expiration of the valid operation period, the changing decorative pattern corresponds to the result of the special lottery. is displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 524(A) and 525(A), the special lottery result is a square pattern (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the result is a big hit. In the case of the production pattern shown in FIG. 524(B) and FIG. 525(B), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and the reach-losing mode (for example, "7", "6", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a loser is displayed. ) to stop and display the decorative pattern.

At the timing (timing t22) when two seconds have passed since the decorative pattern stopped, the frame movable body moves to the raised position (second state ) to the retracted position (first state). At the same time, the simulated image of the movable frame is displayed in a manner in which it descends in accordance with the actual downward movement of the movable right ear frame 7100 and the movable left ear frame 7200 . At the timing (timing t24) when the movement of the movable frame body to the retracted position is completed, the simulated image of the movable frame body changes to a display mode in which the descent is completed in accordance with the actual descent movement of the movable frame body. Display ends.

When the special lottery result is a big win, it is preferable to change the light emission state of the frame movable body from the specific light emission performance state to the normal light emission performance state at a predetermined timing during the big win. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal lighting effect state is continued, and the variation of the next decorative pattern is started.

Figures 526(A) to 526(C) show the moving state of the frame movable body, the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image, and the acceptance of the operation unit when the performance pattern shown in Figure 524(A) is executed. 4 schematically shows changes in the state, the state of the operation instruction display, and the light emitting state of the frame movable body with the lapse of time. As described above, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 524(A) is the effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit when the special lottery result is a big win.

FIG. 526(A) shows the state at timing t5, the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the ready-to-reach state, the frame movable body is in the retracted position (first state) in the normal light emitting state, The frame movable body simulation image is not displayed, the operation section is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 526(B) shows the state at timing t8, the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the ready-to-reach state, and the frame movable body is in the light emitting state from the retracted position (first state) to the raised position (second state). The simulated image of the movable frame is a display simulating a state during movement from the retracted position (first state) to the raised position (second state), and the operation section is disabled. It is a period, and the operation instruction display is hidden.

FIG. 526(C) shows the state at timing t11, the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the ready-to-reach state, the movable frame is in the extinguished state and in the raised position (second state), and the simulated image of the movable frame is A display simulating the frame movable body positioned at the raised position (second state) is provided, and an operation valid period is started in the operation section, and an image simulating the operation section is displayed as an instruction display as an operation instruction display. ing.

FIG. 527(A) shows the state at timing t19, the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the reach state, the frame movable body is in the raised position (second state) in the special light emitting state, and the frame movable body is simulated. The image is displayed simulating the raised position (second state), the operation section is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 527(B) shows the state at timing t23, in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a grid mode (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit. The frame movable body is moving from the raised position (second state) to the retracted position (first state) in the special lighting effect state, and the simulated image of the frame movable body moves from the raised position (second state) to the retracted position ( The display simulates the state during movement to the first state), the operation unit is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 527(C) shows the state at timing t28, in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a grid mode (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit. The frame movable body is located at the retracted position (first state) in the special light emission effect state, the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, the operation section is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed. .

In this way, by displaying the simulated image of the movable frame at the timing when the movable frame starts to move, it is possible to change the lighting mode according to the operation of the movable frame and the operation of the operation unit. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the In addition, the movable frame body appears at a position not conventionally available in response to the result of the special lottery (for example, in response to the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect), so that the player can be greatly surprised and amused. In addition, by changing the light emission mode of the movable frame light-emitting section when the player operates the operation section, it is possible to give the player the feeling that he/she has decided the result of the special lottery. becomes.

Figures 528(A) to 528(F) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to Figures 523(A) to 523(E). 528(A) and 528(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 528(C) and 528(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 528(E) and 528(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 528(A), 528(C), and 528(E) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. showing. 528(B), 528(D), and 528(F) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570. ing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 528(C) and 528(E), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are respectively in the waiting position (first state), and the front side A right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140 and a left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240 are provided on the sides, and when viewed from the right side, the right ear frame movable body rotates by 90 degrees counterclockwise. 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 move from the standby position (first state) to the moving position (second state). The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

FIGS. 529(A) to 529(F) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 528(A) to 528(F). 529(A) and 529(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 529(C) and 529(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 529(E) and 529(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 529(A), 529(C), and 529(E) show the state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. ing. 529(B), 529(D), and 529(F) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570. ing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 529(C) and 529(E), the frame movable body has a rotation shaft on the back side, and rotates clockwise by 90 degrees when viewed from the right side. As a result, the movable frame body moves from the standby position (first state) to the moving position (second state). The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

FIGS. 530(A) to 530(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 523(A) to 523(E). 530(A) and 530(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 530(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 530(D) and 530(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 530(A), 530(C), and 530(D) show the state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. ing. 530(B) and 530(E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570. FIG.

In this embodiment, the upper portion of the movable frame is visible in the front view in the standby state (first state). The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure. In this manner, in the standby state, a part of the movable frame body can be visually recognized from the front view, so that the player can be reminded that the movable frame body will move. Further, during a normal game, only the right ear-frame movable body outer light-emitting part 7118 and the left ear-frame movable body outer light-emitting part 7218 are set to the normal light emission effect state, and only when the specific light emission effect state is set, the inside of the right ear frame movable body is set. The light emitting portion 7116 and the left ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7216 may also be configured to emit light. Also, a similar light emission pattern may be adopted in a movable frame body having another structure.

FIGS. 531(A) to 531(F) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 530(A) to 530(E). 531(A) and 531(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 531(C) and 531(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 531(E) and 531(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 531(A), 531(C), and 531(E) show the state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. ing. 531(B), 531(D), and 531(F) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570. FIG. ing.

In this embodiment, in the standby position (first state), the left and right movable frame bodies are adjacent to each other, and the upper part of the movable frame body is visible in a front view. In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the upper both ear openings 7040 of the door frame top unit. In addition, the movable frame bodies are configured to be movable upward while being separated from each other in the left-right direction. In the state of moving to the movement position (second state), it becomes visible to the player in the same state as in FIG. 523(B). The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

532(A) to 532(E) show another embodiment in which a door frame top unit 570 constituting the door frame 3 is provided with a frame movable body. In this embodiment, the frame movable body is rotatable, and the specific structure and operation mode will be described later.

532(A) and 532(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 532(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 532(D) and 532(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 532(A), 532(C), and 532(D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. 532(B) and 532(E) show that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated clockwise when viewed from the right from the state shown in FIGS. It shows a state in which it is rotated by 90 degrees and protrudes upward from the door frame top unit 570 .

The door frame top unit 570 is made of white translucent synthetic resin, and in the housed state shown in FIG. configured to be invisible. On the other hand, when the player views the door frame top unit 570 obliquely from above, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized as shown in FIG. 532(C).

As shown in FIGS. 532(A) to 532(E), the door frame top unit 570 has a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 and a door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010 . The shape of the door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 and the door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010 is a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from above. Further, in the door frame top unit 570, there are a door frame top unit right light emitting portion 7050 that illuminates the right ear frame movable body 7100, and a door frame top unit left light emitting portion 7052 that illuminates the left ear frame movable body 7200. is provided. Except for these points, the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment basically has the same structure as the structure described with reference to FIGS. 523(A) to 523(E). .

As shown in FIGS. 532(A) to 532(E), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment includes a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side in a front view. there is Specific structures and operation modes of these are shown below. Since right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 basically have the same structure, only right ear frame movable body 7100 will be described as a representative in the following description.

Figures 532(A), 532(C), and 532(D) show the state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 is in the retracted state. The right ear frame movable body 7100 in the housed state has a vertically long rectangular shape in a plan view, with the first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body facing downward and the second surface of the right ear frame movable body facing upward. 7120. The right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is composed of a right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7112 made of an inner colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin and an outer white translucent synthetic resin. The right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114 is provided. On the other hand, the second surface 7120 of the right ear frame movable body is entirely made of gray opaque synthetic resin. The other surfaces (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface) of the right ear frame movable body 7100 are formed of the same white translucent synthetic resin as the first surface outer decorative portion 7114 of the right ear frame movable body 7114 . The left ear frame movable body 7200 has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100 .

The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a right ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7140 . Further, the right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140 is attached near the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 . The right ear frame movable body 7100 can rotate about the horizontal direction as an axis by transmitting power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to the right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140. is. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has a left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240 with a similar structure, and power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is applied to the left ear frame movable body rotating shaft. By being transmitted to 7240, it is possible to rotate around the horizontal direction. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are independently controlled by pulse motors (not shown) to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise by an arbitrary angle when viewed from the right. , and can be stopped at any angle.

As shown in FIGS. 532(A) to 532(E), in the door frame top unit 570, a door frame top unit right light emitting section 7050 for illuminating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is provided. The right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit is installed in a state rotated clockwise by about 30 degrees from the horizontal plane when viewed from the right. The right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit is specifically composed of a printed circuit board coated with a white protective film on both sides. A light emitting diode capable of emitting light to the first surface 7110 is mounted on the top surface. By causing the light-emitting diode to emit light in a predetermined color, the first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body can be made to have a predetermined light-emitting effect. The left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit also has the same structure as the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are driven by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIGS. The door frame top unit 570 can be rotated by a predetermined angle from the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 and stopped at an arbitrary position. Fig. 532(B) and Fig. 532(E) are examples, in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right from the retracted state, and are positioned vertically. In this state, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face the front and stop. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have a shape imitating an animal's ear, and are housed in the door frame top unit 570 and vertical from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. By taking the above, it is possible to express the state of the animal's ears standing up decoratively.

In addition, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized by the player in a rotated state by continuously driving a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. is. When rotating in this manner, it is preferable to rotate the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 multiple times in the same direction at a speed of about one rotation per second. It can also be said that FIGS. 532(B) and 532(E) show the state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating. The directions of rotation of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to rotate clockwise a plurality of times when viewed from the right, or to rotate counterclockwise a plurality of times viewed from the right. It may be configured as With such a configuration, the first surface 7110 of the movable right ear frame and the second surface 7120 of the movable right ear frame are alternately visible to the player. Also, the first surface 7210 of the movable left ear frame and the second surface 7220 of the movable left ear frame are alternately visible to the player.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be stopped or rotated at a predetermined position, and light is emitted from the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit. Although it has been described that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be brought into a predetermined decorative state by light, a specific example will be shown below.

As shown in FIGS. 532(A), 532(C), and 532(D), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are shown. With the first surface 7210 of the movable frame facing downward, when light is emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, the inside of the door frame top unit 570 By the light reflected by , the entire door frame top unit 570 can dimly emit light. This is because the door frame top unit 570 is made of white translucent synthetic resin.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 532(B) and FIG. In the state where the first surface 7210 faces forward, when light is emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, the light illuminates the right ear frame movable body. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the state in which the first surface 7110 and the first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body are decorated. In this case as well, part of the light emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit is emitted to the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. Since the reflected light illuminates the door frame top unit 570 from the inside, the entire door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a slightly dim state.

On the other hand, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated and light is emitted from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, the light is emitted. The light alternately illuminates the first surface 7110 of the movable right ear frame, the second surface 7120 of the movable right ear frame, and the first surface 7210 of the movable left ear frame and the second surface 7220 of the movable left ear frame. state. In addition, the entire door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a slightly faint light emitting state.

In this manner, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are positioned above the upper surfaces of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100 in a stopped state or rotated. When the player looks up, the area occupied by the field of vision is increased, and the volume of the housing is increased, thereby making it possible to give the player unexpected surprises and amusement.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B), a specific operation mode of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the game board side according to the motion mode of the frame movable body. The display mode of the frame movable body simulation image, which is an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an operation unit). An example of an effect combining a player's operation reception mode, a light emission mode of the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, etc. is shown.

FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B) respectively show the operation mode of the movable frame and the display of the simulated image of the movable frame, which is an image simulating the movable frame displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. 16 is a time chart showing a state, a reception state of an operation unit, a display state of an operation instruction display displayed on a game board side effect display device 1600, and a light irradiation mode for a frame movable body.

FIG. 533(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 533(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operating unit during the period when the acceptance of operations on the operating unit is valid. there is FIG. 534(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 534(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B), the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), and display of the frame movable body simulation image The mode, the timing at which operation acceptance for the operation unit becomes valid, the timing at which the operation instruction display is started, and the timing at which the light irradiation mode for the frame movable body changes from the light emitting state to the extinguished state are the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, the timing at which the movable frame body changes from the rotating state (second state) to another state, and the light irradiation state of the movable frame body from the off state to the light emitting state or the specific light emitting state The timing may differ depending on the production pattern. Specific examples of effects in each effect pattern will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B).

533(A) to 534(B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 in the initial state (before timing t0). 532(A), 532(C), and 532(D), the right ear frame is movable. The body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face downward. In this state, when the ready-to-win effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to timing t9. , the rotation is started at the same time, and a state in which the rotation is continued (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state or a rotating state). The direction of rotation is clockwise when viewed from the right, and the speed of rotation is the speed of one rotation per second.

At the same time, in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, display of the simulated image of the movable frame is started. At the same time, display of a simulated door-frame top unit image, which is an image simulating the door-frame top unit 570, also starts. The frame movable body simulated image is specifically composed of an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 . As for the simulated image of the movable frame, the image simulating the movable right ear frame 7100 and the image simulating the movable left ear frame 7200 are the same according to the actual rotation of the movable right ear frame 7100 and the movable left ear frame 7200. It continues to be displayed dynamically in a rotating manner. The rotation speed of the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also set to rotate at the same speed as the actual rotation speed of the frame movable body (the speed of one rotation per second). Is displayed. As a result, when the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 are in a rotated state facing the front as shown in FIGS. The image imitating the frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also the image imitating the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7110 of the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body. An image simulating the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 included in the image simulating the frame movable body 7200 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 as a frame movable body simulated image in a front facing manner.

On the other hand, at timing t9, the reception of the operation to the operation unit becomes valid, and the display of an image instructing the operation of the operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. be. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string (for example, a character string "Push!!") instructing to operate the operation unit may be displayed. may Note that the operation valid period continues until an operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Further, at timing t9, the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, which irradiate light to the movable frame body, change from the light emitting state to the extinguished state.

FIGS. 533(A) and 533(B) show the mode of presentation when the operation to the operation unit is performed at timing t14 after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is valid starts (timing t9). showing. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, the movable frame body that has been rotating until then stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the result of the special lottery, and light is directed to the movable frame body. The lighting mode becomes a predetermined lighting effect state corresponding to the result of the special lottery.

FIG. 533(A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the right ear frame movable body 7100 moves to the first right ear frame movable body. A state in which the left ear frame movable body 7200 is vertically stopped with the surface 7110 on the front side and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is vertically stopped with the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 on the front side (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a third state). Become. At the same time, the lighting mode of light to the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 enters a specific light emitting effect state different from the normal light emitting state. In this way, the special lottery result indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a big win when the light irradiation mode becomes the specific light emission effect state.

On the other hand, FIG. 533(B) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loser. A state in which the left ear frame movable body 7200 is vertically stopped with the second surface 7120 on the front side and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is vertically stopped with the second surface 7220 on the front side (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a fourth state) ). At the same time, the illumination state of the light for the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 changes from the off state to the normal light emitting state. In this way, by changing the light irradiation mode to the normal light emission effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In FIGS. 534A and 534B, after the period during which the operation to the operation unit is valid starts (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period, It shows an effect mode when the operation valid period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined time has passed. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the movable frame body that has been rotating until then automatically stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the result of the special lottery. The illumination mode of the light to the is set to a predetermined light emission performance state corresponding to the result of the special lottery.

FIG. 534(A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit. The left ear frame movable body 7200 stops vertically with the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 facing forward (third state). At the same time, the lighting mode of light to the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 enters a specific light emitting effect state different from the normal light emitting state. In this way, the special lottery result indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a big win when the light irradiation mode becomes the specific light emission effect state.

On the other hand, FIG. 534(B) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss. The left ear frame movable body 7200 stops vertically with the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 facing forward (fourth state). At the same time, the illumination state of the light for the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 changes from the off state to the normal light emitting state. In this way, by changing the light irradiation mode to the normal light emission effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the expiration of the effective period of operation, the varying decorative pattern corresponds to the result of the special lottery. is displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 533(A) and 534(A), the special lottery result is a square pattern (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the result is a big hit. In the case of the production pattern shown in FIG. 533(B) and FIG. 534(B), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the reach-losing mode indicating that the special lottery result is loosing (for example, "7", "6", "7", etc.) ) to stop and display the decorative pattern.

At the timing (timing t24) when 4 seconds have passed since the decorative pattern stopped, the right ear frame movable body maintains either the specific lighting effect state or the normal lighting effect state. A state in which the first surface 7110 and the first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body face forward (third state), or a state in which the second surface 7120 of the right ear frame movable body and the second surface 7220 of the left ear frame movable body face forward. The state is changed from the facing state (fourth state) to a state in which the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face downward (first state). At the same time, the display of the simulated image of the movable frame ends.

When the special lottery result is a big win, it is preferable to change the lighting state of the light to the frame movable body from the specific light emission performance state to the normal light emission performance state at a predetermined timing during the big win. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal lighting effect state is continued, and the variation of the next decorative pattern is started.

In this manner, the movable frame body simulated image is displayed at the timing when the movable frame body changes from the waiting state (first state) to the rotating state (second state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the second state). In addition, in response to the result of the special lottery (for example, in response to the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect), the movable frame body appears at a position that has never existed before, so that the player can be greatly surprised and amused. . Further, when the player operates the operation unit, the movable frame stops in a predetermined stop state (third state or fourth state) and changes the light irradiation mode of the movable frame. It is possible to give the player a feeling as if he himself decided the result of the special lottery.

Figures 535(A) to 535(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to Figures 532(A) to 532(E). 535(A) and 535(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 535(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 535(D) and 535(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 535(A), 535(C), and 535(D) show the state (first state) where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are at the standby position. 535(B) and 535(E) show the state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating.

In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 respectively have a right ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7140 and a left ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7240 at their lower portions. Also, the vertical thickness of the door frame top unit 570 is smaller than that of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 532(A) to 532(E). Further, the right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140 and the left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240 are provided so as to be orthogonal to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 . Also, the upper halves of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are positioned higher than the upper surfaces of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100 .

In the state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face each other. positioned. On the other hand, in the rotated state, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 rotates clockwise in plan view, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 rotates counterclockwise in plan view. For example, in FIGS. 535(B) and 535(E), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise in plan view, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 is rotated clockwise in plan view. It can be said that it shows a state rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees. By adopting such a rotation mode, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 is rotated clockwise in plan view. Even if a player or a store clerk carelessly puts their hands or face close to the frame movable body, their hands or face may be dragged behind the machine and injured, compared to the case where the frame is rotated around. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the production patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

Figures 536(A) to 536(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to Figures 535(A) to 535(E). 536(A) and 536(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 536(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 536(D) and 536(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 536(A), 536(C), and 536(D) show the state (first state) where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are at the standby position. 536(B) and 536(E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated from the door frame top unit 570. FIG.

Also in this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are provided so as to be perpendicular to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a part of the door frame top unit 570 has a part that protrudes upward so as to cover the top, left, right, and rear of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. are doing. In addition, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are colored (specifically pink) and transparent. It is made of resin. Further, the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are each formed of gray opaque synthetic resin. In this embodiment as well, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be in the same state as in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 535(A) to 535(E). . By providing a part that covers the movable frame body in this way, even if a player or a store clerk carelessly puts his or her hand or face close to the movable frame body, the hand or face will be hidden behind the game machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the person is dragged and injured. The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

Figures 537(A) to 537(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to Figures 536(A) to 536(E). 537(A) and 537(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 537(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 537(D) and 537(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 537(A), 537(C), and 537(D) show the state (first state) where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are at the standby position. 537(B) and 537(E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated from the door frame top unit 570. FIG.

In this embodiment as well, a portion of the door frame top unit 570 protrudes upward so as to cover the top, left, right, and rear of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upwardly projecting portion and the right ear frame movable body 7100, or the upwardly projecting portion and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are integrally configured, and after they move forward, The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start to rotate. FIG. 537(D) shows the state before starting forward movement, and FIG. 537(E) shows the state after forward movement is completed.

In this embodiment as well, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be in the same state as in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 535(A) to 535(E). . By providing a part that covers the movable frame body in this way, even if a player or a store clerk carelessly puts his or her hand or face close to the movable frame body, the hand or face will be hidden behind the game machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the person is dragged and injured. By covering the front part of the upwardly protruding portion with a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized, but cannot be touched by a player or a store clerk. It may be configured as

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B). In this case, the upwardly projecting portion and the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the upwardly projecting portion and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be moved forward from timing t5 to timing t7, or from timing t7 to timing t7. It may be performed over timing t9. Further, an image simulating the upwardly projecting portion may be used as the movable frame simulated image, and may be displayed at the timing when the upwardly projecting portion starts to move. A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

523 to 525, an embodiment in which a door frame top unit 570 is provided with a movable frame and a simulated image of the movable frame is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown. 540 show variations of this embodiment. In the embodiments described below, the door frame top unit 570 includes a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 instead of the right ear frame movable body 7100, and replaces the left ear frame movable body 7200 with A left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided.

538(A) and 538(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 538(C) and 538(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 538(E) and 538(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 538(A), 538(C), and 538(E) show a door frame top unit 570 in which a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear inner frame movable body 7300 are installed. It shows a state in which the ear outer frame movable body 7450 is retracted (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a first state). 538(B), 538(D), and 538(F) show from the door frame top unit 570 the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, A state in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrudes upward (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state) is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 538(A) to 538(F), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment has a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the left side and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the right side in a front view. A left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. Specific structures and operation modes of these are shown below. Since the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 basically have the same structure, in the following description, Only the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 may be representatively described.

In the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 538(A) to 538(F) and FIGS. 547(A) to 547(E) described later, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are sometimes referred to as frame movable bodies. Also, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are referred to as the inner frame movable body, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are referred to as the outer frame movable body. There is

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is a movable body having a rectangular shape elongated in the front-rear direction in a plan view of the housed state. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 has a right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 facing upward in the housed state (first state) and facing forward in the protruding state (second state), and a right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 facing forward in the housed state (first state). and the second surface 7320 of the right ear inner frame movable body facing rearward in the protruding state (second state). The right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 is made of colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin. The surfaces of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 other than the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 (upper surface, left side, right side, right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320) are white translucent synthetic resin. formed by The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 has the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 .

The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is a movable body having a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. and a surface 7370 . The right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, and other surfaces (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface) of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are white translucent. It is made of synthetic resin. The left ear outer frame movable body 7450 has the same structure as the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 .

Inside the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a rectangular right ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7330 is provided. Further, inside the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a square-shaped right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380 is provided.

Specifically, the right ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7330 and the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380 are configured by printed circuit boards coated with white protective films on both sides. A light-emitting diode capable of emitting light toward the player side in the projected state (second state) is mounted on the surface. The right ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7330 and the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380 are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 .

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are rotated by a driving mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to rotate the right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the left ear inner frame movable body. The door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 538(A), 538(C), and 538(E) is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right using the shaft 7440 as a rotation axis. 538(B), 538(D), and 538(F) from the state stored in the standby position (first state) upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. It is possible to control to a state (second state) protruding to the side.

On the other hand, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are moved upward by a drive mechanism (not shown) that is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, as shown in FIGS. ), from the state (first state) housed in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIG. 538(E), to FIGS. It is possible to control the door frame top unit 570 to vertically protrude upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown (second state).

A right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 vertically protrude upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. When the state (second state) is reached, as shown in FIG. The player can visually recognize the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 positioned inside. A right ear inner frame movable body 7300 , a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 , a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 , and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have shapes imitating animal ears, and are attached to the door frame top unit 570 . By taking a stored state (first state) and a state (second state) protruding vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, the state in which the animal's ears move can be expressed decoratively. it is possible.

In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are independently housed in the door frame top unit 570 under the control of the peripheral control board 1510 (first state). It is possible to take a state (second state) projecting vertically upward from the upper surface of the .

In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 project vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, respectively. When it is in the state (second state), it is independently housed in the door frame top unit 570 by the control of the peripheral control board 1510 (first state), and from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 It is possible to change the state to a state of vertically protruding upward (second state).

In this embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is made of white translucent synthetic resin. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 538(A), when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are housed in the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7380 When the outer ear frame movable body light-emitting portion 7480 emits light in a predetermined manner, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a dimly lit state.

On the other hand, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrude from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame is movable. When the body light emitting portion 7330, the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380, the left ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7430, and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7480 are caused to emit light in a predetermined manner, the right ear inner frame The movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are visually recognized by the player in a predetermined light emitting state. It is possible to

Note that in a state where the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrude from the door frame top unit 570 (second state). , the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is positioned to cover the back of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is positioned to cover the back of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. , the light emitted forward from the right ear outer frame movable body light-emitting portion 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body light-emitting portion 7480 is emitted from the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 . Even if it faces, the second surface 7320 of the right ear inner frame movable body and the second surface 7420 of the left inner frame movable body are diffusely reflected backward, and finally, the first surface 7360 of the right ear outer frame movable body and the second surface 7420 of the left ear inner frame movable body Since the light is diffusely reflected forward by the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body, the utilization efficiency of the light emitted from the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting section 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting section 7480 can be increased.

In this way, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are moved to move the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100. Since it is positioned above the upper surface, it is possible to give the player unprecedented surprises and amusement compared to the case where the movable body in the game board is moved.

539(A) to 540(B), right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A display mode of a simulated image of a movable frame, which is an image simulating a movable frame, displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 according to a specific operation mode, an operation mode of the movable frame, and an operation button 410 (hereinafter referred to as an operation button 410). player's operation reception mode for the player's operation on the right ear inner frame movable body light emitting part 7330, right ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7380, left ear inner frame movable body light emitting part 7430, left ear outer frame movable body Shown is an example of presentation in which the light emitting modes of the body light emitting section 7480 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a frame movable body light emitting section) are combined.

539(A) to 540(B) respectively show the operation mode of the frame movable body and the display of the frame movable body simulated image, which is an image simulating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. 16 is a time chart showing a state, a reception state of an operation unit, a display state of an operation instruction display displayed on a game board side effect display device 1600, and a light emission effect state of a movable frame light emitting unit.

FIG. 539(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 539(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operating unit during the period when the acceptance of operations on the operating unit is valid. there is FIG. 540(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operating section during the period when the acceptance of operating the operating section is valid. ing. FIG. 540(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing.

Figure 539 (A) ~ Figure 540 (B) in each effect pattern shown, the state (first state) in which the inner frame movable body is retracted to the state (second state) protruded state (second state) timing, the frame movable body The display mode of the simulated image, the timing at which the operation acceptance for the operation unit becomes valid, the timing at which the operation instruction display is started, and the timing at which the movable frame light emitting unit changes from the light emitting state to the extinguished state are the same. On the other hand, presence/absence of operation of the outer frame movable body, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, and the timing at which the frame movable body light-emitting portion changes from the off state to the light emitting state or the specific light emitting state may differ depending on the effect pattern. Specific examples of effects in each effect pattern will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B).

539(A) to 540(B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are In the initial state (before timing t0), the door frame top unit 570 is in a state of being accommodated (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a first state or standby state). In this state, when the ready-to-win effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t7, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 move. It starts to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the right (timing t7).

At the same time, in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, display of a part of the simulated image of the movable frame is started. At the same time, display of a simulated door-frame top unit image, which is an image simulating the door-frame top unit 570, also starts. Specifically, the simulated image of the frame movable body is an image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, an image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body. and an image imitating the frame movable body 7450 . The simulated image of the movable frame is an image simulating the movable right ear inner frame body 7300 and the movable left ear inner frame body 7400 in accordance with the rotation of the actual right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 . A simulated image is dynamically displayed in a rotating manner. Of the frame movable body simulated images, the image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are not yet displayed at this stage. An image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in accordance with the timing (timing t9) when the actual movement of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 ends (timing t9). After that, the display of the rotating state of the image simulating ends, and thereafter the display continues in the state of indicating the stopped state (after timing t9). The movable body 7300 of the right ear inner frame and the movable body 7400 of the left ear inner frame start to rise at timing t7, and two seconds later, at timing t9, the rotation is completed (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a second state or a raised state). Yes).

On the other hand, at timing t9, the reception of the operation to the operation unit becomes valid, and the display of an image instructing the operation of the operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. be. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string (for example, a character string "Push!!") instructing to operate the operation unit may be displayed. may Note that the operation valid period continues until an operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Also, at timing t9, all the frame movable body light-emitting sections are turned off from the light-emitting effect state.

FIGS. 539(A) and 539(B) show the mode of presentation when an operation to the operation unit is performed at timing t14 after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is valid starts (timing t9). showing. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, and the frame movable body light-emitting section enters a predetermined light emission production state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 539(A) shows a production pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light emitting unit changes from the off state to normal light emission production. It becomes a specific light emission production state different from the state. At the same time, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start to rise from the state (first state) housed in the door frame top unit 570, and two seconds later (timing t16), the rising operation is started. It becomes a completed state (second state). At the same time, in addition to the image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, which are already displayed in the stopped state, on the game board side effect display device 1600, As new simulated frame movable body images, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are started to be displayed. The image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in the same manner as the actual upward movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. From timing t14 to timing t16, the display mode changes from the stored state to the display mode in which the rising operation is completed. In this way, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 complete the turning motion (the second state), the light-out state changes to the specific light-emission effect state, and the light-out state changes to the specific light emission effect. The state in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stored in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) changes to a state (second state) in which the rising operation is completed. , an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed in an ascending manner on the game board side effect display device 1600, whereby a special lottery is offered to the player. It will be shown that the result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 539(B) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss. It is in the production state. In this case, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are maintained in the retracted state (first state), and no operation is performed. Also, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are not displayed. In this way, the special lottery result is given to the player when the frame movable body light-emitting portion enters a normal light emitting state, or when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 do not operate. It will be shown that it is a failure.

In FIGS. 540(A) and 540(B), after the period during which the operation to the operation unit is valid starts (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period, It shows an effect mode when the operation valid period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined time has passed. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the frame movable body light-emitting section enters a predetermined light emission production state according to the special lottery result.

Fig. 540(A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the frame movable body light emitting unit emits specific light different from the normal light emitting effect state. It is in the production state. At the same time, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start to rise from the state (first state) housed in the door frame top unit 570, and two seconds later (timing t16), the rising operation is started. It becomes a completed state (second state). At the same time, in addition to the image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, which are already displayed in the stopped mode, on the game board side effect display device 1600, As new simulated frame movable body images, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are started to be displayed. The image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are shown in the same manner as the actual upward movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. From timing t18 to timing t20, the display mode changes from the stored state to the display mode in which the rising operation is completed.

In this way, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 have completed the turning motion (second state), the light-out state changes to the specific light-emission effect state, and the light-out state changes to the specific light emission effect. The state in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stored in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) changes to a state (second state) in which the rising operation is completed. , an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed in an ascending manner on the game board side effect display device 1600, whereby a special lottery is offered to the player. It will be shown that the result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 540(B) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the frame movable body light-emitting portion becomes a normal light-emitting effect state. In this case, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are maintained in the retracted state (first state), and no operation is performed. In addition, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are not displayed. In this way, the special lottery result is given to the player when the frame movable body light-emitting portion enters the normal light emitting state, or when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 do not operate. It will be shown that it is a failure.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t24) after the end of the effective period of operation, the varying decorative pattern corresponds to the result of the special lottery. is displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 539(A) and 540(A), the special lottery result is a square pattern (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the result is a big hit. In the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 539(B) and 540(B), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and a reach-losing mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loser (for example, "7", "6", "7", etc.) ) to stop and display the decorative pattern.

At the timing (timing t26) when two seconds have passed since the decorative pattern stopped, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in either a specific light emitting state or a normal light emitting state. It starts moving from the raised position (second state) to the retracted position (first state) while maintaining the light emission mode. At the same time, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame among the frame movable body simulated images are displayed in accordance with the actual downward movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 . An image simulating the movable body 7450 is displayed in a descending manner. At the timing (timing t28) when the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the storage position is completed, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed. The image simulating is in a display mode in which the descent is completed in accordance with the actual descent movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, and the display ends.

At the timing (timing t30) two seconds after the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the retracted position is completed, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame move. The movable body 7400 starts to move from the raised position (second state) to the retracted position (first state) while maintaining either the specific light emission state or the normal light emission state. At the same time, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is simulated in the frame movable body simulated image in accordance with the actual downward movement of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 while rotating. The image and the image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a manner of descending while rotating. At the timing (timing t32) when the movement of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to the storage position is completed, the image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed. The image simulating is in a display mode in which the descent is completed in accordance with the actual descent operation of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the display ends.

When the special lottery result is a big win, it is preferable to change the light emission state of the frame movable body from the specific light emission performance state to the normal light emission performance state at a predetermined timing during the big win. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal lighting effect state is continued, and the variation of the next decorative pattern is started.

In this way, by displaying the simulated image of the movable frame at the timing when the movable frame starts to move, it is possible to change the lighting mode according to the operation of the movable frame and the operation of the operation unit. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the In addition, according to the result of the special lottery, the movable frame body appears at a position that has never existed before, so that the player can be greatly surprised and amused. Further, after the inner frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the moving state (second state), the outer frame movable body is moved to the standby state (first State) may or may not change to a moving state (second state), so that the player can feel as if he/she has decided the result of the special lottery. In addition, in a situation where the inner frame movable body first enters the moving state (second state) and the player can notice that it has entered the moving state, the player is requested to operate the operation unit. As a result, the player can operate the operating section while having a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the outer frame movable body will enter the moving state (second state) following the inner frame movable body.

FIGS. 541(A) to 541(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 538(A) to 538(F). 541(A) and 541(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 541(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 541(D) and 541(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 541(A), 541(C), and 541(D) show a door frame top unit 570 in which a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear inner frame movable body 7300 are installed. The state (first state) in which the ear outer frame movable body 7450 is housed is shown. 541(B) and 541(E), from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are shown. A state (second state) protruding upward is shown.

In this embodiment, in addition to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. 541(A), 541(C), and 541(D), the door frame top unit 570 is housed in the standby position ( 541(B) and 541(E) to a state in which the door frame top unit 570 vertically protrudes upward (second state). be.

On the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, a first right ear opening 7002 on the door frame top unit is positioned corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The second right ear opening 7004 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the first left ear opening 7012 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A second left ear opening 7014 is provided on the door frame top unit at the position. The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure. As shown in FIGS. 530(A) to 530(E), even in the frame movable body of the structure in this embodiment, the upper part of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 may project from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 in the first state.

Figures 542(A) to 542(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to Figures 541(A) to 541(E). 542(A) and 542(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 542(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 542(D) and 542(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 542(A), 542(C), and 542(D) show a door frame top unit 570 in which a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, The state (first state) in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is stored is shown. 542(B) and 542(E), from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are shown. A state (second state) protruding upward is shown.

In this embodiment, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 do not move upward, but move downward by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. 542(A), 542(C), and 542(D) respectively, from the state (first state) housed in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, to the state shown in FIG. 542(B). 542(E), the door frame top unit 570 can be controlled to vertically protrude upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 or downward from the bottom surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state). be.

On the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, a right ear opening 7000 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and a door frame opening 7000 corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A top unit upper left ear opening 7010 is provided. In addition, on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, the door frame top unit lower right ear opening 7020 is located at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the door frame is located at a position corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. A top unit lower left ear opening 7030 is provided.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the production patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure. In this case, in a state in which it is not clear whether the result of the special lottery will be a big hit or not, the inner frame movable body starts moving downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t7), and the result of the special lottery. is a big hit, the outer frame movable body starts moving upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t14, timing 18, etc.). On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the outer frame movable body does not move. With such a configuration, when the result of the special lottery is a big win, it is possible to make the outer frame movable body visible to other players and store clerks. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the inner frame movable body moves but the outer frame movable body does not move. can be reduced. In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 538(A) to 538(F), the outer frame movable body and the inner frame movable body express the animal's ears decoratively. In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 542(A) to 542(E), the upwardly projecting outer frame movable body expresses the animal's ears, and the inner frame movable body expresses the animal's eyes. there is

FIGS. 543(A) to 543(E) and FIGS. 544(A) to 544(E) show FIGS. 541(A) to 541(E) and FIGS. 542(A) to 542(E). 4 shows a modification of the frame movable body described above. 543(A), 543(B), 544(A), and 544(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 543(C) and 544(C) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 543(D), 543(E), 544(D), and 544(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In this embodiment, each frame movable body protrudes downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (first state) and protrudes upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state). It is possible to take

Figures 543(A), 543(C), and 543(D) show a state (first state) in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body protrude downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570. there is FIGS. 543(B) and 543(E) show a state (second state) in which the inner frame movable body protrudes upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, and the outer frame movable body protrudes upward from the door frame top unit 570. FIG. shows a state (first state) projecting downward from the lower surface of the . Figures 544(A), 544(C), and 544(D) show a state (first state) in which the inner frame movable body protrudes downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, and the outer frame movable body shows a state (second state) projecting upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 . 544(B) and 544(E) show a state (second state) in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body protrude upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. FIG.

In this embodiment, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are driven (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to move to any position from the first state to the second state and stop by the mechanism.

On the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, a first right ear opening 7002 on the door frame top unit is positioned corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The second right ear opening 7004 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the first left ear opening 7012 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A second left ear opening 7014 is provided on the door frame top unit at the position.

In addition, on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, a first right ear opening 7022 under the door frame top unit is located at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The door frame top unit second right ear opening 7024 corresponds to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the door frame top unit lower first left ear opening 7032 corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A second left ear opening 7034 is provided at the position below the door frame top unit.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

In this case, in a state in which it is not clear whether or not the result of the special lottery will result in a big win, the inner frame movable body starts moving upward from the state (first state) protruding from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570. (timing t7) and movement is completed at timing t9. Figures 543(B) and 543(E) show the state in which the movement of the inner frame movable body is completed. When the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the outer frame movable body starts moving upward from the state (first state) protruding from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t14, timing 18, etc.). . FIGS. 544(B) and 544(E) show the state (second state) in which the movement of the outer frame movable body is completed. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the outer frame movable body does not move. With such a configuration, when the result of the special lottery is a big win, it is possible to make the outer frame movable body visible to other players and store clerks. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the inner frame movable body moves but the outer frame movable body does not move. can be reduced.

An example has been shown in which the inner frame movable body protrudes upward to enter the second state, and then the outer frame movable body protrudes upward to enter the second state, but the relationship between the two may be reversed. In this case, the outer frame movable body starts to project upward at timing t7. After that, when the movement is completed (timing t9), the states shown in FIGS. 544(A) and 544(D) are obtained. Further, at timing t14 or timing t18, the inner frame movable body may be configured to start moving upward. It may be configured to be able to execute two production patterns in which the order in which the frame movable body operates is reversed. Furthermore, it is better to set the expectation of a big hit in a production pattern in which the outer frame movable body operates first than in a production pattern in which the inner frame movable body operates first, for example, when the outer frame movable body operates first. It may be configured to ensure a big hit.

FIGS. 545(A) to 546(B) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 538(A) to 538(F). 545(A) and 545(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 545(C) and 545(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 546(A) and 546(B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 545(A), 545(C), and 546(A) show a door frame top unit 570 in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left The state (first state) in which the ear outer frame movable body 7450 is housed is shown. Figures 545(B), 545(D), and 546(B) show that from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left ear A state (second state) in which the outer frame movable body 7450 protrudes upward is shown.

In this embodiment, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are all controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. When viewed from the right, it is configured to be able to move upward by rotating clockwise by 90 degrees by a non-rotating drive mechanism.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B). In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B), after the inner frame movable body is in the second state, the outer frame movable body is in the second state. In the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 545(A) to 546(B), the order of movement of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body is reversed, and the outer frame movable body is moved from timing t7 to timing t9. After the state is changed from the first state to the second state in , the inner frame movable body is preferably changed from the first state to the second state at timing t14 or timing t18. A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

532 to 534, an embodiment in which a door frame top unit 570 is provided with a movable frame and a simulated image of the movable frame is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown. 549 show variations of this embodiment. In the embodiments described below, the door frame top unit 570 includes a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 instead of the right ear frame movable body 7100, and replaces the left ear frame movable body 7200 with A left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided.

547(A) and 547(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 547(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 547(D) and 547(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 547(A), 547(C), and 547(D) show a door frame top unit 570 in which a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear inner frame movable body 7300 are installed. It shows a state in which the ear outer frame movable body 7450 is retracted (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a first state). 547(B) and 547(E) show a movable body of right ear inner frame 7300, a movable right ear outer frame 7350, a movable left ear inner frame 7400, and a movable left ear outer frame from the door frame top unit 570. 7450 shows a state in which 7450 protrudes upward (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a second state).

As shown in FIGS. 547(A) to 547(E), the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000, a door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010, and a door frame top unit inner right side. It has a light emitting part 7050 and a left side light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit. The specific structures and functions of these are the same as those with reference to FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 547(A) to 547(E), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment has a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the left side and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the right side in a front view. A left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. Specific structures and operation modes of these are shown below. Since the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 basically have the same structure, in the following description, Only the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 may be representatively described.

Figures 547(A), 547(C), and 547(D) show the state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is in the retracted state. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in the housed state has a vertically long rectangular shape in plan view, and has a right ear inner frame movable body first face 7310 facing downward and a right ear inner frame movable body first face 7310 facing upward. It has two sides 7320 . The right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 is made of colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin. On the other hand, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 is made of gray opaque synthetic resin. The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 in the housed state has a vertically long rectangular shape in which the vicinity of the center is hollowed out so as to surround the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in plan view, and the right ear outer frame facing downward. It has a frame movable body first surface 7360 and a right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 facing upward. The right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 is made of white translucent synthetic resin. On the other hand, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 is made of gray opaque synthetic resin. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 .

The right inner ear frame movable body 7300 has a right inner ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7340 on the right side (inner side) in plan view. In addition, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 has a right ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7390 on the left side (outside) in plan view. In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7390 are positioned on the same axis. In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7390 are attached near the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 . The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 . The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are powered by a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to rotate the right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body. By being transmitted to the rotating shaft 7390, it is possible to rotate about the left-right direction as an axis. In addition, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have a left ear inner frame movable body rotation shaft 7440 and a left ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7490 having similar structures. Power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the control board 1510 is transmitted to the left ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7440 and the left ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7490, thereby rotating about the horizontal direction as an axis. Is possible. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are each independently controlled by a pulse motor (not shown), thereby moving from the right. It is possible to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise by an arbitrary angle and to stop at an arbitrary angle.

As shown in FIGS. 547(A) to 547(E), in the door frame top unit 570, the right side of the door frame top unit that illuminates the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is provided. A light emitting part 7050 and a left side light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit for illuminating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. The specific structures of the door frame top unit right light emitting portion 7050 and the door frame top unit left light emitting portion 7052 are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. do.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are controlled by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. 547(C) and 547(D), the door frame top unit 570 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the standby position and stopped at an arbitrary position. is possible. Fig. 547(B) and Fig. 547(E) are examples, in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are housed. From the state, rotate 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right, and in a vertical state, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7360, A first plane 7410 shows a state in which the left ear outer frame movable body first plane 7460 faces the front and stops. A right ear inner frame movable body 7300 , a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 , a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 , and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have shapes imitating animal ears, and are attached to the door frame top unit 570 . It is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal's ears move by taking the stored state and the state perpendicular to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 .

In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 continuously drive a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is also possible for the player to visually recognize the rotating state by driving it with the . When rotating in this manner, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotated at a speed of about one rotation per second. Rotate multiple times in the same direction. 547(B) and 547(E) show the state during rotation of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. It can be said that it shows The directions of rotation of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to rotate clockwise a plurality of times when viewed from the right, or to rotate counterclockwise a plurality of times viewed from the right. It may be configured as With such a configuration, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 and the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 are alternately visible to the player. In addition, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 are alternately visible to the player. In addition, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 are alternately visible to the player. In addition, the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 and the left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 are alternately visible to the player.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be stopped or rotated at predetermined positions, and the door frame top unit Right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body Although it has been shown that the bodies 7450 can each be in a predetermined decorative state, a specific example will be shown below.

As shown in FIGS. 547(A), 547(C), and 547(D), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are Right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, Left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 included in left ear inner frame movable body 7400, Left ear outer frame movable body first surface included in left ear outer frame movable body 7450 When light is emitted from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit with the 7460 facing downward, the light reflected in the door frame top unit 570 causes the door to open. It is possible to make the entire frame top unit 570 dimly emit light. This is because the door frame top unit 570 is made of white translucent synthetic resin.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 547(B) and 547(E), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7350 The frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 face forward. When the light is emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit in the facing state, the right ear inner frame of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is irradiated with the light. Movable body first surface 7310, right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 of right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 of left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer side It is possible for the player to visually recognize the state in which the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 of the frame movable body 7450 is decorated. Also in this case, part of the light emitted from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit illuminates the door frame top unit 570 from the inside. , the entire door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a slightly dim state.

On the other hand, while the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotated, the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the door When light is irradiated from the left light emitting portion 7052 in the frame top unit, the irradiated light causes the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, and the right ear outer frame movable body. Body first surface 7360, right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 The left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 is alternately illuminated.

In this way, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body are positioned above the upper surface of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100. Since the 7450 is positioned and rotated in a stopped state, it is possible to give the player unprecedented surprises and amusement compared to the case where the movable body in the game board is moved. .

548(A) to 549(B), right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer frame movable body 7450 ( A frame movable body simulation which is an image simulating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the specific operation mode of the frame movable body (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a frame movable body) The image display mode, the player's operation reception mode for the operation button 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an operation unit), the light emission mode of the right light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit, etc. An example of combined effects is shown.

Figures 548(A) to 549(B) respectively show the operation modes of the frame movable bodies (the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450) provided on the outside, and the effect display on the game board side. A display state of a frame movable body simulated image, which is an image simulating the frame movable body provided outside (the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450) displayed on the device 1600, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image provided on the inside. The operation mode of the frame movable body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400) and the frame movable body provided inside (right ear inner frame movable body) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 The display state of the frame movable body simulation image which is an image simulating the frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400), the reception state of the operation unit, and the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 2 is a time chart showing a display state of , and a light irradiation mode for a movable frame.

FIG. 548(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the acceptance of operation for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 548(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the acceptance of operations on the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 549(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 549(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period in which operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each production pattern shown in FIGS. 548(A) to 549(B), the frame movable body provided on the outside and the frame movable body provided on the inside are rotated from the waiting state (first state) to the rotating state (second state). ), the display mode of the simulated image of the movable frame, the timing at which the operation acceptance for the operation unit becomes effective, the timing at which the operation instruction display is started, and the lighting mode of the movable frame from the light emitting state to the extinguished state. The timing of entering the state is the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, the timing at which the movable frame body changes from the second state (rotating state) to another state, and the light irradiation state of the movable frame body from the off state to the light emitting state or the specific light emitting state The timing may differ depending on the production pattern. Specific examples of effects in each effect pattern will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 548(A) to 549(B).

548(A) to 549(B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are In the initial state (before timing t0), the door frame top unit 570 is stored in the door frame top unit 570 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the first state or standby state). 547(C), as shown in FIG. 547(D), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, the left ear outer The frame movable body first surface 7460 faces downward. In this state, when the ready-to-win effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1) between timing t0 and timing t5, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body The first body surface 7460 simultaneously starts rotating at timing t5, and enters a state in which the rotation continues (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a second state or rotating state). The direction of rotation is clockwise when viewed from the right, and the speed of rotation is the speed of one rotation per second.

At the same time, in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display of the frame movable body simulation image is started. At the same time, display of a simulated door-frame top unit image, which is an image simulating the door-frame top unit 570, also starts. Specifically, the simulated image of the frame movable body is an image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, an image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body. and an image imitating the frame movable body 7450 . The simulated image of the movable frame is an image simulating the movable right ear outer frame body 7350 and the movable left ear outer frame body 7450 in accordance with the rotation of the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 . The rotated image continues to be dynamically displayed while rotating in the same direction. The rotation speed of the image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are also rotated at the same speed as the actual rotation speed of the outer outer frame movable body (the speed of one rotation per second). to be displayed. As a result, when the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are in a rotated state facing the front as shown in FIGS. The image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 of the image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 possessed by the simulated image or the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is used as a frame movable body simulated image in a state in which the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 faces the game board side effect display device. 1600 is displayed.

After the rotating state (second state) of the outer frame movable body continues from timing t4 to timing t9, at timing t9, the inner frame movable body (the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400). start rotating at the same time, and the state in which the rotation is continued (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state or a rotating state). Since the rotation mode of the inner frame movable body and the display mode of the image simulating the inner frame movable body are the same as those of the outer frame movable body, description thereof is omitted. On the other hand, at timing t9, the reception of the operation to the operation unit becomes valid, and the display of an image instructing the operation of the operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. be. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string (for example, a character string "Push!!") instructing to operate the operation unit may be displayed. may Note that the operation valid period continues until an operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Further, at timing t9, the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, which irradiate light to the movable frame body, change from the light emitting state to the extinguished state.

FIGS. 548(A) and 548(B) show the effects when the operating section is operated at timing t14 after the period in which the operation to the operating section is valid starts (timing t9). showing. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, and the movable frame body that has been rotating until then stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the result of the special lottery. The lighting mode becomes a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the result of the special lottery.

FIG. 548(A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit. 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are respectively the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, and the left ear inner frame movable body first surface. The surface 7410 and the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body are brought to the near side and vertically stopped (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the third state). At the same time, a specific light emitting effect in which the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is different from the normal light emitting state. state. In this way, the special lottery result indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a big win when the light irradiation mode becomes the specific light emission effect state.

On the other hand, FIG. 548(B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss. The movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are formed on the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7370, respectively. The second surface 7420 and the second surface 7470 of the left ear outer frame movable body are vertically stopped (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from the off state to the normal light emitting state. In this way, by changing the light irradiation mode to the normal light emission effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

549(A) and 549(B), after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is valid starts (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period, This shows an effect mode when the operation effective period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined period of time has passed. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the movable frame body that has been rotating until then automatically stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the result of the special lottery. The lighting mode of the light to the is set to a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the result of the special lottery.

FIG. 549(A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit. The inner ear frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are respectively the right inner ear frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, A state in which the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 is on the front side and is vertically stopped (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a third state) is established. At the same time, a specific light emitting effect in which the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is different from the normal light emitting state. state. In this way, the special lottery result indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a big win when the light irradiation mode becomes the specific light emission effect state.

On the other hand, FIG. 549(B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss. , the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are respectively the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420. , the second surface 7470 of the left ear outer frame movable body is on the front side, and the state is vertically stopped (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from the off state to the normal light emitting state. In this way, by changing the light irradiation mode to the normal light emission effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In this way, when the result of the special lottery is a big win, each frame movable body stops in the third state to indicate a big win, and when the result of the special lottery is a loss, each The frame movable body stops in the fourth state, indicating a failure.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 548(A) to 549(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the expiration of the valid operation period, the changing decorative pattern corresponds to the result of the special lottery. is displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 548(A) and 549(A), the special lottery result is a square pattern (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the result is a big hit. In the case of the production patterns shown in FIGS. 548(B) and 549(B), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and a reach-losing mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loser (for example, "7", "6", "7", etc.). ) to stop and display the decorative pattern.

At the timing (timing t24) when 4 seconds have passed since the decorative pattern stopped, the frame movable body moves the frame inside the right ear while maintaining either the specific lighting effect state or the normal lighting effect state. A state in which the body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 face forward (third state) or The state in which the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, and the left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 face forward ( From the fourth state), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are downward. The state changes to the state facing (first state). At the same time, the display of the simulated image of the movable frame ends.

When the special lottery result is a big win, it is preferable to change the lighting state of the light to the frame movable body from the specific light emission performance state to the normal light emission performance state at a predetermined timing during the big win. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal lighting effect state is continued, and the variation of the next decorative pattern is started.

In this manner, the movable frame body simulated image is displayed at the timing when the movable frame body changes from the waiting state (first state) to the rotating state (second state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the second state). In addition, according to the result of the special lottery, the movable frame body appears at a position that has never existed before, so that the player can be greatly surprised and amused. Further, after the outer frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), the inner frame movable body rotates from the standby state (first state) with the start of the operation valid period. state (second state), and when the player operates the operation unit, the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body are brought into a third state indicating that the result of the special lottery is a big win , or the fourth state indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if he himself decided the result of the special lottery.

Figures 550(A) to 550(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to Figures 547(A) to 547(E). 550(A) and 550(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 550(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 550(D) and 550(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 550(A), 550(C), and 550(D) show the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The state (first state) in the standby position is shown. Figure 550(B) and Figure 550(E) show a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotating ( second state).

In this embodiment, the vertical thickness of the door frame top unit 570 is smaller than that of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. The body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are configured to be visible from below.

In the vicinity of the front end of the door frame top unit, a right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 . Further, a left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 . The right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit can emit light backward. As a result, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be brought into a predetermined light emitting state. be.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 548(A) to 549(B). In addition, when the special lottery result is a big hit, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, the left ear outer frame. It is preferable that the movable body first surface 7460 faces the front and stops (third state) as shown in FIGS. 550(B) and 550(E). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is a loss, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, the left ear outer frame It is preferable that the second surface 7470 of the movable body is stopped facing the front (fourth state). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

FIGS. 551(A) to 552(B) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 547(A) to 547(E). 551(A) and 551(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 551(C) and 551(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 552(A) and 552(B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 551(A), 551(C), and 552(A) show a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The state (first state) in the standby position is shown. 551(B), 551(D), and 552(B) show the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The rotating state (second state) is shown.

In this embodiment, the central portion of the door frame top unit 570 is hollowed out in the left-right direction, and can be visually recognized as a U-shape when viewed from the right side. A right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are located at the lower part of the door frame top unit 570 hollowed out in the horizontal direction. are provided with a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450, respectively.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are positioned in the standby state (first state) as shown in FIGS. The frame movable body first surface 7310 and the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 are positioned to face each other.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have a shape obtained by vertically inverting a bottomed cylindrical shape in which a part of the cylindrical side surface is cut. 551(A), 551(C), and 552(A), in the standby state (first state), in front of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 , the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are positioned facing forward, and the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are positioned facing forward. It is configured to be invisible when viewed from the front. On the other hand, in the first state, when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are viewed obliquely from below, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame are positioned inside. It is possible to visually recognize the lower part of each movable body 7400 .

In the lower part of the door frame top unit 570 , a right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 . Further, a left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 . The right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit can emit light obliquely upward and forward. As a result, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, which are positioned obliquely forward and upward, can be brought into a predetermined light emitting state. It is possible.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 548(A) to 549(B). In addition, when the special lottery result is a big hit, as shown in FIGS. It is preferable that the movable body first surface 7410 is in a stopped state (third state) facing the front. On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a loss, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 should face the front and stop (fourth state). . On the other hand, for the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the second surface 7370 of the right ear outer frame movable body and the left ear outer frame movable body 7370 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7370 are used regardless of whether the special lottery result is a big hit or a loss. It is preferable that the second surface 7470 of the movable body faces the player side. A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

Figures 553(A) to 553(D) and Figures 554(A) to 554(B) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to Figures 523(A) to 523(E). there is 553(A) and 553(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 553(C) and 553(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 554(A) and 554(B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. Figures 553(A), 553(C), and 554(A) show a state (first state) in which a plurality of movable frame bodies are housed in the standby position. FIGS. 553(B), 553(D), and 554(B) show the state (second state) in which the plurality of movable frame bodies have moved to the movement positions.

In the embodiments described below, instead of the door frame top unit 570, a door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 is provided, and a door frame side unit right arm portion 7600, a door frame side unit left arm portion 7650, and a curtain board bottom unit are provided. A right leg movable body 7700 and a curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 are provided.

The door frame top unit face decoration part 7500 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape imitating a two-member box with a lid, and the right side and left side thereof form the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3, respectively. It is provided so as to overlap the right side and left side of the door frame base unit 100 in a front view. In addition, the upper surface of the door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 is always positioned above the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit face decoration part 7500 consists of a door frame top unit face movable body 7510 corresponding to a lid box to be put on the top of a box composed of two members with a lid, and a lid in a box composed of two members with a lid. and a door frame top unit face lower part 7520 corresponding to the body box on which the door frame is covered.

The door frame top unit face upper movable body 7510 has a lid box shape without a rear side part, is provided so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top unit face lower part 7520, and is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is installed so as to be vertically movable by a drive mechanism. In addition, on the front side of the door frame top unit face movable body 7510, the right eye decoration of the door frame top unit, which has a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front and has a shape imitating the eyes of an animal robot, is provided. A portion 7512 and a door frame top unit left eye decoration portion 7514 are provided. The door frame top unit facial movable body 7510 is provided with a right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body 7200 imitating animal ears in the same manner as the door frame top unit 570 . Also in this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are configured to be vertically movable.

The door frame top unit face lower part 7520 has a box-like shape with a concave portion capable of accommodating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and is similar to the door frame top unit 570. 3 is provided in a fixed state. Further, the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 includes a door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 and a door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 .

The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is provided so as to be embedded in the door frame top unit face lower face 7520 near the center in the left-right direction of the front side of the door frame top unit face lower face 7520 . The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, but has a box shape with an open bottom like a sliding door of a chest of drawers turned upside down. The door frame top unit face under nose movable body 7522 is movable in the front-rear direction. The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is a frame movable body imitating the nose and mouth of an animal robot.

The door-frame top unit under-the-face movable body 7522 is provided so as to be covered with the front-side side portion of the door-frame top unit upper-the-face movable body 7510 . Therefore, in the state (first state) covered by the front side surface portion of the door-frame top unit upper-face movable body 7510, the lower-nose-face movable body 7522 of the door-frame top unit cannot be visually recognized. In addition, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 cannot move forward.

When the door-frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 moves upward and enters the second state, the door-frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 provided to be embedded in the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 is changed. The front side surface becomes visible from the front, and the door frame top unit face under nose movable body 7522 becomes movable forward.

The door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 is provided near the center in the left-right direction on the front side of the bottom face portion of the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 . The door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 is shaped like a circular cylinder cut into a fan shape, and as shown in FIGS. It is provided so that the side forming the central angle is located on the right side. The door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 can rotate within a predetermined angle range with the side forming the central angle of the sector as the rotation axis. Further, the door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 does not have a curved surface located on the near side. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 553(B) and 554(B), when the door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 is rotated about 35 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right side, The inside is configured to be visible.

The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 changes from a state (first state) provided so as to be embedded in the door frame top unit face lower portion 7520 to a state (second state) moved forward, The door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 is rotated about 35 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right side (first state) from the state (first state) stored in the door frame top unit face lower portion 7520 (first state). 2 state), it is possible to decoratively express the state of an animal robot with its mouth open.

The door frame side unit right arm portion 7600 and the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650 are provided below the door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 so as to protrude forward from the front surfaces of both the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100 . ing.

The door frame side unit right arm portion 7600 is composed of a door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 , a door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 , and a door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 .

The door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The door frame side unit right arm case part 7610 has a box shape with a space inside, and the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7630 are movable inside. is. The thickness of the right arm case portion 7610 of the door frame side unit is about several millimeters, and the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 that move inside can be visually recognized.

The door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is formed in a pipe shape from flexible synthetic resin. The door frame side unit right upper arm part 7620 has a length of about 50 cm. It can be rolled up and down. FIGS. 553(A) and 554(A) show a state (first state) in which the right upper arm portion 7620 of the door frame side unit is wound up by a reel-shaped driving mechanism (not shown).

The door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 is formed of two members in the shape of the letter L when viewed from the side and a cylindrical member imitating a shaft for locking them, imitating a manipulator of a robot. It has a shape. The end of the right upper arm portion 7620 of the door frame side unit is attached to this cylindrical member, and the upper arm portion 7620 of the right arm of the door frame side unit is wound up by the reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown). In the first state), the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 is located at the upper part inside the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 .

By rotating a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) in a direction opposite to the winding up direction, the door-frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is lowered in the door-frame side unit right arm case portion 7610, whereby the door frame side unit right arm The lower arm portion 7630 is positioned at the lower portion in the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 due to its own weight. FIG. 553(B) shows a state (second state) in which the door-frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 is positioned at the lower portion within the door-frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 . Note that, in the second state, the right upper arm portion 7620 of the door frame side unit, which has been invisible until then, becomes visible.

The door-frame side unit left arm portion 7650 has the same structure and function as the door-frame side unit right arm portion 7600 and is bilaterally symmetrical. Specifically, the door frame side unit left arm case portion 7660 has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610, and the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670 has the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion. The door frame side unit left lower arm portion 7680 has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right lower arm portion 7630 . Therefore, detailed description of each member constituting the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650 is omitted.

As for the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650, similarly to the door frame side unit right arm portion 7600, the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 is wound up by a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) (first state). By rotating the reel-shaped drive mechanism in a direction opposite to the winding direction, it is possible to take a state (second state) positioned at the lower portion. For example, FIGS. 553(B) and 554(B) show a state (second state) in which the left lower arm portion 7680 of the door frame side unit is positioned at the bottom. Note that, in the second state, the left upper arm portion 7670 of the door frame side unit, which was invisible until then, becomes visible.

The whole or part of the outside (left side in front view) of the door frame side unit right arm case part 7610 and the whole or part of the outside (right side in front view) of the door frame side unit left arm case part 7660 are made of opaque synthetic resin. Alternatively, it may be constructed such that a colored and opaque seal or the like is attached after being formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The entire inside (right side in front view) of the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 and the entire inside (left side in front view) of the door frame side unit left arm case portion 7660 are preferably made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

With this configuration, the door frame side unit right upper arm portion 7620, the door frame side unit right lower arm portion 7630, the door frame side unit left upper arm portion 7670, and the door frame side unit left lower arm portion 7680 move. can be visually recognized by the left and right players, and only the players who are playing the pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the game without letting the other players know about the action. In addition, as will be described later, when these movable frame bodies are operated for the purpose of suggesting a predetermined degree of expectation, even if the special lottery results are lost after these movable frame bodies are operated, other It becomes difficult for other players to visually recognize the player, and it becomes difficult for other players to feel embarrassed.

The curtain plate member 50 has a curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 on the left side in front view, and a curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 on the right side in front view. The curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 are in the standby position (first state) as shown in FIGS. They are located below the handle unit 300 respectively.

The curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 is composed of a curtain plate bottom unit right leg shank portion 7710 and a curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip portion 7720 . The shape of the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shank portion 7710 is cylindrical. In addition, the right foot part 7720 of the curtain plate bottom unit has a cuboid shape that imitates the shape of the foot, and has two circular recesses in the part that corresponds to the sole of the foot. A curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip portion 7720 is attached to the front side surface of the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shin portion 7710 . Therefore, the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shank portion 7710 and the curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip portion 7720 operate integrally.

A drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is provided in the lower portion of the outer frame 2, and the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shank portion 7710 can be moved in the front-rear direction. Further, the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shin portion 7710 can be rotated by a predetermined angle around the longitudinal direction of the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shin portion 7710 .

For example, the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shank portion 7710 is moved forward by a predetermined distance from the standby position (first state) shown in FIGS. It may be configured to operate in a stopped state (second state) by rotating it clockwise by 90 degrees. FIGS. 553(B) and 554(B) show the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shank portion 7710 in the stopped state (second state) in this way.

The curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 has a bilaterally symmetrical structure and function equivalent to those of the curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 . Specifically, the panel bottom unit left leg shin portion 7760 has the same structure and function as the panel bottom unit right leg shin portion 7710, and the panel bottom unit left leg tip portion 7770 has the panel bottom unit right leg. It has the same structure and function as tip 7720 . Therefore, a detailed description of each member constituting the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 will be omitted.

By providing the frame movable body under the game machine in this way, the movement of the frame movable body is not visually recognized by the player as in the conventional art, but is performed by a part of the player's body such as an arm. By the contact of the movable frame body, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented perceptual experience of recognizing that the movable frame body has moved.

With reference to FIGS. 553 and 554, an embodiment in which a plurality of frame movable bodies are provided in the pachinko machine 1 and they operate has been described. Specifically, the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522, and the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524. , door frame side unit right upper arm 7620, door frame side unit right lower arm 7630, door frame side unit left upper arm 7670, door frame side unit left lower arm 7680, curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700, curtain plate 553(A), 553(C), and 554(A) from the standby position (first state) shown in FIGS. ), and changes to the state (second state) at the movement position shown in FIGS. 553(D) and 554(B). Further, each frame movable body can take the first state and the second state by controlling a drive means (not shown) provided corresponding to each frame movable body by the peripheral control board 1510. .

Further, each frame movable body may be provided with a light emitting means controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 so that the normal light emitting state and the specific light emitting state described above can be established.

524(A) to 525(B), the production patterns shown in FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B), or the production patterns modified from these production patterns. It may be configured to be applied to a pattern to operate or emit light.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are provided in the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510 . The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear in the state (first state) housed in the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 after the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is positioned upward in the second state. The movable frame body 7200 may be configured to protrude upward (second state). Also, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B) and their modification examples. Specifically, in each time chart, first, the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 is changed from the first state to the second state, and the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear The movable frame body 7200 may be configured to change from the first state to the second state.

Alternatively, after the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 is in the second state located upward, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body is stored in the door frame top unit lower face 7520 (first state). 7522 may be configured to protrude forward (second state). Also, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B) and their modification examples. Specifically, in each time chart, first, the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 is changed from the first state to the second state, and the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 may be configured to transition from the first state to the second state.

In addition, after the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is changed from the first state to the second state, the door frame top unit face lower mouth mouth movable body 7524 is configured to be changed from the first state to the second state. good too. Also, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B) and their modification examples.

Alternatively, after the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is changed from the first state to the second state, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is changed from the first state to the second state. good too. Also, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B) and their modification examples.

FIGS. 555(A) to 555(K) show modifications of the display mode of the simulated image of the movable frame applicable to the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B). It is a thing. It should be noted that FIG. 555(A) collectively expresses each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B).

FIG. 555(B) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is started at timing t4, and the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is completed at timing t6. After that, at timing t7, the upward movement of the movable frame body is started.

By constructing such an action/display pattern to be executable as an effect, the display of the simulated image of the movable frame becomes an advance notice of the action of the movable frame. In addition, the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulated image enables the player to recognize how the movable frame body operates. The motion of the movable body can be visually recognized from the start of the motion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the movement of the frame movable body. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from inadvertently touching the movable frame body from injuring his or her fingers. In addition, it is possible to indicate that a player who has placed a light load or the like on the frame movable body should move them to another position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the luggage falls and the player is injured, or the driving section for moving the frame movable body is subjected to a load.

FIG. 555(C) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this production pattern, the rising motion of the movable frame body is completed at timing t9, then the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image is started at timing t10, and the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image is started at timing t12. is completed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the movement of the frame movable body to the raised position (moving position). Therefore, if the player does not notice the movement of the frame movable body, such a player will suddenly be able to see the frame movable body that has completed the movement to the raised position. can be given to people. Further, since the simulated image of the movable frame is displayed after moving to the raised position, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the movable frame that has moved. Also, the player can know how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 555(D) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this production pattern, the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulated image is started at timing t6, the upward motion of the movable frame body is then started at timing t7, and the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulated image is started at timing t8. is completed, and the upward movement of the movable frame body is completed at timing t9.

By adopting such a configuration, the display of the simulated image of the movable frame serves as an advance notice of the movement of the movable frame. The player can be made to recognize how the frame movable body operates. The movement of the frame movable body can be visually recognized from the start of movement. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the movement of the frame movable body. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player carelessly touching the frame movable body injures his finger or the like.

FIG. 555(E) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this production pattern, at timing t7, the moving frame movable body starts to move upward, then at timing t8 dynamic display of the movable frame simulated image starts, at timing t9 the moving frame moving body moves upward, and At timing t10, dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame is completed.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can be surprised when the movable frame body starts to move without realizing it. Also, the player can be notified that the frame movable body has started to move.

FIG. 555(F) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed from timing t3 to timing t7 (4 seconds). On the other hand, the upward movement of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (two seconds). The simulated image of the movable frame is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the movable frame.

With such a configuration, the player can recognize in detail how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 555(G) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed from timing t5 to timing t9 (4 seconds). On the other hand, the upward movement of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (two seconds). The simulated image of the movable frame is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the movable frame.

With such a configuration, the player can recognize in detail how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 555(H) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, after the movable frame is raised from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds), dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame is performed from timing t9 to timing t13 (4 seconds). will be The simulated image of the movable frame is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the movable frame.

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize in detail how the frame movable body has moved.

FIG. 555(I) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulation image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, after the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image is performed from timing t5 to timing t7 (2 seconds), the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image is performed again from timing t7 to timing t9. done. On the other hand, the upward movement of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (two seconds). The dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image may be performed three times or more. For example, the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image may be performed from timing t3 to timing t5.

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize how the movable frame moves.

FIG. 555(J) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, after the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds), the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image is performed again from timing t9 to timing t11. done. On the other hand, the upward movement of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (two seconds). The dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image may be performed three times or more. For example, the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image may be performed from timing t11 to timing t13.

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize how the movable frame body has moved.

FIG. 555(K) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, a total of three times from timing t4 to timing t5, from timing t5 to timing t6, and from timing t6 to timing t7, which are the timings before the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, are performed. At twice the speed of the frame movable body, the simulated image of the movable frame is changed from the display mode imitating the first state to the display mode imitating the second state. Such display may be performed twice in total from timing t5 to timing t6 and from timing t6 to timing t7, or may be performed only once from timing t6 to timing t7.

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize how the movable frame moves in a short period of time. In addition, since the simulated image of the movable frame is displayed quickly, the player's eyes become accustomed to the movement of the actual movable frame, allowing the player to fully enjoy the movement of the actual movable frame. becomes possible. Further, by performing the display a plurality of times, it is possible to make the player more aware of the action mode.

Each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 555(A) to 555(K) may be configured to be executed in response to a predetermined situation in the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In this case, the degree of expectation for the big win and the appearance frequency thereof may be different for each production pattern. For example, when a predetermined ready-to-win effect occurs, one of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 555(A) to 555(K) is selected and executed. good. Also, the production pattern explained with reference to FIG. 555(A) has the highest appearance frequency, and the appearance frequency gradually decreases with the production patterns explained with reference to FIGS. 555(B) to 555(K). 555(A) shows the lowest expectation for the big win, and the production pattern explained with reference to FIGS. 555(B) to 555(K) gradually increases the expectation for the big win. The performance pattern to be executed may be selected based on the result of the jackpot lottery so that the . Further, each modified example described below may be similarly configured to be executed with a predetermined degree of expectation and appearance frequency.

By adopting such a configuration, when a performance pattern about the frame movable body different from the usual one appears, the degree of expectation of the player for the big win is not higher than that of the normal frame movable body performance pattern. It is possible to make it feel like.

It should be noted that some of the examples of effects shown in FIGS. 555(A) to 555(K) may be combined and executed as effects. In this case, in the game board side effect display device 1600, it is preferable to combine so as not to display a plurality of simulated frame movable body images at the same time. For example, from timing t4 to timing t7, the production pattern shown in FIG. 555(K) is executed, and from timing t7 to timing t11, the production pattern shown in FIG. 555(J) is executed. It is possible to execute a production pattern that can play both.

Figures 556(A) to 556(E) show modifications of the light emission mode of the light emitting part of the frame movable body that can be applied to the production patterns described with reference to Figures 524(A) to 525(B). is shown. Note that FIG. 556(A) collectively expresses each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B).

FIG. 556(B) shows an effect pattern in which the light-emitting part of the movable frame is turned off at the timing (timing t7) when the movable frame starts to move from the standby position to the moving position. Also, in FIG. 556(C), the light-emitting section of the movable frame is turned off at the timing (timing t5) before the timing (timing t7) when the frame movable body starts to move from the standby position to the moving position. It shows the performance pattern.

In this way, before the movable frame body enters the second state, the light-emitting section of the movable frame body is turned off, and this state is maintained until the operation section is operated or until the effective period of operation ends. By being maintained, it becomes difficult for the player to notice that the frame movable body is moving from the standby position to the moving position. In such a situation, when the player operates the operation unit, the movable frame that has completed the movement to the movement position suddenly emits light from the extinguished state (special light emitting effect state or light emitting effect state). state), it is possible to give the player a big surprise.

FIG. 556(D) shows an effect pattern in which the light emission of the light emitting unit of the movable frame body is suppressed at timing t9 instead of being turned off. The state in which light emission is suppressed may be, for example, light emission with a longer blinking period or a smaller light amount than in the light emission effect state.

In this way, the same effect as in the case of turning off the light can be obtained by setting the state in which light emission is suppressed instead of turning off the light.

FIG. 556(E) shows an effect pattern in which the light-emitting portion of the movable frame body is put into a specific light-emission state instead of being turned off at timing t9. This effect pattern should be selected only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit. At timing t9 when the frame movable body enters the second state, an example of a production pattern in which the light-emitting section of the frame movable body is in the specific light emission production state has been shown. At timing t5, which is the timing before the body starts to move, the light-emitting section of the frame movable body may be brought into a specific light-emitting effect state.

By suddenly changing the state of the light-emitting part of the frame movable body to the specific light-emission presentation state instead of turning off the light, the player can have a great sense of anticipation for the big win.

FIGS. 557(A) to 557(E) show modifications of the display mode of the simulated image of the movable frame applicable to the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B). It is a thing. FIG. 557(A) collectively expresses each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B).

FIG. 557(B) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulated image is started at timing t7, and thereafter, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) are displayed. starts rotating and enters a rotating state (second state).

As described above, the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 move at the same speed as the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 rotate. displayed. Therefore, between timing t7 and timing t9, the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 rotate twice. , the left ear frame movable body 7200 actually starts rotating. It should be noted that the timing for starting the display of the frame movable body simulation image may be earlier. For example, if the display of the simulated image of the movable frame is started at timing t5, an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed in four rotations. Later, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 actually start rotating.

In this way, by displaying the movable-frame-body simulated image before the movable-frame-body starts to operate, the display of the movable-frame-body simulated image serves as an advance notice that the movable-frame-body will operate. . In addition, the dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame allows the player to recognize how the movable frame operates. A player who sees such a simulated image of the movable frame can visually recognize the movement of the movable frame from the start of the movement. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the movement of the frame movable body. In addition, by dynamically displaying simulated images of the movable frame before the movable frame starts to move, the player can certainly recognize how the movable frame moves. becomes. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from inadvertently touching the movable frame body from injuring his finger or the like. In addition, it is possible to indicate that a player who has placed a light load or the like on the frame movable body should move them to another position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the luggage falls and the player is injured, or the driving section for moving the frame movable body is subjected to a load.

FIG. 557(C) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this production pattern, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) start rotating and enter the rotating state (second state). At t11, the dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame is started.

In this way, by displaying the movable frame simulated image after the movable frame starts to move, the player can notice that the movable frame has changed to the rotating state (second state). It becomes possible to make it difficult to break. Therefore, if the player does not notice the change in the state of the movable frame, the player suddenly sees the movable frame in a rotating state, which can bring a great surprise to the player. becomes.

FIG. 557(D) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is started at timing t7. From timing t7 to timing t9, dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame is performed at high speed (two rotations per second). After that, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) start rotating and enter the rotating state (second state).

In this manner, before the movable frame starts to operate, the simulated image of the movable frame is rotated and displayed at a faster speed (twice the speed) than the actual movable frame. changes to the rotating state (second state), it is possible to get used to the operation mode.

FIG. 557(E) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is started at timing t5. From timing t5 to timing t9, dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame is performed at a low speed (half rotation per second). After that, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) start rotating and enter the rotating state (second state).

In this manner, before the movable frame body starts to operate, the simulated image of the movable frame body is rotated and displayed at a slower speed (half the speed) than the actual movable frame body. It is possible for the player who feels that the motion mode is too fast when the body changes to the rotating state (second state) to know the motion mode of the frame movable body.

555(B) to 555(E) are described with reference to FIGS. 538 to 540, etc., and modifications of these embodiments. It may be configured to be executable as an effect pattern by appropriately applying it to the inner frame movable body in .

557(B) to 557(E) are described with reference to FIGS. 547 to 549, etc., and modifications of these embodiments. may be applied to either one of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body, or may be applied to both in the same manner so as to be executable as a production pattern.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 539 and 540, and FIGS. 548 and 549, respectively, the first movable frame body is changed from the first state to the second state, and then this state is maintained for a certain period of time. It is configured to change the second frame movable body from the first state to the second state later. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 539 and 540, it is configured to take a predetermined time even when changing the first movable frame body from the first state to the second state.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the mode in which the movable frame body changes state.

524 and 525, 533 and 534, 539 and 540, and 548 and 549, respectively, the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. At the same timing as the timing, the simulated image of the movable frame is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the same manner as the change of the real movable frame. C), Fig. 555(E), Fig. 555(H), Fig. 557(C), at the timing before starting the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image as described above, the real frame The movable body may be configured to start an action to change from the first state to the second state or to change from the first state to the second state.

By adopting such a configuration, a player who sees the dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame can easily find the movable frame in motion without noticing that the real movable frame is in motion. It becomes possible to

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534, FIGS. 539 and 540, and FIGS. 548 and 549, respectively, when the player operates the operating unit during the valid operation period, the result of the special lottery Depending on the condition, the state of the movable frame may change from the first state to the second state, or the second state may change to either the third state or the fourth state. .

With such a configuration, the player can determine the position of the operation unit and the position of the movable frame body whose state may change, and then operate the movable frame body while keeping his/her eyes aligned with the movable frame body. It is possible for the player to operate the operation part at a desired timing without looking at the part. As a result, it is possible to visually confirm whether or not the state of the movable frame body changes, and if so, to what state the state of the movable frame body changes.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534, FIGS. 539 and 540, and FIGS. However, in addition to the above example, a production pattern for displaying a special operation instruction image that can be displayed only when the result of the special lottery is a big win may be configured to be executable. For example, as the operation instruction image, the image of the movable frame may be displayed simultaneously with the image of the operation unit.

With such a configuration, when the player visually recognizes the special operation instruction image, the player can recognize that the result of the special lottery is a big win and that the movable frame body will always operate when the operation section is operated. As a result, it is possible to operate the operation section while keeping the line of sight on the frame movable body, and to fully enjoy the movement of the frame movable body.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525, FIGS. 533 and 534, FIGS. 539 and 540, and FIGS. A light-emitting part that can irradiate light is provided separately from the movable frame, and after the movable frame changes its state, it is turned off at the same timing as the operation effective period starts, and the operation to the operation part is performed. 556(D) and 556(E). , it is not always necessary to turn off the light, and it may be configured to be in a light emitting state distinguishable from the normal light emitting state. For example, only the outer frame movable body is turned off, the inner frame movable body is turned into a specific light emission state, or the right frame movable body is turned off and the left frame movable body is turned into a specific light emission state, so that a big hit It may be configured to notify the occurrence of Alternatively, all the frame movable bodies are turned off until the operation effective period occurs, and the inner frame movable body is put into a lighting effect state in response to the occurrence of the operation effective period to notify that the operation effective period has occurred, and then the operation unit. According to the operation to or the end of the operation valid period, the light emitting state of all the frame side movable bodies may be set to the light emitting state according to the result of the special lottery.

In this way, by changing the light emission state of the movable frame body to a different state according to the change in the state of the movable frame body, it becomes easier to perceive that the movable frame body has moved by the change in the light emission mode. In addition, if at least a part of the movable frame is illuminated, the player is less likely to be injured when the movable frame moves compared to when the movable frame is turned off. be

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525, FIGS. 533 and 534, FIGS. 539 and 540, and FIGS. 555 (B ), FIG. 555(D), FIG. 555(F), FIG. 555(G), FIG. 555(I), FIG. 555(K), FIG. 557(B), FIG. As described above with reference, at the timing prior to the timing at which the actual movable frame body starts to change from the first state to the second state or changes from the first state to the second state, , dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame may be started.

By adopting such a configuration, since the movable frame can be visually recognized in a state in which the motion of the movable frame is known in advance, every move of the movable frame can be overlooked. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation. Such a configuration is particularly effective when the frame movable body moves intricately as in the time charts shown in FIGS. 539 and 540, or FIGS.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525, and FIGS. 539 and 540, respectively, the movable frame body changes from the first state to the second state in the same time (two seconds). The simulated image is configured to be displayed dynamically at the same speed as the changing mode of the actual movable frame body, but as described above with reference to FIG. The speed at which the display mode simulating the first state changes to the display mode simulating the second state may be faster than the speed at which the movable frame body changes from the first state to the second state.

In this way, the display mode in which the simulated image of the movable frame simulates the first state in a time (one second) shorter than the time (two seconds) required for the movable frame body to change from the first state to the second state. By setting the display mode to a state simulating the second state, the eyes get accustomed to the quick movement of the simulated image of the movable frame body, so that the real movable frame body changes from the first state to the second state. In some cases, it becomes possible to fully enjoy the movement.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534, and FIGS. 548 and 549, respectively, the frame movable body is configured to rotate once per second in the second state. As described above with reference, before the movable frame enters the second state, the movable frame simulated image may be dynamically displayed so as to rotate at a faster speed than the movable frame simulated image. For example, after the movable frame simulated image is displayed so as to rotate once or multiple times at a speed of one rotation in 0.5 seconds, the movable frame may be placed in the second state.

In this manner, dynamic display is performed in which the simulated image of the movable frame rotates once in a time (0.5 seconds) shorter than the time required for the movable frame to rotate once (1 second). By doing so, the eyes become accustomed to the quick movement of the simulated image of the movable frame, so that it is possible to fully enjoy the rotational movement of the real movable frame in the second state.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525, and FIGS. 539 and 540, respectively, the movable frame body changes from the first state to the second state in the same time (two seconds). The simulated image is configured to be dynamically displayed at the same speed as the changing mode of the real frame movable body, but see FIGS. As described above, the speed at which the movable frame simulated image changes from the display state simulating the first state to the display state simulating the second state is changed from the first state to the second state. It may be slower than the changing speed.

In this way, the movable frame simulated image is displayed in the first state in a longer time (4 seconds) than the time (2 seconds) required for the movable frame body to change from the first state to the second state. By configuring the display mode so as to change from the mode to the display mode of the state simulating the second state, even if the player feels that the movement of the movable frame is too fast for the player, the simulated image of the movable frame can be viewed. By being there, the player can recognize the action mode.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534, and FIGS. 548 and 549, respectively, the frame movable body is configured to rotate once per second in the second state. As described above with reference, before the movable frame body enters the second state, the movable frame simulated image may be dynamically displayed in a mode rotating at a slower speed than that. For example, after the movable frame simulated image is displayed so as to rotate once or multiple times at a speed of one rotation in 0.5 seconds, the movable frame may be placed in the second state.
In this manner, dynamic display is performed in which the simulated image of the movable frame rotates once over a period of time (two seconds) longer than the time required for one rotation of the movable frame (one second). As a result, even if the player feels that the actual rotating motion of the frame movable body in the second state is too fast for the player, the player recognizes the motion mode by looking at the simulated image of the movable frame body. becomes possible.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525, and FIGS. 539 and 540, respectively, the simulated image of the movable frame is displayed in the same manner as the actual state of the movable frame is changed from the first state to the second state. However, it is configured so that the display dynamically changing from the image showing the state simulating the first state to the image showing the state simulating the second state is performed only once. As described with reference to FIGS. 555(J) and 555(K), the frame movable body simulation image may be displayed multiple times.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534, and FIGS. 548 and 549, respectively, the movable frame body simulated image is displayed at the same timing as when the movable frame body changes from the first state to the second state. is started, and while the actual movable frame body continues in the second state (rotating state), the simulated image of the movable frame body is dynamically rotated and displayed in the same manner as the actual movable frame body changes. It is configured. Therefore, the simulated image of the movable frame body is repeatedly rotated and displayed in a loop.

In this way, the manner in which the state of the movable frame changes is dynamically displayed a plurality of times as a simulated image of the movable frame. To suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player misses the change of a movable frame body from a first state to a second state by repeatedly and dynamically displaying simulated images of the movable frame body in a manner of periodically changing the frame movable body. becomes possible.

FIGS. 558(A) to 559(B) show modifications of the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B). In this embodiment, at the start of the valid operation period (timing t9), the movable frame body starts to change from the standby position (first state) to the completed movement state (second state). the simulated image of the movable frame is not displayed; the precursor display is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 before the operation effective period occurs; This is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B) in that the post-operation display is performed when the effective period of operation ends (timing t18) without being performed. Regarding points other than these (for example, the lighting effect state of the frame movable body, the stop timing of the decorative pattern, etc.), the effect mode is basically common, so the description of the part where the effect mode is common will be omitted. , the different parts mentioned above will be mainly described below.

FIG. 558(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 558(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 559(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 559(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 558(A) to 559(B), the game board side effect display device 1600 starts a sign display, which is a display suggesting that an operation valid period will occur, at timing t7. . As the precursor display, the characters "Push?" At timing t9, the valid operation period starts, and an image of characters "Push!!" is displayed as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit is in the accepting state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t14) or when the effective period of operation expires without being operated (timing t18). Display characters as images. The post-operation display continues for two seconds and then ends (timing t16 or timing t20).

On the other hand, at timing t9, the movable frame body is turned off and starts to move from the standby position (first state), and at timing t11, the movement is completed (second state). Become.

In this way, before or during the movement of the movable frame body, a display (an indication display or an operation instruction display) that distracts the player's attention from the movable frame body is provided, thereby allowing the player to read the operation section. When the operation is performed, the player's line of sight is guided to the movable frame by changing the state of the movable frame from the extinguished state to the specific luminous effect state or the normal luminous effect state. Since the player feels as if the frame movable body has changed from the first state to the second state without realizing it, it is possible to give the player a great surprise. Further, even if it takes a long time to change the state of the movable frame from the first state to the second state, the player can be assured that the movable frame will be in the second state by the precursor display or the operation instruction display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a person feels irritated. In addition, since it is possible to move the frame movable body slowly, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a player carelessly touching the frame movable body is injured.

FIGS. 560(A) to 561(B) show modifications of the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 558(A) to 559(B). In this embodiment, the state in which the frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) is changed to the timing (t14) when the operation section is operated or the timing (timing t9) when the effective period of operation ends (timing t9). , the point where the change to the state (second state) where the movement is completed starts, and the point that the frame movable body changes to the second state is only when the special lottery result is a big win. This is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 559(B). Regarding points other than these (for example, the lighting effect state of the frame movable body, the stop timing of the decorative pattern, etc.), the effect mode is basically common, so the description of the part where the effect mode is common will be omitted. , the different parts mentioned above will be mainly described below.

FIG. 560(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the acceptance of operation for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 560(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 561(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 561(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period in which operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In the production patterns shown in FIGS. 560(A) and 560(B), the operation valid period occurs, and the player operates the operation unit while the operation instruction is being displayed (timing t14). , When the special lottery result is a big hit, the movable frame moves from the standby position (first state) to the completed movement (second state), and displays after the operation ( Timing t14 to timing t16), if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the state in which the frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) remains unchanged, and only the display after the operation is performed. there is

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 561(A) and 561(B), when the operation valid period ends (t18) and the special lottery result is a big hit, the frame movable body is in the standby position. While moving from (first state) to the state where movement is completed (second state), display after operation is performed (timing t18 to timing t20), and if the special lottery result is a loss, the movable frame body is in the standby position (first state), and only the post-operation display is performed.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 560A and 561A, at timing t22, the state in which the frame movable body is completely moved (second state) to the state in which it is in the standby position (first state). Movement is started, and movement to the standby position is completed at timing t24.

In this way, even after the player has operated the operation unit, by performing the post-operation display instead of the operation instruction display, the game can be played from the movable frame body that changes the state from the first state to the second state. It is possible to divert a person's consciousness. By terminating the post-operation display at the timing when the change to the second state of the frame movable body is completed, the player finally notices that the frame movable body is in the second state. It is possible to give surprises. In addition, even if it takes a long time to change the state of the movable frame from the first state to the second state, the player is irritated by the post-operation display that the movable frame is in the second state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user feels an emotion. In addition, since it is possible to move the frame movable body slowly, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a player carelessly touching the frame movable body is injured.

The timing of changing the frame movable body from the light-out state to the specific light emitting state is set to be the timing (timing t16) when the frame movable body completes the change from the first state to the second state. may By adopting such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice changes in the state of the frame movable body.

FIGS. 562(A) to 563(B) show modifications of the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B). In the present embodiment, the state in which the inner frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) is changed to the state in which movement is completed (second state) in accordance with the start of the operation valid period (timing t7). The starting point, the point at which the simulated image of the movable frame is not displayed, the point at which the precursor display is performed from timing t5 to timing t7 before the operation valid period occurs, the point at which the operation unit is operated (timing t11) or the operation 539(A) to 540(B) is different from the production pattern described with reference to FIGS. Regarding points other than these (for example, the lighting effect state of the frame movable body, the stop timing of the decorative pattern, etc.), the effect mode is basically common, so the description of the part where the effect mode is common will be omitted. , the different parts mentioned above will be mainly described below.

FIG. 562(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 562(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operating unit during the period when the acceptance of operations on the operating unit is valid. there is FIG. 563(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 563(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 562(A) to 563(B), the game board-side effect display device 1600 starts a precursor display, which is a display suggesting that an operation valid period will occur, from timing t5. . As a precursor display, the text "Push?" At timing t7, the valid operation period starts, and an image of characters "PUSH!!" is displayed as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit is in the accepting state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the effective period of operation expires without being operated (timing t16). Display characters as images. The post-operation display continues for two seconds and then ends (timing t13 or timing t18).

On the other hand, at timing t7, the inner frame movable body is turned off and starts to move from the standby position (first state), and at timing t9, the movement is completed (second state). becomes.

In the production patterns shown in FIGS. 562(A) and 562(B), the operation effective period occurs, and the player operates the operation unit while the operation instruction display is being performed (timing t11). If the special lottery result is a big hit, the outer frame movable body moves from the standby position (first state) to the completed state (second state), and displays after the operation. (Timing t11 to timing t13), when the special lottery result is a loss, the effect pattern in which only the display after the operation is performed without changing from the state (first state) where the outer frame movable body is in the standby position is displayed. It is

In the production patterns shown in FIGS. 563(A) and 563(B), when the operation effective period ends (t16) and the special lottery result is a big hit, the outer frame movable body is at the standby position. While moving from the state (first state) to the state where the movement is completed (second state), a post-operation display is performed (timing t16 to timing t18), and if the special lottery result is a loss, the frame is movable. A production pattern is shown in which only the post-operation display is performed without changing from the state where the body is in the standby position (first state).

After that, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 562(A) and 563(A), the outer frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t26 to timing t28. Further, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B), the inner frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t30 to timing t32, and a series of frame movable bodies operation ends.

In this way, before or during the movement of the inner frame movable body, a display (premonitory display or operation instruction display) that distracts the player from the frame movable body is performed, thereby increasing the player's awareness. The focus will be on the game board side effect display device 1600 . In addition, even during the movement of the outer frame movable body after the player has operated the operation section, the post-operation display is performed in place of the operation instruction display that has been performed up to that point, so that the player's awareness is improved. The player continues to be directed to the game board side effect display device 1600 . By adopting such a configuration, the player feels as if both the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body have changed from the first state to the second state without realizing it, which greatly surprises the player. be able to give. In addition, even if it takes time to change the state of the inner frame movable body or the outer frame movable body from the first state to the second state, the inner frame movable body can be moved by the precursor display, the operation instruction display, and the post-operation display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels irritated by the fact that the body or the outer frame movable body is in the second state. In addition, since it is possible to move the frame movable body slowly, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a player carelessly touching the frame movable body is injured.

It should be noted that the timing of changing the frame movable body from the extinguished state to the specific light emitting state is performed at the timing (timing t13 or timing t18) when the outer frame movable body completes the change from the first state to the second state. It may be configured as By adopting such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice changes in the state of the frame movable body.

FIGS. 564(A) to 565(B) show modifications of the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B). In this embodiment, when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the effective period of operation ends (timing t16), the state where the inner frame movable body is at the standby position (first state) is changed. , start to change to the state (second state) where the movement is completed, and then the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, the point where the simulated image of the movable frame is not displayed, and the valid operation period is Precursor display is performed from timing t5 to timing t7 before occurrence, and post-operation display when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the effective period of operation ends without being operated (timing t16). 539(A) to 540(B) is different from the production pattern described with reference to FIGS. Regarding points other than these (for example, the lighting effect state of the frame movable body, the stop timing of the decorative pattern, etc.), the effect mode is basically common, so the description of the part where the effect mode is common will be omitted. , the different parts mentioned above will be mainly described below.

FIG. 564(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the acceptance of operation for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 564(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 565(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 565(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 564(A) to 565(B), the game board-side effect display device 1600 starts a precursor display, which is a display suggesting that an operation valid period will occur, from timing t5. . As a precursor display, the text "Push?" At timing t7, the valid operation period starts, and an image of characters "PUSH!!" is displayed as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit is in the accepting state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the effective period of operation expires without being operated (timing t16). Display characters as images. The post-operation display continues for two seconds and then ends (timing t13 or timing t18).

In the production patterns shown in FIGS. 564(A) and 564(B), an operation valid period occurs, and the player operates the operation unit while an operation instruction is being displayed (timing t11). , When the special lottery result is a big hit, the inner frame movable body changes from the state (first state) in the standby position to the state (second state) in which the movement is completed (timing t11 to timing t13). , the outer frame movable body changes from the state (first state) in the standby position to the state (second state) in which the movement is completed (timing t15 to timing t17), and when the special lottery result is a loss, An effect pattern is shown that does not change from the state (first state) in which the outer frame movable body is at the standby position.

In the production patterns shown in FIGS. 565(A) and 565(B), when the operation effective period ends (t16) and the special lottery result is a big hit, the inner frame movable body is at the standby position. After changing from the state (first state) to the state in which the movement is completed (second state) (timings t16 to t18), the movement is completed from the state (first state) in which the outer frame movable body is at the standby position. When the state (second state) changes (timing t20 to timing t22) and the result of the special lottery is a loss, there is an effect pattern that does not change from the state (first state) where the outer frame movable body is at the standby position. It is shown.

After that, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 564(A) and 565(A), the outer frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t26 to timing t28. Further, in the production pattern shown in FIG. 564 (A) and FIG. 565 (B), the inner frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t30 to timing t32, and a series of frame movable bodies operation ends.

In this way, when the player operates the operation section, the inner frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and then the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. By changing the state, the player slowly observes the manner in which the frame movable body changes the state, and from the player's point of view, the degree of excitement gradually increases over time.

562(A) to 563(B) and the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 564(A) to 565(B) are executed according to the game state. may be configured.

For example, when the average variation time of the decorative pattern is relatively long normal game state (non-probability variation, non-time saving, non-electric support, etc.), Figure 564 (A) ~ Figure 565 (B) It is preferable to execute the production pattern described with reference to . In this case, the player can thoroughly enjoy the movement of the frame movable body because the effect is performed in a state in which a big win is unlikely to occur.

On the other hand, it is a state that can occur after a big hit occurs once, and the average variation time of decorative symbols is relatively short compared to the normal game state. , during time saving, during electric power support, etc.), it is preferable to configure so as to execute the production pattern described with reference to FIGS. In this case, the time from the operation of the operation part until the frame movable body enters the second state is short, and the transition to the jackpot game state can be performed at a good tempo.

In the normal game state, only the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. ) may be made executable.
Alternatively, in the normal game state, the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 562(A) to 563(B) than the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 564(A) to 565(B). It may be configured to increase the ratio of execution of the effect patterns described with reference.

Also, the timing for executing the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564(A) to 565(B) is configured to be executed at an earlier stage than immediately before the stop display of the decorative pattern is performed. good too. For example, before the decorative pattern forms the ready-to-reach state, the production pattern described with reference to FIGS. When the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, the decorative pattern may form the ready-to-win state. By adopting such a structure, the players who have visually recognized the state in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body operate over time gradually develop an expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big win. can be increased. In addition, it is desirable that the decorative pattern forms the reach state when the outer frame movable body is in the second state (for example, timing t24).

In addition, after executing the production pattern described with reference to FIG. 564(A) to FIG. 562(A) to 563(B) or 564(A) to 565(B) may be executed. good.

In this way, after executing the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 562(A) to 563(B) and the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 564(A) to 565(B) are configured to be executed, 564(A) to 565(B) as an effect pattern for determining whether or not the ready-to-reach state is formed. It may be configured to execute an effect pattern that operates. In this case, the operation invalid period continues as the reception state of the operation unit, and the precursor display, operation instruction display, and post-operation display are naturally not performed. By executing the performance pattern of such a modified mode, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels troublesome to operate the operating part in a state where the expectation of the big win is not so high.

In the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 562(A) to 563(B), an example of displaying the characters "Push?" You may display so that it may move to a position. Also, it is preferable to move the movable frame body away from a certain position. For example, when the operation instruction display is performed in the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600, as a precursor display, from the position directly above or diagonally above the game board side effect display device 1600 It is preferable that the characters "Push?" Further, as a post-operation display, the characters “!!” may move from the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 directly below or obliquely downward from the game board side effect display device 1600 . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further distract the player's attention from the upper movable frame body. As will be described later, when the frame movable body is provided below the game board side effect display device 1600, the precursor display and the post-operation display may be configured to move upward in the opposite manner.

In the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 564(A) to 565(B), an example of displaying the characters "Push?" You may display so that it may move to a position. Also, it is preferable to move the movable frame body closer to a certain position. For example, when the operation instruction display is performed in the central portion of the game board-side effect display device 1600, the characters "PUSH?" It should be configured as follows. Further, as a post-operation display, the characters “!!” may move from the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 to the upper part of the game board side effect display device 1600 . With such a configuration, the player's line of sight can be guided to the frame movable body, and the player can fully view the entire series of changes of the frame movable body.

Further, as the operation instruction display, characters such as "!! PUSH!!" may be displayed as a special operation instruction display that occurs only when the special lottery result is a big win. As a post-operation display, instead of the character "!!", the operation instruction display "Push!!" or the special operation instruction display "!!Push!!" continues to be displayed as it is. may In addition, in response to the special operation instruction display "!!Push!!", the characters "!Push?!" !” may be displayed. In this way, the special characters displayed only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit are continuously displayed from before the effective period of operation until after the operation of the operation part, thereby giving the player a great sense of satisfaction. becomes possible.

Figures 566(A) to 566(D), Figures 567(A) to 567(C), Figures 568(A) to 568(C) refer to Figures 524(A) to 525(B) 10 shows a modification of the effect pattern described above. In these modifications, only one of right ear frame movable body 7100 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as first frame movable body) and left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as second frame movable body) the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body may be moved at different timings, and the first frame movable body is modeled after the first frame movable body. Although the simulated image of the movable frame is displayed, the simulated image of the movable frame simulating the second movable frame is basically not displayed for the second movable frame. is operated, and the timing at which the frame movable body operates is not limited to the timing just before the decorative pattern stops.

566(A) to 566(D), 567(A) to 567(C), and 568(A) to 568(C) show production patterns that are performed during the variation of decorative patterns. It is a pattern, and indicates a state in which a predetermined number of seconds have passed since the start of variation of the decorative design (for example, 10 seconds have passed since the start of variation of the decorative design at timing t0).

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(A), the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from timing t5 to timing t7, and maintains the second state for a predetermined time (8 seconds). After that (timing t7 to timing t15), the second state changes to the first state (timing t15 to timing t17). Further, the simulated image of the movable frame simulating the first movable frame changes from the first state to the second state in accordance with the movement of the first movable frame, and is continuously displayed in the second state for a predetermined time. and changes from the second state to the second state (timing t5 to timing t17). On the other hand, the second frame movable body maintains the first state without moving from the standby position. Also, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body is not displayed.

On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(B), the second frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from timing t5 to timing t7, and after maintaining the second state for a predetermined time (timing t7 to timing t15), the state changes from the second state to the first state (timing t15 to timing t17). In addition, when the second frame movable body operates, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body is not displayed. On the other hand, the first frame movable body maintains the first state without moving from the standby position. Also, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body is not displayed.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(B), in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. Since the image is displayed, the player can easily notice that the first frame movable body has moved. On the other hand, in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(B), even when the second frame movable body is operated, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body is not displayed. , the player hardly notices that the second frame movable body has moved.

When the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body operate, the degree of expectation that the special lottery result corresponding to the changing decorative pattern will be a big hit is determined by the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body. It is preferable to configure such that the effect pattern is selected so as to be higher than when it is not performed. For example, the degree of expectation when the first frame movable body operates and the degree of expectation when the second frame movable body operates may each be 10%. With such a configuration, by displaying the simulated image of the movable frame simulating the first movable frame, the first movable frame is in a state where the eyes are directed toward the first movable frame. A player who notices this will have a sense of expectation for the big win.

On the other hand, in order to notice the movement of the second frame movable body, it is necessary to look away from the game board side effect display device 1600 on which decorative symbols are displayed and look at the second frame movable body. Therefore, if you frequently check whether the second frame movable body is operating or if you accidentally face the direction in which the second frame movable body is provided, the second frame movable body will not operate. You will notice that you are there. In this case, the player feels that he/she has learned by his or her own strength that the degree of expectation for the big win is high, and as part of the effect such that the simulated frame movable body imitating the first frame movable body is displayed, the first frame movable body simulation image is displayed. A greater sense of accomplishment will be felt compared to the case where the one-frame movable body is visually recognized, so to speak.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the frame movable body, and the player's interest, which was conventionally within a predetermined range centered on the game board 5, can be directed outward. It is possible to expand.

In the production patterns shown in FIGS. 566(A) and 566(B), an example is shown in which the degree of expectation when the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body are operated is the same 10%, but FIG. ) may be set higher than the expectation level when the first frame movable body operates in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(A). . For example, the effect pattern may be selected so that the degree of expectation when the second frame movable body operates is 15% and the degree of expectation when the first frame movable body operates is 10%. With such a configuration, the player who notices that the second frame movable body is operating will feel a greater sense of accomplishment.

The production pattern shown in FIG. 566(C) is a production pattern obtained by modifying the production pattern shown in FIG. 566(B). In this production pattern, the time (timing t7 to timing t21) during which the second frame movable body is in the second state is 14 seconds, and in the production pattern shown in FIG. This is longer than the 8 seconds during which the state is maintained (timing t7 to timing t15). In this way, by making the time during which the second frame movable body is in the second state longer than the time during which the first frame movable body is in the second state, it is possible for the player to put the second frame movable body in the second state. Being in two states makes it easier to notice.

The expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(C) may be set higher than the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(B). For example, the effect patterns may be selected such that the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(B) is 15% and the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(C) is 25%. . With such a configuration, the player will have a greater sense of anticipation as to how long the second state will be maintained from the moment the player notices that the second frame movable body is operating. The timing at which the player notices that the second frame movable body is in the second state is not constant, and there are cases where it is unknown when the second state has been reached, so the duration of the second state is As the game continues, the player will have a greater sense of expectation.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(B) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(C), the longer the duration of the second frame movable body being in the second state, the greater the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit. Although the embodiment in which the is high is shown, it is also possible to provide three or more production patterns in which the duration of the second state is different. For example, an effect pattern that maintains the second state from timing t7 to time t27 may be made executable, and the degree of expectation for this effect pattern may be 30%.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(B) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(C), the longer the duration of the second frame movable body being in the second state, the greater the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit. However, the degree of expectation is suggested by the number of times the second frame movable body is in the second state, not by the duration that the second frame movable body is in the second state. good too. The production pattern shown in FIG. 566(D) shows an example thereof. The effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(D) shows an example in which the second frame movable body moves from the first state to the second state twice, but the second frame movable body does not perform the second motion. Alternatively, an effect pattern in which the third action is performed after the second action may be configured to be executable. Also at this time, it is preferable that the degree of expectation increases as the number of operations increases. For example, the expectation level is 15% when the second frame movable body operates only once, the expectation level is 25% when the second frame movable body operates twice, and the second frame movable body operates three times. It is preferable to configure so that the degree of expectation when operating is 35%. In this way, the higher the number of times the second frame movable body moves, the higher the degree of expectation. As to how many times the 2nd frame movable body will move, the 2nd frame movable body will be visually recognized with a great sense of anticipation.

The production pattern shown in FIG. 567(A) is a production pattern obtained by modifying the production pattern shown in FIG. 566(A). In this production pattern, the operation mode of the first frame movable body and the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body are the same as those of the production pattern shown in FIG. There is no difference in the mode of production). On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(A), the second frame movable body starts to change from the first state to the second state at timing t21, and is in the second state from timing t23 to timing t33. It differs from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(A) in that it returns to the first state at t35. In addition, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(A), when the second frame movable body is moved, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body is not displayed.

In a gaming machine capable of executing the production pattern shown in FIG. 566(A) and the production pattern shown in FIG. , the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and after returning to the first state, the second frame movable body changes to the first state at the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds) elapses. When the second state is not maintained (when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(A) is selected), and when the second frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (in FIG. 567(A) When the production pattern shown is selected).

With such a configuration, after the player's line of sight once turns to the first frame movable body during the operation of the first frame movable body, before the player's line of sight returns to the game board side effect display device 1600, the first frame movable body is moved. Since the second frame movable body may move, it is possible to make a player who has little game experience recognize that the second frame movable body may move.

The expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. 567(A) may be set higher than the expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. 566(A). For example, the production pattern shown in FIG. 567(A) may be configured to have an expectation level of 25%, and the production pattern shown in FIG. 566(A) may be configured to have an expectation level of 10%. . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation that the second frame movable body will move after the first frame movable body moves.

The production patterns shown in FIGS. 567(B) and 567(C) are production patterns obtained by modifying the production pattern shown in FIG. 566(A). This production pattern differs from the production pattern shown in FIG. 566(A) in that the motion of the first frame movable body and the display of the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body are performed multiple times.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 567(B) and 567(C), the first frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t2, and moves from timing t4 to timing t6. 2 state, returns to the first state at timing t8, then again starts to change from the first state to the second state at timing t11, enters the second state from timing t13 to timing t15, and returns to the second state at timing t17. It returns to state 1. In addition, a dynamic display of a frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body is performed in synchronization with the motion of the first frame movable body.

After that, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(C), the second frame movable body starts to change from the first state to the second state at timing t21, and is in the second state from timing t23 to timing t33. At t35, it returns to the first state. On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(B), the motion of the second frame movable body is not performed.

In a gaming machine capable of executing the production pattern shown in FIG. 567(B) and the production pattern shown in FIG. , the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and then returns to the first state (timing t17). There are cases where the movable body changes from the first state to the second state and cases where the second frame movable body maintains the first state and does not change to the second state.

With such a configuration, after the player's line of sight continues to face the first frame movable body when the first frame movable body operates, before the player's line of sight returns to the game board side effect display device 1600 Since the second frame movable body may move, it is possible to make a player who has little game experience recognize that the second frame movable body may move.

The expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(C) may be set higher than the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(B). For example, the production pattern shown in FIG. 567(B) may be configured to have an expectation level of 25%, and the production pattern shown in FIG. 567(C) may have an expectation level of 35%. . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation that the second frame movable body will move after the first frame movable body moves.

The production patterns shown in FIGS. 568(A) to 568(C) are production patterns obtained by modifying the production pattern shown in FIG. 566(A). This production pattern differs from the production pattern shown in FIG. 566(A) in that the second frame movable body may operate at a timing earlier than the first frame movable body.

In the production patterns shown in FIGS. 568(A) to 568(C), the timing at which the first frame movable body operates and the timing at which the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body is displayed are the same. . Specifically, the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from timing t21 to timing t23, and after maintaining the second state for a predetermined time (8 seconds) (timing t23 to timing t31 ), and changes from the second state to the first state (timing t31 to timing t33). Further, the simulated image of the movable frame simulating the first movable frame changes from the first state to the second state in accordance with the movement of the first movable frame, and is continuously displayed in the second state for a predetermined time. and changes from the second state to the first state (timing t21 to timing t33).

On the other hand, in each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 568(A) to 568(C), the operation mode of the second frame movable body is different as follows.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(A), the second frame movable body continues to be in the first state during the period from t0 to t39 and never enters the second state. In the production pattern shown in FIG. 568(B), the second frame movable body starts to change from the first state to the second state at timing t5, stays in the second state from timing t7 to timing t15, and is in the second state at timing t17. , the state returns to the first state. In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(C), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t5, is in the second state from timing t7 to timing t33, and is in the second state at timing t35. , the state returns to the first state. It should be noted that the display of the frame movable body simulation image simulating the second frame movable body is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

The expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. 568(C) is made higher than the expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. ) may be set higher than the expected degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. For example, the expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. 568(A) is 10%, the expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. 568(B) is 20%, and the expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. %.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(B), the player may miss the action of the second frame movable body when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(B) is executed. be. A player who can visually recognize the action of the second frame movable body can recognize that the degree of expectation is 20% due to the action of the first frame movable body after that. On the other hand, the player who did not notice the movement of the second frame movable body would be in a state of not knowing the exact degree of expectation even if the first frame movable body were to move.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(C), in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. The movable body remains in the movement position (second state). Therefore, when the player sees the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body and notices that the first frame movable body is in the second state, the player checks the state of the second frame movable body. , when the second frame movable body is not operating at that time and is in the first state, it can be recognized that the degree of expectation is not so high. On the other hand, if the second frame movable body is operating at that time and is in the second state, it can be recognized that the degree of expectation is relatively high.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(B) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. The player is interested in whether the first movable frame moves while the movable frame is in the second state. Then, when the first frame movable body operates and enters the second state, the player can recognize that the degree of expectation is high. On the other hand, if the second frame movable body enters the first state before the first frame movable body enters the first state, the player may recognize that the degree of expectation is relatively low. becomes.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(C), the second frame movable body is set to the first state after the first frame movable body is set to the first state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to entertain the player for a long period of time in a desirable state for the player, who has a high degree of expectation.

The embodiments have been described with the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown in FIG. 523 as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively. The frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively, so as to execute the effect pattern described above.

The embodiments have been described with the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown in FIG. 523 as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively. Either one or both of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is the first frame movable body, and either the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 or the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is used as the first frame movable body. Alternatively, both of them may be used as the second frame movable body. A state in which one or both of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are in the second state is defined as the second state of the first frame movable body, and the left ear inner frame movable body. A state in which either or both of 7400 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is in the second state may be configured to execute the above-described effect pattern as the second state of the second frame movable body. .

538, 547, etc., one of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is changed from the first state to the second state when the above-described effect pattern is executed. Then, the other of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is changed from the first state to the second state, and the first frame movable body is changed from the first state to the second state. You may adopt it as an action to do. In addition, after the other of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is changed from the second state to the first state, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 , from the second state to the first state may be adopted as the operation of changing the first frame movable body from the second state to the first state.

Similarly, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 538, etc., FIG. After changing to the second state, the other of left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is changed from the first state to the second state. You may employ|adopt as operation|movement which makes two states. In addition, after the other of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is changed from the second state to the first state, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 , from the second state to the first state may be adopted as the operation of changing the second frame movable body from the second state to the first state.

In this way, state changes due to continuous motions of a plurality of frame movable bodies may be grouped together as a state change of one frame movable body.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are used as the first frame movable body to change the state, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are used as the second frame movable body. Although an example of changing the state has been shown, only one of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is configured to operate as the first frame movable body, and the other is not operated and is in a standby state. may be configured to remain as it is. Alternatively, only one of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is configured to operate as the second frame movable body, and the other is configured to remain in a standby state without being operated. may

For example, of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, only the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is changed as the first frame movable body, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are changed. The outer ear frame movable body 7450 may be configured to change the state as the second frame movable body.

In this case, the areas of the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body differ when viewed from the front and when viewed from the side. Specifically, since the first frame movable body is composed of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the visible area is relatively small, and the second frame movable body consists of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. Since it is composed of the outer frame movable body 7450, the visible area is relatively large.

With such a configuration, when the state of the first frame movable body changes relatively small, a simulated frame movable body image corresponding to the state change of the first frame movable body is displayed when the state is changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the change in the state of the first frame movable body. On the other hand, when the state of the second-frame movable body changes relatively large, the second-frame movable body does not change the state by not displaying the frame-movable-body simulated image corresponding to the second-frame movable body. It is possible to give the player a greater surprise when the player notices that the

The structure of the plurality of frame movable bodies described with reference to FIGS. 553 and 554 may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above.

For example, the curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 may be the first frame movable body, and the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 may be the second frame movable body. Furthermore, the state in which the curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 are in the standby positions shown in FIGS. , 553(B), 553(D), and 554(B) may be set as the second state, and the above effect patterns may be executed.

Alternatively, the door frame side unit right upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame side unit right lower arm portion 7630 are the first frame movable body, and the door frame side unit left upper arm portion 7670 and the door frame side unit left lower arm portion 7680 are the second frame movable body. It may be a movable body. Furthermore, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620, the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670, and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 are shown in FIGS. C), the state in the standby position shown in FIG. 554(A) is defined as the first state, and the state in the movement position shown in FIGS. 553(B), 553(D), and 554(B) is defined as the second state. , may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above.

For example, when the effect pattern shown in FIG. Accompanied by the display of the frame movable body simulation image simulating the side unit right lower arm 7630, after changing from the state in the standby position (first state) to the state in the movement position (second state), and then to the standby position After changing to a certain state (first state), the door frame side unit left upper arm portion 7670 and the door frame side unit left lower arm portion 7680 are changed to the door frame side unit left upper arm portion 7670 and the door frame side unit left lower arm portion. 7680 without displaying the simulated image of the movable frame imitating the 7680, after changing from the state in the standby position (first state) to the state in the movement position (second state), the state in the standby position (first state) state).

Alternatively, either one or both of the curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 are used as the first frame movable body, and the door frame top unit face-up movable body included in the door frame top unit face decoration part 7500 is movable. At least one of body 7510, right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522, door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is used as the second frame movable body. may be Further, curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700, curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750, door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510, right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, door frame top unit lower face A state in which the nose movable body 7522 and the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 are in the standby positions shown in FIGS. B), FIG. 553(D), and FIG. 554(B) may be configured such that the above-described effect patterns are executed with the states of the movement positions shown in FIG. 553(D) and FIG.

For example, the curtain board bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 may be the first frame movable body, and the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 may be the second frame movable body, and the above-described effect pattern may be executed. In this case, the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed for the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 which is larger than the curtain board bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 . By adopting such a configuration, when the player notices that the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 (second frame movable body) is changing its state, the player is more surprised. can be given.

In addition to the door frame top unit face movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also the second frame movable bodies, and the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is stored below. After completing the upward movement from this position, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete the upward movement from the state in which they are housed in the door frame top unit face upward movable body 7510. This state may be the second state of the second frame movable body.

In this way, the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body are arranged at positions facing each other with the game area 5a and the game board side effect display device 1600 interposed therebetween. When the player is visually recognizing one of the frame movable bodies, the other frame movable body is less likely to be visually recognized by the player. In particular, when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(A) is executed, the player's attention is concentrated on the first frame movable body, and the second frame movable body, which is far from the viewing angle, is in sight. You will not be able to enter. Then, it is possible to give a big surprise that the second frame movable body has changed to an unexpected state to the player who notices the state after the movement of the second frame movable body.

Although the production pattern in which the simulated image of the movable frame simulating the second movable frame is not displayed when the second movable frame is operated, the movable frame simulating the second movable frame is shown for a short period of time. It may be configured to display a simulated image. In this case, the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body for a short period of time (for example, 1 second) in the latter half of the predetermined period when the second frame movable body is in the second state. may be configured to be displayed in For example, from timing t30 to timing t31 in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(A), it is preferable to display a frame movable body simulation image simulating the second frame movable body.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not notice that the second frame movable body has moved.

Alternatively, a frame movable body simulation image simulating the second frame movable body may be displayed from timing t33 to timing t34 in the production pattern shown in FIG. 567(A).

With such a configuration, the player can see the state in which the second frame movable body is changing from the second state to the first state, and the player can see that the second frame movable body is in the first state. The user feels frustration that he or she could not enjoy the second state. As a result, in subsequent games, it is possible to heighten awareness of the possibility that the second frame movable body may be operating without realizing it.

524(A) to 525(B), the effect patterns in which the frame movable body operates have been shown. Due to the position of the movable frame body after the movement, the player may violently contact the movable frame body with his or her hand or head, which may injure the player or damage the movable frame body. On the other hand, in a game machine capable of moving the frame movable body, in addition to the movement of the frame movable body, various effects are performed on the game board 5 side, and the effect is performed in an excessive manner for the player. There is a risk of The embodiments described below are intended to solve such problems. 569 and 570, 571 and 572, 573 and 574, 575 and 576 respectively correspond to FIGS. 4 shows a modified example of the production pattern described with reference to each.

In each embodiment shown in FIGS. 569 and 570, FIGS. 571 and 572, FIGS. 573 and 574, and FIGS. It is configured to be in a restrained state. The fluctuating effect sound is a sound that a predetermined music is reproduced in accordance with the fluctuation of the decoration pattern, and the player recognizes it as background music. For example, a piece of music consisting of a voice sung by a predetermined singer and performance sounds of a plurality of musical instruments is played for several minutes, during which the variation of decorative patterns seconds) is performed multiple times. By outputting such a fluctuating effect sound to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. It should be noted that a plurality of such songs may be prepared in advance, and a configuration may be adopted in which playback of a different song is started at the timing when playback of a certain song is completed to the end. Alternatively, in accordance with the change of the game state, the music that has been reproduced so far may be faded out in the middle of reproduction, and another music different from the music that has been reproduced so far may be reproduced. In the present embodiment, by suppressing the volume of such fluctuating effect sound in accordance with the timing when the frame movable body operates, the state of excessive effect is suppressed.

Further, in this embodiment, a special sound is reproduced for a short period of time to remind the player that the movable frame body is moving or that the movable frame body has been moved. . As the special evocative sound, instead of emitting a sound that can be recognized as a series of songs that are played for a long time like the fluctuating effect sound, a sound effect (for example, a chime sound such as "ping-pong") is played in one second. Alternatively, it is preferable to reproduce a piece of music whose reproduction ends in a short period of time (for example, two seconds), or to reproduce a sound like a drum being continuously beaten (for example, a sound such as "thumping") for several seconds. Further, it is preferable that the sound constituting the special evocation sound does not include the instrumental sound used as part of the fluctuating effect sound. Also, the special wake-up sound is output at a predetermined volume without being affected by the output state of the fluctuating effect sound. For example, even in a normal state in which the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is not suppressed, and in a suppressed state in which the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed, the special awakening sound is output at a predetermined volume. Also, the volume of the special evocative sound should be higher than the volume of the fluctuating effect sound in the suppression state. It should be noted that, in an effect pattern to be described later, the state in which the special evocation sound is output may be maintained for about 10 seconds. In this case, it is preferable to repeat such sound effects or music whose reproduction ends in a short period of time so as to maintain the state in which the special evocative sound is output.

In this way, by suppressing the volume of the fluctuating effect sound and generating a special evocative sound in accordance with the operation of the frame movable body, it is possible to prevent the effect provided to the player from becoming excessive. Become. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured or the movable frame from being damaged due to the player coming into contact with the movable frame.

In the production patterns shown in FIGS. 569 (A) to 570 (B), at the timing (timing t7) when the frame movable body starts moving from the standby position (first state) to the movement position, the variable production It is configured to set the sound state to a suppressed state and to output a special evocative sound. Further, the output of the special evocation sound is configured to end at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the effective period of operation ends. The suppression state of the fluctuating effect sound is also terminated at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 571(A) to 572(B), the timing (timing t9 ), the state of the fluctuating effect sound is set to the suppressed state, and the state of outputting the special evocative sound is set. Further, the output of the special evocation sound is configured to end at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the effective period of operation ends. The suppression state of the fluctuating effect sound is also terminated at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends.

Figure 573 (A) ~ Figure 574 (B) in the effect pattern shown, at the timing (timing t7) when the inner frame movable body starts to move from the standby position (first state) to the movement position, fluctuation The state of the effect sound is set to the suppression state, and the state is set to output the special evocative sound. Further, the output of the special evocation sound is configured to end at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the effective period of operation ends. The suppression state of the fluctuating effect sound is also terminated at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends.

Figure 575 (A) ~ Figure 576 (B) in the effect pattern shown, the timing (timing At t5), the state of the fluctuating effect sound is set to the suppressed state, and the state of outputting the special evocative sound is set. Further, the output of the special evocation sound is configured to end at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the effective period of operation ends. The suppression state of the fluctuating effect sound is also terminated at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends.

In this way, at the timing when the frame movable body starts to operate, the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is changed from the normal state to the suppressed state and the special evocative sound is changed from the non-output state to the output state, so that the effect state becomes excessive. It is possible to suppress

Also, as shown in FIGS. 573(A) to 574(B), when a plurality of movable frame bodies can operate in order, the second moving frame movable body starts its operation. , the output state of the variable effect sound is changed from the suppressed state to the normal state, and the special evocative sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress excessive stopping of the fluctuating effect sound necessary for the effect.

The timing of returning the output state of the fluctuating effect sound from the suppression state to the normal state and the timing of not outputting the output state of the special evocative sound are when the player operates the operation unit or when the valid operation period ends. It is the timing of Since the predetermined time has passed since the movable frame moved, it is not meaningful to suppress the fluctuating effect sound. This is because the player notices that the movable body has moved.

On the other hand, the timing of returning the output state of the fluctuating effect sound from the suppression state to the normal state and the timing of changing the output state of the special evocative sound from the output state to the non-output state may be when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured or the movable frame from being damaged due to the player coming into contact with the movable frame. In addition, in the case of an effect pattern in which the plurality of frame movable bodies return to the first state at different timings, the output state of the variable effect sound is suppressed at the timing when the frame movable body that is the latest to enter the first state returns to the first state. It is preferable that the state is returned to the normal state and the output state of the special alert sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state.

Alternatively, at the timing when the operating unit is operated or when the effective period of operation ends, the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is returned from the suppression state to the normal state, while the special evocation sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state. may be when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured or the movable frame from being damaged due to the player coming into contact with the movable frame.

Alternatively, the output state of the special evocation sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state at the timing when the operation unit is operated or the operation effective period ends, and the timing for returning the output state of the fluctuating effect sound from the suppressed state to the normal state is set. It may be when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured or the movable frame from being damaged due to the player coming into contact with the movable frame.

When there are a plurality of frame movable bodies and there are a plurality of timings at which the frame movable bodies start to operate, as in the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 573 and 574, FIGS. You may comprise so that a different special evocation sound may be output corresponding to each of the above.

In the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 573 and 574, the output state of the fluctuating production sound is suppressed at the timing (timing t14) when the operating unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends. An example is shown in which the state is changed to the normal state and the special alert sound is not output. It may be configured so that the sound output state may be continued.

For example, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 573(A), until timing t15 when the outer frame movable body is moving to the movement position, or until timing t16 when the outer frame movable body completes movement to the movement position, or when the outer frame movable body The state of suppressing the fluctuating effect sound or the state of outputting the special evocative sound may be continued until timing t27 when the body is moving to the standby position or timing t28 when the outer frame movable body completes movement to the standby position. .

In addition, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 574(A), until the timing t19 when the outer frame movable body is moving to the movement position, or until the timing t20 when the outer frame movable body completes the movement to the movement position, or until the timing t20 when the outer frame movable body The state of suppressing the fluctuating effect sound or the state of outputting the special evocative sound may be continued until timing t27 when the body is moving to the standby position or timing t28 when the outer frame movable body completes movement to the standby position. .

On the other hand, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 573(B) and 574(B), the production pattern is not transformed, and in the production pattern shown in FIG. 573(B), at timing t14, the production shown in FIG. In the pattern, at timing t18, the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is changed from the suppressed state to the normal state, and the special evocative sound is changed to the non-output state.

In this way, when the outer frame movable body operates (that is, when the special lottery result is a big hit), depending on the operation of the outer frame movable body, the suppression state of the fluctuating effect sound and the output state of the special evocative sound are controlled. By configuring so as to continue, the player may be injured or injured when the player touches the outer frame movable body that is in the state of moving to the moving position or in the state of moving to the moving position (second state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the outer frame movable body is damaged. In particular, the outer frame movable body starts moving at the timing when it is confirmed that the special lottery result is a big win, so the excitement felt by the player is very great. It is possible to make the player recognize that the outer frame movable body is operating without discouraging the player.

The timing of outputting the special wake-up sound may be limited. For example, the special evocation sound is output only during at least one of the period during which the frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state and the period during which the second state is changing to the first state. may

For example, in the rendering patterns shown in FIGS. 569(A) to 570(B), during the period when the frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state (period from timing t7 to timing t9), the frame movable body is changed from the second state to the first state (period from timing t22 to timing t24), the special evocation sound is output only during at least one period, and the special evocation sound is not output during the other periods. may be configured. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the movable frame body.

Further, in the production pattern shown in FIG. 573 (A) and FIG. 574 (B), the inner frame movable body is changed from the first state to the second state (period from timing t7 to timing t9), the inner frame The special evocation sound is output only during at least one period of the period in which the movable body changes from the second state to the first state (period from timing t30 to timing t32), and the special evocation sound is not output during the other periods. It may be configured as Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the movable frame body.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 573(A) and 574(A), the period during which the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (timing t14 in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 573(A) period from timing t16, the period from timing t18 to timing t20 in the production pattern shown in FIG. It may be configured such that the special alert sound is output only during at least one period, and the special alert sound is not output during the other periods. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the movable frame body.

In addition, the period during which the inner frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (period from timing t7 to timing t9), the period during which the inner frame movable body changes from the second state to the first state (timing period from t30 to timing t32), the period during which the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (period from timing t14 to timing t16 in the production pattern shown in FIG. 573(A), In the production pattern shown, the special evocation sound is generated only during at least one of the period from timing t18 to timing t20) and the period during which the outer frame movable body changes from the second state to the first state (from timing t26 to timing t28). It may be configured so as to output the special alert sound and not to output the special alert sound during other periods. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the movable frame body.

In each of the production patterns described above, the state of the fluctuating production sound may be set to the suppressed state, and then the special evocative sound may be output with a slight delay. For example, it may be configured to output a special evocative sound two seconds after the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed. For example, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 569(A) to 570(B), it is preferable to set the fluctuation production sound to a suppressed state at timing t7, and then output the special evocation sound at timing t9. With such a configuration, the player can clearly recognize that the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed and that the special evocation sound has a different property from the fluctuating effect sound.

Alternatively, in each effect pattern described above, the state of the fluctuating effect sound may be set to the suppressed state at a timing a predetermined time before the timing of outputting the special evocation sound. For example, two seconds before the timing of outputting the special awakening sound, the fluctuating effect sound may be suppressed. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 569(A) to 570(B), it is preferable that the variable effect sound is suppressed at timing t5, and then the special evocation sound is output at timing t7. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the variable effect sound has been suppressed and that the special evocation sound has a different property from the variable effect sound.

The timing for ending the output of the special awakening sound may be a predetermined timing. For example, it may be configured such that the special evocation sound is output only for the first two seconds after the movable frame body starts to move. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 569(A) to 570(B), at timing t7, the variable effect sound is suppressed and the output of the special evocation sound is started, and at the time t9, the output of the special evocation sound is started. It should be configured to terminate. It should be noted that the fluctuating effect sound may end at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated, or at the timing (timing t18) when the effective period of operation ends. With such a configuration, since the state in which the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed continues even after the timing when the output of the special evocation sound is finished, the player can easily recognize that the special evocation sound has been output.

It may be configured such that the fluctuation effect sound is suppressed and the special evocative sound is output before the start of the movement of the frame movable body. For example, at a timing two seconds before the frame movable body starts to move, it is preferable to suppress the fluctuating effect sound and output the special evocative sound. For example, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 569(A) to 570(B), at timing t5, the fluctuating production sound is suppressed and the output of the special evocative sound is started, and at timing t7, the state of the frame movable body from the first state to the second state. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the movable frame body is moving, and it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by coming into contact with the movable frame body.

The operation effective period may be generated in accordance with the timing when the frame movable body starts to operate and when the variable effect sound is set to the suppression state. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 573(A) to 574(B), at timing t7, an operation valid period is generated, an operation instruction display is started, and the light emission effect state of the movable frame is turned off. It should be configured as follows. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the movable frame body is moving, and it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by coming into contact with the movable frame body.

By slowly rotating the frame movable body in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 532, 535, 536, and 537, the time charts shown in FIGS. Alternatively, it may be operated like the frame movable body in the modified examples of the time charts shown in FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B). For example, the movable frame in the embodiment shown in FIG. 532 may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right over 2 seconds. When moving to the standby position, it is preferable to rotate the frame movable body 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the right over 2 seconds.

547, 550, 551 and 552, the outer frame movable body and the inner frame movable body in the embodiments shown in FIGS. may be operated like the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body in the modified example of the time chart shown in FIG. For example, the outer frame movable body in the embodiment shown in FIG. 547 may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right over 2 seconds. Further, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit and the operation unit is operated or the operation valid period ends, the inner frame movable body may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right over 2 seconds. . When moving to the standby position, the inner frame movable body is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the right over 2 seconds, and then the outer frame movable body is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the right over 2 seconds. Rotate it 90 degrees around.

523, 528, 529, 530 and 531, and FIGS. 538, 541, 542, 543 and 544, and 545 and 546. 538, 541, 542, 543 and 544, 545 and 546, and the outer frame movable body is in the second state. Either one or both of the body, the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body may be configured to continue vertical movement of about 1 to 2 centimeters or rotational movement of about 5 degrees. With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to easily notice that the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body are operated to enter the second state.

In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534, and FIGS. 548 and 549, respectively, the rotation direction of the frame movable body is clockwise when viewed from the right side. For this reason, compared to the case where the rotating direction of the frame movable body is counterclockwise when viewed from the right side, when the player puts his or her hand or the like on the frame, the hand or the like is caught in the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation.

On the other hand, in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 533 and 534, FIGS. 548 and 549, the rotating direction of the frame movable body may be configured to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the right side. By adopting such a configuration, the rotating body can be visually recognized as if approaching the player, and the movable frame body can be visually recognized by the player in a powerful manner.

In the embodiments shown in FIGS. 533, 534, 548, and 549, the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body are not rotated more than 360 degrees in the second state, but are rotated a predetermined number of times. A configuration may be adopted in which clockwise rotation when viewed from the right and counterclockwise rotation when viewed from the right are alternately repeated within the movement range. For example, as shown in FIGS. 532(B) and 532(E) or FIGS. The frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body may be configured to repeat the turning motion within the range of 45 degrees to the front side and 45 degrees to the rear side. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's hand or the like is caught in the door frame top unit 570 when the player puts the hand or the like on the frame.

In addition, in the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body shown in FIGS. 547(A) to 547(E), when the inner frame movable body rotates clockwise when viewed from the right, the outer When the frame movable body rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the right and the inner frame movable body rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the right, the outer frame movable body rotates clockwise when viewed from the right. It may be configured to rotate around. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's hand or the like is caught in the door frame top unit 570 when the player puts the hand or the like on the frame.

In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 523 and 538, the movable frame has a light emitting unit, but the movable frame is illuminated at a predetermined location outside the movable frame (for example, inside the door frame top unit 570). It may be configured to have a light-emitting portion that illuminates the movable frame body. Alternatively, both of these may be provided, and the movable frame body may be illuminated by the light-emitting portion provided in the movable frame body and the light-emitting portion outside the movable frame body to create a predetermined rendering state.

On the other hand, in the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 532(A) to 532(E) and FIGS. 7050 and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit are provided in the door frame top unit 570. By providing a light emitting part in each of the inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit, the door The frame movable body may be configured to emit light in the same manner as the left light emitting portion 7052 in the frame top unit. Alternatively, both of these may be provided, and the movable frame body may be illuminated by the light-emitting portion provided in the movable frame body and the light-emitting portion outside the movable frame body to create a predetermined rendering state.

With reference to FIGS. 523 to 576, examples have been shown in which the movable frame body changes from the first state to the second state, or changes from the second state to the third state or fourth state. A player or an amusement store clerk pushes the movable frame body in the middle of changing to the second state or the movable frame body that has completed the change from the second state to the fourth state by hand. It may be configured so that it can be returned to the state (first state) located at the position. In this case, a drive mechanism (not shown) for driving the movable frame is provided with a sensor capable of detecting the position of the movable frame, so that when the movable frame is at the initial position at a timing when it should not be at the initial position, may be configured so that the frame movable body stays at the initial position by determining that an operation such as push-in has been performed by a player or an amusement store clerk and not operating the drive mechanism any more.

With such a configuration, the movable frame body can be returned to the initial position (first state) by the player or the store clerk at any timing. Further, even when a heavy article (such as a bag carried by the player) is placed on the movable frame, the driving mechanism for operating the movable frame is controlled so as not to operate the movable frame. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the load from being applied to the drive mechanism. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player or a store clerk is injured.

523 to 576 show the basic structure of the movable frame body, modifications of the structure of the movable frame body, basic control modes of the movable frame body, and modifications of the control modes of the movable frame body. However, the predetermined embodiment or modification of the control mode of the movable frame may be applied to the predetermined embodiment or modification of the structure of the movable frame. Further, one or more other embodiments and modifications of the structure of the movable frame may be applied to the given embodiment and modifications of the structure of the movable frame. In addition, one or more other embodiments or modifications of the control mode of the movable frame may be applied to the predetermined embodiment or modification of the control mode of the frame movable body.

Embodiments may be obtained by applying each of the production examples in the embodiments and the technical matters in the production examples in combination. Moreover, it is good also as an embodiment combining and applying each technical matter in each role product structure.

(Second embodiment)
The second embodiment will be described below based on the embodiments shown in FIGS. 577-604.

[35. Fraudulent countermeasures against obstructive nails]
By the way, a plurality of obstacle nails are installed in the rolling area of the game ball in the game machine. There was a fraudulent act that led many game balls to enter the winning slot illegally.

For example, it is illegal to break into an amusement arcade after it is closed, open the door frame and bend the obstacle nail directly with a tool, etc., or, while the arcade is open, insert a piano wire or the like into the game area and bend the obstacle nail. A game ball has been illegally led to an advantageous direction by bending it, etc., and such illegality has brought great damage to the game parlor. The embodiments described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their object is to provide means for preventing fraudulent acts with respect to obstructive nails.

[35-1. game board]
FIG. 577 shows a front view of the game board 5' in the second embodiment, and FIG. 578 shows an exploded front perspective view of the game board 5'. As illustrated, the game board 5' in this embodiment is mainly composed of a front unit 2000, a game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000. FIG.

The back unit 3000 is composed of a movable effect unit 3600 that mainly performs movable effects using various movable members, and a game board side effect display device 1600 that is arranged behind it and displays game information, effect displays, etc. as images. It is The effects by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the movable effect unit 3600 are configured to be visible to the player through an opening formed in the center of the game panel 1100 .

As shown in the exploded front perspective view of the game board 5' shown in FIG. 578 and the exploded front perspective view of the game panel 1100 shown in FIG. , an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 are attached, and further, a plurality of obstacle nails 1200 and various prize winning devices (general prize winning port 2001, first starting port 2002) are provided, and an opening spreading in the center of the panel plate 1110 The front unit 2000 is fitted into the portion from the front and fixed to the panel plate 1110 from the front with screws (not shown).

[35-2. panel board]
The panel plate 1110 in this embodiment is made of a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material with a thickness of about 10 mm. The panel plate 1110 may be made of, for example, a transparent synthetic resin plate such as polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, or the like.

In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails 1200 are planted on the panel plate 1110 in this embodiment, and the left side game area 5'a and the right side game area 5b of the panel plate 1110 correspond to the shooting direction of the game ball. configured on the front. That is, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of FIG. 579, a right side game area 5b is formed as a rolling area for a game ball shot by a player to the right. A panel projection 1117 projecting toward the opening is integrally formed with the panel plate 1110 . Obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted on the front side of the panel projection 1117, as shown in the layout plan view of the obstacle nails in FIG.

[35-3. front unit]
As shown in the exploded front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 579, the front unit 2000 in this embodiment is formed in a substantially annular shape from a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material with a thickness of about 2 mm, and is mainly composed of It is composed of a stage 2530, a warp exit 2522, a prize winning opening 2005, a channel device 2700, an area cover member 2600 to be described later, and the like.

Also, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 580 and the exploded front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. 581, the channel device 2700 includes a first channel forming member 2720a and a second channel and a forming member 2720b.

Above the first flow passage forming member 2720a and the second flow passage forming member 2720b, a first flow passage ball entrance 2710a and a second flow passage ball entrance 2710b are provided, respectively, for receiving a game ball shot by hitting to the right. Furthermore, the lower portion is provided with a first channel outlet 2730a and a second channel outlet 2730b. Therefore, the game ball fired by hitting to the right enters the first passage ball entrance 2710a or the second passage ball entrance 2710b, and is discharged from the first passage exit 2730a or the second passage exit 2730b. Then, the game ball is discharged to the right game area 5b formed on the panel plate 1110 described above.

[35-4. Right side play area]
In this embodiment, as described above, obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted in the panel convex portion 1117 forming the right game area 5b. More specifically, FIG. Obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted in an arrangement manner as shown in Fig. 2 to form flow paths for a plurality of game balls. That is, three obstruction nails 1201, 1202, and 1203 are planted at equal intervals above the panel convex portion 1117 in the horizontal direction, and twelve obstruction nails 1204 to 1215 are planted thereunder in two substantially vertical directions. of obstructing nails are planted in close proximity. Further below, three obstacle nails 1216 to 1218 are planted close to each other in a substantially oblique direction. In the present embodiment, the obstructing nails are planted in the above-described arrangement, but the arrangement is not necessarily limited to such an arrangement, and the obstructing nails can be planted in arbitrary positions as appropriate. It is possible.

[35-5. Region covering member]
Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 580 and the exploded front perspective view of the area covering member 2600 in FIG. A region cover member 2600 is attached so as to cover the game region 5b from the front side.

The area covering member 2600 of this embodiment is formed of a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material having a thickness of about 2 mm and extending vertically as shown in the figure. According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize the rolling state of the game ball on the back side through the area cover member 2600 while covering the channel device 2700 and the right game area 5b.

Note that the thickness of the region covering member 2600 is not necessarily limited to the thickness in this embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. It is also possible to use a colorless and transparent synthetic resin plate such as polyarylate resin or methacrylic resin.

The area cover member 2600 has a substantially flat front surface and a rear surface, and a penetration portion 2610 including penetration portions 2611 to 2620 is formed as a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower portion of the front view. ing. These penetrating portions 2611 to 2620 are configured to function as accommodating portions capable of accommodating the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 planted in the panel convex portion 1117 of the right game area 5b.

More specifically, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 580 and the exploded rear perspective view of the area covering member 2600 in FIG. 2613 accommodate the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1201 to 1203, respectively, and the elongated hole-shaped penetrating portions 2614 to 2618 accommodate the adjacent obstructing nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215. A penetrating portion 2619 which accommodates two nails each and has an elongated hole longer than the penetrating portions 2614 to 2618 is configured to accommodate the nail heads of the three obstructing nails 1216 to 1218 . A through portion 2620 having a notch is formed at the right end portion of the area covering member 2600 in front view, and the through portion 2620 has the nail heads of the two obstructing nails 1210 and 1211 adjacent to each other. configured to accommodate the part.

Also, as shown in the exploded rear perspective view of area covering member 2600 in FIG. By contacting the ball regulating protrusion 2640, the game ball rolling on the back side of the , it is possible to reduce the flowing speed of the game ball, prevent clogging, and regulate the rolling direction. .

Also, as shown in the exploded rear perspective view of the area covering member 2600 in FIG. In order to prevent this, the area cover member 2600 is fixed with a screw (not shown) on the back side. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 583, screws screwed into mounting bosses 2630, 2631, and 2633 from behind the game panel 1100 are provided so that the area cover member 2600 cannot be easily removed from the back side of the game panel 1100. can be accessed, but the screws screwed into the mounting bosses 2632 are blocked by the panel plate 1110 and cannot be accessed. More specifically, the mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are screwed to the front unit 2000 fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, when removing the area cover member 2600, the front unit 2000 itself is temporarily removed. It is constructed so that it must be removed from the panel plate 1110 . With such a configuration, for example, it becomes difficult for a malicious player or the like to remove the area cover member 2600, and it is possible to suppress an act of illegally bending an obstacle nail.

Additionally, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of area covering member 2600 in FIG. , each flow path is formed by attaching and covering the area cover member 2600 on the front side. That is, since the area covering member 2600 is an essential constituent member that constitutes a part of the flow path of the game ball, for example, a malicious player removes the area covering member 2600 and plant it in the right game area 5b. Even if the provided obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are illegally bent and the game is played as it is, the game ball cannot move as expected in design when the area cover member 2600 is removed. It is configured to lead to damage of parts, etc., and make it difficult to play the game normally. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the act of removing the area covering member 2600 and illegally bending the obstructing nail.

Next, FIGS. 584(a) to 584(c) show sectional views of the implanted portion of the obstacle nail in the right game area 5b. Specifically, the illustration shows a manner in which the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1201 to 1209 and 1212 to 1218 implanted in the panel convex portion 1117 are accommodated in the penetration portion 2610 of the area covering member 2600, and this embodiment , the nail head of each obstructing nail is configured to be accommodated within the thickness of the area covering member 2600 .

In this embodiment, as described above, the thickness of the area covering member 2600 is set to 2 mm, and the dimension (h) from the front surface of the panel protrusion 1117 where each obstructing nail is implanted to the front surface of the area covering member 2600. is approximately 18 mm. Also, the distance (w) between the center of the nail head of each obstructing nail and the end of each penetrating portion 2610 of the area covering member 2600 is approximately 4 mm. Therefore, since the diameter of the nail head of the obstructing nail is about 4 mm, the gap between the peripheral end of the nail head and the open end of each through portion 2610 is about 2 mm.

To describe this embodiment more specifically, FIG. 584(a) is a sectional view showing how the nail heads of obstacle nails 1201 to 1203 are accommodated in penetrating portions 2611 to 2613. As shown in FIG. In this case, the gap from the peripheral end of the nail head of each of the obstructing nails 1201 to 1203 to the open end of the penetrating portions 2611 to 2613 provided in the area covering member 2600 is approximately 2 mm as described above. The center of the nail head and the center of each penetrating portion are configured to match.

The sectional view of FIG. 584(b) shows how the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215 are accommodated in the penetrating portions 2614 to 2618. As shown in FIG. In this case, the gaps from the peripheral edge of the nail heads of the pair of adjacent obstructing nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215 to the open ends of the penetrating portions 2611 to 2613 provided in the area covering member 2600 are the same as described above. It is approximately 2 mm.

The sectional view of FIG. 584(c) shows how the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1216 to 1218 are accommodated in the penetrating portion 2619. As shown in FIG. In this case, the clearance from the peripheral end of the nail head of each of the obstructing nails 1216 to 1218 to the open end of the penetrating portion 2619 provided in the area covering member 2600 is approximately 2 mm as described above.

As described above, since the gap between the outer peripheral edge of the nail head of the obstructing nail and the open end of the penetrating part 2610 constituting the receiving part is only about 2 mm, a tool for bending the obstructing nail is required. It becomes difficult to insert the obstructing nail, and even if the obstructing nail is improperly bent in some way, the peripheral edge of the nail head of the obstructing nail and the open end of the penetrating part 2610 interfere with each other. The degree of bending is limited to a very small amount, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstructing nail. Further, when the obstructing nail is illegally bent, the central position of the penetrating part 2610 and the central position of the nail head of the obstructing nail are eccentric, so that the eccentricity can be visually recognized from the front, thereby facilitating the illegal act. can be discovered.

[35-6. Other embodiments]
As described above, the present embodiment has been described based on the description of each drawing, but the present embodiment is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment, and the following modifications of the implementation configuration are possible.

For example, the relationship between the obstructing nail and the penetrating portion 2610 constituting the accommodating portion for the obstructing nail is as described above based on the embodiment shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. The form is not limited, and the form of the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610 can be variously changed as follows.

In the example of the penetrating portion 2610a illustrated in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 597(a) to (c), two points on the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610a, one on the front side of the area covering member 2600a and the other on the panel plate 1110 side, are: A convex portion with a small cross section is formed. According to such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted in order to illegally bend the obstacle nail 1220, traces such as chipping and denting are likely to remain on the convex portion, so that the illegal act can be easily discovered. It is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstructing nail.

On the other hand, in the example of the penetrating portion 2610a illustrated in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. there is According to such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted in order to illegally bend the obstructing nail 1220, traces such as chips and dents remain in the convex portion, so that the illegal act can be easily discovered. It is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. Moreover, compared with the embodiments shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 597(a) to 597(c), it is possible to easily process and form the convex portions.

In addition, in the examples of the through portion 2610a illustrated in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 599(a) to (d) and FIGS. A convex portion with a small cross section is formed on either the front side of or the panel plate 1110 side. According to such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted in order to illegally bend the obstructing nail 1220, traces such as chips and dents remain in the convex portion, so that the illegal act can be easily discovered. It is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail.

In addition, in the examples shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 601(a) to (e), the front side of the area covering member 2600a in the inner peripheral surface of the through portion 2610a is integrally closed with the area covering member 2600a, A receiving recess 2670 is formed to receive the nail head. According to such a configuration, since it is impossible to access the obstructing nail 1220 from the front side of the area covering member 2600a, it is possible to prevent the illegal bending of the obstructing nail 1220 in advance. Furthermore, when the blocking part is destroyed and a tool or the like is inserted, the trace remains, which makes it easier to detect fraudulent acts, and it is possible to suppress acts of illegally bending the obstructing nail. becomes.

In addition, in the examples shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 602(a) to (c), a rib of about several millimeters may be provided at the open end of the penetrating portion 2610a provided in the region covering member 2600a. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult for a tool for illegally bending an obstacle nail, a piano wire, or the like to access the nail head of the obstacle nail 1220 housed in the penetration portion 2610a, and the tool cannot be forcibly bent. When the nail is inserted, traces such as cracks and dents remain on the rib, so that the act of illegally bending the obstructing nail can be further suppressed. Furthermore, by providing the ribs, the strength of the through portion 2610a can be increased, and the rigidity of the area covering member 2600a itself can be increased.

In the present embodiment and the other examples described above, various modes of the penetrating portion constituting the accommodation portion for the obstructing nail were exemplified. Various forms can be adopted as long as they can accommodate all or part of the obstructing nail in a front view and function as an accommodating portion, including a penetrating portion having a similar shape.

In addition, a decorative seal with a decorative pattern may be attached to the front surface of the area covering member 2600. This not only improves the design of the area covering member 2600 itself, If a tool or the like is forcibly inserted into the gap between the end portion and the open end portion of the through portion 2610, traces such as scratches or peeling will remain on the decorative seal, making it easier to discover fraudulent acts. , it is possible to further suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. By attaching a decorative sticker with a through-hole corresponding to the through-hole 2610 to the surface of the area cover member 2600, the game area can be decorated at the rear side position of the obstacle nail. In contrast to the conventional technology in which only cell sheet decoration (cell decoration) is performed, a decorative sticker with a through hole attached to the area cover member 2600 can be used to create a game area close to the obstacle nail at the front position of the obstacle nail. decoration becomes possible. In addition, by adopting such a decorative seal attached to the area covering member 2600 together with the cell decoration, a three-dimensional decoration can be realized on both the rear side and the front side of the obstacle nail, and a game area that has never been seen before can be achieved. New decorations are possible. In this case, the area covering member 2600 is made of a transparent material, and the decorative sticker attached to the area covering member 2600 has a translucent part that allows the rear cell decoration area to be visually recognized. preferably. In the above embodiment, a sheet-shaped decorative seal was explained as an example, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to such a sticker. You may make it decorate directly by methods, such as processing.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the area cover member 2600 was formed as a single unit and attached to the front side of the front unit 2000, but it is not necessarily limited to this embodiment. It may be formed integrally with various prize winning devices, decoration members, and the like provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the trouble of attaching the area cover member 2600 in the manufacturing process of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the area covering member 2600 is configured as a single member that covers the channel device 2700 and the right gaming area 5b, but is not necessarily limited to this embodiment. , the area cover member 2600 may be divided into a member covering the channel device 2700 and a member covering the right game area 5b, and may be configured to be attached to the front unit 2000 respectively.

In the above-described embodiment, the channel device 2700 and the right game area 5b are covered with the area cover member 2600. However, the invention is not limited to this embodiment. It is also possible to attach the region covering member 2600 to an arbitrary location.

For example, it is possible to attach the area covering member 2600a of the present invention to the game area shown in the front view of FIG. 594(a) in the manner shown in the front view of FIG. 594(b). More specifically, in the illustrated embodiment, the area covering member 2600a has a substantially rectangular penetrating portion 2651 for accommodating the nail head of the so-called jump nail 1231 and the nail head of the so-called dead nail 1230. a notch-shaped penetrating portion 2650 that accommodates the nail heads of the two left guide nails 1232; and a slot shape that accommodates the nail heads of four right guide nails 1233. are formed, and are screwed and fixed from the back side of the panel plate 1110 to four boss portions 2660 integrally formed with the region cover member 2600a. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an act of illegally bending each obstacle nail that greatly affects the winning rate of the game ball to the first start hole 2002 . Furthermore, since the area cover member 2600a is fixed with screws from the rear side of the panel plate 1110, it is not possible to easily access the screws, and it is possible to prevent illegal bending of obstructing nails. ing. In this embodiment, the area cover member 2600a is provided so as to accommodate the obstructing nails planted around the first start opening 2002, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other game areas may be provided. Also, an area covering member 2600a may be provided, and it is also possible to cover the entire game area with a single area covering member 2600a.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of FIG. Although the cross section of the notch portion is configured to be closed, it is not limited to such an embodiment. , the notch portion of the through portion may be closed. In addition, the cutout portion in the through portion may be provided in any direction of the area covering member 2600. In this case, another component existing at a position facing the cutout portion may be provided in the cutout portion. should be configured to close

Also, FIG. 603 illustrates an installation mode of the area covering member 2600 in another embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 603(a), the obstructing nails 1212 and 1213 are accommodated in a through portion 2617 which serves as an accommodating portion for the obstructing nail, and a part of the through portion 2617 is a notch portion. is provided.

In the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 603(a), all the obstructing nails, including the obstructing nails 1212 and 1213, are in their designed positions. By locating the nail head portion of the obstructing nail 1213 inside the line connecting the notched ends 2617a, it is possible to visually confirm that the obstructing nail 1213 is in the designed position.

On the other hand, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 603(b), the obstructing nail 1213 is improperly bent, and the nail head portion of the obstructing nail 1213 crosses the line connecting the two notched ends 2617a. It is configured so that it is possible to easily visually recognize that the obstructing nail is illegally bent by being visually recognized in the state of exceeding. FIG. 603(a) shows an example in which the obstacle nail 1213 is positioned inside the line connecting the two notched ends 2617a as designed. The region covering member 2600 is formed so as to be positioned on the line connecting the ends 2617a (so that the obstructing nail 1213 overlaps the line connecting the two notched ends 2617a in a front view) as designed. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 603(b), if the line that connects the two notched ends 2617a is crossed, the fraud can be easily discovered.

[36. Measures for facilitating confirmation of nail position]
By the way, in a pachinko machine as a game machine, the ball output rate (the degree of prize winning) is greatly influenced by the adjustment of obstacle nails planted on the board surface of the game board. Depending on the ball output rate, the number of customers entering the hall changes greatly, which greatly affects the sales of the game hall. Therefore, it is necessary to check the condition of the obstructing nail at the time of installation of the game machine and at appropriate timing after installation, and to adjust the obstructing nail as necessary. Conventionally, therefore, a nail sheet has been used in order to easily and accurately check the condition of a plurality of obstructing nails and adjust the nails.

The nail sheet is formed into a thin sheet by using a translucent or transparent plastic film or paper material. A pattern corresponding to each obstacle nail is printed on the surface of the nail sheet in the same manner as the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nail planted on the game board.

In order to check the consistency between the gauge arrangement of the obstructing nails actually planted in the game board and the designed gauge arrangement printed on the nail sheet, conventionally printed on the nail sheet together with the above gauge arrangement Various accessory devices and various prize winning devices are aligned with the top surface of the various accessory devices and various prize winning devices that are actually placed on the game board, and are superimposed on each other. I was checking the gauge array of.

However, in general, in addition to obstacle nails, various members such as multiple prize-winning devices, windmills, stages, decorative members, etc. also vary. Therefore, when the thin and freely deformable nail sheet is arranged on the game board, it is quite difficult even for a skilled person to arrange the nail sheet so as not to be twisted due to the irregularities on the back surface of the nail sheet. As a result, there has been a problem that it is impossible to accurately grasp the consistency between the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails planted on the game board and the gauge arrangement printed on the nail sheet.

The embodiments described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine in which the positions of obstructing nails can be relatively easily confirmed.

[36-1. nail sheet]
FIG. 585 shows a front view of the nail sheet 5000 corresponding to the game panel 1100 in this embodiment. In the nail sheet 5000, the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nail printed body 5200 and the pattern of various arrangement members around the obstacle nail printed body 5200 are printed on an A4 size transparent film sheet 5100 in black.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 585, the first area printed on the nail sheet 5000 is used so that the gauge arrangement at a plurality of locations on the game panel 1100 can be confirmed using the limited range in the nail sheet 5000. A body 5110 and a second area printed body 5120 are printed, and the gauge arrays corresponding to the two obstruction nail implantation areas and the peripheral arrangement members are printed separately.

When using the nail sheet 5000 illustrated in FIG. 585 to check the gauge arrangement of the actually implanted obstructing nails, in this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. The outer edge of the area cover member 2600 and the plurality of through parts 2610 printed on the surface are aligned accurately and superimposed on the game panel 1100, and the printed obstacle nail printed body 5200 and the obstacle nails planted on the back surface are provided. Check for any discrepancy between

[36-2. Region covering member]
As described above, the area covering member 2600 of this embodiment is shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. As shown, the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1201 to 1203 are accommodated in the circular through portions 2611 to 2613 of the area covering member 2600 when viewed from the front. , 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215 , two of which are adjacent to each other. It is configured to accommodate ~1218 nail heads. A through portion 2620 having a partial notch is formed in the right end portion of the region covering member 2600 in front view, and the nail heads of the adjacent two obstacle nails 1210 and 1211 are formed in the through portion 2620. configured to accommodate the part.

583, mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are integrally provided on the rear side of the area cover member 2600 so that the area cover member 2600 cannot be removed from the front of the game panel 1100. The member 2600 is screwed on the rear side. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 583, screws screwed into mounting bosses 2630, 2631, and 2633 from behind the game panel 1100 are provided so that the area cover member 2600 cannot be easily removed from the back side of the game panel 1100. can be accessed, but the screws screwed into the mounting bosses 2632 are blocked by the panel plate 1110 and cannot be accessed. More specifically, the mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are screwed to the front unit 2000 fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, when removing the area cover member 2600, the front unit 2000 itself is temporarily removed. It is constructed so that it must be removed from the panel plate 1110 .

Also, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of the area covering member 2600 in FIG. 581, the area covering member 2600 of the present embodiment covers the flow channel device 2700 and the right game area 5b in which a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted. It is thus provided on the gaming panel 1100 to form a wide and flat surface on the gaming panel. Due to such a characteristic configuration, when the very soft nail sheet 5000 is placed on the game panel 1100, it is superimposed on the above-mentioned flat surface, so that it affects various members and obstacle nails that protrude forward in different amounts. The nail sheet 5000 can be stably overlaid on the game panel 1100 without being damaged, even by a non-expert, and without twisting.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the front view of FIG. 577, a large winning opening 2005 is arranged below the right game area 5b, and a large winning opening (not shown) is placed in front of the large winning opening 2005. A mouth cover member is provided. It should be noted that, like the area cover member 2600, the large winning opening cover member is formed to have flat surfaces on the front side and the rear side, and the area covering member 2600 is installed above the large winning opening cover member. and the front side are flush with each other. With such a configuration, the region covering member 2600 and the large winning opening covering member can form a wider flat surface on the game panel 1100 , and the nail sheet 5000 can be further laid on the game panel 1100 . It is possible to stably superimpose them.

Furthermore, the area covering member 2600 of this embodiment accommodates the nail heads of the obstacle nails as described above based on the enlarged front perspective view of FIG. 580 and the rear perspective view of the game panel 1100 of FIG. A plurality of penetrating portions 2610 having different shapes are formed, and when the nail sheets 5000 are superimposed, the shape of the penetrating portions printed on the nail sheet 5000 can be superimposed on the penetrating portions 2610 on the back surface to facilitate the positioning. In addition, it is possible to accurately position the nail sheet 5000 and quickly confirm the gauge arrangement of the obstructing nail while observing the eccentricity between the obstructing nail and the penetrating portion.

[36-3. Other embodiments]
As described above, the present embodiment has been described based on the description of each drawing, but the present embodiment is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment, and the following modifications of the implementation configuration are possible.

In the above-described embodiment, the region cover member 2600 is configured as a single member that covers the channel device 2700 and the right game region 5b, but is not necessarily limited to this embodiment. The member 2600 may be provided on the game panel 1100 separately into a member covering the channel device 2700 and a member covering the right game area 5b. That is, even if the area covering member 2600 having a flat surface on the front side is divided and mounted on the game panel 1100, one large flat surface can be formed. It is possible to stack on the front of the 2600.

Also, the area covering member 2600 may be integrally formed so as to cover a wider area of the game area, and such a configuration allows the nail sheet 5000 to be stably overlaid on the front surface of the area covering member 2600. is.

In addition, the region covering member 2600 in the above-described embodiment was constructed of a single member capable of covering the channel device 2700 and the right playing region 5b. Any area may be configured to be covered with a single area covering member or multiple area covering members, for example, multiple areas around the first start port 2002 as shown in the front view of FIG. 594(b). One example is the provision of an area cover member 2600a for accommodating an obstructing nail. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily and accurately superimpose the nail sheets 5000 at any place on the game panel 1100, and it is possible to quickly confirm the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails. Become.

(Third embodiment)
The third embodiment will be described below based on the embodiments shown in FIGS. 577-604.

[37. Measures for visually confirming the state of obstructing nails]
By the way, a pachinko machine as a game machine is equipped with a plurality of obstacle nails. There was fraudulent activity. For the purpose of preventing such fraudulent acts, conventionally, a decorative cover is provided on the winning gate device so that the entrance obstruction nail planted directly above the winning gate device cannot be illicitly bent. A concentric restricting portion is provided at a position corresponding to the obstructing nail for the introduction port. (For example, JP-A-2008-188259).

In general, the ball output rate (degree of winning) is greatly affected by the adjustment of the obstacle nails planted on the board surface of the game board. They have a great interest in the direction of inclination of the nail, and if the state of the obstructing nail is in a disadvantageous state for the game, they tend not to play the game with the game machine.

On the other hand, in the prior art as described above, for example, as shown in FIG. Since the relative positional relationship between the introduction port obstruction nail and the restricting portion forming the penetrating portion is grasped, the player can recognize that the entrance obstruction nail is inclined in a direction disadvantageous to the winning of the game ball. there was a risk of causing a decrease in interest if

The embodiments described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest.

[37-1. Region covering member]
In order to deal with the above problems, in this embodiment, as in the example shown in FIG. is the most important feature.

The area covering member 2600a in this embodiment illustrated in FIG. 587 shares the basic configuration with the above-described second embodiment, and is similar to the area covering member 2600 of the second embodiment. , 1220 are housed in the through portion 2610a.

On the other hand, the area covering member 2600a in the present embodiment has an obstacle nail 1219 planted near the first start opening 2002 that greatly affects the winning degree of the game ball to the first start opening 2002 under the above-described problem. , 1220 are accommodated in the through portion 2610a.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 587(a), the area covering member 2600a is attached to the decorative member of the first starting port 2002, and the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220 It is accommodated in the through portion 2610a in the manner illustrated in b).

As a method for attaching the region cover member 2600a to the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. It is possible. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 587(d), it is also possible to integrally mold and attach the decoration member of the first starting port 2002 .

As an example of this embodiment, FIG. 588 shows a plurality of embodiments in which the central position of the penetrating portion 2610a formed in the area covering member 2600a is shifted from the central position of the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220. ing.

That is, in order to solve the conventional problems described above, the center of the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220 are attached to the area covering member 2600a without bending or adjusting the actually planted obstructing nails 1219 and 1220. By forming (eccentrically) the penetrating portion 2610a with a position shifted from the position as the center position, is it an advantageous or disadvantageous state compared to the actual implanted state of the obstructing nail (curvature of the obstructing nail, etc.)? , which is visually recognized by the player.

For example, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 588(a), the central position of the through portion 2610a on the right side in the front view is shifted to the left from the central position of the nail head of the obstructing nail 1220. A player who sees such an eccentric mode is given the illusion that the obstacle nail 1220 on the right side is spread outward, and it is possible to induce a desire to play the game machine.

Further, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 588(b), the central position of the through portion 2610a on the left side in the front view is shifted to the right from the central position of the nail head portion of the obstructing nail 1219. It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nail 1219 on the left side is spread outward, and induce the desire to play the game machine.

Furthermore, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 588(c), the central positions of the penetrating portions 2610a on both sides are shifted inward from the central positions of the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220, thereby It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are spread outward, and to induce the desire to play the game machine.

On the other hand, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 588(d), the central position of the through portion 2610a on the right side in the front view is shifted to the right from the central position of the nail head of the obstructing nail 1220, so that this It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nail 1220 on the right side is bent inward. A player who visually recognizes such an aspect assumes that the ball passage between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed and that the game ball is in a disadvantageous situation when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002. Since the right obstruction nail 1220 is not bent inward, the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 at the normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show an unexpected prize-winning mode to the player, and to increase interest in the game.

Further, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 588(e), the central position of the through portion 2610a on the left side in the front view is shifted to the left from the central position of the nail head of the obstructing nail 1219, so that this It is possible to give the player who sees the illusion that the left obstacle nail 1219 is bent inward. A player who visually recognizes such an aspect assumes that the ball passage between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed and that the game ball is in a disadvantageous situation when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002. Since the left obstruction nail 1219 is not bent inward, the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 at the normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show an unexpected prize-winning mode to the player, and to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 588(f), the central positions of the penetrating portions 2610a on both sides are shifted outward from the central positions of the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220, thereby It is possible to give the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are bent inward. A player who visually recognizes such an aspect assumes that the ball passage between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed and that the game ball is in a disadvantageous situation when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002. Since the obstruction nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are not bent inward, the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 at the normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show an unexpected prize-winning mode to the player, and to increase interest in the game.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 588(a) to (f), area cover members 2600a having different formation positions of the penetrating portions 2610a are produced, and the first starting port 2002 is replaced as appropriate. It is very troublesome because it needs to be attached to the decorative part of the. Therefore, hereinafter, based on FIGS. 589(a) to (e), it is possible to reduce the trouble of manufacturing a plurality of area covering members 2600a and the trouble of storing and exchanging the plurality of area covering members 2600a on the amusement arcade side. An embodiment will be described.

As shown in the front view of FIG. 589(a), in this embodiment, one region cover member 2600a is formed with four through portions 2610a, and two lower through portions 2610a are formed into two upper through portions. It is formed inside from 2610a. Then, when attached to the decorative portion of the first starting port 2002 with the illustrated Δ-shaped mark facing upward, as shown in the front view of FIG. The player can visually recognize the center position and the center positions of the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides in the same state. Further, if the area cover member 2600a is rotated 180 degrees and the Δ-shaped mark is directed downward without replacing the area cover member 2600a, the central positions of the through portions 2610a on both sides are aligned as shown in the front view of FIG. 589(c). The nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides can be arranged inside from the central positions of the nail heads, thereby giving the player the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are spread outward. It is possible.

Also, as shown in FIG. 589(d), when the region covering member 2600a is rotated 90 degrees to the right and the Δ-shaped mark is placed facing right, the obstructing nail 1219 on the left side is spread outward. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 589(e), when the area cover member 2600a is rotated 90 degrees to the left and the △-shaped mark is placed facing the left side, the right side It is possible to give the player the illusion that the obstacle nail 1220 is spread upward and slightly outward. With such a configuration, it is possible to variously change the viewing mode for the player with one area covering member 2600a without increasing the number of area covering members 2600a.

[37-3. Other embodiments]
As described above, the present embodiment has been described based on the description of each drawing, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to the above-described embodiment, and the following modifications of the implementation configuration are possible.

For example, as shown in FIG. 590(a), the area covering member 2600a may be formed with an oval through portion 2610a and attached to the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. 590(b). By moving the area covering member 2600a downward from the installation mode to the installation mode shown in FIG. 590(c), the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are spread outwards for the player who is visually recognized from the front. It is possible to make an illusion like this. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game machine.

The shape of the penetrating portion 2610a is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and the penetrating portion 2610a may be of various shapes as long as the player can visually recognize the relative positional relationship between the penetrating portion 2610a and the obstacle nail. can do. For example, as shown in FIG. 591(a), the shape of the through portion 2610a can be a substantially square shape with R portions arranged at the corners. It is also possible to have a square shape.

Furthermore, the penetrating portion 2610a of the present invention is not necessarily limited to a closed shape, and as shown in FIG. , 1220 of the nail heads. Further, as shown in FIG. 591(d), a notch-shaped penetrating portion may be formed in an oblique direction to accommodate the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220. FIG.

In addition, from the viewpoint of making the state of the obstacle nail visible, the penetration part 2610a of the present invention may accommodate the nail heads of a plurality of obstacle nails in one penetration part 2610a. As shown in the figure, the shape of the through portion 2610a provided in the area covering member 2600a is an elongated hole, and the nail heads of a plurality of obstacle nails 1221, 1222 (or 1223, 1224) are accommodated in one through portion 2610a. It is also possible to configure Then, as shown in FIG. 592(b), by forming two elongated hole-shaped through portions 2610a at inner positions in the region cover member 2600a, the player visually recognized from the front can see the obstacle nails 1221 and 1222. , 1223, 1224 are spread outward. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game machine.

In addition, in the above-described various embodiments, the area covering member is targeted for obstructive nails planted in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002, such as so-called dead nails that greatly affect the winning rate of the first starting port 2002. 2600a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to the obstacle nail as described above. An area covering member 2600a may be provided to accommodate the obstruction nail within the penetration 2610a. That is, the player is made to visually recognize the relative positional relationship between the nail head of the obstructing nail and the penetrating portion 2610a provided in the region cover member 2600a, and the state of the obstructing nail is advantageous or disadvantageous for the game. If it is possible to recognize whether the player is in a good state or not, it is possible to increase the willingness to play the game machine.

For example, another embodiment illustrated in the front views of FIGS. 594 and 595 illustrates the installation of an area covering member 2600a for accommodating a plurality of obstructing nails implanted around the first starting port 2002. More specifically, in the illustrated embodiment, the region covering member 2600a has a substantially rectangular penetrating portion 2651 for accommodating the nail head of the so-called jump nail 1231 and the nail head of the so-called dead nail 1230. , a notch-shaped through-hole 2652 for accommodating the nail heads of the two left-side guide nails 1232, and a length for accommodating the nail-heads of the four right-side guide nails 1233. A hole-shaped through portion 2653 is formed, and is screwed from the rear side of the panel plate 1110 to four boss portions 2660 formed integrally with the area cover member 2600a.

A region cover member 2600a is provided in the manner shown in FIG. 594(b) with respect to the game region shown in FIG. 594(a). The area covering member 2600a provided in FIG. 594(b) is configured so that the player can visually recognize the state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 in a state that is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous. 2, the nail head of the jump nail 1231 is positioned at the center of the penetrating part 2651 and the nail head of the life nail 1230 is positioned below the penetrating part 2650 .

On the other hand, the area covering member 2600a illustrated in FIGS. 595(a) and 595(b) includes the area covering member 2600a of FIG. The formation correspondence of the through portion 2650 for accommodating the nail head of the life nail 1230 is different, and the area covering member 2600a shown in FIG. A longer penetrating portion 2650 for accommodating the nail head of the life nail 1230 is formed by shifting downward. With such a configuration, a player who visually recognizes the state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 shown in FIG. It is possible to create an illusion that the player is in an advantageous state for winning a prize at the starting port 2002, and to increase the player's willingness to play.

Conversely, the region covering member 2600a illustrated in FIG. 595(b) shifts upward the penetrating portion 2651 that accommodates the nail head of the jump nail 1231, and shifts the penetrating portion 2650 that accommodates the nail head of the life nail 1230. are formed in short. With such a configuration, a player who visually recognizes the state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 shown in FIG. It is possible to create an illusion that the player is in a disadvantageous state for winning a prize at the starting port 2002, thereby increasing the player's interest in selecting a gaming machine to play. Moreover, even if it is visually recognized in a seemingly disadvantageous state, the actual state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 is not in a state disadvantageous to winning, so the winning rate to the first start port 2002 is reduced. It's not going down. Therefore, a player who has played the game while visually confirming that the jump nail 1231 or the life nail 1230 is in a disadvantageous state will be surprised and exhilarated by the relatively good winning rate of the first start port 2002. can feel the feeling.

Also, the corresponding positional relationship between the life nail 1230 and the penetration part 2650 is not limited to the embodiment shown in FIGS. The state of the nail head is determined by whether the nail head is located inside the line connecting the ends of the notched portions of the penetrating portion 2650 or outside beyond the line connecting the ends. It is also possible to configure so that the user can grasp it.

Also, the method of installing the area cover member 2600a to the game panel 1100 is not limited to the method of fixing to the decoration member of the first starting port 2002 described above. And as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 592(d) or (e), it is possible to fix the area cover member 2600a to the panel plate 1110 from the front side with screws or the like. As a fixing method, a mounting boss may be formed integrally with the panel plate 1110 as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. A screw hole may be provided on the 1110 side, and at that time, as shown in the front view of FIG. preferably.

Furthermore, the manner in which the area cover member 2600a is attached to the panel plate 1110 is not limited to the embodiment described above. It is also possible to fix the area covering member 2600a by using the above structure. With such a configuration, since the area covering member 2600a cannot be easily removed from the front side of the game machine, the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail is prevented. can be prevented.

In the present embodiment and the other examples described above, various modes of the penetrating portion constituting the accommodation portion for the obstructing nail were exemplified. Various forms can be adopted as long as they can accommodate all or part of the obstructing nail in a front view and function as an accommodating portion, including a penetrating portion having a similar shape.

[38. Movable frame]
By the way, in the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. By operating the movable decoration means provided on the frame constituting the outer shape of the game machine at a predetermined timing, it is possible to make the player feel interesting. However, some players find it troublesome to move their line of sight from the predetermined display means to the movable decoration means provided on the frame constituting the outer shape of the game machine, and do not move their line of sight to the movable decoration means that has been activated. In such a case, there is a risk that the player will not be able to fully enjoy the excitement of operating the movable decoration means.

Below, the movable decoration provided on the frame constituting the outer shape of the game machine, because the player feels troublesome to move the line of sight to the movable decoration means provided on the frame constituting the outer shape of the gaming machine. An embodiment of a game machine capable of making the player feel a sense of interest even when the line of sight does not move to the means will be described.

Figures 605 and 606 show a modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 523 . In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 605 and 606, in addition to the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, the door frame top unit 570 includes a frame movable body shaped like a root vegetable. Root vegetable frame movable body 7800 that can move in any direction.

605(A), 605(B), 606(A), and 606(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIG. 605(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 605(D) and 605(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIG. 606(C) is a front view showing the internal structure of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. FIG. 605(A), 605(C), and 605(D) show that the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are at the standby position in the door frame top unit 570. Shows the stowed state. FIG. 605(B) shows a state in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is housed in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have moved to the moving positions. there is FIG. 606(A) shows a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has moved to the movement position. there is FIGS. 605(E) and 606(B) show a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 have moved to the movement positions.

As shown in FIG. 606(C), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has a root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802 imitating root vegetable leaves on the right side in a front view. In addition, a root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7804 imitating the root of a root vegetable is provided on the left side in a front view. Root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802 and root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804 are each made of white translucent synthetic resin, and root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810 is provided inside.

As shown in FIGS. 605(A), 605(B), etc., the lower end of the right connecting linear member 7820 is attached to a predetermined position on the left side of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 when viewed from the front. A lower end portion of a left connecting linear member 7830 is attached to a predetermined position on the right side of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 in front view. On the other hand, the upper end of the right coupling linear member 7820 is connected to the right up-and-down drive mechanism 7825 . In addition, the upper end of the left connecting linear member 7830 is connected to the left vertical motion drive mechanism 7835 . The right connecting linear member 7820 and the left connecting linear member 7830 are string-shaped and have a predetermined length.

The right connecting linear member 7820 and the left connecting linear member 7830 are specifically composed of a tubular cable, inside of which a signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. A signal line (not shown) and a feeder line (not shown) for supplying power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are provided. The signal line and the feeder line may be configured to be provided inside either one of the right connecting wire member 7820 and the left connecting wire member 7830 . It should be noted that instead of transmitting a signal or supplying power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 by wire, a signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 wirelessly. A loop antenna or the like may be used to feed power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 from the side of the door frame 3 in a non-contact manner.

The right vertical motion drive mechanism 7825 and the left vertical motion drive mechanism 7835 each have a rotation mechanism (not shown). It is possible to wind up and down the right connecting linear member 7820 and the left connecting linear member 7830 configured by.

An opening (not shown) is provided on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, and by passing through the opening, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved downward from the state stored in the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to change the position to the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, or to the state to be stored in the door frame top unit 570 from the state to be positioned in front of the game board side effect display device 1600. be. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 606(A), it is possible to move the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to a position in front of the game board side effect display device 1600 . Further, by rotating the rotation mechanism in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 can be moved from the state in which it is positioned in front of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. It can be moved to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 shown in 605(A).

As shown in FIG. 606(C), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has a root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7810 inside. Specifically, the root vegetable frame movable body light-emitting part 7810 has a shape along the outer shape of the root vegetable frame movable body first cover part 7802 and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7804 that constitute the front surface of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 . It consists of a white printed circuit board. As a specific configuration of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting section 7810, for example, the configuration described above for the face substrate 6020 may be adopted. By driving and controlling a plurality of light sources (for example, full-color LEDs) mounted on the front side of the printed circuit board by the peripheral control board 1510, the first cover portion 7802 of the movable root vegetable frame and the second cover portion 7804 of the movable root vegetable frame are controlled. It is possible to have a luminescence decoration mode of a predetermined luminescence color.

As the light emitting mode of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7810, the same light emitting mode as the light emitting mode described above for the rear wall substrate 6352 may be adopted. For example, a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804, which is a root-like portion of the root vegetable frame movable body light-emitting portion 7810, is caused to emit white light, and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804, which is a portion like a leaf, emits white light. By causing a plurality of light sources corresponding to one cover portion 7802 to emit green light, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 can be made into a light-emitting decorative mode imitating a radish. On the other hand, a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804, which is a portion simulating a root, emits red light, and a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802, which is a portion simulating a leaf. By emitting green light from the light source of , it is possible to make the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 into a light-emitting decorative mode imitating a carrot.

528 to 532, 535 to 538, 541 to 547, and 550 to 550, an example in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is provided by modifying the embodiment described with reference to Fig. 523 is shown. In the embodiment described with reference to 554, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be provided. Moreover, in such an embodiment, it may be configured so as to execute the effect mode shown below. In an embodiment in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be operated, one of these frame movable bodies The root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be moved in response to the motion of at least one frame movable body (moving from the standby position to the moving position, changing from the stopped state to the rotating state, etc.).

607 and 608, an effect mode using the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described below. 607(A) and 607(B) show the moving state of the first movable decoration means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200), and a simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means. It is the time chart which showed the display mode and the movement state of the 2nd movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800). Figures 608(A) to 608(C) are front views showing the state of the gaming machine at a predetermined timing of such an effect mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 607, t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the presentation. The time between each timing is 1 second. These points also apply to time charts shown in later-described drawings such as FIGS.

FIG. 607(A) shows an effect mode using the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 605 and 606. FIG. First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative patterns, and at timing t7, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern fluctuates. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upward movement position due to drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. do. At the same time, at timing t7, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200.

FIG. 608(A) shows a state in which the decorative pattern is in the reach state at timing t7, and a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 has started to be displayed. The display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 starts immediately after this (0.1 second or the like).

From timing t7 to timing t9, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement positions. At the same time, a simulated image simulating a mode in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the movement positions is dynamically displayed.

At timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete movement to the movement positions. Simultaneously, a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also displayed in a manner simulating the state in which the movement to the movement position is completed.

FIG. 608(B) shows a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have completed their movement to the movement positions at timing t9. It shows a state in which a simulated image simulating a body 7200 is displayed in a manner simulating a state in which the movement to the movement position is completed.

Next, at timing t13, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the movement position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t14, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. In this state, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 overlaps the display position of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view. It will remain stationary in position. At the same time, at timing t14, the display of the simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200, which have been displayed until then, ends.

In FIG. 608(C), at timing t14, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 displays a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated left ear frame movable body 7200 in the game board side effect display device 1600. It shows a state in which it has moved to a position that overlaps the previous position in a front view.

Next, at timing t18, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t19, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at timing t22, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upward movement position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. From timing t22 to timing t24, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position. At this time, a simulated image simulating a mode in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the movement position is not displayed. At timing t24, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after the timing t24, the variation of the decorative pattern in the center during variation is completed, and the result of the special lottery is a symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the result is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 607(B) shows a game having the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 described with reference to FIGS. It shows the production mode when applied to the machine.

First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative patterns, and at timing t7, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern fluctuates. Reach state. At timing t7, drive control by peripheral control board 1510 causes right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 to change from a state of being stopped in door frame top unit 570 to a state of being rotated. At the same time, at timing t7, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200.

Next, at timing t13, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the movement position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t14, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. In this state, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 overlaps the display position of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. It will remain stationary in position. At the same time, at timing t14, the display of the simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that have been displayed until then is terminated.

Next, at timing t18, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t19, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. At timing t<b>24 , the state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 changes from the rotating state to the stopped state where they are housed in the door frame top unit 570 .

At a predetermined timing after the timing t24, the variation of the decorative pattern in the center during variation is completed, and the result of the special lottery is a symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the result is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

During the game, the player keeps looking at the predetermined display means (the game board side effect display device 1600) in which the effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means is performed. A simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means is displayed on a predetermined display means in accordance with the drive control of the provided first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200). As a result, the player is notified that the first movable decoration means is being driven and controlled, so that the player does not notice that the first movable decoration means is being driven and controlled. , the situation that the player cannot feel the excitement due to the driving control of the first movable decoration means, or the player carelessly touches the first movable decoration means and gets injured. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

On the other hand, a player who is reluctant to visually recognize the driving control of the first movable decoration means, such as feeling tired, directly recognizes that the first movable decoration means is being driven and controlled. It is possible to virtually experience the operation of the first movable decoration means by viewing a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means displayed on the predetermined display means instead of viewing.

Furthermore, since the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) moves to a position overlapping the display position of the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means in a front view, the first movable decoration means To impose a burden such as moving the line of sight on a reluctant player who does not move the line of sight with respect to the first movable decoration means although he/she is aware that the decoration means is driven and controlled. Instead, it is possible for the user to feel the interest caused by the movement of the second movable decoration means. In addition, it is possible to make such passive players regain their positive attitude towards games.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 607(A) and 607(B), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is configured to move forward of the game board side effect display device 1600 at timing t13. , In addition to the effect mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves forward of the game board side effect display device 1600, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 does not move forward of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame A presentation mode in which the player continues to be positioned at the standby position in the top unit 570 may be configured to be executable. With such a configuration, after the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves the right ear frame movable body 7100. A rendering mode in which the simulated image and the simulated left ear frame movable body 7200 are superimposed in a front view with respect to the display position of the simulated simulated image, and a rendering mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 continues to be positioned at the standby position. and can be executed.

Further, when the performance mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved is executed, the expectation of the occurrence of the big hit state is higher than when the performance mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is not moved is executed. may be configured.

With such a configuration, after the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) is displayed, the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is driven and controlled to move to a position where the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means is superimposed when viewed from the front, and the second movable decoration means stands by. Since the second effect mode of continuing to be positioned is executed, the player's interest is focused on whether or not the second movable decoration means moves.

Further, when the first effect mode is executed and when the second effect mode is executed, there is a state (jackpot state) in which the player is more advantageous when the first effect mode is executed. If the degree of expectation is increased, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the movement of the second movable decoration means.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 607(A) and 607(B), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves in front of the game board side effect display device 1600 from timing t13 to timing t14. However, it may be configured to provide a plurality of operation modes when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves forward of the game board side effect display device 1600 . For example, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is temporarily stopped at a position between the standby position and the moving position (between timing t13 and timing t14), and then returns to the standby position (timing t15). Alternatively, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 temporarily stops at a position intermediate between the standby position and the moving position (between timing t13 and timing t14), and then moves to the moving position (timing t15). can be configured to run In this case, it is preferable that the probability of occurrence of the big win state is higher when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to the moving position.

Alternatively, during the period (timing t14 to timing t18) after the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 completes movement to the game board side effect display device 1600 and starts to move into the door frame top unit 570, the root vegetable frame movable body In addition to the mode in which 7800 is stopped in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, it may be configured to move in a predetermined operation mode within the range in front of the game board side effect display device 1600.

In addition, a plurality of operation modes may be provided when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves into the door frame top unit 570 and returns. For example, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 returns from the movement position to the standby position from timing t18 to timing t19, and in addition, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 temporarily stops at an intermediate position between the standby position and the movement position. (Between timing t18 and timing t19), after that, it returns to the waiting position (timing t20).

A mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves from the standby position to the moving position, a mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to the moving position, and a mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves from the moving position to the standby position have been shown. A combination of the operation modes may be adopted as a plurality of operation modes for operating the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 . Further, the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit state may differ depending on the plurality of operation modes.

With such a configuration, in addition to whether or not the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) moves, drive control is performed in one of a plurality of operation modes when it moves. Therefore, in addition to whether or not the second movable decoration means moves, the player's interest is focused on how the second movable decoration means moves.

Furthermore, when the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player (big win state) is configured to differ depending on the operation mode, the player will not be able to understand in what mode the second movable decoration means will move. It is possible to raise the expectation of

The root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to be in a light-off state until the forward movement of the game board side effect display device 1600 is completed, and to be in a light emitting decoration state after the movement to the movement position is completed. . Specifically, from timing t13 to timing t14, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is turned off, and at timing t14 when the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is turned into the light emitting decorative state. , the light emitting decoration state should be continued until timing t18 when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving to the storage position. Alternatively, the luminous decoration state may be continued until timing t19 at which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 completes movement to the storage position. As the luminous decorative state, it is preferable to select one of the above-described radish-like luminescence mode and carrot-like luminescence mode based on the result of a special lottery.

In this way, after moving the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) to the movement position in front of the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in the off state, the luminous decoration is made at the movement position. By setting the state, it is possible to give the player a big surprise. In addition, by setting the luminous decoration state based on the result of the special lottery, the player can have a sense of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be advantageous to the player (big win). Further, when the second movable decoration means is accommodated in the standby position, by continuing the luminous decoration state, interest in the first movable decoration means located on the extension line of the movement direction of the second movable decoration means is increased. It becomes possible for the player to hold it.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 607 and 608, at the same time when the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 starts, in the substantially central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, , display of a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are started. In addition, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 607(A), at the same time when the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement position is completed, the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on. In the substantially central display area, a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed to complete the movement to the movement position. Also, as in the timing t9 to timing t14 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 607(A) and the timing t7 to timing t14 in the embodiment shown in FIG. In the same manner as the operation state of the body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the operation state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that have changed from the non-rotating state at the standby position to the rotating state, during these periods , a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be displayed.

With such a configuration, the first movable decoration means changes from the first state (positioned at the standby position) to the second state (positioned at the moving position or rotating state). The state of (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) can be accurately grasped by visual recognition of predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600).

On the other hand, a simulated image simulating the right ear-frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear-frame movable body 7200 are displayed in a manner different from the operating states of the right ear-frame movable body 7100 and the left ear-frame movable body 7200 . may be configured to do so.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 607A, a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 move and appear from timing t7 to timing t9. However, this dynamic display may be performed again from timing t9 to timing t11, and further from timing t11 to timing t13.

In this way, the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame shifts from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moving state). Even after the change, a simulated image simulating the operation mode of the first movable decoration means is dynamically displayed on a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), so that the player can see the first movable decoration means. It is possible to make the user interested in the operation of the decoration means. In the above example, such dynamic display is performed twice (period from timing t9 to timing t11 and period from timing t11 to timing t13), but dynamic display may be performed once. It is good also as 3 times or more.

Further, at timing t9 in the example shown in FIG. 607(A), the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is separated from the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570, and the effect display device on the game board side is displayed. It may be configured such that it starts to move upward within the display area of 1600, then moves upward within the display area, and moves out of the display area at timing t11. Furthermore, from timing t11 to timing t13, a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be similarly dynamically displayed. FIG. 609(A) is a diagram showing the state at timing t10 in such an embodiment, in which the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is separated from the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570. It shows the state of moving upward.

In this example, the first movable decorative means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame are changed from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moved position). position), a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means (a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear A simulated image imitating the frame movable body 7200) is configured to be moved in a predetermined direction suggesting the position where the first movable decoration means is provided. Further, the first movable decoration means is configured to be positioned on an extension line of the moving direction of the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means when viewed from the front.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the first movable decoration means operates to change from the first state to the second state. In addition, it is possible to directly suggest the position where the first movable decoration means is provided, and to make the player interested in the operation of the first movable decoration means. In addition, an action that is impossible in the actual action of the first movable decoration means is performed with a simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means. It is possible to have it brought to

Alternatively, from timing t9 to timing t14 in the example shown in FIG. It may be configured to dynamically display so as to alternately appear and appear from simulated images. FIG. 609B shows a state in which the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is half retracted with respect to the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 .

In this example, the first movable decorative means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame are changed from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moved position). position), a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means (a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear A simulated image simulating the frame movable body 7200) is displayed in a mode in which it reciprocates in a predetermined direction. Further, the first movable decoration means is configured to be positioned on an extension line of the reciprocating direction when viewed from the front.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the first movable decoration means operates to change from the first state to the second state. In addition, it is possible to suggest the position where the first movable decoration means is provided, and to make the player interested in the operation of the first movable decoration means. Also, the comical display of the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means makes it possible for the player to take an interest in the operation of the first movable decoration means.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 609(A) and 609(B), the first movable decoration means provided on the frame (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) are After changing from the first state (standby state) to the second state (positioned at the movement position), the first movable decoration means moves to the first position in the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600). A dynamic display of a simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means (ears popping upward, ears moving bouncing, etc.) is performed in a manner different from the manner in which the state changes from the state of (1) to the second state. Configure.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in how the first movable decoration means actually operates.

On the other hand, from timing t9 to timing t14 in the rendering mode shown in FIG. 607(A), a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are dynamically displayed in a predetermined color. It may be configured to For example, in a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100, after displaying an image in which the portion simulating the inner side of the ear is red and the portion simulating the outer side of the ear is white, the colors are exchanged and the ear is displayed. The display operation of displaying an image in which the part simulating the inside of the ear is white and the part simulating the outside of the ear is red may be repeated multiple times (for example, 5 times in total by changing the colors every second). . Further, such a display operation may be performed simultaneously on a simulated image simulating left ear frame movable body 7200 . FIG. 610(A) shows a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. The part simulating the inside of the ear is white, and the outside of the ear is white. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which an image is displayed in which the simulated portion is red;

On the other hand, the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to continue to be displayed in a predetermined color without changing the colors. FIG. 610B shows a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100, in which both the inner ear portion and the outer ear portion simulating the ear are pink, and the left ear frame movable body 7200. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect mode in which, as a simulated image simulating the ear, an image in which both the portion simulating the inside of the ear and the portion simulating the outside of the ear are pink are continuously displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in how the first movable decoration means actually emits light.

The degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit state may differ depending on each effect mode described with reference to FIGS. 609 and 610 . For example, the production mode described with reference to FIG. 609(A) is configured so that the expectation for the occurrence of the big hit state is higher than the production mode described with reference to FIG. 609(B). good too. In addition, the production mode described with reference to FIG. 610(A) is configured to have a higher degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit state than the production mode described with reference to FIG. 610(B). good too.

Furthermore, it may be configured to execute an effect mode that combines the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 609 and the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 610 . For example, the effect explained with reference to FIG. It may be configured such that the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big hit state is higher in the effect mode in which the mode and the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 610(B) are combined.

Further, it is preferable to configure such that the ratio of execution of the performance modes with a high degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big win state is low. For example, the performance mode is adjusted so that the ratio of the number of executions of the performance mode with the lower expectation for the occurrence of the big hit state to the number of times of the performance mode with the higher expectation for the occurrence of the big win state is 9:1. It is good to set the execution ratio.

With such a configuration, a simulated image simulating the first movable decorative means (a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the movable right ear frame 7100) displayed on the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) By providing a plurality of display modes of the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, the monotony of the presentation is eliminated, and it becomes possible for the player to take an interest in the first movable decoration means. . In addition, the act of visually recognizing the action itself of the first movable decoration means directly, and the act of visually recognizing the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means and knowing the degree of expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous state for the player. It is possible to provide the player with interest as to which action he enjoys.

In addition, since the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player (jackpot state) will occur is shown to the player by the display mode of the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means, the first movable decoration means is visually recognized. In particular, it is possible to make a reluctant player recognize the presence of the first movable decoration means again.

In addition, the higher the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player (big hit state), the lower the proportion of execution of the performance mode. Although many modes are visually recognized, a performance mode with a high degree of expectation and a low execution rate is rarely seen (for example, once in 10 times), which gives the player a sense of surprise. In addition, the players who have visually recognized the latter presentation mode are excited by the fact that the degree of expectation is high, and they become more interested in the first movable decoration means.

The light emitting states of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are emitted so that they can be recognized in the same manner as the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. It may be configured to allow For example, in the state shown in FIG. 610(A), the outer sides of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are made to emit red light, or in the state shown in FIG. The entire movable frame body 7100 and the movable left ear frame body 7200 may be configured to emit pink light.

In this way, the light emission mode in the second state (positioned at the movement position) of the first movable decorative means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame can be controlled in a predetermined manner. A simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means (a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200) displayed on the display means (game board side effect display device 1600) By making it the same as the image color of the image), when a player visually recognizing the predetermined display means tries to visually recognize the first movable decoration means, the player can quickly recognize the first movable decoration means. becomes possible.

In the substantially central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved in a configuration in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a mode according to the result of the special lottery after starting the variation of the decorative patterns. It may be configured as

For example, when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is to be operated, the variation of the decorative symbols is started at substantially the center of the game board side production display device 1600, and from the state in which the decorative symbols are being varied, the decorative symbols being varied are displayed. is moved to the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600 and displayed in a reduced size, and a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is displayed in the substantially central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. and the display of a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be started.

After that, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the standby position to a position overlapping the substantially central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and further the root vegetable frame is moved from the position overlapping the substantially central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. After the movable frame body 7800 is moved in the direction to be stored in the door frame top unit 570, the decorative pattern that has been displayed on the upper right until then is moved to substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, and then the original size. It is preferable to configure such that the variable display is continued by expanding to 200 mm, and finally the stop display is performed in a manner suggesting the result of the lottery.

When such a decorative symbol variation mode is adopted, the decorative symbol variations are repeated approximately in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

With this configuration, the player's line of sight stays at a predetermined position of the predetermined display means (approximately in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600), and the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable Display of a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means and display of the second movable decoration means are provided for a reluctant player who feels stressed by visually recognizing the drive control of the body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200). The movement of the decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is forced to move the line of sight, and the player feels stress.

At approximately the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, the decorative pattern starts to change, and at the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600, a smaller size than the decorative pattern displayed substantially at the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. Along with starting the variation of the decorative symbols, from the state in which the respective decorative symbols are varied, in the state where the variable display of the decorative symbols during variation is continued on the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600, the game board side. Display of the decorative pattern displayed in the approximate center of the production display device 1600 is temporarily terminated, and a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body are displayed in the approximate center of the game board side production display device 1600. 7200 may be configured to start displaying a simulated image.

After that, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the standby position to a position overlapping the display area in the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the root vegetable frame is moved from the position overlapping the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600. After moving the body 7800 in the direction in which it is housed in the door frame top unit 570, the variable display of the decorative pattern in the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600 is resumed, and finally, together with the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right. , may be stopped and displayed in a mode suggesting the result of the lottery.

When such a variation mode of decorative symbols is employed, the variation of decorative symbols is repeated approximately in the center and upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

By adopting such a configuration, the line of sight of the player stays at a predetermined position of the predetermined display means (approximately in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 where relatively large decorative patterns are displayed). , the first movable decoration means for a reluctant player who feels stressed by visually recognizing the drive control of the first movable decoration means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200). The display of a simulated image imitating the root vegetable frame and the movement of the second movable decoration means (the root vegetable frame movable body 7800) make the player feel as if he/she is forced to move his or her line of sight, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels stress. It becomes possible to

Although an example of displaying a small decorative pattern on the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown, it is configured to be displayed on the lower right or lower left of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is configured to be displayed. During the period of moving from the standby position to the moving position (timing t13 to timing t14 in FIGS. 607(A) and 607(B)) and the period of being positioned at the moving position (timing t14 to timing t18), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves. During the period of movement from the position to the standby position (timing t18 to timing t19 in FIGS. 607(A) and 607(B)), the small decorative pattern is not hidden by the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. may Specifically, during these periods, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the small-sized decorative pattern should not overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, by the movement of the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800), the predetermined position of the predetermined display means (the game board side effect display device 1600 in which relatively small decorative patterns are displayed) By configuring so that the decorative pattern displayed in the lower right or lower left) is not hidden, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a reluctant player feels that the performance is excessive.

613, 614, etc., these display methods may be employed when displaying a simulated image imitating a modeled body and decoration patterns on the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG.

In response to the display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, the game board side effect display device 1600 indicates when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will move. It may be configured to display the waiting time shown. A plurality of display modes will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 611(A) and 611(B). FIG. 611(A) shows a variation of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 607(A). Also, FIG. 611(B) shows a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 607(B).

As a display of the standby time, for example, in the display area between the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, "1" is displayed from timing t8 to timing t9. display a number, display the number "2" from timing t9 to timing t10, display the number "3" from timing t10 to timing t11, display the number "4" from timing t11 to timing t12, A character string “GO!!” (notation is abbreviated as “GO” in FIG. 611A) may be displayed from timing t12 to timing t13. In addition to the display of such numbers and characters, the character string "What if the root vegetables fall...?" It may be configured to be displayed in the display area between the simulated image imitating the movable body 7200 .

Alternatively, without displaying such numbers and characters, the character string "What if root vegetables fall...?" It may be configured to be displayed in the display area between the simulated image imitating the movable body 7200 .

Images (“1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “GO!!”) suggesting the waiting time until the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) operates. is displayed on a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) can be visually recognized. The player can recognize the timing when the second movable decoration means operates, and by displaying a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means, the player's line of sight is moved to the first movable decoration means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a person overlooks the operation of the second movable decoration means. Further, for a passive player who does not move his/her line of sight toward the first movable decoration means, the operation timing of the second movable decoration means is suggested, so that the player can move his/her line of sight from the predetermined display means. It is possible to make the operation of the second movable decoration means wait without delay.

Also, at the same timing (timing t7) as the timing of displaying the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means, an image suggesting that the second movable decoration means operates at a predetermined timing (“If the root vegetables fall, ?”), the player can simultaneously recognize that the first movable decoration means is operating and that the second movable decoration means is operating. A particularly active player moves his line of sight first to the first movable decoration means and does not notice that the display suggesting that the second movable decoration means is being operated is being performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation of the second movable decoration means is overlooked.

In addition, by displaying an image suggesting a waiting time until the second movable decoration means operates near and adjacent to the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means, the player can enjoy the second movable decoration means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user does not notice that the image suggesting the waiting time until the means operates is displayed.

An example of displaying an image suggesting a waiting time until the second movable decoration means operates in the display area between the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. However, the second movable decoration means operates so as to overlap one or both of the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200. It is also possible to display an image suggesting a waiting time until the movement or an image suggesting that the second movable decoration means will operate.

By adopting such a configuration, an image suggesting the wait time until the player operates the second movable decoration means and an image suggesting that the second movable decoration means will operate are displayed. It is possible to further suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user does not notice that the user is there.

In response to the display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, the game board side effect display device 1600 indicates when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will move. Although an example of displaying the expected waiting time has been shown, instead of or in addition to such a display, a similar suggestion may be made by sound. For example, in the display area between the simulated image simulating the right ear-frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear-frame movable body 7200, as shown in FIGS. The voice "ichi" is output from t8 to timing t9, the voice "ni" is output from timing t9 to timing t10, the voice "san" is output from timing t10 to timing t11, and the voice "san" is output from timing t11 to timing t12. It may be configured to output the voice "Yon" and output the voice "Goo" from timing t12 to timing t13. Alternatively, from the timing t7 to the timing t13, the line "Konsai gararakka ba" is output as a voice, or some melody (the melody of about 6 seconds is output at least at the timing t13) is output. may be configured.

In this way, by adopting a configuration that outputs a sound suggesting a waiting time until the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) operates, the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100) , left ear frame movable body 7200), even when the line of sight has moved to the first movable decoration means, the timing at which the second movable decoration means operates can be audibly recognized. Thus, it is possible to fully enjoy the operation of the first movable decoration means until just before the second movable decoration means operates.

Furthermore, in the case of a player who does not move his line of sight with respect to the first movable decoration means, he visually recognizes predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) for performing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means. As for the action itself, the player does not necessarily continue to visually recognize the predetermined display means by operating a mobile phone or smartphone, but the timing of the operation of the second movable decoration means is audibly indicated to the player by sound. Therefore, it is possible to restore the willingness to visually recognize the predetermined display means and the second movable decorative means.

607(A) and 607(B) show an embodiment in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to a position overlapping the simulated images imitating the left and right ear frame movable bodies in a front view. After moving the frame movable body 7800 to the moving position, it may be configured to periodically move up and down at the moving position. For example, during the four seconds from timing t14 to timing t18, it may be configured to repeat such up-and-down movement four times in total by moving up once per second and then moving down. . During the movement at this time, at least part of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved to the area where the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 were displayed in a front view. may be configured to move within a range overlapping with .

Thus, the position where the simulated image simulating the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) with the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) was displayed. After moving to a moving position where the second movable decoration means overlaps with the second movable decoration means when viewed from the front, at least a part of the second movable decoration means moves so as to overlap the area where the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means was displayed when viewed from the front. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a reluctant player feels stress due to the movement of the second movable decoration means after the movement to the movement position.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 605 and 606, since the player can directly touch the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, the player may be injured by the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 falling downward. Otherwise, there is a possibility that the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is pulled downward by the player and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the like are destroyed. Therefore, an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 605 and 606 will be described with reference to FIG. 612 . In this embodiment, it is difficult for the player to touch the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 .

612(A) and 612(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 612(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 612(D) and 612(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 612(A), 612(C), and 612(D) show that the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are at the standby position in the door frame top unit 570. Shows the stowed state. 612(B) and 612(E) show a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 have moved to the movement positions.

As shown in FIG. 612, in this embodiment, a root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 that covers the movement area of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is provided. The root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 is provided in front of the door frame base unit 100 and below the door frame top unit 570, and includes a cover unit frame 7852 having a square shape in front view and a right triangle shape in side view, A cover unit front portion 7854 that covers the square portion formed on the front by the cover unit frame 7852, a cover unit right side portion 7856 that covers the right triangle portions formed on the left and right sides by the cover unit frame 7852, and a cover unit left side. and a surface portion 7858 .

The cover unit frame 7852 is made of colored (specifically, green) opaque synthetic resin. In addition, in order to increase the strength of the cover unit frame 7852, it may be made of metal. Also, the cover unit frame 7852 has a function of holding a cover unit front face portion 7854 , a cover unit right side face portion 7856 and a cover unit left side face portion 7858 .

The cover unit front surface portion 7854, the cover unit right side surface portion 7856, and the cover unit left side surface portion 7858 are each formed of a flat plate-like colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The cover unit front part 7854 is configured to be attached to the cover unit frame 7852 in a tilted state so that its upper part is located on the front side in a side view. A cover unit right side surface portion 7856 and a cover unit left side surface portion 7858 are provided so as to face each other at the left and right ends of the gaming machine.

A player can visually recognize the operating state of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 through the colorless and transparent cover unit front face portion 7854 . Also, a player who plays a game in an adjacent game machine can visually recognize the operation state of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 through the cover unit right side surface 7856 and the cover unit left side surface 7858 . It is possible.

A gaming machine that employs such a configuration may be configured to execute the presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 607 and the like.

In this way, the protective members (cover unit front surface 7854, cover unit right side surface 7856, cover unit left side surface 7858) are arranged so as to surround the movement area of the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800), By adopting a configuration that makes it difficult for the player to touch the second movable decoration means and that the player can visually recognize the second movable decoration means through a transparent protective member, the second movable decoration means can be viewed. While maintaining the visibility of the movable decoration means and the impact given to the player when the second movable decoration means operates, the situation that the player is injured due to the movement of the second movable decoration means, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player destroys the second movable decoration means.

528 to 532, 535 to 538, and 541, the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 547 and 550 to 554, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 may be provided. Also, in such an embodiment, each effect mode described in this specification may be configured to be executed.

Although an example in which the cover unit frame 7852 holds the cover unit front face portion 7854, the cover unit right side face portion 7856, and the cover unit left side face portion 7858 is shown, either or both of the cover unit right side face portion 7856 and the cover unit left side face portion 7858 may be held. It may be configured so as not to be provided. For example, the cover unit frame 7852 may have only the cover unit front portion 7854 , or the cover unit frame 7852 may have only the cover unit front portion 7854 and the cover unit left side portion 7858 .

In this way, the protective member (cover unit front portion 7854; or cover unit front portion 7854 and cover unit right side portion 7856; 7854 and the left side of the cover unit 7858) to contact the second movable decoration means from the sides (right and left, left only, or right only). In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the player can visually recognize the second movable decoration means through the protective member, the visibility of the second movable decoration means and when the second movable decoration means operates A situation in which the player is injured due to the movement of the second movable decoration means while maintaining the impact given to the player, or a situation in which the second movable decoration means is impulsively destroyed by the player. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of Furthermore, since it is possible to touch the second movable decoration means from the side surface where the protective member is not provided, even if some kind of abnormality occurs in the second movable decoration means, maintenance such as repairs can be carried out by the amusement store staff. etc. can be performed.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 605 to 612, etc., it is possible to make the player fully feel the interest by operating the movable decoration means provided on the frame constituting the outer shape of the game machine. Even if it is not possible to do so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the interest felt by the player is reduced.

[39. Movable frame]
By the way, in the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. It is possible to excite the player by driving the modeled body provided on the frame constituting the outer shape of the game machine at a predetermined timing. However, there is room for improvement in the mode of presentation when a plurality of shaped bodies are provided in the frame.

An embodiment of a game machine capable of sufficiently stimulating the player's interest even if the frame has a plurality of drivable shaped bodies will be described below.

The game machine in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450, which are frame movable bodies imitating the outside of the ear (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ear outer frame movable body"). Each of these four frame movable bodies can independently assume a state of being positioned at the standby position and a state of being positioned at the moving position.

Below, with reference to FIGS. 613, 614, 615, and 616, a first rendering mode using the outer ear frame movable body and a second rendering mode using the inner ear frame movable body will be described. . FIGS. 613 and 614 are time charts for the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and FIGS. 615 and 616 are front views showing states of the gaming machine at predetermined timings of such effect modes. .

The first effect mode will be described below with reference to FIGS. 613(A) and 615. FIG. 613(A) and 613(B) have a movable inner ear frame movable body and an outer ear frame movable body, like the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 541. It shows a presentation mode that can be applied to the gaming machine.

First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative patterns, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern fluctuates. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t8, the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 causes the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upper movement position. to start. At the same time, at timing t8, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450.

FIG. 615A shows a state in which display of a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is started at timing t8. The display of the simulated image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is started immediately after this (after 0.1 seconds or the like).

From timing t8 to timing t10, drive control is performed to move the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the movement positions. Simultaneously, a simulated image simulating the manner in which the movable body 7350 of the right ear outer frame moves to the movement position and a simulated image simulating the manner in which the movable body 7450 of the left ear outer frame moves to the movement position are dynamically displayed. be done.

Next, at timing t10, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 complete movement to the movement positions. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a simulated image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are also displayed in a manner simulating a state in which movement to the movement position is completed.

FIG. 615B shows a state in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have completed their movement to the movement positions at timing t10, and a simulated image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left It shows a state in which a simulated image simulating the outer ear frame movable body 7450 is displayed in a manner simulating a state in which movement to the movement position is completed.

From timing t10 to timing t16, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 continue to be positioned at the movement positions. At the same time, the display of the simulated image simulating the state in which the movable body 7350 of the right ear outer frame is located at the moving position and the simulated image simulating the state in which the movable body 7450 of the left ear outer frame is located at the moving position are also continued.

Next, at timing t16, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start moving from the upward movement position to the standby position accommodated in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. At the same time, a simulated image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a simulated image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are dynamically displayed in such a manner that they start to move to the standby position.

From timing t16 to timing t18, drive control is performed to move the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the standby position. A simulated image simulating a mode in which the movable body 7350 of the right ear outer frame moves to the standby position and a simulated image simulating a mode in which the movable body 7450 of the left ear outer frame moves to the standby position are dynamically displayed. .

At timing t18, the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the standby position is completed, and they are housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. At the same time, the display mode of the simulated image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the simulated image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 becomes the display mode in which the movement to the standby position is completed. Specifically, after a state in which only the simulated image simulating the door-frame top unit 570 is displayed for a moment, the display of the simulated image simulating the door-frame top unit 570 also ends.

At a predetermined timing after timing t18, the fluctuation of the central decorative pattern that has been fluctuating ends, and the result of the special lottery is a pattern (for example, "444") indicating a big win, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

The second presentation mode will be described below with reference to FIGS. 613(B) and 616. FIG. First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative patterns, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern fluctuates. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t5, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400.

FIG. 616A shows a state in which display of a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is started at timing t5. The display of the simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is started immediately after this (after 0.1 seconds or the like).

From timing t5 to timing t7, a simulated image simulating a mode in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 moves to the movement position and a simulated image simulating a mode in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 moves to the movement position. is displayed dynamically.

At timing t7, a simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a manner simulating a state in which movement to the movement position is completed.

FIG. 616(B) simulates the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in a state where the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are still housed in the door frame top unit 570 at timing t7. The simulated image and the simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a manner simulating the state in which the movement to the movement position is completed.

Next, at timing t8, the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 causes the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to move upward from the standby position accommodated in the door frame top unit 570. start moving.

Next, at timing t10, the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left inner ear frame movable body 7400 complete movement to the movement positions.

FIG. 616(C) shows a state in which the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left inner ear frame movable body 7400 have completed movement to the movement positions at timing t10, and a simulated image simulating the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left A simulated image simulating the inner ear frame movable body 7400 is displayed in a manner simulating a state in which the movement to the movement position is completed.

From timing t10 to timing t16, the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left inner ear frame movable body 7400 continue to be positioned at the movement position. At the same time, a simulated image simulating a mode in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is positioned at the movement position and a simulated image simulating a mode in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is positioned at the movement position are displayed.

Next, at timing t16, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 start moving from the upward movement position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are dynamically displayed in such a manner that they start to move to the standby position.

From timing t16 to timing t18, drive control is performed to move the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to the standby position. A simulated image simulating a mode in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 moves to the standby position and a simulated image simulating a mode in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 moves to the standby position are dynamically displayed. .

At timing t<b>18 , the movement of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to the standby position is completed, and they are housed in the door frame top unit 570 . At the same time, the display mode of the simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 becomes the display mode in which the movement to the standby position is completed. Specifically, after a state in which only the simulated image simulating the door-frame top unit 570 is displayed for a moment, the display of the simulated image simulating the door-frame top unit 570 also ends.

At a predetermined timing after timing t18, the fluctuation of the central decorative pattern that has been fluctuating ends, and the result of the special lottery is a pattern (for example, "444") indicating a big win, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 driven and controlled in the second rendering mode are the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7350 driven and controlled in the first rendering mode. Compared to the body 7450, the front view area in the state of moving to the movement position is smaller. Therefore, in the second presentation mode, after a predetermined time has passed after starting to display a simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the right ear inner side By performing drive control of the frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, it is configured to compensate for the sense of volume as a performance.

613(A) and 613(B) can be replaced by a movable inner ear frame movable body as in the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. Although an example of application to a gaming machine having the outer ear frame movable body has been shown, it may also be applied to the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 542 . In this case, since the inner ear frame movable body moves from the upper waiting position to the lower moving position, the simulated image of the inner ear frame movable body is also displayed from above within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It becomes a display mode that moves downward. Also, it may be applied to the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. In this case, since the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear frame movable body move from the lower standby position to the upper moving position, the simulated images of the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear frame movable body are also displayed in the game. In the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, the display mode is such that it moves from the bottom to the top. Alternatively, the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear frame movable body are respectively moved from the upper standby position to the lower moving position, and the simulated images of the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear frame movable body are also displayed on the game board side. An effect mode may be adopted in which the display mode moves from top to bottom within the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

The first effect mode will be described below with reference to FIG. 614(A). 614(A) and 614(B) can be applied to a game machine having a rotatable inner ear frame movable body and an outer ear frame movable body as shown in FIGS. 547 and 550. It shows a directing mode.

First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative patterns, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern fluctuates. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t8, due to drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 change from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotated state. . At the same time, at timing t8, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in a dynamic mode imitating a rotated state.

From timing t8 to timing t18, the rotation states of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the door frame top unit 570 in the game board side effect display device 1600, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left The display of the simulated image simulating the outer ear frame movable body 7450 is continued.

At timing t18, the state of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from the rotating state to the stopped state housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. At the same time, the display of the simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 ends.

At a predetermined timing after the timing t24, the variation of the decorative pattern in the center during variation is completed, and the result of the special lottery is a symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the result is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

The second presentation mode will be described below with reference to FIG. 614(B). First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative patterns, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern fluctuates. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t5, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in a dynamic mode imitating a rotated state.

At timing t8, the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 changes the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotated state. .

From timing t8 to timing t18, the rotation states of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the door frame top unit 570 in the game board side effect display device 1600, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7300 are changed. The display of the simulated image simulating the ear inner frame movable body 7400 is continued.

At timing t<b>18 , the state of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 changes from the rotating state to the stopped state accommodated in the door frame top unit 570 . At the same time, the display of the simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 ends.

At a predetermined timing after the timing t24, the variation of the decorative pattern in the center during variation is completed, and the result of the special lottery is a symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the result is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 driven and controlled in the second rendering mode are the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7350 driven and controlled in the first rendering mode. Compared to the body 7450, the maximum area visible in front view in the rotated state is smaller. Therefore, in the second presentation mode, after a predetermined time has passed after starting to display a simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the right ear inner side By performing drive control of the frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body, it is configured to compensate for the sense of volume as an effect.

In this way, the first molded body provided on the frame (the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450) and the second molded body provided on the frame (the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and left ear inner frame movable body 7400). It is configured to start driving the second modeled body at the timing when time has passed. As a result, even when a plurality of shaped bodies are provided in the frame, it is possible to visually increase the sense of volume in the presentation using the second shaped body. In addition, by displaying a simulated image simulating the second modeled body in advance on the predetermined display means, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the drive control of the second modeled body. .

In addition, among the plurality of shaped bodies (first shaped body and second shaped body) provided in the game machine, the size of the shaped body itself and the amount of visual change when the shaped body is driven and controlled are relative. In order to control the drive of the second modeled body, which is relatively small and is not conspicuous to be driven and controlled, at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of display of the simulated image simulating the second modeled body, the second It is configured to start driving the modeled body. As a result, it is possible to visually increase the sense of volume in the production using the second shaped body, which has a small visual change in size and is less noticeable when being driven and controlled. Become. In addition, by displaying a simulated image simulating the second modeled body in advance on the predetermined display means, it is possible to drive the second modeled body, which is relatively small in size and so on and which is likely to be overlooked for drive control. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the control.

In addition, at the timing corresponding to the driving of the first modeled bodies (right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450), a simulated image simulating the first shaped body is displayed on a predetermined display means (game board). By displaying on the side effect display device 1600), it is possible to show the player that the first molded body is being driven and controlled.

Modified examples of the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode described with reference to FIG. 613 will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 617(A) shows a modification of the display mode of the simulated image of the first molded object in the first rendering mode described with reference to FIG. 613(A). In Modified Example 1, the simulated image of the first modeled object is displayed from the first state to the second state from timing t7 to timing t9. Further, in Modified Example 2, the display of changing the simulated image of the first modeled object from the first state to the second state is performed from timing t9 to timing t11. Further, in Modified Example 3, after the display of changing the simulated image of the first modeled body from the first state to the second state is performed from timing t7 to timing t9, the display simulating the second state is performed. ends at timing t11, and from timing t11 to timing t13, the simulated image of the first modeled object is displayed to change from the first state to the second state.

In this manner, the timing at which the display of the simulated image simulating the first modeled object is started may be somewhat delayed with respect to the timing at which the drive control of the first modeled object is started. Alternatively, the timing for ending the display of the simulated image simulating the first modeled object may be the timing before the timing for the first modeled object to enter the first state. Similar effects can be obtained even when such a configuration is employed.

FIG. 617(B) shows a modification of the display mode of the simulated image of the second molded object in the second rendering mode described with reference to FIG. 613(B). In Modification 1, the simulated image of the second modeled object in the second state is displayed from timing t5 to timing t8. Further, in Modification 2, the simulated image of the second modeled body in the second state is displayed from timing t5 to timing t9.

In this way, as the simulated image of the second modeled body, an image simulating the second state in which the second modeled body is drive-controlled is suddenly displayed, and the drive control of the second modeled body is performed. The display may be configured to continue until the start timing. Similar effects can be obtained even when such a configuration is adopted.

Modified examples of the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode described with reference to FIG. 614 will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 618(A) shows a modification of the display mode of the simulated image of the first molded object in the first rendering mode described with reference to FIG. 614(A). In Modification 1, the simulated image of the first modeled object is displayed from timing t7 to timing t18. Further, in Modification 2, the simulated image of the first modeled object is displayed from timing t9 to timing t18. Further, in Modification 3, the simulated image of the first modeled object is displayed from timing t7 to timing t13.

In this manner, the timing at which the display of the simulated image simulating the first modeled object is started may be somewhat delayed with respect to the timing at which the drive control of the first modeled object is started. Alternatively, the timing for ending the display of the simulated image simulating the first modeled object may be the timing before the timing for the first modeled object to enter the first state. Similar effects can be obtained even when such a configuration is adopted.

FIG. 618(B) shows a modification of the display mode of the simulated image of the second molded object in the second rendering mode described with reference to FIG. 614(B). In Modification 1, the simulated image of the second modeled object in the second state is displayed from timing t5 to timing t8. Further, in Modification 2, the simulated image of the second modeled body in the second state is displayed from timing t5 to timing t9.

In this manner, an image simulating the second state in which the second modeled body is driven and controlled is displayed as the simulated image of the second modeled body, and the drive control of the second modeled body is started. It may be configured to continue to display until the timing to be displayed. Similar effects can be obtained even when such a configuration is employed.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 613(A) and 614(A), a simulated image simulating the first shaped body is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the first effect mode. However, it may be configured so that the simulated image simulating the first modeled object is not displayed in the first presentation mode.

By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to secure a display area in the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600). It is possible to keep displaying.

Alternatively, instead of displaying a simulated image simulating the first modeled object in the first rendering mode, a display may be provided to indicate that the first modeled object is being driven and controlled. For example, the game board-side effect display device 1600 may be configured to display a message "My ears may have popped out?!" or a message "Look up?!".

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the first modeled body is being driven and controlled.

Compared to the first modeled object and the second modeled object, the second modeled object has a smaller area in a front view in a drive-controlled state and is less conspicuous. Before the second modeled body is driven and controlled, a simulated image simulating the second modeled body is displayed. It may be configured so as to display a simulated image imitating the modeled body.

If the amount of movement of the second shaped body in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction when the drive is controlled is shorter than that of the first shaped body, the second shaped body is less noticeable. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 615 and 616, the first modeled body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450) is driven and controlled to move upward from the standby position. 10 cm, when the second shaped body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400) is controlled to move upward by 5 cm from the standby position, the drive control of the second shaped body is It is less conspicuous than the first modeled body. In such a case, by displaying a simulated image of the second modeled object, it is possible to secure a sense of volume as a presentation.

In this way, when the moving distance of the second shaped body is smaller than the moving distance of the first shaped body when the drive is controlled, prior to the drive control of the second shaped body, the second shaped body is moved. By displaying the simulated image of , it is possible to secure a sense of volume as a production.

Alternatively, if the movement speed of the second modeled body is slower when the first modeled body and the second modeled body are driven and controlled, the first modeled body and the second modeled body that are rotatable are driven. In the case where the second modeled body has a slower angular velocity when rotated by control, or in the case where the time during which the first modeled body and the second modeled body are driven and controlled is shorter for the second modeled body, etc. , a simulated image of the second shaped body may be displayed prior to the drive control of the second shaped body. In this case as well, it is possible to secure a sense of volume as the effect in the effect using the second modeled body.

A simulated image simulating the second shaped body is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and the number of times of the dynamic display is used to indicate to the player the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big win. good too. For example, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 613(B), in addition to the dynamic display performed from timing t5 to timing t7, it is possible to execute a performance mode in which similar dynamic display is performed from timing t3 to timing t5. can be configured to Furthermore, from the timing t1 to the timing t3, a similar dynamic display may be performed. Further, in addition to the dynamic display performed from timing t5 to timing t7, it may be possible to execute a performance mode in which similar dynamic display is performed from timing t7 to timing t9. Further, from the timing t9 to the timing t11, a similar dynamic display effect mode may be configured to be executable.

In this way, the dynamic display of the simulated image simulating the second modeled body is repeatedly executed before or after the drive control of the second modeled body, and a state advantageous to the player occurs depending on the number of repetitions. By adopting a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation to be made, it is possible to further increase the sense of volume as a performance of the second modeled body, and in addition, the movement of the second modeled body provided in the frame. Either the act of directly viewing the object itself, or the act of viewing a simulated image simulating the second molded object displayed on a predetermined display means and knowing the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur. It is possible to provide the player with the interest of enjoying the game.

In addition, a plurality of simulated images with different display modes are prepared in advance as simulated images simulating the second molded body, and the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big win is given to the player according to the type of displayed simulated image. It may be configured as shown. For example, when a large simulated image simulating the second modeled object and a small simulated image simulating the second modeled object are prepared in advance, and a large simulated image simulating the second modeled object is displayed. It may be configured so that the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big win is higher in the case of . Alternatively, a white simulated image imitating the second molded object and a red simulated image imitating the second molded object are prepared in advance, and the red simulated image imitating the second molded object is displayed. It may be configured so that the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big win is higher in the case of winning.

In this way, it is possible to execute a plurality of different display modes as the dynamic display mode of the simulated image simulating the second modeled body, suggesting the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur depending on the type of displayed simulated image. By adopting such a configuration, the variation of the display mode of the simulated image imitating the second modeled object increases, and in addition to being able to further increase the sense of volume as a production, the frame is provided with The action of directly viewing the movement of the second shaped body itself that is displayed, and the expectation that a situation that is advantageous to the player will occur by viewing the simulated image imitating the second shaped body displayed on the predetermined display means. It is possible to provide the player with the interest of which action of the action of knowing the degree to enjoy.

It should be noted that when suggesting the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur by means of the display mode of the simulated image simulating the second modeled body, the second modeled body is driven and controlled. Although the motions of the two shaped bodies themselves are in the same motion mode, the motion mode of the second shaped body is made different, and the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur depending on the motion mode of the second shaped body. It is good also as a structure which suggests.

In the second production mode, after displaying a simulated image simulating the second modeled object, the second modeled object is driven and controlled. good. For example, from timing t5 to timing t18 in the second rendering mode described with reference to FIGS. It should be configured as follows.

In this way, the third rendering mode without displaying the simulated image of the second molded body can be executed in addition to the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode. It is possible to provide the player with an unexpected and tense performance mode in which the second shaped body, which is relatively inconspicuous compared to the shaped body, is being driven without realizing it.

When driving the first molded body, an evocation sound indicating that the first molded body is driven may be output. For example, in the first rendering mode described with reference to FIGS. may be configured to output an evocative sound indicating that the modeled body is driven. Alternatively, the evocation sound indicating that the first shaped body is driven is output from timing t6 to timing t10 so that the evoked sound is output even after the driving of the first shaped body is controlled. Good to configure. Alternatively, an evocative sound indicating that the first modeled object is being driven is output from timing t8 to timing t12 so that the evocative sound is output after drive control of the first modeled object is started. It should be configured as follows.

By adopting such a configuration, by driving the first shaped body, which has a relatively large size and movement amount, among the plurality of shaped bodies (the first shaped body and the second shaped body), the player can move. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation as Note that when the second modeled body is driven, a simulated image simulating the second modeled body is displayed, so that such an evocative sound is not output.

With reference to FIGS. 613A, 614A, etc., an example of outputting an evocation sound during a predetermined period (timing t6 to timing t8 or timing t6 to timing t10) has been shown. Alternatively, the configuration relating to the special alerting sound described above with reference to FIGS. 569, 570 and the like may be employed.

In order to drive the second modeled body, during either the display period of the simulated image simulating the second modeled body or the period during the drive control of the second modeled body, or both, during the change, as BGM It may be configured so as to suppress the volume of the output fluctuating effect sound. For example, in the second production mode described with reference to FIGS. 613(A) and 613(B), until timing t5, the fluctuating production sound is output in a normal mode, and a simulation simulating the second molded object is performed. In the period from timing t5 to timing t8, which is the period from when the image is displayed until the drive control of the second modeling object is started, the fluctuating effect sound is output in a mode that is more suppressed than in the normal mode. Good to configure. Alternatively, until timing t5, the fluctuating effect sound is output in a normal manner, and the simulated image simulating the second modeled object is displayed until the drive control of the second modeled object is terminated. In the period from timing t5 to timing t18, the fluctuating effect sound may be output in a more restrained manner than in a normal manner. In addition, in the suppression state, it is preferable to set the volume to half or less of that in the normal state.

By changing the output state of the fluctuating effect sound from the normal state to the suppressed state in accordance with the display of the simulated image simulating the second modeled object in this way, a plurality of modeled objects (the first modeled object and the second modeled object) are displayed. The player can concentrate on the fact that the second shaped body, which is relatively smaller in size, is driven or is being driven.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 613 to 616 and the like, by providing a plurality of shaped bodies in the frame, the size of each shaped body and the movable range when each shaped body is driven can be changed. Even in the case of restriction, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the interest felt by the player is reduced when each modeled body is driven alone.

[40. Movable frame]
By the way, in the game machine described with reference to FIGS. Thus, it is possible to make the player feel interesting. However, if the player does not notice the movement of the movable decoration means, the player may be injured by contacting the movable decoration means with his or her head or fingers. there were.

An embodiment of a gaming machine capable of suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which a player is injured by the movable decoration means will be described below.

A first effect mode and a second effect mode applicable to the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 612 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 619(A) and 619(B). Note that the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 in this embodiment is provided inside the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 as described with reference to FIGS. is difficult to construct.

A first presentation mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described below with reference to FIG. 619(A).

In the first effect mode, first, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative symbols at a predetermined timing before the timing t0. It becomes a ready-to-win state (for example, "4↓4") in which only the decorative pattern in the center changes.

Next, at timing t5, the output of an evocative sound for notifying that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 will operate is started. Next, at timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are moved from the standby position accommodated in the door frame top unit 570 to the upward movement position by drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. to start.

From timing t7 to timing t9, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement positions. At this time, the wake-up sound is also continuously output.

At timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete movement to the movement positions. At the same time, the output of the evocative sound that has been continuously output since timing t5 ends.

Next, at timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the movement position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. From timing t22 to timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position overlapping substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t26, the movement of root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at timing t28, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upward movement position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIG.

From timing t28 to timing t30, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position. At timing t30, the movement of right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the fluctuation of the central decorative pattern that has been fluctuating ends, and the result of the special lottery is either a pattern (for example, "444") indicating a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

A second rendering mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described below with reference to FIG. 619(B). Note that, unlike the first effect mode, no evoking sound is output in the second effect mode. Also, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are configured to start their operations at the same time.

In the second effect mode, first, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the variation of decorative patterns is started in the game board side effect display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped at the same pattern, It becomes a ready-to-win state (for example, "4↓4") in which only the decorative pattern in the center changes.

Next, at timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the movement position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At the same time, due to drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upper movement position.

At timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. From timing t22 to timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position overlapping substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view. On the other hand, at timing t23, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement positions is completed.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t26, the movement of root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at timing t28, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upward movement position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIG.

From timing t28 to timing t30, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position. At timing t30, the movement of right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the fluctuation of the central decorative pattern that has been fluctuating ends, and the result of the special lottery is either a pattern (for example, "444") indicating a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

Root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 possessed by the game machine explained with reference to FIG. 620(A) and 620(B), a description will be given of a first effect mode and a second effect mode that can be executed in the game machine having the movable frame body 7200. do.

A first presentation mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described below with reference to FIG. 620(A).

In the first effect mode, first, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative symbols at a predetermined timing before the timing t0. It becomes a ready-to-win state (for example, "4↓4") in which only the decorative pattern in the center changes.

Next, at timing t5, output of an evocative sound for notifying that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 will move thereafter starts. Next, at timing t7, due to drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is changed from the standby state housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotating state. Let

At timing t9, the output of the evocative sound that has been continuously output since timing t5 ends.

Next, at timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the movement position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. From timing t22 to timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position overlapping substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t26, the movement of root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. Next, at timing t30, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from the rotating state to the state in which the rotation is stopped and stored in the standby position.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the fluctuation of the central decorative pattern that has been fluctuating ends, and the result of the special lottery is either a pattern (for example, "444") indicating a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

A second presentation mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described below with reference to FIG. 620(B). Note that, unlike the first effect mode, no evoking sound is output in the second effect mode. Also, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are configured to start their operations at the same time.

In the second effect mode, first, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the variation of decorative patterns is started in the game board side effect display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped at the same pattern, It becomes a ready-to-win state (for example, "4↓4") in which only the decorative pattern in the center changes.

Next, at timing t21, due to drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is changed from the standby state housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotating state. Let

At the timing t21, at the same time, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the movement position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. From timing t22 to timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position overlapping substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t26, the movement of root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. Next, at timing t30, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from the rotating state to the state in which the rotation is stopped and stored in the standby position.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the fluctuation of the central decorative pattern that has been fluctuating ends, and the result of the special lottery is either a pattern (for example, "444") indicating a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

In the first production mode and the second production mode described with reference to FIGS. 619(A) and 619(B), or in the first presentation mode described with reference to FIGS. The operation mode of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is common in the presentation mode and the second presentation mode. On the other hand, in the first presentation mode, after the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 operate with the output of an evocative sound, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 operates after a predetermined period of time. On the other hand, in the second presentation mode, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start operating at the same timing as the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 without outputting the evocative sound. It is configured.

Thus, when the first movable decorative means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame operates independently, the evocative sound is output in advance, so that the game is played. Since the player pays attention to the first movable decoration means, the player's careless action (for example, standing up) can prevent the player from contacting the first movable decoration means and being injured. It is possible to suppress the occurrence.

On the other hand, when the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is operated together with the first movable decoration means, it is configured not to output an evocative sound. This is because the second movable decoration means moves to a position overlapping predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in a front view, so that the player's consciousness is directed to the vicinity of the predetermined display means. This is because the player is less likely to make careless movements, and the player is less likely to be injured even if the first movable decoration means provided on the frame is in motion.

619(A), 620(A), etc., an example of outputting an evocation sound during a predetermined period (timing t5 to timing t9) has been shown. 570 or the like may be configured to employ the configuration relating to the special alert sound described above.

FIG. 621 shows a modification of the rendering mode described with reference to FIG. Also, FIG. 622 shows a modification of the effect mode described with reference to FIG. In these modifications, in the second presentation mode, at timing t22 when the movement of the movable root frame frame body 7800 to the movement position is completed, the movable right ear frame body 7100 and the movable left ear frame body 7200 move to the movement position. It is configured to initiate a move operation.

In this way, at the timing when the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) starts to operate and moves to a position overlapping the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in front view, the second 1 (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) starts to move, the player's consciousness is directed toward the vicinity of the predetermined display means, and the player is prevented from being careless. Movement becomes difficult, and even if the first movable decoration means provided on the frame moves, the player is less likely to get injured.

It may be configured such that the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery will result in a big hit is higher in the second effect mode than in the first effect mode. Also, the frequency with which the first effect mode is executed may be higher than the frequency with which the second effect mode is executed. For example, out of 100 special lotteries, the first effect mode is performed about 5 times (performed with a probability of 5%), and the second effect mode is performed about once (performed with a probability of 1%). may be configured to be performed).

In this way, in the first production mode with a high execution frequency and a low expectation of a big hit, by outputting an evocative sound, the first movable decoration means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear The action of the frame movable body 7200) is called out to the player. In particular, since the player's level of expectation is low and the player's attention to the first movable decoration means is in a scattered state, such arousal is effective.

On the other hand, in the second performance mode in which the frequency of execution is low and the expectation of a big hit is high, no evocative sound is output, and the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) operates together with the first movable decoration means. I am letting In this case, since the expectation of a big hit is high, the player's line of sight is concentrated in the vicinity of the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) to which the second movable decoration means moves, and careless actions ( etc.), there is no need to output an evocative sound when operating the first movable decoration means.

On the other hand, since the clerk of the amusement arcade can visually recognize the operation of the first movable decoration means from a distance, there is a high possibility that a state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state) will occur. can be recognized, and it is possible to provide the player with a predetermined service (exchange of dollar boxes, processing of stopping in fixed-rate gaming machines, etc.).

In addition, if an evocative sound is output in a state of high expectation, it is conceivable that the player may become discouraged, but by not outputting the evocative sound, the occurrence of such a situation is suppressed. It becomes possible to

It is preferable to output an evocative sound at the beginning or middle of the variation of the decorative pattern, but not to output the evocative sound at the middle of the variation of the decorative pattern.

By adopting such a configuration, unnecessary sound is not output at the final stage of variation in which the variation result of the decorative pattern is displayed, and the player can concentrate on the state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on the predetermined display means. .

In the first effect mode, when outputting the evocative sound, the fluctuating effect sound may be suppressed. For example, in the period from timing t5 to timing t9 and the period from timing t4 to timing t10 in the first presentation mode shown in FIGS. should be

On the other hand, in the second presentation mode, the fluctuating presentation sound is suppressed until the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves downward, and the suppression of the fluctuating presentation sound is released at the same time when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves downward. You may For example, in the period from timing t18 to timing t21 and the period from timing t18 to timing t26 in the second production mode shown in FIGS. should be

With this configuration, in the first effect mode, the evocative sound is output while the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed. will be effectively notified to

Further, in the second effect mode, the movement of the second movable decoration means is suppressed by suppressing the fluctuating effect sound for a predetermined period before the movement of the second movable decoration means is started. It becomes easier to convey to the player.

619, 620, etc., an example of suppressing the fluctuating effect sound in a predetermined period has been shown. It may be configured to employ a configuration relating to a variable effect sound or a special evocation sound.

In the first effect mode, the action of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . For example, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. The display of moving the simulated image upward may be displayed from timing t5 to timing t9 in the first effect mode described with reference to FIGS.

On the other hand, in the second effect mode, the game board side effect display device 1600 may not display such a display when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are operated.

By performing such a display, it is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the first movable decoration means will operate in the first presentation mode. On the other hand, in the second rendering mode, by not performing such a display when the first movable decoration means operates, excessive rendering around the predetermined display means is suppressed. can be done. In addition to the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means, another image (for example, an image of an upward arrow) is displayed on the predetermined display means in a manner suggesting the position where the first movable decoration means is provided. may be configured to be displayed in

In the first production mode and the second production mode, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 that has moved to the movement position is moved to the standby position based on the player's operation of a predetermined operation unit (push button, lever, etc.). It may be configured to allow For example, in the first production mode and the second production mode, when the player operates the predetermined operation unit at timing t23, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the moving position from timing t23 to timing t24. It should be moved to the standby position.

In this way, it may be configured such that the time during which the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is positioned at the movement position can be changed according to the operation by the player. As a result, it becomes difficult for other players to notice that the second movable decoration means is operating, and the degree of expectation from other players that a state advantageous to the player (big hit state) will occur is high. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a person is subjected to harassment or the like based on distortion.

In the modified examples of the first production mode and the second production mode in FIGS. The first movable decoration means may be configured to be driven early. That is, in the modifications shown in FIGS. 621 and 622, the second movable decoration means, which starts to operate before the first decoration means, is repeatedly viewed by the player who plays the game repeatedly. Therefore, the operation of the first movable decoration means becomes impatient. Therefore, the operation of the second movable decoration means is not always performed for a certain period of time before the first movable decoration means is operated, but the operation of the second movable decoration means is started by operating the button. By making it possible to drive the first movable decoration means at an appropriate timing after the display, the first movable decoration means can be quickly operated for the player who has watched the same performance many times. It is possible to give an opportunity to let the child play, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. It should be noted that the process of returning the second movable decoration means to the standby position may be started by such a predetermined operation, or even if the predetermined operation is performed, the second movable decoration means may be returned at a predetermined timing. It may be configured to start the process of returning the second movable decoration means to the standby position.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 619, 620, etc., the player's attention can be drawn to the effect based on the lottery result without outputting an evocative sound when operating the first movable decoration means. It is possible to direct the player's attention to the vicinity of the predetermined display means to be performed, and to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is injured by the first movable decoration means.

In the above-described embodiment, by executing a predetermined effect mode out of a plurality of different effect modes, the left and right ear frame movable bodies indicate that there is a high degree of expectation that a big win, which is an advantageous state for the player, will occur. However, it is configured to notify the player of the degree of expectation for the occurrence of game content other than the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big win. may

For example, it is possible to notify the content of the profit to be given to the player during the big win, even though the big win is confirmed. As for the content of profit, for example, the type of profit may be notified, or the amount of profit may be notified.

Alternatively, it may be configured to inform the content of the profit to be given to the player after the big hit. For example, it may be configured to notify the type of profit to be given to the player after the big win, or to notify the amount of profit to be given to the player after the big win. .

In this way, not only the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state), but also the amount of profit given to the player in a state advantageous to the player (for example, Expectations regarding the number of balls to be played and the number of openings of the big winning mouth, etc., and new favorable conditions for the player that may occur after the end of the favorable conditions for the player (for example, variable conditions and electric chew support state), the type of benefit given to the player in the game that newly occurs after the end of the state advantageous to the player (for example, the variable state and the electric chew support state) As an example, even if it is configured to notify the number of fluctuations in which the probability variable state continues and the number of fluctuations in which the electric chew support continues), it is possible to achieve the same effects as the above-described embodiments.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 show that the degree of expectation that a big hit, which is an advantageous state for the player, will occur is high by executing a predetermined performance mode out of a plurality of different performance modes. , the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, etc. are operated to notify the player. , the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big win may include the fact that the big win is determined (the occurrence of a 100% big win). For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, a 50% jackpot is generated when the first effect mode is executed, and a 100% jackpot is generated when the second effect mode is executed. may be configured to occur.

In the above-described embodiments, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body When a simulated image simulating the body 7450 or the like is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is also displayed at the same time. A simulated image may be displayed in advance for about several seconds (for example, two seconds), and then the display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 may be started. . For example, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 607(A), a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 may be displayed from timing t5 to timing t7.

In addition, the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 is fixedly displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 without moving, and the right ear frame is movable relative to the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570. A simulated image imitating a body 7100, a left ear frame movable body 7200, a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 moves upward. It should be configured to

In this way, operable movable decorative means and drivable modeling bodies (right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame A unit (door frame top unit 570) that displays a simulated image simulating the frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450) and stores and holds operable movable decorative means and drivable molded bodies. By displaying a simulated image simulating , the player can easily understand the operation mode and drive mode of the operable movable decoration means and the drivable modeled body.

In particular, a simulated image simulating a unit (door frame top unit 570) for housing and holding operable movable decorative means and drivable molded objects is displayed on a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600). By fixedly displaying in a predetermined area, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the operation mode and drive mode of the operable movable decorative means and the drivable modeled body.

Also, a unit that houses and holds operable movable decorative means and drivable shaped bodies at a timing prior to the timing of displaying a simulated image simulating the operable movable decorative means and drivable shaped bodies. By displaying a simulated image simulating (the door frame top unit 570), the player's sense of expectation for the operation of the movable decoration means and the driving of the modeled body increases. In addition, since the player can visually recognize the operation of the movable decoration means and the driving of the shaped body from the timing when the movement of the movable decoration means and the driving of the shaped body are started, the player can control the operation of the movable decoration means and the driving of the shaped body. can be enjoyed for a longer period of time.

In each of the embodiments described above, the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 may be configured not to be displayed.

Instead of moving the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, the rabbit character 6000 described with reference to FIG. It may be configured to Also in this case, it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the above-described effect modes.

A right ear frame movable body 7100, a left ear frame movable body 7200, a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are door frame top units. An example of operation between the state of being housed in the door frame top unit 570 and the state of protruding upward from the door frame top unit 570 has been shown, but it is not limited to such a state change, and other state changes may also be possible. . For example, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may move from a state in which half of them protrude from the door frame top unit 570 to a state in which they fully protrude from the door frame top unit 570 .

In this way, the first movable decorative means is moved from the first position (the state housed in the door frame top unit 570, the state half protruding from the door frame top unit 570) to the second position. Even if it is configured to operate between the positioned second state (the state where the door frame top unit 570 is completely protruded), the above-described effects can be obtained.

607, 619, etc., the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is accommodated in the door frame top unit 570, and a front view of the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600. Although an example has been shown in which the operation is performed between the states located at positions overlapping with , the change in the state is not limited to such a change, and other state changes may also be possible. For example, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 overlaps substantially the lower part of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view, and then overlaps substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view. It may be configured to move to the state of being in position.

In this way, in the first state where the second movable decoration means is located at the first position (the state housed in the door frame top unit 570), it overlaps substantially the lower part of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view. position) to the second position (position overlapping substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view). Even when it does, it becomes possible to have the effect mentioned above.

As an effect display performed in the display area of the effect display device, there is known a look-ahead effect display that is performed over a plurality of times of variable display of decorative symbols in response to the occurrence of a specific hold. The variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the specific holding causing the look-ahead performance display is stopped in a manner in which the decorative symbols indicate the occurrence of a big win, compared with the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the look-ahead performance display is not performed. The probability of being displayed is set high. Therefore, when the look-ahead effect display is executed, the player has an expectation that a big win will occur.

On the other hand, in the display area of the effect display device, the decorative symbols are variably displayed, and a plurality of effect displays corresponding to the decorative symbols that are being variably displayed (for example, the variable decorative symbols indicate a big hit) Effect display indicating the degree of expectation that is stopped and displayed in the form, etc.) is also performed. For this reason, the player can read the look-ahead effect display suggesting the result of the variable display of the decorative symbols several times ahead, and the variable display mode of the currently variable decorative symbols and the display contents of the effect display corresponding to the currently variable decorative symbols. At the same time, it is becoming a situation where it is necessary to visually recognize.

In such a situation, although the game can be made more interesting, there is a possibility that the player cannot fully grasp the contents indicated by these effect displays. In particular, since the player tends to pay attention to the variable display of decorative symbols that are currently changing and various effects displays corresponding to the variable display, the look-ahead effect display is relatively inconspicuous. There is a problem that the player may lose consciousness of the execution and the approaching start of variation of the decorative symbols corresponding to the look-ahead effect display.

Therefore, when executing the look-ahead effect display, the player can easily grasp that the look-ahead effect display is being executed and that the timing of starting the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the look-ahead effect display is approaching. and embodiment.

Below, with reference to FIG. 623, first, various images displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when executing the look-ahead effect display will be described.
Specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 from the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation performed when the result of the special lottery performed corresponding to the winning to the first start port 2002 is lost. 623(A) to 623(F), an example of rendering in the display area will be described. 623(A) to 623(A)-FIG. 623(D), FIG. 623(G), and FIG. 623(H).

FIG. 623(A) shows a state in which three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It also shows a state in which the pending image corresponding to the stopped decorative symbol is displayed. In addition, it shows a state in which there are three holds corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2002. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "3" is placed as the left decorative pattern, and a decorative pattern with the number "5" is placed as the middle decorative pattern at equal intervals from the left in the approximate center of the display area in the vertical direction. , and decorative patterns with the number "2" as the right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. The decorative pattern consists of a background area (white part in the figure) consisting of an image forming the outline of the decorative pattern in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a number area consisting of an image showing any number from "1" to "9" ( black part in the figure). As shown in the figure, the number area is centered in the background area.

It is preferable that an image having a color different from the color of the background area and the color of the number area constituting the decorative pattern is used. For example, it is preferable to set the color of the background area to white and the color of the number area to black. Note that the outline of the rectangular shape that forms the outline of the background area may be black.

At the bottom of the display area, from the left, the suspension display area, the first suspension display area, the second suspension display area, the third suspension display area, and the fourth suspension display area are set. A state is shown in which the reserved image is displayed in the display area, and the reserved images are displayed in the first to third reserved display areas. Although the fourth reserved display area is indicated by a dotted line in the drawing for explanation, the dotted line is not actually displayed in the display area as a display state, and the reserved image is displayed in the following drawings. In principle, such a dotted line indicating the intended position of the vehicle is not shown.

In FIG. 623(A), the pending image displayed in the pending display area is the pending image corresponding to the statically displayed “3”, “5” and “2” decorative symbols. Further, the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is the pending image corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display corresponding to the pending image ends. Further, the pending image displayed in the second pending display area is the pending image corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display corresponding to the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is completed. be. Further, the pending image displayed in the third pending display area is a pending image corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display corresponding to the pending image displayed in the second pending display area is completed. be.

FIG. 623(B) shows the display state at the start of variation of the decorative design corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area described with reference to FIG. 623(A).
Specifically, the upper edge of the decorative design that is one before in the display order is below the left decorative design to the right decorative design, and the decorative design that is one after in the display order is above the left decorative design to the right decorative design. Bottom edge is displayed. Also, the display of the pending display ends.
The reserved image displayed in the reserved display area and the reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas are always displayed in front of the decorative design. The reserved image and the reserved image are circular in shape and basically white in color. Also, the reserved image has a larger circle diameter than the reserved image.

FIG. 623(C) shows a state in which the left decorative design to the right decorative design are displayed in a variable manner. Each decorative pattern is displayed in a manner of scrolling downward in the display area.

Specifically, the lower side of a certain decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable display is first displayed on the upper side of the display area, and then the decorative pattern moves downward to fill the display area. The entire decorative pattern is displayed, and after the lower end of the decorative pattern reaches the lower side of the display area, only a part of the upper side of the decorative pattern is displayed. The upper end of the decorative pattern reaches the lower side of the display area, and the decorative pattern is not displayed. In this way, each decorative pattern changes its display state in such a flow that it changes from a state not displayed in the display area to a state displayed in the display area and then to a state not displayed in the display area.

The display order is set for the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern. Specifically, following a decorative pattern with a certain number (eg, "1"), decorative patterns with the next number (eg, "2") appear in order from the upper side of the display area. will be displayed. The order of the numbers attached to the decorative patterns is the order of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", and "9". . After the decorative pattern with the number "9", the decorative pattern with the number "1" is displayed in the display area. For example, in FIG. 623(C), the left decorative pattern with the number "1" attached to the lower side and the left decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the upper side are displayed. , both left decorative patterns scroll downward, and the left decorative pattern with the number "2" is followed by the left decorative pattern with the number "3". , appear from the upper side of the display area.

With reference to FIG. 623(B), it has been explained that the display of the reserved image that has been displayed in the reserved display area until then ends at the same time as the decorative pattern starts to change, but the display of the reserved image ends At the same time, the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is displayed so as to move to the left while being enlarged, and displayed as the reserved image in the reserved display area. At the same time, the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is displayed so as to move to the left, and is displayed as a reserved image in the first reserved display area. At the same time, the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is displayed so as to move to the left, and is displayed as a reserved image in the first reserved display area. Enlargement of the reserved image and movement of the reserved image to the left are performed over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.67 seconds). FIG. 623(C) shows the state after such a pending image is moved.

FIG. 623(D) shows a state in which the left decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the middle decorative design and the right decorative design are being variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative design with the number "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, it shows a state in which a new pending image is displayed in the third pending display area in response to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 .

Here, the temporary stop display will be described. A temporary stop display is a display mode of a decorative pattern in which a decorative pattern with a predetermined number is displayed as if it were stopped at a display position where the decorative pattern is finally displayed stopped or in the vicinity thereof. is. Specifically, for example, a decorative pattern with a predetermined number is gently moved up and down to the extent that the number attached to the decorative pattern is clearly visible, with reference to the display position where the decorative pattern is finally stopped and displayed. The temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is performed by displaying it so as to move or display it so as to sway. In this way, by performing the temporary stop display, the decorative symbols being changed are visually recognized as if they are stopped by the player, and the player can confirm the numbers attached to the decorative symbols. . It should be noted that when the decorative pattern is finally stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern is displayed in a completely stopped state without such vertical movement or swinging display.

When the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is changed to the finally stopped decorative pattern, or the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is scrolled and displayed again, There is a case where variable display is performed so that decorative symbols with other numbers are finally stopped and displayed, but the details will be described later.

In FIG. 623(D), arc-shaped lines are added to the upper left and lower right of the left decorative pattern with the number "2". This line indicates that the symbol is in a state of being temporarily stopped. Also, in other drawings, such arcuate lines may be attached to the decorative design, and in this case also, it indicates that the decorative design is in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed.

FIG. 623(E) shows a state in which the right decorative design is temporarily stopped following the left decorative design, and the middle decorative design is being variably displayed. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "2" as the left decorative pattern and a decorative pattern with the number "4" as the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed.

FIG. 623(F) shows a state in which left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. In accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative design, the left decorative design and the right decorative design, which have been temporarily stopped and displayed until then, are also stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, in the figure, the decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the left decorative pattern and the decoration with the number "7" attached to the middle decorative pattern As for the patterns, the decorative patterns in which the number "4" is added to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, and the fact that the special lottery results are lost is indicated by the combination of the stopped and displayed decorative patterns. In the state where the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, as shown in the figure, the decorative patterns displayed above and below each decorative pattern during fluctuation or temporary stop are no longer displayed. The stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), after which the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is newly started. be. In addition, the display of the reserved image displayed in the reserved image ends at the same timing as the timing when the change of the new decorative pattern is started.

FIG. 623(G) shows a state in which, following the left decorative design, the right decorative design is temporarily stopped and the middle decorative design is being variably displayed from the display state shown with reference to FIG. 623(D). ing. Specifically, the left decorative pattern with the number "2" and the right decorative pattern with the number "2" are temporarily stopped, respectively, indicating that the ready-to-win state has occurred. state.

FIG. 623(H) shows a state in which left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative design, the left decorative design and the right decorative design, which have been temporarily stopped and displayed until then, are also stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the left decorative pattern and the decoration with the number "2" attached to the middle decorative pattern are shown in the figure. As for the patterns, the decorative patterns in which the number "2" is attached to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, and the combination of the stopped and displayed decorative patterns indicates that the special lottery result is a big win. In the state where the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, as shown in the figure, the decorative patterns displayed above and below each decorative pattern during fluctuation or temporary stop are no longer displayed. After the stop display of the left decorative design to the right decorative design continues for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the left decorative design to the right decorative design are no longer displayed. After that, the jackpot game state is started, and at the timing when the jackpot game state ends, the display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is resumed, and after that, it corresponds to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area. The variable display of decorative patterns is newly started.

Thus, in the variable display example of the decorative symbols described with reference to FIG. 623, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in response to the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 2002. After the variable display is started from the state, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped in this order, and then the middle decorative design is stopped. In addition, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are simultaneously displayed in a stopped state in accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative design. In addition, by stopping the decorative patterns with the same number as the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the player is shown that the special lottery result is a big hit. In addition, the player is shown that the special lottery result is a loss by stopping at least one of the left to right decorative patterns to which a different number is attached as the decorative pattern.

An embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 623 will be described below with reference to production examples shown in FIGS. FIG. 624 is a time chart in this example of effect, and FIG. 625 is a diagram showing the display state of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing in this example of effect. In FIG. 625, the variable display mode of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the display mode of the reserved image in the reserved display area, and the display mode of the reserved image in the first to fourth reserved display areas are The display mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 623 unless otherwise noted. Note that these points also apply to other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

FIG. 624 is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbols stop fluctuating. FIG. 625(A) is a diagram showing this state, and shows a state in which decorative patterns with numbers "6", "4", and "5" from the left are stopped and displayed. From this state, at timing t0, the variable display of the left decorative design to the right decorative design is newly started. FIG. 625(B) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1) after the start of variable display, and shows a state in which variable display of left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols is being performed. there is

In the time chart shown in FIG. 624(A), t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the presentation. The time between each timing is 1 second. Note that these points also apply to other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 624, at the timing t2, a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 and a new hold occurs. Further, with this starting winning as a trigger, the look-ahead effect display is started at timing t2. Also, in response to the look-ahead effect display, a specific pending image shaped like a pine branch with leaves is displayed instead of the normal pending image. The color of the specific reserved image is green. FIG. 625(C) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the look-ahead effect display is started at timing t2. Also, the third reserved display area shows a state in which a specific reserved image having a shape resembling a pine branch with leaves is displayed instead of an ordinary reserved image having a circular shape.

In the look-ahead effect display, a look-ahead effect image surrounding the display area in a frame shape is displayed in such a manner as to hide a part of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed so as to scroll downward. The look-ahead effect image is an image in which a plurality (specifically, six) of shapes resembling pine branches with leaves protrude toward the inside of a horizontally long rectangular frame. The color of the look-ahead effect image is slightly lighter green than the color of the specific pending image.

The display of the look-ahead effect image and the display of the specific pending image are performed based on the special lottery result obtained when the game ball wins the first start opening 2002, and only the normal pending image with a perfect circular shape and white color is displayed. The performance execution ratio is set so that the probability of winning a big hit is higher when the look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image are displayed than when they are displayed. For example, when a normal pending image is displayed, the probability of a big hit is 0.3%, and when a look-ahead effect image and a specific pending image are displayed, the probability of a big win is 10.0%. is configured to be

With such a configuration, the player can display the look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image, and when the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific pending image is changed, the normal pending image is displayed. Compared to the case where the variation of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image is performed, there is an expectation that the decorative pattern will be stopped and displayed in a stop mode indicating that a big win will occur as a result of the variation of the decorative pattern. You will feel.

From timing t2 to timing t4, while the look-ahead effect image is displayed, the left decorative design to the right decorative design are variably displayed. A look-ahead effect image is displayed in front of the right decorative pattern. Therefore, the variable display of the left decorative design to the right decorative design is performed in a state that a part of the left decorative design to the right decorative design is hidden by the look-ahead effect image. In addition, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, and the third reserved display area The specific pending image is displayed on the front side of each decorative pattern and the look-ahead effect image.

At timing t4, all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 625(D) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t4. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the front-to-back relationship between the pre-reading effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are closer than the pre-reading effect image. displayed on the side. In addition, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, and the third reserved display area The specific pending image is displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image.

At the timing when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols positioned above and below each decorative symbol are no longer displayed. For example, in FIG. 625(D), as the left decorative pattern, only the decorative pattern with the number "1" is stopped and displayed. On the upper side of the decorative pattern is the lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "2", and on the lower side of the decorative pattern with the number "1" is the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number "9". is displayed. By adopting such a configuration, only the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed stand out and can be visually recognized by the player.

The stop display of the decorative pattern continues from timing t4 to timing t5. Also, during this period, the display mode in which the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image is continued.

At timing t5, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the new variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the front-to-back effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are switched again, and the pre-reading effect image is displayed in front of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern. display mode.

At the timing when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols positioned above and below each decorative symbol are no longer displayed. The display of the decorative patterns positioned above and below the pattern is also resumed. For example, in FIG. 625(D), only the decorative pattern with the number "1" is stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern. , the lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "2" is displayed, and the lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "1" is displayed with the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number "9". The downward moving display of each decorative pattern is instantaneously started.

Thereafter, in accordance with the start and stop of the variable display of the decorative symbols, the front-rear effect image and the left to right decorative symbols are interchanged. For example, in the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the display mode in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image is continued, but the period from timing t9 to timing t10 and timing t14 are continued. to timing t15, similarly, the display mode in which the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image is continued.

At the timing t15, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the start winning that triggered the display of the look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image is started. In FIG. 625(E), at a predetermined timing after timing t15 (for example, timing t16), the look-ahead effect image is displayed in front of the left decorative design to the right decorative design, and the specific pending image is displayed in the pending display area. Shows the displayed state.

At the timing t25, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped and displayed with the numeral "2" attached thereto, and the ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. Also, at timing t25, the display of the prefetch effect image that has been displayed until then ends, and the prefetch effect image is not displayed. FIG. 625(F) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the ready-to-win state occurs and the display of the look-ahead effect image ends at timing t25.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern.

FIG. 625(G) shows a state in which, at timing t33, a decorative design with the number "3" attached as a middle decorative design is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, at timing t34, the display of the pending image displayed in the pending display area ends. On the other hand, the stop display state of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is continued until the game ball newly wins the first starting port 2002. - 特許庁

On the other hand, FIG. 625(H) shows a state in which, at timing t33, a decorative design with a numeral "2" attached as a middle decorative design is stopped and displayed. After that, at the timing t34, the display of the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area and the display of the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are finished, and the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the look-ahead performance image is displayed closer to the viewer than the decorative symbols during the variable display of the decorative symbols, and the decorative symbols are displayed closer to the viewer than the look-ahead performance images while the decorative symbols are stopped. ing.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can visually clearly grasp the start and stop of each variable display, so that the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image can be displayed without confirming the movement of the specific reserved image. It becomes possible to recognize that one has approached the fluctuation display of .

In addition, the area occupied in the display area of the look-ahead effect image is larger than the area occupied in the display area of the specific reserved image, and the look-ahead effect image is closer to the stop position of the decorative pattern than the specific reserved image. Since it is displayed, even if the player concentrates on visually recognizing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, it becomes possible to recognize that the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image is one step closer. .

Further, by displaying the decorative pattern and the read-ahead performance image at overlapping positions, the sizes of both the decorative pattern and the read-ahead performance image can be increased, and the utilization efficiency of the display area can be improved. Furthermore, the display can be optimized by configuring the image to be displayed on the front side to be switched between the decorative design and the pre-reading effect image according to the conditions.

Specifically, during the variation of the decorative symbols, the look-ahead effect image is displayed on the front side, so that the player is greatly affected by the approaching timing of performing the variation display corresponding to the look-ahead effect image. It can give you hope. On the other hand, while the variation of the decorative symbols is stopped, the stopping mode of the decorative symbols is not hindered by the look-ahead performance image, and the whole of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed can be clearly shown to the player. .

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 624 and 625, the size of the look-ahead effect image did not change even if the look-ahead effect image was displayed over a plurality of times of variable display of decorative symbols. 626, 628, and 629 below, when the look-ahead effect image is displayed over the variable display of the decorative symbols a plurality of times, the size of the look-ahead effect image is changed. Shows an example of production.

In this effect example, a first prefetch effect image occupying the smallest area relative to the display area, a second prefetch effect image occupying a medium area relative to the display area, and a second prefetch effect image occupying a medium area relative to the display area. It is configured to switch between and display a large third look-ahead effect image at a predetermined timing. The first look-ahead effect image to the third look-ahead effect image are arranged in such a manner that a plurality of (specifically, six) shapes imitating pine branches with leaves protrude inside a horizontally long rectangular frame. In the case of the first look-ahead effect image, the size of the shape imitating a pine branch with leaves is the smallest. In the case of the third look-ahead effect image, the size of the shape imitating a pine branch with leaves is the largest. The colors of the first look-ahead effect image to the third look-ahead effect image are slightly lighter green than the color of the specific pending image. In addition, in the effect example described with reference to FIG. 625, the prefetch effect image displayed in the display area is the first prefetch effect image.

First, with reference to FIGS. 626(A) and 628, there is shown an effect example in which the look-ahead effect image gradually increases over a plurality of times of variable display of decorative symbols. FIG. 626(A) is a time chart in this example of effect, and FIG. 628 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this example of effect.

In this example of effect, the display of the first look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image is started in response to the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 2002 at the timing t2. FIG. 628(A) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the display of the first look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image is started at timing t2.

At timing t4, all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 628(B) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t4. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the front-to-back relationship between the pre-reading effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are closer than the pre-reading effect image. displayed on the side.

Next, at timing t5, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started, and the look-ahead effect image is displayed closer to the viewer than the left to right decorative symbols. At timing t6, which is the timing after one second, instead of the first prefetch effect image, a second prefetch effect image larger than the first prefetch effect image is displayed. FIG. 628(C) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t7) after the display of the second look-ahead effect image is started at timing t6.

Next, at timing t9, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are all stopped and displayed. FIG. 628(D) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t9. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the second look-ahead effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in reverse order, and the left decorative pattern to the right side of the second look-ahead effect image are reversed. Decorative patterns are displayed on the front side.

Next, at timing t10, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. It is configured to display a third look-ahead effect image that is larger than the image. FIG. 628(E) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12) after the display of the third look-ahead effect image is started at timing t11.

Next, at timing t14, all of the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 628(F) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t14. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the 3rd look-ahead effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in reverse order, and the left decorative pattern to the right side of the 3rd look-ahead effect image. Decorative patterns are displayed on the front side.

Next, at timing t15, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. This variable display is a variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display in this example of effect. At timing t15, the display front-to-back relation of the third look-ahead effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is reversed, and the third look-ahead effect image is displayed in front of the left to right decorative patterns. FIG. 628(G) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t16) after the variable display of decorative symbols is started at timing t15.

As described above, in this embodiment, after the decorative symbols are displayed on the front side of the look-ahead effect image in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols, the look-ahead of the decorative symbols is performed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols. After the effect image is displayed on the front side, a prefetch effect image that occupies a larger area in the display area than the prefetch effect image that has been displayed so far is displayed instead of the prefetch effect image that has been displayed so far. It consists of

By adopting such a configuration, the player can visually clearly grasp the start and stop of each variable display, so that the decoration corresponding to the specific reserved image can be displayed without bothering to confirm the movement of the specific reserved image. It becomes possible to recognize that the pattern is approaching the variable display.

Further, the look-ahead effect image that was displayed behind the decorative pattern while the decorative pattern was stopped and partially hidden is displayed in a larger look-ahead effect immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Since it is displayed by switching to an image, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the look-ahead effect image as if it were enlarged twice.

Further, in the present embodiment, the size of the look-ahead effect image is configured to increase step by step. Specifically, by first displaying a small look-ahead effect image, it is possible to make the player recognize that the look-ahead effect has started, and at this stage, the visibility of the changing decorative pattern is greatly hindered. After that, the size of the look-ahead effect image gradually increases.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the look-ahead performance has started, and after that, the size of the look-ahead performance image increases, making it difficult to see the changing decorative patterns. Even so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot understand the display content in the display area.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 626(B) and 629, there is shown an effect example in which the look-ahead effect image gradually becomes smaller over a plurality of times of variable display of decorative symbols. FIG. 626(B) is a time chart in this example of effect, and FIG. 629 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this example of effect.

In this example of effect, the display of the third look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image is started in response to the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 2002 at timing t2. FIG. 629(A) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the display of the third look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image is started at timing t2.

At timing t4, all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 629(B) shows a display state in which all of the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t4. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the front-to-back relationship between the pre-reading effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are closer than the pre-reading effect image. displayed on the side.

Next, at timing t5, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. It is configured to display a second look-ahead effect image that is smaller than the image. FIG. 629(C) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t7) after the display of the second look-ahead effect image is started at timing t6.

Next, at timing t9, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are all stopped and displayed. FIG. 629(D) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t9. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the second look-ahead effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in reverse order, and the left decorative pattern to the right side of the second look-ahead effect image are reversed. Decorative patterns are displayed on the front side.

Next, at timing t10, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. It is configured to display a first look-ahead effect image that is smaller than the image. FIG. 629(E) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12) after the display of the first look-ahead effect image is started at timing t11.

Next, at timing t14, all of the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 629(F) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t14. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the first look-ahead effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in reverse order, and the left decorative pattern to the right side of the first look-ahead effect image are reversed. Decorative patterns are displayed on the front side.

Next, at timing t15, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. This variable display is a variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display in this example of effect. At timing t15, the first look-ahead effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are reversed in display order, and the third look-ahead effect image is displayed closer to the viewer than the left to right decorative patterns. FIG. 629(G) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t16) after the variable display of decorative symbols is started at timing t15.

By adopting such a configuration, the same effects as those of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 626A and 628 can be obtained. For example, since the player can visually clearly grasp the start and stop of each variable display, the player can approach the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image without bothering to confirm the movement of the specific reserved image. can be recognized.

In addition, by displaying the largest prefetch effect image first as the prefetch effect image, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot recognize that the prefetch effect has started. After that, by gradually decreasing the size of the look-ahead effect image, decorations that are variably displayed until the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the display of the look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image are started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot understand the variation contents of the symbols.

Further, in the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 626(A), 628, 626(B), and 629, in addition to the large opening provided in the center of the prefetch effect image ( The second look-ahead effect image and the third look-ahead effect image) are configured to have a small opening through which an image displayed on the rear side can be visually recognized.

Specifically, in the case of the second look-ahead effect image, a total of 6 openings are provided around the second look-ahead effect image, and in the case of the third look-ahead effect image, a total of 8 openings are provided around the third look-ahead effect image. It is configured to be provided. In addition, openings are provided corresponding to the left to right decorative patterns so that the left to right decorative patterns are not difficult to see. For example, in the case of the second look-ahead effect image, two upper and lower openings correspond to the left decorative design, two upper and lower openings correspond to the middle decorative design, and two upper and lower openings correspond to the right decorative design. are provided.

In addition, in the case of the third look-ahead effect image, there are three openings vertically corresponding to the left decorative design, two vertically corresponding to the middle decorative design, and three vertically corresponding to the right decorative design. are provided. As described above, during the variation of the decorative design, the decorative design can be visually recognized through the opening at a predetermined timing, so that the visibility of the decorative design can be suppressed from being lowered.

By adopting such a configuration, even when the look-ahead effect image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and even during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is displayed variably behind the look-ahead effect image. Since it is possible for the player to see through the opening, the player cannot understand the display contents in the display area while maintaining the impact given to the player by the display of the look-ahead effect image. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation.

An embodiment in which the size of the look-ahead effect image does not change (Fig. 624), or an embodiment in which the size of the look-ahead effect image is increased after the decorative pattern starts to change (Fig. 626 (A)), or an embodiment in which it is reduced ( FIG. 626(B)) is shown, but the size of the look-ahead effect image to be displayed may be used to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit.

For example, as the look-ahead effect image, a first look-ahead effect image occupying a small area of the display area, a second look-ahead effect image occupying a medium area of the display area, and a third look-ahead effect image occupying a large area of the display area The read-ahead effect display can be executed in three display modes of the read-ahead effect image, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of the first read-ahead effect image, the second look-ahead effect image, and the third look-ahead effect image, and finally. Depending on the type of the displayed look-ahead effect image, the variation result of the variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the big win will be indicated. . In this case, the player expects that a larger prefetch effect image will be displayed as the prefetch effect image.

Alternatively, the third prefetch effect image, the second prefetch effect image, and the first prefetch effect image are configured so that the degree of expectation increases in this order, and the prefetch effect display is performed according to the type of the prefetch effect image finally displayed. The variation result of the variation display corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the game may suggest the degree of expectation that the game will be a big hit. In this case, the player expects that a smaller prefetch effect image will be displayed as the prefetch effect image.

FIGS. 627(A) to 627(H) show modifications of the state of the look-ahead effect display in the time chart described with reference to FIG. 626(A).

FIG. 627(A) is a diagram for showing the changing state of the decorative symbols, the number of pending symbols, and which of the symbols and the effect display is to be displayed with priority.

In FIG. 627(B), the first look-ahead effect image indicating low expectation is displayed at timing t2, the first look-ahead effect image indicating low expectation is displayed continuously at timing t5, and the first look-ahead effect image indicating medium expectation is displayed at timing t11. 2 is a time chart showing an effect example in which a look-ahead effect image is displayed.

In FIG. 627(C), the first look-ahead effect image indicating low expectation is displayed at timing t2, the first look-ahead effect image indicating low expectation is displayed continuously at timing t5, and the first look-ahead effect image indicating high expectation is displayed at timing t11. 3 is a time chart showing an effect example in which a look-ahead effect image is displayed.

In FIG. 627(D), the first look-ahead effect image indicating low expectations is displayed at timing t2, the second look-ahead effect image indicating medium expectations is displayed at timing t5, and the second look-ahead effect image indicating medium expectations is displayed at timing t11. 9 is a time chart showing an effect example in which a look-ahead effect image is continuously displayed;

In FIG. 627(E), the second look-ahead effect image indicating medium expectations is displayed at timing t2, the third look-ahead effect image indicating high expectations is displayed at timing t5, and the first look-ahead effect image indicating low expectations is displayed at timing t11. 9 is a time chart showing an effect example in which a look-ahead effect image is displayed;

In FIG. 627(F), the third look-ahead effect image indicating high expectation is displayed at timing t2, the third look-ahead effect image indicating high expectation is displayed continuously at timing t5, and the third look-ahead effect image indicating high expectation is displayed at timing t11. 3 is a time chart showing an effect example in which a look-ahead effect image is continuously displayed.

In this way, by constructing so that the degree of expectation increases according to the size of the prefetch effect image that is finally displayed, it is possible to further enhance interest when the prefetch effect image is displayed.

In the variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display, the look-ahead effect image and the decoration pattern may be displayed so as not to overlap each other.

FIG. 627(G) is a time chart showing an effect example in which vertical bar-shaped images are displayed on the left and right sides of the display area as the look-ahead effect image instead of the third look-ahead effect image showing high expectations at timing t16. Also, FIG. 627(H) is a time chart showing an effect example in which vertical bar-shaped images are displayed on the left and right sides of the display area as the look-ahead effect image instead of the first look-ahead effect image indicating the low degree of expectation at timing t16. .

FIG. 629(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t17) after the display of the bar-shaped image is started at timing t16 in the time charts shown in FIGS. 627(G) and 627(H). ing. As shown in FIG. 629(H), the bar-shaped image is displayed at a position that does not overlap with any of the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols during variable display. In the drawing, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner. Also, the color of the bar-shaped image is light green, which is the same color as the first pre-reading effect image and the third pre-reading effect image that have been displayed so far.

As described above, in the present embodiment, instead of the look-ahead effect image that has been displayed over a plurality of variations of the decorative symbols, a bar-shaped image that does not overlap the decorative symbols that are changing is displayed as a look-ahead effect image with a different shape. It is configured to

By adopting such a configuration, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are made to be recognized by the player that the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display is being performed. The appearance mode of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of is clarified, and whether or not a ready-to-win state occurs, or which decorative symbols with numbers are temporarily stopped, The player's visibility is no longer obstructed.

In game shops, there are cases in which the game shop's unique services (such as unlimited services by lucky numbers) are provided to players by means of the numbers attached to the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the form of doubles indicating a big win. The player can confirm the numbers attached to the stopped decorative symbols from the time of temporary stop of the first temporarily stopped left decorative symbol that can determine whether or not such a service can be received.

It should be noted that the number attached to the decorative pattern may be configured to vary the degree of expectation for a big hit when a ready-to-win state occurs. For example, in the ready-to-win state by the decorative pattern with the number "4" and the ready-to-reach state by the decorative pattern with the number "7", the latter is configured so that the expectation of a big win is higher. do it. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the profit given to the player when the jackpot state occurs differs depending on the numbers attached to the decorative symbols. For example, when the decorative pattern with the number "4" stops on double rolls and hits a big hit, and when the decorative pattern with the number "7" stops on double rolls and hits a big hit. In the latter case, it is preferable that the large winning opening 2005 is opened more at the time of the big winning game, so that a large number of prize balls are provided to the player.

By adopting such a configuration, the player will be concerned about which number is attached to the left decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed first. Displaying the image ensures the visibility of the decorative pattern.

In the example of effect described with reference to FIG. 629(H), the entire decorative pattern does not overlap the bar-shaped image, which is the look-ahead effect image. Of these, the background area may be allowed to overlap with the bar-shaped image, and the number area may be configured so as not to overlap with the bar-shaped image. In this case, the thickness of the bar-shaped image described with reference to FIG. 629(H) can be slightly increased in the horizontal direction (inward direction in the display area). Even with such a configuration, the numbers attached to the decorative patterns do not overlap with the look-ahead effect image, so the visibility of the decorative patterns is ensured.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 626 to 629, the size of the look-ahead effect image is used to indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the variable display will be a big hit. In place of or in addition to indicating the degree of expectation, an attribute other than the size of the look-ahead effect image may be modified to indicate the degree of expectation for a big hit.

For example, an image having the same shape as the first prefetch effect image shown in FIG. As effect images, a green prefetch effect image can be displayed as a second prefetch effect image, and a red prefetch effect image can be displayed as a third prefetch effect image in the time chart shown with reference to FIGS. 626 and 627. You may Also, at this time, the expectation level when the blue first look-ahead effect image is displayed is set to a low expectation level, the expectation level when the green second look-ahead effect image is displayed is set to a medium expectation level, and the expectation level when the green second look-ahead effect image is displayed is set to a medium expectation level. 3 It may be configured such that the degree of expectation when the look-ahead effect image is displayed is a high degree of expectation.

Also, an example of blue, green, and red images having the same shape as the first look-ahead effect image shown in FIG. are set to blue, green, and red, or images having the same shape as the third look-ahead effect image shown in FIG. It may be configured to

Alternatively, the degree of expectation may be indicated by a combination of the size and color of the look-ahead effect image. For example, the small-sized look-ahead effect image shown in FIG. A look-ahead effect image having the largest size shown in FIG. The expectation level when the second look-ahead effect image is displayed may be set to medium expectation level, and the expectation level when the third look-ahead effect image is displayed may be set to high expectation level.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can clearly grasp the start and stop of each variable display by the change in the color of the look-ahead effect image. It becomes possible to recognize that the decorative pattern corresponding to the image is approaching the variable display.

In the state where the look-ahead effect image is displayed, when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the colors of the stopped and displayed decorative patterns may be set to the same color or a similar color. good. For example, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern may all be blue.

Specifically, just before stopping the variable display, the background area and the number area of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are set to blue, and the display is stopped in front of the look-ahead effect image in the blue state, and then the fluctuation starts. Sometimes, it is configured to be displayed behind the look-ahead effect image in a blue state, and during variation, it is preferably displayed in white or black, which is the original color. Alternatively, from the start of the display of the look-ahead effect image, the color of the background area and number area of the left decorative design to the right decorative design is set to blue, and the background area of the left decorative design to the right decorative design is displayed until the display of the look-ahead effect image ends. or the state in which the color of the number area is blue may be continued. The colors of the background area and number area of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are not limited to blue, and may be green, red, gray, or the like. If the background area and the number area are to have the same color, it is preferable to provide a black outline portion for the numbers.

In addition, it is preferable that the color of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern and the color of the look-ahead effect image are different colors. For example, when blue is adopted as the color of the left decorative design to the right decorative design, it is preferable to adopt a color other than blue (for example, red or green) as the color of the look-ahead effect image.

In this way, at least at the timing when each decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, each decorative pattern to be stopped is made the same color (for example, blue) or a similar color, so that the left decorative pattern to the right decoration that are stopped are displayed. In addition to the sense of unity of the patterns, the visual difference between the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern can be further enhanced with the look-ahead effect image displayed on the background side. It becomes more clearly recognized by the player.

Furthermore, by making the color of each decorative pattern and the color of the look-ahead effect image different colors, it is possible to further enhance the visual difference between the color of each decorative pattern and the look-ahead effect image, and the variable display of the decorative pattern ends. and start can be more clearly recognized by the player.

In this way, when the colors of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are set to the same color, the color of each decorative pattern is changed to a different color while the look-ahead effect image is being displayed. may Such a change in the color of the decorative pattern is performed at the timing when each decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner and displayed on the front side of the look-ahead effect image, and each decorative pattern is displayed on the rear side of the look-ahead effect image. It is preferable to configure so that the color of the decorative pattern is not changed at the timing when it is set.

For example, during variation of each decorative pattern, the color of each decorative pattern may be changed from blue to green at the timing when each decorative pattern is displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image. It should be noted that depending on the color of the decorative pattern thus changed, some state in the gaming machine (for example, the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display will result in a variable result indicating a big win). It may be configured to suggest

With such a configuration, the player can more clearly recognize the end and start of the variable display of decorative symbols.

The look-ahead effect image may be provided with characters or symbols indicating the name of the effect. Further, when the decorative symbols are stopped, the characters or symbols indicating the name of the effect may be partially or wholly hidden by the stopped decorative symbols. For example, by adding a character string "pine mark growth time" to the pre-reading effect image, a part of the character string "pine mark growth time" is displayed by the decoration pattern displayed on the front side of the pre-reading effect image. Or configure everything to be hidden. Also, in the stick-shaped image shown in FIG. 629(H), a character string "pine tree mark growth time" may be attached as characters indicating the name of the effect.

With such a configuration, the entire name of the prefetch effect image can be visually recognized by the player when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and the display priority of the prefetch effect image and the decorative pattern is switched. , it is possible to impress the player that the look-ahead effect image is being performed.

Also, it is preferable to change the name of the effect to be displayed in the bar-shaped image according to the size of the look-ahead effect image (that is, the degree of expectation for the big win) displayed until immediately before. For example, if the first look-ahead effect image is displayed, the character string "pine mark growth time (small)" is displayed, and if the second look-ahead effect image is displayed, the character string "pine mark growth time ( The character string "Middle)" may be configured to display the character string "Pine mark growth time (Large)" when the third look-ahead effect image is displayed.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible for the player to confirm the degree of expectation for a big hit suggested by the look-ahead effect image while ensuring the visibility of the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 624 and the like, by displaying the specific pending image corresponding to the look-ahead effect image, when the variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display However, instead of or in addition to the display of the specific suspension image, a normal suspension image with a perfect circular shape and white color is displayed, and at the same time as the display of the look-ahead effect image is started, a specific The effect sound may be configured to be output for a predetermined time (for example, one second from timing t2 to timing t3). Alternatively, it may be configured such that only the look-ahead effect image is displayed without outputting such a specific effect sound.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can visually clearly grasp the start and stop of each variable display, so that the player can start displaying the prefetch effect image without confirming the movement of the pending image. It is possible to recognize that one has approached the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that has become.

A performance mode is shown in which one of the look-ahead performance image and the decorative pattern is placed in front and the other is displayed in a superimposed manner. In these examples, in the portion where the image located in front and the image located in back are superimposed, the image located in back was configured to be invisible, but the image in front was half visible. It may be configured to be transparent so that the image located in the back can be seen through the image located in the front.

With such a configuration, the visibility of the look-ahead effect image and the decorative pattern can be ensured.

In a state where the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and the decorative pattern is displayed closer to the viewer than the look-ahead effect image, there is an expectation regarding the variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the start of the display of the look-ahead effect image. It is preferable to configure so as not to perform the effect display indicating the degree of expectation other than the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation related to other pending images). For example, during execution of the look-ahead effect display, if a new hold occurs in response to the winning of the first start opening 2002, regardless of the result of the special lottery, a normal round white hold image is displayed. It should be configured to display

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by information other than the variable display corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display.

628, 629, etc. show an embodiment in which the read-ahead effect image is displayed in the periphery of the display area, but the read-ahead effect image may be displayed near the center of the display area.

FIG. 630 shows a variation of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 628 and 629. FIG. FIG. 630(A) shows the state in which the first look-ahead effect image is displayed at timing t2 in the time chart of FIG. 626(A), and FIG. 630(B) shows at timing t6 in the time chart of FIG. 626(A). FIG. 630(C) shows the state in which the second look-ahead effect image is displayed, and the state in which the third look-ahead effect image is displayed at timing t11 in the time chart of FIG. 626(A). Also, FIG. 630(D) shows a display state in which all of the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t14 in the time chart of FIG. 626(A).

In FIG. 630, the first to third look-ahead effect images are images representing a state in which one to three ingredients are stuck into a skewer of oden. Specifically, the first look-ahead effect image is an image showing a skewer with triangular konjac stuck in it, and the second look-ahead effect image is a skewer with triangular konjac and square-shaped radish. The third read-ahead effect image is an image representing a state in which a triangular konjac, a square radish, and an elliptical paste are stuck in a skewer.

In this way, at the timing when one second has elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the first read-ahead performance image changes to the second read-ahead performance image, and the second look-ahead performance image changes to the third look-ahead performance image. Further, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, in any of the pre-reading effect images, the portion representing the ingredients (konjac, radish, paste) is hidden by displaying the decorative pattern on the front side, and only the portion representing the skewer is displayed. It is visible to the player without being hidden by the decoration pattern.

By adopting such a configuration, one look-ahead effect image can be visually recognized and a plurality of the look-ahead effect images can be visually recognized while the decorative pattern is changing and when the change is stopped. For this reason, the look of the look-ahead effect image is visually recognized by the player as if it has changed greatly, and the start and stop of each variable display can be visually recognized more clearly.

Also, only the portion hidden by the decorative pattern is a place that can change when a certain look-ahead effect image changes to another look-ahead effect image. Therefore, in the case where the type of the look-ahead effect image suggests the degree of expectation of a big win, the player can recognize the stop and start of fluctuation of the decorative symbols if he/she watches only the point where the decorative symbols stop. , it is also possible to recognize the degree of expectation for a big win.

It should be noted that, during one variation of the decorative symbols, when performing a variation mode in which the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed as if they were once stopped, and then the variable display is resumed, a look-ahead effect image is performed. without changing the priority of , the pre-reading effect image may be displayed on the front side of the decoration pattern continuously even during the temporary stop display. For example, in the time chart shown in FIG. 626(A), from timing t7 to timing t8 or from timing t17 to timing t18, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are temporarily displayed. Even in the case of resuming the variable display of the symbols, it is preferable to continue to display the look-ahead effect image in front of the decorative symbols.

With such a configuration, a situation occurs in which the player misunderstands that the variable display is finished and a new variable display is started, and that the decorative pattern whose degree of expectation is suggested by the look-ahead effect image is approaching the variation. can be suppressed.

Although the example of displaying the look-ahead effect image around the display area has been shown, a plurality of look-ahead effect images may be displayed around the display area.

An embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 624 and 625 will be described below with reference to production examples shown in FIGS. FIG. 631 is a time chart in this example of effect, and FIGS. 632 and 633 are diagrams showing the display state of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing in this example of effect.

The look-ahead effect in this embodiment includes a look-ahead effect frame image surrounding the outer periphery of the display area in a frame shape, and the first to sixth forewarning images provided in the display area in a display mode of two columns vertically and three columns horizontally. It is configured to be performed by a preview image.

Specifically, the first pine preview image is displayed in the upper left of the display area, the second pine preview image is displayed in the upper center of the display area, the third pine preview image is displayed in the upper right of the display area, and the third pine preview image is displayed in the lower left of the display area. The 4th pine preview image is displayed in the lower center of the display area, the 5th pine preview image is displayed in the lower right of the display area, and the 6th pine preview image is displayed in the lower right of the display area. The 1st to 6th pine preview images have different display start timings and display end timings, and the display starts and ends independently of each other.

Also, the first to sixth pine preview images are images suggesting that a predetermined effect will be performed.

Specifically, the first forewarning image is an image for notifying that the operation of the operation button 410 is enabled, and is attached with a character string "button ready".

In addition, the second pine preview image is an image for notifying that the ear frame movable body provided on the frame will change from the first state to the second state. attached.

Also, the third pine preview image is an image that foretells that the pending image will change to a pending image indicating that the degree of expectation is higher, and is attached with a character string such as "green pending!".

The fourth notice image is an image that displays a countdown that some notice or suggestion regarding a game will be performed at a predetermined timing, and a character string counted down according to the passage of time is added. For example, after a display such as "After 18 seconds?" is an image in which is displayed as a countdown.

The 5th pitch notice image is an image for notifying that a special ready-to-win that is expected to bring a bigger hit than a normal ready-to-win state will occur as a ready-to-win state, and a character string "SP ready-to-win" is added.

The sixth notice image, like the fourth notice image, is an image that displays a countdown indicating that some kind of notice or suggestion regarding the game will be performed at a predetermined timing.

The color of the pre-reading effect frame image and the first to sixth pine preview images is green. The first to sixth pine preview images are bordered with a color other than green (for example, black). As a result, it is possible to make a visual difference from the pre-reading effect frame images displayed behind the first to sixth pine preview images. Also, the first to sixth announcement images may continue to be displayed even after the corresponding announcement or suggestion is executed, but in that case they are displayed in gray instead of green. Also, the characters added to the first to sixth pine preview images are black.

FIG. 631 is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbols stop fluctuating.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 631, at timing t2, a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and a new hold occurs. Also, with this starting winning as a trigger, at timing t2, display of a prefetch effect frame image, a third pine preview image, a fourth pine preview image, and a sixth pine preview image is started as the prefetch effect display.

FIG. 632(A) shows the display state immediately after the look-ahead effect display is started at timing t2. Specifically, on the front side of the changing decorative pattern, a read-ahead effect frame image that encloses the display area in a rectangular shape is displayed. It shows a state in which the preview image and the sixth preview image are displayed. Also, a state in which the pending image is displayed on the frontmost side is shown. Note that the pending image displayed in the third pending display area is a normal pending image in white.

The third pine notice image has the characters "green reserve!" It shows that it changes to a green hold indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher at a predetermined timing.

Further, the character string "18 seconds later?" is added to the fourth pine preview image, and the character string "23 seconds later?" is attached to the sixth pine preview image. This indicates that some notice or suggestion regarding the game will be made after 18 seconds (timing t20) and after 23 seconds (timing t25).

Next, at timing t4, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are all stopped and displayed. FIG. 632(B) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t4. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the 3rd pine preview image, the 4th pine preview image, the 6th pine preview image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in reverse order, The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in front of the third pine preview image, the fourth pine preview image, and the sixth pine preview image. The reserved image displayed in the reserved display area and the normal reserved images displayed in the first to third reserved display areas are displayed in front of the prefetch effect frame image.

Next, at timing t5, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the new variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the 3rd pine preview image, the 4th pine preview image, the 6th pine preview image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are switched again, and the left decorative pattern to The display mode is such that the third pine notice image, the fourth pine notice image, and the sixth pine notice image are displayed in front of the right decorative pattern.

Next, at timing t7, the display of the fifth pine preview image is started. FIG. 632(C) shows the display state immediately after the display of the fifth pine preview image is started at timing t7. Specifically, it shows a state in which the fifth pine notice image with the characters "SP reach!" is displayed on the front side of the changing decorative pattern. The 5th pine notice image has the characters "SP Reach!" This indicates that the change in is the special reach.

Next, at timing t9, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are all stopped and displayed. FIG. 632(D) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t9. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the 3rd pine preview image, the 4th pine preview image to the 6th pine preview image, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in reverse order, The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in front of the third pine preview image, the fourth pine preview image to the sixth pine preview image.

Next, at timing t10, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the new variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the 3rd pine preview image, the 4th pine preview image, the 6th pine preview image, the left decoration pattern, the right decoration pattern, and the left decoration pattern are replaced again. The display mode is such that the third pine notice image, the fourth pine notice image to the sixth pine notice image are displayed in front of the right decorative pattern.

Next, at timing t11, the display of the second pine tree preview image is started. FIG. 632(E) shows the display state immediately after the display of the second pine preview image is started at timing t11. Specifically, it shows a state in which a second pine forewarning image with the words "Beware of the frame!" is displayed in front of the changing decorative pattern. The second notice image has a character string "Caution on the frame!" It shows that the ear frame movable body provided on the frame changes from the first state to the second state at a predetermined timing corresponding to the variation of the decorative pattern.

Next, at timing t13, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area changes to a green pending image. At the same time, the display of the third forewarning image for notifying that the white pending image will change to the green pending image ends. FIG. 632(F) shows the state immediately after these displays are performed at timing t13.

Next, at timing t14, all of the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 632(F) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t14. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the 2nd pine preview image, the 4th pine preview image to the 6th pine preview image, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in reverse order, The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in front of the second pine preview image, the fourth pine preview image to the sixth pine preview image.

Next, at timing t15, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the new variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the 2nd pine preview image, the 4th pine preview image, the 6th pine preview image, the left decoration pattern, the right decoration pattern, and the left decoration pattern are replaced again. The display mode is such that the second pine notice image, the fourth pine notice image to the sixth pine notice image are displayed in front of the right decorative pattern. Further, the variation of this decorative pattern is a variation corresponding to the suspension caused by the winning of the game ball in the first start hole 2002 at the timing t2, and is a variation display targeted for the look-ahead effect display.

Next, at timing t17, the display of the first pine tree preview image is started. FIG. 632(G) shows the display state immediately after the display of the first pine preview image is started at timing t17. Specifically, it shows a state in which the first forewarning image with the words "button ready" is displayed in front of the changing decorative pattern. The character string "button ready" is attached to the first preview image, which indicates that the operation of the operation button 410 will be enabled at a predetermined timing.

Next, at timing t20, the characters added to the fourth pine preview image change from the characters "01 seconds later?" to the characters "Chance!". At the same time, the green pending image displayed in the pending display area changes to the red pending image. FIG. 633(A) shows the state immediately after these displays are performed at timing t20. The 4th pine preview image was green until then, but becomes gray due to the announcement corresponding to the 4th pine preview image (change to red reserved image).

Next, at timing t22, the display of the fourth pine preview image with the characters "Chance!" ends.

Next, at timing t25, the characters attached to the sixth pine preview image change from the characters "01 seconds later?" to the characters "Chance!". At the same time, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts falling to the front side of the display area. At the same time, the left decorative pattern with the number "2" and the right decorative pattern with the number "2" are temporarily stopped and displayed to generate a ready-to-win state. It should be noted that the middle decorative pattern continues to be displayed in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward. FIG. 633(B) shows the state immediately after these displays are performed at timing t25. The preview image of the sixth pine tree has been green until then, but it becomes gray because the preview corresponding to the preview image of the sixth pine tree (movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800) has been performed.

Next, from timing t25 to timing t29, after the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 changes from the first state (standby state) to the second state (dropped state), the second state is maintained for a predetermined time, and then the second state ( dropped state) to the first state (standby state). Also, at timing t27, the display of the sixth pine preview image with the characters "Chance!" is terminated.

Next, at timing t30, the size of the decorative pattern changes and special reach occurs. Specifically, the left decorative pattern with the number “2”, which had been temporarily stopped and displayed approximately in the vertical center on the left side of the display area, is reduced to a square shape and temporarily displayed at the lower left of the display area. It will be in the stopped display state. Similarly, the right decorative pattern with the number "2", which had been temporarily stopped in the vertical center of the right side of the display area, was reduced to a square shape and temporarily stopped in the lower right of the display area. state. Further, the left decorative design and the right decorative design change from the state of being displayed behind the look-ahead performance frame image to the state of being displayed on the front side of the look-ahead performance frame image. At the same time, the size of the middle decorative pattern in the horizontal direction is approximately doubled, and a variable display is performed. At the same time, the display of the fifth pine preview image with the characters "SP reach!" is terminated. FIG. 633(C) shows the state immediately after these displays are performed at timing t30.

Next, at timing t35, the ear frame movable body changes from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moved to the movement position or rotated). Also, the characters attached to the second pine preview image change from the characters "Be careful on the frame!" to the characters "Moving on the frame!". FIG. 633(D) shows the state immediately after the characters added to the second pine preview image change to the characters "moving on frame!" at timing t30. The second pine preview image has been green until then, but it turns gray because the previous notice (state change of the ear frame movable body) corresponding to the second pine preview image has been performed.

Next, at timing t41, the operation of the operation button 410 changes to a valid state. Also, the characters attached to the first preview image change from the characters "button preparation" to the characters "press OK!". Also, in the center of the lower portion of the display area in the left-right direction, an image imitating a button with the characters "PUSH" is displayed. FIG. 633(E) shows the state immediately after the characters attached to the first pine preview image change to the characters "Press OK!" at timing t30. The first pine notice image has been green until then, but it becomes gray because the notice corresponding to the first pine notice image (change to a state in which the operation of the operation button 410 is enabled) has been performed.

Although illustration is omitted, during a period from timing t41 to timing t43, when the player operates a button, some kind of display suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win is performed. For example, it may be configured such that a character string "May not hit..." or a character string "May hit..." is displayed for one second immediately after the button is operated in the display area according to the button operation. . In this case, if the character string "may not win..." is displayed, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the character string "may not win..." is displayed. good.

Next, at timing t45, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in either a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loss or a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit. be done. FIG. 633(F) shows a display state in which the special lottery result is stop-displayed in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is lost. Also, FIG. 633(G) shows a display state in which the special lottery result is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a big win. At this time, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern, which have been reduced and displayed at the corner of the display area, return to their original sizes and are stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the display area in the vertical direction. In addition, the horizontal width of the middle decorative pattern also returns to its original width, and is stopped and displayed at the substantially central position in the vertical direction of the display area.

As described above, in this embodiment, during the variation of the decorative patterns, the decorative patterns are displayed in front of the first to sixth pine preview images, and during the stop display of the decorative patterns, the first The pine notice image to the sixth pine notice image are configured to be displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern. By adopting such a configuration, the player can visually clearly grasp the start and stop of each variable display. It is possible to recognize that the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image is approaching the variable display without bothering to confirm the movement of the reserved image corresponding to the prize winning.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 631, an effect example is shown in which all of the first to sixth pine preview images are displayed. Based on this, only a part of the pine preview image may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable to display the pine forewarning image from a predetermined timing before the decorative pattern is stopped displayed to a predetermined timing after the start of the new variable display. For example, in the production example shown in FIG. 631, the pine forewarning image is displayed during the period from timing t3 to timing t6, the period from timing t8 to timing t11, and the period from timing t13 to timing t16. do it.

For example, in the case of displaying only the first forewarning image with the words "button ready!" good. Further, when displaying only the second pine forewarning image with the text "Caution on the frame!" Good to configure. The same is true for the third pine preview image to the sixth pine preview image.

By displaying a plurality of pine preview images, one of the pine preview images may be displayed during the period from timing t3 to timing t16. For example, in the effect example shown in FIG. 631, the third pine forewarning image with the characters "green pending!" is not displayed from timing t13 to timing t16. Also, the 5th pine preview image with the characters "SP reach!" is not displayed from timing t3 to timing t6. However, if both the third pine preview image and the sixth pine preview image are displayed, the pine preview image will be displayed during the period from timing t3 to timing t16. In this way, it is possible to display a plurality of pine forewarning images with different display start timings and display end timings.

The size of the look-ahead performance frame image is configured to display a look-ahead performance frame image larger than the performance examples shown in FIGS. You may do so. In this case, the width of the look-ahead rendering frame image, which is a shape surrounding the display area, is made thicker, and when the left to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the left and upper sides of the left decorative pattern and the upper side of the middle decorative pattern are displayed. , the upper side and the right side of the right decorative pattern may overlap the look-ahead effect frame image. Also, in this case, it is preferable that the number area of each of the statically displayed decorative symbols is configured so as not to overlap the look-ahead effect frame image. FIG. 634(A) is a display example of the pre-reading effect frame image having such a wide width immediately after timing t2, and FIG. 634(B) is a display example of the pre-reading effect frame image having such a wide width immediately after timing t4 This is an example.

By adopting such a configuration, even if there is a case where none of the pine forewarning images are displayed in the period from timing t3 to timing t16, the look-ahead effect frame image is behind the decorative pattern when the fluctuation of the decorative pattern is stopped. , and the player can visually and clearly grasp the start and stop of each variable display.
Further, even when the decorative pattern corresponding to the suspension that triggered the display of the pine preview image is stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the pre-reading effect frame image.

FIG. 635 is a modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 635, the suspension display area, first to fourth suspension display areas are provided from the lower left position of the display area toward the upper right. FIG. 635(A) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the look-ahead effect display is started in FIG. 624 . Also, FIG. 635(B) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t4 in FIG. In addition, FIGS. 635(A) and 635(B) show that the suspension display area, the first suspension display area, and the second suspension display area have a normal suspension with a circular shape and white color, and the third suspension display area , a state in which a blue pending image indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high is displayed. In addition, the number of suspensions is three, and the fourth suspension display area is indicated by a dotted line.

In this embodiment, during the variable display of the left to right decorative symbols, the reserved image is displayed closer to the viewer than the left to right decorative symbols. On the other hand, at the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the display order of the reserved image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are closer than the reserved image. displayed on the side.

In this way, when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, part of the first to third reserved display regions and all of the fourth display region are temporarily hidden by the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern. state. In addition, as the third reserved display area, the second display area, the first display area and the reserved display area are approached, the area hidden by the decorative pattern in each display area decreases, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern The visibility of each pending image during the stop display gradually increases, and the player's expectation for the big win increases at an accelerating rate.

With reference to FIGS. 636 and 637, depending on the points displayed corresponding to the predetermined effect display in the display area during the variable display of the decorative symbols, the variable display result of the decorative symbols becomes the variable display result indicating the big win. Shown is an example of an effect that indicates the degree of expectation.

Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the temporary stop display of the decorative patterns is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 4 times) in accordance with the degree of expectation that the result of the variable display will be a big win. The degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested by these temporary stop display effects. 637(A) to 637(H), examples of effects will be described below.

FIGS. 637(A) to 637(H) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode from the start to the end of the “Oden x shopkeeper's time!” effect.

The "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" effect is one of the display effects performed based on the special lottery result obtained when the game ball wins the first starting hole 2002.例文帳に追加In this production example, after the Oden production image display production pattern, which will be described later, is executed four times, it is expected that the result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, which are being variably displayed, will be a big hit, due to the Oden image and the Oden points, which will be described later. degree is suggested.

FIG. 637(A) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the first oden effect image display effect pattern, which will be described later, starts with the start of the "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" effect. In addition, immediately after the display state of the presentation mode display area, the left oden presentation image display area to the right oden presentation image display area, and the accumulated oden point display area, which will be described later, the left decorative pattern to the right decoration are started. It shows the state where the variable display of the symbols has started.

In this state, a rectangular effect mode display area having long sides equal to the vertical length of the display area is provided at the right end of the display area. The presentation mode display area enters a state in which display is performed as the presentation of "Oden x Shopkeeper's time!" . In the effect mode display area, the name of the effect state being executed is given in vertical writing. In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 637(A) to 637(H), a character string "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" is attached.

The display area is provided with three oden effect image display areas: a left oden effect image display area, a middle oden effect image display area, and a right oden effect image display area. Each oden effect display area is a display area in which an oden effect image, which will be described later, is displayed.

The left oden effect image display area is the position where the left decorative pattern is displayed and temporarily stopped, the middle oden effect image display area is the position where the middle decorative pattern is stopped and temporarily stopped, and the right oden effect image display area. are provided at the positions where the right decorative pattern is stopped and temporarily stopped.

Further, each oden effect image display area is provided inside the peripheral portion of the decorative pattern displayed at the corresponding position.

It should be noted that the number area located in the center of the background area in each of the left decorative design to the right decorative design is a special effect including "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" ) to the lower left portion of the background area as shown in FIG. As a result, the visibility of the number area is ensured even when an oden effect image, which will be described later, is superimposed on the front side of the decorative symbols while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed.

The oden effect image is an image displayed in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area, and two types of the oden image and the angry face image are provided.

The oden performance image is displayed at a position overlapping with the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, and is displayed in front of each decorative pattern during variable display that scrolls downward. On the other hand, with respect to each decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped, the oden effect image is displayed in front of each decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped, and the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped is displayed in front of the oden effect image. In some cases, it may be displayed on the side.

The oden image is one of the images indicating the adjustment points of oden points, which are displayed in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area, which will be described later. The oden image is an image of an isosceles triangle shape that imitates konjac, which is a type of oden.

The angry face image is one of the effect images indicating the adjustment points of the oden points described later, which are displayed in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area. The angry face image is a circular image that imitates the angry face of the owner of a food stall that sells oden.

FIG. 636 shows 15 oden effect image display effect patterns that define combinations of oden effect images to be displayed in each image display area from the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area. Each oden effect image display effect pattern will be described below.

The oden effect image display effect pattern 01 is a effect pattern in which no oden effect image is displayed.

The oden effect image display effect pattern 02 and the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 are effect patterns in which one oden effect image is displayed. As shown in FIG. 636, when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is executed, an oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area. Further, when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is executed, an angry face image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area. Hereinafter, although description is omitted, in each effect pattern, whether or not an oden effect image is displayed in each of the left oden effect image display area, the middle oden effect image display area, and the right oden effect image display area is determined. If an effect image is to be displayed, it is defined which of the oden image and the angry face image is to be displayed.

Oden effect image display effect pattern 04 to oden effect image display effect pattern 07 are effect patterns in which two oden effect images are displayed.

Oden effect image display effect pattern 08 to oden effect image display effect pattern 15 are effect patterns in which three oden effect images are displayed.

In this production example, first, as shown in FIG. 637(A), when the production "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" Execution of pattern 04 is started.

FIGS. 637(A) and 637(B) show display states displayed when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed. FIG. 637(A) shows a state in which an oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, an oden image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and an oden effect image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area. It shows a state where there is no

At the lower left end of the display area, there is provided a rectangular total oden point display area having a long side approximately half the length of the display area in the vertical direction. In the accumulated oden point display area, as the production of "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" Along with this, the character string indicating the accumulated oden points is not displayed. The total oden points will be described later.

A character string such as "XX points!" is written vertically in the cumulative oden point display area. The "XX" portion of this character string displays the accumulated oden points. If the oden point is a negative value, it is displayed with a "-" sign added. A method for calculating the accumulated oden points will be described later. It should be noted that the cumulative oden point value is "0" when the "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" effect is started.

In FIG. 637(A), the initial value of the accumulated oden points is "0", and the character string "0 points!" The state attached to the total oden point display area is shown.

FIG. 637(B) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time (specifically, three seconds) has passed from the state shown in FIG. 637(A).

When a predetermined time (specifically, one second) elapses from the timing when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started (the display state shown in FIG. 637(A)), the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed. It changes from a display state in which the display moves downward and is variably displayed to a state in which the temporary stop display is performed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "5", the middle decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "6", and the right decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "6". The symbols change from a display state in which the symbols move downward and are variably displayed to a state in which they are temporarily stopped.

In addition, oden images are displayed in the left oden effect image display area and the middle oden effect image display area.

As a result, the oden image is displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped, and the oden image is displayed on the front side of the middle decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped. Become.

In addition, when a predetermined time (specifically 1.5 seconds) has passed from the state shown in FIG. 637(A), the middle decorative pattern in the state of temporary stop display is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area. The oden image is displayed on the front side of the oden image.

Here, the obtained oden point display area will be described. The obtained oden point display areas are three oblong rectangular display areas provided in the upper part of the display area. The three acquired oden point display areas are arranged in the horizontal direction, and are provided in order from the left to the left acquired oden point display area, the middle acquired oden point display area, and the right acquired oden point display area. In addition, the three acquired oden point display areas correspond to the oden effect image display areas. Above the left oden effect image display area is the left acquired oden point display area, and above the middle oden effect image display area. A middle obtained oden point display area and a right obtained oden point display area are provided above the right oden effect image display area in correspondence with each other.

In addition, at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) has passed since the execution of an arbitrary oden effect image display effect pattern is started, an oden effect is displayed in front of each decorative pattern in the state of being temporarily stopped. When the image is displayed, an arbitrary oden point increase/decrease image is displayed in the obtained oden point display area corresponding to the oden effect image display area where the oden effect image is displayed.

Next, the oden point increase/decrease image will be described. The oden point increase/decrease image is a production image that indicates the addition or subtraction of oden points displayed in the left oden point display area to the right oden point display area, and there are two types of oden point increase images and oden point decrease images. ing.

For example, at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) has passed since the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 was started, the oden image is displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol in the state of temporary stop display. When displayed, in the left acquired oden point display area corresponding to the oden effect image display area where the oden image is displayed, oden showing a symbol and a number such as "+1" indicating that the oden point has increased by 1 point A point increase image is displayed.

Further, for example, at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) has passed since the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is started, an angry When the face image is displayed, a sign such as "-1" indicating that the oden point has decreased by 1 point is displayed in the left oden point display area corresponding to the oden effect image display area where the angry face image is displayed. and an oden point reduction image showing a number is displayed.

At the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) has passed since the execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is started, the oden effect When the image is not displayed, the oden point increase/decrease image is not displayed in the acquired oden point display area.

In this example of effect, a temporary stop display is performed at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) has passed since the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 shown in FIG. Since the oden image is displayed on the front side of the left decorative pattern of the state, in FIG. 637(B), a symbol such as "+1" indicating that the oden point has increased by 1 point in the left acquired oden point display area. And the oden point increase image showing the number is displayed.

Here, a method for calculating the total oden points displayed in the total oden point display area will be described. At the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) has passed since the execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern has started, the oden point increase/decrease image is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area to the right acquired oden point display area. When displayed, the oden points indicated by the oden point increase/decrease image are added to calculate the addition/subtraction acquired oden points. If the calculated added/subtracted acquired oden points are a value other than "0", for the accumulated oden points indicated by "XX" in the character string "XX points!" attached to the accumulated oden point display area, By adding the acquired oden points by addition and subtraction, the value obtained by the addition becomes a new accumulated oden point. The new accumulated oden points are "XX points" added to the accumulated oden point display area at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has passed since the execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern was started. !” is displayed as a new accumulated oden point value indicated by “XX” in the character string.

At the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 2 seconds) has passed since the execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern has started, the oden points are increased or decreased in the left acquired oden point display area to the right acquired oden point display area. When the image is not displayed, the total oden points displayed in the total oden point display area do not change.

In addition, at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) has passed since execution of a predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern has started, the oden points are increased or decreased in the left acquired oden point display area to the right acquired oden point display area. When the added/subtracted oden points calculated by adding the oden points indicated by the oden point increase/decrease image displayed in the image is "0" (for example, one oden point increase image and an oden point decrease image If one is displayed), the total oden points displayed in the total oden point display area do not change.

In this example of effect, the left oden effect image is displayed at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) has passed since the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 shown in FIG. 637(A) was started. When the oden point increase/decrease image is displayed in one of the display areas from the area to the right oden effect image display area, the oden points indicated by the oden point increase/decrease image are added. The displayed oden point increase/decrease image is only the oden point increase image showing a symbol and a number such as "+1" displayed in the left oden effect image display area.

Further, since the value of the accumulated oden points is "0", the character string attached to the accumulated oden point display area is "0 points!".

As a result, the addition/subtraction oden point value "+1" is added to the cumulative oden point value "0", resulting in a new cumulative oden point value of "+1".

As a result, in the display state shown in FIG. 637(B) after a predetermined time (specifically, three seconds) has elapsed since the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 shown in FIG. , the character string attached to the total oden point display area is "1 point!".

The display state at the timing after a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has passed since the execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is started, and at the timing at which the predetermined time (specifically, 1 second) has continued, Execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is terminated.

In this production example, the display state at the timing after a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed since execution of the oden production image display production pattern 04 shown in FIG. B), and after the display state shown in FIG. 637(B) continues for a predetermined time (specifically, one second), the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed. ends.

After the execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is completed, when the next predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is executed, the oden image display effect interval is maintained for a predetermined time (specifically, one second). done.

Specifically, at the same time when the oden image display effect interval is started, the oden effect image in the oden effect image display area is displayed according to the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern whose execution has ended. Then, the oden point increase/decrease image in the obtained oden point display area is not displayed.

In addition, at the same time when the oden image display effect interval is started, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern which are temporarily stopped and displayed according to the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern whose execution has ended are lowered again. It will be in a state of being variably displayed so as to scroll in the direction. In the variable display resumed in the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the decorative patterns are scrolled downward and displayed until the next predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is executed and a temporary stop state is reached. The variable display state is maintained.

In this example of effect, when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is completed, the oden image display effect interval is started. Simultaneously with the start of the oden image display effect interval, the oden image in the left oden effect image display area and the oden point increasing image in the left acquired oden point display area shown in FIG. 637(B) are displayed. It will be in the state of not

At the same time when the oden image display effect interval is started, according to the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 whose execution has ended, the left decorative pattern with the number "5" is replaced with the number "5" as the middle decorative pattern. The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, which were in the state where the decorative pattern with the number "6" as the right decorative pattern and the decorative pattern with the number "6" as the right decorative pattern, were temporarily stopped and displayed, are all variably displayed. state is resumed.

The variable display resumed in the left decorative design to the right decorative design is that each decorative design shown in FIG. Until the state is reached, the variable display state in which the decorative symbols are scrolled downward and displayed is maintained.

FIG. 637(C) shows the state immediately after the oden effect image display effect pattern 09, which is the second oden effect image display effect pattern in the "oden x shopkeeper's time!" effect, is started.

At this time, since the oden effect image display effect pattern is the oden effect image display effect pattern 09, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, the angry face image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and the right oden effect image is displayed. In the effect image display area, an angry face image is displayed in front of each decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner.

Further, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are maintained in a variable display state in which the decorative patterns are scrolled downward and displayed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 637(A), as the production of "Oden x Shopkeeper's time!" is started, the character string "Oden x Shopkeeper's time!" and the displayed state is maintained. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 637(B), the character string "1 point!" attached to the total oden point display area is maintained to be continuously displayed. In addition, the oden point increase/decrease image is not displayed in the acquired oden point display area.

After a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second) has passed since the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 09 shown in FIG. It will be in the state of the temporary stop display from the state. Specifically, the left decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "3", the middle decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "4", and the right decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "4". The symbols change from a state in which they are displayed in a variable state to a state in which they are displayed in a temporary stop state. At this time, in the state shown in FIG. 637(C), each oden effect image displayed in each oden effect image display area is displayed on the front side of each decorative symbol which is in the temporarily stopped state. condition continues.

Further, when a predetermined time (specifically, 1.5 seconds) elapses from the state shown in FIG. A left decorative pattern with a number "3" is displayed in front of the oden image displayed in the left oden effect image display area. As a result, in the oden effect image display area, the oden image in the left oden effect image display area cannot be viewed, and the middle oden effect image display area displays an angry face image, and the right oden effect image display area displays an angry face image. It will be in a state where

Further, when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) elapses from the state shown in FIG. Corresponding to the fact that the angry face image is displayed in the image display area, in the acquired oden point display area, the medium acquired oden point display area has "-1" indicating that the oden point is reduced by 1 point. A state where an oden point reduction image showing a symbol and a number is displayed, and an oden point reduction image showing a symbol and a number such as "-1" indicating that the oden point is reduced by 1 point is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. becomes.

At this time, the oden point increase/decrease images displayed in the acquired oden point display area are the oden point decrease image showing "-1" in the middle acquired oden point display area and the oden point decrease image showing "-1" in the right acquired oden point display area. , the value of the added/subtracted acquired oden points in the oden effect image display effect pattern 09 becomes "-2" which is the sum of "-1" and "-1".

In addition, since the calculated added/subtracted acquired oden point value is "-2" and is a value other than "0", addition is performed to the accumulated oden point value shown in the accumulated oden point display area. . In the state shown in FIG. 637(C), the character string attached to the accumulated oden point display area is "1 point!", so the accumulated oden point value is "1". On the other hand, by adding "-2" which is the value of the addition/subtraction acquired oden points in the oden effect image display effect pattern 09, the new accumulated oden point value becomes "-1".

As a result, in the state shown in FIG. 637(D), which is the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has passed from the state shown in FIG. The string will be "-1 point!".

FIG. 637(D) shows the display state at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has passed since execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 09 shown in FIG. 637(C) is started. there is

Specifically, in the left decorative design to the right decorative design, the decorative design with the number "3" as the left decorative design, the decorative design with the number "4" as the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design Decorative symbols with the number "4" are temporarily stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the oden effect image display area, an angry face image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and an angry face image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area.

In addition, in the acquired oden point display area, in the middle acquired oden point display area, an oden point decrease image showing a symbol and a number such as "-1" indicating that the oden point is reduced by 1 point is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. A symbol such as "-1" indicating that the oden point is reduced by one point and an oden point reduction image indicating a number are displayed.

Also, in the cumulative oden point display area, a character string such as "-1 point!" is attached.

After the display state shown in FIG. 637(D) continues for a predetermined time (specifically, one second), the second oden effect image display effect pattern in the effect "Oden x shopkeeper time!" The execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 09 ends.

After the display state shown in FIG. 637(D) continues for a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second), the execution of the oden image display effect pattern 09 ends. be started.

At the same time when the oden image display effect interval is started, the angry face image in the middle oden effect image display area, the angry face image in the right oden effect image display area, and the middle acquisition shown in FIG. The oden point reduction image in the oden point display area and the oden point reduction image in the right obtained oden point display area are not displayed.

At the same time when the oden image display effect interval is started, according to the oden effect image display effect pattern 09 whose execution has ended, the left decorative pattern with the number "3" is replaced with the number "3" as the middle decorative pattern. The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, which were in the state where the decorative pattern with the number "4" as the right decorative pattern and the decorative pattern with the number "4" as the right decorative pattern, were temporarily stopped and displayed, are all variably displayed. state is resumed.

The variable display resumed in the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is that each decorative pattern shown in FIG. Until the state is reached, the variable display state in which the decorative symbols are scrolled downward and displayed is maintained.

FIG. 637(E) shows the state immediately after the oden effect image display effect pattern 10, which is the third oden effect image display effect pattern in the "oden x shopkeeper's time!" effect, is started.

At this time, since the oden effect image display effect pattern is the oden effect image display effect pattern 10, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, the angry face image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and the right oden effect image is displayed. In the effect image display area, the oden image is displayed in front of each decorative pattern displayed in a variable display state.

Further, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are maintained in a variable display state in which the decorative patterns are scrolled downward and displayed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 637(A), as the production of "Oden x Shopkeeper's time!" is started, the character string "Oden x Shopkeeper's time!" and the displayed state is maintained. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 637(D), the character string "-1 point!" attached to the total oden point display area is maintained to be continuously displayed. In addition, the oden point increase/decrease image is not displayed in the acquired oden point display area.

After a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed since the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 shown in FIG. It will be in the state of the temporary stop display from the state. Specifically, the left decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "1", the middle decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "2", and the right decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "2". The symbols change from a state in which they are displayed in a variable state to a state in which they are displayed in a temporary stop state. At this time, in the state shown in FIG. 637(E), each oden effect image displayed in each oden effect image display area is displayed on the front side of each decorative pattern which is in the temporarily stopped state. condition continues.

Also, when a predetermined time (specifically 1.5 seconds) elapses from the state shown in FIG. A decorative pattern with a number "2" attached as a medium decorative pattern is displayed in front of the angry face image displayed in the medium effect image display area. As a result, in the oden effect image display area, the angry face image in the middle oden effect image display area cannot be visually recognized, and the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area and the oden image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area. state.

Further, when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) has passed from the state shown in FIG. In the acquired oden point display area, the left acquired oden point display area has a symbol such as "+1" indicating that the oden point increases by 1 point, corresponding to the state where the oden images are displayed in the display area. An oden point increase image showing a number is displayed, and a sign such as "+1" indicating that the oden point is increased by one point and an oden point increase image showing a number are displayed in the right obtained oden point display area.

At this time, the oden point increase/decrease images displayed in the acquired oden point display area are the oden point increase image showing "+1" in the left acquired oden point display area and the oden point increase image showing "+1" in the right acquired oden point display area. Along with the oden point increasing image, the value of the addition/subtraction obtained oden points in the oden performance image display performance pattern 10 becomes "+2" which is the sum of "+1" and "+1".

Further, since the value of the calculated addition/subtraction obtained oden points is '+2' and is a value other than '0', addition is performed to the value of the accumulated oden points indicated in the accumulated oden point display area. In the state shown in FIG. 637(E), the character string added to the accumulated oden point display area is "-1 point!", so the accumulated oden point value is "-1". By adding "+2", which is the value of the addition/subtraction oden points in the oden effect image display effect pattern 10, to the value, the new accumulated oden point value becomes "1".

As a result, in the state shown in FIG. 637(D), which is the timing after a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. The character string to be displayed becomes "1 point!".

FIG. 637(F) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has passed since execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 shown in FIG. 637(E) is started. there is

Specifically, in the left decorative design to the right decorative design, the decorative design with the number "1" as the left decorative design, the decorative design with the number "2" as the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design Decorative symbols with the number "2" are temporarily stopped and displayed.

Further, in the oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, and the oden image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area.

In addition, in the obtained oden point display area, the left obtained oden point display area has an oden point increase image showing a symbol and a number such as "+1" indicating that the oden point increases by 1 point, and the right obtained oden point display area has oden points. A symbol such as "+1" indicating an increase of 1 point and an oden point increase image indicating a number are displayed.

In addition, in the accumulated oden point display area, a character string such as "1 point!" is attached.

After the display state shown in FIG. 637(F) continues for a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second), the third time of the oden effect image display effect pattern in the effect "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" The execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 ends.

After the display state shown in FIG. 637(F) continues for a predetermined time (specifically, one second), the execution of the oden image display effect pattern 10 ends, and the oden image display effect interval is set. be started.

At the same time when the oden image display effect interval is started, the oden image in the left oden effect image display area, the oden image in the right oden effect image display area, and the left acquired oden points are shown in FIG. 637(F). The oden point increase image in the display area and the oden point increase image in the right acquired oden point display area are not displayed.

At the same time when the oden image display effect interval is started, according to the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 whose execution has ended, the left decorative pattern with the number "1" is replaced with the number "1" as the middle decorative pattern. The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, which were in the state where the decorative pattern with the number "2" as the right decorative pattern and the decorative pattern with the number "2" as the right decorative pattern, were temporarily stopped and displayed, are all variably displayed. state is resumed.

The variable display resumed in the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is that each decorative pattern shown in FIG. Until the state is reached, the variable display state in which the decorative symbols are scrolled downward and displayed is maintained.

FIG. 637(G) shows the state immediately after the oden effect image display effect pattern 08, which is the fourth oden effect image display effect pattern in the "oden x shopkeeper's time!" effect, is started.

At this time, since the oden effect image display effect pattern is the oden effect image display effect pattern 08, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and the right oden effect is displayed. In the image display area, the oden image is displayed in front of each decorative pattern displayed in a variable display state.

Further, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are maintained in a variable display state in which the decorative patterns are scrolled downward and displayed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 637(A), as the production of "Oden x Shopkeeper's time!" is started, the character string "Oden x Shopkeeper's time!" and the displayed state is maintained. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 637(F), the character string "1 point!" attached to the total oden point display area is maintained to be continuously displayed. In addition, the oden point increase/decrease image is not displayed in the obtained oden point display area.

After a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed since the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 shown in FIG. It will be in the state of temporary stop display from the state. Specifically, the left decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "6", the middle decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "7", and the right decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "7". The symbols change from a state in which they are displayed in a variable state to a state in which they are displayed in a temporary stop state. At this time, in the state shown in FIG. 637(G), each oden effect image displayed in each oden effect image display area is displayed on the front side of each decorative symbol which is in the temporarily stopped state. condition continues.

Also, when a predetermined time (specifically 1.5 seconds) has passed from the state shown in FIG. Since the display state of each oden effect image display area is continued, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and the oden image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area. Each state is displayed.

Further, when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) has passed from the state shown in FIG. The oden image is displayed in the display area, and the oden image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area. An oden point increase image showing a symbol and a number such as "+1" indicating an increase, and an oden point increase image showing a symbol and a number such as "+1" indicating that the oden point is increased by 1 point in the medium acquired oden point display area However, in the right obtained oden point display area, a symbol such as "+1" indicating that the oden point is increased by one point and an oden point increase image indicating a number are displayed.

At this time, the oden point increase/decrease images displayed in the acquired oden point display area are the oden point increase image showing "+1" in the left acquired oden point display area and the oden point increase image showing "+1" in the middle acquired oden point display area. With the oden point increase image and the oden point increase image showing "+1" in the right acquired oden point display area, the values of addition and subtraction acquired oden points in the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 are "+1" and "+1". ” and “+1” become “+3”.

Further, since the value of the calculated addition/subtraction obtained oden points is '+3' and is a value other than '0', addition is performed to the value of the accumulated oden points indicated in the accumulated oden point display area. In the state shown in FIG. 637(G), the character string added to the cumulative oden point display area is "1 point!", so that the cumulative oden point value is "1". On the other hand, the addition of "+3", which is the value of the addition/subtraction oden points in the oden effect image display effect pattern 08, results in a new accumulated oden point value of "4".

As a result, in the state shown in FIG. 637(H), which is the timing after a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has passed from the state shown in FIG. The resulting string is "4 points!".

FIG. 637(H) shows the display state at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has passed since execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 shown in FIG. 637(G) is started. there is

Specifically, in the left decorative design to the right decorative design, the decorative design with the number "6" as the left decorative design, the decorative design with the number "7" as the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design Decorative symbols with the number "7" are temporarily stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and the oden image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area. there is

In addition, in the acquired oden point display area, the left acquired oden point display area has an oden point increase image showing a symbol and a number such as "+1" indicating that the oden point increases by 1 point, and the middle acquired oden point display area shows the oden point. The oden point increase image showing a symbol and number such as "+1" indicating that the oden is increased by 1 point, and the acquired oden point display area on the right shows a symbol and number such as "+1" that indicates that the oden point is increased by 1 point. Each point increase image is displayed.

In addition, in the cumulative oden point display area, a character string such as "4 points!" is attached.

After the display state shown in FIG. 637(H) continues for a predetermined time (specifically, one second), the fourth time of the oden effect image display effect pattern in the effect "Oden x shopkeeper time!" The execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 ends.

After the execution of a predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is completed, when the next predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is not executed, the oden image display effect end interval is set to a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second). ).

Specifically, at the same time when the oden image display effect end interval is started, the oden effect image in the oden effect image display area is displayed according to the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern whose execution has ended. Then, the oden point increase/decrease image in the obtained oden point display area is not displayed.

Further, with the start of the presentation of "Oden x shopkeeper's time!", the character string "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" attached in the presentation mode display area is maintained to be continuously displayed.

Further, when the execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is completed and the next predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is not executed, "XX points!" ” continues to be displayed.

In addition, at the same time when the oden image display effect end interval is started, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern which are temporarily stopped and displayed according to the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern whose execution has ended are decorated. The state in which the symbols are variably displayed is resumed. The variable display restarted in the left decorative design to the right decorative design is temporarily stopped when the left decorative design and the right decorative design are given the same arbitrary numbers as the reach state occurs. The variable display state in which the decorative symbols are scrolled downward and displayed is maintained until it becomes.

In this example of performance, when the execution of the oden performance image display performance pattern 08 is completed, the subsequent oden performance image display performance pattern is not executed, so that the oden image display performance end interval is started. Simultaneously with the start of the oden image display effect end interval, the oden image in the left oden effect image display area and the oden point increasing image in the left acquired oden point display area shown in FIG. 637(H) are displayed. It will be in a state where it will not be

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 637(A), as the production of "Oden x Shopkeeper's time!" is started, the character string "Oden x Shopkeeper's time!" and the displayed state is maintained.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 637(H), the character string "4 points!" attached to the total oden point display area is maintained to be continuously displayed.

At the same time when the oden image display effect end interval is started, according to the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 whose execution has ended, the left decorative pattern with the number "6" is changed to the middle decorative pattern with the number "6". The decorative pattern with the number "7" and the decorative pattern with the number "7" as the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed, respectively. state is resumed.

The oden image display effect end interval continues for a predetermined time (specifically, one second). At the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second) has passed after the oden image display effect end interval ends, a decorative pattern with a predetermined number as the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped from a state in which it is displayed in a variable manner. state. Next, when a predetermined time (specifically, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the oden image display effect end interval has ended, the same predetermined state as the right decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the left decorative pattern is displayed. The state in which the decorative symbols with the numbers of . Further, at the timing when the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped and displayed, the middle decorative design is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward.

When a predetermined time (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses after the ready-to-win state occurs, the state in which the middle decorative pattern is variably displayed is changed to a state in which the variability is stopped.

Specifically, when the special lottery result that triggered the start of "Oden x shopkeeper time!" A decorative pattern attached with a number different from the decorative pattern attached with a predetermined number of the state is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, when the special lottery result is a big hit, the decorations with the same numbers as the decorations with the predetermined numbers in the state of temporary stop display in the left decorations and the right decorations as middle decorations. The pattern is stopped and displayed.

With reference to FIGS. 637(A) to 637(H), an example of the effect in which the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed four times and "4" is finally displayed as the cumulative oden point value has been described. , the value of the cumulative oden points may be used to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit by the player.

Specifically, based on the results of the special lottery, whether or not to execute the “Oden x Shopkeeper Time!” First, determine whether the value of Next, how many times the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed, in what order the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed, in each oden effect pattern, the oden effect image (oden image) when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped is displayed. , angry face image) to be displayed on the front side or the back side of the decorative pattern may be determined based on the final value of the accumulated oden points.

It is preferable to configure such that the higher the final value of the accumulated oden points, the higher the degree of expectation for a big hit. The final value of the accumulated oden points may be configured to take values from "-3" to "10", for example. In this case, when the cumulative oden point value is "-3" to "0", it is preferable that the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure without forming a ready-to-win state. In addition, when the value of the cumulative oden points is "1" to "10", the decorative pattern forms a ready-to-win state, and the formed ready-to-win state indicates the value obtained by multiplying the cumulative oden points by 10. The result may be configured to be the degree of expectation that is stopped and displayed. For example, if the final value of the cumulative oden points is "4", the degree of expectation for a big hit in the ready-to-win state that occurs thereafter may be set to 40%.

It should be noted that the number of times the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed may be determined with a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) as an upper limit. When the upper limit of the number of times the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed is set to 4, when the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed once, when the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed twice, the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed twice. One of the case where the effect image display effect pattern is executed three times and the case where the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed four times is selected based on the result of the special lottery.

It should be noted that the number of times the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed is displayed in the display area at the start of the effect "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" It is preferable to configure so as to notify the In this case, the greater the number of times the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed, the higher the final value of the accumulated oden points. You will feel hopeful. It should be noted that the final value of accumulated oden points may be increased as the number of times the oden effect image display effect pattern is actually executed increases.

With such a configuration, it is possible to specifically know the degree of expectation for a big win by the number of points displayed. The number of points increases or decreases each time the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the interest of the player in the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols can be enhanced.

With reference to FIGS. 636 and 637, an embodiment in which an oden image and an angry face image are displayed as the oden effect images has been shown, but only the oden image or only the angry face image is displayed as the oden effect image. Embodiments in which effects can be executed are described below with reference to FIGS. 638, 639 and 640. FIG.

Since the various embodiments described below are basically modified from FIGS. Similar to the embodiment described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 638(A) is a diagram showing a table defining an effect pattern capable of executing a "super oden time!" effect in which only an oden image is displayed as an oden effect image. Also, FIG. 639 is a diagram showing a display state in the display area when the "Super Oden Time!" effect is executed. Specifically, FIGS. 639(A) to 639(H) show, in chronological order, display examples when "Super Oden Time!" is executed as an effect corresponding to the suspension. 639(A), 639(B), 639(C), 639(D), 639(E), 639(F), 639(G), and 639(H) The performance proceeds in order.

As shown in FIG. 638(A), in the "super oden time!" effect, only the oden image is displayed as the oden effect image.

FIGS. 639(A) and 639(B) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

Also, FIGS. 639(C) and 639(D) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

Also, FIGS. 639(E) and 639(F) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

Also, FIGS. 639(G) and 639(H) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

In this way, it may be configured so that the accumulated oden points are not reduced. In this case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the accumulated oden points are reduced and the player is disappointed.

FIG. 638(B) is a diagram showing a table defining a production pattern capable of executing a "shopkeeper's fury time!" FIG. 640 is a diagram showing the display state in the display area when the "shopkeeper's fury time!" effect is executed. Specifically, FIGS. 640(A) to 640(H) show, in chronological order, display examples when "Shopkeeper's fury time!" is executed as an effect corresponding to the suspension. 640(A), 640(B), 640(C), 640(D), 640(E), 640(F), 640(G), and 640(H) The performance proceeds in order.

As shown in FIG. 638(B), in the "shopkeeper's fury time!" effect, only the angry face image is displayed as the oden effect image.
Figures 640(A) and 640(B) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the effect of "Shopkeeper Furious Time!".
FIG. 640(C) and FIG. 640(D) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the effect of "shopkeeper's fury time!".
FIG. 640(E) and FIG. 640(F) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is selected in the effect of "shopkeeper's fury time!".
FIG. 640(G) and FIG. 640(H) are examples of effects in the case where the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the "shopkeeper's fury time!" effect.

In addition, in the "Shopkeeper's fury time!" production, the display in the accumulated oden point display area starts from "Remaining 10 points!" It is configured so that the accumulated oden points gradually decrease.

In this way, it may be configured so that the accumulated oden points do not increase. In this case, the player sees the effect of "Shopkeeper's fury time!" while hoping that the accumulated oden points will not decrease.

With reference to FIGS. 636 and 637, the embodiment in which the oden effect image is displayed a predetermined number of times while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped has been described, but the effect is such that the oden effect image is displayed a predetermined number of times while the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. 641, 642, and 643, an embodiment in which can be implemented is described below.

In the present embodiment, as a look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, "Oden x Shopkeeper's Time!", "Super Oden Time!", and "Shopkeeper's Fury Time!" are doing.

Specifically, based on the special lottery result obtained when the game ball wins to the first start port 2002 and withheld, it may be configured to determine whether or not to carry out these look-ahead effects.

Figures 641(A) to 641(H) are tables when the effect "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" Examples are shown in chronological order. 641(A), 641(B), 641(C), 641(D), 641(E), 641(F), 641(G), and 641(H) The look-ahead performance progresses in order.

FIGS. 641(A) and 641(B) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the effect of "Oden x shopkeeper's time!".

In addition, when executing the "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" A performance image is displayed on the front side or the rear side of the decorative pattern, an oden point increase/decrease image is displayed corresponding to the display mode of the oden performance image, and the accumulated oden points are updated corresponding to the displayed oden point increase/decrease image. It should be configured as follows. Figures 641(A), 641(C), 641(E), and 641(G) show the display state during variation of the decorative pattern in Figures 641(B), 641(D), and 641 ( F) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 641(H), each decorative design is in a temporary stop state, and from this state, each decorative design fluctuates again to form a ready-to-win state, and then a display mode showing a big hit or a display mode showing a loss. It will be in the state of being stopped by pressing .

Also, FIGS. 641(C) and 641(D) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 14 is selected in the effect of "Oden x shopkeeper's time!".

Also, FIGS. 641(E) and 641(F) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 is selected in the effect of "Oden x shopkeeper's time!".

FIG. 641(G) and FIG. 641(H) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 is selected in the effect of "Oden x shopkeeper's time!".

It should be noted that the final value of the accumulated oden points may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the variation result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect will be a display mode indicating a big win. .

In this way, by increasing or decreasing the accumulated oden points over a plurality of times of variable display, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in the manner in which the decorative symbols are stopped.

Figures 642(A) to 642(H) show display examples when "Super Oden Time!" They are shown in chronological order. 642(A), 642(B), 642(C), 642(D), 642(E), 642(F), and 642(G) progresses in order. To go.

FIGS. 642(A) and 642(B) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

In addition, when executing the "Super Oden Time!" The image is displayed on the front side or the back side of the decorative pattern, the oden point increase/decrease image is displayed corresponding to the display mode of the oden effect image, and the accumulated oden points are updated according to the displayed oden point increase/decrease image. should be configured to Figures 642(A), 642(C), 642(E), and 642(G) show the display state during the variation of the decorative pattern in Figures 642(B), 642(D), and 642 ( F) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 642(H), each decorative design is in a temporary stop state, and from this state, each decorative design fluctuates again to form a ready-to-win state, and then a display mode indicating a big hit or a display mode indicating a loss. It will be in the state of being stopped by pressing .

Also, FIGS. 642(C) and 642(D) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

Also, FIGS. 642(E) and 642(F) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

Also, FIGS. 642(G) and 642(H) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

It should be noted that the final value of the accumulated oden points may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the variation result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect will be a display mode indicating a big win. .

Figures 643(A) to 643(H) show display examples when "Shopkeeper's fury time!" They are shown in chronological order. 643(A), 643(B), 643(C), 643(D), 643(E), 643(F), and 643(G), the look-ahead effect progresses in this order. To go.

FIGS. 643(A) and 643(B) show an example of the effect when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the effect of "Shopkeeper's fury time!".

In addition, when executing the "shopkeeper's furious time!" The image is displayed on the front side or the back side of the decorative pattern, the oden point increase/decrease image is displayed corresponding to the display mode of the oden effect image, and the accumulated oden points are updated according to the displayed oden point increase/decrease image. should be configured to Figures 643(A), 643(C), 643(E), and 643(G) show the display state during the variation of the decorative pattern in Figures 643(B), 643(D), and 643 ( F) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. In addition, in FIG. 643(H), each decorative pattern is in a temporary stop state, and from this state, each decorative pattern fluctuates again to form a ready-to-win state, and then a display mode indicating a big hit or a display mode indicating a loss. It will be in the state of being stopped by pressing .

FIG. 643(C) and FIG. 643(D) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the effect of "shopkeeper's fury time!".

FIG. 643(E) and FIG. 643(F) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is selected in the effect of "shopkeeper's fury time!".

FIG. 643(G) and FIG. 643(H) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the effect of "shopkeeper's fury time!".

It should be noted that the final value of the accumulated oden points may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the variation result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect will be a display mode indicating a big win. .

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 636 to 643, when the temporarily stopped or stopped decorative symbols are displayed in front of the oden effect image, the entire oden effect image is covered by the decorative symbols. Although it was configured to be hidden, when these embodiments are modified to display the temporarily stopped or stopped decorative pattern in front of the oden effect image, a part of the oden effect image may be configured to be visible.

FIGS. 644(A) to 644(C) show an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 643. FIG. This embodiment shows the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed in "shopkeeper's fury time!".

FIG. 644(A) shows the display state at the timing when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started, and FIG. 644(B) shows the display state after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. 644(A). At the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, all the angry face images are displayed in front of the decorative pattern in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area. ing. In addition, FIG. 644(C) is timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from the display state of FIG. In the area, it shows a display state in which all the angry face images are displayed behind the decorative pattern.

As shown in the drawing, in this embodiment, even when the angry face image is hidden by the statically displayed decoration pattern, a part of the angry face image is visible to the player.

FIGS. 644(D) to 644(F) show modified embodiments of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. This embodiment shows the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed in "Super Oden Time!".

FIG. 644(D) shows the display state at the timing when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started, and FIG. At the timing when the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, all the oden images are displayed in front of the decorative patterns in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area. there is In addition, FIG. 644(F) is timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from the display state of FIG. In the area, it shows a display state in which all the oden face images are displayed behind the decorative patterns.

As shown in the drawing, in the present embodiment, even when the oden image is hidden by the decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed, a part of the oden image is visible to the player.

By adopting such a configuration, before temporary stop display or stop display of the decorative pattern, how many angry face images or oden images are displayed in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area. It becomes possible for the player to confirm whether or not it was displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, when the oden image is displayed on the front side of the temporarily stopped or stopped decorative pattern, the oden point increase image is displayed, and the cumulative oden point value is increased by "1". or when an angry face image is displayed in front of the temporarily stopped or stopped decorative pattern, an oden point reduction image is displayed, and the value of the cumulative oden point is reduced by "1". Although the embodiment has been shown, the accumulated oden points may be changed when the oden image or the angry face image is displayed behind the temporarily stopped or stopped decorative pattern.

FIGS. 645(A) to 645(F) show an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 641. FIG. FIGS. 645(A) to 645(C) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 05 is executed in "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" in this embodiment. Also, FIGS. 645(D) to 645(F) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 is executed in "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, when the oden image is displayed on the front side of the decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed, the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" is displayed in the obtained oden point display area. Further, when the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" is displayed, the accumulated oden points are increased by 3.

Further, when the oden image is displayed behind the statically displayed decorative pattern, an oden point decrease image with a character string of "-1" is displayed in the obtained oden point display area. Further, when the oden point decrease image with the character string "-1" is displayed, the total oden point is decreased by one.

Further, when an angry face image is displayed on the front side of the statically displayed decorative pattern, an oden point decrease image with a character string of "-3" is displayed in the obtained oden point display area. Further, when the oden point decrease image with the character string "-3" is displayed, the accumulated oden points are decreased by 3.

Further, when the oden image is displayed on the rear side of the statically displayed decorative pattern, an oden point increase image with a character string of "+1" is displayed in the acquired oden point display area. Further, when the oden point increasing image with the character string "+1" is displayed, the total oden point is increased by one.

FIG. 645(A) shows the display state at the timing when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 05 is started.

FIG. 645(B) is the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from the display state of FIG. It shows a display state in which an oden point decrease image is displayed on the front side of the pattern and a character string "-3" is attached to the left oden point display area. Also, in the middle oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the middle acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. It also shows a display state in which the display of "-4 points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

Fig. 645(C) shows that at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from the display state of Fig. 645(A), the angry face image is displayed as the decorative pattern in the left oden effect image display area. , and an oden point increase image with a character string of "+1" is displayed in the left oden point display area. Also, in the middle oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the middle acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. It also shows a display state in which "0 points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 645(D) shows the display state at the timing when the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 is started.

In FIG. 645(E), when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the display state of FIG. , and an oden point decrease image with a character string of "-1" is displayed in the left oden point display area. In addition, in the middle oden effect image display area, an angry face image is displayed on the front side of the decoration pattern, and an oden point reduction image with a character string "-3" is displayed in the middle acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has become In addition, in the right oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. display status. It also shows a display state in which the display of "-1 point!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In FIG. 645(F), when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state in FIG. , and an oden point decrease image with a character string of "-1" is displayed in the left oden point display area. In addition, in the middle oden effect image display area, the angry face image is displayed behind the decoration pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "+1" is displayed in the middle acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. Also, in the right oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. It also shows a display state in which the display of "-1 point!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In the present embodiment, even when the oden effect image is displayed behind the statically displayed decorative symbols, the accumulated oden points are increased or decreased. Therefore, the player pays attention to the display mode of all the displayed oden effect images, and it is possible to further improve the interest when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, even when the oden image or the angry face image is hidden by the statically displayed decoration pattern, a part of the oden image or the angry face image can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, the player can determine whether the hidden oden effect image is the oden image or the angry face image, depending on the shape of the visible portion.

It should be noted that the oden image or the angry face image may be wholly hidden by the statically displayed decorative pattern.

FIGS. 646(A) to 646(F) show modified embodiments of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 646(A) to 646(C) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is executed in "Super Oden Time!" in this embodiment. Also, FIGS. 646(D) to 646(F) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed in "Super Oden Time!" in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, when the oden image is displayed on the front side of the decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed, the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" is displayed in the obtained oden point display area. Further, when the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" is displayed, the accumulated oden points are increased by 3.

Further, when the oden image is displayed behind the statically displayed decorative pattern, an oden point decrease image with a character string of "-1" is displayed in the obtained oden point display area. Further, when the oden point decrease image with the character string "-1" is displayed, the total oden point is decreased by one.

FIG. 646(A) shows the display state at the timing when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is started.

In FIG. 646(B), when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. It shows a display state in which an oden point increase image with a character string "+3" is displayed in the left oden point display area. It also shows a display state in which "3 points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 646(C) shows that the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. It shows a display state in which an oden point decrease image is displayed on the back side and with a character string of "-1" attached to the left oden point display area. It also shows a display state in which "-1 point!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 646(D) shows the display state at the timing when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started.

In FIG. 646(E), when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. It shows a display state in which an oden point increase image with a character string "+3" is displayed in the left oden point display area. Also, in the middle oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the middle acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. Also, in the right oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. It also shows a display state in which the display of "1 point!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In FIG. 646(F), when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state in FIG. , and an oden point decrease image with a character string of "-1" is displayed in the left oden point display area. Also, in the middle oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the middle acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. Also, in the right oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. It also shows a display state in which the display of "-3 points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In the present embodiment, when an oden image is displayed behind the stationary decorative pattern, the accumulated oden points are reduced. For this reason, the player will pay attention to the display mode of all the displayed oden images, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to make the player interested in how many oden images are displayed and how many of the displayed oden images are displayed on the front side of the statically displayed decorative symbols. .

FIGS. 647(A) to 647(F) show modified embodiments of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 643. FIG. FIGS. 647(A) to 647(C) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is executed in the "shopkeeper's fury time!" in this embodiment. Also, FIGS. 647(D) to 647(F) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed in the "shopkeeper's fury time!" in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, when an angry face image is displayed on the front side of the statically displayed decorative pattern, an oden point reduction image with a character string of "-3" is displayed in the acquired oden point display area. . Further, when the oden point decrease image with the character string "-3" is displayed, the accumulated oden points are decreased by 3.

Also, when an angry face image is displayed on the rear side of the statically displayed decorative pattern, an oden point increase image with a character string of "+1" is displayed in the obtained oden point display area. Further, when the oden point decrease image with the character string "+1" is displayed, the total oden point is increased by one.

FIG. 647(A) shows the display state at the timing when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is started.

In FIG. 647(B), at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state in FIG. It shows a display state in which an oden point decrease image is displayed on the front side of the pattern and a character string "-3" is attached to the left oden point display area. In addition, it shows a display state in which the display of "remaining 7 points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

Fig. 647(C) is timing when the decorative pattern is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from the display state of Fig. 647(A). , and an oden point increase image with a character string of "+1" is displayed in the left oden point display area. In addition, it shows a display state in which "11 remaining points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 647(D) shows the display state at the timing when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started.

In FIG. 647(E), at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state in FIG. It shows a display state in which an oden point decrease image is displayed on the front side of the pattern and a character string "-3" is attached to the left oden point display area. In addition, in the middle oden effect image display area, the angry face image is displayed behind the decoration pattern, and the oden point increase image with the character string "+1" is displayed in the middle acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. In addition, in the right oden effect image display area, an angry face image is displayed behind the decoration pattern, and an oden point increase image with a character string "+1" is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. It also shows a display state in which the display of "9 points remaining!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In FIG. 647(F), at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from the display state in FIG. It shows a display state in which an oden point increase image is displayed behind the pattern and with a character string "+1" attached to the left acquired oden point display area. In addition, in the middle oden effect image display area, the angry face image is displayed behind the decoration pattern, and the oden point increase image with the character string "+1" is displayed in the middle acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. In addition, in the right oden effect image display area, an angry face image is displayed behind the decoration pattern, and an oden point increase image with a character string "+1" is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. It also shows a display state in which the display of "13 remaining points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In this embodiment, when an angry face image is displayed behind the statically displayed decorative pattern, the accumulated oden points are increased. Therefore, the player will pay attention to the display mode of all the displayed angry face images, and it is possible to improve interest. Also, it is possible to make the player interested in how many angry face images are displayed and how many of the displayed angry face images are displayed behind the statically displayed decoration pattern. becomes.

FIG. 648 shows an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 642, only the oden image imitating konjac is displayed as the oden effect image. It is configured to display an image of a mode in which different kinds of oden seeds are stuck. In addition, in this embodiment, it is preferable to configure the contents of effects other than the oden effect image in the same manner as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 642 .

In this embodiment, when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is started, an oden image imitating konjac is displayed in the left oden effect image display area. In addition, a horizontally long skewer image that resembles a skewer is displayed behind the oden image that resembles konnyaku. FIG. 649(A) shows the oden effect image displayed when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is started.

When the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is started, an oden image imitating konjac is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, and a rectangular radish is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area. An oden image is displayed. Also, behind the oden image imitating konjac and the oden image imitating radish, a horizontally long skewer image imitating a skewer is displayed. FIG. 648(A) shows an oden effect image displayed when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is started.

When the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started, an oden image imitating konnyaku is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, and a rectangular radish is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area. An oden image is displayed, and an oden image imitating an elliptical paste is displayed in the right oden effect image display area. Further, behind the oden image imitating konjac, the oden image imitating radish, and the oden image imitating paste, a horizontally long skewer image imitating a skewer is displayed. FIG. 648(E) shows an oden effect image displayed when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is started.

Figures 648(A) to 648(H) show display examples when "Super Oden Time!" They are shown in chronological order. 648(A), 648(B), 648(C), 648(D), 648(E), 648(F), and 648(G), the look-ahead effect progresses in this order. To go.

FIGS. 648(A) and 648(B) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

FIGS. 648(A), 6485(C), 648(E), and 648(G) show the display state while the decorative pattern is changing. 648(F) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 648(H), each decorative design is in a temporary stop state, and from this state, each decorative design fluctuates again to form a ready-to-win state, and then a display mode showing a big hit or a display mode showing a loss. It will be in the state of being stopped by pressing .

Also, FIGS. 648(C) and 648(D) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

Also, FIGS. 648(E) and 648(F) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

FIG. 648(G) and FIG. 648(H) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

In this embodiment, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the image of the oden and the image of the skewer as one effect display. Further, even if the image of the oden is hidden by the decorative pattern, the image of the skewer has a length corresponding to the number of the oden. With such a configuration, it is possible to know how many kinds of oden were displayed before the decorative patterns were stopped and displayed even after the decorative patterns were stopped and displayed.

FIGS. 649(A) to 649(F) show an embodiment in which the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 646 is applied to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 648.

FIGS. 649(A) to 649(C) show display states when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is executed in "Super Oden Time!" in this embodiment.

Also, FIGS. 649(D) to 649(F) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed in "Super Oden Time!" in this embodiment.

FIG. 649(A) shows the display state at the timing when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is started.

Fig. 649(B) shows oden imitating konjac in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of Fig. 649(A). It shows a display state in which the image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and an oden point increasing image with a character string "+3" is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area. It also shows a display state in which "3 points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

Fig. 649(C) shows an oden image simulating konjac in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of Fig. 649(A). is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and an oden point reduction image with a character string of "-1" is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area. It also shows a display state in which "-1 point!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 649(D) shows the display state at the timing when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started.

Fig. 649(E) shows oden imitating konjac in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of Fig. 649(D). It shows a display state in which the image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and an oden point increasing image with a character string "+3" is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area. In addition, in the middle oden effect image display area, an oden image imitating a radish is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and an oden point decrease image with a character string "-1" is displayed in the middle acquired oden point display area. It shows the display state that came to be displayed. In addition, in the right oden effect image display area, an oden image imitating paste is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and an oden point reduction image with a character string "-1" is displayed in the right oden point display area. It shows the display state that came to be displayed. It also shows a display state in which the display of "1 point!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

Fig. 649(F) shows oden imitating konjac in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of Fig. 649(D). It shows a display state in which the image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and an oden point reduction image with a character string of "-1" is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area. In addition, in the middle oden effect image display area, an oden image imitating a radish is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and an oden point decrease image with a character string "-1" is displayed in the middle acquired oden point display area. It shows the display state that came to be displayed. In addition, in the right oden effect image display area, an oden image imitating paste is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and an oden point reduction image with a character string "-1" is displayed in the right oden point display area. It shows the display state that came to be displayed. It also shows a display state in which the display of "-3 points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In the present embodiment, when an oden image is displayed behind the stationary decorative pattern, the accumulated oden points are reduced. For this reason, the player will pay attention to the display mode of all the displayed oden images, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to make the player interested in how many oden images are displayed and how many of the displayed oden images are displayed on the front side of the statically displayed decorative symbols. .

In the display area provided by the display means, the effect corresponding to the changing decorative pattern and the look-ahead effect may be performed at the same time. The player's attention is focused on the performance corresponding to the decorative pattern, the look-ahead performance is less conspicuous, and the impact of the look-ahead performance is reduced. In particular, when changing the mode of the look-ahead effect, there is a risk that the player may miss the changing mode. In this way, the look-ahead effect that suggests the degree of expectation by changing the display mode tends to lack impact, and there is a demand for increasing the impact of the look-ahead effect as a look-ahead effect.

In the embodiments described below, at least a portion of the predetermined effect image being displayed is once hidden by displaying another image in front, and then the entire predetermined effect image is displayed in front of the other image. is displayed, the display mode of the predetermined effect image is changed.

By adopting such a configuration, the predetermined effect image becomes smaller, then becomes larger, and is visually recognized by the player in the order of changing the display mode. As a thing, it is possible for the player to visually recognize it.

An example of rendering in this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 650 and 651. FIG. FIG. 650 is a time chart in this example of effect, and FIG. 651 is a diagram showing the display state of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing in this example of effect. In addition, the variable display mode of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the display mode of the reserved image in the reserved display area, the display mode of the reserved image in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area, etc. are not mentioned. As far as possible, it is the same as the display mode described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 650 is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbols stop fluctuating. FIG. 651(A) is a diagram showing this state, and shows a state in which decorative patterns with numbers "3", "5", and "2" from the left are stopped and displayed.

In addition, the reserved display area has a white reserved image in a perfect circle shape, the first reserved display area has a blue reserved image in a perfect circular shape, and the second reserved display area has a white reserved image in a perfect circular shape. is displayed in the third reserved display area, and a white reserved image having a perfect circular shape is displayed in the third reserved display area. Note that the white pending image displayed in the pending display area is a pending image corresponding to the decorative symbols with the numbers '3', '5', and '2' that are stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, in addition to a white pending image as the pending image, a blue pending image as a pending image indicating that the special lottery result is expected to be a big hit is higher than the white pending image, It is possible to display a pending image colored green and a pending image colored red. In addition, the expectation level when the blue pending image is displayed is low expectation, the expectation level when the green pending image is displayed is medium expectation, and the expectation level when the red pending image is displayed is configured to have high expectations.

When the timing t0 comes from the state where the decorative symbols shown in FIG. 651(A) are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols is newly started.

At timing t7, a plurality of images simulating pine branches with leaves are displayed in an overlapping manner at the bottom of the display area, in the center position in the horizontal direction. Specifically, an image imitating a pine branch with three leaves on the bottom, two on the middle, and one on the top is displayed. Hereinafter, the entire image will be referred to as a pine tree mark group image.

The pine tree mark group image is displayed at a position overlapping the middle decorative pattern, and is displayed on the nearer side than the middle decorative pattern during variable display or stationary display. Also, the pine tree mark group image has three transparent areas (openings) through which the image located on the rear side can be visually recognized. Also, the pine mark group image is displayed at a position overlapping the reserved display area and the first reserved display area. As will be described later, the pine mark group image, the reserved image, and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are the case where the pine mark group image is displayed on the front side, and the reserved image and the first reserved display. The display mode may be a case where the pending image displayed in the area is displayed on the near side.

At timing t7, when the pine tree mark group image starts to be displayed, the pine tree mark group image is displayed on the front side of the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area. FIG. 651(B) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t8) after the display of the pine tree group image is started at timing t7, and the pine tree group image is the pending image. and the state displayed on the front side of the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area.

In this state, the blue reserved image is hidden by the pine tree group image, and only part of the blue reserved image is visible. Specifically, in the three transparent regions of the pine tree mark group image, the blue reserved image located behind the pine tree mark group image is divided into three and visible.

Further, the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is hidden by the pine mark group image, and only a part of the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is visible. Specifically, the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is divided into two and can be visually recognized in one transparent area of the pine tree mark group image and the area outside the pine tree mark group image. .

At timing t9, the display priority of the pine mark group image and the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the reserved image and the first reserved display area. The reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image.

FIG. 651(C) shows a predetermined timing (timing 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing between t9 and t10). FIG. In this state, the entire blue pending image is visible. In addition, the entire reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area can be visually recognized.

At timing t10, the green pending image is displayed instead of the blue pending image that has been displayed. FIG. 651(D) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t11) after changing to a state in which the green pending image is displayed instead of the blue pending image at timing t10. is.

At timing t17, the display priority of the pine mark group image and the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are switched, and the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are switched to the pine tree mark group image. The state in which the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the mark group image is changed to the state in which the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area.

FIG. 651(E) shows a predetermined timing (for example, , timing t18), and shows a state in which the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area. In this state, in the three transparent areas of the pine tree group image, part of the green reserved image located behind is visible. Also, a part of the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is visible.

At timing t19, the display priority of the pine mark group image and the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the reserved image and the first reserved display area. The reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image. FIG. 651(F) shows a predetermined timing (timing FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing between t19 and t20). In this state, the entire green pending image is visible. In addition, the entire reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area can be visually recognized.

At timing t20, the red pending image is displayed instead of the green pending image that has been displayed. FIG. 651(G) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t21) after changing to a state in which the red pending image is displayed instead of the green pending image at timing t20. is.

At the timing t25, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped and displayed with the numeral "2" attached thereto, and the ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. Also, at timing t25, the display of the pine tree mark group image that has been displayed until then ends. FIG. 651(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the ready-to-reach state occurs and the display of the pine mark group image ends at timing t25.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern. When the special lottery result is a loss, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started from timing t34, and when the special lottery result is a big hit, the decorative pattern is newly displayed after the big win game is over. change begins.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 650(B) to 650(E), other rendering examples of the display mode of the pending display will be shown.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 650(B), at timing t10, the blue pending image that has been displayed does not change, and the blue pending image continues to be displayed. Also, at timing t20, the green pending image is displayed instead of the blue pending image that has been displayed.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 650(C), at timing t10, the green pending image is displayed instead of the blue pending image that has been displayed until then. Further, at timing t20, the green pending image continues to be displayed without changing the green pending image that has been displayed.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 650(D), at timing t10, instead of the white pending image that has been displayed until then, the green pending image is displayed. Also, at timing t20, the red pending image is displayed instead of the green pending image that has been displayed.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 650(E), at timing t10, the white pending image that has been displayed until then does not change, and the white pending image continues to be displayed. Further, at timing t20, the white pending image continues to be displayed without changing the white pending image that has been displayed until then.

650(A) to 650(E) may be configured to be executable based on the result of the special lottery.

Thus, based on the result of the special lottery, at predetermined timings (timing t10, timing t20), instead of the currently displayed pending image, the pending image that suggests a higher degree of expectation for a big win is displayed. Alternatively, at predetermined timings (timing t10, timing t20), the currently displayed pending image may continue to be displayed without being changed.

The change mode of the pending image described with reference to FIGS. 650(A) to 650(E) is merely an example. Specifically, at timing t10, the pending image in white, the pending image in blue, the pending image in green, and the pending image in red are displayed as they are, or are changed to the pending image with a higher degree of expectation. It is preferable to configure so as to change the display mode. Further, at timing t20, the pending image in white, the pending image in blue, the pending image in green, and the pending image in red are displayed as they are, or the display mode is changed to the pending image with a higher degree of expectation. It should be configured to change.

Thus, in the present embodiment, a portion of the reserved image (for example, the blue reserved image) suggesting a predetermined degree of expectation of a big hit is temporarily hidden by a predetermined image (pine mark group image) and visually recognized. After it becomes possible, the whole of the reserved image becomes visible again, and the reserved image that has become entirely visible is changed to a reserved image that suggests a higher degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, the green reserved image). It is configured to switch and display.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the change mode of the pending image as a more impactful one.

Also, part of the reserved image (the relevant reserved image, the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area) is hidden by the predetermined image (pine mark group image), and part of the reserved image is not hidden by the predetermined image. Thus, the player can visually recognize what kind of reserved image the hidden reserved image is (what color it is).

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to know the degree of expectation for a big hit in a state in which the pending state is hidden.

The entire reserved image (at least one of the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area) may be entirely hidden by a predetermined image (pine tree mark group image).

In the present embodiment, an example of effect is shown in which the opportunity for changing the display mode of the pending image occurs twice. Alternatively, it may be configured to occur multiple times (three times or more).

With such a configuration, as long as the predetermined image (the image of the group of pine trees) is displayed, the opportunity to change the display mode of the reserved image continues. It is possible to create a sense of anticipation that they will do so.

An example in which the display mode of the pending image can change at a predetermined timing (timing t10, timing t20) when a predetermined image (pine tree mark group image) is displayed has been shown, but the predetermined image is displayed. In this case, the currently displayed pending image (blue pending image) may always be changed to a pending image (green pending image, red pending image) with a higher expectation for a big hit than the pending image (blue pending image).
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player have a great sense of anticipation for the change in the display mode of the pending image by displaying the predetermined image.

In addition, the length of the period (timing t7-timing t9, timing t17-timing t19) during which the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is After the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image, the reserved image can be changed to the reserved image in another display mode. It is longer than the length of the period up to the relevant timing (timing t9-timing t10, timing t19-timing t20).

In addition, after the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image, the reserved image changes to the reserved image in another display mode. The length of the period until the timing that may change is the period in which the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image (timing t10-timing t17 , timing t19-timing t25).

Thus, the length of the period during which the pending image is displayed on the front side (eg, 6 seconds, 7 seconds) is the length of the period during which the pending image is displayed on the back side (eg, 2 seconds). is longer than By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the period in which the state in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the degree of expectation suggested by the pending image is maintained.
Also, from the length of the period during which the pending image is displayed on the back side (eg, 2 seconds), the length of the period from when the pending image is displayed on the front side to when the pending image changes (eg, , 1 second) is shorter. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize the change in the display mode of the pending image as a series of effects.

The second to fourth reserved display areas are configured so as not to be hidden by the pine mark group image.

By adopting such a configuration, whether or not the suspension is likely to be maximized (can be determined by visually checking the second suspension display area and the third suspension display area), whether the suspension is maximized (the 4 can be determined by visually recognizing the reserved display area), and when the player visually recognizes the second reserved display area and the fourth reserved display area, it becomes possible to confirm the reserved status well. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a stressful situation for the player, in which the starting prize is generated even though the number of reserved coins is the maximum (4). In addition, when it is confirmed that the number of reserved items is about to reach the maximum or that the number of reserved items has reached the maximum, the player operates the handle 302 to change the handle 302 to a state in which no game balls are shot. will be made.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 650(A) to 650(E) and FIG. 651, the change mode of the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area was described. In the pending image displayed in , the display mode may be similarly changed. Even with such a configuration, the same effect as in the case of changing the display mode of the pending image can be obtained.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 650(A), an embodiment in which the reserved display area and the first reserved display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. In the time chart shown in 650(A), the reserved display area is not hidden by the pine mark group image, and the first to fourth reserved display areas are sometimes hidden by the pine mark group image. Embodiments are described with reference to FIG.

In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbols stop fluctuating. FIG. 652(A) is a diagram showing this state, and shows a state in which decorative patterns with numbers "3", "5", and "2" from the left are stopped and displayed.

In addition, the reserved display area has a white reserved image in a perfect circle shape, the first reserved display area has a blue reserved image in a perfect circular shape, and the second reserved display area has a white reserved image in a perfect circular shape. , and a blue reserved image having a perfect circular shape is displayed in the third reserved display area. Note that the white pending image displayed in the pending display area is a pending image corresponding to the decorative symbols with the numbers '3', '5', and '2' that are stopped and displayed.

At timing t7, the pine tree mark group image starts to be displayed in the lower right portion of the display area. When the display of the pine tree mark group image is started, the pine tree mark group image is positioned in front of the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area. Is displayed.

FIG. 652B is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t8) after the display of the pine tree group image started at timing t7. It shows a state in which the white reserved image displayed in the display area and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are displayed on the front side. In this state, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are hidden by the pine mark group image and displayed in the first reserved display area. Only part of the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area and part of the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are visible.

At timing t9, the display priority of the pine mark group image, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is switched. From the state displayed on the front side of the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area and the blue pending image displayed in the second pending display area, the white pending displayed in the first pending display area The image and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area change to a state in which they are displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image.

In FIG. 652(C), at timing t9, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t9 and timing t10) after changing to a state. In this state, the entirety of the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is visible.

At timing t10, a green pending image is displayed instead of the blue pending image that has been displayed in the second pending display area. FIG. 652(D) shows a state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t11 ) is a diagram showing a display state.

At timing t17, the display priority of the pine mark group image, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are switched, and the first reserved display area From the state in which the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image, the pine mark group image is displayed in the first reserved display area The state changes to a state in which the green pending image displayed in the white pending image and the green pending image displayed in the second pending display area are displayed on the front side.

In FIG. 652(E), at timing t17, the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t18) after changing to a state, in which a white reserved image and a second reserved display in which the pine mark group image is displayed in the first reserved display area; It shows a state of being displayed on the front side of the green pending image displayed in the area.

At timing t19, the display priority of the pine mark group image, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is switched. From the state displayed on the front side of the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area and the green pending image displayed in the second pending display area, the white pending displayed in the first pending display area The image and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area change to a state in which they are displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image.

In FIG. 652(F), at timing t19, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t19 and timing t20) after changing to a state. In this state, the entire white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are visible.

At timing t20, a red pending image is displayed instead of the green pending image that has been displayed in the second pending display area. FIG. 652(G) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t21) after changing to a state in which a red pending image is displayed instead of a green pending image at timing t20. .

At the timing t25, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped and displayed with the numeral "2" attached thereto, and the ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. FIG. 652(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the reach state occurs at timing t25.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern. When the special lottery result is a loss, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started from timing t34, and when the special lottery result is a big hit, the decorative pattern is newly displayed after the big win game is over. change begins.

Although an example of the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved image in the second reserved display area has been shown, the area in which the display mode of the reserved image is changed is not limited to the second reserved display area. In any one of the fourth reserved display areas, the display mode of the reserved image may be changed in the same manner as in the present example of effect.

In this embodiment, the first to fourth reserved display areas can be hidden by the pine mark group image. Further, the reserved display area is configured so as not to be hidden. In this way, by hiding a plurality of pending display areas with a predetermined image, it is possible to make the player feel interested in which pending image changes. In addition, by constructing the reserved display area so that it is not hidden by a predetermined image, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot confirm the degree of expectation of the latest decorative pattern stop mode. becomes possible.

Note that the display mode of the pending image may be changed. At this time, the display of the pine tree mark group image is ended while the decoration pattern of the reserved image is changing, and the pine tree mark group image is not displayed, and is displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas. In a state in which the displayed reserved image cannot be changed in display form, the display form of the reserved image may be changed to continue the variation of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image.

With such a configuration, even when the pine tree group image is displayed, it is possible to change the display mode of the reserved image and make the player feel interesting. In addition, since the timing at which the reserved image displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas can change the display mode and the timing at which the reserved image changes the display mode are different timings, the player can It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which confusion is caused with respect to the production.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 650(A), an embodiment in which the reserved display area and the first reserved display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. An embodiment in which the time chart shown in 650(A) is modified so that the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area may be hidden by the pine tree mark group image will be described with reference to FIG.

In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbols stop fluctuating. FIG. 653(A) is a diagram showing this state, and shows a state in which decorative patterns with numbers "3", "5", and "2" from the left are stopped and displayed.

Further, the reserved display area has a circular white reserved image, the first reserved display area has a circular blue reserved image, and the second reserved display area has a circular white reserved image. However, in the third reserved display area, a circular white reserved image is displayed. Note that the white pending image displayed in the pending display area is a pending image corresponding to the decorative symbols with the numbers '3', '5', and '2' that are stopped and displayed.

At timing t7, the pine tree mark group image starts to be displayed in the lower part of the display area. When the display of the pine tree mark group image is started, the pine tree mark group image includes the blue reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the second reserved display. It is displayed on the front side of the white reserved image displayed in the area.

FIG. 653(B) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t8) after the display of the group of pine trees starts at timing t7. It shows a state displayed on the front side of the blue reserved image displayed in the area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area. ing. In this state, the blue reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are the pine tree mark. Part of the blue reserved image hidden by the group image and displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are visible respectively.

At timing t9, the pine mark group image, the blue reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area The display priority with the image is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the reserved display area, the reserved image in blue, the reserved image in white in the first reserved display area, and the reserved image in the second reserved display area. From the state displayed on the front side of the white reserved image, the blue reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the second reserved display area The displayed white reserved image changes to a state in which it is displayed on the nearer side than the pine mark group image.

FIG. 653(C) shows the blue pending image displayed in the pending display area, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the white pending image displayed in the second pending display area at timing t9. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (a predetermined timing between timing t9 and timing t10) after the image changes to a state in which the image is displayed on the front side of the pine tree group image. In this state, the blue reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are all visible. It is possible.

At timing t10, instead of the blue pending image that had been displayed in the pending display area until then, the green pending image is displayed. FIG. 653(D) shows a predetermined timing (for example, timing t11) is a diagram showing a display state.

At timing t17, the pine mark group image, the green reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area. The display priority with the image is switched, and the green pending image displayed in the pending display area, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the white pending image displayed in the second pending display area is displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image, the green reserved image in which the pine mark group image is displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the second 2 changes to a state in which it is displayed on the front side of the white reserved image displayed in the reserved display area.

FIG. 653(E) shows, at timing t17, a green pending image in which the pine mark group image is displayed in the pending display area, a white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and a white pending image displayed in the second pending display area. 18 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t18) after changing to a state in which the white reserved image is displayed on the front side, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the reserved display area , the green pending image displayed in , the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the white pending image displayed in the second pending display area. there is

At timing t19, the pine mark group image, the green reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area The display priority with the image is switched, and the green reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the pine mark group image displayed in the second reserved display area. From the state displayed on the front side of the white reserved image, the green reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the second reserved display area The displayed white reserved image changes to a state in which it is displayed on the nearer side than the pine mark group image.

FIG. 653(F) shows the green pending image displayed in the pending display area, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the white pending image displayed in the second pending display area at timing t19. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t19 and timing t20) after the image has changed to a state in which the image is displayed on the front side of the pine tree group image. In this state, the green reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are all visible. It is possible.

At timing t20, instead of the green pending image that has been displayed in the pending display area until then, the red pending image is displayed. FIG. 653(G) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t21) after changing to a state in which the red pending image is displayed instead of the green pending image at timing t20. is.

At the timing t25, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped and displayed with the numeral "2" attached thereto, and the ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. Also, at timing t25, the display of the pine tree mark group image that has been displayed until then ends. FIG. 653(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the ready-to-reach state occurs and the display of the pine mark group image ends at timing t25.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern. When the special lottery result is a loss, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started from timing t34, and when the special lottery result is a big hit, the decorative pattern is newly displayed after the big win game is over. change begins.

Although an example of the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved image in the reserved display area has been shown, the area in which the display mode of the reserved image is changed is not limited to the reserved display area, and the reserved display area to the fourth reserved In any one of the display areas, the display mode of the pending image may be changed in the same manner as in the present example of effect.

In this embodiment, the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area can be hidden by the pine tree mark group image. In this way, by hiding a plurality of pending display areas with a predetermined image, it is possible to make the player feel interested in which pending image changes.

FIG. 654 shows an example of rendering in an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG.

In the present embodiment, two triangular strip images are displayed at the top and bottom of the display area, and the strip image displayed below the display area (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the “lower strip image”) is used to display the second image. The 1st reserved display area to the 4th reserved display area are hidden. In this embodiment, the reserved display area is provided in the lower left part of the display area, and in the area on the right side, from the left, the first reserved display area, the second reserved display area, the third reserved display area, the fourth reserved display area, and the fourth reserved display area. A reserved display area is provided for each.

The lower strip image does not overlap the reserved display area, but overlaps the first to fourth reserved display areas. In addition, the area overlapping with the lower band-shaped image increases as the first reserved display area, the second reserved display area, the third reserved display area, and the fourth reserved display area are reached. For example, about 1/4 of the lower side of the first reserved display area overlaps the lower strip image, but about 3/4 of the lower side of the fourth reserved display area overlaps the lower strip image. is configured to
Figures 654(A) to 654(D) show display examples in the case of performing an effect for a predetermined hold (the third hold in the drawing of Figure 654(A)) in chronological order. That is, the effects progress in the order of Figure 654(A), Figure 654(B), Figure 654(C) and Figure 654(D).

In FIG. 654(A), the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner, and a circular white reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area, and a band image is displayed above and below the display area is displayed. In the figure, the lower band-shaped image is located at a position overlapping the reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas, and from the reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas The display state displayed on the rear side is also shown.

FIG. 654(B) shows a display state in which the lower band-shaped image is displayed in front of the reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas.

FIG. 654(C) shows a display state in which the reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas are displayed in front of the lower strip image.

FIG. 654(D) shows a display state in which a blue pending image is displayed in place of the white pending image displayed in the third pending display area.

It may be configured to display band-shaped images as shown in FIGS. 654(A) to 654(D) instead of the pine tree mark group image in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 650. .

Although an example of the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved image in the third reserved display area has been shown, the area in which the display mode of the reserved image is changed is not limited to the second reserved display area. In any one of the fourth reserved display areas, the display mode of the reserved image may be changed in the same manner as in the present example of effect.

When the lower band-shaped image is displayed on the front side of the reserved image, the proportion of the area of the reserved image that is hidden by the lower band-shaped image is different according to the area where the reserved image is displayed. . Specifically, the reserved image is not hidden by the lower strip image in the first place, the first reserved image is hidden by about 20% of the lower area, and the second reserved image is hidden by about 40% of the lower side. The area is hidden, about 60% of the bottom area is hidden for the third reserved image, and about 80% of the bottom area is hidden for the fourth reserved image. In this manner, the closer to the fourth reserved display area, the higher the concealment ratio of the reserved image by the lower band-shaped image.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the impact of the hold change in the hold for which the variable display is started later.

Although the lower strip image has a triangular shape, the lower strip image may be deformed into a stepped shape as shown in FIGS. 654(E) and 654(F). Specifically, it is preferable to provide a plurality of horizontal steps by combining lines perpendicular to the display area and lines horizontal to the display area so as to form a shape that slopes upward to the right as a whole.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 654(E) and 654(F), a plurality of reserved images can be hidden in one horizontal row. For example, about 30% of the area below the reserved image and the first reserved image is hidden by one horizontal step, and about 60% of the area below the second reserved image and the third reserved image is hidden by one horizontal step. Hidden by a horizontal step, and for the fourth reserved image, the entire image is hidden by one horizontal step.

Alternatively, the belt-shaped image formed stepwise in this way does not hide the reserved image with the lower belt-shaped image, hides about 20% of the lower area of the first reserved image, and hides the second reserved image. about 40% of the lower area is hidden, about 60% of the lower area of the third reserved image is hidden, and about 80% of the lower area of the fourth reserved image is hidden. may be configured.

Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the impact of the pending change in the pending where the variable display is started later.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 650(A), an embodiment in which the reserved display area and the first reserved display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. A modified embodiment in which the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area may be hidden by the pine tree mark group image will be described with reference to FIGS. 655 and 656. FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 655 is a time chart showing an example of rendering in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 656 is a diagram showing a display state in the display area.

In the state of timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the reserved display area has a white reserved image in a perfect circle shape, the first reserved display area has a blue reserved image in a perfect circular shape, and the second reserved display area has a white reserved image in a perfect circular shape. , and a white pending image having a perfect circular shape is displayed in the third pending display area.

At timing t7, the display of the pine tree mark group image having a shape surrounding the display area is started. The pine tree mark group image in this embodiment is formed by combining 16 green images each having a shape resembling a pine branch with leaves. Any of the characters "N", "E", "X", and "T" is attached to the image imitating a pine branch with leaves. When the display of the pine tree mark group image is started, the pine tree mark group image is displayed in front of each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area.

FIG. 656(A) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t8) after the display of the group of pine trees starts at timing t7. It shows a state of being displayed on the front side of each reserved image displayed in the area to the third reserved display area. In this state, each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is hidden by the pine mark group image, and each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is hidden. Only a portion of each is visible.

At timing t9, the display priority of the pine mark group image and each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. From the state in which each reserved image displayed in the display is displayed in front of each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the state in which each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed in front of the pine mark group image and change.

FIG. 656(B) is a predetermined timing after changing to a state in which each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image at timing t9. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at (predetermined timing between timing t9 and timing t10). In this state, all of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area can be visually recognized.

At timing t10, a green pending image is displayed in the first pending display area instead of the blue pending image that has been displayed in the first pending display area. Further, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols scrolled downward are temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern to which the number "4" is attached, the middle decorative pattern to which the character string "continue" is attached, and the right decorative pattern to which the number "4" is attached are displayed. At approximately the center in the vertical direction of , the number "4" and the character string "Continue" are temporarily stopped and displayed in a visually recognizable manner.

FIG. 656(C) shows a predetermined timing (for example, timing t10 and timing t11) after a green pending image is displayed in the first pending display area instead of the blue pending image at timing t10. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing between In this state, all of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area can be visually recognized.

In this embodiment, the pine tree mark group image is temporarily not displayed during the period from timing t11 to timing t13. Also, during this period, the character string "x2" is displayed so as to overlap the upper right portion of the right decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped. FIG. 656(D) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12) between timing t10 and timing t13. In this state, all of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area can be visually recognized.

At timing t13, the display of the pine tree mark group image is started again. At this time, the pine mark group image is displayed in front of each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. Further, at timing t13, the temporary stop display until then changes to a display state in which the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are scrolled and moved downward. In FIG. 656(E), at timing t13, the pine mark group image has changed to a state where it is displayed in front of each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a later predetermined timing (for example, timing t14);

At timing t19, the display priority of the pine mark group image and each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. From the state in which each reserved image displayed in the display is displayed in front of each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the state in which each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed in front of the pine mark group image and change.

FIG. 656(F) is a predetermined timing after changing to a state in which each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image at timing t19. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at (predetermined timing between timing t19 and timing t20). In this state, all of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area can be visually recognized.

At timing t20, instead of the green pending image that had been displayed in the first pending display area until then, the red pending image is displayed in the first pending display area. Further, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols scrolled downward are temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern to which the number "7" is attached, the middle decorative pattern to which the character string "continue" is attached, and the right decorative pattern to which the number "7" is attached are displayed. At approximately the center in the vertical direction, the number "7" and the character string "Continue" are temporarily stopped and displayed in a visually recognizable manner.

FIG. 656(G) shows a predetermined timing (for example, timing t20 and timing t21) after a red pending image is displayed in the first pending display area instead of the green pending image at timing t20. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing between In this state, all of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area can be visually recognized.

In this embodiment, the pine tree mark group image is not displayed at timing t21. Also, from timing t21 to timing t22, the character string "x3" is displayed so as to overlap the upper right portion of the right decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 656(H) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t22) between timing t21 and timing t23. In this state, all of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area can be visually recognized.

At timing t23, the display state changes from the temporary stop display state to a display state in which the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are scrolled downward.

At the timing t25, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped and displayed with the numeral "7" attached thereto, and the ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. FIG. 656(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the reach state occurs at timing t25.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, a decorative design with a number other than "7" as the middle decorative design is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative design with a number "7" is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative design. When the special lottery result is a loss, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started from timing t34, and when the special lottery result is a big hit, the decorative pattern is newly displayed after the big win game is over. change begins.

Although an example of the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved image in the second reserved display area has been shown, the area in which the display mode of the reserved image is changed is not limited to the second reserved display area. In any one of the fourth reserved display areas, the display mode of the reserved image may be changed in the same manner as in the present example of effect.

In this embodiment, the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area can be hidden by the pine tree mark group image. Further, the reserved display area is configured so as not to be hidden. In this way, by hiding a plurality of pending display areas with a predetermined image, it is possible to make the player feel interested in which pending image changes. Further, it is configured such that the display mode of the reserved image can be changed at the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Therefore, compared to the case where the decorative patterns are displayed so as to scroll and move, the player can be made to pay attention to the change of the reserved image, and the player can be distracted by the movement of the decorative patterns. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the state of change of the reserved image cannot be confirmed.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 650(A), an embodiment in which the reserved display area and the first reserved display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. A modified embodiment in which the reserved display area may be hidden by the operation instruction image will be described with reference to FIGS. 657 and 658. FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 657 is a time chart showing an example of rendering in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 658 is a diagram showing a display state in the display area.

In the state of timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the reserved display area has a circular blue reserved image, the first reserved display area has a circular white reserved image, and the second reserved display area has a circular white reserved image. However, a circular white pending image is displayed in each of the third pending display areas.

At timing t5, an operation instruction image indicating that the operation of the operation button 410 is valid starts frame-in from the lower center of the display area in the left-right direction toward the upper side. The operation instruction image has a horizontally long elliptical shape, and the character string "PUSH" is added to the image.

At timing t6, the frame-in of the operation instruction image to the display area is completed. The operation instruction image is displayed behind the reserved image. Further, the operation instruction image continues to move upward even after the frame-in is completed. FIG. 658(A) shows a state in which the operation instruction image has moved from bottom to top and has completely entered the display area.

At timing t7, the upward movement of the operation instruction image is completed. At the same time, the state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the reserved image is changed to the state in which the reserved image is displayed behind the operation instruction image. At the same time, the state in which the reception of operation on the operation button 410 is disabled is changed to the state in which it is enabled. The operation valid period for the operation button 410 continues for two seconds from timing t7 to timing t9. FIG. 658(B) shows, at timing t7, after the state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the pending image changes to the state in which the pending image is displayed behind the operation instruction image. is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (timing t8).

FIG. 658(C) shows a case where an operation is performed during the operation valid period (for example, the player operates the operation button 410 at timing t8 during the operation valid period), or a case where the operation valid period ends. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display state displayed in (when the player does not operate the operation button 410 during the operation valid period). Specifically, the timing (for example, timing t8) at which the player operates the operation button 410 during the valid operation period, or the timing at which the valid operation period ends without the player performing an operation (timing t9). ), the state in which the blue reserved image is displayed behind the operation instruction image changes to a state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the blue reserved image.

At timing t10, a green pending image is displayed in the pending display area instead of the blue pending image that has been displayed in the pending display area. FIG. 658(D) shows a predetermined timing (for example, between timing t10 and timing t11) after a green pending image is displayed in the pending display area instead of the green pending image at timing t10. is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing of .

At timing t11, the display of the operation instruction image displayed behind the pending image ends.

At timing t15, an operation instruction image indicating that the operation of the operation button 410 is valid starts frame-in from the lower center of the display area in the left-right direction toward the upper side. The operation instruction image has a horizontally long elliptical shape, and the character string "PUSH" is added to the image. Moreover, it is larger than the operation instruction image displayed from timing t5 to timing t11.

At timing t16, the frame-in of the operation instruction image to the display area is completed. The operation instruction image is displayed behind the reserved image. Further, the operation instruction image continues to move upward even after the frame-in is completed. FIG. 658(E) shows a state in which the operation instruction image has moved from bottom to top and has completely entered the display area.

At timing t17, the upward movement of the operation instruction image is completed. At the same time, the state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the reserved image is changed to the state in which the reserved image is displayed behind the operation instruction image. At the same time, the state in which the reception of operation on the operation button 410 is disabled is changed to the state in which it is enabled. The operation valid period for the operation button 410 continues for two seconds from timing t17 to timing t19. FIG. 658(F) shows, at timing t17, after the state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the pending image changes to the state in which the pending image is displayed behind the operation instruction image. is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (timing t18).

FIG. 658(G) shows a case where an operation is performed during the operation valid period (for example, the player operates the operation button 410 at timing t18 during the operation valid period), or a case where the operation valid period ends. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display state displayed in (when the player does not operate the operation button 410 during the operation valid period). Specifically, the timing (for example, timing t18) at which the player operates the operation button 410 during the operation valid period, or the timing at which the operation valid period ends without the player performing an operation (timing t9 ), the state in which the green reserved image is displayed behind the operation instruction image changes to a state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the green reserved image.

At timing t10, instead of the green pending image that has been displayed in the pending display area until then, the red pending image that has been displayed in the pending display area is larger than the green pending (specifically, 2 times the diameter) the pending image will be displayed. FIG. 658(H) shows a predetermined timing (between timing t20 and timing t21) after a red pending image is displayed in the pending display area instead of the green pending image at timing t10. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing.

At timing t21, the display of the operation instruction image displayed behind the pending image ends.

At timing t25, the left and right decorative symbols with the same number (for example, "2") are temporarily stopped and displayed to generate a ready-to-win state. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern. When the special lottery result is a loss, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started from timing t34, and when the special lottery result is a big hit, the decorative pattern is newly displayed after the big win game is over. change begins.

In this way, by interchanging the anteroposterior relationship between the operation instruction image and the pending image, it is possible to provide an impactful effect for the change of the pending image. Further, since the characters attached to the operation instruction image are hidden by the reserved image, it is possible to give a great impact to the player.

In this embodiment, two types of operation instruction images having different sizes can be displayed. In addition, the size of the reserved image may be changed. Further, the color of the pending image may not change, but the size of the pending image may change. For example, at timing t20, only the color of the green pending image is changed without changing the size of the green pending image to create a red pending image, or both the size and color of the green pending image are changed to create a large red pending image. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which only the size of the green pending image is changed without changing the color of the green pending image to form a large green pending image. Also, when the size of the reserved image is increased, it is preferable to configure the system so that the expectation of the big win is higher than when the size of the reserved image is not increased.

With such a configuration, the enlarged pending image is visually recognized by the player so as to hide the operation instruction image, so that the effect of changing the pending image can be made more impactful.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 650(A), an embodiment in which the reserved display area and the first reserved display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. An embodiment modified so that the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area may be hidden by the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner will be described with reference to FIGS. 659 and 660. FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 659 is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. FIG. 660 is a diagram showing the display state in the display area.

At timing t0, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. In FIG. 660(A), at timing t0, after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started, at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1), the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2002 occurs, and the number of reserved is the upper limit of four.

In this embodiment, the reserved images are not displayed horizontally in the lower part of the display area, but are displayed vertically in the left side of the display area. Specifically, a fourth reserved display area, a third reserved display area, a second reserved display area, a first reserved display area, and the reserved display area are provided on the left side of the display area from above.

In addition, instead of using a circular reserved image as the reserved image, an image in which ingredients of oden are stuck in a skewer (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an "oden reserved image") is used as the reserved image. there is The oden reserved image is composed of a part imitating a skewer and a part imitating ingredients. The number of ingredients is from 1 to 10, and as the number of ingredients increases, the length of the skewer becomes longer. In addition, the larger the number of ingredients in the image (the longer the length of the oden reservation when viewed in the entire oden reservation image, the longer the image), the variation result of the decoration pattern executed or executed corresponding to the reservation image is configured to increase the degree of expectation that it will indicate a big hit. Further, the oden reserved image in the present embodiment is basically displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern.

Below, corresponding to the number of ingredients that the oden reserved image has, an oden reserved image with one ingredient is an oden reserved image with one ingredient, and an oden reserved image with two ingredients is reserved with two ingredients. Image, oden reserved image with 3 ingredients, oden reserved image with 3 ingredients, oden reserved image with 4 ingredients, oden reserved image with 4 ingredients, oden reserved image with 5 ingredients 5 oden reserved image, 6 ingredients reserved oden image, 6 ingredients reserved oden image, 7 ingredients reserved oden image, 7 ingredients reserved image, 8 ingredients reserved oden image The image is called an oden reserved image with 8 ingredients, an oden reserved image with 9 ingredients is called an oden reserved image with 9 ingredients, and an oden reserved image with 10 ingredients is called an oden reserved image with 10 ingredients.

During the period from timing t0 when the decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner to timing t13, the oden reserved image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. FIG. 660(A) shows an oden reserved image with four ingredients in the reserved display area, an oden reserved image with one ingredient in the first reserved display area, and an oden reserved image with two ingredients in the second reserved display area. , a state in which one ingredient oden reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area and the fourth reserved display area.

At timing t13, the display priority of the oden reserved image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the oden reserved image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern is changed to the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden reserved image. and change. FIG. 660(B) shows a state in which the oden reserved image is displayed in front of the decorative design at timing t13, and a predetermined state after the decorative design is displayed in front of the oden reserved image. The display state at timing (for example, timing t14) is shown.

At timing t15, the display priority of the oden reserved image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden reserved image is changed to the state in which the oden reserved image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. and change. In FIG. 660(C), the display priority of the oden reserved image and the decorative pattern is switched at timing t15, and the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden reserved image, and the oden reserved image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. 2 shows the display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t15 and timing t16) after changing to the state displayed in .

At timing t16, in the reserved display area, the oden reserved image with 6 ingredients is displayed instead of the oden reserved image with 4 ingredients that has been displayed until then, and in the second reserved display area, Instead of the oden reserved image with 2 ingredients displayed until then, the state where the oden reserved image with 3 ingredients is displayed is changed. In FIG. 660(D), at timing t16, in the reserved display area, the oden reserved image with 6 ingredients is displayed instead of the oden reserved image with 4 ingredients that has been displayed until then. In the second reservation display area, at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t17) after changing to the state where the three ingredients oden reserved image is displayed instead of the two ingredients oden reserved image that was displayed until then It shows the display state.

At timing t19, the display priority of the oden reserved image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the oden reserved image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern is changed to the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden reserved image. and change.

FIG. 660(E) shows a state in which the oden reserved image is displayed in front of the decorative design at timing t19, and the decorative design is displayed in front of the oden reserved image. The display state at timing (for example, timing t20) is shown.

At timing t21, the display priority of the oden reserved image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden reserved image is changed to the state in which the oden reserved image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. and change.

In FIG. 660(F), the display priority of the oden reserved image and the decorative pattern is switched at timing t21, and the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden reserved image, and the oden reserved image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. 2 shows the display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t21 and timing t22) after changing to the state displayed in .

At timing t22, in the reserved display area, the oden reserved image with 6 ingredients that had been displayed until then changes to a state in which an oden reserved image with 10 ingredients is displayed, and in the second reserved display area, Instead of the oden reserved image with 3 ingredients displayed until then, the state where the oden reserved image with 6 ingredients is displayed is changed.

In FIG. 660(G), at timing t22, in the reserved display area, the oden reserved image with 10 ingredients is displayed instead of the oden reserved image with 6 ingredients that has been displayed until then. In the second reservation display area, at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t23) after changing to the state where the 6 ingredients oden reserved image is displayed instead of the 3 ingredients oden reserved image that was displayed until then It shows the display state.

At timing t25, the left and right decorative symbols with the same number (for example, "2") are temporarily stopped and displayed to generate a ready-to-win state. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern. In addition, when the special lottery result is a loss, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started from timing t34. On the other hand, when the special lottery result is a big hit, at timing t34, the display of the pending image in the relevant pending display area to the fourth pending display area is temporarily stopped, and after the big win game ends, the decoration pattern is renewed. The display of the pending image in the pending display region to the fourth pending display region is resumed at the same timing as the timing when the variable display is started.

In the present embodiment, for a normal oden reserved image (one ingredient oden reserved image) with a low expectation of a big hit, even if the decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the oden reserved image, the decorative pattern are configured so that they do not overlap with each other.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the number of reservations cannot be confirmed when the player attempts to view the current number of reservations.

On the other hand, for the oden holding image (1 ingredient oden holding image to 10 ingredients oden holding image), which has a higher expectation for a big hit than the normal oden holding image (1 ingredient oden holding image), the decorative pattern is oden When it is displayed on the front side of the reserved image, it overlaps with the decorative pattern and is configured to be visually recognized by the player as if the oden reserved image is hidden by the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the oden reserved image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern and the display mode is changed to another oden reserved image, the oden reserved image is visually recognized by the player in a visual mode in which the oden reserved image is enlarged twice. , it is possible to give a great impact to the player.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 650(A), an embodiment in which the reserved display area and the first reserved display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. An embodiment modified so that the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area may be hidden by the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner will be described with reference to FIGS. 661 and 662. FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 661 is a time chart showing an example of rendering in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 662 is a diagram showing a display state in the display area.

At timing t0, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. During the period from timing t0 when the decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner to timing t7, the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area are displayed in front of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 662(A) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1) after the variable display of decorative symbols is started at timing t0. In the figure, the reserved image is blue in the reserved display area, the reserved image is white in the first reserved display area, the reserved image is white in the second reserved display area, and the reserved image is white in the third reserved display area. A state in which an image is displayed is shown. Further, each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is shown in a state of being displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern. In this embodiment, the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area are basically displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern.

At timing t7, the display priority of each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area and the decoration pattern is switched, and each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is decorated. The state in which the decorative design is displayed in front of the pattern is changed to the state in which the decorative design is displayed in front of each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area.

FIG. 662(B) shows that at timing t7, each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the decorative design, and the decorative design is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. 3 shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t8) after changing to a state in which each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area 3 is displayed on the front side.

At timing t9, the display priority of each reserved image and decorative pattern displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched, and the decorative pattern is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area Each reservation The state of being displayed on the front side of the image is changed to the state of being displayed on the front side of the decoration pattern, with each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area.

In FIG. 662 (C), the display priority of each reserved image and decorative pattern displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched at timing t9, and the decorative pattern is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. From the state displayed on the front side of each reserved image displayed in the state to the state in which each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern. The display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t9 and timing t10) after that is shown.

At timing t10, the pending display area changes to a state in which the green pending image is displayed in place of the blue pending image that has been displayed.

FIG. 662(D) shows, at timing t10, a predetermined timing ( For example, the display state at timing t11) is shown.

At timing t17, the display priority of each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area and the decoration pattern is switched, and each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is decorated. The state in which the decorative design is displayed in front of the pattern is changed to the state in which the decorative design is displayed in front of each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area.

FIG. 662(E) shows that at timing t17, each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the decorative design, and the decorative design changes from the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. 3 shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t18) after changing to a state in which each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area 3 is displayed on the front side.

At timing t19, the display priority of each reserved image and decorative pattern displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched, and the decorative pattern is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area Each reservation The state of being displayed on the front side of the image is changed to the state of being displayed on the front side of the decoration pattern, with each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area.

In FIG. 662 (F), the display priority of each reserved image and decorative pattern displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched at timing t19, and the decorative pattern is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. From the state displayed on the front side of each reserved image displayed in the state to the state in which each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern. The display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t19 and timing t20) after that is shown.

At timing t20, the state changes to a state in which the red pending image is displayed instead of the green pending image that has been displayed in the pending display area.

FIG. 662(G) shows, at timing t20, a predetermined timing ( For example, it shows the display state at timing t21).

At timing t25, the left and right decorative symbols with the same number (for example, "2") are temporarily stopped and displayed to generate a ready-to-win state. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern. In addition, when the special lottery result is a loss, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started from timing t34. On the other hand, when the special lottery result is a big hit, at timing t34, the display of the pending image in the relevant pending display area to the third pending display area is temporarily stopped, and after the big win game ends, the decoration pattern is renewed. The display of the pending image in the pending display region to the fourth pending display region is resumed at the same timing as the timing when the variable display is started.

In the present embodiment, after the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is drawn by the decorative pattern, the display mode of the reserved image is changed while the reserved image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern. there is With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the impact of the hold change.

During the period (timing t7 to timing t9, timing t17 to timing t19) in which the decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the reserved image, there is a possibility that the reserved image will be difficult to see. Therefore, it is preferable to scroll the decorative symbols downward at a variable speed at which the reserved image can be visually recognized through the gap between the decorative symbols displayed on the upper side and the decorative symbols displayed on the lower side.

Specifically, at least once during the period in which the decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the reserved image, from the gap between the decorative pattern displayed on the upper side and the decorative pattern displayed on the lower side, the reserved display area to the second 4, the reserved display area may be configured to be visible. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the number of reservations cannot be confirmed when the player tries to visually recognize the current number of reservations.

With reference to FIGS. 661(A) and 662(A) to 662(G), an example of changing the display mode of the pending image during the variable display in which the decorative symbols are scrolled downward has been shown. 661(B) and 662(H), an embodiment modified so that the decorative pattern is displayed temporarily and the display mode of the pending image is changed during the temporary stop display will be described below. . Incidentally, FIG. 661(B) is a time chart showing an example of the effects of the variable state of decorative symbols in this embodiment. FIG. 662(H) is a diagram showing a display state in the display area.

In this embodiment, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the period from timing t7 to timing t11 and in the period from timing t17 to timing t21.

In the present embodiment, during the period from timing t7 to timing t9 and the period from timing t17 to timing t19, the decorative symbols are displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. It is in the state displayed in In this state, the upper half of each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is hidden by the decoration pattern, and is visually recognized by the player.

Further, at timing t11 and timing t21, the display priority of each reserved image and decorative pattern displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched, and the decorative pattern is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. From the state of being displayed on the front side of each reserved image to be displayed, each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area changes to the state of being displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern. . In this state, the entirety of each suspended image displayed in the suspended display area to the third suspended display area is visually recognized by the player.

FIG. 662(H) shows, at timing t10, a predetermined timing ( 10 shows a display state at a predetermined timing between timing t10 and timing t11.

In this way, even when the configuration is such that the whole of the reserved image becomes visible after part of the reserved image is hidden by the temporarily stopped decorative pattern while the decorative pattern is changing, It is possible to make an impact on the change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 650(A), an embodiment in which the reserved display area and the first reserved display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. A modified embodiment in which the display effect of counting down the time displayed during display may be hidden by the decorative pattern during variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 663 and 664. FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 663 is a time chart showing an example of rendering in this embodiment. FIG. 664 is a diagram showing the display state in the display area.

At timing t0, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the same time, a left countdown image is displayed behind the left decorative pattern. The color of the left countdown image is now green.

The countdown image is an image with a rhombic outer shape. A countdown image is an image indicating that a predetermined effect display is performed at a predetermined timing. Specifically, the number attached to the countdown image indicates the remaining time (remaining seconds) until the predetermined effect is executed. At the timing when the number attached to the countdown image becomes "00", a predetermined effect display is executed. Three countdown images, ie, a left countdown image, a middle countdown image, and a right countdown image are provided corresponding to the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design. Each countdown image is displayed in front of or behind each decorative pattern in the upper part of the display area.

FIG. 664A shows the display state at timing t5. In the drawing, the left countdown image is displayed behind the left decorative pattern. The number "20" is attached to the left countdown image. The number attached to the left count image is decremented by one every time one second elapses from this state, and at timing t25, the number "00" is displayed, but the number "00" is displayed, a predetermined effect display (for example, one of a plurality of characters showing different degrees of expectation for big wins is displayed in the display area) is started. Note that these points are not limited to the left countdown image, and the same applies to the middle countdown image and the right countdown image, which will be described later.

At timing t8, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image changes to the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. .

In FIG. 664(B), the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched at timing t8, and the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern from the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image. It shows the display state immediately after changing to the normal state.

From timing t9 to timing t12, a middle countdown image appears from behind the left countdown image to the right. FIG. 664(C) shows the display state at timing t10 when the middle countdown image is appearing. In the figure, the middle countdown image is appearing from behind the left countdown image to the right. In addition, the countdown image that is moving to the right has a character string "?" instead of a number.

At timing t12, the movement of the middle countdown image to the right side is completed, and the middle countdown image and the middle decoration pattern are overlapped. The middle countdown image is displayed on the front side of the middle decorative pattern. At the same time, the number "30" is added instead of the character string "?" attached to the middle countdown image. Also in the middle countdown image, the assigned number is counted down and displayed according to the passage of time. Also, at timing t12, the left countdown image, which was green, changes to red.

FIG. 664(D) shows the state immediately after such a display mode change at timing t12.

At timing t13, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern is changed to the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image. .

In FIG. 664(E), the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative design is switched at timing t13, and the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative design, and the decorative design is displayed in front of the countdown image. It shows the display state at timing t14, which is the timing after the state has changed to the state where the

At timing t15, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image changes to the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. .

In FIG. 664(F), the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched at timing t15, and from the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image, the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. It shows the display state immediately after changing to the normal state.

At timing t17, display of the right countdown image is started. The right countdown image does not slide like the middle countdown image and starts to be displayed, but is suddenly displayed at a position overlapping the right decorative pattern. The right countdown image is labeled with the number "60".

FIG. 664(G) shows the display state immediately after the display of the right countdown image is started.

At timing t18, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern is changed to the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image. .

In FIG. 664(H), the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched at timing t18, and from the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image. It shows the display state at timing t19, which is the timing after the state has changed to the state where the

At timing t23, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image changes to the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. .

At timing t25, the number attached to the left countdown image becomes "00" and the display of the left countdown image ends at the same time. At the same time, a predetermined display effect is started in the display area.

At timing t26, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern is changed to the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image. .

For the middle countdown image and the right countdown image, the same display effect as that for the left countdown image is executed in the period before and after the timing when the attached number becomes "00".

After a predetermined display performance corresponding to the right countdown image is executed, the decorative patterns to which the same number (for example, ``2'') is attached as the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed to generate a ready-to-win state. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed.

After the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, the middle decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in a display mode according to the special lottery result comes to a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern. In addition, when the special lottery result is a loss, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started from timing t34. After the jackpot game ends, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started.

In this embodiment, the color of the countdown image (for example, green or red), the length of the countdown period (for example, 25 seconds, 30 seconds, or 60 seconds), the number of displayed countdown images (only the left countdown image , two of the left countdown image and the middle countdown image, or three of the left countdown image and the right countdown image) may suggest the degree of expectation for the big win. Alternatively, as the effect display displayed when the count reaches ``00'', a plurality of effect displays with different degrees of expectation for big hits are provided, and any of the effect displays is displayed corresponding to such a mode that the countdown image can take. It may be configured to suggest to the player whether it will be executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the image to be displayed as a countdown, the countdown image is temporarily hidden by the decorative pattern, and after the whole is made visible again, the display mode of the countdown image is changed. It is configured to let By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make an impact on the change mode of the countdown image.

Although the example of the effect in which the color of the countdown image changes from green to red has been shown, the color may not change in some cases.

It may be configured to change the reserved image over a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative pattern. Below, with reference to FIGS. 665(A) and 666, while switching the display priority between the hold image corresponding to the predetermined hold and the pine mark group image, the hold Fig. 3 shows an embodiment modified to change the image; FIG. 665(A) is a time chart showing an example of rendering in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 666 is a diagram showing a display state in the display area.

At timing t0, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started.

At timing t2, the display of the pine tree mark group image is started. The pine tree mark group image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern. Also, at this stage, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, and the blue reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area displayed behind. The pine tree mark group image displayed in this embodiment is the same pine tree mark group image used in the embodiment described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 666(A) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the display of the pine tree group image is started at timing t2.

At timing t4, the decorative pattern changes from the variable display state to the stop display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is lost. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number “2” is attached as the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number “5” is attached as the middle decorative pattern, and a number “4” is attached as the right decorative pattern. The displayed decorative pattern is stopped. At the same time, the display priority of each reserved image displayed in the first to third reserved display areas and the pine mark group image is switched, and each reserved displayed in the first to third reserved display areas From the state where the image is displayed on the front side of the pine tree mark group image to the state where the pine tree mark group image is displayed on the front side of each of the reserved images displayed in the first to third reserved display areas. and change.

In FIG. 666(B), at timing t4, the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, and the pine tree mark group image is displayed in front of the reserved images displayed in the first to third reserved display areas. 4 shows the display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t4 and timing t5) after changing to the displayed state.

At timing t5, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative pattern changes from the stationary display state to the variable display state, corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area until then. Variation display of decorative patterns is started. At the same time, the display priority of each reserved image and the pine mark group image displayed in the first to third reserved display areas is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the first to third reserved display areas. From the state in which each reserved image is displayed in front of each displayed reserved image, to the state in which each reserved image displayed in the first to third reserved display areas is displayed in front of the pine mark group image. and change.

In FIG. 666(C), at timing t5, the decoration pattern changes from the static display state to the variable display state, and each of the reserved images displayed in the first to third reserved display areas is different from the pine mark group image. also shows the display state immediately after changing to the state displayed on the near side.

At timing t5, the reserved images displayed in the respective reserved display areas simultaneously start moving toward the adjacent left reserved display area, and at timing t6, the respective reserved images start to move to the adjacent left reserved display areas. complete at the same time. Specifically, the reserved image that has been displayed in the first reserved display area until then moves to the left while being enlarged, so that the reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area. Further, the suspended image that has been displayed in the second suspended display area until then moves leftward and is displayed in the first suspended display area. Also, the blue reserved image that has been displayed in the third reserved display area until then moves leftward and is displayed in the second reserved display area. Furthermore, instead of the blue reserved image that has completed the movement to the second reserved display area, the green reserved image is displayed in the second reserved display area at timing t6.

FIG. 666(D) shows that at timing t6, the movement of each reserved image is completed, and instead of the blue reserved image that has completed the movement to the second reserved display area, the green reserved image is displayed in the second reserved display area. It shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t7) after it has been displayed.

At timing t9, the decorative pattern changes from the variable display state to the stop display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loss. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number “6” is attached as the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number “9” is attached as the middle decorative pattern, and a number “1” is attached as the right decorative pattern. The displayed decorative pattern is stopped. At the same time, the display priority of each reserved image and the pine mark group image displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area is switched, and each reserved displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area From the state where the image is displayed on the front side of the pine tree mark group image to the state where the pine tree mark group image is displayed on the front side of each of the reserved images displayed in the first to second reserved display areas. and change.

In FIG. 666(E), at timing t9, the decoration pattern is in a stopped display state, and the pine tree mark group image is displayed in front of the reserved images displayed in the first to second reserved display areas. The display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t9 and timing t10) after changing to the displayed state.

At timing t10, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative pattern changes from the stationary display state to the variable display state, corresponding to the reserved image that has been displayed in the first reserved display area until then. Variation display of decorative patterns is started. At the same time, the display priority of each reserved image and the pine mark group image displayed in the first to second reserved display areas is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the first to second reserved display areas. From the state in which each reserved image is displayed in front of each displayed reserved image, to the state in which each reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area is displayed in front of the pine mark group image. and change.

In FIG. 666(F), at timing t10, the decoration pattern changes from the static display state to the variable display state, and the reserved images displayed in the first to second reserved display areas are different from the pine mark group image. also shows the display state immediately after changing to the state displayed on the near side.

At timing t10, the reserved images displayed in the respective reserved display areas simultaneously start moving toward the adjacent left reserved display area, and at timing t11, the respective reserved images start to move to the adjacent left reserved display areas. complete at the same time. Specifically, the reserved image that has been displayed in the first reserved display area until then moves to the left while being enlarged, so that the reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area. Also, the green reserved image that has been displayed in the second reserved display area until then moves leftward and is displayed in the first reserved display area. Furthermore, at timing t11, instead of the green pending image that has completed the movement to the first pending display area, the red pending image is displayed in the first pending display area.

In FIG. 666(G), the movement of each reserved image is completed at timing t6, and instead of the green reserved image that has completed the movement to the first reserved display area, the red reserved image is displayed in the first reserved display area. It shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12) after it has been displayed.

At timing t14, the decorative pattern changes from the variable display state to the stop display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loss. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number “4” is attached as the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number “1” is attached as the middle decorative pattern, and a number “2” is attached as the right decorative pattern. The displayed decorative pattern is stopped. At the same time, the display priority of the red reserved image and the pine tree mark group image displayed in the first reserved display area is switched, and the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is on the front side of the pine tree mark group image. , to a state in which the pine tree mark group image is displayed in front of the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area.

At timing t15, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative pattern changes from the stationary display state to the variable display state, and the red reserved image that was displayed in the first reserved display area until then The variable display of the corresponding decorative pattern is started. At the same time, the display priority is switched between the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the pine tree mark group image, and the pine tree mark group image is closer to the front side than the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area. , to a state in which the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image.

At timing t15, the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area starts to move toward the reserved display area, and at timing t16, the movement of the red reserved image to the reserved display area is completed. Specifically, the red pending image, which has been displayed in the first pending display area until then, moves leftward while enlarging, so that it is displayed in the pending display area.

At the timing t25, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped and displayed with the numeral "2" attached thereto, and the ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. The display of the pine mark group ends at the same time when the reach state occurs.

FIG. 666(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the reach state occurs at timing t25.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern. In addition, when the special lottery result is a loss, until the game ball enters the first start port 2002 and a new special lottery result is acquired, the decorative pattern continues to be displayed in a stopped display state, and the special lottery result is obtained. In the case of a big win, after the big win game ends, a new variation of the decorative pattern is started.

In this manner, the display mode of the pending image may be changed over a plurality of stop displays of the decorative symbols. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make an impact on the change mode of the reserved image.

Below, with reference to FIGS. 665(B) and 667, the reserved image is displayed while switching the display priority between the reserved image corresponding to the predetermined reserved and the decorative design over a plurality of variable display of the decorative design. Fig. 3 shows a modified embodiment; FIG. 665(B) is a time chart showing an example of rendering in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 667 is a diagram showing a display state in the display area.

At timing t0, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. Further, at timing t0, the suspended images displayed in the first to fourth suspended display areas simultaneously start to move toward the adjacent suspended display area on the left side, and at timing t1, the first to fourth suspended display areas. At the same time, the movement of the reserved image displayed in the fourth reserved display area to the third reserved display area is completed.

FIG. 667A shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t2) after the movement of the pending image is completed at timing t1. In this state, a blue pending image is displayed in the third pending display area.

At timing t4, the decorative pattern changes from the variable display state to the stop display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is lost. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number “2” is attached as the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number “5” is attached as the middle decorative pattern, and a number “4” is attached as the right decorative pattern. The displayed decorative pattern is stopped. At the same time, the display priority of each reserved image and decorative pattern displayed in the first reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched, and each reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area to the third reserved display area is A state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the decorative pattern is changed to a state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of each reserved image displayed in the first to third reserved display areas.

In FIG. 667(B), at timing t4, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and the decorative symbols are displayed in front of the reserved images displayed in the first to third reserved display areas. It shows the display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t4 and timing t5) after changing to the state.

At timing t5, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative pattern changes from the stationary display state to the variable display state, corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area until then. The variable display of decorative patterns is started. At the same time, the display priority of each of the reserved images and decorative patterns displayed in the first to third reserved display areas is switched, and the decorative patterns are displayed in the first to third reserved display areas. The state of being displayed on the front side of the reserved image is changed to the state of being displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, each of the reserved images displayed in the first to third reserved display areas.

In FIG. 667(C), at timing t5, the decorative pattern changes from the stationary display state to the variable display state, and the reserved images displayed in the first to third reserved display areas are positioned in front of the decorative pattern. It shows the display state immediately after changing to the state displayed on the side.

At timing t5, the reserved images displayed in the respective reserved display areas simultaneously start moving toward the adjacent left reserved display area, and at timing t6, the respective reserved images start to move to the adjacent left reserved display areas. complete at the same time. Specifically, the reserved image that has been displayed in the first reserved display area until then moves to the left while being enlarged, so that the reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area. Further, the suspended image that has been displayed in the second suspended display area until then moves leftward and is displayed in the first suspended display area. Also, the blue reserved image that has been displayed in the third reserved display area until then moves leftward and is displayed in the second reserved display area. Furthermore, instead of the blue reserved image that has completed the movement to the second reserved display area, the green reserved image is displayed in the second reserved display area at timing t6.

FIG. 667(D) shows that the movement of each reserved image is completed at timing t6, and instead of the blue reserved image that has completed the movement to the second reserved display area, the green reserved image is displayed in the second reserved display area. It shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t7) after it has been displayed.

At timing t9, the decorative pattern changes from the variable display state to the stop display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loss. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number “6” is attached as the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number “9” is attached as the middle decorative pattern, and a number “1” is attached as the right decorative pattern. The displayed decorative pattern is stopped. At the same time, the display priority of each reserved image and decorative pattern displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area is switched, and each reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area is A state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the decorative pattern is changed to a state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of each reserved image displayed in the first to second reserved display areas.

In FIG. 667(E), at timing t9, the decorative pattern is in a stopped display state, and the decorative pattern is displayed in front of each reserved image displayed in the first to second reserved display areas. It shows the display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t9 and timing t10) after changing to the state.

At timing t10, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative pattern changes from the stationary display state to the variable display state, corresponding to the reserved image that has been displayed in the first reserved display area until then. The variable display of decorative patterns is started. At the same time, the display priority of each reserved image and the decorative pattern displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area is switched, and the decorative pattern is displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area. The state of being displayed on the front side of the reserved image is changed to the state of being displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern with each of the reserved images displayed in the first to second reserved display areas.

In FIG. 666(F), at timing t10, the decorative pattern changes from the stationary display state to the variable display state, and each reserved image displayed in the first to second reserved display regions is positioned in front of the decorative pattern. It shows the display state immediately after changing to the state displayed on the side.

At timing t10, the reserved images displayed in the respective reserved display areas simultaneously start moving toward the adjacent left reserved display area, and at timing t11, the respective reserved images start to move to the adjacent left reserved display areas. complete at the same time. Specifically, the reserved image that has been displayed in the first reserved display area until then moves to the left while being enlarged, so that the reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area. Also, the green reserved image that has been displayed in the second reserved display area until then moves leftward and is displayed in the first reserved display area. Furthermore, at timing t11, instead of the green pending image that has completed the movement to the first pending display area, the red pending image is displayed in the first pending display area.

In FIG. 666(G), the movement of each reserved image is completed at timing t6, and instead of the green reserved image that has completed the movement to the first reserved display area, the red reserved image is displayed in the first reserved display area. It shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12) after it has been displayed.

At timing t14, the decorative pattern changes from the variable display state to the stop display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loss. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number “4” is attached as the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number “1” is attached as the middle decorative pattern, and a number “2” is attached as the right decorative pattern. The displayed decorative pattern is stopped. At the same time, the display priority of the red reserved image and the decorative pattern displayed in the first reserved display area is switched, and the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. The state changes to a state in which the decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area.

At timing t15, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative pattern changes from the stationary display state to the variable display state, and the red reserved image that was displayed in the first reserved display area until then The variable display of the corresponding decorative pattern is started. At the same time, the display priority of the red reserved image and the decorative design displayed in the first reserved display area is switched, and the decorative design is displayed in front of the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area. The state changes to a state in which the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern.

At timing t15, the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area starts to move toward the reserved display area, and at timing t16, the movement of the red reserved image to the reserved display area is completed. Specifically, the red pending image, which has been displayed in the first pending display area until then, moves leftward while enlarging, so that it is displayed in the pending display area.

At the timing t25, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped and displayed with the numeral "2" attached thereto, and the ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. The display of the pine mark group ends at the same time when the reach state occurs.

FIG. 667(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the reach state occurs at timing t25.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern. In addition, when the special lottery result is a loss, until the game ball enters the first start port 2002 and a new special lottery result is acquired, the decorative pattern continues to be displayed in a stopped display state, and the special lottery result is obtained. In the case of a big win, after the big win game ends, a new variation of the decorative pattern is started.

In this manner, the display mode of the pending image may be changed over a plurality of stop displays of the decorative symbols. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make an impact on the change mode of the reserved image.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 666 and 667, a new variable display of decorative symbols has started, and each pending image displayed in a pending display area has completed moving to an adjacent pending display area. An example of changing the display mode of the pending image to a different display mode at the timing (timing t6, timing t11) has been shown, but it is configured to change the display mode of the pending image to a different display mode at other timings. good too.

For example, at the timing (timing t5, timing t10) when the new variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the display mode of the pending image is changed to a different display mode in the display state before the movement of the pending image is started. may be configured. Alternatively, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is a period until the movement to the adjacent reserved display area is completed (timing t5 to timing t6, timing t10 to timing At t11), the display mode of the pending image may be gradually changed to a different display mode.

In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 650 to 664, the display mode of the pending image, oden pending image, countdown image, etc. is changed during one variation of the decorative pattern. As shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 665 and 667, the holding image, the oden holding image, the countdown image, etc. in the embodiment are displayed behind the decorative design when the variable display of the decorative design is stopped. In addition, it is configured to be displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern in accordance with the start timing of the new variable display of the decorative pattern, and after a predetermined time has elapsed after displaying the decorative pattern on the front side (for example, 1 second later), it may be modified so as to change the display mode such as a pending image, an oden pending image, a countdown image, or the like.

Conventionally, when displaying a pending image, image data representing that there is a pending in the pending display area, image data representing that there is pending in the pending display area and the first pending display area, the pending display area and Image data indicating that there is a hold in the first holding display area to the second holding display area, image data showing that there is a holding in the holding display area and the first holding display area to the third holding display area, and the holding display A total of 5 image data representing that there is a hold in the area and the 1st hold display area to the 4th hold display area are stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b in advance, and the number of holds changes according to the progress of the game situation. , the drawing data of the image to be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is generated based on any of the image data.

Specifically, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source screen data indicating that the number of pending items has increased by one at the timing when the start winning to the first start gate 2002 occurs, the VDP with built-in sound source 1512a Based on the screen data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, instead of the image data indicating the number of reservations used to generate the drawing data, the image data with one more number of reservations is transferred to the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. A display method was taken in which the data was read from and used to generate drawing data.

Similarly, when the variable display corresponding to the pending image ends and a new variable display starts, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data indicating that the pending number has decreased by one to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. Based on the screen data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator displays the image data with the number of reservations less by one than the image data indicating the number of reservations used in the generation of drawing data. and a display method of reading from the sound control ROM 1512b and using it to generate drawing data.

However, in recent years, an effect has been performed in which the display mode of the pending image is changed from the normal display mode to a different display mode. In this case, in addition to the five patterns described above, image data with different display modes for the pending image is prepared in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. As the variation of the display mode of the pending image increases, such as displaying a plurality of pending images in different display modes at the same time, the amount of image data prepared in advance increases geometrically, and the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b There was a problem that the data size of the image stored in was large.

In addition to changing the display mode of the reserved image, image data for starting the display of the reserved image, image data for moving the reserved image to an adjacent reserved display area, and an image for ending the display of the reserved image Data, etc., the more you try to increase the presentation mode for the pending image, the more you need to prepare the image data corresponding to those presentation modes in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. There is a problem that the size of the image data becomes large.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, layers are prepared individually for each of the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area, and image data corresponding to one reserved display area is arranged in one layer, Each layer is composed to generate drawing data.

In the following, an embodiment will be described in which a plurality of layers with different display priorities are used, image data is arranged for each layer, and the arranged images are superimposed for display. .

Each layer has a predetermined number of vertical and horizontal pixels. This number of pixels is the same as the number of pixels of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . For example, in a game machine equipped with a game board side effect display device 1600 having a display area of 1280 pixels wide and 800 pixels high, the number of pixels in each layer is 1280 pixels wide and 800 pixels high like this display area. . In the following description, the present embodiment is provided with a game board side effect display device 1600 having a display area of 1280 horizontal pixels and 800 vertical pixels. The number of pixels in the display area of the game board side effect display device is not limited to 1280 pixels horizontally and 800 pixels vertically. can be configured to

In the display area, the horizontal axis is the x-axis, the vertical axis is the y-axis, and the origin is set at the upper left. The coordinates of the origin are (0, 0), the coordinates of the lower left corner of the display area are (0, 799), the coordinates of the upper right corner of the display area are (1279, 0), and the coordinates of the lower right corner of the display area are (1279, 799). be. An image stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b can be placed on each layer by designating arbitrary coordinates in the layer. The image that can be placed on the layer has a rectangular shape, and the image is placed so that the upper left pixel of the image is positioned with respect to the specified coordinates. FIG. 671(A) is a diagram showing a state of a layer in which no image is arranged.

A display priority is set for each layer, and image data placed in a layer with a higher priority is composited so that it is displayed in front of image data placed in a layer with a lower priority. Rendering data is generated by

For example, if image data placed in a layer with a low priority and image data placed in a layer with a high priority overlap, the image data placed in a layer with a high priority overlaps the priority. Rendering data is generated in such a manner that the image data arranged in a layer with a low value is hidden.

In each layer, it is possible to place image data only on part of the layer, or to place image data on the entire layer. For example, when image data is placed only on a part of a layer with a high priority, drawing data is generated in such a manner that an image placed on a layer with a low priority can be visually recognized from an area where no image data is placed. It will happen. On the other hand, when image data is placed on the entire layer with high priority, even if some image data is placed on a layer with low priority, the image placed on this layer with low priority is visible. Rendering data in a form that cannot be generated is generated.

It may be configured such that the transparency can be set for the image data arranged in the layer. In this case, it is preferable that the transparency can be set for each pixel of the image data arranged in the layer. In this embodiment, transparency can be set in the range of 0% to 100%. When the transparency is 0%, the pixel is opaque, when the transparency is 50%, the pixel is translucent, and when the transparency is 100%, the pixel is transparent. In this embodiment, if there is no particular mention of transparency, the transparency of the pixel or the image is 0%, ie opaque.

By making it possible to set the transparency of the pixels of the image data placed on the layer, even if the images placed on layers with different priorities overlap, both images can be visible. is. For example, if the transparency of all pixels of image data placed on a layer with high priority is set to 50% and the transparency of all pixels of image data placed on a layer of low priority is set to 0%, , the image placed on the high-priority layer becomes translucent, and the image placed on the low-priority layer is visible in a display mode that makes the image placed on the high-priority layer transparent. It is possible to generate drawing data that can be used.

An embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 668 and 669 in which a plurality of such layers are set and a hold image corresponding to one hold is arranged in each of the layers.

In the embodiment shown below, the upper limit of the number of pending for the first starting port 2002 is four. In addition, in the order of winning the first start port 2002, the suspension and the maximum of four suspensions (in the order in which the variation of the corresponding decorative pattern is started, the suspension, the first suspension, the second suspension, the third suspension, the third suspension) 4 pending) is displayed.

FIG. 668 is a diagram showing display priorities set for layers used for display processing in this embodiment and image data arranged in the layers. A part of the layers up to layer L99, which is the lowest degree layer, is shown in the figure. Of these layers, the layer L40, the layer L45, the layer L50, the layer L55, and the layer L60 are layers in which reserved images are arranged.

Note that the layer L00 is a layer in which an error notification image indicating that some kind of error has occurred in the gaming machine is arranged. In addition, the layer L35 is a layer in which the decorative symbols that are displayed still are arranged. In addition, the layer L65 is a layer in which decorative symbols being displayed in a variable manner are arranged. A layer L99 is a layer in which a background image is arranged.

In this embodiment, basically, the pending image corresponding to the pending is arranged on the layer L40. Also, a reserved image corresponding to the first reservation is arranged on the layer L45. Also, a pending image corresponding to the second pending is arranged on the layer L50. Also, a pending image corresponding to the third pending is arranged on the layer L55. Also, a reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation is arranged on the layer L60.

FIG. 669 is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. FIG. 670 is a diagram showing how reserved images are arranged on layers in this embodiment.

The reserved image in this embodiment has a square shape of 320 pixels horizontally and 320 pixels vertically. The retained image consists of pixels forming a circular portion with a diameter of 320 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion of the circular shape with 100% transparency. The pixels forming the circular portion are composed of pixels with a black outline of the circle and white pixels inside the black outline. The contour portion has a width of about several pixels (for example, 3 pixels). By arranging such a pending image at predetermined coordinates on a predetermined layer, it is possible to generate drawing data in which the perfect circular pending image is visually recognized.

In this embodiment, FIG. 670(A) shows an example in which the pending image is arranged at coordinates (480, 440) of layer L40.

The reserved image in this embodiment has a square shape of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long. The reserved image consists of pixels forming a circular portion with a diameter of 160 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion of the circular shape with 100% transparency. The pixels forming the circular portion are composed of pixels with a black outline of the circle and white pixels inside the black outline. The contour portion has a width of about several pixels (for example, 3 pixels). By arranging such a reserved image at predetermined coordinates on a predetermined layer, it is possible to generate drawing data in which a circular reserved image is visually recognized.

FIG. 670(B) shows a state in which the square-shaped pending image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is placed as the first pending image at the coordinates (760, 600) of the layer L45.

FIG. 670(C) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged as the second reserved image at the coordinates (880, 600) of the layer L50.

FIG. 670(D) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged as the third reserved image at the coordinates (1000, 600) of the layer L55.

FIG. 670(E) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged as the fourth reserved image at the coordinates (1120, 600) of the layer L60.

Also, FIG. 670(F) shows each layer (for example, layer L40 to layer L60) described with reference to FIGS. shows an example of drawing data generated by synthesizing

In the present embodiment, in a layer structure capable of such display, it is possible to perform display processing for arranging each reserved image in a different layer as described below.

FIG. 669 is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. At timing t1, timing t2, timing t3, timing t8, and timing t10, a starting prize to the first start opening 2002 occurs, and the holding image corresponding to the holding and the first holding are displayed for the layers L40 to L60. to the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation are arranged.

FIG. 670(F) is a diagram showing a display state at timing t11. In this state, the reserved image has the highest display priority, and the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation has the lowest display priority.

At timing t13, the pending image corresponding to the pending is placed on the layer L60, the pending image corresponding to the first pending is placed on the layer L55, the pending image corresponding to the second pending is placed on the layer L50, and the second pending image is placed on the layer L50. A reserved image corresponding to the 3rd reservation is arranged on the layer L45, and a reserved image corresponding to the 4th reservation is arranged on the layer L40. The coordinates arranged at this time are not changed.

FIG. 670(G) is a diagram showing a display state at timing t14. In this state, the display priority of the pending image is the lowest, and the display priority of the pending image corresponding to the fourth hold is the highest.

At timing t16, the reserved image corresponding to the relevant reservation, the reserved image corresponding to the first reservation to the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation are arranged on the layers L40 to L60, respectively, and the arrangement before timing t13 return to state.

At timing t19, the pending image corresponding to the pending that has been placed on the layer L40 is placed on the layer L50, and the pending image corresponding to the second pending that has been placed on the layer L50 is placed on the layer L40. The coordinates arranged at this time are not changed.

FIG. 670(H) is a diagram showing a display state at timing t20. In this state, the display priority of the pending image corresponding to the second pending is the highest. Further, the display priority of the hold image corresponding to the first hold is lower than the display priority of the hold image corresponding to the second hold, and the display priority of the hold image corresponding to the first hold is higher than the display priority of the hold image. The display priority of the pending image is the lowest.

At timing t22, the reserved image corresponding to the relevant reservation, the reserved image corresponding to the first reservation to the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation are arranged on the layers L40 to L60, respectively, and the arrangement before timing t19 return to state.

At timing t25, the pending image corresponding to the pending that was placed on the layer L40 again is placed on the layer L50, and the pending image corresponding to the second pending that was placed on the layer L50 is placed on the layer L40. .

At timing t28, the reserved image corresponding to the relevant reservation, the reserved image corresponding to the first reservation to the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation are arranged on the layers L40 to L60, respectively, and the arrangement before timing t25 return to state.

In this way, by switching the display priority of the reserved image while the decorative pattern is changing, it is possible to easily change the appearance of the entire reserved image. Also, it is possible to make a specific reserved image stand out more than other reserved images.

From timing t13 to timing t16, the display priority of the reserved image is the lowest, and the display priority of the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation is the highest. In addition, the configuration may be such that the same display is performed multiple times.

In addition, from timing t19 to timing t22, and from timing t25 to timing t28, the display priority of the pending image corresponding to the second pending is raised twice to make the pending image corresponding to the second pending conspicuous. , Such a display mode may be configured to be performed only once, or may be configured to be performed three or more times. Further, not only the hold image corresponding to the second hold, but also the hold image corresponding to the first hold, the hold image corresponding to the third hold, and the hold image corresponding to the fourth hold are configured to perform the same display. You may

It can also be said that the display mode shown in FIG. 670(G) makes the pending image corresponding to the fourth pending image more conspicuous than the other pending images. Note that such a display may be configured to be executed according to the prefetch result of each hold. For example, by increasing the display priority of a specific hold as in this example of effect, it may be configured to indicate that the degree of expectation for a big hit of the hold is high.

In addition, in the present embodiment and each embodiment described later, the reserved image corresponding to the variation of the decoration pattern currently being performed, the reserved image corresponding to the first reservation to the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation are specially displayed sometimes referred to as As the special display, a special display in which only the reserved image is displayed, a special display in which the reserved image and the reserved image corresponding to the first reservation are displayed, the reserved image and the reserved image corresponding to the first reservation, and the second A special display in which a hold image corresponding to the hold is displayed, a special display in which the hold image, the hold image corresponding to the first hold, the hold image corresponding to the second hold, and the hold image corresponding to the third hold are displayed, There is a special display in which the reserved image, the reserved image corresponding to the first reservation, the reserved image corresponding to the second reservation, the reserved image corresponding to the third reservation, and the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation are displayed. By means of the special display, it is possible to show to the player the number of variations of the decorative symbols from 1 to 5, including the number of variations of the currently varying decorative symbols.

Instead of the normal white pending image displayed as the pending image corresponding to the pending, the pending image corresponding to the first pending to the pending image corresponding to the fourth pending, blue indicating that the expectation of the big hit is higher , green, red, etc. may be arranged in layers.

In this production example, in a state where the display priority is not changed and a state where the display priority is changed, a reserved image in a specific color such as blue, green, or red is arranged in place of the white reserved image. It is preferable to configure the probabilities that .

For example, if the hold image corresponding to the second hold is placed in a layer L50 with a relatively low display priority (for example, timing t16 to timing t19), the layer L40 with a relatively high display priority In the case where it is placed (for example, timing t19 to timing t22), when it is placed in a layer with a higher display priority, a specific color such as blue, green, or red is used instead of the white pending image. may be configured to increase the probability that the reserved image of the

The timing of arranging the reserved image of the specific color is a predetermined timing between when the display priority is changed and when the display priority is changed again (for example, 2 seconds after the display priority is changed). should be For example, if the pending image corresponding to the second pending is placed in a layer L50 with a relatively low display priority (for example, timing t16 to timing t19), at timing t18, instead of the white pending image may be configured to arrange a reserved image of a specific color. In addition, when placed on the layer L40 with relatively high display priority (for example, timing t19 to timing t22), at timing t21, instead of the white pending image, a specific color pending image is placed. It may be configured as

Also, only when placed in a layer L40 with a relatively high display priority (for example, timing t19 to timing t22), instead of the white pending image, a red color that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is higher It may be configured so that a pending image can be placed.

In this way, as the layers in which one reserved image is arranged, there are a layer with a high display priority and a layer with a low display priority. It is configured so that the probabilities of arranging the images are different. By adopting such a configuration, when the display priority of the pending image changes, the player can feel the expectation that the pending image will change to a display mode that suggests a higher degree of expectation for a big hit. It is possible to hold the

In the time chart, the hold image corresponding to the second hold was explained, but this is an example, and the hold image corresponding to the hold, the hold image corresponding to the first hold, and the hold image corresponding to the third hold The same display processing may be performed on both the reserved image and the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation.

Also, in the time chart, an example of the state of the state where the number of holds is 4 has been described, but the number of holds is not limited to 4. When there are 1 suspension and 2nd suspension, and when there are the suspension and the 1st suspension to the 3rd suspension, it may be configured to perform the same effect display. Note that when there is only the pending image, there is no need to switch layers, so the pending image may be changed to a pending image of a different color without switching layers. In addition, you may employ|adopt the same structure also in other embodiment.

Further, in another embodiment described later, at a predetermined timing (for example, 2 seconds later) after the layer in which the reserved image is arranged is changed, the reserved image in which the layer to be arranged is changed, as described above. The display mode of the pending image may be changed immediately.

At the timings of changing the layer on which the reserved image is arranged (for example, timing t13, timing t16, timing t19, timing t22, timing t25, and timing t28), an effect display indicating that the layer on which the reserved image is arranged has been changed. may be configured to be executed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . For example, each displayed pending image may be configured to move vertically together. Alternatively, like the suspended image corresponding to the second suspended in the production example, only the suspended image with the highest priority may be configured to move in the vertical direction.

It should be noted that the timing of performing such effect display is a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12, timing t15, timing t18, timing t21, timing t24, timing t27) before the timing of changing the layer in which the pending image is arranged. or predetermined timings (for example, timing t14, timing t17, timing t20, timing t23, timing t26, timing t29) after changing the layer in which the reserved image is arranged.

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize that the layer in which the pending image is arranged has been changed. In addition, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation that the display mode of the predetermined pending image will change.

Below, referring to FIGS. 668 and 671, another embodiment in which a plurality of such layers are set and a hold image corresponding to one hold is arranged in each of the layers will be described.

In the present embodiment, when the start winning to the first start port 2002 occurs first after the gaming machine is powered on, a pending image is arranged on the layer L40. Next, when the start winning to the first start opening 2002 occurs, a pending image is arranged on the layer L45. Next, when a start winning to the first start opening 2002 occurs, a pending image is arranged on the layer L50. Similarly, in accordance with the occurrence of the start winning to the first start opening 2002, the layer L55, the layer L60 and the layer in which the reserved image is arranged are switched. In addition, after the reserved image data is arranged on the layer L60, when the start winning to the first start opening 2002 occurs, the reserved image is arranged on the layer L40, and similarly, layer L45, layer L50 . Then, the layer in which the pending image data is arranged is cyclically changed when the start winning to the first start port 2002 occurs.

Next, referring to FIG. 671, a mode of arranging an image on a predetermined layer will be described with reference to reserved layers and reserved images. FIG. 671(A) is a diagram showing a state of a layer in which no image is arranged. As shown in the drawing, the number of pixels in the layer in this embodiment is 1280 pixels horizontally and 800 pixels vertically. Also, the origin (0, 0) is provided at the upper left of the layer as shown in the drawing.

The reserved image in this embodiment has a square shape of 160 pixels horizontally and 160 pixels vertically. The retained image consists of pixels forming a circular portion with a diameter of 160 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion of the circular shape with 100% transparency. The pixels forming the circular portion are composed of pixels with a black outline of the circle and white pixels inside the black outline. The contour portion has a width of about several pixels (for example, 3 pixels). By arranging such a pending image at predetermined coordinates on a predetermined layer, it is possible to generate drawing data in which the perfect circular pending image is visually recognized.

In this embodiment, FIG. 671(B) shows an example of arranging the pending image at coordinates (560, 600) of a predetermined layer (for example, layer L40).

The reserved image in this embodiment has a square shape of 80 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically. The retained image consists of pixels forming a circular portion with a diameter of 80 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion of the circular shape with 100% transparency. The pixels forming the circular portion are composed of pixels with a black outline of the circle and white pixels inside the black outline. The contour portion has a width of about several pixels (for example, 3 pixels). By arranging such a reserved image at predetermined coordinates on a predetermined layer, it is possible to generate drawing data in which a circular reserved image is visually recognized.

FIG. 671(C) shows an example in which a pending image is arranged as the first pending image at coordinates (760, 680) of a predetermined layer (eg, layer L45). FIG. 671(D) shows an example in which a pending image is arranged as a second pending image at coordinates (880, 680) of a predetermined layer (eg, layer L50). FIG. 671(E) shows an example of arranging a pending image as the third pending image at coordinates (1000, 680) of a predetermined layer (for example, layer L55). FIG. 671(F) shows an example in which a reserved image is arranged as the fourth reserved image at coordinates (1120, 680) of a predetermined layer (for example, layer L60).

FIG. 671(G) shows an example of drawing data generated by synthesizing each layer (for example, layer L40 to layer L60) described with reference to FIGS. 671(B) to 671(F). there is In FIG. 671(G), illustration of the background image and decorative pattern is omitted, but in reality all layers including these images are combined to generate drawing data.
Thus, in the present embodiment, the pending image corresponding to the pending, the respective pending images corresponding to the first to fourth pending are arranged at predetermined coordinates of different layers, and each layer is synthesized It is configured as follows.

672 and 673, an example of an effect for displaying the drawing data thus generated in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described.

FIG. 672 is a time chart showing how reserved images are assigned to layers in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 673 shows a display example in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . It should be noted that, in the following description, suspensions A to G are indicated according to the order of occurrence of suspensions. Such notation may also be used in other embodiments.

At the timing t1, a hold A is generated in response to the occurrence of the start winning to the first start opening 2002, and at the same time the hold image corresponding to the hold A is arranged at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L40. The reserved image has a square shape of 160 horizontal pixels and 160 vertical pixels, as described above, and is an image visually recognized as a white perfect circle.

Until the timing t1, the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the variable display of decorative symbols is not performed.

FIG. 673 shows a display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t1 and timing t2) after the start winning to the first start opening 2002 occurs at timing t1.

At the timing t2, a hold B is generated in response to the start winning to the first start opening 2002, and at the same time a hold image corresponding to the hold B is arranged at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L45. As described above, the reserved image has a square shape of 80 horizontal pixels and 80 vertical pixels, and is an image visually recognized as a white perfect circle.

At the timing t3, a hold C is generated in response to the occurrence of the start winning to the first start opening 2002, and at the same time a hold image corresponding to the hold C is arranged at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L50.

At timing t4, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the hold A is stopped.

At timing t5, the pending image corresponding to pending A, which has been placed on layer L40 until then, is not placed on layer L40.

Further, at timing t5, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the reservation B is started. At the same time, the pending image placed at coordinates (760, 680) of layer L45 is no longer placed, and instead, the pending image corresponding to pending B is placed at coordinates (560, 600) of layer L45.

Further, at timing t5, the pending image arranged at the coordinates (880, 680) of layer L50 corresponding to pending C is no longer placed, and instead, the pending image corresponding to pending C is placed on layer L50. It is located at coordinates (760,680).

Thus, in the present embodiment, five layers for holding display are prepared, and when holding occurs according to the occurrence of the start winning to the first start opening 2002, the layers are used in order It consists of

At timing t9, the pending image corresponding to pending E is placed on layer L60, and thereafter, at timing t11, the pending image corresponding to pending F is placed on layer L40 where the pending image corresponding to pending A was placed. be done. Similarly, at timing t17, the pending image corresponding to pending G is placed on the layer L45 where the pending image corresponding to pending B and the pending image was placed.

In this way, by placing only one reserved image in one layer, even if it is desired to change the display mode of the reserved image, the reserved image can be displayed without considering the display state in other layers. It is possible to change the display mode of .

An example of arranging a square image of 80 pixels wide by 80 pixels high as a reserved image and a square image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels high as the reserved image on a predetermined layer has been shown. It may be configured such that it is enlarged twice in both the vertical and horizontal directions and used as the reserved image. Alternatively, the reserved image may be reduced to 1/2 both in the vertical and horizontal directions and used as the reserved image.

With such a configuration, there is no need to create in advance the image data of at least one of the pending image and the relevant pending image, and it is possible to reduce the size of the image data stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. Become.

The white portion of the reserved image may be configured to be a color other than white, such as blue, green, or red. In this case, the white reserved image consists of pixels forming the white part of a circular shape with a diameter of 160 pixels and pixels forming the outer part of the circular shape with 100% transparency. It is preferable to generate the suspension image in which the pixels forming the part are blue in advance and store it in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. Similarly, the reserved image in which the pixels forming the white portion of the circular shape are green and the reserved image in which the pixels forming the white portion of the circular shape are red are generated in advance and stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. Good to keep. Then, such a blue pending image, a green pending image, and a red pending image may be arranged at the coordinates (560, 600) instead of the white pending image.

It should be noted that the degree of expectation for a big hit may be indicated by the display mode of the pending image. In this case, as described above, it is preferable to configure the white, blue, green, and red colors so that the degree of expectation for the big win increases in this order.

As with the reserved image, the reserved image may also be configured such that the white portion of the reserved image is a color other than white, such as blue, green, or red. In this case, the white reserved image consisted of pixels forming the white portion of the circular shape with a diameter of 80 pixels and pixels forming the outer portion of the circular shape with 100% transparency. It is preferable to create in advance a reserved image in which the pixels forming the .DELTA. Similarly, a reserved image in which the pixels forming the white portion of the circular shape are green and a reserved image in which the pixels forming the white portion of the circular shape are red are created in advance and stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. good. Then, replacing the blue pending image, the green pending image, and the red pending image with the white pending image, coordinates (760, 680), coordinates (880, 680), coordinates (1000, 680) ), and may be configured to be located at coordinates (1120, 680).

In addition, depending on the display mode of the pending image, it may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation for a big hit. In this case, as described above, it is preferable to configure the white, blue, green, and red colors so that the degree of expectation for the big win increases in this order.

In this way, a plurality of images with different display modes are created in advance as the reserved image or the reserved image, and one of the reserved images or the reserved image is arranged in a predetermined layer based on the special lottery result. may be configured. Note that the timing of arranging the reserved image or the reserved image with different display modes on the predetermined layer is the timing at which the reserved image or the reserved image corresponding to the predetermined reservation is first arranged on the predetermined layer (for example, FIG. 672 may be the timing t1) at which the hold A in the time chart shown in is placed on the layer L40.

Alternatively, it may be the timing after a predetermined period of time has passed after being placed in a predetermined layer (for example, timing t6, which is the timing after timing t2 when hold B in the time chart shown in FIG. 672 is placed in layer L45, etc.).

Alternatively, the timing at which the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image ends and the respective reserved images are rearranged in the adjacent left image arrangement position (for example, the layer corresponding to the reserved D in the time chart shown in FIG. 672 It may be the timing t10 at which the image placed at coordinates (880, 680) of L55 is placed at coordinates (760, 680) of layer L55.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to switch the reserved image or the reserved image to the reserved image or the reserved image having a different display mode at an arbitrary timing without greatly increasing the storage capacity of the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. can be executed.

When a game ball wins the first start port 2002 and a new hold occurs, a new hold image is placed in a layer where nothing has been placed until then, but the hold as described above It may be configured such that the reserved image is first arranged at predetermined coordinates above the arrangement position of the image by a predetermined number of pixels, and the arrangement coordinates of the reserved image are dynamically changed so that the reserved image moves downward.

At timing t1 when suspension A described with reference to FIG. ) to move downward by 80 pixels to arrange the pending image corresponding to pending A at coordinates (560, 600). In this case, after the reserved image is displayed above the reserved image of a perfect circle by the radius, the player visually recognizes the display mode in which the reserved image moves downward by the radius over about 0.67 seconds. It will happen.

Also, at the timing t2 when suspension B described with reference to FIG. seconds) to move 40 pixels downward, and arrange the pending image corresponding to pending B at coordinates (760, 680). In this case, after the reserved image is displayed above the circular reserved image by the radius, the player can visually recognize the display mode in which the reserved image moves downward by the radius over about 0.67 seconds. Become.

In the above-described embodiment, the reserved image or the reserved image placed at the predetermined position of the layer was a single still image with no movement. The image to be viewed may be arranged at a predetermined position on the layer. For example, image data consisting of 30 still images is created in advance, and one of the 30 still images is arranged repeatedly in order at a predetermined position of the layer for each frame. You may By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to dynamically display the pending image with a period of 1 second.

In the above-described embodiment, at the start of a new variable display, the suspended image is suddenly placed 120 pixels to the left on the layer. In this case, the player may perceive the pending image as if it were suddenly displayed, and may not be able to understand the game situation.

Therefore, at the start of a new variable display, the coordinates for arranging the reserved image on a predetermined layer may be gradually changed so that the manner in which the reserved image moves in the horizontal direction can be visually recognized. For example, the y-coordinate is not changed in the coordinates where the pending image is placed, and the x-coordinate value is decreased by 6 every frame, and the x-coordinate value is decreased by 120 in 20 frames (about 0.67 seconds) (that is, 120 pixels in the left direction). With such a configuration, it is possible to dynamically move the pending image over 0.67 seconds.

In addition, in the display processing for moving the placement position of the pending image by 120 pixels over 20 frames, image data consisting of 20 still images is created in advance, and 20 still images are generated for each frame. may be arranged in order. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the display mode of changing the display mode while the pending image moves.

It should be noted that while the decorative pattern is changing, up to four reserved images can be visibly displayed. 120 pixels). In this case, the process of dynamically moving the pending image using image data consisting of 20 still images is performed when moving the second pending leftward, when moving the third pending leftward, and when moving the third pending leftward. It may be configured to be used in each case of moving the 4-hold to the left. By setting the arrangement coordinates of the pending images at equal intervals in this way, it is possible to use the image data in common.

Regarding the coordinates for arranging the pending image, the y-coordinate is not changed, and only the x-coordinate is subtracted by a constant value for each frame. The diameter is twice (160 pixels) as compared with the diameter (80 pixels) of . A modified example of the embodiment in which a reserved image that has been placed as the first reserved image is arranged as the reserved image will be described below. Specifically, image data consisting of 20 still images is created in advance, and the coordinates (760, 680) of the reserved image arranged as the first reserved image are changed to the coordinates (560 , 600), the arrangement coordinates of each still image are determined so as to move linearly over 20 frames, and the still image is arranged for each frame. The 20 still images are configured such that the number of pixels in the vertical direction and the number of pixels in the horizontal direction also increase step by step.

An example has been shown in which image data consisting of 20 still images is created in advance and displayed sequentially. It may be constructed such that the image is enlarged to double the vertical and horizontal sizes at the 20th frame.

With such a configuration, there is no need to prepare image data consisting of 20 still images in advance, and the size of image data stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b can be reduced.

In this way, by arranging each on-hold image individually in a different layer, it is possible to increase the variation of the presentation mode of the on-hold image and reduce the size of the image data stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. becomes.

Moreover, although a plurality of modified examples have been shown for the reserved image and the display mode of the reserved image, these modified examples may be applied to each embodiment described later. Moreover, even when it is applied to each embodiment described later, the effects as described above can be obtained.

674 and 675, an embodiment in which the display method using layers described with reference to FIG. 668 and the like is modified will be described. FIG. 674 is a diagram showing the display priority set for each layer in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 675 is a time chart of an example of rendering using the layer structure in this embodiment.

FIG. 674 is a diagram showing display priorities set for layers used for display processing and image data arranged in the layers in this embodiment. Similarly to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, the pending image displayed as the pending is arranged on the layer L40, the pending image indicating the first pending is arranged on the layer L45, and the second pending is shown on the layer L50. A reserved image is arranged, a reserved image indicating the third reservation is arranged on the layer L55, and a reserved image indicating the fourth reservation is arranged on the layer L60.

In the present embodiment, at timing t5 when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the arrangement of the pending image arranged on the layer L40 ends.

On the other hand, at timing t5, instead of the pending image arranged as the pending image indicating the first hold at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L45, the pending image is arranged at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L45. do. At this time, using the display method described above, the pending image arranged at the coordinates (760, 680) as the first pending image on the layer L45 is moved over 20 frames, and the pending image is moved to the coordinates It may be configured to be placed at (560, 600).

Further, at timing t5, the pending image arranged as the pending image indicating the second pending at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L50 is changed to the pending image showing the first pending at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L50. Place as At this time, using the above-described display method, the pending image arranged at the coordinates (880, 680) as the second pending image on the layer L50 is moved over 20 frames, and is displayed as the first pending image. It may be arranged to be located at coordinates (760, 600).

At timing t6, the pending image, which has been placed at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L45, is placed at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L40 as an image indicating the pending, and the pending image on the layer L45 Image placement ends. It should be noted that when the layer is switched without changing the arrangement coordinates in this way, there is no difference in how the player sees the suspension.

Further, at timing t6, as the image indicating the first suspension, the suspended image that has been placed at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L50 is placed at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L45, and is transferred to the layer L50. Placed state ends.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when a new hold occurs, a hold image corresponding to the newly occurring hold is placed in the layer with the highest display priority among the layers in which no hold image is arranged. placed. In addition, at the timing when the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the predetermined suspension is finished and the variable display of the new decorative pattern is started, the coordinates of the suspended image arranged in each layer are changed in that layer. After that, it is arranged to be rearranged in a layer with a higher display priority.

Alternatively, the coordinates for arranging the reserved image may be configured to be gradually moved using a plurality of frames. In the present embodiment, at the timing one second after the timing when the variable display of the new decorative pattern is started, the layer in which each reserved image is arranged is changed to a layer with a high display priority without changing the coordinates to be arranged. It is configured to be rearranged. In this way, when the pending image is displayed so as to gradually move, it is preferable to complete the movement of the pending image before the pending image is placed on the layer with the higher display priority.

With reference to FIGS. 674 and 675, with respect to the pending image which was arranged at the predetermined coordinates of the predetermined layer at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, after the arrangement coordinates are changed within the layer, the arrangement coordinates are maintained. shows an embodiment in which is arranged in a layer with a high display priority.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 674 and 676, the reserved image that has been placed at the predetermined coordinates of the predetermined layer at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern is first placed in a layer with a high display priority, and then placed in that layer. , an embodiment modified to change the placement coordinates is described. FIG. 674 is a diagram showing the layer structure in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 676 is a time chart of an example of rendering using the layer structure in this embodiment.

In the present embodiment, at timing t5 when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the arrangement of the pending image arranged on the layer L40 ends.

On the other hand, at timing t5, instead of the pending image arranged as the image indicating the first pending at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L45, the image showing the pending at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L40 Place the reserved image once. After that (for example, after one frame), the retained image of 160 pixels by 160 pixels is arranged at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L40.

At this time, using the display method described above, the pending image arranged at the coordinates (760, 680) on the layer L40 is moved over 20 frames, and the pending image is moved to the coordinates (560, 600). may be configured to be placed in

Further, at timing t5, the pending image arranged as the pending image indicating the second pending at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L50 is changed to the pending image showing the first pending at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L45. Place as Afterwards (eg, one frame later), the retained image is placed at coordinates (760, 600) on layer L45.

At this time, using the display method described above, the suspended image arranged at the coordinates (880, 680) on the layer L45 is moved over 20 frames, and the suspended image indicating the first suspension is displayed at the coordinates ( 760, 600).

Thus, in the present embodiment, when a new hold occurs, a hold image corresponding to the newly occurring hold is placed in the layer with the highest display priority among the layers in which no hold image is arranged. placed. In addition, at the timing when the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the predetermined pending is finished and the variable display of the new decorative pattern is started, the pending image arranged in each layer is arranged in the layer with the higher display priority. After redoing, the coordinates for arranging the reserved image are changed in each newly arranged layer.

Alternatively, the coordinates for arranging the reserved image may be configured to be gradually moved using a plurality of frames. In this embodiment, it is preferable that the movement of the reserved image is completed within one second from the timing when the variable display of the new decorative pattern is started.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 674 and 675 and the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. The reserved image indicating the third reservation, the reserved image indicating the third reservation, and the reserved image indicating the fourth reservation are arranged so that the display priority decreases in this order. A method of displaying a pending image using such set display priority will be described below.

FIG. 677 shows an effect example in which, in the display processing using layers described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 677(A) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L40.

FIG. 677(B) shows a state in which a horizontally long rectangular reserved image is arranged as the first reserved image at the coordinates (680, 680) of the layer L45. Specifically, this retained image consists of pixels forming an elliptical white portion of 240 pixels wide by 80 pixels high inscribed in a rectangle of 240 pixels wide by 80 pixels high, and an elliptical white portion with 100% transparency. pixels forming the outer part. In addition, in this production example, the degree of expectation for a big hit is set to be higher for this retention visually recognized in an elliptical shape, compared to other retentions visually recognized in a perfect circular shape.

FIG. 677(C) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 80 horizontal pixels and 80 vertical pixels described above is arranged as the second reservation at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L50.

FIG. 677(D) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 80 horizontal pixels and 80 vertical pixels is arranged as the third reservation at the coordinates (1000, 680) of the layer L55.

FIG. 677(E) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 80 horizontal pixels and 80 vertical pixels is arranged as the fourth reservation at the coordinates (1120, 680) of the layer L60.

FIG. 677(F) schematically shows the drawing data generated when each layer shown in FIGS. 677(A) to 677(E) and the layer L65 on which the changing decorative pattern is arranged are superimposed. It is shown In addition, FIG. 677(G) shows a state in which one hold is digested from the state shown in FIG. ing. In addition, in the figure, illustration of the 100% transparent portion outside the circular shape portion and the elliptical shape portion is omitted.

In this way, by arranging only one reserved image in one layer in the layers in which the display priority is set in a predetermined order, the display mode of the reserved image can be enlarged as shown in the figure. However, even if portions of the reserved images whose transparency is not 100% overlap each other, one of the reserved images is automatically displayed on the front side based on the set display priority. Become.

It should be noted that the horizontally long rectangular pending images shown in FIGS. 677(B) and 677(G) may be configured such that the horizontally long rectangular pending images are arranged in the layer from the time of the start winning. , At the time of starting winning, a square-shaped pending image is placed in a layer, and a square-shaped pending image at a predetermined timing (for example, when the first hold changes to the hold and the decorative pattern starts to change) Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which horizontally long rectangular retained images are arranged.

FIG. 678 shows an effect example in which, when reserved images are overlapped in the display processing using layers described with reference to FIG. 674, the overlapping mode of the reserved images is automatically determined.

FIG. 678(A) shows a state in which the square-shaped pending image of 320 pixels wide by 320 pixels long is arranged at the coordinates (480, 440) of the layer L40. The retained image consists of pixels forming a circular portion with a diameter of 320 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion of the circular shape with 100% transparency. The pixels forming the circular portion are composed of pixels with a black outline of the circle and white pixels inside the black outline. The contour portion has a width of about several pixels (for example, 3 pixels).

FIG. 678(B) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged as the first reserved image at the coordinates (760, 600) of the layer L45.

FIG. 678(C) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged as the second reserved image at the coordinates (880, 600) of the layer L50.

FIG. 678(D) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged as the third reserved image at the coordinates (1000, 600) of the layer L55.

FIG. 678(E) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 horizontal pixels and 160 vertical pixels is arranged as the fourth reservation at the coordinates (1120, 600) of the layer L60.

FIG. 678(F) schematically shows the drawing data generated when each layer shown in FIGS. 677(A) to 677(E) and the layer L65 on which the changing decorative pattern is arranged are superimposed. It is shown In addition, in the figure, illustration is omitted for a portion having a transparency of 100% outside the circular shape portion.

In this way, by arranging only one reserved image in one layer in the layers in which the display priority is set in a predetermined order, as shown in the figure, the transparency of the reserved image is 100%. Even if the non-% portions overlap each other, one of the pending images is automatically displayed on the front side based on the set display priority.

In this way, by arranging only one hold on one layer, it is possible to change the color of the hold image, increase the size of the hold image, move the hold image, and Even in the case of displaying pending images in which images may overlap each other, it is possible to generate drawing data related to the pending images without considering the display status of other pending images.

In the drawing data shown in FIGS. 677(F), 677(G), and 678(F), although one reserved image may partially hide other reserved images, the entire other reserved images is large enough to not be completely hidden. With such a configuration, the player can accurately recognize the number of reserved coins.

FIG. 679 shows the layer structure in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 674, modified so as to reverse the display priority order of the layers in which the reserved image to the reserved image showing the fourth reservation are arranged. It is a figure which shows. In the layer structure shown in FIG. 679, on the layer L40, a hold image indicating the fourth hold is arranged, on the layer L45, a hold image showing the third hold is arranged, on the layer L50, the second hold The pending image indicating the first pending is arranged on the layer L55, and the pending image displayed as the pending is arranged on the layer L60.

FIG. 680 is a time chart of an example of rendering using such a layer structure. The time chart shown in FIG. 680 is the same as the effect example described with reference to FIG. 675 except for the layer priority such as the variation time of decorative symbols and the timing of start winning. In the production example shown in FIG. 680 as well, similar to the production example described with reference to FIG. . On the other hand, at a timing (for example, timing t6 or timing t11) after one second has passed since the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, a display process is performed in which the reserved image is arranged in a layer with a lower display priority by one.

FIG. 681 is a time chart of an example of rendering using such a layer structure. The time chart shown in FIG. 681 is the same as the effect example described with reference to FIG. 676 except for the layer priority such as the variation time of decorative symbols and the timing of start winning. In the production example shown in FIG. 681, when the decorative pattern starts to change, the reserved image that has been placed at the predetermined coordinates of the predetermined layer is first placed in a layer with a low display priority, and then placed in that layer. A display process is performed to change the coordinates.

Various modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 674-676 may be applied to the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 679-681.

FIG. 682 shows an effect example in which, when reserved images overlap each other in the display processing using layers described with reference to FIG. 679, the overlapping mode of the reserved images is automatically determined.

FIG. 682(A) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 80 horizontal pixels and 80 vertical pixels is arranged as the fourth reservation at the coordinates (1120, 680) of the layer L40.

FIG. 682(B) shows a state in which the aforementioned reserved image of 80 horizontal pixels and 80 vertical pixels and having a square shape is arranged as the third reservation at the coordinates (1000, 680) of the layer L45.

FIG. 682(C) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 80 horizontal pixels and 80 vertical pixels is arranged as the second reservation at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L50.

FIG. 682(D) shows a state in which a horizontally long rectangular reserved image is arranged as the first reserved image at the coordinates (680, 680) of the layer L55. Specifically, this retained image consists of pixels forming an elliptical white portion of 240 pixels wide by 80 pixels high inscribed in a rectangle of 240 pixels wide by 80 pixels high, and an elliptical white portion with 100% transparency. pixels forming the outer part. In addition, in this production example, the degree of expectation for a big hit is set to be higher for this retention visually recognized in an elliptical shape, compared to other retentions visually recognized in a perfect circular shape.

FIG. 682(E) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 horizontal pixels and 160 vertical pixels is arranged at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L60.

FIG. 682(F) schematically shows the drawing data generated when each layer shown in FIGS. 682(A) to 682(E) and the layer L65 on which the changing decorative pattern is arranged are superimposed. It is shown Also, FIG. 682(G) shows a state in which one hold is digested from the state shown in FIG. ing. In addition, in the figure, illustration of the 100% transparent portion outside the circular shape portion and the elliptical shape portion is omitted.

In this way, by arranging only one reserved image in one layer in the layers in which the display priority is set in a predetermined order, the display mode of the reserved image can be enlarged as shown in the figure. However, even if portions of the reserved images whose transparency is not 100% overlap each other, one of the reserved images is automatically displayed on the front side based on the set display priority. Become.

FIG. 683 shows an effect example in which, in the display processing using layers described with reference to FIG. 679, when the reserved images overlap each other, the overlapping mode of the reserved images is automatically determined.

FIG. 683(A) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged as the fourth reserved image at the coordinates (1120, 600) of the layer L40.

FIG. 683(B) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged as the third reserved image at the coordinates (1000, 600) of the layer L45.

FIG. 683(C) shows a state in which the aforementioned reserved image of 160 horizontal pixels and 160 vertical pixels and having a square shape is arranged as a second reservation at the coordinates (880, 600) of the layer L50.

FIG. 683(D) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged as the first reserved image at the coordinates (760, 600) of the layer L55.

FIG. 683(E) shows a state in which the square-shaped pending image of 320 pixels wide by 320 pixels long is arranged at the coordinates (480, 440) of the layer L60. The retained image consists of pixels forming a circular portion with a diameter of 320 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion of the circular shape with 100% transparency. The pixels forming the circular portion are composed of pixels with a black outline of the circle and white pixels inside the black outline. The contour portion has a width of about several pixels (for example, 3 pixels).

FIG. 683(F) schematically shows the drawing data generated when each layer shown in FIGS. 683(A) to 683(E) and the layer L65 on which the changing decorative pattern is arranged are superimposed. It is shown It should be noted that in the drawing, the portion outside the circular shape portion where the transparency is 100% is omitted.

In this way, by arranging only one reserved image in one layer in the layers in which the display priority is set in a predetermined order, as shown in the figure, the transparency of the reserved image is 100%. Even if the non-% portions overlap each other, one of the pending images is automatically displayed on the front side based on the set display priority.

In this way, by arranging only one hold on one layer, it is possible to change the color of the hold image, increase the size of the hold image, move the hold image, and Even in the case of displaying pending images in which images may overlap each other, it is possible to generate drawing data related to the pending images without considering the display status of other pending images.

Instead of or in addition to changing the display mode of the reserved image, the reserved image is decorated by arranging a specific image corresponding to the reserved image in a layer with a higher display priority or a layer with a lower display priority than the reserved image. You may Further, by arranging such a specific image, it may be configured to indicate that the variation result of the decorative pattern related to the reserved image is highly expected to be a big hit.

An embodiment modified so that a specific image can be arranged on a predetermined layer in correspondence with a reserved image will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 684 is a diagram showing display priorities set for layers used for display processing in this embodiment and image data arranged in the layers. A part of the layers up to layer L99, which is the lowest degree layer, is shown in the figure.

A layer L37 is a layer in which specific images corresponding to the reserved image, the reserved image corresponding to the first reservation to the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation are arranged.

A layer L39 is a layer on which a specific image corresponding to the reserved image is displayed. A layer L40 is a layer in which the reserved image is arranged. A layer L41 is a layer on which a specific image corresponding to the reserved image is displayed.

A layer L44 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the first suspension is displayed. A layer L45 is a layer in which a reserved image corresponding to the first reserved image is arranged. Layer L46 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the first suspension is displayed.

A layer L49 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the second hold is displayed. A layer L50 is a layer in which a reserved image corresponding to the second reserved image is arranged. A layer L51 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the second suspension is displayed.

A layer L54 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the third suspension is displayed. A layer L55 is a layer in which a pending image corresponding to the third pending is arranged. Layer L56 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the third suspension is displayed.

A layer L59 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the fourth hold is displayed. A layer L60 is a layer in which a reserved image corresponding to the fourth reserved image is arranged. A layer L61 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the fourth hold is displayed.

A layer L63 is a layer in which specific images corresponding to the reserved image, the reserved image corresponding to the first reservation to the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation are arranged.

Also, the layer L00 is a layer in which an error notification image indicating that some kind of error has occurred in the gaming machine is arranged. In addition, the layer L35 is a layer in which the decorative symbols that are displayed still are arranged. Also, the layer 65 is a layer in which the decorative symbols being displayed in a variable manner are arranged. A layer 99 is a layer in which a background image is arranged.

FIG. 685 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a gaming machine that employs the layer structure described with reference to FIG. 684. FIG. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 685(A) to 685(G), the holding image of the perfect circle corresponding to the holding is arranged on the layer L40, and the holding image of the perfect circle corresponding to the first holding is arranged on the layer L45. is arranged, a perfect circular pending image corresponding to the second pending is placed on the layer L50, a perfect circular pending image corresponding to the third pending is placed on the layer L55, and a perfect circular pending image corresponding to the fourth pending is placed on the layer L60 A held image is placed.

FIG. 685(A) is an example of rendering in which a specific image visually recognized as a horizontally long ellipse corresponding to the first hold is arranged on the layer L46. It should be noted that it is also possible to arrange specific images of oblong elliptical shapes in corresponding layers corresponding to the suspension, the second suspension to the fourth suspension.

FIG. 685(B) arranges a specific circular image corresponding to the reservation on the layer L41, arranges a specific circular image corresponding to the first reservation on the layer L46, and arranges the second reservation on the layer L51. This is an effect example in which a specific circular image corresponding to is arranged, and a specific circular specific image corresponding to the third reservation is arranged on the layer L56.

FIG. 685(C) is an example of rendering in which a horizontally long rectangular specific image is arranged on the layer L37 to hide the lower half of the reserved image positioned on the rear side.

FIG. 685(D) is an example of rendering in which a horizontally long rectangular specific image with a transparency of 50% is arranged on the layer L37 so that the entire reserved image positioned behind is translucent.

FIG. 685(E) is an example of rendering in which a horizontally long rectangular specific image is arranged on the layer L65 so as to overlap the lower half of the reserved image positioned on the near side.

In FIG. 685(F), a specific image of a vertical elliptical shape is placed on the layer L39 with a transparency of 50%, so that the pending image corresponding to the pending on the rear side can be visually recognized semitransparently, This is an effect example in which a specific image having a vertically long elliptical shape is arranged on the layer L49 with a transparency of 50% so that the pending image corresponding to the second pending located on the rear side can be visually recognized semitransparently.

FIG. 685(G) shows an effect in which the arrangement mode of each specific image described with reference to FIG. 685(B) and the arrangement mode of each specific image described with reference to FIG. 685(F) are executed simultaneously. For example.

In this way, by providing a layer in which a specific image can be arranged corresponding to each reserved image, various display modes can be executed for the reserved image while maintaining the visibility of each reserved image. .

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 685(A), 685(B), 685(F), and 685(G), by displaying a specific image corresponding to a predetermined hold, the corresponding specific image is It may be configured to indicate that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high compared to the reservation that is not displayed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 685(C) to 685(E), by displaying a specific image corresponding to the displayed suspension (the suspension to the fourth suspension in the figure), the specific image is displayed. It may be configured to indicate that any one of the displayed holds has a higher chance of winning a jackpot than a non-displayed hold. Also, such a form of presentation may be applied to the above-described embodiment. For example, when changing the pending image for the first pending, the display mode as shown in FIG. 685 may be executed.

FIG. 686 is an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. In such a layered structure, the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 685 may be configured to be executable.

It is possible to realize diversification of effects not only by displaying decorative symbols and displaying reserved images, but also by arranging a plurality of characters in a plurality of layers with different display priorities. An embodiment modified so as to effectively utilize display processing by a plurality of layers to perform display effects will be described below.

FIG. 687(A) shows a first vehicle image, a second vehicle image, a first medal image, a second medal image, and a third medal image displayed in the display area in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 687(B) is a diagram schematically showing an arrangement mode of the medal image with respect to the vehicle image. FIG. 688 shows the layer structure in this embodiment and how images are arranged in layers in a plurality of effect patterns.

First, referring to FIG. 687(A), the car images (first car image, second car image) and medal images (first medal image, second medal image, third medal image) will be described.

The first vehicle image is a horizontally long rectangular image of 280 pixels wide by 200 pixels long. The first vehicle image is an image imitating a light van type cash transport vehicle. The first car image consists of an area composed of black pixels representing the body and tires of the vehicle, and other areas composed of pixels with 100% transparency (the upper left part of the image and the left and right parts of the tire part). It consists of

The second vehicle image is a horizontally long rectangular image of 280 pixels wide by 200 pixels long. The second vehicle image is an image imitating a truck with an open-type cargo bed. The second car image consists of an area composed of black pixels representing the body and tires of the car, and an area composed of pixels with 100% transparency (the upper left part of the image, the upper right part of the image, and the tire part). left and right parts).

The first medal image is a square image of 80 pixels wide by 80 pixels long. The first medal image is located inside the circular perfect circle, which is an area composed of black pixels representing a circular perfect circle with a width of several pixels (for example, 3 pixels) inscribed in a square of 80 pixels wide by 80 pixels high. It is composed of an area composed of black pixels representing the kanji character "gold" and an area composed of other pixels having 100% transparency.

The second medal image is a square-shaped image of 80 horizontal pixels and 80 vertical pixels. The second medal image is located inside the circular perfect circle, which is an area composed of black pixels representing a circular perfect circle with a width of several pixels (for example, 3 pixels) inscribed in a square of 80 pixels wide by 80 pixels high. It is composed of an area composed of black pixels representing the kanji character "silver" and an area composed of other pixels having 100% transparency.

The second medal image is a square-shaped image of 80 horizontal pixels and 80 vertical pixels. The third medal image is located inside the circular perfect circle, which is an area composed of black pixels representing a circular perfect circle with a width of several pixels (for example, 3 pixels) inscribed in a square of 80 pixels wide by 80 pixels high. It is composed of an area composed of black pixels representing the kanji character "copper" and an area composed of other pixels having 100% transparency.

The medal image and the car image are arranged in different layers. Description will be made below with reference to FIGS. 687B and 688. FIG. As shown in FIG. 688, car effect patterns 01 to 05 are provided as effect patterns in this embodiment. In each car effect pattern, display is executed in which the car image and the medal image move from the right end to the left end in the lower portion of the display area. Further, the car image and the reserved image, and the medal image and the reserved image may overlap each other, but the details will be described later.

In the car effect pattern 01, one of the medal images (the first medal image, the second medal image, and the third medal image) is placed on the layer L39, and the car images (the first and second car images) are placed on the layer L41. one is placed. Note that the layer L40 is a layer in which the pending image corresponding to the pending is arranged.

In the car effect pattern 02, one of the medal images (the first medal image, the second medal image, and the third medal image) is placed on the layer L44, and the car images (the first car image and the second car image) are placed on the layer L46. one is placed. Note that the layer L45 is a layer in which the reserved image corresponding to the first reservation is arranged.

In the car effect pattern 03, one of the medal images (the first medal image, the second medal image, and the third medal image) is placed on the layer L49, and the car images (the first and second car images) are placed on the layer L51. one is placed. Note that the layer L50 is a layer in which the pending image corresponding to the second pending is arranged.

In the car effect pattern 04, one of the medal images (the first medal image, the second medal image, and the third medal image) is placed on the layer L54, and the car images (the first and second car images) are placed on the layer L55. one is placed. Note that the layer L56 is a layer in which the pending image corresponding to the third pending is arranged.

In the car effect pattern 05, one of the medal images (the first medal image, the second medal image, and the third medal image) is placed on the layer L59, and the car images (the first and second car images) are placed on the layer L60. one is placed. Note that the layer L61 is a layer in which the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation is arranged.

The relative positional relationship between the car image placed on a predetermined layer and the medal image placed on the predetermined layer is the positional relationship in which the medal image is positioned behind the car image when the layers are superimposed. It has become. In addition, the positional relationship between the car image and the medal image does not change even when the car image is moved in the car effect patterns 01 to 05, and even if the car image moves, the relative positions of both images do not change. Relationships continue to be maintained.

FIG. 687B shows vehicle images (first and second vehicle images) arranged in predetermined layers and medal images (first and second medal images, and third medal images) arranged in predetermined layers. medal image). In addition, in the drawing, only the outline portion is shown for the part imitating a car.

Combinations of car images and medal images shown in FIG. 687(B) (six in total) can be applied to each of car effect pattern 01 to car effect pattern 05 shown in FIG. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a total of 30 production patterns.

Referring to FIG. 689, an execution example of car presentation using car images and medal images is shown. In this production example, the decorative symbols are fluctuating, and the maximum number of reserved symbols is four. Further, in the lower portion of the display area, from left to right, the pending image corresponding to the pending, the pending image corresponding to the first pending to the fourth pending image corresponding to the fourth pending are arranged. The reserved image and each reserved image are square-shaped reserved images of 80 horizontal pixels and 80 vertical pixels as described above. As described above, when this image is placed on a predetermined layer, the image is displayed in a perfect circular shape with a black outline and a white inside of the outline.

FIG. 689 shows an example of an effect in the display area when the car effect pattern 03 is executed. In this production example, the first medal image is arranged on the layer L49, and the first car image is arranged on the layer L51. Further, on the layer L50, a pending image corresponding to the second pending is arranged.

FIG. 689(A) shows a state in which placement of the first medal image on the layer L49 and placement of the first car image on the layer L50 have started. A reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation is placed on layer L60. Therefore, the first medal image arranged on the layer L49 and the first car image arranged on the layer L50 are positioned and visually recognized on the front side of the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation. It has a display mode.

In FIG. 689(B), the first medal image placed on layer L49 and the first car image placed on layer L51 move leftward from the state shown in FIG. 689(A) in the lower portion of the display area. It shows a state in which it has been moved by a predetermined number of pixels. In this state, the first vehicle image is located behind the reserved image corresponding to the second reserved image placed on the layer L50. Also, the first medal image is located on the front side of the reserved image corresponding to the second reserved, which is arranged on the layer L50.

The first medal image is composed of a perfectly circular contour portion made up of black pixels, a character portion made up of black pixels (in this case, the character “gold”), and other portions with 100% transparency. there is Therefore, when the first medal image is located on the front side of the reserved image, the outline of the black perfect circle and the black characters of the first medal image are on the front side of the white pixels of the reserved image. becomes visible. In FIG. 689(B), the left half of the character "Kin" overlaps the white portion of the reserved image, making it visible.

In FIG. 689(C), the first medal image placed on layer L49 and the first car image placed on layer L51 move leftward from the state shown in FIG. 689(B) in the lower portion of the display area. Further, it shows a state of moving by a predetermined number of pixels. Even in this state, the first medal image placed on the layer L49, the first car image placed on the layer L51, and the hold image corresponding to the second hold placed on the layer L50 overlap each other. There is, and the entirety of the characters "Kin" overlaps the white portion of the pending image corresponding to the second pending. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the character "KIN" as a whole.

In FIG. 689(D), the first medal image placed on layer L49 and the first car image placed on layer L51 move leftward from the state shown in FIG. 689(C) in the lower portion of the display area. Further, it shows a state of moving by a predetermined number of pixels. In this state, the first medal image placed on the layer L49, the first car image placed on the layer L51, and the hold image corresponding to the hold placed on the layer L40 overlap each other. However, since the hold image corresponding to the hold arranged on the layer L40 has a higher display priority, the first car image and the first medal image are higher than the hold image corresponding to the hold. displayed in the back.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by arranging predetermined images in layers before and after a layer in which a predetermined reserved image is arranged, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the reserved image.

In the above-described production example, the car production pattern 03 is executed to execute the production corresponding to the second hold. A similar effect mode can be realized for images. Similarly, by executing the car effect pattern 02, the car effect pattern 04 is applied to the reserved image corresponding to the first reserve by executing the car effect pattern 04 to the reserved image corresponding to the third reserve. By executing 05, a similar effect mode can be realized for the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reserved.

It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the car effect pattern based on the result of the special lottery. Further, it is preferable to configure the system so that the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big win is suggested by the type of the visually recognized medal. For example, the special lottery result is better when the second medal is displayed than when the third medal is displayed, and when the first medal is displayed than when the second medal is displayed. It is preferable to configure so that the degree of expectation that is a big hit is high. For example, in this production example, in the front side of the white part of the pending image displayed as the second pending, the letters "silver" and the letters "gold", the latter corresponds to the second pending It is preferable to configure so that the degree of expectation that the variation result of the decorative pattern will result in a big win is high.

An example of an effect is shown in which the medal image moves from the right end to the left end of the lower part of the display area along with the car image. can be configured to FIG. 689(E) shows a modified example in which the first medal image moving from the right is stopped at the center of the circular portion of the hold image corresponding to the second hold. In the figure, the first car image continues to move leftward independently of the first medal image, which is stopped and displayed, and is about to be out of the display area. It is

FIG. 690 shows an example of effect modified in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 689 so that the second vehicle image is moved instead of the first vehicle image.

In this way, when each car effect pattern is executed using the second car image, the player can visually recognize which medal image is arranged immediately after the car image appears at the left end of the lower part of the display area. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in which hold the medal image that has become visible will stop.

In the embodiment shown below, an embodiment will be described in which a special lottery result is suggested according to the result of a display effect in which a plurality of characters run a foot race.

FIG. 691 is a diagram showing layers for arranging various images used in the ready-to-win foot race production in this embodiment and the display priority of these layers. Also, FIG. 692 shows an example of a presentation in a foot race presentation.

In the present embodiment, in the ready-to-win state, six male sextuplet characters and a tall male rival character who is the rival of the sextuplets run a foot race. , special lottery results are suggested.

Specifically, the six male characters who are the sextuplets are the first brother character of the eldest son, the second brother character of the second son, the third brother character of the third son, the fourth brother character of the fourth son, and the fifth brother character of the fifth son. It consists of a brother character and a sixth brother character of the sixth son.

Each character is a vertically long rectangular image consisting of opaque pixels of a predetermined color representing the character's head and character body, and 100% transparent pixels other than the character's head and character body. By arranging them in layers (layer L70, layer L72, layer L74, layer L76, layer L78, layer L80, layer L82), a display state in which they are visually recognized as a predetermined character is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 692(A), each character can be identified by adding a predetermined letter to the head of each character image. Specifically, the head of the first brother character is "1", the head of the second brother character is "2", the head of the third brother character is "3", and the head of the fourth brother character is "3". "4" is added to the head, "5" to the head of the fifth brother character, "6" to the head of the sixth brother character, and "ra" to the head of the rival character. ing.

As shown in FIG. 691, layer L82 is the first sibling character image showing the first sibling character, layer L80 is the second sibling character image showing the second sibling character, and layer L78 is the third sibling character image showing the third sibling character. Layer L74 is the fourth brother character image showing the fourth brother character, Layer L72 is the fifth brother character image showing the fifth brother character, Layer L70 is the sixth brother character showing the sixth brother character. The layer on which the image is placed. A layer L76 is a layer in which a rival character image representing a rival character is arranged. A layer L69, a layer L71, a layer L73, a layer L75, a layer L77, a layer L79, and a layer L81 are layers in which medal images are arranged.

FIG. 692(A) shows the display state immediately after the start of the foot race ready-to-win production. In this state, the first brother character image is on layer L82, the second brother character image is on layer L80, the third brother character image is on layer L78, the rival character image is on layer L76, and the fourth brother character is on layer L74. As for the images, the fifth brother character image is arranged on the layer L72, and the sixth brother character image is arranged on the layer L70. In addition, the reserved image, which is white and visually recognized as a perfect circle, is arranged on the layer L60. In addition, on the layer L65, decorative patterns with the number "2" attached to the upper left end and the upper right end are arranged in a state of being temporarily stopped, and the reach state is determined by the decorative patterns with the number "2" attached. formed.

In the display state shown in FIG. 692(A) immediately after the start of the reach-for-foot race production, the first brother character image is behind the second brother character image, and the second brother character image is behind the third brother character image. the third brother character image behind the rival character image, the rival character image behind the fourth brother character image, the fourth brother character image behind the fifth brother character image, and the fifth brother character image behind the fifth brother character image. The character image is positioned behind the sixth sibling character image. In this way, each image other than the sixth sibling character image is displayed in such a manner that a part of the image is hidden by the character image on the near side.

FIG. 692(B) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 692(A). FIG. 692(C) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 692(B). In the foot race ready-to-reach production, the coordinates in the y-axis direction are not changed for the first to sixth brother character images in each layer, and the values in the x-axis direction are changed to predetermined values. ∼ 6th brother characters are configured to be visually recognized as moving in the left and right direction. As for the rival character image, the arrangement coordinates in the layer L76 do not change during execution of the foot race ready-to-win effect, and the state of being displayed in the center of the display area is maintained.

In this way, by arranging a plurality of character images at overlapping positions and moving them only in one axial direction, it is possible to give a sense of depth to the appearance of the characters racing.

FIG. 692(D) shows a display state when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 692(C). Specifically, it shows a state in which the goal line image placed on layer L84 is moving from the right side to the left side of the display area. In layer L84, the goal line image enters the frame from the right side of the display area, moves to the left side at a constant speed, and finally leaves the frame on the left side of the display area.

In the foot race reach production, there are cases where the rival character wins the foot race, and where one of the first to sixth brother characters wins the foot race. It is configured so that the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big hit is higher when the player wins the foot race. Whether or not the player wins the foot race is determined by whether or not the character image overlaps the goal line image first.

FIG. 692(E) shows a display example when the rival character first overlaps the goal line image. On the other hand, FIG. 692(G) shows a display example when the first brother character and the second brother character overlap the goal line image before the rival character.

After the display states shown in FIGS. 692(E) and 692(G), the first medal images to the first medal images described with reference to FIG. A third medal image is displayed corresponding to the character images that have won first to third places. A medal image is not displayed correspondingly to the character images that have won the fourth place or later.

FIG. 692(F) shows the first to third medal images described with reference to FIG. 687(A) corresponding to the order of each character after the display state shown in FIG. indicates a display state arranged corresponding to the character images that have won up to the third place.

Specifically, the first medal image is on layer L75, the rival character image is on layer L76, the second medal image is on layer L77, the third brother character image is on layer L78, and the third medal image is on layer L81. A first sibling character image is arranged on the layer L82. Thus, a display mode is shown in which the rival character wins the gold medal, the third brother character wins the silver medal, and the first brother character wins the bronze medal.

Similarly, in FIG. 692(H), after the display state shown in FIG. 3 shows a display state in which 3 medal images are arranged corresponding to the character images that have won up to 3rd place.

Specifically, the third medal image is on layer L75, the rival character image is on layer L76, the second medal image is on layer L77, the third sibling character image is on layer L78, and the first medal image is on layer L81. A first sibling character image is arranged on the layer L82. As a result, a display mode is shown in which the first brother character wins the gold medal, the third brother character wins the silver medal, and the rival character wins the bronze medal.

With such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 692(F) and 692(H), it is possible to realize a display state in which medals are visually superimposed on the front side of each character. Further, by performing such a display performance, the degree of expectation of the decorative symbols in the ready-to-win state being stopped and displayed in a stop mode indicating that a big win will occur is shown to the player.

The display states shown in FIGS. 692(F) and 692(H) are for layer L69, layer L71, layer L73, layer L75, layer L77, layer L79, and layer L81, which are layers for arranging medal images. This is achieved by arranging medal images.

Specifically, the medal images corresponding to the first to third rankings are displayed in correspondence with the layers in which the character images that have won the first to third rankings are arranged.

A process of placing medal images on layer L69 corresponding to the character images placed on layer L70, a process of placing medal images on layer L71 corresponding to the character images placed on layer L72, and a process of placing medal images on layer L74. A process of placing a medal image on the layer L73 corresponding to the character image, a process of placing a medal image on the layer L75 corresponding to the character image placed on the layer L76, and a process of placing the medal image on the layer L78 corresponding to the character image placed on the layer L78. A process of placing a medal image on layer L77, a process of placing a medal image on layer L79 corresponding to the character image placed on layer L80, and a process of placing a medal image on layer L80 corresponding to the character image placed on layer L82. Arrangement processing is performed according to the result of the foot race.

Thus, in the foot race ready-to-win production, the result of the special lottery is indicated according to the character that reaches the finish line first. On the other hand, it may be configured to suggest the special lottery result in a different mode in the foot race ready-to-win production. Below, a modified example of the foot race ready-to-reach presentation explained with reference to FIGS. 691 and 692 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 693 and 694. FIG.

Fig. 693 shows a first modification of the foot race ready-to-reach effect. In this production example, the fourth to sixth brother characters withdraw from the foot race in the middle of the foot race, and play tricks on the first to third brother characters and rival characters who are continuing the foot race. Such a display effect is executed.

FIG. 693(A) shows the state immediately after the start of the foot race. This display state is the same as the state shown in FIG. 692(A).

FIG. 693(B) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 693(A). FIG. 693(B) shows a state in which the fourth and sixth brother characters have moved to the left side of the display area, and the fifth brother character has moved to the right side of the display area.

FIG. 693(C) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 693(B). FIG. 693(C) shows a display state in which the fourth brother character and the sixth brother character are framed out to the left side of the display area, and the fifth brother character is framed out to the right side of the display area. In the display area, the first to third brother characters and rival characters are in a foot race.

FIG. 693(D) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 693(C). In the display state shown in FIG. 693(D), the fifth brother character holding a bronze medal (third medal image) frames in from the left side of the display area. The fifth brother character image is arranged on layer L72, and the third medal image is arranged on layer L71.

FIG. 693(E) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 693(D). In the display state shown in FIG. 693(E), the fifth brother character holding the bronze medal (third medal image) moves to the center of the display area and overlaps the rival character and the third brother character on the front side. Become. In this state, a display effect is performed in which the fifth brother character hands over the bronze medal (third medal image) to the third brother character. For example, in the layer L71 where the third medal image is arranged, the arrangement position of the third medal image may be moved so as to oscillate vertically or horizontally.

FIG. 693(F) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 693(E). In the display state shown in FIG. 693(F), the bronze medal (third medal image) that had been held by the fifth brother character was handed over to the third brother character and overlapped on the front side of the third brother character. state. The third brother character image is arranged on layer L78, and the third medal image is arranged on layer L77. Also, at the timing when the third medal image is laid out on the layer L77, the third medal image is not laid out on the layer L71. A goal line is displayed at the right end of the display area.

FIG. 693(G) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 693(F). In the display state shown in FIG. 693(G), the third brother character is the first to reach the goal line while holding the bronze medal (third medal image).

FIG. 693(H) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 693(G). In the display state shown in FIG. 693(H), the fourth brother character holds a gold medal (first medal image) and the sixth character holds a silver medal (second medal image) on the left side of the display area. It is In this presentation, the bronze medal won by the third brother character suggests the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit. In addition, the degree of expectation for a big win is not suggested by the rival character and the first brother character who did not win medals despite placing in the top three.

Fig. 694 shows a second modification of the foot race ready-to-reach effect. In this production example, the fourth to sixth brother characters withdraw from the foot race in the middle of the foot race, and play tricks on the first to third brother characters and rival characters who are continuing the foot race. Such a display effect is executed.

FIG. 694(A) shows the state immediately after the start of the foot race. This display state is the same as the state shown in FIG. 692(A).

FIG. 694(B) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 694(A). FIG. 694B shows a state in which the fourth and sixth brother characters have moved to the left side of the display area, and the fifth brother character has moved to the right side of the display area.

FIG. 694(C) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 694(B). FIG. 694(C) shows a display state in which the fourth brother character and the sixth brother character are framed out to the left side of the display area, and the fifth brother character is framed out to the right side of the display area. In the display area, the first to third brother characters and rival characters are in a foot race. Also, at this time, the layer on which the third brother character is placed is changed from the layer L78 on which it was placed until then to the layer L74. Also, the coordinates at which the third sibling character is arranged are changed from the right side of the rival character to the lower left.

FIG. 694(D) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 694(C). In the display state shown in FIG. 694(D), the fourth sibling character holding a gold medal (first medal image) enters the frame from the left side of the display area. The fourth brother character image is arranged on layer L72, and the first medal image is arranged on layer L71.

FIG. 694(E) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 694(D). In the display state shown in FIG. 694(E), the fourth brother character holding the gold medal (first medal image) moves to the center of the display area and overlaps the third brother character on the front side. In this state, a display effect is performed in which the fourth brother character hands over the gold medal (first medal image) to the third brother character.

FIG. 694(F) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 694(E). In the display state shown in FIG. 694(F), the gold medal (first medal image) held by the fourth brother character is handed over to the third brother character and overlapped on the front side of the third brother character. state. The third brother character image is arranged on layer L74, and the first medal image is arranged on layer L73. A goal line is displayed at the right end of the display area.

FIG. 694(G) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 694(F). In the display state shown in FIG. 694(G), the rival character is the first to reach the goal line. Also, a state is shown in which the third brother character reaches the goal line second while holding the gold medal (first medal image).

FIG. 694(H) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 694(G). In the display state shown in FIG. 694(H), the fourth brother character holds a bronze medal (third medal image) and the sixth character holds a silver medal (second medal image) on the left side of the display area. It is In this presentation, the gold medal won by the third brother character suggests the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit. In addition, the degree of expectation for a big win is not suggested by the rival character and the first brother character who did not win medals despite placing in the top three.

As in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 692, the order of reaching the goal line may suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit. In particular, the degree of expectation for a big win may be suggested by the order of sibling characters or the order of rival characters. In the present embodiment, a medal image is added to the character image as a display effect so that the ranking is easy to understand.

On the other hand, as described with reference to FIGS. 693 and 694, during the foot race production, some characters leave the screen, and the characters who leave the screen hand over medals to the characters in the foot race. , may be configured to perform an effect such that the order is forcibly determined. In this case, since the order of the characters can be predicted before the characters in the foot race reach the finish line, it is possible to enhance the interest compared to the presentation described with reference to FIG. 692 .

In FIG. 694, the layer on which the third brother character image is arranged is changed from layer L78 to layer L74 during the foot race ready-to-win effect. Such display control makes it possible to execute an effect display such that the third brother character image receives medals from another character on the nearer side than L76 where the rival character image is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 693(D), the third brother character image is arranged in a layer behind the rival character image, and as shown in FIG. The mode of the medals given to the third brother character may be different depending on whether the medals are arranged on the layer closer to the player than the third brother character.

For example, when the third brother character is behind the rival character, the rival character interferes with the fourth brother character and the fifth brother character. It may be configured so that it may not be possible to pass.

On the other hand, when the third brother character is closer to the rival character than the rival character, the medals brought by the fourth brother character and the fifth brother character can almost certainly be handed over without being disturbed by the rival character. can be configured to Thus, when the third brother character is on the front side of the rival character, a predetermined medal (for example, a gold medal) is awarded to the third brother character compared to when the third brother character is on the back side of the rival character. It may be constructed so that the probability of being handed over to sibling characters is increased.

Also, the third brother character may be configured so that medals are handed over multiple times. In this case, a predetermined medal (for example, a gold medal) indicating that the third brother character is on the front side of the rival character indicates that the likelihood of a big hit is higher when the third brother character is on the front side of the rival character. ) so that the probability of possessing it at the goal is high.

In each of the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 623 to 694, examples of moving the displayed image from the front side to the back side or from the back side to the front side were shown. By applying display processing using a layer structure such as that described with reference to FIG. By moving to a layer, the displayed image may be moved from the front side to the back side or from the back side to the front side.

Embodiments may be obtained by combining and applying each technical matter in the structure of the gaming machine in the embodiments. Further, the embodiments may be applied by combining each production example and each technical matter in each production example. Moreover, it is good also as an embodiment combining and applying each technical matter in each role product structure. Moreover, it is good also as an embodiment, combining and applying each of these technical matters.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same effects can be obtained.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 main body frame 5 game board 5' game board 5a game area 190 glass unit 530 door frame left side unit 550 door frame right side unit 570 door frame top unit 931 power board 1000 front constituent member 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1100 Game panel 1100a Game panel opening 1110 Panel plate 1117 Panel projection 1200 Obstacle nail 1201 Obstacle nail 1202 Obstacle nail 1203 Obstacle nail 1204 Obstacle nail 1205 Obstacle nail 1206 Obstacle nail 1207 Obstacle nail 1208 Obstacle nail 1209 1210 obstacle nail 1211 obstacle nail 1212 obstacle nail 1213 obstacle nail 1214 obstacle nail 1215 obstacle nail 1216 obstacle nail 1217 obstacle nail 1218 obstacle nail 1219 obstacle nail 1220 obstacle nail 1221 obstacle nail 1222 obstacle nail 1223 obstacle nail 1224 obstacle nail 1230 obstacle nail 1230 obstacle nail Nail 1232 Left guide nail 1233 Right guide nail 1402 Normal pattern indicator 1403 First special symbol indicator 1404 First special reserved number indicator 1405 Second special symbol indicator 1406 Second special reserved number indicator 1407 Round indicator 1500 Periphery Control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Game board side effect display device 2000 Front unit 2001 General winning opening 2002 First start opening 2003 Gate part 2004 Second starting opening 2005 Big winning opening 2522 Warp exit 2530 Stage 2600 Area cover member 2600a Area cover member 2610 Penetration part 2610a Penetration part 2611 Penetration part 2612 Penetration part 2613 Penetration part 2614 Penetration part 2615 Penetration part 2616 Penetration part 2617 Penetration part 2617a Notched end part 2618 Penetration part 2619 Penetration part 2620 Penetration part 2630 Mounting boss 2631 Mounting boss 2 2633 Mounting boss 2640 Ball restricting protrusion 2650 Penetration part 2651 Penetration part 2652 Penetration part 2653 Penetration part 2660 Boss part 2670 Accommodating concave part 2700 Channel device 2710a First channel inlet 2710b Second channel inlet 2720a First channel forming member 2720b Second flow path forming member 2730a First stream Path exit 2730b Second path exit 5000 Nail sheet 5100 Film sheet 5110 First area printed material 5120 Second area printed material 5200 Obstacle nail printed material 5950 Rail member 6000 Rabbit part 6010 Face cover part 6011 Front part of face cover part 6011a 1 face light scattering part 6011b second face light scattering part 6012 face cover upper surface 6013 face cover right surface 6014 face cover lower surface 6015 face cover left surface 6016 first arm 6017 second arm 6020 face substrate 6021 First ear part 6021a First ear decoration part 6022 Second ear part 6022a Second ear decoration part 6023 Face light emitting part 6023a First face light emitting part 6023b Second face light emitting part 6024 Mouth decoration part 6025 Control element 6026 Driver 6027 Resistor 6027a 1 resistor 6027b 2nd resistor 6027c 3rd resistor 6027d 4th resistor 6027e 5th resistor 6027f 6th resistor 6028 capacitor 6028a 1st capacitor 6028b 2nd capacitor 6029 connector 6030 body 6100 stump accessory 6200 stump 6210 stump board 6210a stump Opening 6300 Stump box 6310 Box upper wall 6320 Box right wall 6330 Box lower wall 6340 Box left wall 6350 Box rear wall 6352 Rear wall substrate 6352a First rear wall substrate 6352b Second rear wall substrate 6354 Rear wall Light emitting part 6354a First rear wall light emitting part 6354b Second rear wall light emitting part 6356 Rear wall cover 6358 Rear wall cover light scattering part 6358a First rear wall cover light scattering part 6358b Second rear wall cover light scattering part 6360 First grass movable Part 6360a First grass decoration part 6370 Second grass movable part 6370a Second grass decoration part 6380 Rear wall plate part 6381 Grass plate part 6381a Grass plate colored and transparent part 6381b Grass plate colorless and transparent part 6382a Grass plate center decoration part 6382b Grass plate top Decorative portion 6382c Grass plate right decorative portion 6382d Grass plate lower decorative portion 6382e Grass plate left decorative portion 6400 Grass accessory 6420 Grass substrate 6422 Grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422a Grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422b Grass substrate front second light emitting portion 6422c Grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6424 Grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424a Grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion Light emitting portion 6424b Grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6426 Grass substrate opening 6426a Grass substrate first opening 6426b Grass substrate second opening 6440 Grass front cover 6442 Grass front cover transparent portion 6442a Grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442b Grass front cover Colored transparent portion 6444 Grass front cover light scattering portion 6444a Grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b Grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6446 Grass front cover opaque portion 6448 Grass front cover opening 6448a Grass front cover first opening 6448b Grass front cover Second opening 6460 Back cover cover 6462 Back cover transparent part 6462a Back cover cover colorless transparent part 6462b Back cover cover colored transparent part 6464 Back cover cover light scattering part 6464a Back cover cover colorless light scattering part 6464b Back cover cover colored light scattering Part 6466 Grass back cover opaque part 6470 First grass role 6475 Second grass role 6480 Third grass role 6485 Fourth grass role 6500 Mountain role 6520 Mountain board 6522 Mountain board front light emitting part 6522a First mountain board front surface Light-emitting portion 6522b Mountain-board front surface second light-emitting portion 6522c Mountain-board front surface third light-emitting portion 6522d Mountain-board front surface fourth light-emitting portion 6522e Mountain-board front surface fifth light-emitting portion 6522f Mountain-board front surface sixth light-emitting portion 6522g Mountain-board front surface seventh light-emitting portion 6522h Mountain substrate front surface 8th light emitting portion 6522i Mountain substrate front surface 9th light emitting portion 6524 Mountain substrate opening 6540 First mountain front cover 6542 First mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6544 First mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6548 First mountain Front cover opening 6560 Second mountain front cover 6562 Second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6564 Second mountain front cover colorless light scattering portion 6600 First giant tree accessory 6610 First giant tree trunk substrate 6630 First giant tree leaf substrate 6650 Second second Big tree role 6660 Second big tree trunk board 6680 Second big tree leaf board 6700 First cloud role 6750 Second cloud role 6800 Back grass role 6820 Back grass board 6822 Back grass board front light emitting part 6824 Back grass Substrate opening 6824a Back grass substrate first opening 6824b Back grass substrate second opening 6824c Back grass substrate third opening 6824d Back grass substrate fourth opening 6840 Back grass front cover 6842 Back grass front cover Cover colored transparent part 6844 Back grass front cover colored light scattering part 6848 Back grass front cover opening Part 6848a Back grass front cover first opening 6848b Back grass front cover second opening 6848c Back grass front cover third opening 6848d Back grass front cover fourth opening 7000 Door frame top unit upper right ear opening Part 7002 First right ear opening on door frame top unit 7004 Second right ear opening on door frame top unit 7010 Left ear opening on door frame top unit 7012 First left ear opening on door frame top unit 7014 Door frame Top unit top second left ear opening 7020 Door frame top unit bottom right ear opening 7022 Door frame top unit bottom first right ear opening 7024 Door frame top unit bottom second right ear opening 7030 Door frame top unit bottom left Ear opening 7032 Door frame top unit lower first left ear opening 7034 Door frame top unit lower second left ear opening 7040 Door frame top unit upper both ear openings 7050 Door frame top unit right light emitting part 7052 Door frame top Intra-unit left light emitting part 7100 Right ear frame movable body 7110 Right ear frame movable body 1st surface 7112 Right ear frame movable body 1st surface inner decorative part 7114 Right ear frame movable body 1st surface outer decorative part 7116 Right ear frame movable body Inner light emitting part 7118 Right ear frame movable body Outer light emitting part 7120 Right ear frame movable body second surface 7140 Right ear frame movable body rotation axis 7200 Left ear frame movable body 7210 Left ear frame movable body First surface 7212 Left ear frame movable Body first surface inner decorative part 7214 Left ear frame movable body First surface outer decorative part 7216 Left ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7218 Left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7220 Left ear frame movable body second surface 7240 Left ear frame Movable body rotation axis 7300 Right ear inner frame movable body 7310 Right ear inner frame movable body 1st surface 7320 Right ear inner frame movable body 2nd surface 7330 Right ear inner frame movable body Light emitting part 7340 Right ear inner frame movable body rotation Axis 7350 Right ear outer frame movable body 7360 Right ear outer frame movable body 1st surface 7370 Right ear outer frame movable body 2nd surface 7380 Right ear outer frame movable body Light emitting part 7390 Right ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7400 Left ear Inner frame movable body 7410 Left ear inner frame movable body First surface 7420 Left ear inner frame movable body Second surface 7430 Left ear inner frame movable body Light emitting part 7440 Left ear inner frame movable body Rotation shaft 7450 Left ear outer frame movable body 7460 left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7470 left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7480 left ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7490 left ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7 500 Door frame top unit face decoration part 7510 Door frame top unit face upper movable body 7512 Door frame top unit right eye decoration part 7514 Door frame top unit left eye decoration part 7520 Door frame top unit lower face part 7522 Door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7524 Door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7600 Door frame side unit right arm part 7610 Door frame side unit right arm case part 7620 Door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7630 Door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7650 Door frame side unit left arm part 7660 Door frame side unit left arm case part 7670 Door frame side unit left arm upper arm part 7680 Door frame side unit left arm lower arm part 7700 Curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7710 Curtain plate bottom unit right foot shin part 7720 Curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip part 7750 Curtain Board bottom unit left leg movable body 7760 Curtain plate bottom unit left leg shank 7770 Curtain plate bottom unit left foot tip 7800 Root vegetable frame movable body 7802 Root vegetable frame movable body First cover part 7804 Root vegetable frame movable body Second cover part 7810 Root vegetable frame movable body Light-emitting part 7820 Right connecting linear member 7825 Right vertical movement driving mechanism 7830 Left connecting linear member 7835 Left vertical movement driving mechanism 7850 Root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7852 Cover unit frame 7854 Cover unit front surface 7856 Cover unit right side surface 7858 Cover unit Left side portion 9100 Character accessory 9110 Cover member (cover body)
9111 transmission part (first region)
9112 non-transmissive portion (second region)
9120 character accessory substrate 9130 base member 9200 snowman accessory 9210 cover member 9210a front side cover member 9210b back side cover member 9220 snowman substrate 9301 light emitter (LED)
9302 resistance

Claims (1)

Lottery means for performing a lottery for granting profits;
By arranging various effect images on multiple layers with different display priorities, the display priority is differentiated, and the effect image placed on the layer with the higher display priority is replaced with the effect image placed on the layer with the lower display priority. a display means for displaying in front of the
A symbol variation means for performing a symbol variation display based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means;
a special effect means capable of changing a pending display indicating the number of executions of symbol variation display by the symbol variation means from a normal display mode to an expectation level mode suggesting an expectation level regarding the awarding of the profit;
with
The pending display includes a corresponding display displayed corresponding to the symbol variation display being executed, and a suspension corresponding display displayed corresponding to the number of symbol variation displays whose execution is suspended,
The special production means is
The mode of the pending display is changed to the expectation level mode while maintaining the layer when the pending display is displayed in the normal display mode without changing the layer when the pending display is displayed in the normal display mode. special performances and
A second special effect of changing the mode of the pending display from the layer when the pending display is displayed in the normal display mode to a different layer, and then changing it to the expectation level mode,
The layer on which the pending display is displayed can be changed in accordance with the start of execution of the symbol variation display,
Execution probability of the first special effect for changing the pending display to the expectation degree mode while maintaining the layer when the pending display is displayed in the normal display mode, and when the pending display is displayed in the normal display mode. The execution probability of the second special effect that changes the pending display to the degree of expectation mode after changing from the layer to a different layer is different, and the pending display is either the corresponding display or the pending display. is displayed, and when it is displayed as the corresponding display, it is displayed in the expectation degree mode at a high rate.

Images